PHASE 1 CDC Specifications & Drawings

Request for Proposal
W912ER-16-R-0029
Design-Build
Triton Operational Facilities
T
P-960
AF
Al Dhafra, UAE
R
D
Volume 1 of 1
PARTS 2 thru 6
US Army Corps
of Engineers
Middle East District
Triton Operational Facilities (BAMS) P-960
Al Dhafra, UAE
1.0 Table of Contents (RFP Parts 2-6)

1. PART 2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01 14 00 WORK RESTRICTIONS
01 30 00 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
01 31 19.05 20 POST AWARD MEETINGS
01 32 17.00 20 NETWORK ANALYSIS SCHEDULES (NAS)
01 33 00.05 20 CONSTRUCTION SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
01 33 10.05 20 DESIGN SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
01 33 29.05 20 SUSTAINABILITY REPORTING FOR DESIGN-BUILD
01 35 26 GOVERNMENTAL SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
01 42 00 SOURCES FOR REFERENCE PUBLICATIONS
01 42 15 METRIC MEASUREMENTS
01 45 00.00 10 QUALITY CONTROL
01 45 00.10 10 QUALITY CONTROL STSTEM (QCS)
01 50 00 TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
01 57 20.00 10 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION
01 57 23 TEMPORARY STORM WATER POLLUTION CONTROL
01 58 00 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION
T
01 74 19 CONSTRUCTION AND DEMOLITION WASTE MANAGEMENT
01 78 00 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
AF
01 78 24.00 20 FACILITY ELECTRONIC OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE SUPPORT
INFORMATION (eOMSI)
2. PART 3 PROJECT PROGRAM
CHAPTER 1 & 2. PROJECT DESCRIPTION AND PROJECT OBJECTIVES

CHAPTER 3. SITE ANALYSIS
R
CHAPTER 4. SPACE TABULATION FORM
CHAPTER 5. ROOM REQUIREMENTS
CHAPTER 6. ENGINEERING SYSTEMS REQUIREMENTS
D
3. PART 4 PERFORMANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
A10 FOUNDATIONS
A20 BASEMENT CONSTRUCTION
B10 SUPERSTRUCTURE
B20 EXTERIOR ENCLOSURE
B30 ROOFING
C10 INTERIOR CONSTRUCTION
C20 STAIRS
C30 INTERIOR FINISHES
D20 PLUMBING
D30 HVAC
D40 FIRE PROTECTION
D50 ELECTRICAL
E10 EQUIPMENT
E20 FURNISHINGS
F10 SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
F20 SELECT BLDG DEMOLITION
G10 SITE PREPARATIONS
Al Dhafra, UAE
G20 SITE IMPROVEMENTS

G30 SITE CIVIL/MECHANICAL UTILITIES
G40 SITE ELECTRICAL UTILITIES
Z10 GENERAL PERFORMANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
4. PART 5 PRESCRIPTIVE SPECIFICATIONS
UFGS 31 00 EARTHWORK
UFGS 31 31 16.13 CHEMICAL TERMITE TREATMENT
UFGS 32 11 23 GRADED-CRUSHED AGGREGATE BASE COURSE
USGF 32 12 10 BITUMINOUS TACK AND PRIME COATS
USGS 32 12 15 HOT-MIX ASPHALT (HMA) FOR AIRFIELDS
USGS 32 13 11 CONCRETE PAVEMENT FOR AIRFIELDS AND OTHER HEAVY-DUTY
PAVEMENTS
USGS 32 13 73 COMPRESSIVE JOINT SEALS FOR CONCRETE PAVEMENTS
5. PART 6 ATTACHMENTS
ADAB SPEC COMM
T
REFUELER RAMP AS-BUILTS
GEOTECH
MQ-4C TRITON FRD
NAVFAC SYSTEM FURNITURE SPECIFICATION
PENN MEMO
AF
RF CABLING AND ANTENNA
SITE DRAWINGS
SITE PHOTOS
TOWER DRAWINGS
TRITON BASING 101
UFC 4 211 01N
ECB 2015-7
R
NAVY FALL PROTECTION GUIDE
D
Al Dhafra, UAE
PART TWO - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
T
AF
R
D
PART TWO - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS - Page 1

Triton Operational Facilities (BAMS), Al Dhafra, UAE 401070
SECTION 01 14 00
WORK RESTRICTIONS
11/11
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;

submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When
used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office
that will review the submittal for the Government. Submittals with an "S"
are for inclusion in the Sustainability Notebook, in conformance to Section
01 33 29.05 20 SUSTAINABILITY REPORTING FOR DESIGN-BUILD. Submit the
following in accordance with Section 01 33 00.05 20 CONSTRUCTION SUBMITTAL
PROCEDURES and Section 01 33 10.05 20 DESIGN SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals
T
List of Contact Personnel; G M/R
1.2 SPECIAL SCHEDULING REQUIREMENTS
a.
AF
Airfield operations will continue during the entire construction
period. The Contractor must conduct his operations so as to cause the
least possible interference with normal operations.
b. Permission to interrupt any roads and/or utility service must be

requested in writing a minimum of 15 calendar days prior to the desired
date of interruption.
R
1.3 CONTRACTOR ACCESS AND USE OF PREMISES
1.3.1 Activity Regulations
Ensure that Contractor personnel employed on the Activity become familiar

D
with and obey Activity regulations including safety, fire, traffic and
security regulations. Keep within the limits of the work and avenues of
ingress and egress. Wear hard hats in designated areas. Do not enter any
restricted areas unless required to do so and until cleared for such
entry. Mark Contractor equipment for identification.
1.3.1.1 Subcontractors and Personnel Contacts
Provide a list of contact personnel of the Contractor and subcontractors

including addresses and telephone numbers for use in the event of an
emergency. As changes occur and additional information becomes available,
correct and change the information contained in previous lists.
1.3.1.2 No Smoking Policy
Smoking is prohibited within and outside of all buildings on installation,

except in designated smoking areas. This applies to existing buildings,
buildings under construction and buildings under renovation. Discarding
tobacco materials other than into designated tobacco receptacles is
considered littering and is subject to fines. The Contracting Officer will
identify designated smoking areas.
SECTION 01 14 00 Page 1
1.3.2 Working Hours
Regular duty hours consist of a 9.0 hour period , between 0730 to 1630
Sunday through Thursday, excluding Government holidays.
1.3.3 Work Outside Regular Hours
If the Contractor desires to carry on work outside regular duty hours, or

on holidays (including the following U.S. holidays: New Year's Day, Martin
Luther King Jr's Birthday, George Washington's Birthday, Memorial Day,
Independence Day, Labor Day, Columbus Day, Veteran's Day, Thanksgiving and
Christmas), he shall submit an application to the Contracting Officer. The
Contractor shall allow ample time to enable satisfactory arrangements to be
made by the Government for inspecting the work in progress. At night,
exterior lighting shall be provided in conformance with EM-385-1-1 entitled
"Safety and Health Requirements Manual".
1.3.4 Occupied Areas and Existing Facilities
The Contractor may be working around occupied areas and existing
T
facilities. Do not enter these areas or facilities without prior approval
of the Contracting Officer.
1.3.5 Utility Cutovers and Interruptions

AF
a. Make utility cutovers and interruptions after normal working hours or
on Saturdays and Government holidays. Conform to procedures required
in the paragraph "Work Outside Regular Hours."
b. Ensure that new utility lines are complete, except for the connection,
before interrupting existing service.
R
c. Interruption to telephone service, electric service, and fire alarm are
considered utility cutovers pursuant to the paragraph entitled "Work
Outside Regular Hours."
d. Operation of Station Utilities: The Contractor must not operate nor

D
disturb the setting of control devices in the station utilities system,

including water, sewer, electrical, and steam services. The Government
will operate the control devices as required for normal conduct of the
work. The Contractor must notify the Contracting Officer giving
reasonable advance notice when such operation is required.
1.4 BASE SECURITY REQUIREMENTS
Work under this contract will be performed at a location with security and
access control procedures. Compliance with base pass and access procedures
is the sole responsibility of the Contractor, and is required to be
accomplished prior to initiation of the process for gaining access to
controlled sites. Contractor shall be responsible for determining the
nature and amount of any fees required. Contractor is responsible for all
workers granted access pursuant to work under this contract. Contractor
shall pay all gate pass fees.
a. Contractor must be registered to work in the UAE and must register

with the Command Military Works (CMS) to obtain a security clearance to
work on a UAE Military Base. This procedure can take as much as six
(6) months to obtain all of the needed passes.
b. Other Data: Contractor shall provide additional data, as required

and not specifically indicated above, to secure all required passes for
where work is required to be performed.
c. Compliance with Revised Requirements: The Government and/or Host

Nation may revise requirements and procedures for obtaining passes
and/or access to the site of work at any time during the life of the
contract. Contractor shall comply with all such requirements, as
directed by the Contracting Officer.
d. Contractor shall employ an acceptable system for accountability

and control of all compound passes/access badges issued to him.
Passes/Access Badges shall be returned to the Government and/or Host
Nation as soon as they are no longer required. This system shall be
approved by the Contracting Officer, and shall be modified as directed
by the Contracting Officer to correct any deficiencies noted during
contract performance in maintaining an acceptable level of
accountability and control.
1.4.1 Requirements
T
The Host Nation Security Office maintains the ultimate authority for
establishing, monitoring, and enforcing security requirements for the
Base. All contractor, subcontractor, or vendor personnel and vehicles at
AF
any tier working at any location on the base are subject to a thorough
search upon entering, departing, or at any time deemed necessary by Base
Security Personnel. The Contractor shall be responsible for compliance
with all base security requirements. The Government and/or Host Nation
reserves the right to deny access or to require the contractor to remove
any personnel or equipment deemed to be a threat to the security of the
Base or Base personnel. The Contractor shall work through the Contracting
Officer to assure that base security regulations are followed.
R
1.4.2 Security Areas
For the duration of this contract, the Base will be divided into two zones,
the Base Security Area and the Construction Security Area. The contract
D
work will be confined to the Construction Security Area for the majority of
the work. Limited access to the Base Security Area will be coordinated
with Base Security personnel, through the Contracting Officer. Minimum
requirements for Contractor entry and operations in each of these areas is
described below.
1.4.3 Construction Security Area
The Construction Security Area encompasses the area surrounding P960, the
ongoing construction of P960, the Contractor's mobilization areas, and the
Construction Security Area Access Gate. The Construction Security Area
will be established by temporary movable fencing and shall be indicated on
the Contractor's Construction Site Plan. All temporary fence separating
base and construction security zones shall be high quality movable metallic
type. Fence shall be 1800 mm (6 feet) tall. All fencing shall be provided
with visual screen or be solid metallic panels. For separation of areas
within construction security zone, the Contractor may use existing movable
fence and provide additional quantities as required. The Government will
have the primary responsibility for implementation and enforcement of the
security requirements for all contractor personnel and equipment in the
Construction Security Area. The Construction Security Area will exist for
the entire duration of this contract. However, as various parts of the

work are completed the temporary movable fence will be relocated to
redefine the boundary of the Construction Security Area. Relocations of
the temporary movable fence must be coordinated through the Contracting
Officer and approved by the Base Security Officer. Upon completion of all
contract work the temporary removable fence shall remain the property of
the Contractor and be removed from the base as part of the Contractor's
demobilization.
1.4.3.1 Access to the Construction Security Area
Contractor access to the Construction Security Area for all personnel,

vehicles, equipment and materials will be limited to the Construction
Security Area Access Gate. During the period of this contract, other
contractors may also utilize the Construction Security Area Access Gate and
may have mobilization areas in the Construction Security Area. The
Construction Security Area will be accessible at 0730 hours each morning
until 1630 each evening. Special requests to extend either the opening
time, closing time or both shall be approved by the Base Security Officer 5
working days in advance of the requested time. Any approval for extended
hours may be because of emergency circumstances and will not be approved
T
for large blocks of time or because the Contractor needs to work additional
hours to regain its schedule. The Base Security Officer, from time to time
and possibly for extended time periods throughout the duration of this
contract, without notice, may increase or decrease the threat condition
AF
(THREATCON) under which Base Security operates. At anytime during the
duration of this contract while THREATCON CHARLIE is in effect the
Construction Security Area will be open for work activities from 0600 until
1800 only, seven days per week. There will be no exceptions to these
operating hours. At anytime during the duration of this contract while
THREATCON DELTA is in effect, the Construction Security Area may be closed
for all construction activity. The Base Security actions to safeguard the
Military and Civilian personnel during any security condition may have a
R
negative affect on contractor's employees, vehicle and materials access and
overall ability to perform. Any such action taken by Base Security is
considered necessary for the security and protection of US military and
civilian personnel. The Contractor should expect daily 60 to 90 minutes
waiting period for his workers to access the site.
D
1.4.3.2 Identification of Employees in the Construction Security Area
The Contractor shall provide a list of all employees who will need access
to the Construction Security Area. The access list shall contain the
following information: name, company, nationality, date of birth, place of
birth, Central Population Register (CPR), expiry date, passport number,
date issued and expiry date, visa expiry. In order to get on the access
list, copies of Passport, CPR and Residence Permit shall be provided. All
of these three (3) documents must be valid at all times to remain on the
access list. The access list additions/deletions will be provided in three
(3) copies through the Contracting Officer to the Base Security Officer on
a weekly basis. The Contractor shall plan his employee force requirements
such that the access list will contain all those employees who will need
access to the Construction Security Area for the period the list is in
effect. Supplemental updating of the employee access list will be allowed
only at the discretion of the Contracting Officer with the approval of the
Base Security Officer. Employees who no longer require access to the
Construction Security Area should be removed from the list. Each
contractor employee seeking entrance to the Construction Security Area must
be on the approved Access List. To gain access to the Construction
Security Area personnel shall surrender their CPR card or Passport to the
personnel at the Construction Security Area Access Gate, and receive an
identification badge allowing that individual access to the Construction
Security Area. Employees shall wear identification badges prominently
displayed at all times while in the Construction Security Area. Failure to
wear a properly displayed identification badge may be considered grounds
for removal of the employee from the site. The Contractor shall conduct
random inspections to assure that identification badges are properly
displayed. At the conclusion of the work day each employee shall return
the badge to the Base Security personnel at the Construction Security Area
Access Gate and receive his CPR card or Passport back. In addition to
identification badges, all contractor labor personnel shall wear coveralls
in a distinct color for the contractor's personnel and for each
subcontractor's personnel. The Coveralls shall have markings on the back
clearly identifying the company for whom the employee works.
1.4.3.3 Identification of Vehicles and Equipment in the Construction

Security Area
The Contractor shall provide a list of all vehicles that require access to
the Construction Security Area. This access list shall contain the same
T
information and back-up documents as required for the Construction Security
Zone. The current access list shall be provided through the Contracting
Officer to the Base Security Office on a weekly basis. The Contractor
shall plan his vehicle requirements such that the access list will contain
AF
all those vehicles that will need access to the Construction Security Area
for the period the list is in effect. Supplemental updating of the vehicle
access list will be allowed only at the discretion of the Contracting
Officer with the approval of the Base Security Officer. All Contractor
vehicles and equipment entering through the construction gate will be
subject to a thorough inspection by Government personnel, including, as a
minimum, a detailed inspection of the vehicle's interior and
undercarriage. All vehicles will bear the name of the contractor,
R
subcontractor or supplier they represent in a prominent place on the
vehicle. No vehicle of any type will be left unaccompanied near the
temporary fence separating base and construction security zones. No
vehicle or equipment will be left on the work site after work hours, unless
specifically approved by the Contracting Officer.
D
1.4.4 Base Security Area
Limited access to the Base Security Area will be controlled by Base

Security personnel. The Contractor will schedule and plan his work to
minimize the numbers of personnel, vehicles, and equipment entering the
Base Security Area. Within the Base Security Area, Base Security personnel
will be responsible for implementation and enforcement of security
requirements. However, the Contractor is responsible to assure that his
personnel, vehicles and equipment are in compliance with all security
regulations.
1.4.4.1 Access to the Base Security Area
Contractor personnel will enter the Base Security Area through the Base
Personnel Gate. Personnel without proper identification and clearance will
not be permitted entry. Contractor vehicles and equipment will enter the
Base Security Area through the point designated by Base Security. Vehicle,
equipment, and drivers without proper identification and clearance will not
be permitted entry. All vehicles and equipment entering the Base Security
Area will be thoroughly inspected by Government personnel. Privately owned
vehicles will not be permitted entry to the Base Security Area. For the
purpose of executing any work under this contract, hours of operation of
the Base Security Area are the same as for the Construction Security Area.
1.4.4.2 Identification of Employees in the Base Security Area
The Contractor shall provide a list of all employees who will need access
to the Base Security Area at least seven (7) days prior to the required
date of access. The access list shall contain the name, current CPR or
Passport number, nationality and firm employing each person on the list.
The current access list will be provided through the Contracting Officer to
the Base Security Officer on a weekly basis. The Contractor shall plan his
employee force requirements such that the access list will contain all
those employees who will need access to the Base Security Area for the
completion of the particular work item being performed. Supplemental
updating of the employee access list will be allowed only at the discretion
of the Contracting Officer with the approval of the Base Security Officer.
To gain access to the Base Security Area personnel will surrender their CPR
card or Passport to the Base Security personnel at the Base Personnel Gate
and receive an identification badge allowing that individual access to the
Base Security Area. Employees shall wear identification badges prominently
T
displayed at all times while in the Base Security Area. Failure to wear a
properly displayed identification badge may be considered grounds for
removal of the employee from the site. The Contractor shall conduct random
inspections to assure that identification badges are properly displayed.
AF
At the conclusion of the work day each employee shall return the badge to
the Base Security personnel and receive his CPR card or Passport back. In
addition to identification badges, all contractor labor personnel shall
wear coveralls of a distinct color for the contractor's personnel and for
each subcontractor's personnel. The Coveralls shall have markings on the
back clearly identifying the company for whom the employee works.
1.4.4.3 Identification of Vehicles and Equipment in the Base Security Area

R
All Contractor vehicles and equipment entering the Base Security Area must
be listed on the Base Vehicle Access List. The Contractor shall provide a
list of all vehicles that require access to the Base Security Area. This
access list shall include the type of equipment, make and model,
D
registration number, company name of owner, operator's name and CPR or

Passport Number. The current access list will be provided through the
Contracting Officer to the Base Security Officer on a weekly basis. The
Contractor shall plan his vehicle and equipment requirements such that the
access list will contain all those vehicles and equipment that will need
access to the Base Security Area for completion of the particular work item
being performed. Supplemental updating of the employee access list will be
allowed only at the discretion of the Contracting Officer with the approval
of the Base Security Officer. All Contractor vehicles and equipment
entering through the Base Delivery Gate will be subject to a through
inspection by Base Security personnel, including, as a minimum, a detailed
inspection of the vehicle's interior and undercarriage. No vehicle will be
left unattended in the Base Security Area at any time. All vehicles not
actively involved in construction activities or delivering materials will
be parked in an area designated by Base Security.
1.4.5 Access Passes for Contractor Supervisory Personnel
All Contractor supervisory personnel(above foreman level) requiring regular

access to the Base Security Area or the Construction Security Area will be
issued appropriate passes by the Base Security Office. For each
supervisory person requiring access, the Contractor shall submit a Security

Area Pass Application through the Contracting Officer to the Base Security
Office. The contractor shall designate whether the employee needs access
only to the Construction Security Area or both the Base and Construction
Security Areas. Only the highest levels of the contractor's management and
those employees conducting regular business with the Navy shall be allowed
a Base Security Area Pass. Copies of the application forms will be made
available at the Pre-construction Conference. The Contractor will allow a
minimum of seven days for processing and issuance of Security Access
Passes. If the pass holder leaves the employment of the contractor during
the course of this contract the contractor shall immediately return the
employee's pass to the Contracting Officer. Prior to final payment under
this contract, the Contractor shall be responsible to account for all Base
passes issued to Contractor employees.
1.4.6 Escorted Access Passes
The Contractor and Contractor's personnel, including individual vendor or

subcontractor manager, materials delivery vehicle etc., must be escorted by
USAF personnel anywhere within the USAF sections of the air base.
Contractor shall be responsible for all costs associated with excort
T
requirements.
1.4.7 Contractor Security Manager

AF
The contractor will appoint an individual to act as its Security Manager
throughout the duration of this contract. The Security Manager's primary
function will be to coordinate all issues relative to access to the Base
and Construction Security Areas, to establish and maintain employee and
vehicle access lists, to coordinate the entry of escorted visitors and
materials to the Security Areas, and to generally represent the
contractor's interest in dealing with the Contracting Officer and the Base
Security Personnel. This individual shall be capable of clearly
R
communicating orally and in writing with Base Security personnel. The
ability to communicate in other languages than English will be beneficial
as well. The Security Manager will be subject to the approval of the Base
Security Officer and can be removed from the position at anytime at the
request of the Base Security Officer. The Security Manager will work at
D
the contractor's office located at the Construction Security Area Access

Gate. At the start of construction the Security Manager, the Contracting
Officer and the Base Security Officer shall meet to discuss all details of
the Base Security requirements, to reach an understanding of the Security
Manager's duties and other operational relationships.
1.4.8 Access to Operational Areas
Contractor personnel are expressly prohibited from entering operational

buildings or areas without the specific authorization of the Base Security
Office. Necessary access to operational buildings or areas shall be
coordinated through the Contracting Officer and approved by the Base
Security Officer a minimum of seven (7) days before access is required.
1.4.8.1 Restricted Items
No cell phones with cameras will be allowed on Base.
1.5 RADIO TRANSMITTER RESTRICTIONS
To preclude accidental actuation of sensitive electronic equipment, the
Contractor shall not use radio transmitting equipment without prior

approval of the Contracting Officer.
1.6 ON-BASE PHOTOGRAPHY PROHIBITION
The Contractor shall not engage in any form of photography without prior
written approval from the Contracting Officer and USAF Base Security.
1.7 COMPLIANCE WITH HOST COUNTRY RULES AND CUSTOMS
The laws of Host Country may prohibit access to certain areas of the
country which are under military control. The Contractor shall furnish the
Contracting Officer the names of personnel, type, and amounts of equipment,
dates and length of time required at the site, and the purpose of entering
the host country. It is understood that areas to which rights of entry are
provided by the Host Government are to be used only for work carried out
under the contract and no destruction or damages shall be caused, except
through normal usage, without concurrence of the Host Government.
1.8 CONTRACTOR TRANSPORTATION AND CUSTOMS CLEARANCE
T
All materials and equipment which are to be incorporated into the project,
or are to be used in support of this contract, may be shipped free of duty,
if the following actions are taken:
1.8.1
AF
Shipments of Materials
All shipments of materials into the country for use in performance of work
under this contract and supplies or services necessary for support of the
Contractor's personnel shall be addressed to the shipping address furnished
to the Contractor by the Contracting Officer. Address will be furnished
upon request by the Contractor.
R
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Used
D
PART 3 EXECUTION
Not Used
-- End of Section --
SECTION 01 15 00.12 10
SUPPLEMENTARY REQUIREMENTS
10/15
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUBMITTAL

01 33 29.05 20, SUSTAINABITY REPORTING FOR DESIGN-BUILD. Submit the
following in accordance withSection 01 33 00.05 20 CONSTRUCTION SUBMITTAL
T
Foreign Objects Damage (FOD) Control Plan; G M/R
Requests for Digging Permits; G M/R

AF
Proposed Means of Providing Project Security; G M/R
Accident Prevention Plan (APP); G M/R
SD-07 Certificates
Certificates Of Compliance
R
1.2 FOREIGN OBJECTS DAMAGE CONTROL
The Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Contracting Officer, for
approval, his plan to (control Foreign Objects Damage (FOD) at its
D
mobilization site, construction site and during work on or near aircraft

runways and/or taxiways. The plan shall be specific and shall describe in
detail measures to be implemented to prevent deposit of foreign objects on
runways and/or taxiways during construction. The Foreign Objects Damage
(FOD) Control Plan shall be submitted fifteen (15) calendar days prior to
the start of any work on or near aircraft runways or taxiways. No work will
be allowed near any runways or taxiways without approval of the FOD control
plan by the Contracting Officer.
1.3 AIRFIELD PAVEMENT WORKSHOP (APW)
The Contractor shall plan for an Airfield Pavement Workshop (APW) for an
approximately two (2) day period during the initial construction phase of
the airfield pavement work, ideally during the Preparatory and/or Initial
Phase Inspections. The APW is conducted by U.S. Army Corps of Engineers
(USACE) Transportation Systems Center (TSC) and provides additional
direction and technical support during start-up activities for the
construction phase for airfield pavement projects executed by USACE. The
APW may include a group presentation, observation and analysis of test
section construction, verification of plant calibration, and observation of
work quality during early phases of concrete paving.
SECTION 01 15 00.12 10 Page 1

There shall be no additional compensation for attending this workshop.

Contractor representatives in attendance shall include those personnel
typically present during the Preparatory Phase Inspection. The contractor
shall coordinate the specific time and location with the Contracting
Officer. Contractor shall note that TSC requires a minimum of 60 calendar
days advance notice to conduct the APW. Further directions will be given
at the Pre-Construction Conference.
1.4 DIGGING PERMITS
1.4.1 Requirements for Digging Permits
Prior to the start of any work activity which requires excavation within the
current Base Civil Engineering Squadron, the Contractor shall obtain a
digging permit.
1.4.2 Requests for Digging Permits
Requests for Digging Permits shall be submitted through the Contracting

Officer's Representative (COR) and Resident Engineer/Project Engineer to
T
the AF AFCEC Project Manager/BASECE a minimum of twenty-one (21) days prior
to the start of the work activity covered by the permit. The request for a
Digging Permit shall include a narrative description of the work to be
performed and a detailed map of the area of the excavation clearly marking
AF
the location of all known utilities or other obstructions. If the work
activity covered by the Digging Permit request also requires a utility
outage, a separate request for the outage shall be submitted in accordance
with the paragraph entitled CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING UTILITIES.
1.4.3 Preparation of Requests for Digging Permits
Prior to submitting a request for a Digging Permit, the Contractor shall

R
carefully review the area to be excavated to determine the location of
existing utilities and other obstructions. The Contractor will review
available drawings and will conduct a visual inspection of the site. The
Contractor will utilize underground utility detecting devices such as metal
and cable detectors to determine the location of existing utilities. All
D
utility lines found shall be clearly flagged or marked and the location of
the utility shall be shown on the drawing to be submitted with the request
for Digging Permit.
1.4.4 Existing Underground Utilities
The Contractor is provided notice that existing utilities are present in

the construction area which may not be shown, or are inaccurately shown, on
the base as-built drawings and the contract drawings. The Contractor shall
exercise utmost care in researching locations of existing utilities and
reducing damage to existing utilities. Any utilities damaged by the
Contractor shall be promptly repaired by the Contractor. The Contracting
Officer will review and approve any proposed repairs. Any damage to
existing utilities will be immediately reported to the Contracting Officer
and the Base Civil Engineering Squadron.
1.4.5 Use of Underground Utility Detecting Device
Prior to any excavation, a metal and/or cable detecting device shall be

used along the route of the excavation. All underground utilities
discovered by this method will be flagged a minimum distance of one-half
SECTION 01 15 00.12 10 Page 2

(1/2) meter on each side of the location.
1.4.6 Hand Excavation
Hand excavation methods and special supervisory care shall be used between
any flagged markers, in areas of known or suspected hazards, and in areas
known or suspected to have multiple and/or concentrated utility lines or
connections.
1.5 HAUL ROUTES - SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS
The Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating with the Host

Government use of any existing roads as haul routes. Construction, and
routing of new haul roads, and/or upgrading of existing roads for the
Contractor's use, is the sole responsibility of the Contractor. It shall
be the Contractor's responsibility to obtain such local authorizations,
permits and licenses necessary to establish his mobilization camp, quarry
operations, batching operations and haul routes.
1.6 RESPONSIBILITY FOR PHYSICAL SECURITY
T
Prior to mobilization, the Contractor shall submit his proposed means of
providing project security to prevent unauthorized access to equipment,
facilities, materials and documents, and to safeguard them against
sabotage, damage, and theft. The Contractor shall be responsible for
AF
physical security of all materials, supplies, and equipment of every
description, including property which may be Government-furnished or owned,
for all areas occupied jointly by the Contractor and the Government, as
well as for all work performed.
1.7 CERTIFICATES OF COMPLIANCE
Any certificates required for demonstrating proof of compliance of

R
materials with specification requirements shall be executed in accordance
with Section 01 33 00.05 20 CONSTRUCTION SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES. Each
certificate shall be signed by an official authorized to certify in behalf
of the manufacturing company involved and shall contain the name and
address of the Contractor, the project name and location, description and
D
the quantity of the items involved, and date or dates of shipment or

delivery to which the certificates apply. Copies of laboratory test reports
submitted with certificates shall contain the name and address of the
testing laboratory and the date or dates of the tests to which the report
applies. Certification shall not be construed as relieving the Contractor
from furnishing satisfactory material.
1.8 ACCIDENT PREVENTION
The Contractor shall comply with all applicable Host Country laws and with
such additional measures as the Contracting Officer may find necessary in
accordance with CONTRACT CLAUSE 52.236-13 entitled ACCIDENT PREVENTION (NOV
1991). Applicable provisions of the Corps of Engineers manual entitled
Safety and Health Requirements Manual EM 385-1-1, will be applied to all
work under this contract. The referenced manual may be obtained from the
Contracting Officer's Representative at the jobsite or from the Middle East
District at Winchester, Virginia.
1.8.1 Accident Prevention Plan (APP)
Submit the APP to the Contracting Officer 15 calendar days prior to the
SECTION 01 15 00.12 10 Page 3

date of the preconstruction conference for acceptance, four (4) copies of

the Accident Prevention Plan required by the CONTRACT CLAUSE 52.236-13
entitled ACCIDENT PREVENTION (NOV 1991) shall be submitted for review by
the Contracting Officer. The Contractor shall not commence physical work at
the site until the Accident Prevention Plan (APP) has been reviewed and
accepted by the Contracting Officer or his authorized representative. The
APP shall meet the requirements listed in Appendix "A" of EM385-1-1.
The Activity Hazard Analysis is a method in which those hazards likely to

cause a serious injury or fatality are analyzed for each phase of
operations. Corrective action is planned in advance which will eliminate
the hazards. An analysis is required for each new phase of work. On large
or complex jobs the first phase may be presented in detail with the
submittal of the Accident Prevention Plan rather than presenting the
complete analysis. If the plan is to be presented in phases, a proposed
outline for future phases must be submitted as a part of the initial
Accident Prevention Plan submittal. Accident Prevention Plans will be
reviewed for timeliness and adequacy at least monthly with a signature
sheet signed and dated documenting that these reviews took place.
Copy of company policy statement of Accident Prevention and any other
T
guidance as required by EM 385-1-1, Appendix A.
1.8.2 Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter (GFCI) Requirement - Overseas

Construction
AF
The Corps of Engineers Health and Safety Manual, EM 385-1-1, section
11.C.05.a. states: "The GFCI device shall be calibrated to trip within the
threshold values of 5 ma +/- 1 ma as specified in Underwriters Laboratory
(UL) Standard 943." A variance from USACE has been granted allowing 10 ma,
in lieu of 5 ma, for overseas activities that use 220 Volts(V)/50 hertz(hz)
electrical power.
R
1.8.3 Temporary Power - Electrical Distribution Boxes
EM 385-1-1 section 11.A.01.a. states "All electrical wiring and equipment

shall be a type listed by a nationally recognized testing laboratory for
the specific application for which it is to be used." This includes
D
temporary electrical distribution boxes. Locally manufactured electrical

boxes will not be allowed. Only manufactured electrical distribution boxes
that meet the European CE requirements, with 10 ma CE type GFCIs installed
shall be allowed.
Contractors shall:
a. Make no modifications that might void any CE or manufacturer

certification.
b. Test the installed systems to demonstrate that they operate properly

and provide the 10 ma earth leakage protection.
c. Ensure GFCIs will have an integral push-to-test function. The

testing shall be performed on a regular basis.
d. Check that proper grounding is checked regularly and flexible cords,

connectors, and sockets inspected before each use.
SECTION 01 15 00.12 10 Page 4

1.9 LOCALLY AVAILABLE SERVICE FOR EQUIPMENT
All equipment furnished under this contract, regardless of country of

manufacture or purchase, must have in-country service availability. In the
event that the Contractor proposed to provide equipment for which
in-country service is not available, the Contractor must provide written
justification for the Contracting Officer's approval. This justification
shall be submitted for each product or material for which a waiver is
sought concurrently with the submittal required by the Technical
Provisions. Submission of group or "blanket" waivers is unacceptable.
1.10 PHYSICAL CONDITIONS
The indications of physical conditions on the drawings and in the

specifications are the result of site investigations. Exploration logs (FOR
INFORMATION ONLY) are presented in PART 6 ATTACHMENTS.
1.11 STANDARDIZATION
Where two or more items of the same type or class of equipment furnished in
this project are required, the units shall be products of the same
T
manufacturer and shall be interchangeable when of the same size, capacity,
performance characteristics, and rating. The only exception to this
requirement is where the items are interchangeable due to conformance with
industry standards (valves, fittings, etc.), they need not be by the same
AF
manufacturer. This requirement applies to all manufactured items in the
project which normally require repair or replacement during the life of the
equipment.
1.12 ON-BASE PHOTOGRAPHY PROHIBITION
The Contractor shall not engage in any form of photography without prior
written approval from the Contracting Officer.
R
1.13 PUBLIC RELEASE OF INFORMATION
1.13.1 Prohibition
D
There shall be no public release of information or photographs concerning

any aspect of the materials or services relating to this bid, contract,
purchase order, or other documents resulting therefrom without the prior
written approval of the Contracting Officer.
1.13.2 Subcontract and Purchase Orders
The Contractor agrees to insert the substance of this clause in all

purchase orders and subcontract agreements issued under this contract.
1.14 CUSTOM EXEMPT CONTRACT
The Contractor shall furnish to the Contracting Officer, just prior to

completion of this contract, a consolidated inventory of all inventory of
all excess supplies, materials and equipment imported duty free for use
under this contract. All excesses shall become the property of the
Government.
1.15 COMPLIANCE WITH HOST COUNTRY RULES AND CUSTOMS
The laws of Host Country may prohibit access to certain areas of the
SECTION 01 15 00.12 10 Page 5

country which are under military control. The Contractor shall furnish the
Contracting Officer the names of personnel, type, and amounts of equipment,
dates and length of time required at the site, and the purpose of entering
the host country. It is understood that areas to which rights of entry are
provided by the Host Government are to be used only for work carried out
under the contract and no destruction or damages shall be caused, except
through normal usage, without concurrence of the Host Government.
1.15.1 Contractor's Responsibilities
The following items are the sole responsibility of the Contractor to

investigate, estimate as to cost, and assume the risk, as normally
encountered by Contractors. The Contractor shall be responsible for
determining the effect of the following on his own cost of performance of
the contract and for including sufficient amount in the contract price:
a. Official language and type of accounts required to satisfy the

officials of the Local Government.
b. Entry and exit visas, residence permits, and residence laws

applicable to aliens. This includes any special requirements of
T
the Host Government, including those required by local Labor
Offices, which the Contractor may have to fulfill before an
application for a regular block of visas will be accepted.
AF
c. Passports, health and immunization certificates, and quarantine
clearance.
d. Compliance with local labor and insurance laws, including payment

of employer's share of contribution, collecting balance from
employee and paying into insurance funds.
e. Strikes, demonstrations and work stoppage.

R
f. Collection through withholding and payment to local Government, of
any Host Country income tax on employees subject to tax.
g. Arranging to perform work in the Host Country, to import

D
personnel, to employ non-indigenous labor, to receive payments and

to remove such funds from the country.
h. Operating under local laws, practices, customs and controls, and

with local unions, in connection with hiring and firing, mandatory
wage scales, vacation pay, severance pay, overtime, holiday pay,
7th day of rest, legal notice or pay in lieu thereof for dismissal
of employees, slowdown and curtailed schedules during religious
holidays and ratio of local labor employed in comparison to others.
i. Possibility of claims in local bureaus, litigation in local

courts, or attachment of local bank accounts.
j. Compliance with workmen's compensation laws and contributions into

funds. Provisions of necessary medical service for Contractor
employees.
k. Special license required by the local Government for setting up

and operating any manufacturing plant in the Host Country, e.g.
concrete batching, precast concrete, concrete blocks, etc.
SECTION 01 15 00.12 10 Page 6

l. Sales within the host country of Contractor-owned materials, and

equipment.
m. Special licenses for physicians, mechanics, tradesmen, drivers,

etc.
n. Identification and/or registration with local police of imported

personnel.
o. Stamp tax on documents, payments and payrolls.
p. Base passes for permanent staff, day laborers, motor vehicles, etc.
q. Compliance with all customs and import rules, regulations and

restrictions, including, but not limited to, local purchase
requirements.
1.16 RADIO TRANSMITTER RESTRICTIONS
To preclude accidental actuation of sensitive electronic equipment, the

Contractor shall not use radio transmitting equipment without prior
T
approval of the Contracting Officer.
1.17 BASE HOT WORK PERMITS
1.17.1
AF
Requirement for Hot Work Permits
Prior to the start of a work activity including hot work (welding, burning,
etc.) or the operating of other flame producing devices, the Contractor
shall obtain a Hot Work Permit.
1.17.2 Requests for Hot Work Permits

R
Requests for Hot Work Permits shall be submitted through the Contracting
Officer to the Base Fire Department a minimum of 7 days prior to the start
of the work activity covered by the permit. The request for a Hot Work
Permit shall include a narrative description of the work to be
accomplished, a list of equipment to be used, and a description of special
D
safety precautions that the Contractor will put in place during the work to
assure compliance with EM 385-1-1 and Base Fire Regulations.
1.17.3 Preparatory Inspections and Inspection of Equipment
During the Preparatory Inspection for any work activity including hot work,
the Hot Work Permit shall be reviewed. During the Preparatory inspection,
all hot equipment and safety equipment shall be checked to assure that it
is in proper working order. Safety equipment required by the Hot Work
Permit shall be checked at the beginning of each shift to assure that it is
in proper working order.
SECTION 01 15 00.12 10 Page 7

SECTION 01 30 00
ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
11/11
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the

extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the
basic designation only.
U.S. NATIONAL ARCHIVES AND RECORDS ADMINISTRATION (NARA)
15 CFR 772 Definition of Terms
15 CFR 773 Special Licensing Procedures
1.2 SUBMITTALS
T
AF
01 33 29.05 20 SUSTAINABILITY REPORTING FOR DESIGN BUILD. Submit the
PROCEDURES and 01 33 10.05 20 DESIGN SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:

R
Progress and completion pictures; G M/R
1.3 SUPERVISION
Have at least one qualified supervisor capable of reading, writing, and

D
conversing fluently in the English language on the job site during working
hours. In addition, if a Quality Control (QC) representative is required
on the contract, then that individual shall also have fluent English
communication skills.
1.4 EXPORT LICENSES FOR OVERSEAS PROJECTS
Obtain individual export licenses and project export licenses required by

the Department of Commerce regulations (15 CFR 772 and 15 CFR 773) so that
no delays are experienced in shipping from the United States of America to
a foreign country. For additional information, the Contractor may contact
one of the U.S. and Foreign Commercial Service District Offices of the
Department of Commerce which are located in almost every State.
1.5 WAIVER FOR WORKER'S COMPENSATION
In addition to "FAR 52.228-3, Workers' Compensation and Insurance," the

Secretary of Labor has granted a waiver. The waiver does not apply to
employees who are hired in the United States, or who are residents, or
citizens of the United States.
1.6 AVAILABILITY OF CADD DRAWING FILES
After award and upon request, the electronic "Computer-Aided Drafting and
Design (CADD)" drawing files will only be made available to the Contractor
for use in preparation of construction drawings and data related to the
referenced contract subject to the following terms and conditions.
Request specific drawing numbers of files required; the entire set of
drawing files will not be provided.
Data contained on these electronic files shall not be used for any purpose
other than as a convenience in the preparation of construction drawings and
data for the referenced project. Any other use or reuse shall be at the
sole risk of the Contractor and without liability or legal exposure to the
Government. The Contractor shall make no claim and waives to the fullest
extent permitted by law, any claim or cause of action of any nature against
the Government, its agents or sub consultants that may arise out of or in
connection with the use of these electronic files. The Contractor shall,
to the fullest extent permitted by law, indemnify and hold the Government
harmless against all damages, liabilities or costs, including reasonable
attorney's fees and defense costs, arising out of or resulting from the use
of these electronic files.
T
These electronic CADD drawing files are not construction documents.
Differences may exist between the CADD files and the corresponding
construction documents. The Government makes no representation regarding
AF
the accuracy or completeness of the electronic CADD files, nor does it make
representation to the compatibility of these files with the Contractors
hardware or software. In the event that a conflict arises between the
signed and sealed construction documents prepared by the Government and the
furnished CADD files, the signed and sealed construction documents shall
govern. The Contractor is responsible for determining if any conflict
exists. Use of these CADD files does not relieve the Contractor of duty to
fully comply with the contract documents, including and without limitation,
R
the need to check, confirm and coordinate the work of all contractors for
the project.
If the Contractor uses, duplicates and/or modifies these electronic CADD

files for use in producing construction drawings and data related to this
D
contract, all previous indicia of ownership (seals, logos, signatures,

initials and dates) shall be removed.
1.7 ELECTRONIC MAIL (E-MAIL) ADDRESS
The Contractor shall establish and maintain electronic mail (e-mail)

capability along with the capability to open various electronic attachments
in Microsoft, Adobe Acrobat, and other similar formats. Within 10 days
after contract award, the Contractor shall provide the Contracting Officer
a single (only one) e-mail address for electronic communications from the
Contracting Officer related to this contract including, but not limited to
contract documents, invoice information, request for proposals, and other
correspondence. The Contracting Officer may also use email to notify the
Contractor of base access conditions when emergency conditions warrant,
such as hurricanes, terrorist threats, etc. Multiple email address will
not be allowed.
It is the Contractor's responsibility to make timely distribution of all

Contracting Officer initiated e-mail with its own organization including
field office(s). The Contractor shall promptly notify the Contracting
Officer, in writing, of any changes to this email address.
1.8 PHYSICAL CONDITIONS
The indications of physical conditions on the drawings and in the

specifications are the result of adjacent site investigations. Exploration
logs are presented "For Information Only in Part 6 of the Technical
Provisions.
1.9 STANDARDIZATION
Where two or more items of the same type or class of equipment furnished in
this project are required, the units shall be products of the same
manufacturer and shall be interchangeable when of the same size, capacity,
performance characteristics, and rating. The only exception to this
requirement is where the items are interchangeable due to conformance with
industry standards (valves, fittings, etc.), they need not be by the same
manufacturer. This requirement applies to all manufactured items in the
project which normally require repair or replacement during the life of the
equipment.
1.10 RESIDUAL CONSTRUCTION MATERIAL
T
All Contractor purchased materials and equipment intended for incorporation
into the completed facilities and which are later determined excess to the
actual construction requirements, will become the property of the
AF
Government. The residual materials and equipment shall be tagged (giving
the area where like type material and equipment were installed), and stored
in an orderly manner in a designated area as directed and approved by the
Contracting Officer.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Used
R
PART 3 EXECUTION
Not Used
D
SECTION 01 31 19.05 20
POST AWARD MEETINGS

05/14
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
This document includes post-award requirements for project kickoff and

subsequent design and preconstruction meetings.
1.2 SUBMITTALS

T
PROCEDURES and 01 33 10.05 20 DESIGN SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:

AF
Design Submittal Packaging Proposal; G M/R
Project Schedule; G M/R
Performance Assessment Plan (PAP); G M/R
Design Presentation Concept; G M/R

R
1.3 POST AWARD KICKOFF MEETING
The Post Award Kickoff (PAK) meeting is made up of Contract Administration,

Concept Design Presentation/Design Development or Concept Design Workshop
D
(CDW), Partnering, and Scheduling. If mutually beneficial to the

Contractor and the Government, these four elements may be addressed in a
single multi day meeting but most often multiple scheduled meetings are
required. Schedule a separate meeting or a separate day of the multiday
PAK, to accomplish the Design Presentation/Design Development Meeting or
Concept Design Workshop(CDW).
1.3.1 PAK Meeting Schedule and Location
Within 35 calendar days after contract award, and prior to commencing work,
meet with the Contracting Officer for the PAK meeting(s). The meeting shall
be located in UAE at a specific time and place to be determined by the
Contractor and accepted by the Contracting Officer or Contracting Officer's
Representative (COR).
1.3.2 PAK Meeting Outcomes
The meeting(s) outcomes are:
a. Integrate the Contractor and all client representatives into the project
team.
SECTION 01 31 19.05 20 Page 1

b. Achieve consensus from the project team on any issues and concerns with
the Contractor's technical proposal and the User's functional
requirements. Confirm the design is within the project budget.
c. Establish and explain policies and procedures for completion of a

successful project.
d. Establish clear lines of communication and points of contact for

Government and Contractor team members.
e. Obtain an acceptable conceptual design, signed by the client, Contractor

and other key team members.
f. Establish project design schedule, design submittal packaging, and

preliminary construction schedule in accordance with Section
01 32 17.05 20 COST-LOADED NETWORK ANALYSIS SCHEDULES (NAS) FOR
DESIGN-BUILD. Discuss design milestones and events that will be
included in the Quality Control Communication Plan.
g. Establish clear expectations and schedules for facility turnover,
T
providing DD Form 1354 asset management records, eOMSI submittals,
Guiding Principle Validation, Third Party Certification (if
applicable), and training of Government maintenance personnel.
1.3.3
AF
PAK Meeting Contractor Attendees
The following Contractor key personnel shall attend the PAK: Project
Manager, Project Scheduler, Lead Designer-of-Record (DOR), Design Staff
responsible for each architectural/engineering discipline when facility
design is discussed, Superintendent, QC Manager, and the DQC Manager.
Optional attendees include: Principal, Assistant Project Manager, major
subcontractors and specialized supplemental QC personnel.
R
1.3.4 Contract Administration
Contract administration roles and responsibilities will be addressed.

D
1.3.5 Design Presentation/Development (DP/D)
The Contractor shall lead discussions to develop an understanding of the

facility design that the accepted technical proposal represents with the
Government users and maintainers of the facility. Develop plans, exterior
finish materials, and building elevations to conduct working sessions with
the Government meeting attendees. The purpose of the DP/D Meeting is to
confirm the appropriateness of the facility design and develop acceptable
alternatives if changes are needed. The Contractor shall anticipate that
Government Facility Users represented at the DP/D Meeting will provide
additional functional information. Incorporate functional design changes
into the facility design as required to meet the needs of the Users. At
the end of the DP/D Meeting the Contractor shall provide either assurance
that the updated design can be built with-in the budget or identify
potential cost modification items and establish a follow-on DP/D Meeting to
finalize a design that will include trade-offs to bring the project within
the budget.
Demonstrate ability to achieve identified Guiding Principle sustainability

goals and also Third Party Certification sustainability goals, if
applicable. Provide Preliminary Sustainability Notebook, refer to Section
SECTION 01 31 19.05 20 Page 2

01 33 29.05 20 SUSTAINABILITY REPORTING FOR DESIGN-BUILD for requirements.
1.3.5.1 Design Presentation/Development Contractor Meetings Attendees
The following Contractor key personnel shall attend the Design

Presentation: Project Manager, Project Scheduler, Cost Estimator, Lead
Designer of Record, Design Staff responsible for each
architectural/engineering discipline when facility design is discussed,
Major Subcontractors, and DQC.
1.3.6 Partnering
To most effectively accomplish this contract, the Government requires the

formation of a cohesive partnership within the Project Team whose members
are from the Government, Contractor and its Subcontractors. Key Personnel
from the Supported Command, End User (who will occupy the facility), NAVFAC
(Echelon III and/or IV), Navy Region/Installation, Contractor and
Subcontractors and the Designer of Record will be invited to participate in
the Partnering process. The Partnership will draw on the strength of each
organization in an effort to achieve a project without any safety mishaps,
conforming to the Contract, within budget and on schedule.
T
Information on the Partnering Process and a list of Key and Optional
personnel who should attend the Partnering meeting are available from the
AF
INFORMAL PARTNERING: The Contracting Officer shall organize the Partnering
Sessions with key personnel of the project team, including Contractor's
personnel and Government personnel.
The Initial Informal Partnering session should be a part of the DB Post

Award Kickoff (PAK) . Partnering sessions should be held at a location
agreed to by the Contracting Officer and the Contractor.
R
The Initial Informal Partnering Session will be conducted and facilitated
using electronic media (a video and accompanying forms) provided by
D
The Partners will determine the frequency of the follow-on sessions.
1.3.7 Performance Assessment Plan (PAP)
The Performance Assessment Plan (PAP) shall be used to document design

innovation and budget management, provide performance feedback to the
Contractor, and as a basis for interim and final evaluations in the
Construction Contractor Appraisal System (CCASS) on-line database.
It is the intent of the Government to establish the PAP based on tangible,

measurable indicators of outstanding contractor performance, and on
commitments made in the Contractor's proposal. The initial PAP may be
found in RFP PART 6 Attachments. Review and finalize the initial PAP during
the Partnering Session. During the initial Partnering Session, the
Government, the Contractor, the Designer-of-Record, and the Client will
establish the PAP. Following the establishment of the PAP, the Contractor
will present it, with his input, for update and discussion at projects
meetings which discuss project performance. Submit an updated PAP on a
monthly basis with the invoice for that period as a minimum.
SECTION 01 31 19.05 20 Page 3

1.3.8 Project Schedule
Provide in accordance with Section 01 32 17.05 20 COST-LOADED NETWORK

ANALYSIS SCHEDULES (NAS) FOR DESIGN-BUILD.
1.4 DESIGN QUALITY ASSURANCE MEETINGS
After Government Quality Assurance (QA) of each Design Submittal has been
completed, meet with the Government for a one-day conference to discuss
review comments for the specific design submittal.
Provide consolidated copies of all Government comments with annotations of

Contractor's action beside them. Notify the Contracting Officer in writing
within five (5) days after receipt of Government's comments if the
Contractor disagrees with comments technically or interprets comments to
exceed the requirements of the contract.
1.4.1 Design QA Meeting Attendees
The following Contractor key personnel shall attend the design QA

meetings: Project Manager, QC Manager, Commissioning Authority, and
T
Contractor's Design Staff (architect and engineering disciplines related to
topics to be discussed).
1.4.2 Design QA Meeting Location

AF
Meetings shall be located at the office of the Contracting Officer's QA
Team or may be conducted at other locations or by other electronic means if
mutually acceptable to all parties.
1.4.3 Minimum Design QA Meeting Agenda
Address all Government comments that are unresolved and present

R
clarification or supporting information requested by the Contracting
Officer's QA team during the previous meeting.
1.5 PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING

D
Meet with the Contracting Officer to discuss construction items of concern

to the Government and the Contractor such as outages, storage, trailer
location, disposal of construction debris, and safety, at a location to be
determined by the Contracting Officer. The Preconstruction meeting may
take place with the PAK meeting or at any time prior to mobilization and
before any construction work begins.
1.6 RECURRING MEETINGS
1.6.1 Quality Control and Production Meetings
Quality Control and Production Meetings in accordance with Section 01 45 00.

00 10 QUALITY CONTROL.
1.6.2 Safety Meetings
Safety Meetings in accordance with Section 01 35 26 GOVERNMENT SAFTETY

REQUIREMENTS.
SECTION 01 31 19.05 20 Page 4

1.6.3 eOMSI Meetings
Refer to Section 01 78 24.00 20 FACILITY ELECTRONIC OPERATIONS AND

MAINTENANCE INFORMATION (eOMSI) for requirements.
1.6.4 Sustainability Documentation Progress Meetings
Most sustainability documentation progress meetings may be combined with

other design, construction, and project closeout meetings; however
additional meetings are required post-design and post-construction. Refer
to Section 01 33 29.05 20 SUSTAINABILITY REPORTING FOR DESIGN-BUILD for
meeting requirements.
1.7 FACILITY TURNOVER PLANNING MEETINGS
Key personnel will meet to identify strategies to ensure the project is

carried to expeditious closure and turnover to the Client. Start the
turnover process at the PAK Meeting and convene the Facility Turnover
Meetings once the project has reached approximately 75% completion or three
to six months prior to Beneficial Occupancy Date (BOD), whichever comes
first. The Contracting Officer's Representative will lead the meetings and
T
guide the discussions based on an agenda provided by the Government. The
Facility Turnover effort shall include the following:
a. PAK Meeting
AF
1. Contracting Officer's Technical Representative (COTR) will provide
theRZ (Red Zone) Checklist and the Contractor, Client, and USACE
Representatives will compare Contractor's schedule to RZ Checklist
to ensure all Contractor Checklist Items are included in the
schedule and to discuss the scheduling impact of Client and USACE
Checklist Items.
R
2. Discuss the requirements of creating the Draft and finalizing the
Interim DD Form 1354 to provide asset management records to the
Government. Refer to Section 01 33 10.05 20 DESIGN SUBMITTAL
PROCEDURES for requirements.
D
b. Facility Turnover Meetings
1. Fill in the RZ Checklist including Contractor, Client, and USACE

Checklist Items and assigned a person responsible for each item
and a due date. The Contracting Officer's Representative will
facilitate the assignment of responsibilities and fill out the RZ
Checklist.
2. Review the Contractor's updated schedule. The Contractor shall

develop a POAM for the completion of all Contractor, Client, and
NAVFAC Checklist items.
3. Confirm that all RZ Checklist items will be completed on time for

the scheduled Facility Turnover.
4. Assign responsibility and schedule for the provision of all

information necessary to complete the Final eOMSI Data and
Documents Submittals for facility turnover.
5. Assign responsibility and schedule for the provision of all

documentation necessary to achieve Guiding Principle Validation
SECTION 01 31 19.05 20 Page 5

and also Third Party Certification, if applicable.
6. Schedule and coordinate the facility training of Government

maintenance personnel.
1.7.1 Facility Turnover Meeting Attendees
The following key personnel shall attend the Facility Turnover Meetings:
Contractor QC Manager, Design Quality Control Manager, Superintendent,
Major Subcontractors, Designer-of-Record, Contracting Officer's
Representative, Project Sponsor, Representative(s) of NAVFAC, the Facility
Owner/ Real Property Accounting Officer, Public Works Facility Maintenance
Specialist, and the Client.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Used.
PART 3 EXECUTION
Not Used.
T
AF
R
D
SECTION 01 31 19.05 20 Page 6

SECTION 01 32 17.05 20
COST-LOADED NETWORK ANALYSIS SCHEDULES (NAS)FOR DESIGN-BUILD

03/15
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
The Contractor is responsible for scheduling all design, procurement,

Contractor quality control and construction, acceptance testing and
training. A single schedule shall logically incorporate all design and
construction for the entire project. Unless otherwise indicated, the
contractor may begin construction when design is signed, stamped and
submitted to the Government via the Contractor's quality control
organization. If Government approval is required for any portion of a final
signed and sealed design package prior to construction, that review time
shall be included in the schedule. The schedule shall also include times
for procurement, Contractor quality control and construction, acceptance
testing and training. Refer to Section 01 33 00.05 20 CONSTRUCTION
T
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES and Section 01 33 10.05 20 DESIGN SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
to determine if any items require Government approval prior to
construction. If any are required, include that submittal review time in
the schedule.
AF
The schedule is a tool to manage the project, both for Contractor and
Government activities. It will also be used to report progress and
evaluate time extensions. The Project NAS must be cost-loaded and will
provide the basis for progress payments. Use the Critical Path Method
(CPM) and the Precedence Diagram Method (PDM) to satisfy time and cost
applications. For consistency, when scheduling software terminology is
used in this specification, the terms in Primavera's scheduling programs
R
are used.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
The use of a "G" following a submittal indicates that a Government approval

D
action is required. Submit the following in accordance with Section

01 33 00.05 20 CONSTRUCTION SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES and 01 33 10.05 20 DESIGN
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES FOR DESIGN-BUILD.
Qualifications; G M/R
Design Baseline Network Analysis Schedule (NAS); G M/R
Construction Baseline Network Analysis Schedule (NAS); G M/R
SD-07 Certificates
Monthly Network Analysis Schedule Update; G M
SD-11 Closeout Submittals
As-Built Schedule; G; G M/R
SECTION 01 32 17.05 20 Page 1

1.3 SCHEDULE ACCEPTANCE PRIOR TO START OF WORK
The Design Baseline Network Analysis Schedule(NAS) shall be submitted and

presented to the Government at the PAK Meeting. The acceptance of a Design
Baseline NAS is a condition precedent to processing Contractor's pay
request(s) for design activities/items of work. The most current updated
design schedule shall accompany each design submittal.
The Contracting Officer and Contractor must participate in a preliminary

meeting(s) to discuss the proposed schedule and requirements of this
section prior to the Contractor preparing the Project Baseline Schedule.
Government review comments on the Contractor's schedule(s) do not relieve
the Contractor from compliance with requirements of the Contract
Documents. Only bonds may be paid prior to acceptance of the Baseline
Network Analysis Schedule (NAS) The acceptance of a Baseline NAS is a
condition precedent to:
a. The Contractor starting work on the demolition or construction stage(s)

of the contract.
b. Processing Contractor's invoices(s) for construction activities/items
T
of work.
c. Review of any schedule updates.

AF
Submittal of the Construction Baseline Network Analysis Schedule, and
subsequent schedule updates, is understood to be the Contractor's
certification that the submitted schedule meets all of the requirements of
the Contract Documents, represents the Contractor's plan on how the work
must be accomplished, and accurately reflects the work that has been
accomplished and how it was sequenced (as-built logic).
1.4 SOFTWARE
R
Prepare and maintain project schedules using Primavera P6. Importing data
into P6 using data conversion techniques or third party software is cause
for rejection of the submitted schedule.
D
A listing of Primavera P6 settings and parameters which must be used in

preparing the Schedules are contained later in this specification section.
Deviation from these settings and parameters, without prior consent of the
Contracting Officer, is cause for rejection of schedule submission.
1.5 QUALIFICATIONS
The designated Scheduler for the project must have prepared and maintained
at least 3 previous schedules of similar size and complexity of this
contract using Primavera P3, Primavera SureTrak, or Primavera P6. At least
two of the three must be in Primavera P6. Submit a resume outlining the
qualifications of the Scheduler. A resume outlining the qualifications of
the Scheduler and their Primavera P6 training certificate from an
authorized Primavera trainer shall be submitted for acceptance to the
Contracting Officer. If at a later date, the Contracting Officer considers
the Contractor's Scheduler to be incompetent or objectionable, the
Contractor will propose a new Scheduler, meeting the qualification
requirements. Payment will not be processed until an acceptable Scheduler
is provided.
SECTION 01 32 17.05 20 Page 2

1.6 NETWORK SYSTEM FORMAT
The system must include time-scaled logic diagrams and specified reports.
1.6.1 Diagrams
Provide Time-scaled Logic Diagram printed in color on ANSI D size sheets.

The diagram must clearly show activities on the critical path. Include the
following information for each activity:
a. Activity ID
b. Activity Description
c. Original Duration in Work Days
d. Actual Duration in Work Days
e. Remaining duration in Work Days
f. Physical Percent Complete
T
g. Start Date
h. Finish Date
AF
i. Total Float
1.6.2 Schedule Activity Properties and Level of Detail
The NAS must identify all Design, Government, Construction Quality

Management (CQM), and Construction activities planned for the project and
all other activities that could impact project completion if delayed.
R
Create separate activities for each Phase, Area, Floor Level and Location
the activity is occurring. Activity categories included in the schedule
are specified below.
With the exception of the Contract Award and Contract Completion Date (CCD)
D
milestone activities, no activity shall be open-ended; each activity must

have predecessor and successor ties. No activity shall have open start or
open finish (dangling) logic. Minimize redundant logic ties. Once an
activity exists on the schedule it must not be deleted or renamed to change
the scope of the activity and must not be removed from the schedule logic
without approval from the Contracting Officer. While an activity cannot be
deleted, where said activity is no longer applicable to the schedule but
must remain within the logic stream for historical record, it can be
changed to a milestone. Document any such change in the milestone's
"Notebook", including a date and explanation for the change. The ID number
for a deleted activity must not be re-used for another activity. Within
the Baseline Schedule no more than 20 percent of the activities may be
critical or near critical. Critical is defined as having the longest
path. "Near Critical" is defined as having Total Float of 1 to 14 days.
Contractor activities must be driven by calendars that reflect local
regular holidays and non-work days.
SECTION 01 32 17.05 20 Page 3

1.6.2.1 Activity Categories
1.6.2.1.1 Design Activities
Design activities must include design decision points, design submittal

packages, including any critical path submittals for Fast Tracked Phases.
Review times for design development packages shall be included in the
schedule. Refer to Section 01 33 00.05 20 CONSTRUCTION SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
and Section 01 33 10.05 20 DESIGN SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
for specific requirements.
1.6.2.1.2 Procurement Activities
Tasks related to the procurement of material or equipment shall be included

as separate activities in the project schedule. Examples of procurement
activities include, but are not limited to; Material/equipment submittal
preparation, submittal and approval of material/equipment;
material/equipment fabrication and delivery, and material/equipment
on-site. As a minimum, separate procurement activities will be provided
for critical items, long lead items, items requiring Government approval
and material/equipment procurement for which payment will be requested in
T
advance of installation. Show each delivery with relationship tie to the
Construction Activity specifically for the delivery.
1.6.2.1.3 Government Activities

AF
Government and other agency activities that could impact progress must be
clearly identified. Government activities include, but are not limited to;
Government approved submittal reviews, Government conducted
inspections/tests, environmental permit approvals by utility outages
Notice(s) to Proceed, Design Start, Construction Start, (including
Design/Construction Start for each Fast-Track Phase, and delivery of
Government Furnished Material/Equipment.
R
1.6.2.1.4 Quality Management (QM) Activities
The Preparatory Phase and Initial Phase for each Definable Feature of Work
identified in the Contractor's Quality Control Plan must be added to each
D
Three-Week Look Ahead Schedule referenced in the paragraph THREE-WEEK LOOK

AHEAD SCHEDULE. The Follow-up Phase will be represented by the
Construction Activities in the Baseline Schedule and in the schedule
updates.
1.6.2.1.5 Construction Activities
No on-site construction activity must have a duration in excess of 20

working days. Contractor activities must be driven by calendars that
reflect local holidays and non-work days, unless otherwise defined in this
contract. Government availability for construction submittal review,
meeting attendance, performance verification testing, acceptance
inspections, etc, will be extremely limited between Christmas and New Years
Day.
1.6.2.1.6 Lags
Lags will not be used when the creation of an activity will perform the
same function (e.g., concrete cure time). Lag durations contained in the
project schedule shall not have a negative value. Contractor will identify
any lag proposed and provide an explanation for the purpose of the lag in
SECTION 01 32 17.05 20 Page 4

the Narrative Report.
1.6.2.1.7 Critical Activities
The following activities, when applicable, shall be listed as separate line

activities on the Contractor's project schedule:
a. Submission and approval of mechanical / electrical layout drawings.

b. Submission and approval of O&M manuals.
c. Submission and approval of as-built drawings.
d. Submission and approval of 1354 data and installed equipment lists.
e. Submission and approval of testing and air balance (TAB).
f. Submission of TAB specialist design review support.
g. Submission and approval of fire protection specialist.
h. Submission and approval of testing and balancing of HVAC
plus commissioning plans and data.
i. Air and water balance dates.
j. HVAC commissioning dates.
k. Controls testing plans.
l. Controls testing.
m. Performance Verification testing.
T
n. Other systems testing, if required
o. Pre-final Inspection
p. Correction of Punch List from Pre-final Inspection
q. Final Inspection1.6.2.2 Contract Milestones and Constraints
AF
1.6.2.2.1 Project Start Date Milestones
Include as the first activity on the schedule a start milestone titled

"Contract Award", which must have a Mandatory Start constraint equal to the
Contract Award Date.
1.6.2.2.2 Facility Turnover Planning Meeting Milestones

R
See paragraph ACTIVITY CATEGORIES above.
1.6.2.2.3 Substantial Completion Milestone

D
Include an unconstrained finish milestone on the schedule titled

"Substantial Completion". Substantial Completion is defined as the point
in time the Government would consider the project ready for beneficial
occupancy wherein by mutual agreement of the Government and Contractor,
Government use of the facility is allowed while construction access
continues in order to complete remaining items (e.g. punch list and other
close out submittals).
1.6.2.2.4 Projected Completion Milestone
Include an unconstrained finish milestone on the schedule titled "Projected

Completion". Projected Completion is defined as the point in time the
Government would consider the project complete. This milestone must have
the Contract Completion (CCD) milestone as its only successor.
1.6.2.2.5 Contract Completion Date (CCD) Milestone
Include as the last activity on the schedule a finish milestone titled

"Contract Completion (CCD)". Calculation of schedule updates must be such
that if the finish of the "Projected Completion" milestone falls after the
contract completion date, then negative float will be calculated on the
SECTION 01 32 17.05 20 Page 5

longest path and if the finish of the "Projected Completion" milestone

falls before the contract completion date, the float calculation must
reflect positive float on the longest path.
1.6.2.3 Work Breakdown Structure & Activity Code
At a minimum, the Contractor must establish a Work Breakdown Structure

(WBS) and provide activity codes identified as follows:.
1.6.2.3.1 Work Breakdown Structure (WBS)
Group all activities and milestones within appropriate WBS categories

including, at a minimum, the following:
a. Project Milestones:
(1) Management Milestones
(2) Project Administrative Meetings
b. Pre-Construction Phase:
T
(1) Submittals and Reviews
(2) Procurement
AF
c. Construction Phase; Create multiple sub-sections in accordance with
project specific categories of work including in WBS descending order
as follows:
(1) General Area
(a) Type of Work Item

R
1. Location
d. Commissioning & Testing:

D
(1) Specific area/locations of commissioning
(2) Final Testing
(3) Training
e. Project Closeout: Include activity items such as Punchlist,

Demobilization, O&M, As-built Drawings, and As-built NAS.
f. Modifications: Create multiple sub-sections as the project progresses

identified by modifications issued.
1.6.2.3.2 1.6.2.5 Activity Code Dictionary and Values
The Contractor shall use the activity coding structure defined in the
Standard Data Exchange Formant (SDEF) in ER-1-1-11, Appendix A. This exact
structure is mandatory, even if some fields are not used. The codes will
have values assigned that will allow the scheduling program to sort,
select, group and organize the activities in the schedule.
SECTION 01 32 17.05 20 Page 6

1.6.2.4 Anticipated Weather Lost Work Days
Use the following schedule of anticipated monthly non-work days due to

adverse weather as the basis for establishing a "Weather Calendar" showing
the number of anticipated non-workdays for each month due to adverse
weather, in addition to all local non-work days.
MONTHLY ANTICIPATED ADVERSE WEATHER DELAYS

JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUN JUL AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC
1 2 2 1 0 2 2 2 2 0 0 1
Assign the Weather Calendar to any activity that could be impacted by

adverse weather. The Contracting Officer will issue a modification in
accordance with the contract clauses, giving the Contractor a time
extension for the difference of days between the anticipated and actual
adverse weather delay if the number of actual adverse weather delay days
exceeds the number of days anticipated for the month in which the delay
T
occurs and the adverse weather delayed activities are critical to contract
completion. A lost workday due to weather conditions is defined as a day
in which the Contractor cannot work at least 50 percent of the day on the
impacted activity.
AF
1.6.2.5 Cost Loading
1.6.2.5.1 Cost Loading Activities
Assign Material and Equipment Costs, for which payment will be requested in
advance of installation, to their respective procurement activity (i.e.,
the material/equipment on-site activity). Assign cost for
R
material/equipment, paid for after installation; labor; and construction
equipment to their respective Construction Activities. The value of
commissioning, testing and closeout WBS section must not be less than 10
percent of the total costs for Procurement and Construction Activities.
Evenly disperse overhead and profit to each activity over the duration of
D
the project.
1.6.2.5.2 Quantities and Units of Measure
Each cost loaded activity must have a detailed quantity breakdown and unit
of measure. Lump sum costing is not acceptable.
1.6.3 Schedule Software Settings and Restrictions
a. Activity Constraints: Date/time constraint(s), other than those

required by the contract, are not allowed unless accepted by the
Contracting Officer. Identify any constraints proposed and provide an
explanation for the purpose of the constraint in the Narrative Report
as described in Paragraph REQUIRED TABULAR REPORTS..
b. Default Progress Data Disallowed: Actual Start and Actual Finish dates
on the CPM schedule must match the dates on the Contractor Quality
Control and Production Reports.
c. Software Settings: Handle schedule calculations and Out-of-Sequence

progress (if applicable) through Retained Logic, not Progress
SECTION 01 32 17.05 20 Page 7

Override. Show all activity durations and float values in days. Show
activity progress using Remaining Duration. Set default activity type
to "Task Dependent".
d. At a minimum, include the following settings and parameters in Baseline

Schedule preparation:
(1) General: Define or establish Calendars and Activity Codes at the

"Project" level, not the "Global" level.
(2) Admin Drop-Down Menu, Admin Preferences, Time Periods Tab:
(a) Set time periods for P6 to 8.0 Hours/Day, 40.0 Hours/Week,

172.0 Hours/Month and 2000.0 Hours/Year.
(b) Use assigned calendar to specify the number of work hours for
each time period: must be checked.
(3) Admin Drop-Down Menu, Admin Preferences, Earned Value Tab:
(a) Earned Value Calculation: Use "Budgeted values with current
T
dates".
(4) Project Level, Dates Tab:

AF
(a) Set "Must Finish By" date to "Contract Completion Date".
(5) Project Level, Defaults Tab:
(a) Duration Type: Set to "Fixed Duration & Units".
(b) Percent Complete Type: Set to "Physical".

R
(c) Activity Type: Set to "Task Dependent".
(d) Calendar: Set to "Standard 5 Day Workweek". Calendar must

reflect local non-work days. Alternative calendars may be used
with Contracting Officer approval.
D
(6) Project Level, Calculations Tab:
(a) Activity percent complete based on activity steps: Must be

Checked.
(b) Reset Remaining Duration and Units to Original: Must be

Checked.
(c) Subtract Actual from At Completion: Must be Checked.
(d) Recalculate Actual units and Cost when duration percent

complete changes: Must be Checked.
(e) Link Actual to Date and Actual This Period Units and Cost:
Must be Checked.
(f) Price/Unit: Set to "$1/h".
(g) Update units when costs change on resource assignments: Must

be Unchecked.
SECTION 01 32 17.05 20 Page 8

(7) Project Level, Settings Tab:
(a) Define Critical Activities: Check Longest Path.
(8) Work Breakdown Structure Level, Earned Value Tab:
(a) Technique for Computing Performance Percent Complete:

"Activity percent complete" is selected.
(b) Technique for Computing Estimate to Complete (ETC): "PF = 1"

is selected.
1.6.4 Required Tabular Reports
Include the following reports with the Baseline, Monthly Update and any
other required schedule submittals:
a. Log Report: Listing of all changes made between the previous schedule
and current updated schedule.
T
b. Narrative Report: Identify and justify:
(1) Progress made in each area of the project;

AF
(2) Critical Path;
(3) Date/time constraint(s), other than those required by the contract
(4) Changes in the following; added or deleted activities, original

and remaining durations for activities that have not started,
logic, milestones, planned sequence of operations, critical path,
and cost loading;
R
(5) Any decrease in previously reported activity Earned Amount;
(6) Pending items and status thereof, including permits, changes

orders, and time extensions;
D
(7) Status of Contract Completion Date and interim milestones;
(8) Current and anticipated delays (describe cause of delay and

corrective actions(s) and mitigation measures to minimize);
(9) Description of current and future schedule problem areas.
Each entry in the narrative report must cite the respective Activity ID and
Activity Description, the date and reason for the change, and description
of the change.
c. Earned Value Report: List all activities having a budget amount cost
loaded. Compile total earnings on the project from notice to proceed
to current progress payment request. Show current budget, previous
physical percent complete, to-date physical percent complete, previous
earned value, to-date earned value and cost to complete on the report
for each activity.
d. Schedule Variance Control (SVC) Diagram: With each schedule

submission, provide a SVC diagram showing 1) Cash Flow S-Curves
SECTION 01 32 17.05 20 Page 9

indicating planned project cost based on projected early and late

activity finish dates and 2) Earned Value to-date. Revise Cash Flow
S-Curves when the contract is modified, or as directed by the
e. Daily Reported Production Activity: Submit on a monthly basis, in

electronic spreadsheet format, a summary of daily reported production
activity for the reporting month in the update schedule. Use the
following columns for reporting:
(1) Date
(2) Activity ID
(3) Work Description
(4) Contractor
(5) Billable Hours
f. Total Float Report: List of all activities by total float in ascending
T
order and then in order of early start date.
g. 30-Day Look Ahead: Activities in progress or scheduled to start or

finish within the next thirty (30) calendar days of the project Data
AF
Date or is continuing through the thirty (30) day period.
h. Labor Staffing Report and Histogram: With each Baseline Network

Analysis Schedule submittal and each updated schedule, a planned early
and planned late versus actual labor resource report and histogram will
be provided. The report and histogram shall be based upon and shall be
in agreement with, the number of shifts and crew sizes by craft, in the
Baseline Network Analysis Schedule (planned) and the Monthly Network
R
Update (actual). Included in the report will be a tabular listing of
each trade that worked on the activities during the construction period.
i. Equipment Usage Report and Histogram: With each Baseline Network

Analysis Schedule submittal and each updated schedule, a planned early
D
and planned late versus actual equipment resource report and histogram
will be provided. The report and histogram shall be based upon and
shall be in agreement with the equipment allocation in the Baseline
Network Analysis Schedule (planned) and the Monthly Network Update
(actual). Included in the report will be a tabular listing of
equipment (by year, make and model) that worked on the activities
during the construction period.
1.7 SUBMISSION AND ACCEPTANCE
1.7.1 Design Baseline NAS
The Design Baseline NAS shall include detailed design activities, general
(summarized) approach for the construction phase(s) of the project and
required milestone activities. If the project is being Fast-Tracked or allows
Early Start of construction, the Design Baseline Project Schedule shall
include all fast-tracked design construction phases, etc., including the
required or proposed critical path design submittals within each phase that
shall occur during the duration of the project.
The Contractor shall develop the Construction Baseline Schedule as design
SECTION 01 32 17.05 20 Page 10

progresses, with detailed construction activities. If design must be

completed and accepted prior to construction, submit the complete design and
construction network analysis schedule and obtain acceptance prior to
starting construction work. If the project will be Fast-Tracked, each
construction stage shall be detailed and built upon the previous Fast-Tracked
Baseline Schedule (including any interim updates) and accepted prior to
starting that stage of the construction work. Payment for completed work is
dependent on an accepted, detailed schedule for that portion of work.
1.7.2 Monthly Network Analysis Updates
Contractor and Government representatives must meet at monthly intervals to

review and agree on the information presented in the updated project
schedule. The submission of an acceptable, updated schedule to the
Government is a condition precedent to the processing of the Contractor's
invoice. Submit an acceptable, updated schedule to the Government
regardless of whether a Contractor's invoice is submitted for the given
period. The Contractor and Government must agree on percentage of payment
for each activity progressed during the update period. Monthly update
schedules must incorporate as-built events as they occurred and provide
ongoing status of anticipated finish dates. As-built events must
T
correspond to contemporaneous records, including but not limited to,
submittals, daily production reports and quality control reports.
Provide the following with each Schedule submittal:

AF
a. Time-Scaled Logic Diagram.
b. Reports listed in paragraph entitled "REQUIRED TABULAR REPORTS."
c. Data disks containing the project schedule. Include the back-up native .xer
program files.
R
1.7.3 As-Built Schedule
As a condition precedent to the release of retention and making final

payment, submit an "As-Built Schedule," as the last schedule update showing
all activities at 100 percent completion. This schedule must reflect the
D
exact manner in which the project was actually constructed.
1.8 CONTRACT MODIFICATION
Submit a Time Impact Analysis (TIA) with each cost and time proposal for a
proposed change. TIA must illustrate the influence of each change or delay
on the Contract Completion Date or milestones. No time extensions will be
granted nor delay damages paid unless a delay occurs which consumes all
available Project Float, and extends the Projected Finish beyond the
Contract Completion Date.
a. Each TIA must be in both narrative and schedule form. The narrative
must define the scope and conditions of the change; provide start and
finish dates of impact, successor and predecessor activity to impact
period, responsible party; describe how it originated, and how it
impacts the schedule. The schedule submission must consist of three
native files:
(1) Fragnet used to define the scope of the changed condition
(2) Most recent accepted schedule update as of the time of the
SECTION 01 32 17.05 20 Page 11

proposal or claim submission that has been updated to show all

activity progress as of the time of the impact start date.
(3) The impacted schedule that has the fragnet inserted in the updated
schedule and the schedule run so that the new completion date is
determined.
b. For claimed as-built project delay, the inserted fragnet TIA method
must be modified to account for as-built events that have already
occurred or is occurring after the data date of schedule update used.
c. All TIAs must include any mitigation, and must determine the
apportionment of the overall delay assignable to each individual
delay. The associated narrative must clearly describe the findings in
a chronological listing beginning with the earliest delay event.
(1) Identify types of delays as follows:
(a) Excusable Delay: Force-Majeure (e.g. weather) - Contractor may

receive time extension, but time will not be compensable.
T
(b) Inexcusable Delay: Contractor Responsibility Contractor must
not receive time extension.
(c) Compensable Delay: Government Responsibility Contractor may

AF
receive compensable time extension.
(2) If a combination of delay types occurs, it is considered

Concurrent Delay, which is defined in the following combinations:
(a) Excusable Delay and Compensable Delay results in Excusable

Delay
R
(b) Excusable Delay and Inexcusable Delay results in Inexcusable
Delay
(c) Compensable Delay and Inexcusable Delay results in Excusable

Delay
D
d. Submit Data disks containing the narrative and native schedule files.
e. Unless the Contracting Officer requests otherwise, only add conformed

contract modifications into the Project NAS.
1.8.1 No Reservation of Rights
All direct costs, indirect cost, and time extensions must be negotiated and
made full, equitable and final at the time of modification issuance.
1.9 FLOAT
Use of float suppression techniques, such as; preferential sequencing

(arranging critical path through activities more susceptible to Government
caused delay), lag logic restraints, zero total or free float constraints,
extended activity times, or imposing constraint dates other than as
required by the contract, shall be cause for rejection of the project
schedule or its updates. The use of Resource Leveling (or similar software
features) used for the purpose of artificially adjusting activity durations
to consume float and influence the critical path is expressly prohibited.
SECTION 01 32 17.05 20 Page 12

1.10 THREE-WEEK LOOK AHEAD SCHEDULE
Prepare and issue a 3-Week Look Ahead schedule to provide a more detailed
day-to-day plan of upcoming work identified on the Project Network Analysis
Schedule. Key the work plans to NAS activity numbers and update each week
to show the planned work for the current and following two-week period.
Additionally, include upcoming outages, closures, field evaluation tests,
preparatory meetings, and initial meetings. Identify critical path
activities on the Three-Week Look Ahead Schedule. The detail work plans
are to be bar chart type schedules, derived from but maintained separately
from the Project NAS on an electronic spreadsheet program and printed on
216 by 279 mm sheets as directed by the Contracting Officer. Activities
must not exceed 5 working days in duration and have sufficient level of
detail to assign crews, tools and equipment required to complete the work.
Deliver three hard copies and one electronic file of the 3-Week Look Ahead
Schedule must be delivered to the Contracting Officer no later than 8 a.m.
each Monday and reviewed during the weekly CQC Coordination and/or
Production Meeting.
1.11 CORRESPONDENCE AND TEST REPORTS
T
All correspondence (e.g., letters, Requests for Information (RFIs),
e-mails, meeting minute items, Production and QC Daily Reports, material
delivery tickets, photographs) must reference Schedule activity IDs that
are being addressed. All test reports (e.g., concrete, soil compaction,
AF
weld, pressure) must reference schedule activity IDs that are being
addressed.
1.12 ADDITIONAL SCHEDULING REQUIREMENTS
Any references to additional scheduling requirements, including systems to

be inspected, tested and commissioned, that are located throughout the
remainder of the Contract Documents, are subject to all requirement of this
R
section.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not used.
D
PART 3 EXECUTION
Not used.
SECTION 01 32 17.05 20 Page 13

SECTION 01 33 00.05 20
CONSTRUCTION SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

05/14
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
This section covers construction submittals that are not included in the
design submittals. Submit design submittals in accordance with 01 33 10.05
20 DESIGN SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES. When using Unified Facility Guide
Specifications (UFGS) sections that reference Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL
PROCEDURES, change reference to this section, Section 01 33 00.05 20
CONSTRUCTION SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES.
1.2 SUBMITTAL DESCRIPTIONS (SD)
Submittal requirements are specified in UFGS in Part 2, GENERAL

REQUIREMENTS; in references in Part 4 PERFORMANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS;
T
and in UFGS in Part 5, PRESCRIPTIVE SPECIFICATIONS. Submittals that are
identified by SD numbers use descriptions of items included in submittal
packages and titles as follows:
AF
Certificates of insurance.
Surety bonds.
List of proposed subcontractors.
List of proposed products.
Construction Progress Schedule.
Submittal register.
R
Schedule of values.
Health and safety plan.
Work plan.
Quality controlplan.
Environmental protection plan.
D
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Drawings, diagrams and schedules specifically prepared to

illustrate some portion of the work.
Diagrams and instructions from a manufacturer or fabricator for

use in producing the product and as aids to the Contractor for
integrating the product or system into the project.
Drawings prepared by or for the Contractor to show how multiple

systems and interdisciplinary work will be coordinated.
SD-03 Product Data
Catalog cuts, illustrations, schedules, diagrams, performance

charts, instructions and brochures illustrating size, physical
appearance and other characteristics of materials or equipment for
some portion of the work.
Samples of warranty language when the contract requires extended
SECTION 01 33 00.05 20 Page 1

product warranties.
Manufacturer's data certifying and demonstrating that specific

product, process, and/or conditions complies with applicable
Guiding Principle GP) criteria.
SD-04 Samples
Physical examples of materials, equipment or workmanship that

illustrate functional and aesthetic characteristics of a material
or product and establish standards by which the work can be judged.
Color samples from the manufacturer's standard line (or custom

color samples if specified) to be used in selecting or approving
colors for the project.
Field samples and mock-ups constructed on the project site

establish standards by which the ensuing work can be judged.
Includes assemblies or portions of assemblies which are to be
incorporated into the project and those which will be removed at
conclusion of the work.
T
SD-05 Design Data
Calculations, mix designs, analyses or other data pertaining to a

part of work.
AF
SD-06 Test Reports
Report signed by authorized official of testing laboratory that

a material, product or system identical to the material, product
or system to be provided has been tested in accord with specified
requirements. (Testing must have been within three years of date
R
of contract award for the project.)
Report which includes findings of a test required to be performed

by the Contractor on an actual portion of the work or prototype
prepared for the project before shipment to job site.
D
Report which includes finding of a test made at the job site or

on sample taken from the job site, on portion of work during or
after installation.
Investigation reports.
Daily checklists.
Final acceptance test and operational test procedure.
SD-07 Certificates
Statements signed by responsible officials of manufacturer of

product, system or material attesting that product, system or
material meets specification requirements. Must be dated after
award of project contract and clearly name the project.
Document required of Contractor, or of a supplier, installer or

subcontractor through Contractor, the purpose of which is to
further quality of orderly progression of a portion of the work by
SECTION 01 33 00.05 20 Page 2

documenting procedures, acceptability of methods or personnel

qualifications.
Confined space entry permits.
SD-08 Manufacturer's Instructions
Preprinted material describing installation of a product, system

or material, including special notices and Material Safety Data
sheets concerning impedances, hazards and safety precautions.
SD-09 Manufacturer's Field Reports
Documentation of the testing and verification actions taken by

manufacturer's representative to confirm compliance with
manufacturer's standards or instructions.
Factory test reports.
SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data
T
Data that is furnished by the manufacturer, or the system provider,
to the equipment operating and maintenance personnel. This data is
needed by operating and maintenance personnel for the safe and
efficient operation, maintenance and repair of the item.
AF
Documentation to record compliance with technical or

administrative requirements or to establish an administrative
mechanism.
Special requirements necessary to properly close out a

R
construction contract. For example, Record Drawings, As-built
drawings, DD Form 1354, Guiding Principles Validation or
Sustainability Third Party Certification (TPC), Sustainability
Notebook (including all of components) and eOMSI submittals. Also,
submittal requirements necessary to properly close out a major
D
phase of construction on a multi-phase contract.
1.3 SUBMITTALS

that will review the submittal for the Government.
The use of an "S" following a submittal indicates separate but simultaneous

submittal is required as part of federally mandated sustainability
requirements. Refer to Section 01 33 29.05 20 SUSTAINABILITY REPORTING FOR
DESIGN-BUILD for "S" submittal requirements.
Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00.05 20 CONSTRUCTION

SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES and Section 033 10.05 20 DESIGN SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
Submittal Register Format; G M/R
SECTION 01 33 00.05 20 Page 3

1.3.1 Submittal Register
Contractor-Furnished Design Documents shall be incorporated in the NAS and

ENG Form 4288, Submittal Register. Refer to Section 01 32 17.05 20 for
details.
1.3.1.1 Construction Submittal Register (ENG Form 4288)
The Contractor is responsible for developing ENG Form 4288 for the
design-build portion of this contract. All design and construction
submittals shall be shown on this register. The submittal register shall
be the controlling document and will be used to control all consruction
submittals throughout the life of the contract. The Contractor shall
maintain ahd update the register on a monthly basis for the Contracting
Officer's approval.
A copy of the initial ENG Form 4288 and each monthly update prepared by the
Contractor, shall be submitted to:
U.S. Army Corps of Engineers

T
(CETAM-EC-M Attn: H. Kidwell)
201 Prince Frederick Drive
Winchester VA 22602
1.4
AF
CONSTRUCTION QUALITY CONTROL
1.4.1 Contractor Reviewing, Certifying, Approving Authority
The QC organization is responsible for reviewing and certifying that

submittals are in compliance with the contract requirements.
In RFP PART 4 PERFORMANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (PTS), there are UFGS

R
specification sections required to be submitted as part of the design
submittal. Unless specified otherwise in this section, the Contractor's
DOR is the approving authority for submittals listed in these
specifications with a "G" designation, unless the DOR delegates to
Contractor Quality Control approval. RFP Part 4 PTS sections also include
D
submittals identified for DOR approval that are not denoted with a "G"
designation, these submittals cannot be delegated for Contractor Quality
Control approval.
If RFP PART 5 PRESCRIPTIVE SPECIFICATIONS are utilized in this RFP, the

Contractor's DOR is the approving authority for submittals listed with a
"G" designation, unless the DOR delegates to Contractor Quality Control
approval.
DOR shall approve construction submittals that are incorporated in the

design submittal prior to being submitted to the Government. Indicate
approval of these construction submittals on the accompanying submittal
transmittal forms and the submittal register for each design submittal
package. In addition, the DOR professional stamp on the final design
submittal indicates approval of construction submittals combined with the
design submittal.
Submittal items identified in RFP PARTS 2, 4, and 5 that are not identified
with a "G" designation or not designated for DOR approval (in RFP Part 4)
are for Contractor Quality Control approval.
SECTION 01 33 00.05 20 Page 4

Construction submittals that are approved by the DOR or certified by the QC

are not required to be submitted to the Government for surveillance, except
when the RFP requires the design and construction submittals to be combined
in Section 01 33 10.05 20, DESIGN SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES or where specified
in the paragraph entitled, SUBMITTALS RESERVED FOR GOVERNMENT SURVEILLANCE
of this section.
In addition to other approvals that may be required, provide review and

approval of Guiding Principles Validation and TPC Submittals by
Design-Build team's Sustainability or TPC Professional. Provide this
approval prior to including in any Government-reviewed submittal.
1.4.2 Submittals Reserved for Government Surveillance
Surveillance submittals are approved by the Contractor in accordance with

paragraph CONTRACTOR REVIEWING, CERTIFYING, AND APPROVING AUTHORITY, but
provide the Government the opportunity to oversee critical project issues.
If during the Government surveillance of construction submittals, items are

brought to the Contractor's attention as non-compliant, the Contractor
shall correct the submittal and construction to comply with the
T
requirements of the RFP. Stamp surveillance submittals "APPROVED" by the
DOR or QC Specialist and "FOR INFORMATION ONLY." Submit the following
Government surveillance submittals, prior to starting work for construction
submittal items, and after the completion of the work for reports
submittals items.
AF
a. Submit fire protection related submittals pertaining to spray-applied
fire proofing and fire stopping, exterior fire alarm reporting systems,
interior fire alarm & detection systems, and fire suppression systems
including fire pumps and standpipe systems.
b. Submit geotechnical related submittals pertaining to the soils

R
investigations (reports and soils analysis), foundations (shallow and
deep), pavements structure design, test pile and production pile
testing and installation.
c. Submit telecommunications shop drawings, as described in Part 4, D50

D
ELECTRICAL, for coordination with the NMCI Contractor.
d. Submit Final Guiding Principle Validation documentation.
1.4.3 Submittals Reserved for Government Approval
The Government is the approving authority for submittals with a "G"

designation in RFP Part 2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS specification sections.
Comply with additional Government approval requirements for Environmental
submittals, as specified in RFP Part 2, Section 01 57 20.00 10
ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION and Section 01 57 23 TEMPORARY STORM WATER
POLLUTION CONTROL.
1.4.3.1 Scheduling for Government Approved Submittals
Except as specified otherwise, allow review period, beginning when

Government receives submittal from the QC organization, of 30 working days
for return of submittal to the Contractor. Period of review for submittals
with Contracting Officer approval begins when Government receives submittal
from QC organization. Period of review for each resubmittal is the same as
for initial submittal.
SECTION 01 33 00.05 20 Page 5

1.4.4 Constraints
a. Submittals shall be complete for each definable feature of work; submit

components of definable feature interrelated as a system at the same
time.
b. Approval of a separate material, product, or component does not imply

approval of assembly in which item functions.
1.4.5 Design Change and Variation
The Contractor must limit change and variation to items that will be
advantageous to the Government. Submit proof that the change or variation
is needed and provide the same or better level of quality as the design
that the Government originally reviewed or approved. Design change is
considered prior to Government approval of the final design and variation
is considered after Government approval of final design.
1.4.5.1 Design Changes
T
Design changes must meet the minimum requirements of the solicitation and
the accepted proposal. Any changes to the design from what was previously
reviewed by the Government during any phase of the design process prior to
Government approval of the Final Design must be approved by the DOR and
AF
Government before the design change may be incorporated into the design
documents. Design changes shall be requested in accordance with Section
01 33 10.05 20 DESIGN SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES.
1.4.5.2 Variations
Variations from contract requirements including the solicitation, the

accepted proposal, and the final design, require Government approval.
R
Variations must be approved by the DOR prior to submitting written request
to the Government for approval.
a. Considering Variations
D
Discuss the proposed variation with the Contracting Officer after

consulting with the DOR prior to submission to help ensure functional and
quality requirements are met and minimize potential rejections and
re-submittals. When contemplating a variation which results in lower cost,
consider submitting the variation as a Value Engineering Change Proposal
(VECP) in accordance with FAR 52.248-3. Specifically point out variations
from contract requirements in transmittal letters as applicable. Failure to
receive prior Government approval for deviations may result in the
Government requiring rejection and removal of such work at no additional
cost to the Government.
b. Submitting Variations
When submitting a variation, deliver the written request to the Contracting

Officer in the form of a Request for Information (RFI) to include
documentation illustrating the nature and features of the variation
including any necessary technical submittals and why the variation is
desirable and beneficial to Government. Request shall also include any
savings to the government and documented approval from the DOR.
The Contracting Officer will indicate an approval or disapproval of the
SECTION 01 33 00.05 20 Page 6

variation request; and if not approved as submitted, shall indicate the

Government's reasons therefor. Any work done before such approval is
received shall be at the Contractor's risk.
c. Warranting Variations Are Compatible
When proposing a variation for approval, the Contractor, including its

Designer(s) of Record, warrants that the contract documents have been
reviewed to establish that the variation, if incorporated, will be
compatible with the design intent and operational requirements.
Ensure no work has begun until submittals for that work have been
"approved" or "approved as noted."
1.4.7 QC Organization Responsibilities
Stamp each sheet of each submittal with QC certifying statement or

approving statement, except that data submitted in bound volume or on one
sheet printed on two sides may be stamped on the front of the first sheet
T
only.
a. When approving authority is Contracting Officer, QC organization

will certify submittals, assure proper signatures, and forward to
AF
Contracting Officer with the following certifying statement:
"I hereby certify that the (equipment) (material) (article) shown and
marked in this submittal is that proposed to be incorporated with
contract Number (insert contract number here), is in compliance with
the contract documents, can be installed in the allocated spaces, and
is submitted for Government approval.
R
RFP Part Two Submittals:
Certified by QC Manager ________________________, Date ______

(QC Manager)
D
RFP Part Four and Part Five Submittals:
Certified by DOR _______________________, Date ______
Certified by QC Manager ________________________, Date ______"
(1) Sign certifying statement or approval statement. The person

signing certifying statements shall be QC organization member
designated in the approved QC plan. The signatures shall be in
original ink. Stamped signatures are not acceptable.
(2) Update submittal register database as submittal actions occur and

maintain the submittal register at project site until final
acceptance of all work by Contracting Officer.
(3) Retain a copy of approved submittals at project site, including

Contractor's copy of approved samples.
b. When the Approving Authority is the Designer of Record, the DOR shall
approve, professionally stamp, sign, and date submittals. DOR stamp on
construction submittals or submission of design documents that include
SECTION 01 33 00.05 20 Page 7

construction submittals indicates DOR approval for construction. QC

organization will certify submittals, assure proper signatures, and
forward to Contracting Officer with the following certifying statement:
contract Number (insert contract number here), is in compliance with
the contract requirements, can be installed in the allocated spaces,
and is submitted for DOR approval.
RFP Part Four and Part Five Submittals:
Approved by DOR _______________________, Date ______
Certified by QC Manager _______________________, Date ______"
(1) Sign certifying statement or approval statement. The person

signing certifying statements shall be QC organization member
designated in the approved QC plan. The signatures shall be in
original ink. Stamped signatures are not acceptable.
T
(2) Update submittal register database as submittal actions occur and
maintain the submittal register at project site until final
acceptance of all work by Contracting Officer.
AF
(3) Send copies of final DOR or QC Specialist approved and signed
submittals that are identified in this section for Government
surveillance to the Contracting Officer. Stamp copies "For
Surveillance Only."
1.4.8 Government's Responsibilities
When approving authority is the Contracting Officer, the Government will:

R
a. Note date on which submittal was received from QC Manager, on each
submittal.
b. Review submittals for compliance with contract documents.

D
1.4.8.1 Government Actions
Submittals will be returned with one of the following notations:
"A" - Approved
Contractor's submittal meets or exceeds all contract requirements.

Status Completed, i.e., Contractor's activity in the NAS for this item
is complete
"B" - Approved as Noted, Re-submittal Not Required
Contractor's submittal meets the contract requirements, but additional

information is needed for the contract file that is missing. Status
Completed, i.e., Contractor's activity in the NAS for this item is
complete.
"C" - Approved as Noted, Re-submittal Required
Confirmation or additional information is required in order to
SECTION 01 33 00.05 20 Page 8

determine if the submittal meets or exceeds the contract requirements.

When a single transmittal contains submittal data on more that one
item, only those items with this code require re-submittal.
Contractor's activity in the NAS for this item is not complete.
"D" - Returned By Separate Correspondence, Completed
Status Completed, i.e., Contractor's activity in the NAS for this item
is complete.
"E" - Disapproved, Re-Submittal Required
Failed to provide sufficient evidence to demonstrate compliance with

contract requirements. Status Resubmit, i.e., Contractor's activity in
the NAS for this item is not complete.
"F" - Receipt Acknowledged
For Information Only (FIO) submittals where the submittal complies with
contract requirements. Status Completed, i.e., Contractor's activity
in the NAS for this item complete.
T
"G" - Other (Specify), Re-Submittal Required
Resubmit, i.e., Contractor's activity in the NAS for this item is not
complete.
AF
"X" - Receipt Acknowledged, Re-Submittal Required
Does not comply with contract requirements. Status Resubmit, i.e.,

Contractor's activity in the NAS for this item is not complete.
R
e. Submittals required for surveillance will be returned only if corrective
actions are required.
1.5 FORMAT OF SUBMITTALS

D
1.5.1 Transmittal Form
The transmittal form (ENG Form 4025) generated in the QCS module of RMS
shall be used for submitting both design and construction submittals in
accordance with the instructions on the reverse side of the form. This
form shall be properly completed by filling out all the heading blank
spaces and identifying each item submitted. Special care will be exercised
to ensure proper listing of the specification paragraph and/or sheet number
of the contract drawings pertinent to the data submitted for each item.
1.5.1.1 Combined Design and Construction Submittal Notification
Indicate on the design submissions transmittal form, which construction

submittals have been combined with the design documents. Coordinate
transmittal form list of combined design and construction submittals with
submittal register to indicate DOR approval of all combined submittals.
1.5.1.2 Sustainable Design and Construction Submittals
On all projects, provide sustainability submittals in accordance with
SECTION 01 33 00.05 20 Page 9

requirements of this document, specification Section 01 33 29.05 20

SUSTAINABILITY REPORTING FOR DESIGN-BUILD andthe DIM MED Design Instruction
Manual. Specific submittal requirements are also identified in technical
sections of the specifications. Separate out data demonstrating compliance
with construction sustainability requirements and submit separately but
concurrently.
1.5.2 Identifying Submittals
When submittals are provided by a Subcontractor, the Prime Contractor is to

prepare, review and stamp with Contractor's approval all specified
submittals prior to submitting for Government approval.
Identify submittals, except sample installations and sample panels, with

the following information permanently adhered to or noted on each separate
component of each submittal and noted on transmittal form. Mark each copy
of each submittal identically, with the following:
a. Project title and location.
b. Construction contract number.
T
c. Date of the drawings and revisions.
d. Name, address, and telephone number of subcontractor, supplier,

AF
manufacturer and any other subcontractor associated with the
submittal.
e. Section number of the specification section by which submittal is

required.
f. Submittal description (SD) number of each component of submittal.

R
g. When a resubmission, add alphabetic suffix on submittal description, for
example, submittal 18 would become 18A, to indicate resubmission.
h. Product identification and location in project.

D
1.5.3 Format for SD- 02 Shop Drawings
Shop drawings are not to be less than 210 by 297 mm nor more than 1189 by
841 mm, except for full size patterns or templates. Prepare drawings to
accurate size, with scale indicated, unless other form is required.
Drawings are to be suitable for reproduction and be of a quality to produce
clear, distinct lines and letters with dark lines on a white background.
Present 210 by 297 mm sized shop drawings as part of the bound volume for
submittals required by section. Present larger drawings in sets.
Include on each drawing the drawing title, number, date, and revision
numbers and dates, in addition to information required in paragraph
entitled, "Identifying Submittals," of this section.
Number drawings in a logical sequence. Each drawing is to bear the number

of the submittal in auniform location adjacent to the title block. Place
the Government contract number in the margin, immediately below the title
block, for each drawing.
Dimension drawings, except diagrams and schematic drawings; prepare
SECTION 01 33 00.05 20 Page 10

drawings demonstrating interface with other trades to scale. Use the same
unit of measure for shop drawings as indicated on the contract drawings.
Identify materials and products for work shown.
Include the nameplate data, size and capacity on drawings. Also include
applicable federal, military, industry and technical society publication
references.
1.5.4 Format of SD - 03 Product Data and SD - 08 Manufacturer's Instructions
Present product data submittals for each section as a complete bound

volume. Include table of contents, listing page and catalog item numbers
for product data.
Indicate, by prominent notation, each product which is being submitted;

indicate specification section number and paragraph number to which it
pertains.
Supplement product data with material prepared for project to satisfy

submittal requirements for which product data does not exist. Identify this
material as developed specifically for project, with information and format
T
as required for submission of SD-07 Certificates.
Provide product data in metric dimensions. Where product data are included
in preprinted catalogs with English units only, submit metric dimensions on
separate sheet.
AF
Include the manufacturer's name, trade name, place of manufacture, and
catalog model or number on product data. Also include applicable federal,
military, industry and technical society publication references. Should
manufacturer's data require supplemental information for clarification,
submit as specified for SD-07 Certificates.
R
Where equipment or materials are specified to conform to industry and
technical society reference standards of the organizations such as American
National Standards Institute (ANSI), ASTM International (ASTM), National
Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA), Underwriters Laboratories
(UL), and Association of Edison Illuminating Companies (AEIC) submit proof
D
of such compliance. The label or listing by the specified organization will

be acceptable evidence of compliance. In lieu of the label or listing,
submit a certificate from an independent testing organization, competent to
perform testing, and approved by the Contracting Officer. State on the
certificate that the item has been tested in accordance with the specified
organization's test methods and that the item complies with the specified
organization's reference standard.
Collect required data submittals for each specific material, product, unit
of work, or system into a single submittal and marked for choices, options,
and portions applicable to the submittal. Mark each copy of the product
data identically. Partial submittals will not be accepted for expedition of
construction effort.
Submit manufacturer's instructions prior to installation.
1.5.5 Format of SD - 04 Samples
Furnish samples in sizes below, unless otherwise specified or unless the

manufacturer has prepackaged samples of approximately same size as
specified:
SECTION 01 33 00.05 20 Page 11

a. Sample of Equipment or Device: Full size.
b. Sample of Materials Less than 50 by 75 mm: Built up to 210 by 297 mm.
c. Sample of Materials Exceeding 210 by 297 mm: Cut down to 210 by 297 mm
and adequate to indicate color, texture, and material variations.
d. Sample of Linear Devices or Materials: 250 mm length or length to be

supplied, if less than 250 mm. Examples of linear devices or materials
are conduit and handrails.
e. Sample of Non-Solid Materials: 750 ml. Examples of non-solid materials

are sand and paint.
f. Color Selection Samples: 50 by 100 mm. Where samples are specified for
selection of color, finish, pattern, or texture, submit the full set of
available choices for the material or product specified. Sizes and
quantities of samples are to represent their respective standard unit.
g. Sample Panel: 1200 by 1200 mm.
T
h. Sample Installation: 10 square meters.
Samples Showing Range of Variation: Where variations in color, finish,

AF
pattern, or texture are unavoidable due to nature of the materials, submit
sets of samples of not less than three units showing extremes and middle of
range. Mark each unit to describe its relation to the range of the
variation.
Reusable Samples: Incorporate returned samples into work only if so

specified or indicated. Incorporated samples are to be in undamaged
condition at time of use.Recording of Sample Installation: Note and
R
preserve the notation of area constituting sample installation but remove
notation at final clean-up of project.
When color, texture or pattern is specified by naming a particular

manufacturer and style, include one sample of that manufacturer and style,
D
for comparison.
1.5.6 Format of SD - 05 Design Data and SD - 07 Certificates
Provide design data and certificates on 210 by 297 mm paper. Provide a

bound volume for submittals containing numerous pages.
1.5.7 Format of SD-06 Test Reports and SD - 09 Manufacturer's Field Reports
Provide reports on 210 by 297 mm paper in a complete bound volume. Indicate

by prominent notation, each report in the submittal. Indicate specification
number and paragraph number to which it pertains.
1.5.8 Format of SD - 10 Operation and Maintenance Data (O&M)
Comply with the requirements specified in Section 01 78 24.00 20 FACILITY

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE SUPPORT INFORMATION (eOMSI) for O&M Data format.
SECTION 01 33 00.05 20 Page 12

1.5.9 Format of SD - 01 Preconstruction Submittals and SD - 11 Closeout

Submittals
When submittal includes a document which is to be used in project or become

part of project record, other than as a submittal, do not apply
Contractor's approval stamp to document, but to a separate sheet
accompanying document.
Provide all dimensions in administrative submittals in Metric. Where data

are included in preprinted material with English units only, submit metric
dimensions on separate sheet.
1.6 FORWARDING SUBMITTALS
Contractor's shipping cartons shall not exceed 23 kilograms (50 pounds) per
carton. The Government will not accept boxes over 50 pounds and any
associated delay will not be claimable.
Submittals shall be made as follows:
1.6.1 Procedures
T
a. Submittals designated as "M" on the Submittal Register (ENG Form
4288) shall be submitted in two (2) hard copies and one (1) CD to
Middle East District. One (1) courtesy hard copy and one (1) CD shall
AF
also be sent to the Al Dhafra Project Office.
b. Submittals designated as "R" on the Submittal Register (ENG Form

4288) shall be submitted in three (3) hard copies and one (1) CD to Al
Dhafra Project Office .
c. Submittals designated as "M/R" on the Submittal Register (ENG Form

4288) shall be submitted in two (2) hard copies and one (1) CD to the
R
Middle East District and three (3) hard copies and one (1) CD to the Al
Dhafra Project Office.
d. "For Information Only" (FIO) submittals shall be submitted in two

(2) hard copies and one (1) CD to the Middle East District and three
D
(3) hard copies to the Al Dhafra Project Office. Sample submittals

shall only be submitted to the Al Dhafra Project Office.
e. Submittals of operation and maintenance manuals in seven (7) copies

shall be submitted to the Al Dhafra Project Office .
f. Mailing Addresses for Above Submittals:
MIDDLE EAST DISTRICT
(1) DHL, FEDEX, UPS or any other courier service:

Middle East District (CETAM-EC-EM)
201 Prince Frederick Drive
Winchester, VA 22602
(2) U.S. Postal Service:

Middle East District (CETAM-EC-EM)
SECTION 01 33 00.05 20 Page 13

P.O. Box 2250

Winchester, VA 22604-1450
UAE - AL DHAFRA PROJECT OFFICE
FedEx Address:
Al Dhafra Project Office, U.S. Army Corps of Engineers
Al Dhafra Air Base, UAE
380 ECES/COE
APO AE 09853-5000
Attn: Resident Engineer
The Government will further discuss detailed submittal procedures with the
Contractor at the Preconstruction Conference.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not used.
PART 3 EXECUTION
T
Not used.
AF
R
D
SECTION 01 33 00.05 20 Page 14

SECTION 01 33 10.05 20
DESIGN SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

09/14
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
This section includes requirements for Contractor-originated design

documents and design submittals.
1.2 REFERENCES

basic designation only. The latest version of the publication at time of
award shall be used.
U.S. DEPARTMENT OF DEFENSE (DOD)
T
UFC 1-200-01 (2013) General Building Requirements
UFC 1-300-08 (2009, with Change 2) Criteria for

AF Transfer and Acceptance of DoD Real
Property
MIDDLE EAST DISTRICT (MED)
DIM Design Instruction Manual
1.3 UFC 1-200-02

R
UFC 1-200-01 requires compliance with UFC 1-200-02, "High Performance and
Sustainable Building Requirements". UFC 1-200-02 replaces and cancels UFC
4-030-01, Sustainable Development and UFC 3-400-01, Energy Conservation.
D
1.4 UFC 3-600-10N and UFC 3-800-10N
UFC 3-600-10N and UFC 3-800-10N are only available on the NAVFAC
Design-Build Website under the Design Guidance link:
http://www.wbdg.org/ndbm/design_guidance.php. These Draft UFCs are
applicable as final documents for Navy projects.
1.5 GENERAL DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
Contractor-originated design documents shall provide a project design that

complies with the Request For Proposal (RFP), DIM, UFC 1-200-01, the Core
UFCs, and other UFC's listed above.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
Submit design submittals, including shop drawings used as design drawings,

to the Government for approval. The use of a "G" following a submittal
indicates that a Government approval action is required. Submit the
following in accordance with this section and Section 01 33 00.05 20
SECTION 01 33 10.05 20 Page 1

The use of an "S" following a submittal indicates separate submittal is

required as part of federally mandated sustainability requirements. Refer
to Section 01 33 29.05 20 SUSTAINABILITY REPORTING FOR DESIGN-BUILD for "S"
submittal requirements.
Consolidated RFP Documents; G M/R
Submittal Register; G M/R
SD-05 Design Data
Design Drawings; G M
Specifications; G M
Design Analysis; G M
Design Submittals; G M
T
Sustainability Notebook; G S

AF
Record Documents; G M/R
Final Sustainability Notebook; G S
DD Form 1354; G M/R
1.7 DESIGN QUALITY CONTROL

R
1.7.1 Contractor Reviewing and Certifying Authority
The QC organization is responsible for reviewing and certifying that design

submittals are in compliance with the contract requirements.
D
1.7.2 Government Approving Authority
The Contracting Officer is the approving authority for design submittals.
1.7.3 Designer of Record Certifying Authority
The Designer of Record (DOR) is the design certifying authority. The DOR
accepts responsibility for design of work in each respective design
discipline, by stamping and approving final construction drawings submitted
to the Government approval authority.
1.7.4 Contractor Construction Actions
Upon submission of sealed and signed design documents certified by the DOR,
Design Quality Control (DQC) Manager and the Quality Control (QC) Managers,
the Contractor may proceed with material and equipment purchases,
fabrication and construction of any elements covered by that submittal,
except as specified in the following paragraph.
SECTION 01 33 10.05 20 Page 2

1.7.4.1 Exception to Contractor Construction Actions
The Government will approve the following final submittals before the
Contractor shall be allowed to proceed with construction:
a. Any design submittal that includes or will be impacted by a design

change to the contract. Final Government approval of the design change is
required before construction can begin on the work included in that design
submittal.
a. Designate a lead licensed architect or engineer to be in responsible

charge to coordinate the design effort of the entire project. This
lead architect or engineer shall coordinate all design segments of the
project to assure consistency of design between design disciplines.
b. With the Designer or Record, verify site information provided in the

RFP. In addition, provide additional field investigations and
verification of existing site conditions as may be required to support
the development of design and construction of the project.
T
c. Indicate on the transmittal form accompanying submittal which design
submittals are being submitted as shop drawings.
AF
d. Advise Contracting Officer of variations, as required by paragraph
"Variations."
e. Provide an updated, cumulative submittal register with each design

package that identifies the design and construction submittals required
by that design package and previous submittals.
f. Refer to Section 01 33 29.05 20, SUSTAINABILITY REPORTING FOR

R
DESIGN-BUILD for Contractor's responsibilities for Guiding Principle
Validation.
1.7.6 QC Organization Responsibilities

D
a. Both the CA and the QC Manager must certify design submittals for
compliance with the contract documents. The DOR stamp on drawings
indicates approval from the DOR.
b. QC organization shall certify submittals forwarded by the Designer of

Record (DOR) to the Contracting Officer with the following certifying
statement:
Contract Number (insert contract number here), is in compliance with
the contract documents, and is submitted for Government approval.
Certified by Design Quality Control (DQC) Manager

_____________________, Date _______
Certified by QC Manager________________________________,
Date ______"
c. Sign certifying statement. The persons signing certifying statements

shall be the QC organization members designated in the approved QC
SECTION 01 33 10.05 20 Page 3

plan. The signatures shall be in original ink. Stamped signatures are

not acceptable.
d. Update submittal register as submittal actions occur and maintain the

submittal register at project site until final approval of all work by
e. Retain a copy of approved submittals at project site.
1.7.7 Government Responsibilities
The Government will:
a. Note date on which submittal was received from QC manager, on each

submittal.
b. Perform a quality assurance (QA) review of submittals. Government will

notify Contractor when comments for that design package are posted and
ready for Contractor evaluation and resolution.
1.7.7.1 Actions Possible
T
Submittals will be returned with one of the following notations:
"G" - Other (Specify) Re-Submittal Required

AF
Design submittal is not acceptable for "Release for Construction."
Status Resubmit, i.e., Contractor's activity in the NAS for this item
is not complete.
"K" - Government Concurs with Interim Design
Design submittals, Status Completed, i.e., Contractor's activity in the

R
NAS for this item is complete.
"R" - Acceptable for Release for Construction, Completed
Designs, Status Completed, i.e., Contractor's activity in the NAS for

D
this item is complete.
"X" - Receipt Acknowledged - Does Not Comply, Re-Submittal Required
The Contractor's QC system failed to provide sufficient evidence to

demonstrate compliance with contract requirements. Status Resubmit,
i.e., Contractor's activity in the NAS for this item is not complete.
1.8 ENGLISH LANGUAGE
All specifications, drawings, design analysis, design calculations, shop

drawings, catalog data, materials lists, and equipment schedules submitted
shall be in the English language.
1.9 UNITS OF MEASUREMENT
Design documents shall be prepared in accordance with the guidance offered

in SECTION 01 42 15 METRIC MEASUREMENTS.
The metric units used are the International System of Units (SI) developed
and maintained by the General Conference on Weights and Measures (CGPM);
SECTION 01 33 10.05 20 Page 4

the name International System of Units and the international abbreviation

SI were adopted by the 11th CGPM in 1960.
1.9.1 Drawings
All site layout data shall be dimensioned in meters or coordinates, as

appropriate. All details and pipe sizes shall be dimensioned in millimeters.
EXAMPLE: Masonry openings shall be a U.S. module to suit a standard

U.S. door. The dimensions of the opening shall be given in SI units.
1.9.2 Design Calculations
Calculations shall be in English (I-P) or metric (SI) units as deemed

appropriate by the designer to meet the requirements of the design.
Quantities on the contract drawings stated in metric units, shall also be
stated in SI units in the design analysis to match the drawings.
1.9.3 Specifications
All equipment and products shall be specified by U.S. standards and
T
described by SI units.
1.10 DESIGN DOCUMENTS

AF
Provide design documents that include design analysis, design drawings, and
design specifications, reports, and submittal register in accordance with
DIM, Submittal Procedures.
The Contractor is required to make product, material, and system selections

during the project design and indicate these choices on the design
documents. Accomplish this by submitting design drawings and
specifications that include proprietary submittal information such as
R
manufacturers name, product names, model numbers, product data,
manufactures information, provided optional features, appropriate
connections, fabrication, layout, and product specific drawings. Adherence
to RFP submittal requirements and provision of DOR approved construction
submittal information on the design submittals - eliminates the need for
D
follow-on traditional construction submittals after the final design is

approved.
All products, materials, and systems on the project.
Refer to 01 33 00.05 20, CONSTRUCTION SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES for requirements

pertaining to Contractor proposed design changes or variations.
1.11 DESIGN DRAWINGS
Prepare, organize, and present design drawings in accordance with the

requirements of DIM, Design Procedures.
1.11.1 Design Drawings Used as Shop Drawings
Design drawings shall be prepared to minimize construction submittals after

final design is approved. Indicate proprietary information on the design
drawings as necessary to describe the products, materials, or systems that
are to be used on the project. Construction submittal information included
directly in the design drawings must be approved by the DOR. All design
documents must be professionally signed in accordance with contract
SECTION 01 33 10.05 20 Page 5

requirements.
1.11.2 Drawing Format For Design Drawings Used as Shop Drawings
The Contractor-originated drawings will be used as the basis for the record
drawings. Shop drawings included as design documents shall comply with the
same drawing requirements such as drawing form, sheet size, layering,
lettering, and title block used in design drawings.
1.11.3 Identification of Design Drawings Used as Shop Drawings
The Contractor's transmittal letter and submittal register shall indicate

which desgn drawings are being submitted as shop drawings.
1.11.4 Seals and Signatures on Documents
All final Contractor-originated design drawings shall be signed, dated, and

bear the seal of the registered architect or the registered engineer of the
respective discipline. This seal shall be the seal of the Designer of
Record for that drawing, and who is professionally registered for work in
that discipline. A principal or authorized licensed or certified employee
T
shall electronically sign and date final drawings and cover sheet. The
design drawing coversheets shall be sealed and signed by the lead licensed
architect or engineer of the project design team. Indicate the
Contractor's company name and address on the drawing coversheets of each
AF
design submittal. Application of the electronic seal and signature accepts
responsibility for the work shown thereon.
1.11.5 Units of Measure
Utilize Metric units of measure on the design documents
1.12 SPECIFICATIONS
R
Provide a Contractor-originated design specification that in conjunction
with the drawings, demonstrates compliance with requirements of the RFP.
The specified products, materials, systems, and equipment that are approved
by the DOR; submitted to the Government by the Contractor; and reviewed by
D
the Contracting Officer shall be used to construct the project. UFGS

sections contained in RFP Part 2 shall become a part of the
Contractor-originated Division 01 specification without modification.
Specification Sections contained in RFP Part 5 shall become a part of the
Contractor-originated specification without modification.
1.12.1 Specifications Components and Format
The Contractor shall prepare design specifications that include a UFGS

specification for each product, material, or system on the project.
Provide a UFGS specification and also proprietary information such as
catalog cuts and manufacturers data that demonstrates compliance with the
RFP. Provide project specifications to include the following:
a. Provide the specification cover sheet with the professional seal and
signature of the lead licensed architect or engineer of the project
design team. Indicate the Contractor's company name and address on the
specification coversheet.
b. Table of contents for entire specification.
SECTION 01 33 10.05 20 Page 6

c. Individual UFGS specification sections for each product, material, and

system required by the RFP. Edit UFGS sections in accordance with RFP
Part 4, PTS Section Z-10, Design Submittals.
d. Include a coversheets for the product, material, or system information

that is being proprietarily specified. This information is to follow
the related UFGS specification.
e. Include highlighted and annotated Catalog Cuts, Manufacturer's Product

Data, Tests, Certificates, Manufactures information and letters for
each product, material, or system that is being proprietary specified.
f. Coordinated submittal register for all products, materials and systems

with each design submittal. Provide a cumulative register that
identifies the design and construction submittals required by each
design package along with previous design submittals. The DOR shall
assist in developing the submittal register by determining which
submittal items are required to be approved by the DOR. Complete all
fields in the final submittal register in order to obtain Government
approval of the final design. Submittal register to include separate
but simultaneous delivery and approval of design or data required to
T
fulfill sustainability requirements by Section 01 33 29.05 20
SUSTAINABILITY REPORTING FOR DESIGN-BUILD.
1.12.2 Specifications Section Source Priority

AF
Choose UFGS sections that describe the products, materials, and systems
that are used on the project. Use current UFGS sections that are available
on the Whole Building Design Guide website (available at this website:
http://www.wbdg.org/references/pa_dod.php) and give priority to the Unified
Tri-Service UFGS sections (no spec number suffix) and UFGS that are
prepared by USACE (.00 10 suffix). Only use a UFGS section prepared by
another DoD Component (.00 20, and .00 30 suffix), if an applicable USACE
R
prepared specification section does not exist. If no applicable UFGS
technical specification exists to meet your project requirements, consult
with the USACE Component for guidance and create a new UFGS specification
in accordance with UFC 1-300-02, Unified Facilities Guide Specifications
(UFGS) Format Standard.
D
1.12.3 Fire Protection Specifications
Specifications pertaining to spray-applied fire proofing and fire stopping,

exterior fire alarm reporting systems, interior fire alarm and detection
systems, and fire suppression systems, including fire pumps and standpipe
systems shall be either prepared by, or reviewed and approved by the Fire
Protection DOR.
1.12.4 Identification of Manufacturer's Product Data Used with

Specifications
Provide complete and legible catalog cut sheets, product data, installation
instructions, operation and maintenance instructions, warranty, and
certifications for products and equipment for which final material and
equipment choices have been made. Indicate, by prominent notation, each
product that is being submitted including optional manufacturer's features,
and indicate where the product data shows compliance with the RFP.
SECTION 01 33 10.05 20 Page 7

1.12.5 Specification Software
Submit the final specification source files in SPECSINTACT.
1.13 DESIGN ANALYSIS
Prepare, organize, and present design analysis in accordance with the

requirements of DIM. The design analysis shall be a presentation of facts
to demonstrate the concept of the project is fully understood and the
design is based on sound engineering principles. Provide design analyses
for each discipline and include the following:
a. Basis of design that includes:
(1) An introductory description of the project concepts that addresses

the salient points of the design;
(2) An orderly and comprehensive documentation of criteria and

rationale for system selection; and
(3) The identification of any necessary licenses and permits that are
T
anticipated to be required as a part of the design and/or
construction process. The "Permits Record of Decision" (PROD) form
provided shall be used for recording permits.
AF
b. Code and criteria search shall identify all applicable codes and
criteria and highlight specific requirements within these codes and
criteria for critical issues in the facility design.
c. Calculations as specified and as needed to support this design.
d. Draft and Final Energy and Sustainability Record Card (ESRC) that
documents the energy usage and sustainable features of the building.
R
Refer to Record Documents paragraphs in this section for requirements.
g. Section titled "Antiterrorism" that documents the antiterrorism features
h. Fall Protection Analysis

D
i. Draft and Interim DD Form 1354 that document the real property assets of
the project. Refer to Record Documents paragraphs in this section for
requirements.
1.13.1 Basis of Design Format
The basis of design for each design discipline shall include a cover page
indicating the project title and locations, contract number, table of
contents, tabbed separations for quick reference, and bound in separate
volumes for each design discipline.
1.13.2 Design Calculations
Place the signature and seal of the designer responsible for the work on
the cover page of the calculations for the respective design discipline.
1.13.3 Fall Protection Analysis
Eliminate fall hazards in the facility or if not feasible provide control

measures to protect personnel conducting maintenance work after completion
SECTION 01 33 10.05 20 Page 8

of the project. Identify fall hazards in the Basis of Design with the
Design Development and Prefinal submittals. The analysis shall describe
how fall hazards are considered, eliminated, prevented or controlled to
prevent maintenance personnel from exposure to fall hazards while
performing work at heights. Refer to RFP Part 2, Section 01 35 26,
GOVERNMENT SAFETY REQUIREMENTS for fall hazard protection requirements.
1.14 RECORD DOCUMENTS
1.14.1 DD Form 1354
Prepare a Draft and Interim DD Form 1354, TRANSFER AND ACCEPTANCE OF

MILITARY REAL PROPERTY, in accordance with UFC 1-300-08. All assets must
be broken out by construction categories that are found in the DD Form 1391
and the "Category Codes for Military Real Property" from NAVFAC P-72. Use
Navy specific Facility Catcodes from the NAVFAC P-72, which are available
from the Contracting Officer. Coordinate the identification of appropriate
asset construction categories with the Contracting Officer and the Real
Property Accounting Officer.
a. Draft DD Form 1354. DOR shall determine applicable real property assets
T
broken out by construction categories and submit a "Draft DD Form 1354"
for Government approval as a part of the Design Analysis included with
the Prefinal Design submittal. "Draft DD Form 1354" must include all
quantities and units of measure, but does not require cost breakdown.
AF
Download the current blank editable DD Form 1354 in ADOBE (PDF) from
the following website:
http://www.dtic.mil/whs/directives/infomgt/forms/eforms/dd1354.pdf
b. Interim DD Form 1354. Contractor shall coordinate with the DOR and
update the Draft DD Form 1354 submission to include any additional assets,
improvements, or alterations that occurred during construction. Use the
Draft DD Form 1354 to identify costs. Submit Interim DD Form 1354 to the
R
Government for approval 60 days prior to the Beneficial Occupancy Date
(BOD). If modifications to the Interim DD Form 1354 are required by the
Government, the corrected version must be submitted prior to the BOD.
Submit the completed Checklist for Form DD1354 of Government-Furnished and

D
Contractor-Furnished/Contractor Installed items. Attach this list to the

Interim DD Form 1354. Instructions for completing the form and a blank
checklist may be obtained from UFC 1-300-08
When documenting demolition work, the DD Form 1354 shall list the
quantitative data associated with this work as a negative value to show the
cost should be deleted from the Navy asset data store. Coordinate with the
Installation Real Property POC to assist in determining the negative value
for demolition work.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 DESIGN SUBMITTALS
Contractor Furnished design submittals are the various design documents

which primarily consist of specifications, drawings and design analysis and
calculations. The Design-Build Contractor shall begin construction work
once the Government has reviewed the Design-Build Contractor's design
submittal and has cleared it for construction. Clearance for construction
shall not be construed as meaning Government approval. Unless otherwise
SECTION 01 33 10.05 20 Page 9

indicated, the risk for the design is the sole responsibility of the
Design-Build Contractor.
Complete the Contractor-originated design submittals as defined by this

contract, and coordinate with the approved design network analysis schedule.
Refer to Section 01 33 29.05 20, SUSTAINABILITY REPORTING FOR DESIGN-BUILD

for sustainable design submittals.
2.1.1 Design Submittal Packages
The Government prefers to review for Quality Assurance (QA) as few

submittal packages as possible. Site and Building Design Submittal
Packages are required, however Critical Path Design Submittals are
acceptable if they are substantiated as having an impact to the critical
path in the Government approved Network Analysis Schedule. A Critical Path
submittal shall include all design analyses, drawings, specifications and
product data required to fully describe the project element for Government
review.
Examples of project elements that may be submitted as Critical Path Design
T
Submittal Packages are: Demolition Design, Foundation Design, Structural
Design, Building Enclosure Design, Remaining Work Design,
Furniture/Equipment Design, long lead items, or any other construction
activity or project element that can be organized into a submittal package
AF
that can be reviewed and approved by the Government without being
contingent upon subsequent design submittals.
2.1.2 Required Design Submittals
Provide the following Design Submittal packages. Provide comprehensive,

multi-discipline design packages that include design documentation for
project elements, fully developed to the design stage indicated, and in
R
accordance with DIM, except where specified otherwise.
a. Concept Design as proposed presented at Post Award Kickoff.
b. Preliminary Design (35 percent) - Government Progress QA. 30 calendar

D
day Government review time exclusive of mailing.
c. Design Development (65 percent) - Government Progress QA. 30 calendar

d. Prefinal (100 percent) Design - Government Progress QA. 30 calendar

e. Final Design - Government QA. 30 calendar day Government review time,

exclusive of mailing, for submittals requiring Government approval
prior to construction.
2.1.3 Critical Path Design Submittals
Provide Critical Path Design Submittals that include design documents for
the project elements involved. Include and provide full documentation that
would normally have been provided in earlier submittal stages, such as
Design Development Phase.
a. 100 percent (Prefinal) Design - Government Progress QA. 30 calendar

SECTION 01 33 10.05 20 Page 10

b. Final Design - Government QA. 30 calendar day Government review time,

exclusive of mailing, for submittals requiring Government approval
prior to construction.
2.1.4 Forwarding Submittals Requiring Government Approval
Contractor's shipping cartons shall not exceed 23 kilograms (50 pounds) per
carton. The Government will not accept boxes over 50 pounds and any
associated delay will not be claimable.
Submittals shall be made in accordance with Section 01 33 00.05 20

The Government will further discuss detailed submittal procedures with the
Contractor at the Preconstruction Conference.
2.1.5 Distribution of Approved Final Design Drawings and Specification to

Government Representatives
Submit within 14 calendar days of receiving the Government Approved Final
T
Design Documents, which includes any Critical Path Final Design Document
Packages, electronic and hardcopy(s) of these final documents to Government
representatives for use during the construction of the project. If
Critical Path Submittal Packages are used, provide coversheets and index to
AF
identify each sheet and how this Critical Path Submittal Package fits into
the overall project. Provide the number and type of copies of the final
design documents to the following Government representative:
a. Two (2) electronic and two (2) hard copies to the Project Manager,
b. Two (2) electronic and two (2) hard copyies to the Technical
R
Coordinator, Middle East District
c. One (1) electronic and one (1) hard copy to the Construction Manager,
D
d. One (1) electronic and one (1) hard copy to the Contracting Officer,
e. One (1) electronic and one (1) hard copy to the Public Works Officer,
Bahrain Resident Office
f. One (1) electronic and one (1) hard copy to the Resident Engineer, Al
Dhafra Project Office
2.2 IDENTIFICATION OF DESIGN SUBMITTALS
Provide a title sheet to clearly identify each submittal, the completion

status, and the date. The title sheet shall use the standard format
indicated in the FC 1-300-09N for title sheets. The title sheet shall be
unique to a particular design submittal. Submit the project title sheet
with design status and date for the design submittals.
2.2.1 Critical Path Submittal Title Sheet
Identify Critical Path submittals as such and include a title sheet

indicating the type of critical path submittal, the level of completion of
SECTION 01 33 10.05 20 Page 11

the individual drawings, and which drawings are approved for construction.
2.2.2 Construction Document Validation
All CAD design documents used to construct the facility must bear a visible
and legible AutoCAD generated plotstamp in the lower right hand margin of
each drawing. The plotstamp information on the jobsite construction
documents must match the plotstamp information contained on the following
development stages of the design documents:
a. The Final Critical Path Submittal or the Final Design Submittal

professionally signed by the DOR and submitted for Government approval.
b. The Final Critical Path Submittal or the Final Design Submittal drawings
that have approved by the Government. This development stage may be
combined with "c." below, if issued at the same time.
c. The Final Critical Path or Final Design drawings that have been included
in the contract by modification.
d. The Final Critical Path or Final Design drawings which include
T
subsequent revisions to the design documents that have been included in
the contract by modifications.
Issue new drawings for construction which bear the current plotstamp once a
AF
new development stage of the design documents has been accomplished. Design
documents which do not bear a plotstamp that matches the corresponding
plotstamp exhibited on the design documents described above, shall not be
used for the construction of the project. The plotstamp must bear the date
and time of the plot, at a minimum. Maintain a plotstamp record at the
jobsite that lists the applicable plotstamp information for each drawing
through each stage of development described above.
R
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 CONTRACTOR'S RESOLUTION OF COMMENTS
Provide written responses to all written comments by the Government.

D
Resubmittal of an unacceptable design submittal shall be a complete package

that includes all the required, specified components of that design
submittal. When required by the Government, Contractor resubmittal of
design package, due to nonconformance to the contract, is not a delay in
the contract.
3.2 DESIGN CHANGE AND VARIATIONS
A design change is when the design is revised from what was reviewed by the
Government during any phase of the design process prior to Government
approval of the Final Design. A variation is any portion of the design that
differs from the requirements of the solicitation, accepted proposal, or
final design after Government approval of the Final Design. Design changes
and variations require Government approval and only variations that are
advantageous to the Government will be considered. Refer to Section
01 33 00.05 20, CONSTRUCTION SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES for further explanation
and requirements of design change and variation.
The Contractor shall immediately notify the Government of all potential

design changes and variations via a Request for Information (RFI) to the
Contracting Officer. Design changes or variations that the Contractor
SECTION 01 33 10.05 20 Page 12

asserts will require a contract modification to adjust the cost/price or

schedule shall not be incorporated in the design during any phase of the
design process without prior documented approval from the Contracting
Officer. Contractors will not receive compensation for any unauthorized
design changes or variations which have been included in the Government
approved Final Design. Include the following information in the design
change and variation RFIs:
a. Indicate the RFP Parts, sections, and paragraphs affected by this design
change or variation,
b. The scope of work of the design change or variation,
c. The reason for the proposed change,
d. Explanations of how the variation is advantageous to the Government.
d. Indicate which upcoming design submittal will be affected by the subject

design change,
e. Explanation of contract cost/price and schedule impacts or provide an
T
affirmative statement indicating that the design change or variation
will not have an impact on the contract cost/price or schedule.
f. Coordination measures proposed to incorporate the design change or

AF
variation into the construction.
g. Upon request by the Contracting Officer, submit a cost proposal prepared

using the Uniformat Work Breakdown Structure for all design changes and
variations that have cost or schedule impacts. Submit a proposal that
provides cost breakdown of each Uniformat system or subsystem that is
applicable to the design change or variation. Utilize the units of
measure indicated in the Uniformat Structure at the NAVFAC DB RFP
R
website, http://www.wbdg.org/ndbm/uniformat.php.
3.3 THE CONTRACT AND ORDER OF PRECEDENCE
3.3.1 Contract Components

D
The contract consists of the solicitation, the approved proposal, and the
final design.
3.3.2 Order of Precedence
In the event of conflict or inconsistency between any of the below

described portions of the conformed contract, precedence shall be given in
the following order:
a. Any portions of the proposal or final design that exceed the

requirements of the solicitation.
(1) Any portion of the proposal that exceeds the final design.
(2) Any portion of the final design that exceeds the proposal.
(3) Where portions within either the proposal or the final design
conflict, the portion that most exceeds the requirements of the
solicitation has precedence.
SECTION 01 33 10.05 20 Page 13

b. The requirements of the solicitation, in descending order of precedence:
(1) Standard Form 1442, Price Schedule, and Davis Bacon Wage Rates.
(2) Part 1 - Contract Clauses.
(3) Part 2 - General Requirements.
(4) Part 3 - Project Program Requirements.
(5) Part 6 - Attachments (excluding Concept Drawings).
(6) Part 5 - Prescriptive Specifications exclusive of performance

specifications.
(7) Part 4 - Performance Specifications exclusive of prescriptive

specifications.
(8) Part 6 - Attachments (Concept Drawings).
3.3.2.1 Government Review or Approval
T
Government review or approval of any portion of the proposal or final
design shall not relieve the Contractor from responsibility for errors or
omissions with respect thereto.
AF
R
D
SECTION 01 33 10.05 20 Page 14

SECTION 01 33 29.05 20
SUSTAINABILITY REPORTING FOR DESIGN-BUILD

03/15
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

U.S. DEPARTMENT OF ENERGY (DOE)
ISWG Guiding Principles (2008) High Performance and Sustainable

Buildings Guidance
T
40 CFR 247
AF Comprehensive Procurement Guideline for
Products Containing Recovered Materials
U.S. DEPARTMENT OF AGRICULTURE (USDA)
USDA Biopreferred Program United States Department of Agriculture's

Biopreferred Program
R
1.2 SUMMARY
This specification includes general requirements and procedures for

projects to be designed, constructed, and documented per the federally
mandated "Guiding Principles" (GP), Third Party Certification (TPC)
D
requirements (if applicable), UFC 1-200-02 High Performance and Sustainable

Building Requirements, and other requirements identified in this
specification.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
Submittals requirements are specified in the technical sections using

Submittal Description (SD) numbers and titles. Submittals requiring
Government approval use a "G" or submittal designator in the UFGS sections.
In addition, submit the GPV-required sustainability documentation in this
specification as "S" submittals. Submittals not having a "G" designation
are for Information Only.
Submittals with an "S" are for inclusion in the Sustainability Notebook, in

conformance with the requirements of this Section.
Government approval is required for submittals in RFP Part 2 with a "G"

designation Additional construction submittals reserved for Government
approval are listed in the Section 01 33 00.05 20 CONSTRUCTION SUBMITTAL
PROCEDURES. Submittals with a "G" designation found in the sections used
by the Contractor to create construction specification, require DOR
SECTION 01 33 29.05 20 Page 1

approval. DOR approved submittals are also listed in the "Construction

Submittals" paragraph in each RFP PART 4, Performance Technical
Specifications. Provide required certification or validation submittals in
accordance with Section 01 33 10.05 20 DESIGN SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES, Section
01 33 00.05 20 CONSTRUCTION SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES, DIM, Design Procedures,
and as identified below.
Preliminary Sustainability Notebook; G M/R
Preliminary High Performance and Sustainable Building Checklist; G

M/R
SD-05 Design Data
Final Design Sustainability Notebook; G M
Final Design High Performance and Sustainable Building Checklist; G

M
T
Final Sustainability Notebook; G M/R

AF
Final High Performance and Sustainable Building Checklist; G M/R
1.4 GUIDING PRINCIPLES VALIDATION (GPV)
Provide sustainability documentation to verify achievement of

ISWG Guiding Principles Validation (GPV).
Provide the following for GPV:

R
a. Refer to Attachment 1, HPSB Checklist at the end of this specification
section.
b. Obtain approval of the HPSB Checklist from the Contracting Officer at

D
the Post Award Kick-Off Meetings. Contracting Officer's approval

establishes identified ISWG Guiding Principles Requirements as the
project's sustainability goals.
No variations or substitutions to the HPSB Checklist are allowed

without written consent from the Contracting Officer. Immediately
bring to the attention of the Contracting Officer any project changes
that impact meeting the approved ISWG Guiding Principles Requirements
for this project and Contractor must demonstrate that change will not
incur additional construction cost or increase the life cycle cost.
c. Include all work required to incorporate the applicable

ISWG Guiding Principles Requirements indicated on the HPSB Checklist
and in this contract.
d. Include design and construction related documentation to maintain an

up-to-date Sustainability Notebook. Supplement design and construction
related documentation containing the following components;
(1) HPSB Checklist
SECTION 01 33 29.05 20 Page 2

(2) Sustainability
1.4.1 Sustainability Action Plan
Include the following information in the Sustainability Action Plan;
a. Contractor's planned method to achieve each GP requirement.
1.4.2 Costs
Contractor is responsible for all costs associated with designing,

constructing and demonstrating that project complies with approved
ISWG Guiding Principles Requirements.
1.5 SUSTAINABILITY SUBMITTALS
Provide documentation in the Sustainability Notebook and the HPSB Checklist

to indicate compliance with the sustainability requirements of the project.
1.5.1 "S" Submittals for Sustainability Documentation
T
Submit the GPV sustainability documentation required in this specification
as "S" submittals. Highlight GPV compliance data in "S" submittal.
1.5.2 Sustainability Notebook

AF
Prepare and maintain a comprehensive Sustainability Notebook to document
compliance with the sustainability requirements identified in the approved
HPSB Checklist. Sustainability Notebook must contain all required data to
support full compliance with the ISWG Guiding Principles Requirements.
Sustainability Notebook is in the form of an Adobe PDF file; bookmarked at
each ISWG Guiding Principles Requirement and sub-bookmarked at each
document. Match format to ISWG Guiding Principles numbering system
R
indicated herein. Maintain up to date information, spreadsheets,
templates, etc. with each current submittals.
Contracting Officer may deduct from the monthly progress payment

accordingly if Sustainability Notebook information is not current, until
D
information is updated and on track per project goals.
1.5.2.1 Sustainability Notebook Submittal Schedule
Provide Sustainability Notebook Submittals at the following milestones of

the project:
a. Preliminary Sustainability Notebook
Submit preliminary Sustainability Notebook for approval at the Post

Award Kick-Off Meetings. Include Preliminary High Performance and
Sustainable Building Checklist.
b. Final Design Sustainability Notebook
Submit updated Sustainability Notebook no later than 60 days after

final design complete submission. Review Sustainability Notebook
submission for completeness of design requirements, prerequisites, and
credits documentation and appropriate progress toward construction
requirements, prerequisites, and credits documentation. Identify any
outstanding issues relating to achieving the sustainability goals of
SECTION 01 33 29.05 20 Page 3

the project and incomplete documentation requirements. Obtain DOR

approval and submit three (3) electronic copies of the Final Design
Sustainability Notebook on DVDs to the Government. Include Final
Design High Performance and Sustainable Building Checklist.
c. Construction Progress Meetings.
Update GP documentation in the Sustainability Notebook for each meeting.
d. Final Sustainability Notebook
Submit updated Sustainability Notebook within 60 days after the

Beneficial Occupancy Date (BOD). Final progress payment retainage may
be held by Contracting Officer until Final Sustainability construction
phase documentation is complete. Obtain DOR approval and submit three
(3) electronic copies of the Final Sustainability Notebook on DVDs to
the Government. Include Final High Performance and Sustainable
Building Checklist.
1.5.3 High Performance Sustainable Building (HPSB) Checklistand Sustainable

Energy Data Record Card (SEDRC)
T
Provide documentation that provides proof of and supports compliance with
the attached HBSP Checklist.
1.5.3.1
AF
HPSB Submittals
Submit an updated copy of the HPSB Checklist and SEDRC with each
Sustainability Notebook submittal. Attach HPSB Checklist and SEDRC to
DD1354 Real Property Record Submittal.
1.5.3.2 SEDRC Checklist Public Access

R
The SEDRC form is found at the following link:
http://www.wbdg.org/pdfs/navfac_sustainable_energy_data_record_card.pdf or
obtained from the Government Project Manager.
1.6 DOCUMENTATION REQUIREMENTS

D
Incorporate each of the following ISWG Guiding Principles Requirements into

project and provide documentation that proves compliance with each listed
requirement. Items below are organized according to the
ISWG Guiding Principles.
1.6.1 Integrated Design Process
Use a collaborative, integrated planning and design process. For the

submittal documentation below, use the Integrated Building Design process
as described in ASHRAE Handbook - HVAC Applications, Chapter 58 (Integrated
Building Design) to the maximum extent practical. This reference is
applicable to all disciplines and provides a roadmap to guide design teams
through the Integrated Design process. (The use of Building Information
Modeling, as described in the section Tools is encouraged but not required.)
a. Design submittal documentation required;
(1) Maintain an up-to-date list of the sustainability integrated

design team and their roles in all stages of a project's planning
and delivery:
SECTION 01 33 29.05 20 Page 4

(a) Contractors Sustainability Coordinators; Architecture and

engineering disciplines involved on the project and the DOR in
charge of the overall project and each discipline; Construction
Subcontractors and the company representatives that align with
each architectural and engineering discipline, Planning, Public
Works, Environmental Specialist and other appropriate installation
personnel.
(b) Describe their roles and responsibilities and plan-of-action

for how each team member will be involved to achieve the project
sustainability requirements, and how the Contractor will
coordinate with Government personnel.
(2) Provide narratives and reports;
(a) Performance goals for siting, energy, water, materials, and

indoor environmental quality along with other comprehensive design
goals and ensures incorporation of these goals throughout the
design and lifecycle of the building.
T
(b) Integration of the goals into design and construction.
(c) Collaboration with other providers, such as Commissioning

Authority and Third Party Certification.
AF
1.6.2 Stormwater Management
Meet the requirements of UFC 3-210-10.
a. Design submittal documentation required
(1) Provide documentation showing storm water is managed on site per

R
cited criteria.
1.6.3 Water Use for Heating and Cooling
Reduce Process Water consumption.

D
(1) Provide required documentation showing compliance with EPAct 2005,

Section 109 where life cycle cost effective.
(2) Provide life cycle cost analysis (LCCA)
1.6.4 Recycled Content
Provide materials on this project with aggregated total recycled content

greater than 10 percent. In addition comply with 40 CFR 247. Refer to
http://www.epa.gov/cpg/products.htm for assistance identifying products
cited in 40 CFR 247.
a. Construction submittal documentation required
(1) Total amount of recycled content contained in building materials

as a percentage of total cost of all building materials on the
project (mechanical, electrical and plumbing components, and
specialty items such as elevators excluded).
SECTION 01 33 29.05 20 Page 5

(2) Contractor may submit for Government approval proposed alternative

products or systems that provide equivalent performance and
appearance and have greater contribution to project recycled
content requirements. For all such proposed substitutions, submit
with the Sustainability Action Plan accompanied by product data
demonstrating equivalence.
1.6.5 Bio-Based Products
Utilize products and materials made from bio-based materials to the maximum
extent possible without jeopardizing the intended end use or detracting
from the overall quality delivered to the end user. Use only supplies and
materials of a type and quality that conform to applicable specifications
and standards.
Bio-based products that are designated for preferred procurement under

USDA Biopreferred Program must meet the required minimum bio-based
content. Refer to www.biopreferred.gov.for the product categories and
BioPreferred Catalog.
T
(1) Provide bio-based content and bio-based source of material.

Indicate name of the manufacturer, cost of each product and the
AF
use of each product on this project.
1.6.6 Environmentally Preferred Products
Use products designated for Federal procurement to meet environmentally

preferred requirements.

R
(1) Provide list of environmentally preferable products used on this
project that meet the requirements of UFC 1-200-02.
1.6.7 Recycling - Design

D
Provide a dedicated, easily-accessible area or areas for the collection and

storage of materials for recycling for the entire building. Collection must
include, at a minimum: paper, corrugated cardboard, glass, plastics and
metals.
(1) Provide documentation showing an appropriately sized and placed

storage room has been dedicated for recyclables.
1.6.8 Recycling - Construction
Divert construction debris from landfill disposal in accordance with

Section 01 74 19 CONSTRUCTION AND DEMOLITION WASTE MANAGEMENT.
a. Construction submittal documentation
(1) Documentation showing total amount of construction debris diverted

from landfill as a percentage of all construction debris on the
project.
SECTION 01 33 29.05 20 Page 6

(a) Include project's Construction Waste Management Plan and all

dumpster haul tickets.
1.6.9 Ozone Depleting Substances

The use of CFC-based refrigerants in HVAC&R systems is prohibited.
Eliminate the use of all ozone depleting substances (CFC's, HCFCs, or
Halons) during construction and in building design where alternative
environmentally preferable products are available taking into account
lifecycle impacts.
(1) MSDS sheets for all refrigerants provided
(2) Use substances that meet the criteria of U.S. EPA Significant New
Alternatives Policy (http://www.epa.gov/ozone/snap/index.html)
1.6.10 Validation and Certification Restrictions
The purchase of renewable energy credits to meet project sustainability
T
goals is prohibited.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not used.
AF
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 SUSTAINABILITY COORDINATION
3.1.1 Coordinating Sustainability Documentation Progress

R
Provide sustainability focus and coordination at the following meetings to
achieve sustainability goals. In addition to requirement below, the
following meetings requirements are further described in other parts of the
RFP documents. Contractor's designated sustainability professional
responsible for GP documentation must participate in the following meetings
D
to coordinate documentation completion:
a. Design Review Meetings: Review progress towards meeting Sustainability

requirements in the Sustainability Action Plan, and completeness of
Sustainability Notebook at the following;
(1) Post Award Kick-Off Meeting: Refer to Section 01 31 19.05 20 POST

AWARD MEETINGS. Discuss the following: HPSB Checklist,
Sustainability Action Plan, Design submittal and Construction
submittal requirements and schedule, individuals responsible for
achieving each Guiding Principle Requirement.
(2) Design Quality Assurance Meetings: Refer to Section 01 31 19.05 20

POST AWARD MEETINGS for requirements. Discuss progress toward
accomplishing Sustainability goals and obtaining sustainability
documentation at each design submittal review. Refer to RFP Part
2 Section 01 33 10.05 20 DESIGN SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES for
designated design submittals.
(3) Design Complete Review Meetings (No later than 60 days after final
design complete submission): Review HPSB Checklist, Sustainability
SECTION 01 33 29.05 20 Page 7

Notebook for completeness and identify any outstanding issues

relating to final score and documentation requirements.
b. Construction Progress Meetings: Review GP sustainability requirements

with project team including contractor and sub-contractor
representatives. Demonstrate HPSB Checklist documentation is being
collected and updated to the Sustainability Notebook.
(1) Project Closeout Meetings: Refer to Section 01 31 19.05 20 POST

AWARD MEETINGS for further requirements. Review HPSB Checklist,Sustainability
Notebook for completeness and identify any outstanding issues
relating to final documentation requirements.
(2) Final Sustainability Notebook Review
T
AF
R
D
SECTION 01 33 29.05 20 Page 8

SECTION 01 35 26
GOVERNMENTAL SAFETY REQUIREMENTS

02/12
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

AMERICAN SOCIETY OF SAFETY ENGINEERS (ASSE/SAFE)
ASSE/SAFE A10.32 (2012) Fall Protection
ASSE/SAFE A10.34 (2001; R 2012) Protection of the Public on

or Adjacent to Construction Sites
T
ASSE/SAFE Z359.1 (2007) Safety Requirements for Personal
Fall Arrest Systems, Subsystems and
Components
AF
ASME INTERNATIONAL (ASME)
ASME B30.22 (2010) Articulating Boom Cranes
ASME B30.5 (2014) Mobile and Locomotive Cranes
NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)

R
NFPA 10 (2013) Standard for Portable Fire
Extinguishers
NFPA 241 (2013) Standard for Safeguarding

Construction,Alteration, and Demolition
D
Operations
NFPA 51B (2014) Standard for Fire Prevention During

Welding, Cutting, and Other Hot Work
NFPA 70 (2014; AMD 1 2013; Errata 1 2013; AMD 2

2013; Errata 2 2013; AMD 3 2014; Errata
3-4 2014; AMD 4-6 2014) National
Electrical Code
NFPA 70E (2015; ERTA 1 2015) Standard for

Electrical Safety in the Workplace
U.S. ARMY CORPS OF ENGINEERS (USACE)
EM 385-1-1 (2014) Safety and Health Requirements

Manual
10 CFR 20 Standards for Protection Against Radiation
29 CFR 1910 Occupational Safety and Health Standards
29 CFR 1910.146 Permit-required Confined Spaces
29 CFR 1915 Confined and Enclosed Spaces and Other

Dangerous Atmospheres in Shipyard
Employment
29 CFR 1926 Safety and Health Regulations for

Construction
29 CFR 1926.1400 Cranes and Derricks in Construction
29 CFR 1926.16 Rules of Construction
29 CFR 1926.500 Fall Protection
CPL 2.100 (1995) Application of the Permit-Required

Confined Spaces (PRCS) Standards, 29 CFR
1910.146
T
U.S. NAVAL FACILITIES ENGINEERING COMMAND (NAVFAC)
NAVFAC P-307 (2009; Change 1 Mar 2011; Change 2 Aug

AF 2011)Management of Weight Handling
Equipment
1.2 DEFINITIONS
a. Competent Person for Fall Protection. A person who is capable of

identifying hazardous or dangerous conditions in the personal fall
arrest system or any component thereof, as well as their application
R
and use with related equipment, and has the authority to take prompt
corrective measures to eliminate the hazards of falling.
b. High Visibility Accident. Any mishap which may generate publicity or

high visibility.
D
c. Medical Treatment. Treatment administered by a physician or by

registered professional personnel under the standing orders of a
physician. Medical treatment does not include first aid treatment even
through provided by a physician or registered personnel.
d. Operating Envelope. The area surrounding any crane. Inside this

"envelope" is the crane, the operator, riggers and crane walkers,
rigging gear between the hook and the load, the load and the crane's
supporting structure (ground, rail, etc.).
e. Recordable Injuries or Illnesses. Any work-related injury or illness

that results in:
(1) Death, regardless of the time between the injury and death, or the
length of the illness;
(2) Days away from work (any time lost after day of injury/illness
onset);
(3) Restricted work;
(4) Transfer to another job;
(5) Medical treatment beyond first aid;
(6) Loss of consciousness; or
(7) A significant injury or illness diagnosed by a physician or other

licensed health care professional, even if it did not result in
(1) through (6) above.
f. "USACE" property and equipment specified in USACE EM 385-1-1 should be

interpreted as Government property and equipment.
g. Weight Handling Equipment (WHE) Accident. A WHE accident occurs when

any one or more of the eight elements in the operating envelope fails
to perform correctly during operation, including operation during
maintenance or testing resulting in personnel injury or death; material
or equipment damage; dropped load; derailment; two-blocking; overload;
or collision, including unplanned contact between the load, crane, or
other objects. A dropped load, derailment, two-blocking, overload and
T
collision are considered accidents even though no material damage or
injury occurs. A component failure (e.g., motor burnout, gear tooth
failure, bearing failure) is not considered an accident solely due to
material or equipment damage unless the component failure results in
AF
damage to other components (e.g., dropped boom, dropped load, roll
over, etc.) Any mishap meeting the criteria described above shall be
documented in both the Contractor Significant Incident Report (CSIR)
and using the USACE ENG 3394 form submitted within five days both as
provided by the Contracting Officer.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
R
D

Accident Prevention Plan (APP); G M/R
Activity Hazard Analysis (AHA); G M/R
Crane Critical Lift Plan; G M/R
Proof of qualification for Crane Operators; G M/R
SD-06 Test Reports
Notifications and Reports
Submit reports as their incidence occurs, in accordance with the
requirements of the paragraph, "Notifications and Reports."
Accident Reports; G M/R
Crane Reports; G M/R
SD-07 Certificates
Confined Space Entry Permit
Hot work permit
License Certificates
Certificate of Compliance (Crane)
Submit one copy of each permit/certificate attached to each

Daily Quality Control Report.
Machinery & Mechanized Equipment Certification Form
T
1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
In addition to the detailed requirements included in the provisions of this

contract, comply with the most recent edition of USACE EM 385-1-1, and host
AF
nation laws, ordinances, criteria, rules and regulations. Submit matters
of interpretation of standards to the appropriate administrative agency for
resolution before starting work. Where the requirements of this
specification, applicable laws, criteria, ordinances, regulations, and
referenced documents vary, the most stringent requirements govern.
1.5 SITE QUALIFICATIONS, DUTIES AND MEETINGS

R
1.5.1 Personnel Qualifications
1.5.1.1 Site Safety and Health Officer (SSHO)
The SSHO must meet the requirements of EM 385-1-1 section 1 and ensure that
D
the requirements of 29 CFR 1926.16 are met for the project. Provide a
Safety oversight team that includes a minimum of one (1) person at each
project site to function as the Site Safety and Health Officer (SSHO). The
SSHO or an equally-qualified Designated Representative/alternate shall be
at the work site at all times to implement and administer the Contractor's
safety program and government-accepted Accident Prevention Plan. The
SSHO's training, experience, and qualifications shall be as required by
EM 385-1-1 paragraph 01.A.17, entitled SITE SAFETY AND HEALTH OFFICER
(SSHO), and all associated sub-paragraphs.
A Competent Person shall be provided for all of the hazards identified in

the Contractor's Safety and Health Program in accordance with the accepted
Accident Prevention Plan, and shall be on-site at all times when the work
that presents the hazards associated with their professional expertise is
being performed. Provide the credentials of the Competent Persons(s) to
the the Contracting Officer for acceptance in consultation with the Safety
Office.
1.5.1.1.1 The Contractor Quality Control (QC) Personnel
The Contractor Quality Control (QC) person cannot be the SSHO on this
project, although the QC has safety inspection responsibilities as part of

the QC duties.
The Project Superintendent or other Contractor personnel may act on behalf

of the SSHO for a period of no more than thirty (30) days annually,
provided that the individual meets the same competency level of the SSHOs,
demonstrates the proficiency required, and is approved by the Contracting
Officer in consultation with the Safety and Health Manager.
1.5.1.2 Competent Person for Confined Space Entry
Provide a "Competent Person" to supervise the entry into each confined

space. That individual must meet the requirements and definition of
Competent Person as contained in EM 385-1-1.
1.5.1.3 Crane Operators
Meet the crane operators requirements in USACE EM 385-1-1, Section 16 and

Appendix I. In addition, for mobile cranes with Original Equipment
Manufacturer (OEM) rated capacitates of 50,000 pounds or greater, designate
crane operators as qualified by a source that qualifies crane operators
T
(i.e., union, a government agency, or an organization that tests and
qualifies crane operators). Provide proof of current qualification. In
addition, the Contractor shall comply with 29 CFR 1926, Subpart CC.
AF
1.5.2 Personnel Duties
1.5.2.1 Site Safety and Health Officer (SSHO)
The SSHO shall:

R
a. Conduct daily safety and health inspections and maintain a written log
which includes area/operation inspected, date of inspection, identified
hazards, recommended corrective actions, estimated and actual dates of
corrections. Attach safety inspection logs to the Contractors' daily
quality control report.
D
b. Conduct mishap investigations and complete required reports. Maintain

the OSHA Form 300 and Daily Production reports for prime and
sub-contractors.
c. Maintain applicable safety reference material on the job site.
d. Attend the pre-construction conference, pre-work meetings including

preparatory inspection meeting, and periodic in-progress meetings.
e. Implement and enforce accepted APPS and AHAs.
f. Maintain a safety and health deficiency tracking system that monitors

outstanding deficiencies until resolution. Post a list of unresolved
safety and health deficiencies on the safety bulletin board.
g. Ensure sub-contractor compliance with safety and health requirements.
h. Maintain a list of hazardous chemicals on site and their material

safety data sheets.
Failure to perform the above duties will result in dismissal of the

superintendent, QC Manager, and/or SSHO, and a project work stoppage.
The project work stoppage will remain in effect pending approval of a
suitable replacement.
1.5.3 Meetings
1.5.3.1 Preconstruction Conference
a. Contractor representatives who have a responsibility or significant

role in accident prevention on the project shall attend the
preconstruction conference. This includes the project superintendent,
site safety and health officer, quality control supervisor, or any
other assigned safety and health professionals who participated in the
development of the APP (including the Activity Hazard Analyses (AHAs)
and special plans, program and procedures associated with it).
b. Discuss the details of the submitted APP to include incorporated plans,

programs, procedures and a listing of anticipated AHAs that will be
developed and implemented during the performance of the contract. This
list of proposed AHAs will be reviewed at the conference and an
T
agreement will be reached between the Contractor and the Contracting
Officer's representative as to which phases will require an analysis.
In addition, establish a schedule for the preparation, submittal,
review, and acceptance of AHAs to preclude project delays.
AF
c. Deficiencies in the submitted APP will be brought to the attention of
the Contractor at the preconstruction conference, and the Contractor
shall revise the plan to correct deficiencies and re-submit it for
acceptance. Do not begin work until there is an accepted APP.
d. The functions of a Preconstruction conference may take place at the

Post-Award Kickoff meeting for Design Build Contracts.
R
1.5.3.2 Safety Meetings
Conduct and document meetings as required by EM 385-1-1. Attach minutes

showing contract title, signatures of attendees and a list of topics
D
discussed to the Contractors' daily quality control report.
1.6 ACCIDENT PREVENTION PLAN (APP)
Use a qualified person to prepare the written site-specific APP. Prepare

the APP in accordance with the format and requirements of USACE EM 385-1-1
and as supplemented herein. Cover all paragraph and subparagraph elements
in USACE EM 385-1-1, Appendix A, "Minimum Basic Outline for Accident
Prevention Plan". Specific requirements for some of the APP elements are
described below. The APP shall be job-specific and address any unusual or
unique aspects of the project or activity for which it is written. The APP
shall interface with the Contractor's overall safety and health program.
Include any portions of the Contractor's overall safety and health program
referenced in the APP in the applicable APP element and made site-specific.
The Government considers the Prime Contractor to be the "controlling
authority" for all work site safety and health of the subcontractors.
Contractors are responsible for informing their subcontractors of the
safety provisions under the terms of the contract and the penalties for
noncompliance, coordinating the work to prevent one craft from interfering
with or creating hazardous working conditions for other crafts, and
inspecting subcontractor operations to ensure that accident prevention
responsibilities are being carried out. The APP shall be signed by the
person and firm (senior person) preparing the APP, the Contractor, the
on-site superintendent, the designated site safety and health officer, the
Contractor Quality control Manager, and any designated CSP or CIH.
Submit the APP including Form A-02 Accident Prevention Plan Checklist
(Attachment A) to the Contracting Officer 15 calendar days prior to the
date of the preconstruction conference for acceptance. Work cannot proceed
without an accepted APP.
Once accepted by the Contracting Officer, the APP and attachments will be
enforced as part of the contract. Disregarding the provisions of this
contract or the accepted APP will be cause for stopping of work, at the
discretion of the Contracting Officer, until the matter has been rectified.
Once work begins, changes to the accepted APP shall be made with the
knowledge and concurrence of the Contracting Officer, project
superintendent, SSHO and quality control manager. Should any severe hazard
exposure, i.e. imminent danger, become evident, stop work in the area,
secure the area, and develop a plan to remove the exposure and control the
hazard. Notify the Contracting Officer within 24 hours of discovery.
T
Eliminate/remove the hazard. In the interim, take all necessary action to
restore and maintain safe working conditions in order to safeguard onsite
personnel, visitors, the public (as defined by ASSE/SAFE A10.34,) and the
environment.
AF
Copies of the accepted plan will be maintained at the resident engineer's
office and at the job site.
Continuously review and ammend the APP, as necessary, throughout the life
of the contract. Incorporate unusual or high-hazard activities not
identified in the original APP as they are discovered.
1.6.1 EM 385-1-1 Contents

R
In addition to the requirements outlined in Appendix A of USACE EM 385-1-1,
the following is required:
a. Names and qualifications (resumes including education, training,

D
experience and certifications) of all site safety and health personnel

designated to perform work on this project to include the designated
site safety and health officer and other competent and qualified
personnel to be used such as CSPs, CIHs, STSs, CHSTs. Specify the
duties of each position.
b. Qualifications of competent and of qualified persons. As a minimum,

designate and submit qualifications of competent persons for each of
the following major areas: excavation; scaffolding; fall protection;
hazardous energy; confined space; health hazard recognition, evaluation
and control of chemical, physical and biological agents; personal
protective equipment and clothing to include selection, use and
maintenance.
c. Confined Space Entry Plan. Develop a confined and/or enclosed space

entry plan in accordance with USACE EM 385-1-1, applicable OSHA
standards 29 CFR 1910, 29 CFR 1915, and 29 CFR 1926, OSHA Directive
CPL 2.100, and any other federal, state and local regulatory
requirements identified in this contract. Identify the qualified
person's name and qualifications, training, and experience. Delineate
the qualified person's authority to direct work stoppage in the event
of hazardous conditions. Include procedure for rescue by contractor

personnel and the coordination with emergency responders. (If there is
no confined space work, include a statement that no confined space work
exists and none will be created.)
d. Crane Critical Lift Plan.

Prepare and sign weight handling critical lift plans for lifts over 75
percent of the capacity of the crane or hoist (or lifts over 50 percent of
the capacity of a barge mounted mobile crane's hoists) at any radius of
lift; lifts involving more than one crane or hoist; lifts of personnel; and
lifts involving non-routine rigging or operation, sensitive equipment, or
unusual safety risks. Submit 15 calendar days prior to on-site work and
include the requirements of USACE EM 385-1-1, paragraph 16.H. and the
following:
(1) For lifts of personnel, demonstrate compliance with the requirements of

29 CFR 1926.1400.
e. Fall Protection and Prevention (FP&P) Program Documentation. The

program documentation shall be site specific and address all fall
hazards in the work place and during different phases of construction.
T
Address how to protect and prevent workers from falling to lower levels
when they are exposed to fall hazards above 1.8 m. A qualified person
for fall protection shall prepare and sign the program documentation.
Include fall protection and prevention systems, equipment and methods
AF
employed for every phase of work, responsibilities, assisted rescue,
self-rescue and evacuation procedures, training requirements, and
monitoring methods. Revise the Fall Protection and Prevention Program
documentation every six months for lengthy projects, reflecting any
changes during the course of construction due to changes in personnel,
equipment, systems or work habits. Keep and maintain the accepted Fall
Protection and Prevention Program documentation at the job site for the
duration of the project. Include the Fall Protection and Prevention
R
Program documentation in the Accident Prevention Plan (APP).
The FP&P Plan shall include a Rescue and Evacuation Plan in accordance
with USACE EM 385-1-1, Section 21.M. The plan shall include a detailed
discussion of the following: methods of rescue; methods of self-rescue;
D
equipment used; training requirement; specialized training for the

rescuers; procedures for requesting rescue and medical assistance; and
transportation routes to a medical facility. Include the Rescue and
Evacuation Plan in the Fall Protection and Prevention (FP&P) Plan, and
as part of the Accident Prevention Plan (APP).
f. Occupant Protection Plan. The safety and health aspects of lead-based

paint removal if applicable.
g. Lead Compliance Plan if applicable.
h. Asbestos Hazard Abatement Plan if applicable.
i. Site Safety and Health Plan. The safety and health aspects prepared in
accordance with EM 385-1-1, when applicable.
j. PCB Plan. The safety and health aspects of Polychlorinated Biphenyls

work, if applicable.
k. Site Demolition Plan. The safety and health aspects prepared in

accordance with EM 385-1-1.
l. Excavation Plan. The safety and health aspects prepared in accordance

with EM 385-1-1..
1.7 ACTIVITY HAZARD ANALYSIS (AHA)
The Activity Hazard Analysis (AHA) format shall be in accordance with USACE
EM 385-1-1, Section 1. Submit the AHA for review at least 15 calendar days
prior to the start of each phase. Format subsequent AHAs as amendments to
the APP. The analysis should be used during daily inspections to ensure the
implementation and effectiveness of the activity's safety and health
controls.
The AHA list will be reviewed periodically (at least monthly) at the
Contractor supervisory safety meeting and updated as necessary when
procedures, scheduling, or hazards change.
Develop the activity hazard analyses using the project schedule as the
basis for the activities performed. Any activities listed on the project
schedule will require an AHA. The AHAs will be developed by the
contractor, supplier or subcontractor and provided to the prime contractor
T
for submittal to the Contracting Officer.
1.8 DISPLAY OF SAFETY INFORMATION

AF
Within one10 calendar days after commencement of work, erect a safety
bulletin board at the job site. Where size, duration, or logistics of
project do not facilitate a bulletin board, an alternative method,
acceptable to the Contracting Officer, that is accessible and includes all
mandatory information for employee and visitor review, shall be deemed as
meeting the requirement for a bulletin board. Include and maintain
information on safety bulletin board as required by EM 385-1-1, section
01.A.06. Additional items required to be posted include:
R
a. Confined space entry permit.
b. Hot work permit.

D
1.9 SITE SAFETY REFERENCE MATERIALS
Maintain safety-related references applicable to the project, including

those listed in the article "References." Maintain applicable equipment
manufacturer's manuals.
1.10 EMERGENCY MEDICAL TREATMENT
Contractors will arrange for their own emergency medical treatment.

Government has no responsibility to provide emergency medical treatment.
1.11 NOTIFICATIONS and REPORTS
1.11.1 Accident Notification
Notify the Contracting Officer as soon as practical, but no more than four
hours after any accident meeting the definition of Recordable Injuries or
Illnesses or High Visibility Accidents, property damage equal to or greater
than $2,000, or any weight handling equipment accident. Do not proceed with
crane operations until cause is determined and corrective actions have been
implemented to the satisfaction of the Contracting Officer. Within
notification include contractor name; contract title; type of contract;

name of activity, installation or location where accident occurred; date
and time of accident; names of personnel injured; extent of property
damage, if any; extent of injury, if known, and brief description of
accident (to include type of construction equipment used, PPE used, etc.).
Preserve the conditions and evidence on the accident site until the
Government investigation team arrives on-site and Government investigation
is conducted.
1.11.2 Accident Reports
a. Conduct an accident investigation for recordable injuries and

illnesses, for Medical Treatment defined in paragraph DEFINITIONS,
property damage accidents resulting in at least $20,000 in damages, and
near misses as defined in EM 385-1-1, to establish the root cause(s) of
the accident. Complete the applicable USACE Accident Report Form 3394,
and provide the report to the Contracting Officer within 5 calendar days
of the accident. The Contracting Officer will provide copies of any
required or special forms.
b. Conduct an accident investigation for any weight handling equipment
T
accident (including rigging gear accidents) to establish the root
cause(s) of the accident, complete the WHE Accident Report (Crane and
Rigging Gear) form and provide the report to the Contracting Officer
within 30 calendar days of the accident. Do not proceed with crane
AF
operations until cause is determined and corrective actions have been
implemented to the satisfaction of the contracting officer. The
Contracting Officer will provide a blank copy of the accident report
form.
1.11.3 Crane Reports
Submit crane inspection reports required in accordance with USACE EM 385-1-1,

R
Appendix I and as specified herein with Daily Reports of Inspections.
1.11.4 Certificate of Compliance
Provide a Certificate of Compliance for each crane entering an activity

D
under this contract. State within the certificate that the crane and
rigging gear meet applicable OSHA regulations (with the Contractor citing
which OSHA regulations are applicable, e.g., cranes used in construction,
demolition, or maintenance comply with 29 CFR 1926 and USACE EM 385-1-1
Section 16 and Appendix I. Certify on the Certificate of Compliance that
the crane operator(s) is qualified and trained in the operation of the
crane to be used. Also certify that all of its crane operators working on
the DOD activity have been trained in the proper use of all safety devices
(e.g., anti-two block devices). Post certifications on the crane.
1.12 HOT WORK
Submit and obtain a written permit prior to performing "Hot Work" (welding,
cutting, etc.) or operating other flame-producing/spark producing devices,
from the Installation Fire Departments. A permit is required from the
Explosives Safety Office for work in and around where explosives are
processed, stored, or handled. CONTRACTORS ARE REQUIRED TO MEET ALL
CRITERIA BEFORE A PERMIT IS ISSUED. Provide at least two (2) twenty (20)
pound 4A:20 BC rated extinguishers for normal "Hot Work". All
extinguishers shall be current inspection tagged, approved safety pin and
tamper resistant seal. It is also mandatory to have a designated FIRE
WATCH for any "Hot Work" done at this activity. The Fire Watch shall be
trained in accordance with NFPA 51B and remain on-site for a minimum of 30
minutes after completion of the task or as specified on the hot work permit.
When starting work in the facility, require personnel to familiarize

themselves with the location of the nearest fire alarm boxes and be in
possession of emergency Installation Fire Department phone number. ANY
FIRE, NO MATTER HOW SMALL, SHALL BE REPORTED TO THE RESPONSIBLE
INSTALLATION FIRE DEPARTMENT IMMEDIATELY.
1.13 RADIATION SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
License Certificates for radiation materials and equipment shall be

submitted to the Contracting Officer and Radiation Safety Office (RSO) for
all specialized and licensed material and equipment that could cause fatal
harm to construction personnel or to the construction project.
Workers shall be protected from radiation exposure in accordance with

10 CFR 20. Standards for Protection Against Radiation
Loss of radioactive material shall be reported immediately to the
T
Actual exposure of the radiographic film or unshielding the source shall

not be initiated until after 5 p.m. on weekdays.
AF
In instances where radiography is scheduled near or adjacent to buildings
or areas having limited access or one-way doors, no assumptions shall be
made as to building occupancy. Where necessary, the Contracting Officer
will direct the Contractor to conduct an actual building entry, search, and
alert. Where removal of personnel from such a building cannot be
accomplished and it is otherwise safe to proceed with the radiography, a
fully instructed employee shall be positioned inside such building or area
R
to prevent exiting while external radiographic operations are in process.
Transportation of Regulated Amounts of Radioactive Material will comply
with 49 CFR, Subchapter C, Hazardous Material Regulations. Local Fire
authorities and the site Radiation Safety officer (RSO) shall be notified
of any Radioactive Material use.
D
Transmitter Requirements: The base policy concerning the use of

transmitters such as radios, cell phones, etc., must be adhered to by all
contractor personnel. They must also obey Emissions control (EMCON)
restrictions.
1.14 FACILITY OCCUPANCY CLOSURE
Streets, walks, and other facilities occupied and used by the Government
shall not be closed or obstructed without written permission from the
1.15 GAS PROTECTION
Contractor shall have one or more employees properly trained and

experienced in operation and calibration of gas testing equipment and
formally qualified as gas inspectors who shall be on duty during times
workers are in confined spaces. Their primary functions shall be to test
for gas and operate testing equipment. Unless equipment of constant
supervisory type with automatic alarm is employed, gas tests shall be made
at least every 2 hours or more often when character of ground or experience
indicates gas may be encountered. A gas test shall be made before workmen
are permitted to enter the excavation after an idle period exceeding
one-half hour.
Readings shall be permanently recorded daily, indicating the concentration

of gas, point of test, and time of test. Submit copies of the gas test
readings to the Contracting Officer at the end of each work day.
Special requirements, coordination, and precautions will apply to areas

that contain a hazardous atmosphere or, by virtue of their use or physical
character, may be oxygen deficient. A check by Government is required
prior to entering confined space. Surveillance and monitoring shall be
required in these types of work spaces by both Contractor and Government
personnel.
1.16 SEVERE STORM PLAN
In the event of a severe storm warning, the Contractor must:
a. Secure outside equipment and materials and place materials that could
be damaged in protected areas.
T
b. Check surrounding area, including roof, for loose material, equipment,
debris, and other objects that could be blown away or against existing
facilities.
AF
c. Ensure that temporary erosion controls are adequate.
1.17 CONFINED SPACE ENTRY REQUIREMENTS.
Contractors entering and working in confined spaces while performing

general industry work are required to follow the requirements of OSHA
29 CFR 1926 and comply with the requirements in Section 34 of EM 385-1-1,
R
OSHA 29 CFR 1910, and OSHA 29 CFR 1910.146.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not used.
D
2.1 CONFINED SPACE SIGNAGE
Provide permanent signs integral to or securely attached to access covers

for new permit-required confined spaces. Signs wording:
"DANGER--PERMIT-REQUIRED CONFINED SPACE - DO NOT ENTER -" in bold letters a
minimum of 25 mm in height and constructed to be clearly legible with all
paint removed. The signal word "DANGER" shall be red and readable from
1520 mm.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 CONSTRUCTION AND OTHER WORK
Comply with USACE EM 385-1-1, NFPA 70, NFPA 70E, NFPA 241, the APP, the
AHA, Federal and State OSHA regulations, and other related submittals and
activity fire and safety regulations. The most stringent standard prevails.
PPE is governed in all areas by the nature of the work the employee is
performing. Use personal hearing protection at all times in designated
noise hazardous areas or when performing noise hazardous tasks. Safety
glasses must be carried/available on each person.
Mandatory PPE includes:
a. Hard Hat
b. Appropriate Safety Shoes
c. Reflective Vests
3.1.1 Hazardous Material Use
Each hazardous material must receive approval from the Contracting Office
or their designated representative prior to being brought onto the job site
or prior to any other use in connection with this contract. Allow a
minimum of 10 working days for processing of the request for use of a
hazardous material.
3.1.2 Hazardous Material Exclusions
Notwithstanding any other hazardous material used in this contract,
T
radioactive materials or instruments capable of producing
ionizing/non-ionizing radiation (with the exception of radioactive material
and devices used in accordance with USACE EM 385-1-1 such as nuclear
density meters for compaction testing and laboratory equipment with
AF
radioactive sources) as well as materials which contain asbestos, mercury
or polychlorinated biphenyls, di-isocynates, lead-based paint are
prohibited. The Contracting Officer, upon written request by the
Contractor, may consider exceptions to the use of any of the above excluded
materials. Low mercury lamps used within fluorescent lighting fixtures are
allowed as an exception without further Contracting Officer approval.
Notify the Radiation Safety Officer (RSO) prior to excepted items of
radioactive material and devices being brought on base.
R
3.1.3 Unforeseen Hazardous Material
The design should have identified materials such as PCB, lead paint, and
friable and non-friable asbestos and other OSHA regulated chemicals (i.e.
D
29 CFR Part 1910.1000). If additional material, not indicated, that may be

hazardous to human health upon disturbance during construction operations
is encountered, stop that portion of work and notify the Contracting
Officer immediately. Within 15 calendar days the Government will determine
if the material is hazardous. If material is not hazardous or poses no
danger, the Government will direct the Contractor to proceed without
change. If material is hazardous and handling of the material is necessary
to accomplish the work, the Government will issue a modification pursuant
to "FAR 52.243-4, Changes" and "FAR 52.236-2, Differing Site Conditions."
3.2 PRE-OUTAGE COORDINATION MEETING
Apply for utility outages at least 15 days in advance. As a minimum, the

request should include the location of the outage, utilities being
affected, duration of outage and any necessary sketches. Special
requirements for electrical outage requests are contained elsewhere in this
specification section. Once approved, and prior to beginning work on the
utility system requiring shut down, attend a pre-outage coordination
meeting with the Contracting Officer and the Installation representative
to review the scope of work and the lock-out/tag-out procedures for worker
protection. No work will be performed on energized electrical circuits
unless proof is provided that no other means exist.
3.3 CONTROL OF HAZARDOUS ENERGY (LOCKOUT/TAGOUT)
Ensure that each employee is familiar with and complies with these
procedures and USACE EM 385-1-1, Section 12, Control of Hazardous Energy.
3.4 FALL HAZARD PROTECTION AND PREVENTION PROGRAM
Establish a fall protection and prevention program, for the protection of

all employees exposed to fall hazards. Within the program include company
policy, identify responsibilities, education and training requirements,
fall hazard identification, prevention and control measures, inspection,
storage, care and maintenance of fall protection equipment and rescue and
evacuation procedures in accordance with ASSE/SAFE Z359.1.
3.4.1 Training
Institute a fall protection training program. As part of the Fall Hazard

Protection and Prevention Program, provide training for each employee who
might be exposed to fall hazards. Provide training by a competent person
T
for fall protection in accordance with USACE EM 385-1-1, Section 21.B.
3.4.2 Fall Protection Equipment and Systems

AF
Enforce use of the fall protection equipment and systems designated for
each specific work activity in the Fall Protection and Prevention Plan
and/or AHA at all times when an employee is exposed to a fall hazard.
Protect employees from fall hazards as specified in EM 385-1-1, Section
21. In addition to the required fall protection systems, safety skiff,
personal floatation devices, life rings etc., are required when working
above or next to water in accordance with USACE EM 385-1-1, Paragraphs 21.N
through 21.N.04. Personal fall arrest systems are required when working
R
from an articulating or extendible boom, swing stages, or suspended
platform. In addition, personal fall arrest systems are required when
operating other equipment such as scissor lifts if the work platform is
capable of being positioned outside the wheelbase. The need for tying-off
in such equipment is to prevent ejection of the employee from the equipment
D
during raising, lowering, or travel. Fall protection must comply with

29 CFR 1926.500, Subpart M, USACE EM 385-1-1 and ASSE/SAFE A10.32.
3.4.2.1 Personal Fall Arrest Equipment
Personal fall arrest equipment, systems, subsystems, and components shall

meet ASSE/SAFE Z359.1. Only a full-body harness with a shock-absorbing
lanyard or self-retracting lanyard is an acceptable personal fall arrest
body support device. Body belts may only be used as a positioning device
system (for uses such as steel reinforcing assembly and in addition to an
approved fall arrest system). Harnesses shall have a fall arrest
attachment affixed to the body support (usually a Dorsal D-ring) and
specifically designated for attachment to the rest of the system. Only
locking snap hooks and carabiners shall be used. Webbing, straps, and ropes
shall be made of synthetic fiber. The maximum free fall distance when using
fall arrest equipment shall not exceed 1.8 m. The total fall distance and
any swinging of the worker (pendulum-like motion) that can occur during a
fall shall always be taken into consideration when attaching a person to a
fall arrest system.
3.4.3 Fall Protection for Roofing Work
Implement fall protection controls based on the type of roof being

constructed and work being performed. Evaluate the roof area to be
accessed for its structural integrity including weight-bearing capabilities
for the projected loading.
a. Low Sloped Roofs:
(1) For work within 1.8 m of an edge, on low-slope roofs, protect

personnel from falling by use of personal fall arrest systems,
guardrails, or safety nets. A safety monitoring system is not
adequate fall protection and is not authorized.
(2) For work greater than 1.8 m from an edge, erect and install
warning lines in accordance with 29 CFR 1926.500 and USACE
EM 385-1-1.
b. Steep-Sloped Roofs: Work on steep-sloped roofs requires a personal

fall arrest system, guardrails with toe-boards, or safety nets. This
requirement also includes residential or housing type construction.
T
3.4.4 Horizontal Lifelines
Design, install, certify and use under the supervision of a qualified

AF
person horizontal lifelines for fall protection as part of a complete fall
arrest system which maintains a safety factor of 2 (29 CFR 1926.500).
3.4.5 Guardrails and Safety Nets
Design, install and use guardrails and safety nets in accordance with
EM 385-1-1 and 29 CFR 1926 Subpart M.
R
3.4.6 Rescue and Evacuation Procedures
When personal fall arrest systems are used, ensure that the mishap victim
can self-rescue or can be rescued promptly should a fall occur. Prepare a
Rescue and Evacuation Plan and include a detailed discussion of the
D
following: methods of rescue; methods of self-rescue; equipment used;

training requirement; specialized training for the rescuers; procedures for
requesting rescue and medical assistance; and transportation routes to a
medical facility. Include the Rescue and Evacuation Plan within the
Activity Hazard Analysis (AHA) for the phase of work, in the Fall
Protection and Prevention (FP&P) Plan, and the Accident Prevention Plan
(APP).
3.5 SCAFFOLDING
Provide employees with a safe means of access to the work area on the
scaffold. Climbing of any scaffold braces or supports not specifically
designed for access is prohibited. Access scaffold platforms greater than
6 m maximum in height by use of a scaffold stair system. Do not use
vertical ladders commonly provided by scaffold system manufacturers for
accessing scaffold platforms greater than 6 m maximum in height. The use
of an adequate gate is required. Ensure that employees are qualified to
perform scaffold erection and dismantling. Do not use scaffold without the
capability of supporting at least four times the maximum intended load or
without appropriate fall protection as delineated in the accepted fall
protection and prevention plan. Stationary scaffolds must be attached to
structural building components to safeguard against tipping forward or

backward. Give special care to ensure scaffold systems are not
overloaded. Side brackets used to extend scaffold platforms on
self-supported scaffold systems for the storage of material is prohibited.
The first tie-in shall be at the height equal to 4 times the width of the
smallest dimension of the scaffold base. Place work platforms on mud
sills. Scaffold or work platform erectors shall have fall protection
during the erection and dismantling of scaffolding or work platforms that
are more than six feet. Delineate fall protection requirements when
working above six feet or above dangerous operations in the Fall Protection
and Prevention (FP&P) Plan and Activity Hazard Analysis (AHA) for the phase
of work.
3.6 EQUIPMENT
3.6.1 Material Handling Equipment
a. Material handling equipment such as forklifts shall not be modified

with work platform attachments for supporting employees unless
specifically delineated in the manufacturer's printed operating
instructions.
T
b. The use of hooks on equipment for lifting of material must be in
accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions.
c.
AF
Operators of forklifts or power industrial trucks shall be licensed in
accordance with OSHA.
3.6.2 Weight Handling Equipment
a. Equip cranes and derricks as specified in EM 385-1-1, section 16.
b. Notify the Contracting Officer 15 days in advance of any cranes

R
entering the activity so that necessary quality assurance spot checks
can be coordinated.
c. Comply with the crane manufacturer's specifications and limitations for

erection and operation of cranes and hoists used in support of the
D
work. Perform erection under the supervision of a designated person

(as defined in ASME B30.5). Perform all testing in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommended procedures.
e. Under no circumstance shall a Contractor make a lift at or above 90

percent of the cranes rated capacity in any configuration.
f. When operating in the vicinity of overhead transmission lines,

operators and riggers shall be alert to this special hazard and follow
the requirements of USACE EM 385-1-1 Section 11, NAVFAC P-307 Figure
10-3 and ASME B30.5 or ASME B30.22 as applicable.
g. Do not crane suspended personnel work platforms (baskets) unless the

Contractor proves that using any other access to the work location
would provide a greater hazard to the workers or is impossible. Do not
lift personnel with a line hoist or friction crane.
h. Inspect, maintain, and recharge portable fire extinguishers as

specified in NFPA 10, Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers.
i. All employees must keep clear of loads about to be lifted and of
suspended loads.
j. Use cribbing when performing lifts on outriggers.
k. The crane hook/block must be positioned directly over the load. Side
loading of the crane is prohibited.
l. A physical barricade must be positioned to prevent personnel from

entering the counterweight swing (tail swing) area of the crane.
m. Certification records which include the date of inspection, signature

of the person performing the inspection, and the serial number or other
identifier of the crane that was inspected shall always be available
for review by Contracting Officer personnel.
n. Written reports listing the load test procedures used along with any
repairs or alterations performed on the crane shall be available for
review by Contracting Officer personnel.
o. Certify that all crane operators have been trained in proper use of all
safety devices (e.g. anti-two block devices).
T
p. Take steps to ensure that wind speed does not contribute to loss of
control of the load during lifting operations. Prior to conducting
lifting operations set a maximum wind speed at which a crane can be
AF
safely operated based on the equipment being used, the load being
lifted, experience of operators and riggers, and hazards on the work
site. This maximum wind speed determination shall be included as part
of the activity hazard analysis plan for that operation.
3.6.3 Equipment and Mechanized Equipment
a. Proof of qualifications for operator shall be kept on the project site

R
for review.
b. Manufacture specifications or owner's manual for the equipment shall be

on-site and reviewed for additional safety precautions or requirements
that are sometimes not identified by OSHA or USACE EM 385-1-1.
D
Incorporate such additional safety precautions or requirements into the

AHAs.
3.6.4 USE OF EXPLOSIVES
Explosives shall not be used or brought to the project site without prior
written approval from the Contracting Officer. Such approval shall not
relieve the Contractor of responsibility for injury to persons or for
damage to property due to blasting operations.
3.7 EXCAVATIONS
Soil classification must be performed by a competent person in accordance

with 29 CFR 1926 and EM 385-1-1.
3.7.1 Utility Locations
All underground utilities in the work area must be positively identified by

a third party, independent, private utility locating company in addition to
any station locating service and coordinated with the station utility
department.
3.7.2 Utility Location Verification
Physically verify underground utility locations, including utility depth,

by hand digging using wood or fiberglass handled tools when any adjacent
construction work is expected to come within three feet of the underground
system.
3.7.3 Utilities Within and Under Concrete, Bituminous Asphalt, and Other
Impervious Surfaces
Utilities located within and under concrete slabs or pier structures,

bridges, parking areas, and the like, are extremely difficult to identify.
Whenever contract work involves chipping, saw cutting, or core drilling
through concrete, bituminous asphalt or other impervious surfaces, the
existing utility location must be coordinated with station utility
departments in addition to location and depth verification by a third
party, independent, private locating company. The third party,
independent, private locating company shall locate utility depth by use of
Ground Penetrating Radar (GPR), X-ray, bore scope, or ultrasound prior to
the start of demolition and construction. Outages to isolate utility
T
systems must be used in circumstances where utilities are unable to be
positively identified. The use of historical drawings does not alleviate
the contractor from meeting this requirement.
3.8 ELECTRICAL
AF
3.9.1 Portable Extension Cords
Size portable extension cords in accordance with manufacturer ratings for

the tool to be powered and protected from damage. Immediately removed from
service all damaged extension cords. Portable extension cords shall meet
the requirements of EM 385-1-1, NFPA 70E, and OSHA electrical standards.
R
3.9 WORK IN CONFINED SPACES
Comply with the requirements in Section 34 of USACE EM 385-1-1, OSHA

29 CFR 1910, OSHA 29 CFR 1910.146, OSHA Directive CPL 2.100 and OSHA
D
29 CFR 1926. Any potential for a hazard in the confined space requires a
permit system to be used.
a. Entry Procedures. Prohibit entry into a confined space by personnel

for any purpose, including hot work, until the qualified person has
conducted appropriate tests to ensure the confined or enclosed space is
safe for the work intended and that all potential hazards are
controlled or eliminated and documented. (See Section 34 of USACE
EM 385-1-1 for entry procedures.) All hazards pertaining to the space
shall be reviewed with each employee during review of the AHA.
b. Forced air ventilation is required for all confined space entry

operations and the minimum air exchange requirements must be maintained
to ensure exposure to any hazardous atmosphere is kept below its'
action level.
c. Sewer wet wells require continuous atmosphere monitoring with audible

alarm for toxic gas detection.
3.10 ATTACHMENT
Attachment A - Form A-02 Accident Prevention Plan Checklist
T
AF
R
D
D
R
AF
T
D
R
AF
T
D
R
AF
T
D
R
AF
T
D
R
AF
T
SECTION 01 42 00
SOURCES FOR REFERENCE PUBLICATIONS

11/14
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
Various publications are referenced in other sections of the specifications

to establish requirements for the work. These references are identified in
each section by document number, date and title. The document number used
in the citation is the number assigned by the standards producing
organization (e.g. ASTM B564 Standard Specification for Nickel Alloy
Forgings). However, when the standards producing organization has not
assigned a number to a document, an identifying number has been assigned
for reference purposes.
1.2 ORDERING INFORMATION
T
The addresses of the standards publishing organizations whose documents are
referenced in other sections of these specifications are listed below, and
if the source of the publications is different from the address of the
AF
sponsoring organization, that information is also provided. Documents
listed in the specifications with numbers which were not assigned by the
standards producing organization should be ordered from the source by title
rather than by number.
AMERICAN SOCIETY OF SAFETY ENGINEERS (ASSE/SAFE)

1800 East Oakton Street
Des Plaines, IL 60018
R
Ph: 847-699-2929
Internet: http://www.asse.org
ASME INTERNATIONAL (ASME)

Two Park Avenue, M/S 10E
D
New York, NY 10016-5990

Ph: 800-843-2763
Fax: 973-882-1717
E-mail: customercare@asme.org
Internet: http://www.asme.org
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)

100 Barr Harbor Drive, P.O. Box C700
West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959
Ph: 877-909-2786
Internet: http://www.astm.org
FOUNDATION FOR CROSS-CONNECTION CONTROL AND HYDRAULIC RESEARCH

(FCCCHR)
University of South California
Research Annex 219
3716 South Hope Street
Los Angeles, CA 90089-7700
Ph: 213-740-2032 or 866-545-6340
Fax: 213-740-8399
E-mail: fccchr@usc.edu
Internet: http://www.usc.edu/dept/fccchr
GREEN SEAL (GS)

1001 Connecticut Avenue, NW
Suite 827
Washington, DC 20036-5525
Ph: 202-872-6400
Fax: 202-872-4324
Internet: http://www.greenseal.org

1 Batterymarch Park
Quincy, MA 02169-7471
Ph: 617-770-3000
Fax: 617-770-0700
Internet: http://www.nfpa.org
U.S. ARMY (DA)

U.S. Army Publishing Directorate
Ph: 703-614-3634
Internet: http://www.apd.army.mil
T
CRD-C DOCUMENTS available on Internet:
http://www.wbdg.org/ccb/browse_cat.php?c=68
AF
Order Other Documents from:
USACE Publications Depot
Attn: CEHEC-IM-PD
2803 52nd Avenue
Hyattsville, MD 20781-1102
Ph: 301-394-0081
Fax: 301-394-0084
E-mail: pubs-army@usace.army.mil
R
Internet: http://www.publications.usace.army.mil/
or
http://www.hnc.usace.army.mil/Missions/Engineering/TECHINFO.aspx
U.S. DEPARTMENT OF AGRICULTURE (USDA)

D
Order AMS Publications from:

AGRICULTURAL MARKETING SERVICE (AMS)
Seed Regulatory and Testing Branch
801 Summit Crossing Place, Suite C
Gastonia, NC 28054-2193
Ph: 704-810-8871
Fax: 704-852-4189
E-mail: seed.ams@usda.gov
Internet: http://www.ams.usda.gov/lsg/seed.htm
Order Other Publications from:
U.S. Department of Agriculture, Rural Utilities Program
USDA Rural Development, Room 4051-S
Mail Stop 1510
1400 Independence Avenue SW
Phone: (202) 720-9540
TTY: (800) 877-8339 (Federal Relay Service)
Fax: (202) 720-1725
Internet: http://www.rurdev.usda.gov/utilities_lp.html

Order DOD Documents from:
Room 3A750-The Pentagon
1400 Defense Pentagon
Ph: 703-571-3343
FAX: 215-697-1462
E-mail: customerservice@ntis.gov
Internet: http://www.ntis.gov
Obtain Military Specifications, Standards and Related Publications
from:
Acquisition Streamlining and Standardization Information System
(ASSIST)
Department of Defense Single Stock Point (DODSSP)
Document Automation and Production Service (DAPS)
Building 4/D
700 Robbins Avenue
Philadelphia, PA 19111-5094
Ph: 215-697-6396 - for account/password issues
Internet: http://assist.daps.dla.mil/online/start/; account
registration required
T
Obtain Unified Facilities Criteria (UFC) from:
Whole Building Design Guide (WBDG)
National Institute of Building Sciences (NIBS)
1090 Vermont Avenue NW, Suite 700
AF
Washington, CD 20005
Ph: 202-289-7800
Fax: 202-289-1092
Internet: http://www.wbdg.org/references/docs_refs.php
U.S. DEPARTMENT OF ENERGY (DOE)

1000 Independence Avenue Southwest
Washington, D.C. 20585
R
Internet: www.eere.energy.gov
U.S. FEDERAL AVIATION ADMINISTRATION (FAA)

Order for sale documents from:
Superintendent of Documents
D
U.S. Government Printing Office (GPO)

710 North Capitol Street, NW
Washington, DC 20401
Ph: 202-512-1800
Fax: 202-512-2104
E-mail: contactcenter@gpo.gov
Internet: http://www.gpoaccess.gov
Order free documents from:
Federal Aviation Administration
Department of Transportation
800 Independence Avenue, SW
Ph: 1-866-835-5322
Internet: http://www.faa.gov
U. S. GREEN BUILDING COUNCIL (USGBC)

2101 L St NW, Suite 500
Washington, D.C. 20037
Ph: 800-795-1747
Internet: http://www.usgbc.org

8601 Adelphi Road
College Park, MD 20740-6001
Ph: 866-272-6272
Fax: 301-837-0483
Internet: http://www.archives.gov
Order documents from:
Superintendent of Documents
U.S.Government Printing Office (GPO)
710 North Capitol Street, NW
Ph: 202-512-1800
Fax: 202-512-2104
E-mail: contactcenter@gpo.gov
Internet: http://www.gpoaccess.gov
U.S. NAVAL FACILITIES ENGINEERING COMMAND (NAVFAC)

1322 Patterson Ave. SE, Suite 1000
Washington Navy Yard, DC 20374-5065
Ph: 202-685-9387
Internet: http://www.navfac.navy.mil
T
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not used
AF
PART 3 EXECUTION
Not used
R
D
SECTION 01 42 15
METRIC MEASUREMENTS
02/14
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

ASTM SI10 (2010) American National Standard for Use

of the International System of Units (SI):
The Modern Metric System
T
1.2 GENERAL
This project includes metric units of measurements. The metric units used
are the International System of Units (SI) developed and maintained by the
AF
General Conference on Weights and Measures (CGPM); the name International
System of Units and the international abbreviation SI were adopted by the
11th CGPM in 1960. When both metric and English inch-pound (I-P)
measurements are includedthe specification may contain measurements for
products that are manufactured to an industry recognized rounded metric
(hard metric) dimensions but are allowed to be substituted by I-P
products, to indicate industry and/or Government standards, test values or
other controlling factors, such as the code requirements where I-P values
R
are needed for clarity, or to trace back to the referenced standards, test
values or codes.
1.3 USE OF MEASUREMENTS IN SPECIFICATIONS

D
Measurements in specifications shall be either in SI or I-P units as

indicated, except as otherwise authorized. When only SI or I-P
measurements are specified for a product, the product shall be procured in
the specified units (SI or I-P) unless otherwise authorized by the
Contracting Officer. The Contractor is responsible for all associated
labor and materials when authorized to substitute one system of units for
another and for the final assembly and performance of the specified work
and/or products.
1.3.1 Hard Metric
Hard metric measurements are often used for field data such as distance
from one point to another or distance above the floor. Products are
considered to be hard metric when they are manufactured to metric
dimensions or have an industry recognized metric designation.
1.3.2 Soft Metric
a. A soft metric measurement is a non-mathematical, industry related

conversion. Soft metric measurements are used for measurements
pertaining to products, test values, and other situations where the I-P
units are the standard for manufacture, verification, or other

controlling factor.
b. A soft metric measurement is also indicated for products that are

manufactured in industry designated metric dimensions but are required
by law to allow substitute I-P products.
1.3.3 Neutral
A neutral measurement is indicated by an identifier which has no expressed

relation to either an SI or an I-P value (e.g., American Wire Gage (AWG)
which indicates thickness but in itself is neither SI nor I-P).
1.4 COORDINATION
Discrepancies, such as mismatches or product unavailability, arising from

use of both metric and non-metric measurements and discrepancies between
the measurements in the specifications and the measurements in the drawings
shall be brought to the attention of the Contracting Officer for resolution.
1.5 RELATIONSHIP TO SUBMITTALS
T
Submittals for Government approval or for information only shall cover the
SI or I-P products actually being furnished for the project. Submit the
required drawings and calculations in the same units used in the contract
AF
documents describing the product or requirement unless otherwise instructed
or approved. Use ASTM SI10 as the basis for establishing metric
measurements required to be used in submittals.
-- End of Document --
R
D
SECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 01 45 00.00 10
QUALITY CONTROL
02/10
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
1.2 SUBMITTALS
PART 2 PRODUCTS
T
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

3.2 QUALITY CONTROL PLAN
3.2.1
AF
Content of the CQC Plan
3.2.2 Additional Requirements for Design Quality Control (DQC) Plan
3.2.3 Acceptance of Plan
3.2.4 Notification of Changes
3.3 COORDINATION MEETING
3.4 QUALITY CONTROL ORGANIZATION
3.4.1 Personnel Requirements
3.4.2 CQC System Manager
R
3.4.3 CQC Personnel
3.4.4 Additional Requirement
3.4.5 Organizational Changes
3.5 SUBMITTALS AND DELIVERABLES
3.6 CONTROL
D
3.6.1 Preparatory Phase

3.6.2 Initial Phase
3.6.3 Follow-up Phase
3.6.4 Additional Preparatory and Initial Phases
3.7 TESTS
3.7.1 Testing Procedure
3.7.2 Testing Laboratories
3.7.2.1 Capability Check
3.7.2.2 Capability Recheck
3.7.3 Onsite Laboratory
3.8 COMPLETION INSPECTION
3.8.1 Punch-Out Inspection
3.8.2 Pre-Final Inspection
3.8.3 Final Acceptance Inspection
3.9 DOCUMENTATION
3.10 NOTIFICATION OF NONCOMPLIANCE
-- End of Section Table of Contents --
SECTION 01 45 00.00 10 Page 1

SECTION 01 45 00.00 10
QUALITY CONTROL
02/10
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

ASTM D3740 (2012a) Minimum Requirements for Agencies

Engaged in the Testing and/or Inspection
of Soil and Rock as Used in Engineering
T
Design and Construction
ASTM E329 (2014a) Standard Specification for

Agencies Engaged in the Testing and/or
AF Inspection of Materials Used in
Construction
ER 1110-1-12 (2006; Change 1) Engineering and Design --

Quality Management
R
1.2 SUBMITTALS

D
Contractor Quality Control (CQC) Plan; G M/R

Design Quality Control (DQC) Plan; G M/R
SD-05 Design Data
Discipline-Specific Checklists; G M
SD-06 Test Reports
Verification Statement; G M
SECTION 01 45 00.00 10 Page 2

PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Used
PART 3 EXECUTION
Establish and maintain an effective quality control (QC) system that

complies with the Contract Clause titled "Inspection of Construction." QC
consist of plans, procedures, and organization necessary to produce an end
product which complies with the contract requirements. The QC system must
cover all construction design and construction operations, both onsite and
offsite, and be keyed to the proposed construction design and construction
sequence. The project superintendent will be held responsible for the
quality of work and is subject to removal by the Contracting Officer for
non-compliance with the quality requirements specified in the contract. In
this context the highest level manager responsible for the overall
construction activities at the site, including quality and production is
the project superintendent. The project superintendent must maintain a
physical presence at the site at all times and is responsible for all
T
construction and related activities at the site, except as otherwise
acceptable to the Contracting Officer.
3.2 QUALITY CONTROL PLAN

AF
Submit no later than 45 days after receipt of notice to proceed, the
Contractor Quality Control (CQC) Plan proposed to implement the
requirements of the Contract Clause titled "Inspection of Construction."
The Government will consider an interim plan for the first 90 days of
operation. Construction Design and construction will be permitted to begin
only after acceptance of the CQC Plan or acceptance of an interim plan
applicable to the particular feature of work to be started. Work outside
R
of the accepted interim plan will not be permitted to begin until
acceptance of a CQC Plan or another interim plan containing the additional
work.
3.2.1 Content of the CQC Plan

D
Include, as a minimum, the following to cover all design and construction

construction operations, both onsite and offsite, including work by
subcontractors, fabricators, suppliers, and purchasing agents
subcontractors, designers of record, consultants, and architect/engineers
(AE):
a. A description of the quality control organization, including a chart

showing lines of authority and acknowledgment that the CQC staff will
implement the three phase control system for all aspects of the work
specified. Include a CQC System Manager who reports to the project
superintendent.
b. The name, qualifications (in resume/CVformat), duties,

responsibilities, and authorities of each person assigned a CQC
function.
c. A copy of the letter to the CQC System Manager signed by an authorized

official of the firm which describes the responsibilities and delegates
sufficient authorities to adequately perform the functions of the CQC
System Manager, including authority to stop work which is not in
SECTION 01 45 00.00 10 Page 3

compliance with the contract. Letters of direction to all other

various quality control representatives outlining duties, authorities,
and responsibilities will be issued by the CQC System Manager. Copies
of these letters must be furnished to the Government.
d. Procedures for scheduling, reviewing, certifying, and managing

submittals, including those of subcontractors, offsite fabricators,
suppliers, and purchasing agentssubcontractors, designers of record,
consultants, and architect engineers (AE). These procedures must be in
accordance with Section 01 33 00.05 20 CONSTRUCTION SUBMITTAL
PROCEDURES and Section 01 33 10.05 20 DESIGN SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES.
e. Control, verification, and acceptance testing procedures for each

specific test to include the test name, specification paragraph
requiring test, feature of work to be tested, test frequency, and
person responsible for each test. (Laboratory facilities approved by
the Contracting Officer must be used.)
f. Procedures for tracking preparatory, initial, and follow-up control

phases and control, verification, and acceptance tests including
documentation.
T
g. Procedures for tracking constructiondesign and construction
deficiencies from identification through acceptable corrective action.
Establish verification procedures that identified deficiencies have
been corrected.
AF
h. Reporting procedures, including proposed reporting formats.
i. A list of the definable features of work. A definable feature of work

is a task which is separate and distinct from other tasks, has separate
control requirements, and may be identified by different trades or
disciplines, or it may be work by the same trade in a different
R
environment. Although each section of the specifications may generally
be considered as a definable feature of work, there are frequently more
than one definable features under a particular section. This list will
be agreed upon during the coordination meeting.
D
3.2.2 Additional Requirements for Design Quality Control (DQC) Plan
The following additional requirements apply to the Design Quality Control

(DQC) plan:
a. Submit and maintain a Design Quality Control (DQC) Plan as an effective

quality control program which will assure that all services required by
this design-build contract are performed and provided in a manner that
meets professional architectural and engineering quality standards. As
a minimum, all documents must be technically reviewed by competent,
independent reviewers identified in the DQC Plan. The same element
that produced the product may not perform the independent technical
review (ITR). Correct errors and deficiencies in the design documents
prior to submitting them to the Government.
b. Include the design schedule in the master project schedule, showing the
sequence of events involved in carrying out the project design tasks
within the specific contract period. This should be at a detailed
level of scheduling sufficient to identify all major design tasks,
including those that control the flow of work. Include review and
correction periods associated with each item. This should be a forward
SECTION 01 45 00.00 10 Page 4

planning as well as a project monitoring tool. The schedule reflects

calendar days and not dates for each activity. If the schedule is
changed, submit a revised schedule reflecting the change within 7
calendar days. Include in the DQC Plan the discipline-specific
checklists to be used during the design and quality control of each
submittal. Submit at each design phase as part of the project
documentation these completed discipline-specific checklists.
ER 1110-1-12 provided some useful information in developing checklists.
c. Implement the DQC Plan by a Design Quality Control Manager who has the
responsibility of being cognizant of and assuring that all documents on
the project have been coordinated. This individual must be a person
who has verifiable engineering or architectural design experience and
is a registered professional engineer or architect. Notify the
Contracting Officer, in writing, of the name of the individual, and the
name of an alternate person assigned to the position.
The Contracting Officer will notify the Contractor in writing of the

acceptance of the DQC Plan. After acceptance, any changes proposed by the
Contractor are subject to the acceptance of the Contracting Officer.
T
3.2.3 Acceptance of Plan
Acceptance of the Contractor's plan is required prior to the start of

construction design and construction. Acceptance is conditional and will
AF
be predicated on satisfactory performance during the construction design
and construction. The Government reserves the right to require the
Contractor to make changes in his CQC Plan and operations including removal
of personnel, as necessary, to obtain the quality specified.
3.2.4 Notification of Changes
After acceptance of the CQC Plan, notify the Contracting Officer in writing
R
of any proposed change. Proposed changes are subject to acceptance by the
3.3 COORDINATION MEETING

D
After the Preconstruction Conference, before start of construction,Post A

ward Conference, before start of design or construction, and prior to
acceptance by the Government of the CQC Plan, meet with the Contracting
Officer or Authorized Representative and discuss the Contractor's quality
control system. Submit the CQC Plan a minimum of 14 calendar days prior to
the Coordination Meeting. During the meeting, a mutual understanding of
the system details must be developed, including the forms for recording the
CQC operations operations, design activities, control activities, testing,
administration of the system for both onsite and offsite work, and the
interrelationship of Contractor's Management and control with the
Government's Quality Assurance. Minutes of the meeting will be prepared by
the Government, signed by both the Contractor and the Contracting Officer
and will become a part of the contract file. There may be occasions when
subsequent conferences will be called by either party to reconfirm mutual
understandings and/or address deficiencies in the CQC system or procedures
which may require corrective action by the Contractor.
SECTION 01 45 00.00 10 Page 5

3.4 QUALITY CONTROL ORGANIZATION
3.4.1 Personnel Requirements
The requirements for the CQC organization are a Safety and Health Manager,
CQC System Manager CQC System Manager, a Design Quality Manager, and
sufficient number of additional qualified personnel to ensure safety and
contract compliance. The Safety and Health Manager must report directly to
a senior project (or corporate) official independent from the CQC System
Manager. The Safety and Health Manager will also serve as a member of the
CQC Staff. Personnel identified in the technical provisions as requiring
specialized skills to assure the required work is being performed properly
will also be included as part of the CQC organization. The Contractor's
CQC staff must maintain a presence at the site at all times during progress
of the work and have complete authority and responsibility to take any
action necessary to ensure contract compliance. The CQC staff will be
subject to acceptance by the Contracting Officer. Provide adequate office
space, filing systems and other resources as necessary to maintain an
effective and fully functional CQC organization. Promptly complete and
furnish all letters, material submittals, shop drawing submittals,
schedules and all other project documentation to the CQC organization. The
T
CQC organization is responsible to maintain these documents and records at
the site at all times, except as otherwise acceptable to the Contracting
Officer.
3.4.2
AF
CQC System Manager
Identify as CQC System Manager an individual within the onsite work

organization who is responsible for overall management of CQC and have the
authority to act in all CQC matters for the Contractor. The CQC System
Manager must be a graduate engineer, graduate architect, or a graduate of
construction management, with a minimum of 10 years construction experience
on construction similar to this contract. This CQC System Manager must be
R
on the site at all times during construction and be employed by the prime
Contractor. The CQC System Manager must be assigned no other duties.
Identify in the plan an alternate to serve in the event of the CQC System
Manager's absence. The requirements for the alternate are the same as the
CQC System Manager.
D
3.4.3 CQC Personnel
In addition to CQC personnel specified elsewhere in the contract, provide

as part of the CQC organization specialized personnel to assist the CQC
System Manager for the following areas: civil, structural, design quality
control manager and submittals clerk. These individuals must be directly
employed by the prime Contractor and may not be employed by a supplier or
subcontractor on this project; be responsible to the CQC System Manager; be
physically present at the construction site during work on their areas of
responsibility; have the necessary education and/or experience in
accordance with the experience matrix listed herein. These individuals may
perform other duties but must be allowed sufficient time to perform their
assigned quality control duties as described in the Quality Control Plan.
SECTION 01 45 00.00 10 Page 6

Experience Matrix
Area Qualifications
Civil Graduate Civil Engineer or Construction

Manager with 10 years experience in the type
of work being performed on this project
Structural Graduate Civil Engineer (with Structural Track

or Focus) with 10 years experience and 5 years
of experience supervising structural features
of work in the field with a construction
company
Submittals Submittal Clerk with 1 year experience
T
Design Quality Control Registered Architect or Professional Engineer
Manager
AF
3.4.4 Additional Requirement
In addition to the above experience and education requirements, the CQC

System Manager must have completed the Construction Quality Management
(CQM) for Contractors course. If the CQC System Manager does not have a
current certification, obtain the CQM for Contractors course certification
within 90 days of award. This course is periodically offered by the Naval
R
Facilities Engineering Command and the Army Corps of Engineers. Contact
the Contracting Officer for information on the next scheduled class.
The Construction Quality Management Training certificate expires after 5

D
years. If the CQC System Manager's certificate has expired, retake the
course to remain current.
3.4.5 Organizational Changes
Maintain the CQC staff at full strength at all times. When it is necessary
to make changes to the CQC staff, revise the CQC Plan to reflect the
changes and submit the changes to the Contracting Officer for acceptance.
3.5 SUBMITTALS AND DELIVERABLES
Submittals, if needed, must comply with the requirements in Section

01 33 00.05 20 CONSTRUCTION SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES and Section 01 33 10.05 20
DESIGN SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES. The CQC organization is responsible for
certifying that all submittals and deliverables are in compliance with the
contract requirements. When Section 23 08 00.00 10 COMMISSIONING OF HVAC
SYSTEMS are included in the contract, the submittals required by those
sections must be coordinated with Section 01 33 00.05 20 CONSTRUCTION
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES and Section 01 33 10.05 20 DESIGN SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
to ensure adequate time is allowed for each type of submittal required.
SECTION 01 45 00.00 10 Page 7

3.6 CONTROL
Contractor Quality Control is the means by which the Contractor ensures

that the construction, to include that of subcontractors and suppliers,
complies with the requirements of the contract. At least three phases of
control must be conducted by the CQC System Manager for each definable
feature of the construction work as follows:
3.6.1 Preparatory Phase
This phase is performed prior to beginning work on each definable feature of

work, after all required plans/documents/materials are approved/accepted, and
after copies are at the work site. This phase includes:
a. A review of each paragraph of applicable specifications, reference

codes, and standards. Make available during the preparatory inspection
a copy of those sections of referenced codes and standards applicable
to that portion of the work to be accomplished in the field. Maintain
and make available in the field for use by Government personnel until
final acceptance of the work.
T
b. Review of the contract drawings.
c. Check to assure that all materials and/or equipment have been tested,
submitted, and approved.
AF
d. Review of provisions that have been made to provide required control
inspection and testing.
e. Examination of the work area to assure that all required preliminary

work has been completed and is in compliance with the contract.
f. Examination of required materials, equipment, and sample work to assure

R
that they are on hand, conform to approved shop drawings or submitted
data, and are properly stored.
g. Review of the appropriate activity hazard analysis to assure safety

requirements are met.
D
h. Discussion of procedures for controlling quality of the work including

repetitive deficiencies. Document construction tolerances and
workmanship standards for that feature of work.
i. Check to ensure that the portion of the plan for the work to be
performed has been accepted by the Contracting Officer.
j. Discussion of the initial control phase.
k. The Government must be notified at least 24 hours in advance of

beginning the preparatory control phase. Include a meeting conducted
by the CQC System Manager and attended by the superintendent, other CQC
personnel (as applicable), and the foreman responsible for the
definable feature. Document the results of the preparatory phase
actions by separate minutes prepared by the CQC System Manager and
attach to the daily CQC report. Instruct applicable workers as to the
acceptable level of workmanship required in order to meet contract
specifications.
SECTION 01 45 00.00 10 Page 8

3.6.2 Initial Phase
This phase is accomplished at the beginning of a definable feature of

work. Accomplish the following:
a. Check work to ensure that it is in full compliance with contract

requirements. Review minutes of the preparatory meeting.
b. Verify adequacy of controls to ensure full contract compliance. Verify

required control inspection and testing are in compliance with the
contract.
c. Establish level of workmanship and verify that it meets minimum

acceptable workmanship standards. Compare with required sample panels
as appropriate.
d. Resolve all differences.
e. Check safety to include compliance with and upgrading of the safety

plan and activity hazard analysis. Review the activity analysis with
each worker.
T
f. The Government must be notified at least 24 hours in advance of
beginning the initial phase for definable feature of work. Prepare
separate minutes of this phase by the CQC System Manager and attach to
AF
the daily CQC report. Indicate the exact location of initial phase
for definable feature of work for future reference and comparison with
follow-up phases.
g. The initial phase for definable feature of work should be repeated for
each new crew to work onsite, or any time acceptable specified quality
standards are not being met.
R
3.6.3 Follow-up Phase
Perform daily checks to assure control activities, including control

testing, are providing continued compliance with contract requirements,
until completion of the particular feature of work. Record the checks in
D
the CQC documentation. Conduct final follow-up checks and correct all
deficiencies prior to the start of additional features of work which may be
affected by the deficient work. Do not build upon nor conceal
non-conforming work.
3.6.4 Additional Preparatory and Initial Phases
Conduct additional preparatory and initial phases on the same definable

features of work if: the quality of on-going work is unacceptable; if
there are changes in the applicable CQC staff, onsite production
supervision or work crew; if work on a definable feature is resumed after a
substantial period of inactivity; or if other problems develop.
3.7 TESTS
3.7.1 Testing Procedure
Perform specified or required tests to verify that control measures are

adequate to provide a product which conforms to contract requirements.
Upon request, furnish to the Government duplicate samples of test specimens
for possible testing by the Government. Testing includes operation and/or
SECTION 01 45 00.00 10 Page 9

acceptance tests when specified. Procure the services of a Corps of

Engineers approved testing laboratory or establish an approved testing
laboratory at the project site. Perform the following activities and
record and provide the following data:
a. Verify that testing procedures comply with contract requirements.
b. Verify that facilities and testing equipment are available and comply
with testing standards.
c. Check test instrument calibration data against certified standards.
d. Verify that recording forms and test identification control number

system, including all of the test documentation requirements, have been
prepared.
e. Record results of all tests taken, both passing and failing on the CQC
report for the date taken. Specification paragraph reference, location
where tests were taken, and the sequential control number identifying
the test. If approved by the Contracting Officer, actual test reports
may be submitted later with a reference to the test number and date
T
taken. Provide an information copy of tests performed by an offsite or
commercial test facility directly to the Contracting Officer. Failure
to submit timely test reports as stated may result in nonpayment for
related work performed and disapproval of the test facility for this
contract.
AF
3.7.2 Testing Laboratories
The listing of validated testing laboratories is available under "Fact

Sheets" at
http://www.erdc.usace.army.mil/Media/FactSheets/FactSheetArticleView
R
3.7.2.1 Capability Check
The Government reserves the right to check laboratory equipment in the

D
proposed laboratory for compliance with the standards set forth in the
contract specifications and to check the laboratory technician's testing
procedures and techniques. Laboratories utilized for testing soils,
concrete, asphalt, and steel must meet criteria detailed in ASTM D3740 and
ASTM E329.
3.7.2.2 Capability Recheck
If the selected laboratory fails the capability check, the Contractor will
be assessed a charge of $5,000.00 to reimburse the Government for each
succeeding recheck of the laboratory or the checking of a subsequently
selected laboratory. Such costs will be deducted from the contract amount
due the Contractor.
3.7.3 Onsite Laboratory
The Government reserves the right to utilize the Contractor's control

testing laboratory and equipment to make assurance tests, and to check the
Contractor's testing procedures, techniques, and test results at no
additional cost to the Government.
SECTION 01 45 00.00 10 Page 10

3.8 COMPLETION INSPECTION
3.8.1 Punch-Out Inspection
Conduct an inspection of the work by the CQC System Manager near the end of
the work, or any increment of the work established by a time stated in the
SPECIAL CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS Clause, "Commencement, Prosecution, and
Completion of Work", or by the specifications. Prepare and include in the
CQC documentation a punch list of items which do not conform to the
approved drawings and specifications, as required by paragraph
DOCUMENTATION. Include within the list of deficiencies the estimated date
by which the deficiencies will be corrected. Make a second inspection the
CQC System Manager or staff to ascertain that all deficiencies have been
corrected. Once this is accomplished, notify the Government that the
facility is ready for the Government Pre-Final inspection.
3.8.2 Pre-Final Inspection
The Government will perform the pre-final inspection to verify that the
facility is complete and ready to be occupied. A Government Pre-Final
Punch List may be developed as a result of this inspection. Ensure that
T
all items on this list have been corrected before notifying the Government,
so that a Final inspection with the customer can be scheduled. Correct any
items noted on the Pre-Final inspection in a timely manner. These
inspections and any deficiency corrections required by this paragraph must
AF
be accomplished within the time slated for completion of the entire work or
any particular increment of the work if the project is divided into
increments by separate completion dates.
3.8.3 Final Acceptance Inspection
The Contractor's Quality Control Inspection personnel, plus the

superintendent or other primary management person, and the Contracting
R
Officer's Representative must be in attendance at the final acceptance
inspection. Additional Government personnel including, but not limited to,
those from Base/Post Civil Facility Engineer user groups, and major
commands may also be in attendance. The final acceptance inspection will
be formally scheduled by the Contracting Officer based upon results of the
D
Pre-Final inspection. Notify the Contracting Officer at least 14 days

prior to the final acceptance inspection and include the Contractor's
assurance that all specific items previously identified to the Contractor
as being unacceptable, along with all remaining work performed under the
contract, will be complete and acceptable by the date scheduled for the
final acceptance inspection. Failure of the Contractor to have all
contract work acceptably complete for this inspection will be cause for the
Contracting Officer to bill the Contractor for the Government's additional
inspection cost in accordance with the contract clause titled "Inspection
of Construction".
3.9 DOCUMENTATION
Maintain current records providing factual evidence that required quality

control activities and/or tests have been performed. Include in these
records the work of subcontractors and suppliers on an acceptable form that
includes, as a minimum, the following information:
a. Contractor/subcontractor and their area of responsibility.
b. Operating plant/equipment with hours worked, idle, or down for repair.
SECTION 01 45 00.00 10 Page 11

c. Work performed each day, giving location, description, and by whom.

When Network Analysis (NAS) is used, identify each phase of work
performed each day by NAS activity number.
d. Test and/or control activities performed with results and references to

specifications/drawings requirements. Identify the control phase
(Preparatory, Initial, Follow-up). List of deficiencies noted, along
with corrective action.
e. Quantity of materials received at the site with statement as to

acceptability, storage, and reference to specifications/drawings
requirements.
f. Submittals and deliverables reviewed, with contract reference, by whom,

and action taken.
g. Offsite surveillance activities, including actions taken.
h. Job safety evaluations stating what was checked, results, and

instructions or corrective actions.
T
i. Instructions given/received and conflicts in plans and/or
specifications.
j.
AF
Provide documentation of design quality control activities. For
independent design reviews, provide, as a minimum, identification of
the Independent Technical Review (ITR) team, the ITR review comments,
responses and the record of resolution of the comments.
k. Contractor's Verification Statement.
Indicate a description of trades working on the project; the number of

R
personnel working; weather conditions encountered; and any delays
encountered. Cover both conforming and deficient features and include a
statement that equipment and materials incorporated in the work and
workmanship comply with the contract. Furnish the original and one copy of
these records in report form to the Government daily within 24 hours after
D
the date covered by the report, except that reports need not be submitted
for days on which no work is performed. As a minimum, prepare and submit
one report for every 7 days of no work and on the last day of a no work
period. All calendar days must be accounted for throughout the life of the
contract. The first report following a day of no work will be for that day
only. Reports must be signed and dated by the CQC System Manager. Include
copies of test reports and copies of reports prepared by all subordinate
quality control personnel within the CQC System Manager Report.
The Contracting Officer will notify the Contractor of any detected

noncompliance with the foregoing requirements. Take immediate corrective
action after receipt of such notice. Such notice, when delivered to the
Contractor at the work site, will be deemed sufficient for the purpose of
notification. If the Contractor fails or refuses to comply promptly, the
SECTION 01 45 00.00 10 Page 12

Contracting Officer may issue an order stopping all or part of the work
until satisfactory corrective action has been taken. No part of the time
lost due to such stop orders will be made the subject of claim for
extension of time or for excess costs or damages by the Contractor.
T
AF
R
D
SECTION 01 45 00.00 10 Page 13

SECTION 01 45 00.10 10
QUALITY CONTROL SYSTEM (QCS)

02/10
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 Contract Administration
The Government will use the Resident Management System for Windows (RMS) to
assist in its monitoring and administration of this contract. The
Contractor must use the Government-furnished Construction Contractor Module
of RMS, referred to as QCS, to record, maintain, and submit various
information throughout the contract period. The Contractor module, user
manuals, updates, and training information can be downloaded from the RMS
web site (http://rms.usace.army.mil). This joint Government-Contractor use
of RMS and QCS will facilitate electronic exchange of information and
overall management of the contract. QCS provides the means for the
Contractor to input, track, and electronically share information with the
T
Government in the following areas:
Administration
Finances
Quality Control
AF
Submittal Monitoring
Scheduling
Import/Export of Data
1.1.1 Correspondence and Electronic Communications
For ease and speed of communications, both Government and Contractor will,
R
to the maximum extent feasible, exchange correspondence and other documents
in electronic format. Correspondence, pay requests and other documents
comprising the official contract record will also be provided in paper
format, with signatures and dates where necessary. Paper documents will
govern, in the event of discrepancy with the electronic version.
D
1.1.2 Other Factors
Particular attention is directed to Contract Clause, "Schedules for

Construction Contracts", Contract Clause, "Payments", Section
01 32 17.05 20 COST-LOADED NETWORK ANALYSIS SCHEDULES (NAS) FOR DESIGN-BUILD,
Section 01 33 00.05 20 CONSTRUCTION SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES, Section
01 33 10.05 20 DESIGN SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES , and Section 01 45 00.00 10
QUALITY CONTROL, which have a direct relationship to the reporting to be
accomplished through QCS. Also, there is no separate payment for
establishing and maintaining the QCS database; all costs associated
therewith will be included in the contract pricing for the work.
1.2 QCS SOFTWARE
QCS is a Windows-based program that can be run on a stand-alone personal

computer or on a network. The Government will make available the QCS
software to the Contractor after award of the construction contract. Prior
to the Pre-Construction Conference, the Contractor will be responsible to
download, install and use the latest version of the QCS software from the
Government's RMS Internet Website. Upon specific justification and request
SECTION 01 45 00.10 10 Page 1

by the Contractor, the Government can provide QCS on optical disk. Any
program updates of QCS will be made available to the Contractor via the
Government RMS Website as they become available.
1.3 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
Minimum system configuration requirements required to run QCS is available

on the RMS website at the below link:
http://rms.usace.army.mil/QCS
1.4 RELATED INFORMATION
1.4.1 QCS User Guide
After contract award, download instructions for the installation and use of
QCS from the Government RMS Internet Website. In case of justifiable
difficulties, the Government will provide an optical disk (CD/DVD)
containing these instructions.
T
1.4.2 Contractor Quality Control (CQC) Training
The use of QCS will be discussed with the QC System Manager during the
mandatory CQC Training class.
AF
1.5 CONTRACT DATABASE
Prior to the pre-construction conference, the Government will provide the

Contractor with basic contract award data to use for QCS. The Government
will provide data updates to the Contractor as needed, generally by using
the Government's SFTP repository built into QCS import/export function.
These updates will generally consist of submittal reviews, correspondence
R
status, QA comments, and other administrative and QA data.
1.6 DATABASE MAINTENANCE
Establish, maintain, and update data in the QCS database throughout the
D
duration of the contract at the Contractor's site office. Submit data

updates to the Government (e.g., daily reports, submittals, RFI's, schedule
updates, payment requests, etc.) using the Government's SFTP repository
built into QCS export function. If permitted by the Contracting Officer,
email or optical disk may be used instead of QCS (see Paragraph DATA
SUBMISSION VIA OPTICAL DISK). The QCS database typically includes current
data on the following items:
1.6.1 Administration
1.6.1.1 Contractor Information
Contain within the database the Contractor's name, address, telephone

numbers, management staff, and other required items. Within 14 calendar
days of receipt of QCS software from the Government, deliver Contractor
administrative data in electronic format.
1.6.1.2 Subcontractor Information
Contain within the database the name, trade, address, phone numbers, and
other required information for all subcontractors. A subcontractor must be
SECTION 01 45 00.10 10 Page 2

listed separately for each trade to be performed. Assign each

subcontractor/trade a unique Responsibility Code, provided in QCS. Within
14 calendar days of receipt of QCS software from the Government, deliver
subcontractor administrative data in electronic format.
1.6.1.3 Correspondence
Identify all Contractor correspondence to the Government with a serial

number. Prefix correspondence initiated by the Contractor's site office
with "S". Prefix letters initiated by the Contractor's home (main) office
with "H". Letters must be numbered starting from 0001. (e.g., H-0001 or
S-0001). The Government's letters to the Contractor will be prefixed with
"C".
1.6.1.4 Equipment
Contain within the Contractor's QCS database a current list of equipment

planned for use or being used on the jobsite, including the most recent and
planned equipment inspection dates.
1.6.1.5 Management Reporting
T
QCS includes a number of reports that Contractor management can use to
track the status of the project. The value of these reports is reflective
of the quality of the data input, and is maintained in the various sections
AF
of QCS. Among these reports are: Progress Payment Request worksheet,
QA/QC comments, Submittal Register Status, Three-Phase Control checklists.
1.6.1.6 Request For Information (RFI)
Exchange all Requests For Information (RFI) using the Built-in RFI
generator and tracker in QCS.
R
1.6.2 Finances
1.6.2.1 Pay Activity Data
Include within the QCS database a list of pay activities that the
D
Contractor must develop in conjunction with the construction schedule. The

sum of all pay activities must be equal to the total contract amount,
including modifications. Group pay activities Contract Line Item Number
(CLIN); the sum of the activities must equal the amount of each CLIN. The
total of all CLINs equals the Contract Amount.
1.6.2.2 Payment Requests
Prepare all progress payment requests using QCS. Complete the payment
request worksheet, prompt payment certification, and payment invoice in
QCS. Update the work completed under the contract, measured as percent or
as specific quantities, at least monthly. After the update, generate a
payment request report using QCS. Submit the payment request, prompt
payment certification, monthly NAS update, and payment invoice with
supporting data using the Government's SFTP repository built into QCS
export function. If permitted by the Contracting Officer, email or a
optical disk may be used. A signed paper copy of the approved payment
request is also required, which will govern in the event of discrepancy
with the electronic version.
SECTION 01 45 00.10 10 Page 3

1.6.3 Quality Control (QC)
QCS provides a means to track implementation of the 3-phase QC Control

System, prepare daily reports, identify and track deficiencies, document
progress of work, and support other Contractor QC requirements. Maintain
this data on a daily basis. Entered data will automatically output to the
QCS generated daily report. Provide the Government a Contractor Quality
Control (CQC) Plan within the time required in Section 01 45 00.00 10
QUALITY CONTROL. Within seven calendar days of Government acceptance,
submit a QCS update reflecting the information contained in the accepted
CQC Plan: schedule, pay activities, features of work, submittal register,
QC requirements, and equipment list.
1.6.3.1 Daily Contractor Quality Control (CQC) Reports.
QCS includes the means to produce the Daily CQC Report. The Contractor may
use other formats to record basic QC data. However, the Daily CQC Report
generated by QCS must be the Contractor's official report. Summarize data
from any supplemental reports by the Contractor and consolidate onto the
QCS-generated Daily CQC Report. Submit daily CQC Reports as required by
Section 01 45 00.00 10 QUALITY CONTROL. Electronically submit reports to
T
the Government within 24 hours after the date covered by the report. Also
provide the Government a signed, printed copy of the daily CQC report.
1.6.3.2 Deficiency Tracking.

AF
Use QCS to track deficiencies. Deficiencies identified by the Contractor
will be numerically tracked using QC punch list items. Maintain a current
log of its QC punch list items in the QCS database. The Government will
log the deficiencies it has identified using its QA punch list items. The
Government's QA punch list items will be included in its export file to the
Contractor. Regularly update the correction status of both QC and QA punch
list items.
R
1.6.3.3 QC Requirements
Develop and maintain a complete list of QC testing and required structural

and life safety special inspections required by the International Code
D
Council (ICC), transferred and installed property, and user training

requirements in QCS. Update all data on these QC requirements as work
progresses, and promptly provide this information to the Government via QCS.
1.6.3.4 Three-Phase Control Meetings
Maintain scheduled and actual dates and times of preparatory and initial
control meetings in QCS.
1.6.3.5 Labor and Equipment Hours
Log labor and equipment exposure hours on a daily basis. This data will be
rolled up into a monthly exposure report.
1.6.3.6 Accident/Safety Reporting
The Government will issue safety comments, directions, or guidance whenever

safety deficiencies are observed. The Government's safety comments will be
included in its export file to the Contractor. Regularly update the
correction status of the safety comments. In addition, utilize QCS to
advise the Government of any accidents occurring on the jobsite. This
SECTION 01 45 00.10 10 Page 4

brief supplemental entry is not to be considered as a substitute for

completion of mandatory reports, e.g., ENG Form 3394 and OSHA Form 300.
1.6.3.7 Features of Work
Include a complete list of the features of work in the QCS database. A

feature of work may be associated with multiple pay activities. However,
each pay activity (see subparagraph "Pay Activity Data" of paragraph
"Finances") will only be linked to a single feature of work.
1.6.3.8 Hazard Analysis
Use QCS to develop a hazard analysis for each feature of work included in
the CQC Plan. Address any hazards, or potential hazards, that may be
associated with the work.
1.6.4 Submittal Management
Maintain a complete list of all submittals, including completion of all

data columns. Dates on which submittals are received and returned by the
Government will be included in its export file to the Contractor. Use QCS
T
to track and transmit all submittals. ENG Form 4025, submittal transmittal
form, and the submittal register update must be produced using QCS. QCS
and RMS will be used to update, store and exchange submittal registers and
transmittals, but will not be used for storage of actual submittals.
AF
1.6.5 Schedule
Develop a construction schedule consisting of pay activities, in accordance

with Section 01 32 17.05 20 COST-LOADED NETWORK ANALYSIS SCHEDULES (NAS).
Input and maintain in the QCS database this schedule either manually or by
using the Standard Data Exchange Format (SDEF) (see Section 01 32 17.05 20
COST-LOADED NETWORK ANALYSIS SCHEDULES (NAS) . Include with each pay
R
request the updated schedule.
1.6.6 Import/Export of Data
QCS includes the ability to export Contractor data to the Government and to
D
import submittal register and other Government-provided data from RMS, and
schedule data using SDEF.
1.7 IMPLEMENTATION
Contractor use of QCS as described in the preceding paragraphs is

mandatory. Ensure that sufficient resources are available to maintain its
QCS database, and to provide the Government with regular database updates.
QCS shall be an integral part of the Contractor's management of quality
control.
1.8 DATA SUBMISSION VIA OPTICAL DISK
The Government-preferred method for Contractor's submission of QCS data is

by using the Government's SFTP repository built into QCS export function.
Other data should be submitted using email with file attachment(s). For
locations where this is not feasible, the Contracting Officer may permit
use of optical disk for data transfer. Export data onto optical disks
using the QCS built-in export function. If used, submit optical disks in
accordance with the following:
SECTION 01 45 00.10 10 Page 5

1.8.1 File Medium
Submit in English required data on optical disk conforming to industry

standards used in the United States.
1.8.2 Optical Disk Labels
Affix a permanent exterior label to each optical disk submitted. Indicate

on the label in English, the QCS file name, full contract number, contract
name, project location, data date, name and telephone number of person
responsible for the data.
1.8.3 File Names
The files will be automatically named by the QCS software. The naming
convention established by the QCS software must not be altered.
1.9 MONTHLY COORDINATION MEETING
Update the QCS database each workday. At least monthly, generate and
submit an export file to the Government with schedule update and progress
T
payment request. As required in Contract Clause "Payments", at least one
week prior to submittal, meet with the Government representative to review
the planned progress payment data submission for errors and omissions.
AF
Make all required corrections prior to Government acceptance of the export
file and progress payment request. Payment requests accompanied by
incomplete or incorrect data submittals will be returned. The Government
will not process progress payments until an acceptable QCS export file is
received.

R
The Contracting Officer will notify the Contractor of any detected
noncompliance with the requirements of this specification. Take immediate
corrective action after receipt of such notice. Such notice, when
delivered to the Contractor at the work site, will be deemed sufficient for
the purpose of notification.
D
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Used
PART 3 EXECUTION
Not Used
SECTION 01 45 00.10 10 Page 6

SECTION 01 50 00
TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

08/09
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

FOUNDATION FOR CROSS-CONNECTION CONTROL AND HYDRAULIC RESEARCH

(FCCCHR)
FCCCHR List (continuously updated) List of Approved

Backflow Prevention Assemblies
T
NFPA 241 (2013) Standard for Safeguarding

Construction,Alteration, and Demolition
AF Operations
NFPA 70 (2014; AMD 1 2013; Errata 1 2013; AMD 2

2013; Errata 2 2013; AMD 3 2014; Errata
3-4 2014; AMD 4-6 2014) National
Electrical Code
U.S. FEDERAL AVIATION ADMINISTRATION (FAA)

R
FAA AC 70/7460-1 (2007; Rev K) Obstruction Marking and
Lighting
1.2 SUBMITTALS
D

Construction site plan; G M/R
1.3 CONSTRUCTION SITE PLAN
Prior to the start of work, submit a site plan showing the locations and
dimensions of temporary facilities (including layouts and details,
equipment and material storage area (onsite and offsite), and access and
haul routes, avenues of ingress/egress to the fenced area and details of
the fence installation. Identify any areas which may have to be graveled
to prevent the tracking of mud. Indicate if the use of a supplemental or

other staging area is required. Show locations of safety and construction
fences, site trailers, construction entrances, trash dumpsters, temporary
sanitary facilities, and worker parking areas.
1.4 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS CERTIFICATE
Certificate of Full Approval from FCCCHR List, University of Southern

California, attesting that the design, size and make of each backflow
preventer has satisfactorily passed the complete sequence of performance
testing and evaluation for the respective level of approval. Certificate
of Provisional Approval will not be acceptable.
1.4.1 Backflow Tester Certificate
Prior to testing, submit to the Contracting Officer certification issued by

the State or local regulatory agency attesting that the backflow tester has
successfully completed a certification course sponsored by the regulatory
agency. Tester must not be affiliated with any company participating in
any other phase of this Contract.
T
1.4.2 Backflow Prevention Training Certificate
Submit a certificate recognized by the State or local authority that states

the Contractor has completed at least 10 hours of training in backflow
AF
preventer installations. The certificate must be current.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 TEMPORARY SIGNAGE
2.1.1 Bulletin Board

R
Immediately upon beginning of work, provide a weatherproof glass-covered
bulletin board not less than 915 by 1220 mm in size for displaying weekly
project status, progress photos, safety information, and other information
approved by the Contracting Officer.
D
2.1.2 Project and Safety Signs
The requirements for the signs, their content, and location are as
specified in Section 01 58 00 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION. Erect signs within 15
days after receipt of the notice to proceed. Correct the data required by
the safety sign daily, with light colored metallic or non-metallic numerals.
2.2 TEMPORARY TRAFFIC CONTROL
2.2.1 Haul Roads
Construct access and haul roads necessary for proper prosecution of the
work under this contract. Construct with suitable grades and widths; sharp
curves, blind corners, and dangerous cross traffic should be avoided.
Provide necessary lighting, signs, barricades, and distinctive markings for
the safe movement of traffic. The method of dust control must be adequate
to ensure safe operation at all times. Location, grade, width, and
alignment of construction and hauling roads are subject to approval by the
Contracting Officer. Lighting must be adequate to assure full and clear
visibility for full width of haul road and work areas during any night work
operations.
2.2.2 Barricades
Erect and maintain temporary barricades to limit public access to hazardous

areas. Whenever safe public access to paved areas such as roads, parking
areas or sidewalks is prevented by construction activities or as otherwise
necessary to ensure the safety of both pedestrian and vehicular traffic
barricades will be required. Securely place barricades clearly visible
with adequate illumination to provide sufficient visual warning of the
hazard during both day and night.
2.2.3 Fencing
Provide fencing around the construction site and at all open excavations to
control access by unauthorized people.
a. The safety fencing must be a high visibility orange colored, high

density polyethylene grid or approved equal, a minimum of 1.1 m high,
supported and tightly secured to steel posts located on maximum 3 m
centers, constructed at the approved location. Install fencing to be
able to restrain a force of jet blast at least 114.00 kg against it.
T
b. In addition, prior to the start of work, enclose the construction site
and mobilization areas which are not within the construction fence with
a temporary safety fence, including gates and warning signs, to protect
AF
the public from construction activities. The safety fence shall be
made of chain link, a minimum of 1800 mm high, supported and tightly
secured to steel posts located on minimum 3000 mm centers. Remove the
fence from the work site upon completion of the contract.
2.2.4 Temporary Wiring
Provide temporary wiring in accordance with NFPA 241 and NFPA 70. Include
R
frequent inspection of all equipment and apparatus.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EMPLOYEE PARKING

D
Contractor employees will park privately owned and/or rental vehicles in an

area designated by the Contracting Officer. This area will be within
reasonable walking distance of the construction site. Contractor employee
parking must not interfere with existing and established parking
requirements of the government installation.
3.2 TEMPORARY BULLETIN BOARD
Locate the bulletin board at the project site in a conspicuous place easily
accessible to all employees, as approved by the Contracting Officer.
3.3 AVAILABILITY AND USE OF UTILITY SERVICES
Contractor shall make their own arrangements for temporary utilities.

Materials may be new or used, must be adequate for the required usage, not
create unsafe conditions, and not violate applicable codes and standards.
3.3.1 Sanitation
a. Provide and maintain within the construction area minimum

field-type sanitary facilities approved by the Contracting Officer and
periodically empty wastes into a municipal, district, or station

sanitary sewage system, or remove waste to a commercial facility.
Obtain approval from the system owner prior to discharge into any
municipal, district, or commercial sanitary sewer system. Any
penalties and / or fines associated with improper discharge will be the
responsibility of the Contractor. Coordinate with the Contracting
Officer and follow station regulations and procedures when discharging
into the station sanitary sewer system. Maintain these conveniences at
all times without nuisance. Include provisions for pest control and
elimination of odors. Government toilet facilities will not be
available to Contractor's personnel.
b. Provide temporary sewer and sanitation facilities that are

self-contained units with both urinals and stool capabilities.
Ventilate the units to control odors and fumes and empty and clean them
at least once a week or more often if required by the Contracting
Officer. The doors shall be self-closing. The exterior of the unit
shall match the base standard color. Locate the facility behind the
construction fence or out of the public view.
3.3.2 Obstruction Lighting of Cranes
T
Provide a minimum of 2 aviation red or high intensity white obstruction
lights on temporary structures (including cranes) over 30 meter above
ground level. Light construction and installation must comply with
AF
FAA AC 70/7460-1. Lights must be operational during periods of reduced
visibility, darkness, and as directed by the Contracting Officer.
3.3.3 Fire Protection
Provide temporary fire protection equipment for the protection of personnel

and property during construction. Remove debris and flammable materials
daily to minimize potential hazards.
R
3.4 TRAFFIC PROVISIONS
3.4.1 Maintenance of Traffic

D
a. Conduct operations in a manner that will not close any thoroughfare or

interfere in any way with traffic on roadways except with written
permission of the Contracting Officer, Host Nation and U.S. Air Force
at least 15 calendar days prior to the proposed modification date, and
provide a Traffic Control Plan detailing the proposed controls to
traffic movement for approval. The plan must be in accordance with
local regulations. Make all notifications and obtain any permits
required for modification to traffic movements. Contractor may move
oversized and slow-moving vehicles to the worksite provided
requirements of the local authority have been met.
b. Conduct work so as to minimize obstruction of traffic, and maintain

traffic on at least half of the roadway width at all times. Obtain
approval from the Contracting Officer prior to starting any activity
that will obstruct traffic.
c. Provide, erect, and maintain, at contractors expense, lights, barriers,

signals, passageways, detours, and other items, that may be required by
the Life Safety Signage, overhead protection authority having
jurisdiction.
3.4.2 Protection of Traffic
Maintain and protect traffic on all affected roads during the construction
period except as otherwise specifically directed by the Contracting
Officer. Measures for the protection and diversion of traffic, including
the provision of watchmen and flagmen, erection of barricades, placing of
lights around and in front of equipment the work, and the erection and
maintenance of adequate warning, danger, and direction signs, will be as
required by the State and local authorities having jurisdiction. Protect
the traveling public from damage to person and property. Minimize the
interference with public traffic on roads selected for hauling material to
and from the site. Investigate the adequacy of existing roads and their
allowable load limit. Contractor is responsible for the repair of any
damage to roads caused by construction operations.
3.4.3 Rush Hour Restrictions
Do not interfere with the peak traffic flows preceding and during normal
operations without notification to and approval by the Contracting Officer.
3.4.4 Dust Control
T
Dust control methods and procedures must be approved by the Contracting
Officer. Treat dust abatement on access roads with applications of calcium
chloride, water sprinklers, or similar methods or treatment.
AF
3.5 CONTRACTOR'S MOBILIZATION AREA
The Contractor will be permitted to use designated area within the air base
as directed by the Contracting Officer for operation of his construction
equipment and plants, shops, warehouses, and offices. The Contractor shall
not be authorized to have living accommodations for his work force on the
base. The Contractor is responsible for obtaining any required additional
R
mobilization area above that designated. On completion of the contract,
all facilities shall be removed from the mobilization area by the
Contractor and shall be disposed of in accordance with applicable Host
Government Laws and Regulations. The site shall be cleared of construction
debris and other materials and the area restored to its final grade
D
3.5.1 Safety
Protect the integrity of any installed safety systems or personnel safety

devices. If entrance into systems serving safety devices is required, the
Contractor must obtain prior approval from the Contracting Officer. If it
is temporarily necessary to remove or disable personnel safety devices in
order to accomplish contract requirements, provide alternative means of
protection prior to removing or disabling any permanently installed safety
devices or equipment and obtain approval from the Contracting Officer.
3.5.2 Administrative Field Offices
Provide and maintain administrative field office facilities within the

construction area at the designated site. Government office and warehouse
facilities will not be available to the Contractor's personnel.
3.5.3 Storage Area
Construct a temporary 1.8 m high chain link fence around trailers and
materials. Include plastic strip inserts, colored brown, so that
visibility through the fence is obstructed. Fence posts may be driven, in

lieu of concrete bases, where soil conditions permit. Do not place or
store Trailers, materials, or equipment outside the fenced area unless such
trailers, materials, or equipment are assigned a separate and distinct
storage area by the Contracting Officer away from the vicinity of the
construction site but within the installation boundaries. Trailers,
equipment, or materials must not be open to public view with the exception
of those items which are in support of ongoing work on any given day. Do
not stockpile materials outside the fence in preparation for the next day's
work. Park mobile equipment, such as tractors, wheeled lifting equipment,
cranes, trucks, and like equipment within the fenced area at the end of
each work day.
3.5.4 Supplemental Storage Area
Upon Contractor's request, the Contracting Officer may designate another or

supplemental area for the Contractor's use and storage of trailers,
equipment, and materials. This area may not be in close proximity of the
construction site. Contractor shall plan for their own additional storage
area as required. Fencing of materials or equipment will not be required
at this site; however, the Contractor is responsible for cleanliness and
T
orderliness of the area used and for the security of any material or
equipment stored in this area. Utilities will not be provided to this area
by the Government.
3.5.5
AF
Appearance of Trailers
a. Trailers utilized by the Contractor for administrative or material

storage purposes must present a clean and neat exterior appearance and
be in a state of good repair. Trailers which, in the opinion of the
Contracting Officer, require exterior painting or maintenance will not
be allowed on installation property.
R
b. Paint using suitable paint and maintain the temporary facilities.
Failure to do so will be sufficient reason to require their removal.
3.5.6 Maintenance of Storage Area

D
a. Keep fencing in a state of good repair and proper alignment. Grassed

or unpaved areas, which are not established roadways, will be covered
with a layer of gravel as necessary to prevent rutting and the tracking
of mud onto paved or established roadways, should the Contractor elect
to traverse them with construction equipment or other vehicles; gravel
gradation will be at the Contractor's discretion. Mow and maintain
grass located within the boundaries of the construction site for the
duration of the project. Grass and vegetation along fences, buildings,
under trailers, and in areas not accessible to mowers will be edged or
trimmed neatly.
3.5.7 Security Provisions
Provide adequate outside security lighting at the Contractor's temporary

facilities. The Contractor will be responsible for the security of its own
equipment; in addition, the Contractor will notify the appropriate law
enforcement agency requesting periodic security checks of the temporary
project field office.
3.5.8 Weather Protection of Temporary Facilities and Stored Materials
Take necessary precautions to ensure that roof openings and other critical
openings in the building are monitored carefully. Take immediate actions
required to seal off such openings when rain or other detrimental weather
is imminent, and at the end of each workday. Ensure that the openings are
completely sealed off to protect materials and equipment in the building
from damage.
3.5.8.1 Building and Site Storm Protection
When a warning of gale force winds is issued, take precautions to minimize

danger to persons, and protect the work and nearby Government property.
Precautions must include, but are not limited to, closing openings;
removing loose materials, tools and equipment from exposed locations; and
removing or securing scaffolding and other temporary work. Close openings
in the work when storms of lesser intensity pose a threat to the work or
any nearby Government property.
3.6 CONTRACTOR'S OFF BASE MOBILIZATION AREA
T
If the Contractor requires an additional area for his operations to support
this contract in excess of that shown in the RFP (see paragraph entitled
"Supplemental Storage Area"), the Contractor shall provide, furnish,
operate and maintain facilities for his operations in an area off base.
AF
All utilities will be the responsibility of the Contractor and shall be
provided at no cost to the Government. On completion of the contract, all
facilities shall be removed by the Contractor and shall be disposed of in
the manner directed by the Contracting Officer. The site shall be cleared
of construction debris and other materials and the area restored to its
original condition.
3.6.1 Facilities Within the Mobilization Site

R
All facilities within the Contractor's mobilization site shall be of
substantial construction suitable for the local weather conditions. Messing
and sanitary facilities shall meet the requirements of Corps of Engineers
Safety and Health Requirements Manual EM 385-1-1. The Contractor shall
D
provide all utilities required to make the site self-sufficient.
3.6.2 Special Requirements
The Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating with the Host

Government use of any existing roads as haul routes. Construction, and
routing of new haul roads, and/or upgrading of existing roads for the
Contractor's use, is the sole responsibility of the Contractor. It shall
be the Contractor's responsibility to obtain such local authorizations,
permits and licenses necessary to establish his mobilization camp, quarry
operations, batching operations and haul routes (See Clause COMPLIANCE WITH
HOST COUNTRY RULES AND CUSTOMS.
3.7 GOVERNMENT FIELD OFFICE
3.7.1 USACE Office
Provide the Government with an office, approximately 19 square meters in

floor area, located where directed and providing space heat, air
conditioning, electric light and power, and toilet facilities consisting of
one lavatory and one water closet complete with connections to water and
sewer mains. Provide a mail slot in the door or a lockable mail box
mounted on the surface of the door. Include a 1200 by 2400 mm plan table,
computer work space, a standard size office desk and chair, and telephone.
At completion of the project, the office will remain the property of the
Contractor and be removed from the site. Utilities willbe connected and
disconnected in accordance with local codes and to the satisfaction of the
3.7.2 Trailer-Type Mobile Office
The Contractor may, at its option, furnish and maintain a trailer-type

mobile office acceptable to the Contracting Officer and providing as a
minimum the facilities specified above. Securely anchor the trailer to the
ground at all four corners to guard against movement during high winds.
3.8 PLANT COMMUNICATION
Whenever the Contractor has the individual elements of its plant so located
that operation by normal voice between these elements is not satisfactory,
the Contractor must install a satisfactory means of communication, such as
telephone or other suitable devices and made available for use by
T
Government personnel.
3.9 TEMPORARY PROJECT SAFETY FENCING

AF
As soon as practicable, but not later than 15 days after the date
established for commencement of work, furnish and erect temporary project
safety fencing at the work site. Maintain the safety fencing during the
life of the contract and, upon completion and acceptance of the work, will
become the property of the Contractor and be removed from the work site.
3.10 CLEANUP
R
Remove construction debris, waste materials, packaging material and the
like from the work site daily. Any dirt or mud which is tracked onto paved
or surfaced roadways must be cleaned away. Store any salvageable materials
resulting from demolition activities within the fenced area described above
or at the supplemental storage area. Neatly stack stored materials not in
D
trailers, whether new or salvaged.
3.11 RESTORATION OF STORAGE AREA
Upon completion of the project remove the bulletin board, signs,

barricades, haul roads, and any other temporary products from the site.
After removal of trailers, materials, and equipment from within the fenced
area, remove the fence that will become the property of the Contractor.
Restore areas used by the Contractor for the storage of equipment or
material, or other use to the original or better condition. Remove gravel
used to traverse grassed areas and restore the area to its original
condition, including top soil and seeding as necessary.
SECTION 01 57 20.00 10
ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION
04/06
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

U.S. ARMY (DA)
DA AR 200-1 (2007) Environmental Protection and

Enhancement
T
EM 385-1-1 (2014) Safety and Health Requirements
Manual
AF
WETLANDS DELINEATION MANUAL (1987) Corps of Engineers Wetlands
Delineation Manual
40 CFR 150 - 189 Pesticide Programs
40 CFR 260 Hazardous Waste Management System: General

R
40 CFR 261 Identification and Listing of Hazardous
Waste
40 CFR 262 Standards Applicable to Generators of

D
Hazardous Waste
40 CFR 279 Standards for the Management of Used Oil
40 CFR 302 Designation, Reportable Quantities, and

Notification
40 CFR 355 Emergency Planning and Notification
40 CFR 68 Chemical Accident Prevention Provisions
49 CFR 171 - 178 Hazardous Materials Regulations
1.2 DEFINITIONS
1.2.1 Environmental Pollution and Damage
Environmental pollution and damage is the presence of chemical, physical,

or biological elements or agents which adversely affect human health or
welfare; unfavorably alter ecological balances of importance to human life;
affect other species of importance to humankind; or degrade the environment
SECTION 01 57 20.00 10 Page 1

aesthetically, culturally and/or historically.
1.2.2 Environmental Protection
Environmental protection is the prevention/control of pollution and habitat

disruption that may occur to the environment during construction. The
control of environmental pollution and damage requires consideration of
land, water, and air; biological and cultural resources; and includes
management of visual aesthetics; noise; solid, chemical, gaseous, and
liquid waste; radiant energy and radioactive material as well as other
pollutants.
1.2.3 Contractor Generated Hazardous Waste
Contractor generated hazardous waste means materials that, if abandoned or

disposed of, may meet the definition of a hazardous waste. These waste
streams would typically consist of material brought on site by the
Contractor to execute work, but are not fully consumed during the course of
construction. Examples include, but are not limited to, excess paint
thinners (i.e. methyl ethyl ketone, toluene etc.), waste thinners,excess
paints, excess solvents, waste solvents, and excess pesticides, and
T
contaminated pesticide equipment rinse water.
1.2.4 Installation Pest Management Coordinator

AF
Installation Pest Management Coordinator (IPMC) is the individual
officially designated by the Installation Commander to oversee the
Installation Pest Management Program and the Installation Pest Management
Plan.
1.2.5 Project Pesticide Coordinator
The Project Pesticide Coordinator (PPC) is an individual that resides at a

R
Construction Project office and that is responsible for oversight of
pesticide application on Project grounds.
1.2.6 Land Application for Discharge Water

D
The term "Land Application" for discharge water implies that the Contractor
must discharge water at a rate which allows the water to percolate into the
soil. No sheeting action, soil erosion, discharge into storm sewers,
discharge into defined drainage areas, or discharge must occur. Land
Application must be in compliance with all applicable Host Nation laws and
regulations.
1.2.7 Pesticide
Pesticide is defined as any substance or mixture of substances intended for

preventing, destroying, repelling, or mitigating any pest, or intended for
use as a plant regulator, defoliant or desiccant.
1.2.8 Pests
The term "pests" means arthropods, birds, rodents, nematodes, fungi,

bacteria, viruses, algae, snails, marine borers, snakes, weeds and other
organisms (except for human or animal disease-causing organisms) that
adversely affect readiness, military operations, or the well-being of
personnel and animals; attack or damage real property, supplies, equipment,
or vegetation; or are otherwise undesirable.
SECTION 01 57 20.00 10 Page 2

1.2.9 Surface Discharge
The term "Surface Discharge" implies that the water is discharged with
possible sheeting action and subsequent soil erosion may occur. Waters
that are surface discharged may terminate in drainage ditches, storm
sewers,creeks, and would require a permit to discharge water from the
governing agency.
1.2.10 Wetlands
Those areas that are inundated or saturated by surface or ground water at a

frequency and duration sufficient to support, and that under normal
circumstances do support, a prevalence of vegetation typically adapted for
life in saturated soil conditions. Wetlands generally include swamps,
marshes, and bogs. Official determination of whether or not an area is
classified as a wetland must be done in accordance with
WETLANDS DELINEATION MANUAL.
T
Minimize environmental pollution and damage that may occur as the result of
construction operations. The environmental resources within the project
boundaries and those affected outside the limits of permanent work must be
protected during the entire duration of this contract. Comply with all
AF
applicable environmental Host Nation or Federal laws and regulations. Any
delays resulting from failure to comply with environmental laws and
regulations will be the Contractor's responsibility.
1.4 SUBCONTRACTORS
Ensure compliance with this section by subcontractors.

R
1.5 PAYMENT
No separate payment will be made for work covered under this section.
Payment of fees associated with environmental permits, application, and/or
notices obtained by the Contractor, and payment of all fines/fees for
D
violation or non-compliance with Host Nation or Federal laws and

regulations are the Contractor's responsibility. All costs associated with
this section must be included in the contract price.
1.6 SUBMITTALS

that will review the submittal for the Government. Submit the following in
accordance with Section 01 33 00.05 20 CONSTRUCTION SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
and Section 01 33 10.05 20 DESIGN SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
Environmental Protection Plan; GM/R
1.7 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION PLAN
Prior to commencing construction activities or delivery of materials to the

site, submit an Environmental Protection Plan for review and approval by
SECTION 01 57 20.00 10 Page 3

the Contracting Officer. The purpose of the Environmental Protection Plan

is to present a comprehensive overview of known or potential environmental
issues which the Contractor must address during construction. Issues of
concern must be defined within the Environmental Protection Plan as
outlined in this section. Address each topic at a level of detail
commensurate with the environmental issue and required construction
task(s). Topics or issues which are not identified in this section, but
are considered necessary, must be identified and discussed after those
items formally identified in this section. Prior to submittal of the
Environmental Protection Plan, meet with the Contracting Officer for the
purpose of discussing the implementation of the initial Environmental
Protection Plan; possible subsequent additions and revisions to the plan
including any reporting requirements; and methods for administration of the
Contractor's Environmental Plans. The Environmental Protection Plan must
be current and maintained onsite by the Contractor.
1.7.1 Compliance
No requirement in this Section will relieve the Contractor of any

applicable Host Nation or Federal laws and regulations. During
Construction, the Contractor will be responsible for identifying,
T
implementing, and submitting for approval any additional requirements to be
included in the Environmental Protection Plan.
1.7.2 Contents
AF
Include in the environmental protection plan, but not limit it to, the
following:
a. Name(s) of person(s) within the Contractor's organization who is(are)

responsible for ensuring adherence to the Environmental Protection Plan.
b. Name(s) and qualifications of person(s) responsible for manifesting

R
hazardous waste to be removed from the site, if applicable.
c. Name(s) and qualifications of person(s) responsible for training the

Contractor's environmental protection personnel.
D
d. Description of the Contractor's environmental protection personnel

training program.
e. An erosion and sediment control plan which identifies the type and
location of the erosion and sediment controls to be provided. The plan
must include monitoring and reporting requirements to assure that the
control measures are in compliance with the erosion and sediment
control plan, Host Nation and Federal laws and regulations. A Storm
Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP) may be substituted for this
plan.
f. Drawings showing locations of proposed temporary excavations or

embankments for haul roads, stream crossings, material storage areas,
structures, sanitary facilities, and stockpiles of excess or spoil
materials including methods to control runoff and to contain materials
on the site.
g. Traffic control plans including measures to reduce erosion of temporary

roadbeds by construction traffic, especially during wet weather. Plan
shall include measures to minimize the amount of mud transported onto
paved public roads by vehicles or runoff.
SECTION 01 57 20.00 10 Page 4

h. Work area plan showing the proposed activity in each portion of the
area and identifying the areas of limited use or nonuse. Plan should
include measures for marking the limits of use areas including methods
for protection of features to be preserved within authorized work areas.
i. Drawing showing the location of borrow areas.
j. Include in the Spill Control plan the procedures, instructions, and

reports to be used in the event of an unforeseen spill of a substance
regulated by 40 CFR 68, 40 CFR 302, 40 CFR 355, and/or regulated under
Host Nation laws and regulations. The Spill Control Plan supplements
the requirements of EM 385-1-1. Include in this plan, as a minimum:
(1) The name of the individual who will report any spills or
hazardous substance releases and who will follow up with complete
documentation. This individual will immediately notify the
Contracting Officer and Facility Environmental Office in addition
to the legally required Host Nation reporting channels if a
reportable quantity is released to the environment. Include in
the plan a list of the required reporting channels and telephone
T
numbers.
(2) The name and qualifications of the individual who will be

responsible for implementing and supervising the containment and
cleanup.
AF
(3) Training requirements for Contractor's personnel and methods of
accomplishing the training.
(4) A list of materials and equipment to be immediately available at

the job site, tailored to cleanup work of the potential hazard(s)
identified.
R
(5) The names and locations of suppliers of containment materials and
locations of additional fuel oil recovery, cleanup, restoration,
and material-placement equipment available in case of an
unforeseen spill emergency.
D
(6) The methods and procedures to be used for expeditious contaminant

cleanup.
k. A non-hazardous solid waste disposal plan identifying methods and

locations for solid waste disposal including clearing debris and
schedules for disposal.
(1) Identify any subcontractors responsible for the transportation

and disposal of solid waste. Submit licenses or permits for solid
waste disposal sites that are not a commercial operating facility.
(2) Evidence of the disposal facility's acceptance of the solid waste

must be attached to this plan during the construction. Attach a
copy of each of the Non-hazardous Solid Waste Diversion Reports to
the disposal plan. Submit the report for the previous quarter on
the first working day after the first quarter that non-hazardous
solid waste has been disposed and/or diverted (e.g. the first
working day of January, April, July, and October).
(3) Indicate in the report the total amount of waste generated and
SECTION 01 57 20.00 10 Page 5

total amount of waste diverted in cubic meters or tons along with

the percent that was diverted.
(4) A recycling and solid waste minimization plan with a list of

measures to reduce consumption of energy and natural resources.
Detail in the plan the Contractor's actions to comply with and to
participate in Host Nation government sponsored recycling programs
to reduce the volume of solid waste at the source.
l. An air pollution control plan detailing provisions to assure that dust,

debris, materials, trash, etc., do not become air borne and travel off
the project site.
m. A contaminant prevention plan that: identifies potentially hazardous

substances to be used on the job site; identifies the intended actions
to prevent introduction of such materials into the air, water, or
ground; and details provisions for compliance with Host Nation and
Federal laws and regulations for storage and handling of these
materials. In accordance with EM 385-1-1, a copy of the Material
Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) and the maximum quantity of each hazardous
material to be onsite at any given time must be included in the
T
contaminant prevention plan. Update the plan as new hazardous
materials are brought onsite or removed from the site.
n. A waste water management plan that identifies the methods and

AF
procedures for management and/or discharge of waste waters which are
directly derived from construction activities, such as concrete curing
water, clean-up water, dewatering of ground water, disinfection water,
hydrostatic test water, and water used in flushing of lines. If a
settling/retention pond is required, the plan must include the design
of the pond including drawings, removal plan, and testing requirements
for possible pollutants. If land application will be the method of
disposal for the waste water, the plan must include a sketch showing
R
the location for land application along with a description of the
pretreatment methods to be implemented. If surface discharge will be
the method of disposal, include a copy of the permit and associated
documents as an attachment prior to discharging the waste water. If
disposal is to a sanitary sewer, the plan must include documentation
D
that the Waste Water Treatment Plant Operator has approved the flow
rate, volume, and type of discharge.
o. A historical, archaeological, cultural resources biological resources

and wetlands plan that defines procedures for identifying and
protecting historical, archaeological, cultural resources, biological
resources and wetlands known to be on the project site: and/or
identifies procedures to be followed if historical archaeological,
cultural resources, biological resources and wetlands not previously
known to be onsite or in the area are discovered during construction.
Include in the plan methods to assure the protection of known or
discovered resources, identifying lines of communication between
Contractor personnel and the Contracting Officer.
p. Include and update a pesticide treatment plan, as information becomes

available. Include in the plan: sequence of treatment, dates, times,
locations, pesticide trade name, Host Nation or EPA registration
numbers, authorized uses, chemical composition, formulation, original
and applied concentration, application rates of active ingredient (i.e.
pounds of active ingredient applied), equipment used for application
and calibration of equipment. Host Nation or Federal pest management
SECTION 01 57 20.00 10 Page 6

record keeping and reporting requirements as well as any additional

Installation Project Office specific requirements are the Contractor's
responsibility in conformance with DA AR 200-1 Chapter 5--Pest
Management, Section 5-4 "Program requirements" for data required to be
reported to the Installation.
1.7.3 Appendix
Attach to the Environmental Protection Plan, as an appendix, copies of all

environmental permits, permit application packages, approvals to construct,
notifications, certifications, reports, and termination documents.
1.8 PROTECTION FEATURES
This paragraph supplements the Contract Clause PROTECTION OF EXISTING

VEGETATION, STRUCTURES, EQUIPMENT, UTILITIES, AND IMPROVEMENTS. Prior to
start of any onsite construction activities, the Contractor and the
Contracting Officer will make a joint condition survey. Immediately
following the survey, the Contractor will prepare a brief report including
a plan describing the features requiring protection under the provisions of
the Contract Clauses, which are not specifically identified on the drawings
T
as environmental features requiring protection along with the condition of
trees, shrubs and grassed areas immediately adjacent to the site of work
and adjacent to the Contractor's assigned storage area and access route(s),
as applicable. This survey report will be signed by both the the
AF
Contractor and the Contracting Officer upon mutual agreement as to its
accuracy and completeness. The Contractor must protect those environmental
features included in the survey report and any indicated on the drawings,
regardless of interference which their preservation may cause to the work
under the contract.
1.9 ENVIRONMENTAL ASSESSMENT OF CONTRACT DEVIATIONS

R
Any deviations from the drawings,plans and specifications, requested by the
Contractor and which may have an environmental impact, will be subject to
approval by the Contracting Officer and may require an extended review,
processing, and approval time. The Contracting Officer reserves the right
to disapprove alternate methods, even if they are more cost effective, if
D
the Contracting Officer determines that the proposed alternate method will
have an adverse environmental impact.
1.10 NOTIFICATION
The Contracting Officer will notify the Contractor in writing of any

observed noncompliance with Host Nation or Federal environmental laws or
regulations, permits, and other elements of the Contractor's Environmental
Protection plan. After receipt of such notice, the Contractor will inform
the Contracting Officer of the proposed corrective action and take such
action when approved by the Contracting Officer. The Contracting Officer
may issue an order stopping all or part of the work until satisfactory
corrective action has been taken. No time extensions will be granted or
equitable adjustments allowed for any such suspensions. This is in
addition to any other actions the Contracting Officer may take under the
contract, or in accordance with the Federal Acquisition Regulation or
Federal Law.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
NOT USED
SECTION 01 57 20.00 10 Page 7

PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 ENVIRONMENTAL PERMITS AND COMMITMENTS
Obtaining and complying with all environmental permits and commitments

required by Host Nation or Federal environmental laws and regulations is
the Contractor's responsibility.
3.2 LAND RESOURCES
Confine all activities to areas defined by the drawings and

specifications. Identify any land resources to be preserved within the
work area prior to the beginning of any construction. Do not remove, cut,
deface, injure, or destroy land resources including trees, shrubs, vines,
grasses, topsoil, and land forms without approval, except in areas
indicated on the drawings or specified to be cleared. Ropes, cables, or
guys will not be fastened to or attached to any trees for anchorage unless
specifically authorized. Provide effective protection for land and
vegetation resources at all times, as defined in the following
subparagraphs. Remove stone, soil, or other materials displaced into
T
uncleared areas.
3.2.1 Work Area Limits

AF
Mark the areas that need not be disturbed under this contract prior to
commencing construction activities. Mark or fence isolated areas within
the general work area which are not to be disturbed. Protect monuments and
markers before construction operations commence. Where construction
operations are to be conducted during darkness, any markers must be visible
in the dark. The Contractor's personnel must be knowledgeable of the
purpose for marking and/or protecting particular objects.
R
3.2.2 Landscape
Trees, shrubs, vines, grasses, land forms and other landscape features
indicated and defined on the drawings to be preserved must be clearly
identified by marking, fencing, or wrapping with boards, or any other
D
approved techniques. Restore landscape features damaged or destroyed

during construction operations outside the limits of the approved work area.
3.2.3 Erosion and Sediment Controls
Providing erosion and sediment control measures in accordance with Host

Nation and Federallaws and regulations is the Contractor's responsibility.
Select and maintain the erosion and sediment controls such that water
quality standards are not violated as a result of construction activities.
The area of bare soil exposed at any one time by construction operations
should be kept to a minimum. Construct or install temporary and permanent
erosion and sediment control best management practices (BMPs) as specified
in Section 01 57 23 TEMPORARY STORM WATER POLLUTION CONTROL. BMPs may
include, but not be limited to, vegetation cover, stream bank
stabilization, slope stabilization, silt fences, construction of terraces,
interceptor channels, sediment traps, inlet and outfall protection,
diversion channels, and sedimentation basins. The Contractor's best
management practices must also be in accordance with the Host Nation
requirement and the Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP) prepared
by the Contractor. Remove any temporary measures after the area has been
stabilized.
SECTION 01 57 20.00 10 Page 8

3.2.4 Contractor Facilities and Work Areas
Place field offices, staging areas, stockpile storage, and temporary

buildings in areas designated on the drawings or as directed by the
Contracting Officer. Temporary movement or relocation of Contractor
facilities will be made only when approved. Erosion and sediment controls
must be provided for onsite borrow and spoil areas to prevent sediment from
entering nearby waters. Temporary excavation and embankments for plant
and/or work areas must be controlled to protect adjacent areas.
3.3 WATER RESOURCES
Monitor all water areas affected by construction activities to prevent

pollution of surface and ground waters. Do not apply toxic or hazardous
chemicals to soil or vegetation unless otherwise indicated. For
construction activities immediately adjacent to impaired surface waters,
the Contractor must be capable of quantifying sediment or pollutant loading
to that surface water when required by Host Nation issued Clean Water Act
permits.
T
3.3.1 Cofferdams, Diversions, and Dewatering Operations
Construction operations for dewatering, removal of cofferdams, tailrace

excavation, and tunnel closure will be controlled at all times to maintain
AF
compliance with existing Host Nation water quality standards and designated
uses of the surface water body. Comply with the Host Nation water quality
standards and anti-degradation provisions.
3.4 AIR RESOURCES
Equipment operation, activities, or processes will be in accordance with

all Host Nation and Federal air emission and performance laws and standards.
R
3.4.1 Particulates
Dust particles; aerosols and gaseous by-products from construction

activities; and processing and preparation of materials, such as from
D
asphaltic batch plants; must be controlled at all times, including

weekends, holidays and hours when work is not in progress. Maintain
excavations, stockpiles, haul roads, permanent and temporary access roads,
plant sites, spoil areas, borrow areas, Contractor's mobilication area, and
other work areas within or outside the project boundaries free from
particulates which would cause the Host Nation or Federal air pollution
standards to be exceeded or which would cause a hazard or a nuisance.
Sprinkling, chemical treatment of an approved type, baghouse, scrubbers,
electrostatic precipitators or other methods will be permitted to control
particulates in the work area. Sprinkling, to be efficient, must be
repeated to keep the disturbed area damp at all times. Provide sufficient,
competent equipment available to accomplish these tasks. Perform
particulate control as the work proceeds and whenever a particulate
nuisance or hazard occurs. Comply with all Host Nation visibility
regulations.
3.4.2 Odors
Odors from construction activities must be controlled at all times. The

odors must be in compliance with Host Nation regulations and/or local
ordinances and may not constitute a health hazard.
SECTION 01 57 20.00 10 Page 9

3.4.3 Sound Intrusions
Keep construction activities under surveillance and control to minimize

environment damage by noise.
3.4.4 Burning
Burning is prohibited on the Government premises.
3.5 CHEMICAL MATERIALS MANAGEMENT AND WASTE DISPOSAL
Disposal of wastes will be as directed below, unless otherwise specified in

other sections and/or shown on the drawings.
3.5.1 Solid Wastes
Place solid wastes (excluding clearing debris) in containers which are

emptied on a regular schedule. Handling, storage, and disposal must be
conducted to prevent contamination. Employ segregation measures so that no
hazardous or toxic waste will become co-mingled with solid waste.
T
Transport solid waste off Government property and dispose of it in
compliance with Host Nation requirements for solid waste disposal. Verify
that the selected transporters and disposal facilities have the necessary
permits and licenses to operate.
AF
3.5.2 Chemicals and Chemical Wastes
Dispense chemicals ensuring no spillage to the ground or water. Perform

and document periodic inspections of dispensing areas to identify leakage
and initiate corrective action. This documentation will be periodically
reviewed by the Government. Collect chemical waste in corrosion resistant,
compatible containers. Collection drums must be monitored and removed to a
R
staging or storage area when contents are within 150 mm of the top. Wastes
will be classified, managed, stored, and disposed of in accordance with
Host Nation and Federal laws and regulations.
3.5.3 Contractor Generated Hazardous Wastes/Excess Hazardous Materials

D
Hazardous wastes are defined in 40 CFR 261, or are as defined by applicable

Host Nation regulations. Hazardous materials are defined in
49 CFR 171 - 178. At a minimum, manage and store hazardous waste in
compliance with 40 CFR 262. Take sufficient measures to prevent spillage
of hazardous and toxic materials during dispensing. Segregate hazardous
waste from other materials and wastes, protect it from the weather by
placing it in a safe covered location, and take precautionary measures such
as berming or other appropriate measures against accidental spillage.
Storage, describing, packaging, labeling, marking, and placarding of
hazardous waste and hazardous material in accordance with 49 CFR 171 - 178,
Host Nation laws and regulations is the Contractor's responsibility.
Transport Contractor generated hazardous waste off Government property
within 60 days in accordance with the Environmental Protection Agency and
the Department of Transportation laws and regulations. Dispose of
hazardous waste in compliance with Host Nation and Federal laws and
regulations. Spills of hazardous or toxic materials must be immediately
reported to the Contracting Officer and the Facility Environmental Office.
Cleanup and cleanup costs due to spills are the Contractor's
responsibility. The disposition of Contractor generated hazardous waste
and excess hazardous materials are the Contractor's responsibility.
SECTION 01 57 20.00 10 Page 10

Coordinate the disposition of hazardous waste with the Facility's

Hazardous Waste Manager and the Contracting Officer.
3.5.4 Fuel and Lubricants
Storage, fueling and lubrication of equipment and motor vehicles must be

conducted in a manner that affords the maximum protection against spill and
evaporation. Manage and store fuel, lubricants and oil in accordance with
all Host Nation and Federal laws and regulations. Used lubricants and used
oil to be discarded must be stored in marked corrosion-resistant containers
and recycled or disposed in accordance with 40 CFR 279 and Host Nation laws
and regulations. Storage of fuel on the project site is not allowed. Fuel
must be brought to the project site each day that work is performed.
3.5.5 Waste Water
Disposal of waste water will be as specified below.
a. Waste water from construction activities, such as onsite material

processing, concrete curing, foundation and concrete clean-up,
water used in concrete trucks, forms, etc. will not be allowed to
T
enter water ways or to be discharged prior to being treated to
remove pollutants. Dispose of the construction related waste
water off-Government property in accordance with all Host Nation
and Federal laws and regulations.
AF
b. For discharge of ground water, the Contractor will surface
discharge in accordance with all Host Nation and Federal laws and
regulations.
c. Water generated from the flushing of lines after disinfection or

disinfection in conjunction with hydrostatic testing testing will
be land applied in accordance with all Host Nation and Federal
R
laws and regulations for land application.
3.6 RECYCLING AND WASTE MINIMIZATION
Participate in Host Nation government sponsored recycling programs. The

D
Contractor is further encouraged to minimize solid waste generation

throughout the duration of the project.
3.7 NON-HAZARDOUS SOLID WASTE DIVERSION REPORT
Maintain an inventory of non-hazardous solid waste diversion and disposal

of construction and demolition debris. Submit a report to the Contracting
Officer on the first working day after each fiscal year quarter, starting
the first quarter that non-hazardous solid waste has been generated.
Include the following in the report:
Construction and Demolition (C&D) cubic meters, as appropriate

Debris Disposed
Debris Recycled
Total C&D Debris Generated cubic meters, as appropriate
SECTION 01 57 20.00 10 Page 11


Debris Disposed
Waste Sent to Waste-To-Energy cubic meters, as appropriate
Incineration Plant (This amount
should not be included in the
recycled amount)
3.8 HISTORICAL, ARCHAEOLOGICAL, AND CULTURAL RESOURCES
If during excavation or other construction activities any previously

unidentified or unanticipated historical, archaeological, and cultural
resources are discovered or found, all activities that may damage or alter
such resources will be temporarily suspended. Resources covered by this
paragraph include but are not limited to: any human skeletal remains or
burials; artifacts; shell, midden, bone, charcoal, or other deposits; rock
or coral alignments, pavings, wall, or other constructed features; and any
indication of agricultural or other human activities. Upon such discovery
or find, immediately notify the Contracting Officer so that the appropriate
authorities may be notified and a determination made as to their
significance and what, if any, special disposition of the finds should be
T
made. Cease all activities that may result in impact to or the destruction
of these resources. Secure the area and prevent employees or other persons
from trespassing on, removing, or otherwise disturbing such resources.
3.9 BIOLOGICAL RESOURCES

AF
Minimize interference with, disturbance to, and damage to fish, wildlife,
and plants including their habitat. The protection of threatened and
endangered animal and plant species, including their habitat, is the
Contractor's responsibility in accordance with Host Nation and Federal laws
and regulations.
R
3.10 INTEGRATED PEST MANAGEMENT
In order to minimize impacts to existing fauna and flora, the Contractor

through the Contracting Officer, must coordinate with the Installation Pest
D
Management Coordinator (IPMC) Project Pesticide Coordinator (PPC)at the

earliest possible time prior to pesticide application. Discuss integrated
pest management strategies with the IPMC and receive concurrence from the
IPMC through the COR prior to the application of any pesticide associated
with these specifications. Installation Project Office Pest Management
personnel will be given the opportunity to be present at all meetings
concerning treatment measures for pest or disease control and during
application of the pesticide. The use and management of pesticides are
regulated under 40 CFR 150 - 189.
3.10.1 Pesticide Delivery and Storage
Deliver pesticides to the site in the original, unopened containers bearing

legible labels indicating the EPA registration number and the
manufacturer's registered uses. Store pesticides according to
manufacturer's instructions and under lock and key when unattended.
3.10.2 Qualifications
For the application of pesticides, use the services of a subcontractor

whose principal business is pest control. The subcontractor must be
licensed and certified where the work is to be performed.
SECTION 01 57 20.00 10 Page 12

3.10.3 Pesticide Handling Requirements
Formulate, treat with, and dispose of pesticides and associated containers

in accordance with label directions and use the clothing and personal
protective equipment specified on the labeling for use during all phases of
the application. Furnish Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for all
pesticide products.
3.10.4 Application
Apply pesticides using a Host Nation Certified Pesticide Applicator in

accordance with EPA label restrictions and recommendation. The Certified
Applicator must wear clothing and personal protective equipment as
specified on the pesticide label. The Contracting Officer will designate
locations for water used in formulating. Do not allow the equipment to
overflow. All equipment must be inspected for leaks, clogging, wear, or
damage and repaired prior to application of pesticide.
3.11 PREVIOUSLY USED EQUIPMENT
T
Clean all previously used construction equipment prior to bringing it onto
the project site. Ensure that the equipment is free from soil residuals,
egg deposits from plant pests, noxious weeds, and plant seeds. Consult
with the Host Nation jurisdictional office for additional cleaning
requirements.
AF
3.12 MAINTENANCE OF POLLUTION FACILITIES
Maintain permanent and temporary pollution control facilities and devices

for the duration of the contract or for that length of time construction
activities create the particular pollutant.
R
3.13 MILITARY MUNITIONS
In the event military munitions, as defined in 40 CFR 260, are discovered

or uncovered, the Contractor will immediately stop work in that area and
immediately inform the Contracting Officer.
D
3.14 TRAINING OF CONTRACTOR PERSONNEL
The Contractor's personnel must be trained in all phases of environmental

protection and pollution control. Conduct environmental
protection/pollution control meetings for all personnel prior to commencing
construction activities. Additional meetings must be conducted for new
personnel and when site conditions change. Include in the training and
meeting agenda: methods of detecting and avoiding pollution;
familiarization with statutory and contractual pollution standards;
installation and care of devices, vegetative covers, and instruments
required for monitoring purposes to ensure adequate and continuous
environmental protection/pollution control; anticipated hazardous or toxic
chemicals or wastes, and other regulated contaminants; recognition and
protection of archaeological sites, artifacts, wetlands, and endangered
species and their habitat that are known to be in the area.
3.15 CONTAMINATED MEDIA MANAGEMENT
Manage contaminated environmental media consisting of, but not limited to,
ground water, soils, and sediments in accordance with Part 4 G10.
SECTION 01 57 20.00 10 Page 13

3.16 POST CONSTRUCTION CLEANUP
The Contractor will clean up all areas used for construction in accordance
with Contract Clause: "Cleaning Up". Unless otherwise instructed in
writing by the Contracting Officer, obliterate all signs of temporary
construction facilities such as haul roads, work area, structures,
foundations of temporary structures, stockpiles of excess or waste
materials, and other vestiges of construction prior to final acceptance of
the work. The disturbed area must be graded, filled and the entire area
seeded unless otherwise indicated.
T
AF
R
D
SECTION 01 57 20.00 10 Page 14

SECTION 01 57 23
TEMPORARY STORM WATER POLLUTION CONTROL

04/08
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
The work consists of implementing the storm water pollution prevention

measures to prevent sediment from entering streams or water bodies as
specified in this Section in conformance with the requirements of Section
01 57 20.00 10 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION, and the requirements of the
National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (NPDES).
1.2 REFERENCES

T
ASTM D4439
AF (2014) Geosynthetics
ASTM D4491 (1999a; R 2014; E 2014) Water Permeability

of Geotextiles by Permittivity
ASTM D4533/D4533M (2015) Standard Test Method for Trapezoid

Tearing Strength of Geotextiles
R
ASTM D4632/D4632M (2015) Grab Breaking Load and Elongation
of Geotextiles
ASTM D4751 (2012) Determining Apparent Opening Size

of a Geotextile
D
ASTM D4873 (2002; R 2009) Identification, Storage,

and Handling of Geosynthetic Rolls and
Samples
1.3 SUBMITTALS

Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan; G M/R

Storm Water Notice of Intent; G M/R
SD-06 Test Reports
Storm Water Inspection Reports for General Permit; G M

Erosion and Sediment Controls; G M
SD-07 Certificates
Mill Certificate or Affidavit
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Identify, store and handle filter fabric in accordance with ASTM D4873.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 COMPONENTS FOR SILT FENCES
2.1.1 Filter Fabric
Provide geotextile that complies with the requirements of ASTM D4439, and
consists of polymeric filaments which are formed into a stable network such
T
that filaments retain their relative positions. The filament shall consist
of a long-chain synthetic polymer composed of at least 85 percent by weight
of ester, propylene, or amide, and contains stabilizers and/or inhibitors
added to the base plastic to make the filaments resistant to deterioration
AF
due to ultraviolet and heat exposure. Provide synthetic filter fabric that
contains ultraviolet ray inhibitors and stabilizers to assure a minimum of
six months of expected usable construction life at a temperature range of
-18 to plus 49 degrees C. The filter fabric shall meet the following
requirements:
FILTER FABRIC FOR SILT SCREEN FENCE

R
PHYSICAL PROPERTY TEST PROCEDURE STRENGTH REQUIREMENT
Grab Tensile Elongation ASTM D4632/D4632M 445 N min. 30 percent

D
(percent) max.
Trapezoid Tear ASTM D4533/D4533M 245 N min.
Permittivity ASTM D4491 0.2 sec-1
AOS (U.S. Std Sieve) ASTM D4751 20-100
2.1.2 Silt Fence Stakes and Posts
Use either wooden stakes or steel posts for fence construction. Wooden
stakes utilized for silt fence construction, shall have a minimum cross
section of 50 by 50 mm when oak is used and 100 by 100 mm when pine is
used, and have a minimum length of 1.5 m. Steel posts (standard "U" or "T"
section) utilized for silt fence construction, shall have a minimum mass of
1.98 kg/linear meter and a minimum length of 1.5 m.
2.1.3 Mill Certificate or Affidavit
Provide a mill certificate or affidavit attesting that the fabric and
factory seams meet chemical, physical, and manufacturing requirements

specified above. Specify in the mill certificate or affidavit the actual
Minimum Average Roll Values and identify the fabric supplied by roll
identification numbers. Submit a mill certificate or affidavit signed by a
legally authorized official from the company manufacturing the filter
fabric.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROLS
The controls and measures required of the Contractor are described below.
3.1.1 Stabilization Practices
The stabilization practices to be implemented mayinclude mulching or

erosion control matts. On the daily CQC Report, record the dates when the
major grading activities occur, (e.g., excavation, embankment, and grading
); when construction activities temporarily or permanently cease on a
portion of the site; and when stabilization practices are initiated.
Except as provided in paragraphs UNSUITABLE CONDITIONS and NO ACTIVITY FOR
T
LESS THAN 21 DAYS, initiate stabilization practices as soon as practicable,
but no more than 14 days, in any portion of the site where construction
activities have permanently ceased.
3.1.1.1
AF
Unsuitable Conditions
Where the initiation of stabilization measures by the fourteenth day after

construction activity temporarily or permanently ceases or is precluded by
unsuitable conditions caused by the weather, initiate stabilization
practices as soon as practicable after conditions become suitable.
3.1.1.2 No Activity for Less Than 21 Days

R
When the total time period in which construction activity is temporarily
ceased on a portion of the site is 21 days minimum, stabilization practices
do not have to be initiated on that portion of the site until 14 days have
elapsed after construction activity temporarily ceased.
D
3.1.1.3 Burnoff
Burnoff of the ground cover is not permitted.
3.1.1.4 Protection of Erodible Soils
Immediately finish the earthwork brought to a final grade, as indicated or

specified, and protect the side slopes and back slopes upon completion of
rough grading. Plan and conduct earthwork to minimize the duration of
exposure of unprotected soils.
3.1.2 Erosion, Sediment and Stormwater Control
Prepare and submit a Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP) for the
project to the Contracting Officer prior to the commencement of work. The
SWPPP shall meet the requirements of the Host Nation and general permit for
storm water discharges from construction sites. Submit the SWPPP to the
Contracting Officer, a minimum of 14 calendar days prior to the start of
any land disturbing activities. Maintain an approved copy of the SWPPP at
the construction on-site office, and continually update as regulations
require, to reflect current site conditions. Include within the SWPPP:
a. Identify potential sources of pollution which may be reasonably

expected to affect the quality of storm water discharge from the
site.
b. Describe and ensure implementation of practices which will be used

to reduce the pollutants in storm water discharge from the site.
c. Ensure compliance with terms of the Host Nation and general permit
for storm water discharge.
d. Select applicable best management practices from EPA 832-R-92-005.
e. Include a completed copy of the Registration Statement, BMP

Inspection Report Template and Notice of Termination except for
the effective date.
3.1.3 Stormwater Drainage
There will be no discharge of excavation ground water to the sanitary sewer
T
or storm drains without prior specific authorization of the Environmental
Programs Division in writing. Discharge of hazardous substances will not
be permitted under any circumstances. Construction site runoff will be
prevented from entering any storm drain directly by the use of method
AF
suitable to the Environmental Programs Division. Provide erosion
protection of the surrounding soils.
3.1.4 Structural Practices
Implement structural practices to divert flows from exposed soils,

temporarily store flows, or otherwise limit runoff and the discharge of
pollutants from exposed areas of the site. Implement structural practices
R
in a timely manner, during the construction process, to minimize erosion
and sediment runoff. Include the following devices as appropriate.
3.1.4.1 Silt Fences

D
Provide silt fences as a temporary structural practice to minimize erosion

and sediment runoff. Properly install silt fences to effectively retain
sediment immediately after completing each phase of work where erosion
would occur in the form of sheet and rill erosion (e.g. clearing and
grubbing, excavation, embankment, and grading). Obtain approval from the
Contracting Officer prior to final removal of silt fence barriers.
3.1.4.2 Diversion Dikes
Build diversion dikes with a maximum channel slope of 2 percent and

adequately compacted to prevent failure. The minimum height measured from
the top of the dike to the bottom of the channel shall be 0.5 m. The
minimum base width shall be 1.8 m and the minimum top width shall be 0.6 m.
Ensure that the diversion dikes are not damaged by construction operations
or traffic.
3.1.5 Sediment Basins
Trap sediment in temporary sediment basins. Select a basin size to

accommodate the runoff of a local 50-year storm. Pump dry and remove the
accumulated sediment, after each storm. Use a paved weir or vertical
overflow pipe for overflow. Remove collected sediment from the site.
Institute effluent quality monitoring programs. Install, inspect, and
maintain best management practices (BMPs) as required by the general
permit. Prepare BMP Inspection Reports as required by the general permit.
If required by the permit, include those inspection reports.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF SILT FENCES
Extend silt fences a minimum of 400 mm above the ground surface without
exceeding 860 mm above the ground surface. Provide filter fabric from a
continuous roll cut to the length of the barrier to avoid the use of
joints. When joints are unavoidable, splice together filter fabric at a
support post, with a minimum 150 mm overlap, and securely sealed. Excavate
trench approximately 100 mm wide and 100 mm deep on the upslope side of the
location of the silt fence. The 100 by 100 mm trench shall be backfilled
and the soil compacted over the filter fabric. Remove silt fences upon
approval by the Contracting Officer.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Maintain the erosion and sediment control measures, and other protective
T
measures in good and effective operating condition by performing routine
inspections to determine condition and effectiveness, by repair of erosion
and sediment control measures and other protective measures. Use the
following procedures to maintain the protective measures.
AF
3.3.1 Silt Fence Maintenance
Inspect the silt fences in accordance with paragraph, titled "Inspections,"

of this section. Any required repairs shall be made promptly. Pay close
attention to the repair of damaged silt fence resulting from end runs and
undercutting. Should the fabric on a silt fence decompose or become
ineffective, and the barrier is still necessary, replace the fabric
R
promptly. Remove sediment deposits when deposits reach one-third of the
height of the barrier. Remove a silt fence when it is no longer required.
The immediate area occupied by the fence and any sediment deposits shall be
shaped to an acceptable grade. The areas disturbed by this shaping shall
receive erosion control.
D
3.3.2 Diversion Dike Maintenance
Inspect diversion dikes in accordance with paragraph, titled "Inspections,"

of this section. Pay close attention to the repair of damaged diversion
dikes and accomplish necessary repairs promptly. When diversion dikes are
no longer required, shape to an acceptable grade and apply erosion control.
3.4 INSPECTIONS
3.4.1 General
Inspect disturbed areas of the construction site, areas that have not been
finally stabilized used for storage of materials exposed to precipitation,
stabilization practices, structural practices, other controls, and area
where vehicles exit the site at least once every seven (7) calendar days
and within 24 hours of the end of any storm that produces 13 mm or more
rainfall at the site. Conduct inspections at least once every month where
sites have been finally stabilized.
3.4.2 Inspections Details
Inspect disturbed areas and areas used for material storage that are
exposed to precipitation for evidence of, or the potential for, pollutants
entering the drainage system. Observe erosion and sediment control
measures identified in the Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan to ensure
that they are operating correctly. Inspect discharge locations or points
to ascertain whether erosion control measures are effective in preventing
significant impacts to receiving waters. Inspect locations where vehicles
exit the site for evidence of offsite sediment tracking.
3.4.3 Inspection Reports
For each inspection conducted, prepare a report summarizing the scope of

the inspection, name(s) and qualifications of personnel making the
inspection, the date(s) of the inspection, major observations relating to
the implementation of the Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan,
maintenance performed, and actions taken. Furnish the report to the
Contracting Officer within 24 hours of the inspection as a part of the
Contractor's daily CQC REPORT. A copy of the inspection report shall be
maintained on the job site.
T
3.4.4 Monthly Inspection Report and Certification Form
Complete, sign, and submit the original form, on the first working day of
AF
each month, to the Contracting Officer.
Unless otherwise notified, submit the Monthly Inspection Reports and

Certification Forms for an additional two (2) months after the final
completion of all stormwater pollution measures required in ths contract
have been implemented.
R
D
SECTION 01 58 00
PROJECT IDENTIFICATION
08/09
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

EP 310-1-6a (2006) Sign Standards Manual, VOL 1
EP 310-1-6b (2006) Sign Standards Manual, VOL 2,

Appendices
T
1.2 SUBMITTALS

AF
SD-02 Shop Drawings

R
Preliminary drawing indicating layout and text content; G M
Sign Legend Orders; G M

D
1.3 PROJECT SIGN
1.3.1 Construction Project Signs (USACE)
Furnish the construction project sign package, maintain the signs during
construction, and remove the signs from the job site upon completion of the
project. The construction project sign package consists of two signs: one
for project identification and the other to show the on-the-job safety
performance of the contractor. The package shall conform to the
requirements of EP 310-1-6a and EP 310-1-6b, specifically Section 16.
Submit the sign legend orders as described in Section 16 of EP 310-1-6a
prior to erecting the signs.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Used
PART 3 EXECUTION
Not Used
T
AF
R
D
SECTION 01 74 19
CONSTRUCTION AND DEMOLITION WASTE MANAGEMENT

01/07
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

U.S. GREEN BUILDING COUNCIL (USGBC)
LEED BD+C (2009; R 2010) Leadership in Energy and

Environmental Design(tm) Building Design
and Construction (LEED-NC)
T
1.2 GOVERNMENT POLICY
Government policy is to apply sound environmental principles in the design,

construction and use of facilities. As part of the implementation of that
AF
policy: (1) practice efficient waste management when sizing, cutting, and
installing products and materials and (2) use all reasonable means to
divert construction and demolition waste from landfills and incinerators
and to facilitate their recycling or reuse. A minimum of 60 percent by
weight of total project solid waste shall be diverted from the landfill.
1.3 MANAGEMENT
R
Develop and implement a waste management program. Take a pro-active,
responsible role in the management of construction and demolition waste and
require all subcontractors, vendors, and suppliers to participate in the
effort. Construction and demolition waste includes products of demolition
or removal, excess or unusable construction materials, packaging materials
D
for construction products, and other materials generated during the

construction process but not incorporated into the work. In the management
of waste consideration shall be given to the availability of viable
markets, the condition of the material, the ability to provide the material
in suitable condition and in a quantity acceptable to available markets,
and time constraints imposed by internal project completion mandates. The
Contractor is responsible for implementation of any special programs
involving rebates or similar incentives related to recycling of waste.
Revenues or other savings obtained for salvage, or recycling accrue to the
Contractor. Appropriately permit firms and facilities used for recycling,
reuse, and disposal for the intended use to the extent required by federal,
state, and local regulations. Also, provide on-site instruction of
appropriate separation, handling, recycling, salvage, reuse, and return
methods to be used by all parties at the appropriate stages of the project.
1.4 SUBMITTALS


Waste Management Plan; G M/R; (LEED BD+C)
Records; (LEED BD+C)
1.5 MEETINGS
Conduct Construction Waste Management meetings. After award of the

Contract and prior to commencement of work, schedule and conduct a meeting
with the Contracting Officer to discuss the proposed Waste Management Plan
and to develop a mutual understanding relative to the details of waste
management. The requirements for this meeting may be fulfilled during the
coordination and mutual understanding meeting outlined in Section
T
01 45 00.00 10 QUALITY CONTROL. At a minimum, environmental and waste
management goals and issues shall be discussed at the following additional
meetings:
a.
AF
Pre-bid meeting.
b. Preconstruction Pre-demolition meeting.
c. Regular site QC meetings.
d. Work safety meetings.

R
1.6 WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN
A waste management plan shall be submitted within 15 days after notice to

proceed and not less than 10 days before the pre-demolition meeting. The
plan shall demonstrate how the project waste diversion goal shall be met
D
and shall include the following:
a. Name of individuals on the Contractor's staff responsible for waste

prevention and management.
b. Actions that will be taken to reduce solid waste generation, including

coordination with subcontractors to ensure awareness and participation.
c. Description of the regular meetings to be held to address waste

management.
d. Description of the specific approaches to be used in recycling/reuse of

the various materials generated, including the areas on site and
equipment to be used for processing, sorting, and temporary storage of
wastes.
e. Characterization, including estimated types and quantities, of the

waste to be generated.
f. Name of landfill and/or incinerator to be used and the estimated costs

for use, assuming that there would be no salvage or recycling on the
project.
g. Identification of local and regional reuse programs, including

non-profit organizations such as schools, local housing agencies, and
organizations that accept used materials such as materials exchange
networks and Habitat for Humanity. Include the name, location, and
phone number for each reuse facility to be used, and provide a copy of
the permit or license for each facility.
h. List of specific waste materials that will be salvaged for resale,

salvaged and reused on the current project, salvaged and stored for
reuse on a future project, or recycled. Recycling facilities that will
be used shall be identified by name, location, and phone number,
including a copy of the permit or license for each facility.
i. Identification of materials that cannot be recycled/reused with an

explanation or justification, to be approved by the Contracting Officer.
j. Description of the means by which any waste materials identified in

item (h) above will be protected from contamination.
T
k. Description of the means of transportation of the recyclable materials
(whether materials will be site-separated and self-hauled to designated
centers, or whether mixed materials will be collected by a waste hauler
and removed from the site).
AF
l. Anticipated net cost savings determined by subtracting Contractor
program management costs and the cost of disposal from the revenue
generated by sale of the materials and the incineration and/or landfill
cost avoidance.
Revise and resubmit Plan as required by the Contracting Officer. Approval

of Contractor's Plan will not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for
R
compliance with applicable environmental regulations or meeting project
cumulative waste diversion requirement. Distribute copies of the Waste
Management Plan to each subcontractor, the Quality Control Manager, and the
D
1.7 RECORDS
Records shall be maintained to document the quantity of waste generated;

the quantity of waste diverted through sale, reuse, or recycling; and the
quantity of waste disposed by landfill or incineration. Quantities may be
measured by weight or by volume, but must be consistent throughout. List
each type of waste separately noting the disposal or diversion date.
Identify the landfill, recycling center, waste processor, or other
organization used to process or receive the solid waste. Provide
explanations for any waste not recycled or reused. With each application
for payment, submit updated documentation for solid waste disposal and
diversion, and submit manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices
specifically identifying the project and waste material. The records shall
be made available to the Contracting Officer during construction, and a
copy of the records shall be delivered to the Contracting Officer upon
completion of the construction.
1.8 COLLECTION
Separate, store, protect, and handle at the site identified recyclable and
salvageable waste products in a manner that maximizes recyclability and
salvagability of identified materials. Provide the necessary containers,

bins and storage areas to facilitate effective waste management and clearly
and appropriately identify them. Provide materials for barriers and
enclosures around recyclable material storage areas which are nonhazardous
and recyclable or reusable. Locate out of the way of construction traffic.
Provide adequate space for pick-up and delivery and convenience to
subcontractors. Recycling and waste bin areas are to be kept neat and
clean, and recyclable materials shall be handled to prevent contamination
of materials from incompatible products and materials. Clean contaminated
materials prior to placing in collection containers. Use cleaning materials
that are nonhazardous and biodegradable. Handle hazardous waste and
hazardous materials in accordance with applicable regulations and
coordinate with Section 01 57 20.00 10 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION. Separate
materials by one of the following methods:
1.8.1 Source Separated Method.
Waste products and materials that are recyclable shall be separated from
trash and sorted as described below into appropriately marked separate
containers and then transported to the respective recycling facility for
further processing. Deliver materials in accordance with recycling or
T
reuse facility requirements (e.g., free of dirt, adhesives, solvents,
petroleum contamination, and other substances deleterious to the recycling
process). Separate materials into the following category types as
appropriate to the project waste and to the available recycling and reuse
AF
programs in the project area:
a. Land clearing debris.
b. Asphalt.
c. Concrete and masonry.

R
d. Metal (e.g. banding, stud trim, ductwork, piping, rebar, roofing, other
trim, steel, iron, galvanized, stainless steel, aluminum, copper, zinc,
lead brass, bronze).
(1) Ferrous.
D
(2) Non-ferrous.
e. Wood (nails and staples allowed).
f. Debris.
g. Glass (colored glass allowed).
h. Paper.
(1) Bond.
(2) Newsprint.
(3) Cardboard and paper packaging materials.
i. Plastic.
Type
1 Polyethylene Terephthalate (PET, PETE)
2 High Density Polyethylene (HDPE)
3 Vinyl (Polyvinyl Chloride or PVC)
4 Low Density Polyethylene (LDPE)
5 Polypropylene (PP)
6 Polystyrene (PS)
7. Other. Use of this code indicates that the package in

question is made with a resin other than the six listed
above, or is made of more than one resin listed above, and
used in a multi-layer combination.
T
j. Gypsum.
k. Non-hazardous paint and paint cans.
l. Carpet.
AF
m. Ceiling tiles.
n. Insulation.
o. Beverage containers.
R
1.8.2 Co-Mingled Method.
Waste products and recyclable materials shall be placed into a single

container and then transported to a recycling facility where the recyclable
materials are sorted and processed.
D
1.8.3 Other Methods.
Other methods proposed by the Contractor may be used when approved by the
1.9 DISPOSAL
Control accumulation of waste materials and trash. Recycle or dispose of

collected materials off-site at intervals approved by the Contracting
Officer and in compliance with waste management procedures. Except as
otherwise specified in other sections of the specifications, disposal shall
be in accordance with the following:
1.9.1 Reuse.
First consideration shall be given to salvage for reuse since little or no

re-processing is necessary for this method, and less pollution is created
when items are reused in their original form. Coordinate reuse with the
Contracting Officer. Sale or donation of waste suitable for reuse shall be
considered.
1.9.2 Recycle.
Waste materials not suitable for reuse, but having value as being
recyclable, shall be made available for recycling. All fluorescent lamps,
HID lamps, and mercury-containing thermostats removed from the site shall
be recycled. Arrange for timely pickups from the site or deliveries to
recycling facilities in order to prevent contamination of recyclable
materials.
1.9.3 Waste.
Materials with no practical use or economic benefit shall be disposed at a

landfill or incinerator.
1.9.4 Return
Set aside and protect misdelivered and substandard products and materials
and return to supplier for credit.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
T
Not used.
PART 3 EXECUTION
AF
Not used. -- End of Section --
R
D
SECTION 01 78 00
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
08/11
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

ASTM E1971 (2005; R 2011) Stewardship for the

Cleaning of Commercial and Institutional
Buildings
T
GREEN SEAL (GS)
GS-37 (2012) Cleaning Products for Industrial

and Institutional Use
AF
ERDC/ITL TR-12-1 (2012) CAD Drafting Standard

R
FC 1-300-09N (2014) Navy and Marine Corps Design

Procedures
D
UFC 1-300-08 (2009, with Change 2) Criteria for

Transfer and Acceptance of DoD Real
Property
1.2 DEFINITIONS
1.2.1 As-Built Drawings
As-built drawings are developed and maintained by the Contractor and depict
actual conditions, including deviations from the Contract Documents. These
deviations and additions may result from coordination required by, but not
limited to: contract modifications; official responses to Contractor
submitted Requests for Information; direction from the Contracting Officer;
designs which are the responsibility of the Contractor, and differing site
conditions. Maintain the as-builts throughout construction as red-lined
hard copies on site. As-built drawings are further defined in NFAS
5252.236-9310. These files serve as the basis for the creation of the
record drawings.
1.2.2 Record Drawings
The record drawings are the final compilation of actual conditions

reflected in the as-built drawings.
1.3 SOURCE DRAWING FILES
Request the full set of electronic drawings, in the source format, for
Record Drawing preparation, after award and at least 30 days prior to
required use.
1.3.1 Terms and Conditions
Data contained on these electronic files must not be used for any purpose
other than as a convenience in the preparation of construction drawings and
data for the referenced project. Any other use or reuse shall be at the
sole risk of the Contractor and without liability or legal exposure to the
Government. The Contractor must make no claim and waives to the fullest
extent permitted by law, any claim or cause of action of any nature against
the Government, its agents or sub consultants that may arise out of or in
connection with the use of these electronic files. The Contractor must, to
T
the fullest extent permitted by law, indemnify and hold the Government
harmless against all damages, liabilities or costs, including reasonable
attorney's fees and defense costs, arising out of or resulting from the use
of these electronic files.
AF
These electronic CAD drawing files are not construction documents.
Differences may exist between the CAD files and the corresponding
construction documents. The Government makes no representation regarding
the accuracy or completeness of the electronic CAD files, nor does it make
representation to the compatibility of these files with the Contractor
hardware or software. In the event that a conflict arises between the
signed and sealed construction documents prepared by the Government and the
R
furnished Source drawing files, the signed and sealed construction
documents govern. The Contractor is responsible for determining if any
conflict exists. Use of these Source Drawing files does not relieve the
Contractor of duty to fully comply with the contract documents, including
and without limitation, the need to check, confirm and coordinate the work
D
of all contractors for the project. If the Contractor uses, duplicates or

modifies these electronic source drawing files for use in producing
construction drawings and data related to this contract, remove all
previous indicia of ownership (seals, logos, signatures, initials and
dates).
1.4 SUBMITTALS

SD-03 Product Data
Warranty Management Plan

Warranty Tags
Final Cleaning
Spare Parts Data
SD-08 Manufacturer's Instructions
Preventative Maintenance
Condition Monitoring (Predictive Testing)
Inspection
Posted Instructions
Operation and Maintenance Manuals; G R
As-Built Drawings; G M/R

Record Drawings; G M/R
As-Built Record of Equipment and Materials; G M/R
FINAL APPROVED SHOP DRAWINGS; G M/R
CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT SPECIFICATIONS; G M/R
T
Certification of EPA Designated Items; G M/R
Interim DD FORM 1354; G M/R
Checklist for DD FORM 1354; G M/R
NAVFAC Sustainable & Energy Data Record Card; G M/R
AF
1.5 SPARE PARTS DATA
Submit two (2) copies of the Spare Parts Data list.
Indicate manufacturer's name, part number, nomenclature, and stock level

required for maintenance and repair. List those items that may be
standard to the normal maintenance of the system.
R
1.6 QUALITY CONTROL
Additions and corrections to the contract drawings must be equal in quality

and detail to that of the originals. Line colors, line weights, lettering,
D
layering conventions, and symbols must conform to DIM and be the same as
the original line colors, line weights, lettering, layering conventions,
and symbols.
1.7 WARRANTY MANAGEMENT
1.7.1 Warranty Management Plan
Develop a warranty management plan which contains information relevant to

the clause Warranty of Construction. At least 30 days before the planned
pre-warranty conference, submit two (2) sets of the warranty management
plan. Include within the warranty management plan all required actions and
documents to assure that the Government receives all warranties to which it
is entitled. The plan must be in narrative form and contain sufficient
detail to render it suitable for use by future maintenance and repair
personnel, whether tradesmen, or of engineering background, not necessarily
familiar with this contract. The term "status" as indicated below must
include due date and whether item has been submitted or was accomplished.
Warranty information made available during the construction phase must be
submitted to the Contracting Officer for approval prior to each monthly pay
estimate. Assemble approved information in a binder and turn over to the
Government upon acceptance of the work. The construction warranty period

will begin on the date of project acceptance and continue for the full
product warranty period. A joint 4 month and 9 month warranty inspection
will be conducted, measured from time of acceptance, by the Contractor,
Contracting Officer and the Customer Representative. Include within the
warranty management plan , but not limited to, the following:
a. Roles and responsibilities of all personnel associated with the

warranty process, including points of contact and telephone numbers
within the organizations of the Contractors, subContractors,
manufacturers or suppliers involved.
b. Furnish with each warranty the name, address, and telephone number of
each of the guarantor's representatives nearest to the project location.
c. Listing and status of delivery of all Certificates of Warranty for

extended warranty items, to include roofs, HVAC balancing, pumps,
motors, transformers, and for all commissioned systems such as fire
protection and alarm systems, sprinkler systems, lightning protection
systems, etc.
T
d. A list for each warranted equipment, item, feature of construction or
system indicating:
(1) Name of item.

(2)
AF
Model and serial numbers.
(3) Location where installed.
(4) Name and phone numbers of manufacturers or suppliers.
(5) Names, addresses and telephone numbers of sources of spare parts.
(6) Warranties and terms of warranty. Include one-year overall
warranty of construction, including the starting date of warranty
of construction. Items which have extended warranties must be
indicated with separate warranty expiration dates.
R
(7) Cross-reference to warranty certificates as applicable.
(8) Starting point and duration of warranty period.
(9) Summary of maintenance procedures required to continue the
warranty in force.
(10) Cross-reference to specific pertinent Operation and Maintenance
D
manuals.
(11) Organization, names and phone numbers of persons to call for
warranty service.
(12) Typical response time and repair time expected for various
warranted equipment.
e. The plans for attendance at the 4 and 9 month post-construction

warranty inspections conducted by the Government.
f. Procedure and status of tagging of all equipment covered by extended

warranties.
g. Copies of instructions to be posted near selected pieces of equipment

where operation is critical for warranty and/or safety reasons.
1.7.2 Performance Bond
The Performance Bond must remain effective throughout the construction

period.
a. In the event the Contractor fails to commence and diligently pursue any
construction warranty work required, the Contracting Officer will have

the work performed by others, and after completion of the work, will
charge the remaining construction warranty funds of expenses incurred
by the Government while performing the work, including, but not limited
to administrative expenses.
b. In the event sufficient funds are not available to cover the

construction warranty work performed by the Government at the
Contractor's expense, the Contracting Officer will have the right to
recoup expenses from the bonding company.
c. Following oral or written notification of required construction

warranty repair work, respond in a timely manner. Written verification
will follow oral instructions. Failure to respond will be cause for
the Contracting Officer to proceed against the Contractor.
1.7.3 Pre-Warranty Conference
Prior to contract completion, and at a time designated by the Contracting

Officer, meet with the Contracting Officer to develop a mutual
understanding with respect to the requirements of this section.
T
Communication procedures for Contractor notification of construction
warranty defects, priorities with respect to the type of defect, reasonable
time required for Contractor response, and other details deemed necessary
by the Contracting Officer for the execution of the construction warranty
AF
will be established/reviewed at this meeting. In connection with these
requirements and at the time of the Contractor's quality control completion
inspection, furnish the name, telephone number and address of a licensed
and bonded company which is authorized to initiate and pursue construction
warranty work action on behalf of the Contractor. This point of contact
will be located within the local service area of the warranted
construction, be continuously available, and be responsive to Government
inquiry on warranty work action and status. This requirement does not
R
relieve the Contractor of any of its responsibilities in connection with
other portions of this provision.
1.7.4 Contractor's Response to Construction Warranty Service Requirements

D
Following oral or written notification by the Contracting Officer, respond

to construction warranty service requirements in accordance with the
"Construction Warranty Service Priority List" and the three categories of
priorities listed below. Submit a report on any warranty item that has
been repaired during the warranty period. Include within the report the
cause of the problem, date reported, corrective action taken, and when the
repair was completed. If the Contractor does not perform the construction
warranty within the timeframe specified, the Government will perform the
work and back charge the construction warranty payment item established.
a. First Priority Code 1. Perform onsite inspection to evaluate

situation, and determine course of action within 4 hours, initiate work
within 6 hours and work continuously to completion or relief.
b. Second Priority Code 2. Perform onsite inspection to evaluate

situation, and determine course of action within 8 hours, initiate work
within 24 hours and work continuously to completion or relief.
c. Third Priority Code 3. All other work to be initiated within 3 work

days and work continuously to completion or relief.
d. The "Construction Warranty Service Priority List" is as follows:
Code 1-Life Safety Systems

(1) Fire suppression systems.
(2) Fire alarm system(s) in place in the building.
Code 1-Air Conditioning Systems

(1) Recreational support.
(2) Air conditioning leak in part of building, if causing damage.
(3) Air conditioning system not cooling properly.
Code 1-Doors
(1) Overhead doors not operational, causing a security, fire, or
safety problem.
(2) Interior, exterior personnel doors or hardware, not functioning
properly, causing a security, fire, or safety problem.
Code 3-Doors
(1) Overhead doors not operational.
(2) Interior/exterior personnel doors or hardware not functioning
properly.
T
Code 1-Electrical
(1) Power failure (entire area or any building operational after 1600
hours).
(2) Security lights
AF
(3) Smoke detectors
Code 2-Electrical
(1) Power failure (no power to a room or part of building).
(2) Receptacle and lights (in a room or part of building).
Code 3-Electrical
R
Street lights.
Code 1-Gas
(1) Leaks and breaks.
(2) No gas to family housing unit or cantonment area.
D
Code 1-Heat
(1) Area power failure affecting heat.
(2) Heater in unit not working.
Code 2-Kitchen Equipment

(1) Dishwasher not operating properly.
(2) All other equipment hampering preparation of a meal.
Code 1-Plumbing
(1) Hot water heater failure.
(2) Leaking water supply pipes.
Code 2-Plumbing
(1) Flush valves not operating properly.
(2) Fixture drain, supply line to commode, or any water pipe leaking.
(3) Commode leaking at base.
Code 3 -Plumbing
Leaky faucets.
Code 3-Interior
(1) Floors damaged.
(2) Paint chipping or peeling.
(3) Casework.
Code 1-Roof Leaks

Temporary repairs will be made where major damage to property is
occurring.
Code 2-Roof Leaks

Where major damage to property is not occurring, check for location of
leak during rain and complete repairs on a Code 2 basis.
Code 2-Water (Exterior)

No water to facility.
Code 2-Water (Hot)

No hot water in portion of building listed.
Code 3-All other work not listed above.
T
1.7.5 Warranty Tags
At the time of installation, tag each warranted item with a durable, oil
and water resistant tag approved by the Contracting Officer. Attach each
AF
tag with a copper wire and spray with a silicone waterproof coating. Also,
submit two (2) record copies of the warranty tags showing the layout and
design. The date of acceptance and the QC signature must remain blank
until the project is accepted for beneficial occupancy. Show the following
information on the tag.
Type of
product/material
R
Model number
Serial number
D
Contract number
Warranty period from/to
Inspector's signature
Construction Contractor
Address
Telephone number
Warranty contact
Address
Telephone number
Warranty response time

priority code
WARNING - PROJECT PERSONNEL TO PERFORM ONLY OPERATIONAL MAINTENANCE
DURING THE WARRANTY PERIOD.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 GOVERNMENT FURNISHED MATERIALS
The Government will provide an optical disc (CD or DVD) at the

preconstruction conference that contains the following:
a. One set of "as-designed" electronic CAD files in the specified software

and format revised to reflect all amendments and the final contract PDF
drawings. The CAD files are provided to enable preparation of as-built
T
or as-constructed drawings. If discrepancies exist between the CAD
files and the contract PDF drawings, correct the CAD files to show the
contract PDF drawings.
b.
AF
A submittal register data file in comma separated value (CSV) format
for import into the Resident Management System (RMS).
2.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Prepare the CAD drawing files in AutoCAD Release 2010 or the current format
used by the end user compatible with Windows operating system.
R
2.2.1 Additional Drawings
If additional drawings are required, prepare them using the specified

electronic file format applying the same graphic standards specified for
original drawings. The title block and drawing border to be used for any
D
new final record drawings must be identical to that used on the contract
drawings.
2.2.1.1 Sheet Numbers and File Names
If a sheet needs to be added between two sequential sheets, append a

Supplemental Drawing Designator in accordance with DIM Adding a drawing
sheet, and ERDC/ITL TR-12-1 adding or deleting drawing sheets and index
sheet procedures.
2.3 CERTIFICATION OF EPA DESIGNATED ITEMS
Submit the Certification of EPA Designated Items as required. Include on

the certification form the following information: project name, project
number, Contractor name, license number, Contractor address, and
certification. The certification will read as follows and be signed and
dated by the Contractor. "I hereby certify the information provided herein
is accurate and that the requisition/procurement of all materials listed on
this form comply with current EPA standards for recycled/recovered
materials content. The following exemptions may apply to the
non-procurement of recycled/recovered content materials:
1) The product does not meet appropriate performance standards;

2) The product is not available within a reasonable time frame;
3) The product is not available competitively (from two or more sources);
4) The product is only available at an unreasonable price (compared with a
comparable non-recycled content product).
Record each product used in the project that has a requirement or option of
containing recycled or biobased content in accordance with SECTION 01 33 29.05 20
SUSTAINABILITY REPORTING FOR DESIGN-BUILD, noting total price, total value
of post-industrial recycled content, total value of post-consumer recycled
content, total value of biobased content, exemptions (1, 2, 3, or 4, as
indicated), and comments. Recycled and biobased content values may be
determined by weight or volume percent, but must be consistent throughout.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS
Provide and maintain two (2) black line print copies of the PDF contract
drawings for as-built Drawings. Submit as-built drawings 30 days prior to
T
contract completion data.
3.1.1 Markup Guidelines

AF
Make comments and markup the drawings complete without reference to
letters, memos, or materials that are not part of the As-Built drawing.
Show what was changed, how it was changed, where items(s) were relocated
and change related details. These working as-built markup prints must be
neat, legible and accurate as follows:
a. Use base colors of red, green, and blue. Color code for changes as
follows:
R
(1) Special (Blue) - Items requiring special information,
coordination, or special detailing or detailing notes.
(2) Deletions (Red) - Over-strike deleted graphic items (lines),

D
lettering in notes and leaders.
(3) Additions (Green) - Added items, lettering in notes and leaders.
b. Provide a legend if colors other than the "base" colors of red, green,
and blue are used.
c. Add and denote any additional equipment or material facilities, service

lines, incorporated under As-Built Revisions if not already shown in
legend.
d. Use frequent written explanations on markup drawings to describe

changes. Do not totally rely on graphic means to convey the revision.
e. Use legible lettering and precise and clear digital values when marking
prints. Clarify ambiguities concerning the nature and application of
change involved.
f. Wherever a revision is made, also make changes to related section

views, details, legend, profiles, plans and elevation views, schedules,
notes and call out designations, and mark accordingly to avoid
conflicting data on all other sheets.
g. For deletions, cross out all features, data and captions that relate to
that revision.
h. For changes on small-scale drawings and in restricted areas, provide

large-scale inserts, with leaders to the applicable location.
i. Indicate one of the following when attaching a print or sketch to a

markup print:
1) Add an entire drawing to contract drawings
2) Change the contract drawing to show
3) Provided for reference only to further detail the initial design.
j. Incorporate all shop and fabrication drawings into the markup drawings.
3.1.2 As-Built Drawings Content
T
Revise As-Built Drawings in accordance with DIM. Provide two (2) sets of
paper copies from PDF drawings to show the as-built conditions by red-line
process during the execution of the project. Keep these working as-built
markup drawings current on a weekly basis and at least one set available on
AF
the jobsite at all times. Changes from the contract drawings which are
made during construction or additional information which might be uncovered
in the course of construction must be accurately and neatly recorded as
they occur by means of details and notes. Submit the working as-built
markup drawings for approval prior to submission of each monthly pay
estimate. For failure to maintain the working and final record drawings as
specified herein, the Contracting Officer will withhold 10 percent of the
monthly progress payment until approval of updated drawings. Show on the
R
as-built drawings, but not limited to, the following information:
a. The actual location, kinds and sizes of all sub-surface utility lines.
In order that the location of these lines and appurtenances may be
determined in the event the surface openings or indicators become
D
covered over or obscured, show by offset dimensions to two permanently

fixed surface features the end of each run including each change in
direction on the record drawings. Locate valves, splice boxes and
similar appurtenances by dimensioning along the utility run from a
reference point. Also record the average depth below the surface of
each run.
b. The location and dimensions of any changes within the building

structure.
c. Layout and schematic drawings of electrical circuits and piping.
d. Correct grade, elevations, cross section, or alignment of roads,

earthwork, structures or utilities if any changes were made from
contract plans.
e. Changes in details of design or additional information obtained from

working drawings specified to be prepared and/or furnished by the
Contractor; including but not limited to shop drawings, fabrication,
erection, installation plans and placing details, pipe sizes,
insulation material, dimensions of equipment foundations, etc.
f. The topography, invert elevations and grades of drainage installed or

affected as part of the project construction.
g. Changes or Revisions which result from the final inspection.
h. Where contract drawings or specifications present options, show only

the option selected for construction on the working as-built markup
drawings.
i. If borrow material for this project is from sources on Government

property, or if Government property is used as a spoil area, furnish a
contour map of the final borrow pit/spoil area elevations.
j. Systems designed or enhanced by the Contractor, such as HVAC controls,

fire alarm, fire sprinkler, and irrigation systems.
k. Changes in location of equipment and architectural features.
j. Modifications (include within change order price the cost to change

working as-built markup drawings to reflect modifications) and
T
compliance with FC 1-300-09N procedures.
l. Actual location of anchors, construction and control joints, etc., in

concrete.
AF
m. Unusual or uncharted obstructions that are encountered in the contract
work area during construction.
n. Location, extent, thickness, and size of stone protection particularly

where it will be normally submerged by water.
3.2 RECORD DRAWING FILES

R
If additional drawings are required, prepare them using the specified
electronic file format applying the same graphic standards specified for
original drawings. The title block and drawing border to be used for any
new final record drawings must be identical to that used on the contract
D
drawings. Accomplish additions and corrections to the contract drawings

using CAD files. Provide all program files and hardware necessary to
prepare final PDF record drawings. The Contracting Officer will review
final PDF record drawings for accuracy and return them to the Contractor
for required corrections, changes, additions, and deletions.
3.2.1 Rename the CAD Drawing files
Rename the CAD Drawing files using the contract number as the Project Code
field,(e.g., W91238-15-C-10A-102.DWGDGN) as instructed in the
Pre-Construction conference. Use only those renamed files for the
Marked-up changes. Make all changes on the layer/level as the original
item.
a. For AutoCAD files (DWG), enter all as-built delta changes and notations
on the AS-BUILT layer.MicroStation files (DGN), enter all as-built
delta changes and notations on:
- Level #63
- Level/Layer Name contains: ANNO-REVS
- Level/Layer Description: Revisions
c. When final revisions have been completed, show the wording "RECORD
DRAWING AS-BUILTS" followed by the name of the Contractor in letters at
least 5 mm high on the cover sheet drawing. Date RECORD DRAWING
AS-BUILTS" drawing revisions in the revision block.
d. Within 10 days after Government approval of all of the working record

drawings for a phase of work, prepare the final CAD record drawings for
that phase of work and submit PDF drawing files and two sets of prints
for review and approval. The Government will promptly return one set
of prints annotated with any necessary corrections. Within 10 days
revise the CAD files accordingly at no additional cost and submit one
set of final prints for the completed phase of work to the Government.
Within
20 days of substantial completion of all phases of work, submit the
final record drawing package for the entire project. Submit one set of
electronic CAD files, and one set of the approved working record PDF
files on three optical discs with two sets of prints. The CAD files
must be complete in all details and identical in form and function to
the CAD drawing files supplied by the Government. Prepare AutoCAD
files for transmittal using e-Transmit. Prepare MicroStation files for
T
transmittal using the Packager (Archive). Make any transactions or
adjustments necessary to accomplish this. The Government reserves the
right to reject any drawing files it deems incompatible with the
customer's CAD system. Paper prints, drawing files and storage media
AF
submitted will become the property of the Government upon final
approval. Failure to submit final record PDF drawing files, CAD files
and marked prints as specified will be cause for withholding any
payment due under this contract. Approval and acceptance of final
record drawings must be accomplished before final payment is made.
3.3 RECORD DRAWINGS

R
Prepare and provide Record Drawings in accordance with DIM. Provide two (2)
copies of Record Drawings on two separate CDs or DVDs 30 days after BOD.
Prepare final record drawings after the completion of each definable feature
D
of work as listed in the Contractor Quality Control Plan (Foundations,

Utilities, Structural Steel, etc., as appropriate for the project).
Transfer the changes from the approved working as-built markup drawings to
the original electronic CAD drawing files. Modify the as-built CAD drawing
files to correctly show the features of the project as-built by bringing
the working CAD drawing set into agreement with approved working as-built
markup drawings, and adding such additional drawings as may be necessary.
Jointly review the working as-built markup drawings with printouts from
working as-built CAD drawing PDF files for accuracy and completeness.
Monthly review of working as-built CAD drawing PDF file printouts must
cover all sheets revised since the previous review. These PDF drawing
files are part of the permanent records of this project. Any drawings
damaged or lost must be satisfactorily replaced at no expense to the
Government.
a. Drawing revisions (include within change order price the cost to change
working and final record drawings to reflect revisions) and compliance
with the following procedures.
(1) Follow directions in the revision for posting descriptive changes.
(2) The revision delta size must be 8 mm unless the area where the
delta is to be placed is crowded. Use a smaller size delta for
crowded areas.
(3) Place a revision delta at the location of each deletion.
(4) For new details or sections which are added to a drawing, place a
revision delta by the detail or section title.
(5) For minor changes, place a revision delta by the area changed on
the drawing (each location).
(6) For major changes to a drawing, place a revision delta by the

title of the affected plan, section, or detail at each location.
(7) For changes to schedules or drawings, place a revision delta

either by the schedule heading or by the change in the schedule.
3.3.1 Final Record Drawing Package
Submit the final record PDF and CAD drawings package for the entire
T
project within 20 days of substantial completion of all phases of work.
Submit one set of ANSI D size PDF and CAD files on optical disc, read-only
memory (ROM), two sets of ANSI D size prints and one set of the approved
working record drawings. The package must be complete in all details and
AF
identical in form and function to the contract drawing files supplied by
the Government.
3.4 FINAL APPROVED SHOP DRAWINGS
Submit final approved project shop drawings 30 days after transfer of the
completed facility.
R
3.5 CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT SPECIFICATIONS
Submit final PDF file of record construction contract specifications,

including revisions, immediately after approval of design and final
as-built specifications seven (7) days after CCD.
D
3.6 EQUIPMENT
3.6.1 As-Built Record of Equipment and Materials
Furnish one (1) copy of preliminary record of equipment and materials used
on the project 60 days prior to final inspection. This preliminary
submittal will be reviewed and returned with Government comments. Submit
two (2) sets of final record of equipment and materials along with the
final O&M manuals and 30 days prior to CCD.
3.6.2 Real Property Equipment
Submit a list of installed equipment furnished under this contract.

Include all information usually listed on manufacturer's name plate. In
the Equipment-In-Place List include, as applicable, the following for each
piece of equipment installed: description of item, location (by room
number), model number, serial number, capacity, name and address of
manufacturer, name and address of equipment supplier, condition, spare
parts list, manufacturer's catalog, and warranty. Submit a draft list at
time of transfer. Submit the final list 30 days after transfer of the
completed facility.
3.7 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
Provide project operation and maintenance manuals as specified in Section

01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS.
Submit one PDF file and six (6) hard copies of the project operation and
maintenance manuals 30 calendar days prior to testing the system involved.
Update and resubmit data for final approval no later than 30 calendar days
prior to contract completionBOD.
3.7.1 Configuration
Operation and Maintenance Manuals must be consistent with the

manufacturer's standard brochures, schematics, printed instructions,
general operating procedures, and safety precautions. Provide
manufacturer's PDF files of above and bind information in manual format and
grouped by technical sections. Organize data by separate index and tabbed
sheets for vendor data and manuals. Test data must be legible and of good
quality. Caution and warning indications must be clearly labeled. Hard
T
copy pages must have 10 millimeter holes and be bound in 3-ring, loose-leaf
binders. Binder must lie flat with printed sheets that are easy to read.
3.7.2 Training and Instruction

AF
Submit classroom and field instructions in the operation and maintenance of
systems equipment where required by the technical provisions. These
services must be directed by the Contractor, using the manufacturer's
factory-trained personnel or qualified representatives. Contracting
Officer will be given 7 calendar days written notice of scheduled
instructional services. Instructional materials belonging to the
manufacturer or vendor, such as lists, static exhibits, and visual aids,
R
must be made available to the Contracting Officer.
3.8 CLEANUP
Provide final cleaning in accordance with ASTM E1971 and submit two (2)
D
copies of the listing of completed final clean-up items. Leave premises

"broom clean." Comply with GS-37 for general purpose cleaning and bathroom
cleaning. Use only nonhazardous cleaning materials, including natural
cleaning materials, in the final cleanup. Clean interior and exterior
glass surfaces exposed to view; remove temporary labels, stains and foreign
substances; polish transparent and glossy surfaces; vacuum carpeted and
soft surfaces. Clean equipment and fixtures to a sanitary condition.
Replace filters of operating equipment and comply with the Indoor Air
Quality (IAQ) Management Plan. Clean debris from roofs, gutters,
downspouts and drainage systems. Sweep paved areas and rake clean
landscaped areas. Remove waste and surplus materials, rubbish and
construction facilities from the site. Recycle, salvage, and return
construction and demolition waste from project in accordance with Section
01 57 23 TEMPORARY STORM WATER POLLUTION CONTROL, and 01 74 19 CONSTRUCTION
AND DEMOLITION WASTE MANAGEMENT.
3.9 PREVENTATIVE MAINTENANCE
Submit Preventative Maintenance, Condition Monitoring (Predictive Testing)

and Inspection schedules with instructions that state when systems should
be retested.
a. Define the anticipated length of each test, test apparatus, number of

personnel identified by responsibility, and a testing validation
procedure permitting the record operation capability requirements
within the schedule. Provide a signoff blank for the Contractor and
Contracting Officer for each test feature; e.g., liter per second, rpm,
kilopascal. Include a remarks column for the testing validation
procedure referencing operating limits of time, pressure, temperature,
volume, voltage, current, acceleration, velocity, alignment,
calibration, adjustments, cleaning, or special system notes. Delineate
procedures for preventative maintenance, inspection, adjustment,
lubrication and cleaning necessary to minimize corrective maintenance
and repair.
b. Repair requirements must inform operators how to check out,

troubleshoot, repair, and replace components of the system. Include
electrical and mechanical schematics and diagrams and diagnostic
techniques necessary to enable operation and troubleshooting of the
system after acceptance.
3.10 REAL PROPERTY RECORD
T
Near the completion of Project, but a minimum of 60 days prior to final
acceptance of the work, complete and submit an accounting of all installed
property with Interim DD FORM 1354. Include any additional assets,
AF
improvements, and alterations from the Draft DD FORM 1354. Contact the
Contracting Officer for any project specific information necessary to
complete the DD FORM 1354. Refer to UFC 1-300-08 for instruction on
completing the DD FORM 1354. For information purposes, a blank fillable
PDF DD FORM 1354 may be obtained at the following:
http://www.dtic.mil/whs/directives/forms/eforms/dd1354.pdf
Submit the completed Checklist for DD FORM 1354 of Installed Building

R
Equipment items. Attach this list to the updated DD FORM 1354.
3.11 NAVFAC SUSTAINABLE & ENERGY DATA RECORD CARD
Within 60 days of the completion of Project, complete an electronic copy of

D
the NAVFAC Sustainable & Energy Data Record Card, and submit to the
Contracting Officer. Draft Record card for this project should be
available from Designer of Record (DOR) or Contracting Officer.
Instructions and a blank DD Form (fill-able) in ADOBE (PDF) may be obtained
at the Whole Building Design Guide web site by navigating:
Home > Participating Agencies > Department of Defense (DoD) > NAVFAC
Sustainable Development Program > Contract Documents > NAVFAC Sustainable &
Energy Data Record Card; or directly at
http://www.wbdg.org/pdfs/navfac_sustainable_energy_data_record_card.pdf.
SECTION 01 78 23
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

07/06
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

ASTM E1971 (2005; R 2011) Stewardship for the

Cleaning of Commercial and Institutional
Buildings
1.2 SUBMISSION OF OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
T
Submit Operation and Maintenance (O&M) Data specifically applicable to this
contract and a complete and concise depiction of the provided equipment,
product, or system, stressing and enhancing the importance of system
AF
interactions, troubleshooting, and long-term preventative maintenance and
operation. The subcontractors must compile and prepare data and deliver to
the Contractor prior to the training of Government personnel. The
Contractor must compile and prepare aggregate O&M data including clarifying
and updating the original sequences of operation to as-built conditions.
Organize and present information in sufficient detail to clearly explain
O&M requirements at the system, equipment, component, and subassembly
level. Include an index preceding each submittal. Submit in accordance
R
with this section and Sections 01 33 00.05 20 CONSTRUCTION SUBMITTAL
PROCEDURES and 01 33 10.05 20 DESIGN SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES .
1.2.1 Package Quality

D
Documents must be fully legible. Poor quality copies and material with
hole punches obliterating the text or drawings will not be accepted.
1.2.2 Package Content
Data package content shall be as shown in the paragraph titled "Schedule of

Operation and Maintenance Data Packages." Comply with the data package
requirements specified in the individual technical sections, including the
content of the packages and addressing each product, component, and system
designated for data package submission, except as follows. Commissioned
items without a specified data package requirement in the individual
technical sections must use Data Package 3. Commissioned items with a Data
Package 1 or 2 requirement must use instead Data Package 3.
1.2.3 Changes to Submittals
Manufacturer-originated changes or revisions to submitted data must be

furnished by the Contractor if a component of an item is so affected
subsequent to acceptance of the O&M Data. Submit changes, additions, or
revisions required by the Contracting Officer for final acceptance of
submitted data within 30 calendar days of the notification of this change
requirement.
1.3 TYPES OF INFORMATION REQUIRED IN O&M DATA PACKAGES
1.3.1 Operating Instructions
Include specific instructions, procedures, and illustrations for the

following phases of operation for the installed model and features of each
system:
1.3.1.1 Safety Precautions and Hazards
List personnel hazards and equipment or product safety precautions for all
operating conditions. List all residual hazards identified in the Activity
Hazard Analysis provided under Section 01 35 26 GOVERNMENT SAFETY
REQUIREMENTS. Provide recommended safeguards for each identified hazard.
1.3.1.2 Operator Prestart
Include procedures required to install, set up, and prepare each system for
use.
T
1.3.1.3 Startup, Shutdown, and Post-Shutdown Procedures
Provide narrative description for Startup, Shutdown and Post-shutdown

AF
operating procedures including the control sequence for each procedure.
1.3.1.4 Normal Operations
Provide narrative description of Normal Operating Procedures. Include

Control Diagrams with data to explain operation and control of systems and
specific equipment.
R
1.3.1.5 Emergency Operations
Include Emergency Procedures for equipment malfunctions to permit a short

period of continued operation or to shut down the equipment to prevent
further damage to systems and equipment. Include Emergency Shutdown
D
Instructions for fire, explosion, spills, or other foreseeable

contingencies. Provide guidance and procedures for emergency operation of
all utility systems including required valve positions, valve locations and
zones or portions of systems controlled.
1.3.1.6 Operator Service Requirements
Include instructions for services to be performed by the operator such as

lubrication, adjustment, inspection, and recording gage readings.
1.3.1.7 Environmental Conditions
Include a list of Environmental Conditions (temperature, humidity, and

other relevant data) that are best suited for the operation of each
product, component or system. Describe conditions under which the item
equipment should not be allowed to run.
1.3.1.8 Operating Log
Provide forms, sample logs, and instructions for maintaining necessary

operating records.
1.3.2 Preventive Maintenance
Include the following information for preventive and scheduled maintenance

to minimize corrective maintenance and repair for the installed model and
features of each system. Include potential environmental and indoor air
quality impacts of recommended maintenance procedures and materials.
1.3.2.1 Lubrication Data
Include preventative maintenance lubrication data, in addition to

instructions for lubrication provided under paragraph titled "Operator
Service Requirements":
a. A table showing recommended lubricants for specific temperature ranges

and applications.
b. Charts with a schematic diagram of the equipment showing lubrication

points, recommended types and grades of lubricants, and capacities.
c. A Lubrication Schedule showing service interval frequency.
T
1.3.2.2 Preventive Maintenance Plan and Schedule
Include manufacturer's schedule for routine preventive maintenance,

AF
inspections, tests and adjustments required to ensure proper and economical
operation and to minimize corrective maintenance. Provide manufacturer's
projection of preventive maintenance work-hours on a daily, weekly,
monthly, and annual basis including craft requirements by type of craft.
For periodic calibrations, provide manufacturer's specified frequency and
procedures for each separate operation.
1.3.2.3 Cleaning Recommendations

R
Provide environmentally preferable cleaning recommendations in accordance
with ASTM E1971.
1.3.3 Corrective Maintenance (Repair)

D
Include manufacturer's recommended procedures and instructions for

correcting problems and making repairs for the installed model and features
of each system. Include potential environmental and indoor air quality
impacts of recommended maintenance procedures and materials.
1.3.3.1 Troubleshooting Guides and Diagnostic Techniques
Include step-by-step procedures to promptly isolate the cause of typical

malfunctions. Describe clearly why the checkout is performed and what
conditions are to be sought. Identify tests or inspections and test
equipment required to determine whether parts and equipment may be reused
or require replacement.
1.3.3.2 Wiring Diagrams and Control Diagrams
Wiring diagrams and control diagrams shall be point-to-point drawings of

wiring and control circuits including factory-field interfaces. Provide a
complete and accurate depiction of the actual job specific wiring and
control work. On diagrams, number electrical and electronic wiring and
pneumatic control tubing and the terminals for each type, identically to
actual installation configuration and numbering.
1.3.3.3 Maintenance and Repair Procedures
Include instructions and a list of tools required to repair or restore the

product or equipment to proper condition or operating standards.
1.3.3.4 Removal and Replacement Instructions
Include step-by-step procedures and a list required tools and supplies for
removal, replacement, disassembly, and assembly of components, assemblies,
subassemblies, accessories, and attachments. Provide tolerances,
dimensions, settings and adjustments required. Instructions shall include
a combination of text and illustrations.
1.3.3.5 Spare Parts and Supply Lists
Include lists of spare parts and supplies required for maintenance and
repair to ensure continued service or operation without unreasonable
delays. Special consideration is required for facilities at remote
locations. List spare parts and supplies that have a long lead-time to
T
obtain.
1.3.4 Corrective Maintenance Work-Hours

AF
Include manufacturer's projection of corrective maintenance work-hours
including requirements by type of craft. Corrective maintenance that
requires completion or participation of the equipment manufacturer shall be
identified and tabulated separately.
1.3.5 Appendices
Provide information required below and information not specified in the

R
preceding paragraphs but pertinent to the maintenance or operation of the
product or equipment. Include the following:
1.3.5.1 Product Submittal Data

D
Provide a copy of all SD-03 Product Data submittals required in the

applicable technical sections.
1.3.5.2 Manufacturer's Instructions
Provide a copy of all SD-08 Manufacturer's Instructions submittals required

in the applicable technical sections.
1.3.5.3 O&M Submittal Data
Provide a copy of all SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data submittals

required in the applicable technical sections.
1.3.5.4 Parts Identification
Provide identification and coverage for all parts of each component,

assembly, subassembly, and accessory of the end items subject to
replacement. Include special hardware requirements, such as requirement to
use high-strength bolts and nuts. Identify parts by make, model, serial
number, and source of supply to allow reordering without further
identification. Provide clear and legible illustrations, drawings, and
exploded views to enable easy identification of the items. When

illustrations omit the part numbers and description, both the illustrations
and separate listing shall show the index, reference, or key number that
will cross-reference the illustrated part to the listed part. Parts shown
in the listings shall be grouped by components, assemblies, and
subassemblies in accordance with the manufacturer's standard practice.
Parts data may cover more than one model or series of equipment,
components, assemblies, subassemblies, attachments, or accessories, such as
typically shown in a master parts catalog
1.3.5.5 Warranty Information
List and explain the various warranties and clearly identify the servicing
and technical precautions prescribed by the manufacturers or contract
documents in order to keep warranties in force. Include warranty
information for primary components such as the compressor of air
conditioning system.
1.3.5.6 Extended Warranty Information
List all warranties for products, equipment, components, and sub-components
T
whose duration exceeds one year. For each warranty listed, indicate the
applicable specification section, duration, start date, end date, and the
point of contact for warranty fulfillment. Also, list or reference all
specific operation and maintenance procedures that must be performed to
AF
keep the warranty valid.
1.3.5.7 Personnel Training Requirements
Provide information available from the manufacturers that is needed for

use in training designated personnel to properly operate and maintain the
equipment and systems.
R
1.3.5.8 Testing Equipment and Special Tool Information
Include information on test equipment required to perform specified tests

and on special tools needed for the operation, maintenance, and repair of
components.
D
1.3.5.9 Testing and Performance Data
Include completed prefunctional checklists, functional performance test

forms, and monitoring reports. Include recommended schedule for retesting
and blank test forms.
1.3.5.10 Field Test Reports
Provide Field Test Reports (SD-06) that apply to equipment associated with
the system.
1.3.5.11 Contractor Information
Provide a list that includes the name, address, and telephone number of the
General Contractor and each Subcontractor who installed the product or
equipment, or system. For each item, also provide the name address and
telephone number of the manufacturer's representative and service
organization that can provide replacements most convenient to the project
site. Provide the name, address, and telephone number of the product,
equipment, and system manufacturers.
1.4 TYPES OF INFORMATION REQUIRED IN CONTROLS O&M DATA PACKAGES
Include Data Package 5 and the following for control systems:
a. Narrative description on how to perform and apply all functions,

features, modes, and other operations, including unoccupied operation,
seasonal changeover, manual operation, and alarms. Include detailed
technical manual for programming and customizing control loops and
algorithms.
b. Full as-built sequence of operations.
c. Copies of all checkout tests and calibrations performed by the

Contractor (not Cx tests).
1.5 SCHEDULE OF OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA PACKAGES
Furnish the O&M data packages specified in individual technical sections.

The required information for each O&M data package is as follows:
T
1.5.1 Data Package 1
a. Safety precautions
b.
AF
Cleaning recommendations
c. Maintenance and repair procedures
d. Warranty information
e. Contractor information
R
f. Spare parts and supply list
D
b. Normal operations
c. Environmental conditions
d. Lubrication data
e. Preventive maintenance plan and schedule
f. Cleaning recommendations
g. Maintenance and repair procedures
h. Removal and replacement instructions
i. Spare parts and supply list
j. Parts identification
k. Warranty information
l. Contractor information
b. Operator prestart
c. Startup, shutdown, and post-shutdown procedures
d. Normal operations
e. Emergency operations
f. Environmental conditions
g. Lubrication data
h. Preventive maintenance plan and schedule
i. Cleaning recommendations
T
j. Troubleshooting guides and diagnostic techniques
k. Wiring diagrams and control diagrams

AF
l. Maintenance and repair procedures
m. Removal and replacement instructions
n. Spare parts and supply list
o. Product submittal data

R
p. O&M submittal data
q. Parts identification
D
r. Warranty information
s. Testing equipment and special tool information
t. Testing and performance data
u. Contractor information
c. Startup, shutdown, and post-shutdown procedures
e. Emergency operations
f. Operator service requirements
g. Environmental conditions
h. Lubrication data
i. Preventive maintenance plan and schedule
j. Cleaning recommendations
k. Troubleshooting guides and diagnostic techniques
l. Wiring diagrams and control diagrams
m. Maintenance and repair procedures
n. Removal and replacement instructions
o. Spare parts and supply list
p. Corrective maintenance man-hours
T
q. Product submittal data
r. O&M submittal data
s. Parts identification
AF
t. Warranty information
u. Personnel training requirements
v. Testing equipment and special tool information

R
w. Testing and performance data
x. Contractor information

D
c. Start-up, shutdown, and post-shutdown procedures
e. Environmental conditions
f. Preventive maintenance plan and schedule
g. Troubleshooting guides and diagnostic techniques
h. Wiring and control diagrams
i. Maintenance and repair procedures
j. Removal and replacement instructions
k. Spare parts and supply list
l. Product submittal data
m. Manufacturer's instructions
n. O&M submittal data
o. Parts identification
p. Testing equipment and special tool information
q. Warranty information
r. Testing and performance data
s. Contractor information
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Used
T
PART 3 EXECUTION
Not Used
AF
R
D
SECTION 01 78 24.00 20
FACILITY ELECTRONIC OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE SUPPORT INFORMATION (eOMSI)

02/15
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
1.1.1 eOMSI Manual
Manual (PDF file) provided by the Contractor that includes, but is not
limited to, product information, a facility description with photos, and a
list of primary facility systems.
1.1.2 eOMSI Facility Data Workbook (FDW)
A Microsoft Excel spreadsheet containing 17 facility asset fields to be

populated with the required information by the Designer of Record and
Construction Contractor.
T
1.1.3 Systems
The words "system", "systems", and "equipment", when used in this document
AF
refer to as-built systems and equipment.
1.1.4 Computer Assisted Design and Drafting (CADD)
Electronic Computer Assisted Design and Drafting graphic software program

that is used to create facility design contract documents and Record
Drawings.
R
1.1.5 KTR
An abbreviation for "Contractor."
1.2 EOMSI MEETINGS

D
1.2.1 Post-Award Kickoff Meeting
Be prepared to discuss the following during this meeting:
a. eOMSI Manual and eOMSI Facility Data Workbook Development Meetings
b. Processes and methods of gathering eOMSI Manual and eOMSI Facility Data
Workbook information during construction.
c. The eOMSI Submittals schedule. Include the eOMSI submittal schedule on

the Baseline Construction Schedule in accordance with Section
01 32 17.05 20 COST-LOADED NETWORK ANALYSIS SCHEDULES (NAS) FOR
DESIGN-BUILD.
d. Electronic eOMSI Facility Data Workbook file for Contractor's use and
completion.
SECTION 01 78 24.00 20 Page 1

1.2.2 eOMSI Manual and Facility Data Workbook Coordination and Mutual
Understanding Meeting
Facilitate a meeting after the Post-Award Kickoff Meeting prior to the

submission of the eOMSI Progress Submittal. Meeting attendance must
include the Contractor's eOMSI Manual and Facility Data Workbook Preparer,
Designer of Record (DOR), and Quality Control Manager, and the Government's
Design Manager (DM), Contracting Officer's Representative, and NAVFAC
Public Works (PW) Facilities Management Division (FMD). Also include the
Mechanical, Electrical, and Fire Protection Sub-Contractors as required.
The purpose of this meeting is to reach a mutual understanding of the scope

of work concerning the contract requirements for eOMSI and coordinate the
efforts necessary by both the Government and Contractor to ensure an
accurate collection, preparation and timely Government review of eOMSI.
1.2.3 Facility Turnover Meeting
Include eOMSI in Red Zone (NRZ) facility turnover meetings as specified in

Section 01 31 19.05 20, POST AWARD MEETINGS.
T
1.3 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULING
1.3.1 eOMSI, Progress Submittal

AF
Submit the Progress submittal when construction is approximately 50 percent
complete, to the Contracting Officer for approval. Provide eOMSI Manual
Files (Bookmarked PDF) and eOMSI Facility Data Workbook (Excel). Include
all elements and portions of system construction completed up to this point.
The purpose of this submittal is to verify progress is in accordance with

contract requirements as discussed during the eOMSI Coordination and Mutual
Understanding Meeting. Field verify a portion of the eOMSI information in
R
accordance with paragraph FIELD VERIFICATION.
1.3.2 eOMSI, Prefinal Submittal
Submit the 100 percent submittal of the eOMSI Prefinal Submittal to the
D
Contracting Officer for approval within 90 calendar days of the Beneficial

Occupancy Date (BOD). This submittal must provide a complete, working
document that can be used to operate and maintain the facility. Any portion
of the submittal that is incomplete or inaccurate requires the entire
submittal to be returned for correction. Any discrepancies discovered
during the Government's review of eOMSI Progress submittal must be
corrected prior to the Prefinal submission.
The eOMSI Prefinal Submittal must include eOMSI Manual Files (Bookmarked
PDF) and eOMSI Facility Data Workbook (Excel).
1.3.3 eOMSI, Final Submittal
Submit completed eOMSI Manual Files (Bookmarked PDF) and eOMSI Facility
Data Workbook (Excel). The Final submittal is due at BOD. Any
discrepancies discovered during the Government's review of the Prefinal
eOMSI submittal, including the Field Verification, must be corrected prior
to the Final eOMSI submission.
SECTION 01 78 24.00 20 Page 2

1.3.4 Final eOMSI Submittal Translation
Provide a translation in Arabic of all items under Facility Information and

Primary Systems Information in electronic format. Provide drawings, charts
and tables in both English and the foreign language. If required by
Contracting Officer, provide a split format showing the foreign language on
the left and English translation on the right.
1.4 UNITS OF MEASURE
Provide eOMSI utilizing the units of measure by the RFP for the facility.
Refer to Section 01 33 10.05 20 DESIGN SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES. Metric eOMSI
must be in SI (System International) metric units exclusively.
1.5 SUBMITTALS

T
AF
Training Plan; G R
Training Outline; G R
Training Content; G R
R
eOMSI, Progress Submittal; G M/R
eOMSI, Prefinal Submittal; G M/R

D
eOMSI, Final Submittal; G
Training Video Recording; G M/R
Validation of Training Completion; G M/R
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 eOMSI FILES FORMAT
Assemble each manual into a composite electronically indexed file using the
most current version of Adobe Acrobat or similar software capable of
producing PDF file format. Provide compact disks (CD) or data digital
versatile disk (DVD) as appropriate, so that each one contains all
maintenance and record files, and Project Record Documents and Training
Videos. Include a complete electronically linked operation and maintenance
directory. Provide four electronic copies of the eOMSI Manuals to the
Contracting Officer for approval.
Provide eOMSI Facility Data Workbook on compact disks (CD) or data digital
SECTION 01 78 24.00 20 Page 3

versatile disk (DVD) disks in (EXCEL) format. Scan eOMSI Manual Files and
eOMSI Facility Data Workbook for malicious viruses using a commercially
available scanning program that is routinely updated to identify and remove
current virus threats.
2.1.1 eOMSI Manual Organization
Organize the eOMSI Manuals into two parts: 1) Product and Drawing
Information, and 2) Facility Information. Bookmark the PDF files for easy
access to the information.
a. Bookmark Facility Information and Primary Systems to at least one level

lower than the major system.
b. Bookmark Product and Drawing Information documents using the current

version of CSI Masterformat numbering system, and arrange submittals
using the specification sections as a structure. Use CSI Masterformat
and UFGS numbers along with descriptive bookmarked titles that explain
the content of the information that is being bookmarked.
2.1.2 eOMSI Manual Compact Disk Label and Disk Holder or Case
T
Provide the following information on the compact disk label and disk holder
or case:
a. Building Number
AF
b. Project Title
c. Activity and Location
d. Construction Contract Number

R
e. Prepared For: (Contracting Agency)
f. Prepared By: (Name, title, phone number and email address)
g. Include the compact disk content on the disk label

D
h. Date
i. Virus scanning program used
2.2 EOMSI MANUAL
2.2.1 Product and Drawing Information
Provide an organized record of the facility products, materials, equipment,

and minimum information necessary to operate the facility. Provide Product
and Drawing Information for all systems in the final constructed facility.
Organize and bookmark the information for easy access and quick retrieval.
2.2.1.1 O&M Data
As a minimum, include the O&M Data, submitted in the technical

specification sections, and in accordance with Section 01 78 23 OPERATION
AND MAINTENANCE DATA.
SECTION 01 78 24.00 20 Page 4

2.2.1.2 Record Drawings
Provide an electronic, PDF copy of the Record Drawings, prepared in

accordance with the MED Design Instructions Manual and Section 01 78 00
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS. Bookmark all drawings using the sheet title and sheet
number.
Include Record Drawings as part of the Red-Zone in accordance with Section

01 30 00 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS.
2.2.1.3 Utility Record Drawings
Using Record Source Drawings, show and document details of the actual
installation of the utility systems; annotate and highlight the eOMSI
information. Provide Utility Record Drawings in PDF format. Provide the
following drawings at a large enough scale to differentiate designated
isolation units from surrounding valves and switches.
a. Utility Schematic Diagrams - Provide a one line schematic diagram for

each utility system such as power, water, wastewater, and gas/fuel.
Schematic diagram must show from the point where the utility line is
T
connected to the mainline up to the 1.5 meter connection point to the
facility. Indicate location or area designation for route of
transmission or distribution lines; locations of duct banks, manholes/
handholes or poles; isolation units such as valves and switches; and
AF
utility facilities such as pump stations, lift stations, and
substations.
b. Enlarged Connection and Cutoff Plans - Provide enlarged floor plans

that provide information between the 1.5 meter utility connection point
and where utilities connect to facility distribution. Enlarge floor
plans / elevations of the rooms where the utility enters the building
and indicate on these plans locations of the main interior and exterior
R
connection and cutoff points for all utilities. Also enlarge floor
plans / elevations of the rooms where equipment is located. Include
enough information to enable someone unfamiliar with the facility to
locate the connection and cutoff points. Indicate designations such as
room number, panel number, circuit breaker, or valve number, of each
D
utility and equipment connection and cutoff point, and what that
connection and cutoff point controls.
2.2.2 Facility Information
Provide the following in Facility Information:
2.2.2.1 General Facility and System Description
Describe the function of the facility. Detail the overall dimensions of

the facility, number of floors, foundation type, expected number of
occupants, and facility Category Code. List and generally describe all the
facility systems listed in the Primary Systems Information and any special
building features (for example, HVAC Controls, Sprinkler Systems, Cranes,
Elevators, and Generators). Include photographs marked up and labeled to
show key operating components and the overall facility appearance.
2.2.2.2 Basis of Design
Include the Basis of Design that shows the basic design scope of work,
assumptions and the original intentions of the Designer of Record (DOR).
SECTION 01 78 24.00 20 Page 5

Identify the site utility design goals, objectives, design load limits,
assumptions, and system features that are critical to the operation and
maintenance of the systems.
2.2.2.3 Floor Plans
Provide uncluttered, legible 29.9 by 43.2 cm floor plans. Include room

numbers, type or function of spaces, and overall facility dimensions on the
floor plans. Do not include items such as construction instructions,
references, or frame numbers.
2.2.2.4 Floor Coverings, Wall Surfaces, and Ceiling Surfaces
Provide a table that lists by room number (including hallways and common
spaces), the type, and area of finish, manufacturer's product name,
identifying number, and color. Include a facility summary of the total area
for each type of space and floor, wall, or ceiling finish in the table.
2.2.2.5 Windows
Provide a table that lists by room number (including hallways
T
and common spaces), the type of window, window size, number of each size
and type, special features, manufacturer's product name, identifying
number, and color. The table must include a facility summary of the total
number for each type and size of window.
AF
2.2.2.6 Roofing
Provide the total area of each type of roof surface and system. Provide
the name of the roofing product and system; manufacturer's, supplier's, and
installer's names, addresses, and phone numbers; manufacturer's product
name, identifying number, and color. For each type of roof, provide a
recommended inspection, maintenance and repair schedule that details
R
checkpoints, frequencies, and prohibited practices. List roof structural
load limits.
2.2.2.7 HVAC Filters

D
Provide a table that lists the quantity, type, size, and location of each
HVAC filter, manufacturer's product name, and identifying number.
2.2.2.8 Lighting Fixtures
Provide a table that lists by room number (including hallways and common
spaces), the type of lighting fixture, ballast, number of lighting
fixtures, type of lamps and number of lamps, and the manufacturer's product
name and the identifying number. The table must include a facility summary
of the total number of fixtures of each type and number of lamps of each
type.
2.2.2.9 Equipment Listing
Provide a table that lists the major equipment shown on the design
equipment schedules. Show the item descriptions, locations, model numbers;
and the names, addresses, and telephone numbers of the manufacturers,
suppliers, contractors, and subcontractors.
SECTION 01 78 24.00 20 Page 6

2.2.2.10 System Flow Diagrams
Provide a flow diagram indicating system liquid, air or gas flow during
normal operations. Integrate all system components into the diagram. A
compilation of non-integrated, flow diagrams for the individual system
components are not acceptable.
2.2.2.11 Valve List
Provide a list of all valves associated with the system. Show valve type,
identification number, function, location and normal operating position.
2.2.2.12 Riser Diagrams
Provide riser diagrams and settings of equipment.
2.3 eOMSI FACILITY DATA WORKBOOK
Download the eOMSI Facility Data Workbook at the following location:

http://www.wbdg.org/ccb/NAVGRAPH/graphtoc.pdf. Complete the KTR Facility
Data File tab based on the selection of master systems, systems, and
T
subsystems installed. The following tabs are included in the eOMSI
Facility Data File Workbook and serve the purpose stated:
a. Instructions Tab: Instructions for completing Model & Facility Data

AF
Matrix Tab and KTR Facility Data File. If a discrepancy exists between
what is required in this section and the Workbook, the instructions
within the workbook take precedence.
b. Model & Facility Data Matrix Tab: The Matrix lists Required Asset
Fields for each SYSTEM and SUBSYSTEM. The Designer of Record selects
SYSTEMS and SUBSYSTEMS that are within the project scope, which the
Contractor needs to include and populate in KTR Facility Data File
R
tab. The "Required Facility Asset Field Position Numbers," one through
seventeen, are pre-populated, and are not editable.
c. Required Asset Fields Tab: Defines the 17 Required Facility Asset

Field Position Numbers used in Model and Facility Data Matrix and KTR
D
Facility Data File tabs.
d. KTR Sample Facility Data File Tab: Sample KTR eOMSI facility data
file. This spreadsheet shows an example of the mandatory fields of all
equipment to be included in the KTR eOMSI Facility Data File, along
with their descriptions.
e. KTR Facility Data File Tab: Required eOMSI facility data file
deliverable provided to the Government. Provide a separated and unique
new row for each facility component or piece of equipment installed.
Asset number will be provided at final by the Government.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 FIELD VERIFICATION
Field verify eOMSI Facility Data Workbook information with Contractor and
Government personnel. Include the following personnel in this meeting:
Contractor's eOMSI Manual and Facility Data Workbook Preparer and Quality
Control Manager, and the Government's Contracting Officer's Representative
and NAVFAC PW FMD. Request, and provide, an eOMSI Field Verification
SECTION 01 78 24.00 20 Page 7

Meeting no sooner than 14 calendar days after submission of the Progress

eOMSI submittal, and another, no sooner than 14 calendar days after
submission of the Prefinal eOMSI submittal. During this meeting, the
Government and Contractor will verify that the eOMSI Facility Data Workbook
is complete and accurate.
Field verify that at least 5 Subsystems under each of the Master Systems
are accurate, for a total of 25 Subsystems. For each of these items,
verify that the required facility asset field, as defined in the "Model &
Facility Data Matrix" tab, contains the specified data and it is accurate
(i.e. item description, manufacturer, model no., serial no.). 100 percent
accuracy of eOMSI information is required for successful field
verification. Any discrepancies discovered must be corrected prior to next
eOMSI Facility Data Workbook Submittal.
(1) F10 - Special Construction

(2) G30 - Site Civil/Mechanial Utilities
(3) G40 - Site Electrical Utilities
(4) H10 - Waterfront Structures
(5) H50 - Waterfront Utilities
T
3.2 eOMSI TRAINING
Prior to acceptance of the facility by the Contracting Officer for

Beneficial Occupancy, provide comprehensive training for the systems and
AF
equipment specified in the technical specifications. The trainees must
include the Facilities Management Specialist, building maintenance
personnel, and applicable building occupants. Instructors must be
well-versed in the particular systems that they are presenting. Address
all aspects of the eOMSI Manual and Facility Data Workbook submittal.
Training must include classroom and field lectures as applicable. The
location of classroom training requires approval by the Contracting Officer.
R
3.2.1 Training Plan
Submit a written training plan to the Contracting Officer for approval at

least 60 calendar days prior to the scheduled training. Indicate prior
approval of the training plan by the Quality Control Manager (QC) on the
D
submittal forwarded to the Contracting Officer. Also, coordinate the

training schedule with the Contracting Officer and QC. Include within the
plan the following elements:
a. Equipment included in training
b. Intended audience
c. Location of training
d. Dates of training
e. Objectives
f. Outline of the information to be presented and subjects covered

including description
g. Start and finish times and duration of training on each subject
h. Methods (e.g. classroom lecture, video, site walk-through, actual

operational demonstrations, written handouts)
SECTION 01 78 24.00 20 Page 8

i. Instructor names and instructor qualifications for each subject
j. List of texts and other materials required to support training
3.2.2 Training Content
The core of this training must be based on manufacturer's recommendations

and the operation and maintenance information defined in Section 01 78 23
OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE DATA. The QC is responsible for overseeing and
approving the content and adequacy of the training. Provide a brief
summary of "Facility Information" and a more detailed presentation of,
"Primary Systems Information". Spend 95 percent of the instruction time
during the presentation on the "Primary Systems Information". Include the
following for each Primary system training presentation:
a. Start-up, normal operation, shutdown, unoccupied operation, seasonal

changeover, manual operation, controls set-up and programming,
troubleshooting, and alarms.
b. Relevant health and safety issues.
T
c. Discussion of how the feature or system is environmentally responsive.
Advise adjustments and optimizing methods for energy conservation.
d. Design intent.
AF
e. Use of O&M Manual Files.
f. Review of control drawings and schematics.
g. Interactions with other systems.

R
h. Special maintenance and replacement sources.
i. Tenant interaction issues.
3.2.3 Training Outline

D
Provide the eOMSI Manual Files (Bookmarked PDF) and eOMSI Facility Data
Workbook and a written course outline listing the major and minor topics to
be discussed by the instructor on each day of the course to each trainee in
the course. Provide the course outline 14 calendar days prior to the
training.
3.2.4 Training Video Recording
Provide to the Contracting Officer two copies of the training course in DVD
video recording format. Capture within the recording, in video and audio,
all instructors' training presentations including question and answer
periods with the trainees. Confirm proposed software used to create the
training is compatible with the using activity resources to play the
training materials. The recording camera(s) must be attended by a person
during the recording sessions to assure proper size of exhibits and
projections during the recording are visible and readable when viewed as
training.
SECTION 01 78 24.00 20 Page 9

3.2.5 Unresolved Questions from Trainees
If, at the end of the training course, there are questions from trainees
that remain unresolved, the instructor must send the answers, in writing,
to the Contracting Officer for transmittal to the trainees, and the
training video must be modified to include the appropriate clarifications.
3.2.6 Validation of Training Completion
Ensure that each attendee at each training session signs a class roster
daily to confirm Government participation in the training. At the
completion of all training, submit a signed validation letter that includes
a sample record of training for reporting what systems were included in the
training, who provided the training, when and where the training was
performed, and copies of the signed class rosters. Provide two copies of
the validation to the Contracting Officer, and one copy to the eOMSI
Preparer for inclusion into the eOMSI documentation.
3.2.7 Quality Control Coordination
Coordinate the eOMSI training with the QC in Section 01 45 00.00 10 QUALITY
T
CONTROL.
AF
R
D
SECTION 01 78 24.00 20 Page 10

Al Dhafra, UAE
PART THREE - PROJECT PROGRAM

Project Program
T
AF
R
D
PART THREE - PROJECT PROGRAM - Page 1

Al Dhafra, UAE
1. PROJECT DESCRIPTION
2. PROJECT OBJECTIVES
2.1. Mission Statement
2.2. Facility Function
2.3. Project Specific Priorities
2.4. Appropriate Design
2.5. Workflow Process
2.6. Special Design Challenges
2.7 Adaptability and Flexibility
2.8 Construction Phasing and Sequence of Construction
3. SITE ANALYSIS
3.1 Existing Site Conditions
3.2 Site Development Requirements
4. BUILDING REQUIREMENTS
T
4.1 Space Tabulation
4.2 Space Relationships
4.3 Exterior Character
AF
5. ROOM REQUIREMENTS
6. ENGINEERING SYSTEMS REQUIREMENTS

A10 Foundations
A20 Basement Construction
R
B10 Superstructure
B20 Exterior Closure
B30 Roofing
C10 Interior Construction
C20 Stairs
D
C30 Interior Finishes

D20 Plumbing
D30 HVAC
D40 Fire Protection Systems
D50 Electrical Power and Lighting
E10 Equipment
E20 Furnishings
F10 Special Construction
G10 Site Preparations
G20 Site Improvements
G30 Site Mechanical Utilities
G40 Site Electrical Utilities
Part 3 contains the project description, functional and performance requirements, scope items,
and expected quality levels that exceed Part 4. Part 4 identifies design criteria, verification
requirements, and performance and quality requirements of products. See "Order of
Precedence" paragraph in Part 2 for relationships between all parts of this RFP.
PART THREE - PROJECT PROGRAM - Page 2

Al Dhafra, UAE
1.0 PROJECT DESCRIPTION (SCOPE OF WORK)
1.1 GENERAL
This project constructs environmentally controlled pre-engineered space with vertical fabric doors for four
(4) Triton aircraft at Al Dhafra AB, UAE. The structure(s) will serve as hangar space for one or more
aircraft of the Triton Unmanned Aircraft System (UAS) platform and each may contain organizational,
maintenance, and administration spaces. The facilities must be of semi-permanent construction, defined
for this purpose to be construction, other than pavements, equipment pads and foundations, which can be
disassembled and removed from the site. Supply space must be provided within one of the structures.
Hangar access and parking aprons will also be constructed. The facilities will include the construction of
a shielded Forward Operating Base (FOB) Mission Control System (MCS) and an associated
communications tower, emergency generator. The facility layout must allow any of the four aircraft to be
deployed at any time. Access for aircraft to the taxiway may be accomplished by moving other aircraft to
temporary parking areas provided on the site.
Development area on the site is limited. It is important that this facility be designed to effectively utilize
the site to satisfy the Request for Proposal (RFP) requirements while ensuring adequate maneuvering
T
and parking space for the aircraft. All structures shall comply with applicable building codes, Unified
Facilities Criteria, and regulations whichever is more stringent.
AF
Site work shall include; demolition of existing improvements, grading, vehicle paving, taxiways, and
access driveways, a new Airfield Ground Equipment (AGE) yard, apron area paving, storm drainage,
walkways and sidewalks, utility corridors, fire protection access, bicycle racks, site and apron lighting, and
dumpster/recycling enclosures. Site drawings showing the project location and limits of construction are
included in Part 6, Site Drawings. A notional site plan is included in Part 6, Site Drawings.
A Facility Requirements Document (FRD) containing system and facility characteristics and requirements
is attached, see PART 6, Attachments. The applicable requirements contained in this FRD shall apply to
R
this project except as modified herein.
D
1.2 OPTIONS
This contract includes separate bid priced options as follows;
Option #1 Furniture, Fixtures and Equipment
This option is for the procurement and installation of freestanding furniture, fixtures, and equipment for the
base facilities included in this RFP. See PARTS 3 & 4, Paragraphs E-10 Equipment and E-20
Furnishings for additional requirements.
Option #2 Electronic Security Systems
This option is for the procurement and installation of Electronic Security Systems (ESS). This option
includes active equipment, cabling, connections, and testing. The design of the system is required in the
base contract as part of this RFP and shall not be priced as part of this option. Pathways, spaces, and
passive (physical) infrastructure are required in base contract also. See PARTS 3 & 4, Paragraphs G40
and D50 for specifics requirements.
Option #3 R-11 Cooling Barn

This option constructs an R-11 Cooling Barn capable of sheltering one R-11 Fuel Truck. The Cooling
PART 3 - CHAPTER 1 - Page 1

Al Dhafra, UAE
Barn should be located in the existing R-11 Yard as indicated on the site layout in Part 6. This structure
should also be of semi-permanent construction.
Option #4 Alternate Storm Water Management System

This option is for the construction of an alternate storm water management system. The Contractor may
propose a storm water management system utilizing retention or detention ponds, above grade or below
grade, with or without pump or gravity discharge. The system shall contain the total volume of storm
water within the LIMITS OF CONSTRUCTION. This system replaces the storm water management
system described in the base contract.
T
AF
R
D

Al Dhafra, UAE
2.0 PROJECT OBJECTIVES
2.1 Mission Statement

The Triton MQ-4C Unmanned Aircraft System (UAS) is intended to provide a persistent
maritime Intelligence, Surveillance, and Reconnaissance (ISR) data collection and dissemination
capability to the fleet; serving as a force multiplier for the Joint Force and Fleet Commander,
enhancing situational awareness of the battle space, and shortening the sensor-to-shooter chain.
In a secondary role, TRITON UAS will be used alone or in conjunction with other assets to
respond to theater level operational or national strategic tasking.
2.2 Facility Function

This project constructs up to four environmentally controlled pre-engineered structures with vertical fabric
doors. Each structure will serve as an aircraft hangar for the Unmanned Aircraft System (UAS) platform
and each may contain organizational, maintenance, and administration spaces. These spaces will be of
semi-permanent construction. Supply space will be constructed within one of the structures. Hangar
T
access and parking aprons will also be constructed. A R-11 Cooling Barn shall be constructed as a
support space as part of option #3. This facility shall be capable of sheltering one R-11 Fuel Truck and
maintaining an indoor temperature of 85 degrees. The Cooling Barn shall be a drive-through facility with
vehicle doors on opposite sides large enough for the fuel truck to pass through, as well as include any
AF
clearances required. There shall also be a minimum of 1 personnel egress door located next to each
vehicle door. The facilities will include the construction of a shielded Forward Operating Base (FOB)
Mission Control System (MCS).
2.3 Project Specific Priorities

R
2.3.1 Sustainable Design and Construction
Design and construct project per sustainability requirements identified in Section 01 33 29.05 20,
Sustainability Reporting for Design-Build. Additional specific sustainability requirements are found
D
in RFP Part 2, Part 3, and Part 4 sections.
Design and construct project per UFC 1-200-02 High Performance and Sustainable Buildings.
2.3.2 Storm Water Management - Low Impact Development (LID)
Provide a design that incorporates low impact development (LID) strategies complying with UFC
3-210-10, Low Impact Development to the extent pratical. If LID is not used for major
construction projects (with budgets exceeding $750,000) or major renovation projects (with
budgets exceeding $5 million) having a stormwater element, a waiver must be obtained from the
Regional Engineer. If a project has a footprint (consisting of building, sidewalks, and parking) of
over 5000 square feet and does not maintain the predevelopment hydrology to the maximum
extent technically feasible (METF), these constraints must be documented on the Naval Facilities
Engineering Command (NAVFAC) Sustainable Energy Data Record Card (NSEDRC) and
approved by the Governments Civil Technical Discipline Coordinator. The NSEDRC can be
found at:
http://www.wbdg.org/pdfs/navfac_sustainable_energy_data_record_card.pdf .
These policies are in addition to State or Local storm water management program permit

Al Dhafra, UAE
requirements. The Designer of Record (DOR) must balance all requirements, Federal, State,
Local and the above stated policies, and acquire required regulatory permits when managing
storm water generated.
For Navy and Marine Corps projects, comply with Navy LID Policy (commonly referred to as the
Penn Memo). The Navy LID policy sets a goal of no net increase in stormwater and sediment or
nutrient loading from major renovation projects and construction projects. Major renovation
projects are defined as having a storm water component and exceeding $5 million and major
construction projects are defined as exceeding $750,000. If LID is not implemented to the METF
as defined in UFC 3-210-10, a waiver must be obtained from the Regional Engineer. Coordinate
waiver review and approval with the Government's Civil Technical Discipline Coordinator (TDC).
2.3.3 Energy Efficiency
Energy efficiency must be in accordance with UFC 1-200-02, High Performance Sustainable and
Building Requirements.
2.3.4 Life-Cycle Cost Analysis
T
The Contractor shall provide a Life-Cycle Cost Analysis, as part of the design phase of this project,
in accordance with UFC 1-200-02, High Performance Sustainable and Building Requirements and
ECB 2015-7, Life-Cycle Cost Analysis Requirements for the Design Phase of USACE Buildings,
AF
Central Energy Systems, and Associated Supporting Facilities. A copy of ECB 2015-7 is included
in PART 6 Attachments.
2.3.5 Building Commissioning
Provide commissioning to meet requirements identified in UFGS Section 01 33 29.05 20

Sustainability Reporting For Design-Build, UFGS Section 01 45 00.00 10 Quality Control, and UFC
R
1-200-02 High Performance and Sustainable Building Requirements.
2.3.6 Accessibility Requirements

D
Provide barrier-free design in accordance with UFC 1-200-01 , General Building Requirements.
2.3.7 Fall Protection Systems
Equip all hangar spaces with an overhead rigid-rail fall protection system in conformance with the
Department of the Navy Fall Protection Guide, UFC 4-211-01N, Aircraft Maintenance Hangars,
OSHA 29 CFR PART 1910, 1915, 1926.50, and ANZI Z2359.1. A copy of the Navy Fall
Protection Guide is included in PART 6 Attachments.
The fall protection system shall be engineered to provide localized protection along the
longitudinal axes of the airframe fuselage. Consider fall clearance distances, to ensure that the
worker is brought to a stop prior to contacting a lower level and that adequately protects the work
area, provides suitable fall protection, limits deflection and free fall, is designed for the appropriate
number of users and does not introduce excessive loads into the supporting roof structure.
2.3.8 Antiterrorism Criteria
Design the facility to comply with UFC 4-010-01, DoD Minimum Antiterrorism Standards for

Al Dhafra, UAE
Buildings and as specified below.
Facility, except hangar aircraft bay, shops and storage/warehouse areas, will have an occupancy
designated as inhabited in accordance with UFC 4-010-01.
Facility is within a controlled perimeter.
Facility shall be designed and constructed to meet the standards for Low Level of Protection.
Facilities, 3 stories or greater in height, will be required to meet the progressive collapse
avoidance standards. Documents, including design drawings and calculations, demonstrating
compliance with these requirements must be submitted in accordance with UFGS Section 01 33
10.05 20 Design Submittal Procedures.
Facility required minimum standoff distances from parking and roadways shall be determined in
accordance with UFC 4-010-01. The site is constrained and the required minimum standoff
distances from parking and roadways may not be available in all directions. Standoff distances
may be reduced, to the minimum allowed, if the required level of protection can be achieved
through analysis, building hardening, or other mitigating construction in accordance with UFC
3-340-01 Design and Construction of Hardened Structures to Conventional Weapons Effects.
T
Blast analysis is required for all windows and doors and structural components and assemblies.
See the following table for design impulses and pressures which apply to the design of items listed
above. Documents, including design drawings and calculations, demonstrating compliance with
these requirements must be submitted in accordance with UFGS Section 01 33 10.05 20 Design
Submittal Procedures.
AF
Design Blast Pressures
Incident Reflected
Range Pressure Impulse Pressure Impulse Load Duration
(m) (kPa) (kPa-msec) (kPa) (kPa-msec) (msec)
25 19 105 40 205 13
20 26 130 57 261 12
R
15 41 169 96 357 11
10 88 242 236 564 9
5 407 457 1699 1291 6
3 1285 685 7598 2499 5
D
At a minimum, all windows in exterior walls of inhabited spaces, or in walls separating inhabited
and uninhabited spaces, shall have retention film, 4 mil, applied.
At a minimum, all doors in exterior walls of inhabited spaces, and in walls separating inhabited and
uninhabited spaces, shall swing out and shall be of hollow metal construction.
2.3.9 Secured Areas
Provide secured areas within the building that comply with the construction detailing of Intelligence
Community Standard (ICS) Number 705-1, and MQ-4C Triton FRD REV. G (section 4.2.1.1
EMI/EMC Requirements). Provide secure areas (but do not accredit) to include the following
space(s): FOB MCS Server Room, FOB MCS Pilot Space, and FOB MCS Vestibule.. These
rooms will require a radio frequency shield that meets all the technical requirements that comply
with MQ-4C Triton FRD REV. G (section 4.2.1.1 EMI/EMC Requirements and shall be constructed
in accordance with ICD 705 Technical Specifications and MIL-STD-464. The outside perimeter of
these spaces defines the secured area and provide standard construction with an STC rating
identified in the room requirements. The wall construction and STC rating of shared walls between

Al Dhafra, UAE
the secured perimeter and the higher rated secured area is determined by the higher rated
secured area requirements. While these rooms shall be constructed accordingly, they are not
defined by the ICD 705 and thus do not require accreditation or the processes necessary to
accomplish accreditation. Adjacent to the secured area perimeter shall be the FOB MCS
Equipment Room, FOB MCS Maintenance Space, and the FOB MCS Toilet. These spaces are
required to be directly adjacent to the shielded enclosure, but are not contained within the shielded
enclosure.
Provide open secret, secure rooms in accordance with SECNAVINST 5510.36A Department of
Navy (DON) Information Security Program (ISP) Instruction, and SECNAV M-5510.36 manual.
These rooms include the following space(s): Telecommunications Room(s) (Secure Comm.
Room), Secure Storage, Secure VTC Room, Operations Office, Electrical Instruments (AE) Shop,
and Electronics Tech (AT) Workcenter. The outside perimeter of these spaces defines the secured
area and provide standard construction with an STC rating identified in the room requirements.
The wall construction and STC rating of shared walls between the secured perimeter and the
higher rated secured area is determined by the higher rated secured area requirements.
The contractor is responsible for testing and verification of ratings all wall and door construction
requiring STC rating.
T
Refer to the RFP Part 3, Chapter 5 - Room Requirements to further define the secured area
requirements.
AF
2.4 Appropriate Design
The contractor and its Architect/Engineer shall be responsible for understanding and conforming to
all applicable design criteria associated with the facilities to be provided under this contract. In
addition to the documents listed or identified elsewhere in this RFP, Comply with UFC 4-211-01N
Aircraft Maintenance Hangars: Type I, Type II and Type III for planning and design requirements
R
for this project. The Triton MQ-4C aircraft dimensions upon which the hangar bay shall be sized
(providing required clearances around and above the aircraft) are contained within the Facilities
Requirements Document (FRD) provided in PART 6 Attachments.
D
2.5 Workflow Process
2.5.1 Hours of Operation
Facility will be staffed and operated 24 hours, 7 days per week.
2.5.2 Staffing/Occupancy
The estimated staffing for the building is 55 personnel, not all of whom will have a dedicated
workstation. The projected staffing for most of the spaces within the building has been identified
in Part 3, Chapter 5 to the greatest extent possible. This information shall be confirmed by the
successful proposer during design development. Occupancy used to design building features,
such as structural, egress, and plumbing fixtures shall be determined as required using occupant
load factors in applicable building or life safety codes.

Al Dhafra, UAE
2.6 Special Design Challenges

The Host Nation has dictated that any U.S. facilities must appear temporary in nature and must be
constructed as a non-permanent facility. This has resulted in the decision to utilize a tension
fabric structure for the exterior shell of the hangar. UFC 1-201-01, Non-Permanent DoD Facilities
in Support of Military Operations requirements shall be followed. The facility construction type is
to be considered as semi-permanent. All supporting functions, and facilities not within the
footprint of the hangars should maintain a similar temporary and expeditionary appearance.
This facility must simultaneously meet the maintenance needs of several aircraft while minimizing
the duplication of equipment and space. In order to facilitate this design objective, the contractor
and its Architect/Engineer must retain the services of a certified industrial designer to analyze and
design maintenance shop workflow. The industrial designer must develop a shop layout that will
accommodate the maintenance equipment requirements specified in this RFP and maximize use of
the allocated maintenance spaces.
2.7 Adaptability and Flexibility

The Contractor and its Architect/Engineer should prepare designs which are both adaptable and
flexible. Unless needed to meet criteria contained within, facilities should not be so specific in
design and details as to preclude adaptability for other potential future uses. Neither should they
T
be designed in such a way as to prevent flexibility in future arrangements.
2.8 Construction Phasing and Sequence of Construction

AF
The contractor must have an approved phasing plan in accordance with UFC 3-260-01 Airfield and
Heliport Planning and Design before start of any work on the site. This plan shall be submitted for
review at the 65% design.
The Contractor and its Architect/Engineer should prepare designs and construction operations
which consider the following;
R
Demolition and construction adjacent to the Refueler Apron shall be accomplished before work on
the remainder of the site. This work includes but not limited to shoulder demolition and area
lighting demolition. The permanent Jet blast deflectors must be installed prior to the start of
construction on the remainder of the site.storm water management during construction is a
D
contractor responsibility. This may require construction of temporary holding ponds and pumps.
The work includes demolition and construction on and next to operational airfield pavements. The
contractor shall insure safe operations on the construction site.
Area lighting of the adjacent aircraft ramps and taxiways must be maintained while any existing
area lighting is removed or relocated.
The new AGE Yard must be operational prior to interrupting the use of, or demolition of, the existing
Yard.
Vehicle access to the operational Age Yard must be maintained at all times.
Fuel Truck access to the adjacent Aircraft Ramp along Taxiway Alpha (West Road) must be
maintained at all times.

Triton Operational Facilities (BAMS) P960
Al Dhafra, UAE
3.0 SITE ANALYSIS

3.1 Existing Site Conditions
The site is on an active airfield and adjacent to an active apron with refueler hydrants. The site is
restricted by roads on the north and west, an active taxiway to the east and an active apron to the
south. The site is generally flat with a slight slope to the south. A drainage detention pond is along
the south site of the site. The site is approximately 2 meters lower in elevation that the apron. An
active Airfield Ground Equipment (AGE) yard is on the west side. Area lighting for the apron is along
the south side. Drawings showing the location and limits of construction are included in Part 6.
3.1.1 Topography
The site has minimal slope and is generally flat and composed of mixed desert soil and may contain
urban fill type materials. An existing storm water detention basin receives drainage from the site and
T
the Refueler Apron (Tango Ramp). The site is approximately one to two meters lower in elevation than
the Refueler Apron (Tango Ramp). Part of the site is a paved area used for equipment and vehicle
parking, AGE Yard.
AF
3.1.1.1 Vegetation and Landscaping
The site has little to no vegetation.
3.1.1.2 Wildlife
R
There is no known wildlife at the site.

D
3.1.1.3 Wetlands
There are no wetlands on the site.
3.1.1.4 UXO
An UXO Survey of the project site has not been conducted.
3.1.2 Man Made Constraints
3.1.2.1 Site Utilities

An existing 200 millimeter HDPE Fire Water line runs west to east under the north Refueler Apron
(Tango Ramp) shoulder.

Al Dhafra, UAE
Domestic Water service will be provided from existing line to the west.
Sanitary Sewer service will be provided from an existing line to the west.
Two (2) existing 300 mm stainless steel aircraft fuel line and associated control lines runs west to east
under the north Refueler Apron (Tango Ramp) shoulder.
An existing underground electric line along with high mast lighting for the Refueler Apron runs west to
east about 48 meters north of the Refueler apron.
An existing communications duct runs along the north of the site and along the east side of the site.
See Part 6 for drawing showing existing utilities.
3.1.2.2 Site Drainage and Storm Water Runoff

Approximately 50 percent of the Refueler Apron area and all of the project site drains directly to a
detention basin along the north edge of the Refueler Apron (Tango Ramp). The remainder of the
Refueler Apron drains to the east and the runoff is directed to the basin along the north edge of the
T
apron. All storm water from this area is retained in the detention base without any discharge. The
existing drainage pattern is shown on drawing CG-201 in Part 6.
AF
3.1.2.3 Existing Building and Structures
The project site has no buildings requiring demolition. Three high mast light poles and foundations are
within the project site. An electric transformer for the area lighting is located with the high mast
lighting. A concrete paved AGE vehicle and equipment storage area approximately 93 x 50 meters is
on the west side of the site. A guard tower for the Refueler Apron (Tango Ramp) is at the northeast
R
corner of the apron. The Guard Tower will remain active during construction and will not be relocated.
If the grading design requires modification to the grade elevations at the Guard Tower the contractor
shall provide a new tower of similar construction. Tower design will require review and approval by
the US Air Force and may include height or size modifications.
D
3.1.2.4 Hazardous Materials

It is not known if the site contains any hazardous waste or other hazardous materials. The contractor
shall retain an Environmental Engineering firm to evaluate and test the soil at the storm water storage
basin for contaminants. The Environmental Engineer shall prepare a site investigation plan and submit
it to the Resident Engineer for review and approval. After approval of the investigation plan the
Environmental Engineer shall conduct the investigation and provide a report of findings to the Resident
Engineer.
3.1.2.5 Fencing
There is an existing fence on the north and east side of the site. The fence is chain link with metal post.
Fence fabric height is approximate 2 meters with approximately 1 meter above with 6 single strands of

Al Dhafra, UAE
barb wire. The fence belongs to the Host Nation and is to remain in place except where needed for the
new taxiway. Any changes to the fence will require Host nation approval.
3.1.2.6 Adjacent Land Use

A Refueler Apron (Tango Ramp) is on the south boundary of the project site. Jet blast from aircraft on
the Refueler Apron will affect the design of this project. East of the project site is an active taxiway.
West of the project site are multiple airfield support facilities.
3.2 Site Development Requirements

The site development includes aircraft apron and taxiway pavement, buildings, and jet blast deflectors.
Provide hangar building(s) and other structures as described in other sections of this document.
Provide parking for 3 Triton aircraft.
Provide vehicle parking for 6 vehicles. Handicapped parking not required.
Provide water storage tanks as required by the fire protection design.
T
Provided all equipment pads as required to support building functions and operations.
Provide dumster pad in accordance with base trash collection procedures.
Provide one communications tower.
AF
Provide an AGE Yard approximately 4600 square meters to replace the existing yard. Provide direct
access to the Refueler Apron (Tango Ramp) from the AGE Yard.
Provide Line Vehicle Parking Area approximately 335 square meters.
Storm water management and discharge in accordance with the master drainage plan.
Provide all facilities not listed but are required for a fully functioning Triton Operational Facility.
Provide paved vehicle access to the AGE Yard.
Provide one R11 Cooling Barn, Option Number 3, at a remote location in the current R11 Parking area.
R
See Part 6, Site Drawings for drawing showing project location.
D
3.2.1 Facility Footprint

Building footprints shall conform to the Architectural requirements of this document. All facilities,
utilities, accessory structures, pavements, airfield pavements, and storm drainage structures shall be
located within the defined limits of construction. Limits of construction are shown on drawing C-101 in
Part 6. A conceptual notional site plan is provided in Part 6, Site Drawings.
3.2.2 Demolition
The contractor shall provide all demolition and debris removal need to develop the site and construct
the facilities. Additional pavement removal and replacement will be required for utility connections.
Demolition will generally consist of pavement removal and removal of existing utilities. Provide all
demolition and removal as needed to construction the project. Demolition consist of but not limited
to:
Demolish Apron and Taxiway shoulder as required for new apron and taxiway tie in.
Demolish existing AGE Yard approximately 90 x 50 meters.
Demolish existing apron shoulder as required for AGE Yard access pavement.

Al Dhafra, UAE
Demolish existing apron shoulder as needed for storm drainage construction.

Demolish existing fence as required for taxiway construction.
Utility demolition includes Area Lighting and associated foundations, conduit, transformer,
Communication Duct, and Apron and Taxiway edge lighting.
Excavate and remove stockpile soil and remove all debris from the site.
3.2.3 Aircraft Access

Aircraft access to the apron and hangars will be from the existing taxiway to the east and the Refueler
Apron. Taxiway access is considered the primary route and access from the apron is considered
secondary. All access routes shall meet clearance requirements for the Triton aircraft.
3.2.4 Vehicle and Pedestrian Access

Vehicle and pedestrian access will be from the road to the west (West Road) or north. Access shall be
paved asphalt road.
T
3.2.5 Grading and Drainage
Positive drainage will be provided around all proposed facilities. Pavements will be sloped to drain.
AF
Drainage design must accommodate storm water runoff from the Refueler Apron (Tango Ramp).
Storm water drainage design shall be for a 10 year storm event. See Sections G103001 and G3030 for
additional requirements. Airfield pavement slope requirements shall be in accordance with UFC
3-260-01 including connection to the existing taxiway (East Taxiway) and existing apron (Refueler Apron,
Tango Ramp).
3.2.6 Utilities
R
Domestic water service shall be provided from the existing base system. The contractor shall
coordinate with the Resident Engineer and Base CE to locate the most desirable water line for service to
D
the facility. See Drawing C-401 in Part 6 for known utility lines. Host Nation approval will be made
through the Resident Engineer.
Sanitary sewer service shall be provided from the existing base system. The contractor shall
coordinate with the Resident Engineer and Base CE to locate the most desirable water line for service to
the facility. See Drawing C-401 in Part 6 for known utility lines. Host Nation approval will be made
through the Resident Engineer.
Water for fire hydrants shall be provided from the existing base system. The existing line encircles the
Refueler Apron (Tango Ramp). See G301004 for additional requirements. See Part 6 for As built
information.
There is no existing storm sewer serving the Refueler Apron or Triton site. Construct storm water
collection and conveyance for all new construction and the entire area which currently drains to any
existing detention pond within the limits of construction. Coordinate storm water management design

Al Dhafra, UAE
with the ongoing Air Force/Host Nation drainage master plan. Storm water discharge from the site
shall be compatible with the master plan and discharge location shall be as defined by the master plan.
The existing aircraft fuel line will be operational during construction and shall be protecting as necessary
during construction.
3.2.7 Construction Access and Lay Down Area

The contractor will be provided with designated construction access route and a designated Lay Down
Area.
3.2.8 Sustainable Development

Sustainable design principles shall be included in the design and construction of the project in
accordance with Executive Order 13423 and other laws and Executive Orders to the maximum extent
possible. Low Impact Development will be included in the design and construction of this project to
the maximum extent possible.
T
AF
R
D

Al Dhafra, UAE
4.0 BUILDING REQUIREMENTS

See attached document(s), '4_SpaceTabulation_Chart
4.2 Space Relationships
The primary space within the facility will be the aircraft bay. Supporting maintenance, administrative and
storage spaces shall be placed adjacent to the aircraft bay. The other spaces may access the aircraft
bay through interior corridors.
The FOB MCS Server Room, FOB MCS Pilot Space, FOB MCS Vestibule, FOB MCS Equipment Room,
FOB MCS Maintenance Space, FOB MCS Toilet, Secure Room (Communications), Operations Office,
OIC Room, Secure VTC, and Secured/Classified Storage shall be co-located due to their level of security,
operational interaction and compatibility unless specifically stated otherwise in the room requirements
sheets.
T
4.3 Exterior Character
AF
The exterior envelope of the maintenance hangar will be constructed of coated tension fabric stretched
over a metal structural frame. Additional buildings as needed may be constructed as pre-engineered
metal buildings. The multi-leaf aircraft hangar doors shall also be of vertical lifting PVC coated fabric
construction with the center section height established to accommodate passage of the aircraft tail with
required clearances and the height of the two side sections established to accommodate the aircraft
wings also with required clearances. The exterior of all facilities shall blend with the overall base color
scheme and style. Final exterior materials, finishes, and colors are subject to Government review and
R
approval.
D

4.0 BUILDING REQUIREMENTS
P-960 TRITON Operational Facilities (BAMS)
**Net-to-Gross Factor = 1.15
BAMS Operations Facilities (16,884 SM) Per 1391

BAMS Hangars (5,946 SM)
Aircraft Parking Apron (8,820 SM)
16,884
-8,820
Remaining Area 8,064
-5,946
Support Spaces (SM) 2,118
Facility PA Net SM Gross SM

Fire Protection 286 286 329
T
Secured/Classified Storage 70 37 43
Warehouse Storage Area 557 446 513
Consumables Storage 37 37 43
AF
Administrative Space 278 266 306
Operations Office 37 43
OIC 11 13
Fleet Support Representatives 28 32
Secure Conference Room (VTC) 28 32
Visiting CO 10 12
R
Visiting CMC 9 10
Printer Room 11 13
Admin. Break Room 19 22
Training Space 74 85
D
Training Storage 9 10
Secure Room (Communications) 10 12
Antennas/Antenna Cabling 20 23 *
Maintenance Shops 803 511 587

Mechanical Shop (AD) 28 32
Airframes (AM) 28 32
Electrical Instruments (AE) 28 32
Electronics Tech (AT) Workcenter 28 32
Tool Room 111 128
Maintenance Control 46 53
Maintenance Control Offices 10 12
Material Control 28 32
Locker Rooms 26 30
Women's Toilet 48 55
Men's Toilet 48 55
Janitor's Closet 3 3
Maintenance Break Room 19 22
QA Safety 28 32
Admin Storage 9 10
Battery Storage 23 26
FOB MCS Not Shielded 40 46

FOB MCS Maintenance Space 28 32
FOB MCS Equipment Room 10 12
FOB MCS Toilet 2 2
FOB MCS Shielded 124 80 92

FOB MCS Server Room 51 59
FOB MCS Pilot Space 23 26
FOB MCS Vestibule 6 7
Total SM 1,958
Areas shown in table are minimum required area for each space.
Area calcaulations are per UFC 3-101-01.
T
AF
R
D
Al Dhafra, UAE
5.0 ROOM REQUIREMENTS

See attached document(s), 5_Room_Requirements_Form
T
AF
R
D

Al Dhafra, UAE
SPACE NAME: OH Hangar Bay

Space Characteristics
Function/adjacencies: Maintenance Space for aircraft
Special Dimensions:
Acoustics:
Access: From Exterior.
Number of Occupants: 10 per hangar
Other/special requirements:
Uniformat
Description Qty Size Specific Requirements
Section
B2010 Exterior Walls AD Tension Fabric Structures to house UA
B2020 Exterior Windows AD AD N/A
T
Steel Doors and frames, insulated, paint. . Provide
914mm x exterior personnel doors to meet fire exit
B2030 Steel doors and frames AD
2134mm requirements (minimum 1 on each side of hangar
door).
AF
B203008 Exterior Door Hardware AR AR Full weather-stripping, overhead holders
Overhead and Roll-up 3048mm W x Electrically operated, overhead rolling insulated

B203004 1
Doors 3048mm H doors to Exterior, paint.
Vertical lift fabric doors. Provide NEMA 4X

corrosion-proof (salt spray) and waterproof enclosure
for door operator control panel in a location where
R
B203005 Hangar Doors AR AD
line-of-sight for complete door movement can be
observed. Provide generator and automatic transfer
switch for back-up power to hangar doors.
Painted between O1/O2 spaces and hangar bay.

D
C1010 Interior Partitions AR

Rated where required.
At personnel doors from Corridors and exterior into

C103004 Identifying Devices AR
AD Hangar Bay. Message: Hangar.
Message: Indicate the room name for the space

C103004 Identifying Devices AR AR being entered from the hangar bay. Locate at each
entry to an interior space.
Moveable furnishings 3 Aircraft tie down storage bar
1 Deionized water system
C103099 Draft Curtains AR AR Per NFPA 409.
C3010 Wall Finish AR AR Paint
Fuel Resistive Resinous Flooring, 5 coat system. No

C3020 Floor Finish AR AR
base required.
Paint exposed structure including ductwork, conduit,

C3030 Ceiling Finish AR AR
piping, devices, etc.
Provide central exhaust system for each hangar for

D304007 Exhaust Systems AR AR
ventilation
PART 3 CHAPTER 5 Page 1

Al Dhafra, UAE
Provide HVAC systems in accordance with section

D30 HVAC AR AR
D30
D503001 Phone Outlets 1 AR
Emergency Shower/Eye
D201090
Wash
AR AR Floor drain needed
Wall Mounted Electric

D2010 AR AR
Water Cooler
AFFF Fire Protection

D4090
System
With oil water separator with 5 MICRON filter,

Compressed Air Tool
D209005
Drops
AR AR coupler. Provide 6 strategically placed in hangar bay,
locations determined at design by user and/or COR.
Oil Water Separator AR AR Effluent From trench drains
D202002 Hose Bibs AR AR Provide in accordance with section D202002
Trench Drains Per UFC 4-211-01N 3.2.2.1
T
AFFF Deluge Valve Riser
D4090 3 AR
Assembly
D5020 Branch power and lighting AR AR

AF
400 HZ, 60 KVA, 100 cable, /28 VDC, 400 AMP,
100 cable/480 VAC, Three-phase, 100Amp, 4-wire,
D5020 Power Service Point 4 AR
60 Hz, with MIL-C-22992/ (2)120V, Single phase, 60
Hz, 20Amp, GFI
Provide convenience outlets at 30 along hangar

D5020 Convenience outlets AR AR
interior wall
R
120VAC 60 Hz, 20amp receptacle located in the
D5020 Convenience outlets 2 AR
hangar bay to power the GPS antenna kit
Resistance of less than 10 ohms located on a

minimum of 7315 mm (24 feet) grid in the hangar bay
D5020 Grounding points AR AR
space in accordance with UFC 4-211-01N are
D
required.
G204003 Bollards AR Locate at each corner of each roll-up door.

Al Dhafra, UAE
SPACE NAME: Maintenance Control

Function/adjacencies: This space provides for administration of squadron maintenance. This space may also be used
for briefing of maintenance personnel prior to beginning of work day.
Special Dimensions:
Ideal Plan Dimensions:
Minimum Ceiling Height: 9 ft. (2.74M).
Acoustics:
Access: To the hangar bay
Number of Occupants: 2
Uniformat
Section
Painted with resilient base. Internal separation
T
C1010 Interior Partitions AR AR partitions may be gypsum board on metal studs.
914mm x
C1020 Interior Doors AR
2134mm
Steel Doors and frames, insulated, paint.
AF
Marker Boards and Tack
C103003 1 AR
Boards
Counter height to be at standing height, space for 10

people to stand at counter facing each other (5 on
C103008 Solid surface counters AR AR one side, 5 on the other) with data and electrical
R
outlets to accommodate laptop computers. Network
to be NIPR.LMS and phones.

C3010 Wall Finish AR AR
partitions may be gypsum board on metal studs.
D
C3020 Floor Finish AR AR Resilient flooring, minimum. Carpet shall not be used
C3030 Ceiling Finish AR AR 600mm x 600mm Suspended Acoustical Ceiling.

MILLWORK/Moveable
furnishings
1 Transaction Counter with workstation on other side
D30 HVAC AR AR
5 zone Time Zone clock outlet recessed, 2 dedicated

circuits to support unclassified printer/LMS printer
Phones, CATV, building management system,

Telecommunications
D503001
Systems
AR AR Security monitoring if required; CCTV monitoring of
launch point(s)
Networks 5 NIPR/LMS/ Networks
(3)Desks, (4)side chairs (5)task chairs, and(2)

stools.(2) bookcase,(2) lateral files, copy/printer
machine, fax machine, shredder,(1) printer desk,
E2020 Moveable Furnishings 2
(1)workstation, (1)printer table (8;x3 x 2.5high)2438
x 1066 x 762 mm high, (1)crosscut shredder, (1)table
to support (GFE)Pema Case.

Al Dhafra, UAE
SPACE NAME: Maintenance Control Office 1

Function/adjacencies: Provides private office for the Maintenance Control OIC. Adjacent to Maintenance Control.
Special Dimensions:
Acoustics:
Access:
Uniformat
Section
T
914mm x
C1020 Interior Doors
AF AR
2134mm

C103003 1 AR
Boards
C103004 Identifying Devices AR AR

R
C3030 Ceiling Finish AR AR 600mm x 600mmSuspended Acoustical Ceiling.

D
D30 HVAC AR AR
Telecommunications
D503001
Systems
AR AR Phones, CATV
Office desk with file storage, wardrobe, (1)task chair,

(2)side chairs, (1) bookcase

Al Dhafra, UAE
SPACE NAME: Maintenance Control Office 2

Function/adjacencies: Provides private office for the Maintenance Control OIC. Adjacent to Maintenance Control.
Special Dimensions:
Acoustics:
Access:
Uniformat
Section

T
914mm x
2134mm
C103003
Boards
AF 1 AR
C103004 Identifying Devices AR AR

Resilient flooring, minimum. Carpet shall not be

used
R
D
D30 HVAC AR AR
Telecommunications
D503001
Systems
AR AR Phones, CATV
Office desk with file storage, wardrobe, (1)desk task

chair, (2)side chairs, bookcase

Al Dhafra, UAE
SPACE NAME: Administration Storage

Function/adjacencies: Adjacent to maintenance control/material control
Special Dimensions:
Acoustics:
Access:
Number of Occupants:
Uniformat
Section
Full-height metal stud framing, partitions to be full-

C1010 Interior Partitions height painted impact-resistant board on metal studs
with resilient base. Rated where required.
T
1828 x
2134
Tack board. Provide smaller marker board at

C103003
Boards
AF 3x4
common area
C103004 Identifying Devices Room sign at each room entrance
C3020 Floor Finish AR AR Resilient flooring, minimum or Carpet tile

R
D30 HVAC AR AR
D
Dedicated circuit and duplex receptacle for network

copier/printer
Unclassified outlets on adjoining or opposite walls.

Telecommunications Each outlet to contain one each NIPR, voice and
D503001 1
Systems LMS RJ45 jacks plus one blank in faceplate
E2020 Moveable Furnishings (2)lateral files and (2)storage cabinets

Al Dhafra, UAE
SPACE NAME: Material Control

Function/adjacencies: This space provides for maintenance record storage. This activity also provides for receipt and
documentation of deliveries.
Special Dimensions:
Acoustics:
Access:
Other/special requirements: Adjacency to Maintenance Control and tool room if possible
Uniformat
Section
T
914mm x
C1020 Interior Doors AR Steel Doors and frames, insulated, paint.
AF 2134mm

C103003
Boards
1 AR Marker board at each work station
C103004 AR AR

R
C3030 Ceiling Finish AR AR 600mm x 600mm Suspended Acoustical Ceiling
Transaction Counter in Material Control. Size to allow

Mill Work or furniture 1 AR
D
for 2 people at counter

D30 HVAC AR AR

copier/printer
Unclassified outlet for each workstation, plus one

Telecommunications 3 unclassified outlet on adjoining or opposite wall.
D503001
Systems Each outlet to contain one each NIPR, voice and 2
LMS RJ45 jack
(1)Office desk with file storage and monitor mounts for

2 monitors, (4)task chairs, (4)side chairs, bookcase,
one(1) desk workstations with file storage, (1), ESD
workbench, (2)stools, side chairs, (2)light duty
E2020 Moveable Furnishings
shelving, ESD mat, (1)table for (GFE) transit cases,
(1) 55w x 22d x 41h bubble wrap holder/dispenser
w/ 2 swivel & 2 locking casters, level 6 GSA approved
4H file safe.
Wall mounted grounding bus bar above ESD

D509003 Grounding Systems
workbench

Al Dhafra, UAE
SPACE NAME: Tool Room

Function/adjacencies: Stores and manages aircraft tools and test equipment
Special Dimensions:
Acoustics:
Access: hangar bay
Number of Occupants:1
Uniformat
Section

T
914mm x Steel Doors and frames, insulated, paint. Vision

2134mm panel
AF
2438mm
Wx Steel door & frame. Electrically operated, overhead
B203004 Roll-up Doors 1
3048mm rolling insulated doors to Exterior, paint. lockable
H
Marker Boards and

C103003 1 AR 1 large marker board for common use
R
Tack Boards
AR AR

D

used
Transaction Counter, Size to allow for 2 people at

C103008 Mill Work 1 AR
counter. Stainless steel countertop for durability
D30 HVAC AR
Branch power and

D5020 AR AR
lighting
2 RJ45 Jacks with 3 LMS drops each

Telecommunications
D503001 AR
Systems Each outlet to contain one each NIPR, voice, and 2
LMS RJ45 jacks
(8)heavy duty shelving units (96w x 36d x
E10 Equipment
72h)2438w x 914 d x ,1828h mm,
(1)Office desk, (3)task chairs, (6)storage shelving,

E2020 Moveable Furnishings cabinets, (4)drawer type tool cabinets(NSN #
SEP3163AL), (6)5h storage cabinets with doors, ,
Al Dhafra, UAE
(1)table to support GFE)PEMA case (3x6)Pallet

Jack, heat lamp, full sized refrigerator, small deep
freeze, (1)work table, (1)GSA safe (48x24d x 72h)
1219x609x1828, (1)stool, All appendix B tools and
support equipment from the FRD
T
AF
R
D

Al Dhafra, UAE
SPACE NAME: Quality Assurance & Safety

Function/adjacencies: Space used to provide work areas for Quality Assurance and Safety personnel
Special Dimensions:
Acoustics:
Access:
Uniformat
Section
T
914mm x
2134mm
AF
C103003
Boards
1 AR Large markerboard for common use


R
used
D
D30 HVAC AR AR

printer
Telecommunications Each outlet to contain one each NIPR, voice, and 2

D503001 3
Systems LMS RJ45 jacks
Three (3) desk workstations, (3)desk task chairs,

(3)side chairs,(3) storage shelving and (3)cabinets

Al Dhafra, UAE
SPACE NAME: Fleet Support Representatives

Function/adjacencies:
Special Dimensions:
Acoustics:
Access:
Uniformat
Section

T
914mm x
2134mm

C103003
Boards
AF 1 AR
C3020 Floor Finish Resilient flooring minimum
C3030 Ceiling Finish AR 600mm x 600mm Suspended Acoustical Ceiling.

R
D30 HVAC AR AR
Dedicated circuit and duplex receptacle for contractor

network copier/printer
D
Unclassified outlet for each workstation plus one

unclassified outlet on each other wall.
Each outlet to contain one each NIPR, voice, LMS
and contractors network RJ45 jacks. Route
contractors network cabling back to separate cabinet
Telecommunications in telecommunications room.
D503001 3
Systems
Unclassified outlet to contractors network
printer/copier containing one RJ45 jack plus one
blank in faceplate. Route contractors network
cabling back to separate cabinet in
telecommunications room.
Three (3) desk workstations, (3)desk task chairs,(3)

file storage, (3)side chairs

Al Dhafra, UAE
SPACE NAME: Consumable Storage

Function/adjacencies: Provide shelf, bin and hazmat storage of consumable spare parts
Special Dimensions:
Minimum Ceiling Height:
Acoustics:
Access:
Uniformat
Section
C1010 Interior Partitions AR AR Partitions to be full-height galvanized caging.
T
1828mm x
2134mm
Double door with keyed lockset

AF
C3020 Floor Finish AR AR Sealed Concrete
C3030 Ceiling Finish AR AR Paint all exposed surfaces

Fire Alarm and Mass
D4010
Notification Systems
Combine fire alarm/mass notification system
D30 HVAC
R
Provide (2) 120VAC convenience receptacles and (1)
D5020D30 Branch power and lighting
120VAC dedicated circuit for work table.
Unclassified outlets on opposite walls. Each outlet to

Telecommunications
D503001
Systems
contain one each NIPR, voice and LMS RJ45 jacks
D
plus one blank in faceplate
Eight (8) tool storage cabinets with drawers and

dividers, (4)cabinets, (4)open storage shelving, four
(4) hazmat lockers with spill containment, (1)work
table

Al Dhafra, UAE
SPACE NAME: Secured/Classified Storage

Function/adjacencies: Used to provide secure storage for classified (secret level access control) material and equipment
Special Dimensions:
Acoustics:
Access: Hangar Bay
Number of Occupants: Unoccupied
Other/special requirements: Construct IAW SECNAV M-5510.36
Uniformat
Section
3048mm W Forklift accessible, electrically operated, overhead
B2030 Exterior Doors AR x 3048mm rolling insulated doors to Exterior IAW SECNAV
H 5530.10, paint. Rollup door adjacent to hangar bay
C1010 Partitions AR AR Full-height 1-hr separation from Hangar Bay
T
914mm x Metal door frame, hardware with keyed lockset, paint.
2134mm CDX-10 lock per FF-L-2740B and FF-L-2890B.
Partitions to be full-height painted impact-resistant

C3010 Wall Finishes
AF AR AR
gypsum board on metal studs with resilient base
C3020 Floor Finish AR AR Sealed concrete

Fire Alarm and Mass
D4010
Notification Systems
Combine fire alarm/mass notification system
R
D30 HVAC Venting and heating required.
All vents or duct openings exceeding 96 square

Air Distribution, heating inches that penetrate the perimeter walls of a
D304001
and cooling classified room shall be protected with permanently
D
affixed man bars.
Provide (1) 120VAC convenience receptacle

D5020 Branch power and lighting
Dedicated circuit and up/down controls for overhead
door
Access control at entrance door (CAC reader)
Intrusion Detection System (IDS) with BMS at door

and Passive Infrared (PIR) motion detector inside to
D503005 Security Systems monitor room. BMS for roll-up door(s).
CCTV camera at exterior of entrance door.
Alarm locally at Maintenance Control.
Unclassified outlets on opposite walls. Each outlet to

Telecommunications
D503001
Systems
contain one each NIPR, voice and LMS RJ45 jacks
plus one blank in faceplate
(2) Heavy duty shelving (610d x 2438w x 1828h (2 x

E10 Equipment
8 x 6)

Al Dhafra, UAE
E2020 Moveable Furnishings (1)4 drawer class 6 safe (610 x 1219 x 1828)
T
AF
R
D

Al Dhafra, UAE
SPACE NAME: Warehouse Storage

Function/adjacencies: Tools and parts storage for direct support of Triton Maintenance
Special Dimensions:
Acoustics:
Access: Bulk storage/Rack Storage Area accessible via forklift
Uniformat
Section
1828mm x
B2030 Exterior Doors AR
2134mm
Non-corroding prefinished steel, extra heavy duty.
2438mm W
Overhead and Roll-up Electrically operated, overhead rolling insulated
B203004 1 x 3048mm
doors doors to Exterior, paint.
H
T
Twenty Four (24) industrial shelving units
C103006 Shelving
AF (4ftx8ftx10ft)
C3010 Wall Finish Paint
C3020 Floor Finish Sealed concrete
C3030 Ceiling Finish Paint exposed surfaces

R
Service Equipment
D501002
Entrance
208/120V, 3-phase, 4-wire, 200A service panel.
Wall mounted grounding bus bar above ESD work

D509003 Grounding Systems
bench
D
D30 HVAC AR AR
120VAC convenience receptacles at 20-feet on

center throughout storage areas.
D5020 Branch power and lighting 400v, 3 phase dedicated circuit and locking type
receptacle for forklift battery charger
Unclassified outlet for workstation plus one

3 unclassified outlet on each of three other walls.
Each outlet to contain one each NIPR, voice and 2
Telecommunications LMS RJ45 jack
D503001
Systems
One unclassified outlet for network copier/printer
consisting of one RJ45 jack plus one blank in
faceplate
Combination emergency shower/eyewash to serve

D201090 Emergency Fixtures forklift charging station and per NAVOSH
requirements

Al Dhafra, UAE
(5)industrial shelving units, 610 x 2438w x 1828high

E10 Equipment
(2x8x6)
2438x609x
1828
Heavy duty shelving
E2020 Moveable furnishings 6 Hazmat lockers with spill containment
One (1) workstation (6x6), One(1) ESD bench,

(2)task stools ,(1)task chair, (2)waste and recycle
receptacles, (1) bubble wrap dispenser, (2)work
E2020 Moveable furnishings tables for shipping/receiving, 914x2433 x 914 mm
high (3x8x3),,(2) ESD mat, (9)part storage cabinets
762 x 914 x 1220 (2.5d x 3w x 4h), (1)storage safe
610 x 1219x 1828 (2x4x6),
Provide minimum 2 drops, 40cfm (19 L/s) each at

125 psi. Each drop shall be equipped with
D209005 Compressed Air filter/moisture separator, pressure guage, air
pressure regulator, and a quick-disconnect.
Terminate with a coupler, 5 micron filter
T
AF
R
D

Al Dhafra, UAE
SPACE NAME: Shop Area AD (Mechanical Shop)

Function/adjacencies: Area to prep mechanical and power components prior to installation
Special Dimensions:
Acoustics:
Access: Hangar Bay
Number of Occupants: 7 personnel per shift
Uniformat
Section
Full-height 1-hr separation from Hangar Bay. Full-
C1010 Partitions AR AR height painted impact resistant gypsum board on
metal studs with resilient base.
T
1282mm x 45-min fire-rated doors, vision panel, extra heavy
C102003 Fire Doors AR
2134mm duty.
C103003
AF 1
Boards
C103004 Identifying Devices
C3020 Floor Finish AR AR VCT

R
D201090 emergency fixtures Emergency eyewash and shower
D
D203003 Floor Drains AR
Provide (2 outlet drops) shop compressed air outlets,

40CFM each at 125 psi. Provide regulators and
D209005 Compressed Air System
water separators at each drop. Terminate with
coupler. 5 micron filter required.
Venting and heating. Provide temperature control

D30 HVAC Systems
and perforated ceiling diffusers for supply and return.
Dedicated circuit and duplex and duplex receptacle

Communications and for network copier/printer
D5030
Security
Dedicated circuit and duplex receptacle above each
work bench.
D3040 Exhaust
D304007 Exhaust Systems
Provide 120VAC convenience receptacles at 10-feet

D5020 Branch power and lighting on center throughout

Al Dhafra, UAE

LMS RJ45 jack (3 per shop)
(1) Workstation, (1) ESD workbench, (1)

workbench with riser,(2) stools for ESD
workbench, (2) stools for workbench, (1)task
chairs,(2) ESD mat
T
AF
R
D

Al Dhafra, UAE
SPACE NAME: Shop Area AM (Airframes)

Function/adjacencies: Shop space.
Special Dimensions:
Acoustics:
Access:
Uniformat
Section
C1010 Interior Partitions AR AR height painted impact resistant gypsum board on

T
2134mm duty.
C103003 1
Boards

AF
Partitions to be full-height painted impact resistant
gypsum board on metal studs with resilient base.

R
D201004 Sinks
D201090 Emergency Fixtures Emergency eyewash and shower

D

coupler. 5 micron filter required

D30 HVAC Systems
D3040 Exhaust

on center throughout

for network copier/printer

work bench.
Telecommunication Each outlet to contain one each NIPR, voice and 2

D503001
Systems LMS RJ45 jack

Al Dhafra, UAE
(1)Workstation, (1) ESD workbench, (1) workbench,

E2020 Moveable Furnishings (2)stools for ESD workbench, (2) stools for
workbench, (2)task chairs, (1)work table
T
AF
R
D

Al Dhafra, UAE
SPACE NAME: Shop Area AT (Electronics Workcenter)

Special Dimensions:
Acoustics:
Access:
Other/special requirements: Secure space, constructed IAW SECNAV M-5510.36
Uniformat
Section

T
2134mm duty. CDX-10 lock per FF-L-2740B and FF-L-2890B.
C103003 1
Boards

AF
C3010 Wall Finish AR AR Paint.
D201004 Sinks
R

D

coupler. 5 micron filter required.

D30 HVAC Systems
D3040 Exhaust

on center throughout

for network copier/printer

work bench.

D503001 3
Systems LMS RJ45 jack (3 per shop)

Al Dhafra, UAE

E2020 Moveable Furnishings (2) stools for ESD workbench, (2) stools for
workbench, (1)task chairs, (2)ESD Mat
Access Control at entrance door (CAC reader)
Intrusion Detection (IDS) with BMS at door and Passive

Infrared (PIR) motion detection inside.
D503005 Security System
CCTV to monitor exterior entrance door.
Alarms and camera to report to Maintenance Control.
T
AF
R
D

Al Dhafra, UAE
SPACE NAME: Shop Area AE (Electrical Instruments)

Special Dimensions:
Acoustics: STC 45
Access:
Other/special requirements: Classified Secret space, construct IAW SECNAV M-5510.36.
Uniformat
Section
45-min fire-rated doors, vision panel, extra heavy

914mm x
T
2134mm
duty. Include IDS, ACS, and CDX-10 lock in
compliance with FF-L-2740B and FF-L-2890B.
C103003 1
Boards
AF

R
D201004 Sinks

D

coupler. 5 micron filter required
D30 HVAC Systems Provide in accordance with section D30
D3040 Exhaust
Provide (3) 120VAC quad dedicated receptacles and

(1) 120VAC dedicated duplex receptacle. Provide
120VAC convenience receptacles at 10-feet on
center throughout

D503001 3
Systems LMS RJ45 jack (3 per shop)

D503005 Security System

Al Dhafra, UAE

E2020 Moveable Furnishings (2)stools for ESD workbench, (2) stools for
workbench, (1)task chairs,(1) class 5, 4 drawer safe
T
AF
R
D

Al Dhafra, UAE
SPACE NAME: OIC Room

Function/adjacencies: OIC private office, adjacent to Operations (Ops) Office
Special Dimensions:
Minimum Ceiling Height: 2.7m
Acoustics: 45 STC minimum
Access:
Uniformat
Section
Full height walls, full height painted gypsum board
T
C1010 Interior Partitions AR AR
walls with resilient base. Rated where required.
914m x
2134mm
Metal Frame, hardware with keyed lockset, painted.
AF
C103003
Boards
C3020 Floor Finish AR AR Carpet tile

R
C3030 Ceiling Finish AR AR 600mm x 600mm Suspended acoustic tiles
D30 HVAC
D
D5020 Branch power and lighting Provide (4) 120VAC convenience receptacles
Unclassified outlet consisting of one each NIPR,

voice
Telecommunications
D503001
Systems
Classified outlet for workstation. Each classified
outlet to contain SIPR duplex SC fiber optic jack,
keyed RJ45 voice jack and one blank in faceplate.
(1) Executive Desk, (1)executive task chair, (2) guest

chairs, (1) bookcase, (1)5-location world clock

Al Dhafra, UAE
SPACE NAME: Training Space

Function/adjacencies: Reconfigurable type space for small team meeting and/or training
Special Dimensions:
Acoustics:
Access:
Uniformat
Section

T
914mm x
2134mm

C103003
Boards
2 Large markerboard
AF
C102007 Interior Door Hardware Hardware with keyed lockset
C3030 Ceiling Finish AR AR 600mm x 600mm suspended acoustic ceiling tile

R
C103090 Other interior Specialties TV wall mount brackets and reinforcement.
D30 HVAC
Recessed duplex receptacle at 2.0m AFF for flat

panel television monitor. Locate adjacent to F-type
D
CATV outlet
D5020 Branch power and lighting Dedicated circuit and duplex receptacle for network
copier/printer
Dedicated circuit and duplex receptacle for A/V

equipment
(4) unclassified outlet on each wall, each to contain

NIPR, voice and LMS RJ45 jacks and one blank in
faceplate
1 Unclassified outlet for network copier/printer

Telecommunications
D503001
Systems
containing one RJ45 jack
(2) Unclassified A/V outlets located at opposite

ends of room adjacent to television monitor.
Each unclassified A/V outlet to contain 4
voice RJ45 jacks and one blank in faceplate
F-type CATV outlet at 2.0m AFF for flat panel

D503004 Television Systems
television monitor at opposite ends of room

Al Dhafra, UAE
(1)A/V credenza, (25)stackable chairs ,

(20)conference room chairs , (10)2 person
configurable training tables with tabletop COM and
electrical outlets, (1) flatscreen T.V.
T
AF
R
D

Al Dhafra, UAE
SPACE NAME: Training Storage

Function/adjacencies: adjacent to Training Space
Special Dimensions:
Acoustics:
Access:
Uniformat
Section

T
914mm x
2134mm

C103003
Boards
AF
C102007 Interior Door Hardware Hardware with keyed lockset
C3020 Floor Finish AR AR Carpet Tile and resilient base
C3030 Ceiling Finish AR AR 600mm x 600mm Suspended acoustic panel ceiling

R
D30 HVAC

D
Telecommunications
D503001
Systems
E10 Equipment Open shelving (2)
Lockable supply cabinets (2), chair dollies, table

dollies

Al Dhafra, UAE
SPACE NAME: Operations (Ops) Office

Special Dimensions:
Acoustics:
Access:
Other/special requirements: open secret space, construct IAW SECNAV M-5510.36
Uniformat
Section

T
High security combination lock and electronic card
914mm x
2134mm
reader. Entrance doors with CDX-10 lock per FF-L-
2740B and FF-L-2890B.
C103003
AF 1
Large marker board at common area, marker board
Boards at each workstation
C103090 Other interior Specialties TV wall mount brackets and reinforcement.
C3020 Floor Finish AR AR Carpet Tile and Resilient base
C3030 Ceiling Finish AR AR 600mm x 600mm Suspended acoustic panel ceiling

R
D30 HVAC
D

copier/printer
panel television monitor. Locate adjacent to F-type
CATV outlet
(3) Each outlet to contain one each NIPR, voice

and 2 LMS RJ45 jack (3 per shop)
(4) Classified outlet for workstation. Each
classified outlet to contain SIPR duplex SC
fiber optic jack, keyed RJ45 voice jack and
Telecommunications one blank in faceplate
D503001
Systems (1) Unclassified outlet for network copier/printer
containing one RJ45 jack and one blank in
faceplate
(1) Classified outlet to network copier/printer
containing SIPR duplex SC fiber optic jack
and one blank in faceplate
F-type CATV outlet at 2.0m AFF for flat panel

D503004 Television Systems
television
E2020 Moveable Furnishings Four (4) Workstations, (4)task chairs, (1)lateral file,

Al Dhafra, UAE
(1)5-zone time zone clock, (1)work table for

copy/sort, (2)storage cabinets, (1)safe
Access control at entrance door CAC Reader)
IDS with BMS at door and control panel and Passive

Infrared (PIR) motion detector inside to monitor room
D503005 Security Systems
CCTV camera at exterior of entrance door.
Alarm locally at Maintenance Control.
T
AF
R
D

Al Dhafra, UAE
SPACE NAME: Secure Comm

Function/adjacencies: Serves as main entrance point for SIPRNET service
Special Dimensions:
Acoustics: STC 45
Access:
Other/special requirements: Locate within secure suite. Provide perimeter construction. Shielded enclosure (Ref. FRD REV G, Section
4.2.1.1.3 Shielded Chamber and MIL=STD-464. Construct IAW SECNAV M-5510.36.
Uniformat
Section
Steel stud with gypsum board. Extend to structure

above. Rated where required.
T
Steel door and steel frame, paint. Hardware with
914mm x keyed locket in addition to combo lock. STC 35.
2134mm Entrance door with CDX-10 lock per FF-L-2740B and
AF FF-L-2890B.
High security combination lock and electronic card

C102007 Interior Door Hardware
reader
C3020 Floor Finish AR AR Resilient flooring and resilient base

R
C3030 Ceiling Finish AR AR Paint
D
D30 HVAC


Al Dhafra, UAE
SPACE NAME: Secure (VTC) Conference Room

Function/adjacencies: Provides secure space to conduct classified briefs and video teleconference. Locate within secure suite.
Special Dimensions:
Acoustics: STC 50
Access:
Other/special requirements: Equipped with VTC capability, classified level secret. Coordinate requirements of user-provided equipment
including flat screen television. Construct IAW SECNAV M-5510.36.
Uniformat
Section
T
Full-height walls meetings classified requirements.
Steel doors and frames, insulated, paint. Entrance

AF AR
914mm x
2134mm
doors provide CDX-10 locks per FF-L-2740B and FF-
L-2890B.
C103003
Boards
1 Large marker board
Interior door hardware Hardware with keyed lockset

R
C3020 Floor Finish AR AR Carpet tile and resilient base
C3030 Ceiling Finish AR AR 600mm x 600mm Suspended acoustical ceiling tiles

D
All vents or duct openings exceeding 96 square

inches that penetrate the perimeter walls of a secret
D30 HVAC
room shall be protected with permanently affixed
bars.

panel television monitor
Provide interconnecting raceways between VTC
monitor and input jack locations
Telecommunications Provide (2) SIPRNET, (5) Telephone RJ-45 outlets

D503001
Systems and (1) audio visual connection.

D503005

Al Dhafra, UAE
(1)Conference room table for 10 people with table top

electrical and internet connectivity,(10) conference
room chairs, (1)AV credenza and (1)task chair,
(1)workstation
T
AF
R
D

Al Dhafra, UAE
SPACE NAME: Visiting CO Office

Function/adjacencies: Private Office for Navy Officer
Special Dimensions:
Acoustics:
Access:
Uniformat
Section
Full height painted gypsum board walls with resilient

base. Rated where required.
T
914mm x
2134mm
Steel doors and frames, insulated, paint

C103003 1
Boards
AF

R
D30 HVAC
D
Unclassified outlet for workstation and one

unclassified outlet on opposite or adjoining wall.
Telecommunications
D503001
Systems
1 LMS RJ45 jack
Unclassified outlet for network copier/printer

containing 1 RJ45 jack plus one blank in faceplate
(1)Executive Desk, (1)executive task chair, (2) guest

chairs, (1)bookcase,

Al Dhafra, UAE
SPACE NAME: Visiting CMC Office

Function/adjacencies: Private office for Navy senior enlisted
Special Dimensions:
Acoustics:
Access:
Uniformat
Section
Full height painted gypsum board walls with resilient

T
914mm x
2134mm
Steel doors and frames, insulated, paint

C103003
Boards
AF

R
D30 HVAC
D
Unclassified outlet for workstation and one

unclassified outlet on opposite or adjoining wall.
Telecommunications
D503001
Systems
LMS RJ45 jack
Unclassified outlet for network copier/printer

containing 1 RJ45 jack plus one blank in faceplate
(1)Desk, (1)task chair, (2) guest chairs, (1)bookcase,

(1)5-location world clock

Al Dhafra, UAE
SPACE NAME: MCS Pilot

Function/adjacencies: Pilot operation workstations for R&R missions
Special Dimensions:
Acoustics: Minimum 70dB of attenuation from 10kHz to 10gHz, to protect mission equipment from EME
Access: Shield-lock entrance vestibule
Other/special requirements: Shielded enclosure (Ref FRD REV G, Section 4.2.1.1.3 Shielded Chamber and MIL=STD-464),
Uniformat
Section
RF shielded boundary to contain welded steel box.

C1010 Interior Partitions AR AR Full-height painted gypsum board walls with resilient
T
914mm x Shielded chamber door at outer enclosure. Entrance
C102090 Specialty Doors AR
2134mm doors with CDX-10 per FF-L-2740B and FF-L-2890B.
C3010 Wall Finish
AF AR AR Paint.
12 high raised access flooring over depressed slab

with anti-static floor tile finish
C3030 Ceiling Finish AR AR Painted gypsum board interior surfaces
D30 HVAC Cooling and heating, primary and back up

R
Provide a master power emergency cut-off switch to
interrupt IT branch circuits. Panel board shall be
provided with power-line filter. (4) 20A 120VAC
branch circuits for Transit cases. Provide 120VAC
D
convenience receptacles at 10ft on center

throughout. Dimmable lights in space
Provide (2) telephone RJ-45 outlets, (1) NIPRNET

Telecommunications
D503001
Systems
and (2) SIPRNET connections; CCTV monitoring of
launch point(s)

Two (2) (pilot stations) desks (3x6) by GFE, (2) task

chairs, (2 ) MCS )transit cases)tables, (2) shelving
E2020 Moveable Furnishings units (2x6), (1) table (sized to fit MCS printer and
product support transit cases) (1) 5-location world
clock.

Al Dhafra, UAE
SPACE NAME: FOB MCS Server Rm

Function/adjacencies: Provides space to establish the Triton aircraft launch and recovery controls and flight management server systems
Special Dimensions:
Acoustics: Minimum 70dB of attenuation from 10kHz to 10gHz, to protect mission equipment from EME, STC 50
Access:
Other/special requirements: Shielded enclosure (Ref FRD REV G, Section 4.2.1.1.3 Shielded Chamber and MIL=STD-464, 100% HVAC
redundancy, inspection crawl space between the shielded enclosure ceiling lid and roof structure is required
Uniformat
Section
RF shielded enclosure constructed of welded steel

panel system. Minimal mechanical joints are highly
T
C1010 Partitions AR AR
desirable. Full height painted gypsum board walls
(1) 3 wide x 7 high shielded double doors for

AF equipment and furniture transfer purposes only, (1)
C102090 Specialty Doors 2 interior door STC-50 rating, 914mm x 2134mm.
Entrance doors with CDX-10 per FF-L-2740B and
FF-L-2890B.
R
12 high raised access flooring over depressed

concrete slab with anti-static floor tile finish
D
Provide cooling per special area inside condition,

D30 HVAC indoor condition
primary and backup
Provide (2) computer rated precision cooling air

conditioning with air cooled condensing units. One
Computer rated air
D309090
conditioning
(1) unit to cool a sensible load of 168K BTU/HR and
(1) unit as 100% back-up with automatic switch over.
Provide humidifier and temperature control.
Provide a master power emergency cut-off switch to

interrupt IT branch circuits. Panel board shall be
provided with 100dB power-line filter (22) 20A
120VAC and (10) 30A 120 VAC branch circuits for
transit cases. Provide 120VAC convenience
receptacles at 10ft on center throughout
Provide (1) telephone RJ-45 outlet, (2) SIPRNET,

and (1) NIPRNET connection, (1) STE phone and (2)
Telecommunications
D503001
Systems
LMS connections. Line filters shall be provided for
copper communication cables penetrating shielded
chamber. Provide connection of LMS system from

Al Dhafra, UAE
FOB MCS server to Base PoP/DISA (ADNS

connection)
Provide 2 tall x thick x 24 long bare copper

D509003 Grounding systems
grounding bus
Provide intrusion detection and access control

system with key card reader at entry point. Provide
CCTV camera, balance magnetic switch. Ensure
security systems are in accordance with ICD705.
Interior distribution
D501003
transformers
K-13 ventilated type transformer
(1)GSA Class 6 safe (4 Drawer), (1) high-security

level 6 cross-cut shredder, 7 per pass, and 20 gal.
waste capacity, (1) ESD workbench, (1) task chair,
(2) lockable storage cabinetsF
Surface-mounted enclosed fluorescent T8 designed

D502002 Lighting equipment
for 50 ft candles
T
AF
R
D

Al Dhafra, UAE
SPACE NAME: Locker Rooms

Function/adjacencies: adjacent to toilet rooms
Special Dimensions:
Acoustics: Per UFC 4-211-01N
Access:
Other/special requirements: 50 total lockers, split between male and female staffing (75% male, 25% female)
Uniformat
Section
C1010 Interior Partitions AR CMU partition walls. Rated where required.
C1020 Interior Doors AR 914 x 2134 Metal door frame, hardware with keyed lockset, paint
T
C103003
Boards
C3010 Wall Finish

AF AR AR Ceramic tile up to 1.8m, painted above
C3020 Floor Finish AR AR Slip-resistant ceramic tile
C3030 Ceiling Finish AR AR 600mm x 600mm moisture resistant acoustic ceiling tiles
D30 HVAC
R
Telecommunications
D503001
Systems
D

Al Dhafra, UAE
SPACE NAME: FOB MCS Equipment Room

Function/adjacencies: Adjacent to other FOB MCS spaces, but not within the shielded envelope.
Special Dimensions:
Acoustics: STC 45
Access:
Uniformat
Section
T
Steel doors and frames, insulated, paint, shielded.
914mm x
C102090 Specialty Doors AR
2134mm
Entrance doors with CDX-10 locks per FF-L-2740B
and FF-L-2890B.
AF
R
D

primary and backup
Panel board shall be provided with 100dB power-line

filter (22) 20A 120VAC and (10) 30A 120 VAC branch
circuits for transit cases. Provide 120VAC
convenience receptacles at 10ft on center throughout
Telecommunications
D503001
Systems
1 NIPR/1SIPR/Voice Jack

Al Dhafra, UAE

(1)GSA Class 5 safe (4 Drawer), (2) tables for transit

case storage, (2) task chairs
T
AF
R
D

Al Dhafra, UAE
SPACE NAME: FOB MCS Vestibule

Function/adjacencies: Vestibule between equipment room and MCS pilot space
Special Dimensions:
Acoustics:
Access:
Other/special requirements: Shielded enclosure (Ref FRD REV G, Section 4.2.1.1.3 Shielded Chamber and MIL=STD-464,
Uniformat
Section
T
AF Shielded chamber doors to create entry vestibule.
1016mm x
C102090 Specialty Doors 2
2134mm
Only one door can be opened at a time. Entrance
Door with FF-L-2740B and FF-L-2890B.

R

D
primary and backup


Al Dhafra, UAE
SPACE NAME: FOB MCS Maintenance Space

Function/adjacencies: Area for personnel responsible for maintenance of the MCS hardware. Adjacent to shielded FOB MCS spaces, but
not within the shielded envelope.
Special Dimensions:
Acoustics:
Access:
Other/special requirements: Coordinate requirements of user-provided equipment including copy/print/fax machines. Construct IAW
SECNAV M-5510.36.
Uniformat
Section
T
C1010 Partitions AR AR height painted impact-resistant board on metal studs
45-min fire-rated doors, vision panel, extra heavy

914mm x
AF AR
2134mm
duty. Entrance Doors with CDX-10 locks per FF-
L2740B and FF-L-2890B.
C103003
Boards
C103004 Identifying Devices Room sign at each room entrance

R
C3020 Floor Finish AR AR Resilient tile
C3030 Ceiling Finish AR AR 600mm x 600mm suspended acoustical ceiling tiles.
D30 HVAC Heating and cooling, primary and backup

D
Provide (3) 120VAC quad dedicated receptacles and

(1) 120VAC dedicated duplex receptacle. Provide
convenience receptacles at 10ft on center
throughout.
Telecommunications Provide (4) NIPRNET, (4) LMS, (1) Telephone RJ-45

D503001
Systems outlet, (1) printer connections

One (1) desk (3x6), (1) task chair, (1) ESD bench,
(1) adjustable work bench, (2) stools with adjustable
E2020 Moveable Furnishings backs for ESD workbench (2) stools with adjustable
backs for workbench, (1) file cabinet (1)shredder,
(1)wall clock. (1)ESD Mat

Al Dhafra, UAE
SPACE NAME: Fire Protection Room

Special Dimensions:
Acoustics:
Access:
Uniformat
Section
C1010 Interior Partitions AR AR CMU partition walls, fire-rated where required
T

AF Room sign at entrance
D203003 Floor Drains Provide floor drain

R
D30 HVAC Provide HVAC in accordance with section D30
Telecommunications
D503001
D
Systems

Al Dhafra, UAE
SPACE NAME: Printer Room

Function/adjacencies: adjacent to offices
Special Dimensions:
Acoustics:
Access:
Uniformat
Section

C1010 Interior Partitions AR AR height painted impact-resistant board on metal studs
T

C103003
Boards
AF
C3030 Ceiling Finish AR AR 600mm x 600mm acoustic ceiling tiles

R
D30 HVAC

D
Telecommunications
D503001
Systems
(1) high-security level 6 cross-cut shredder, 7 per

E2020 Moveable Furnishings 1 AR
pass, and 20 gal. waste capacity.

Al Dhafra, UAE
SPACE NAME: Admin Break Room

Function/adjacencies: located near offices
Special Dimensions:
Acoustics:
Access:
Uniformat
Section

T

C103003
Boards
AF
Solid surface counters,

C103008 &
plastic laminate or AR AR Wall and base cabinets. Wood stain to match doors.
C103009
stained wood cabinetry
R
C3020 Floor Finish AR AR Solid vinyl planks
21 deep
D2010 Stainless steel 1 Full size, single compartment.
D
min.
D30 HVAC
Telecommunications Provide 1 CATV outlet on each available wall (RG-6, Snap

D503001
Systems and Seal F connector)
(2)Tables, (8)stackable break room chairs,(1) coffee

E2020 Moveable Furnishings maker,(1) full sized refrigerator, (1) microwave, (1)large
garbage container

Al Dhafra, UAE
SPACE NAME: Maintenance Break Room

Function/adjacencies: adjacent to maintenance spaces
Special Dimensions:
Acoustics:
Access:
Uniformat
Section
T
AF
C103003
Boards
Solid surface counters,

C103008 &
plastic laminate or AR AR Wall and base cabinets. Wood stain to match doors.
C103009
stained wood cabinetry
R
C3020 Floor Finish AR AR Solid vinyl planks

D
21 deep
D2010 Stainless steel 1 Full size, single compartment.
min.
D30 HVAC
Telecommunications
D503001
Systems
(2)Tables, (8)stackable break room chairs,(1) coffee

E2020 Moveable Furnishings maker,(1) full sized refrigerator, (1) microwave, (1)large
garbage container

Al Dhafra, UAE
SPACE NAME: Mens Toilet Room

Function/adjacencies: adjacent to locker rooms and womens toilet.
Special Dimensions:
Acoustics:
Access:
Uniformat
Section
T
height painted impact and moisture resistant board
on metal studs with resilient base. Rated where
required.

AF AR 914 x 2134
Metal door frame, push/pull hardware, kickplate on both
sides of door, paint

C103003
Boards
C3010 Wall Finish AR AR Ceramic tile up to 1.8m, painted above

R
C3030 Ceiling Finish AR AR Suspended moisture resistant gypsum board.
D304007 Exhaust Systems Provide exhaust systems in accordance with D304007

D
D30 HVAC Provide HVAC in accordance with D30
Telecommunications
D503001
Systems
E2020 Moveable Furnishings Large garbage container with swing lid

Al Dhafra, UAE
SPACE NAME: Womens Toilet Room

Function/adjacencies: adjacent to locker rooms and mens toilet.
Special Dimensions:
Acoustics:
Access:
Uniformat
Section

T
required.
Metal door frame, push/pull hardware, kickplate on both
C1020 Interior Doors AR 914 x 2134
sides of door, paint

AF
C103003
Boards

R
C3030 Ceiling Finish AR AR Suspended moisture resistant gypsum board.
D304007 Exhaust Systems Provide exhaust systems in accordance with D304007
D30 HVAC
D
Telecommunications
D503001
Systems
E2020 Moveable Furnishings Large garbage container with swing lid

Al Dhafra, UAE
SPACE NAME: Corridor

Special Dimensions:
Acoustics:
Access:
Uniformat
Section
C1010 Interior Partitions AR AR CMU partition walls, fire-rated where required
T
C103003
Boards

AF

R
D30 HVAC
Telecommunications
D503001
Systems
D
450mm x Wall-mounted, framed artwork, digital images to be provided

E2020 Moveable Furnishings Min. 6
600mm during design for subject matter approval

Al Dhafra, UAE
SPACE NAME: Janitors Closet

Function/adjacencies: adjacent to locker and toilet rooms.
Special Dimensions:
Acoustics:
Access:
Uniformat
Section

T
required.
C103003
Boards
AF
C3020 Floor Finish AR AR Sealed concrete floor
C3030 Ceiling Finish AR AR 600mm x 600mm moisture resistant acoustic ceiling tiles
R
D30 HVAC
D
Telecommunications
D503001
Systems

Al Dhafra, UAE
SPACE NAME: FOB MCS Toilet Room

Function/adjacencies: adjacent to FOB MCS spaces
Special Dimensions:
Acoustics:
Access:
Other/special requirements: Construct in accordance with SECNAV M-5510.36
Uniformat
Section

T
required.
AF
C103003
Boards

R
C3030 Ceiling Finish AR AR Suspended moisture resistant gypsum board
D20 Plumbing Provide plumbing systems in accordance with section D20
D30 HVAC
D
Telecommunications
D503001
Systems
E2020 Moveable Furnishings Garbage container with swing lid

Al Dhafra, UAE
SPACE NAME: Antennas/Antenna Cabling

Function/adjacencies: adjacent to FOB MCS shielded spaces
Special Dimensions:
Acoustics: STC 45
Access: single personnel door
Other/special requirements: locate within secure suite, provide perimeter construction IAW SECNAV M-5510.36
Uniformat
Section
Steel stud with gypsum board, extend to structure above,
T
rating where required.
914mm x Steel door and steel frame, paint, hardware with keyed
2134mm lockset in addition to combination lock, STC 35

AF
C103003
Boards
C3020 Floor Finish AR AR Resilient flooring and resilient base

R
D30 HVAC
D
Telecommunications
D503001
Systems
D503005 Security Systems AR AR Access control at entrance doors (CAC card activated)

Al Dhafra, UAE
SPACE NAME: Battery Shop

Function/adjacencies: Area is required to service and charge lithium ion batteries
Special Dimensions:
Acoustics:
Access: To exterior only, interior visual access through windows
Uniformat
Section
914mm x Non-corroding, pre-finished, heavy duty hollow metal door
B2030 Exterior Doors 1
2134mm and frame.
1000mm x For observation purposes provide minimum size of 3-4
T
C101005 Interior Windows 2
1000mm square, fire-rated, wired glazing.
Painted CMU to be acid or alkali resistant; paint up to 4

C3010 Wall Finishes AR AR above ground white color; above 4 paint color shall match
AF existing facility.
Concrete sealant to be slip-resistant and acid or alkali

C3020 Floor Finishes AR AR
resistant.
Paint all exposed surfaces. Paint to be acid or alkali

C3030 Ceiling Finishes AR AR
resistant.
Emergency eyewash and shower with self-contain drainage

D201090 Emergency Fixture AR AR
basin and tempered water.
R
D30 HVAC Indoor Condition AR AR Cooling.
D305003 Fan Coil Unit AR AR Provide fan coil unit for cooling.
D304007 Exhaust System AR AR Roof-mounted exhaust fan at a rate of 1 CFM/FT2

D
D501004 Panelboards AR AR 208/120V, 3-phase, 4-wire 125A panelboard.
One (1) 120VAC convenience receptacle, (2) L6-30R

D5020 Lighting and Branch Wiring AR AR receptacles for battery chargers and (1) 6-20R 208VAC
dedicated circuit for refrigerator.
Provide non-metallic vapor tight enclosed and gasketed

D502002 Lighting Equipment AR AR
fluorescent T8.
D509003 Grounding Systems AR AR Provide 3/4" diameter x 10 long driven ground rod.
E10 Equipment AR AR (2) battery chargers (user-provided)
Two (2) work benches (3x6), (2) task chairs, (1) hazmat
E20 Furnishings
locker (for used battery), waste receptacle, wall clock.

Al Dhafra, UAE
6.0 ENGINEERING SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
T
AF
R
D

Al Dhafra, UAE
A10 FOUNDATIONS
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Provide the building foundation system in accordance with UFC 3-301-01, Structural Engineering and
UFC 3-220-01, Geotechnical Engineering. Foundation must be designed to suit subsurface
conditions, and must be capable of transmitting all building loads to the ground.
See Section B10, Superstructure, for additional loading criteria.
A10 GENERAL
T
GOVERNMENT PROVIDED GEOTECHNICAL INFORMATION
Subsurface soil information, including a geotechnical report from projects at Al Dhafra

AF
Air Base is included in Part 6 of this RFP. The contractor is responsible to conduct a site
specific geotechnical investigation in accordance with UFC 3-260-02 Chapter 5 Site
Investigations.
Any included subsurface information is only for the Contractor's information and is not
guaranteed to fully represent all subsurface conditions. The Government shall not be
R
responsible for any interpretation or conclusion by the Contractor drawn from the data
or information.
Any geotechnical report accompanying the subsurface information is provided only to

D
better convey data (boring logs, testing, etc.) or to document observed site conditions.
The assumptions, analysis, and recommendations of any accompanying report were
developed for preliminary planning purposes only and may not reflect present project
requirements. The Contractor is required to retain a Geotechnical Engineer experienced
and licensed in the geographic region of the project to interpret the Government
provided information as related to his design concept and develop geotechnical
requirements to support design and construction.
Minor variations in subsurface conditions between borings should be anticipated. The

Contractor shall bear all costs associated with the site preparation, ground improvement
and foundations except as allowed by Contract Clause FAR 52.236-2, "Differing Site
Conditions". The Contractor's Geotechnical Engineer shall perform additional
subsurface investigation/testing as required to adequately determine all applicable
geotechnical factors including the type and capacity of the project foundations. The
Contractor's Geotechnical Engineer shall consider the provided information and any
additional information obtained and prepare a report as described in other portions of
PART 3 - CHAPTER 6 / ESR A10 - Page 1

Al Dhafra, UAE
this RFP. The minimum requirements for the subsurface investigation and report are as
required by UFC 1-300-09N with associated references.
As a minimum, the Contractor shall excavate 10 test pits to a depth of 1.5 m below
finished graded or to rock, whichever is shallower, and supplementary laboratory
classification of soils encountered, on the building site to support the foundation design.
The contractor is responsible for the site specific geotechnical investigation, perform
field and laboratory testing, and provide supporting calculations. The geotechnical
investigation shall be performed in accordance with EM 1110-1-1804 and Part 4 Section
G10 of this RFP.
T
AF
R
D

Al Dhafra, UAE
A20 BASEMENT CONSTRUCTION

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Basement construction should not be used for this project.
--End of Section--
T
AF
R
D

Al Dhafra, UAE
B10 SUPERSTRUCTURE
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The superstructure consists of structural elements above the foundation that provide support for
vertical loads and resistance to lateral loads.
This section includes the requirements for the superstructure of the building, including floor and roof
framing, columns, interior load-bearing walls and the main lateral-force resisting system. Exterior load
bearing walls are addressed in Section B20.
Provide the building framing system in accordance with UFC 3-301-01, Structural Engineering.
Live Loads
Live loads that differ from the minimum live loads provided in UFC 3-301-01 shall be as
T
follows:
Occupancy or Use: Offices and Corridors above the ground floor.

AF
Uniform Live load: 4.8 kPa (100 psf).
Importance Factors
Use Risk Category II in Table 2-2 of UFC 3-301-01 for determining Importance Factors for
seismic, snow, and wind design.
R
Wind Exposure
Wind design shall be based on Exposure C

D
The effects of ongoing activities adjacent to the site, such as jet blast, shall be considered in the
design and construction of all facilities. Temporary jet blast deflectors may need to be installed, or
structures may need to be designed to resist jet blast effects as determined by the sequence of
construction operations.
B1010 FLOOR CONSTRUCTION

The floor construction may include any structural framing system meeting the requirements of this
section. The floor construction used must also be in accordance with the requirements specified
elsewhere in this RFP.
B1020 ROOF CONSTRUCTION

The roof construction may include any structural framing system meeting the requirements of this
section. The roof construction used must also be in accordance with the requirements specified
elsewhere in this RFP.
PART 3 - CHAPTER 6 / ESR B10 - Page 1

Al Dhafra, UAE
--End of Section--
T
AF
R
D

TRITON Operational Facilities (BAMS) P-960
Al Dhafra, UAE
B20 EXTERIOR ENCLOSURE

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
This system consists of the exterior shell of the facility, which includes all vertical and horizontal
exterior closure such as exterior walls, exterior windows, and exterior doors. This system excludes
roofing (See System B30, Roofing). The requirements for load bearing exterior walls are specified in
this system and not specified in System B10, Superstructure. Structural frame elements at exterior
such as columns, beams, and spandrels are included in Superstructure, with only the applied exterior
finishes (e.g., paint, stucco) being included here. Finishes to the inside face of walls which are not
an integral part of the wall construction are included in System C30, Interior finishes.
GENERAL SYSTEMS REQUIREMENTS

B2010 EXTERIOR WALLS
T
The exterior materials of the building(s), which are not part of the tension fabric structure, shall be
prefinished insulated metal panels. See UFC 4-211-01N, Aircraft Maintenance Hangars: Type I,
Type II, and Type III for additional requirements.
AF
Where applicable, provide a ventilated, rain-screen, exterior wall system composed of the Exterior
Closure and the Exterior Wall Backup Construction indicated below.
B201001 EXTERIOR CLOSURE

Provide PVC-coated tension fabric cover over pre-engineered metal framing.
R
Provide metal prefabricated panel wall enclosure. Metal shall have concealed fasteners.
B201002 EXTERIOR WALL BACKUP CONSTRUCTION

D
No requirements specified.
B201003 INSULATION & EXTERIOR ENCLOSURE BARRIERS

Provide continuous insulation, vapor retarder, water-resistive barrier, and air barrier to meet or exceed
requirements of project's energy savings requirements as indicated by applicable ASHRAE 90.1
calculations called for in UFC 1-200-02, High Performance and Sustainable Building Requirements",
and meeting minimum building envelope insulation requirements of UFC 3-101-01, "Architecture" in
the administrative, shop, and support spaces, but not in the hangar bay.
Provide a continuous air barrier to control air leakage into, and out of conditioned spaces. The air
barrier shall encompass all elements of the facility that are exposed to the outside environment or
outside environmental conditions such as roof, walls, floors, and compartmentalized unconditioned
portions of the facility such as garages, and negatively pressurized spaces. Permanently seal
penetrations through the air barrier, joints in the air barrier, adjoining construction, and transitions to
different air barrier materials.
Confirm air barrier compliance with Air Barrier Performance Test in RFP Part 4 B20.

Al Dhafra, UAE
Provide thermal envelope performance testing through infrared thermography in accordance with RFP
Part 4. Coordinate thermal imaging testing with air barrier testing construction schedule
Provide a continuous water resistive barrier in accordance with UFC 3-101-01, Architecture. The
water resistive barrier must resist liquid (bulk) water from being absorbed into the back-up wall
assembly if water leaks, penetrates, or seeps past the exterior enclosure cladding system.
Provide a vapor pressure analysis and hydrothermal analysis in accordance with UFC 3-101-01,
Architecture. Determine if a moisture barrier/ vapor retarder is required and where it would be located.
Include analysis and conclusion in the design analysis for the project, refer to UFGS 01 33 10.05 20,
Design Submittal Procedures. If required by the analysis, provide a moisture barrier/ vapor retarder to
restrict the flow of moisture through the exterior enclosure.
Include written and graphic descriptions of exterior enclosure barrier materials and location within the
wall as a part of the Contractor provided design analysis. Identify in the analysis the continuous
boundary limits of the air barrier and of the zone or zones to be field tested for building air tightness.
Provide contract drawings that indicate each exterior enclosure barrier location and the materials that
make up the barriers. Detail the following barrier conditions;
T
a. Typical conditions at wall sections.
b. Barrier treatment at wall openings.

AF
c. Intersections with other exterior enclosure assemblies and materials. Include intersections at roof
and floors.
d. Intersections with counter flashing.
e. Inside and outside corners.

R
f. Preservation of air and water tightness at anchors for materials that cover the barrier.
g. Treatment to seal barrier penetrations such as conduits, pipes, electric boxes, and fixtures.
h. Indicate air barrier perimeter, if facility is segmented into areas that are not within the air barrier
D
envelope.
B201004 PARAPETS
Provide parapets for exterior wall construction, where required for low-slope roofs.
B201005 EXTERIOR LOUVERS & SCREENS

Provide exterior louvers and screens, where required, that match the finish of the existing windows
and detailed to integrate with the architecture of the building, as appropriate to the design of the
building.
B201006 BALCONY WALLS & HANDRAILS

Provide complete non-corrosive metal railing systems including anchors and attachment sleeves and
fasteners.

Al Dhafra, UAE
B201007 EXTERIOR SOFFITS

Provide exterior soffit system on structures that are not part of the tension fabric hangar structure.
B201009 EXTERIOR PAINTING AND COATINGS

Provide field applied exterior coatings for all items that are not prefinished, and to prefinished items
when required to provide a color other than a standard prefinished color. Provide special coating
systems for exposed structural elements.
B201010 EXTERIOR JOINT SEALANTS

Provide exterior application of joint sealants to seal joints and prepare for finish material installation.
B201011 SUN CONTROL DEVICES (EXTERIOR)

Sun control devices shall be detailed to integrate with the architectural wall system.
B201012 SCREEN WALL
T
Provide screen walls where required to screen mechanical units, electrical substations, loading docks,
and trash receptacles. Screen walls must be compatible with the building architecture. Design
AF
rooftop mechanical screens to minimize roofing penetrations.
B2020 EXTERIOR WINDOWS

As much as practical, windows may be provided in each area of the building that is regularly
occupied, to enhance the working environment, without compromising visual acuity and comfort.
Exterior windows shall be prefinished aluminum. Windows shall meet Antiterrorism requirements.
R
Provide natural light in the hangar bay.
Provide acoustical rated window assemblies in occupied areas meeting requirements of the
D
Acoustical Report.
B202001 WINDOWS
Determine the construction of security windows by evaluating the project program security
requirements, using the Military Handbook 1013/1A, Design Guidance for Physical Security of
Facilities, to define window requirements.
Windows shall be aluminum fixed.
B202002 STOREFRONTS
There are no storefronts in the hangar.

Al Dhafra, UAE
B202004 EXTERIOR GLAZING

Glazing color shall be tinted grey.
Glazing shall be insulating glass units consisting of two pair of laminated glass sheets separated by
an air space.
B2030 EXTERIOR DOORS

Provide solid door assemblies. Exterior doors and frames shall be non-corroding galvanized steel.
Doors shall be Extra Heavy Duty Doors - ANSI /SDI A250.8, Level 3, physical performance Level A,
Model 1 minimum and as required to meet ATFP requirements.
Glazing shall match the window glazing.
B203001 SOLID DOORS
T
Provide solid steel door assemblies including painted galvanized heavy-duty, non-corroding, insulated
doors with frames and hardware. Also provide louvers and accessories and wall opening elements
such as lintels sills and flashings.
AF
B203002 GLAZED DOORS
Glazed Doors - Provide Exterior Glazed Doors. Including painted steel framed door assemblies with
insulated, tinted glazing, frames, and hardware compatible with other buildings on the base and wall
opening elements such as lintels, sills, through-wall flashings, and joint sealers.
R
B203004 OVERHEAD ROLL-UP AND OVERHEAD SECTIONAL
DOORS
D
Provide overhead doors in accordance with Door and Access Systems Association International
(DAMSA) requirements. Comply with ANSI/DAMSA 102-2004 for overhead sectional doors and
ANSI/DAMSA 207-2008 for overhead roll-up doors.
Doors shall be rolling service type. Doors shall have automatic operation. Doors shall be operated
by three-button electric power conforming to NEMA MG1, NEMA ICS 1, NEMA ICS 2, and NEMA ICS
6, with auxiliary hand chain operation.
B203005 Hangar Doors

Hangar doors shall be provided to provide a minimum clear opening of 39.868 meters/130.8 feet wide
by 4.694 meters/15.4 feet high plus minimum clearances per the FRD and UFC on all sides. The
contractor shall confirm that aircraft dimensions provided in the FRD combined with the door
dimensions noted above will provide the required clearances indicated in UFC 4-211-01N.
Hangar doors shall be vertical lift multi-leaf fabric doors. Hangar doors shall be capable of being
opened manually in the event of a power interruption. Doors shall be capable of being operated from
the interior or exterior of the hangar.

Al Dhafra, UAE
B203006 BLAST RESISTANT DOORS

Provide special doors used for blast resistance.
B203008 EXTERIOR DOOR HARDWARE

Provide the services of a certified door hardware consultant to prepare the door hardware schedule.
Provide hardware keying compatible with the existing U.S. controlled facilities keying system.
Provide a card key system. Provide the services of a certified door hardware consultant to prepare
the door hardware schedule.
Door hardware finish shall be chrome-plated brass or bronze, or stainless steel brass or bronze.
--End of Section--
T
AF
R
D

Al Dhafra AB, UAE
B30 ROOFING
B30 GENERAL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Roof systems shall be watertight and compatible with facility function, construction, and service
conditions. Provide complete roof system design and construction services for the entire new facility
roof system, including all ancillary and incidental work necessary for a complete, new, watertight roof
system installation.
Submittal Requirements: Components of a minimum roof submittal shall include the roof plan, method
of drainage, standard details and details unique to the project, wind load calculations and
requirements.
Provide a Pre-Design Roofing Conference (if required in RFP Part 4) and Pre-Roofing Conference to
assure roof design and construction is properly coordinated before construction begins.
T
Built-in gutter systems where drainage passes through an interior space or is concealed in the
exterior cavity wall shall be prohibited.
AF
Refer to UFC 3-110-03, Roofing, UFC 3-101-01, Architecture, and UFC 1-200-02 High Performance
Sustainable Buildings for additional roofing requirements.
B3010 ROOF COVERINGS

R
B301001 STEEP SLOPE ROOFING SYSTEMS
Steep slope roofing systems are preferred over low slope roofing systems. Steep slope roofing
systems that are acceptable include metal. Steep slope roofing may be used on support or
D
secondary buildings. See section F10 for hangar roof requirements. The roof system shall be
designed and attached to resist wind uplift pressures calculated in accordance with ASCE 7. Uplift
resistance shall be validated by applicable Factory Mutual (FM), Underwriters Laboratories (UL), or
ASTM uplift resistance test procedures.
B301002 LOW SLOPE ROOFING SYSTEMS

Wind Uplift - The complete roof covering assembly shall be rated Class 1- 60, 75, 90, 105, 120, 135
or appropriate in accordance with FM P7825, capable of withstanding an uplift pressure of 1.44 kPa
(60 pounds per square foot) with a safety factor of 2, and FM I-49 for perimeter and flashing
attachment.
Fire Safety - Complete roof covering assembly shall:
1. Be Class A rated in accordance with ASTM E 108 or FM 4470 or UL 790; and
2. Be listed as part of Fire-Classified roof deck construction in UL RMSD or Class I roof

deck construction in FM P7825c.

Al Dhafra AB, UAE
A three ply modified system consisting of modified base sheet, modified bitumen interply sheet, and
modified bitumen cap sheet is the system of choice for new low sloped roofing.
Use a ventilating base sheet over any materials which may contain moisture which may need to
transpire out of the building.
Low slope roofing systems that are acceptable include three-ply modified bitumen roofing.
Cool Roof - Meet the ASHRAE 90.1 Chapter 5 values for cool roofing. If a cool roof is not selected in
zones 1-3, meet one of the exception requirements listed in ASHRAE 90.1 Chapter 5 or provide
thermal insulation above the deck with an R value of 33 or greater.
B301003 ROOF INSULATION AND FILL

Provide roof insulation values no less than in accordance with UFC 1-200-02 High Performance and
T
Sustainable Buildings and UFC 3-110-03 Roofing.
B301004 FLASHINGS AND TRIM

AF
Flashing and sheet metal work shall include scuppers, splash pans, and sheet metal roofing.
Flashings may include any of the following: copper, sheet and strip - ASTM B 370, cold-rolled temper
Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) - ASTM A 653/ A 653M. Galvanized steel items shall have a
baked-on, factory applied finish of polyvinylidene fluoride or an equivalent fluorocarbon coating
Stainless Steel - ASTM A 167, Type 302 or 304 Aluminum Alloy Sheet and Plate - ASTM B 209
Pre-Finished Aluminum. Finish shall be baked-on factory applied color coating of polyvinylidene
fluoride (PVF2) or other equivalent fluorocarbon coating with a minimum thickness of 0.8 to 1.3 mils.
R
B301005 GUTTERS AND DOWNSPOUTS

D
Provide gutters and downspouts compatible with roofing material and finish. Concealed (interior)
gutters and downspouts are prohibited.
B301006 ROOF OPENINGS AND SUPPORTS

Provide insulated roof hatch on support buildings where rooftop equipment is present and rails or
guards.
B301090 OTHER ROOFING

Provide lightning protection, without penetrating the roof membrane or flashing components
--End of Section--

Al Dhafra AB, UAE
C10 INTERIOR CONSTRUCTION

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Interior construction includes interior partitions, interior doors, and fittings.
Provide durable construction appropriate for the building function. Acoustic properties of materials,
as well as durability, shall be considered during material selection.
GENERAL SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS

Areas of the Project subject to abuse require that "impact resistant" systems be provided. See
"Room Requirements" for specific requirements on "Partitions", "Interior Doors", and "Fittings".
C1010 PARTITIONS
T
Partitions shall be concrete masonry or gypsum board on metal studs as required in UFC 4-211-01N.
Masonry walls are preferred at areas subject to impact or abuse such as shops, utility rooms, toilet
AF
and locker/shower rooms. The wall separating the aircraft bay from the support spaces shall also be
masonry. Metal stud and gypsum board should be limited to interior partitions within administrative
areas.
C101001 FIXED PARTITIONS

For areas with specific ratings, partitions shall extend to roof construction above.
R
Provide fixed interior partitions, except where demountable or retractable partitions are specifically
required by the "Room Requirements." Sound-rated partition assemblies shall have a minimum
Sound Transmission Coefficient (STC) of 36 in accordance with ASTM E 90 or ASTM E 413 for
frequency data unless noted otherwise herein or in the room requirements sheets.
D
Glass masonry units shall transmit 75 percent light.
C101002 DEMOUNTABLE PARTITIONS

Demountable partitions, if used, shall include sound rated, full height (floor to ceiling) solid partitions
and wire mesh partitions. Sound-rated partition assemblies shall have a minimum Sound
Transmission Coefficient (STC) of 36 in accordance with ASTM E 90 or ASTM E 413 for frequency
data unless otherwise noted herein. Extend wire mesh partitions meant for security purposes to the
structural ceiling, or provide a wire mesh ceiling. Coordinate finishes with Section C30 Interior
Finishes.
C101003 RETRACTABLE PARTITIONS

Provide retractable partitions to include operable panel partitions and accordion folding partitions.
Sound-rated partition assemblies shall have a minimum Sound Transmission Coefficient (STC) of 36
in accordance with ASTM E 90 or ASTM E 413 for frequency data unless otherwise noted herein.
Coordinate finishes with Section C30 Interior Finishes.
PART 3 - CHAPTER 6 / ESR C10 - Page 1

Al Dhafra AB, UAE
C101004 INTERIOR GUARDRAILS AND SCREENS

Provide balustrades where required by code. Provide screens where required to prohibit view of a
particular area.
C101005 INTERIOR WINDOWS

Provide interior windows of hollow metal, fixed or operable as required by the specific function.
C101006 GLAZED PARTITIONS & STOREFRONTS

No criteria specified.
C101007 INTERIOR GLAZING

Interior glazing shall be clear, tempered glass, or fire-rated as dictated by the particular use.
C1020 INTERIOR DOORS
T
C102001 STANDARD INTERIOR DOORS
AF
All interior doors shall be hollow metal in hollow metal frames.
Provide STC sound rated door and standard hollow metal door frame with continuous sound/ weather
seals around the door to create a sound control door where used in sound rated partitions. STC
rating of door shall match the partition. Provide sound/ weather seals at the top and both sides that
are integral with the door frame and drop down door bottom sound/ weather seals shall rest on a
metal threshold. After installation, test the doors with a flashlight to determine if any gaps in the
sound seals allow light to be viewed on the opposite side of the door.
R
C102002 GLAZED INTERIOR DOORS

Provide vision glazing in doors where it is required by the Room Requirements portion of this RFP,
D
or it is deemed advantageous to be able to see through the door, either for safety of pedestrian traffic,
or other functional reason.
C102003 FIRE DOORS

Provide interior fire doors in fire-rated partitions.
C102004 SLIDING AND FOLDING DOORS

C102005 INTERIOR OVERHEAD DOORS

C102006 INTERIOR GATES

Provide interior gates where such items are operationally suitable or requested.

Al Dhafra AB, UAE
C102007 INTERIOR DOOR HARDWARE

Provide special door hardware, such as CDX-10 combination deadbolt locks or card key system at
areas with SIPRNET drops or otherwise requiring heightened security as directed by the user and in
concert with the site security requirements. Hinges on doors accessing secure areas shall have
non-removable pins. Compliance with the life safety code is required and security hardware shall be
selected with that in mind.
Provide card key type access units for specialized entries. Provide lithium battery powered,
magnetic stripe keycard locksets that are ANSI/BHMA A156.13, Series 1000, Grade 1, mortise locks,
tamper resistant, UL listed with 1 inch (25 mm) throw deadbolt, 3/4-inch (19 mm ) throw latch bolt,
auxiliary dead-locking latch, and 2-3/4 inch (68.75 mm) backset.
Door hardware finish shall be chrome-plated brass or bronze, or stainless steel.
C102090 OTHER INTERIOR SPECIALTY DOORS

Provide interior specialty doors where the need for such is identified by the user during design
development. See Part 3, Chapter 2, section 2.3.7 for additional information, reference &
T
requirement documents for secure area doors. Doors accessing secure areas shall be out-swinging.
C102091 OTHER INTERIOR PERSONNEL DOORS

AF
Provide interior personnel doors suitable in size to serve the anticipated use of the space to which the
doors provide access.
C1030 SPECIALTIES
C103001 COMPARTMENTS, CUBICLES, & TOILET PARTITIONS
R
Provide toilet partitions in all toilet rooms with more than one water closet or urinal. Provide toilet
accessories as indicated in Chapter 3, Room Requirements portion of this RFP.
D
C103002 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES

Provide toilet and bath accessories that are appropriate in quantity, style, and finish for the specific
room.
C103003 MARKER BOARDS AND TACK BOARDS

Provide marker boards and tack boards as indicated in Chapter 5 "Room Requirements" portion of
this RFP. Marker boards and tack boards are funded as part of the construction contract.
C103004 IDENTIFYING DEVICES

All necessary interior signage shall be incorporated as part of the architectural drawings. Interior
signage is not collateral equipment. Interior signage shall demonstrate complete coordination with the
facility design, SID and FF&E submittals. Provide interior directional signage as required for facility
wayfinding. Provide an identifying device at each interior door. Signs must meet ABA Accessibility
Standard requirements. Refer to UFC 3-120-01, Design: Sign Standards, for more information.

Al Dhafra AB, UAE
C103005 LOCKERS
Provide lockers of vented double-tier configuration unless directed otherwise by the user through
design discussions. Lockers shall be metal construction and enamel finish. Lockers are funded as
part of the construction contract.
C103006 SHELVING
Provide steel utility shelving. Built-in fixed shelving is funded as part of the construction contract.
C103007 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS

Provide fire extinguisher cabinets.
C103008 COUNTERS
Provide plastic laminate counter tops and back splashes.
C103009 CABINETS
T
Provide cabinetry and millwork items with associated accessories. Cabinetry shall be AWI premium
grade and have concealed hinges with adjustable standards for shelves. All exposed surfaces will
AF
be covered with high pressure plastic laminate clad.
Provide specific cabinetry as shown on the Room Requirements Sheets.
C103010 CASEWORK
R
Provide all built-in premanufactured metal cabinetry for specialized functions such as laboratories,
libraries, medical and dental facilities. Casework shall comply with Mil Std 1691.
Provide specific casework as shown on the Room Requirements Sheets.

D
C103011 CLOSETS
C103012 FIRESTOPPING PENETRATIONS

Provide all sleeves, caulking, and flashing for firestopping penetrations.
C103013 SPRAYED FIRE-RESISTIVE MATERIALS

C103014 ENTRANCE FLOOR GRILLES AND MATS

Provide surface floor mats at main building entrances.

Al Dhafra AB, UAE
C103015 ORNAMENTAL METAL WORK

C103090 OTHER INTERIOR SPECIALTIES

No additional requirements identified.
--End of Section--
T
AF
R
D

Al Dhafra, UAE
C20 STAIRS
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Stairs, including stair construction and stair finishes, shall be provided as required by the building
code to provide egress from the building from above or below grade level floors. Stairs shall be in
accordance with UFC 1-200-01, General Building Requirements.
C2010 STAIR CONSTRUCTION

C201001 INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR STAIRS
T
Interior stairs shall be constructed of steel or steel with concrete filled pans.
Exterior stairs shall be constructed of galvanized steel or cast-in-place reinforced concrete.

AF
Concrete is an acceptable finish for exterior stairs. Exterior concrete stairs shall have cast aluminum
treads with abrasive surface.
Steel stairs shall be primed and painted.
C201090 HANDRAILS, GUARDRAILS, AND ACCESSORIES

R
Handrails and guardrails shall be painted galvanized steel. Handrails and guardrails shall present a
smooth, unbroken surface throughout the length of the stair.
D
Handrails and guardrails shall be finished to withstand extreme wear conditions.
Metal ladders and railings complying with OSHA requirements shall be provided for access and
protection to any mechanical mezzanines, lofts or other similar spaces.
--End of Section--

Al Dhafra, UAE
C30 INTERIOR FINISHES

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Interior finishes include wall finishes, floor finishes, wall base finishes, and ceiling finishes.
Provide aesthetically pleasing, functional, durable finishes appropriate to the buildings function.
Acoustic properties of materials, as well as durability and ease of maintenance, shall be considered
during material selection. Maximize the use of sustainable materials.
Color selections require the use of wall and floor finish material accents to enhance the color and
appearance of the interior design. Provide a wall and floor color design that includes a minimum of
two different accents colors throughout the facility. Submit pattern drawings of the accents design
with the interior design submittal.
T
AF
See "Room Requirements" for specific requirements on "Interior Finishes."
C30 SSPC QP 1 CERTIFICATION

The Project requires industrial coatings on structural steel arch framing system surfaces. All
contractors and subcontractors that perform surface preparation or coating application shall be
certified by the Society for Protective Coatings (formerly Steel Structures Painting Council - SSPC) to
R
the requirements of SSPC QP 1 prior to contract award, and shall remain certified while
accomplishing any surface preparation or coating application.
C3010 WALL FINISHES

D
All interior wall finish materials in area subject to impact and requiring higher durability shall be
painted concrete masonry.
All interior wall finish materials within administrative areas or spaces not subject to impact and
requiring a heightened degree of durability may be gypsum board.
All interior wall finishes are indicated in the Room Requirements portion of this RFP
C3020 FLOOR FINISHES

Provide floor finish materials to meet the following requirements;
Exposed concrete floors shall be coated with a sealer appropriate to the function of the space.
Colored concrete floor in administrative areas shall be applied as a topical dye or a dry shake pigment
application.
Hangar bay floor finish shall have a Thin Film Flooring System meeting the requirements of MPI 212
and UFGS 09 67 23.15 Fuel Resistive Resinous Flooring, 5-Coat System.

Al Dhafra, UAE
Shop spaces shall have an epoxy floor coating.
Floor finishes shall be as indicated in the Room Requirements portion of this RFP. Carpet shall not
be used on this project.
d. Resilient Floor Finishes
Provide resilient floor finishes as identified in the Project Program, Room Requirements or as directed
below. Include manufacturer's full line of color, texture and pattern selections, including multi-colored
materials.
C3030 CEILING FINISHES

Primary ceiling finish in administrative areas shall be 600x600x6 minimum thickness suspended
acoustical panel ceiling system, except provide a suspended gypsum board ceiling in entrance lobby,
restrooms and showers. Acoustical panels shall have a regular edge. Panels shall have
factory-applied standard washable painted finish or Type IV with factory-applied plastic
membrane-faced vinyl.
Exposed structural systems shall be painted according to PTS Section C3040 INTERIOR COATINGS
T
AND SPECIAL FINISHES.
Ceiling finishes shall be as indicated in the Room Requirements portion of this RFP.
AF
C3040 INTERIOR COATINGS AND SPECIAL FINISHES
Paint all interior exposed surfaces including metal items, such as interior grilles, registers, diffusers,
access panels, and panel boxes.
All finish coatings shall be as indicated in the "Room Requirements" portion of this RFP.
R
--End of Section--
D

Al Dhafra, UAE
D20 PLUMBING
Refer to Part 4 Section D20 for performance requirements of the building elements included in the
plumbing system.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The plumbing system for FY15 Navy MILCON Project P-960 consists of all fixtures, potable cold and
hot water piping and equipment, piping insulation, water heating equipment, sanitary waste and vent
piping systems, and other specialty piping and equipment within 5 foot (1.5 meter) of the building.

Provide working space around all equipment. Provide concrete pads under all equipment. Provide
T
all required fittings, connections and accessories required for a complete and usable system. All
equipment shall be installed per the criteria of PTS section D20 and the manufacturers
recommendations. Design and installation shall be in accordance with IPC, NFPA 409 Standard on
Aircraft Hangars, and UFC 3-420-01, Plumbing Systems. Where the word "should" is used in the
AF
manufacturers recommendations, substitute the word "must".
D2010 PLUMBING FIXTURES

Provide quantity and type of plumbing fixtures required for the occupancy, use, and functions
described for this facility. Refer to Room Requirements Section for additional specific requirements
for spaces with plumbing fixtures.
R
D201001 WATER CLOSETS

Provide wall or floor mounted dual function flush valve water closets in all restroom spaces.
D
D201002 URINALS
Provide low flow flush valve urinals in all restroom spaces.
D201003 LAVATORIES
Provide countertop lavatories with metering faucet in each restroom space. Provide pop-up drain.
D201004 SINKS
Refer to Room Requirement Section for the number and type of sinks required.
Provide countertop kitchen sink with two compartments in the kitchen and break room spaces.
Provide waste disposer unit.
Provide service sink in the appropriate maintenance spaces.
PART 3 - CHAPTER 6 / ESR D20 - Page 1

Al Dhafra, UAE
Provide mop sink in the janitorial space.
D201005 SHOWERS/TUBS
Provide a terrazzo tile shower floor and wall assembly with chrome plated copper shower supply
fittings in the Locker Rooms.
D201006 DRINKING FOUNTAINS AND COOLERS

Provide drinking fountains in the locker rooms, Hangar Bay and office spaces centrally located in
accordance with UFC 3-420-01.
D201090 EMERGENCY FIXTURES

Provide emergency shower and eyewash station (ES/EWS) in the Hangar space as well as all
maintenance and storage spaces in locations as specified in accordance with UFC 3-420-01
Appendix D, locate ES/EWS as close to the hazard as possible, within 10 to 20 ft (3 to 6 m) for highly
corrosive chemical, but not more than 10 seconds or 100 feet (30 m) of unobstructed travel away,
whichever is lesser. Provide shower and eyewash assemblies in accordance with ANSI/ISEA Z358.1.
T
Provide all emergency showers with a privacy curtain and rail assembly. Provide tepid water (60F to
100F) with water tempering valve assembly.
Provide alarms and appurtenances for service within NEMA type 3 or 4 enclosures.
AF
D2020 DOMESTIC WATER DISTRIBUTION
Perform a flow test to determine system requirements.
A flow test was performed with the following results:

R
Date:
Time:
D
Location:
Static pressure:
Residual pressure:
Flow:
D202001 PIPES AND FITTINGS

Provide Copper pipe for above ground supply and CPVC piping and fittings for below ground and
buried cold water piping.
D202002 VALVES & HYDRANTS

Provide isolation valves at supply to each floor. Provide hose bibbs in mechanical rooms and
maintenance areas. Provide hose bibbs along the building exterior such that all points along the
perimeter can be reached with a 100 foot (30 meter) long hose.

Al Dhafra, UAE
Provide hose bibbs along hangar bay wall at columns and spaced not more than 30 meters apart.
Hose bibbs within one of the hangar bays in each hangar facility shall be capable of delivering enough
water to wash the aircraft while it is parked in the hangar. Provide Coordinate washing location and
sizing with contracting officer representative (COR).
Designer is to evaluate the feasibility of providing a condensate recovery system to recover all
condensate produced from HVAC equipment in the facility to help meet sustainability requirements.
The condensate recovery system will be recycled to provide water for washing of the aircrafts.
Designer shall also evaluate the feasibility of providing recycled aircraft wash water for reuse of
washing aircrafts to meet sustainability requirements.
D202003 DOMESTIC WATER EQUIPMENT

Provide backflow preventers of types and at points within domestic water systems as specified by
IPC. Locate inside the mechanical room on service entrance lines where not provided exterior to the
building.
Provide water meter on the building main and tie water meter into the BAS.
Provide electric water heater for heating of domestic water.
T
Instantaneous or tank type electric water heaters may be provided to meet hot water needs.
AF
Provide water tempering valve assembly.
Provide in-line circulator for domestic hot water distribution system where hot water lines have and
equivalent length more than 15m (50ft.) from water heating source.
Provide domestic water booster system for domestic water distribution system if required.
D202004 INSULATION & IDENTIFICATION

R
Provide mineral fiber insulation with vapor barrier on domestic hot water supply and recirculation
piping. Provide cellular glass insulation with vapor barrier on domestic cold water supply piping.
Provide identification for piping and equipment.
D
D202005 SPECIALTIES
Provide valve box for buried valves.
D202090 OTHER DOMESTIC WATER SUPPLY

Provide piping supports in accordance with the IPC. Provide inspections, disinfection, and testing in
accordance with the IPC.
D2030 SANITARY WASTE
D203001 WASTE PIPE & FITTINGS

Provide plastic PVC piping, fittings, and solvent cement for above and below ground installation.
Provide cast iron above grade where pipes run through plenums.

Al Dhafra, UAE
D203002 VENT PIPE & FITTINGS

Provide plastic PVC piping, fittings, and solvent cement. Provide cast iron above grade where pipes
run through plenums.
D203003 FLOOR DRAINS

Provide floor drains in mechanical rooms, restrooms, and plumbing chase areas. Provide trench
drains in the hangar bay areas. Trench drains shall be provided in accordance with UFC 4-211-01N
3.2.2.1 and NFPA 409 Standard on Aircraft Hangars section hangar floor trench drainage.
D203004 SANITARY & VENT EQUIPMENT

Provide sump and sewage pump where required.
D2040 RAIN WATER DRAINAGE
D204001 PIPE & FITTINGS
T
Provide PVC piping, fittings, and solvent cement above and below ground.
D204002 ROOF DRAINS

AF
Provide roof drains that are compatible with the roofing system.

Provide the same as domestic water piping.
R
D204090 OTHER RAIN WATER DRAINAGE SYSTEM
D2090 OTHER PLUMBING SYSTEMS
D
D209001 SPECIAL PIPING SYSTEMS
D209002 ACID WASTE SYSTEMS

Provide acid waste system where required.
D209003 INTERCEPTORS
Provide an oil/water separator for the trench drains in the hangar bay area.
D209005 COMPRESSED AIR SYSTEM (NON-BREATHING)

Provide a compressed air system to serve all of the hangar bay module[s] and all maintenance
spaces to include but not limited to the support equipment maintenance shop and the square storage
cage. Compressed air distribution system shall be used as the source. Provide air compressors,
refrigerated air dryer, after cooler, air receiver, de-oilers and filters for the new facility. Provide a
minimum of one (1) air compressors per hanger bay, each air compressor shall provide 100% of peak

Al Dhafra, UAE
compressed air demand of each hangar bays. Provide distribution piping, valves, pressure regulators,
compressed air drops with quick disconnects, and hose reels throughout the hangar bays and shop
spaces to allow connection of pneumatic tools, sanders, grinders, etc. Location of air drops and hose
reels should be coordinated with the facility User and Contracting Officer.
Provide compressed air service points in the hangar bays quantity and capacity as required by the
user. Each service point shall consist of wall-mounted hose reel, pneumatic tool lubricator, 861 kPa
(125 psig) pressure regulator with adjustability of +/- 861 kPa (125 psig), pneumatic tool filter, needle
valve shutoff, and pneumatic tool quick connector.
Hose bibbs in hangar bays shall be co-located with compressed air service points. Quantity shall be
sufficient to allow full coverage of each hangar bay for hose bibbs as well as compressed air but not
more than 30m apart. See room requirements for additional compressed air requirements.
--End of Section--
D209090 OTHER SPECIAL PLUMBING SYSTEMS

T
-- End of Section -- AF
R
D

Al Dhafra, UAE
D30 HVAC
Refer to Part 4 Section D30 for performance requirements of the building elements included in the
HVAC system.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Provide a distributed chilled water heating, ventilating and air conditioning (HVAC) system for the
FY16 Navy MILCON Project P-960 that attains the following objectives: Occupant comfort, Indoor air
quality, Acceptable noise levels, Energy efficiency, Reliable operation, and Ease of maintenance.
Design and installation shall be in accordance with IMC, UFC 3-401-01, Mechanical Engineering,
UFC 3-410-01, Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Systems, NFPA 409, Standard on Aircraft
Hangars, and UFC 4-010-01, DoD Minimum Antiterrorism Standards for Buildings.
T
Provide working space around all equipment. Provide all required fittings, connections and
accessories required for a complete and usable system. All equipment shall be installed per the
criteria in PTS Section D30 and the manufacturer's recommendations. Where the word "should" is
AF
used in manufacturers instructions, substitute the word "shall".
Provide air conditioning and heating for spaces as indicated and for the following Design conditions:
Outside Conditions
Summer 110 Degrees F dry Winter 55 Degrees F

bulb
R
43.3 Degrees C dry 12.7 Degrees C

bulb
D
86 Degrees F wet
bulb
30 Degrees C wet
bulb
All Occupied and Office, Toilet, Locker Room Areas Inside Conditions
Summer 78 Degrees F dry Winter 65 Degrees F

bulb
25.5 Degrees C dry 18 Degrees C

bulb

Al Dhafra, UAE
50 %RH
All Maintenance, Hangar Bay Areas and Fuel Barn Inside Conditions
Summer 78 Degrees F dry Winter No Heating Degrees F

bulb
25.5 Degrees C dry No Heating Degrees C

bulb
50 %RH
Mechanical, Electrical, Fire Pump and Utility Room Inside Conditions
T
bulb
AF
29 Degrees C dry No Heating Degrees C
bulb
50 %RH
R
Communication Rooms Inside Conditions

D

bulb
23.8 Degrees C dry No Heating Degrees C

bulb
50 %RH
Provide Ventilation rates and systems per ASHRAE Standard 62.1, Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor
Air Quality and MIL-HDBK-1028/1, Aircraft Maintenance Facilities.
The HVAC system must provide each zone with the choice of heating or cooling year round unless
otherwise indicated. Each zone must have its own limited range of control, as allowed by the control
system central workstation.

Al Dhafra, UAE
Zone the HVAC system as follows:
Administrative, maintenance and support areas shall be zoned as appropriate for the function.
MCS functions shall be a separate zone
Communication rooms shall be a separate zone
Hangar Bay Area shall be a separate zone
Fuel Barn Area shall be a separate zone
Provide minimum 4-inch (100 mm) thick concrete housekeeping pads and vibration isolators under all
floor-mounted equipment. Provide vibration isolators for all hanging equipment. Provide flexible
connections between all equipment, piping, and ductwork systems.
All mechanical equipment must have painted finishes that pass a salt-spray test conducted per ASTM
B117 for duration of at least 500 hours.
All outside mechanical equipment HVAC cooling/heating and condenser coils must be provided with a
manufacturer approved coating system. The heat transfer rating shall be as designed.
Ventilation (and air-conditioning) systems shall be designed to minimize sand and dirt infiltration. All
air-conditioning systems shall be designed to maintain positive pressure inside the building with
T
respect to the exterior. All fresh air intakes shall be provided with sand louvers, washable filters and
bird screens. All air handlers shall have a minimum filtered dust control efficiency of 85%. Inertial air
separator may be used for first stage of filtration.
AF
In accordance with UFC 3-410-01 For new construction and major renovations projects when the total
outdoor air requirements exceed 1000 CFM, provide a DOAS that supplies dehumidified and
reheated (tempered to room DB temperature) 100 percent outside air directly to all spaces when
occupied.
Electrical equipment used or servicing the hangar (OH) space within 18 inches (0.45m) of the floor
and within 5 ft (1.5m) of the silhouette of the aircraft shall be Class I, Division 2 hazardous rating in
accordance with NFPA 70, National Electrical Code. All HVAC return and supply diffusers shall be
R
located a minimum of 10 feet above the hangar floor.
HVAC for telecommunication rooms (TR) shall be designed in accordance with UFC 3-580-01 and
TIA-569-C and TIA-569-C-1. Provide each TR with its own independent thermostat for climate control,
D
capable of supporting year round ambient temperature control (24 hours/day, 365 days/year), to
protect all installed electronic equipment. Do not include heating and cooling systems on building time
clocks or other temperature setback means for telecom spaces.
The designer must prepare a Life Cycle Cost Analysis (LCCA) to determine the heating and cooling
systems, fuel sources and major system components. The analysis must conform to the life cycle cost
and energy criteria specified in UFC 3-401-01 paragraph 2-1.1 Life Cycle Considerations. Centralized
versus De-centralized Plants - De-centralized plants may be a more cost effective alternative for a
new or replacement project. The designer must follow the "Evaluation of District and
Islanded/Decentralized Utility Options with Life-Cycle Cost Analysis Guidance" in Appendix G of UFC
3-410-01 to determine which alternative is most life cycle cost effective.
Provide back-up HVAC to the following areas: FOB-MCS, MCS Pilot, MCS Server Room, MCS
Equipment Area, MCS Vestibule, MCS Techs and all other MCS functional areas.
For sizing condensers and condensing units, add 5F (3C) to the outdoor dry bulb temperature.
Provide security measures for all secure spaces in accordance with MIL-HDBK-1013/1A Design
Guidelines for Physical Security of Facilities and UFC 4-010-05 Sensitive Compartmented Information

Al Dhafra, UAE
Facilities Planning, Design, and Construction.
D3010 ENERGY SUPPLY
D301001 OIL SUPPLY SYSTEM

D301002 GAS SUPPLY SYSTEM

D301003 STEAM SUPPLY SYSTEM (FROM CENTRAL PLANT)

D301004 HOT WATER SUPPLY SYSTEM (FROM CENTRAL PLANT)
T
D301005 SOLAR ENERGY SUPPLY SYSTEMS

AF
D3020 HEAT GENERATING SYSTEMS

The heating load for this facility shall be served by electric resistance heating coils located in the air
handlers serving each space.
R
D302001 BOILERS
D
D302002 FURNACES
D302003 FUEL-FIRED UNIT HEATERS

D302004 AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT

D302005 EQUIPMENT THERMAL INSULATION

No criteria specified
D3030 COOLING GENERATING SYSTEMS

Al Dhafra, UAE
D303001 CHILLED WATER SYSTEMS

Provide chilled water system for service to the building HVAC equipment.
Provide reciprocating, rotary screw or scroll air-cooled chillers (as recommended by ASHRAE
handbooks for size) using a variable or constant volume pumping system. The cooling load for this
facility shall be served by multiple chillers providing for satisfaction of the cooling load with a minimum
50% redundancy in as staged duty-duty-standby configuration. One (or more as necessary) chiller
shall be powered by the emergency (standby) generator to provide cooling to the FOB-MCS and
associated communication and office spaces upon loss of prime power.
Chillers shall operate in temperatures down to 4 degrees Celsius and up to 55 degrees Celsius.
Provide insulation and vapor barrier on all chilled water equipment.
Provide chiller controls in compliance with ASHRAE 135 BACnet - A Data Communication Protocol
for Building Automation and Control Networks.
Provide complete start-up and operational testing of chiller equipment.
T
D303002 DIRECT EXPANSION SYSTEMS
AF
D3040 DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS
D304001 AIR DISTRIBUTION, HEATING & COOLING
Provide insulated, galvanized steel ductwork constructed, braced, reinforced, installed, supported,
and sealed per the IMC and SMACNA standards.
R
Direct expansion variable air volume systems are not acceptable.
VAV systems with single duct and series fan powered boxes with electric heating coils may be used
D
to air condition the facility. Heating coils shall be provided where required for Administrative areas.
Chilled water shall be generated via air-cooled chillers and meeting the minimum part load IPLV in
accordance with Federal Energy Management Program (FEMP) or Energy Star efficiency
requirements.
Provide grilles, registers, and diffusers.
D304002 STEAM DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS

D304003 HOT WATER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS

D304004 CHANGEOVER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS


Al Dhafra, UAE
D304005 GLYCOL DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS

D304006 CHILLED WATER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS

For exterior buried chilled water distribution systems, coordinate with Section G30, Site
Civil/Mechanical Utilities.
Provide a constant speed, variable speed and/or primary/secondary pumping system to serve the
HVAC chilled water equipment throughout the facility.
Provide steel chilled water supply and return piping to serve the HVAC equipment throughout the
facility. Insulate piping with cellular glass insulation.
Provide air control and shot type feeder for manual chemical feed for the chilled water piping system.
Provide an expansion tank for the chilled water piping system.
T
Provide system flushing and start-up for the chilled water piping system.
D304007 EXHAUST SYSTEMS

AF
Provide ductwork constructed, braced, reinforced, installed, supported, and sealed per the IMC and
SMACNA standards.
Provide ducted exhaust ventilation systems and exhaust fans to serve all ventilated zones of the
facility. Provide in-line, rooftop or ceiling centrifugal exhaust fan[s]. Provide exhaust systems for
maintenance and Hangar areas in accordance with UFC 3-410-04N Industrial Ventilation, the
International Mechanical Code and UFC 4-211-01N Aircraft Maintenance Hangars.
R
Provide fuel vapor and vehicle exhaust sensors (CO, NO2, etc.) for the Fuel Barn area with a purge
exhaust system to remove harmful vapors when detected in accordance with the IMC chapter 4
ventilation and section 404 enclosed parking garages and code 29 CFR OSHA section
D
1910.106(e)(3)(v) Ventilation. Exhaust system equipment shall be explosion proof. All heating and air
conditioning return and supply diffusers shall be located a minimum of 10 feet above the floor.
Ventilation and exhaust for battery charging stations shall be design in accordance with UFC
3-520-05.
D304008 AIR HANDLING UNITS

Factory fabricated air handling units shall be of the low or medium pressure class and shall be
typically the single-zone draw through or multi-zone blow through type. AHUs shall be constant
volume type and shall supply cooling via chilled water and heating via electric resistance heating
coils. Units shall include fans, cooling coils, heating coils, air tight insulated casings, MERV 8 pre
filters, MERV 13 final filter(s) (when tested in accordance with ASHRAE Standard 52.2), v-belt motor
drives, compressors and all appurtenances required for the specified operations. Units located
outside shall receive the necessary weather protection. All supply and return air ductwork shall be
routed concealed within finished areas of the facility where possible.
D304090 OTHER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS

Al Dhafra, UAE
Provide base mounted circulating pumps.
D3050 TERMINAL & PACKAGE UNITS
D305002 UNIT HEATERS

D305003 FAN COIL UNITS

2-pipe vertical or horizontal type fan coil units (FCU) and controls may be used to serve the heating
and cooling requirements of the facility. One fan coil unit shall be provided for each zone and shall be
located within a mechanical closet or above the drop ceiling. The mechanical closet shall be lockable
and allow adequate space for maintenance as specified by equipment manufacturer. Provide each
fan coil unit with a return filter grille to ease maintenance requirements. If space does not allow for
vertical fan coil units, provide horizontal fan coil units in the overhead with a means for removal and
maintenance of the units through lockable access panels. Provide auxiliary drain pans below valves
and appurtenances to prevent piping leaks and condensate forming on chilled water piping from
damaging ceilings.
T
D305004 FIN TUBE RADIATORS CONVECTORS
AF
D305005 ELECTRIC HEATING
Heating shall be provided for the facility to maintain the required winter indoor design temperature.
The heating system may consist of electric resistant heating coils located within the air handling unit
or fan coil units. The electric heating coils inside the standard air handling units shall be of open
R
resistance type designed for direct exposure to the air stream. Electric heating coils shall be
completely prepackaged and provided with the required temperature and safety controls. Electric
heating coils shall be staged heating with a maximum of load of 5 kW per stage.
D305006 PACKAGE UNITS

D
Provide 100% Outside Air Makeup Air Conditioning Units to precondition outside air prior to
distributing to the space.
D3060 CONTROLS AND INSTRUMENTATION
D306001 HVAC CONTROLS
D306001 1.1 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROLS (DDC)

Provide a complete Direct Digital Control (DDC) system to comply with UFGS 23 09 23.13 20 BACnet
Direct Digital Control Systems for HVAC for the facility.
Provide operator workstation and notebook computer[s] and complete application software with all
licenses. DDC control system for the facility shall be monitored and controlled from a central location
(mechanical or control room).
Provide meters, monitored by DDC, on all of the building's incoming utilities (water and electric). Set

Al Dhafra, UAE
up trend reports to record data daily and store values in the operator workstation DDC computer.
Provide flow rate meters, monitored by the DDC system, for central and chilled water flow.
Provide air handlers and all terminal units, including VAV boxes, with discharge/supply temperature
sensors.
Provide central air handler unit outside air CFM air flow monitoring stations.
Provide a DDC option for automatic operation of building circulating pumps whenever outdoor air
temperature is below 35 degrees F (1.7 degrees C) or when there is a high potential for freeze
damage.
Provide control to automatically start back-up pumps (or other HVAC equipment) if the primary device
fails. Primary and back-up equipment starter circuits shall be wired to prevent both pieces of
equipment from operating at the same time. Rotate primary and back-up HVAC equipment monthly
(adjustable) with a lead/lag control routine.
D306001 1.2 ELECTRONIC CONTROLS
T
Provide electronic controls for the HVAC systems and equipment.
D3070 SYSTEMS TESTING AND BALANCING

AF
Provide complete Testing and Balancing (TAB) of all air and water distribution systems and HVAC
equipment. Provide TAB in accordance with UFGS 23 05 93 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for
HVAC (specification to be provided and edited by DOR).
D307003 HVAC COMMISSIONING

R
Refer to RFP Part 3 - Project Program, Chapter 2 for Building Commissioning requirements.
Mechanical systems to be commissioned, if provided, include HVAC systems and controls,
refrigeration systems and controls, renewable energy systems, chilled water systems, and domestic
hot water systems. Commission HVAC systems in accordance with UFGS 23 08 00.00 10
Commissioning of HVAC Systems (specification to be provided and edited by DOR).
D
D3090 OTHER HVAC SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT

D309001 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION ITEMS
Provide seismic restraints and Comply with the Force Protection Criteria.
D309090 OTHER SPECIAL MECHANICAL SYSTEMS

Provide industrial ventilation system in accordance with UFC 3-401-01.
Provide air to air heat exchangers or runaround coils in the air handling system where economically
feasible in the life cycle cost.

Al Dhafra, UAE
D40 FIRE PROTECTION

Refer to Part 4 Section D40 for performance requirements of the building elements included in the fire
protection systems.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Provide an integrated fire alarm, mass notification system, and suppression system capable of
notifying building occupants and controlling any fire that may start inside the facility. Automatic
suppression systems shall consist of both wet pipe sprinkler systems throughout the facility, and
AFFF systems in the hangar bays.
T
Provide working space around all equipment. Provide concrete pads under all equipment. Provide all
required fittings, connections and accessories required for a complete and usable system. All
equipment shall be installed per the criteria of PTS section D40 and the manufacturers
recommendations. Where the word "should" is used in the manufacturer's recommendations,
AF
substitute the word "shall".
All Design Documents, (i.e. Building Code/Life Safety Analysis, plans, specifications, and
calculations) developed for Section D40 shall be prepared by, or under the supervision of the
design/build contractor's Qualified Fire Protection Engineer, the Fire Protection Designer of Record
(FPDOR).
R
Installation drawings, shop drawings or working plans, calculations, other required pre-construction
documentation and as-built drawings shall be prepared by, or under the direct supervision of a NICET
engineering technician as specified below. NICET engineering technicians shall hold a current
certification as an engineering technician in the field of Fire Protection Engineering Technology with
Level IV certification in the appropriate subfield. Individuals responsible for work specified in D4090
D
shall hold a Level IV certification in the Special Hazards Suppression Systems subfield.
Provide training for the active systems consisting of three (3) eight (8)-hour sessions to accommodate
all shifts of the base fire department and allow for rescheduling for unforeseen fire department
responses.
D4010 FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEMS

Provide an integrated fire alarm, mass notification and public address systems capable of notifying
building occupants inside the facility. Provide a complete, electrically supervised, addressable
intelligent, manual and automatic, annunciated fire alarm and detection system throughout the facility.
The system shall be a voice evacuation type system and shall also serve as a mass notification
system. These integrated systems shall be capable of notifying building occupants by means of
tones, strobes, textural messaging, pre-recorded and live voice announcements. The fire reporting
portion of the system shall be compatible with the existing base fire reporting system. The fire alarm
system shall include manual stations, system smoke detectors, duct smoke detectors, heat detectors,
triple IR optical detectors, audio/visual alarms, fire alarm radio transmitter, electrical supervision of all
sprinkler system alarm and supervisory devices, and electrical supervision of fire pump controllers.

Al Dhafra, UAE
The fire alarm control panel shall be capable of handling a minimum of 500 individually identified
sensors within the main control panel. Provide Class A Notification Appliance Circuits, Class A
Signaling Line Circuits, and Class A Initiation Device Circuits. Provide back-up amplifiers for
combination fire alarm/mass notification systems.
Manual pull stations shall be surface mounted.
Provide a remote annunciator located at the main entrance to the hangar(s).
Provide a crossed zoned smoke detection system for activation of the clean agent suppression
system.
D4020 FIRE SUPPRESSION WATER SUPPLY AND EQUIPMENT

For Bidding purposes, the contractor shall assume that fire pumps are required to supply the entire
water supply for the wet pipe overhead sprinkler system and the AFFF low level foam system using
Viking GN 200/360 grate nozzles in the hangar bay, and the wet pipe sprinkler system in other
buildings. The water flow and pressure demands shall be satisfied with the largest pump out of
service. Fire pumps must not be used at greater than 130 percent of rated capacity for volume (i.e.
2500 gpm pumps must not be used for more than 3250 gpm). Two water storage tanks, each
T
holding at least 60% of the total water volume, must be installed. All fire pumps must be able to take
water from either tank at 100% of the flow rate.
The site location is next to the refueler ramp which is encircled with a 200 mm HDPE fire water main
AF
fed from the adjoining industrial area (Motown). These fire water mains are served by two (1
primary and 1 back-up) fire pumps with a capacity of 1200 gpm. The fire pumps draw from two
100,000 gallon ground level storage tanks. The USAF has granted permission to tie into the fire
water mains to supply water to the site. The static and residual pressure of the base fire protection
water supply is not known. . If this system is used, the contractor shall perform a hydraulic test on
which to base hydraulic calculations.
R
Where portable water source is used, incoming service shall be provided with a backflow preventer.
D
D4030 STANDPIPE SYSTEMS

Not Used.
D4040 SPRINKLER SYSTEMS

Provide wet pipe automatic sprinkler protection to provide complete coverage throughout the hangar
bays, shop areas, and administrative areas.
For hangar bays the sprinkler rate of application shall be 0.17 gpm/ft2 (6.9 L/min/m2) over the
hydraulically most demanding 7,500 ft2 (697 m2) of floor area as defined in NFPA 13. Do not
increase design area when the ceiling slopes exceed 2 in 12.
For light hazard areas the sprinkler rate of application shall be hazardous classification HC-1 per
Factory Mutual Data Sheet 3-26 (latest edition)
For ordinary hazard areas the sprinkler rate of application shall be hazardous classification HC-2 per
Factory Mutual Data Sheet 3-26 (latest edition).

Al Dhafra, UAE
Provide quick-response sprinklers with ordinary temperature rating in areas with finished ceilings.
Provide white sprinkler escutcheon plates to match ceiling color.
D4090 OTHER FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS

Provide a low-level AFFF system in the Hangar Bay area. Foam proportioning equipment shall
activate automatically upon alarm of triple IR detection system or activation of a manual releasing
station. The low level AFFF system shall use Viking Grate Nozzles GN 200/360, GN 200/180, and
GN 200/90. AFFF low level system shall comply with UFC 4-211-01N. The Viking Grate Nozzle GN
200/360 has a coverage area of 50 ft x 25 ft, an operating pressure between 40 psig and 45 psig, and
a K factor of 23.6 (in English units).
Provide a supplementary total flooding clean agent fire suppression system for complete fire
protection coverage throughout areas with command and control equipment.
--End of Section--
T
AF
R
D

Al Dhafra, UAE
D50 ELECTRICAL
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
(a) Provide complete Electrical Distribution System consisting of: Service Entrance Cables/Wiring and
Equipment, Lighting and Power Panelboards, Dry Type Transformers, Conduits, Feeder cables, Lighting
and Power Branch Circuit wiring, Motor Control Equipment, Interior and Exterior Building Lighting,
Communications, Security and Alarm Systems, Emergency Egress Lighting, Grounding System, Lightning
Protection System, 400-Hertz and 60 Hertz Frequency Converters, Uninterruptable Power Supply (UPS),
Emergency Power. All Systems shall include necessary accessories and/or devices in order for the
System(s) to be complete and usable System(s). Complete Distribution System shall consist of insulated
cables/conductors installed in conduit(s).
(b) Work required in this Section extends installations out to the building(s) 5 foot (1.5 meter) line.
(c)The hangar(s) will house fueled aircraft. No fueling of aircrafts shall take place within the hangars. The
T
electrical installation shall be in compliance with the requirements of National Fire Protection Association
(NFPA 70, NEC), UFC 3-501-01 and The Electricity Wiring Regulations issued by The Regulation and
Supervision Bureau for the Water, Wastewater and Electricity Sector in the Emirate of Abu Dhabi.
AF
(d) All Systems shall be designed for minimum 20% future spare capacity and in accordance with the
applicable Unified Facilities Criteria (UFC) listed in Part 4, unless noted otherwise. Lighting levels shall be
calculated per the IES recommended upper limits.
(e) All equipment installed under this Project shall be in compliance with and approved by The Electricity
Wiring Regulations issued by The Regulation and Supervision Bureau for the Water, Wastewater and
Electricity Sector in the Emirate of Abu Dhabi.
R
Provide an Electrical System complete in place, tested and approved, as specified throughout this RFP,
as needed for a complete, usable and proper installation. All equipment shall be installed per the criteria
D
of PTS Section D50 and the manufacturers recommendations. Where the word "should" is used in the
manufacturers recommendations, substitute the word "shall".
Contractor shall Design-Build two (2) Fabric Hangars and Maintenance & Support Facilities, to include a
Shielded Enclosure, to support Operation & Maintenance of MQ-4C Triton Aircrafts. All work shall be in
accordance with the requirements of applicable Unified Facilities Criteria and the MQ-4C Triton Facilities
Requirement Document (FRD).
SUSTAINABILITY
Provide electrical systems and components that support project sustainability and energy goals.
ANTITERRORISM
Provide bracing of electrical equipment which is suspended and weighs more than 31 pounds.
SEISMIC BRACING
Seismic Bracing of electrical equipment to resist seismic events shall be provided based on site seismic
design criteria, calculations and building importance factor.
ELECTRICAL TESTING

Al Dhafra, UAE
New electrical equipment shall be tested in accordance with NETA acceptance testing specifications.
Existing electrical equipment remaining in service shall be tested in accordance with NETA maintenance
testing specifications.
COMMISSIONING
Commission all systems in accordance with RFP Part 3 Chapter 2, Section 01 33 29.05 20 Sustainability
Reporting for Design Build and UFC 01-200-02 High Performance and Sustainable Buildings.
D5010 ELECTRICAL SERVICE AND DISTRIBUTION
(a) Electric Service to the Facility/Facilities shall consist of Unit Distribution Substation (UDS), to include,
a High Voltage (11KV) Ring-Main-Unit, Oil-Filled Transformer and a Secondary Distribution Cabinet. UDS
shall be installed on a concrete pad, minimum 150mm thick. Secondary voltage cables from the UDS to
the Service Entrance Equipment inside the facility shall be installed underground and in 150mm (6inch)
PVC concrete encased conduit ductbank. High voltage cables may be installed direct buried per UAE
Standards.
D501001 MAIN TRANSFORMERS
(a) Main transformer shall be oil-filled type, rated for 11KV - 415/240Volts, 3 Phase, 4 Wire, 50 Hz and 50
T
Degree Centigrade.
D501002 SERVICE ENTRANCE EQUIPMENT

AF
All service into the facility shall be underground.
(a) Secondary Voltage Service Entrance cables from the UDS to the Service Entrance Equipment
(Switchboards (SWB) and/or Main Distribution Panels (MDP)) inside the facility shall be installed
underground and in concrete encased ductbank. Service entrance cables and equipment shall be rated
for Service Entrance application.
R
(b) All Service Entrance SWBs and/or MDPs shall be provided with digital Watt-Hour Metering for billing
purpose.
(c) Transient Voltage Surge Suppression (TVSS) shall be provided at each Service Entrance Equipment.
D
D501003 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS AND FREQUENCY CONVERTERS
General use incoming power to the hangars, all other facilities and for site, shall be rated at 415/240Volts,
3 Phase, 4 Wire, 50 Hertz. Additional power systems shall include:
(a) 208/120 Volts, 3 Phase, 4 Wire, 60Hz, utilizing static type frequency converters. Individual frequency
converters in lieu of a central unit may be provided for each facility and/or area, at the option of the
Contractor.
(b) 208/120 Volts, 3 Phase, 4 Wire, 400Hz, utilizing static type frequency converters. Hangars 1 & 2 shall
not be serviced by a central (common) frequency converter unit.
(c) Indoor installed transformers shall be dry type. Floor mounted units shall be installed on 150mm thick
concrete pad.
(d) Provide a 200A, 28VDC, power supply for each of four (4) aircrafts.

Al Dhafra, UAE
D501004 PANELBOARDS
(a) Provide Lighting and Power Distribution panelboards to serve respective loads, as required.
Panelboards shall be of sufficient ampacity to serve the designed loads plus a minimum of 20% additional
spare capacity to provide for future growth. Dedicated panelboards shall be provided for sensitive
electronic loads (i.e. server/LAN rooms, computer labs, telecom rooms) and also for separate spaces
identified as Work Center/Area, such as, Instrumentation Work Center, Avionics Work Center,
Maintenance Control, etc.
(b) Panelboard(s) and other equipment located close to the aircraft wash area shall be protected with
minimum IP54 (NEMA Type 4) enclosure.
(c) Panelboards/Distribution Boards shall be factory assembled and comply with BS EN 60439.
(d) Panelboard rating above 200A shall be installed in dedicated area, Electric Room.
D501005 ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS
All circuit breakers shall be enclosed in proper IP or NEMA Type rated enclosures. Indoor installed
enclosures shall be rated for IP10 with gasket to keep dust out. Exterior installed enclosures shall be
T
rated for IP54.
D501006 MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS

AF
Use of Motor Control Center (MCC) in this Project is at the option of the Contractor. However,
individual motor starters and disconnect switches shall be provided for all motors. Variable Frequency
Drive (VFD) for motor may be provided, as necessary and at the option of the Contractor. All motors
and/or pumps shall be provided with proper circuit breaker protection, circuit wiring and connections
to the equipment.
D501090 OTHER SERVICE AND DISTRIBUTION

R
(a) Diesel engine emergency stand-by generator shall be provided to service critical loads, to include but
not limited to, Shielded Enclosure loads, HVAC for the shielded enclosure, each Hangar loads (to include
400Hz frequency converter loads), hangar doors, communications equipment and a fire pump.
Generator shall be a weatherproof enclosed skid mounted unit, installed outdoors on a concrete pad.
D
Unit shall be provided with an eight (8) hour belly mounted day tank. Unit shall be sized for additional
20% spare capacity for future, based on 100% demand load.
(b) Automatic Transfer Switch (ATS) with a by-pass switch shall be 4 Pole and installed inside the
building electric room. ATS shall be sized to match stand-by generator name plate rating.
(c) Dedicated emergency generator for the Fire Pump is not required.
(d) Receptacles near wet areas (sinks, basins etc.) shall be installed at least 1M away from the wet area.
(e) Manual Transfer Switch (MTS/Selector Switch) shall be 4 Pole and installed on the Primary side of
the Power Filters serving the shielded enclosure.
D5020 LIGHTING AND BRANCH WIRING
(a) Provide electrical connections for all systems requiring electrical service.
(b) Provide lighting and general purpose receptacles throughout all spaces, as required. Lighting and
branch circuit wiring shall comply with BS 7671.

Al Dhafra, UAE
(c) Light switches for the toilets shall be installed outside the toilets.
(d) No outlets, including shaver outlets, shall be installed inside the toilets.
(e) All general purpose receptacles (outlets) shall be protected by 30ma GFCI.
(f) Only copper conductor cables and wiring is permitted. Aluminum conductors cables/wiring is not
permitted.
(g) Ring circuits shall be provided for general purpose receptacles. Radial circuits shall be provided for
large or specialty loads, such as, water heaters, pumps, kitchen cookers/ovens etc. Large loads shall be
hard-wire connected (not plugged into a receptacle) via a locally provided disconnect switch.
(h) Provide 240V, 13 amp, 50 Hz (BS 1363) duplex switched receptacles in all rooms, minimum one (1)
duplex receptacle on each wall. In hangars, large bay areas and warehouses, provide receptacles at 5M
intervals, minimum.
(i) Provide 120V, 20 amp, 60 Hz (NEMA 5-20R) Duplex Receptacle:
(a) Minimum Six (6) Duplex Receptacles in all Specialty Rooms/Areas in coordination with the COR,
T
unless noted otherwise.
(b) Minimum Six (6) Duplex Receptacles in each shop, with final location of the receptacles coordinated
with the COR.
AF
(c) Minimum Six (6) Duplex Receptacles, three (3) on each side wall, shall be provided in each Hangar.
Final location of the receptacles shall be coordinated with the COR.
(j) Wiring in unfinished areas shall be installed in surface mounted conduits system supported at 3M
intervals. Wiring in finished areas shall be installed in recessed conduit system.
R
(k) Power receptacles for wall mounted TV monitors shall be collocated with the wall mounted brackets.
(l) Provide dedicated 240V, 13 amp. 50 Hz (BS 1363) duplex switched receptacles for office equipment,
refrigerator, etc. in accordance with the requirement of Facilities Requirement Document (FRD).
D
D502001 BRANCH WIRING
(a) All branch circuit wiring shall be insulated copper conductors installed in metal conduit. Homeruns may
have no more than three phase conductors. The sharing of neutral conductors between phases is not
allowed on non-linear loads (i.e. computers, electronic ballasts,).
(b) The 400 Hz Power System cabling shall be rated for 400 Hz and installed in aluminum
conduit/raceway system.
D502002 LIGHTING EQUIPMENT
(a) Preferred indoor and outdoor lighting is LED. However, fluorescent and High Intensity Discharge (HID)
lighting may be acceptable on cases by case basis and upon CORs approval. HID lighting shall not be
provided or installed near or around the antennas. Lighting fixtures shall be appropriate for its use and
location and shall be selected in coordination with the Architectural finish for the respective rooms/areas.

Al Dhafra, UAE
(b) Emergency 'egress' light fixtures shall have integral battery charger and nickel cadmium battery and
auto-change over in event of normal lighting circuit failure. The battery shall be capable of maintaining at
the required l i g h t i n g level for a minimum of 90 minutes.
(c) Exterior building light fixtures shall be installed above each exterior door.
(d) Exit Signs shall be provided at each exit and shall be with NiCd battery and solid state
inverter/converter for 180 minutes back up.
(e) Light switches or occupancy sensors shall be provided in each room for lighting control. Exterior
building lights shall be photo-electric controlled for dusk-to-dawn operation. Dimmable lighting with
dimmer switches shall be provided in conference and control rooms, if required, unless noted otherwise.
(f) Flood lighting to illuminate front and back areas of the hangars shall be provided. Light fixtures may be
attached to the hangar frame.
D5030 COMMUNICATIONS AND SECURITY
The Room Requirements Section identifies locations for communications and security systems and
equipment, unless noted otherwise in the following sub-elements.
T
D503001 TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
AF
Provide a complete building entrance facility, backbone distribution system, and horizontal distribution
system including, but not necessarily limited to, all wiring, pathway systems, grounding, backboards,
connector blocks, protectors for all copper service entrance pairs, patch panels, fiber optic distribution
panels, terminators for all fiber optic cables, outlet boxes, telephone jacks, data jacks and cover plates.
The telecommunications entrance facility (Communications Equipment Room (CER)); 150 SF are
currently allocated for the CER. If more than one facility is designed, communications spaces and
pathways shall abide to listed criteria.
R
Provide Category 6 Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP) copper cable, plenum rated, for horizontal voice and
data cables (green cables for data (NIPRnet), gray for voice (NIPRnet VoIP), and purple for LMS
(TCP/IP)). Terminate all horizontal cable on rack-mounted patch panels in cabinets per the ADAB Spec,
FRD for FOB, listed standards and specs, and attachments. Test all cables upon installation and submit
D
test results to MED for review. All telecom outlets shall consist of single gang, quad port faceplates and
modular 8P8C Category 6 connectors. Patch panels shall also be Cat 6 8P8C and no less than 24 ports.
Provide the number of cables per outlet as specified in the Room Requirements of this document.
Terminate all wires. All components shall be keystone compatible. All outlets shall be recessed where
possible. Provide wall-mount telephone outlets with Cat 6, USOC (RJ-11), and stainless steel covers as
designated in Chapter 5 Room Requirements.
Copper riser cables shall be 24 AWG, Category 3 and in 25 pair binder groups and plenum rated. Fiber
optic riser cable shall be tight-buffered, 8.3 single-mode and 62.5 multimode hybrid. Coaxial riser shall be
RG-11 (Series 11) with an 18 AWG solid copper conductor, and dual shield, plenum rated.
Secret Internet Protocol Router Network (SIPRnet) is a project requirement. Protective Distribution
System (PDS) is required for drops which pass from secure rooms to or through unclassified rooms per
NSTISSI-7003. Provide multimode fiber optic cable for horizontal SIPRNET workstations. All fiber optic
cables shall be in accordance with the ADAB Spec, FRD for FOB, listed standards and specs, and
attachments. All TRs with secret network infrastructure shall be located directly adjacent to rooms they
distribute SIPRnet to. Test all fibers upon installation and submit test results to MED for review.
D503002 PAGING SYSTEMS

Al Dhafra, UAE
Provide a multi-channel paging system to be integrated with the Mass Notification System (MNS), to
include, but not limited to, microphones, microphone outlet receptacles, inputs and outputs, preamplifiers,
single channel paging, control for each input, power amplifying equipment, and accessories required to
output the paging system audio signals through selected portions of the audio distribution network of the
MNS. The MNS operations must have complete priority/precedence over the paging system with override
functionality. All individual or zone speaker volume controls must default to the emergency sound level
when used for an MNS message. PA system shall be provided in accordance with UFC 4-211-01N.
D503003 INTERCOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
D503004 TELEVISION SYSTEMS
Provide CATV outlets in all rooms. Use RG-6 (Series 6) coaxial cable, 18 AWG solid copper conductor,
dual shield, to outlets and RG-11 to interconnect communications rooms. Terminate cables with F
connectors. Provide calculations within submittals with anticipated dB levels at all TV locations. Provide
in-wall conduit from behind television mounts to floor outlet (300-450mm AFF). Outlet shall be surface
mounted, and include bezel that will accommodate RGA, VGA, S video, and HDMI connectivity. Video
cables to be provided by others.
T
Conduct CATV testing at each outlet.
D503005 SECURITY SYSTEMS

AF
An Electronic Security System (ESS) is the integrated electronic system that encompasses the following
subsystems; access control system (ACS), intrusion detection system (IDS), and CCTV. The ESS shall
be in accordance with UFC 4-021-02 Electronic Security Systems, 1 October 2013.
Design a complete and usable ESS system, as part of the base contract. All ESS provisions shall be
included in the base contract. They include all conduits, pull boxes, pull strings, terminal boxes, spaces
and pathways, and all passive system components required to support the installation of an active and
R
fully operational ESS. The design of a complete ESS systems, per the following paragraph, is included in
the base contract, but should be separated as an option in the design.
Option #2: The ESS system shall include PACS (Physical Access Control System), and IDS (Intrusion
D
Detection System) per the Room Requirements section. Provide IDS system for all secure areas and
telecommunications equipment rooms (secure room-type constructed rooms) to include BMS sensors and
interior passive infrared sensors (PIR). This option shall include the provision and installation of all
electronic equipment, cabling, and connections.
See Room Requirements for list of rooms with ESS.
D503090 OTHER COMMUNICATIONS AND ALARM SYSTEMS
D5090 OTHER ELECTRICAL SERVICES
a. Uninterrupted Power Supply (UPS) power shall be provided within all communication and secure
rooms, to include Shielded Enclosure.
b. UPS Power in Hangars is not required. Portable UPS Units will be provided by the User. However, the
Contractor shall provide appropriately rated two (2) disconnect switches in each Hangar for the
Customers UPS connection. Disconnects shall be located one on each side wall of the Hangar, as

Al Dhafra, UAE
directed by the COR. Disconnect rating shall be coordinated with the COR based on the User provided
UPS units.
D509001 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION ITEMS (ELECTRICAL)
(a) Provide General Construction Items (Electrical) including, but not necessarily limited to, all
connections, fittings, boxes and associated equipment needed by this and other sections of this RFP as
required for a complete and usable system.
(b) Conduits, cable trays and busways that penetrate fire-rated walls, fire-rated partitions, or fire-rated
floors shall be fire stopped in accordance with Section C10, Interior Construction.
D509002 EMERGENCY LIGHTING AND POWER
(a) Provide power and wiring for emergency lights and exit lights throughout the facility
(b) Provide emergency generator power for communications room(s), emergency lighting and hangar
doors, unless noted otherwise.
(c) Provide UPS power for the Shielded Enclosure and Communications Rooms. The UPS system shall
T
provide 15 minutes minimum of emergency power to allow startup and connection of the emergency
generator for an orderly shutdown of the critical loads.
D509003 GROUNDING SYSTEMS

AF
(a) Grounding and bonding shall comply with the requirements of NEC. Underground connections shall
be exothermal welded. All exposed non-current carrying metallic parts of electrical equipment in the
electrical system shall be grounded. Insulated grounding conductor (separate from the electrical system
neutral conductor) shall be installed in all feeder and branch circuit raceways. Grounding conductor shall
be color green, unless the local authority requires a different color-coded conductor. New ground buses
( 2" tall X 1/4" thick copper ground bus) w i t h i n s u l a t e d s t a n d - o f f s h a l l be installed in the
R
h a n g a r s , electrical room, each shop and each computer and communication room. Ground busses shall
be connected to the ground ring.
(b) Aircraft static grounding system/points shall be provided in each hangar for each MQ-4C Triton Aircraft
D
in accordance with the requirements of UFC 4-211-01N. Final location of the grounding points shall be
coordinated with the COR/Navy.
D509004 LIGHTNING PROTECTION
Provide Lightning Protection System for all facilities and flood lighting poles, in compliance with the
requirements of FAA-STD-19E and UFC 3-575-01. Lightning protection system and grounding for the
communication RF tower, antennas, and cabling shall comply with FAA-STD-019E and NFPA 780
requirements. New System shall include, not limited to, air terminals, roof and down conductors and
counterpoise ground ring with ground rods. Minimum of two (2) ground test hand-holes shall be
provided for inspection and measurement of ground resistance. All underground connections shall be
exothermic weld. Lightning Protection System installed for the hangars with fabric roof, shall not void
the fabric roof warranty.
Provide proper power wiring and connections to all electric heating systems and equipment, as required.
D509006 ENERGY MANAGEMENT CONTROL SYSTEM

Al Dhafra, UAE
Provide power wiring and connections for all energy management control systems, as required.
D509007 PHOTOVOLTAIC ENERGY SYSTEM
Not Required.
D509090 OTHER SPECIAL SYSTEMS AND DEVICES
1. Frequency Converters:
(a) Provide 4 60KVA each, 208/120V, 3P, 4W 400Hz. Frequency Converter. Two in each Hangar, one
per aircraft. Provide 100ft secondary cable with end matching plug to connect to the aircraft receptacle.
Coordinate secondary cable requirements, type, gauge etc. with the COR/Customer. Secondary side
circuit breakers and cables used in the 400Hz System shall be rated for 400Hz application. Cables and/or
circuit breakers rated for 50Hz or 60 Hz shall not be acceptable. Cable raceways (trays and/or conduits)
used for the 400Hz System shall be aluminum.
(b) All frequency converters shall be reviewed and approved by the Navy prior to purchase and
installation.
2. Shielded Enclosure for Mission Control System (MCS): Following features apply.
T
(a) Lighting Level 50 FC (500 Lux), minimum.
(b) Dimmable lighting control

AF
(c) Redundant HVAC serviced from emergency generator power.
(d) Floor mounted receptacles at each workstation: 1-duplex 120V, 60Hz and 1-duplex 220V, 50 Hz.
(e) Dedicated circuits shall be provided for printers, copiers etc.
(f) UPS power for workstations and server room communication racks.
R
(g) All incoming power to the Shielded Enclosure shall be filtered. Power filters shall be installed/mounted
to the outside of the Enclosure.
3. Equipment located close to the aircraft wash area shall be protected with minimum IP54 (NEMA Type
D
4) enclosure. Switches and receptacles shall be protected with waterproof enclosures.
4. Special Power: In addition to UAE standard operating power (415/240V, 3P, 4W, 50Hz.), special power
shall also be provided in the following spaces. Contractor shall refer to the Facilities Requirement
Document (FRD) for detail requirements.
(a) Hot Bench Room: 208/120V, 3P, 4W, 400Hz and 250VAC, 3P.
(b) Avionics Work Center: 208/120V, 3P, 4W, 400Hz and 28VDC.
(c) Instrumentation Work Center: 208/120V, 3P, 4W, 400Hz and 28VDC
--End of Section--

Al Dhafra, UAE
E10 EQUIPMENT
E1010 COMMERCIAL EQUIPMENT

The contractor shall obtain the services of equipment specialists to specify specialty equipment.
Equipment specialists shall not have any affiliation with the product specified.
All specialty equipment will be installed by qualified installers regularly engaged in installing the
specialty equipment.
Provide energy using equipment per criteria listed in UFGS 01 33 29.05 20 Sustainability Reporting
for Design Build.
T
E101003 VENDING EQUIPMENT
AF
E101005 SECURITY AND VAULT EQUIPMENT
The Vault space shall be designed in accordance with criteria in MIL-HDBK-1013/1A to provide at
least 10 minutes of delay time against low and medium threat severity levels of forced entry.
R
Provide vault doors where indicated in the "Room Requirements."
Vault door shall be provided with a day gate.

D
E1020 INSTITUTIONAL EQUIPMENT
E102003 LABORATORY EQUIPMENT

E102009 AUDIOVISUAL EQUIPMENT

Under the construction contract, the general contractor shall be responsible for coordinating design
requirements with the end user/Command IT personnel, providing equipment specifications, and
procurement and installation of the Audiovisual (AV) equipment. As required, the contractor shall
obtain services of an audiovisual equipment specialist to design and specify the audiovisual
equipment.
AV Equipment including electronics potentially connected to data/IT, shall be coordinated with design
and construction but planned for and funded by the user or Budget Submitting Office sponsoring the
user. AV equipment shall include, but is not limited to: intercom/sound systems, smartboards, flat
screens, projectors, video teleconferencing, interactive wall systems and CCTVs. The AV equipment
PART 3 - CHAPTER 6 / ESR E10 - Page 1

Al Dhafra, UAE
will be funded as part of the FF&E Package.
E1030 VEHICULAR EQUIPMENT

E1040 GOVERNMENT FURNISHED EQUIPMENT

Rough-in and provide connections for Government-furnished equipment such that equipment will
operate as intended, including providing miscellaneous items such as plugs, receptacles, wire, cable,
conduit, flexible conduit and outlet boxes or fittings. Equipment shall remain in control of the
Government until such time as the Contractor is ready to install. Contractor shall provide 30 days
advance notice of expected installation date testing requirements of Government Furnished
equipment shall be the responsibility of the Contractor and shall follow the same guidelines as though
the Contractor had provided the equipment.
E1090 OTHER EQUIPMENT
T
E109002 PALLET RACKS
Provide heavy duty industrial shelving 96W x 48D x 120H with equally spaced shelved shelves, or
sized as called out in the room requirements forms.
AF
The basic components of the heavy duty industrial shelving shall be upright frames and beams.
Additional items to be supplied for this shelving shall be concrete floor anchors and wire deck
shelving.
Step Down Design: All beams shall have a step for the purpose of accepting accessories. Step
sizes shall be 7/8 and 1-5/8 high.
R
Beam Locking Key for Safety: A unique recessed safety key made from heavy gauge steel shall
slide into place. They shall resist an upward force from material handling equipment up to 1000
pounds. The key is an integral part of the beam assembly, can be engaged easily without tools, and
is clearly visible for checking.
D
Heavy Duty Beam End Connector: Beam ends shall be made from extra heavy gauge steel. They
feature a three prong connection which assures positive beam to post alignment along the 8-1/2
length of the connector, and uniform load distribution. Provide extra protection to the prongs during
transit and installation.
Welded Upright Frame Bracing: Upright frame columns shall be securely MIG welded together with
channel type braces for maximum rigidity.
Upright Column: Columns form an M design for added strength. Slanted slots on the column
allow for beam placement on 3 vertical centers. Slots on column sides shall accept the safety beam
locking key. The design allows for standard beams to be placed flush with the top, or as close as 9
from the floor.
Foot Plate: A heavy Gauge foot plate is securely welded to each post to provide positive load
distribution on 13.7 square inches minimum, and two 9/16 holes allow for floor anchoring on either
side of the frame. Standard duty footplates shall be 7ga. thick.
Pallet Rack Frames: Beam heights shall adjust on 3 vertical centers, and shall be independent on

Al Dhafra, UAE
each side of the frame. Various load rated frames can be combined in a row of rack for maximum
economy.
Provide pallet rack upright frames completely fabricated, welded into rigid units. Provide standard
finish for upright frames 028 gray baked enamel.
Install all upright frames securely; anchor to the floor for safety. Provide all anchors and attachment
hardware as required and recommended by the manufacturer for installation. Provide compliance
with all applicable codes and seismic requirements.
Pallet Rack Beams: Beam step height of 7/8 and 1-5/8 are available for a wide variety of accessory
use. Both the overlapping seam and the beam end connector are securely MIG welded for strength.
The face of the beam has an M-design recessed configuration for added strength, protecting the
locking key, and to accept pressure sensitive labeling. Each beam shall be stamped with an
indemnifying letter referring to the load bearing capacity. Beams shall be finished in yellow backed
enamel for high visibility. Provide pallet rack support beams with one ton, per pair, weight capacity,
unless otherwise called out in project program or E20.
Pallet Rack Accessories: Provide wire decks to span support beams.
T
Provide general duty cross bars for supporting heavier loads smaller than unit depth.
Provide heavy duty flanged cross bar to support heavier loads smaller than unit depth on 1-5/8 step
beams.
AF
Fork Clearance Bar: Provides proper fork clearance for unpalletized stock, 2 wide by 2-3/4 high.
Heavy Duty Skid Channel Assembly: Provides a channeled base for skid runners, 4 wide by 2
high.
R
Provide Frame Protector: Anchors to floor at front of post. Frame protector shall provide protection
against damage from material handling vehicles.
Decking: Provide wire decks.

D
Hardware: Provide hardware as needed to bolt units to the floor slab.
Size: See project program.
Color: Grey.
Manufacturer: Penco, style pallet rack; or approved equal.
--End of Section--

Al Dhafra, UAE
E20 FURNISHINGS
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Furnishings shall include fixed furnishings as part of the Structural Interior Design (SID) and the
design and documentation of the movable furnishings, the Furniture, Fixtures, and Equipment (FF&E)
Package.
The design and documentation of both shall be funded as part of the construction contract. The
purchase and installation of the FF&E Package shall be funded separately as part of Collateral
Equipment.
The movable furniture and furnishings (FF&E) for this facility may include, but are not limited to
movable furniture systems, freestanding furniture, , appliances, flat screen TVs (not connected to
data), accessories, shop equipment, specialty equipment (specified by the Activity) and other
T
miscellaneous items to support facility functions.
Fixed furnishings (items that are fixed to the structure), such as specialty equipment, drying cages,
weapon racks ,pallet racks, lockers, motorized projection screens, blinds/shades are part of the
AF
construction contract.

Design and provide fixed and movable furnishings for all areas as developed during Activity
programming and as indicated in the Room Requirements (refer to Part 3 Section 5 of this RFP).
Design a complete FF&E package and prepare supporting plans and procurement data. FF&E
R
items identified in this RFP are to be used as a guideline to assist in establishing the minimum facility
requirements and do not relieve the Contractor's Interior Designer from developing a complete design
package that incorporates ALL of the Activities FF&E requirements. FF & E Items listed in the Room
Requirements are minimum requirements and do not relieve the Contractors responsibility to provide
D
all items as spelled out in the attached Facilities Requirements Document. Design per specific UFC
(i.e. Youth center, BEQ, etc) and in conjunction with UFC 03-120-10, Interior Design. Design per the
Facilities Requirement Document that is attached to this RFP.
The contractor shall have an Interior Designer with a minimum of one of the following credentials:
National Council for Interior Design Qualification (NCIDQ) certification, or state and/or jurisdiction
Interior Design Certification, Registration, or License. This Interior Designer shall prepare both the
SID and the FF&E Package and shall participate in all design charrettes and review meetings to
develop the building design and floor plan. When Audio Visual (A/V), shop, or specialty equipment is
required in the project, the contractor shall obtain the services of equipment specialists to specify the
A/V, shop, or specialty equipment. The Contractor's Interior Designer and any Specialists shall not
have any affiliation with the products specified. The Governments Interior Designer reserves the
right to approve/disapprove the qualifications of the Contractor's Interior Designer.
All fixed and movable furnishings selections shall be closely coordinated with Parts 3 and 4 Sections
C10, Interior Construction, and C30 and E10 of this RFP. The FF&E package shall be fully integrated
with the building systems and finishes.
The Contractor's Interior Designer shall be responsible for designing and providing specifications for
procurement of all FF&E, to include delivery and installation, for the facilities built under this contract

Al Dhafra, UAE
as directed by the Governments Interior Designer. .
The FF&E package shall be fully integrated into the design and construction schedule for the building.
Consider furnishings relative to Section 01 33 29.05 20 Sustainability Reporting for Design Build and
UFC 01-200-02 High Performance and Sustainable Buildings.
INTERIOR DESIGN SUBMITTAL AND MEETING REQUIREMENTS

STRUCTURAL INTERIOR DESIGN (SID)
The SID submittal process shall begin following the award of the RFP. The SID submittal shall
include Interior Design programming documents, FF&E Floor Plans, interior signage plans/details,
and exterior & interior finish/color and material sample boards. Refer to this RFP Part 4 Section Z10
General Performance Technical Specifications and Part 2 UFGS Section 01 33 10.05 20, Design
Provide the following SID meetings and submittals;
a. Concept Design Workshop (CDW) (10%-15%) or Initial Design Meeting: The

Contractors Interior Designer shall develop the Interior Design SID programming
documents, which will include a preliminary Furniture and Equipment Plan and the FF &
T
E Summary List.
b. Design Development (35%-50%) Submittal: The Contractor's Interior Designer shall

AF
provide a conceptual Finish Schedule, proposing finish materials to be used in all spaces.
The Furniture and Equipment Plan and FF&E Summary List should be further developed
and included in this submittal. Once these proposed finishes and FF & E are approved
by the Government, SID and FF & E can continue to Prefinal submittal.
c. Prefinal (100%) Submittal: The Contractor's Interior Designer shall provide a submittal
that includes an updated Furniture and Equipment Plan, Finish Schedule, Floor Finish
R
Plan, Finish Legend, signage plans/details, and sample/color boards for review and
approval.
d. Final Submittal: The Contractor's Interior Designer shall incorporate the final approved
D
Furniture and Equipment Plan, Finish Schedule, Floor Finish Plan and Finish Legend,
signage plans/details, and sample/color boards into the Contractor's final document set.
These drawings and all approved finishes must be submitted in 8-1/2" x 11" binder
format, using heavy duty plastic sheet protectors. Six (6) sets of the Final SID Submittal
must be distributed as follows: USACE Project Manager, NAVFAC Project Manager, the
Activity, the USACE field office, and two (2) copies to USACE MED, Winchester, VA.
SID CONSTRUCTION SUBMITTALS
No substitutions shall be made to the SID finishes once they have been approved by the Government
during the design phase. In the event that revisions may be required due to unforeseen conditions
such as discontinued product, such revisions must be submitted via the COR for approval by the
Government Interior Designer before substitutions can be made.
FIXTURES, FURNISHINGS AND EQUIPMENT (FF&E)

The FF&E process shall begin immediately with the architectural effort. . The submittals shall include
fixtures, furnishings, and equipment specifications in accordance with the Activity requirements to

Al Dhafra, UAE
produce an optimally functional facility. FF&E are all items that are not fixed to the structure, but are
fully integrated with the building systems and finishes. Refer to RFP Part 4 Section Z10 General
Performance Technical Specification and Part 2 UFGS Section 01 33 1-.05 20, Design Submittal
Procedures.
Develop design as described and in accordance with the Activity requirements. Include in the design
all loose furnishings required to produce an optimum functional facility, consistent with quality
commercial design. This project also includes the preparation of specific detailed information for
each selected item. Each submittal must demonstrate interaction thoroughly with the Activity
requirements and complete coordination with the facility design and the SID. Six (6) sets of the Final
FF&E Submittal must be distributed as follows: one each to the USACE Project Manager, NAVFAC
Project Manager, the Activity, the USACE field office, and two (2) copies to USACE MED, Winchester,
VA.
For all projects, including fast track projects, the contractor is responsible for sufficiently scheduling all
SID/FF&E submittals early enough to obtain the required government approvals, and meeting all
ordering and installation lead times to complete the project by the contract completion date.
These are minimum requirements and the Contractor must be prepared to provide any/all additional
meetings and submittals that may be necessary to support the Interior Design effort/FF&E
T
coordination.
Provide the following FF&E meetings and submittals;
a.
AF
FF & E Concept (10-15%)Presentation: The Contractors Interior Designer shall present
main preliminary FF & E selections for approval. This presentation can include loose
format samples and catalog cuts for an over the shoulder review. Sample boards are
not required. This over the shoulder review shall be arranged with the Governments
Interior Designer at a location convenient to the government/governments interior
designer. After the Governments Interior Designer approves the (10-15%) concept
selections, the Contractors Interior Designer shall continue on developing the approved
concepts to the next schedule milestone, the (65%) Design Development review.
R
b. Design Development (65%): The Contractors Interior Designer shall continue

developing the FF & E using the approved concept selections. The FF & E package
D
shall be presented with the rest of the architectural package at roughly 65% completion
status for this Design Development review.
c. Preliminary FF&E Submittal: The Preliminary FF&E submittal shall be due at pre-final
(100%). It shall be presented to the Activity and Government Interior Designer.
Submit (2) sets of the following in a 3-ring binder (with the exception of the 16x20 color
boards) (1) each for both Activity and Government Interior Designer review and approval:
1. Cover Title Page (project name, project #, submittal date, submittal title)
2. FF&E list (Cost Summary)
3. Furniture placement plans coded to the FF& list and furnishings specifications
4. Specifications for furniture, furnishings, etc.
5. Catalog cuts and finish samples for all specified items
6. 16x20 inch color boards of furniture/furnishings and finishes (including SID) specified

Al Dhafra, UAE
for Activity presentation to indicate overall design intent. Boards shall show integration
of SID and FF & E finishes.
7. 8x10 color photographs of the color boards
d. Final FF&E Submittal: The Contractor's Interior Designer shall submit the Final FF&E
Package following the receipt and incorporation of review comments on the preliminary
FF&E submittal. The Final submittal shall include the following:
1. Cover Title Page (project name, project #, submittal date, submittal title)
2. Table of Contents
3. Manufacturer Contact List
4. Specifications for furniture, furnishings, and equipment
5. Procurement Data Sheets for each product indicating final finish and fabric selections
6. CD copy of the final FF&E binder.
T
7. Final Finish Selections and Memo Samples for the FF&E submitted in 8x10 binder
format, using heavy-duty plastic sheet protectors
AF
8. 8x10 color photographs of the color boards showing overall design intent and
integration of SID with FF & E
FF&E CONSTRUCTION SUBMITTALS

Submit any revisions or deviations caused by discontinued items to the Contracting Officer for
R
approval by the Government Interior Designer.
Operation and Maintenance Manuals for seating, systems furniture and keyboard trays.
D
E2010 FIXED FURNISHINGS (SID)

Fixed furnishings (SID) are funded as part of the construction project and are not funded as part of
FF&E Each submittal must demonstrate complete coordination with the facility design and with the
package for movable furnishings.
Develop design as described herein and provide storage shelving, equipment racks,
whiteboards/bulletin boards, and window treatments. Cross reference C10 Interior Construction, and
C30 Interior Finishes, for possible further performance requirements. Each submittal must
demonstrate complete coordination with the facility design and with the package for movable
furnishings.
PALLET RACKS
Provide pallet racks as described and called out in the Room Requirements. Provide pallet racks
that are designed and installed in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations and best
practices. Provide wire shelving if no other information is provided. Provide shelving that conforms

Al Dhafra, UAE
to all applicable codes and standards, including fire protection and seismic. Provide warehouse and
pallet rack layouts with aisles to accommodate a forklift.
A. Pallet rack 48d x 96w x 120high with (4) shelves spaced equally or as directed by the COR.
Provide (1) ton capacity, minimum, per shelf with weight equally distributed. Coordinate with
COR for exact shelf spacing and clear dimensions shelf to shelf before any pallet racks are
ordered or installed. See E109002 for other pallet rack information and requirements.
WHITEBOARDS
Provide markerboards/whiteboards with porcelain on steel writing surfaces. Provide a storage rail and
markers and erasers with all markerboards/whiteboards. Coordinate with building construction to
include appropriate blocking or structural support for the installation of markerboards and tackboards.
Provide 1828mm x 1219mm(72x48) markerboards/whiteboards in general use areas. Provide
609mm x 914mm (24x36) whiteboards for individual workstation usage.
CELL PHONE LOCKERS
Provide steel cell phone lockers at the entrance to every area that has Siprnet COM provisions. The
quantity of cell phone spaces shall equal the maximum occupancy of the room. Provide wall blocking
T
and install/wall mount the lockers in accordance with manufacturers recommendations.
E201001 FIXED ARTWORK

AF
As required, provide wall mosaic, painted mural, graphics and/or logo of activity in appropriate
locations.
Provide artwork in Corridors at minimum of every 5 meters. Provide framed Black and White
photographic prints of site specific noteworthy regional landscapes and monuments or graphic
photographs of current Navy ships and/or aircraft. Artwork shall be matted and framed. Overall
framed piece shall be approximately .914 x .6096m.
R
E201002 WINDOW TREATMENTS

All windows and other glazed openings to the exterior of the building shall be provided with aluminum
D
horizontal blinds and are considered SID and are funded as part of the construction project.
Soft window treatments, such as draperies (not to include stage curtains), are considered FF&E and
shall be included in the FF&E package, as required.
E201003 FIXED SEATING AND TABLES

As required, but not limited to, provide fixed locker room benches, and site furniture.
Provide locker room benches.
E2020 MOVABLE FURNISHINGS

The design of the FF&E package is funded as part of the construction contract base bid. The
purchase and installation coordination of FF&E is a planned modification to the contract and funded
separately as part of Collateral Equipment.
Design and provide a FF&E package in accordance with UFC 03-120-10, Interior Design, and other
portions of this RFP for all areas as developed during Activity programming to provide a fully usable

Al Dhafra, UAE
and complete facility. Items shall comply with all applicable codes and standards including
ANSI/BIFMA.
FF&E may also include specialty items specified by the Activity and the Contractor's Interior Designer
is responsible for incorporating these into the FF&E package. NSN numbers are provided for
reference, for many items, in the Facilities Requirements Document which is attached to this RFP.
User provided equipment that is not in contract (N.I.C.) but necessary to the functioning of this facility
shall all be located on the furniture floor plan and marked N.I.C.. This shall include all equipment that
is COM connected such as printers, copiers, and televisions, etc.. Televisions that are not connected
to COM shall be provided in the FF & E package.
Provide all appropriate information security protection equipment such as safes, paper media
shredder, electronic media degausser, etc. All information security protection equipment shall comply
with D0D 5200.1-R, D0D Information Security Program.
The FF&E Package cost estimate shall include shipping, freight, handling, and professional
installation, project management, and HAR.
The Contractor, as a planned modification, shall be authorized by the Government Contracting Officer
T
to procure all furniture/furnishings in the approved final FF&E package. When the modification for
turnkey furniture procurement is exercised, the Contractor's proposed Handling and Administrative
Rate (HAR) shall not exceed 5% of the total cost of the FF&E, shipping, freight, handling, and
installation. The HAR includes all of the prime contractor's effort related to the storage, coordination,
AF
handling and administration of subcontractors, and all other associated costs and profit for the
procurement of FF&E. No other charges, fees, or markups will be authorized. The contractor shall
establish and submit a fixed percentage figure, for the administration effort of this modification (HAR),
with the initial project proposal as part of the contractor's Pricing Schedule.
E202002 MODULAR PREFABRICATED FURNITURE

R
Provide Workstation systems product or modular freestanding workstations as required. Provide at a
minimum, an articulating keyboard tray with left or right handed mouse extension for each computer
location. Provide a desk or workstation for each person as required in the Room Requirements.
D
Freestanding desk component workstations shall be provided for workers in all areas. Provide the
free standing desking components with half height modesty panels to access wall electrical and data
outlets. For general office areas, provide components of steel construction with high pressure
plastic laminate tops (HPL). Provide an overhead storage hutch with flipper doors or storage
wardrobe, tack board, and task light. Provide a pedestal, B/B/F, with a pencil drawer insert and
hanging file frames that accommodate paper sizes common to the area. Provide a F/F pedestal as
required. Provide an articulated keyboard tray with left or right handed mouse pad and with a
variable height range for each desk workstation.
Desks, and printer desks,, shall be (72 x 30) 1828 x 762 mm with (1) Box/box/file pedestal, with an
articulated keyboard tray with left or right handed mouse pad and with a variable height range.
Office desks with file storage shall be (72 x 30) 1828 x 762 mm with pencil drawer and file/file
pedestal, and with stack on hutch (including tack board and undershelf task light),, and with an
articulated keyboard tray with left or right handed mouse pad and with a variable height range.
Workstation or desk workstation shall be a (72 x 72) 1828 x 1828 mm, L-shaped desk workstation
with stack on hutch (including tack board and undershelf task light), (1)file/file pedestal, (1)box/box/file
pedestal,with an articulated keyboard tray with left or right handed mouse pad and with a variable
height range.

Al Dhafra, UAE
Private offices in upgraded areas shall be provided with transitional style executive level hardwood
veneer desk components with high pressure laminate (HPL) woodgrain tops that match desk veneer.
Desks shall be specified in a light colored hardwood veneer to minimize the showing of dust.
For single person private executive offices, provide a U-shaped desk( breakfront) with stack-on
storage unit (with under work shelf task light and tack board) on credenza section, files drawers, box
drawers, and pencil drawer, bookcase (1) executive leather task chair, (2) executive side chairs.
All desk components shall be from the same manufacturer, style line, and finish.
For multiple person executive private offices, provide each person with a hardwood veneer L-shaped
desk with stack-on storage unit (with under work shelf task light and tack board), box drawer, file
drawer, pencil drawer, bookcase, executive leather task chairs. All desk components shall be from
the same manufacturer, style line, and finish. Desks shall be specified in a light colored hardwood
veneer to minimize the showing of dust.
All desk components within the workstation shall be from the same manufacturer, style line, and
finish.
Provide articulating desk mounted monitor mounts for multiple computer monitors as described in the
Room Requirements.
T
E202003 FREESTANDING FURNITURE
Provide ergonomic task seating, lounge, reception and guest seating, storage and filing, tables, as
AF
required.
SEATING
Task Seating
Provide task seating that is fully ergonomic and coordinated by finish and scale to the workstation.
R
Provide high performance fabrics with a minimum of (Wyzenbeck) 100,000 double rubs of durability.
Seating specifications to include: all adjustable arms, back, height, and seat pan; 5 star base,
appropriate castors for floor surface, lumbar support and availability in a minimum of two (2) sizes.
Provide swivel, tilt, variable back lock, and contoured seat and back with waterfall front seat edge.
D
All task chairs shall have an adjustable seat height range of 4 , with the range to include 16
-20.Task seating can be from the same manufacturer as the desk systems or major furniture
supplier or other seating manufacturer as approved by the Government Interior Designer.
Because of advanced functionality requirements for the MCS areas, for all MCS areas, task chairs
shall be the Herman Miller Aeron chair, or approved equal, with all available Herman Miller Aeron
chair ergonomic and functional features. Chairs other than the Aeron chair that are submitted for
approval as to equality with the Herman Miller Aeron chair shall have passed ergonomic and Human
Factors testing by the NGC Navy HMI team.
Provide executive task chairs with same specifications as task seating, but with leather upholstery.
Provide coordinating side chairs in leather upholstery.
Provide task stools with a foot ring for a seat height that is compatible for work tables and benches
with a stand-up height. Stools shall have an adjustable back. Coordinate seating with actual height of
work tables and benches.
All seating shall support up a minimum of 300 pounds.
In workstations and offices, provide side/guest chairs that are compatible in style, finish, and color

Al Dhafra, UAE
with the desk chairs.
At conference tables, provide ergonomic conference seating with castors, non-upholstered arms,
waterfall front, swivel, tilt, pneumatic seat height adjustment, and padded, contoured seat and back,
unless otherwise noted. Provide arm height and/or design that allows seating to be moved up
closely to the table top. Conference chair backs may be other than upholstered such as mesh fabric
if it is ergonomically designed, forms to back and is comfortable. Provide perimeter stacking
conference room side chairs, if required, that are compatible in style, finish, and color with the
conference seating at the tables.
Training Room Seating
Provide seating with passive ergonomic features in that the seat and back offers some synchronized
movement to allow the person seated to change positions. The support can be legs, sled base or
single pedestal with 5 star base and casters as determined by user requirements. Provide high
density stack chairs or nesting chairs as required. Provide attached, storable tablet arm as required.
If upholstered, provide high performance fabrics with a minimum of (Wyzenbeck) 100,000 double rubs
of durability. Provide seating that supports a minimum of 300 pounds.
TABLES
T
Training Tables
Provide 2 person sized work surfaces or training tables as determined from user requirements.
AF
Training tables shall nest for storage. Where computers are used (assume usage if no information is
available), provide tables with wire management capability or pre-wired tables to accommodate
data/telecommunications requirements. Powered raceways that will accommodate data and voice
wire management shall be completely coordinated with all facility systems. The Contractor shall
ensure the coordination of all electrical/data and furniture locations. The Contractor shall provide and
coordinate all telecommunication receptacles and outlet requirements, hardwire all pre-wired furniture
with the building systems and coordinate all IT and telephone connections. No power poles shall be
accepted.
R
Provide conference tables with table top electrical and COM. Provide wire handling bases to route
wires and cables. Contractor shall provide floor outlets coordinated with the table locations in
conference rooms to conceal, protect, and hide cables. Provide under table top wire management. In
D
executive conference rooms, provide upgraded finishes on table trims and bases. Provide all
conference tables with HPL tops. Provide executive conference tables with woodgrain HPL with
matching hardwood edges and substantial wire handling bases. Provide an audio/visual cabinet to
match the conference table in style and finish as required.
Provide general use table tops with flat vinyl edges. No self-edges shall be accepted. Provide
these tables with T, X or pedestal bases set back from table edges so that chairs can be pulled up on
all four sides. Provide adjustable glides. Table tops shall be constructed to prevent warping or
sagging.
Provide tables to support User provided cases and printers as described in the Facilities
Requirements Document. Tables shall be wide enough to support the multiple cases and equipment
that will be located on them. Generally, 7-8w x 3d x 2.5h is required.
WORKBENCHES
Provide industrial steel workbenches or worktables with laminated hardwood maple butcherblock
tops, or electrically safe workbenches as required. All workbenches shall be provided with standing
heights. Provide worksurface electrical provisions as required. Steel legs are to be constructed with

Al Dhafra, UAE
reinforcing stringer. No span of greater than 609mm (24) shall be unsupported by steel structure.
The top shall be constructed to prevent bowing or sagging. Provide levelling glides on all four legs.
Provide a durable steel finish. All structural components shall be welded. Workbenches shall be
approximately 72 x 36 by 36. The following types shall be required:
Work tables shall have steel top, shall be 36 x 72 x 36, and shall be provided with no backsplash or
shelf, or below worksurface storage.
Work benches shall be provided with hardwood butcherblock tops and shall be 36 x 72 x 36.
Work bench with risers shall be provided with hardwood butcherblock top shall be 36 x 72 x 36,
shelf riser and below worksurface storage.
(ESD)Electrically Safe Workbench: Provide 36 x 72 x 36 workbench with back splash and upper
shelf and under worksurface cabinet storage. Worksurfaces shall be ESD protective work surfaces.
Work surfaces shall be connected to a ground through a ground cable. Workbench shall be provided
with electrical outlets and shall be earth grounded. Provide an electrical grade rubber matt in front of
the workbench. Assemble and install according to manufacturers recommendations and best
practices. Workbenches shall be IAW MIL-HDBK-263B, and Mil-STD-1686. Provide/install
recommended safety signs and label plates.
T
STORAGE AND FILING
Provide freestanding storage units, file cabinets and file safes to accommodate the specific and
AF
unique storage requirements of the user.
Provide pedestals that are interchangeable from left to right, and right to left, and retain pedestal
locking system capability. All pedestal drawers shall stay securely closed when in the closed position
and protect wires from damage during drawer operation. Each drawer shall also contain a safety
catch to prevent accidental removal when fully open. When freestanding or mobile pedestals are
used, equip them with counterweights. Provide integral pulls. Provide locks.
R
Provide steel lateral files with fully enclosed welded steel bodies of minimum 22 ga. steel with 18-20
ga reinforcements. Tops and drawers shall be minimum of 20 ga. steel. Provide counterweights for
filing cabinets when required by the manufacturer for stability. Provide file drawers that allow only
one drawer to be opened at a time. Provide file drawer storage that is equipped with hanging file
D
frames sized appropriately for the paper size that is common in the area. Drawer suspension slides
shall be full extension, progressive, heavy duty steel. Provide locks and leveling glides.
Provide steel bookcases with (5) adjustable shelves. Case construction shall be 20-22 ga. steel.
Provide steel storage cabinets with (2) doors and (4-5) interior adjustable shelves. The storage
cabinet shall be freestanding and be equipped with adjustable glides. The wardrobes shall match
lateral file construction specifications including steel gauges, bracing, etc.
Provide steel wardrobes with interiors customized for both personal and work-related storage with file
storage and box drawers, storage compartment with door, and coat storage with door. The steel case
body shall have a fully finished steel back and shall be equally and fully finished on all interior and
exterior surfaces. The wardrobe shall be freestanding and be equipped with adjustable glides. The
wardrobes shall match lateral file construction specifications including steel gauges, bracing, etc.
Provide storage and shelving units that meet customers functional load requirements for stored
items. Provide heavy duty storage and shelving if information is not available. In that case, provide
Industrial Shelving 24d x 48w x 72, or 24d x 96w x 72, high with adjustable shelves, as called out
in the Room Requirements. Shelves shall be wire mesh. Maximize shelving. Each shelf shall

Al Dhafra, UAE
support 400-600 pounds. Provide floor attachments.
For lighter weight applications, use heavy duty add-on shelving, provide adjustable steel shelves,
solid steel construction, and either a full closed back or else cross bracing to prevent sway. Shelves
shall be adjustable.
Hazmat cabinets/lockers shall be constructed of 14 and 18 gauge steel with double walls construction
and spill containment. Cabinet shall have a 30 gal. capacity. The cabinet shall meet OSHA
requirements and NFPA Code 30 requirements. Size: approximately 48x22x35. Provide cabinets
that are designed to safely store workshop specific expected items, whether flammable, corrosive
acid, etc.
Tool drawer units shall be configured to store expected tools common to the shop area. Provide
Stanley Vidmar or equal product.
Safe or safe file shall be a class 6 secure storage file with 4 drawers or sized as described in the Room
Requirements. The file shall provide 30 man minutes against covert entry, 20 man hours against
surreptitious entry, and 10 man minutes against forced entry. The file shall be an approved container
under GSA Federal Specification AA-F-358H.
T
E202004 ACCESSORIES
Provide clocks, desktop signage, lamps, soft window treatments (drapery and hardware), and other
accessory items as required. Provide a wall clock in every office/administration space See Room
AF
Requirements for the specific type of wall clock. If a wall clock is not mentioned, provide a standard
wall clock.
Provide a standard commercial quality steel clock as required in the Room Requirements. Provide an
electric model with wireless time technology to synchronize facility clocks. The clock shall be
approximately 16 in diameter with a polished chrome case. Numbers shall be bold and sans serif
for clarity. Install in accordance with manufacturers recommendations.
R
Provide a 5 location (time zone) digital wall clocks as required in the Room Requirements. Clocks
shall be provided with LED letters for the synchronized time locations and the synchronized times.
The clock shall have a black frame with non-glare lens and super bright LED numbers and letters.
D
Character height shall be minimum 4. Clock shall connect to building power and also have battery
back-up. Provide a remote control. Provide blocking and install in accordance with manufacturers
recommendations. Provide a security mount. Dimensions: approximately (10 x 80 x 1.5) 254 x
2032 x 38mm
Provide desk mounted workstation signage that coordinates in style/type/color with building signage.
Signage shall be freestanding desk top signage. Signage shall be composed, at a minimum, of
aluminum frame, back panel, clear plastic cover, and standing device. Signage shall be approximately
.0508m high x .1778m long (2 high x7 long). Insert channel shall be minimum .0254 m (1 high) and
capable of receiving standard white paper insert. Text type and general appearance of signs shall
match building signage. Signage insert shall be provided with name of occupant for each
workstation/desk. Names will be provided by the COR (Contracting Officers Representative) before
installation. Furnish software for creating text in PC computers for owner production of paper inserts
after project completion.
E202090 OTHER MOVABLE FURNISHINGS

Provide fire retardant (FR) waste receptacles, FR recycling containers, fire extinguishers, - literature
racks, washers, dryers, microwaves, refrigerators, T.V.s, non-plumbed coffee pots, and other
appliances as required.

Al Dhafra, UAE
Provide 3.5 gal. personal sized FR wastebaskets in fiberglass, for every desk, workstation, work
bench or work table.
Provide large 44-50 gal. sized FR garbage containers with lids as required. Lids shall be removable
drop and swing to provide easy access for refuse disposal and to hide refuse from view. Provide a
large garbage container with swing lid in every toilet room or locker room. Provide a large garbage
container with swing lid in every conference room, training room, or other larger gathering spaces.
Provide upgraded garbage containers in upgraded areas.
Provide a 31 gal. anodized garbage can with lid in each shop area.
Provide 92 gal. capacity, 4 compartment recycling containers with (4) 23 gal. compartments. Lids
shall be hinged and interchangeable with shaped openings for specific recyclables. Provide a
recycling container in each break room or area.
If no other information is provided in the Room Requirements, provide each workstation, at minimum,
with either an under shelf task light or a desk lamp for lighting. Desk light shall be from same
manufacturer as the systems furniture. Desk lamp shall be articulated at three points and be
adjustable.
T
Provide commercial stainless steel appliances rated for energy savings. All refrigerators shall be
auto defrost.
Provide approximately 72 flatscreen LED T.V.s that are HD multi system TV's (PAL and NTSC
AF
capable. T.V.s shall be wall mounted with manufacturers recommended tilt adjustable wall
brackets. Provide wall blocking to reinforce wall mount bracket. Televisions shall provide a
minimum of (1) USB port, (1) VGA video port, (1) DVI port, and ethernet. Resolution shall be 1080P
with a minimum of 120 hz refresh rate. Contrast ratio shall be a minimum of 1,000,000:1. 2x HDMI
shall be provided. Provide coaxial connection capability. Voltage shall be 110-240. Provide a
flatscreen T.V.as required, in all locations that are not connected to communications wiring.
Televisions shall be compatible with all base electrical and COM standards.
R
Provide bubble wrap holders as required. Portable Bubble wrap holder shall be a steel framed roll
stand with castors and hold down bar for dispensing bubble wrap. Use Riverside Paper Company
ZZ-CR-RSC4048 or approved equal. Provide an equivalent bubble wrap holder that is wall mounted
as listed in the Room Requirements.
D
Provide high security cross cut shredders that is a Security Level -7 shredder and are GSA approved
for the destruction of top secret documents. Provide a waste volume of approximately 45 gal. and
can shred 12000 sheets per day.
--End of Section--

Al Dhafra, UAE
F10 SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Special Construction shall include special structures such as pre-engineered buildings.
F1010 SPECIAL STRUCTURES
F101001 METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS (PRE-ENGINEERED)

Provide the building foundation and other systems in accordance with UFC 3-301-01, Structural
T
Engineering and UFC 4-211-01N, Aircraft Maintenance Hangars, Type I, II, and III.
Pre-engineered metal buildings shall comply in all regards with the requirements of traditional
construction.
AF
Pre-engineered metal buildings may be considered for utility structures such as sunshades and
equipment enclosures. Buildings shall have thermal resistance to comply with ASHRAE 90.1
standards for its use.
The framing system for the steel structure shall be in accordance with AISC M016, except that end
frames may be of rigid frame or beam and column design.
R
See ESR A10 and B10 for structural loading data requirements.
See ESR D10 for the Weight Handling Equipment and load requirements for the structure to
accommodate.
D
F101002 TENSIONED FABRIC COVERED HANGAR

(PRE-ENGINEERED)
The structure membrane shall be tensioned over a rigid steel frame structure which is fabricated and
assembled in accordance with NFPA 409 Section 9.1.1. The footprint of the structure shall be
rectangular in shape. The interior of the structure below the main arch shall be clear and free of any
structural members and shall provide unobstructed floor space.
Roof and Wall Surfaces: To provide for maximum compatibility with standard door, window,
ventilation, and other accessory and cladding systems, the structure shall be designed such that the
roof and gable side wall surfaces to receive these elements form flat planes.
Purlin Spacing: To provide for structural stability, to minimize unsupported areas of membrane fabric
in the roof and to provide for installation of accessory items, the main structural trusses shall be
laterally braced by tubular purlins.
Mechanical Equipment Interface: The main structural roof trusses shall allow for installation of
PART 3 - CHAPTER 6 / ESR F10 - Page 1

Al Dhafra, UAE
electrical and mechanical equipment between the inner and outer surfaces of the truss framework.
Likewise, the structure shall accept penetrations through the membrane for access doors and
mechanical services with minimal modification.
Structure Membrane: the noncombustible membrane covered frame structure shall be classified as
Type IIB construction and shall comply with the requirements set forth in chapter 31 Special
Construction of the IBC. The building envelope shall be a PVC coated weather tight woven polyester
fabric tensioned over an arched structural frame. The membrane shall meet the requirements of
NFPA 701. Fire retardant and waterproof shall be a minimum 28oz per square yard coated weight
with a Class A Flame Spread of 25 or less. The UV stabilized fabric shall be treated with a fungicide
and have a projected life expectancy of 15-20 years; a tensile strength of 440/435 pounds/inch
minimum, trapezoidal tear of 60/56 lbs and shall be minimum 23 mils in thickness. Flashing
materials shall be as recommended by the tension fabric building manufacturer. The color shall be
selected from the manufacturers standard product line. The extent to which translucent fabric
panels are used for natural lighting must be coordinated with the building HVAC design to minimize
hear gain while maximizing the benefits of natural lighting.
--End of Section--
T
AF
R
D
PART 3 - CHAPTER 6 / ESR F10 - Page 2

Al Dhafra, UAE
G10 SITE PREPARATION

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Provide site preparation that supports project sustainability goals.
The site preparation system consists of site clearing, demolition, salvage, utility relocation, and earthwork
necessary to ready the site for other work associated with the project.
Develop the project site and perform all off-site work necessary to meet the requirements of the project,
antiterrorism criteria, local codes, reference standards, technical specifications and performance criteria.
All site work shall meet the requirements for clearance and airspace in accordance with UFC 3-260-01, Airfield
T
and Heliport Planning and Design and the Triton Facility Requirements Document. Construction Phasing Plan
and Operational Safety on Airfields During Construction must be submitted and approved before start of
construction. The work will require close coordination with airfield operations on the Refueler Apron.
AF
The Contractor is required to perform a topographic survey in accordance with FC 1-300-09N, Design
Procedures. Include this topographic survey in all design submittals. The existence, size and/or location of the
utilities are not guaranteed information provided. Verify the location of all utilities prior to construction.
Minimize the impact of construction activity on operations and neighboring facilities.
Identify and obtain all permits to comply with all Host Nation and Al Dhafra Air Base requirements associated
R
with this work. Submit a complete "Permits Record of Decision" (PROD) form with the first design submittal
package. A blank PROD form can be obtained at the Download Tab of Part 6 of the NAVFAC Design-Build
website at the following link http://ndbm.wbdg.org/system/html/6/453 . Determine correct permit fees and pay
said fees. Forward copies of all permits, permit applications, and the completed PROD form to the
D
Government's Civil Reviewer and Environmental Reviewer. Perform work in accordance with the obtained
permits.
Coordinate and obtain the Contracting Officer's approval for proposed haul route(s), work site access point(s),
employee parking location(s) and material laydown and storage area(s).
Refer to Site Analysis and Building Requirements Sections for additional site preparation functional program
information.
GOVERNMENT PROVIDED GEOTECHNICAL INFORMATION
Subsurface soil information from the 2003 Coalition Forces Apron and 2004 Refueler Ramp projects,
immediately adjacent to the project site, is included in Part 6 of this RFP. The contractor is responsible for
conducting a site specific geotechnical investigation in accordance with UFC 3-260-02 Chapter 5 and as
specified in this RFP.
Any included subsurface information is only for the Contractor's information and is not guaranteed to fully
represent all subsurface conditions. The Government will not be responsible for any interpretation or
conclusion by the Contractor drawn from the data or information.
PART 3 - CHAPTER 6 / ESR G10 - Page 1

Al Dhafra, UAE
Any geotechnical report accompanying the subsurface information is provided only to better convey data
(boring logs, testing, etc.) or to document observed site conditions. The assumptions, analysis, and
recommendations of any accompanying report were developed for preliminary planning purposes only and may
not reflect present project requirements. The Contractor is required to retain a Geotechnical Engineer
experienced and licensed in the geographic region of the project to interpret the Government provided
information as related to his design concept and develop geotechnical requirements to support design and
construction.
Anticipate minor variations in subsurface conditions between testing locations. The Contractor is responsible
for all costs associated with the site preparation, ground improvement and foundations except as allowed by
Contract Clause FAR 52.236-2, "Differing Site Conditions". The Contractor's Geotechnical Engineer must
perform additional subsurface investigation/testing as required to adequately determine all applicable
geotechnical factors including the type and capacity of the project foundations. The Contractor's Geotechnical
Engineer is required to evaluate the provided information and any additional information obtained and prepare a
report as described in other portions of this RFP. The minimum requirements for the subsurface investigation
and report are as required by FC 1-300-09N with associated references.
As a minimum, the Contractor shall excavate 10 test pits to a depth of 1.5 m below finished graded or
to rock, whichever is shallower, and supplementary laboratory classification of soils encountered, on
the building site to support the foundation design.
T
The contractor is responsible for the site specific geotechnical investigation, perform field and
laboratory testing, and provide supporting calculations. The geotechnical investigation shall be
performed in accordance with EM 1110-1-1804 and Part 4 Section G10 of this RFP.
AF
The contractor is responsible for, the site specific geotechnical investigation, performing field and laboratory
testing, and providing supporting calculations.
Observed site conditions which may present a challenge during design/construction include - The soils that will
be exposed after completion of stripping will be soft and at or near the groundwater elevation. The Contractor
will anticipate these marginal subgrade support conditions and incorporate measures into his design and
construction procedures to obtain required soil support while maintaining progress for completion on schedule.
R
Personnel under the supervision of a registered Professional Engineer shall provide inspection of excavations
and soil/groundwater conditions throughout construction. The Engineer is required to perform pre-construction
and periodic site visits throughout construction to assess site conditions. The Engineer, with the concurrence of
the Contractor and the Contracting Officer, is required to update the excavation, sheeting, shoring and
D
dewatering plans as construction progresses to reflect actual site conditions and is required to submit the
updated plan and a written report (with professional stamp) at least monthly informing the Contractor and
Contracting Officer of the status of the plan and an accounting of Contractor adherence to the plan; specifically
addressing any present or potential problems. The Engineer must be available to meet with the Contracting
Officer at any time throughout the contract duration. The Contractor is responsible for all costs of the
Engineer.
G1010 SITE CLEARING
G101001 CLEARING
The project site does not have saleable timber.
Burning will not be permitted.
G101002 TREE REMOVAL


Al Dhafra, UAE
G101003 STUMP REMOVAL

G101004 GRUBBING
G101005 SELECTIVE THINNING

G101006 DEBRIS DISPOSAL

Dispose of all grubbing and clearing residue, demolished material, rubbish and debris generated by this project
by hauling off-site and off station to an approved location and in accordance with Host Nation regulations.
G1020 SITE DEMOLITION & RELOCATIONS
T
Demolition includes but is not limited to apron shoulder and other pavements, area lighting, apron
and taxiway edge lighting. Coordinate utility outages with the Contractor Officer Representative and
Base Civil Engineer. Relocate transformer and high voltage line. Relocate electric to area lighting.
AF
Area lighting poles and lights may be reused based on final lighting design. If not reused salvage for
turnover to the base.
Salvage removed edge lights for turnover to the base.
G102001 BUILDING MASS DEMOLITION

R
G102002 ABOVEGROUND SITE DEMOLITION

D
Demolish apron and taxiway shoulders as need for new pavement construction. Any damaged
portion of existing pavements shall be repaired or replaced by the contractor at no expense to the
government. Demolish and remove existing AGE Yard concrete pavement. Demolish and salvage
area light poles and lighting. Demolish and remove light pole foundations. All demolition shall be
disposed off base at the contractors expense.
G102002 1.1 ABOVEGROUND STORAGE TANKS

G102003 UNDERGROUND SITE DEMOLITION

Do not abandon in place utilities underneath or within 10 feet (3.0 m) of any new facilities or under any airfield
pavement. Remove and relocate existing utility piping, conduits, and utility structures under the proposed
building and airfield pavements. Except for communications lines along the existing taxiway, fuel lines along
the north side of the Refueler Apron, and the fire water line along the north side of the Refueler Apron.

Al Dhafra, UAE
All conduits must be removed.
Remove piping to be abandoned
Remove existing utility structures in their entirety including light pole foundations.
Fill all excavated areas with compacted select fill.
G102003 1.1 UNDERGROUND STORAGE TANKS

G102004 BUILDING RELOCATION
G102005 UTILITY RELOCATION
T
Comply with the requirements of the base Public works Department and/or Host nation concerning the utility
relocation. See Section G30 for utility connection requirements.
AF
G102006 FENCING RELOCATION
The existing fence is to remain except where demolition is required for taxiway construction. The contractor shall
maintain the fence during construction and replace any damaged fence with similar materials at no cost to the
government. G102007 SITE CLEANUP
Remove debris and rubbish in a manner that prevents spillage on streets or adjacent areas and in
R
accordance with Host Nation regulations. Dispose of all debris and rubbish in a legal manner in
accordance with Host Nation laws and regulations. The distance to the disposal area in unknown but is
assumed to be within 50 kilometers of the project site.
D
G102090 OTHER SITE DEMOLITION & RELOCATIONS

Remove any stockpiled soil and debris from the site. Soil meeting Specification 31 00 00
Earthwork may be reused on the site. Remove any aggregate surface materials and exposed base
course materials. Aggregates meeting Specification 31 00 00 Earthwork may be reused on the site as
fill.
G1030 SITE EARTHWORK
G103001 GRADING
Provide finish floor elevations for new facilities and elevations for mechanical/electrical equipment pads in
accordance with UFC 1-200-01, General Building Requirements and UFC 3-201-01, Civil Engineering.
Provide slope and grade of airfield pavements in accordance with UFC 3-260-01, Airfield and Heliport
Planning and Design and Federal Aviation Administration Advisory Circular 150/5320-5 Airport
Drainage Design.

Al Dhafra, UAE
G103002 COMMON EXCAVATION

Common excavation shall consist of all materials found on the site and shall be in accordance with
UFGS 31 00 00, Earthworks.
G103003 ROCK EXCAVATION

Blasting will not be permitted.
G103004 FILL & BORROW

Fill material beyond what is available from the site shall be provide by the contractor from an off site borrow
source. All materials and work shall be in accordance with UFGS 31 00 00 Earthwork.
G103005 COMPACTION
The following methods of soil compaction shall not be allowed: water flooding or water jetting.
Compaction requirements shall be in accordance with UFGS 31 00 00 Earthwork. The underlying
T
sug-grade material shall be compacted to a minimum depth of 150 millimeters. Compact soil fill to a
minimum 98% Modified Proctor Density (ASTM D 1557) and within -1% and +2% of optimum moisture
content. Compact graded crushed aggregate base course to 100% Modified Proctor Density and within
AF
-1% and +2% of optimum moisture content.
G103006 SOIL STABILIZATION

The following methods of soil stabilization will not be allowed: lime, cement, lime slurry, asphalt. If soil
stabilization is approved for use design and construction shall be in accordance with UFC 3-250-11 Soil
Stabilization for Pavements.
R
G103007 SLOPE STABILIZATION

Provide slope stabilization through appropriate grading and site design for a minimum factor of safety of 1.5 or
D
slope that does not exceed the maximum slope per Host Nation requirements.
G103008 SOIL TREATMENT

Treat the area around the entire foundation of each building for termite control in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions.
G103009 SHORING
Provide shoring for all excavation greater the 1.5 meters or where in-situ soils lack the ability to
remain stable after excavation.
G103010 TEMPORARY DEWATERING

Provide dewatering for excavation to prevent sloughing of excavation slopes and walls where
required due to the water table elevation. Water level must be maintained continuously a minimum
300 millimeters below the lowest working level. Dewater shall be in accordance with UFC 3-220-05

Al Dhafra, UAE
G103011 TEMPORARY EROSION & SEDIMENT CONTROL

Temporary erosion and sediment control shall be provided as part of the Contractor prepared
Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP) to the extent practical.
G103090 OTHER SITE EARTHWORK

G1040 HAZARDOUS WASTE REMEDIATION

G1040 1.1 EXCAVATION

Perform excavation of contaminated material in accordance with the geotechnical investigation report, EM
385-1-1, and the Contractor's Professional Engineer.
T
Areas of contamination are unknown.
AF
Where excavation extends into groundwater levels, employ dewatering methods on a localized basis to facilitate
excavation operations. Collect water generated by dewatering during excavation and test it in accordance with
Contractor's Professional Engineer recommendations.
Dispose of water that contains contaminants above regulatory acceptable levels in accordance with Host Nation
Environmental Regulation or the Final Governing Standards, whichever is more stringent.
G1040 1.2 STOCKPILED SOILS

R
Soils with Organic Vapor Analyzer/Flame Ionization Detector readings of 5 ppm or greater are
considered contaminated. Contaminated soil shall be disposed off-site in accordance with Host Nation
Regulation or the Final Governing Standards, whichever is more stringent.
D
Soils that are less than 5 ppm may be used as clean fill.
G1040 1.3 CLEAN FILL

Backfill soils that are determined as clean fill via testing and compact in accordance with the requirements listed
in this section.
G1040 1.4 SPILLS

In the event of a spill or release of hazardous substances, pollutant, contaminant or oil, notify the Contracting
Officer immediately. Take containment/control actions immediately to minimize the effect of any spill or leak.
Perform clean up in accordance with Host Nation Environmental Regulations or the Final Governing Standards,
whichever is more stringent.
G1040 1.5 DISPOSAL

Al Dhafra, UAE
All waste materials will become the property of the Contractor; transport, dispose of or recycle all waste
materials in accordance with Host Nation environmental Regulation or the Final Governing Standards,
--End of Section--
T
AF
R
D

Al Dhafra, UAE
G20 SITE IMPROVEMENTS

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Provide site improvements that support project sustainability goals.
The site improvements system consists of airfield pavements and pavement related features, facility
construction to support four (4) Triton aircraft operations, construction of an Airfield Ground
Equipment Yard in support of Air Force airfield operations, and other exterior site development work
related to this project. Provide a pavement design by a licensed Professional Engineer familiar with
conditions local to the project site. Site design, including but not limited to design aircraft parking
apron and taxiway, will include coordination with the Civil Engineer.
T
Provide site improvements as required to make a useable facility that meets functional and
operational requirements, incorporates all applicable anti-terrorism, force protection and physical
security requirements and blends into the existing environment.
AF
Provide site design in accordance with UFC 3-260-01, Airfield and Heliport Planning and Design,
AFETL 09-1 Airfield Planning and Design Criteria for Unmanned Aircraft Systems, and MQ-4C Triton
Facilities Requirements Document (FRD) Rev G. Two aircraft access routes to the apron shall be
provided. Aircraft access shall be provided from the existing taxiway to the east and the existing
Refueler Apron. The Launch/Recovery location shall be on the new apron/taxiway near the existing
east taxiway. Launch and Recovery location shall have static grounding in accordance with MQ-4C
Triton Facilities Requirements Document. Provide three parking spots for triton aircraft on the apron.
R
Each Triton parking spot shall have static grounding and aircraft tie downs in accordance with MQ-4C
Triton Facilities Requirements Document. Hangars and other Buildings shall be outside the QD
arch. An aircraft wash rack is not required. A Power Check Pad is not required. A new AGE Yard
shall be provided to replace the existing yard. The AGE Yard shall have direct access to the
D
Refueler Apron. The new AGE Yard shall be approximately 4600 square meters. Provide an
access road to the AGE Yard from the existing road to the west of the site. Provide Jet Blast
Deflectors to protect facilities, vehicle pavement areas, aircraft pavement areas, AGE Yard, and Line
Vehicle parking based on KC-10 operations on the Refueler Apron. Assume the KC-10 tail engine is
not operated during aircraft movement. Inhabited buildings must be beyond the QD explosive safety
arch.
Identify and obtain all permits to comply with all Host Nation regulatory requirements associated with
this work. Complete the "Permits Record of Decision" (PROD) form with the first design submittal
package. A blank PROD form can be obtained at the Download Tab of Part 6 of the NAVFAC
Design-Build website at the following link http://ndbm.wbdg.org/system/html/6/453 . Determine
correct permit fees and pay said fees. Forward copies of all permits, permit applications, and the
completed PROD form to the Government's Civil Reviewer. Perform work in accordance with the
obtained permits.
Provide site improvements that support project sustainability goals.
Minimize the impact of construction activity on operations and neighboring facilities.
Site facilities develop appropriate and positive relationships with other facilities and functional

Al Dhafra, UAE
requirements of the Triton system.
Refer to Section 2.0 Project Objectives and 3.0 Site Analysis additional site improvement functional
program information. The Site design must consider and accommodate all building requirements.
G2010 ROADWAYS
Provide vehicle access road to all buildings and parking areas.
Provide single lane paved road 5 meters wide for access to the AGE Yard.
G201001 BASES & SUBBASES

Design shall be in accordance with UFC 3-250-01fa Pavement Design for Roads, Streets, and
Open Storage Areas. Use Graded Crushed Aggregate for base course. Provide subbase in
accordance with Specification 31 00 00 Earthwork.
G201002 CURBS & GUTTERS
T
G201003 PAVED SURFACES

AF
Road surface shall be asphalt concrete. Design in accordance with UFC 3-250-01FA pavement
Design for Roads, Streets, Walks, and Open Storage and Pavement-Transportation Computer
Assisted Structural Engineer Software PCASE 2.09.04. Design vehicle shall be 18 kip equivalent
single axle at 500,000 passes.
G201004 MARKING & SIGNAGE

R
Provide road marking and signage in accordance with Abu Dhabi Municipality Traffic Control Device
Manual.
G201005 GUARDRAILS & BARRIERS

D
G201006 RESURFACING
G201090 OTHER ROADWAYS
G2020 PARKING LOTS

Provide vehicle parking for 6 non tactical vehicle. Parking spaces shall be 3 meters by 6 meters.

Use Graded Crushed Aggregate for base course. Provide subbase in accordance with Specification
31 00 00 Earthwork.

Al Dhafra, UAE


Vehicle parking surface shall be asphalt concrete. Design in accordance with UFC 3-250-01FA
pavement Design for Roads, Streets, Walks, and Open Storage and Pavement-Transportation
Computer Assisted Structural Engineer Software PCASE 2.09.04. Design vehicle shall be 18 kip
equivalent single axle at 500,000 passes.

. Provide white 150 millimeters wide pavement marking to delineate vehicle parking spaces.

T
G202006 RESURFACING
AF
G202007 MISCELLANEOUS STRUCTURES AND EQUIPMENT
G202090 OTHER PARKING LOTS

R
Provide AGE Yard approximately 4600 square meters. Provide Line Vehicle Parking area in
accordance with Facilities Requirements Document and approximately 18.3 x 18.3 meters.
Pavement shall be concrete.
D
Design in accordance with UFC 3-250-01FA pavement Design for Roads, Streets, Walks, and Open
Storage and Pavement-Transportation Computer Assisted Structural Engineer Software PCASE
2.09.04. Design vehicle shall be 18 kip equivalent single axle at 550,000 passes.
Minimum concrete flexural strength shall be 4.48 MPa.
G2030 PEDESTRIAN PAVING

Sidewalks shall be cast in place concrete or precast concrete block pavers.

Use Graded Crushed Aggregate for base course. Provide subbase in accordance with Specification
31 00 00 Earthwork.

Al Dhafra, UAE


G203005 RESURFACING
T
G203006 OTHER WALKS, STEPS & TERRACES
AF
G2040 SITE DEVELOPMENT

G204001 FENCING & GATES
R
Provide polyvinyl chloride (PVC) coated over zinc-coated steel fencing components in accordance
with FS RR-F-191/1, Type IV for the fencing system. Provide a PVC coating with color and a
minimum thickness of 0.10 inch (2 mm). Provide top tension wires and bottom rails.
D
G204002 RETAINING AND FREESTANDING WALLS

G204003 EXTERIOR FURNISHINGS

G204004 SECURITY STRUCTURES

Existing guard tower to remain and will be operational during construction.
G204005 SIGNAGE
G204006 FOUNTAINS & POOLS

Al Dhafra, UAE
G204007 PLAYING FIELDS

G204008 TERRACE AND PERIMETER WALLS

G204009 FLAGPOLES
G204090 OTHER SITE IMPROVEMENTS
T
Provide jet blast deflectors to protect the buildings, apron, AGE Yard, Line Vehicle parking,
and other facilities being constructed from KC-10 aircraft operations on the Refueler Apron
(Tango Ramp). See Part 6, Site Drawings, C-101 for KC-10 parking locations on Tango Ramp.
Design to be in accordance with UFC 3-260-01, Airfield and Heliport Planning and Design and
AF
the jet blast deflector manufacturers recommendations. Design may assume the KC-10 tail
engine is not being run during brake away or maneuvering.
Provide mooring points and static ground points at aircraft parking spots in accordance with
Triton Facilities Requirements Document.
R
G2050 LANDSCAPING
D
G205001 FINE GRADING AND SOIL PREPARATION

Provide fine grading of all areas not receiving pavement.
G205002 EROSION CONTROL MEASURES

Prevent erosion from occurring by providing erosion control measures as required Host Nation
Standards.
G205003 TOPSOIL AND PLANTING BEDS

G205004 SEEDING SPRIGGING AND SODDING


Al Dhafra, UAE
G205005 PLANTINGS
G205006 PLANTERS
G205007 IRRIGATION SYSTEMS

G205090 OTHER LANDSCAPING

G2060 AIRCRAFT PAVING
T
G2060 1.1 PAVEMENT DESIGN
Airfield pavements shall be designed in accordance with the UFCs 3-260-01 and 3-260-02 and the
Pavement / Transportation-Computer Assisted Structural Engineering (P-CASE) program found at
AF
www.pcase.com. The design aircraft shall be the RQ-4B Global Hawk since the MQ-4C Triton is not
available in PCASE. The RQ-4B is the MQ-4Cs predecessor and has similar dimensions and
configurations. Parking spots shall be provided for 3 aircraft. Each aircraft parking spot shall have
mooring points and static grounding point in accordance with the Facility Requirement document.
Launch and Recovery location shall be provided on the apron/taxiway near the east taxiway. Launch
and Recovery shall be provided with static grounding point.
R
The aircraft pavement system will consist of 4 types of pavements, an aircraft hangar pavement, parking
aprons/testing pads, a taxiway, and shoulders. The aircraft hangar pavements shall be designed as an
Air Force Medium" pavement with a Type C traffic area which is comparable to Navy Secondary traffic
area. The parking aprons/testing pads and taxiways shall be designed as Air Force Medium pavements
with a Type B traffic area (comparable to Navy Primary traffic area). Shoulders shall be design to
D
support a minimum of 5,000 passes of a 4,535 kg (44.5 kN) load of imposed by a single wheel with a tire
pressure of 0.69 MPa.
Aircraft hangar pavement shall be designed as rigid (Plain Concrete Pavements) pavement with a
minimum thickness of 200 mm.
Parking apron and testing pad pavement shall be designed as rigid (Plain Concrete Pavements)
pavement with a minimum thickness of 250 mm.
The Taxiway shall be designed as rigid (Plain Concrete Pavements) pavement with a minimum thickness
of 225 mm or as flexible (Hot Mixed Asphalt - HMA) pavement with a minimum thickness of 75 mm.
Shoulders shall be design as flexible (hot mixed asphalt - HMA) pavement with a minimum thickness of
50 mm.
Rigid, flexible, and shoulder pavement base course layers shall be graded crushed aggregate base
course (GCA) with a minimum thickness of 150 mm.

Al Dhafra, UAE
Concrete and asphalt used for airfield pavement construction shall be in accordance with this contracts
specifications. These specifications shall be used verbatim and shall not be edited by the Contractor. The
airfield pavement design shall be submitted to the Contracting Officer for review prior to any construction.
Rigid pavements shall be plain-jointed concrete pavement with compression joint seals in accordance
with specification 32 13 73-COMPRESSION JOINT SEALS FOR CONCRETE PAVEMENTS.
G2060 1.2 AIRFIELD SAFETY

Adhere to all requirements of marking and safety for vehicles and personnel within the airfield safety zone
identified in Part 3 of the RFP.
G2060 1.3 PAVEMENT MARKINGS AND LIGHTING

Permanent and temporary pavement markings and lighting shall be in accordance with the requirements
of NAVAIR 51-50AAA-2, "TECHNICAL MANUAL - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR SHOREBASED
AIRFIELD MARKING AND LIGHTING". Utilize United Facilities Guide Specification 32 17 23.00 20
Pavement Markings and edit appropriately. For pavements being overlaid, resurfaced, reconstructed, or
seal coated requiring immediate opening, the markings shall be applied at half rates in two applications
with a 30 day minimum separation of applications.
T
G2060 1.4 EXISTING UTILITY STRUCTURES
Existing utility structures shall be adjusted to meet the new finished pavement grades. The structure and
AF
cover shall be investigated to determine its ability to support the load of the design aircraft. Report the
results of the survey to the Contracting Officer. Structures within aircraft pavements, within 153 m of
runway pavements or within 15 m of any other full strength aircraft pavements, shall be designed in
accordance with FAA Advisory Circular AC 150/5320-6E, Appendix 3, "Design of Structures for
Heavy Aircraft" with a maximum wheel load of 34,019 kg for paved surfaces and 22,680 kg for unpaved
surfaces.
G2060 1.5 NEW UTILITY STRUCTURES

R
New utility underground structures, manholes, catch basins, utility vaults or similar structures within
aircraft pavements, within 153 m of runway pavements or within 15 m of any other full strength aircraft
pavements, shall be designed in accordance with FAA Advisory Circular AC 150/5320-6E, Airport
D
Pavement Design and Evaluation, Appendix 3, Design of Structures for Heavy Aircraft with a maximum
wheel load of 85,266 KG for paved surfaces and 22,680 KG for unpaved surfaces.
G206001 BASE COURSE

The designer of record shall use UFGS Specification 32 11 23 Graded Crushed Aggregate Base Course
listed in G20.1.2 Government Standards for the appropriate base course layer. Submit these
specifications in redline fashion as part of the design submittal.

The designer of record shall use the applicable UFGS Specifications listed in G20.1.2 Government
Standards for the appropriate surfaces whether Portland cement concrete, Bituminous Concrete or other
surface materials that are indicated in the UFC 3-260-02, Pavement Design for Airfields. Insure that the
specifications are for airfield pavements or the specifications are acceptable alternatives for the pavement
in the location or intended use of the pavement.
G206002 1.1 PAVEMENT MATERIALS

Al Dhafra, UAE
G206002 1.1.1 Bituminous Concrete Pavement

Bituminous concrete pavement shall be in accordance with the attached UFGS 32 12 15, Hot-Mix Asphalt
(HMA) for Airfields. Provide longitudinal joints in bituminous concrete pavements using joint cutting or
joint adhesive methods. Recycled Asphalt Pavement (RAP) will not be allowed.
G206002 1.1.1.1 Tack Coat and Prime Coat

Bituminous tack coats are specified in the attached UFGS 32 12 10, Bituminous Tack and Prime Coats.
Tack coats are required for overlays on existing pavements and on new pavements when the underlying
bituminous layer has become contaminated by construction traffic or dust. Prime coats are not normally
used unless a cut-back asphalt is available. Emulsified asphalts are difficult to use for prime coat
applications.
G206002 1.1.2 Portland Cement Concrete Pavement

Portland Cement Concrete Pavement shall be in accordance with the attached UFGS 32 13 11, Concrete
Pavement for Airfields and Other Heavy-Duty Pavements. The Portland cement concrete shall be
designed for 4,481 to 4,826 kPa in 28 days unless project requirements dictate a shorter period. Use
T
measures to mitigate alkali-silica reaction (ASR). The use of fly ash or silica fumes is encouraged in all
mixes, but especially in the longer strength development mixes. Recycled Portland Cement Concrete
(RPCC) will not be allowed.
AF
G206002 1.1.2.1 Joints
Joints shall be in accordance with UFC 3-260-02 Chapter 12 for Joints for Navy and Marine Corps
Pavements.
G206002 1.1.3 IMPROVING SKID RESISTANCE OF AIRFIELD PAVEMENTS

R
Grooving or use of porous friction courses for runway or taxiway pavements should be in accordance with
FAA Advisory Circular NO. 150/5320-12C, Measurement, Construction, and Maintenance of
Skid-Resistant Airport Pavement Surfaces.
D
G206002 1.1.4 PROTECTION OF AIRFIELD PAVEMENTS AT ARRESTING GEARS

Not Used.
G206003 AIRFIELD PAVEMENT MAINTENANCE AND REPAIRS

G206003 1.1 Bituminous Concrete Overlay/Resurfacing
Not Used
G206003 1.2 Portland Cement Concrete Repairs

Design overlays in accordance with UFC 3-260-02, and design the repairs in accordance with UFC
3-270-03, Concrete Crack and Partial Depth Spall Repair and UFC 3-270-04, Concrete Repair. Partial
depth repairs (spall repairs) may use propriety products but each product must have a proven record of
good performance in the situation in which it will be subjected.

Al Dhafra, UAE
--End of Section--
T
AF
R
D

Al Dhafra, UAE
G30 SITE CIVIL/MECHANICAL UTILITIES

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The site civil utility systems include water supply systems, sanitary sewer systems, storm drainage
systems, fire water sypply systems and associated appurtenances which are more than 1.5 meters
outside the building.

Develop the site to provide water, fire protection, sanitary sewer, storm drainage services that meet
the requirements of each applicable regulatory agency that governs and issues permits for the
construction and operation of these systems. Site design is required to comply with UFC 3-210-10,
Low Impact Development to the extent pratical, as well as Host Nation stormwater management
T
regulations and applicable project sustainability goals.
Provide each system complete and ready for operation.

AF
Physically verify the location of existing above and below ground utilities prior to starting work.
Identify and obtain all permits to comply with all Host Nation regulatory requirements associated with
this work. Complete the "Permits Record of Decision" (PROD) form with the first design submittal
package. A blank PROD form can be obtained at the Download Tab of Part 6 of the NAVFAC
Design-Build website at the following link http://ndbm.wbdg.org/system/html/6/453 . Determine
correct permit fees and pay said fees. Forward copies of all permits, permit applications, and the
R
completed PROD form to the Government's Resident Engineer and Project Engineer for review.
Perform work in accordance with the obtained permits.
Minimize the impact of construction activity on facility operations and neighboring facilities.
D
Obtain final approvals from the Government's Resident Engineer and the Contracting Officer for all
utility connection points associated with this work.
Coordinate with the base utility providers and pay any fees or charges required to connect to their
utility.
All disciplines involved in site work design must coordinate utility locations with the Civil Engineer.
Refer to Site Analysis and Building Requirements Sections for additional site civil utilities information.
Provide all required fittings, connections and accessories required for a complete and usable system.
Install all equipment per the criteria of PTS Section G30 and the manufacturer's recommendations.
Where the word "should" is used in the manufacturer's recommendations, substitute the word "shall".
After installation of the equipment and systems, provide individual training courses for two
Government personnel for each of the items listed below, covering items contained in the Operations
and Maintenance manuals. Provide one copy of the Operations and Maintenance manuals for each
two course attendees. Provide one DVD disc of the training courses to be used as refresher courses
and to train additional personnel. Conduct training by the same factory trained engineer that

Al Dhafra, UAE
supervised the installation of the system. During training include classroom discussion as well as
hands on maintenance, replacement of typical components and repair type maintenance training for
parts typically replaced or repaired in the field. Submit training plan 30 calendar days prior to training
sessions; include scheduling, content, outline, and training material handouts. Provide training for
water supply systems, fire water supply systems, sanitary sewer systems.
Leakage test is required.
G3010 WATER SUPPLY

The new water system is an extension of the existing water system. The existing water system
serving the project site is owned, operated and maintained by Host Nation. Provide the new water
system and connections to the existing water system in accordance with UFC 3-230-01, Water
Supply: Storage, Distribution, and Transmission; the Host Nations requirements; whichever is more
stringent. Utility connections will require work beyond the limits of construction. Coordinate all work
with the Resident Engineer and Base CE before start of work.
Notify the utility provider of the additional demand generated by the proposed facility. Provide a copy
of all correspondence with the utility provider to the Resident Engineer for Review.
T
Backflow preventer is required at all service entrance lines. All below grade valves, backflow
preventers, and other appurtenances shall be in a concrete vault.
G301001 WELL SYSTEMS

AF
G301002 POTABLE WATER DISTRIBUTION

A water meter on each proposed service line is required. Provide type of meter and remote reading as
R
required by the utility provider.
G301003 POTABLE WATER STORAGE

D
G301004 FIRE PROTECTION WATER DISTRIBUTION

The existing fire water distribution system shall be expanded to provide a loop around the
proposed site. The new loop shall connect to the existing loop at the Refueler apron on both
the northeast and northwest corners. Provide all lines, hydrants, and building connection in
accordance with UFC 3-230-01, Water Supply: Storage, Distribution, and Transmission and
UFC 3-600-01, Fire Protection Engineering For Facilities.
Fire water distribution lines under full strength airfield pavement shall be encased in concrete.
Minimum encasement shall be 300 millimeters. This shall include existing fire water distribution
lines under new connecting taxiway/taxilane.
G301005 FIRE PROTECTION WATER STORAGE

Al Dhafra, UAE
G301006 NON-POTABLE WATER DISTRIBUTION

G301007 PUMPING STATIONS

G301008 PACKAGED WATER TREATMENT PLANTS

G301090 OTHER WATER SUPPLY
G3020 SANITARY SEWER

The new sanitary sewer system is an extension of the existing sanitary sewer collection system. The
existing sanitary sewer collection system serving the project site is owned by the Host Nation.
T
Provide the new sanitary sewer system and connections to the existing sanitary sewer collection
system in accordance with UFC 3-240-01, Wastewater Collection; the Host Nation; whichever is more
stringent. Utility connections will require work beyond the limits of construction. Coordinate all work
with the Resident Engineer and Base CE before start of work.
AF
Provide a copy of all correspondence with the utility provider to the Resident Engineer.
G302001 SANITARY SEWER PIPING

Provide PVC or uPVC pipe for all below grade sanitary sewer pipe.
R
G302002 SANITARY SEWER MANHOLES & CLEANOUTS
Provide precast concrete manholes only.
D
Utility structures on or below apron or taxiway pavement or within 15 meters of full strength
pavements shall be designed for heavy aircraft loading. Manhole covers, grates, and frames shall be
airfield rated and certified by the manufacture to meet the requirements of FAA Advisory Circular
150/5320-6E, Airport Pavement Design and Evaluation and 150/5320-5d Airport Drainage Design.
Utility structures shall be designed for wheel loading and direct loading in accordance with FAA
Advisory Circular 150/5320-6E, Airport Pavement Design and Evaluation.
G302003 LIFT STATIONS AND PUMPING STATIONS

A wastewater pump station will not be required.
G302004 PACKAGED SANITARY SEWER TREATMENT PLANTS

G302005 SEPTIC TANKS


Al Dhafra, UAE
G302006 DRAIN FIELDS

G302090 OTHER SANITARY SEWER

G3030 STORM SEWER

The existing storm water drainage system serving the area is a basin (detention pond) along the north
side of the Refueler Apron (Tango Ramp). Drainage design shall be in accordance with Federal
Aviation Administration Advisory Circular 150/5320-5 Airport Drainage Design, and NFPA 415
Standard on Airport Terminal Buildings, Fueling Ramp Drainage, and Loading Walkways, and
Host Nation requirments. Design storm shall be a 10 year storm. Pavements shall be
provided with slope in accordance with UFC 3-260-01. The drainage design and construction
shall accommodate storm water runoff from the Refueler Apron and any other areas that drain
to the existing basin. Grading, drainage, storm water holding areas, and pump stations shall be
T
adequate so that no existing or proposed facility or pavement is flooded due to the design
storm. Storm sewer shall be routed, to the STORM WATER PUMP STATION BEING
CONSTRUCTED BY OTHERS, through an underground pipe. The contractor shall coordinate
their design and construction with the drainage master plan provided by the US Air Force and
AF
approved by the Host Nation.
G303001 STORM SEWER PIPING
Materials are required to be polyvinyl chloride (PVC), UPCV, HDPE. Concrete encasement
is required under all pavement. Pipe shall conform to the requirements of FAA AC
150/5320-5D Airport Drainage Design. Pressure pipe shall meet the requirement of HDPE
Pressure Class 200 or PVC Schedule 80.
R
G303002 STORM SEWER STRUCTURES

Utility structures on or below apron or taxiway pavement or within 15 meters of full strength pavements
D
shall be designed for heavy aircraft loading. Manhole covers, grates, and frames shall be airfield rated
and certified by the manufacture to meet the requirements of FAA Advisory Circular 150/5320-6E, Airport
Pavement Design and Evaluation and 150/5320-5d Airport Drainage Design. Utility structures shall be
designed for wheel loading and direct loading in accordance with FAA Advisory Circular 150/5320-6E,
Airport Pavement Design and Evaluation.
G303003 LIFT STATIONS

If required provide in accordance with FAA AC 150/5320-5D, Airport Drainage Design, UFC 3-240-01
Waste Water collection, and Water Environment Federation Manual of Practice FD-4 Design of
Wastewater and Storm water Pump Stations. Backup electric power shall be provided for all pumping
facilities. Design and construction shall be coordinated with the Resident Engineer and Base CE and
requires coordination with the master drainage plan and any pump station or other structures being
constructed by the US Air Force in support of the master drainage plan.
G303004 CULVERTS AND FORCE MAINS

Storm sewer piping materials are required to be polyvinyl chloride (PVC), uPVC, or HDPE. All Culverts

Al Dhafra, UAE
under pavement will be concrete encased. . Pipe shall conform to the requirements of FAA AC
150/5320-5D Airport Drainage Design. Pressure pipe shall meet the requirement of HDPE Pressure
Class 200 or PVC Schedule 80. G303005 HEADWALLS
Provide concrete cast-in-place headwalls in accordance with Host Nation requirements and
standards FAA requirements or UFC 3-230-17fa Drainage Areas Other than Airfields whichever
is more strigent. .
G303006 EROSION & SEDIMENT CONTROL MEASURES

Provide grouted rip rap at embankments and ditches when slope is greater than 2%. Provide
grouted rip rap al all headwalls.
G303007 STORM WATER MANAGEMENT

Comply with UFC 3-210-10, Low Impact Development to the extent practical. Consider the following
LID features. The use of bioretention, cisterns, rain gardens, and tree box filters are not allowed for
this project.
T
Evaluate the drainage conditions and submit sealed calculations to the Government for civil and
environmental review documenting how design meets UFC 3-210-10, FAA AC 150/5320-5D, Airport
Drainage Design and applicable project sustainability goals. Provide a narrative indicating which
AF
criteria governs the design and all assumptions. Technical constraints that limit compliance with UFC
3-210-10 must be documented, reviewed and approved by the Contracting Officer.
If the project footprint exceeds 5000 SF (464.5 SM) and does not maintain the predevelopment
hydrology to the maximum extent technically feasible (METF), these constraints must be documented
on the NAVFAC Sustainable Energy Data Record Card (NSEDRC) and approved by the
Government's Civil Reviewer. The NSEDRC can be found at:
http://www.wbdg.org/pdfs/navfac_sustainable_energy_data_record_card.pdf .
R
For Navy and Marine Corps projects, comply with Navy LID Policy (commonly referred to as the Penn
Memo). The Navy LID policy sets a goal of no net increase in stormwater and sediment or nutrient
loading from major renovation projects and construction projects. Major renovation projects are
D
defined as having a storm water component and exceeding $5 million and major construction projects
are defined as exceeding $750,000. If LID is not implemented to the METF as defined in UFC
3-210-10, a waiver must be obtained from the Regional Engineer. Coordinate waiver review and
approval with civil Technical Discipline Coordinator (TDC).
The contractor must obtain all required regulatory permits required for the proposed work.
Coordinate all reports, submittals, and permit applications through the Contracting Officer.
G303090 OTHER STORM SEWER

An oil/water separator will not be required as part of the storm sewer.
G3040 HEATING DISTRIBUTION

G304001 OVERHEAD HOT WATER SYSTEMS


Al Dhafra, UAE
G304002 OVERHEAD STEAM SYSTEMS

G304003 UNDERGROUND HOT WATER SYSTEMS

G304004 UNDERGROUND STEAM SYSTEMS

G304005 REINFORCED CONCRETE MANHOLES & VALVE BOXES

Provide valve boxes for building supply taps and system isolation.
G304090 OTHER HEATING DISTRIBUTION
T
G3050 COOLING DISTRIBUTION

AF
G305001 OVERHEAD COOLING SYSTEMS
Provide flexible cellular insulated piping system including supports.
Provide steel support poles.

R
G305002 UNDERGROUND COOLING SYSTEMS
Provide direct buried, factory pre-fabricated, pre-insulated piping systems. Piping systems shall
consist of a steel or plastic reinforces thermosetting resin RTR or PVC carrier pipe with polyurethane
D
insulation and a PVC or RTR jacket,
G305090 OTHER COOLING DISTRIBUTION

Provide a sacrificial anode cathodic protection system for the underground piping systems.
G3060 FUEL DISTRIBUTION
G306001 LIQUID FUEL DISTRIBUTION PIPING

Provide steel diesel fuel piping system.
Existing aircraft fuel lines under new taxiway/taxi lanes shall be encased in concrete. Minimum
encasement shall be 300 millimeters.
G306003 LIQUID FUEL STORAGE TANKS

Provide 8 hour storage capacity at 100 percent load for stand-by (emergency) generator. Provide

Al Dhafra, UAE
generator day tanks that shall be integral with the engine generator (belly tank).
Day tank for each gen-set shall incorporate secondary containment (double wall) and be located
under the gen-set as a skid mounted, 'belly' tank. Day (belly) tank shall come as standard product
with generator set as an integral part of the skid and generator set. Day tank shall be provided with
fuel pump if recommended by gen-set manufacturer, fill cap, vent, drain plug, fuel level indicator and
engine supply and return connections. Its supports, anchors and saddles shall be as per tank
manufacturer's recommendations. Tank and its accessories shall have coating suitable for outdoor
installation and site weather conditions. Tank shall comply with and be UL-142 listed. Coordinate fuel
tank plumbing fittings with base to facilitate refueling.
G306004 LIQUID FUEL DISPENSING EQUIPMENT

G306006 GAS DISTRIBUTION PIPING [NATURAL GAS]

[PROPANE])
T
G306007 GAS STORAGE TANKS
AF
G306009 OTHER GAS DISTRIBUTION
G306090 OTHER FUEL DISTRIBUTION

R
Provide warning and identification tape for underground utilities.
G3090 OTHER SITE MECHANICAL UTILITIES

D

Al Dhafra, UAE
G40 SITE ELECTRICAL UTILITIES

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The site electrical utility system consists of all power and telecommunications and fiber optic cabling from
the existing distribution system point of connection including all connections, accessories and devices as
necessary and required for a complete and usable system. This section covers installations up to within 5
feet (1.5 meters) of new (or existing) building location.

Provide an Electrical System complete in place, tested and approved, as specified throughout this
RFP, as needed for a complete, usable and proper installation. All equipment shall be installed per
the criteria of PTS Section G40 and the manufacturers recommendations. Where the word "should" is
used in the manufacturer's recommendations, substitute the word "shall".
T
Provide site electrical utilities systems and components that support project sustainability goals.
G4010 ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION

AF
Connect to the existing Medium Voltage (MV) 11 kV, 50 Hertz electrical power system. The
connection point shall be an underground direct buried loop feed from a nearest existing Ring-Main-Unit
(RMU)/pad mount transformer in the MO Town Area to the Project Site Unit Distribution Substation
(UDS). Refer to Drawing C-401 for MV feeder point of connection. Approximate distance 150 Meters. The
available fault current at the point of connection shall be assumed to be an infinite bus. MV cables
under paved areas shall be installed in 150mm PVC concrete encased ductbanks. Each ductbank
R
shall be provided with a minimum of 2-150mm spare conduits for future use.
G401001 SUBSTATIONS
D
Provide a Unit Distribution Substation (UDS) a biodegradable less-flammable liquid filled transformer
to feed the facility.
G401002 TRANSFORMERS
Provide a three phase UDS to feed the facility.
Provide the following features:
1. Dead-Front Design with ANSI specific front plate spacing.
2. Loop feed switch.
3. High Side Ring-Main-Unit (RMU) Feed-thru inserts
4. Six surge arresters for loop feed circuits.

Al Dhafra, UAE
5. Biodegradable less-flammable liquid-insulated.
G401003 SWITCHES, CONTROLS AND DEVICES

Provide a RMU at the High Side of the UDS transformer.
G401004 OVERHEAD ELECTRIC CONDUCTORS

Not Applicable (N/A).
G401005 TOWERS, POLES, CROSSARMS AND INSULATORS

N/A
G401006 UNDERGROUND ELECTRIC CONDUCTORS
T
Provide a medium voltage 600 volt secondary underground electrical power distribution systems to
meet the connection requirements as indicated in paragraph G4010 "Electrical Distribution
AF
G401007 DUCTBANKS, MANHOLES, HANDHOLES AND
RACEWAYS
a. Provide a system of concrete encased ductbanks, handholes and manholes for all underground
secondary power wiring. Provide a direct buried underground for medium voltage (11KV) power
distribution system.
R
b. Provide for future use a 4-150mm PVC concrete encased conduit ductbank across the Project
taxiway connecting existing Host Nations active taxiway. All conduits shall be capped at both ends.
D
G401008 GROUNDING SYSTEMS

Provide a complete grounding system for the electrical power distribution system.
G401009 METERING
Provide a separate Kilowatt Demand Meter for each UDS
G401010 CATHODIC PROTECTION SYSTEMS

N/A
G401011 EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS FOR COASTAL AND HIGH

HUMIDITY AREAS N/A
G4020 SITE LIGHTING

Al Dhafra, UAE
a. Existing KC-10 Ramp flood lighting poles may be in conflict with the Project Site. If in conflict, the
flood lighting system shall be relocated to an acceptable location either on the Project Site or off the
Project Site in coordination with the COR. Relocated flood lighting system shall be redesigned to
maintain existing illumination (FC, Lux) levels for the KC-10 Ramp. Redesign may require taller poles
and/or additional flood light fixtures. Additional light fixtures, if required, shall be of the same type,
make and model and by the same manufactures of the existing fixtures. Contractor shall refer to the
site photos included in the Contract documents to access existing site conditions. Contractor may
reutilize existing flood lighting fixtures and/or flood lighting poles at the Contractors option. Unutilized
existing flood light fixtures and/or poles shall be turned-in to the COR. Contractor shall be responsible
to continue to provide the required lighting for the KC-10 Ramp (Tango Ramp) throughout the
construction of this Project.
b. Electric service to the relocated flood lighting poles shall be extended form the existing MV feeder
utilizing existing UDS. Existing MV feeder and the UDS may be in conflict with the Project Site and
may need to be relocated utilizing same size cable. Relocated MV cables if under paved areas shall
be installed in concrete encased ductbanks. Manholes and/or handholes within taxiways and/or ramp
areas shall be of aircraft load bearing type.
c. Flood lighting shall be provided on both sides of Triton Aircraft launch & recovery areas for aircraft
O&M and prep work and with local controls installed in weatherproof enclosure(s). Acceptable lighting
T
level at and on both sides of the aircraft shall be no less than 15FC (150Lux). Light fixtures shall be
provided with glare control. Approximate height of the maintenance/prep areas on the aircraft is from
finished grade to +/-15 feet height. Power for the flood lights shall be extended from the Project
emergency electrical distribution system and not from the existing KC-10 Ramp flood lighting system.
AF
G402001 EXTERIOR LIGHTING FIXTURES AND CONTROLS
Existing lighting control system for the ramp flood lighting shall be relocated to de-conflict with the
Project Site and shall be operable thru the Project construction period.
R
G402002 SPECIAL SECURITY LIGHTING SYSTEMS

N/A
D
G402003 OTHER AREA LIGHTING (Airfield Lighting)

Triton Aircraft Taxiway and Apron Edge Lighting shall be provided per UFC 3-535-01. All edge lights shall
be flush mounted type and connected to the existing Host Nations taxiway edge lighting circuit. Any
existing elevated taxiway edge light fixture in conflict with Triton Aircraft taxiway shall be replaced with a
flush mounted light fixture. Lighted information sign shall be provided for the Triton Ramp along the Host
Nations taxiway and connected to the taxiway edge lighting circuit.
G402004 LIGHTING POLES

KC-10 Ramp new flood lighting poles, if required, shall be of the same type as those existing.

Provide a complete underground distribution system for the relocated flood lighting systems.

Al Dhafra, UAE
G402006 DUCTBANKS, MANHOLES AND HANDHOLES

Provide an underground concrete encased ductbank system including conduits and handholes to
meet the connection requirements indicated in paragraph G4020 "Site Lighting".

Provide a complete grounding system for all site lighting systems.
G4030 SITE COMMUNICATION AND SECURITY

Provide a site communication system including, but not necessarily limited to, Voice and Data
Telecommunications Systems, and Cable Television (CATV) Systems, including all conduit and
wiring, underground structures, termination equipment, poles and structures, and grounding systems
as required for a complete and usable system.
G403001 TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS

The connection point for the site telecommunications systems shall be undergrounded extended to
T
the project site underground in a system of manholes and duct bank from the manhole and duct bank
system north running parallel to the site (east to west). This is distributed from ITN 7. Provide a
second, physically diverse pathway for to ITN 8 that will provide a high level of physical redundancy.
AF
The estimated diverse route is approximately 125m. Coordinate the requirements and design with the
380th ECS I/O Cable Engineer.
Provide only fiber optics OSP cable, in accordance with the ADAB Specs, FRD, and listed standards
and specs. CATV is also distributed via fiber optics and utilizes APC contact connectors. Ensure the
design can be integrated into the bases overall OSP infrastructure.
G403002 CABLE TV SYSTEMS (CATV)

R
See section G403001 for OSP CATV.
G403003 CABLES AND WIRING

D
Cables and wiring for site telecommunications and security systems shall be as indicated in their
respective categories. The PETs are to be on the RUS list of material, (Publication IP 344-2). The
PET shall be compliant with the ADAB Specs requirements.

Provide a system of duct banks, manholes, and handholes for site telecommunications. The conduit
for the manhole shall be direct buried (minimum of 1 meter below the finished grade), schedule 40
PVC with an inside diameter of 102.26mm, and outside diameter of 114.3mm and a minimum wall
thickness of 6.02mm. The manhole shall be connected to the existing manhole and duct bank system
by twelve (12) conduits, one having four (4) 25mm poly vinyl chloride (PVC) or polyethylene (PE)
Schedule 40, NEMA TC-7 ribbed wall inner ducts. The concrete pour and final structure will abide by
AASHTO H20 and ASTM C150 standards. See drawing attachments in Part 6. All underground ducts
shall be concrete encased. Ensure that the existing underground pathways north and east of the site
comply with the load rating required by the UFC for Airfield Paving. All duct banks and
manholes/handholes will need to be coordinated and deconflicted with the DORs designed USAF
AGE Yard location. Ensure all load ratings are appropriately designed.

Al Dhafra, UAE
G403005 TOWERS, POLES AND STANDS

One RF/SATCOM communications tower is required. The planned height of the tower is 100ft and
should account for mounting of up to eight (9) antennas of varying heights and mounting styles. The
tower design will be a square design with stairs that switchback up the center (for ease of access and
maintenance to the techs). Contractor to coordinate with customer and will provide GPS coordinate of
all antenna locations once locations are locked in. The DOR shall design and provide the
RF/SATCOM communications tower, as well as all cabling, connectors, and patch/EMI I/O panels
necessary to interconnect mounted antennas to system equipment, in accordance with Part 6,
Attachment RF Cable and Antenna Layout. Information required to be ascertained (through systems
and requirements analysis) may include, but is not limited to, tower structure, siting, height, and
mounting support provisions; antenna configuration/positioning, transmission distances, propagation
characteristics, azimuths; cable lengths, supporting hardware, pathways and spaces. Antennas
systems include both line-of-sight (optical and effective) and omnidirectional technologies. The
mounting and provision of antennas shall be performed by the client stakeholder; however, close
coordination shall be required in order to ensure all support and distribution accommodates the
antennas and system equipment.
FRD Clarification:
T
1. Attachment RF Cable and Antenna Layout shall replace Appendix F and J of the accompanying
FRD.
2. Heliax RF cable will not be used; see Attachment RF Cable and Antenna Layout for RF cable
callout.
AF
3. The RETA weather box is a requirement for the CDL in this project; a dome is not required; see
Attachment CDL Enclosure Box for design information.
4. BES (BAMS Earth Station) is not a requirement for this project.
5. For the UHF LOS (C2) antennas, this project will require the incorporation of an HN to N adaptor
(P/N PE9194) between the RF pigtail and the antenna; see Attachment RF Antenna RF Cable
and Antenna Layout.
6. The number of RF penetrations shall be thirteen (13): (3) N-type for NTCS, 2 N-type for UHF
R
LOS, 2 N-type for SATCOM, 1 TNC-type for INMARSAT, 1 N-type for GPS, 2 N-type RF (spare),
and (2) TNC-type (spare).
7. The UHF LOS and SATCOM mast poles are 2.3 (not to be greater than) versus 2.37.
8. The SATCOM antennas do not use HN RF connectors; see Attachment RF Cable and Antenna
Layout.
D
9. The CDL will not be mounted in cement, but shall require a dedicated stand on the RF/SATCOM
tower.
10. Per D50, Part 3 and 4, lightning protections systems for RF antenna tower(s), antennas, and
antenna cabling shall comply with FAA-STD-019E and NFPA 780.
11. See General Tower Design attachment for 6 foot min. standoff for support arms/mounting poles.
12. See attachment Antenna J-box layout for the J-box requirement at the base of the tower.
13. The CDL requires two (2) dedicated 20 amp circuits and a double throw, single pole On/Off switch
located near the CDL for maintenance and repair. See attachment CDL Configuration for build
requirements and additional information.
14. See attachment C5F additional data support and clarification to drawings for RF connector
spacing.
G403006 TV CAMERAS AND MONITORS

Design exterior CCTV camera(s) to be monitored on-site for security and mission functions. Design
flight line CCTV camera(s) to provide monitoring of site aircraft launch and recovery point(s).
Number of cameras are estimated at two (2); locations TBD by customer at time of design analysis
following overall site layout confirmation. Monitoring and control shall be located in Launch and
Maintenance Control offices. Contractor to coordinate with local Force Protection and ESS

Al Dhafra, UAE
control/maintenance offices. Provide all passive components required to support this system as part
of the base contract, to include all conduits, pull boxes, pull strings, terminal boxes, support/mounting
poles, and spaces and pathways.
Option #2: All active, electronic components of the CCTV system to complete a usable system. To
include, but not limited to, cabling, terminations, cameras and mounts, switches, converters,
amplifiers, controllers, and monitors.
G403007 ELECTRONIC SECURITY SYSTEMS (ESS)

The flight line and aprons deploy an underground, TASS fiber optic IDS system. Design and passive
provisions to support this system shall be included in this contract, and the Contractor will be required
to coordinate closely with base Force Protection/ESS personnel. These provisions may include, but
not limited to, underground conduit for fiber optic sensors, terminal boxes, and any mounting
equipment/materials required to support passive distribution. Currently, this IDS application is in the
planning and expansion phase conducted by the USAF; fiber optics to be installed by others.
G403008 OTHER COMMUNICATION AND ALARM

T
AF
Provide a complete grounding system for all site communications systems. The underground
distribution system shall have a complete bonding and grounding system for all metallic cable
components, splices, cable breaks, maintenance holes, and all associated infrastructure. Provide
19MM (3/4) by 3M (10) solid copper ground rod and precast inspection pit with cover; route ground
conductor to rod through manhole/handhole top and grout opening tight. Ground all non-current
carrying metal parts (I.E. cable racks) to installed ground bus or electrode.
R
G4090 OTHER SITE ELECTRICAL UTILITIES
N/A
D
G409007 PHOTOVOLTAIC ENERGY SYSTEM

N/A

Al Dhafra, UAE
PART FOUR - PERFORMANCE TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS
T
AF
R
D
PART FOUR - PERFORMANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS - Page 1

Al Dhafra, UAE
SECTION A10
FOUNDATIONS
12/13
A10 GENERAL
RFP Part 3 including the Engineering System Requirements (ESR) provide project
specific requirements. The RFP Part 4, Performance Technical Sections (PTS)
provide generalized technical requirements that apply to multiple facility types
and include more requirements than are applicable to any one project. Therefore,
only the RFP Part 4 requirements that apply to the project and further define the
RFP Part 3 project specific requirements are required.
A10 1.1 DESIGN GUIDANCE
Provide the design and installation in accordance with the following

references. This Performance Technical Specification (PTS) adds
clarification to the fundamental requirements contained in the following
T
Government Standards. The general requirements of this PTS section are
located in PTS Section Z10, General Performance Technical Specification.
AF
A10 1.1.1 Government Standards
UNIFIED FACILITIES CRITERIA (UFC)
UFC 1-200-01 General Building Requirements(A

reference in this PTS section to UFC
1-200-01 requires compliance with the
Tri-Service Core UFCs that are listed
R
in UFGS Section 01 33 10.05 20, which
includes the following significant
UFC(s): UFC 3-101-01 Architecture,
UFC 3-220-01 Geotechnical
D
Engineering, UFC 3-301-01 Structural

Engineering)
UNIFIED FACILITIES GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS (UFGS)
UFGS Section 31 00 00 Earthwork
A10 1.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A10 1.2.1 Earthwork
The Designer of Record shall prepare the following UFGS Specification

as part of the project specification and shall include the prepared
specification section in the design submittal for the project:
PART 4 - SECTION A10 - Page 1

Al Dhafra, UAE
Section 31 00 00 Earthwork
A10 1.2.2 Geotechnical Report
A10 1.2.2.1 Subsurface Soils Information
Any provided subsurface soil information is included for the

contractors information only, and is not guaranteed to fully
represent all subsurface conditions. The data included in this
RFP is to assist in proposal preparation. Contractor shall
perform, at his expense, such subsurface exploration,
investigation, testing, and analysis as his Designer of Record
deems necessary for the design and construction of the
foundation system.
A10 1.2.2.2 Contractor-provided Geotechnical Engineer
The Contractor is required to retain a Geotechnical Engineer

experienced and licensed in the geographic region of the project
T
to interpret any provided data as related to his design concept
and develop requirements for bidding. Requirements stated in
Parts 3 and 4 of the RFP take precedence over any content of
AF
any included geotechnical report. Additional requirements for
the geotechnical design of this project are provided elsewhere
in this RFP.
All work by the Contractor-provided Geotechnical Engineer at

the project location shall be coordinated with the Contracting
Officer and shall not interfere with normal base operations.
When providing the Foundation Work Design submittal, provide
R
the Contractor's Geotechnical Report (an Adobe Acrobat PDF
version on CD and two printed copies) for review and record
keeping purposes. The report shall become the property of the
Government. Provide the Geotechnical reports generated during
D
construction, such as pile load tests or PDA results, pile

driving results and analysis, to the Contracting Officer (an
Adobe Acrobat PDF version and two printed copies) for record
keeping purposes.
A10 1.2.2.3 Contractor-Provided Geotechnical Report
Submit a written Geotechnical report based upon contractor

conducted subsurface investigation data and all additional
field and laboratory testing accomplished at the discretion of
the Contractor's Geotechnical Engineer. The Geotechnical
Report shall include the following:
a. The project site description, vicinity map and site map

indicating the location of borings and any other sampling
locations. Provide 24 hour groundwater observations for
at least 20% of the borings, minimum one boring. Provide
notes explaining any abbreviations or symbols used and
describing any special site preparation requirements.

Al Dhafra, UAE
b. Results of all applicable field and laboratory testing,

whether Government or Contractor-provided. Address
existing subsurface conditions, selection and his design
of the foundation and floor slab, all underground
construction including utility installation and all
other site-specific requirements (such as soil
stabilization and slope stability).
c. Engineering analysis, discussion and recommendations
addressing:
1) Settlement analysis. Settlement shall be limited as

required in EM 1110-1-1904, Settlement Analysis
2) Bearing Capacity Analysis.
3) Foundation selection and construction

considerations (shallow, deep, special); dimensions, and
installation procedures.
4) Site preparation (earthwork procedures and
T
equipment), compaction requirements, building slab
preparation (as applicable), soil sensitivity to weather
and equipment, groundwater influence on construction,
AF
mitigation of expansive soils or liquefaction potential,
dewatering requirements, slope stability, and other
necessary instructions.
5) Sheeting and shoring considerations, as applicable
6) Pavement design calculations with parameters

defined, actual or assumed, and recommended thicknesses
R
and materials, whether for design or for proposed
modifications to the RFP provided pavement design
7) Haul routes and stockpile locations for earthwork,

D
as applicable.
8) Calculations to support conclusions and

recommendations.
9) Recommendations shall be presented on a

structure-by-structure Basis.
The Geotechnical Report shall be signed by the

Contractor-provided Geotechnical Engineer.
The submitted report shall be accompanied by a cover letter

identifying any report recommendations of the report proposed
to be adopted into the design which are interpreted by the
Contractor as a change condition to the Geotechnical or Pavement
related requirements of the RFP.
A10 1.2.2.4 Geotechnical Site Data required in Design Drawings

Al Dhafra, UAE
The Contractor's final design drawings shall include the

Government-provided subsurface data presented in the RFP as
noted below, as well as all additional borings and laboratory
test data results performed by the Contractor. The data
provided shall include:
a. Logs of Borings and related summary of laboratory test

results and groundwater observations. Provide 24-hour
groundwater observations for at least 20% of the borings,
minimum one boring. Provide notes explaining any
abbreviations or symbols used and describing any special
site preparation requirements.
b. The locations of all borings shall be indicated on the
drawings. The applicable design drawings shall be
revised to reference the Contractors Geotechnical
Report as being a basis for design.
A10 1.3 PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION AND ACCEPTANCE TESTING
T
Verification of satisfactory construction and system performance of the
foundations shall be via Performance Verification Testing, and by field
inspection, as detailed in this section of the RFP and in UFGS Section 01
AF
45 00.00 10. Provide special tests and special inspections in accordance
with UFGS Section 01 45 00.00 10, Quality Control.
A10 1.3.1 Earthwork
Perform quality assurance for earthwork in accordance with IBC Chapter

17 and UFGS Section 31 00 00. A competent person, as defined by COE
EM 385-1-1, under supervision of a registered Professional Engineer
R
is required to provide inspection of excavations and soil/groundwater
conditions throughout construction. The Engineer shall be
responsible for performing periodic site visits throughout
construction to assess site conditions. The Engineer, with the
D
concurrence of the contractor and the Contracting Officer, shall

update the excavation, sheeting, shoring, and dewatering plans as
construction progresses to reflect actual site conditions and shall
submit the updated plan and a written report (with professional stamp)
at least monthly informing the Contractor and the Contracting Officer
of the status of the plan and an accounting of Contractor adherence
to the plan; specifically addressing any present or potential
problems. The Engineer shall be available to meet with the
Contracting Officer at any time throughout the contract duration.
A10 1.4 DESIGN SUBMITTALS
Design submittals shall be in accordance with Z10, General Performance

Technical Specifications, UFGS Section 01 33 10.05 20, Design Submittal
Procedures, MED Design Instruction Manual, UFC 3-220-01 Geotechnical
Engineering, and UFC 1-200-01 General Building Requirements.

Al Dhafra, UAE
UFGS sections listed below or in the body of the PTS text are to be used
by the Designer of Record (DOR) as a part of the design submittal. The DOR
shall edit these referenced UFGS sections and submit them as a part of the
design submittal specification. Edit the specification sections in
accordance with the limitations stated in PTS section Z10, General
Performance Technical Specifications.
A10 1.5 CONSTRUCTION SUBMITTALS
Submit construction submittals in accordance with PTS Section Z10, General

Performance Technical Specifications. In addition to the Z10 requirements,
the Designer of Record (DOR) shall approve the following submittals as a
minimum:
All structural elements necessary for construction
T
Contractor-provided geotechnical report
AF
Controlled fill or backfill material tests
As-Built drawings
A1010 STANDARD FOUNDATIONS

R
A1010 1.1 SHEETING AND SHORING
Provide sheeting and shoring as required. Sheeting and shoring plans shall
be signed by the Contractor's Geotechnical Engineer.
D
A1010 1.2 TERMITE CONTROL
A1010 1.2.1 Termite Control Barrier System
Formulate and apply termiticide in accordance with the manufacturer's

label directions. The termiticide label shall bear evidence of
registration by the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or
appropriate requirements of the host country.
Apply termiticide to the soil that will be covered by or lie

immediately adjacent to the building(s) and structure(s), providing
a protective barrier against subterranean termites.
Maintain the Pest Management Maintenance Record, DD Form 1532-1 and

submit the Pest Management Report, DD Form 1532 as required.
Applicator(s) shall be licensed or certified by the Federal government

or the state or the host country, as applicable.

Al Dhafra, UAE
A1010 1.2.2 Warranty
Furnish a 3 year written warranty against infestations or

reinfestation by subterranean termites of the buildings or building
additions constructed under this contract. Perform annual
inspections of the building(s) or building addition(s). If live
subterranean termite infestation or subterranean termite damage is
discovered during the warranty period, and building conditions have
not been altered in the interim, the Contractor shall:
a. Perform treatment as necessary for elimination of subterranean

termite infestation;
b. Repair damage caused by termite infestation;
c. Reinspect the building approximately 180 calendar days after
the repair.
A1010 1.2.3 Visual Inspection Guide
T
To maintain resistance to termites, complete the system and do not
disturb, penetrate or damage during the remaining contract time
period. Provide Manufacturers Guidance for performing a visual
AF
assessment of the installed system to ensure the system provides the
designed termite physical barrier.
A101001 WALL FOUNDATIONS
Provide foundation walls as required in accordance with the requirements of this

section and other portions of this RFP.
R
A101002 COLUMN FOUNDATIONS
Provide column foundations and grade beams as required in accordance with the
requirements of this section and other portions of this RFP.
D
A1020 SPECIAL FOUNDATIONS
A102004 DEWATERING
Dewater site for foundation construction as required by soil conditions and local
subsurface and surface water, including rainfall, and considering any potential
adverse impact on adjacent facilities, including settlement. Dewatering
requirements and methods shall be established by the Contractors Geotechnical
Engineer, based on his subsurface exploration and investigation.
A102005 RAFT FOUNDATIONS
If required, provide a raft foundation as required to achieve the requirements

of this section and other portions of this RFP and as required by the Contractors
Geotechnical Engineer.
A102006 PRESSURE INJECTED GROUTING

Al Dhafra, UAE
If required, pressure inject grout as required in accordance with the requirements

of this section and other portions of this RFP.
A1030 SLAB ON GRADE
A103001 STANDARD SLAB ON GRADE
If allowed by site conditions and recommended by the Contractor-provided

Geotechnical Engineer, provide standard concrete slab on grade to meet the required
loading requirement in accordance with the requirements of this section and other
portions of this RFP.
Floor slab on grade shall be designed and constructed in accordance with EM

1110-1-1904, Settlement Analysis and so that any settlement of the floor slab shall
not result in harmful distortion of the floor, nor vertical misalignment of the
floor with other building components (such as doorways and trenches), building
utilities or with pile-supported building elements. If these above conditions
cannot be met, provide a pile supported slab.
T
A103003 TRENCHES
AF
Trenches shall be constructed of reinforced concrete with water proof joints and
seals to prevent ground water infiltration.
A103004 PITS AND BASES
Pits and bases shall be constructed of reinforced concrete with water proof joints
and seals to prevent ground water infiltration.
R
A103005 FOUNDATION DRAINAGE
A103005 1.1 PERIMETER FOUNDATION DRAINAGE

D
Perimeter drainage system shall be provided to remove water away from the
foundation of the facility and to be deposited in the storm sewerage system
of the site. Pipe for the foundation drainage system shall be of the type
specified, shall be perforated, and shall be of a size sufficient to remove
water from the foundation successfully. Provide one, or a combination of
more than one, of the following types of pipe:
a. Corrugated Polyethylene (PE) Drainage Pipe: ASTM F 405, heavy duty,

for pipe 3 to 6 inches in diameter inclusive; ASTM F 667 for pipe 8
to 24 inches in diameter. Fittings shall be manufacturer's standard
type and shall conform to the indicated specification.
b. Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) Pipe: ASTM D 2751, with a
maximum SDR of 35.
c. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe: ASTM F 758, Type PS 46, ASTM D 3034,
or ASTM F 949 with a minimum pipe stiffness of 46 psi.
Installation shall include wrapping the pipe with filter fabric sock and
careful bedding of the pipe with appropriate fill material to ensure that
the pipe does not become obstructed with the bedding material.

Al Dhafra, UAE
A103090 OTHER SLAB ON GRADE
A103090 1.1 BLOCK OR BOARD PERIMETER INSULATION
Provide only thermal insulating materials recommended by manufacturer for

perimeter insulation. Provide one of the board or block thermal insulations
listed below conforming to the following standards:
a. Cellular Glass: ASTM C 552

b. Extruded Preformed Cellular Polystyrene: ASTM C 578
The thickness of insulation and thermal resistance value shall be sufficient

to meet the applicable building code and energy budget for the facility.
A10 1.18 New section
T
AF
R
D

Al Dhafra, UAE
SECTION A20
BASEMENT CONSTRUCTION
12/13
A20 GENERAL
A20 1.1 DESIGN GUIDANCE

T
AF
A20 1.1.1 Government Standards

R
UFC(s):UFC 3-101-01, Architecture UFC
3-220-01, Geotechnical Engineering
D
UFC 3-301-01, Structural Engineering)
A20 1.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A20 1.2.1 Required Specifications
The Designer of Record shall utilize the following UFGS Specifications

for the project specification.
Section 31 00 00, Earthwork

Al Dhafra, UAE
A20 1.2.2 Geotechnical Report
A20 1.2.2.1 Contractor-provided Geotechnical Engineer
The Contractor-provided Geotechnical Engineer is required to

be experienced with soil conditions in the region where the
project site is located. The geotechnical engineer shall
evaluate the RFP data, obtain and evaluate all additional data
as required to support the design and construction, and prepare
a Geotechnical Report.
A20 1.2.2.2 Subsurface Soils Information
Subsurface soil information, if provided, is included for the

contractors information only, and is not guaranteed to fully
represent all subsurface conditions. The data included in this
RFP are intended for proposal preparation and preliminary
design only. Contractor shall perform, at his expense, such
subsurface exploration, investigation, testing, and analysis
T
as his Designer of Record deems necessary for the design and
construction of the foundation system.
AF
All work by the Contractor-provided Geotechnical Engineer at
the project location, if required, shall be coordinated with
the Contracting Officer and shall not interfere with normal base
operations. Prior to the Foundation Work Design submittal,
provide a Contractor Geotechnical Report (an editable Adobe
Acrobat PDF version on CD and two printed copies) for review
and record keeping purposes. The report shall become the
property of the Government. Geotechnical reports generated
R
during construction, such as pile driving results and analysis,
shall be provided to the Contracting Officer. In addition,
provide an editable Adobe Acrobat PDF version and two printed
copies for record keeping purposes.
D
A20 1.2.2.3 Contractor-Provided Geotechnical Report
Submit a written Geotechnical report based upon

Government-provided subsurface investigation data and all
additional field and laboratory testing accomplished at the
discretion of the Contractor's Geotechnical Engineer. The
Geotechnical Report shall include the following:
a. The project site description, vicinity map and site map.

b. Results of all the field and laboratory testing, whether
Government or Contractor-provided.
addressing:
d. Settlement
e. Bearing Capacity
f. Foundation selection and construction considerations
(shallow, deep, special); dimensions, and installation
procedures.

Al Dhafra, UAE
g. Site preparation (earthwork procedures and equipment),

compaction requirements, building slab preparation (as
applicable), soil sensitivity to weather and equipment,
and groundwater influence on construction
h. Sheeting and shoring considerations, as applicable
i. Pavement design parameters, actual or assumed, including
recommended thicknesses and materials, be for design or
for proposed modifications to the RFP provided pavement
design only
j. Haul routes and stockpile locations for earthwork, as
applicable
k. Calculations to support conclusions and recommendations
l. Recommendations shall be presented on a
structure-by-structure basis
The Geotechnical Report shall be signed by a registered

Geotechnical Engineer.
The submitted report shall be accomplished by a cover letter

identifying any recommendations of the report proposed to be
T
adopted into the design which are interpreted by the Contractor
as either conflicting with or being modifications to the
Geotechnical or Pavement related requirements of the RFP.
AF
A20 1.2.2.4 Geotechnical Site Data required in Design Drawings
The Contractor's final design drawings shall include the

Government-provided subsurface data presented in the RFP as
noted below, as well as any additional borings and laboratory
test result data performed by the Contractor.
R
a. Logs of Borings and related summary of laboratory test
results and groundwater observations.
b. The locations of all borings shall be indicated on the
drawings. The applicable design drawings shall be
D
revised to reference the Contractors Geotechnical

Report as being a basis for design.
A20 1.3 PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION AND ACCEPTANCE TESTING
Verification of satisfactory construction and system performance shall be

via Performance Verification Testing, as detailed in this section of the
RFP. Provide special tests and special inspections in accordance with UFGS
Section 01 45 00.00 10, Quality Control.
A20 1.3.1 Earthwork
Perform quality assurance for earthwork in accordance with IBC Chapter

17 and UFGS Section 31 00 00. If a registered Professional Engineer
is required to provide inspection of excavations and soil/groundwater
conditions throughout construction, the Engineer shall be responsible
for performing pre-construction and periodic site visits throughout
construction to assess site conditions. The Engineer, with the
concurrence of the contractor and the Contracting Officer, shall

Al Dhafra, UAE
update the excavation, sheeting, shoring, and dewatering plans as

construction progresses to reflect actual site conditions and shall
submit the updated plan and a written report (with professional stamp)
at least monthly informing the Contractor and the Contracting Officer
of the status of the plan and an accounting of Contractor adherence
to the plan; specifically addressing any present or potential
problems. The Engineer shall be available to meet with the
Contracting Officer at any time throughout the contract duration.
The contractor shall bear all costs of the Engineer.
A20 1.4 DESIGN SUBMITTALS
Design Submittals shall be in accordance with Z10, General Performance

Technical Specifications, UFGSS section 01 33 10.05 20, Design Submittal
Procedures, MED Design Instruction Manual, UFC 3-301-01, Structural
Engineering, and UFC 3-220-01, Geotechnical Engineering.
In addition, UFGS sections listed below or in the body of the PTS text are
to be used by the Designer of Record (DOR) as a part of the design submittal.
If the UFGS products or systems are applicable to the project, the DOR shall
T
edit these referenced UFGS sections and submit them as a part of the design
submittal specification. Edit the specification sections in accordance
with the limitations stated in PTS section Z10, General Performance
AF
Technical Specifications.
UFGS 31 00 00, Earthwork
A20 1.5 CONSTRUCTION SUBMITTALS

R
minimum:
D
Contractor-provided geotechnical report
Controlled fill or backfill material tests
A2010 BASEMENT EXCAVATION
A201001 EXCAVATION FOR BASEMENTS
Excavate for the basement as required in accordance with the requirements of this
A201002 STRUCTURE BACKFILL AND COMPACTION
Provide backfill and soil compaction as required in accordance with the

requirements of this section and other portions of this RFP.

Al Dhafra, UAE
A201003 SHORING
Provide shoring and sheeting as required in accordance with the requirements of

this section and other portions of this RFP. Shoring and sheeting plans shall
be signed by the Contractor's Geotechnical/Structural Engineer.
A2020 BASEMENT WALLS
A202001 BASEMENT WALL CONSTRUCTION
Provide basement walls as required in accordance with the requirements of this

A202002 MOISTURE PROTECTION
A202002 1.1 BUILT-UP BITUMINOUS WATERPROOFING
A202002 1.1.1 Environmental Conditions
Apply the primers and waterproofing specified herein when the ambient
T
temperature is above 40 degrees F.
A202002 1.1.2 Liquid Asphalt

AF
Deliver bulk liquid asphalt in fully insulated, heated transport
tanker vehicles with circulating pump devices. Maintain the
temperature of the liquid asphalt between 400 and 450 degrees F during
storage, provided the transport and storage time does not exceed 12
hours. If the transport and storage time exceeds 12 hours, lower the
temperature to between 300 and 325 degrees F at the time the 12 hours
are exceeded. Liquid asphalt shall be used within 36 hours after
R
loading in the transport tanker.
A202002 1.1.3 Materials

D
a. Bitumen - Asphalt; ASTM D 449, Type I.

b. Bituminous Plastic Cement - ASTM D 4586, Type I for asphalt.
c. Membrane Fabric
The following requirements shall apply:
Felt or Fabric Saturant or

Material Impregnant Specification
Glass (felt) mat Asphalt ASTM D 2178, Type III

Reinforcing glass Asphalt ASTM D 1668, Type I
fabric
d. Nails - Galvanized roofing nails.
e. Primer - ASTM D 41 for asphalt.
f. Protection Board - ASTM D 517, plain, asphalt plank; ASTM C 208,
construction grade building board, 1/2 inch thick, asphalt
saturated or coated; ASTM C 726, 7/16 inch thick, covered on
one side with waterproof paper or asphalt-saturated felt.

Al Dhafra, UAE
A202002 1.2 ELASTOMERIC SHEET WATERPROOFING
A202002 1.2.1 Environmental Conditions
Do not apply waterproofing during inclement weather or when there is

ice, frost, surface moisture, or visible dampness on the surface to
receive waterproofing and when ambient and surface temperatures are
40 degrees F or below. The restriction on the application of
waterproofing materials when ambient and surface temperatures are
below 40 degrees F will be waived if the Contractor devises a means,
approved by the Contracting Officer, of maintaining the surface and
ambient temperatures above 40 degrees F.
A202002 1.2.2 Butyl Rubber Sheeting
Not less than 60 mils minimum thickness.
A202002 1.2.2.1 Butyl Rubber Sheeting Performance Requirements
a. Thickness Tolerance, ASTM D 412: Plus or minus 10
T
percent;
b. Specific Gravity, ASTM D 297: 1.20, plus or minus 0.05;
c. Tensile Strength, ASTM D 412: 1200 psi minimum;
d.
AF
Tensile Stress at 300 percent elongation, ASTM D 412:
600 psi minimum;
e. Elongation, ASTM D 412: 300 percent minimum;
f. Tear Resistance, Die C, ASTM D 624: 125 pound force per
inch (lbf/inch) minimum;
g. Shore A Hardness, ASTM D 2240: Five-second interval
before reading; 60 plus or minus 10;
h. Ozone Resistance, ASTM D 1149: No cracks, 7 days - 50
R
pphm - 100 degrees F, 20 percent elongation;
i. Heating Aging-Accelerated, ASTM D 573: Tensile
retention, 60 percent of minimum original elongation
retention; 60 percent of minimum original requirement;
D
7 days, 240 degrees F.

j. Butyl Identification, ASTM D 471, Tricresyl Phosphate
Immersion: Maximum volume swell 10 percent, 70 hrs, 212
degrees F;
k. Low Temperature Flexibility, ASTM D 746: No failure at
-40 degrees F;
l. Water Absorption, ASTM D 471: +1 percent maximum. 7
days, 158 degrees F;
m. Exposure to Fungi and Bacteria in Soil, Minimum 16 Weeks:
Unaffected; and
n. Water Vapor Transmission, 80 Degrees F Permeance, ASTM
E 96, Procedure B or BW: 0.15 perms maximum.
A202002 1.2.2.2 Adhesive, Cement, and Tape for Use with Butyl
Rubber
Provide as recommended by the butyl rubber waterproofing

membrane manufacturer.

Al Dhafra, UAE
A202002 1.2.3 Composite, Self-Adhering Membrane Sheeting
Cold applied composite sheet consisting of rubberized asphalt and

cross laminated, high-density polyethylene film. Not less than 60 mils
minimum thickness is required.
A202002 1.2.3.1 Composite, Self-Adhering Sheeting Performance

Requirements
a. Tensile Strength, ASTM D 412, Die C: 250 psi minimum;

b. Ultimate Elongation, ASTM D 412, Die C: 200 percent
minimum;
c. Water Vapor Transmission, ASTM E 96 80 Degrees F
Permeance, Procedure B: 0.1 perm maximum;
d. Pliability Degrees F, ASTM D 146: (180 Degrees Bend Over
One Inch Mandrel): No cracks at minus -25 degrees F;
e. Cycling Over Crack at Minus 15 Degrees F: Membrane is
applied and rolled across two primed concrete blocks with
no separation between blocks. Crack opened and closed
from zero to 1/4 inch. No effect at 100 cycles;
T
f. Puncture Resistance, ASTM E 154: 40 lb. minimum;
g. Lap Adhesion at Minimum Application Temperature, ASTM
D1876 Modified, 5 lbs/in.(880 N/m);
h.
AF
Peel Strength, ASTM D 903: Modified, 9 lbs/in;
i. Resistance to Hydrostatic Head, ASTM D 5385: 231 ft of
water
j. Water Absorption, ASTM D 570; 0.1% maximum.
A202002 1.2.3.2 Primer

R
Asphalt composition, ASTM D 41, or synthetic polymer in solvent
as recommended by the membrane manufacturer.
A202002 1.2.3.3 Mastic

D
Polymer modified asphalt in suitable solvent of trowel-grade

consistency and as recommended by the membrane manufacturer.
A202002 1.2.4 Protection Board
Three-dimensional, high impact resistant polymeric grid with woven

monofilament drainage fabric bonded to the grid.
A202003 BASEMENT WALL INSULATION
A202003 1.1 BLOCK OR BOARD INSULATION
Provide only thermal insulating materials recommended by manufacturer for

the indicated application. Provide one of the board or block thermal
insulations listed below conforming to the following standards:
a. Cellular Glass: ASTM C 552

b. Extruded Preformed Cellular Polystyrene: ASTM C 578

Al Dhafra, UAE
c. Unfaced Preformed Rigid Polyurethane and Polyisocyanurate Board: ASTM

C 591
d. Faced Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate and Polyurethane Insulation:
ASTM C 1289
e. Type I Aluminum Foil on both major surfaces. Class 1 - Non-reinforced
core foam.
A202003 1.2 BLANKET INSULATION
ASTM C 665, Type I, blankets without membrane coverings; with a thermal

resistance value, which will be sufficient to meet the applicable building
code and energy budget for the facility. The insulation material shall not
contain asbestos materials.
A202003 1.2.1 Recycled Materials
Provide Thermal Insulation containing recycled materials to the

extent practicable, provided the material meets all other
requirements of this section. The minimum required recycled
T
materials content by weight are:
Rock Wool: 75 percent slag

AF
Fiberglass: 20 to 25 percent glass cullet
A202004 INTERIOR SKIN
Comply with Section C30, Interior Finishes.

R
D

Al Dhafra, UAE
SECTION B10
SUPERSTRUCTURE
11/10
B10 GENERAL
B10 1.1 DESIGN GUIDANCE

T
AF
B10 1.1.1 Government Standards

R
3-301-01, Structural Engineering)
UFC 4-023-03 Design of Buildings to Resist

D
Progressive Collapse
B10 1.2 PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION AND ACCEPTANCE TESTING

via Performance Verification Testing, as detailed in this section of the
B10 1.3 DESIGN SUBMITTALS

Technical Specifications, UFGS section 01 33 10.05 20, Design Submittal
Procedures, MED Design Instruction Manual, UFC 3-101-01, Architecture, and
UFC 3-301-01, Structural Engineering.
B10 1.4 CONSTRUCTION SUBMITTALS
PART 4 - SECTION B10 - Page 1

Al Dhafra, UAE

minimum:
All structural elements necessary for construction of the

superstructure.
B1010 FLOOR CONSTRUCTION
B101001 STRUCTURAL FRAME
Structural frame elements may include columns, girders, beams, trusses, joists,
moment frames, shear walls, and bracing. See Section B20, Exterior Enclosure,
for additional requirements for exterior walls used as load-bearing walls or shear
walls.
B101002 STRUCTURAL INTERIOR WALLS
T
Provide structural interior walls as required in accordance with the requirements
of this section and other portions of this RFP. See Section C10, Interior
AF
Construction, for additional requirements.
B101003 FLOOR DECKS AND SLABS
If required, provide floor decks as required in accordance with the requirements

of this section and other portions of this RFP.
B101005 BALCONY CONSTRUCTION

R
Design and construct exterior balconies to drain and with the top of the balcony
high-point below the interior floor elevation as required for flashing.
D
B101006 RAMPS
Provide ramps as required in accordance with the requirements of this section and
other portions of this RFP.
B101007 FLOOR RACEWAY SYSTEMS
See Section D50, Electrical, for floor raceway systems.
B1020 ROOF CONSTRUCTION
B102001 STRUCTURAL FRAME
Structural frame elements may include columns, girders, beams, trusses, joists,
moment frames, shear walls, and bracing. See Section B20, Exterior Enclosure,
for additional requirements for exterior walls used as load-bearing walls or shear
walls.
B102002 STRUCTURAL INTERIOR WALLS

Al Dhafra, UAE
Provide structural interior walls as required in accordance with the requirements

of this section and other portions of this RFP. See Section C10, Interior
Construction, for additional requirements.
B102003 ROOF DECKS AND SLABS
Provide roof deck as required in accordance with the requirements of this section
and other portions of this RFP.
B102004 CANOPIES
Provide canopies as required in accordance with the requirements of this section

and other portions of this RFP.
T
AF
R
D

Al Dhafra, UAE
SECTION B20
EXTERIOR ENCLOSURE
05/14
B20 GENERAL

T
AF
Industry standards, codes, and Government standards referenced in the
section text that are not found in the Unified Master Reference List (UMRL)
in the Construction Criteria Base (CCB) at the Whole Building Design Guide
Website , are listed below for basic designation identification. Comply
with the required and advisory portions of the current edition of the
referenced standard at the time of contract award.
B20 1.1.1 Industry Standards and Codes

R
NATIONAL LUMBER GRADES AUTHORITY (NLGA)

D
Military Handbook 1013/1A, Design Guidance for Physical Security of

Facilities

UFC(s): UFC 3-101-01, Architecture)
UFC 1-200-02 High Performance and Sustainable

Buildings
UFC 04-211-01N Aircraft Maintenance Hangars: Type

I, II, and III

Al Dhafra, UAE
Verification of satisfactory exterior enclosure system performance must be

via Performance Verification Testing, and by field inspection as detailed
in this section of the RFP. Provide special tests and special inspections
in accordance with UFGS Section 01 45 00.00 10, Design and Construction
Quality Control. The Contractor must pay the cost of all testing.
B20 1.2.1 Required Brick Masonry Testing and Field Samples
a. Where field testing is required, masonry strength must be

determined in accordance with ACI 530.1.
b. Field Samples: Masonry Panel Requirements - At the job site
submit for approval by the Designer of Record, a sample masonry
panel minimum 8 feet (2.4 meters) long by a minimum of 4 feet
(1.2 meters) high. Actual Sample size will be determined by
number of components in the sample wall but provide a span of
T
at least 4 feet (1.2 meters) of uninterrupted brickwork and 2
feet (.6 meters) above wall openings. The approved sample must
exhibit the standard for workmanship and materials for the
AF
project. The sample panel must include brick coursing, bond,
weep holes, flashing, thickness, anchors, joint reinforcing,
wall ties, rigid-board insulation, intersection of walls, bond
beams, expansion and control joints, and tooling of joints,
range of color, texture of masonry, and mortar color; or
cold-formed steel framing, insulation, fiberglass-faced gypsum
sheathing, air barrier, moisture barrier/vapor retarders,
exterior enclosure barrier connections to adjoining
R
construction, sealing of exterior enclosure barrier
penetrations, sealant, masonry ties and anchors, and tooling
of joints, the range of color and texture of brick veneer, and
the color of mortar. The sample panel must be protected from
D
damage and must remain at the site until masonry work is complete
and approved, at which time the panel must be removed from the
site. If there are windows or curtain walls in the project
which interface with the masonry, a cut-away sample window or
curtain wall mock-up must be installed in the masonry field
panel, with all accessories, finishes, and trim (see B20 1.2.4
and 1.2.5). Masonry work must match the approved sample.
B20 1.2.2 Air Barrier Field Sample
Designate a portion of the project that reveals the various edge, seam,
transition, and penetration conditions that the air barrier is exposed
to. Determine this location with the Contracting Officer and obtain
approval of the sealing methods employed on the project from the air
barrier Manufacturer. Leave sample area exposed to view as long as
practical to serve as a construction standard and comparison of future
air barrier construction on the project. Before construction covers
the sample area, provide detailed photographs of the air barrier
details for future reference.

Al Dhafra, UAE
B20 1.2.3 Air Barrier Performance
Provide air barrier inspection on all projects and air barrier

performance testing when required in RFP Part 3, section B20.
B20 1.2.3.1 Air Barrier Inspection
Coordinate all subcontractors that provide part of the air

barrier construction to provide an air tight barrier. Review
the air barrier prior to being covered by subsequent
construction to confirm that the air barrier complies with the
following requirements;
a. Prior to applying an air barrier, confirm that the

substrate complies with conditions required by the
applied air barrier material manufacturer.
b. Air barrier must create a continuous barrier, without
gaps, "fish mouths", holes, unsealed seams, or unsealed
penetrations.
c. Air barrier components are compatible and capable of
T
being permanently connected to form an air tight barrier.
d. Construction of the air barrier complies with air barrier
design as indicated in the Design Analysis and exterior
AF
enclosure barrier drawings.
e. Air barrier is installed in accordance with
manufacturer's standard details available on the Air
Barrier Association of America (ABAA) website named "Air
Barrier Materials, Components, Assemblies & Systems" and
found at the following web link;
http://www.airbarrier.org/materials/assemblies_e.php
R
B20 1.2.3.2 Air Barrier Performance Testing
Provide air barrier testing and repair as follows (coordinate

with infrared thermal testing):
D
a. Provide a testing plan as a part of the Commissioning Plan

and notify the Contracting Officer 7 working days before
the testing will take place. Do not test the building
until verifying that the continuous air barrier is in
place and installed without failures in accordance with
installation instructions so that repairs to the
continuous air barrier, if needed to comply with the
required air leakage rate, can be done in a timely manner.
Also coordinate building access during the test with the

Contracting Officer. Perform pretest inspection with
all parties involved in the test and possible repairs of
the building enclosure. Record pretest conditions and
utilize pictures to assist in the documentation.
b. Perform testing as described in "U.S. Army Corps of
Engineers Air Leakage Test Protocol for Building
Envelopes Version3, May 11,2012." The air leak flow rate
must not exceed 0.25 CFM at 75 Pa per square foot (0.076

Al Dhafra, UAE
cmm 75 Pa per square meter) of building enclosure area

including roof or ceiling, walls and floor as provided
by the DOR.
Method 1: This test consists of measuring the flow rates

required to establish 12 positive and 12 negative
building pressures from at least 25 Pa to at least 50 Pa.
At least 12 bias pressure readings must be taken across
the building enclosure and averaged over 5 seconds each
before and after the test. None of these readings must
exceed 30% of the minimum test pressure.
Method 2: this test consists of measuring the flow rates

required to establish 12 positive building pressures from
at least 50 Pa to at least 75 Pa. At least 12 bias pressure
readings must be taken across the building enclosure and
averaged over 5 seconds each before and after the test.
None of these readings must exceed 20% of the minimum test
pressure.
T
The test results must be either pass or fail. Provide
the theoretical size of the opening that leaks the same
amount as the building enclosure at 75 Pa, to facilitate
AF
the search for leaks and repair of the exterior enclosure.
c. Provide infrared thermography to determine air leakage
paths if facility fails to retain the required air
pressure in the test above. Utilize infrared cameras
with a resolution of 0.1 degree C or better.
Perform infrared thermography in accordance with ISO

6781:1983 and ASTM C1060-90(1997). Determine air
R
leakage pathways in accordance with ASTM E1186-03
Standard Practices for Air Leakage Site Detection in
Building Envelopes and Air Barrier Systems, and perform
corrective work as necessary to achieve the whole
D
building air leakage rate specified.
Modify construction to stop identified air leakage until

target 0.25 cfm/ft2 is reached. Correct air path leaks
at the source of the leak, do not use sealant to close
air leakage paths that are required to be opened for
maintenance of the facility such as fixtures, switches
covers, receptacle covers, access doors,...etc.
d. Air leaks must be sealed in the following
order of priority: 1. Top of the
building. These include attics, roof/wall
intersections, penthouse doors and walls,
HVAC equipment.
2. Bottom of the building. These include
ground floor access doors and inspection
hatches, exhaust and air intake vents,
service penetrations of enclosure, crawl
spaces.
3. Vertical shafts. These include gasket

Al Dhafra, UAE
stairwell fire doors, fire hose cabinets and

recessed toilet accessories connected to
vertical shaft, vertical and horizontal
utility penetrations in service rooms,
elevator rooms and shafts.
4. Exterior walls. These include weather
strip doors and windows, exhaust fans and
ducts, service penetrations, electrical
receptacles, wall base.
B20 1.2.4 Thermal Envelope Performance Testing (Infrared Thermography)
Where required in RFP Part 3, provide infrared thermal testing and

repair as follows (coordinate with air barrier testing):
a. Test the building envelope using Infrared Thermography

technology. The thermography testing must be completed in
accordance with the requirements of ASTM C1060 and ISO 6781.
T
The Contracting Officer will witness the testing. Testing must
occur just before the building air tightness test. Testing must
also occur during the air tightness test so that areas of
AF
building air leaks are detected. If the building air tightness
test is failed, thermographic testing must be repeated just
before and during subsequent air tightness tests until the air
tightness test is successful.
b. Thermography Test Procedures: Submit detailed test procedures
indicating the test apparatus, the test methods and procedures,
and the analysis methods to be employed not later than 60 days
after Notice to Proceed.
R
c. Thermography Test Report: Provide a report. The report must
include thermographs in color and a color temperature scale to
define the temperature indicated by the various colors. The
report must identify the high temperature reading, the outdoor
D
air temperature, the building indoor air temperature, and the

wind speed and direction. The report must note any areas of
compromise in the building envelope, and must note all actions
required and taken to correct those areas.
d. Final Test: Final thermography test report must demonstrate the
problem areas have been corrected. Submit the complete test and
analysis for review and approval.
B20 1.2.5 Required Records for Concrete Wall Panels
a. Cast-in-place - Submit to DOR mandatory batch ticket

information as ASTM C 94 for each load of ready-mixed concrete.
b. Submit to DOR commercial testing results in accordance with PCI
MNL-117 and as required in paragraph entitled "Sampling and
Testing for Precast"
B20 1.2.6 Precast Concrete Wall Panel Surface Finish Sample
Submit to DOR a concrete wall panel sample 12 inches (300 mm) by 12

Al Dhafra, UAE
inches (300 mm) by approximately 1 1/2 inches (38 mm) in thickness,

to illustrate quality, color, and texture of both exposed-to-view
surface finish and finish of panel surfaces that will be concealed
by other construction. Obtain initial approval of color and texture
from DOR prior to submission of sample panels.
B20 1.2.6.1 Manufacturing Plant Sampling And Testing for Precast
Plant Quality Control - PCI MNL-117 for PCI enrolled plants.

Where panels are manufactured by specialists in plants not
currently enrolled in the PCI "Quality Control Program,"
provide a product quality control system in accordance with PCI
MNL-117 and perform concrete and aggregate quality control
testing using an approved, independent commercial testing
laboratory. Submit test results to the Contracting Officer.
a. Aggregate Tests: ASTM C 33. Perform one test for each

aggregate size, including determination of the specific
gravity.
b. Strength Tests: ASTM C 172. Provide ASTM C 39 and ASTM
T
C 31/C 31M compression tests. Perform ASTM C 143 slump
tests. Mold six cylinders each day or for every 20 cubic
yards (15 cubic meters) of concrete placed, whichever is
AF
greater. Perform strength tests using two cylinders at
7 days and two at 28 days. Cure four cylinders in the
same manner as the panels and place at the point where
the poorest curing conditions are offered. Moist cure
two cylinders and test at 28 days.
c. Changes in Proportions: If, the compressive strength
falls below that specified, adjust the mix proportions
and water content and make necessary changes in the
R
temperature, moisture, and curing procedures to secure
the specified strength. Notify the Contracting Officer
of all changes.
d. Strength Test Results: Evaluate compression test results
D
at 28 days in accordance with ACI 214 using a coefficient

of variation of 20 percent. Evaluate the strength of
concrete by averaging the test results (two specimens)
of standard cylinders tested at 28 days. Not more than
20 percent of the individual tests must have an average
compressive strength less than the specified ultimate
compressive strength.
B20 1.2.6.2 Acceptable Appearance
Refer to Architectural Precast Concrete by the Prestressed

Concrete Institute, in the "Acceptability of Appearance"
paragraph for reasons to reject precast panels. Panels in
place may be rejected for any one of the product defects or
installation deficiencies remaining after repairs and cleaning
have been accomplished. "Visible" means visible to a person
with normal eyesight when viewed from a distance of 20 feet (6
meters) in broad daylight.

Al Dhafra, UAE
B20 1.2.7 Window Sample Mock-Up
a. Provide mock-up of one (1) typical combination window unit to

be used within the project and conduct a field mock-up test in
strict compliance with AAMA 502 method A and method B. Each
opening will be tested to achieve performance of ASCE 7-02
calculated requirements (PSF or Kg/m2) for water resistance,
which must not exceed .667 % of the products capable water based
on AAMA 101/I.S.2. Allowable rates of air leakage for field
testing must be 1.5 times applicable AAMA 101/I.S.2 rate for
the Product Type and Performance Class.
b. Opening is to be tested under "Quality Control" testing by a
designated independent testing agency.
1) Schedule mock-up installation sufficiently in advance of

need to allow adequate time for cure of sealants, testing and
reconstruction, if needed, without delaying the project.
2) Build mock-up in building enclosure wall in location selected

by Owner and Architect.
T
3) Modify mock-up construction and perform additional tests as
required to achieve specified minimum acceptable results. If
AF
corrections are not adequate, construct new mock-up, at written
direction of Owner and Architect. Co-ordinate construction of
mock-up with other involved trades.
4) Approved mock-ups may become part of completed Work if

undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
5) Flood test Mock-up window subsill and obtain approval of DOR

R
prior to installing window unit.
B20 1.2.8 Curtain Wall Systems Field Sample and Testing

D
a. At the job site submit for approval by the Designer of Record,

a sample curtain wall installation which may be a cut-away
portion of a curtain wall, if appropriate, to show the
construction, the workmanship, tie-in to building,
infiltration and moisture barriers, wrap, flashing, head,
window unit installation where required, sill, lintel if
required, interior and exterior trim, anchors and reinforcing,
and sealants.
b. Provide mock-up of (1) designated Curtain Wall System unit to
be used in conducting a field mock-up test in strict compliance
with AAMA 503 method A and method B. Each opening will be tested
to achieve performance of ASCE 7-05 calculated requirements
(PSF or Kg/m2) for water resistance, which must not exceed the
derived water expectation of 0 infiltration at the calculated
Design Pressure. Allowable rates of air leakage for field
testing must be .30 CFM/Ft2 of wall area test specimen.
Performance test at 6.24 PSF (30.3 Kg/m2) allows .30 cfm/ft2.
Opening is to be tested under "Quality Control" testing by a
designated independent testing agency.

Al Dhafra, UAE
1) Schedule mock-up installation sufficiently in advance of

need to allow adequate time for cure of sealants, testing and
reconstruction, if needed, without delaying the project.
2) Build mock-up in building enclosure wall in location

selected by DOR.
3) Modify mock-up construction and perform additional tests

as required to achieve specified minimum acceptable results.
If corrections are not adequate, construct new mock-up, at
written direction of DOR. Co-ordinate construction of mock-up
with other involved trades.
4) Approved mock-ups may become part of completed Work if

undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
The sample curtain wall must be protected from damage and must remain
at the site until curtain wall construction work is complete and
approved, at which time the panel must be removed from the site. On
T
projects where the curtain wall interfaces with masonry walls, a
cut-away sample curtain wall must be installed with the masonry sample
panel. Curtain wall installations must match the approved sample.
AF
Water Penetration: No water penetration must occur when the wall is
tested in accordance with ASTM E 331 at a differential static test
pressure of 20 percent of the inward acting design wind pressure as
specified, but not less than 15 psf (80 Kg/m2). Make provision in
the wall construction for adequate drainage to the outside of water
leakage or condensation that occurs within the outer face of the wall.
Leave drainage and weep openings in members and wall open during test.
R
Design submittals must be in accordance with Z10, General Performance

D

Procedures, MED Design Instruction Manual, UFC 3-101-01, Architecture and
If the UFGS products or systems are applicable to the project, the DOR must
UFGS 08 34 16.10, Steel Sliding Hangar Door
UFGS 08 34 16.20, Vertical Lift Fabric Door

Al Dhafra, UAE

the Designer of Record (DOR) must approve the following submittals as a
minimum;
Shop drawings for reinforcing steel in masonry walls, doors, door

hardware, windows, storefront, curtainwall, glazing, paint, exterior
enclosure barrier systems, and visible exterior materials.
All structural elements necessary for construction.
B20 1.4.1 Manufacturer's Verification Inspection Documentation for

Galvanized Steel
Manufacturer's verification inspection documentation must be

submitted for all galvanized steel in accordance with ASTM A123, ASTM
A 153, and ASTM A 653.
T
B20 1.4.2 Field Inspection of Field-erected Concrete Panels
a. Perform field inspection of panel welded connections. Furnish

AF
the services of AWS-certified welding inspector for erection
inspections. Welding inspector must visually inspect all
welds and identify all defective welds.
b. The DOR must be notified in writing of defective welds, bolts,
nuts and washers within 7 working days of the date of inspection.
All defective connections or welds must be removed and re-welded
or repaired as required by the DOR.
R
B20 1.4.3 Sustainable Construction Submittals
Submit sustainable construction submittals in accordance with UFGS

01 33 29.05 20 Sustainability Reporting for Design-Build.
D
B2010 EXTERIOR WALLS
Provide exterior wall construction that consists of exterior skin system of

non-structural outside face elements with rain-screen back-up wall systems that
include; flashing (embedded, exposed, and thru-wall), a water resistive barrier,
moisture barrier/ vapor retarder (if required), air barrier, and insulation
systems with interior skin system materials to provide a protective finish on the
inside face of exterior walls. Provide all components necessary to for a shingled
water resistive barrier to direct water that would penetrate the wall to be directed
to the outside of the wall. Provide exterior enclosure components and barriers
in accordance with UFC 3-101-01, Architecture.
Design all work to comply with UFC 3-101-01, Architecture, and UFC 3-301-01,
Structural Engineering, and the following requirements:
a. Vapor Pressure and Hygrothermal Analysis - Perform a job specific vapor

pressure and hygrothermal analysis in accordance with UFC 3-101-01,
Architecture. The conclusion of the analysis must indicate if a moisture

Al Dhafra, UAE
barrier/ vapor retarder is required, the appropriate locations of needed

moisture barrier/ vapor retarder, and anticipated dew-point locations in
the exterior enclosure during different critical times of the year.
b. Wind Loads - Provide wind load calculations for exterior cladding in
accordance with UFC 1-200-01 and UFC 3-301-01 with comparative analysis of
the cladding system to be provided.
c. Water Penetration - No water penetration must occur at a pressure of 8 psf
(39 Kg/m2) of fixed area when tested in accordance with ASTM E 331.
d. Insulating Value - Comply with UFC 3-101-01, Architecture for the ASHRAE
requirements defining the minimum insulating value of the complete wall
system.
B201001 EXTERIOR CLOSURE
B201001 1.1 MASONRY VENEER EXTERIOR WALL CLOSURE COMPONENTS
B201001 1.1.1 General Requirements
a. The masonry veneer includes the non-load bearing exterior walls

of the structure, and also includes colored mortar, special
T
shapes such as sills, headers, trim units and copings of brick
masonry, precast concrete, concrete masonry units, or other
approved materials. The veneer must be tied to the backup wall
AF
system with a system that allows the veneer to move
independently of the backup wall system, while being
structurally supported. Allow for expansion and contraction
of the veneer without cracking the exterior material.
b. Use running bond, tooled concave joints and full head joint
weeps at 24 inches (610 mm) o.k. in the course immediately above
the base flashing. Where rowlocks are permitted, slope
rowlocks and project not less than 1/2 inch (13 mm) beyond the
R
face of the wall to form a wash and drip. Where required,
provide colored mortar conforming to ASTM C270. Provide
special shapes where required.
c. Locate expansion/control joints and seal with proper backing
D
material and ASTM C 920 polyurethane sealant, or preformed foam

or rubberized expansion joint closure. Conform to UFC 3-101-01
and BIA Technotes 18, 18A. Match joint color of the brick,
unless DOR directs otherwise.
d. Conform to ACI 530.1 for masonry veneer installation, including
cold weather construction. Antifreeze admixtures are not to
be used.
e. Clean the masonry in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions and BIA Technote 20.
f. Utilize BIA Technical Notes to design, detail, and construct
brick masonry walls. This PTS section amends the BIA documents
and takes precedence over similar BIA requirements.
Substitute directive language in the place of BIA suggestive
language as required in PTS Section Z10, General Performance
Technical Specifications. The results of these wording
substitutions change this document to required procedures.
B201001 1.1.2 Face Brick

Al Dhafra, UAE
a. Brick Masonry Appearance - Do not change source or supply of

materials after brick manufacturing work has started. Blend
all brick to produce a uniform appearance when installed. An
observable "banding" or "layering" of colors or textures caused
by improperly mixed brick is unacceptable.
b. Brick Type - Provide brick in accordance with ASTM C216, Grade
SW, type FBX. Test rating of ASTM C67 must be "Not
effloresced".
B201001 1.1.3 Split Faced or Ground Faced Masonry
ASTM C 90. If required, provide split faced or ground faced units,

or split-ribbed units or scored-faced units.
B201001 1.1.4 Cast Stone Trim Units
a. Cast stone must be the product of a manufacturer regularly

engaged in the manufacture of architectural cast stone (precast
concrete building unit) products. Meet or exceed the
requirements of ASTM C 1364.
T
b. Trim units of cast stone must include sills, fascia, header
units, copings and other trim units as required by the approved
design
AF
B201001 1.1.5 The Wall Cavity
Comply with UFC 3-101-01 and BIA Technical Notes 21A, 21B, 21C, 28B.
B201001 1.1.6 Through-Wall Flashing Components
Provide through-wall flashing over all openings, spandrels, shelf

R
angles, lintels, and built-in structural steel members. Provide
through-wall flashing below all openings, parapets copings, sills,
and at the base of the wall. Provide a method of weeping water
collected by the through-wall flashing to the outside of the wall.
D
a. Incorporate weep holes to align with through-wall flashing in

cavity wall construction as required by UFC 3-101-01 and BIA
Technotes. Install flashing according to BIA Technotes 7, 7A,
7B, 21A, 21B, 21C, 28B, and SMACNA figures 4-1A and 4-1B. Extend
metal drip edge flashing beyond the wall plane using a 1/4 inch
(6 mm) preformed 45 degree angle turn down.
b. Flashing material must be as required by UFC 3-101-01 and the
following: Provide flashing of 7 ounce copper flashing with a
3 ounce bituminous coating on each side or a fiberglass fabric
bonded on each side of the copper sheet. Sixteen (16) ounce
uncoated copper, 28 gauge Type 302 or 304 stainless steel is
also acceptable. Flexible membrane flashing, plastic or
PVC-based membrane flashing is prohibited. Lap and seal
turndown solid metal drip edge flashing to through- wall
flashing. Refer to "Flashing" in this section to find
requirements for non-through-wall flashing.
c. Incorporate the through-wall flashing in the water resistive
barrier and seal joints to flashing to form a shingled effect

Al Dhafra, UAE
and direct water to the exterior to the exterior enclosure and

away from back-up wall assembly.
d. Where flashing is not continuous, such as at masonry wall
opening heads and sills, extend flashing four inches beyond each
side of the opening and turn up ends to form a pan and prevent
water from reentering the wall cavity.
B201001 1.1.7 Reinforcing in Veneer Layer
Reinforcing in the veneer layer must be galvanized in accordance with

ASTM A 123/A123M, ASTM A153/A153M, or ASTM A653/A653M, Z275 (G90)
coating, and be of sufficient size to eliminate damage to the veneer
layer from wind and other live and dead loads imposed on the veneer
layer.
B201001 1.2 METAL WALL PANEL EXTERIOR CLOSURE
B201001 1.2.1 General Wall Panel Requirements
a. Factory Color Finish - Provide panels with a factory applied,
T
baked coating to the exterior and interior of metal wall panels
and metal accessories. Exterior finish topcoat must be of 70
percent polyvinylidene fluoride (PVDF) resin with not less than
AF
0.8 mil dry film thickness (DFT). Provide exterior primer that
is standard with panel manufacturer but not less than 0.8 mil
dry film thickness (DFT). Provide factory applied 70 percent
PVDF clear coating of 0.8 mil DFT over the color topcoat and
edge coating for projects within 300 feet (91 meters) of a water
shoreline or industrial environment. Field apply 70 percent
PVDF clear coat to unfinished panel edges or field cut panels.
Interior finish exposed to sun or rain must be the same coating
R
and DFT as the exterior coating.
b. Wall system and attachments must resist wind loads as determined
by ASCE 7, with a factor of safety appropriate for the material
holding the anchor. Maximum deflection due to wind on aluminum
D
wall panels must be 1/60. Limit maximum deflection due to wind

on steel wall panels and girts behind aluminum or steel wall
panels to 1/120 of their respective spans, except that when
interior finishes are used limit the maximum allowable
deflection to 1/180 of their respective spans. The structural
performance test methods and requirements of the wall system
and attachments must be in accordance with ASTM E 1592.
c. Conformations - Non-insulated steel or aluminum wall panels
must have configurations for overlapping adjacent sheets or
interlocking ribs for securing adjacent sheets and fastened to
framework using exposed or concealed fasteners, as specified.
Provide sheets of sufficient length to cover the entire height
of any unbroken wall surface when the length of run is 30 feet
(9 meters) or less. Design wall systems with provisions for
expansion and contraction. Where required, provide series 305
stainless steel fasteners factory finished to match panels.
d. Shape - Standard V-beam or boxed beam type having 5 to 8 inch
(125 mm to 200 mm) pitch for steel panels or 4 to 8 inch (100
mm to 200 mm) pitch for aluminum panels, and 1.5 inch (38 mm)

Al Dhafra, UAE
overall depth, exclusive of coating. Other shapes may be

considered if approved by the DOR.
B201001 1.2.2 Steel Wall Panels
a. Material and Coating - Form sheets from steel conforming to ASTM

A 653/A 653M, Structural Grade 40, galvanized coating
conforming to ASTM A 924/A 924M, Class G-90; aluminum-coated
steel conforming to SAE AMS 5036; or steel-coated with
aluminum-zinc alloy conforming to ASTM A 792/A 792M, except that
coating chemical composition must be approximately 55 percent
aluminum, 1.6 percent silicon, and 43.4 percent zinc with
minimum coating weight of 0.5 ounce per square foot.
b. Gage - Minimum 22 U.S. Standard Gage for wall panels, but in
no case lighter than required to meet maximum deflection
requirements specified.
B201001 1.2.3 Aluminum Wall Panels
a. Material and Coating - Form sheets of Alloy 3004 or Alclad 3004
T
conforming to ASTM B 209 having proper temper to suit respective
forming operations.
b. Thickness - Minimum 0.032 inch (0.81 mm) nominal, but in no case
AF
thinner than that required to meet maximum deflection
requirements specified.
B201001 1.2.4 Insulated Aluminum or Steel Wall Panels
Insulated wall panels must be steel or aluminum factory-fabricated

units with insulating core between metal face sheets securely fastened
together and uniformly separated with rigid spacers. Provide factory
R
color finish on panels. Insulation must be compatible with adjoining
materials and capable of retaining its R-value for the life of the
metal facing sheets; and unaffected by extremes of temperature and
humidity. The assembly must have a flame spread rating not higher
D
than 25, and smoke developed rating not higher than 50 when tested
in accordance with ASTM E 84. Panels must be not less than 8 inches
(200 mm) wide and must be in one piece for unbroken wall heights.
Provide wall panel edge configurations with interlocking ribs for

securing adjacent panels. Utilize factory fabricated corners and
trim pieces at intersections with other materials. Fasten wall
panels to framework using concealed fasteners. Install in accordance
with DOR-approved shop drawings and manufacturer's recommendations.
a. Insulated Steel Panels - Zinc-coated steel conforming to ASTM

A 653/A 653M; or Aluminum-zinc alloy coated steel conforming
to ASTM A 792/A 792M, AZ 55 coating. Uncoated wall panels must
be 0.024 inch (0.61 mm) thick minimum.
b. Insulated Aluminum Panels - Alloy conforming to ASTM B209,
temper as required for the forming operation, minimum 0.032 inch
(0.81 mm) thick.
B201001 1.3 STUCCO EXTERIOR WALL CLOSURE

Al Dhafra, UAE
B201001 1.3.1 Portland Cement Plaster
ASTM C150, gray Portland cement Type II with 1/2 inch (13 mm) maximum
chopped alkali resistant fiberglass strands, minimum 1.5 percent by
weight to cement; 1 1/2 pounds (.68 kg) per sack of cement. Lime must
conform to ASTM C206, Type S. Utilize stainless steel or zinc corner
beads, J-beads and other accessories for the system.
a. Unless specifically deleted, utilize an acrylic admixture or

coating to give additional moisture suppression to control
fungus growth for the system.
b. Sand aggregate for job-mixed base coat and job-mixed finish coat
stucco must conform to ASTM C897.
c. Sand for Finish Coats: Natural color and graded within the
limits shown above for basecoats, except that the sand must pass
the No. 8 sieve, and for smooth finish the sand must pass the
No. 30 sieve.
d. Mix scratch coat in proportion of one part by volume Portland
cement, 3/4 to 1 1/2 parts by volume hydrated lime and 2 1/2
T
to 4 parts sand (volume of sand per sum of cement and lime).
Mix brown coat in proportion of one part by volume Portland
cement, 3/4 to 1 1/2 parts by volume hydrated lime and 3 to 5
AF
parts sand (volume of sand per sum of cement and lime). Mix
proportions can vary depending on climate and application
variations, with the approval of the DOR.
e. Portland Cement Stucco Finish Coat 3 to 5 parts sand (volume
of sand per sum of cement and lime).
f. Portland cement plaster application must be in accordance with
ASTM C 926. Furring and lath application must be in accordance
with ASTM C 1063.
R
g. Bonding Agents: ASTM C 932. Provide for exterior applications
to masonry or concrete substrates.
h. Provide water resistive barrier under stucco in accordance with
manufacturers recommendations and code requirements.
D
B201001 1.4 EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM (EIFS)
EIMA TM 101 and 01 EIMA TM 101.86. Refer to the RFP Part 3 Project Program
to determine if EIFS is used as the non-primary or the primary exterior finish
material for the project. Job-fabricate the exterior insulation and finish
system (EIFS) covering consisting of sheathing, water resistive barrier,
moisture drainable insulation board system, reinforcing fabric, base coat,
finish coat, adhesive, primer, accessories, flashing, sealant, and
mechanical fasteners. The system components must be compatible with each
other and with the substrate as recommended or approved by, and the products
of, a single manufacturer regularly engaged in furnishing Exterior
Insulation and Finish Systems. Install all materials using an applicator
trained and approved by the system manufacturer in accordance with
DOR-approved shop drawings and manufacturer's recommendations. Provide
EIFS Class PB or Class PM. Do not use Class PB EIFS in first floor, high
traffic areas, or in areas where pedestrians congregate without at least
one layer of 20 ounce (567 grams) reinforcing fabric mesh. Use 1/8 inch
(4 mm) minimum thickness for PB finish system. Color of the EIFS finish

Al Dhafra, UAE
must be consistent, with no variation noticeable to the DOR. Seal all joints
in EIFS in accordance with ASTM C 1481 and as recommended by the manufacturer.
Furnish manufacturer's standard warranty for the EIFS. Provide warranty
directly to Government and cover a period of not less than 5 years from date
Government accepted the work.
B201001 1.4.1 EIFS System Components
a. Glass Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board - Conform to ASTM C 1177/C

1177M. Nail Pull Resistance: No less than 120 lb (54.4 Kg) when
tested in accordance with ASTM C 473.
b. Mechanical Fasteners - Corrosion resistant and as approved by
EIFS manufacturer. Select fastener type and pattern based on
applicable wind loads and substrate into which fastener will
be attached, to provide the necessary pull-out, tensile, and
shear strengths.
c. Thermal Insulation - Drainable type. Do not use any layer of
insulation less than 3/4 in (19 mm) thick. The maximum
thickness of all layers must not exceed 4 in (101 mm).
Insulation Board must be certified as aged, in block form, prior
T
to cutting and shipping, a minimum of 6 weeks by air-drying,
or equivalent. Insulating material must conform to ASTM C 578,
Type I or IV, as recommended by the EIFS manufacturer and treated
AF
to be compatible with other EIFS components.
d. Reinforcing Fabric - Reinforcing fabric mesh must be
alkali-resistant, balanced, open weave, glass fiber fabric made
from twisted multi-end strands specifically treated for
compatibility with the other system materials, and comply with
EIMA TM 105.01 and as recommended by EIFS manufacturer.
B201001 1.5 CONCRETE EXTERIOR WALL CLOSURE

R
B201001 1.5.1 Precast Concrete Wall Panels:
ACI 211.1 and ACI 301. PCI MNL-116 or PCI MNL-117. Concrete must have
D
a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 4000 psi (281 Kg/cm2). Air

content of plastic concrete must be between 4 and 6 percent air by
volume. Provide a dosage of air entraining agent, which will produce
19 plus or minus 3 percent air in a 1 to 4 by weight standard sand
mortar in accordance ASTM C 185. Provide aggregate in accordance with
ASTM C 33. Seal the panel joints with fully loaded and tooled sealant
joints that are properly sized, shaped, and placed against
manufacturer approved backing material. Sealant material thickness
must not be less than 1/4 inch (6mm).
For rain screen precast panel wall systems with back-up wall
construction, provide sealed face joints that allow moisture to be
drained from the wall cavity behind the precast panels via weeps.
Provide flashing and water/ moisture resistant barriers to direct
water from the wall cavity to the outside of the building. Locate
weeps where cavity is obstructed such as above through-wall flashing,
at head and sill flashing above and below windows, above door
flashings, and wall base flashing.

Al Dhafra, UAE
For barrier wall precast panel wall systems without back-up wall
construction, provide a two stage drained joint system on all precast
panels joints. Design the two staged drained joint system to provide
the following;
a. Locate all sealant beads on the exterior side of the backer rod.
Align placement of the exterior sealant bead with the exterior
surface of the precast panel and space the placement of the
interior sealant bead as required below but no less than 3 inches
(75 mm) from the face of the panel to the face of the interior
tooled sealant bead.
b. Space sealant beads as far apart as possible but provide no less
than 1 inch (25mm) clear air space between the exterior seal
backer rod and the tooled interior sealant bead.
c. Form minimum of 1/2 inch (12mm) weep holes to facilitate
drainage in the vertical sealant joints. Attach a bead of
sealant to the interior vertical sealant bead with an outward
slope and a drop in height of at least 4 inches (100mm) to form
the drainage plane for the weep opening.
d. Locate weeps as necessary to allow complete drainage of water
T
from the two stage air/ vent space. Provide weeps at
obstructions in the air/ vent space such as through wall
flashing, horizontal panel joints, head and sill flashing above
AF
and below windows, above door flashing, and wall base flashing.
Minimize cracking potential of precast concrete elements by

implementing expansion and control joints in the precast assembly.
Comply with the following;
a. Exposed Aggregates - In addition to the above aggregate, facing

mixture aggregate, and aggregate for homogeneous panels with
R
exposed aggregate finish, must be crushed stone.
b. Cement - ASTM C 150.
c. Admixtures - ASTM C 260 for air-entraining admixtures. Other
admixtures: ASTM C 494. Certify that admixtures are free of
D
chlorides.
d. Reinforcement - ACI 301.
e. Inserts - ASTM A 47, Grade 32510 or 35018, or may be medium
strength cast steel conforming to ASTM A 27/A 27M, Grade
U-60-30. Where exposed to moisture, provide inserts hot-dip
galvanized after fabrication in accordance with ASTM A 153/A
153M.
f. Embedded Plates - ASTM A 36/A 36.
g. Flashing Reglets - Fabricate of sheet metal, open-type with
continuous groove 1-1/8 inches (28 mm) deep minimum by 3/16 inch
(5 mm) wide at opening and sloped upward at 45 degrees. Top
surface must have toothed lip section to anchor upturned edge
of metal snap-lock counter flashing when inserted. Provide
stainless steel sheet metal, 0.011 inch (0.28 mm) minimum
thickness, ASTM A 167, Type 302 or Type 304, Number 2D finish,
soft temper.
h. Clip Angles - ASTM A 36/A 36M steel, galvanized after
fabrication in accordance with ASTM A 153/A 153M.
i. Ferrous Casting Clamps - ASTM A 47, Grade 32510 or Grade 35018

Al Dhafra, UAE
malleable iron or cast steel, or ASTM A 27/A 27M, Grade U-60-30,

cast steel casting, hot-dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM
A 153/A 153M.
j. Threaded Fasteners - Provide galvanized machine bolts, washers
and, when required, nuts.
1) Bolts: ASTM A 449, 3/4 inch (19 mm) diameter machine bolts
with hexagon head.
2) Washers: ANSI B18.21.1, medium or heavy lock-spring

washers.
3) Nuts: ASTM A 563, Grade C, heavy, hexagon-type nuts.
4) Square Nuts: ASTM A 563, Grade A, plain.
B201001 1.6 CONCRETE WALL PANEL RESTORATION
Materials, physical and chemical properties, and composition of new concrete

must match that of existing concrete to be repaired, unless samples and
T
testing determine that existing mixtures and materials are faulty or
non-performing.
AF
B201001 1.6.1 Existing Concrete Testing
Take representative samples of existing concrete from areas of the

structure to be repaired at indicated locations. The samples must
be taken in accordance with ASTM C 42 and ASTM C 823 and tested in
accordance with ASTM C 39, ASTM C 42, ASTM C 295, ASTM C 457, ASTM
C 856, ASTM C 1218/C 1218M, and ASTM C 642, ASTM C 114, and ASTM C
1084. Evaluate aggregates in the existing concrete in accordance
R
with ASTM C 136 and ASTM C 295. Determine the air content of the
existing concrete in accordance with ASTM C 457 and ASTM C 642.
B201001 1.6.2 Admixtures

D
Air entraining admixtures must conform to ASTM C 260, water-reducing

or -retarding admixtures must conform to ASTM C 494, and pigments for
integrally colored concrete must conform to ASTM C 979 and ASTM C 1017.
Admixtures must not contain added chlorides.
B201001 1.6.3 Aggregates
Aggregates must conform to ASTM C 33.
B201001 1.6.4 Cement
Match cement composition of cement used in existing concrete to be

repaired as determined by samples and testing and conforms to the basic
requirements of ASTM C 150, Type I or II. Provide cement with
non-shrink (shrinkage compensating) properties and conforms to ASTM
C 1107, Class B or C, expansive cement type.
B201001 1.6.5 Pozzolan

Al Dhafra, UAE
Provide pozzolan to conform with ASTM C 618, Class F, including limit

on available alkalis, "Table 2 - Supplementary Optional Chemical
Requirements," and uniformity requirements, "Table 4 - Supplementary
Optional Physical Requirements."
B201001 1.6.6 Epoxy Anchor Adhesives
Use epoxy-resin grout to bond steel anchors to concrete with a 100

percent solids, moisture insensitive, low creep, structural adhesive.
The epoxy must conform to ASTM C 881, type IV; grade and class selected
to conform to the manufacturer's recommendations for the application.
The epoxy adhesive must be conditioned, proportioned, mixed, and
applied in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, except
as otherwise specified herein.
a. Epoxy-resin grout - Provide a two-component material, 100

percent solids by weight, formulated to meet the requirements
of ASTM C 881, Type I or II. Use type I material when materials
or atmospheric temperatures are 70 degrees F (21 degrees C) or
T
above. Use type II material when materials or atmospheric
temperatures are below 70 degrees F (21 degrees C). Provide
epoxy-resin grout with the ability to structurally rebond
AF
cracks, delaminations, and hollow plane conditions in concrete;
must be insensitive to the presence of water; and must have the
capability to penetrate cracks down to 5 mils in width.
Materials must have been successfully used in similar
conditions for a period of at least five years.
b. Epoxy Injection Ports - Design injection ports for epoxy-resin
grout for the intended use as required in this section and made
according to the recommendation of the epoxy manufacturer.
R
B201001 1.7 WOOD SIDING SYSTEM
B201001 1.7.1 Horizontal Wood Siding

D
Horizontal Wood Siding: DOC PS 20, exterior, lap type, 6 inches wide,
maximum practicable lengths, 7/16 inch (11 mm) thick, smooth face.
Shop coat all surfaces of wood siding and trim with an alkyd primer.
a. Species and Grades
Utilize species and grades listed:
1) Grade 1 Common spruce-pine-fir; NELMA, NLGA, WCLIB, or

WWPA.
2) Grade Prime or D finish, pressure-preservative-treated

hem-fir; NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA.
3) Grade D Select (Quality) eastern white pine, eastern

hemlock-balsam fir-tamarack, eastern spruce, or white woods;
NELMA, NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA.

Al Dhafra, UAE
4) Grade D Select northern white cedar; NELMA or NLGA.
5) Grade B & B, pressure-preservative-treated southern pine;

SPIB.
b. Water resistive barrier - Install to protect back-up wall
assembly.
B201001 1.8 VINYL SIDING SYSTEM
Integrally colored, vinyl siding complying with ASTM D 3679. Horizontal or

vertical pattern with exposure and shape to be compatible with overall design
concept. Provide a water resistive barrier to protect back-up wall assembly
and install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
B201001 1.8.1 Texture, Thickness, Finish and Color
Wood grain texture. Minimum Nominal Thickness: 0.044 inch (1.1 mm).
Minimum Profile Depth (Butt Thickness): 5/8 inch (16 mm) or 3/4 inch
(19 mm). Nailing Hem: Double thickness. Comply with
manufacturer's requirements for fastener types and nailing process.
T
B201001 1.8.2 Accessories
AF
Provide integrally colored, premanufactured accessories to match
siding. Use accessories at terminations with other materials.
B201001 1.9 MANUFACTURED FACED PANELS SYSTEMS EXTERIOR WALL SIDING
B201001 1.9.1 Glass Fiber Reinforced Cementitious Panels System
Siding made from fiber-cement board that does not contain asbestos
R
fibers; complies with ASTM C 1186, Type A, Grade II; is classified
as noncombustible when tested according to ASTM E 136; and has a
flame-spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84.
Provide a water resistive barrier under panel systems and install in
D
accordance with manufacturers recommendations. Panel system must be

a horizontal siding pattern in plain or beaded-edge style, unless
vertical sheet panels are allowed by the RFP Part 3. Texture: Rough
sawn or smooth, factory primed.
B201001 1.10 OTHER EXTERIOR WALL CLOSURE
B201001 1.10.1 Glass Block
a. Provide clear colorless glass block. Units to have polyvinyl

butyral edge coating. Units to have 75 percent light
transmission allowance. Utilize ventilators and accessories
recommended by glass block manufacturer. Glass block
specified is manufactured by Pittsburgh Corning Corporation.
The manufacturer's name and catalog identification are provided
to describe physical characteristics and functional
requirements of the product desired. Other manufacturers'
products that are considered to be the functional equivalent
will be acceptable.

Al Dhafra, UAE
b. Provide DECORA, VUE, or ARGUS pattern for the exterior glass

block units. Units designated as "reflective glass block"
must have a highly reflective oxide surface coating of a gray
color.
B201001 1.10.2 Concrete Unit Masonry
Masonry walls must comply with ACI 530.1. Load-bearing units: ASTM
C90, Non-load bearing- units: ASTM C129, Type I or II. Provide ground
face units, split-faced units, ground-faced units, or split-ribbed
units for exposed exterior walls. Provide water repellent admixture
to masonry units where the exterior face of the units will not receive
a waterproof coating such as paint. Mortar must conform to ASTM C
270, Type S. Test mortar in accordance with ASTM C 780. Provide
water repellent admixture and color additive in mortar for masonry
walls that will not receive a waterproof coating such as paint. Do
not use admixtures containing chlorides. Provide air entrainment,
not to exceed 12 percent, in mortar.
a. Adjustable Anchors for Structural Members - Use adjustable
T
anchors to anchor masonry structural steel columns or beams.
Weld the fixed portion of the anchors (steel anchor rods) to
the structural steel member. Provide adjustable anchors 3/16
AF
inch (5 mm) diameter steel wire, triangular-shaped. Anchors
attached to steel must be 5/16 inch (8 mm) diameter steel bars
placed to provide 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) play between flexible
anchors and structural steel members.
b. Deformed Bars - ASTM A 615/A 615M, ASTM A 616/A 616M, ASTM A
617/A 617M, or ASTM A 706/A 706M.
B201002 EXTERIOR WALL BACKUP CONSTRUCTION

R
B201002 1.1 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY
Provide concrete unit masonry as described in B201001 1.10.2

D
Provide water resistive barrier on the cavity-facing wythe of the backup

masonry. Coordinate water resistant barrier materials and methods to
provide water control and vapor transmission control for the lifetime of
the structure. Seal all holes and penetrations in the water resistive
barrier and repair any material damaged by other construction operations.
B201002 1.2 LOAD-BEARING METAL FRAMING SYSTEM
Exterior Studs:
Max. Deflection Criteria Exterior Finish
L/360 Cement Plaster, Wood Veneer, Synthetic

Plaster, Metal Panels
L/600 Brick Veneer, Stone Panels
Compute wall deflections on the basis that studs withstand all lateral forces

Al Dhafra, UAE
independent of any composite action from sheathing materials. Design studs

abutting windows or louvers not to exceed 1/4-inch maximum deflection and
as required in UFC 4-010-01.
a. Studs - ASTM A 1003/ASTM A 1003M, Structural Grade 50, Type H minimum;

provide Z180 (G60) galvanized coating in accordance with ASTM A
653/ASTM A 653M. Do not expose studs to direct moisture contact.
Clearly stamp studs with manufacturer's name, initials, or logo, an
ICBO number, material thickness and yield strength. Choose size and
gage as required to meet the loading requirements specified.
b. Bracing - Provide horizontal bracing in accordance with design
calculations and AISI SG-673, consisting of, as a minimum, runner
channel cut to fit between and welded to the studs or hot- or
cold-rolled steel channels inserted through cutouts in the web of each
stud and secured to studs with welded clip angles. Provide bracing,
as a minimum, at 5 feet (1.52 meters) o.c. for wind load only, and
3"-4"(1.0 meters) o.c. for axial loads.
c. Sheathing - Provide sheathing to withstand structural loads imposed
on the wall structure. Cover sheathing with either a 15 pound
asphalt-impregnated building paper, or air barrier as required by the
T
wall moisture analysis. Provide one of the following sheathings:
(1) Plywood: C-D Grade, Exposure 1, with an Identification Index

AF
of not less than 24/0.
(2) Structural-Use and OSB Panels: Sheathing grade with durability

equivalent to Exposure 1, Span Rating of 24/0 or greater.
(3) Gypsum: ASTM C 79/C 79M and ASTM C 1177/C 1177M, 1/2 inch (13
mm) thick fire retardant (Type X) 5/8 inch (15 mm) thick; 4 feet (1.2
meters) wide with square edge for supports 16 inches (400 mm) o.c.
R
with or without corner bracing of framing. Face gypsum sheathing with
materials capable of resisting six months of weathering exposure
without degradation of the covering or the gypsum material. Seal all
joints as recommended by the manufacturer.
D
d. Water resistive barrier - Install to protect back-up wall assembly.
B201002 1.3 WOOD FRAMING SYSTEM
Kiln-dry all lumber materials to comply with DOC PS 20. Installation must
be in accordance with AF&PA T11. Use preservative pressure treated lumber
at sill plates and other members in contact with concrete and masonry
surfaces.
a. Species and Grades - Provide species and grades listed:
(1) Grade 2 Common spruce-pine-fir; NELMA, NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA.
(2) Grade 2 Common, hem-fir; Douglas-fir; NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA.
(3) Grade 2 Common, southern pine; SPIB.

b. Sheathing - Sheathing must withstand structural loads imposed on the
wall structure. Cover sheathing with a water resistive barrier and
other barriers as required by the vapor pressure and hygrothermal

Al Dhafra, UAE
analysis. Provide one of the following sheathings:
(1) Plywood: C-D Grade, Exposure 1, with an Identification Index

of not less than 24/0.
(2) Structural-Use and OSB Panels: Sheathing grade with durability

equivalent to Exposure 1, Span Rating of 24/0 or greater.
(3) Gypsum: ASTM D 3273 for mold resistance, ASTM C 1177/C1177M,

fire retardant (Type X) 5/8 inch (15 mm) thick; 4 feet (1.2 meters)
wide with square edge for supports 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. with or
without corner bracing of framing. Face gypsum sheathing with
materials capable of resisting six months of weathering exposure
without degradation or the covering or the gypsum material. Seal all
joints as recommended by the manufacturer.
c. Water resistive barrier - Install to protect back-up wall assembly.
B201002 1.4 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE SYSTEM
a. Unless otherwise noted herein, all concrete design and construction
T
must be in accordance with UFC 1-200-01.
b. Concrete construction must be in accordance with ACI 301.
c. Refer to Performance Verification Testing for Cast-in-place field
AF
quality control.
d. Concrete construction tolerances must be in accordance with ACI 117.
e. Design for watertight joints, or weeping joints having back-up water
penetration protection in precast elements. Minimize cracking
potential of precast concrete elements by implementing expansion and
control joints in the precast assembly.
f. Joints must include properly sized and placed backing material and
fully loaded and tooled sealant joint of no less than 1/4 inch sealant
R
material thickness.
g. Provide a water resistive barrier to protect back-up wall assembly.
B201003 INSULATION AND EXTERIOR ENCLOSURE BARRIERS

D
Provide insulation, air barriers, water resistive barriers, and moisture barrier/
vapor retarders (if required) in the exterior enclosure to control heat loss/gain,
air infiltration/diffusion, moisture infiltration/diffusion, and water
infiltration. These barriers can be accomplished by insulation, liquid
application, applied sheet materials, or applied membranes.
Provide insulation, air barrier and water resistive barrier on all conditioned
facilities and moisture barrier/ vapor retarders when required by the exterior
enclosure vapor pressure and hygrothermal analysis. These barrier materials may
be installed separately or combined if different air barrier, moisture barrier/
vapor retarder, and water resistive barrier functions can be consolidated in one
material.
Provide exterior enclosure barriers that are durable and designed to last the life
of the facility. Seal the continuous air and water resistive barrier in a flexible
manner to allow for relative movement of adjacent building enclosure components.
Support exterior enclosure barriers to withstand maximum positive and negative
air pressure to be placed on the building without displacement or damage and

Al Dhafra, UAE
transfer the load to the structure. Permanently seal penetrations, joints, holes,
and transitions to adjoining construction in air and water resistive barriers as
recommended by the material manufacturer. Do not compromise exterior enclosure
barrier integrity at electrical boxes, fixture supports, and fasteners with holes
through the exterior enclosure barriers that allow air or water leakage. Do not
expose exterior enclosure barriers or retarders to environment conditions longer
than is recommended by the manufacturer.
B201003 1.1 INSULATION SYSTEMS
Vertical and horizontal polystyrene insulation conforming to ASTM C578 or

rigid polyisocyanurate board wall insulating products conforming to ASTM
C591 or mineral-fiber blanket insulation conforming to ASTM C 665 must be
provided. Wall insulating product must have a minimum R-value to meet UFC
3-101-01 Architecture and the energy design of the facility. Seal the joints
in rigid insulation within cavity/veneer walls for additional moisture and
air infiltration protection.
B201003 1.2 AIR BARRIER
T
The building air barrier is a combination of various construction materials/
components that form a continuous air barrier seal on all six sides of a
building. Materials designated as a part of the air barrier must use methods
AF
recommended by the manufacture to seal joints and intersections for
air-tightness. Individual materials used in the continuous air barrier
must have an air permeance not to exceed 0.004 cfm/ft2 at a pressure
differential of 0.3 inches water (1.56lb/ft2), (0.02 L/s. m2 at 75 Pa) when
tested in accordance with ASTM E 2178. If the air barrier is to be field
tested, refer to the requirements in the paragraph entitled "Air Barrier
Performance Testing" of this section for entire building minimum air
permeance. Air barrier installation at windows must be in accordance with
R
ASTM E 2112.
B201003 1.2.1 Exterior Enclosure Air Barrier Materials

D
Refer to Air Barrier Association of America (ABAA) to identify

qualified materials with the appropriate performance for the air
barrier. Utilize materials from the "ABAA Evaluated Air Barrier
Materials" found at the following web link;
http://www.airbarrier.org/materials/index_e.php
B201003 1.3 WATER RESISTIVE BARRIER
Provide a water resistant barrier to resist bulk water penetration and

wind-driven rain that passes the exterior cladding of the facility. Provide
vapor permeable water resistant barrier if the water resistive barrier
function is combined with other exterior enclosure barrier functions.
Integrate water resistive barriers with wall flashing to form a shingled
effect and direct water down the outside surface of the water resistive
barrier, away from the back-up wall assembly, and out of the wall. Comply
with the requirements of ASTM E2256 for mechanical fastened building wrap
materials or ICC-ES Acceptance Criteria AC38 for other materials.
B201003 1.3.1 Exterior Enclosure Water Resistive Barrier Materials

Al Dhafra, UAE
Refer to Air Barrier Association of America (ABAA) to identify

qualified materials with the appropriate performance for the water
resistive barrier. Utilize materials from the "ABAA Evaluated Air
Barrier Materials" found at the following web link;
http://www.airbarrier.org/resistive/index_e.php
B201003 1.4 MOISTURE BARRIER/ VAPOR RETARDER
Provide a moisture barrier/ vapor retarder to slow or reduce the unintended

movement of water vapor in and out of conditioned space, if required by
exterior enclosure vapor pressure and hygrothermal analysis. Perform the
analysis and provide a moisture barrier/ vapor retarders in accordance with
UFC 3-101-01, Architecture. Choose the moisture barrier/ vapor retarder
permeability as a function of climate, the characteristics of the materials
that comprise the assembly, and the interior conditions. If required,
install moisture barrier/ vapor retarder materials on the warm side of the
building assembly insulation (in the predominate season for the facility
climate). Select moisture barrier/ vapor retarders in accordance with ASTM
C755.
T
B201004 PARAPETS
AF
Avoid parapets when possible, but when necessary, provide parapets with the same
materials as the exterior wall construction, including framing members, anchors,
flashings, cants, and accessories. Parapets must be designed to withstand the
lateral loads prevailing at the project site and be provided with thruwall flashing
below the parapet cap, at structural members, at penetrations, and at the roof
level. Provide flashing and scuppers in accordance with SMACNA.
B201005 EXTERIOR LOUVERS & SCREENS

R
If required, provide louvers, which are not an integral part of the mechanical
equipment, exterior closures, grilles and screens, storm shutters, and other
materials used for a variety of purposes including screening of equipment or as
D
louvers for exterior doors.
Louvers, screens, grilles in must be selected in a color and design that is

compatible with the fabric of the exterior architectural character as described
below. For frame construction, install in accordance with ASTM E 2112.
B201005 1.1 WALL LOUVERS
Wall louvers must be drainable blade type louver with blade slopes of 45
degrees minimum, but provide wind driven rain rated louvers for wall louvered
rooms without a floor drain within the room. Louvers must be made to
withstand a wind load of not less than 30 psf (146 Kg/m2), .08 inch (2 mm)
thick 6063-T5 or T52 extruded aluminum in a factory-finished color in
accordance with AAMA 2605 with a minimum coating thickness of 1.2 mil to
match the building facade. Wall louvers must bear the AMCA certified ratings
program seal for air performance and water penetration in accordance with
AMCA 500 , 500L (wind driven rain), and AMCA 511. Provide sill flashing
with sloped drain pan at base of louver to collect moisture that migrates
down the interior face of the louver. This sill flashing must drain water

Al Dhafra, UAE
to the outside of the building. Louvers must have bird screens.
B201005 1.2 SCREENED EQUIPMENT ENCLOSURE
Design and fabricate support frames to withstand wind loads. Anchor frames
securely in place. Provide secondary horizontal steel or aluminum framing
for attachment of screen materials. Screen material must be factory finished
coating in accordance with AAMA 2605 with a minimum coating thickness of
1.2 mils. Formed metal panels from galvanized steel sheet per ASTM A 653
or aluminum sheet per ASTM B 209.
B201005 1.3 STORM SHUTTERS
B201005 1.3.1 Roll Shutters
Roll shutters must have factory finished 0.050 inch (1.27 mm),
6063-T5/T6 aluminum slats with continuous over-head housing, frame
and tracks. Roll shutter must be capable of being locked in a closed
position by a non-key device.
T
B201005 1.3.2 Accordion Shutters
Accordion shutters must have factory-finished aluminum alloy

AF
6063-T5/T6 slats and tracks. Accordion shutter must have stainless
steel wheel carriers, nylon wheels and guides with stainless steel
fasteners and be capable of being locked in a closed position by a
non-key device.
B201005 1.3.3 Hinged Louvered Shutters
Hinged louvered shutters must have factory finished 0.50 inch (13 mm),
R
6063-T5/T6 aluminum louvered blades and frames with stainless steel
hinges, holders, and fasteners. Allow minimum space between
horizontal louver blades. Provide storm bar where required due to
the lateral loads imposed on the shutter.
D
B201005 1.3.4 Removable Shutters
Removable shutters must have formed factory finished 0.050 inch (1.27
mm), 3003-H16 aluminum panels and continuous 6063-T5/T6 header and
base frame with stainless steel fasteners or spring tempered stainless
steel clips.
B201005 1.3.5 Exterior Door Louvers
If allowed by UFC 4-010-01, louvers for exterior doors must be inverted

"Y" type with minimum of 30 percent net-free opening. Weld or tenon
louver blades to continuous channel frame and weld assembly to door
to form watertight assembly. Form louvers of hot-dip galvanized
steel of same gage as door facings. Louvers must have steel-framed
insect screens secured to room side and readily removable. Louvers
must have aluminum wire cloth, 18 by 18 or 18 by 16 inch mesh, for
insect screens. Net-free louver area to be before screening.

Al Dhafra, UAE
B201006 BALCONY WALLS & HANDRAILS
B201006 1.1 PRECAST CONCRETE BALCONY WALLS
Precast concrete balcony walls must be in accordance with section B201001

EXTERIOR CLOSURE paragraph titled, "Precast Concrete Wall Panels."
B201006 1.2 UNIT MASONRY BALCONY WALLS
B201006 1.2.1 Clay Masonry Units
Clay masonry balcony walls must be in accordance with section B201001

EXTERIOR CLOSURE, paragraph titled, "Face Brick."
B201006 1.2.2 Concrete Masonry Units
Concrete masonry balcony walls must be in accordance with section

B201001 EXTERIOR CLOSURE, paragraph titled, "Unit Masonry."
B201006 1.3 METAL FRAMED ASSEMBLY BALCONY WALLS
T
Metal framed assembly balcony walls must be in accordance with section
B201001 EXTERIOR CLOSURE, paragraph titled, "Load Bearing Metal Framing
System."
AF
B201006 1.4 WOOD FRAMED ASSEMBLY BALCONY
Wood framed assembly balcony walls must be in accordance with section B201001
EXTERIOR CLOSURE, paragraph titled, "Wood Framing System."
B201006 1.5 HANDRAILS

R
Design handrails and anchorage connections to resist loads in accordance

with IBC. Provide materials in accordance with NAAMM PR, with the same size
handrail and vertical post. Provide series 300 stainless steel pipe
D
collars. Factory coat all metal railings, except ornamental metals such
as brass, bronze, and nickel-silver, with a high performance coating in
accordance with AAMA 2605 with a minimum coating thickness of 1.2 mils unless
otherwise noted.
B201006 1.5.1 Steel Handrails
Steel handrails, including inserts in concrete, steel pipe conforming

to ASTM A 53 or structural tubing conforming to ASTM A 500, Grade A
or B of equivalent strength must be provided. Steel railings must
be of 1 1/2 inches (38 mm) nominal size. Railings must be hot-dip
galvanized, shop primed shop painted for exterior applications.
B201006 1.5.2 Aluminum Handrails
Aluminum railing must be of 1-1/2 inch (38 mm) nominal schedule 40

pipe conforming to ASTM B 429 or 1-3/4 inch (44 mm) square aluminum
semi-hollow tube with rounded corners conforming to ASTM B 221.
Railings must be coated with a high performance coating or anodized

Al Dhafra, UAE
in accordance with AAMA 611, Class I. All fasteners must be Series

300 stainless steel.
B201006 1.5.3 Wood Handrails
Wood handrails must be of pre-finished natural hardwood in oak,

walnut, or ash. Wood must be coated with hard acrylic finish to
withstand indentations.
B201007 EXTERIOR SOFFITS
Exterior soffit system assemblies must include trim and necessary accessories
including high performance coatings, if required. Installation must be crisp,
fit and trim with tight joinery to back-up framing. Soffits must be designed to
be field assembled by lapping side edges of adjacent panels and mechanically
attaching through panels to galvanized, non-load bearing framing conforming to
ASTM A 653 (G60) and ASTM C 645, using concealed fasteners. Provide trim
accessories of the same material and finish as the soffit material where soffit
abuts other materials.
T
Use adequate backing material to assure snug joints and even face planes. Where
soffits ventilate an attic space, or an otherwise unventilated space, provide a
soffit/ridge/louver/ventilator ventilation system with air quantities complying
AF
to the IBC. For spaces intentionally not vented, provide sealed soffits to
maintain the integrity of the air barrier and insulation barrier.
B201007 1.1 METAL SOFFIT PANELS
Metal soffit panels must be factory-formed and factory-finished. Use

factory-applied sealant in side laps
R
B201007 1.2 VINYL SOFFIT SYSTEM
If required, provide integrally colored vinyl soffit complying with ASTM

D 4477.
D
B201007 1.3 EXTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEM
Exterior gypsum wall board soffit system must be tapered edge 5/8 inch (16
mm) thick, 48 inch (1.2 meter) wide exterior gypsum board panels conforming
to ASTM C 931 and ASTM C 840, mechanically attached to galvanized non-load
32bearing framing conforming to ASTM A 653, G60 and ASTM C 754. Tape and
finish gypsum board joints in accordance with ASTM C840. Soffit design must
assure that the gypsum soffit material does not have direct water contact.
B201008 WALL FLASHING
Flashing must be aluminum or stainless steel or copper. Aluminum must conform

to ASTM B 209/B 209M, 0.040 inches (1.27 mm) thick and must be coated to match
the item flashed. Stainless steel must conform to ASTM A 167, type 302 or 304,
2D finish, fully annealed, dead soft temper. Thickness must be a minimum of 0.018
inches (0.4572 mm). Copper must conform to ASTM B 370, cold rolled temper.
Thickness of copper must be 20 ounces per square foot (6.125 Kg/m2). Incorporate
the flashing in the water resistive barrier and seal joints to flashing to form

Al Dhafra, UAE
a shingled effect and direct liquid water to the exterior of the exterior enclosure
and away from back-up wall assembly.
B201009 EXTERIOR PAINTING AND SPECIAL COATINGS
Apply coatings directly to all non-prefinished surfaces of the exterior

construction. Comply with Master Painters Institute requirements for surface
degradation analysis, surface preparation, paint and coating selection, paint
application restrictions for substrate materials, and paint application.
B201009 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Painting practices must comply with applicable federal, state and local laws
enacted to insure compliance with Federal Clean Air Standards. Apply
coating materials in accordance with SSPC PA 1. SSPC PA 1 methods are
applicable to all substrates.
All paint must be in accordance with the Master Painter Institute (MPI)
standards for the exterior architectural surface being finished. The
current MPI, "Approved Product List" which lists paint by brand, label,
T
product name and product code as of the date of contract award, will be used
to determine compliance with the submittal requirements of this
specification. The Contractor may choose to use a more current MPI
AF
"Approved Product List"; however, only one list may be used for the entire
contract. All coats on a particular substrate, or a paint system, must be
from a single manufacturer. No variation from the MPI Approved Products
List is acceptable.
Select paint systems for the project in accordance with the MPI Architectural
Painting Decision Tree available on the Whole Building Design Guide. Use
this interactive MPI Decision Tree website to identify applicable paint
R
system(s) for the project. The MPI Decision Tree identifies paint systems
for each interior or exterior coated surface in "Normal" or "Aggressive"
environmental conditions and generally lists the applicable paint systems
in descending order of performance. The paint system at the top of each
D
substrate list generally indicates the highest performing acceptable

coating system.
Choose the "Aggressive" environmental conditions in the MPI Decision Tree

for exterior systems that are used in moist humid conditions, abrasive
conditions, chemical exposure conditions, or within five miles proximity
of the ocean or a body of water. Also use "Aggressive " environmental
conditions in interior spaces that are exposed to in moist humid conditions,
abrasive conditions, chemical exposure conditions, such as bathrooms,
shower rooms, kitchens, chemical storage area, swimming pools, laundry,
sanitary areas, commercial kitchens, industrial production areas, and
hospital operating rooms provide paint systems that comply with the MPI
Decision Tree "Aggressive" environmental conditions.
Comply with the following requirements when determining the appropriate

paint or coating system from the MPI Decision Tree:
a. Some of these paint systems are identified with a "NAVFAC Anchor".

This "NAVFAC Anchor" indicates the minimum performing system that NAVFAC

Al Dhafra, UAE
will accept for that substrate and environmental conditions.
b. When multiple "NAVFAC Anchors" are indicated on a certain substrate

and environmental condition, provide the "NAVFAC Anchor" paint or coating
system that is most appropriate for the facility use.
c. If only one MPI Decision Tree choice is available for a certain

substrate and environmental condition with no indicated NAVFAC preference,
provide that sole option for NAVFAC projects.
d. If the MPI Decision Tree provides multiple choices and no NAVFAC

preference is denoted, refer to the Additional RFP Requirements below to
determine level of performance.
e. If the MPI Decision Tree does not identify all paint system applicable
to the facility, utilize the MPI Architectural Painting, Exterior Systems
Manual to identify other appropriate paint systems for the project. Utilize
the "Premium Grade" systems and comply with all limitations stated in the
MPI "Approved Product List" for each paint product. Products having an MPI
VOC Range E3 must be given preferential consideration over lower VOC Ranges.
T
Use higher performing paint systems unless the lower performing paint system
can be justified based on a lifecycle cost to include surface preparation,
application, disposal, environmental impact, and required recoating cycles.
AF
Only use paint products that have been tested for MPI'S "DETAILED
PERFORMANCE" or "EVALUATED PERFORMANCE ". Do not use products that have only
been tested for "INTENDED USE".
f. If an "Aggressive" environmental condition option is not available

in the MPI Decision Tree for a certain substrate, use the "Normal"
environmental condition option.
R
g. Refer to the Additional Exterior Paint and Coating System Requirements
below for further system requirements.
Paints and coatings must comply with Master Painters Institute Green
D
Performance Standard GPS-1-12 which is available at the following website;

http://www.specifygreen.com/EvrPerf/EnvironmentalPerformance.html .
Choose paints that provide performance, are environmentally friendly, and
that conform to EPA or local environmental regulations, whichever requires
the lowest VOC content.
B201009 1.1.1 MPI Gloss Levels
Gloss levels must comply with the MPI system of determining gloss as
defined in the Evaluation sections of the MPI Manuals. Utilize the
performance characteristics of the paint gloss and sheen to categorize
paint rather than manufacturers description of the product. The MPI
Gloss Levels are indicated by the notation G1, G2, G3, G4, G5, G6,
or G7. Navy only uses MPI Gloss Levels G2, G3, G5, G6.
The MPI Decision Tree indicates a default gloss level for each paint
system, however consider the appearance, anticipated conditions, and
need for cleaning when establishing the final gloss level for each
coated surface of the project. Comply with the following guidance in

Al Dhafra, UAE
choosing the appropriate gloss level.
a. Use G2 "Velvet-like" Flat for ceilings, residential walls away

from human contact and low traffic areas.
b. Use G3 "Eggshell-like" in high traffic areas for ceilings and

walls, when human contact with the wall is limited, and for dark accent
colors.
c. Use G5 Semigloss for walls, doors and trim for high durability
and clean ability and when a surface is expected to have routine human
contact.
d. Use G6 Gloss only in special situations such as for piping

identification or special effects.
The MPI gloss and sheen standard values are per ASTM D523, and are
as follows:
Gloss Level Number Gloss@60 Degrees
T
Sheen@85 Degrees
Gloss Level 1(G1)-
-Matte or Flat Max.5 units Max.10
units
AF
Gloss Level 2(G2)--"Velvet-like" Flat Max. 10 units 10-35
units
Gloss Level 3(G3)--"Eggshell-like" Max. 10-25 units 10-35
units
Gloss Level 4(G4)-"Satin-like Max. 20-35 units Min. 35
units
Gloss Level 5(G5)-Semi-Gloss 35-70 units
Gloss Level 6(G6)--Gloss 70-85 units
R
Gloss Level 7(G7)--High Gloss More than 85 units
B201009 1.1.2 MPI System Designations and Table Abbreviations

D
The MPI coating system number description is found in either the MPI
Architectural Painting Specification Manual or the Maintenance
Repainting Manual and defined as an exterior system
a. EXT - MPI short-term designation for an exterior coating system

on a new surface.
b. REX - the MPI short term designation for an exterior coating
system used in repainting projects or over existing coating
systems.
c. DSD - the MPI short-term designation for Degree of Surface
Degradation as defined in the Assessment sections in the MPI
Maintenance Repainting Manual. Degree of Surface Degradation
designates the MPI Standard for description and appearance of
existing condition of surfaces to be painted. This DSD
classification is used to determine the proper surface
preparation necessary for painting.
B201009 1.1.3 Surface Preparation

Al Dhafra, UAE
Comply with the "Exterior Surface Preparation" section of the MPI

Architectural Painting Specification Manual or the Exterior Surface
Preparation section of the MPI Maintenance Repainting Manual. All
suggestive language such as "may" or "should" are deleted from the
standard and "must" inserted in its place. Suggestive language such
as "recommended" or "advisable" is deleted from the standard and
"require" or "required" inserted in its place. The results of these
wording substitutions change this document to required procedures.
For surface preparation, determine a MPI DSD Assessment of each
surface and comply with the MPI Surface Preparation Requirements
relating to the assessments. Not withstanding MPI requirements,
clean exterior ferrous metal that is exposed to weather conditions
(wind, precipitation, solar degradation, and humidity) to a SSPC SP
10 level (near white).
Remove dirt, splinters, loose particles, grease, oil, and other

foreign matter and substances deleterious to coating performance as
specified for each substrate before application of paint or surface
treatments. For existing buildings, use MPI Maintenance Repainting
Manual to determine the coatings that need to be removed. Remove
T
deteriorated or loose coatings before repainting begins. Oil and
grease must be removed prior to mechanical cleaning. Cleaning must
be programmed so that dust and other contaminants will not fall on
AF
wet, newly painted surfaces. Exposed ferrous metals such as nail
heads on or in contact with surfaces to be painted with water-thinned
paints, must be spot-primed with a suitable corrosion-inhibitive
primer capable of preventing flash rusting and compatible with the
coating specified for the adjacent areas.
B201009 1.2 ADDITIONAL EXTERIOR PAINT AND COATING SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS

R
In addition to the MPI Decision Tree, comply with the following paint system
requirements:
D
B201009 1.2.1 Pavement Coatings
a. EXT 3.2 Concrete Horizontal Surfaces
Normal/ Aggressive Condition; Pigmented;
Provide road and parking lot pavement marking in accordance with UFGS 32
17 23.00 20, Pavement Markings.
b. EXT 10.2 Bituminous Coated Surfaces
Provide road and parking lot pavement marking in accordance with UFGS 32
17 23.00 20, Pavement Markings.

Al Dhafra, UAE
B201009 1.2.2 Hot Metal Surfaces (including smokestacks),
a. EXT 5.2 Hot Metal, Up to 205 degrees C 400 degrees F
Normal/ Aggressive Condition; Pigmanted
(1) EXT 5.2A - Heat Resistant Enamel
Primer: Intermediate/ Topcoat:
MPI 21 Surface Preparation and numbers of coats per manufacturers'

instructions.
b. EXT 5.2 Hot Metal (Ferrous), Up to 400 degree C, 750 degree F
T
(1) 5.2C - Heat resistant - inorganic zinc coating
Primer:
AF
Intermediate/ Topcoat:

instructions.
(2) 5.2B - Heat resistant - aluminum finish enamel

R

D
instructions.
c. EXT 5.2 Hot Metal (Non-Ferrous), Up to 593 degree C, 1100 degree F
Normal/ Aggressive Condition; Pigmented
(1) 5.2D - Heat Resistant Coating
New and existing surfaces cleaned bare to SSPC SP 10/NACE No. 2

instructions.
B201010 EXTERIOR JOINT SEALANT

Al Dhafra, UAE
Sealant joint design, priming, tooling, masking, cleaning and application must
be in accordance with the general requirements of Sealants: A Professionals' Guide
from the Sealant, Waterproofing & Restoration Institute (SWRI). All sealant must
conform to ASTM C 920.
Joints must include proper backing material for sealant support during
application, control of sealant depth, and to act as a bond breaker. Use filler
boards, backer rods and bond breaker tapes. Provide priming unless specifically
not recommended by the sealant manufacturer. Applied sealant must be tooled.
Tooling must not compact sealant too less than the minimum sealant thickness
required. Mask adjacent surfaces to control sealant boundaries during sealant
application.
B201011 SUN CONTROL DEVICES (EXTERIOR)
Sun control devices must be manufactured devices to provide sun control on exterior
windows and storefronts. Sun control devices must be designed and installed to
withstand the wind loads prevailing at the project site.
B201011 1.1 EXTERIOR SUN SCREENS
T
Exterior sun screens must be of aluminum with 6063-T5/T6 aluminum
demountable frame attachment. Screen material must be formed factory
AF
finished metal from aluminum sheet per ASTM B 209. Screen material must be
factory finished coating in accordance with AAMA 2605 with a minimum coating
thickness of 1.2 mils. Sunscreen must be awning, fin or other type
appropriate to the installation.
B201012 SCREEN WALL
Screen walls include attached or unattached walls adjacent to the main building.
R
Screen walls must conform to the applicable portions of Section B201001 EXTERIOR
CLOSURE.
B201090 OTHER EXTERIOR WALLS

D
B2020 EXTERIOR WINDOWS
Standard windows must be in compliance with ANSI/AAMA/WDMA 101, SWI SWS, UFC
4-010-01, and the design criteria of ASCE 7 for glazed windows to meet the Building
Code.
If required, provide windows that meet the requirements of AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2.

Residential construction must utilize windows that comply with AAMA LC-25
designation unless the wind pressure on the building exceeds 38 psf (185 Kg/m2).
Commercial (non-residential) construction must utilize windows that comply with
AAMA designation HC-40 (60 psf - 293 Kg/m2) for windows that do not have to meet
anti-terrorism requirements, and HC-60 (90 psf - 439 Kg/m2) for commercial windows
that are required to meet anti-terrorism requirements, unless the wind pressure
or blast pressure on the building exceeds the design pressure for these minimum
windows. Determine the wind pressure on the building by converting the ASCE-7
basic wind speed to wind pressure and find the corresponding structural test
pressure in the AAMA specific requirements or optional performance tables. If the
residential window wind pressure exceeds of 38 psf (185 Kg/m2) or the commercial

Al Dhafra, UAE
(non-residential) window wind pressure exceeds 60 psf (293 Kg/m2) or exceeds 90

psf (439 Kg/m2), utilize a higher AAMA designated window complying with the
calculated wind pressure. Anti- Terrorism window systems (including connections)
must meet the testing requirements of UFC 4-010-01 when tested in accordance with
ASTM F1642.
Comply with ASTM E 2112 and with flashing and weather-resistive barrier
manufacturers recommendations to install windows in framed wall construction.
Comply with window flashing details from BIA for masonry back-up and veneer walls.
Engineer and install window cleaning access and anchorage to the exterior wall
for facilities over three stories tall without interior window cleaning access
from pivoting or tilting sash. Provide anchors in accordance with OSHA standard
29 CFR Section 1910.66.
Windows must be provided with sills on the exterior and stools on the interior
of the opening. Sills must be special shape or cut unit masonry or precast concrete
in masonry exterior construction and extruded aluminum or aluminum-wrapped wood
framing or formed metal in other construction. Positively slope sills away from
windows. Window stools must be slate or solid polymer for commercial construction
and painted wood for residential construction.
T
B202001 WINDOWS
AF
Exterior windows must consist of fixed and operable sash used singly and in
multiples. Provide operable sash in spaces occupied by people as a minimum.
Include operating hardware, non-corroding framed metal screens for operable sash,
integrated blinds set between glass panels and security grilles. Provide jamb
support for larger windows where recommended by manufacturer. Metal windows with
insulating glass must have thermally broken frames and sash. Provide thermally
broken windows and window assemblies where separating conditioned and
unconditioned spaces. Provide windows and window assemblies that bear an NFRC
R
energy performance label and meet or exceed current EnergyStar requirements.
Provide glazing in exterior windows in accordance with section B202004 EXTERIOR

GLAZING.
D
B202001 1.1 STANDARD WINDOW SYSTEMS
B202001 1.1.1 Steel Windows
Conform to SWI SWS. Solid hot-rolled steel shape welded frames and
mullions. Provide chemically cleaned and primed galvanized frames
with polysteel powder coat finish. Provide glazing beads, steel frame
screens with aluminum mesh at operable sashes, hardware and locks,
and tinted glazing. Aluminum screens must comply with ANSI/SMA 1004.
B202001 1.1.2 Aluminum Windows
Conform to ANSI/AAMA/WDMA 101. Factory finish aluminum windows and

provide with aluminum frame screens with aluminum mesh at operable
sash, hardware and locks, and tinted glazing. Aluminum screens must
comply with ANSI/SMA 1004.
Exposed aluminum surfaces must be factory finished with an AA 45 anodic

Al Dhafra, UAE
coating or an AAMA organic coating. Provide a minimum of

architectural Class II anodized coating or a baked enamel finish
conforming to AAMA 2604 for residential construction. Provide a
minimum of architectural Class I anodized coating or a
high-performance organic coating conforming to AAMA 2605 for
non-residential (commercial) construction. AAMA coatings must have
a total dry film thickness of 1.2 mils.
B202001 1.1.3 Security Windows
Security windows delay forced entry into the building through the
windows. In addition to meeting the requirements of AAMA 101, windows
designated "resistance to forced entry" must conform to the
requirements of AAMA 1302.
B202001 1.1.4 Plastic Windows, Factory Finish
Provide integral colored or co-extruded color PVC, welded and

reinforced corners, reinforcing members, fasteners, hardware,
weatherstripping, welded sill, and anchors conforming to
T
ANSI/AAMA/WDMA 101 or ASTM D 4099. The exterior grade polyvinyl
chloride extrusion must comply with AAMA 303 and ASTM 4726.
AF
B202001 1.1.5 Wood Windows
Wood windows must consist of complete units including sash, glass,

frame, weatherstripping, insect screen, and hardware. Window units
must meet the requirements of AAMA 101, except maximum air
infiltration must not exceed 0.30 CFM per linear foot of sash crack
when tested under uniform static air pressure difference of 1.57 psf
(7.66 Kg/m2). Glass and glazing materials must conform to section
R
B202004, EXTERIOR GLAZING. Insect screen must meet ASTM D 3656, Class
2, 18 by 14 mesh, color charcoal. Aluminum screen frames must meet
SMA 1004.
D
a. Finish
1) Vinyl (PVC) Cladding: Preservative treat all basic wood

frame and sash members in accordance with WDMA I.S.4, except
do not use pentachlorophenol. Clad all exterior surfaces with
rigid polyvinyl sheathing, complying with ASTM D 1784, class
14344-C, not less than 35 mil average thickness.
2) Aluminum Cladding: Preservative treat all basic wood frame

and sash members in accordance with WDMA I.S.4, except do not
use pentachlorophenol. Clad all exterior surfaces with roll
formed aluminum with joints sealed during assembly. Aluminum
clad frames and sash must meet performance requirements of AAMA
101. Aluminum finish must be an organic coating of an AAMA 2604
coating for residential construction and AAMA 2605 for
non-residential (commercial) construction with a minimum dry
film thickness of 1.2 mils.
B202002 STOREFRONTS

Al Dhafra, UAE
Provide one-story storefront system fabricated from formed and extruded aluminum
and glass components for exterior use.
B202002 1.1 ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS
B202002 1.1.1 Performance Requirements
a. Structural Requirements, as measured in accordance with ANSI/ASTM

E330: Wind loads for exterior assemblies must meet or exceed 25 psf
(122 Kg/m2) acting inward and 25 psf (122 Kg/m2) acting outward.
Design system to withstand this as a minimum and comply with design
pressure established within the required ASCE 7-05 Wind Speed
Calculations determined by the overall average opening within the
project.
b. Deflection: Maximum calculated deflection of any framing member

in direction normal to plane of wall when subjected to specified design
pressures for spans up to and including 13-6" must be limited to 1/175
of its clear span and for spans greater than 13-6" deflection must
T
be limited to 1/240 + 1/4" of its clear span, except that maximum
deflection of members supporting plaster surfaces must not exceed
1/360 of its span.
AF
c. Air Infiltration - Air leakage through fixed light areas of
storefront must not exceed 0.06 cfm per square foot of surface area
when tested in accordance with ASTM E283 at differential static
pressure of 6.24 psf (33.84 Kg/m2).
d. Water Penetration - When tested in accordance with ASTM E 331, there

must be no water penetration at a pressure of 15 psf (73 Kg/m2) of
R
fixed area.
e. Water infiltration No uncontrolled leakage when tested in

accordance with ASTM E331 at test pressure of 10 psf (48 Kg/m2) for
D
system standard and capable of performing within the Design Pressure

requirements derived from the ASCE 7-05 requirements.
f. Provide storefront framing and glazing assembly with an overall

thermal transmittance value of not more than 0.40 BTU/hr x ft2 x deg
F as determined according to NFRC 100.
B202002 1.1.2 Doors And Frames
Provide doors complete with frames, framing members, subframes,

transoms, adjoining sidelights, adjoining window wall, trim, and
accessories, as required for a complete installation. Anchors must
be stainless steel. Weatherstripping must be Continuous wool pile,
silicone treated, or type recommended by door manufacturer. See
B203008, EXTERIOR DOOR HARDWARE for hardware requirements.
B202002 1.1.3 Aluminum Alloy for Doors and Frames
ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T6 for extrusions. ASTM B 209, alloy and temper

Al Dhafra, UAE
best suited for aluminum sheets and strips.
B202002 1.1.4 Fabrication
a. Aluminum Frames: Provide removable glass stops and glazing

beads for frames accommodating fixed glass. Use countersunk
stainless steel Phillips screws for exposed fastenings, and
space not more than 12 inches (300 mm) o.c.. Mill joints in
frame members to a hairline fit, reinforce, and secure
mechanically.
b. Aluminum Doors: Doors must be medium or wide stile. Doors must
be not less than 1-3/4 inches (44 mm) thick. Minimum wall
thickness, 0.125 inch (3.175 mm), except beads and trim, 0.050
inch (1.27 mm). Bevel single-acting doors at lock, hinge, and
meeting stile edges. Double-acting doors must have rounded
edges at hinge stile, lock stile, and meeting stile edges.
c. Finishes: Provide exposed aluminum surfaces with factory finish
of anodic coating conforming to AA45, Architectural Class I or
an organic coating conforming to AAMA 2605 with a total dry film
thickness of not less than 1.2 mils.
T
B202003 CURTAIN WALLS
AF
B202003 1.1 GLAZED CURTAIN WALL SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
Provide system complete with framing, mullions, trim, panels, windows,

glass, glazing, sealants, insulation, fasteners, anchors, accessories,
concealed auxiliary members, and attachment devices for securing the wall
to the structure as specified.
Fully coordinate system accessories directly incorporated and adjacent to

R
related work and insure materials compatibility, deflection limitations,
thermal movements, and clearances and tolerances as specified. Design and
test in accordance with AAMA Curtain Wall Manual.
D
Provide thermally broken curtain wall framing and infill glazing and panels
where separating conditioned and unconditioned spaces.
B202003 1.1.1 Source
Curtain wall system components must be furnished by one manufacturer

or fabricator; however, all components need not be products of the
same manufacturer.
B202003 1.1.2 Cleaning Provisions
For curtain wall systems over two stories in height reinforce curtain
wall members and provide support for cleaning rigs. The support for
cleaning rigs may be provided by other elements of the facility.
B202003 1.1.3 Warranty
a. System Warranty - Manufacturer of the curtain wall system must

be warrant that the design, construction, and materials

Al Dhafra, UAE
installed in the system must be free of manufacturer's defects

for the life of the installation. The manufacturer must
provide a similar warranty for the individual components of the
system that are provided by other, outside manufacturers.
Execute the warranty for the system directly to the Government.
b. Additional Glass Warranty - Insulating glass units must be
guaranteed not to develop material obstruction of vision as a
result of dust or film formation on the inner glass surface
caused by failure of the seal, other than through glass
breakage, within a period of 5 years from date of acceptance
of work by the Government. Units failing to comply with the terms
of this guarantee must be replaced with new units without
additional cost to the Government. The Contractor must require
the manufacturer to execute their warranties in writing
directly to the Government.
B202003 1.1.4 Design
a. Structural Requirements, as measured in accordance with

ANSI/ASTM E330:
T
1) Wind loads for exterior assemblies: Provide systems capable
of performing at a minimum C acting inward and 25 psf (122 Kg/m2)
AF
acting outward. Design system to withstand this as a minimum
and comply with design pressure established within the required
ASCE 7-05 Wind Speed Calculations determined by the overall
average opening within the project.
2) Deflection: Maximum calculated deflection of any framing

member in direction normal to plane of wall when subjected to
specified design pressures for spans up to and including 13'-6"
R
must be limited to 1/175 of its clear span and for spans greater
than 13'-6" deflection must be limited to 1/240 + 1/4" of its
clear span, except that maximum deflection of members
supporting plaster surfaces must not exceed 1/360 of its span.
D
3) Water Penetration/Water infiltration - No uncontrolled

leakage when tested in accordance with ASTM E331 at test
pressure of 10 psf (48.6 Kg/m2) for system standard and capable
of performing within the Design Pressure requirements derived
from the ASCE 7-05 requirements.
4) Air Infiltration - Air leakage through fixed light areas

of storefront must not exceed 0.06 cfm per square foot of surface
area when tested in accordance with ASTM E283 at differential
static pressure of 26.24 psf (30.32 Kg/m2).
b. Delamination: Adhesively bonded metal-faced or glass faced
panels must show no evidence of delamination, warpage or other
deterioration or damage when subjected to the six "Accelerated
Aging Cycles" specified in ASTM D 1037.
c. Thermal Conductance: The thermal transmittance of opaque panels
must not exceed the specified U-value, when tested in accordance
with ASTM C 236. The average calculated thermal transmittance
of the complete wall assembly including panels, windows, and

Al Dhafra, UAE
all other components must not exceed a U-value necessary to meet

the energy budget of the facility. Determine U-values of
components in accordance with ASTM C 236.
d. Window Tests: Windows must meet the requirements specified
herein. Windows must meet the same requirements for deflection
and structural adequacy as specified for framing members when
tested in accordance with ASTM E 330 except permanent
deformation must not exceed 0.4 percent; there must be no glass
breakage, and no permanent damage to fasteners, anchors,
hardware, or operating devices. Windows must have no water
penetration when tested in accordance with ASTM E 331.
e. Fire Resistance Tests: Insulation provided in the curtain wall
system or field applied in conjunction with the curtain wall
system must have a flame spread rating not exceeding 75 and a
smoke developed rating not exceeding 150 when tested in
accordance with ASTM E 84, except as specified otherwise herein.
1) Insulation: Insulation contained entirely within panel

assemblies which meet the flame spread and smoke developed
ratings of 75 and 150 respectively. Insulation isolated from
T
the building interior by masonry walls, masonry cavity walls,
or encased in masonry cores is not required to comply with the
flame spread and smoke developed ratings specified.
AF
2) Curtain Wall Systems: Material for firestopping the
opening between the edge of the floor slab and back of the
curtain wall system, must have not less than the flame spread
and smoke developed ratings specified for insulation which is
neither isolated from the building interior nor encased in
masonry cores.
R
3) Curtain Wall Panels: Panels for fire resistive curtain
walls must have the required fire resistive rating when tested
in accordance with ASTM E 119.
D
4) Firestopping Materials and Devices: Firestopping

material and attachment devices must be an effective barrier
against the spread of fire, smoke, and gases for the required
period of when exposed to the conditions of the standard ASTM
E 119 time-temperature curve for a period equivalent to the fire
rating of the floor system and must also be rated noncombustible
when tested in accordance with ASTM E 136.
B202003 1.1.5 Tolerances
Design and erect wall system to accommodate tolerances in building

frame and other contiguous work. Provide with the following
tolerances:
a. Maximum variation from plane or location shown on DOR-approved

shop drawings: 1/8 inch (3 mm) per 12 feet (3.7 meters) of length
up to not more than 1/2 inch (13 mm) in any total length.
b. Maximum offset from true alignment between two identical
members abutting end to end in line: 1/16 inch (1.6 mm).

Al Dhafra, UAE
B202003 1.1.6 Structural Requirements
Deflection and Structural Tests: No curtain wall framing member must

deflect, in a direction normal to the plane of the wall, more than
1/175 of its clear span or 3/4 inch (20 mm), whichever is less, when
tested in accordance with ASTM E 330, except that when a plastered
or gypsum board surface will be affected the deflection must not exceed
1/360 of the span. No framing member must have a permanent
deformation in excess of 0.2 percent of its clear span when tested
in accordance with ASTM E 330 for a minimum test period of 10 seconds
at 1.5 times the design wind pressures specified.
B202003 1.1.7 Thermal Movement
Fabricate, assemble, and erect system with adequate allowances for

expansion and contraction of components and fastenings to prevent
buckling damage, joint seal failure, glass breakage, undue stress on
fastenings or other detrimental effects.
T
B202003 1.1.8 Curtain Wall Components
AF
The curtain wall and the components listed below must be designed to
meet the performance requirements below.
a. Framing Members in Curtain Wall Main Frames and Sash or

Ventilator Members: extrusion strength must meet or exceed the
physical properties required for minimum ultimate tensile yield
strength of 16,000 psi (110 MPa) when tested under AA ASDI, ASTM
E34, and ASTM B221M (or ASTM B221).
R
b. Joint and Glazing Sealants: Perform tests as required by ASTM
C 920.
c. Preformed Compression Gaskets and Seals: ASTM C 864.
d. Preformed Lock-strip Gaskets: ASTM C 542, modified as follows:
D
Heat age specimens seven days at 158 degrees F (70 degrees C),
in zipped or locked position under full design compression.
Unzip, cool for one hour, re-zip, and test lip seal pressure,
which must be minimum 2.5 pounds per linear inch on any extruded
or corner specimen.
e. Spandrel Glass: Fallout resistance test, ASTM C 1048.
f. Porcelain Enamel: Acid resistance, color retention, and spall
resistance tests, PEI 1001.
g. Anodized Finishes: Aluminum used for framing must have a color
anodized NAAMM MFM finish designation AA-MIO-C22-A34 and
AA-MIO-C22-A44, meeting the requirements of AAMA 611.
h. Glass and Glazing:
1) Conform to paragraph B202004, GLAZING.
2) Insulating Glass must meet ASTM E 546 or ASTM E 576 at minus

20 degrees F (minus 29 degrees C), no frost or dew point.
i. Firestopping Material - Mineral fiber manufactured from
asbestos-free materials, and conforming to ASTM C 612 or ASTM

Al Dhafra, UAE
C 665, meeting fire resistance requirements specified.

j. Screens - ASTM D 3656, Class 2, 18 by 14 mesh, color charcoal.
k. Panels - Unless otherwise indicated, design for installation
from outside the building. Provide moisture/ vapor retarder
on interior face of insulation. Seal edges of panels with cores
of absorptive material to prevent entrance of water and allow
venting of the core space to outside air.
1) Metal Facing Panels, Single Thickness - Metal facing panels

must be single thickness. Panel facing must be flat sheet or
textured type, made of porcelain enamel, aluminum, bronze,
stainless steel and, with backside stiffeners or edge flanges
spaced as required to meet flatness specified.
2) Adhesively Bonded Panels - Adhesively bonded panels must

be sandwich type, metal faced both sides, and bonded to form
stable and composite unit. Nonexposed face must be galvanized
steel. Exposed face must be porcelain enamel, aluminum,
bronze, or stainless steel, with continuous laminated backing
or internal stiffening ribs or breaks spaced as required to meet
T
flatness specified.
3) Nonmetallic Panels
AF
a) Panels must be glass-faced on the side that will be
exposed to view. Glass must be spandrel glass with ceramic
coating on its non-weathering surface and smooth finish on the
exposed surface; backing must be adhesively bonded to
non-weathering surface.
b) Adhesively bonded insulated panels must be

R
nonmetallic faced, sandwich type, tempered hardboard on exposed
face and on non-exposed face. Apply coating of epoxy or
polyester followed by application of inert aggregate to exposed
face in the factory. Inert aggregate must be natural stone
D
chips.
l. Metal Windows - Conform to ANSI/AAMA/WDMA 101. Provide inside
glazing with removable metal glazing beads except for windows
with structural glazing. Factory finish aluminum windows and
provide with aluminum frame screens with aluminum mesh at
operable sash, hardware and locks, and tinted glazing. Aluminum
screens must comply with ANSISMA 1004.
Exposed aluminum surfaces must be factory finished with an AA

45 anodic coating or an AAMA organic coating. Provide a minimum
of architectural Class II anodized coating or a baked enamel
finish conforming to AAMA 2604 for residential construction.
Provide a minimum of architectural Class I anodized coating or
a high-performance organic coating conforming to AAMA 2605 for
non-residential (commercial) construction. AAMA coatings
must have a total dry film thickness of 1.23 mils.
m. Metal Accessories - Provide gravel stops and fascias,
flashings, metal sills, metal stools, louvers, venetian blind
pockets, and closures. Fabricate accessories of sizes and

Al Dhafra, UAE
shapes indicated from similar materials and finish as specified

for the wall system.
B202004 EXTERIOR GLAZING
Provide setting and sealing materials, stops and gaskets as recommended by the
glass or acrylic sheet manufacturer.
Provide warranty for insulating glass units for a period of 10 years against
development of material obstruction to vision (such as dust or film formation on
the inner glass surfaces) caused by failure of the hermetic seal, other than through
glass breakage. The Contractor must require the glazing warranty for curtain wall
glazing to be written directly to the Government.
Provide warranty for polycarbonate sheet glazing for a period of 5-years against
breakage, coating delamination, and yellowing.
Glazing thickness indicated in the following paragraphs is the minimum acceptable

thickness. Provide thicker glazing if required by the manufacturer for the given
application.
T
B202004 1.1 GLASS
AF
B202004 1.1.1 Clear Glass
Type I, Class 1 (clear), Quality q4 (A).
B202004 1.1.2 Heat-Absorbing Glass
ASTM 1036, Type I, Class 2 (heat absorbing and light reducing), Quality
q3 (select), 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick, with a light transmittance of
R
approximately 45 percent and total solar transmittance of not more
than 50 percent for 1/4 inch (6 mm) thickness. Use warm color tint
for warm color frames and cool color tints for white and gray frames.
D
B202004 1.1.3 Wire Glass
Type II, Class 1, Form 1, Quality q8 Mesh m1 or Form 2, Quality q7,

Finish f1, Mesh m1, 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick. Conform to NFPA 80. Glass
for fire-rated windows must be UL listed and must be rated when tested
B202004 1.1.4 Laminated Glass
ASTM 1172, fabricated from two pieces of Type I, Class 1, Quality q3

glass laminated together with a clear 0.030 inch (0.75 mm) thick
polyvinyl butyral interlayer. The total thickness must be nominally
1/4 inch (6 mm). Laminated glass used for anti-terrorism window
assemblies must be a minimum of 1/4 inch (6 mm) thickness.
B202004 1.1.5 Insulating Glass Units
Provide insulated glass using a combination of the interior and

exterior glazing materials listed below filled with a thermal

Al Dhafra, UAE
resistive gas. The air space must be sized to meet the thermal
requirements below but not less than one half inch(12 mm) for
non-residential construction and one quarter inch(6 mm) minimum for
residential construction.
Provide active solar control glazing by using tinting, maximum thermal

resistance, special coatings to meet Energy Star climate zone and
window type requirements(including frames), and comply with the
performance characteristics below. Provide an active low-emissivity
coating on glass surface number 2 (the inside surface of the exterior
glass pane).
If the building is located in a heat dominated climate zone, the

facility is designed to utilize solar heat gain to augment the HVAC
system, and the window overhang design prohibits excessive solar gain;
a passive low-emissivity coating may be used to accommodate the
design. Occupied spaces adjoining passive low-emissivity coated glass
must be designed for comfortable use of the space.
Provide two panes of glass separated by a dehydrated airspace and
T
hermetically sealed. Dimensional tolerances must be as specified in
IGMA TR-1200. The units must conform to ASTM E 773 and ASTM E 774,
Class A. Provide primary seal, secondary seal, and spacers to
AF
eliminate moisture and hydrocarbon vapor transmission into airspace.
Warranty insulating glass units against development of material
obstruction to vision (such as dust, fogging, or film formation on
the inner glass surfaces) caused by failure of the hermetic seal for
a 10-year period following acceptance of the work.
The interior glass pane must be one of the following:

R
1. Typically ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1, Quality q4, minimum 1/4
inch (6 mm) thick;
2. ASTM C 1048, Grade B (fully tempered), Style I (uncoated), Type
I, Class 1 (transparent), Quality q4, minimum 1/4 inch (6 mm)
D
thick when required by ANSI Z97.1 or possible human impact is

anticipated;
3. ASTM C 1172, laminated glass as specified above, when required
by antiterrorism requirements.
The exterior glass pane must be one of the following:
1. Typically ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 2 (tinted heat absorbing

or reflective), Quality q4, minimum 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick;
2. ASTM C 1048, Grade B (fully tempered), Style I (uncoated), Type
I, Class 2 (tinted heat absorbing or reflective), Quality q4,
minimum 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick when required by ANSI Z97.1 or
possible human impact is anticipated.
Insulating glass performance for active solar control using

low-emissivity coatings:
1. Visible Light Transmission, 66% or lower

Al Dhafra, UAE
2. Outdoor Light Reflectance, 11% or greater
3. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient, .36 or lower
4. Winter U-Value, .35 Btu/square foot x hr x degree F or lower for

residential construction and .29 Btu/square foot x hr x degree F or
lower for all other types of construction.
B202004 1.1.6 Tempered Glass
ASTM C 1048, Kind FT (fully tempered), Condition A (uncoated), Type

I, Class 1 (transparent) or 2 (tinted heat absorbing, Quality q3, 1/4
inch (6 mm) thick.
B202004 1.1.7 Bullet-Resisting Glass
ASTM 1172 and UL 752, fabricated from Type I, Class 1, Quality q3 glass
with polyvinyl butyral plastic interlayers between the layers of glass
and listed by UL ABPMED as bullet resisting, with a power rating of
Medium---Small
- Arms, High---Small
- Arms, Super---Small
- Arms,
T
High---Rifle,
- or as required by the building program in accordance with
UL 752.
AF
B202004 1.1.8 Patterned Glass
ASTM 1036, Type II, Class 1 (translucent), Form 3 (patterned), Quality

q7 (decorative), Finish f1 (patterned one side), Pattern p2
(geometric) 7/32 inch (5.55 mm) thick.
B202004 1.1.9 Spandrel Glass

R
ASTM C 1048, Kind HS or FT, Condition B (ceramic coated), Type I,
Quality q5, 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick.
B202004 1.1.10 Spandrel Glass with Adhered Backing

D
ASTM C 1048, Kind HS or FT, Condition B (ceramic coated), Type I,

Quality q5, 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick and must pass the fallout resistance
test specified in ASTM C 1048.
B202004 1.2 PLASTIC GLAZING
All plastic glazing exposed to the interior or exterior environment must

have an applied hardcoat.
B202004 1.2.1 Bullet-Resistant Plastic Sheet
Provide cast acrylic sheet or mar-resistant polycarbonate sheet

laminated with a special interlayer, and listed in UL 752 as bullet
resisting, Class I, II, III, clear, or in color.
B202004 1.2.2 Acrylic Sheet Glazing
ASTM D 4802, Type I, regular, Type II, heat resistant, in various

Al Dhafra, UAE
thicknesses, clear or colored.
B202004 1.2.3 Polycarbonate Sheet Glazing
ASTM D 3595, ANSI Z97.1, Mar-resistant, Clear and smooth both sides
when used for vision glazing; Translucent, textured both sides when
used for obscure glazing, tint to match frame, ultraviolet stabilized,
thickness to be specified in mm and inches, and listed in UL ABPMED
as burglar resisting. Mar-resistant sheet must have a change in haze
of between 5 and 8 percent under silica carbide test, 56.44 ounces
(1600 grams), ASTM D 673.
B202004 1.3 FRAGMENT RETENTION FILM FOR GLAZING
Existing windows that will not be replaced in the project must have fragment
retention film if they require antiterrorism protection. The film must be
polyester, polyethylene terephthalate, or a composite. Fragment retention
film must be optically clear and free of waves, distortions, impurities,
and adhesive lines. The film may be a single layer or laminated.
Lamination of the film must only occur at the factory of the fragment
T
retention film manufacturer. The film must include an abrasion resistant
coating on the surface that does not receive the film adhesive. Fragment
retention film must be a minimum thickness of 0.004 inch (0.1016 mm), or
AF
0.007 inch (0.1778 mm), or 0.010 inch (0.254 mm). The film must be supplied
with an optically clear weatherable pressure sensitive adhesive. The
adhesive must contain ultraviolet inhibitors to protect the film for its
required life and must limit ultraviolet transmission to not more than 8
percent of the radiation between 300 and 380 nanometers. The adhesive must
not be water activated. A water-soluble detackifier or release liner may
be incorporated over the adhesive to facilitate film application. The
adhesive must be 90 percent cured within 30 days of installation. Adhesives
R
on film thicknesses of 0.010 inch (0.254 mm) and greater must be a minimum
of 0.0008 inch (0.02032 mm) thick.
B202090 OTHER EXTERIOR WINDOWS

D
B202090 1.1 OPERABLE TRAY PASS WINDOWS
Frames and glass channels must be of heavy type 6063-TS aluminum extrusions
with reinforcing as required. Include bullet-resistant glazing and
heavy-duty operable pass tray. Unit must have a minimum of architectural
Class I anodized coating or a high-performance organic coating conforming
to AAMA 2605. AAMA coatings must have a total dry film thickness of 1.2
mils.
B2030 EXTERIOR DOORS
Exterior doors must be heavy duty insulated steel doors and frames for service
access. Door frames must be welded. Corner knockdown door frames are not
permitted.
Use heavy-duty overhead holder and closer to protect doors from wind damage.
Provide kickplates on the inside face of all exterior doors.

Al Dhafra, UAE
Weather-protect all exterior doors and related construction with low infiltration
weatherstripping and sealants. Provide threshold with offset to stop water
penetration while maintaining accessibility compliance.
Conform to the design criteria of ASCE 7.
See section B203008, EXTERIOR DOOR HARDWARE, for door hardware requirements. For
all installations, provide a recessed key box (Knox Box) approximately 7 inches
x 7 inches (175 mm x 175 mm) with 4-3/4 inches (120 mm) solid steel door at primary
exterior entry for storage of keys and access cards accessible by the fire
department.
B203001 SOLID DOORS
B203001 1.1 STEEL DOORS
Hardware preparation must be in accordance with ANSI A250.6. Doors must

be hung in accordance with ANSI A115.16.
B203001 1.1.1 Steel Doors
T
Steel doors must be ANSI A250.8, Level 4, exterior, main entry doors,
with a physical performance level of, Model 1 or 2.
AF
Doors may be specified to be insulated. Door selection must be
specified in the project program according to the following:
a. Standard Duty Doors - Level 1, physical performance Level C,

Model [1] [2]
b. Heavy Duty Doors - physical performance Level B, Model [1] [2]
c. Extra Heavy Duty Doors - ANSI A250.8, Level 3, physical
R
performance Level A, Model [1] [2] [3]
d. Maximum Duty Doors - ANSI A250.8, Level 4, physical performance
Level A, Model [1] [2]
D
B203001 1.1.2 Residential Insulated Steel Entry Door Systems
Insulated steel doors and frames must be provided for residential

construction with a core of polyurethane foam and an R factor of 10.0
or more (based on a k value of 0.16). Face sheets, edges, and frames
of galvanized steel not lighter than 23 gage thick (0.7 mm) for paneled
door faces, or 16 gage thick (1.5 mm) for solid doors, with vinyl door
bottom flashing. Frames must be a minimum 16 gage thick (1.5 mm)
respectively; with magnetic weatherstripping; nonremovable-pin
hinges; thermal-break aluminum threshold. Doors and frames must
receive phosphate treatment, rust-inhibitive primer, and baked
acrylic enamel finish. Doors must have been tested in accordance with
ANSI A250.4 and must have met the requirements for Level C. Prepare
doors to receive specified hardware. Doors must be 1-3/4 inch (44.5
mm) thick.
B203001 1.1.3 Insulation Cores
Insulated cores must be of type specified, and provide an apparent

Al Dhafra, UAE
U-factor of .48 in accordance with SDI 113 and must conform to:
a. Rigid Polyurethane Foam: ASTM C591, Type 1 or 2,

foamed-in-place or in board form, with oxygen index of not less
than 22 percent when tested in accordance with ASTM D2863; or
b. Rigid Polystyrene Foam Board: ASTM C578, Type I or II; or
c. Mineral board: ASTM C612, Type I.
a. Louvers must comply with SDI 111-C, must be stationary,

sight-proof type. Use lightproof louvers if function of room
requires darkness. Louver frames must be 20-gage steel with
louver blades minimum 24 gage.
b. Astragals: For pairs of exterior steel doors that will not have
aluminum astragals or removable mullions, provide overlapping
steel astragals with the doors.
c. Moldings: Provide moldings around glass of exterior doors and
louvers. Provide non-removable moldings on outside of
exterior doors. Secure inside moldings to stationary moldings,
T
or provide snap-on moldings. Muntins must interlock at
intersections and must be fitted and welded to stationary
moldings.
AF
B203001 1.1.5 Standard Steel Frames
ANSI A 250.8. Form frames with welded corners for installation in

exterior walls. Form stops and beads of 20 gage steel. Frames must
be set in accordance with ASTM A250.11.
B203001 1.1.6 Anchors

R
Anchor all frames with a minimum of three jamb anchors and base steel
anchors per frame, zinc-coated or painted with rust-inhibitive paint,
not lighter than 18 gage. Mortar infill frames in masonry walls, and
D
infill with gypsum board compound at each jamb anchor in metal frame
walls. Only use surface exposed bolted anchors in concrete walls.
B203001 1.1.7 Finishes
a. Exterior Doors, Factory-Primed and Field Painted Finish - Doors

and frames must be factory primed with a rust inhibitive coating
as specified in ANSI A250.8. Factory prime doors on six sides
of the door. Manufacturer's primer and field painting must be
compatible with finish system in the paragraph "EXTERIOR
PAINTING AND SPECIAL COATINGS".
b. Exterior Doors Galvanized Finish - Must be Commercial Quality,
Coating Class A, zinc coating in accordance with ASTM A 591 when
facility is located further than 300 feet (91 meters) from the
ocean. When facility is located within 300 feet (91 meters)
of the ocean, provide G60 galvanized coating in accordance with
ASTM A 924/A 924M and ASTM A 653/A 653M.
B203001 1.2 WOOD DOORS

Al Dhafra, UAE
Solid wood or particleboard core with solid wood edge bands and reinforced
at all hardware attachments to door with sound grade hardwood. Exterior
wood doors are only allowed in residential construction where facility
design, overhangs and porches eliminate direct rain/moisture contact from
wind driven rain.
B203001 1.2.1 Stile and Rail Doors
Stile and rail doors must be premium or custom grade Ponderosa pine
stile and rail doors conforming to WDMA I.S.6A-01, heavy duty.
B203001 1.2.2 Flush Doors
Flush doors must conform to WDMA I.S.1-A.
Exterior Flush Doors - Solid wood core, Type I conforming to WDMA I.S.
1-A.
B203001 1.2.3 Wood Door Louvers
T
Door louvers must be of the manufacturer's standard design and must
transmit a minimum of 35 percent free air. Louver must be a galvanized
AF
coated louvers with insect screens and comply with SDI 111-C, must
be stationary, sight-proof type. Use lightproof louvers if function
of room requires darkness.
B203001 1.2.4 Door Light Openings
Where glazed openings are required, use the manufacturer's standard

wood moldings. Moldings for doors to receive a natural finish must
R
be of the same species and color of the face veneer.
B203001 1.2.5 Fabrication

D
a. Marking - Each door must bear a stamp, brand or other identifying

mark indicating quality and construction of the door.
b. Adhesives and Bonds - WDMA I.S. 1-A. Use Type I bond for
exterior doors. Adhesive for doors to receive a natural finish
must be non-staining.
B203002 GLAZED DOORS
B203002 1.1 ALUMINUM GLAZED DOORS
See B202002 STOREFRONTS, paragraph titled, "Doors and Frames."
B203004 OVERHEAD ROLL-UP AND OVERHEAD SECTIONAL DOORS
Refer to RFP PART 3, Chapter 6 for project specific exterior overhead sectional
and roll-up doors system requirements. Do not use exterior roll-up doors as an
entrance into conditioned spaces.
B203004 1.1 OVERHEAD ROLL-UP DOORS

Al Dhafra, UAE
Provide overhead doors in accordance with Door and Access Systems

Association International (DASMA) requirements. Overhead roll-up doors
must conform to ANSI/ DASMA 207. Provide overhead roll-up doors with
minimum 22 gage thermal insulated slats, however use door weight, pressure,
and width to determine if a heavier gauge slat is required. Electric
operators must have protected 3-button switches conforming to NEMA MG 1,
NEMA ICS 1, and NEMA ICS 2. Galvanize door and sheet metal components in
accordance with ASTM A653. Apply painted coat required in RFP Part 3,
Chapter 6, over the galvanizing to all components directly exposed to the
weather.
B203004 1.2 OVERHEAD SECTIONAL DOORS
Provide overhead doors in accordance with Door and Access Systems

Association International (DASMA) requirements. Overhead sectional doors
must conform to ANSI/DASMA 102 Completely close the door opening in the
closed position and make the full width and height of the door opening
available for use in the open position. Provide a 3 inch (75 mm) track when
required by manufacturers standards, or design pressure and forces on the
T
door, or if the door is equal to or greater than 16 feet (4877 mm) high or
wide. Design door storage to allow full use of the space around the door
for the activities required in the space. Provide a minimum of 16 inches
AF
(400 mm) of headroom for 2 inch (50 mm) tracks, 21 inches (525 mm) of headroom
for 3 inch (75 mm) tracks, or a high lift type or vertical lift type. If
motorized, provide limit switches to automatically stop doors at the fully
open and closed positions. Provide readily adjustable limit switch
positions.
Doors must remain operable and undamaged after conclusion of tests conducted
in accordance with ASTM E 330 using the design wind load. Form steel door
R
sections of hot-dipped galvanized steel not lighter than 16 gage using a
flush surface without ribs or grooves. Sections must be not less than 1
3/4 inches (44.50 mm) minimum panel thickness. Provide maximum insulation
value to insulate doors as required to meet energy requirements. Cover
D
interior of door sections with steel sheets of not lighter than 24 gauge
to completely enclose the insulating material. Provide galvanized steel
tracks not lighter than 14 gauge for 2 inch (50 mm) tracks and not lighter
than 12 gauge for 3 inch (75 mm) track. Provide a positive locking device
and cylinder lock with two keys on manually operated doors. Form aluminum
door panels of 0.050 inch (1.3 mm) sheet aluminum and styles and rails of
6063-T6 aluminum. Galvanize door and steel sheet metal components in
accordance with ASTM A653.
B203004 1.3 OVERHEAD DOOR FINISH
Finish steel door and components with hot dipped galvanized coating and apply
a baked-on primer and topcoat painted finish. If powder coat finish is
required in RFP Part 3, Chapter 6, painted system must conform to the
following requirements;
a. Outgas Forgiving Primer
b. Film Thickness per ISO 2360 - 2.5-3.5 mils (60-80 m)

Al Dhafra, UAE
c. Mandrel Bending Test per ASTM D522 - 1/8 inches (3mm)
d. Impact Test per ASTM D2794 - Up to 80 in/lb. Cracking at the perimeter

of the concave area
but no cracking pick off
e. Pencil Hardness per ASTM D3363 - 2H minimum.
f. Color Change per ASTM D2244 - 5.0 (Hunter)
g. Gloss Retention per ASTM D523 - >80%
h. Salt Spray Test per ASTM B117 - 3000 hours
B203005 HANGAR DOORS
DOR utilize UFGS Specification Section 08 34 16.10, Steel Sliding Hangar Doors,
or Specification Section 08 34 16.20, Vertical Lift Fabric Doors, for the project
specification submittal for the project. Refer to the Project Program for which
T
type of hanger door is used on this project.
B203008 EXTERIOR DOOR HARDWARE

AF
Provide the services of an Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC), Certified Door
Consultant (CDC), or an Electrified Hardware Consultant (EHC) to assist the
Designer of Record in preparation of the door hardware schedule and product
selection. The hardware consultant must sign and seal the door hardware
construction submittal. Provide, as far as possible, door hardware of one
manufacturers make. All hardware must be clearly and permanently marked by the
manufacturer where it will be visible after installation.
R
B203008 1.1 HINGES
BHMA A156.1, size to match door size, but in no case less than 4-1/2 x 4-1/2
D
inches (114 mm x 114 mm), with non-removable pin and anti-friction bearing
hinges. Use two hinges for doors 60 inches (1500 mm) or less in height and
one additional hinge for each additional 30 inches (750 mm), or fraction
thereof, in door height.
B203008 1.2 PIVOTS
BHMA A156.4.
B203008 1.3 LOCKS AND LATCHES
Commercial (all construction except family housing) buildings locks and

latches must be BHMA A 156.13, Series 1000, Operational Grade 1, Security
Grade 2 for exterior building entrances and other high-use doors not
requiring exit devices. Use BHMA A 156.2, Series 4000, Grade 1 for all
Commercial buildings locks and latches not using Series 1000 hardware.
For Residential (family housing) projects, use Series 4000, Grade 2

hardware.

Al Dhafra, UAE
B203008 1.3.1 Combination Locks for Sensitive Areas and Vault Doors
If required for exterior use, see C102007 1.1.6 "Combination Locks"

for the specification. This installation may require special weather
protection.
B203008 1.3.2 Pushbutton Combination Locks
Where required, provide a heavy-duty, mechanical combination lockset

with 5 pushbuttons, standard-sized knob or lever, 3/4 inch (19 mm)
deadlocking latch with 2-3/4 inch (70 mm) back-set. Provide deadbolt
key override option. Safelock, Simplex, and Venn are acceptable
manufacturers. Provide a hardware grade equivalent to Grade 1,
series 4000. Include a 5-year parts and labor warranty.
B203008 1.4 CARD KEY SYSTEM
Where required, provide card key type access units. Provide lithium battery
powered, magnetic stripe keycard locksets that are ANSI/BHMA A156.13, Series
1000, Grade 1, mortise or ANSI/BHMA A156.2, Series 4000, Grade 1, cylindrical
T
locks, tamper resistant, UL listed with 1 inch (25 mm) throw deadbolt,
3/4-inch (19 mm) throw latch bolt, auxiliary deadlocking latch, and 2-3/4
inch (68.75 mm) backset. The latch bolt and the dead bolt must be operated
AF
simultaneously by rotating inside lever. Locks with mechanical override
lock cylinders are not acceptable. Locks must be operated only by a
correctly encoded keycard. Use of a newly issued keycard automatically
re-keys the lock and voids the previous keycard. The lock must re-lock
immediately after outside lever is turned and latch retracted. Locks must
have memory that is capable of recording up to 140 entries into each room,
identification of the keycard used to access the room, the date and time
of entry. Entry information of the lock must be retrievable by a data key
R
that can be inserted into the lock and then taken to the front desk printer
to display information. Other components that are required for this system
at the front desk are a personal or laptop computer, printer and encoder
to program each key.
D
For exit device locks with card key access, provide mortise type, narrow
stile exit devices with 24 volt DC, solenoid option for card key exterior
access at aluminum storefront doors. Provide mortise type exit devices with
24 volt DC, solenoid option with alarm and remote exterior access for card
key access at insulated hollow metal doors. The alarmed exit device must
sound when exiting only.
System must be capable of accepting a minimum of 12 keycard access levels,

security auditing and computer interfacing with existing installations
management system. Provide a single point of contact customer service
representative accessible by telephone with a 10-digit telephone number
without additional dialing hierarchies except that a maximum 4-digit
extension is permissible. On-site service must be provided within 3 hours
from request within the first 12 months of occupancy. Provide a 5-year parts
and labor warranty.
B203008 1.5 EXIT DEVICES

Al Dhafra, UAE
BHMA A 156.3, Grade 1. Provide on exit doors if it is anticipated that more

than 50 people may use a particular door in an emergency exit situation.
Touch bars must be provided in lieu of conventional crossbars and arms. Use
manufacturer's integral touch bars in aluminum storefront doors.
B203008 1.6 EXIT LOCKS WITH ALARM
BHMA A 156.5.
B203008 1.7 CYLINDERS AND CORES
If required, provide cylinders and cores for new locks, including locks
provided under other sections of this specification. Cylinders and cores
must have seven pin tumblers. Cylinders must be products of one
manufacturer, and cores must be the products of one manufacturer. Rim
cylinders, mortise cylinders, and knobs of bored locksets must have
interchangeable cores, which are removable by special control keys. Stamp
each interchangeable core with a key control symbol in a concealed place
on the core.
T
B203008 1.8 KEYING SYSTEM
Keying system must be a master key system for the facility, unless more than
AF
one tenant/tenant command must reside in a facility, or a grand master keying
system, or great, grand master keying system if multiple tenants or buildings
are required. The keying system must be an extension of the existing keying
system for additions to existing facilities. The keying system must allow
for construction interchangeable cores when subcontractors require keys
during construction. If required, provide a key cabinet.
The Contractor must coordinate a keying system meeting. The Contractor's

R
Project Manager, Superintendent, Hardware Subcontractor, Electrical
Subcontractor (if keying hardware is electric), Designer of Record,
Contracting Officer, Public Works Base Hardware Specialist, and the Using
Activity must attend this meeting to establish the keying system for the
D
project. This meeting is intended to identify base limitations, the

necessary security, and access control within the facility. The meeting
must produce a marked up copy of the floor plan indicating the doors to
receive locks and the doors to be keyed together, and any master keying or
grand master keying.
B203008 1.9 KEYS
Furnish one file key, one duplicate key and one working key for each key
exchange and for each master and grand master keying system.
B203008 1.10 LOCK TRIM
Cast, forged or heavy wrought construction and commercial plain in design.
B203008 1.10.1 Knobs and Roses
Knobs and roses must meet test requirements of BHMA A 156.2 and BHMA
A 156.13.

Al Dhafra, UAE
B203008 1.10.2 Lever Handles
Provide lever handles in lieu of knobs as required by DoD ABAAS. Lever

handles must meet the test requirements of BHMA A 156.13 for mortise
locks. All lever handles (mortise or cylinder) must be the
freewheeling type.
B203008 1.11 DOOR BOLTS
BHMA A 156.16, Grade 1. Provide two flush bolts for each inactive leaf of
a pair of doors.
B203008 1.12 CLOSERS
BHMA A 156.4, Series C02000, Grade 1, with PT 4C, 1-1/2 inch piston, heavy
duty forged arm, full size case. Provide closers for all exterior doors,
fire-rated doors, corridor doors, stairway doors, and secure area doors,
for non-residential (commercial) construction, as a minimum.
B203008 1.13 OVERHEAD HOLDERS
T
BHMA A 156.8, Grade 1. Provide for exterior doors for non-residential
(commercial) construction.
AF
B203008 1.14 DOOR PROTECTION PLATES
Kick plates must conform to BHMA A 156.6. Provide kick plates on all doors
with closers and all doors leading to corridors or circulation spaces.
Provide armor plates on all doors to receive cart traffic. Provide mop
plates on all doors in rooms with a mopable floor finish that do not have
kick plates.
R
B203008 1.15 DOOR STOPS AND SILENCERS
BHMA A 156.16. Provide silencers, Type L03011, three per single door and
D
four per double door, for doors in hollow metal frames.
B203008 1.16 THRESHOLDS
BHMA A 156.21. Provide thresholds with offset to stop water infiltration,

while maintaining accessibility requirements.
B203008 1.17 WEATHERSTRIPPING
BHMA A 156.22. Air leakage of weatherstripped doors must not exceed 0.5
CFM of air per square foot of door for residential doors, and 1.25 CFM for
non-residential doors (unless a more restrictive infiltration level is
specified).
B203008 1.18 RAIN DRIPS
For all exterior doors that open to the outside, where the door swing area
is not covered by an overhang, provide top and bottom rain drips complying
with ANSI R3Y535 as a minimum. Greater weathersealing may be required by

Al Dhafra, UAE
the geographic location of the project.
B203008 1.19 FINISHES
One of the following hardware finish systems must be provided, and match
the interior door hardware:
a. BHMA A156.18. Hardware must have BHMA 630 finish (satin stainless
steel), unless specified otherwise. Provide items not manufactured
in stainless steel in BHMA 626 finish (satin chromium plated) over
brass or bronze, except surface door closers which must have aluminum
paint finish, and except steel hinges which must have BHMA 652 finish
(satin chromium plated). Hinges for exterior doors must be stainless
steel with BHMA 630 finish or chromium plated brass or bronze with
BHMA 626 finish. Exit devices may be provided in BHMA 626 finish in
lieu of BHMA 630 finish. Exposed parts of concealed closers must have
finish to match lock and door trim. Hardware for aluminum doors must
be finished to match the doors.
b. BHMA A156.18. Hardware must have BHMA 612 finish (satin bronze),
unless specified otherwise. Surface door closers must have bronze
T
paint finish. Steel hinges must have BHMA 639 finish (satin bronze
plated). Exposed parts of concealed closers must have finish to match
lock and door trim. Hardware for aluminum doors must be finished to
AF
match the doors. Hardware showing on interior of bathrooms, shower
rooms, toilet rooms, washrooms, laundry rooms, and kitchens must have
BHMA 629 finish (bright stainless steel) or BHMA 625 finish (bright
chromium plated).
B203090 OTHER EXTERIOR SPECIALTY DOORS
Where required, provide special function exterior doors and gates and assemblies
R
required for the proper operation and functioning of the facility. Exterior doors
system may include factory-finished or painted doors and frames.
B203090 1.1 AUTOMATIC ENTRANCE DOORS

D
B203090 1.1.1 Automatic Swinging Entrance Door Controller
Automatic swinging entrance doors must be glazed aluminum doors and

frames as specified in this section. Controller must be a dual
function safety device that utilizes planar K-band microwave motion
detectors and active infrared presence sensors at each door to protect
individuals in the path of the swinging door. The planar K-band
motion detector must be capable of sensing an individual moving as
slow as 2.2 inches (55.8 mm) per foot. The infrared sensors must
employ both diffused presence sensors that see through the plane of
the door, and distance measuring sensors. The infrared sensors must
constantly remain in operation. The safety device must call for
reactivation or creep closing function, depending on the location of
the sensor. If the sensor is located on the swing side, it will call
for reactivation; if it is located on the pull side, it will call for
creep closing function. Sensing system must be fully adjustable with
a universal remote control, and meet or exceed the requirements of
ANSI A156.10. System must include aluminum guard rails and signage

Al Dhafra, UAE
for additional personnel safety.
B203090 1.1.2 Automatic Sliding Entrance Door Controller
Automatic sliding entrance doors must be glazed aluminum doors and

frames as specified in this section. Controller must be a dual
function safety device that utilizes planar K-band microwave motion
detectors and focused active infrared presence sensors at each door
to protect individuals in the path of the sliding door. The planar
K-band motion detector must be capable of sensing an individual moving
as slow as 2.2 inches (55.8 mm) per foot. The focused active infrared
sensors must overlap their patterns for full coverage of the motion
pattern and extend its range all the way to the floor surface. The
infrared sensors must constantly remain in operation even when the
door is in the closing cycle. Door and frame must have a "break-away"
feature that allows the door to be pushed open in an emergency exit
situation.
T
AF
R
D

Al Dhafra, UAE
SECTION B30
ROOFING
05/14
B30 GENERAL

T
AF
Industry standards, codes, and Government standards that are referenced in
the section text that are not found in the Unified Master Reference List
(UMRL) in the Construction Criteria Base (CCB) at the Whole Building Design
Guide Website are listed below for basic designation identification.
Comply with the required and advisory portions of the current edition of
the standard at the time of contract award.

R

D

UFC(s):UFC 3-101-01 Architecture UFC
3-110-03 Roofing)

Buildings
B30 1.1.2 Design Requirements
Wind Uplift Resistance: Determine the required wind uplift

resistance based on ASCE 7 wind loading calculations or applicable
building code requirements and UFC 3-301-01 Architecture and UFC
3-110-03 Roofing. The specified FM rating incorporates a safety

Al Dhafra, UAE
factor of 2 over the maximum calculated uplift pressure. Therefore,

a FM rating of 1-90 correlates to a maximum uplift calculation of 2.2
kPa, 45 psf. When a rated system is specified, ensure the specified
roof system is capable of meeting the wind uplift resistance
specified. Where non-rated systems may be allowed and used,
delineate calculated values in the roof specification or drawings.
Utilize independently tested and rated roof systems, such as Factory
Mutual (FM), Underwriters Laboratory (UL), and Single Ply Roofing
Industry (SPRI).
The complete roof system assembly shall be rated and installed to

resist wind loads calculated in accordance with ASCE 7 and validated
by uplift resistance testing in accordance with Factory Mutual (FM)
test procedures. Non-rated systems must not be installed, except as
approved by the Contracting Officer. Submit licensed engineer's wind
uplift calculations and substantiating data to validate any non-rated
roof system.
T
Verification of satisfactory roofing system performance shall be via
Performance Verification Testing, and by field inspection as detailed in
this section of the RFP. All performance and acceptance testing including
AF
final/warranty inspections shall be witnessed by the Contracting Officer
on all significant roof projects.
A significant roof is defined as a single or group of buildings with greater

than 15,000 square feet (1,400 m2) of roof area; or a roof with area that
is allocated to energy generating equipment such as solar hot water panels
or photovoltaic panels; or where building equipment (excluding HVAC), use,
or safety causes multiple roof penetrations.
R
B30 1.2.1 Pre-Roofing Design Conference
If the project roof meets the definition of a significant roof above,

D
provide a Pre-Roofing Design Conference. Schedule this conference

prior to the roof design and roof layout of the facility. Attendee's
shall include the DOR, DQC Manager, Roof Design Assurance Consultant
(if applicable), Commissioning Authority, and Subcontractors
directly responsible for installing the roof and equipment that will
be mounted on the roof. Discuss and coordinate the following as a
minimum:
a. Renewable energy systems to be mounted on the roof and interface

with building systems and utilities,
b. Allocation of space on the roof for different functions,
c. Impact of renewable energy systems and building orientation to
the suns path,
d. Waterproofing, flashing, and future reroofing considerations
of the facility resulting from renewable energy systems
inclusion on the roof,
e. Measures taken to eliminate penetration of the roof membrane.
NRCA roof details proposed for each necessary penetration,
f. Structural requirements to support roof mounted equipment,

Al Dhafra, UAE
g. Aesthetic impact of roof mounted equipment on the facility and

measures taken to mitigate negative appearances of equipment.
h. Maintenance and Commissioning requirements of the roof and roof
mounted equipment to facilitate final testing and provide
proper access and roof membrane protection.
B30 1.2.2 Pre-Roofing Conference
Prior to beginning roofing work, the Contractor shall hold a

Pre-Roofing Conference with the Contracting Officer. Attendees'
shall include personnel directly responsible for the roofing systems
design and construction, DQC Manager, Commissioning Authority, as
well as the roofing manufacturer's technical representative, and Roof
Design Consultant (if applicable). At this time the Contractor will
address any conflicts between the proposed roofing system, the design
documents, and the scheduling of work / workers (trades) to assure
a watertight roofing installation. Resolutions will be obtained and
documented in writing prior to the start of roofing work. A quality
assurance/quality control plan shall also be established at this time,
inclusive of the roofing manufacturer's recommended testing and
T
inspections procedures, and in accordance with industry standard
guidelines.
AF
Contractor shall provide the following additional information at the
pre-roofing conference: Procedure for the roof manufacturers
technical representative's onsite inspection and acceptance of the
roofing substrate, roof insulation, and installation of the roofing
in accordance with the roof system warranty, the name of the
manufacturer's technical representatives, the frequency of the onsite
visits, copies of the roof status reports from the technical
representatives to the roof manufacturer, and pertinent structural
R
details to the roofing system.
B30 1.2.3 Roof Design Assurance

D
If the project roof meets the definition of a significant roof above,

the Contractor must utilize the services of a Registered Roof
Consultant (RRC) certified by the Roof Consultant Institute, or a
Registered Professional Architect or Engineer who specializes in
roofing, to approve the roof design. The roof consultant must derives
his or her principal income from roofing design on the quality control
staff of the Design or Design-Build team. The roof consultant must
verify in writing that the design for the project is in accordance
with the current edition of NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual,
UFC 3-110-03, the RFP, and standard industry practices and building
codes.
B30 1.2.4 Low Slope Roof Drain Test
Plug roof drains and fill with water to the edge of the drain sump
for 24 hours. Not all drains shall be tested at one time. Measure
water at the beginning and end of the 24 hour time period to ensure
there is no leakage. Repeat testing until all leaks have been located,
corrected, and no leaks found.

Al Dhafra, UAE
B30 1.2.5 Tests for Surface Dryness
Prior to application of roofing materials, perform surface dryness

tests in presence of DOR. Asphalt of 350 to 400 degrees F (177 to
204 degrees C) shall not foam upon contact with substrate. After
foaming test is performed, test for strippability (adherence).
B30 1.2.6 Quality Control Program
Contractor shall establish a quality control program to assure

adherence to NRCA recommended Quality Control Guidelines for the
Application of Roofing Systems and other specified application
requirements. Compliance with UFGS Section 01 45 00.00 10, Quality
Control, is required.

Procedures, MED Design Instruction Manual, and UFC 3-101-01, Architecture.
T
AF
minimum:
Test reports, color samples, certificates of conformance, warranties, close

out documentation, and manufacturer's instructions for application and
installation on all products used on the roof. Products used on the roof
R
consist of but are not limited to structural deck, insulation, membrane or
panels, Standing Seam Metal Roofing (SSMR), flashing, fasteners, nailers,
accessories and equipment support curbs or equipment support stands for
solar equipment, equipment roof plan, maintenance access and paths.
D
B3010 ROOF COVERINGS
Roof coverings shall comply with the requirements of UFC 3-110-03, Roofing, and
NRCA, Roofing and Waterproofing Manual found at
http://www.nrca.net/rp/technical/manual/manual.aspx as the primary NAVFAC
roofing criteria. Roof selection shall comply with UFC 3-330-02A, Design:
Commentary on Roof Systems. Determine wind uplift using wind speed in accordance
with ASCE-7.
Submit the INFORMATION CARD (see "Form 1" at the end of this section) Provide a
typewritten card, laminated in plastic and framed in a weather-tight frame, or
a photoengraved 0.032-inch (0.81 mm) thick aluminum card for the roof. This card
shall be a minimum size of 8 1/2 x 11 inch (216 x 280 mm) and contain information
listed in the attached Form 1. Install the card where directed. Furnish framed
card and a duplicate card to the Designer of Record.
B301001 STEEP SLOPE ROOF SYSTEMS

Al Dhafra, UAE
Slope conversions from low slope to steep slope roofing systems must specifically
address temporary waterproofing protection where new framing connections
penetrate the existing low slope system.
B301001 1.1 SLATE ROOFING
Slate roofing systems shall be installed in accordance with NRCA Standards.
Contractor shall supply manufacturer's standard warranty against

defects in product workmanship and materials, including related metal
flashing for a period of 30 years from the date of FINAL acceptance
of the work.
B301001 1.1.2 Materials
a. Slate - Slate materials shall meet the grading standards of the

National Slate Association. Field punching of slate shall be
from the back of the slate.
T
b. Underlayment Membrane - For standard slate roofs, roofing felts
shall be un-perforated asphalt-saturated felts, No. 30 or
heavier. For graduated slate roofs, two layers of felts shall
AF
be applied with joints and laps staggered. When roof slopes
are less than 4:12, a double layer of felt shall be applied in
mastic or hot asphalt shall be applied. At the roofing
perimeter, eaves, rakes, sidewalls, head walls, valleys and all
penetrations, install self-adhering membrane (3 foot band
minimum) (900 mm band minimum).
c. Fastening - Nails shall be stainless steel or copper ring shank
nails. Nails shall be long enough to penetrate the roof
R
sheathing with heads of sufficient diameter to prevent pullover
of slate. Slate shall hang on the shaft of the fastener, and
drawn to, but not tight against the slate surface. Exposed
nails on the top courses shall be sealed. In high wind areas,
D
provide mechanical fastening plus sealant adhesive attachment.

Provide screws, wire ties, hook nails, tile locks and storm
clips of brass, copper or stainless steel as recommended by the
manufacturer for the project.
d. Flashing - Flashings for slate roofing shall be 16 oz. (454 g)
copper or 24 gage stainless steel, and 16 oz. (454 g) lead-coated
copper, and shall be protected to prevent the potential for
galvanic action by having contact with dissimilar metals.
e. Snow Guards - Provide snow guards of type compatible with roof
system specified, and designed to meet design loads for the
project location.
B301001 1.2 ASPHALT SHINGLES
The shingle roofing system shall be installed in accordance with NRCA Roofing
and Waterproofing Manual(Latest Edition), "Steep Roofing", closed cut
valley flashing shall not be allowed and per ASTM D 3462.
B301001 1.2.1 Warranties

Al Dhafra, UAE
The contractor shall furnish to the Government the manufacturer's

standard 30-year warranty for the asphalt shingles. The Contractor
shall also warrant that the asphalt shingle roofing system, as
installed, is free from defects in workmanship. Provide a minimum
10-year fungus resistance warranty in southern climate and areas
susceptible to fungus growth on shingles.
a. Shingles - Shingles shall meet ASTM D 3018, Type I, and ASTM

D 3462, and shall weigh not less than 210 pounds per 100 square
feet (95 kg per 9.3 square meters). Shingles shall meet the
fire resistance requirements of UL 790 for Class 'A' and resist
winds in accordance with ASCE-7 when tested in accordance with
UL 997.
b. Shingle Underlayment - Asphalt-saturated felt conforming to
ASTM D 226, Type I.
c. Self-Adhering Membrane - Self-adhering rubberized asphaltic
membrane, a minimum of 40 mils thick. Provide at all ridges,
T
valleys, sidewalls and starter strips.
d. Nails - 11 or 12 gauge hot-dipped galvanized steel, corrosion
resistant roofing nails, with sharp points and flat heads 3/8
AF
inch to 7/16 inch (9.5 mm to 11 mm) diameter. Shank diameter
shall be a minimum of 0.105 inch (2.7 mm) to a maximum of 0.135
inch (3.4 mm). Nails shall be long enough to penetrate through
all layers of roofing materials and achieve secure anchorage
into a roof deck. A minimum of 4 nails shall be used on a full
width shingle, and six nails in high wind areas. Location of
nails shall be as shown in manufacturers printed installation
instructions. Staples are not permitted as a means of
R
attachment.
e. Asphalt Roof Cement - ASTM D 4586, Type II
f. Asphalt Primer - ASTM D 41
D
B301001 1.3 ROOF TILES
The contractor shall warrant for 30 years that the tile roofing system,
as installed, is free from defects in workmanship.
a. Clay Tile - ASTM C 1167, machine-formed natural clay tiles,

kiln-fired to vitrification and free from surface
imperfections. Provide specially shaped units as required to
provide watertight installation and closure. Form fastening
holes prior to firing.
b. Concrete Tile - ASTM C 1492, molded or extruded, interlocking
concrete roofing tile units, and specially shaped as required
to provide a watertight installation and closure. Provide with
cast-in anchor lugs, transverse weather checks and fastening

Al Dhafra, UAE
holes.
B301001 1.3.3 Underlayment
Underlayment type shall be determined by slope as follows:
10:12 slope and above shall have a minimum of one layer of number
30 felt, laid in shingle fashion with a minimum of a 2 inch (50
mm) lap.
4:12 to 10:12 slopes shall have a minimum of 2 layers of number

30 felt or one layer of a modified bitumen underlayment for use
with standard size tile as long as tile is laid with a minimum
of a 3 inch (75 mm) headlap. Underlayment shall be laid shingle
fashion with a 19-inch (480 mm) lap.
Tiles shall not be laid on slopes less than 4:12.
T
a. Felt Underlayment - Asphalt saturated felt
conforming to ASTM D 226, Type I.
AF
b. Flexible Hip, Starter and Ridge Flashing - Provide
SBS Modified rubberized asphalt adhesive on a
linear, low-density polyethylene membrane with a
60 mil total thickness, or 40 mil thick
self-adhered membrane underlayment in accordance
with ASTM D 1970. At the roofing perimeter, eaves,
rakes, sidewalls, head walls, valleys and all
penetrations, install self-adhering membrane (3
R
foot (900 mm) band minimum).
B301001 1.3.4 Substrate Panels for Application Over Metal Deck

D
a. Glass Mesh Mortar Units - ASTM E 84, exterior type panels of

Portland cement.
b. Fiberglass-Faced Gypsum Roof Board - ASTM 1177/C 1177M
B301001 1.3.5 Fasteners
a. Nails for Applying Felt Underlayment - Hot dip galvanized steel,

11 gage, of sufficient length to penetrate through substrate
panels.
b. Materials for Installation of Tile - Nails shall be round-head,
sharp point, 11 or 12 gauge, copper or stainless steel ring
shank roofing nails. Nail heads shall be low profile, smooth
and flat. Shanks may be smooth, barbed or otherwise deformed
for added pull out resistance. Nails should be of sufficient
length to penetrate one inch (25 mm) into wood ridge and hip
boards, or battens, with heads of sufficient size to prevent
pullover of the tile.

Al Dhafra, UAE
1) Wind Locks shall be of 10 gage copper or brass, 12 gage

galvanized steel, or 0.084 inch (2.1 mm) stainless steel formed
wire clips.
2) Provide hurricane clips with two nail holes in the

horizontal leg for anchorage to deck or substrate.
3) Provide dual means of attachment of tile as follows, or as

recommended by the tile manufacturer: Mechanical fastening
plus hurricane clips, mechanical fastening plus foam setting,
mechanical fastening plus sealant adhesive attachment of tile
to tile in headlap areas.
B301001 1.3.6 Preservative-Treated Lumber - AWPA C1
B301001 1.3.7 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim
Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim of 20 oz. Copper, lead-coated

copper or stainless steel to comply with SMACNA Architectural Sheet
T
Metal Manual.
B301001 1.3.8 Bird-stop for Concrete Tile

AF
Provide 20 oz.(567 g) copper, lead or stainless steel "L" section with
3-inch (75 mm) wide horizontal leg and vertical leg cut to conform
to bottom profile of tile, or provide mortar formed bird-stops with
weep holes, molded plastic bird-stops, or prefabricated tiles as
recommended by roofing tile manufacturer.
B301001 1.3.9 Mortar

R
ASTM C 270, Type M mortar mix. Mortar set tile shall not be used in
high-wind areas.
D
B301001 1.3.10 Asphaltic Plastic Cement
ASTM D 4586.
B301001 1.3.11 Foam-set Tile
Provide foam plastic adhesive designed to meet the concrete and clay
tile roofing industries requirements for adhering roofing tile to
specified roof underlayment assemblies. Foam adhesive shall meet
ASTM E 84, with a flame spread of less than 75. When tested in
accordance with ASTM E 108, the roof covering system shall qualify
as a Class 'A' roof covering system.
B301001 1.4 METAL ROOF PANELS (ARCHITECTURAL STANDING SEAM METAL ROOFS ON
SUPPORTED SUBSTRATE)
B301001 1.4.1 Manufactured Sheet Metal Roofing
Provide galvanized steel or aluminum-zinc coated steel or aluminum

Al Dhafra, UAE
panels formed at the manufacturing plant and conditioned for flatness.

Panel thickness shall be determined by the requirements of NRCA,
Roofing and Waterproofing Manual, but not less than 24 gauge for panels
less than 16 inches wide (400 mm), and 22 gauge for panels 16 inches
(400 mm) wide or greater. All panels greater than 12 inches (300 mm)
wide shall have preformed reinforcing ribs or embossed for stiffening.
The minimum gauge for aluminum panels shall be 20-gauge, .032 inch
thick (.8 mm thick) or greater. Roofing design shall meet deflection
and wind load requirements per building code.
The SSMR system covered under this specification shall include the
entire roofing system; the standing seam metal roof panels, fasteners,
connectors, roof securement components, and assemblies tested and
approved in accordance with ASTM E 1592. In addition, the system
shall consist of panel finishes, slip sheet, insulation, vapor
retarder, all accessories, components, and trim and all connections
with roof panels. This includes roof penetration items such as vents,
curbs, skylights; interior or exterior gutters and downspouts; eaves,
ridge, hip, valley, rake, gable, wall, or other roof system flashings
installed and any other components specified within this contract to
T
provide a weathertight roof system.
a. Provide inverted "L" Standing Seam shape roofing panels.

b.
AF
Panel Protection - Treat exposed cut edges with compatible
coating comparable to the factory applied coating system for
corrosion protection.
c. Sealants - Provide non-curing, non-skinning butyl based
sealants and tapes for concealed locations such as within laps
and under eaves. Provide polyurethane and curing butyl
elastomeric sealants for exposed locations such as along top
edge of surface mounted counter flashings.
R
d. Factory Color Finish - Provide factory applied, baked coating
to the exterior and interior of metal wall panels and metal
accessories. Provide exterior finish top coat of 70 percent
polyvinylidene fluoride resin with not less than 0.8 mil dry
D
film thickness. Provide exterior primer standard with panel

manufacturer with not less than 0.8 mil dry film thickness.
Interior finish shall consist of 0.5 mil dry film thick backer
coat if permanently concealed from view by construction or the
same coating and dry film thickness as the exterior coating if
the panel interior side will be exposed. Provide
factory-applied clear 70 percent PVF, 0.8 mil top coat and edge
coating on all factory-cut or unfinished panel edges for
projects within 300 feet (91 meters) of the ocean or industrial
environments.
e. Warranty - Furnish manufacturer's no dollar limit materials and
workmanship warranty for the roofing system. The warranty
period shall be not less than 20 years from the date of
Government acceptance of the work. The warranty shall be
issued directly to the Government. The warranty shall provide
that if within the warranty period the metal roofing system
becomes non-watertight or shows evidence of corrosion,
perforation, peeling paint, rupture or excess weathering due
to deterioration of the roofing system resulting from defective

Al Dhafra, UAE
materials or workmanship the repair or replacement of the

defective materials and correction of the defective workmanship
shall be the responsibility of the roofing system manufacturer.
Repairs that become necessary because of defective materials
and workmanship while roofing is under warranty shall be
performed within 7 days after notification, unless additional
time is approved by the Contracting Officer. Failure to
perform repairs within the specified period of time will
constitute grounds for having the repairs performed by others
and the cost billed to the manufacturer. The Contractor shall
also provide a 2 year contractor installation warranty.
Coating shall not show a color change greater than 5 NBS color
units per ASTM D2244, and not show chalking in excess of 10 per
ASTM D4214.
f. Wind Uplift - Metal roofing systems shall be designed and
attached to resist wind uplift pressures calculated in
accordance with ASCE 7. Uplift resistance shall be validated
by applicable Factory Mutual (FM), Underwriters Laboratories
(UL), or ASTM uplift resistance test procedures.
T
B301001 1.4.2 Metal Roof Design Requirements
The design of the SSMR system shall be provided by the Contractor as

AF
a complete system. Roof panels, components, transitions,
accessories, and assemblies shall be supplied by the same roofing
system manufacturer. Provide to the DOR a design analysis signed by
a Registered Professional Engineer employed by the SSSMR
manufacturer. The design analysis shall include a list of the design
loads, and complete calculations for the roofing system and its
components; valley designs, gutter/downspout calculations, screw
pullout test results, and shall indicate how expected thermal
R
movements are accommodated.

D
Provide other sheet metal flashings, trim moldings, closure strips,

caps and other preformed metal panel accessories, of the same
material, thickness and finish as panels, except accessories that are
concealed after installation, and are aluminum or zinc-coated steel
may be provided unfinished. Provide molded closure strips of
closed-cell or solid-cell synthetic rubber, neoprene, or polyvinyl
chloride premolded to match configurations of preformed metal panels.
All accessories shall be manufactured or approved by the roof panel
manufacturer.
Provide concealed fasteners for attaching panels to structural

supports and to adjoining panels as approved and in accordance with
printed manufacturer's recommendations.
B301001 1.4.5 Field Quality Control
Install in accordance with the approved manufacturer's erection

Al Dhafra, UAE
instructions, shop drawings, and diagrams. Panels shall be in full

and firm contact with attachment clips. Where prefinished panels are
cut in the field, or where any of the factory applied coverings or
coatings are abraded or damaged in handling or installation, they
shall, after necessary repairs have been made with material of the
same color as the weather coating, be approved before being installed.
Seal openings through panels. Correct defects or errors in the
materials. Replace materials which cannot be corrected in an
approved manner with nondefective materials. Provide molded closure
strips where necessary to provide weathertight construction. Use
shims as required to ensure attachment clip line is true. Use a
spacing gage at each row of panels to ensure that panel width is not
stretched or shortened. Provide 30 pound layer of asphalt-saturated
felt placed perpendicular to roof slope, covered by a slip sheet.
Overlap side and end laps 75 mm 3 inches, offset seams in building
paper with seams in felt.
Apply roofing panels with the standing seams parallel to the slope
of the roof. Provide roofing panels in longest practical lengths from
ridge to eaves (top to eaves on shed roofs), with no transverse joints
T
except at the junction of ventilators, curbs, and similar openings.
Install flashing to assure positive water drainage away from roof
penetrations. Locate panel end laps such that fasteners do not engage
AF
supports or otherwise restrain the longitudinal thermal movement of
panels. Attach panels to the structure with concealed clips
incorporated into panel seams. Clip attachment shall allow roof to
move independently of the structure, except at fixed points as
necessary.
B301001 1.5 STRUCTURAL METAL ROOFING SYSTEM

R
B301001 1.5.1 Structural Standing Seam Metal Roof (SSSMR) System
The SSSMR system covered under this specification shall include the
entire roofing system; the standing seam metal roof panels, fasteners,
D
connectors, roof securement components, and assemblies tested and

approved in accordance with ASTM E 1592. In addition, the system
shall consist of panel finishes, slip sheet, insulation, vapor
retarder, all accessories, components, and trim and all connections
with roof panels. This includes roof penetration items such as vents,
curbs, skylights; interior or exterior gutters and downspouts; eaves,
ridge, hip, valley, rake, gable, wall, or other roof system flashings
installed and any other components specified within this contract to
provide a weathertight roof system.
B301001 1.5.2 Design Requirements
The design of the SSSMR system shall be provided by the Contractor

as a complete system, in accordance with ASCE 7. Framing members and
connections not indicated on the drawings shall be designed by the
Contractor. Roof panels, components, transitions, accessories, and
assemblies shall be supplied by the same roofing system manufacturer.
Provide to the DOR a design analysis signed by a Registered
Professional Engineer employed by the SSSMR manufacturer. The design

Al Dhafra, UAE
analysis shall include a list of the design loads, and complete

calculations for the support system (when provided by the Contractor),
roofing system and its components; valley designs, gutter/downspout
calculations, screw pullout test results, and shall indicate how
expected thermal movements are accommodated.
a. Dead Loads - The dead load shall be the weight of the SSSMR
system. Collateral loads such as sprinklers, mechanical and
electrical systems, and ceilings shall not be attached to the
panels.
b. Concentrated Loads - The panels and anchor clips shall be
capable of supporting a 300 pound concentrated load. The
concentrated load shall be applied at the panel mid-span and
will be resisted by a single standing seam metal roof panel
assumed to be acting as a beam. The un-deformed shape of the
panel shall be used to determine the section properties.
c. Uniform Loads - The panels and concealed anchor clips shall be
capable of supporting the minimum uniform live load specified
in the project program.
d. Roof Snow Loads - The design roof snow loads shall be shown on
T
the contract drawings.
e. Wind Loads - The design wind uplift pressure for the roof system
shall be shown on the contract drawings. The design uplift
AF
force for each connection assembly shall be that pressure given
for the area under consideration, multiplied by the tributary
load area of the connection assembly. The safety factor listed
below shall be applied to the design force and compared against
the ultimate capacity. Prying shall be considered when
figuring fastener design loads.
1) Single fastener in each connection.............3.0

R
2) Two or more fasteners in each connection...2.25

f. Framing Members Supporting the SSSMR System - New or revised
framing members and their connections shall be designed in
D
accordance with AISC 335, AISI SG-973, or SJI Specs & Tables.
Maximum deflection under applied live load, snow, or wind load
shall not exceed 1/180 of the span length.
g. Roof Panels Design - Deflections shall be based on panels being
continuous across three or more supports. Deflection shall be
calculated and measured along the major ribs of the panels.
1) Steel panels shall be designed in accordance with AISI

SG-973.
2) Aluminum panels shall be designed in accordance with AA ADM.

The panel deflection from concentrated loads shall not exceed
1/180 of the span length. The panel deflection under applied
live load, snow, or wind load shall not exceed 1/180 times the
span length.
B301001 1.5.3 Performance Requirements
a. The SSSMR shall be tested for wind uplift resistance in

Al Dhafra, UAE
accordance with ASTM E 1592; SSSMR systems previously tested

and approved may be acceptable.
b. SSSMRS Warranty Certificate -- At the completion of the project
the Contractor shall furnish signed copies of the 5-year
Warranty for Structural Standing Seam Metal Roof (SSSMR)
System, a sample copy of which is attached to this section, and
the 20-year Manufacturer's Material Warranties, and the
manufacturer's 20-year system weather-tightness warranty.
1) Contractor's Weather-tightness Warranty
The SSSMR system shall be warranted by the Contractor on a no

penal sum basis for a period of five years against material and
workmanship deficiencies; system deterioration caused by
exposure to the elements or inadequate resistance to specified
service design loads, water leaks, and wind uplift damage. The
SSSMR system covered under this warranty shall include the
entire roofing system including, but not limited to, the
standing seam metal roof panels, fasteners, connectors, roof
securement components, and assemblies tested and approved in
T
accordance with ASTM E 1592. In addition, the system shall
consist of panel finishes, slip sheet, insulation, vapor
retarder, all accessories, components, and trim and all
AF
connections with roof panels. This includes roof penetration
items such as vents, curbs, and skylights; interior or exterior
gutters and downspouts; eaves, ridge, hip, valley, rake, gable,
wall, or other roof system flashings installed and any other
components specified within this contract to provide a
weathertight roof system; and items specified in other sections
of these specifications that are part of the SSSMR system. All
material and workmanship deficiencies, system deterioration
R
caused by exposure to the elements /or inadequate resistance
to specified design loads, water leaks and wind uplift damage
shall be repaired as approved by the DOR. See the attached
Contractor's required warranty for issue resolution of
D
warrantable defects. This warranty shall warrant and cover the

entire cost of repair or replacement, including all material,
labor, and related markups. The Contractor shall supplement
this warranty with written warranties from the installer and
system manufacturer, which shall be submitted along with
Contractor's warranty; however, the Contractor shall be
ultimately responsible for this warranty
2) Manufacturer's Material Warranties
The Contractor shall furnish, in writing, the following

manufacturer's material warranties which cover all SSSMR system
components such as roof panels, anchor clips and fasteners, flashing,
accessories, and trim, fabricated from coil material:
a) A manufacturer's 20 year material warranty warranting that

the aluminum, zinc-coated steel, aluminum-zinc alloy coated
steel or aluminum-coated steel as specified herein will not
rupture, structurally fail, fracture, deteriorate, or become

Al Dhafra, UAE
perforated under normal design atmospheric conditions and

service design loads. Liability under this warranty shall be
limited exclusively to the cost of either repairing or replacing
nonconforming, ruptured, perforated, or structurally failed
coil material.
b) A manufacturer's 20 year exterior material finish warranty

on the factory colored finish warranting that the finish, under
normal atmospheric conditions at the site, will not crack, peel,
or delaminate; chalk in excess of a numerical rating of eight,
as determined by ASTM D 4214 test procedures; or change color
in excess of five CIE or Hunter Lab color difference (delta E)
units in accordance with ASTM D 2244. Liability under this
warranty is exclusively limited to refinishing with an
air-drying version of the specified finish or replacing the
defective coated material.
c) A roofing system manufacturer's 20 year, non-prorated,

system weathertightness warranty.
B301001 1.5.4 Roof Panels
T
Panels shall be steel or aluminum and shall have a factory color or
mill finish. Length of sheets shall be sufficient to cover the entire
AF
length of any unbroken roof slope for slope lengths that do not exceed
30 feet. When length of run exceeds 30 feet and panel laps are provided,
each sheet in the run shall extend over three or more supports. Sheets
longer than 100 feet may be furnished if approved by the DOR. Width
of sheets shall provide not more than 24 inches of coverage in place.
SSSMR system with roofing panels greater than 12 inches in width shall
have standing seams rolled during installation by an electrically
driven seaming machine.
R
a. Steel panels
1) Steel panels shall be zinc-coated steel conforming to ASTM

D
A 653/A 653M; aluminum-zinc alloy coated steel conforming to

ASTM A 792/A 792M, AZ 55 or 50 coating; or aluminum-coated steel
conforming to ASTM A 463/A 463M,Type 2, coating designation T2
65. Zinc, zinc-aluminum alloy or aluminum coated panels shall
be 0.023 inch (0.584 mm) thick minimum. Panels shall be within
95 percent of reported tested thickness as noted in wind uplift
resistance testing required in paragraph "PERFORMANCE
REQUIREMENTS".
2) Prior to shipment, if the panels are not specified with a

factory color finish, mill finish panels shall be treated with
a passivating chemical to inhibit the formation of oxide
corrosion products. Panels that have become wet during shipment
and have started to oxidize shall be rejected.
b. Aluminum Panels - Alloy conforming to ASTM B 209, temper as

required for the forming operation, minimum 0.032 inch thick.

Al Dhafra, UAE
B301001 1.5.5 Concealed Anchor Clips
Concealed anchor clips shall be the same as the tested roofing system.
Flashing, trim, metal closure strips, caps and similar metal

accessories shall be the manufacturer's standard products. Exposed
metal accessories shall be finished to match the panels furnished.
Fasteners for steel roof panels shall be zinc-coated steel, aluminum,

corrosion resisting steel, or nylon capped steel, type and size
specified below or as otherwise approved for the applicable
requirements. Fasteners for aluminum roof panels shall be aluminum
or corrosion resisting steel. Fasteners for structural connections
shall provide both tensile and shear ultimate strengths of not less
than 750 pounds per fastener. Exposed roof fasteners shall be sealed
or have sealed washers on the exterior side of the roof to waterproof
T
the fastener penetration. Washer material shall be compatible with
the roofing; have a minimum diameter of 3/8 inch for structural
connections; and gasketed portion of fasteners or washers shall be
AF
neoprene or other equally durable elastomeric material approximately
1/8 inch thick. Exposed fasteners for factory color finished panels
shall be factory finished to match the color of the panels.
a. Screws - Screws for attaching anchor devices shall be not less

than No. 14
b. Bolts - Bolts shall be not less than 1/4 inch diameter,
shouldered or plain shank as required, with locking washers and
R
nuts.
c. Structural Blind Fasteners - Blind screw-type expandable
fasteners shall be not less than 1/4 inch diameter. Blind (pop)
rivets shall be not less than 9/32 inch minimum diameter.
D
B301001 1.5.8 Sub-purlins
Cold formed supporting structural members/sub-purlins shall have a

minimum thickness of 0.059 inches and a minimum tensile yield strength
of 50000 psi. Hot rolled structural members shall have a minimum
thickness of 0.25 inches and a minimum tensile yield strength of 36000
psi. Sub-purlins shall be galvanized or shop painted, as required
by the project program.
B301001 1.5.9 Factory Color Finish
Panels shall have a factory applied polyvinylidene fluoride finish

on the exposed side. The exterior finish shall consist of a baked-on
topcoat with an appropriate prime coat. The exterior coating shall
be a nominal 2 mil thickness consisting of a topcoat of not less than
0.7 mil dry film thickness and the paint manufacturer's recommended
primer of not less than 1.0 mil thickness. The interior color finish

Al Dhafra, UAE
shall consist of the same coating and dry film thickness as the
exterior. The exterior color finish shall meet the test requirements
specified below.
a. Salt Spray test - A sample of the sheets shall withstand a cyclic

corrosion test for a minimum of 2016 hours in accordance with
ASTM D 5894, including the scribe requirement in the test.
Immediately upon removal of the panel from the test, the coating
shall receive a rating of not less than 10, no blistering, as
determined by ASTM D 714; 10, no rusting, as determined by ASTM
D 610; and a rating of 6, over 21/16 to 1/8 inch failure at
scribe, as determined by ASTM D 1654.
b. Formability Test - When subjected to testing in accordance with
ASTM D 522 Method B, 1/8 inch diameter mandrel, the coating film
shall show no evidence of cracking to the naked eye.
c. Humidity Test - When subjected to a humidity cabinet test in
accordance with ASTM D 2247 for 1000 hours, a scored panel shall
show no signs of blistering, cracking, creepage or corrosion.
d. Impact Resistance - Factory-painted sheet shall withstand
direct and reverse impact in accordance with ASTM D 2794 0.500
T
inch diameter hemispherical head indenter, equal to 1.5 times
the metal thickness in mils, expressed in inch-pounds, with no
cracking.
e.
AF
Abrasion Resistance Test - When subjected to the falling sand
test in accordance with ASTM D 968, Method A, the coating system
shall withstand a minimum of 2.83 cubic feet (80 liters) of sand
before the appearance of the base metal. The term "appearance
of base metal" refers to the metallic coating on steel or the
aluminum base metal.
f. Specular Gloss - Where considerations for flight line
visibility (or other considerations) mandate, finished roof
R
surfaces shall have a specular gloss value of 10 or less at
an angle of 85 degrees or 30 plus or minus the value specified
in the project program at 60 degrees when measured in accordance
with ASTM D 523.
D
g. Pollution Resistance - Coating shall show no visual effects when

covered spot tested in a 10 percent hydrochloric acid solution
for 24 hours in accordance with ASTM D 1308.
B301001 1.5.10 Insulation
Thermal resistance of insulation shall be not less than the R-values

shown on the contract drawings. R-values shall be determined at a
mean temperature of 75 degrees F in accordance with ASTM C 518.
a. Polyisocyanurate Rigid Board Insulation for Use Above a Roof

Deck - Polyisocyanurate insulation shall conform to ASTM C 1289,
Type II.
b. Blanket Insulation - Blanket insulation shall conform to ASTM
C 991.
c. Glass Mat Gypsum Roof Board - Glass mat gypsum roof board for
use above the deck or insulation for thermal protection shall
have a flame spread - 0, smoke developed - 0, shall be water
resistant and have a compressive strength of 500 psi. Glass

Al Dhafra, UAE
mat gypsum roof board shall conform to ASTM C 1177/C 1177M.
B301001 1.5.11 Sealant
Sealants shall be elastomeric type containing no oil or asphalt.

Exposed sealant shall be colored to match the applicable building
color or clear and shall cure to a rubber like consistency. Sealant
placed in the roof panel standing seam ribs shall be provided in
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
B301001 1.5.12 Vapor Retarder
a. Vapor Retarders as Integral Facing - Alloy conforming to ASTM

B 209, temper as required for the forming operation, minimum
0.032 inch thick. Insulation facing shall have a permeability
of 0.02 perm or less when tested in accordance with ASTM E 96.
b. Vapor Retarders Separate from Insulation - Vapor retarder
material shall be polyethylene sheeting conforming to ASTM D
4397. A single ply of 10 mil polyethylene sheet; or, at the
Contractor's option, a double ply of 6 mil polyethylene sheet
T
shall be used. A fully compatible polyethylene tape with equal
or better water vapor control characteristics than the vapor
retarder material shall be provided. A cloth industrial duct
AF
tape in a utility grade shall also be provided to use as needed
to protect the vapor retarder from puncturing.
c. Slip Sheet for Use With Vapor Retarder - Slip sheet for use with
vapor retarder shall be a 5 lb. per 100 square feet rosin-sized,
unsaturated building paper.
B301001 1.5.13 EPDM Rubber Boots

R
Flashing devices around pipe penetrations shall be flexible,
one-piece devices molded from weather-resistant EPDM rubber. Rubber
boot material shall be as recommended by the manufacturer. The boots
shall have base rings made of aluminum or corrosion resisting steel
D
that conform to the contours of the roof panel to form a weather-tight

seal.
B301001 1.5.14 Prefabricated Curbs and Equipment Support
Prefabricated curbs and equipment supports shall be of structural

quality, hot-dipped galvanized or galvanized sheet steel, factory
primed and prepared for painting with mitered and welded joints.
Integral base plates and water diverter crickets shall be provided.
Minimum height of curb shall be 8 inches above finish roof. Curbs
shall be constructed to match roof slope and to provide a level top
surface for mounting of equipment. Curb flange shall be constructed
to match configuration of roof panels. Curb size shall be
coordinated, prior to curb fabrication, with the mechanical equipment
to be supported. Strength requirements for equipment supports shall
be coordinated to include all anticipated loads. Flashings shall not
be rigidly attached to underline structure.
B301002 LOW SLOPE ROOF SYSTEMS

Al Dhafra, UAE
a. Warranty (Except SSSMRS) - Furnish the roofing system manufacturer's

materials and workmanship warranty for the roofing system. The
warranty period shall not be less than 20 years from the date the
Government acceptance of the work. The warranty shall be issued
directly to the Government and shall not be limited in dollar value.
The system warranty shall include roofing membrane, insulation,
flashings, accessories and attachments.
b. Wind Uplift - The complete roof covering assembly shall be rated in
accordance with FM P7825, capable of withstanding an uplift pressure
as determined by ASCE-7, and FM I-49 for perimeter and flashing
attachment.
c. Fire Safety - The complete roof covering assembly shall meet ASTM E
108, Class 1A or UL 790, Class A; and be listed as Fire-Classified
roof deck construction in the UL RMSD, or Class I roof deck
construction in FM P7825. All components of the system shall be UL
labeled. Complete roof covering assembly shall:1) Be Class A or B
T
rated in accordance with ASTM E 108 , FM 4470, or UL 790; and2) Be
listed as part of Fire-Classified roof deck construction in UL RMSD, or
Class I roof deck construction in FM P7825c.
d. Traffic Pads - Provide on roof system to protect roof from foot
AF
traffic. Provide traffic pads from roof access to and around roof
mounted mechanical equipment and underneath removable mechanical
equipment access panels. Traffic pads shall be of compatible
material to roof.
e. Cool Roof - If required in RFP Part 2 or Part 3 comply with UFC 3-110-03,
Roofing Chapter 1, Cool Roofs. Cool roof design must follow the
requirements in UFC 3-110-03 "Roofing" Chapter 1, Cool Roofs.
R
B301002 1.2 BUILT-UP ASPHALT ROOFING (AGGREGATE SURFACED)
This paragraph covers the requirements for aggregate surfaced bituminous

D
built-up roofing made up of glass felt, asphalt bitumen, and aggregate

surfaced or modified bitumen cap sheet.
a. Asphalt - ASTM D 312, Type II, III or IV

b. Felts - Base Sheet (GB) - ASTM D 4601, Type II without
perforations
1) Ply Felt (GA) - ASTM D 2178, Type IV or VI
2) Ventilating Base Sheet VB) - ASTM D 4897
3) Flashing Felt (SBS Modified Base Sheet - MB) per ASTM D 6162
(with combined polyester and glass fiber reinforcing), Type II,
Grade G (weighing 4.3(90 lbs./100sf), and a thickness of 130
mils) or Grade S (weighing 58 lbs./100sf and a thickness of 85
mils), ASTM D 6163 (with glass fiber reinforcing), Type II,
Grade G (weighing 90 lbs./100sf, and a thickness of 130 mils)

Al Dhafra, UAE
or S (weighing 58 lbs./100sf and a thickness of 85 mils), ASTM

D 6164 (with polyester reinforcing), Type II, Grade G (weighing
90 lbs./100sf, and a thickness of 130 mils) or S (weighing 70
lbs./100sf and a thickness of 115 mils).
4) SBS Bitumen Cap Sheet (RSS) - ASTM D 6162 (with combined

polyester and glass fiber reinforcing), Type II, Grade G
(weighing 90 lbs./100sf, and a thickness of 130 mils), ASTM D
6163 (with glass fiber reinforcing), Type II, Grade G (weighing
90 lbs./100sf, and a thickness of 130 mils), ASTM D 6164 (with
polyester reinforcing),
c. Primer - ASTM D 41
d. Asphalt Roof Cement - ASTM D 4586, Type II for vertical surfaces
and Type I for horizontal surfaces.
e. Aggregate for Surfacing Built-up Roofing - ASTM D 1863
f. Fasteners - Provide metal fasteners of copper, aluminum or
stainless steel, compatible with materials to be penetrated.
Fasteners shall be of sufficient length to achieve appropriate
embedment or penetration into the substrate below.
g. Metal Discs - Flat discs or caps of zinc-coated steel not less
T
than 28 gage and not less than 1-3/8 inches (35 mm) in diameter.
h. Traffic Pads - Preformed reprocessed rubber, compatible with
the roof membrane, 1/4-inch (6.35 mm) minimum thickness,
AF
weighing not less than 1-1/2 pounds per square foot, to protect
roof from foot traffic. Provide traffic pads around roof
access and around roof mounted equipment and underneath
removable mechanical equipment access panels.
B301002 1.2.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
a. Tests for Surface Dryness - see paragraph B301002 1.2 for

R
Performance Verification and Acceptance Testing requirements.
B301002 1.3 ETHYLENE PROPYLENE DIENE MONOMER (EPDM)

D
a. EPDM Sheet - ASTM D 4637. Ethylene Propylene Diene Monomer

(EPDM), reinforced, 0.06 inch (1.5 mm) thick for fully adhered
application. Seams shall be sealed with seam tape versus liquid
adhesive, unless previously approved by DOR.
b. Flashing and Flashing Accessories - Flashing, including
perimeter flashing, flashing around roof penetrations, and
prefabricated pipe seals, shall be 0.06 inch (1.5 mm) minimum
thick uncured EPDM sheet or 0.045 inch (1.1 mm) minimum thick
cured EPDM.
c. Fasteners - Provide fasteners warranted by the roofing
manufacturer for the EPDM sheet installation.
d. Roof Insulation - Provide rigid board insulation beneath the
EPDM sheet as part of the warranted roof system, and compatible
with the adhesive used in the installation.

Al Dhafra, UAE
B301002 1.4 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING
This paragraph covers the requirements for modified bituminous membrane

sheet roofing, SBS modified for hot mopping or cold applied, with a minimum
slope of 1/2 inch per foot. Contractor shall provide a complete modified
bitumen roofing system, to include insulation, flashings, felts, primers
and adhesives as recommended for the installation either on a nailable
(plywood or metal deck) or non-nailable (concrete) substrate, from the
materials below. All work must follow the NRCA RoofMan guidelines and
standards stated within this Section.
a. Asphalt - ASTM D 312, Type III or IV.

b. Ply Materials -
1) Ventilating Base Sheet (VB) - ASTM D 4897, Type II
2) Base Sheet (GB) - ASTM D 4601, Type II without perforations
T
3) SBS Modified Base Sheet (MB) - ASTM D 6162 (with combined
polyester and glass fiber reinforcing), Type II, Grade S
weighing 58 lbs./100sf and a thickness of 85 mils), ASTM D 6163
AF
with glass fiber reinforcing), Type II, Grade S (weighing 58
lbs./100sf and a thickness of 85 mils), ASTM D 6164 (with
polyester reinforcing), Type II, Grade S (weighing 70
lbs./100sf and a thickness of 115 mils).
4) SBS Interply Sheet: ASTM D 6162, ASTM D 6164, ASTM D 6163,

Type I or II, Grade S, minimum 80 mils (2.0 mm) thick.
R
5) SBS Bitumen Cap Sheet (RSS) - ASTM D 6162 (with combined
polyester and glass fiber reinforcing), Type II, Grade G
(weighing 90 lbs./100sf, and a thickness of 130 mils), ASTM D
6163 (with glass fiber reinforcing), Type II, Grade G (weighing
D
90 lbs./100sf, and a thickness of 130 mils), ASTM D 6164 (with

polyester reinforcing), Type II, Grade G (weighing 90
lbs./100sf, and a thickness of 130 mils). Provide polyester
reinforced cap sheet on roofs expected to experience high levels
of traffic, on roofs with congested equipment, where equipment
is expected to receive regular service or high maintenance, and
where other service conditions warrant.
c. Mineral Roofing Granules - Factory applied, requiring no
further coating.
d. Primer - ASTM D 41
e. Asphalt Roof Cement - ASTM D 4586, Type II for vertical surfaces,
Type I for horizontal surfaces.
f. Fasteners - Provide non-corrosive fasteners meeting the
requirements of FM A/S4470.
g. Asphalt Adhesive - ASTM D 4479, Type III.
h. Reflective Coating - 100% Acrylic Elastomeric with Energy Star
Rating exceeding the requirements of ASTM D-6083. Coating shall
be intended for use as a roof topcoat.

Al Dhafra, UAE
B301002 1.5 STRUCTURAL STANDING SEAM METAL ROOFING
See B301001 1.5.1 "Structural Standing Seam Metal Roof System" for SSSMR
requirements.
B301003 ROOF INSULATION & FILL
The insulation system shall be coordinated with the mechanical design to suit the
energy requirements of the facility.
B301003 1.1 MINERAL FIBER BLANKET INSULATION
This paragraph covers the requirements for mineral fiber blanket thermal
insulation in attics and above ceilings.
B301003 1.1.1 Products
a. Blanket Insulation - ASTM C 665, Type I, II, or III, as

appropriate for the installation, Class A, membrane-faced
surface with a flame spread of 25 or less; and a smoke developed
T
rating of 150 or less when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84.
Indicate insulation R-values on the design drawings.
b. Blocking - Treated wood, metal, un-faced mineral fiber blankets
AF
in accordance with ASTM C665, Type I. Blocking around chimneys
and other heat producing devices shall be non-combustible and
shall meet the requirements of ASTM E 136.
c. Vapor Retarder - 6 mil (minimum) thick polyethylene sheeting
conforming to ASTM D 4397, with a water permeance value of 1
perm or less when tested according with ASTM E 96.
R
B301003 1.2 ROOF AND DECK INSULATION
This paragraph covers the requirements for insulation materials used below
the roofing systems.
D
B301003 1.2.1 Insulation Types
Roof insulation shall have an R-value determined per ASHRAE Standard

90.1 and per project energy goals and be one or an assembly of a maximum
of three of the following materials and compatible with attachment
methods for the specified insulation and roof system:
a. Expanded Perlite Board - ASTM C 728, minimum thickness of 3/4"

boards, and 4' by 4' board size.
b. Polyisocyanurate Board - ASTM C 1289, with a minimum compressive
strength of 138 kPa (20 psi), unless overlaid with another board
with a comparable or greater compressive strength. Use
insulation facer as recommended by the roofing material
manufacturer. Board size shall be restricted to 4' by 4' when
applied in direct contact with concrete deck.
c. Composite Boards - ASTM C 984 (Polyisocyanurate-perlite) or
ASTM C 1050 (Polystyrene-wood fiberboard), Type III, Grade 1,
Class A, or ASTM C 1289, Type V, oriented strand board or

Al Dhafra, UAE
waferboard on one side and fibrous felt or glass fiber mat

membrane or aluminum foil on the other.
d. Wood Fiber (high density) - ASTM C 208
B301003 1.2.2 Tapered Roof Insulation
On portions of the roof where the sloping of structure does not allow
the minimum slopes, provide a factory tapered roof insulation system
to provide positive drainage of roof system, and to include drainage
around curbs, penetrations, and projections through the roof plane.
For new construction, provide one layer of the tapered roof insulation
assembly factory tapered to a slope not less than 1/2" per foot (13
mm per 300 mm). For re-roofing applications where slopes of 1/2" per
foot (13 mm per 300 mm) cannot be achieved, provide a minimum of 1/4"
per foot (6.35 mm per 300 mm) slope.
B301003 1.2.3 Protection Board
Provide for use as a thermal barrier (underlayment) or protection

board for hot-mopped applications.
T
B301003 1.2.4 Glass Mat Gypsum Roof Board
AF
ASTM C 1177, with a 0 Flame Spread and 0 Smoke Developed when tested
B301003 1.2.5 Bitumens
a. Asphalt Primer - ASTM D 41

b. Asphalt - ASTM D 312, Type III or IV
c. Asphalt Roof Cement - ASTM D 4586, Type I for horizontal
R
surfaces, Type II for vertical and sloped surfaces. Roof
cement shall be compatible with membrane materials.
D
B301003 1.2.6 Underlayment
a. Asphalt-Saturated Felt Base Sheet for Single Layer Application

- ASTM D 4869, Type II or ASTM D 226, Type II (30 pounds).
b. Polymer-Modified Self-Adhering Bitumen Sheet, 40 mil (1.1 mm)
minimum thickness. Provide at roof perimeter, valley and roof
penetration locations as a minimum.
B301003 1.2.7 Seal at Penetrations
Provide pre-manufactured flashing components for use in single-ply

roofing applications. Seal laps and penetrations to prevent moisture
vapor penetration. Adhesives, sealants, prefabricated components
and spray foam products may be required.
Fasteners shall be flat, round or hexagonal steel (not less than

Al Dhafra, UAE
1-3/8"(35 mm) diameter) and 28 gage, or plastic plates (not less than
3 inches (75 mm) in diameter).
Fasteners in lightweight cellular concrete decks shall penetrate at

least 1 inch (25 mm) but not more than 1-1/2 inches (32 mm) into the
deck. Withdrawal resistance from lightweight cellular concrete deck
shall be not less than 40 lbs.(18 kg) each, or 120 lbs. (54 kg) each
in metal deck.
Fasteners in steel decks shall be hardened fasteners or screws

conforming to FM A/S4470 and listed in FM P7825 for Class I roof deck
construction.
Fasteners shall be place to withstand an uplift pressure required by

the project program in the field of the roof and FM LPDS 1-49 for
perimeter component and flashing attachment.
Roofing Nails - Provide corrosion resistant ring shank nails of

sufficient length to penetrate a minimum of 1 inch (25 mm) into wood
nailers or so as to provide appropriate embedment in substrate below.
T
Fasteners shall conform to FM A/S4470, and be placed to withstand an
uplift pressure of 90 psf (4.3 kPa) conforming to FM P7825, and FM
1-49 for perimeter fasteners.
AF
B301003 1.2.9 Wood Nailers
Wood nailers shall be pressure-preservative-treated in accordance

with AWPA M2 Standards, permanently marked or branded, and installed
flush with the top of the adjacent insulation board. Separate treated
wood nailers from roofing metals with underlayment.
R
B301003 1.2.9.1 Fasteners
Provide stainless steel, double hot-dipped galvanized or other

corrosion resistant fasteners recommended by the treatment
D
manufacturer for use with treated wood.
B301004 FLASHINGS & TRIM
B301004 1.1 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL
This paragraph covers the requirements for flashing and sheet metal work
including scuppers, splash pans, and sheet metal roofing. Flashing and
sheet metal shall be provided in accordance with roof manufacturers printed
installation instructions and in compliance with NRCA and SMACNA
recommendations.
Furnish sheet metal items in minimum 8 to 10 foot (2.44 to 3.05 meter)

lengths. Sheet metal items include the following: gutters, including
hangers; downspouts; counter-flashings; gravel stops and fascias;
cap, valley, stepped, base and eave flashings and related accessories.

Al Dhafra, UAE
a. Copper, Sheet and Strip - ASTM B 370, cold-rolled temper.

b. Lead-Coated Copper Sheet - ASTM B 101
c. Lead Sheet - Minimum weight 4 pounds per square foot (.19 kPa).
d. Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) - ASTM A 653/ A 653M.
Galvanized steel items shall have a baked-on, factory applied
finish of polyvinylidene fluoride or an equivalent fluorocarbon
coating with a minimum thickness of 0.8 to 1.3 mils.
e. Stainless Steel - ASTM A 167, Type 302 or 304, 2D finish, fully
annealed, dead-soft temper.
f. Aluminum Alloy Sheet and Plate - ASTM B 209
g. Pre-Finished Aluminum - Provide trim, gravel stops and fascias
of Pre-finished aluminum. Finish shall be baked-on factory
applied color coating of polyvinylidene fluoride (PVF2) or
other equivalent fluorocarbon coating with a minimum thickness
of 0.8 to 1.3 mils.
h. Aluminum alloy, Extruded Bars, Rods, Shapes, and Tubes - ASTM
B 221
i. Solder - ASTM B 32
j. Polyvinyl Chloride Reglet - ASTM D 1784, Type II
k. Asphalt Primer - ASTM D 41
T
l. Fasteners - Fasteners shall be of the same or compatible metal
with the item being fastened. Stainless steel fasteners shall
be used to fasten dissimilar materials.
AF
B301004 1.1.2 Field Quality Control
Fabrication and installation of sheet metal items shall be as follows:
a. Install work with watertight and hairline joints, without

waves, warps, buckles, fastening stresses, or distortion,
R
allowing for expansion and contraction.
b. Make surfaces to receive sheet metal plumb and true, clean,
even, smooth, dry and free of defects and projections that could
affect the application.
D
c. Provide sheet metal flashing in angles formed where roof decks

abut walls, curbs, ventilators, pipes, or other vertical
surfaces and wherever indicated and necessary to make the work
watertight.
d. Provide prefabricated inside and outside corners at all sheet
metal intersection pieces. Minimum leg length shall be 12
inches (300 mm), maximum length shall be 18 inches (450 mm).
e. Sheet metal shall be fabricated to conform to the contours of
surfaces to which applied.
f. All sheet metal cap flashings shall have waterproof membrane
underlayment installed behind or below the metal components.
g. Provide conforming sheet metal closures at all flashing
termination conditions.
h. Provide fastenings and accessories as required to provide a
securely attached, watertight construction. Cleats shall be
a minimum of one gage heavier than the component to be attached.
i. Where sheet metal components are to be embedded in the roofing
system, prime both sides of all metal flanges prior to
installation.

Al Dhafra, UAE
B301005 GUTTERS AND DOWNSPOUTS
Provide gutters and downspouts compatible with roofing material and finish.
Concealed (interior) gutters and downspouts are prohibited. The primary and
secondary drainage systems shall be sized per applicable Plumbing and Building
Codes. Finish shall be baked-on factory applied color coating of polyvinylidene
fluoride (PVF2) or other equivalent fluorocarbon coating with a minimum thickness
of 0.8 to 1.3 mils.
B301006 ROOF OPENINGS AND SUPPORTS
Provide flashings for roof openings and supports as recommended by the NRCA
and as specified below:
When existing pitch pans cannot be avoided and must be utilized, insure pitch
pan is a preformed pan with minimum 4-inch (100 mm) height and 2-inch (50
mm) flange with 2-inch (50 mm) clearance on all sides of the penetration.
T
Fill bottom 1/3 with non-shrink grout. Fill remainder with pourable
elastomeric sealer sloped to drain. For round penetrations, provide a
metal umbrella cap clamped to the penetration.
AF
Assure all penetration flashings extend minimum 8 inches (200 mm) above the
finished roof surface. Use round shapes to construct equipment supports.
Equipment supports should be raised on a continuous curb a minimum of 14
inches (350 mm), but not less than as required by the NRCA.
B301006 1.2 ROOF HATCHES

R
Construct using NRCA approved techniques and details. Provide roof hatch
where required by OSHA, or as access to roof when roof mounted equipment
is used or other routine roof maintenance is required.
D
B301006 1.2.1 Construction
Provide insulated roof hatches of 14 gage galvanized steel with 22

gage galvanized steel liner or 18 gage aluminum liner, and have
integral curb, flange and flashings for securing to roof deck. Hinge
shall be heavy-duty zinc plated steel with non-removable pins.
Latching mechanism shall be zinc-coated steel slam latch with inside
and outside levers. Springs shall be greased compression springs in
telescopic tubes. Provide interior locking of roof hatch. Provide
a safety rail or ladder extension. Size roof hatch to allow access
of routine maintenance equipment, but not less than 2'-6" x 3'-0" (750
mm x 900 mm). Hatch and access ladders shall conform to OSHA and other
applicable safety standards.
B301006 1.3 GLAZED ROOF OPENINGS
This paragraph covers the requirements for skylights manufactured from

glass-fiber or thermoplastic carbonate.

Al Dhafra, UAE
Skylights and other glazed roof openings shall be used only to supplement
interior lighting levels (generally in steep slope or vertical
applications), and otherwise, are discouraged from use. Proper detailing
is critical, and shall be scrutinized closely to minimize the likelihood
of future leaks at these locations.
The contractor shall furnish to the Government the manufacturer's

complete warranty for materials, workmanship and installation. The
warranty is for 10 years from the time of project completion. The
warranty shall guarantee, but shall not be limited to, the following:
a. Light transmission and color of the panels shall not change

after exposure to heat of 300 degrees F (149 degrees C) for 25
minutes.
b. There is no delamination of the panel affecting appearance,
performance, weatherability or structural integrity of the
panels or the completed system.
c. There is no fiberbloom on the panel face.
T
d. Change in light transmission of no more than 6% per ASTM D 1003,
and in color (yellowing index) no more than 10 points in
comparison to the original specified value over a 10 year
period.
AF
B301006 1.3.2 Skylight Panels
Skylight panels shall be constructed of glass-fiber reinforced

polyester or extruded cellular thermoplastic polycarbonate
materials. Glass-fiber reinforced panels shall conform to ASTM D
R
3841 and to the requirements of AAMA 1600/I.S.7.
a. Non-Combustible Grid Core - The aluminum I-beams shall be

6063-T6 with provisions for mechanical interlocking of
D
muntin-mullion and perimeter to provide full bonding surface

to contact the face material. Panels shall withstand 1200
degrees F (650 degrees C) for a minimum of one hour without
collapse or exterior flaming.
b. Adhesive - The laminate adhesive shall meet the following
requirements:1) Tensile strength of 750 psi-in. in accordance
with ASTM C 297.2) Shear strength shall meet or exceed the
following per ASTM D 1002:a) 540 psi (3723 kPa) at 50% relative
humidity and 73 degrees F (23 degrees C).b) 800 psi (5516 kPa)
under accelerated aging per ASTM D 1037 at room temperature.c)
250 psi (1724 kPa) under accelerated aging per ASTM D 1037 at
182 degrees F (83 degrees C).d) 1400 psi (9653 kPa) after 500
hour Oxygen Bomb per ASTM D 572.e) 100 psi (690 kPa) at 182
degrees F (83 degrees C).
c. Panel Construction - Panels shall consist of fiberglass faces
laminated to an aluminum I-beam grid core and shall not deflect
more than 1.9 inches (48 mm) at 30 psf (1.44 kPa) in 10 feet
(3.048 meters) per ASTM E 72, without a supporting frame.

Al Dhafra, UAE
B301006 1.3.3 Thermoplastic Polycarbonate Panels
The glazing panels shall meet the following requirements:
a. The interior flame spread classification shall be Class I in

accordance with ASTM E 84, with a smoke developed rating no
greater than 70 in accordance with ASTM D 2843.
b. The exterior and interior faces shall be an approved light
transmitting panel with a CC1 fire rating classification in
accordance with ASTM D 635.
c. Self-ignition shall be greater than 1058 degrees F (570 degrees
C) in accordance with ASTM D 1929.
d. Fire rated roof assembly translucent panels shall be
successfully evaluated for fire from exterior exposure per ASTM
E 108 to meet Class 'A' rating, and be listed by an independent
recognized listing laboratory.
B301006 1.4 GUARDS
T
Provide rails or guards as required by the OSHA, the International Building
Code or other applicable safety standards.
B301090 OTHER ROOFING

AF
B301090 1.1 LIGHTNING PROTECTION
Lightning protection component penetrations and attachments shall be sealed

and flashed and anchored in a permanent manner and in a manner to avoid the
degradation of the watertight integrity of the roof system. Do not cut or
otherwise disturb the roof membrane. Mastic seals in the plane of the roof
R
are unacceptable. Anchor plates set in mastic shall be set on roof surface
cleaned of aggregate and loose material prior to mastic application.
B301090 1.2 ROOF DRAINS (EXISTING)

D
Where existing roof drains are to be reused in roof replacement construction,

the contractor shall provide new, compatible flashing materials, a new drain
clamping ring and new bolts for anchorage. Reuse of existing clamping ring
and bolts is unacceptable.
B301090 1.3 VEGETATED ROOFS
Where vegetated roofs are specified, provide additional technical

specification for Government approval. Refer to UFC 3-110-03 and Whole
Building Design Guide section titled "Vegetated Roof Covering ".

Al Dhafra, UAE
FORMS
ROOFING SYSTEM COMPONENTS
1. Contract Number: ______________________________________________________
2. Building Number and Location: _________________________________________
3. NAVFAC Specification Number: __________________________________________
4. Deck Type: ____________________________________________________________
5. Slope of Deck: ________________________________________________________
6. Insulation Type and Thickness:_________________________________________
7. Insulation Manufacturer: ______________________________________________
8. Vapor Retarder (______) Yes (______) No
T
9. Vapor Retarder Type: __________________________________________________
AF
10. Roofing Description: __________________________________________________
Manufacturer (Name, address, and phone no.): __________________________
_______________________________________________________________________
Type: __________________________________________________________________
R
Method of attachment: __________________________________________________
11. Statement of Compliance or Exception: _________________________________

D
_______________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________
12. Date Roof Completed: __________________________________________________
13. Warranty Period: ______________________________________________________
14. Roofing Contractor (Name and Address):
_______________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________
15. Prime Contractor (Name and Address):

Al Dhafra, UAE
_______________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________
Contractor's Signature _______________________________ Date: _____________
Inspector's Signature ________________________________ Date: _____________
T
AF
R
D

Al Dhafra, UAE
Form page 1
CONTRACTOR'S FIVE (5) YEAR NO PENAL SUM WARRANTY FOR STRUCTURAL STANDING SEAM METAL
ROOF (SSSMR) SYSTEM
FACILITY DESCRIPTION_________________________________________________
BUILDING NUMBER:_____________________________________________________
CONTRACT NUMBER:_____________________________________________________
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACTOR:__________________________________________________________
ADDRESS:_____________________________________________________________
T
POINT OF CONTACT:____________________________________________________
AF
TELEPHONE NUMBER:____________________________________________________
OWNER
OWNER:_______________________________________________________________
ADDRESS:_____________________________________________________________
R
POINT OF CONTACT:____________________________________________________
D
CONSTRUCTION AGENT
CONSTRUCTION AGENT:__________________________________________________
ADDRESS:_____________________________________________________________
POINT OF CONTACT:____________________________________________________

Al Dhafra, UAE
Warranty page 1
ROOF (SSSMR) SYSTEM (continued)
THE SSSMR SYSTEM INSTALLED ON THE ABOVE NAMED BUILDING IS WARRANTED BY

_____________________________ FOR A PERIOD OF FIVE (5) YEARS AGAINST WORKMANSHIP
AND MATERIAL DEFICIENCES, WIND DAMAGE, STRUCTURAL FAILURE, AND LEAKAGE. THE SSSMR
SYSTEM COVERED UNDER THIS WARRANTY SHALL INCLUDE, BUT SHALL NOT BE LIMITED TO,
THE FOLLOWING: THE ENTIRE ROOFING SYSTEM, MANUFACTURER SUPPLIED FRAMING AND
STRUCTURAL MEMBERS, METAL ROOF PANELS, FASTENERS, CONNECTORS, ROOF SECUREMENT
COMPONENTS, AND ASSEMBLIES TESTED AND APPROVED IN ACCORDANCE WITH ASTM E 1592.
IN ADDITION, THE SYSTEM PANEL FINISHES, SLIP SHEET, INSULATION, VAPOR RETARDER,
ALL ACCESSORIES, COMPONENTS, AND TRIM AND ALL CONNECTIONS ARE INCLUDED. THIS
T
INCLUDES ROOF PENETRATION ITEMS SUCH AS VENTS, CURBS, SKYLIGHTS; INTERIOR OR
EXTERIOR GUTTERS AND DOWNSPOUTS; EAVES, RIDGE, HIP, VALLEY, RAKE, GABLE, WALL,
OR OTHER ROOF SYSTEM FLASHINGS INSTALLED AND ANY OTHER COMPONENTS SPECIFIED WITHIN
AF
THIS CONTRACT TO PROVIDE A WEATHERTIGHT ROOF SYSTEM; AND ITEMS SPECIFIED IN OTHER
SECTIONS OF THE SPECIFICATIONS THAT ARE PART OF THE SSSMR SYSTEM.
ALL MATERIAL DEFICIENCIES, WIND DAMAGE, STRUCTURAL FAILURE, AND LEAKAGE ASSOCIATED
WITH THE SSSMR SYSTEM COVERED UNDER THIS WARRANTY SHALL BE REPAIRED AS APPROVED
BY THE CONTRACTING OFFICER. THIS WARRANTY SHALL COVER THE ENTIRE COST OF REPAIR
OR REPLACEMENT, INCLUDING ALL MATERIAL, LABOR, AND RELATED MARKUPS. THE ABOVE
REFERENCED WARRANTY COMMENCED ON THE DATE OF FINAL ACCEPTANCE ON
R
____________________________ AND WILL REMAIN IN EFFECT FOR STATED DURATION FROM
THIS DATE.
SIGNED, DATED, AND NOTARIZED (BY COMPANY PRESIDENT)

D
____________________________________________________________
(Company President) (Date)

Al Dhafra, UAE
Warranty page 2
THE CONTRACTOR SHALL SUPPLEMENT THIS WARRANTY WITH WRITTEN WARRANTIES FROM THE
MANUFACTURER AND INSTALLER OF THE SSSMR SYSTEM, WHICH SHALL BE SUBMITTED ALONG
WITH THE CONTRACTOR'S WARRANTY. HOWEVER, THE CONTRACTOR WILL BE ULTIMATELY
RESPONSIBLE FOR THIS WARRANTY AS OUTLINED IN THE SPECIFICATIONS AND AS INDICATED
IN THIS WARRANTY EXAMPLE.
T
EXCLUSIONS FROM COVERAGE
AF
1. NATURAL DISASTERS, ACTS OF GOD (LIGHTNING, FIRE, EXPLOSIONS, SUSTAINED WIND
FORCES IN EXCESS OF THE DESIGN CRITERIA, EARTHQUAKES, AND HAIL).
2. ACTS OF NEGLIGENCE OR ABUSE OR MISUSE BY GOVERNMENT OR OTHER PERSONNEL,

INCLUDING ACCIDENTS, VANDALISM, CIVIL DISOBEDIENCE, WAR, OR DAMAGE CAUSED BY
FALLING OBJECTS.
3. DAMAGE BY STRUCTURAL FAILURE, SETTLEMENT, MOVEMENT, DISTORTION, WARPAGE, OR

R
DISPLACEMENT OF THE BUILDING STRUCTURE OR ALTERATIONS MADE TO THE BUILDING.
4. CORROSION CAUSED BY EXPOSURE TO CORROSIVE CHEMICALS, ASH OR FUMES GENERATED

OR RELEASED INSIDE OR OUTSIDE THE BUILDING FROM CHEMICAL PLANTS, FOUNDRIES, PLATING
D
WORKS, KILNS, FERTILIZER FACTORIES, PAPER PLANTS, AND THE LIKE.
5. FAILURE OF ANY PART OF THE SSSMR SYSTEM DUE TO ACTIONS BY THE OWNER TO INHIBIT
FREE DRAINAGE OF WATER FROM THE ROOF AND GUTTERS AND DOWNSPOUTS OR ALLOW PONDING
WATER TO COLLECT ON THE ROOF SURFACE. CONTRACTOR'S DESIGN SHALL INSURE FREE
DRAINAGE FROM THE ROOF AND NOT ALLOW PONDING WATER.
6. THIS WARRANTY APPLIES TO THE SSSMR SYSTEM. IT DOES NOT INCLUDE ANY
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGE TO THE BUILDING INTERIOR OR CONTENTS THAT IS COVERED BY THE
WARRANTY OF CONSTRUCTION CLAUSE INCLUDED IN THIS CONTRACT.
7. THIS WARRANTY CANNOT BE TRANSFERRED TO ANOTHER OWNER WITHOUT WRITTEN CONSENT

OF THE CONTRACTOR; AND THIS WARRANTY AND THE CONTRACT PROVISIONS WILL TAKE
PRECEDENCE OVER ANY CONFLICTS WITH STATE STATUTES.
**

Al Dhafra, UAE
Warranty page 3
**REPORTS OF LEAKS AND SSSMR SYSTEM DEFICIENCIES SHALL BE RESPONDED TO WITHIN 48

HOURS OF RECEIPT OF NOTICE, BY TELEPHONE OR IN WRITING, FROM EITHER THE OWNER OR
CONTRACTING OFFICER. EMERGENCY REPAIRS TO PREVENT FURTHER ROOF LEAKS SHALL BE
INITIATED IMMEDIATELY; A WRITTEN PLAN SHALL BE SUBMITTED FOR APPROVAL TO REPAIR
OR REPLACE THIS SSSMR SYSTEM WITHIN SEVEN (7) CALENDAR DAYS. ACTUAL WORK FOR
T
PERMANENT REPAIRS OR REPLACEMENT SHALL BE STARTED WITHIN 30 DAYS AFTER RECEIPT
OF NOTICE, AND COMPLETED WITHIN A REASONABLE TIME FRAME. IF THE CONTRACTOR FAILS
TO ADEQUATELY RESPOND TO THE WARRANTY PROVISIONS, AS STATED IN THE CONTRACT AND
AF
AS CONTAINED HEREIN, THE CONTRACTING OFFICER MAY HAVE THE SSSMR SYSTEM REPAIRED
OR REPLACED BY OTHERS AND CHARGE THE COST TO THE CONTRACTOR.
IN THE EVENT THE CONTRACTOR DISPUTES THE EXISTENCE OF A WARRANTABLE DEFECT, THE
CONTRACTOR MAY CHALLENGE THE OWNER'S DEMAND FOR REPAIRS OR REPLACEMENT DIRECTED
BY THE OWNER OR CONTRACTING OFFICER EITHER BY REQUESTING A CONTRACTING OFFICER'S
DECISION UNDER THE CONTRACT DISPUTES ACT, OR BY REQUESTING THAT AN ARBITRATOR
RESOLVE THE ISSUE. THE REQUEST FOR AN ARBITRATOR MUST BE MADE WITHIN 48 HOURS
R
OF BEING NOTIFIED OF THE DISPUTED DEFECTS. UPON BEING INVOKED, THE PARTIES SHALL,
WITHIN TEN (10) DAYS, JOINTLY REQUEST A LIST OF FIVE (5) ARBITRATORS FROM THE
FEDERAL MEDIATION AND CONCILIATION SERVICE. THE PARTIES SHALL CONFER WITHIN TEN
(10) DAYS AFTER RECEIPT OF THE LIST TO SEEK AGREEMENT ON AN ARBITRATOR. IF THE
D
PARTIES CANNOT AGREE ON AN ARBITRATOR, THE CONTRACTING OFFICER AND THE PRESIDENT
OF THE CONTRACTOR'S COMPANY WILL STRIKE ONE (1) NAME FROM THE LIST ALTERNATIVELY
UNTIL ONE (1) NAME REMAINS. THE REMAINING PERSON SHALL BE THE DULY SELECTED
ARBITRATOR. THE COSTS OF THE ARBITRATION, INCLUDING THE ARBITRATOR'S FEE AND
EXPENSES, COURT REPORTER, COURTROOM OR SITE SELECTED, ETC., SHALL BE BORNE EQUALLY
BETWEEN THE PARTIES. EITHER PARTY DESIRING A COPY OF THE TRANSCRIPT SHALL PAY
FOR THE TRANSCRIPT. A HEARING WILL BE HELD AS SOON AS THE PARTIES CAN MUTUALLY
AGREE. A WRITTEN ARBITRATOR'S DECISION WILL BE REQUESTED NOT LATER THAN 30 DAYS
FOLLOWING THE HEARING. THE DECISION OF THE ARBITRATOR WILL NOT BE BINDING;
HOWEVER, IT WILL BE ADMISSIBLE IN ANY SUBSEQUENT APPEAL UNDER THE CONTRACT DISPUTES
ACT.
A FRAMED COPY OF THIS WARRANTY SHALL BE POSTED IN THE MECHANICAL ROOM OR OTHER
APPROVED LOCATION DURING THE ENTIRE WARRANTY PERIOD.

Al Dhafra, UAE
Warranty page 4
T
AF
R
D

Al Dhafra, UAE
SECTION C10
INTERIOR CONSTRUCTION
05/14
C10 GENERAL
C10 1.1 DESIGN GUIDANCE

T
AF
Guide Website , are listed below for basic designation identification.
C10 1.1.1 Industry Standards and Codes

R
Sealant, Waterproofing & Restoration Institute
C10 1.1.2 Government Standards

D

3-120-10, Interior Design)

Buildings
C10 1.2 PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION AND ACCEPTANCE TESTING
PART 4 - SECTION C10 - Page 1

Al Dhafra, UAE
Verification of satisfactory interior construction assemblies' performance

shall be via Performance Verification Testing, as detailed in this section
of the RFP. Provide special tests and special inspections in accordance
with UFGS Section 01 45 00.00 10, Quality Control. The Contractor shall
pay the cost of all testing.
C10 1.2.1 Slump and Compressive Strength Tests for Grout
Slump between 8 and 11 inches (200 and 275 mm). Provide minimum grout
strength of 2000 PSI in 28 days, as tested per ASTM C 1019.
C10 1.2.2 Door Closure Field Test for Demountable Partitions, Retractable
Partitions, Operable Panels, and Accordion Partitions
Perform a flashlight test of all joints in partitions and partition

to wall, floor, and ceiling. No light from a flashlight shall be
visible from the opposite side of the partition. Adjust partition
at locations where light is visible, and re-test.
C10 1.2.3 Field Test for Sprayed Fire-Resistive Materials
T
A qualified testing and inspection agency shall be engaged to prepare
testing and adhesion reports to test for bond strength. Bond strength
AF
shall be tested per ASTM E 736 and be found to meet the requirements
in UL's Fire Resistance Directory for coating materials.
C10 1.3 DESIGN SUBMITTALS

Procedures, MED Design Instruction Manual, UFC 3-101-01, Architecture, and
R
C10 1.4 CONSTRUCTION SUBMITTALS

D

minimum:
Doors, door hardware, windows and glazing, cabinets and countertops,

casework, and fireproofing/firestopping.
C10 1.5 SUSTAINABILITY
Provide products and systems in accordance with UFGS 01 33 29.05 20

Sustainability Reporting for Design Build.
C1010 PARTITIONS
For general use, metal studs and standard grade GWB, CMU with prime filler coat,
or CMU/cast-in-place concrete with GWB or skim coat plaster are acceptable unless

Al Dhafra, UAE
shown otherwise in the Project Program. Reinforce points where doorknobs can
strike a wall and anchorage points for wall mounted equipment.
Provide control joints and installation techniques as recommended by the

manufacturer. See PTS Section C30, Interior Finishes, for additional
information.
Provide painted GWB with access panels at surfaces furred for HVAC, plumbing and
other utility services and controls behind wall surfaces.
Acceptable systems where "IMPACT RESISTANCE" (areas subject to physical abuse or

wear) is designated in the project program requirements for impact resistance
systems include:
a. CMU/cast-in-place concrete with or without plaster or furred impact

resistant GWB or surface applied impact resistant textured acrylic
architectural coating system.
b. GWB/metal stud system reinforced for impact resistance with a double layer
of gypsum board using at least one layer of impact resistant gypsum board
to resist denting and puncturing on the impact surface. If wall is subjected
T
to impact on both sides, both sides of the stud require a double layer of
gypsum board. Structural, mechanical, and acoustical design requirements
effect the metal stud/gypsum support configuration.
AF
C101001 FIXED PARTITIONS
Provide fixed partitions, except where demountable or retractable partitions are

specifically required by the "Room Requirements", to include wood or metal studs,
GWB, plaster, masonry and cast-in-place concrete walls. Sound-rated partition
assemblies shall have a minimum Sound Transmission Coefficient (STC) as required
R
by the project program. Construct sound-rated bulkheads above partition
assemblies for continuity to the deck above.
C101001 1.1 CAST-IN-PLACE INTERIOR CONCRETE WALLS

D
Accomplish work in accordance with UFC 1-200-01, ACI 117 and 301/301M.
Concrete Mix Design shall be suitable for the job conditions.
C101001 1.2 MASONRY PARTITIONS
Accomplish work in accordance with ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 and associated
ASTM Standards for concrete masonry wall construction.
C101001 1.2.1 Testing
Masonry strength shall be determined in accordance with ACI 530.1.

Where fire-rated assemblies are indicated, provide concrete masonry
units that have been tested in conformance with ASTM E 119. Provide
certificate of compliance to the Designer of Record (DOR) that the
materials and assemblies meet the fire ratings indicated on the
drawings.
C101001 1.2.2 Masonry Units Types

Al Dhafra, UAE
C101001 1.2.2.1 Concrete Masonry Units
Units of modular dimensions and air, water or steam cured.

Surfaces of units to be plastered or stuccoed shall be
sufficiently rough to provide bond and exposed surfaces of units
shall be smooth and of uniform texture.
a. Hollow Load-Bearing Units: ASTM C 90, Type I or II, made

of lightweight or normal weight aggregate.
b. Hollow Non-Load-Bearing Units: ASTM C 129, Type I or II,
made with lightweight or normal weight aggregate.
c. Special Shapes: Provide special shapes as necessary to
complete the work.
d. Fire-Rated CMU: Products shall be tested and approved
by United Laboratories (UL) according to testing methods
described in ASTM E 119, and listed as 2, 3 or 4-hour
fire-rated.
T
C101001 1.2.2.2 Glazed Structural Clay Tile
Provide glazed tile of Grade S, Type I, conforming to ASTM C

AF
126. Tile for fire-rated walls shall have the percent of solid
required for that rating.
C101001 1.2.2.3 Pre-Faced Concrete Masonry Units
Provide pre-faced concrete masonry units conforming to ASTM C

744, load-bearing or non-load-bearing, lightweight, Grade N,
Type I.
R
C101001 1.2.2.4 Glass Masonry Units
Provide glass block units made of clear colorless glass with

D
polyvinyl butyl edge coating. Provide all aggregates,

horizontal and vertical joint reinforcing, panel anchors, and
expansion strip as recommended by the glass block manufacturer.
C101001 1.2.3 Masonry Partition Materials
a. Mortar - Provide ASTM C 270, Type N or S for non-shear-wall

interior masonry. For Glass Block use Type S, White Portland
cement.
b. Portland Cement - ASTM C 150, Type I, II, or III.
c. Masonry Cement - ASTM C 91, Type N, S, or M.
d. Sand - ASTM C144.
e. Grout - ASTM C 476, Fine aggregate for grouting cells / spaces
3" (75 mm) or less, or coarse aggregate for grouting cells /
spaces greater than 3" (75 mm). Slump between 8 and 11 inches
(200 and 275 mm). Provide minimum grout strength of 2000 PSI
in 28 days, as tested per ASTM C 1019.

Al Dhafra, UAE
C101001 1.2.4 Masonry Accessories
a. Horizontal Joint Reinforcement - Fabricate from cold drawn

steel wire, ASTM A 82. Wire shall be hot-dipped galvanized
after fabrication in accordance with ASTM A 153/ A 153M, Class
B-2, 1.5 ounces of zinc per square foot (42.52 g / 0.0929 sq.
meter ).
b. Anchors and Wall Ties - Provide of stainless steel, ASTM A 167,
Type 304, or zinc-coated steel.
c. Reinforcing Bars - ASTM A 615 / A 615M.
C101001 1.3 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
Cold-Formed Metal Framing shall be designed and constructed in accordance

with the provisions of UFC 1-200-01 and the International Building Code.
C101001 1.3.1 Studs
Galvanized steel, ASTM A 653 / A 653M, SS Grade 50, G60
T
C101001 1.3.2 Framing Accessories
AF
Fabricate steel-framing accessories of the same material and finish
used for framing members, with minimum yield strength of 33,000 psi
(230 Mpa). Accessories include, but are not limited to, the following:
bracing, bridging, blocking, web stiffeners, end and foundation
clips, gusset plates, stud kickers, knee braces, girts, joist hangers,
reinforcing and backer plates.
Provide permanent metal-to-metal contact separation from stud to

R
electrical conduits, plumbing pipes, and other internal wall system
components, such as electrical wires.
C101001 1.4 METAL SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES

D
Provide steel materials for metal support systems with galvanized coating
per ASTM A 653/ A 653M, G60; aluminum coating ASTM A 463/ A 463M, T1-25;
or a 55% aluminum-zinc coating ASTM A 792.
C101001 1.4.1 Suspended and Furred Ceiling Systems, and Wall Furring
ASTM C 841(for lath); ASTM C 645 (for GWB).
C101001 1.4.2 Non-load-Bearing Wall Framing / Furring
ML/SFA MLF (for lath); ASTM C 645, but not thinner than 0.0179 inch
(0.4547 mm) thickness. Provide 0.0329 inch (0.8357 mm) minimum
thickness for supporting wall hung items such as cabinetwork,
equipment and fixtures and for GWB.
C101001 1.5 ROUGH CARPENTRY
Unless otherwise noted, all rough carpentry shall be concealed from view.

Al Dhafra, UAE
All framing and board lumber shall be graded and marked by a recognized
association or independent inspection agency. Certification of grade is
acceptable in lieu of grade markings. Framing lumber such as studs, plates,
caps, bucks and nailers shall be of the minimum grade for the application
in accordance with the grading rules for the local species of framing and
board lumber.
C101001 1.5.1 Moisture Content
Air-dry or kiln dry lumber as follows:
a. Framing lumber and boards - 19% maximum

b. Timbers 5" and thicker - 25% maximum
C101001 1.5.2 Fire-retardant Treatment
Comply with AWPA C20 or AWPA C27.
C101001 1.5.3 Preservative Treated Lumber
T
Preservative treated lumber shall be in accordance with AWPA
Standards.
AF
C101001 1.5.4 Structural Lumber
Provide of species and grade as listed in AF&PA 101 that have the
following minimum allowable unit stresses: 1050 Fb, 700 Fc with
1,200,000 E (for engineered uses) but not less than required by
structural calculations.
C101001 1.5.5 Plywood, Structural

R
PS-1, PS-2.
a. Plywood (Concealed) - C-D grade, exposure 1 durability

D
classification, span rating of 24/16 or greater.

b. Plywood Shear Walls - Structural I, C-C or C-D grade, and a
minimum thickness of 1/2 inch (12.5 mm), but not less than
required by structural calculations.
C101002 DEMOUNTABLE PARTITIONS
This paragraph covers unitized/component based demountable walls/partitions and

associated work, including tracks and anchoring systems. Requirements and
configurations shall be in accordance with the project requirements. Majority
of the components and hardware shall be provided by a single manufacturer and on
the manufacturer's current GSA pricelist.
C101002 1.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
C101002 1.1.1 Product Construction
Panels and framework shall be unitized/component based(not stick

Al Dhafra, UAE
built), and non-progressive. All panel components including frames,

glass frames, door frames, base trim, ceiling trim, and tracks shall
be cold-formed steel or extruded aluminum and powder coated. Panels
shall be a minimum of 2-1/4" thick, and shall have panels available
between 6"-48" with 1/16" minimum with nominal widths and filler
panels available. Panels shall have no more than a " reveal between
adjacent panels or the use of connectors in the same finish of the
skin. Panels shall have integrated leveling devices and have a
minimum of " adjustability at the ceiling and 1" of adjustability
at the floor. Walls shall be capable of hanging any manufacturer's
systems furniture. Walls must meet seismic requirements when
applicable.
C101002 1.1.2 Surface Skin
Wall surfaces to be available including fabric, wood veneer, plastic

laminate, painted MDF, glass, plexi-glass, resin, dry erase board,
metal, and custom paint, with the option of being be segmented or
monolithic. Surfaces all be interchangeable with the ability to apply
a new skin/finish.
T
C101002 1.1.3 Door Assemblies
AF
Doors shall be a minimum of 1-3/4" thick and available as a hinged
or pivot door with the option of being a single or double doors, and
with or without glass. All hardware to be included. Door and Frame
assemblies shall be aligned and fitted, and securely anchored to
partitions.
C101002 1.1.4 Glazing

R
Comply with the Federal Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing
Materials and shall be factory installed. Options shall include
clear, frosted, patterned, custom etched, back painted, and available
for use on panels and doors.
D
C101002 1.1.5 Burning Characteristics and Fire Endurance
The system shall have a Class 'A' (under 25) flame spread rating in
conformance with ASTM E 84.
Provide fabric and lining with a flame spread rating of 25 or less,

fuel contribution rating of 15 or less, and a smoke generation of 50
or less when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84.
C101002 1.1.6 Acoustical Performance
Sound-rated partition assemblies shall have a minimum Sound

Transmission Coefficient (STC) as required by the RFP Part 3, Project
Program. STC ratings must be laboratory test and documentation must
be provided.
C101002 1.1.7 Structural Performance

Al Dhafra, UAE
Panel deflection shall not exceed 1/120th of the vertical span when
tested in accordance with ASTM E 72.
C101002 1.1.8 Electrical Requirements
Modular power options shall be available within solid wall cavities,

base areas and frames and shall have open accessibility before, during
and after installation. Power shall be accessible to power and data
cabling, disconnection, and reconnection to accommodate wall
disassembly and relocation. Power Supply to consist of an 8-wire
system with 3,3,2 circuits and 2+1 grounding or a 10-wire system with
4-4-2 circuits and 2+2 grounding with isolated grounding available.
UL Listed manufactured wiring system rated for 20amp 120V/208V or
120V/240V. The components shall have a permanent label listing
manufacturer, catalog number, CSA/UL listing. Component's wiring
shall not be "de populated" to impede future configurations.
Electrical system must be capable of working with other manufacturer's
products. Light switch and outlet devices shall be provided by the
mfr and be fully pre-wired and pre-installed at the factory. Cables
shall have a J-Box option for hardwiring any manufacturer's furniture
T
power feed cable. Receptacles to indicate which circuit within the
modular wiring zone to which they are connected. Receptacles
may/may-not be pre-dedicated but must be able to easily be switched
AF
to suit the user circuit requirements. Additional power and/or data
modules & hardwired outlets (fire, safety, thermostats etc) shall have
the option of being installed on any panel.
C101002 1.1.9 Installation
To include all materials, labor, equipment, and additional seismic

bracing as necessary, needed for a turn-key installation. Existing
R
Walls, ceilings, ceiling suspension systems, or floors shall not be
altered or damaged to accommodate function of partitions.
Manufacturer or manufacturer's representative must take field
measurements prior to fabrication.
D
C101002 1.1.10 Field Test
Perform field tests as required in Paragraph C30 1.2 PERFORMANCE

VERIFICATION AND FIELD TESTING.
C101002 1.2 WIRE MESH PARTITIONS
Wire mesh partitions shall be complete with all items necessary for a
useable, and rigid installation. Provide pre-manufactured assemblies with
pre-bolted connections. Wire mesh partition doors require a means of
locking. Key and cylinder locks are required for partition doors used
daily.
C101002 1.2.1 Materials
a. Steel shapes, plates and bars - ASTM A 36/ A 36M.

b. Cold-formed steel - AISI SG-673.
c. Wire mesh - Provide carbon steel wire with woven diamond mesh

Al Dhafra, UAE
and intermediate crimping. Wire shall be 10 gauge mesh for

seasonal storage, 6 gage mesh for protection of equipment and
tools.
C101003 RETRACTABLE PARTITIONS
This paragraph covers all retractable partitions and associated work, including
tracks and anchoring systems. Wall assemblies above retractable partitions shall
provide a sound barrier equal to, or greater than, the sound rating of the
partition.
C101003 1.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
The retractable partitions below shall meet the following performance

requirements.
C101003 1.1.1 Burning Characteristics
The system shall have a Class 'A' (under 25) flame spread rating in
T
conformance with ASTM E 84.
C101003 1.1.2 Fire Endurance

AF
Provide fabric and lining with a flame spread rating of 25 or less,
fuel contribution rating of 15 or less, and a smoke generation of 50
or less when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84.
C101003 1.1.3 Acoustical Performance
Sound-rated partition assemblies shall have a minimum Sound

R
Transmission Coefficient (STC) as required by the project program.
Construct sound-rated bulkheads above partition assemblies for
continuity to the deck above.
D
C101003 1.1.4 Electrical Requirements
Electrically powered partitions shall be controlled by electrical

switches located in the room where the partitions are stored.
Electrical outlets shall be tied to the building electrical power
system through over-head or end-mount base feeds.
C101003 1.1.5 Door Closure Field Test
Perform field tests as required in Paragraph C30 1.2 PERFORMANCE

VERIFICATION AND FIELD TESTING.
C101003 1.2 PARTITION MATERIALS
a. Aluminum Extrusions - ASTM B221, Alloy 3003

b. Steel Sheets - ASTM A 653 / A653M
c. Fabric Coating - CFFA-W-101-B, Type II

Al Dhafra, UAE
C101003 1.2.1 OPERABLE PANEL PARTITIONS
Operable panel partitions shall be factory finished, supported from

an overhead track without floor guides, and complete with hardware,
track, and accessories necessary for operation.
a. Suspension System - shall consist of steel or heavy duty

extruded aluminum track connected to the structural system by
threaded rods, and trolleys designed to support the weight of
the partition. Provide steel track of 16 gage minimum,
phosphate treated and finished, or zinc or cadmium coated, or
provide extruded aluminum track with minimum thickness of 1/8
inch (3.2 mm). Tracks shall have an integral ceiling guard.
Trolleys shall have at least two ball bearing nylon or steel
tired wheels spaced according to manufacturer's design criteria
and four at an end post.
C101003 1.2.2 ACCORDION PARTITIONS
T
Provide full accordion type partitions, factory finished, supported
from overhead track without floor guides, and complete with hardware,
track, and accessories necessary for operation.
AF
Suspension System - shall consist of steel or aluminum track and
trolleys designed to support the weight of the partition. Provide
steel track of 16 gage minimum, phosphate treated and finished, or
zinc or cadmium coated, or provide extruded aluminum track with
minimum thickness of 1/8 inch (3.2 mm). Tracks shall have an integral
ceiling guard. Trolleys shall have at least two ball bearing nylon
or steel tired wheels spaced according to manufacturer's design
R
criteria and four at an end post.
C101003 1.2.3 CUBICLE TRACK AND HARDWARE

D
Provide heavy-duty ceiling surface mounted tracks except in ceiling

heights over nine feet, hanger mounted tracks may be used, with
stainless steel fasteners. Track bends shall be a minimum of 18
inches radius.
C101003 1.2.3.1 Materials
a. Extruded Aluminum Track - ASTM B 221 and ASTM B 456; alloy

6063-TS, channel shape minimum 1-1/4 inch (32 mm) wide
by 1-1/8 inch (29 mm) deep, 0.050 inch (1.27 mm) minimum
wall thickness.
b. Carrier Unit - Provide silent type with double canted
wheel carrier. Wheels shall have nylon on stainless
steel hooks with swivel to support curtain. Provide 2.2
carriers for every foot of track length plus one
additional carrier.
C101004 INTERIOR GUARDRAILS & SCREENS

Al Dhafra, UAE
This paragraph covers assemblies to include interior guardrails associated with

open sides of floors, but not stairs' handrails. Also included are screens and
associated work to include tracks and anchoring systems.
C101004 1.1 MATERIALS
a. Structural Carbon Steel - ASTM A 36/ A 36M

b. Structural Tubing - ASTM A 500
c. Steel Pipe - ASTM A 53, Type E or S, Grade B
d. Aluminum Alloy products - Products shall conform to ASTM B 209 for
sheet plate, and ASTM B 221 for extrusions, and ASTM B 26/B 26M or
ASTM B 108 for castings, as applicable.
C101004 1.2 FABRICATION FINISHES
C101004 1.2.1 Galvanizing
Hot-dip galvanize steel items to be exposed to water contact.
T
Zinc-coat steel in the largest unit possible. Galvanize per ASTM A
123/ A 123M, ASTM A 153/ A 153M or ASTM A 653/ A 653M, G90, as
applicable.
AF
C101004 1.2.2 Non-Ferrous Metal Surfaces
Protect by plating, Class I anodic coatings, or 70% polyvinylidene

fluoride organic coatings. See Section C30 for additional
coatings/finish information.
C101004 1.3 GUARDRAILS

R
Design guardrails in accordance with the IBC, except delete the handrail
design load reduction for code exceptions for residential, prisons,
industrial, high hazard, and storage facilities. Provide materials in
D
accordance with NAAMM PR, and provide the same size rail and post. Provide
pipe collars of the same material and finish as the handrail and posts.
C101005 INTERIOR WINDOWS
For fixed interior windows, assemblies include frames, glazing, caulking, and
other associated work. For other window types, see PTS Section B20, Exterior
Enclosure. Glazing for windows specified under this section is located in
C101007, "Interior Glazing."
C101005 1.1 ALUMINUM WINDOWS
Each window unit shall be a complete factory assembled unit with or without
glass installed. Fabrication of window units shall comply with AAMA 101.
a. Fixed Windows - Type F, LC25 for residential, or HC40 for

non-residential (commercial).
b. Sliding Glass Pass Windows - Frames and glass channels shall be of
heavy type 6063-TS aluminum extrusions. Provide 1/4-inch (6.35 mm)

Al Dhafra, UAE
clear tempered glass.

c. Bullet-Resistant Pass Windows - Conform to UL classification (1
through 8) as required by the installation. Provide fixed,
bullet-resistant glazing with pass tray for installations requiring
high levels of security.
C101005 1.2 VISION PANELS
a. Wood Windows
Wood windows shall consist of complete units, including sash, glass,

frame and hardware. Window units shall meet the Grade 40 requirements
of AAMA 101. Wood members that will receive a transparent finish
shall be in one piece, not finger-jointed.
b. Plastic Windows
Provide PVC windows, reinforcing members, welded corners, fasteners,

hardware and anchors conforming to AAMA 101 or ASTM D 4099.
T
1) Windows shall be fixed or operable, as stated in the project
program.
AF
2) Material and Color - Window (PVC) color shall be a consistent color
all the way through the material.
c. Hollow Metal Vision Panels - shall meet the requirements of hollow
metal frames, paragraph C102001.
C101005 1.3 BULLET RESISTANT WINDOWS
Windows shall meet U.L. Classification, Rating Level 1 through 8, as required

R
for the installation and stated in the project program. Each window shall
be a complete factory-assembled unit with glass factory or field installed.
C101005 1.3.1 Glazing

D
Provide as specified under this section, paragraph entitled "Interior

Glazing."
C101005 1.3.2 Setting Materials
Provide types required for the glazing applicable setting method

specified in the GANA Glazing Manual. If sealants are employed, use
elastomeric sealants, ASTM C 920, Type S or M, Grade NS, Class 12.5,
Use NT.
C101005 1.4 FINISHES
Finish exposed aluminum or steel window surfaces as follows:
a. Anodic Coating
Architectural Class I (0.7 mil or thicker), designation

AA-M10-C22-A41, clear (natural) or A42, integral color or A44,

Al Dhafra, UAE
electrolytically deposited color anodized.

b. Organic Coating
Provide a high-performance coating in accordance with AAMA 2605 with

a total dry film thickness not less than 1.2 mils (0.03 mm).
C101006 GLAZED PARTITIONS & STOREFRONTS
This paragraph covers fixed interior glazed partitions, including interior

storefronts with doors. Assemblies include frames, glazing, caulking, and other
associated work. See Section B20, Exterior Enclosure, for aluminum storefront
framing components and performance requirements.
C101006 1.1 GLASS
Refer to "Interior Glazing".
C101006 1.2 SETTING AND SEALING MATERIALS
T
Provide as specified in the GANA Glazing Manual, SIGMA TM-3000 and SIGMA
TB-3001, and per manufacturers recommendations.
C101007 INTERIOR GLAZING

AF
ASTM C 1036, unless specified otherwise. Provide patterned glass where required
to obscure view into bathrooms and dressing rooms.
Provide setting and sealing materials, stops and gaskets as recommended by the
glass or acrylic sheet manufacturer.
R
Glazing thickness indicated in the following paragraphs is the minimum acceptable
thickness. Provide thicker glazing if required by the code or the manufacturer
for the given application.
D
C101007 1.1 GLASS
C101007 1.1.1 Clear Glass
Type I, class I (clear), quality q4 or q5 for patterned glass.
C101007 1.1.2 Wire Glass
Provide glazing of Type II, Class I, Form I, Quality q8 mesh stainless

steel, diamond pattern, 1/4 inch (6.35 mm) thick. Glass shall comply
with ASTM E 163.
C101007 1.1.3 Patterned Glass
Type II, Class 1 (translucent), Form 3 (patterned), quality q7

(decorative), Finish f2 (patterned two sides), 1/8 inch (3.2 mm).
C101007 1.1.4 Laminated Glass

Al Dhafra, UAE
Fabricate from two pieces of Type I, Class 1, quality q3 glass

laminated together with a clear, 0.030 inch (0.75 mm) thick polyvinyl
butyral interlayer. Total thickness shall be nominally 1/4 inch
(6.35 mm).
C101007 1.1.5 Bullet-Resistant Glass
Provide bullet resistant composite glazing panel listed by UL ABPMED

with a power rating corresponding to the installation prescribed, and
in accordance with UL 752.
C101007 1.1.6 Tempered Glass
ASTM C 1048, Kind FT (fully tempered), Condition A (uncoated), Type

I, Class 1 (clear), quality q3.
C101007 1.2 PLASTIC GLAZING
C101007 1.2.1 Bullet-Resistant Plastic Sheet
T
Bullet resistant rating in accordance with UL 752, Class I, clear in
color. Only use bullet-resistant plastic sheet on existing interior
windows that cannot be removed and replaced.
AF
C101007 1.2.2 Polycarbonate Sheet
ANSI Z97.1, Mar-resistant, Clear and smooth both sides when used for
vision glazing; Translucent, textured both sides when used for obscure
glazing. Mar-resistant sheet shall have a change in haze of between
5 and 8 percent under silica carbide test, 1600 grams, ASTM D 673.
R
Provide warranty for polycarbonate sheet glazing for a period of
5-years that includes the following:
a. Warranty Type I, Class A (UV Stabilized) sheets against

D
breakage;
b. Warranty Type III (coated and mar-resistant) sheets against
breakage and coating delamination.
c. Warranty Type IV (coated sheet) against breakage and yellowing
C101008 INTERIOR JOINT SEALANT
Sealant joint design and application shall be in accordance with the general
requirements of Sealants: A Professionals Guide from the Sealant, Waterproofing
& Restoration Institute. Refer to manufacturers' recommendations for chemical
resistance.
C101008 1.1 JOINT SEALANT TYPES FOR INTERIOR WORK
Sealants shall be paintable, and shall match the color of adjacent surfaces.
a. Vertical Surfaces - ASTM C 920, Type M, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT.
b. Horizontal Surfaces - ASTM C 920, ASTM D 1190 for traffic surfaces,

Al Dhafra, UAE
Type M, Class 25, Use T.

c. Pools and pool decks - for vertical joints, Gun grade: ASTM C 920,
Type M, Grade NS, Class 25, NT; for horizontal deck traffic joints
pourable: ASTM C 920, Type M, Grade P, Class 25, T
d. Food Service - Use a Vinyl Acetate Homopolymer, or other low VOC,
non-toxic sealant approved for use in food preparation areas.
e. Chemical Resistance - Ensure that all sealants are chemically
compatible or resistant to adjacent materials, or materials that may
come into contact with the sealants in the course of the building life.
C1020 INTERIOR DOORS
Door hardware shall be as specified in "Interior Door Hardware" in this section.
C102001 STANDARD INTERIOR DOORS
This paragraph covers all standard interior wood or hollow metal doors with frames,
hardware, locks, and finish.
T
C102001 1.1 STEEL DOORS
Hardware preparation shall be in accordance with SDI 17, ANSI/DHI A115 and
AF
ANSI/SDI 100. Doors shall be hung in accordance with ANSI/SDI 100.
C102001 1.1.1 Standard Steel Doors
ANSI A 250.8, Level 1, (occasional use, low abuse types such as closet
doors without locks); Level 2, (low use, moderate abuse types such
as office/storeroom doors); Level 3, (moderate use, high abuse types
such as BEQ sleeping room doors); Level 4, (high use, high abuse types
R
such as corridors, stairways, assembly spaces, and main entry doors),
with a physical performance level of 'A'. Maximum door undercut shall
not exceed 3/4 inch (19 mm).
D
C102001 1.1.2 Sound Insulated Doors and Frames
Provide sound insulated door and frame assemblies into rooms requiring
wall assemblies to be sound insulated with a Sound Transmission Class
(STC) rating as required.
C102001 1.1.3 Accessories
a. Shelves for Dutch doors shall comply with SDI 111-B, and be of
steel not lighter than 16 gage.
b. Louver shall comply with SDI 111-C, shall be stationary,
sight-proof type. Use lightproof louvers if function of room
requires darkness. Louver frames shall be 20-gage steel with
louver blades minimum 24 gage.
C102001 1.2 STANDARD STEEL FRAMES
ANSI A 250.8. Form frames with welded corners for installation in masonry

Al Dhafra, UAE
partitions and knock-down field assembled corners for installation in metal

stud and GWB partitions. Frames shall be set in accordance with SDI 105.
Form stops and beads with 20 gauge steel.
Provide a minimum of three jamb anchors and base steel anchors per frame,
zinc-coated or painted with rust-inhibitive paint, not lighter the 18 gauge.
Secure frames to previously installed concrete or masonry with expansion
bolts in accordance with SDI 11-F. Provide mortar infill of frames in
masonry walls, and gypsum board compound infill at each jamb anchor in metal
frame walls.
a. Factory-Primed Finish. Doors and frames in non-humid, non-corrosive

environments shall be factory primed with a rust inhibitive coating
as specified in ANSI A 250.8. Factory prime doors on six sides of
the door.
b. Zinc-Iron Alloy Coating (Galvanealed) and Factory Primed Finish
c. Fabricate interior doors and frames (for installation in such rooms
as kitchens, laboratories, battery charging, utility rooms and humid
T
areas such as shower/drying areas, areas with frequent floor
mopping, or corrosive chemical atmospheres) from zinc coated steel,
alloyed type, complying with ASTM A 653/ A 653M. Factory prime doors
AF
and frames as specified in ANSI A 250.8.
d. Manufacturers primer shall be compatible with door finish system in
C30, Interior Coatings.
C102001 1.4 WOOD DOORS
C102001 1.4.1 Wood Doors and Frames

R
Install wood doors and frames according to workmanship requirements

of the Architectural Woodwork Institute Quality Standard 900-T-4
Custom Grade. Wood door frames may only be used in residential
D
construction.
For non-residential buildings provide extra-heavy doors for

stairways, building entrances, corridors, assembly spaces, and other
high use interior doors. Provide heavy duty doors for other
non-residential locations and for residential buildings.
Wood doors shall be solid wood doors with wood core and solid wood
edge bands. Vertical edge bands shall be one piece or laminated
two-piece solid lumber to match face veneer species for natural finish
wood doors. Reinforce door at all hardware attachments to door with
sound grade hardwood. Horizontal edge bands shall be solid wood or
structural composite lumber.
a. Stile and Rail Doors Provide premium or select grade Ponderosa

pine, Douglas Fir, White Pine, or Yellow Poplar stile and rail
doors conforming to WDMA I.S.6A-01. Doors shall be premium
grade, heavy duty or as required by the project program.
b. Interior Flush Doors - Flush doors shall conform to WDMA

Al Dhafra, UAE
I.S.6A-01. Doors shall be premium grade, heavy duty, or

otherwise as required by the project program. Provide WDMA
I.S. 1A-04 SCLC-5 structural composite lumber core, or staved
lumber core, or PC-5 particleboard core construction. Do not use
particleboard cores where it is anticipated that hardware may be
screw mounted to the doors. Provide hardwood or softwood
veneers cut for the best presentation for natural finishing of doors.
Set match veneers of all components of a door opening. Face
veneers shall be 1/20" thick before sanding.
c. Closet Doors - Provide flush, paneled, or louvered doors of
premium or custom grade, conforming to WDMA I.S.1A-01, premium
or custom grade, heavy duty. Doors shall be hinged or sliding.
d. Acoustical Doors and Frames - WDMA I.S 1-A-2004 WDMA I.S.6A-01.
Doors shall be premium or custom grade, heavy duty as required
by the project program. Provide acoustical doors in solid core,
constructed for door, hardware, and frame to provide a Sound
Transmission Class (STC) rating of 39 (minimum) when tested in
accordance with ASTM E 90.
T
C102001 1.4.2 Wood Door Accessories
a.
AF
Door Louvers - Louver shall comply with SDI 111-C. Louver
frames shall be 20-gage steel with louver blades minimum 24
gage.
b. Door Light Openings - Provide glazed openings with the
manufacturer's standard wood moldings. Moldings for doors to
receive a natural finish shall be of the same species and color
of the face veneer.
R
C102001 1.4.3 Fabrication
a. Marking - Each door shall bear a stamp, brand or other

D
identifying mark indicating quality and construction of the

door.
b. Adhesives and Bonds - WDMA I.S. 1-A. Use Type I (water-proof)
adhesive for assembly of interior doors and for the fabrication
of stiles, rails, crossbands, and veneers. Adhesive for doors
to receive a natural finish shall be non-staining. Type II
(water resistant) is allowed for fabrication of core parts.
C102001 1.4.4 Finishes
Unless required otherwise by the project program, typically provide

natural finish wood doors. Factory prime and or seal on all six sides
of doors.
a. Factory Finish - Provide doors finished at the factory as

follows: AWI Quality Standards Section 1500, specification
for Conversion varnish, alkyd urea catalyzed polyurethane, or

Al Dhafra, UAE
acrylated UV curable epoxy. The coating shall be AWI Quality

Standards premium, medium rubbed sheen, with an open or closed
grain effect. Poly-wrap prefinished wood doors at factory for
shipping.
b. Field Finish - Prepare doors in accordance with WDMA
I.S.1-A-2004. Factory prime or seal doors. Manufacturer's
primer or sealer shall be compatible with door finish system
in Section C30, Interior Finishes.
c. Plastic Laminate Finish - Factory applied, NEMA LD 3, 0.050 inch
(1.27 mm) minimum thickness.
C102002 GLAZED INTERIOR DOORS
This paragraph covers all glazed interior doors with glass, frames, hardware and
locking devices. See paragraph entitled "Interior Glazing" in this section for
glazing options.
C102002 1.1 ALUMINUM DOORS, FRAMES AND STOREFRONT
T
Provide swing-type aluminum doors and frames complete with framing members,
transoms, side-lites, and accessories. Fabricate of ASTM B 221, Alloy
6063-TS for extrusions.
AF
C102002 1.2 FABRICATION
C102002 1.2.1 Aluminum Frames
Provide frames with removable glass stops and glazing beads to

accommodate fixed glazing. Countersink screws for exposed
fastenings. Jointing of framing members shall obtain hairline fit,
R
be reinforced, and mechanically secured.
C102002 1.2.2 Aluminum Doors

D
Doors shall be not less than 1-3/4 inches (44 mm) thick, with a minimum
wall thickness of 0.125 inch (3.2 mm), except beads and trim, 0.050
inch (1.27 mm). Full glazed stile and rail doors shall have medium
or wide stiles and rails. Maximum water leakage of the door and frame
shall be "no uncontrolled water penetrating systems or appearing on
systems' normally exposed interior surfaces from sources other than
condensation." Water controlled by flashing and gutters that is
drained to exterior and cannot damage adjacent materials or finishes
is not considered water leakage.
C102002 1.2.3 Welding and Fastening
Locate welds and fasteners on unexposed surfaces, where possible.

Exposed welds shall be dressed smoothly. Exposed fasteners shall
have counter-sunk heads. Weld concealed reinforcements for hardware
in place. Hardware reinforcements shall be of stainless steel or
steel with a hot-dipped galvanized finish, and shall be secured with
stainless steel screws.

Al Dhafra, UAE
C102002 1.2.4 Finishes
Provide exposed aluminum surfaces with factory finish of anodic or

organic coating. Anodic coatings shall conform to AA 45, with an
Architectural Class I finish, 0.7 mil or thicker. Organic coatings
shall be a baked enamel finish in accordance with AAMA 2605 with a
total dry film thickness not less than 1.2 mil. Exposed fasteners
to match the door finish.
C102003 FIRE DOORS
This paragraph covers all interior fire doors, including all necessary frames,
hardware, closing devices, and alarms associated with the door.
C102003 1.1 FIRE AND SMOKE DOORS AND FRAMES
Provide in conformance with NFPA 80 an NFPA 105. Fire doors and frames shall
bear the label of UL, FM or WHI attesting to the rating required. Door and
frame assemblies shall be tested for conformance per NFPA 252 or UL 10C (for
positive pressure). Wood fire doors shall also comply with ASTM E 152.
T
Provide stainless steel astragals complying with NFPA 80 for fire-rated
assemblies and NFPA 105 for smoke control assemblies.
AF
C102004 SLIDING AND FOLDING DOORS
Provide paneled or louvered closet doors of premium or custom grade, conforming

to WDMA I.S.6A-01, heavy duty. Doors shall be sliding or bi-folding, as required
by the program.
C102005 INTERIOR OVERHEAD DOORS

R
Refer to RFP PART 4, B20 Exterior Enclosure - "Overhead Roll-Up and Overhead
Sectional Doors" for interior overhead door requirements. Design for ASCE 7 wind
loading not required for interior overhead doors.
D
C102006 INTERIOR GATES
Any special type gate installed in the interior of a facility, including frames,
hardware, hoisting devices, finish, and other associated work.
C102007 INTERIOR DOOR HARDWARE
C102007 1.1 DOOR HARDWARE
Provide the services of an Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC),

Certified Door Consultant (CDC), or an Electrified Hardware Consultant (EHC)
to assist the Designer of Record in preparation of the door hardware schedule
and product selection. The hardware consultant shall sign and seal the door
hardware construction submittal. Provide, as far as feasible, locks,
hinges, pivots, and closers from one lock, hinge, pivot, or closer
manufacturer's make. All door hardware shall be clearly and permanently
marked by the manufacturer, on a location to be visible after installation.
Modify hardware as necessary to provide features indicated or specified.

Al Dhafra, UAE
For necessary hardware items not indicated in these specification sections,

provide ANSI/BHMA grade 1 rated hardware.
C102007 1.1.1 Hardware for Fire Doors
All hardware provided shall meet the requirements of NFPA 80 for Fire
Doors and NFPA 101 for exit doors. Hardware shall bear the label of
Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc., and be listed in UL BMD or labeled
and listed by another testing laboratory acceptable to the contracting
officer. Comply with NFPA 105 for smoke control assemblies.
C102007 1.1.2 Hinges
BHMA A156.1, Grade 1, 4-1/2 x 4-1/2 inches (108 x 108 mm) with
non-removable pin or anti-friction bearing hinges.
C102007 1.1.3 Locks and Latches
For non-residential buildings use Series 1000, Operational Grade 1,

Security Grade 2 for stairways, building entrances, corridors,
T
assembly spaces, and other high use interior doors. Use Series 4000,
Grade 1 for non-residential locations not using Series 1000 hardware.
For residential buildings use Series 4000, Grade 2 for interior doors.
AF
a. Mortise Locks and Latches - BHMA A 156.13, Series 1000,
Operation Grade 1, Security Grade 2.
b. Bored Locks and Latches - BHMA A 156.2, Series 4000, Grade 1,
or Grade 2.
C102007 1.1.4 Combination Locks

R
BHMA A 156.2. Heavy-duty, mechanical combination lockset with 5

pushbuttons, standard-sized knob or lever, 3/4-inch (19 mm)
deadlocking latch, 2-3/4 inch (70 mm) back-set. Provide deadbolt key
D
override option. Safelock, Simplex, and Venn are acceptable

manufacturers. Provide a hardware grade equivalent to Grade 1,
series 4000. Provide a 5-year parts and labor warranty.
A door into a sensitive area shall be fitted with a FF-L-2740A X-09

Heavy-duty, combination Electromechanical Deadbolt lock for
pedestrian doors, with a drill resistant dial ring mounting plate,
2-3/4 inch (70 mm) back-set, with Automatic Lock Reset, High-Security
combination scramble, and resistant to all forms of external
manipulation and environmental attack. KABA-MAS is the acceptable
manufacturer. Three Modes of Operation: 1) The Single Combination Mode
allows access by dialing a six-digit combination. 2) The Dual
Combination Mode allows access only when two separate codes are
entered within 10 seconds of one another. 3) The
Supervisory/Subordinate Mode allows access by a subordinate only
after a supervisor code has been entered. Audit Feature: Lock shall
have a full compliment of auditing features, including non-resettable
openings log, and unsuccessful attempts log (audits after 3
unsuccessful attempts) that resets once the proper access code is

Al Dhafra, UAE
entered. Lock shall generate its own electrical energy with each turn
of the dial, with no batteries or wires required. Lock shall be
designed to fit industry standard door mounting pattern.
C102007 1.1.5 Card Key System
Provide card key type access units for specialized entries as required
by the program. Provide lithium battery powered, magnetic stripe
keycard locksets that are ANSI/BHMA A156.13, Series 1000, Grade 1,
mortise or ANSI/BHMA A156.2, Series 4000, Grade 1, cylindrical locks,
tamper resistant, UL listed with 1 inch (25 mm) throw deadbolt,
3/4-inch (19 mm) throw latch bolt, auxiliary dead-locking latch, and
2-3/4 inch (68.75 mm) backset. The latch bolt and the dead bolt shall
be operated simultaneously by rotating inside lever. Locks with
mechanical override lock cylinders are not acceptable. Locks shall
be operated only by a correctly encoded keycard. Use of a newly issued
keycard automatically re-keys the lock and voids the previous keycard.
The lock shall re-lock immediately after outside lever is turned and
latch retracted. Locks shall have memory that is capable of recording
up to 140 entries into each room, identification of the keycard used
T
to access the room, the date and time of entry. Entry information
of the lock shall be retrievable by a data key that can be inserted
into the lock and then taken to the front desk printer to display
AF
information. Other components that are required for this system at
the front desk are a personal or laptop computer, printer and encoder
to program each key.
For exit device locks with card key access, provide mortise type,
narrow stile exit devices with 24 volt DC, solenoid option for card
key exterior access at aluminum storefront doors. Provide mortise
type exit devices with 24 volt DC, solenoid option with alarm and
R
remote exterior access for card key access at insulated hollow metal
doors. The alarmed exit device shall sound when exiting only.
System shall be capable of accepting a minimum of 12 keycard access

D
levels, security auditing and computer interfacing with the existing

or new management system. Provide a single point of contact customer
service representative accessible by telephone with a 10-digit
telephone number without additional dialing hierarchies except that
a maximum 4-digit extension is permissible. On-site service shall be
provided within 3 hours from request within the first 12 months of
occupancy. Provide a 5-year parts and labor warranty.
C102007 1.1.6 Exit Devices
BHMA A 156.3, Grade 1. Touch bars shall be provided in lieu of

conventional crossbars and arms. Use manufacturer's integral touch
bars in aluminum storefront doors.
C102007 1.1.7 Cylinders and Cores
Provide cylinders and cores for new locks, including locks provided
under other sections of this specification. Cylinders and cores
shall have seven pin tumblers. Cylinders shall be products of one

Al Dhafra, UAE
manufacturer, and cores shall be the products of one manufacturer.

Rim cylinders, mortise cylinders, and knobs of bored locksets shall
have interchangeable cores, which are removable by special control
keys. Stamp each interchangeable core with a key control symbol in
a concealed place on the core.
C102007 1.1.8 Keying System
Provide a master key system for the facility unless more than one
tenant/tenant command shall reside in a facility. Provide a grand
master keying system, or great, grand master keying system if multiple
tenants or multiple buildings are required. Provide an extension of
the existing keying system for existing facility additions. Name the
manufacturer of the existing locks, and indicate if they have
interchangeable cores. Provide construction interchangeable cores
when subcontractors require keys during construction.
The Contractor shall coordinate a keying system meeting. The

Contractor's Project Manager, Superintendent, Hardware
Subcontractor, Electrical Subcontractor (if keying hardware is
T
electric), Designer of Record, Contracting Officer, Public Works Base
Hardware Specialist, and the Using Activity shall attend this meeting
to establish the keying system for the project. This meeting is
AF
intended to identify base limitations, the necessary security, and
access control within the facility. The meeting shall produce a
marked up copy of the floor plan indicating the doors to receive locks
and the doors to be keyed together, and any master keying or grand
master keying
C102007 1.1.9 Keys

R
Furnish one file key, one duplicate key and one working key for each
key exchange and for each master and grand master keying system.
C102007 1.1.10 Key Cabinet and Control System

D
BHMA A 156.5 Provide key cabinet with 25% more key hooks than required
for interior and exterior doors.
C102007 1.1.11 Lock Trim
Cast, forged or heavy wrought construction and commercial plain in

design.
a. Knobs and Roses - Knobs and roses shall meet test requirements
of BHMA A 156.2 and BHMA A 156.13.
b. Lever Handles - Provide lever handles in lieu of knobs, as
required by DoD ABAAS. All lever handles shall have the
freewheeling feature.
C102007 1.1.12 Door Bolts
BHMA A 156.16. Provide automatic latching flush bolts for double doors
with both door leafs active, BHMA A 156.3, Type 25.

Al Dhafra, UAE
C102007 1.1.13 Closers
BHMA A 156.4, Series C02000, Grade 1, with PT 4C, 1-1/2 inch piston,
heavy duty forged arm, with full size cover.
C102007 1.1.14 Overhead Holders
BHMA A 156.8, Grade 1.
C102007 1.1.15 Closer Holder-Release Devices
BHMA A 156.15, Grade 1.
C102007 1.1.16 Door Protection Plates
Provide armor, mop, and kick plates conforming to BHMA A 156.6.

Provide door kick plates on all doors with closers and doors leading
to corridors or circulation spaces. Provide armor plates on all doors
that receive cart traffic. Provide mop plates on all doors in rooms
that have a mop-able floor finish.
T
C102007 1.1.17 Door Stops and Silencers
AF
BHMA A 156.16, Type L03011, three per single door and four per double
door.
C102007 1.1.18 Thresholds
BHMA A 156.21.
C102007 1.1.19 Door Gasketing

R
BHMA A 156.22. Use light-proof gasketing for room functions that

require darkness and integral sound-proof gasketing on acoustically
rated doors.
D
C102007 1.1.20 Finishes
Provide one of the following hardware finish systems, matching the

exterior hardware finish system.
a. BHMA A156.18. Hardware shall have BHMA 630 finish (satin

stainless steel), unless specified otherwise. Provide items
not manufactured in stainless steel in BHMA 626 finish (satin
chromium plated) over brass or bronze, except surface door
closers which shall have aluminum paint finish, and except steel
hinges which shall have BHMA 652 finish (satin chromium plated).
Hinges for exterior doors shall be stainless steel with BHMA
630 finish or chromium plated brass or bronze with BHMA 626
finish. Exit devices may be provided in BHMA 626 finish in lieu
of BHMA 630 finish except where BHMA 630 is specified under
paragraph entitled "Hardware Sets". Exposed parts of
concealed closers shall have finish to match lock and door trim.
Hardware for aluminum doors shall be finished to match the

Al Dhafra, UAE
doors.
b. BHMA A156.18. Hardware shall have BHMA 612 finish (satin
bronze), unless specified otherwise. Surface door closers
shall have bronze paint finish. Steel hinges shall have BHMA
639 finish (satin bronze plated). Exposed parts of concealed
closers shall have finish to match lock and door trim. Hardware
for aluminum doors shall be finished to match the doors.
Hardware showing on interior of bathrooms, shower rooms, toilet
rooms, washrooms, laundry rooms, and kitchens shall have BHMA
629 finish (bright stainless steel) or BHMA 625 finish (bright
chromium plated).
C102090 OTHER INTERIOR SPECIALTY DOORS
C102090 1.1 ACCESS DOORS
Provide manufactured access doors and frames of 16-gage steel minimum with
concealed pivots or a continuous piano hinge and flush stainless steel cam
latch. Finish with manufacturer's standard primer coat finish and paint to
match the wall or ceiling unless a stainless steel finish is required in
T
the Project Program. Provide UL Rated access doors in fire rated assemblies.
Access panels located in furred wall spaces shall have an inserted material
to match adjacent wall surface. Size access doors large enough to allow
AF
convenient hand and tool access and operation of controls and equipment
beyond the door. If maintenance of controls or equipment beyond the door
requires removal, size access door to allow removal and reinstallation of
new equipment through the access door. Provide access panels capable of
receiving finish material inserts in visible wall locations of habitable
spaces.
C102091 OTHER INTERIOR PERSONNEL DOORS

R
Interior personnel doors not described by the assembly categories listed above.
C1030 SPECIALTIES
D
C103001 COMPARTMENTS, CUBICLES AND TOILET PARTITIONS
This paragraph covers assemblies for individual compartments, cubicles, toilet

partitions and urinal screens.
C103001 1.1 TOILET PARTITIONS
FS A-A-60003. Provide toilet compartments at multi-fixture toilet rooms

of Type I, Style B-Ceiling Hung, C-Overhead Braced, or F-Overhead
braced-alcove. Reinforce panels to receive partition-mounted accessories.
Steel and Plastic toilet partitions shall have a recovered materials content
of 20 to 30 percent.
C103001 1.2 URINAL SCREENS
FS A-A-60003. Type III, Style A, floor supported and wall hung or Style
D, wall hung. Wall hung urinal screens shall be secured with continuous
flanges to urinal screen and wall.

Al Dhafra, UAE
C103001 1.3 HARDWARE AND FITTINGS
Chrome-plated or stainless steel door latches and coat hooks. Provide one
coat hook per compartment door. Latches and hinges for handicapped
compartments shall comply with DoD ABAAS.
Finishes shall comply with FS A-A-60003. Use only one type of partition
per building.
a. Metal toilet partitions and urinal screens shall be made of stainless

steel.
b. Solid plastic partitions shall be fabricated of polymer resins
(polyethylene) formed under high pressure forming a single component
section one inch thick. Color shall extend throughout the panel
thickness.
c. Phenolic core panels.
d. Laminated plastic partitions are acceptable in low or limited use
applications (one or two toilet stalls per toilet room).
T
C103002 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES
AF
This paragraph covers toilet and bath accessories including, but not limited to,
soap dispensers, paper holders, towel receptacles, grab bars, and bathroom
mirrors.
C103002 1.1 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES
C103002 1.1.1 Toilet Tissue Dispensers

R
Provide surface or recessed mounted dispensers fabricated of

stainless steel. Provide one horizontally or vertically mounted
double-roll dispenser per toilet compartment, unless otherwise
D
indicated.
C103002 1.1.2 Paper Towel Dispensers
Provide one per pair of sinks in toilet rooms without electric hand
dryers, and one per room with electric hand dryers, unless otherwise
indicated. Provide surface or recessed mounted towel dispenser
constructed of a minimum 0.7mm 0.03 inch Type 304 stainless steel.
C103002 1.1.3 Combination Paper Towel Dispenser / Waste Receptacle
Provide a recessed or semi-recessed type with a capacity of 400 sheets

of C-fold, single-fold, or quarter-fold towel and be constructed of
22-gage stainless steel. Provide one per pair of sinks, unless
otherwise indicated. Provide the towel compartment door with a
tumbler key lock locking mechanism.
C103002 1.1.4 Sanitary Napkin Disposal Units

Al Dhafra, UAE
Units shall be toilet partition or wall mounted of not less than 22

gage stainless steel, with top and bottom hinged access doors.
Provide one in each Woman's toilet stall, unless otherwise indicated.
Each unit shall have leak-proof receptacle for disposable liners.
Provide fifty disposable liners of the type standard with the
manufacturer.
C103002 1.1.5 Medicine Cabinets
Provide units with plate or float glass mirrors on doors. Provide

doors and frames of 16-gage steel with a continuous piano hinge and
flush magnetic latch.
C103002 1.1.6 Towel Bars
Provide stainless steel towel bars with a minimum thickness of 0.015

inch (0.4 mm).
C103002 1.1.7 Grab Bars
T
Provide stainless steel grab bars per DoD ABAAS.
C103002 1.1.8 Robe Hooks

AF
Provide stainless steel two-hook shape with integral wall flange, with
a projection not less than 1-5/8 inches (41 mm).
C103002 1.1.9 Mirrors
Provide one manufactured framed electro-copper plated mirror per

sink, or one full-size mirror for all sinks, unless otherwise
R
indicated.
C103002 1.1.10 Soap Dispensers

D
Provide one soap dispenser per two sinks, with mechanical action
dispensing valve. Do not mount soap dispenser on mirror. Surface
mounted liquid type shall consist of a vertical Type 304 stainless
steel tank with holding capacity of 1.2L (40 fluid ounces) with a
corrosion-resistant all-purpose valve.
C103002 1.1.11 Electric Hand Dryer
Provide wall mount and electric hand dryer designed to operate at

110/125 volts, 60 cycles, single phase alternating current with a
heating element core rating of a maximum 2100 watts. Provide dryer
housing of single piece construction and of chrome plated steel.
Provide one unit per three sinks, unless otherwise indicated.
C103003 MARKER BOARDS AND TACK BOARDS
This paragraph covers all marker boards, tack boards and fastening devices.
C103003 1.1 MATERIALS

Al Dhafra, UAE
a. Porcelain Enamel - Marker board writing surface shall be composed of

porcelain enamel fused to a nominal 28 gage thick steel sheet,
laminated to a 1/4-inch (6.35 mm) thick core material with a steel
or foil backing sheet.
b. Cork shall be a continuous resilient sheet made from soft, clean,
granulated cork, relatively free from hardback and dust and bonded
with a binder suitable for the intended purpose. The cork sheet shall
have a tensile strength of not less than 40 PSI (275.8 kPa) when tested
in accordance with ASTM F 152.
c. Tack-board Covers - Provide woven fabric or vinyl wall covering over
cork tack surface.
d. Aluminum - Aluminum frame extrusions shall be alloy 6063-T5 or
6063-T6, conform to ASTM B 221, and be a minimum of 0.06 inches (1.5
mm) thick.
e. Hardwood - Exposed hardwood for frames, cabinets and cases shall be
oak, walnut or mahogany, with a factory applied stain and lacquer
finish.
f. Glass - Provide tempered glass in accordance with ANSI Z97.1 and in
conformance with ASTM C 1048.
T
C103003 1.2 PRESENTATION BOARD
AF
The presentation board shall be a laminate covered wall-hung cabinet with
lockable doors. Doors are to be attached to the cabinet with continuous
piano hinges, and have a catch or closure to keep doors closed when not in
use. The interior of the cabinet shall contain a porcelain enamel marker
board writing surface with chalk-tray, a flip chart that can be hung on an
interior door panel, and fabric covered tack surface on the interior door
panels.
R
a. Marker Board - Marker board shall be a factory assembled, one-piece

unit, and have a 28 gauge nominal steel porcelain enamel writing
surface and a chalk-tray with end closure. Frame shall be aluminum,
D
powder-coated steel, oak, walnut or mahogany.

b. Tack Board - Tack boards shall consist of a minimum 1/4-inch (6.35
mm) thick natural cork laminated to a minimum 1/4-inch (6.35 mm) thick
hardboard, shall have an oak or aluminum frame, and be vinyl or fabric
covered. Covers shall have a Class 'A' flame spread rating of 0-50,
and a smoke developed rating of 0-450 in accordance with ASTM E 84.
C103004 IDENTIFYING DEVICES
This paragraph covers all signs, plaques, and traffic markers.
C103004 1.1 ASSEMBLIES
The signage system assemblies shall consist of three primary elements; a

structural rail (with coordinating rail joiners to increase sign height in
the field), removable copy inserts, and interlocking end caps or frame, and
trim.

Al Dhafra, UAE
C103004 1.1.1 Inserts
The signage rails shall be designed as to accept ABS plastic signage

inserts.
C103004 1.1.1.1 Insert Fabrication
The insert is the signage member to which message signage copy

in the form of letters, numbers, and symbols shall be applied,
and shall be interchangeable with similar sized rails of any
other sign of equal or greater width and height. The ends of
the rail and insert assembly shall be enclosed by end caps of
prefinished 6064T5 extruded aluminum. Inserts shall be
fabricated from 0.090 minimum ultra-violet resistant thickness
extruded ABS Acrylic sheet core with 20.003 polycarbonate
non-glare clear cap bonded to the core during the extrusion
texturing process.
C103004 1.1.2 End Caps
T
End caps shall be injection-molded ABS plastic with integral color.
The end caps shall be interchangeable to either end of each sign type,
and any other similar sign of equal height. The end caps shall be
AF
interlocking mechanically with the inserts, and rail, requiring no
tools for assembly. End caps shall utilize straight corners (instead
of radius corners). Spring clips shall be steel. Plastic spring
clips are not acceptable.
C103004 1.1.3 Trim
Optional accessory top and bottom trim frames of prefinished (color

R
as indicated 6063T5 extruded aluminum shall be provided to the signage
types indicated.
C103004 1.1.4 Mounting

D
Mounting of the modular signage system shall include surface mounting

with screw-on applications for interior and exterior walls and on
selected doors as indicated, at the locations indicated, and other
mounting devices as indicated.
C103004 1.1.5 Graphics Application
a. Tactile Letters and Symbols
Chemically weld tactile letters and symbols to front surface

of signage inserts where indicated and where required by DoD
ABAAS. Tactile letters and symbols shall be sized as indicated.
b. Braille
Grade II Braille. Provide Grad II Braille inlaid strip as

indicated to match sign color.
C103004 1.2 ALUMINUM ALLOY PRODUCTS

Al Dhafra, UAE
Provide ASTM B 209 for aluminum sheet or plate, ASTM B 221 for aluminum
extrusions and ASTM B 26/B 26M or ASTM B 108 for aluminum castings. Provide
aluminum extrusions at least 1/8-inch (3.2 mm) thick and aluminum plate or
sheet at least 16 gage thick. Provide aluminum castings of solid aluminum
cast certified by AA 46 alloy designation B443.0. Where anodic coatings
are specified, alloy shall conform to Aluminum Associations alloy
designation 514.0 or A514.0.
C103004 1.2.1 Aluminum Finishes
Provide exposed aluminum finishes with either mill finish, factory

finished with anodic coating or organic coating. Anodized finishes
shall conform to AA 45, Architectural Class I or II, with a coating
thickness 0.7 mil or thicker. Organic coatings shall be a baked enamel
finish with a dry film thickness not less than 1.2 mils, conforming
to AAMA 605.2.
C103004 1.3 STEEL PRODUCTS
T
Provide ASTM A 36/A 36M for structural steel, ASTM A 167 for sheet and plates.
C103004 1.4 CAST METAL

AF
a. Cast Aluminum, ASTM B 108
b. Cast Bronze, ASTM B 62
C103004 1.5 GLASS
ASTM C 1036, Type 1, Class 1, Quality q3

R
C103004 1.6 FIBER-REINFORCED POLYESTER (FRP)
ASTM D 3841, Type II, Grade 1

D
C103004 1.7 ACRYLIC SHEET
ASTM D 4802, Type III
C103004 1.8 POLYCARBONATE SHEET
SAE AMS 3611
C103004 1.9 EXTERIOR POST AND PANEL SIGNS
C103004 1.9.1 Posts and Panels
Provide one-piece extruded aluminum posts with not less than 0.125
inch (3.2 mm) wall thickness. Posts shall permit attachment of panel
framing system. Provide cap for each post. Panel framing system shall
consist of aluminum extrusions and interlocking track components
designed to interlock with concealed fasteners. Panels shall be
fabricated of rectangular extruded tubular aluminum with a minimum
wall thickness of 0.125 inches. Panels shall be removable and

Al Dhafra, UAE
interchangeable. Posts shall be embedded in solid concrete

foundation.
C103004 1.9.2 Illumination
Provide concealed lighting within panel framing members. Provide

T-12 slim-line lamps,. Ballast shall be integrally mounted with high
power factor and rated for use in up to minus 20 degrees F (minus 29
degrees C) ambient starting temperature.
C103005 LOCKERS
C103005 1.1 STEEL CLOTHING LOCKERS
C103005 1.1.1 FS AA-L-00486 (Rev J), enameled steel.
Provide ventilated, Single Tier Units (unless multi-tier permitted

by Project Program), fully framed. Provide galvanized or galvaneal
shelves and bottoms for all lockers, and fully galvanized or galvaneal
lockers in locker spaces adjoining shower rooms. Provide full height
T
door stiffeners.
C103006 SHELVING
AF
Assemblies include all types of shelving with brackets and all supporting materials
and finish, if required.
C103007 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS
Cabinet shall be constructed of 16 gauge cold-rolled steel door panel / front,

and a 22 gauge cold-rolled steel tub. Cabinet shall be fire-rated if located in
R
a fire rated wall assembly, and have a full-length piano hinge, and baked enamel
finish. Provide a stainless steel cabinet door if cabinet is exposed to the
environment. Size and locate fire extinguisher cabinets to encase extinguisher
as required by NFPA 10 & 101.
D
C103008 COUNTERS
C103008 1.1 LAMINATE COVERED COUNTER TOPS
Fabricate with lumber and a core of exterior grade plywood (A-C Grade) or
particleboard (ANSI A208.1, Grade 1-M-2 or better), glued and screwed to
form an integral unit. Bond laminated plastic under pressure to exposed
surfaces using manufacturers recommended glue.
a. Countertops shall be constructed to meet "Custom" quality grade as

defined in AWI Quality Standards.
b. Finish shall meet NEMA LD 3, Grade PF 42 for plastic laminate.
C103008 1.2 ACRYLIC COUNTER TOPS
Provide 100% acrylic counter tops for use in non-residential construction.

Al Dhafra, UAE
Solid surfacing material shall consist of 100% pure acrylic polymer, mineral
fillers, and pigments. The material shall be homogenous, not coated or
laminated. Superficial damage to a depth of 0.010 inch (.254 mm) shall be
repairable by sanding or polishing. Install with factory recommended
fasteners/adhesives/sealant. Provide the following performance
characteristics:
a. Tensile strength, ASTM D 638: 5800 psi minimum

b. Hardness, ASTM D 2583: Barcol Impressor 55 minimum
c. Flammability, ASTM E 84: Class I/A, flame spread 25 maximum; smoke
developed 30 maximum
d. Thermal Expansion, ASTM D 696:.00002 in/in/F maximum
e. Boiling water resistance, NEMA LD 3: No effect
f. High temperature resistance, NEMA LD 3: No effect
g. Liquid absorption, ASTM D 570 (24 hours): 0.10 percent maximum
h. Mold and mildew growth, ASTM G 21: No growth, no effect
i. Bacteria growth, ASTM G 22: No growth, no effect
j. Sanitation, NSF 51: "Food Contact" approval for food area
applications
k. Impact resistance, NEMA LD 3 (1/2 lb. ball drop): 1/4 inch material,
T
36 inch drop, no failure 1/2 inch material, 120 inch drop, no failure
C103009 CABINETS
AF
This paragraph includes casework items that are permanently fixed in-place.
Included are all cabinetry and millwork items with their associated accessories
and anchoring devices.
C103009 1.1 WALL AND BASE CABINETS

R
Wall and base cabinets shall be of the same construction and appearance,
with solid ends and frame fronts, or with frames all around. Frames shall
be not less than 3/4 inch by 1 1/2 inches (19 mm by 38 mm) hardwood. All
ends, bottoms, backs, and partitions shall be hardwood plywood. Cabinet
D
doors and drawer fronts shall be a minimum 3/4 inch (19 mm) of either plywood
or medium density fiberboard cores with solid edge bands.
C103009 1.1.1 Quality Standards
Wall and base cabinets shall be constructed to meet "Custom" quality

grade as defined in AWI Quality Standards, except where this
specification exceeds AWI Custom.
C103009 1.1.2 Hardware
Provide cabinet hardware including two self-closing hinges for each

door and two side-mounted metal drawer slides for each drawer and pulls
for all doors and drawers as follows. All cabinet hardware exposed
to view shall be ANSI/BHMA 156.9, Grade 1, and comply with the
following requirements:
a. Concealed Euro-Style, back mounted hinges with opening to 165

degrees and a self-closing feature at less than 90 degrees.

Al Dhafra, UAE
b. Drawer slides shall have a static rating capacity of 100 lbs.

(444 N).
c. Provide adjustable shelving standards with shelf support
hardware for wall cabinets.
d. Provide heavy-duty magnetic latch and door and drawer catch
C103009 1.1.3 Finish
Provide plastic laminate (NEMA LD3) or transparent finish with sealer

and varnish as selected by Designer of Record.
C103010 CASEWORK
This paragraph includes all built-in premanufactured metal cabinetry for

specialized functions such as labs, libraries, medical and dental facilities. At
a minimum, all casework shall conform to the following chart:
Metals Thickness and Material
T
Uprights (all)
Horizontal foot 4" x 2" tube, 14 ga. (.075") HRPO Steel

AF
Vertical upright 6" x 2" tube, 11 ga. (.118") HRPO Steel
Leveler Threaded steel with plastic foot and

rubber boot
Bridge Channels
R
Channel (halves) 14 ga. (.075") CQCR Steel
Utility Rails
D
Top and Bottom Channels 18 ga. (.047") CQCR Steel
Covers 18 ga. (.047") CQCR Steel
Dividers 16 ga. (.059") CQCR Steel
End Brackets 22 ga. (.030") CQCR Steel
Top Stretchers
Channel 14 ga. (.075") CQCR Steel
End Brackets 18 ga. (.047") CQCR Steel
Vertical Utility Chase
Chase Assembly
Upper Chase Cover

Al Dhafra, UAE
Cover 16 ga. (.059") CQCR Steel
Middle Chase Cover
Lower Chase Cover
Attachment Bracket 11 ga. (.118") CQCR Steel
Chase Cover
Panel 18 ga. (.047") CQCR Steel
Bridge Cover Extension
T
Chase Cabinet Filler

AF
Cantilever
Cantilever 11 ga. (.118") HRPO Steel
End Panel
R
Outer Cover 11 ga. (.118") HRPO Steel
Inner Cover 20 ga. (.036") CQCR Steel
Angle Bracket 16 ga. (.059") CQCR Steel

D
Shelves
Shelf (all) 16 ga. (.059") CQCR Steel
End Panels (all) 14 ga. (.075") CQCR Steel
Reinforcement Channel (Flat and16 ga. (.059") CQCR Steel

Seismic Flat Shelves)
Seismic Shelf Support Lip 20 ga. (.036") CQCR Steel
Laminate Overhead Storage Cabinets
Hanger bracket 14 ga. (.075") CQCR Steel
Solid door pull Steel, aluminum or zinc
Glass door pull Steel

Al Dhafra, UAE
Glass door track Aluminum
Reinforcing hat channel for 11 ga. (.118") HRPO Steel

shelf
Steel Overhead Storage Cabinets
Sides, Back and Door 20 ga. (.036") CQCR Steel
Top, Bottom and Shelf 18 ga. (.047") CQCR Steel
Hanger bracket 14 ga. (.075") CQCR Steel
Solid door pull Steel, aluminum or zinc
Glass door pull Steel
Glass door track Aluminum
T
shelf
Laminate Storage and Sink Cabinets

AF
Drawer glides Steel rails with ball bearings
Door hinges Steel
Door and Drawer pulls Steel, aluminum or zinc

R
Leveler bracket 11 ga. (.118") HRPO Steel

rubber boot
D

shelf
Steel Storage and Sink Cabinets
Sides, Back and Top 20 ga. (.036") CQCR Steel
Base, Bottom and Shelf 18 ga. (.047") CQCR Steel
Door (interior and exterior 20 ga. (.036") CQCR Steel

panels)
Drawer glides Steel rails with ball bearings
Door hinges Steel
Door and Drawer pulls Steel, aluminum or zinc
Leveler bracket 11 ga. (.118") HRPO Steel

Al Dhafra, UAE

rubber boot

shelf
Cord Reel
Cord Reel 11 ga. (.118") HRPO Steel
Cable Storage Tray
Tray 24 ga. (.024") CQCR Steel
Phenolic Drying Rack
Mounting brackets, in-line 14 ga. (.075") CQCR Steel
Mounting brackets, end-of-bench14 ga. (.075") CQCR Steel
T
Modular Power Block with GFCI
Receptacle
AF
Housing and back bracket 16 ga. (.059") CQCR Steel
Modular Connector Faceplates
Faceplate 16 ga. (.059") CQCR Steel
Non-Metals Thickness and Material

R
Laminate Worksurfaces
Worksurface core 1.12" X 45 lb/cu ft medium density

D
particle board
Top and bottom laminate .012" thick laminate

(standard)
Front edge banding 3mm thick rigid plastic
Side and back edge banding 1mm thick, flat profile rigid plastic
Chemsurf Chemical-Resistant
Laminate Worksurfaces
Worksurface core 1.12" X 45 lb/cu ft medium density

particle board
Chemsurf (option) VGP grade, resin-impregnated kraft

paper
Front edge banding 3mm thick rigid plastic

Al Dhafra, UAE
Side and back edge banding 1mm thick, flat profile rigid plastic
Phenolic Resin Worksurfaces
Worksurface core .75" thick, phenolic

resin-impregnated kraft paper
Phenolic Drying Rack
Panel 1.00" thick, phenolic

Pegs .38" dia x 5" long polypropylene pegs
Phenolic Drip Trough
Trough 1.00" thick, phenolic

Drain tube .50" OD rigid phenolic tube
T
Drain flexible tube .50" OD x 3' long flexible clear PVC
tubing
AF
Laminate Overhead Storage Cabinets
Panel core (Top, Bottom, Ends, .75" X 45 lb/cu ft industrial grade

Back, Door, Shelf) particle board
Laminate .012" thick laminate

R
Cabinet edge banding 1mm thick, flat profile rigid plastic
Door edge banding 2mm thick, flat profile rigid plastic

D
Glass door .25" thick tempered safety glass
Steel Overhead Storage Cabinets
Glass door .25" thick tempered safety glass
Laminate Storage and Sink Cabinets
Panel core (Top, Bottom, Base, .75" X 45 lb/cu ft industrial grade

Ends, Back, Door, and Shelf) particle board
Laminate .012" thick laminate
Cabinet edge banding 1mm thick, flat profile rigid plastic
Drawer/Door edge banding 2mm thick, flat profile rigid plastic
Drawer/Door stop Rubber
Steel Storage and Sink Cabinets

Al Dhafra, UAE
Drawer/Door stop Rubber
Power Block
Housing Ultramid Nylon
Harness-to-Harness Connector
Duplex Receptacles
Modular Harnesses and Multipurpose

Power Infeeds
Connector housing Ultramid Nylon
T
Wire Manager
Channel Rigid plastic

AF
C103011 CLOSETS
This paragraph includes all built-in closets with associated work and finishes.
C103012 FIRESTOPPING PENETRATIONS

R
This paragraph covers fire-stopping assemblies to include sleeves, caulking and
flashing. See PTS Section D40, Fire Protection, for additional requirements.
D
C103012 1.1 FIRESTOPPING
Provide asbestos-free firestopping material capable of maintaining an

effective barrier against flame, gases and temperature. Provide
non-combustible firestopping that is non-toxic to human beings during
installation or during fire conditions. Devices and equipment for
firestopping service shall be UL FRD listed or FM P7825 approved for use
with applicable construction, and penetrating items.
C103012 1.1.1 Fire Hazard Classification
Material shall have a flame-spread of 25 or less, a smoke developed

rating of 50 or less when tested in accordance with UL 723 or UL listed
and accepted.
C103012 1.1.2 Firestopping Rating
Firestopping materials shall be UL FRD listed or FM P7825 approved

for "F" and "T" ratings at least equal to the fire-rating of the fire

Al Dhafra, UAE
wall in which penetrated openings are to be protected.
C103013 SPRAYED FIRE-RESISTIVE MATERIALS
See PTS Section D40, Fire Protection, for additional requirements.
C103013 1.1 SPRAYED FIRE-RESISTIVE MATERIALS
C103013 1.1.1 Quality Assurance
A pre-installation conference shall be held with the manufacturers

approved installer prior to the application of the sprayed
fire-resistive materials. See Paragraph C10 1.2 for field testing
requirements for the fire-resistive material. Products provided shall
not contain asbestos per 40 CFR 763.
C103013 1.1.2 Warranty
Contractor shall provide manufacturer's standard materials and

workmanship warranty stating that the manufacturer agrees to repair
T
or replace materials that fail within 2 years, or as required by the
project program, from date of Substantial Completion.
AF
C103013 1.1.3 Material Composition
Provide sprayed fire-resistive material consisting of factory-mixed,

dry formulation of gypsum or Portland cement binders and light-weight
mineral or synthetic aggregates mixed with water at the Project site,
or provide sprayed-fiber fire-resistive material consisting of
factory-mixed, dry formulation of inorganic binders, mineral fibers,
fillers, and additives conveyed in a dry state by pneumatic equipment
R
and mixed with water at a spray nozzle to form a damp, as-applied
product.
C103013 1.1.4 Physical Properties

D
a. Dry Density: 15 lb/cubic foot (240 kg/cubic meter) for

referenced fire-resistance design to attain the ratings
indicated, per ASTM E 605.
b. Thickness: Provide minimum average thickness required for
fire-resistance design indicated according to the following
criteria, but not less than 0.375 inch (9 mm), per ASTM E 605:
1) Where the referenced fire-resistance design lists a

thickness of 1 inch (25 mm) or greater, the minimum allowable
individual thickness of sprayed fire-restive material is the
design thickness minus 0.25 inch (6 mm).
2) Where the referenced fire-resistance design lists a

thickness of less than 1 inch (25 mm) but more than 0.375 inch
(9 mm), the minimum allowable individual thickness of sprayed
fire-resistive material is the greater of 0.375 inch (9 mm) or
75 percent of the design thickness.

Al Dhafra, UAE
3) No reduction in design thickness is permitted for those

fire-resistance designs whose fire-resistance ratings were
established at densities of less than 15 lb/cubic foot (240
kg/cubic meter).
c. Bond Strength: 150 lb/sq. ft. (7.2 kPa) minimum per ASTM E 736.
d. Compressive Strength: 5.21 lb/sq. in. (35.9 kPa) as determined
per ASTM E 761. Minimum thickness of sprayed fire-resistive
material tested shall be 0.75 inch (19 mm) and minimum dry
density shall be as specified, but not less than 15 lb/cubic
foot (240 kg/cubic meter).
e. Corrosion Resistance: No evidence of corrosion per ASTM E 937.
f. Deflection: No cracking, spalling, or delaminating per ASTM E
759.
g. Effect of Impact on Bonding: No cracking, spalling, or
delaminating per ASTM E 759.
h. Air Erosion: Maximum weight loss of 0.025 g/sq. foot (0.270
g/sq. meter) in 24 hours per ASTM E 859.
i. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide sprayed
fire-resistive materials with the following surface-burning
characteristics per ASTM E 84 by United Laboratories:
T
flame-spread index of 10 or less and a smoke developed index
of 0.
j. Fungal Resistance: No observed growth on specimens per ASTM G
21.
AF
C103014 ENTRANCE FLOOR GRILLES AND MATS
Provide entrance mats at all entrances to the facility. Provide recessed entrance
mats at building entrances with enclosed vestibule and or surface applied
entranceway mats or entranceway floor tiles at all other entrances. Entranceway
mats and entranceway floor tile require the use of a transition edge where he mat
R
adjoins other floor materials. Mat system shall meet ASTM D-2047 coefficient of
friction requirements for dry and wet surfaces. All portions of mat system shall
comply with ASTM E 648, Class I for flammability and ASTM E 662 for smoke development
of 450. Fasteners shall be non-corrosive screws and anchors for securing frames
D
together to floors. Provide continuous vinyl bottom cushion to quiet clatter at

recessed entrance mat systems. Hinges shall be flexible aluminum or thermoplastic
hinge retained in aluminum tread port, and allow debris and moisture to flow through
recessed mat. Provide ball and socket hinge for easy roll-up of recessed mat
inserts for cleaning. Recessed entrance mat systems shall use either an aluminum
or thermoplastic framework and shall have replaceable wearing surface inserts.
Provide inserts as follows:
a. Carpet Inserts - Carpet insert fiber shall be colorfast, solution dyed,

anti-static, anti-microbial, and waterproof. Fiber shall be 100% nylon or
polypropylene. Each carpet fiber shall be bonded to rigid ply backing to
prevent fraying and supplied in continuous splice-free lengths. Carpet shall
be minimum of 30-oz./yd.
b. Vinyl or Rubber Inserts - Vinyl or rubber inserts shall be removable and
be made from recycled materials wherever possible. Inserts shall have
serrated edges for scraping purposed or flexible abrasive grit tape, bonded
to a rigid vinyl tread insert.

Al Dhafra, UAE
C103014 1.1 RECESSED MAT THERMOPLASTIC FRAME PROPERTIES
Thermoplastic frame shall be colorfast and UV-resistant. Tensile strength

of frame shall comply with ASTM D 638. Tensile impact of frame shall comply
with ASTM D 1822. Flexural strength of frame shall comply with ASTM D 790.
Shore D hardness of frame shall comply with ASTM D 2240. Rockwell R hardness
of frame shall comply with ASTM D 785. Coefficient of thermal expansion
of frame shall comply with ASTM D 696.
C103014 1.2 RECESSED MAT ALUMINUM FRAME REQUIREMENTS
Aluminum frame and rail shall comply with ASTM B 221, alloy 6063-T5. Frame
shall have butted corners and be factory coated with zinc chromate or
manufacturer's standard protective finish where surfaces are in contact with
concrete. Provide standard mill finish, color anodized finish complying
with AAMA 606.1, clear anodized finish complying with AAMA 607.1, or bronze
complying with ASTM B455, alloy 385.
C103014 1.3 SURFACE MOUNTED/LOOSE-LAY ENTRANCE MATS
T
Loose-lay mats shall have beveled vinyl or rubber transition edge and shall
have surface of carpet or vinyl/rubber surfaces. Edges shall conform to
ADA accessibility guideline 4.5.2, for loose-lay surface applications.
AF
Mats shall be easily removed yet remain adhered to floor to prevent mat from
moving as pressure from walking is applied. Do not use carpet inserts unless
directed otherwise.
C103014 1.4 SURFACE APPLIED ENTRANCEWAY FLOOR TILE
Applied entranceway floor tiles shall be in the form of carpet tiles, carpet
tiles with vinyl or rubber scrubbing surfaces, or tiles of thermoplastic
R
scrubbing surfaces only. Tiles shall be installed in areas where permanent
mat is required but slab is not recessed to receive permanent recess mat.
Tiles shall be securely installed without obvious seams, cleanable,
dimensionally stable, and with maximum finished tile thickness of 1/2" above
D
finished floor line. Carpet fibers shall 100% nylon or polypropylene,

anti-static, anti-microbial, colorfast, solution dyed, mold and mildew
resistant, and waterproof with minimum face weight of 30 oz/yd2.
Thermoplastic only tiles shall be PVC free and UV-resistant.
C103015 ORNAMENTAL METALWORK
Building components made from ornamental metals. Ornamental stair handrails are
included in B1010 EXTERIOR STAIRS and PTS C20, Stairs.
C103090 OTHER INTERIOR SPECIALTIES
This paragraph covers other interior specialties not described by other assembly
categories listed previously.
C103090 1.1 PROJECTION SCREEN
Motorized projection screen shall be wall, ceiling, or above ceiling

mounting, and shall have a 120V motor that is lubricated for life, quick

Al Dhafra, UAE
reversal type, has overload protector, integral gears, and preset accessible
limit switches. Screen shall be flame retardant, mildew resistant and have
black masked borders. Controls shall be wall mounted with wiring concealed
within the wall construction. Pull-down projection screens shall be
provided in lieu of motorized projection screens as approved by the Activity,
as specified in the project program.
C103090 1.2 OTHER INTERIOR SPECIALTIES
Also see PTS Sections C20 and C30 for additional interior specialties not
specified here.
T
AF
R
D

Al Dhafra, UAE
SECTION C20
STAIRS
05/14
C20 GENERAL

T
AF
Industry standards, codes, and government standards that are referenced in
C20 1.1.1 Industry Standards and Codes

R
AISC American Institute of Steel Construction

D

UFC(s):UFC 3-101-01, Architecture)

Buildings
Verification of satisfactory stair performance shall be via Performance

Al Dhafra, UAE
Verification Testing, as detailed in this section of the RFP.
C20 1.2.1 Field Testing for Concrete
Field Quality Control Test Reports to be submitted to DOR shall comply

with ACI 301. If concrete is found to be below the strength required
in the tests, Contractor shall remove and replace that concrete and
all associated building components at his own expense.


Performance Technical Specification. In addition to the Z10 requirements
the Designer of Record (DOR) shall approve the following construction
T
submittals as a minimum:
Stairs, handrails.
AF
C2010 STAIR CONSTRUCTION
C201001 INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR STAIRS
Provide primed and painted steel stairs with concrete filled pans or cast-in-place
concrete stairs for industrial and commercial construction. Design load shall not
be less than 100 PSF (4.8 kPa) for live load, and 300 pounds (136 kg) for
R
concentrated loads. Required means of egress stairs shall conform to NFPA 101.
Provide steel guard and handrails.
C201001 1.1 STEEL STAIRS

D
Design shall conform to AISC S335 or AISC S342L.
a. Structural Carbon Steel - ASTM A 36/A 36M

b. Structural Tubing - ASTM A 500
c. Steel Pipe - ASTM A 47
d. Gratings - Gray cast iron ASTM A 48, Class 40
e. Metal plank grating, non-slip requirement, FS RR-G-1602
aluminum ASTM B 209, 6061-T6; steel ASTM A 653/ A 653M, G90.
f. Floor Plates, Patterned - ASTM A 786/A 786M, 14 gage.
g. Anchor Bolts - ASTM A 307
h. Galvanized Structural Steel - All steel exposed to the
environment or direct water contact shall be galvanized in
accordance with ASTM A 123 /A123M, ASTM A153/A153M, and ASTM
A653/A653M, Z275 (G90) coating. Galvanize all components
after fabrication in accordance with ASTM A385. Fabricate all
steel components in the largest units practical using bolted

Al Dhafra, UAE
connections for field assembly. Repair damage to, or voids in,

galvanizing in accordance with ASTM A780, Annex A1 or Annex A3.
C201001 1.2 ALUMINUM ALLOY PRODUCTS
Conform to ASTM B 209 for sheet plate, ASTM B 221 for extrusions and ASTM
B 26/B 26M or ASTM B 108 for castings. Aluminum extrusions shall be at least
1/8-inch (3.2 mm) thick and aluminum plate or sheet at least 0.050 inch (1.27
mm) thick.
C201001 1.3.1 Galvanizing
Hot-dip galvanizing: ASTM A 123/A123M, ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM A

653/A 653M, G90, as applicable.
C201001 1.3.2 Aluminum Finishes
Protect by plating, Class I anodic coatings, or 70% polyvinylidene
T
fluoride organic coatings. See PTS Section C30 for additional
coatings/finish information.
AF
C201001 1.3.3 Safety Treads
NAAMM BG steel, Type W (welded).
C201001 1.3.4 Other Coatings
See PTS Section C30, Interior Finishes, for painted finishes.

R
C201001 1.4 CONCRETE STAIRS / STEPS
Provide interior or exterior concrete steps and stair with non-slip finish.
For interior stairs, provide rubber or other finish treads. For exterior
D
stairs, provide cast-in-place abrasive nosing. Provide steel guard and

handrails as necessary. Fire stairs shall comply to NFPA 101.
a. Concrete - ACI 211.1, ACI 301/301M, and ACI 318/318M, with a

compressive strength of 3,000 psi (20,680 kPa) or greater.
Concrete Mix Design shall be suitable for the job conditions.
b. Reinforcements - Bars, fabrics, connectors, and chairs shall
be galvanized.
c. Reinforcing Bars - ACI 301/301M
d. Welded Wire Fabric - ASTM A 185 or ASTM A 497
e. Cast Aluminum Safety Nosings - For exterior concrete stairs,
provide safety nosings of cast aluminum with abrasive surfaces
or with abrasive inserts.
C201001 1.5 WOOD STAIRS
Wood stairs may be used only for residential construction. Provide wood

Al Dhafra, UAE
treads of minimum 1-1/4 inches thickness, of clear red or white oak. Risers
shall be nominal one-inch finish lumber. Provide natural finish equivalent
to one coat of sealer and two coats of varnish on all exposed surfaces.
C201002 FIRE ESCAPE STAIRS
Design fire escapes of the type and arrangement to conform to Fire Escape Stairs,
of NFPA 101, Life Safety Code. Escape stairs shall be of steel or aluminum,
conforming to the requirements of this specification section.
C201090 STAIR HANDRAILS, GUARDRAILS, AND ACCESSORIES
C201090 1.1 HANDRAILS
Design handrails in accordance with the IBC, except delete the handrail
design load reduction code exceptions for residential, prisons, industrial,
high hazard, and storage facilities. NAAMM PR, provide the same size rail
and post. Provide series 300 stainless steel pipe collars. Factory coat
all metal railings (except for ornamental metals such as brass, bronze,
stainless steel, and nickel-silver) with a high performance coating in
T
accordance with AAMA 2605, with a minimum coating thickness of 1.2 mils
unless otherwise noted.
AF
C201090 1.1.1 Steel Handrails
Provide steel handrails, including inserts in concrete, steel pipe

conforming to ASTM A 53 or structural tubing conforming to ASTM A 500,
Grade A or B of equivalent strength. Railings shall be hot-dip
galvanized and shop painted for exterior applications and primed and
shop painted for interior applications. Railing may be unpainted
hot-dip galvanized in industrial areas.
R
C201090 1.1.2 Aluminum Handrails
Provide aluminum pipe railing conforming to ASTM B 429 or square

D
aluminum semi-hollow tube conforming to ASTM B 221. Railings shall

be coated with a high performance coating or anodized in accordance
with AAMA 611, Class I.
C201090 1.1.3 Ornamental Handrails
Provide ornamental railings. Provide anchorage and fasteners as

recommended by the product manufacturer. Railing system shall conform
to ASTM E 985, minimum concentrated test load requirement.
C201090 1.1.4 Glass Handrails
Provide glass railings consisting of continuous 1/2-inch (13 mm)

beveled tempered glass structural balusters with continuous railing
cap and bottom shoe molding. Railing cap and shoe molding shall be
6063-T52 aluminum, type 304 stainless steel, brass, or bronze.
C201090 1.1.5 Wood Handrails

Al Dhafra, UAE
Wood handrails shall only be used for residential construction.

Provide wood handrails of pre-finished natural hardwood. Wood shall
be coated with hard acrylic finish to withstand indentations.
C201090 1.2 METAL LADDERS
C201090 1.2.1 Metal Ladders
Provide vertical ladders conforming to Section 7 of 29 CFR 1910.27.
Offset distance from the rungs to the finished wall surface not less
than 7 inches (175 mm). Provide heavy clip angles riveted or bolted
to the stringer and drilled for not less than two 1/2-inch (12 mm)
diameter expansion bolts as indicated. Provide intermediate clip
angles not over 48 inches (1200 mm) on center.
C201090 1.2.3 Ladder Cages
T
Where the height of the ladder is greater than 20 feet (6000 mm),
provide a cage to conform to 29 CFR 1910.27.
a.
AF
Cage fabrication - Provide attachments for fastening bands to
the side rails of ladders or directly to the structure.
R
D

Al Dhafra, UAE
SECTION C30
INTERIOR FINISHES
05/14
C30 GENERAL
All interior finish products shall be from manufacturers' standard running line
offerings. Custom fabrications shall not be allowed unless otherwise noted.
T
AF

R
C30 1.1.1 Industry Standards And Codes

D
FLOOR COVERING INSTALLATION CONTRACTOR'S ASSOCIATION (FCICA)
FLOOR COVERING INSTALLATION BOARD (FCIB)
TILE COUNCIL OF NORTH AMERICA (TCNA)


Al Dhafra, UAE

Buildings
C30 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
C30 1.2.1 Paint Applicators Qualifications
C30 1.2.1.1 SSPC QP 1 Certification
For the application of industrial coatings identified in the

Project Program, all contractors and subcontractors that
perform surface preparation or coating application shall be
certified by the Society for Protective Coatings (formerly
Steel Structures Painting Council) (SSPC) to the requirements
of SSPC QP 1 prior to contract award, and shall remain certified
while accomplishing any surface preparation or coating
application. The painting contractors and painting
subcontractors must remain so certified for the duration of the
T
project. If a contractor's or subcontractor's certification
expires, the firm will not be allowed to perform any work until
the certification is reissued. Requests for extension of time
for any delay to the completion of the project due to an inactive
AF
certification will not be considered and liquidated damages
will apply. Notify the Contracting Officer of any change in
contractor certification status.
C30 1.2.2 Aircraft Maintenance Hangar and Vehicle Maintenance Flooring

Installer Qualifications
R
The Designer of Record shall utilize UFGS Specification Section 09
67 23.14, Fuel Resistive Resinous Flooring, 3-Coat to provide the
required installer qualifications for the floor coating system.
D
Verification of satisfactory interior finish assemblies' performance shall

be via Performance Verification Testing, as detailed in this section of the
RFP.
C30 1.3.1
Provide sample of textured ceiling application for DOR approval before

resuming work. Sample shall be used as a reference for remaining
application.
C30 1.3.2
Provide sample of multicolor paint application for DOR approval before

resuming work. Sample shall be used as a reference for remaining
application.
C30 1.3.3

Al Dhafra, UAE
Provide sample of terrazzo and/ or architectural cast-in-place

concrete floor application for DOR approval before resuming work.
Sample shall be used as a reference for remaining application.

Changes shall not be made to the finishes that are submitted in the plans,
T
specifications, and Structural Interior Design submittals and approved by
the Government during the design phase unless changes are requested by the
Government. In the event that revisions may be required because of
AF
unforeseen conditions such as discontinued product, the revisions must be
approved by the DOR and then submitted to the Government Interior Designer
for approval before substitutions can be made.
Submit construction submittals in accordance with PTS section Z10, General

R
the Designer of Record (DOR) and the NAVFAC Interior Designer shall approve
the following construction submittals as a minimum:
Paint, Finish materials, Finish colors

D
Installation drawings for floors with carpet, tile, stone,

architectural cast-in-place concrete or terrazzo to include locations
and details of seams, color and material transitions, details of
divider strips, control joints, and crack control solutions.
Changes shall not be made to the finishes that are submitted and approved
by the Government during the design phase. In the event that revisions may
be required because of unforeseen conditions such as discontinued product,
the revisions must be approved by the DOR and then submitted to the Government
Interior Designer for approval before substitutions can be made.
C3010 WALL FINISHES
Interior wall finishes shall be moisture and mildew resistant, easily maintained,
and suitable in accordance with industry standards for the architectural surface
being finished. For painted wall finishes, refer to C3040 "INTERIOR PAINTING AND
SPECIAL COATINGS".

Al Dhafra, UAE
C301001 CONCRETE WALL FINISHES
C301001 1.1 SPECIAL OR ARCHITECTURAL FINISHES ON INTERIOR CONCRETE WALLS
Cast-in-place or pre-cast concrete wall finishes shall include, but are not
limited to, abrasive blasted surfaces, colored surfaces, exposed aggregate,
grooved surfaces, or tooled surfaces.
C301002 PLASTER WALL FINISHES
Veneer plaster shall be gypsum plaster veneer finish on gypsum base finishes, or
cement plaster veneer finish on concrete or masonry. Refer to Section C3040 for
paint system and gloss level.
C301002 1.1 GYPSUM PLASTER
Provide gypsum neat plaster or high strength gypsum plaster base coat
conforming to ASTM C28. High strength gypsum plaster shall have a compressive
strength of not less than 2,500 psi, when tested dry in accordance with ASTM
C472.
T
C301002 1.1.1
AF
High strength gypsum gaging plaster finish coat shall have a
compressive strength of not less than 4,500 psi when tested dry in
accordance with ASTM C472.
C301002 1.1.2
Provide gypsum molding plaster for ornamental plaster in accordance

with ASTM C59.
R
C301002 1.1.3
Provide Keene's cement finish coat conforming to ASTM C61.

D
C301002 1.1.4
Provide acoustical gypsum plaster finish coat conforming to ASTM E1042

Type I or II Class A, noncombustible.
C301002 1.2 CEMENT PLASTER
C301002 1.2.1
Portland cement plaster base coat in accordance with ASTM C150, gray
Portland cement. Use Type I when no special characteristics are
required, Type II when plaster and stucco will be exposed to moderate
sulfate (alkali) action, Type III when early strength is needed as
in cold weather, and Type V when high resistance to sulfate is
required.
C301002 1.2.2

Al Dhafra, UAE
Portland cement plaster finish coat in accordance with ASTM C150, gray
Portland cement Type I when no special characteristics are required,
Type II when plaster and stucco will be exposed to moderate sulfate
(alkali) action, Type III when early strength is needed as in cold
weather.
C301002 1.2.3
Factory-mixed finish coat according to the manufacturer's

instructions.
C301002 1.3 ACRYLIC PLASTER COATING
High Performance (impact resistant) seamless interior acrylic coating

system shall be used as an interior wall finish over CMU that has been joint
filled and smoothed with a water resistant manufactured recommended
compound. Coating system to be mold and mildew resistant, have a minimum
Barcoll Hardness Index of 38 and flame spread 15 or less per ASTM-E84 and
have a minimum final film thickness of higher than 10 mils. Coating system
must have been on the market and successfully used in commercial applications
T
for a minimum of 10 years. Coating system must be applied by a manufacturer's
factory trained applicator/installer.
AF
C301003 GYPSUM WALLBOARD FINISHES
Conform to specifications, standards and requirements in accordance with Gypsum

Association GA 214, GA 216 and GA 224. Provide asbestos free materials only.
Provide Type X gypsum board in fire rated assemblies. Provide a foil back gypsum
board when a vapor retarder is required.
C301003 1.1 REGULAR GYPSUM BOARD

R
ASTM C36/C36M and ASTM C1396/C1396M 1/2 or 5/8 inch (12.7 mm or 15.9 mm)
thick in residential construction, and 5/8 inch (15.9 mm) thick in
non-residential construction, tapered edges for exposed layers, square
D
edges for concealed backer layers.
C301003 1.2 MOISTURE RESISTANT GYPSUM BOARD
ASTM C630/C630M, 1/2 or 5/8 inch (12.7 mm or 15.9 mm) thick in residential
construction, and 5/8 inch (15.9 mm) thick in non-residential construction.
Use in humid areas or spaces but not as a substrate in tiled areas where
wall tile is exposed to direct moisture contact or condensation
accumulation.
C301003 1.3 FOIL BACKED GYPSUM BOARD
ASTM C1396/C1396M 1/2 or 5/8 inch (12.7 mm or 15.9 mm) thick in residential
construction, and 5/8 inch (15.9 mm) thick in non-residential construction,
tapered edges for layers exposed to view, square edges for concealed layers.
Seal joints in foil backing to other panels and adjoining materials as
recommended by the panel manufacturer.
Alternative to foil backed gypsum board in Secured Areas: Field applied

Al Dhafra, UAE
foil faced barrier material is an acceptable alternative for pre

manufactured foil backed gypsum board. Provide a continuous composite
multilayer barrier with a woven polyethylene sheet sandwiched between two
sheets of solid reflective aluminum surfaces. Shielding effectiveness
tested in accordance with IEEE 229/ ASTM D4935. Install barrier in
accordance with manufactures instructions.
C301003 1.4 CEMENTITIOUS BACKING UNITS
ANSI A108.11 and ANSI A118.9, 5/8 inch (15.9 mm) thick; use as a substrate
for ceramic tile in wet areas that are exposed to direct moisture contact
or condensation accumulation for areas including, but not limited to, tubs,
shower enclosures, saunas, steam rooms, gang shower rooms, and shower drying
rooms. Provide screws specifically designed for use with cement panels.
C301003 1.5 IMPACT RESISTANT GYPSUM BOARD
Reinforced gypsum panel with imbedded fiber mesh or polycarbonate resin

thermoplastic backing, 5/8 inch (15.9 mm) thick, tapered edges, in
accordance with Structural Failure Test; ASTM E695 or ASTM D2394 and
T
Indentation Test; ASTM D5420 or ASTM D1037. Provide metal framing of
20-gauge minimum. Provide fasteners that meet manufacturer requirements and
specifications. Impact resistant gypsum board shall have a flame spread
AF
rating of 25 or less and a smoke developed rating of 50 or less, ASTM E84.
Finish with a high strength plaster veneer. Refer to PTS C10 for further
requirements on impact resistant wall construction.
C301003 1.6 JOINT TREATMENT
ASTM C475, Joint compound shall be specifically formulated and manufactured

for use with and compatible with tape, substrate and fasteners as recommended
R
by the manufacturer. Tape and finish gypsum board in accordance with ASTM
C840, GA 214 and GA 216. Provide premanufactured joints at all structural
expansion joints, crack control joints, and change of materials as
recommended by the manufacturer and in accordance with GA 216.
D
C301003 1.7 FASTENERS
ASTM C514. Fasteners shall be compatible with each type of gypsum board
material as recommended by the gypsum board manufacturer and in accordance
with GA 216 and GA 224.
C301003 1.8 ACCESSORIES
ASTM C1047. Fabricate from corrosion protected steel or plastic designed

for intended use. Accessories manufactured with paper flanges are not
acceptable. Flanges shall be free of dirt, grease, and other materials that
may adversely affect bond of joint treatment. Provide prefinished or job
decorated materials. For predecorated gypsum board provide prefinished
metal or plastic trim to match predecorated gypsum board. Install as
recommended by GA 214, GA 216 and GA 224.
C301003 1.9 LEVEL OF FINISH

Al Dhafra, UAE
C301003 1.9.1
Tape and finish gypsum board in accordance with ASTM C840, GA 214 and
GA 216. Plenum areas above ceilings shall be finished to GA 214, Level
1. Water resistant gypsum backing board, ASTM C630/C630M, to receive
ceramic tile shall be finished to GA 214, Level 2. Walls to receive
a heavy-grade wall covering or have textured finish before painting
shall be finished to GA 214 Level 3. Walls without wall wash lighting
to receive paint (MPI Gloss Level 2), light textures, or wall coverings
shall be finished to GA 214 Level 4. Unless otherwise specified, all
gypsum board walls, partitions shall be finished to GA 214 Level 5.
Provide joint, fastener depression, and corner treatment. Do not use
fiberglass mesh tape with conventional drying type joint compounds;
use setting or hardening type compounds only. Provide treatment for
water-resistant gypsum board as recommended by the gypsum board
manufacturer.
C301003 1.9.2
Wherever gypsum board is to receive eggshell (MPI Gloss Level 3),
T
semigloss (MPI Gloss Level 5), or gloss (MPI Gloss Level 6) paint
finish, finish gypsum wall surface to GA 214 Level 5.
C301003 1.9.3
AF
Where wall wash lighting will accent the flatness of the wall and
surface irregularities in gypsum board joints, provide feature edge
gypsum board and two coat joint compound fillers. Provide this
special joint treatment at up lighting, down lighting and horizontal
lighting at the end of a passageway wall.
R
C301004 TILE AND TERRAZZO WALL FINISHES
C301004 1.1 CERAMIC TILE WALL SYSTEM FINISHES

D
Provide ceramic tile wall systems as defined in the Tile Council of America
(TCA) handbook for ceramic tile installations suitable for the service
requirements listed. Install systems in accordance with ANSI A108/A118
series standards. Colored epoxy grout with sealer shall be provided.
Coordinate with ceramic bath accessories for modularity. Include all trim
pieces, caps, stops, and returns to complete installation.
C301004 1.1.1
Ceramic Mosaic Wall Tile shall be a minimum of 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick
and installed from floor to ceiling, unless otherwise noted.
C301004 1.1.2
Wall tile shall be glazed, matte glazed or unglazed finish. Refer to

project program for tile type, pattern, and surface texture.
C301004 1.1.3

Al Dhafra, UAE
Porcelain wall tile shall be through color, polished or unpolished.

Refer to project program for tile type, pattern, and surface texture.
C301004 1.1.4
Provide wall tile color and style selections a minimum of one grade
above base grade.
C301004 1.1.5
Provide Designer accent tile, accent strips and accessory ceramic tile
shapes as an integral part of the ceramic wall tile system.
C301005 WALL COVERINGS
Wall coverings shall be material designed specifically for the specified use. The
wallcovering shall contain a non-mercury based anti-microbial. The wallcovering
shall be the type made without the use of cadmium-based stabilizers. Wallcovering
shall have a Class A flame spread rating of 0-25 and smoke development rating of
0-50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. The wall preparation, trimming,
T
adhesive and application shall be according to the manufacturers printed
directions. The manufacturer shall approve the installers in writing. The
material must be easily cleaned by traditional methods such as washing, wiping,
AF
or vacuuming. Primer and adhesive shall be of a type recommended by the
wallcovering manufacturer and shall contain a non-mercury based anti-microbial.
Adhesive shall be strippable type. Do not apply wall coverings to the interior
surface of exterior walls.
C301005 1.1 VINYL WALL COVERING
C301005 1.1.1
R
Vinyl wallcovering shall be a vinyl coated woven or nonwoven fabric

with germicidal additives and shall conform to ASTM F793, Category
V Type II, 13.1 to 22 ounces (371 g to 624 g) total weight per square
D
yard and width of 54 inches (1370 mm). Provide ASTM F793, Category
VI, Type III, 22 ounces (624 g) and above to cover rough textured walls
such as masonry.
C301005 1.1.2
Provide a polyvinyl fluoride film, 0.0005 inch (0.012 mm) thick or

thicker shall be factory applied to the wall covering where additional
resistance to staining and soiling from exposure to staining reagents
or chemicals and resistance from abuse is required. The film shall
be transparent (clear), medium gloss.
C301005 1.2 FABRIC WALL COVERING
C301005 1.2.1
Fabric wallcovering shall be woven material of Polyester or

Polyolefin, or a combination of the two fibers with an acrylic backing.
The face shall be treated with a soil repellent finish. The material

Al Dhafra, UAE
must be a minimum of 48 inches (1219 mm) wide. "Tackable" wall

covering shall be "self-healing" from tack penetration through the
covering into the substrate. The material must be a minimum of 12
ounces (340 g) per square yard exclusive of backing. A tackable wall
covering will not be required for smoother, less textured surface
appearance.
C301005 1.2.2
Acoustical wallcovering shall be textured, woven or non-woven

material of polyester or polyolefin, or a combination of the two fibers
with an acrylic backing. The material must be a minimum of 48 inches
(1219 mm) wide and a minimum of 16 ounces (454 g) per square yard.
The material shall have an NRC rating of .15 on gypsum board in
C301005 1.3 WALLCOVERING BORDER
Vinyl wallcovering border shall be a vinyl coated woven or nonwoven fabric

with germicidal additives and shall conform to ASTM F793, Type I, 7 to 13
T
ounces (198 g to 368 g) or Type II, 13.1 to 22 ounces (371 g to 624 g) total
weight per square yard.
AF
C301005 1.4 SURFACE PREPARATION FOR UNEVEN WALLS
C301005 1.4.1
Wall liner shall be a non-woven polyester cellulose blend having a

minimum weight of 3.7 ounces (105 g) per square yard and a total minimum
thickness of 0.013 inches (0.33 mm). Wall liner shall have a Class
A flame spread rating of 0-25 and smoke development rating of 0-50
R
when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. Use for masonry walls or walls
with uneven surfaces.
C301005 1.4.2
D
For masonry or rough textured walls, use a veneer plaster finish to

smooth the walls prior to wallcovering installation.
C301005 1.5 CORNER GUARDS
C301005 1.5.1
Corner guards shall be 3/32 inch (2.4 mm) thick and shall cover 1 inch
(25 mm) each side of corner at right angles. Corner guards shall be
clear polycarbonate. Use in executive areas, office areas, and
wall-covered areas subject to cart traffic as a minimum.
C301005 1.5.2
Corner guards shall be 3/32 inch thick and shall cover 2-1/2 inches
(64 mm) each side of corner at right angles. Corner guards shall be
through color polycarbonate or rubber. Use in corridors or other high
traffic areas.

Al Dhafra, UAE
If protective wall components from paragraphs C301090 - 1.5 and 1.6

are provided, corner guards shall be from the same lot and color as
protective wall components.
C301005 1.6 WAINSCOT CAP
C301005 1.6.1
Wainscot cap shall be satin-finished extruded aluminum approximately

3/4 inch (19 mm) high, feathered at bottom edge, with an approximate
3/16 inch (5 mm) exposed face on top edge, and grooved to receive the
covering. Adhesive to install wainscot cap shall be of a type
recommended by the manufacturer of the cap.
C301005 1.6.2
Wood wainscot cap shall be 3-1/2 by 3/4 inch (89 mm by 19 mm) solid
hardwood, AWI Custom grade, with painted or stained finish. Profile
shall be a molded shape.
T
C301006 ACOUSTICAL PANELS ADHERED TO WALLS
Acoustical wall treatment shall be acoustical panels, sound absorbing wall units,
AF
or acoustical wall systems. Acoustical panel system shall include manufacturer's
standard concealed fasteners, splines, tracks, and other components necessary to
complete the installation. Fire rating for the complete composite system shall
be Class A, 200 or less smoke density and flame spread less than 25, when tested
in accordance with ASTM E84.
C301006 1.1 ACOUSTICAL FABRIC COVERED WALL PANELS

R
C301006 1.1.1
Prefinished factory assembled wall panels shall consist of, seamless

fabric covered fiberglass or mineral fiber core system. Perimeter
D
edges shall be reinforced by an aluminum frame or a formulated resin

edge hardener. Fabric covering shall be stretched free of wrinkles
and then bonded to the edges and back or bonded directly to the panel
face, edges, and back of panel a minimum distance standard with the
manufacturer. Mounting shall be by manufacturer's standard concealed
spline, mechanical fasteners, magnetic fasteners, hook and loop or
adhesive mounting.
C301006 1.1.2
Stretched fabric wall panel system shall consist of continuous

perimeter and butt seam mounting extrusions, site-fabricated and
applied directly to the substrate. Facing fabric shall be stretched
over core materials and attached without adhesives, nails, tacks,
screws or tapes so that fabric may be removed and replaced with
framework in place.
C301006 1.1.3

Al Dhafra, UAE
Fabric shall be seamless, 100% polyester or olefin or a blend of the

two. Light fastness (fadeometer) shall be approximately 40 hours in
accordance with AATCC 16.
C301006 1.1.3.1
Non-woven, embossed texture, or needle punched 100 percent

polyester, minimum 12 ounces (340 g) per linear yard. Tear
strength shall be minimum 25 pounds (11.25 kg) machine direction
and minimum 40 pounds (18 kg) cross-machine direction in
accordance with ASTM D1117. Tensile strength shall be minimum
50 pounds (22.5 kg) machine direction and minimum 75 pounds (34
kg) cross-machine direction in accordance with ASTM D5034.
C301006 1.1.3.2
Woven, minimum 2-ply 100 percent polyester or olefin, minimum

12 ounces (340 g) per linear yard. Tear strength shall be
minimum 29 pounds (13 kg). Tensile strength shall be 150 pounds
(68 kg) minimum in accordance with ASTM D5034.
T
C301006 1.1.3.3
AF
Perforated vinyl covering with fabric backing, minimum 20
ounces (567 g) per linear yard total weight.
C301006 1.2 ACOUSTICAL WALL PANELS
Aspen wood fibers bonded together with an inorganic hydraulic cement binder,
formed in a continuous process under heat and pressure. Nominal overall panel
thickness shall be 1 inch (25 mm). Noise Reduction Coefficient shall be not
R
less than NRC 0.85 for Type C-40 and C-80 mounting.
C301090 OTHER WALL FINISHES

D
C301090 1.1 SOLID SURFACING WALL FINISHES
Solid surfacing material shall consist of 100% pure acrylic polymer, mineral
fillers, and pigments. The material shall be homogenous, not coated or
laminated, meeting ANSI Z124.3 and ANSI Z124.6 requirements. Superficial
damage to a depth of 0.010 inch (.254 mm) shall be repairable by sanding
or polishing. Provide manufacturer's full range of colors and patterns.
Flammability, ASTM E84: Class I/A, flame spread 25 maximum; smoke developed
30 maximum.
C301090 1.1.1
If used in a shower, solid surfacing wall finishes shall extend from

top of shower pan to a minimum of 84 inches (2130 mm) or to underside
of ceiling and shall surround the shower enclosure. Wall finish shall
extend from top of tub to 84 inches (2130 mm) and shall surround tub
shower. If used in a kitchen, solid surfacing wall finish shall extend
from top of kitchen countertop to underside of wall cabinet.

Al Dhafra, UAE
C301090 1.1.2
Provide solid surfacing with factory recommended

fasteners/adhesives/caulk to complete the installation.
C301090 1.2 PLASTIC LAMINATE WALL FINISHES
Plastic laminate used for wall applications shall be commercial grade,

high-pressure laminate with a #60 finish, approved for vertical
applications. NEMA LD 3.
C301090 1.2.1
The kitchen wall area between the counter top backsplash and the bottom
of the wall cabinet shall be plastic laminate. Laminate wall finish
shall include factory recommended fasteners/adhesives/caulk to
complete the installation.
C301090 1.3 DECORATIVE PANELING SYSTEM
T
Architectural paneling system applied to interior walls shall include
associated furring, fastening, and trim to complete the installation. Wood
paneling system finish shall be factory or field applied.
AF
C301090 1.4 WOOD TRIM AND DETAILING FINISHES
Decorative panels, chair rail, standing and running trim, shall be of AWI
custom grade hardwood with a painted or stained finish. Refer to C3040
"INTERIOR PAINTING AND SPECIAL FINISHES" for finish system. Chair rail shall
be a minimum of 3-1/2 inches (89 mm) high. Profile of chair rail shall be
a molded shape. Wood trim shall include associated furring, fastening,
R
adhesives and trim to complete the installation.
C301090 1.5 IMPACT RESISTANT PANEL OR WAINSCOT WALL FINISHES

D
The wall covering panel system, or wainscot, shall be an impact-resistant

acrylic PVC sheet of a minimum 0.060 inch (1.5 mm) thickness in 4 foot by
8 foot (1219 mm by 2438 mm) sheets. The system shall be Class A (ASTM E84),
UL listed, and chemical and stain resistant. It shall include all
accessories, such as top caps, joint covers, and inside and outside corners,
necessary for a complete installation. A full range of colors and textures
shall be included. The wall panel system shall have coordinating color and
pattern options for all components within the system. The wall panel system
shall offer a 21 ounce (595 g) fabric backed vinyl wallcovering laminated
to a 0.020 inch (.51 mm) rigid acrylic/PVC backing capped with 1 mil of
protective film.
C301090 1.5.1
Impact Resistant Trim Finishes - Impact resistant chair or handrail

system shall be a formed rigid PVC product. Chair or handrail shall
be a minimum of 3 inches (76 mm) high and be mounted with concealed
hardware. Chair or handrail system shall be chemical, stain, and
bacteria resistant. Chair rail shall be UL classified, conforming

Al Dhafra, UAE
to NFPA Class A fire rating and ASTM D256-90b for impact strength of
30.2 ft-lbs/inch thick.
C301090 1.6 CORNER AND WALL GUARDS
Corner and wall guards shall be high-impact formed polyvinyl chloride a

minimum of 0.078 inch (2 mm) with concealed mounting hardware and end
closure. If used with an impact resistant panels system, the guards shall
be from the same manufacturer as the impact resistant wall panel system,
chair or hand rail system and shall include all accessories necessary for
a complete installation. A full range of styles, colors and textures shall
be included.
C3020 FLOOR FINISHES
Refer to C3040 "INTERIOR PAINTING AND SPECIAL FINISHES" for painted floor coatings.
C3020 1.1 RESILIENT SUBFLOOR PREPARATION
Have third party independent concrete slab testing agent verify that
T
concrete slabs comply with ASTM F710. Minimum values shall not be below the
following: Concrete floor flatness shall meet minimum flatness of FF 60 when
tested in accordance to ASTM E1155 - 96(2008). Concrete levelness on slab
AF
on grade shall meet minimum levelness of FL 45 when tested in accordance
with ASTM E1155 - 96(2008). This requirement does not apply to elevated
concrete slabs.
C3020 1.1.1 Floor Preparation
Prior to installation of flooring materials the concrete sub-floors

are to be dry, free of curing compounds, sweeping compounds, sealers,
R
hardeners, and other materials which could interfere with bonding of
adhesive. If curing compounds, sweeping compounds, bond breakers or
sealers exist, they shall be completely removed by mechanical means
and methods, specifically grinding and shot blasting of concrete
D
surface as necessary. Determine adhesion and dryness characteristics

by performing bond and moisture tests. Prior to building being
conditioned, perform a preliminary moisture test using in situ probe
relative humidity testing as specified per ASTM F 2170.
C3020 1.1.2 Testing
All pre-installation moisture testing is to be performed by a

qualified independent testing agency. Perform the following test as
soon as building is enclosed, watertight, and conditioned, and a
minimum of two months prior to floor covering installation.
a. Moisture Testing: Perform moisture and pH tests as recommended by

the flooring and adhesive manufacturers. Perform test starting on the
deepest part of the concrete structure. Proceed with installation only
after concrete substrates meet or exceed floor covering
manufacturer's requirements. In the absence of specific guidance from
the flooring manufacturer the following shall be the required minimum:

Al Dhafra, UAE
b. Perform concrete internal relative humidity testing using in situ

probes in accordance with ASTM F 2170. Proceed with installation only
after concrete reaches maximum 75 percent relative humidity level
measurement.
C3020 1.1.3 Additional Preparation
If tested moisture levels exceed the allowable limits, shot blast the
concrete subfloors to including grinding of areas not accessible to
shot blasting equipment and install a 100% solids VOC free epoxy
moisture and pH control system as recommended by the third party
testing agent.
a. Install cement based self-leveling underlayment over epoxy

moisture and pH control system to create a smooth substrate suitable
for floor covering and approved by floor covering manufacturer for
use with their products.
b. Correct conditions that will impair proper installation.
T
c. Fill cracks, joints and other irregularities in concrete with
leveling compound.
AF
d. Do not use adhesive for filling or leveling purposes.
C3020 1.1.4 Final Cleaning Prior to Flooring Finish Installation
Clean floor of oil, paint, dust, and deleterious substances. Leave

floor dry and cured free of residue from existing curing or cleaning
agents.
R
C302001 TILE FLOOR FINISHES
Provide ceramic tile floor systems as defined in the Tile Council of North America
(TCNA) handbook for ceramic tile installation and materials for the service
D
requirements listed. Provide installation and materials in accordance with ANSI

A108/A118 series standards, except do not use organic adhesives. Provide
manufacturers full range of colors and styles. Tile shall be a minimum of two
grades above base grade.
Mortar shall be Portland cement, ANSI A108.1A/1B/1C/ A118.1, Latex-Portland

cement, ANSI A108.5/A118.4 or Epoxy ANSI A108.6/A118.3.
Grout shall be factory sanded Portland cement, ANSI A108.10/A118.6, Latex-Portland

cement, ANSI A108.10/A118.7 or Epoxy ANSI A108.6/A118.3. Provide tile joint grout
sealer on white, light colored areas that are routinely exposed to water and liquid
cleaning materials, entrance areas, and areas that require a high degree of stain
resistance, and as required by the manufacturer. Provide chemical resistant epoxy
resin for kitchens and other areas where high resistance to staining and absorption
are required, ANSI A118.3.
Slip resistant tile shall have a minimum Dynamic Coefficient of Friction (wet and
dry) of 0.42, ANSI A137.1-2012. Tile shall have smooth, non-slip or textured
surface and a glazed or unglazed finish. Non-slip or textured surface required

Al Dhafra, UAE
for tile in areas where there is excessive water or grease and oils such as kitchens,
dining facilities, shower rooms, toilets, and in industrial and maintenance
facilities.
C302001 1.1 CERAMIC MOSAIC UNGLAZED FLOOR TILES
Ceramic Mosaic unglazed floor tiles shall be a minimum of 1/4 inch (6 mm)
thick with a maximum of 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) grout width with cushioned edge.
Tile shall have less than a 0.5 percent water absorption rate, ASTM C373.
C302001 1.2 PORCELAIN FLOOR TILE
Porcelain floor tiles shall be a minimum of 5/16 inch (8 mm) thick with a
maximum of 1/4 inch (6 mm) grout width with cushioned edge. Tile shall have
a minimum breaking strength of 300 pounds (202 kg), ASTM C648 and a maximum
absorption rate of 0.5%, ASTM C373. Tile shall be color through,
impervious, unglazed or glazed finish with an unpolished, semi-polished,
polished, or textured surface.
C302001 1.3 QUARRY FLOOR TILE
T
Quarry floor tiles shall be a minimum of 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) thick tiles with
a maximum of 1/4 inch (6 mm) grout width. Tile shall have a minimum breaking
AF
strength of 350 pounds (158 kg), ASTM C648 and a maximum absorption rate
of 3%, ASTM C373. Use grout release for darker pigmented grout colors. Tile
shall have a maximum of 3.0 percent water absorption rate when tested in
accordance with ASTM C373. Non-slip, abrasive grain or textured surface
required for tile in areas where there is excessive water or grease and oils.
Tile shall consist of semi-vitreous, vitreous or clay material with smooth
or textured surface and unglazed finish.
R
C302002 TERRAZZO FLOOR FINISHES
Refer to Project Program for special design requirements.

D
C302002 1.1 BONDED TERRAZZO
Provide terrazzo, bonded to concrete, consisting of a terrazzo topping over

an underbed. Where structural movement is anticipated which may injure the
terrazzo, use the sand cushion (floating) method. Provide cementitious
terrazzo in accordance with the NTMA bonded terrazzo specification. Patterns
shall have three (3) colors with (18 gauge) minimum zinc "L" divider strips.
Applicator shall be approved by the NTMA and shall have a minimum of 5 years
experience in the application of the materials to be used and shall have
a completed 8 successful installations within the past 2 years.
C302002 1.2 RESINOUS TERRAZZO
The resinous terrazzo flooring shall be an epoxy terrazzo. All terrazzo,

auxiliary products and materials and application techniques used must be
approved by National Terrazzo and Mosaic Association (NTMA) and epoxy
terrazzo manufacturer, whichever is more stringent, prior to use. These
requirements shall include, but are not limited to the following;

Al Dhafra, UAE
Epoxy Terrazzo Minimum Requirements:
The contractor must be a member of NTMA and shall have a minimum 10 years
application experience and have completed a minimum 5 successful
installations over the past five years of similar scope, complexity and
minimum of 75 percent of the square footage.
No products shall contain VOC's or formaldehydes. Thickness 3/8" cast in

place. Hardness: 60-85 per ASTM D-2240. Tensile Strength: 3,000 psi (min)
per ASTM D-638. Compressive Strength: 10,000 psi (min) per ASTM D-695.
Chemical Resistance: No deleterious effects per ASTM D-1308
Divider strips/control joints in the terrazzo shall be aluminum or brass

shall occur directly above control joints in the subfloor and be a minimum
18 gauge "L" shape. A flexible crack suppression membrane (elastomeric)
installed over entire floor slab surfaces, including all cracks in the
subfloor. Flatness tolerance of the slab must be less than 0.25-in flatness
variation over 10ft span. Fill areas with 100% epoxy solids with fine
aggregates per manufacturer's recommendations for areas which do not meet
the flatness tolerance mentioned above. The concrete surface shall use shot
T
blasting only (no alternate method to be used). The concrete slab is to
be tested for moisture transmission using ASTM F2170 Probe Test. Concrete
slabs shall be shot-blasted and cleaned to receive epoxy terrazzo moisture
AF
vapor primer system as specified by manufacturer and NTMA, whichever is more
stringent.
Maintain the ambient room and floor temperature at 60F or above for a period
extending 72 hours before, during and after floor installation. Concrete
to receive epoxy terrazzo shall have cured for at least 28 days and be free
of all curing compounds. Test concrete substrate to determine acceptable
moisture levels prior to installation. Testing should be conducted
R
according to ASTM F2170, Probe Test (determining relative humidity in
concrete slabs using in situ probes). Concrete slabs shall be shot-blasted
and cleaned to receive epoxy terrazzo moisture vapor primer system as
specified by manufacturer and NTMA, whichever is more stringent. The
D
building shall be enclosed and the HVAC system operational prior to and
during each day of installation, the terrazzo contractor shall verify that
the dew point is at least 5 F (-15 C) less than the slab and air
temperature.
Physical properties of the moisture migrating primer shall have a maximum

of 0.3 perms with 100% RH. Primer shall be a material recommended by the
resin manufacturer which will penetrate the pores of the substrate and bond
with the topping to form a permanent monolithic bond between the substrate
and the topping.
Five colors for various patterns and accents throughout the flooring area.
Marble chips shall not exceed #1 size. Provide a minimum of three 6" x 6"
samples for each color and type of terrazzo for review prior to purchase
and two 6" lengths of each type of divider strip. Use of post-industrial
recycled marble or granite terrazzo chips. When completed, the terrazzo
shall show a minimum of 70% decorative aggregate chips on the surface.
The finished floor will be rinsed clean, allowed to dry and non-yellowing,

Al Dhafra, UAE
slip-resistant & durable water based acrylic sealer. Confirm with user if
high polish finish may be used in lieu of sealer. Coordinate with user sheen
of polished finish. Use 100% epoxy solids flexible resin, tinted to match
adjoining terrazzo matrix per manufacturer's specification.
For concrete slab requirements; See PTS A10-50 Slab on Grade, 1.1.1 Slab
on Grade where Resinous Terrazzo Floor Finish is scheduled.
C302003 WOOD FLOORING
C302003 1.1 WOOD FLOORING SYSTEM
Wood strip flooring shall be 3/4 inch (19 mm) thick by 2-1/4 inches (57 mm)
face width, kiln dried, continuous tongue and groove and of standard lengths.
Beech and birch shall be second grade in accordance with NOFMA Grading Rules.
Hard maple shall be second and better in accordance with MFMA-01. Red and
white oak shall be select grade in accordance with NOFMA Grading Rules.
Strip flooring shall be marked with the trademark of the grading agency.
The strip flooring shall be NOFMA certified and installed in accordance with
NOFMA publication Installing Hardwood Flooring. Nails shall be as
T
recommended by strip flooring manufacturers recommendations. Resilient
pads shall be pneumatic rubber, PVC, or polyurethane resilient mounts to
fit the floor system. Moisture barrier shall be 6 mil minimum thickness
polyethylene.
AF
C302003 1.1.1
Rooms where wood flooring is to be installed shall have permanent

heating and air conditioning installed and working or adequate
arrangements for ventilation and temperature controls starting not
less than 3 days prior to beginning the installation of flooring and
R
continuing throughout the remainder of the contract period.
C302003 1.1.2
D
Concrete slab shall be level, steel troweled to a tolerance of 1/8

inch (3 mm) plus or minus in a 10 foot (3048mm) radius. Slab surface
shall be clean, dry, and approved by wood floor manufacturer prior
to start of installation.
C302003 1.1.3
Unless otherwise approved, flooring shall be laid parallel to the

length of the area to be floored. Strips shall be laid with close
joints, snugly driven up but providing for expansion in accordance
with humidity conditions expected during the life of the flooring.
End joints shall be so alternated that there will be at least two boards
between end joints in the same plane and at least 6 inches between
end joints in adjacent boards. Space for expansion shall be left
along perimeter walls and around fixed projections through the floor
surface.
C302003 1.1.4

Al Dhafra, UAE
Flooring shall be sanded to a smooth, even, uniform finish without

burns in accordance with the flooring manufacturers recommendations.
The flooring shall be left clean and ready to receive the finishing
materials. Refer to C3040 "INTERIOR PAINTING AND SPECIAL FINISHES"
for floor finishes.
C302004 RESILIENT FLOOR FINISHES
All resilient flooring shall meet or exceed applicable ADA horizontal

requirements. Each type of flooring shall be installed with recommended adhesive
in accordance with the manufacturers' written instructions. Installers shall be
approved by the manufacturer in writing and shall have a minimum of 3 yrs experience
for each type of flooring to be installed. A minimum of 2% total quantity for
each type flooring, color and pattern shall be provided and stored within each
building for future replacement and patching. Provide manufacturers full line of
color and pattern selections, including multi-color patterns. Use the resilient
floor finishes as identified in the Project Program or as directed below.
C302004 1.1 RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING SYSTEMS
T
C302004 1.1.1
Resilient linoleum sheet flooring shall be made with natural raw

AF
materials including linseed oil, flour, and rosin or resin binders
double calendared onto natural jute backing, ASTM F2034, Type I.
Pattern and color shall extend throughout thickness of material.
Gage shall be 0.10 inch (2.5 mm). Static load limit shall be 250 psi
per ASTM F970. Seal linoleum using manufacturer's recommended sealer
for commercial application. The manufacturer's technical
representative shall review and approve each typical sample
application on-site prior to resuming the installation and shall spot
R
check each 1,196 square yards (1000 square meters) for quality
control. Work shall not commence on any portion of work until the
manufacturer's technical representative renders approval on site. A
manufacturer's five year warranty is required.
D
C302004 1.1.2
Resilient rubber sheet flooring shall be commercial quality,

dimensionally stable, wear resistant, firm and slip resistant with
integral color. The rubber sheet flooring shall be a three-layer
construction consisting of a rubber wear layer, a cushioned layer,
and a polyester backing. All components of the construction shall
be thoroughly vulcanized to prevent delamination. The rubber sheet
flooring shall conform to ASTM F1860-98 and require no wax
maintenance.
C302004 1.1.3
Resilient homogeneous vinyl sheet flooring shall be commercial

quality, 0.080 inch (2.0 mm) overall nominal gauge with a minimum wear
layer thickness of 0.066 inch (1.6 mm) and a minimum of 6 feet (1.83
m) wide. It shall be non-layered, non-backed and include a protective
urethane finish for ease of maintenance and conform to ASTM F1303,

Al Dhafra, UAE
Type II Grade 1 Class A. Seams shall be recess scribed and heat welded
with patterned or solid color weld rods depending on the contractors
design intent to camouflage, blend or accent the seam lines.
Resilient homogeneous vinyl sheet flooring shall require no wax
maintenance.
C302004 1.1.4
Resilient heterogeneous vinyl sheet flooring shall be commercial

quality, 0.080 inch (2.0 mm) overall nominal gauge with a minimum wear
layer thickness of 0.066 inch (1.6 mm) and a minimum of 6 feet (1.83
m) or 12 feet (3.6 m) wide. It shall include a protective urethane
finish for ease of maintenance and conform to ASTM F1303, Type I Grade
1 Class A. Seams shall be recess scribed and heat welded with
patterned or solid color weld rods depending on the contractor's
design intent to camouflage, blend or accent the seam lines.
Resilient heterogeneous vinyl sheet flooring shall require no wax
maintenance.
C302004 1.2 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING SYSTEM
T
C302004 1.2.1
AF
Resilient vinyl composition tile (VCT) shall be commercial grade,
asbestos free, with a nominal overall gauge of 1/8 inch (3 mm) and
a wear layer thickness of 1/8 inch (3 mm) nominal. The tile shall be
manufactured in accordance with ASTM F 1066, Type II, Comp. 1, Class
2, through pattern. Tile shall be finished in accordance with
manufacturers written instructions.
C302004 1.2.2
R
Resilient static dissipative vinyl composition tile (SDT) shall be

of commercial grade, asbestos free, with a nominal overall gauge of
1/8-inch (3 mm) and a wear layer thickness of 1/8-inch (3 mm) nominal;
D
with an antistatic additive. The SDT tile shall conform to ASTM F1066,
Class 2 through pattern. The flooring shall be installed with
recommended adhesive and accessories; and finished in accordance with
the manufacturer's written instructions. Use SDT floors in computer
areas or areas with sensitive electronic where the Project Program
requires tile.
C302004 1.2.3
Resilient solid vinyl tile/plank shall be 0.1 inch (2.5 mm) thick,
with a vinyl wear layer of 0.040 inches (1.mm) and shall be planks
or square tiles. It shall include a protective urethane finish for
ease of maintenance and conform to ASTM E648, Type III, Class 1 and
ASTM F1700, Class III. Provide vinyl flooring that is easily cleaned
with off-the-shelf products. Surface finishes requiring
manufacturer supplied or special order cleaning solutions are not
acceptable. Vinyl flooring shall have a marble, granite, stone,
terrazzo or wood grain pattern. A manufacturer's 25-year min
warranty is required. Products must meet the Buy American Act and be

Al Dhafra, UAE
manufactured in ISO 9001 and ISO 14001 compliant factories.
C302004 1.2.4
Resilient rubber tile shall be 100% synthetic rubber with color

through, slip resistance formulation, with a minimum base thickness
of 0.125 inch (3.2 mm) and a minimum stud height of 0.024 inch (0.6
mm). Rubber tile shall conform to ASTM F1344, Class I and ASTM E648,
Class 1. The product shall require no wax maintenance. A
manufacturer's 10-year warranty is required for a raised round or
square surface profile. A manufacturer's 5-year warranty is required
for other surface textures with slip resistant formulation.
C302004 1.2.5
Resilient athletic rubber tile shall be 100% synthetic heavy rubber

or recycled crumb rubber tile, 3/8 inch (9 mm) thick. Rubber tile shall
conform to ASTM F1344 for recycled crumb rubber tile. The product
shall require no wax maintenance. A manufacturers 2-year warranty
is required. Use rubber tile flooring in weight and exercise rooms.
T
C302004 1.2.6
AF
Resilient linoleum tile shall be made with natural raw materials
including linseed oil, flour, and rosin or resin binders double
calendared onto synthetic jute backing, ASTM F2034, Type I. Pattern
and color shall extend throughout thickness of material. Gage shall
be 0.10 inch (2.5 mm). Static load limit shall be 250 psi per ASTM
F970. Seal linoleum using manufacturer's recommended sealer for
commercial application. The manufacturer's technical
representative shall review and approve each typical sample
R
application on-site prior to resuming the installation and shall spot
check each 1,196 square yards (1000 square meters) for quality
control. Work shall not commence on any portion of work until the
manufacturer's technical representative renders approval on site. A
D
manufacturer's 5-year warranty is required.
C302005 CARPETING
C302005 1.1 GENERAL
Installer(s) shall be approved by the manufacturer in writing. Carpet

manufacturer shall be established and in good standing with the industry.
A minimum of 5% total quantity for each color and pattern shall be provided
and stored within the building for future replacement patching.
C302005 1.2 CARPET PILE FIBER
Provide one of the following:
a. 100% premium branded, yarn-dyed, Type 6.6 continuous hollow filament

nylon
b. 100% premium branded, solution-dyed, Type 6 or Type 6.6 continuous
hollow filament nylon

Al Dhafra, UAE
c. 100% premium branded, combination yarn dyed and solution-dyed, Type

6 or Type 6.6 continuous hollow filament nylon
C302005 1.3 CARPET BACKING REQUIREMENTS
a. Provide manufacturer's standard high performance carpet backing.

b. Moisture resistant carpet backing shall pass the 24 hour British Spill
Test.
c. Moisture proof carpet backing shall pass the 10,000 Impacts Test.
d. Provide moisture resistant carpet backing with an attached urethane
cushion, minimum 18 lb. density.
e. Provide moisture proof carpet backing with integral high density
cushion of thermoplastic, urethane, or PVC.
C302005 1.4 CARPET PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS
a. Flammability: Carpet shall meet the Critical Radiant Flux

Classification of not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm. when tested in
accordance with ASTM E648. Carpet shall generate less than 450 rating
when tested in accordance with ASTM E662
T
b. Static Control: Carpet shall include a permanent static control
system to control static build-up to less than 3.0 KV in accordance
with AATCC-134.
c.
AF
Dimensional Stability: Carpet shall be permanently dimensionally
stable with no delamination of components or any edge raveling or
zippering. Edge Ravel: Minimum 1 lb. loop pile only - ASTM D-7267;
Delamination: Minimum 3.5 lb. per inch of width - ASTM D-3936; Tuft
Bind: Minimum 10 lb. average tuft bind for loop pile - ASTM D-1335;
Tuft Bind: Minimum 8 lb. average tuft bind for (Modular Tile) loop
pile - ASTM D-1335.
d. Colorfastness to Crocking: Not less than 4, wet and dry, per
R
AATCC-165.
e. Colorfastness to Light: Not less than 4 after 40 AFU (AATCC fading
units) per AATCC-16.
f. Antimicrobial Activity: Not less than 0.08-inch (2-mm) halo of
D
inhibition for gram-positive bacteria; not less than 0.04-inch (1-mm)

halo of inhibition for gram-negative bacteria; no fungal growth, per
AATCC-174.
g. Appearance Retention: Provide carpet with a medium scale (>3"
repeat) or large scale (>6" repeat), multi-color pattern for excellent
appearance retention and soil hiding characteristics. Heathered
yarn without a pattern is unacceptable unless approved by the NAVFAC
Interior Designer as an accent carpet.
h. Sustainability: Provide carpets with recycled fiber content, and
renewable material content in the attached cushion or backing
materials certified by an independent testing agency. Recycle Content
of the Total Product Weight: Must be either Pre-consumer or
Post-consumer content or a combination of these. Broadloom: minimum
of 10%; Modular Tile: minimum of 30%.
i. Product Sustainability Certification: To achieve superior
performance in multiple environmental attribute areas, carpet must
have third party certification in accordance with NSF/ANSI 140
Sustainable Carpet Assessment Standard at a "Gold" level minimum.
Carpet manufacturer must supply certificate as part of the procurement

Al Dhafra, UAE
documentation.
j. Indoor Air Quality: Provide carpets that meet the criteria of the
CRI "Green Label Plus" Indoor Air Quality Testing Program. Carpet
adhesive VOC's shall be less than 50 g/L..
k. Reclamation of existing carpet to be determined with potential vendor.
When carpet is replaced, submit certification documentation from the
reclamation facility to the Contracting Officer.
l. Written Warranty: Lifetime commercial warranty for texture retention
and edge raveling, zippering, de-lamination is required. Seam
preparation and adhesives shall be recommended by the carpet
manufacturer in accordance with the warranty. Contractor shall
submit a copy of the manufacturer's standard warranty to the
Contracting Officer within 60 days of BOD. Government shall be a
beneficiary of the terms of this warranty.
m. Texture Appearance Retention Rating (TARR): The carpet should be
evaluated using ASTM D-5252, Hexapod Drum Test, as the commercial
carpet test procedure and TARR classification determined by ASTM
D-7330. Carpet must meet TARR ratings specified below:
Space Definition Traffic Classification TARR Classification
T
Private Offices Moderate > 3.0 TARR
Training,
AF
Heavy > 3.0 TARR
Conference, etc.
Open Office, Severe > 3.5 TARR

Corridors,
Lobbies, etc.
R
C302005 1.5 CARPET INSTALLATION

D
Install carpet by one of the following methods in accordance the

manufacturer's recommendations and in accordance with the Carpet and Rug
Institute, CRI-104, Standard for Installation Specification of Commercial
Carpet, compatible with the construction, backing, and pattern
characteristics of each carpet provided.
a. Direct Glue Down Carpet Installation

b. Double Glue Down Carpet and Pad Installation
c. Carpet with Attached-Cushion Installation
d. Preapplied releasable "dry" adhesive system installation.
e. Stretch-In Carpet Installation with tack strips and pad
C302006 MASONRY AND STONE FLOORING
C302006 1.1 UNIT MASONRY FLOORING SYSTEM
Unit masonry flooring system and coordinating base shall be fired red clay
brick, or chemical resistant brick unit masonry flooring. Provide unit

Al Dhafra, UAE
masonry flooring systems in accordance with the Brick Industry Association

recommendations and the Tile Council of America Handbook for Ceramic Tile
Installation.
C302006 1.2 STONE FLOOR AND BASE FINISHES
C302006 1.2.1
Natural Stone Flooring and coordinating base shall be of marble,

granite, or travertine.
C302006 1.2.2
Aggregate Stone Tile and coordinating base shall be a composite of

marble or granite.
C302006 1.2.3
Install stone floor and base in accordance with the recommendations

of the Marble Institute of America, the Indiana Limestone Institute
T
of America, Inc. the National Building Granite Quarries Association,
Inc. in addition to the Tile Council of America Handbook for Ceramic
Tile Installationas applicable to the type of stone being installed.
AF
C302007 WALL BASE FINISHES
Provide a wall base for transition between floor and wall finish. If no other
type of base is required, provide rubber or vinyl straight base at carpet
installations, rubber or vinyl cove base at exposed concrete or resilient tile
floors, and a base to match the floor material at hard surface tile floors, or
as required in the project program.
R
C302007 1.1 RESILIENT WALL BASE FINISHES
C302007 1.1.1
D
All rubber wall base shall be 4 inch (100 mm) high and 1/8 inch (3.2
mm) thick as required unless indicated otherwise. The wall base shall
include inside and outside corners and shall conform to ASTM F1861-98,
Type TS. Provide wall base in rolls and not 4 foot lengths.
C302007 1.1.2
Flash-coved integral resilient sheet wall bases shall be installed

in accordance with the manufacturers' printed instructions to include
a cove stick having a minimum radius of 3/4 inch (19 mm) and finished
with an approved cap strip.
C302007 1.2 CARPET WALL BASE FINISHES
Carpet wall base finishes shall consist of a strip of carpet matching or

contrasting adjacent carpet, 4 inch (100 mm) high, with the top edge finished
with an aluminum or vinyl edge profile; or an edge binding material matching
the carpet.

Al Dhafra, UAE
C302007 1.3 WOOD BASE FINISHES
Wall base shall be a minimum of 3-1/2 inches (90 mm) high and AWI custom
grade hardwood molding with mitered inside and outside corners. Refer to
C302008 - 1.1.2 for wood finishes.
C302007 1.4 STONE AND MARBLE BASE FINISHES
Stone and marble wall base shall coordinate with the adjacent flooring and
shall be 4 inch (89 mm) and 3/4 inch (19 mm) thick.
C302007 1.5 TILE BASE FINISHES
Coordinate tile base with ceramic wall and floor tile for color, material
match and modularity. Include all pre-manufactured trim pieces, special
shapes, caps, stops, and returns to provide a complete installation. Provide
coordinating wall, base and floor tile for curb construction at showers.
C302008 STAIR FINISHES
T
C302008 1.1 RESILIENT STAIR TREADS, RISERS AND LANDINGS
Refer to C302004 for resilient landing finishes. Provide rubber risers to

AF
match treads or one piece tread/risers. Provide treads with raised patterns
and visually impaired nosing inserts as required.
C302008 1.2 PORCELAIN AND STONE STAIR TREADS, RISERS AND LANDINGS
Refer to C302001 and C302006 for porcelain and stone stair finishes. Provide
treads with textured surfaces or raised patterns and visually impaired
nosing inserts as required.
R
C302008 1.3 CARPETED STAIR TREADS, RISERS AND LANDINGS
Refer to C302005 for carpeted stair finishes. Provide dense padding on treads
D
and nosings for increased appearance retention and durability.
C302009 FLOOR TOPPINGS AND TRAFFIC MEMBRANES
Assemblies include floor toppings and membrane systems.
C302009 1.1 REFLECTIVE, CHEMICAL AND SLIP RESISTANT FLOOR SYSTEMS
C302009 1.1.1 Thin Film Floor Coating
The Designer of Record shall utilize UFGS Specification Section 09

67 23.15, Fuel Resistive Resinous Flooring, 3-Coat System, for the
project specification submittal and for test patch, surface
preparation, and installation requirements. Use MPI Product #212
"Thin Film Flooring System for Aircraft Maintenance Facilities" for
product specifications.
C302009 1.1.2 Dry Shake Floor Topping

Al Dhafra, UAE
System shall be a nonferrous, non-oxidizing metallic aggregate,

dry-shake surface hardener system consisting of specially processed
cementitious binder, plasticizer, and water-reducing admixtures,
formulated and processed under the stringent quality control of the
manufacturer. The hardener shall be proportioned and sealed in
standard moisture resistant bags. The manufacturer shall guarantee
their aggregate to be free of rust, corrosive materials, oil,
petroleum, or other water-base materials when delivered. The
manufacturer shall replace any material found to contain any such
materials, or any other material, which is deemed unsatisfactory.
The manufacturer shall provide a full-time technical representative,
qualified in designing and adjusting concrete mixes, to assist in the
application of the aggregate surface hardener system. A mono
molecular surface evaporation retardant film, as recommended by ACI
305R and ACI 308R, shall be provided for use under drying conditions,
due to high concrete or ambient temperatures, low humidity, high
winds, and so forth. This includes heated interiors during cold
weather, to aid in maintaining concrete moisture during the early
placement stages of the plastic concrete. Retarder shall be
certified by its manufacturer to be compatible with the surface
T
hardener and shall be used in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations. Curing and sealing materials and procedures shall
be as recommended by the manufacturer of the aggregate surface
AF
hardener system and ASTM C309 or ASTM C1315. All installation shall
be in accordance with manufacturers instructions. Coordinate the
concrete mix design with the dry shake floor topping manufacturer to
optimize bond of floor finish to slab. Spread topping mix with a
mechanical spreader.
C302010 HARDENERS AND SEALERS

R
C302010 1.1 HARDENED AND SEALED CURE CONCRETE FLOORS
Harden and seal concrete floors in accordance with the finished floor
manufacture requirements. Utilize other methods of concrete curing if the
D
floor finish manufacturer does not recommend a chemical hardener or sealer.

Concrete floors that can utilize a hardener-sealer and will be exposed to
traffic shall receive a minimum of two coats of hardener-sealer curing agent
for dust protection. These hardener-sealer-cured floors shall be finished
with a curing agent that shall penetrate the concrete to permanently seal
the floor against moisture and the penetration of contaminants. The curing
agent shall be non-toxic, non-flammable, and non-combustible and shall be
installed in accordance with the manufacturers printed instructions. The
finished floor shall be dust-free.
C302010 1.2 COLORED CONCRETE FLOORS
Colored concrete floors shall include a colored pigment either applied as

a topical dye; or a concrete topping with integral color pigment; or a dry
shake pigment application, as required by the project program. Concrete
floor shall be trowel applied in a pattern, or shall include grit for slip
resistance.
C302011 RAISED ACCESS FLOORING

Al Dhafra, UAE
C302011 1.1 FLOORING SUPPORT SYSTEM
Design support system to allow for 360 degree clearance in laying out cable
and cutouts for service to machines and so that panel and stringer together
take up maximum of 2 inches (50 mm).
C302011 1.1.1 Pedestals, Shafts, and Caps
Provide pedestals of steel or aluminum, each capable of carrying 4,960

pounds (2250 kg) axial load without permanent deformation. Provide
permanent factory applied corrosion resistant finish for pedestals
made of ferrous materials. Provide base plate not less than 4 inch
by 4 inch by 1/8 inches (100 mm by 100 mm by 3 mm) thick, welded to
shaft of pedestal. Approved die-formed bases of equivalent load
spreading capacity and bearing area may be provided in lieu of flat
base plates. Provide shafts to support design loads. Provide Pedestal
Caps designed to fit precisely over pedestal shafts and to interlock
with panels and stringers to prevent tilting, rocking, or vibrating
of panels when live load is applied. Provide pedestals with adjusting
T
threads or other devices that will permit leveling of floor system
with adjustment range of approximately 2 inches (50 mm). Provide lock
nuts, set screws, or other locking devices to positively lock final
AF
pedestal vertical adjustments in place, independent of floor panels.
Do not use self-tapping screws, snap type connections, or
spring-action lock-nuts. All adhesives used shall be as recommended
by the manufacturer.
C302011 1.1.2 Stringers
Fabricate from rolled or formed galvanized steel conforming to ASTM

R
A591/A592M. Incorporate interlocking pedestal and stringers in
pedestal stringer system, providing positive seating of panels to
prevent tilting, rocking, or vibrating of panels when live load is
applied. Provide stringers that can be added or removed after floor
D
is in place. Fasten end of each stringer and mid-point of each four

foot stringer positively to pedestal heads, using manufacturer's
standard screws. Provide screws that are removable from top.
C302011 1.2 FLOOR PANELS
Provide interchangeable 24 inch by 24 inch (610 mm by 610 mm) square module

panels capable of supporting design loads. Panels shall be of weight that
can readily be removed and handled by one person using lifting tool furnished
by access floor manufacturer. Panel finish surface to be Grade HW 120 high
pressure plastic laminate conforming to NEMA LD. Use either factory
attached carpet tile, factory attached - static dissipative grounded carpet
tile or field installed carpet tile with seams overlapping the access floor
grid panels or to transition areas where only part of the space is recessed
for access floor.
a. Aluminum Panels - ASTM B85, SC84A, die-cast or extruded construction

for rooms with MRI equipment.

Al Dhafra, UAE
b. Steel Panels - Die-formed construction. Weld flat steel top sheet to

one or more formed steel stiffener sheets. Provide zinc-coating conforming
to ASTM A591/A591M, Class C, with manufacturer's standard corrosive
resistant electrically conductive epoxy paint finish . Wood, plastic and
other combustible products are prohibited.
c. Cementitious or Concrete Filled Formed Steel Panels Entirely

non-combustible steel shell and cementitious or concrete fill, corrosive
resistant inside and out. Seal cut edges in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations.
d. All panels to be manufactured in USA and individually labeled "Made

in USA"
C302011 1.2.1 Gravity Held Factory Finished Panels with Bolted Stringer
Understructure
Fasten end of each stringer and mid-point of each four foot stringer
positively to pedestal heads, using manufacturer's standard screws.
Provide corner lock system for all general office (bare for carpet
T
tile) applications with screws that are removable from top.
C302011 1.3 GROUNDING

AF
Ground access floor system for safety hazard and static suppression.
Connection of access floor support system to building grounding electrodes
is specified in another section of this RFP. Provide positive contact
between components for safe, continuous electrical grounding of entire floor
system. Total system resistance from wearing surface of floor to building
grounding electrode shall be within the range of 0.5 megohms to 20,000
megohms for computer rooms, electronics offices, data centers and control
R
rooms, 0.2 megohms to 2.0 megohms for clean rooms and laboratories.
C302011 1.4 THRESHOLD(S)

D
Provide interior thresholds of nonferrous materials where flooring

materials or floor levels change.
C302011 1.5 RAMPS
Provide ramps of required slip resistance and slope conforming to ATBCB ADA
Title III.
C302011 1.6 INSTALLATION
Install access floor system and accessories under supervision of the access
flooring manufacturers authorized representative to insure rigid, firm
installation free of vibration, rocking, rattle, squeaks, and other
unacceptable performance. Install in accordance with the following;
a. Set pedestal in adhesive as recommended by the access flooring

manufacturer to provide full bearing of the pedestal base on the sub
floor.
b. Layout floor panel installation to keep the number of cut panels at

Al Dhafra, UAE
the floor perimeter at a minimum. Scribe panel assemblies at the

perimeter to provide a close fir with no voids greater than 1/18" where
panels abut vertical surfaces. At spaces where access floor connects
to the walls provide connection detail that seals the access floor
to the wall to reduce air leakage.
c. Secure grid member to pedestal heads in accordance with access floor
manufacturers instructions.
d. Thoroughly clean up dust, dirt and construction debris caused by floor
installation.
e. Level installed access floor to within 0.060" of true level over the
entire area and within 0.10" in any 10" distance.
C3030 CEILING FINISHES
Refer to C3040 "INTERIOR PAINTING AND SPECIAL COATINGS" for painted ceiling
finishes.
C303001 ACOUSTICAL CEILING TILES AND PANELS
C303001 1.1 ACOUSTICAL CEILING PANELS
T
All acoustical ceiling panels shall be 24 inch by 24 inch (610 mm by 610
mm), with a minimum light reflectance of .75 (except as noted), Class A,
AF
flame spread 25 or less and smoke development of 50 or less, ASTM E84. All
acoustical ceiling panels shall have minimum 60% recycled content except
as noted. Acoustical ceiling panels shall conform to ASTM E1264. Provide
square edge except as noted.
C303001 1.1.1
For typical open office areas, conference rooms, executive offices,

R
provide non-asbestos mineral composition acoustical ceiling panels
of Type III with factory-applied standard washable painted finish or
Type IV with factory-applied plastic membrane-faced vinyl, Form: 1,
2, or 3. Provide reveal edge tiles unless otherwise noted.
D
C303001 1.1.2
For typical humid areas such as toilets, kitchens, fitness and locker
rooms, provide non-asbestos mineral or glass composition acoustical
ceiling panels bonded with ceramic, moisture resistant thermo-setting
resin, or other moisture resistant material with factory-applied
standard washable painted finish; and recycled content: minimum of
40%.
C303001 1.1.3
For areas with very high humidity, heavy soiling, staining, impact
abrasion, or limited security concerns, such as bachelor's quarters,
laundry rooms, or maintenance shops, provide Type V, Steel or Type
VII, aluminum faces with white baked on enamel finish, and
non-asbestos mineral composition absorbent backing.
C303001 1.1.4

Al Dhafra, UAE
For areas requiring a concealed grid system, provide non-asbestos

mineral composition acoustical ceiling panels of Type III with
factory-applied standard washable painted finish or Type IV with
factory-applied plastic membrane-faced vinyl, Form: 1, 2, or 3; Size:
12 inch by 12 inch by 5/8 inch (305 mm by 305 mm by 19 mm), Edge: for
concealed grid installation.
C303001 1.1.5
Provide NRC and CAC ratings as follows:
Type of space Minimum NRC Minimum CAC
Open Office .70 35-39

Areas,
Auditoriums
Conference .60 35-39

Rooms,
T
Classrooms
Activity .60 35-39

spaces,
AF
Lobbies,
Corridors
Executive and .60 35-39

Private
Offices
R
Toilets .50 35-39
Kitchens .50 35-39

D
Fitness/Locke .50 35-39

r Rms
All other .50 35-39

spaces
Base the tested NRC value on Mounting Type E-400 of ASTM E795.
C303002 GYPSUM WALLBOARD CEILING FINISHES
Conform to specifications, standards and requirements in accordance with Gypsum

Association GA 214, GA 216 and GA 224. Provide asbestos free materials only.
Provide featured edge gypsum board on all gypsum surfaces that flatness of joints
will be visible, such as up-lighted ceilings, window lighted ceilings, and as
recommended by the manufacturer. Provide Type X gypsum board in fire rated
assemblies.

Al Dhafra, UAE
C303002 1.1 REGULAR GYPSUM BOARD
ASTM C36/C36M and ASTM C1396/C1396M, 1/2 or 5/8 inch(12.7 mm or 15.9 mm)
thick, tapered edge. Provide 5/8 inch (15.9 mm) for all projects except
for single family residential, which may utilize 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) if other
requirements, such as sound control, are met.
C303002 1.2 MOISTURE RESISTANT GYPSUM BOARD
ASTM C630/C630M, 1/2 or 5/8 inch (12.7 mm or 15.9 mm) thick, tapered edges.
Use for ceilings in humid areas. Do not use as a substrate in tiled areas
where tile will be exposed to direct moisture contact or condensation
accumulation. Support moisture resistant gypsum board at 12 inches (305 mm)
on center. Provide 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) for single-family residential
projects only. Provide 5/8 inch (15.9 mm) for all other projects.
C303002 1.3 FOIL BACKED GYPSUM BOARD
ASTM C1396/C1396M 1/2 or 5/8 inch (12.7 mm or 15.9 mm) thick in residential
construction, and 5/8 inch (15.9 mm) thick in non-residential construction,
T
tapered edges for layers exposed to view, square edges for concealed layers.
Seal joints in foil backing to other panels and adjoining materials as
recommended by the panel manufacturer.
AF
Alternative to foil backed gypsum board in Secured Areas: Field applied
foil faced barrier material is an acceptable alternative for pre
manufactured foil backed gypsum board. Provide a continuous composite
multilayer barrier with a woven polyethylene sheet sandwiched between two
sheets of solid reflective aluminum surfaces. Shielding effectiveness
tested in accordance with IEEE 229/ ASTM D4935. Install barrier in
accordance with manufactures instructions
R
C303002 1.4 CEMENTITIOUS BACKING UNITS
ANSI A108.11 and ANSI A118.9, 1/2 or 5/8 inch (12.7 mm or 15.9 mm) thick;
D
use for adhesive applied ceramic tile in wet areas (tubs, shower enclosures,
saunas, steam rooms, gang shower rooms, or for shower areas with a veneer
plaster finish. Support cementitious backing units at 12 inches (305 mm)
on center. Provide screws specifically designed for use with cement panels.
C303002 1.5 IMPACT RESISTANT GYPSUM BOARD
Reinforced gypsum panel with imbedded fiber mesh or polycarbonate resin

thermoplastic backing, 5/8 inch (15.9mm) thick, tapered edges, in accordance
with Structural Failure Test; ASTM E695 or ASTM D2394 and Indentation Test;
ASTM D5420 or ASTM D1037. For use whenever gypsum board partitions are
allowed for barracks, training facilities, and industrial facilities.
Provide metal framing of 20-gauge minimum. Provide fasteners that meet
manufacturer requirements and specifications. Impact resistant gypsum
board shall have a flame spread rating of 25 or less and a smoke developed
rating of 50 or less, ASTM E84. Finish with a high strength veneer plaster.
C303002 1.6 TEXTURED CEILING FINISH SYSTEM

Al Dhafra, UAE
Applied textured ceiling finish shall be plaster based. Refer to paragraph

"C301002 - 1.1 GYPSUM PLASTER" for finish requirements.
C303002 1.7 JOINT TREATMENT
ASTM C475, Joint compound shall be specifically formulated and manufactured

for use with and compatible with tape, substrate and fasteners as recommended
by the manufacturer. Tape and finish gypsum board in accordance with ASTM
C840, GA 214 and GA 216. Provide premanufactured joints at all structural
expansion joints, crack control joints, and change of materials as
recommended by the manufacturer and in accordance with GA 216.
C303002 1.8 FASTENERS
ASTM C514, Fasteners shall be compatible with each type of gypsum board
material as recommended by the gypsum board manufacturer and in accordance
with GA 216 and GA 224.
C303002 1.9 ACCESSORIES
T
ASTM C1047, Fabricate from corrosion protected steel or plastic designed
for intended use. Accessories manufactured with paper flanges are not
acceptable. Flanges shall be free of dirt, grease, and other materials that
AF
may adversely affect bond of joint treatment. Provide prefinished or job
decorated materials. Install as recommended by GA 214, GA 216 and GA 224.
C303002 1.10 LEVEL OF FINISH
C303002 1.10.1
Tape and finish gypsum board in accordance with ASTM C840, GA 214 and
R
GA 216. Ceilings to receive a heavy-grade wall covering or heavy
textured finish before painting shall be finished to GA 214, Level
3. Ceilings without critical lighting to receive flat paints, light
textures, or wall coverings shall be finished to GA 214, Level 4.
D
Unless otherwise specified, all gypsum board walls, partitions and

ceilings shall be finished to GA 214, Level 5. Provide joint,
fastener depression, and corner treatment. Do not use fiberglass
mesh tape with conventional drying type joint compounds; use setting
or hardening type compounds only. Provide treatment for
water-resistant gypsum board as recommended by the gypsum board
manufacturer.
C303002 1.10.2
Wherever gypsum board is to receive eggshell, semigloss or gloss paint

finish, or where severe, up or down lighting conditions occur, finish
gypsum wall surface to GA 214 Level 5. In accordance with GA 214 Level
5, apply a thin skim coat of joint compound to the entire gypsum board
surface, after the two-coat joint and fastener treatment is complete
and dry.
C303003 PLASTER CEILING FINISHES

Al Dhafra, UAE
C303003 1.1 VENEER PLASTER CEILING FINISHES SYSTEM
Veneer plaster ceilings shall be gypsum plaster veneer finish to gypsum base
finishes. Refer to Section C3040 for paint system and gloss level. Provide
gypsum neat plaster, gypsum ready-mixed plaster, or high strength gypsum
plaster base coat conforming to ASTM C28. High strength gypsum plaster shall
have a compressive strength of not less than 2,500 psi, when tested dry in
C303004 WOOD CEILINGS
Not Used.
C303005 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS
C303005 1.1 EXPOSED SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILING GRID
Provide 24 inch by 24 inch (610 mm by 610 mm) aluminum or steel non-corroding

intermediate-duty standard grid system for lay-in acoustical panels (ASTM
C635). Finish shall be factory applied white baked enamel. Provide
T
manufacturer's hold down clips for fire rated assemblies and wall or edge
molding. Hang grid system as recommended by manufacturer but with no less
than 0.106 inch (2.7 mm) diameter wires (ASTM A641A, A641M, Class 1), or
AF
with one by 3/16 inch (4.76 mm) galvanized steel straps conforming to ASTM
A653A, A653M (for light commercial zinc coating) or ASTM A366A, A366M (with
an electrodeposited zinc coating, Type RS). Use ASTM A580/A580M, composition
302 or 304, condition annealed stainless steel, 0.106 inches (2.7 mm) in
diameter over high humidity areas such as commercial kitchens and pools.
Install suspended grid system with acoustical sealant (ASTM C843,
nonstaining and ASTM C636). Recycled content shall be a minimum of 25%.
R
C303005 1.2 CONCEALED SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILING GRID
Provide 12 inch by 12 inch (305 mm by 305 mm) aluminum or steel non-corroding

intermediate-duty concealed grid system for lay-in acoustical panels (ASTM
D
C635). Finish shall be factory applied white baked enamel. Provide

manufacturers wall or edge molding. Hang grid system as recommended by
manufacturer but no less than with 0.106 inch (2.7 mm) diameter wires (ASTM
A641A, A641M, Class 1), or with one by 3/16 inch (4.76mm) galvanized steel
straps conforming to ASTM A653A, A653M (for light commercial zinc coating)
or ASTM A366A, A366M (with an electrodeposited zinc coating, Type RS).
Install suspended grid system with acoustical sealant (ASTM C843,
nonstaining) and in accordance with ASTM C636. Recycled content shall be
a minimum of 25%.
C303005 1.3 SUSPENDED AND FURRED CEILING SYSTEMS
ASTM C841 (for lath); ASTM C645 (for GWB).
Provide steel materials for metal support systems with galvanized coating
per ASTM A653/A653M, G60; aluminum coating ASTM A463/A463M, T1-25; or a 55%
aluminum-zinc coating. Provide suspended ceiling framing in accordance
with ASTM C754, except framing members shall be 16 inches (400mm) unless
otherwise noted.

Al Dhafra, UAE
C303006 METAL STRIP CEILINGS
Not Used.
C303090 OTHER CEILING AND CEILING FINISHES
C3040 INTERIOR COATINGS AND SPECIAL FINISHES
Apply coatings directly to all non-prefinished surfaces of the interior

construction. Comply with Master Painters Institute requirements for surface
degradation analysis, surface preparation, paint and coating selection, paint
application restrictions for substrate materials, and paint application.
C304001 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
All paint shall be suitable in accordance with the Master Painter Institute (MPI)
standards for the interior architectural surface being finished. The current MPI,
"Approved Product List" as of the date of contract award, will be used to determine
compliance with the submittal requirements of this specification. The Contractor
may choose to use a more current MPI "Approved Product List"; however, only one
T
list may be used for the entire contract. All coats on a particular substrate,
or a paint system, must be from a single manufacturer. No variation from the MPI
Approved Products List is acceptable.
AF
Select paint systems for the project in accordance with the MPI Architectural
Painting Decision Tree available on the Whole Building Design Guide. Use this
interactive MPI Decision Tree website to identify applicable paint system(s) for
the project. The MPI Decision Tree identifies paint systems for each interior or
exterior coated surface in "Normal" or "Aggressive" environmental conditions and
generally lists the applicable paint systems in descending order of performance.
The paint system at the top of each substrate list generally indicates the highest
R
performing acceptable coating system.
Choose the "Aggressive" environmental conditions in the MPI Decision Tree for
exterior systems that are used in moist humid conditions, abrasive conditions,
D
chemical exposure conditions, or within five miles proximity of the ocean or a

body of water. Also use "Aggressive " environmental conditions in interior spaces
that are exposed to in moist humid conditions, abrasive conditions, chemical
exposure conditions, such as bathrooms, shower rooms, kitchens, chemical storage
area, swimming pools, laundry, sanitary areas, commercial kitchens, industrial
production areas, and hospital operating rooms provide paint systems that comply
with the MPI Decision Tree "Aggressive" environmental conditions.
Comply with the following rules when determining the appropriate paint or coating
system from the MPI Decision Tree:
a. Some of these paint systems are identified with a "NAVFAC Anchor". This
"NAVFAC Anchor" indicates the minimum performing system that NAVFAC will accept
for that substrate and environmental conditions.
b. When multiple "NAVFAC Anchors" are indicated on a certain substrate and

environmental condition, provide the "NAVFAC Anchor" paint or coating system that
is most appropriate for the facility use.

Al Dhafra, UAE
c. If only one MPI Decision Tree choice is available for a certain substrate
and environmental condition with no indicated NAVFAC preference, provide that sole
option for NAVFAC projects.
d. If the MPI Decision Tree provides multiple choices and no NAVFAC preference
is denoted, refer to the Additional RFP Requirements below to determine level of
performance.
e. If the MPI Decision Tree does not identify all paint system applicable to
the facility, utilize the MPI Architectural Painting, Exterior Systems Manual to
identify other appropriate paint systems for the project. Utilize the "Premium
Grade" systems and comply with all limitations stated in the MPI "Approved Product
List" for each paint product. Products having an MPI VOC Range E3 shall be given
preferential consideration over lower VOC Ranges. Use higher performing paint
systems unless the lower performing paint system can be justified based on a
lifecycle cost to include surface preparation, application, disposal,
environmental impact, and required recoating cycles. Only use paint products that
have been tested for MPI'S "DETAILED PERFORMANCE" or "EVALUATED PERFORMANCE ".
Do not use products that have only been tested for "INTENDED USE".
T
f. If an "Aggressive" environmental condition option is not available in the
MPI Decision Tree for a certain substrate, use the "Normal" environmental condition
option.
AF
g. Refer to the Additional Exterior Paint and Coating System Requirements below
for further system requirements.
Paints and coatings shall comply with Master Painters Institute Green Performance
Standard GPS-1-12 which is available at the following website;
http://www.specifygreen.com/EvrPerf/EnvironmentalPerformance.html . Provide
Interior flat intermediate and topcoats of a maximum of 50 g/L VOC and interior
R
non-flat intermediate and topcoats of a maximum 150 g/L VOC. Choose paints that
provide performance and are environmentally friendly by using total VOC budgeting
to analyze the total impact of all flat, non-flat and special purpose coatings
on the project.
D
C304001 1.1 MPI GLOSS LEVELS
Gloss levels shall comply with the MPI system of determining gloss as defined
in the Evaluation sections of the MPI Manuals. Utilize the performance
characteristics of the paint gloss and sheen to categorize paint rather than
manufactures' description of his product. The MPI Gloss Levels are
indicated by the notation G1, G2, G3, G4, G5, G6, or G7. G1 is not used
by Navy.
The MPI Decision Tree indicates a default gloss level for each paint system,
however consider the appearance, anticipated conditions, and need for
cleaning when choosing the correct gloss level for each coated surface of
the project. Comply with the following guidance in choosing the appropriate
gloss level.
a. Use G2 "Velvet-like" Flat for ceilings, residential walls away from

human contact and low traffic areas.

Al Dhafra, UAE
b. Use G3 "Eggshell-like" in high traffic areas for ceilings and walls,

when human contact with the wall is expected but limited, and for dark accent
colors.
c. Use G5 Semigloss for walls, doors and trim for high durability and clean
ability and when a surface is expected to have routine human contact.
d. Use G6 Gloss only in special situations such as piping identification

or special effects.
The MPI Gloss and Sheen Standard values are measured per ASTM D523, and are
as follows:
Gloss Level Number Gloss@ 60 Degrees Sheen@85

Degrees
Gloss Level 1(G1) - Matte or Flat Max.5 units Max.10 units
Gloss Level 2(G2) - "Velvet-like" Flat Max. 10 units 10-35 units
Gloss Level 3(G3) - "Eggshell-like" Max. 10-25 units 10-35 units
Gloss Level 4(G4) - "Satin-like" Max. 20-35 units Min. 35 units
Gloss Level 5(G5) - Semi-Gloss 35-70 units
T
Gloss Level 6(G6) - Gloss 70-85 units
Gloss Level 7(G7) - High Gloss More than 85 units
AF
C304001 1.2 MPI SYSTEM DESIGNATIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
The MPI coating system number in each Division is found in either the MPI
Architectural Painting Specification Manual or the Maintenance Repainting
Manual and defined as an interior system (INT/RIN).
a. INT designates an interior coating system for new surfaces.

b. RIN designates an interior coating system used in repainting projects
R
or over existing coating systems.
c. DSD - the MPI short-term designation for Degree of Surface Degradation
as defined in the Assessment sections in the MPI Maintenance
Repainting Manual. Degree of Surface Degradation designates the MPI
D
Standard for description and appearance of existing condition of

surfaces to be painted. This DSD classification is used to determine
the proper surface preparation necessary for painting.
C304001 1.3 SURFACE PREPARATION
Comply with the "Interior Surface Preparation" section of the MPI

Architectural Painting Specification Manual or the "Interior Surface
Preparation section of the MPI Maintenance Repainting Manual. All
suggestive language such as "may" or "should" are deleted from the standard
and "must" or "shall" inserted in its place. Suggestive language such as
"recommended" or "advisable" is deleted from the standard and "require" or
'required" inserted in its place. The results of these wording substitutions
change this document to required procedures. For surface preparation,
determine a MPI DSD Assessment of each surface and comply with the MPI Surface
Preparation Requirements relating to the assessments. Notwithstanding MPI
requirements, clean interior ferrous metal to a SSPC SP 10 level (near white)
that have aggressive chemical environments (SSPC Zones 3A, 3B, 3C, 3D, and
3E) or waterfront exposure to open structures (SSPC Zones 2A or 2B).

Al Dhafra, UAE
Examples of these types of facilities are indoor water training facilities,

indoor swimming pools, and open or mostly open waterfront maintenance
buildings/ waterfront warehouses/ canopies.
Remove dirt, splinters, loose particles, grease, oil, and other foreign
matter and substances deleterious to coating performance as specified for
each substrate before application of paint or surface treatments. For
existing buildings, use MPI Maintenance Repainting Manual to determine the
coatings that need to be removed. Remove deteriorated or loose coatings
before repainting begins. Oil and grease shall be removed prior to
mechanical cleaning. Cleaning shall be programmed so that dust and other
contaminants will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces. Exposed ferrous
metals such as nail heads on or in contact with surfaces to be painted with
water-thinned paints, shall be spot-primed with a suitable
corrosion-inhibitive primer capable of preventing flash rusting and
compatible with the coating specified for the adjacent areas.
C304001 1.4 ADDITIONAL INTERIOR PAINT AND COATING SYSTEMS
In addition to the MPI Decision Tree, comply with the following paint system
T
requirements:
C304001 1.4.1 PAVEMENT COATINGS

AF
(1) INT 3.2 Concrete Horizontal Surfaces
Normal Environmental Conditions; Pigmented
Provide road and parking lot pavement marking in accordance with UFGS
32 17 23.00 20, Pavement Markings.
R
C304001 1.4.2 DRESSED LUMBER
Provide Pigmented systems for Composite Wood Doors (Fiberboard) and

trim. Do not use Normal/ Aggressive; Clear and Normal/ Aggressive
D
Stain finishes.
C304007 SPECIAL COATINGS TO WALLS
C304007 1.1 HIGH PERFORMANCE ARCHITECTURAL COATING (HIPAC)
HIPAC shall be a durable, organic system applied to a continuous (seamless)

high-build film and cure to a hard glaze finish. They shall be resistant
to continuous heat and humidity, abrasion, staining, chemicals, and
biological growth. Coating shall be installed as a complete system, and
as recommended by the manufacturer and have a flame spread index of not more
than 25 and a smoke developed index of not more than 50 when tested in
accordance with ASTM E84.
C304007 1.1.1
Two-component, epoxy-polyamide shall be chemical and

corrosion-resistant, adhesive, alkali-resistant, and water-tolerant
for metal, wood, concrete, masonry surfaces, and painted surfaces

Al Dhafra, UAE
where high gloss or glaze type finish, extreme workability and

resistance to abrasion and stains is required. Minimum dry film
thickness is 3 mils for each of two coats. Furnish Gloss or Semigloss
finish. Maximum volatile organic compounds (VOC) shall be 340
grams/liter.
C304007 1.1.2
Single Component, Moisture-Curing Urethane shall be a flexible,

abrasion- and impact-resistant, use for floors, walls, machinery,
equipment and other surfaces where good abrasion resistance, color
retention, gloss retention, graffiti resistance and good resistance
to acids, alkalis, solvents, strong cleaners and sanitizers, fuel and
chemicals are necessary. Can also be used on concrete floors, brick
and masonry surfaces (properly conditioned), metals (properly
primed), and wood (properly prepared and sealed.) Minimum dry film
thickness is 3 mils for each of 3 coats. Use Type I, Aliphatic, for
exterior use except for oily or resinous exterior wood surfaces. Use
Type II, Aromatic, for interior use.
T
C304007 1.2 IMPACT RESISTANT WALL FINISHES
Provide textured acrylic architectural coating system: a seamless textured

AF
acrylic water-based coating system, having a thickness of at least 20 mils,
on surfaces scheduled to receive it. System shall be composed of pure
acrylic polymers, silica dioxide, ethylene dioxide and pigments. System
shall have a Barcoll Hardness Index of 38.0 or greater, smoke contribution
of 7.0 or less, and have water vapor permeability of 27.5 English Perms or
greater when tested in accordance with ASTM E96. (MPI 42) Coating system
must have been on the market and successfully used in commercial applications
for a minimum of 10 years.
R
C304007 1.2.1 CMU Application
High Performance seamless interior acrylic coating system shall be

D
used as an interior wall finish over CMU that has been joint-filled
and smoothed with a water resistant manufactured recommended
compound. Coating system to be mold and mildew resistant, flame spread
15 or less per ASTM-E84 and have a minimum final film thickness of
7 mils.
C304007 1.2.2 Gypsum Wallboard Application
High Performance seamless interior acrylic coating system shall be

used as an interior wall finish over gypsum wallboard. Do not prime
or seal the drywall except as specifically recommended by the texture
acrylic coating manufacturer. Coating system to be mold and mildew
resistant, flame spread 8.5 or less per ASTM-E84 and have a minimum
final film thickness of 20 mils.
Finish may only be installed by factory-qualified applicators in

accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions and

Al Dhafra, UAE
recommendations, to fulfill warranty requirements. All coating system

components shall be products of the same manufacturer.
A minimum of one sample wall application shall be provided. Edges

at door and window frames shall be feathered; hard edges are
unacceptable. Upon approval of the sample wall by the project
manager, the application shall serve as a standard for the remaining
work.
The manufacturer's certified representative shall provide an on-site

training demonstration of the application and care of the finish for
the end-user's facility manager or other representatives.
T
AF
R
D

Al Dhafra, UAE
SECTION D20
PLUMBING
05/14
D20 GENERAL
D20 1.1 NARRATIVE
This section must be used in conjunction with all parts of the Design Build
(D/B) Request for Proposal (RFP) to determine the full requirements of this
solicitation.
T
This section includes the construction of interior plumbing systems. This
section covers installations inside the facility and out to the five foot
AF
line. See Section G30, Site Mechanical Utilities, for continuation of
systems beyond the five foot line.
D20 1.2 PLUMBING DESIGN GUIDANCE

R
D20 1.2.1 Government Standards

D
Federal Energy Management Program (FEMP)

UFC(s):UFC 3-401-01, Mechanical
EngineeringUFC 3-420-01, Design:
Plumbing Systems)

Buildings
PART 4 - SECTION D20 - Page 1

Al Dhafra, UAE
In addition, UFGS sections listed below, in the body of the PTS text, or
as listed on the whole building design guide (wbdg.org) website are to be
used by the Designer of Record (DOR) as a part of the design submittal. If
the UFGS products or systems are applicable to the project, the DOR shall
UFGS 22 00 00, Plumbing, General Purpose
UFGS 33 52 10, Service Piping, Fuel Systems
UFGS 33 56 10, Factory-Fabricated Fuel Storage Tanks
UFGS 22 07 19.00 40 Plumbing Piping Insulation
D20 1.3 DESIGN SUBMITTALS
T
Procedures, MED Design Instruction Manual, and UFC 3-401-01, Mechanical
Engineering.
AF
D20 1.4 CONSTRUCTION SUBMITTALS

R
Fixtures, equipment, and OMSI information for all equipment and fixtures.
D2010 PLUMBING FIXTURES

D
Plumbing fixtures shall be provided in accordance with the IBC, IPC, and as
specified. Provide EPA's "WaterSense" labeled fixtures where available.
D201001 WATER CLOSETS
D201001 1.1 FLUSH VALVE WATER CLOSETS
ASME A112.19.2, white vitreous china, siphon jet. Provide ASME A112.19.5
trim. Provide self-closing metering type flush valve, unless electronic
flush control is specified in the ESR Section D20. Electronic flush control
shall conform to UL 1951 and ASSE 1037. Flush valve shall not exceed 1.28
GPF (4.8 LPF). Handicapped fixture mounting height and appurtenances shall
be in accordance with ABA Accessibility Standard.
D201001 1.2 DUAL FUNCTION FLUSH VALVE WATER CLOSETS
ASME A112.19.2, white vitreous china, siphon jet. Provide ASME A112.19.5
trim. Provide self-closing metering type dual function flush valve, unless
electronic flush control is specified in the ESR Section D20. Electronic

Al Dhafra, UAE
flush control shall conform to UL 1951 and ASSE 1037. Dual function flush
valve shall provide a flush of 0.8 to 1.1 GPF (3.0 to 4.2 LPF) or 1.28 GPF
(4.8 LPF). Maximum flush volume shall not exceed 1.28 GPF (4.8 LPF).
Handicapped fixture mounting height and appurtenances shall be in accordance
with ABA Accessibility Standard.
D201001 1.3 FLUSH TANK WATER CLOSETS
ASME A112.19.2, white vitreous china, siphon jet. EPA "WaterSense"

labeled. Provide ASME A112.19.5 trim. Water flushing volume of the water
closet shall not exceed 1.28 GPF (4.8 LPF). Handicapped fixture mounting
height and appurtenances shall be in accordance with ABA Accessibility
Standard.
D201001 1.4 DUAL FUNCTION FLUSH TANK WATER CLOSETS
ASME A112.19.2, white vitereous china, siphon jet. Provide ASME A112.19.5
trim. Dual function flush tank water closet shall provide a dual flush that
allows a flush of 0.8 to 1.1 GPF (3.0 to 1.6 LPF) or 1.28 GPF (4.8 LPF).
Maximum flush tank volume per flush shall not exceed 1.28 GPF (4.8 LPF).
T
D201002 URINALS
AF
D201002 1.1 FLUSH VALVE URINALS
ASME A112.19.2, white vitreous china, wall-mounted, wall outlet, siphon jet,
integral trap, extended side shields. EPA "WaterSense" labeled. Provide
large diaphragm (not less than 2.625 inches (66 mm) upper chamber inside
diameter at the point where the diaphragm is sealed between the upper and
R
lower chambers) flush valve of chrome plated cast brass conforming to ASTM
B 584, including vacuum breaker and angle (control-stop) valve. Maximum
flush valve volume per flush shall not exceed 0.5 gallons per flush (1.9
lpf). Provide ASME A112.19.5 trim and ASME 112.6.1M concealed chair
D
carriers. Provide self-closing metering type flush valve, unless

electronic flush control is specified in the ESR Section D20. Electronic
flush control shall conform to UL 1951 and ASSE 1037.Handicapped fixture
mounting height and appurtenances shall be in accordance with the ABA
Accessibility Standard.
D201002 1.2 NON WATER USE URINALS
ASME A112.19.2, white vitreous china, wall-mounted, wall outlet, non-water

using, integral drain line connection, with sealed replaceable cartridge
or integral liquid seal trap insert. The urinal and trap assembly shall
maintain a sufficient barrier of a biodegradable immiscible liquid to
provide the trap seal and inhibit the backflow of sewer gases. For urinals
that use a replaceable cartridge, provide four additional cartridges for
each urinal installed. Provide an additional quart of biodegradable liquid
for each urinal installed. Provide ASME A112.6.1M concealed chair
carriers. Installation and testing shall be in accordance with the
manufacturers recommendations. Drain lines that connect to the urinal
outlet shall not be made of copper tube or pipe. Urinal design and

Al Dhafra, UAE
installation shall be ADA compliant. Slope the sanitary sewer branch line
for non-water use urinals a minimum of 1/4-inch per foot. Manufacturer
shall provide an operating manual and on-site training for the proper care
and maintenance of the urinal.
D201003 LAVATORIES
D201003 1.1 COUNTERTOP LAVATORIES
Unless integral bowl is specified elsewhere, lavatories shall be white, ASME

A112.19.2 vitreous china lavatories with minimum dimensions of 20 inches
(508 mm) wide x 18 inches (457 mm) front to rear, and self-rimming type.
Provide ASME 112.18.1 copper alloy centerset faucets unless self closing
metering or electronic control is specified in ESR section D20. Faucets
shall be EPA "WaterSense" labeled. Provide with aerator, adjustable
P-traps, and perforated grid strainers, unless pop-up drain fittings are
specified in ESR section D20.
D201003 1.2 WALL-MOUNTED LAVATORIES
T
ASME A112.19.1, white enameled cast-iron or ASME A112.19.2 white vitreous
china with ASME A112.6.1M concealed arm carrier support, with minimum
dimensions of 20 inches wide by 18 inches (508 mm wide by 457 mm) front to
AF
rear. Provide ASME 112.18.1 copper alloy centerset faucets unless self
closing metering or electronic control is specified in ESR section D20.
Faucets shall be EPA "WaterSense" labeled. Provide with aerator,
adjustable P-traps, and perforated grid strainers, unless pop-up drain
fittings are specified in ESR section D20.
D201003 1.3 HANDICAPPED LAVATORIES

R
Same as Paragraphs 1.1 or 1.2, except height and appurtenances shall be in
accordance with ABA Accessibility Standard.
D201004 SINKS
D
D201004 1.1 COUNTERTOP SINKS
ASME A112.19.3 sink, 20 gage stainless steel with integral mounting rim,
minimum dimensions of 33 inches (840 mm) wide for two compartment or 21 inches
(560 mm) wide for one compartment by 21 inches (560 mm) front to rear, with
ledge back and undersides coated with sound dampening material. Provide
top-mounted ASME A112.18.1 copper alloy faucets, swing spout with aerator,
and stainless steel drain outlets with cup strainers. Provide adjustable
P-trap with drain piping to vertical vent stack. If specified in ESR section
D20, provide UL 430 waste disposer unit in right compartment.
D201004 1.2 SERVICE SINKS
ASME A112.19.1, white enameled cast-iron or ASME A112.19.2 white vitreous

china, wall mounted and floor supported by wall outlet cast-iron P-trap,
minimum dimensions of 22 inches (560 mm) wide by 18 inches (457 mm) front
to rear with 9 inch (230 mm) splashback, and stainless steel rim guard.
Provide ASME A112.18.1 copper alloy back-mounted combination faucets with

Al Dhafra, UAE
vacuum breaker and 0.75 inch (20 mm) external hose threads.
D201004 1.3 MOP SINKS
Pre-cast terrazzo floor-mounted mop sink, 36 inches x 36 inches x 12 inches

(914 mm x 914 mm x 305 mm) shall be made of marble chips cast in white Portland
cement to a compressive strength of not less than 3625 PSI (25 mPa) 7 days
after casting. Provide brass body drains with nickel bronze strainers cast
integral with terrazzo. Provide stainless steel rim guard for mop sink.
Provide chrome-plated exposed hot and cold water faucets ASME A112.18.1
wall-mounted copper alloy faucets swing spout with 3/4 inch (20 mm) hose
connection, vacuum breaker, and pail hook. Provide mop hanger on wall above
sink suitable for four mops.
D201004 1.4 LAUNDRY SINKS
IAPMO Z124.6, plastic, two compartment, minimum dimensions of 40 inches wide

by 21 inches (1016 mm wide by 533 mm) front to rear, with floor-supported
steel mounting frame secured to wall. Provide ASME A112.18.1 copper alloy
centerset faucets, swing spout with aerator, and stainless steel drain
T
outlets with cup strainers, and 1.5 inch (40 mm) adjustable P-trap with drain
piping to vertical vent stack.
D201005 SHOWERS/TUBS
AF
D201005 1.1 ONE PIECE BATH AND SHOWER MODULES
IAPMO Z124.1.2, made of white fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP) or acrylic

with slip-resistant bathing surfaces, integral grab bar, and three walls
integrally molded in one piece. Provide outlet at left or right as necessary
to suit module arrangement. Provide pop-up drain fittings and adjustable
R
P-trap. Bathtub and shower supply fittings shall be diverter type with body
mounted from behind the wall. Provide tub fill over-rim spout with
diverter.
D
D201005 1.2 SHOWER FLOORS
Precast terrazzo or Acrylic Shower Floors: Terrazzo shall be made of marble

chips cast in white Portland cement to produce a compressive strength of
not less than 3625 psi (25 MPa) 7 days after casting. Provide brass body
drains with nickel bronze strainers cast integral with terrazzo.
D201005 1.3 BATHTUBS
ASME A112.19.1 white enameled cast-iron or porcelain steel bathtubs,

recessed type, minimum dimensions of 56 inches (1424 mm) wide by 30 inches
(762 mm) front to rear by 16 inches (406 mm) high with drain outlet for
above-the-floor drain installation. Bathtub and shower supply fittings
shall be diverter type with body mounted from behind the wall. Provide tub
over fill rim spout with diverter.
D201005 1.4 SHOWER SUPPLY FITTINGS
ASME A112.18.1, ball joint, self-cleaning, adjustable spray pattern shower

Al Dhafra, UAE
heads, connected to concealed pipe connected to copper alloy pressure

balance single control type mixing valves with front access integral
screwdriver stops. Showerhead shall be EPA "WateSense" labeled. Anchor
the mixing valves and the pipe to each showerhead in wall to prevent movement.
D201005 1.5 HANDHELD SHOWER HEAD
ASSE 1014, adjustable spray hand-held shower head with swivel fitting, 60
inch (1524 mm) minimum flexible chrome plated copper alloy hose and in-line
vacuum breaker. Provide push button flow control if specified in ESR
section D20. Provide 25 inch (635 mm) grab bar with sliding spray holder
that locks at any height.
D201006 DRINKING FOUNTAINS AND COOLERS
D201006 1.1 DRINKING FOUNTAINS
Wall mounted drinking fountain shall be constructed of white enameled cast

iron with bubbler and push button control. Handicapped fixture mounting
height and appurtenances shall be in accordance with ABA Accessibility
T
Standard.
D201006 1.2 ELECTRIC WATER COOLERS

AF
AHRI 1010, wall-mounted, bubbler style, air-cooled condensing unit, 4.0 gph
(4.20 mL per second) minimum capacity, stainless steel splash receptor,
double wall heat exchanger, and all stainless steel cabinet. Provide ASME
A112.6.1M concealed wall hangers with thru-bolts and back plates.
R
D201090 EMERGENCY FIXTURES
Pressure-compensated tempering valve is required for emergency fixtures, with

leaving water temperature setpoint adjustable throughout the range 60 to 95 degrees
D
F (15.5 and 35 degrees C) unless cold water supply meets temperature criteria.
Where indicated in ESR section D20, provide packaged, UL listed, alarm system;
including an amber strobe lamp, horn with externally adjustable loudness and horn
silencing switch, mounting hardware, and waterflow switch, assembled and prewired
for waterproof service within NEMA Type 3 or 4 enclosures or for explosion proof
service within NEMA Type 7 or 9 enclosures.
D201090 1.1 EMERGENCY SHOWER
ISEA Z358.1, wall-mounted self-cleaning, non-clogging 10 inch (250 mm)

diameter stainless steel deluge shower head with elbow, one inch (25 mm)
full-flow stay-open ball valve with pull rod and 8 inch (200 mm) diameter
ring or triangular handle, one inch (25 mm) interconnecting fittings.
D201090 1.2 EMERGENCY EYE & FACE WASH
ISEA Z358.1, wall-mounted self-cleaning, non-clogging eye and face wash with
quick opening, full-flow valves, stainless steel eye and face wash receptor.

Al Dhafra, UAE
Provide copper alloy control valves.
D201090 1.3 COMBINATION EMERGENCY SHOWER & EYEWASH
ISEA Z358.1, column mounted on a floor flange. Design combination unit so

components can be operated individually from a common fixture supply line.
Provide a self-cleaning, non-clogging 10 inch (250 mm) diameter stainless
steel deluge shower head with elbow, full flow stay-open ball valve with
pull rod and 8 inch (200 mm) diameter ring or triangular handle one inch
(25 mm) interconnecting fittings. Provide a self-cleaning, non-clogging
eye and face wash with quick opening, full-flow valves, stainless steel eye
and face wash receptor. Provide copper alloy control valves.
D2020 DOMESTIC WATER DISTRIBUTION
D202001 PIPES & FITTINGS
D202001 1.1 COPPER
Use copper tubing and fittings for pipe sizes 4 inches (100 mm) or smaller.
T
Use type L tubing above ground with solder fittings. For buried piping,
use type K tubing with solder fittings.
AF
D202001 1.2 CHLORINATED POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (CPVC)
When specified in ESR section D20, provide CPVC pipe, fittings, and solvent
cement per ASTM D 2846/D 2846M for sizes 4 inches (100 mm) and smaller.
Provide transition union connections or threaded gate valve between metallic
piping and CPVC piping.
D202002 VALVES & HYDRANTS

R
D202002 1.1 VALVES
Provide valves at water supplies to fixtures and to provide ease of

D
maintenance as required in the IPC.
D202002 1.2 HOSE BIBBS & HYDRANTS
Use non-freeze wall hydrants where the winter design temperature is at or

below freezing. Hose bibbs are acceptable for use elsewhere.
D202002 1.2.1 Hose bibbs
Angle type, copper alloy hose bibbs with vacuum breaker.
D202002 1.2.2 Wall Hydrants
Non-freeze, ASSE 1019, cast bronze, with vacuum breaker, locking

shield and tee-handle.
D202003 DOMESTIC WATER EQUIPMENT
D202003 1.1 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS

Al Dhafra, UAE
Furnish proof that each make, model/design, and size of backflow preventer
being furnished for the project is approved by and has a current "Certificate
of Approval" from the Foundation for Cross-Connection Control and Hydraulic
Research (FCCCHR)-USC. Listing of the particular make, model/design, and
size in the current FCCCHR-USC will be acceptable as the required proof.
Provide freeze protection for aboveground exterior applications in areas
where the winter design temperature is at or below freezing.
D202003 1.2 WATER HEATERS
D202003 1.2.1 Electric Water Heaters
Electric water heaters with double heating element per UL 174 for water
heaters with less than 120 gallons of storage and 200,000 btuh input.
Provide water heater per UL 1453 for commercial water heaters with
120 gallons of storage or more and 200,000 btuh input or more. Water
heaters shall be equipped with glass-lined steel tanks, high
efficiency type, insulated with polyurethane foam insulation,
replaceable anodes, and adjustable range thermostat to allow hot water
T
settings between 110 and 160 degrees F (43 and 71 degrees C). Water
heater warranty shall be a minimum of 5 years.
AF
D202003 1.2.2 Gas-Fired Water Heaters
High efficiency storage type water heaters per CSA/AM Z21.10.1 for
water heaters with less than 120 gallons of storage and input ratings
of 75,000 btuh or less. Provide water heater per CSA/AM Z21.10.3 for
commercial water heaters with 120 gallons of storage or more and input
ratings above 75,000 btuh. Water heaters shall meet AGA
requirements. Water heaters shall be equipped with glass-lined steel
R
tanks, polyurethane foam insulation, replaceable anodes, and
adjustable range thermostat to allow hot water settings between 110
and 160 degrees F (43 and 71 degrees C). Water heater warranty shall
be a minimum of 5years. Provide vent in accordance with NFPA 54.
D
D202003 1.2.3 Oil-Fired Water Heaters
UL 732 oil-fired water heaters with glass-lined steel tanks, high

efficiency type, insulated with polyurethane foam insulation,
replaceable anodes, with adjustable range thermostat to allow hot
water settings between 110 and 160 degrees F (43 and 71 degrees C).
Provide vent in accordance with NFPA 58. Oil-fired water heater
system design shall be in accordance with NFPA 31.
D202003 1.2.4 Instantaneous Water Heater (Electric)
UL 499, heater(s) shall be of the modulating, under the sink,

point-of-use type. Output temperature shall be adjustable from 40
degrees F to 160 degrees F. Heating elements shall be field
replaceable. Unit(s) shall have a 10-year warranty.
D202003 1.2.5 Steam Heat Exchangers

Al Dhafra, UAE
Double wall copper tube domestic water heating elements constructed

with air gap to atmosphere between the two walls using steam as the
heating medium exterior of the heating elements. Provide posted
operating instructions for water heaters.
D202003 1.2.6 Storage Tanks
AWWA D100, glass-lined vertical steel tanks, minimum of 125 psig (862
kPa) (gage) working pressure.
D202003 1.3 PUMPS
D202003 1.3.1 Inline Pumps
In-line circulator for service water distribution system. Factory

assembled and tested pumps constructed of materials suitable for hot
domestic water service.
D202003 1.3.2 Base Mounted Pumps
T
Potable water service, base mounted, end suction pumps with mechanical
seals and drip-proof electric motors.
AF
D202003 1.4 DOMESTIC WATER PRESSURE BOOSTER SYSTEM
Factory assembled, tested, and certified by a single manufacturer who

assumes undivided responsibility for the system to include providing
start-up services, two days instruction and furnishing related operations
and maintenance manuals. Each building shall be provided with its own
system. Each system will consist of a minimum of two pumps mounted on a
single, welded structural steel base. Provide bladder type low-flow
R
accumulator storage tank, lead-lag pump alternator selector switches and
all related controls and alarms required for safe and proper system
operation. Provide variable frequency drive pump operation.
D
D202003 1.5 EXPANSION TANKS
Steel expansion tank with potable water rated polypropylene or butyl lined
diaphragm at water heater.
D202003 1.6 WATER METERS
AWWA C701 turbine type, with register reading in liters and U.S. gallons.
D202004 1.1 PIPING INSULATION
Mineral fiber insulation on domestic hot water supply and recirculation

piping. Insulate domestic cold water piping with cellular glass insulation
(ASTM C 552, Type II, and Type III).
D202004 1.2 PIPING & EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION

Al Dhafra, UAE
In addition to the requirements in Section Z10, General Performance

Technical Specification, provide laminated plastic nameplates for valves.
Stop valves in supplies to fixtures will not require nameplates. Identify
above ground pipe with the type of service and direction of flow. Letter
size, lengths and colors shall be per ANSI A13.1.
D202005 SPECIALTIES
D202005 1.1 WASHING MACHINE CONNECTOR BOX
Recessed wall box fabricated of PVC plastic. Provide bronze dual washing
machine valve with single lever shut-off.
D202005 1.2 VALVE BOXES
For each buried valve provide cast-iron, ductile-iron box of a suitable size.
Provide cast-iron or ductile-iron cover for the box with the word "WATER"
cast on the cover.
D202005 1.3 WATER HAMMER ARRESTORS
T
PDI WH 201, water hammer arrestors in lieu of air chambers.
AF
D202005 1.4 ICEMAKER CONNECTOR BOX
Recessed wall box fabricated of PVC plastic. Provide bronze shut-off valve.
D202090 OTHER DOMESTIC WATER SUPPLY
D202090 1.1 SUPPORTS

R
Provide piping supports in accordance with the IPC.
D202090 1.2 INSPECTIONS

D
Prior to initial operation, inspect piping system for compliance with

drawings, specifications, and manufacturer's submittals.
D202090 1.3 DISINFECTION
Upon completion of the installation, disinfect all systems per the IPC.
D202090 1.4 PLUMBING SYSTEMS TESTING
Upon completion of the installation test all systems per the IPC.
D2030 SANITARY WASTE
D203001 WASTE PIPE & FITTINGS
D203001 1.1 PIPING AND FITTINGS
Cast iron hub and spigot pipe and fittings, rubber compression gasket joints
or cast-iron hubless pipe and fittings, CISPI 301 with CISPI 310 couplings.

Al Dhafra, UAE
Where indicated in ESR Section D20, plastic PVC or ABS piping, fittings,
and solvent cement per ASTM D 2665 or ASTM D 2661 may be provided. Plastic
piping shall be equipped with approved firestopping devices as required by
code.
D203001 1.2 CLEANOUTS
Provide cleanouts as required by the IPC. Material shall be consistent with

the piping system materials.
D203002 VENT PIPE & FITTINGS
Cast-iron hubless pipe and fittings, CISPI 301 with CISPI 310 couplings. Where
indicated in ESR Section D20, plastic PVC or ABS piping, fittings, and solvent
cement per ASTM D 2665 or ASTM D 2661. PVC piping shall be equipped with approved
firestopping devices as required by code. Single drainage/vent stack systems
(such as Philadelphia system) and mechanical air admittance valves are not
acceptable.
D203003 FLOOR DRAINS
T
Floor drains shall be flush strainer or extended rim type as required by the IPC.
Provide in mechanical rooms, restrooms, fire pump room, laundry room, and plumbing
AF
chase areas. Provide floor sinks in kitchens. Provide floor sinks where required
for interior air handling unit condensate drains.
D203004 SANITARY & VENT EQUIPMENT
D203004 1.1 PUMPS
D203004 1.1.1 Submersible Sump Pumps

R
Factory assembled and tested submersible type pumps for operation

under water.
D
D203004 1.1.2 Sewage Pumps
FS A-A-50555, single or duplex type to meet demand. Duplex types

shall be provided with automatic controls to alternate the operation
from one pump to the other.
D2040 RAIN WATER DRAINAGE
D204001 PIPE & FITTINGS
Cast iron hubless pipe and fittings, CISPI 301 with CISPI 310 couplings. Where
indicated in ESR Section D20, plastic PVC or ABS piping, fittings, and solvent
cement per ASTM D 2665 or ASTM D 2661 may be used. PVC piping shall be equipped
with approved firestopping devices as required by code. Size and install piping
in accordance with the IPC.
D204002 ROOF DRAINS
Roof drains shall conform to ASME A112.6.4, with dome and integral flange, and

Al Dhafra, UAE
shall have a device for making a watertight connection between roofing and
flashing.
D204003 RAIN WATER DRAINAGE EQUIPMENT
Where required by building design, provide expansion joint(s) of proper size to

receive the conductor pipe. The expansion joint shall consist of a heavy cast-iron
housing, brass or bronze sleeve.
Mineral fiber insulation on all drainage piping that may be subject to

condensation. Provide a vapor retarder. Identify aboveground pipe with the type
of service and direction of flow. Letter size, lengths and colors shall be per
ANSI A13.1.
D2090 OTHER PLUMBING SYSTEMS
D209001 SPECIAL PIPING SYSTEMS
T
D209001 1.1 NATURAL GAS PIPING
Conform to requirements of the local natural gas utility and ASME B31.8,
AF
Gas Transmission and Distribution Piping Systems, for exterior piping.
Conform to requirements of NFPA 54, National Fuel Gas Code, for interior
gas piping. Provide meter and pressure regulator in accordance with the
requirements of the local utility. Provide earthquake valve where required
by code.
D209002 ACID WASTE SYSTEMS

R
Acid-resistant DWV pipe, fittings, and couplings with mechanical, bell and spigot,
or fusion type joints. Material for buried piping and aboveground piping shall
be silicon-iron composition. Borosilicate glass pipe and fitting may be provided
for aboveground piping where acid composition dictates, except vent piping through
D
and above roofs shall be silicon-iron composition. Provide cleanouts and drains
as specified for DWV piping, except material shall be silicon-iron composition.
D209003 INTERCEPTORS
D209003 1.1 OIL/WATER SEPARATOR
Oil/water separator, where required, in accordance with the IPC and with
a minimum flow capacity to meet system demand.
D209003 1.2 GREASE INTERCEPTORS
Provide in accordance with the IPC and PDI G 101.
D209005 COMPRESSED AIR SYSTEM (NON-BREATHING)
D209005 1.1 AIR COMPRESSOR
Factory packaged electric motor driven, duplex air compressor including

Al Dhafra, UAE
manufacturers standard air filter, oil filter, and plug drain. Air
compressor, aftercooler, and receiver shall be factory packaged as a unit.
Receiver tank shall be per ASME PBVC Sec. VIII D1, labeled and rated for
125 PSI (862 kPa) gage, equipped with required valves and trimmings,
including gage and automatic drain valve and ASME BPVC pressure safety relief
valve. Air compressor and receiver shall be sized in accordance with the
Compressed Air and Gas Institute (CAGI) guidelines. Locate air compressor
away from noise sensitive areas.
D209005 1.2 REFRIGERATED AIR DRYER
Low-pressure compressed air dryer of the mechanical refrigeration type,

equipped with an automatic temperature shutdown switch to prevent freezing,
a regenerative air-to-air exchanger (as standard with the manufacturer),
and a main compressed air cooling exchanger. Refrigeration system shall
use non-CFC refrigerant and shall cool compressed air to dry the air. Dryer
operating pressure shall be not less than 125 PSI (862 kPa) gage. Dryer
size shall be based on system pressure, the entire system air flow, and
provide air with a dew point 5 degrees F (-15 degrees C) lower than the most
stringent equipment or outlet requirement. The pressure drop of the dryer
T
shall not exceed 2 PSI (13.8 kPa) gage.
D209005 1.3 COMPRESSED AIR PIPING SYSTEM

AF
Piping shall conform to the requirements of ASME B31.1 for materials,
assembly, and testing. Piping shall be steel, black seamless schedule 40
carbon steel per ASTM A 53/A 53M with threaded fittings or copper tubing
per ASTM B 88, Type K or Type L, hard drawn, Class 1, with wrought copper
or bronze fittings. Provide compressed air drops in locations to facilitate
work required with quick disconnects throughout the work areas to allow
connection of such as pneumatic tools and air guns. Each air drop shall
R
be equipped with a filter/moisture separator, pressure gauge, air pressure
regulator, and a quick-disconnect.
D

Al Dhafra, UAE
SECTION D30
HVAC
05/14
D30 GENERAL
D30 1.1 NARRATIVE
This section includes the construction of interior mechanical systems. This

section covers installations inside the facility and out to the five foot
line. See Section G30, Site Civil/Mechanical Utilities, for continuation
T
of systems beyond the five-foot line.
D30 1.2 MECHANICAL DESIGN GUIDANCE

AF

R
Federal Energy Management Program (FEMP)

D

UFC(s):UFC 3-401-01, Mechanical
Engineering: UFC 3-420-01, Plumbing
Systems)

Buildings
UFC 3-440-04N Solar Heating of Buildings and

Domestic Hot Water
UFC 4-211-01N AIRCRAFT MAINTENANCE

HANGARS: TYPE I, TYPE II AND

Al Dhafra, UAE
TYPE III
UFGS 01 78 24.00 20 Electronic Facility Operation and

Maintenance Support Information
UFGS 23 05 93 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for

HVAC
UFGS 23 09 23.13 20 BACNET Direct Digital Control Systems

for HVAC
UFGS 23 81 23.00 20 Computer Room Air Conditioning Units
D30 1.3 PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION AND ACCEPTANCE TESTING
T
a. Verification of satisfactory HVAC system performance shall be via
Performance Verification Testing, as detailed in this section.
b. The Government reserves the right to witness all Acceptance Tests and
AF
Inspections, review data, and request other such additional
inspections and repeat tests as necessary to ensure that the system
and provided services conform to the stated requirements.
c. The Qualified Testing Organization shall provide the Acceptance Tests
and Inspections test plan and perform the acceptance tests and
inspections. Test methods, procedures, and test values shall be
performed and evaluated in accordance with appropriate standards, and
R
the manufacturer's recommendations. Equipment shall be placed in
service only after completion of required tests and evaluation of the
test results have been completed. Contractor shall supply to the
testing organization complete sets of shop drawings, settings of
D
adjustable devices, and other information necessary for an accurate

test and inspection of the system prior to the performance of any final
testing. Perform acceptance tests and inspections on Computer Room
Air Conditioning Units, Direct Digital Control System, and HVAC
Testing/Adjusting/Balancing.
D30 1.4 HVAC COMMISSIONING
Commission the HVAC systems per the Commissioning Plan as required by UFGS
Specification Section 01 45 00.00 10, Design & Construction Quality Control.
HVAC system commissioning shall coordinate with and incorporate the testing,
reporting, training & O&M documentation requirements of UFGS 23 05 93,
Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC and UFGS 23 09 23.13 20, BACnet
Direct Digital Control Systems for HVAC.


Al Dhafra, UAE
Procedures, MED Design Instruction Manual, and UFC 3-401-01, Mechanical

Engineering.
In addition, UFGS sections listed below, in the body of the PTS text or as
listed on the whole building design guide (wbdg.org) website are to be used
by the Designer of Record (DOR) as a part of the design submittal. If the
UFGS products or systems are applicable to the project, the DOR shall edit
these referenced UFGS sections and submit them as a part of the design
UFGS 01 78 24.00 20, Electronic Facility Operation and Maintenance

Support Information
UFGS 23 09 23.13 20, BACnet Direct Digital Control Systems for HVAC
UFGS 23 05 93, Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC
UFGS 48 14 13.00 20, Solar Liquid Flat Plate Collectors
T
UFGS 23 00 00, Air Supply, Distribution, Ventilation, and Exhaust
Systems
AF
UFGS 23 08 00.00 10, Commissioning of HVAC Systems

R
Solar hot water heating system fixtures and equipment, and OMSI
D
information for all equipment and fixtures.
D30 1.7 MOTORS
Single-phase fractional-horsepower alternating-current motors shall be

high efficiency types corresponding to the applications listed in NEMA MG
11. Select polyphase motors based on high efficiency characteristics
relative to the applications as listed in NEMA MG 10. Additionally, all
polyphase squirrel-cage medium induction motors with continuous ratings
shall meet or exceed energy efficient ratings per Table 12-10 of NEMA MG
1. Provide controllers for 3-phase motors rated 1 hp (0.75 kW) and above
with phase voltage monitors designed to protect motors from phase loss and
over/under-voltage. Provide means to prevent automatic restart by a time
adjustable restart relay. For packaged equipment, the manufacturer shall
provide controllers including the required monitors and timed restart.
Provide reduced voltage starters for all motors 25 hp and larger.
D3010 ENERGY SUPPLY

Al Dhafra, UAE
D301001 OIL SUPPLY SYSTEM
Conform to requirements of International Mechanical Code for piping. Conform to

requirements of NFPA 31 for testing. Contractor is responsible for providing the
complete oil supply system to the facility, including any applications and permits.
D301001 1.1 OIL SUPPLY SYSTEM PIPING & EQUIPMENT
ASTM A 53/A 53M or ASTM A 106/A 106M piping with associated ASME fittings
or ASTM B 88, type L or M copper tubing with ASME B16.26 flared fittings
or compression type fittings. Provide welded fittings on piping below
grade. Pumps that are not part of the burner assembly shall be positive
displacement type. Provide oil filter prior to oil entering appliance or
pump. Storage tanks shall meet the requirements of NFPA 31.
D301002 GAS SUPPLY SYSTEM
D301002 1.1 NATURAL GAS PIPING
T
Conform to requirements of the local natural gas utility and ASME B31.8,
Gas Transmission and Distribution Piping Systems, for exterior piping.
Conform to requirements of NFPA 54, National Fuel Gas Code, for interior
AF
gas piping. Provide meter and pressure regulator in accordance with the
requirements of the local utility. Provide earthquake valve where required
by code. Contractor is responsible for providing the complete natural gas
system to the facility, including any applications and permits.
D301002 1.2 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
D301002 1.2.1 Aboveground Within Buildings

R
Black steel per ASTM A 53/A 53M, Schedule 40, and associated ASME
fittings threaded ends for sizes 2 inches (50 mm) and smaller;
otherwise, plain end beveled for butt welding.
D
D301002 1.3 PRESSURE TESTS
Pressure test per NFPA 54 at 1.5 times maximum working pressure, but in no
case less than 50 PSI (350 kPa).
D301002 1.4 PROPANE PIPING
If required, provide the same as specified for natural gas and comply with
NFPA 58.
D301002 1.4.1 Underground
Polyethylene (PE) pipe conforming to ASTM D 2513 for 100 PSI (690 kPa)
(gage) working pressure. Standard Dimension Ratio shall be 11.5
maximum. Provide detectable aluminum plastic backed tape or
detectable magnetic plastic tape manufactured specifically for
warning and identification of direct buried piping. Tape shall be
detectable by an electronic detection instrument. Polyethylene

Al Dhafra, UAE
Fittings shall be ASTM D 2683 socket fittings or ASTM D 2513 molded

butt-fusion fittings.
D301002 1.5 PROPANE TANKS
If not provided by the propane provider, the tank material and installation
shall comply with NFPA 58.
D301003 STEAM SUPPLY SYSTEM (FROM CENTRAL PLANT)
Refer to Section G30, Site Civil/Mechanical Utilities
D301004 HOT WATER SUPPLY SYSTEM (FROM CENTRAL PLANT)
Refer to Section G30, Site Civil/Mechanical Utilities
D301005 SOLAR ENERGY SUPPLY SYSTEM
Design and build each solar domestic hot water heating system meeting the
requirements of UFC 3-440-04N Solar Heating of Buildings and Domestic Hot Water.
T
Each system shall be fully integrated with the building DDC controls system.
Provide complete solar domestic hot water system designed and built by a single
AF
contractor who specializes in solar heated water systems. System shall be
designed, built, and tested by this contractor who shall be responsible for the
provided system to operate as proposed. This design-build contractor must be
endorsed in writing, prior to system design, by the manufacturer of the solar plate
collectors provided for this solicitation.
The solar domestic hot water system designer shall work with the building designers
to optimize the roof area, slope and orientation available for solar domestic hot
R
water. Coordinate with other solar systems utilizing the roof area such as
photovoltaic systems.
Provide solar liquid flat plate collector systems to comply with the requirements
D
specified in UFGS Section 48 14 13.00 20, Solar Liquid Flat Plate Collectors.
D3020 HEAT GENERATING SYSTEMS
D302001 BOILERS
If required, provide Boiler(s) type for the load capacity of the building as
indicated in ESR Section D30.
D302001 1.1 REQUIREMENTS
Boiler shall be designed, tested, and installed per ASME CSD-1 (Controls
and Safety Devices) and ASME BPVC (Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code). The
boiler shall meet the requirements of the UL 795, ANSI Z83.3, and ASME CSD.
Oil-fired boiler system design shall be in accordance with NFPA 31.
D302001 1.2 BOILER BURNER
Burners provided shall be the make, model and type certified and approved

Al Dhafra, UAE
by the manufacturer of the boiler being provided. Burner controls and flame
safety equipment shall conform to either ASME CSD-1 or NFPA 58 as dictated
by the input.
D302001 1.3 BOILER TRIM AND CONTROL EQUIPMENT
D302001 1.3.1 Boiler Controls
Mount controls, including operating switches, indicating lights,

gages, alarms, motor starters, fuses, and circuit elements of the
control systems, on a single control panel mounted on the burner or
separate from the burner. Location of the separate panel shall be
at the side of the boiler or in a freestanding control cabinet away
from the front of the boiler. When using BACnet communication
protocol, use the ASHRAE 135 protocol without gateways to interface
with the BACnet Direct Digital Control System in specification UFGS
23 09 23.13 20.
D302001 1.3.2 Boiler Trim
T
Comply with ASME BPVC SEC IV, ASME CSD-1, and additional appurtenances
as specified herein.
AF
D302001 1.3.3 Pressure Gages
Provide pressure gages with a scale equivalent to 1.5 times the outlet
water pressure on supply water piping and return water piping.
D302001 1.3.4 Thermometers
Provide thermometers with a scale equivalent to 1.5 times the outlet

R
water temperature on supply water piping and return water piping.
D302001 1.3.5 Drain Trapping

D
Provide drain valve and piping to a floor drain.
D302001 1.3.6 Air Vent Valve
Provide with screwed connection, stainless steel disk, and stainless

steel seats to vent entrapped air.
D302001 1.4 STEAM BOILERS
Steam boilers shall meet the requirements of hot water boilers, except as
follows.
D302001 1.4.1 Pressure Gages
Provide pressure gages with a scale equivalent to 1.5 times the outlet
water pressure on boiler feedwater supply piping and condensate return
water piping. Provide boiler steam pressure gage with scale
equivalent to 1.5 times the boiler rated working pressure.

Al Dhafra, UAE
D302001 1.4.2 Thermometers
Provide thermometers with a scale equivalent to 1.5 times the outlet

water temperature on boiler feedwater piping and return water piping.
D302001 1.5 BOILER STACK AND ACCESSORIES
Provide pre-manufactured, multi-wall stacks complying with NFPA 54 or NFPA

58 and UL-listed. Provide flue gas thermometer and mount in flue gas outlet.
D302001 1.6 BOILER STARTUP AND OPERATIONAL TESTS
D302001 1.6.1 Boiler Cleaning
Prior to startup, clean boiler(s) in accordance with ASME Boiler and

Pressure Vessel Codeand manufacturer's recommendations.
D302001 1.6.2 Operational Tests
Furnish the services of an engineer or technician approved by the
T
boiler manufacturer for installation, startup, operational and safety
testing. Demonstrate proper operability of combustion control, flame
safeguard control, and safety interlocks.
AF
D302003 FUEL-FIRED UNIT HEATERS
D302003 1.1 GAS-FIRED UNIT HEATERS
ANSI Z83.8 and AGA label. Equip each heater with individually adjustable
package discharge louver. Provide with thermostat.
R
D302003 1.2 INFRARED HEATERS
ANSI Z83.8 and AGA label.

D
D302004 AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT
D302004 1.1 HEAT EXCHANGERS
Steam to hot water converter as required for the application. Provide

factory assembled, u-tube units constructed in accordance with ASME BPVC
for steam or hot water. Factory assembled, plate type heat exchangers may
be provided for hot water.
D302004 1.2 CONDENSATE RETURN UNITS
Floor-mounted receiver and duplex pump unit.
D302005 EQUIPMENT THERMAL INSULATION
Insulate hot water pumps and equipment as suitable for the temperature and service
in rigid block, semi-rigid board, or flexible unicellular insulation to fit as
closely as possible to equipment.

Al Dhafra, UAE
D3030 COOLING GENERATING SYSTEMS
If coatings are indicated in ESR Section D30, provide with copper tube/copper fin
construction or immersion applied, baked phenolic or other approved coating that
passes the 3000 hour salt spray resistance test using the ASTM B117 procedure.
Field applied coatings are not acceptable.
D303001 CHILLED WATER SYSTEMS
D303001 1.1 AIR-COOLED CHILLERS
Air-cooled chillers shall be type indicated in Project Program and meet the
requirements of AHRI 550/590. Provide control panel with the
manufacturers' standard controls and protection circuits. If DDC system
is required in project, provide a control interface for remote monitoring
of the chiller's operating parameters, functions and alarms from the DDC
control system central workstation. When using BACnet communication
protocol, use the ASHRAE 135 protocol without gateways to interface with
the BACnet DDC system in specification UFGS 23 09 13.13 20.
T
D303001 1.1.1 Stages
Provide continuous variable speed compressor adjustment to match

AF
actual load, or minimum of four stages of unloading at 25% per stage
minimum for reciprocating, centrifugal, and scroll chillers.
Provide reciprocating units with hot gas bypass.
D303001 1.1.2 Pressure Control
Provide head pressure control for cold temperature operation.

Provide freeze protection for chiller and piping.
R
D303001 1.1.3 Coil Construction
Provide copper tube, aluminum fins for condenser coils. Provide

D
manufacturer's optional louvered covers or hail guards for condenser

coils to provide protection against vandalism, debris, or hail.
D303001 1.2 WATER-COOLED CHILLERS
Self-contained chiller meeting the requirements of AHRI 550/590. Provide

control panel with the manufacturers' standard controls and protection
circuits. If DDC system is required in project, provide a control interface
for remote monitoring of the chiller's operating parameters, functions and
alarms from the DDC control system central workstation. Provide automatic
capacity-reduction system for stable operation from 100 to 10 percent of
full load capacity. When using BACnet protocol, use the ASHRAE 135 protocol
without gateways to interface with the BACnet DDC system in specification
23 09 23.13 20.
D303001 1.3 COOLING TOWERS
Factory assembled, conforming to NFPA 214. Fire hazard rating for plastic
impregnated materials shall not exceed 25. Provide Cooling Technology

Al Dhafra, UAE
Institute 201 certification of tower capability and performance. Cooling

Tower performance shall meet or exceed that listed in ASHRAE 90.1.
Construct as indicated in ESR Section D30 with fill material of PVC formed
sheets. Provide stainless steel hardware. Provide vibration cutout
switch interlocked with the fan motor. Provide 2-speed or adjustable
frequency drive fan motors. Provide work platform(s) at all locations in
the tower that require periodic maintenance. For multi-cell installations,
provide isolation valves on inlets and outlets of each cell.
D303001 1.4 CLOSED CIRCUIT COOLERS
Factory assembled, conforming to NFPA 214. Fire hazard rating for plastic
impregnated materials shall not exceed 25. Provide Cooling Technology
Institute 201 certification of tower capability and performance. Cooler
performance shall meet or exceed that listed in ASHRAE 90.1. Provide
stainless steel hardware. Provide vibration cutout switch interlocked with
the fan motor. Provide 2-speed or adjustable frequency drive fan motors.
Meet OSHA safety requirements for stairs and handrails.
D303002 DIRECT EXPANSION SYSTEMS
T
If coatings are indicated in ESR Section D30, provide with copper tube/copper fin
construction or immersion applied, baked phenolic or other approved coating that
AF
passes the 3000 hour salt spray resistance test using the ASTM B117 procedure.
Field applied coatings are not acceptable.
D303002 1.1 HEAT PUMPS
D303002 1.1.1 Air to Air
Air-cooled, split system heat pumps with ducted air distribution.

R
Provide units factory assembled, designed, tested, and rated in
accordance with AHRI 210/240 or AHRI 340/360. Provide manufacturer's
minimum recommended clearance around condensing units. Refrigerant
piping size shall be per the manufacturer's recommendations. Insulate
D
refrigerant piping suction lines and condensate drain.
D303002 1.1.2 Water Source
Factory assembled, designed, tested, and rated in accordance with

AHRI/ISO 13256-1 or AHRI/ISO 13256-2. Unit shall be AHRI/ISO 13256-1
or AHRI/ISO 13256-2 certified, or listed in the AHRI/ISO 13256-1 or
AHRI/ISO 13256-2 directory.
D303002 1.1.3 Ground-Coupled
Factory assembled, designed, tested, and rated in accordance with

AHRI/ISO 13256-1 or AHRI/ISO 13256-2. Unit shall be AHRI/ISO 13256-1
or AHRI/ISO 13256-2 certified, or listed in the AHRI/ISO 13256-1 or
AHRI/ISO 13256-2 directory. Ground-coupled heat pumps shall be
connected to the heat exchanger by a closed loop ground source vertical
well field. Design and installation of each well field shall comply
with IGSHPA and ASHRAE Standards.

Al Dhafra, UAE
D303002 1.2 CONDENSING UNITS
Air-cooled, split system air conditioner with ducted air distribution.

Provide units factory assembled, designed, tested, and rated in accordance
with AHRI 210/240 or AHRI 340/360. Provide manufacturer's minimum
recommended clearance around condensing units. Refrigerant piping size
shall be per the manufacturer's recommendations.
D303002 1.3 DX VARIABLE AIR VOLUME (VAV) UNITS
Direct expansion equipment shall be specifically designed and manufactured

for VAV applications. The same manufacturer shall provide central air
handling units, VAV boxes/zone dampers and zone controls. Airflow through
the evaporator coils shall not be modulated. Provide duct mounted zone
control damper units with integral control box, designed for use with DX
VAV packaged systems. Self-modulating air diffusers will not be allowed.
D303002 1.4 DUCTLESS SPLIT SYSTEM
Air-cooled, ductless split system. Provide units factory assembled,
T
designed, tested, and rated in accordance with ARI 210/240. Provide
manufacturer's minimum recommended clearance around heat pump or condensing
units. Refrigerant piping size shall be per the manufacturer's
AF
recommendations. Insulate refrigerant piping suction lines and condensate
drain.
D303002 1.5 VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW SYSTEMS
The system shall consist of VRF heat pump units, branch circuit controllers,
VRF fan coil units, and associated controls. The heat pump units shall be
inverter driven and shall utilize R410A refrigerant. The branch circuit
R
controllers shall include multiple branch connections allowing for
simultaneous heating and cooling utilizing hot gas refrigerant or sub-cooled
liquid. The total capacity of the branch controllers shall be between 50%
and 150% of the rated capacity.
D
All refrigerant piping shall be sized and installed in strict compliance

with the manufacturer's requirements. Refrigerant piping shall be clean,
dry, and leak free. Prior to installation all refrigerant pipes shall
remain sealed. During installation and prior to filling, nitrogen shall
be used to maintain cleanliness and prevent oxidation and scaling while
brazing. Each system shall be installed to provide proper oil return.
Refrigerant piping shall be copper, ACR type, ASTM B280. All joints shall
be sil-brazed. All thicknesses of piping shall remain the same throughout
the system. Each refrigerant circuit shall be individually pressure tested
and commissioned. Pressure testing shall be performed using nitrogen at
1-1/2 times the system operating pressure. Each system shall be designed
to meet Refrigerant Piping and Heat Transfer Components ASME B31.9, Building
Services Piping Code and shall be designed to allow for expansion and
contraction.
D3040 DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS
D304001 AIR DISTRIBUTION, HEATING & COOLING

Al Dhafra, UAE
D304001 1.1 DUCTWORK
Except as specified herein, provide ductwork constructed, braced,

reinforced, installed, supported, and sealed per SMACNA standards.
D304001 1.1.1 Flexible Ducts
Use insulated flexible duct only for connections to air distribution

devices to adapt to minor offsets. Flexible duct shall be UL 181
listed and per SMACNA 1966 duct construction standards with a minimum
R value of 4. Maximum length of flexible ductwork shall be 6 feet
(2 meters).
D304001 1.1.2 Flexible Connections
Provide flexible connectors between fans and ducts.
D304001 1.1.3 Volume Dampers
T
Provide manual volume dampers in each branch take-off from the main
duct to control air quantity except for primary supply ductwork on
VAV systems. Dampers shall conform to SMACNA 1966 duct construction
AF
standards and shall be seal class "A" construction.
D304001 1.1.4 Fire Dampers
Fire dampers shall be rated per UL 555. Fire dampers shall be dynamic
type rated for closure against a moving airstream. Provide fire
dampers that do not intrude into the air stream when in the open
position.
R
D304001 1.1.5 Smoke Dampers
Smoke dampers shall be rated per UL 555S.

D
D304001 1.1.6 Sound Attenuators
Fabricated attenuators that will reduce the rated sound pressure level
of the fan down to at least 65 decibels in the 250 Hz (third octave
band) center frequency by using a reference sound source calibrated
in decibels of sound power at 10 to 12 watts. Maximum permissible
pressure drop shall not exceed 0.63 inch of water (157 Pa).
D304001 1.2 LOUVERS & HOODS
D304001 1.2.1 Louvers
Louvers shall bear AMCA ratings seal for air performance and water
penetration in accordance with AMCA 500L and AMCA 511. Louvers shall
be constructed of anodized aluminum alloy or stainless steel.
Provide birdscreens.
D304001 1.2.2 Hoods

Al Dhafra, UAE
Hoods shall be constructed of anodized aluminum alloy or stainless

steel. Provide with birdscreens.
D304001 1.3 GRILLES, REGISTERS, & DIFFUSERS
Factory-finished grilles, registers, and diffusers. Exterior and exposed

edges shall be rolled, or otherwise stiffened and rounded.
D304001 1.4 INSULATION
Provide external thermal insulation for all ductwork. Insulate ductwork

in concealed spaces with blanket flexible mineral fiber. Insulate ductwork
in Mechanical Rooms and exposed locations with rigid mineral fiber
insulation.
Provide insulation with factory applied all-purpose jacket with integral

vapor retarder. In exposed locations, provide a jacket with white surface
suitable for painting. Flame spread/smoke developed rating for all
insulation shall not exceed 25/50. Minimum insulation thickness shall be
T
the minimum thickness required by ASHRAE 90.1. Insulate the backs of all
supply air diffusers with blanket flexible mineral fiber insulation.
D304001 1.5 VAV BOXES

AF
Pressure-independent type variable air volume units rated per AHRI 880.
Boxes shall not be allowed to fully shut-off. Provide each box with a heating
coil unless not required by space reheat or heating. Provide electronic
controls.
D304001 1.6 VARIABLE AIR VOLUME VAV FAN-POWERED UNITS

R
Pressure-independent, fan powered, VAV units rated per AHRI 880 and UL
listed. Provide each box with a heating coil. Provide electronic controls
with speed controller, discharge volume control damper(s), and
D
return/recirculation air frame and filter. If discharge dampers are not

provided with the unit, coordinate installation with the sheet metal
contractor. Insulate in accordance with ASHRAE 90.1.
D304002 STEAM DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS
D304002 1.1 STEAM PIPING
Steam piping shall be ASTM A 106/A 106M or ASTM A 53/A 53M Grade B, Schedule
40, black steel, electric-resistance welded or seamless.
D304002 1.2 CONDENSATE RETURN PIPING
Condensate return piping shall be ASTM A 106/A 106M or ASTM A 53/A 53M, Grade
B, Schedule 80, black steel, electric-resistance welded or seamless.
D304002 1.3 STEEL PIPE FITTINGS
For piping 2 inch (50 mm) and smaller, provide ASME B16.3 malleable iron

Al Dhafra, UAE
screwed fittings or ASME B16.11 socket welding (Class 3000) or threaded type
(Class 2000). Provide ASME B16.9 butt-welding fittings or ASME B16.5
flanged type for piping 2-1/2 inch (63 mm) and larger.
Insulate steam and condensate return piping with mineral fiber or cellular
glass insulation with all-purpose jacket.
D304002 1.5 STEAM PRESSURE REDUCING STATION
For each building, provide steam pressure reducing station(s).
D304002 1.6 STEAM TRAPS
Provide steam traps and accessories in accordance with UFC 3-401-01.
D304003 HOT WATER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS
D304003 1.1 HOT WATER PIPING
T
Hot water piping shall be electric resistance welded or seamless Schedule
40 black steel pipe conforming to ASTM A 53/A 53M. Piping 4 inch (100 mm)
AF
and smaller may be ASTM B 88 Type K or L copper.
R
D304003 1.3 COPPER FITTINGS
ASME B16.18 cast bronze solder joint type or ASME B16.22 wrought copper
D
solder joint type.
D304003 1.4 ISOLATION VALVES
Provide isolation valves on supply and return lines at take-offs for service
to each building(s). Valves shall be located in valve boxes.
Insulate hot water piping with mineral fiber insulation with factory-applied
all-purpose jacket. Provide aluminum metal wrap over insulation for all
exterior piping.
D304003 1.6 VALVES
Provide shut off valves, appropriately sized relief valves, and

appropriately sized balancing valves as necessary to balance water flows,
protect components and isolate equipment for service and repairs.

Al Dhafra, UAE
D304003 1.7 APPURTENANCES
Provide appurtenances such as air separators, expansion tanks, suction

diffusers, strainers, and other required features to allow for proper
operation of hot water systems.
D304003 1.8 TEST PORTS
Provide test ports in piping at inlet and outlet of all major system
components including boilers, pumps, and other equipment as required.
D304004 CHANGEOVER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS
Provide as specified for Hot Water Distribution Systems see D304003.
D304005 GLYCOL DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS
Provide as specified for Chilled Water Distribution Systems see D304006.
D304006 CHILLED / CONDENSER WATER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS
T
D304006 1.1 ABOVEGROUND CHILLED AND CONDENSER WATER PIPING
Aboveground chilled water piping shall be electric resistance welded or

AF
seamless Schedule 40 black steel pipe conforming to ASTM A 53/A 53M. Piping
4 inch (100 mm) and smaller may be ASTM B 88 Type K or L copper.
R
D304006 1.3 COPPER FITTINGS

D
ASME B16.18 cast bronze solder joint type or ASME B16.22 wrought copper
solder joint type.
D304006 1.4 ISOLATION VALVES
to each building(s). Valves shall be located in valve boxes.
Insulate chilled water pumps and accessories for the temperature and service
in rigid block, semi-rigid board, or flexible unicellular insulation to fit
as closely as possible to equipment. Insulate above ground chilled water
piping with cellular glass insulation (ASTM C 552, Type II, and Type III).
Flexible unicellular insulation may be used on small piping runouts.
Insulate condenser water piping with mineral fiber insulation. Provide
all-purpose jacket with vapor retarder. Provide aluminum metal wrap over
insulation for all exterior piping.

Al Dhafra, UAE
D304006 1.6 VALVES
Provide shut off valves, appropriately sized relief valves, and

appropriately sized balancing valves as necessary to balance water flows,
protect components and isolate equipment for service and repairs.
D304006 1.7 TEST PORTS
Provide test ports in piping at inlet and outlet of all major system
components including chillers, pumps, and other equipment as required.
D304007 EXHAUST SYSTEMS
D304007 1.1 FANS
Fans shall be AMCA 210 certified, with AMCA seal. Fan bearings shall have
a minimum average life of 200,000 hours at design operating conditions.
Provide bird screens for outdoor inlets and outlets. Provide direct-drive
type fans with means for verifying operation via the building DDC system
or with speed controllers
T
D304007 1.2 IN-LINE FANS
AF
UL-Listed centrifugal fans.
D304007 1.3 WALL FANS
Propeller fans with fan guards. Provide centrifugal fans with backdraft
dampers and wall bracket.
D304007 1.4 ROOFTOP FANS

R
UL-Listed centrifugal fans with roof curb.
D304007 1.5 UTILITY SETS

D
AMCA 210 with AMCA seal.
D304007 1.6 BATHROOM FANS
UL 507 and UL-listed, Home Ventilating Institute (HVI) certified and with
AMCA seal for ceiling installation.
D304007 1.7 RANGE HOODS
UL 507 and UL-listed, with AMCA seal, range hood with light over stove.
Minimum fan capacity shall be 160 cfm with maximum sound level of 5.6 sones.
D304008 AIR HANDLING UNITS
AMCA 210 certified fans with AMCA seal. Fan bearings shall have a minimum average
life of 200,000 hours at design operating conditions. Provide bird screens for
outdoor inlets and outlets.

Al Dhafra, UAE
D304008 1.1 CENTRAL STATION AIR HANDLERS
Modular construction, double wall air handling units with minimum of 1 inch
(25 mm) casing insulation. Provide AHRI 430 certified fans and AHRI
certified coils. Provide stainless steel, positive draining condensate
drain pan. For 100% outside air units provide capability for cooling,
heating, dehumidification and reheat.
D304008 1.1.1 Ultraviolet Disinfection System
For central station air handling units provide an ultra violet c-band
(UVC) disinfection system for mold, bacteria and odor control in each
air handler that has a chilled water or DX cooling coil.
Irradiation-emitters and fixtures are to be installed in sufficient
quantity and in such an arrangement so as to provide an equal
distribution of UVC energy on the coil and in the drain pan. To
maintain energy efficiency, the UVC energy produced shall be of the
lowest possible reflected and shadowed losses. Energy Efficiency -
Power supplies shall be of the high efficiency electronic type and
matched to the emitter. Intensity - The minimal UVC energy striking
T
the leading edge (if installed upstream) or trailing edge (if
installed downstream) of all the coil fins shall not be less than 820
W/cm2 at the closest point and through placement, not less than 60%
AF
of that value at the farthest point. Equal amounts are to strike the
drain pan, either directly or indirectly through reflection. The
foregoing sets the placement and minimum quantity of fixtures to be
installed. Installation - emitters and fixtures shall be installed
at right angles to the conforming lines of the coil fins, such that
through incident angle reflection, UVC energy bathes all surfaces of
the coil and drain pan as well as all of the available line of sight
airstream. One complete set of spare bulbs will be supplied.
R
D304090 OTHER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS
D304090 1.1 PUMPS

D
Centrifugal circulating pumps with motor, motor starter, and motor enclosure
conforming to the appropriate NEMA standards. Provide suction diffusers
on base-mounted pumps. Insulate pumps used for hot service and chilled
water service.
D304090 1.1.1 In-Line Pumps
Pumps constructed of manufacturer's standard materials suitable for

chilled, condenser, and hot water heating systems.
D304090 1.1.2 Base Mounted Pumps
Single stage end suction pumps suitable for chilled, condenser, and
hot water heating systems.
D304090 1.2 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES (VFD)
Factory-assembled variable frequency drive control systems for variable

Al Dhafra, UAE
speed control. All air handling unit and pump VFD's shall be from the same
manufacturer. Each VFD shall include motor starter, motor disconnects and
controls as required for a complete system. Units shall be UL-listed and
comply with the National Electric Code.
Provide the following accessories:
Disconnect switch
Control circuit transformer, with primary and secondary fuses
Manual bypass
System hand-off-auto switch with provisions for remote start/stop of

the system.
System initialized light
Run light
T
Failure alarm
LCD digital display with numeric keypad

AF
Provide a control interface for remote monitoring of VFD functions
and alarms from the DDC control system computer.
D304090 1.3 AIR SEPARATORS
ASME rated air separators with tangential inlet and outlet connections and
R
automatic air vent.
D304090 1.4 SOLIDS SEPARATORS

D
Provide centrifugal solids separator with automatic drain in open systems.
D304090 1.5 EXPANSION TANKS
ASME rated expansion tanks with polypropylene or butyl diaphragm or

compression tanks as indicated in UFC 3-401-01.
D304090 1.6 MAKE-UP WATER STATION
Station shall consist of a water pressure-reducing valve and a relief valve

in the make-up water line to the chilled and hot water systems to maintain
the operating pressure. Provide a 3/4 inch (20 mm) globe valve by-pass
around this pressure reducing station. Provide reduced pressure backflow
preventer upstream of the by-pass.
D304090 1.7 GLYCOL MAKE-UP STATION
If required, provide a glycol makeup system to maintain system proper

operating mixture.

Al Dhafra, UAE
D304090 1.8 CONDENSATE DRAIN PIPING
ASTM B 88, Type M or L, hard drawn copper.
D304090 1.9 CONDENSATE DRAIN INSULATION
Insulate condensate drain piping with flexible cellular insulation.
D304090 1.10 CHEMICAL TREATMENT
If required, Provide chilled and hot water systems with automatic chemical
treatment system for the control of pH, scale formation, and corrosion
inhibition. Provide shot-type feeders for manual chemical feed. Feeders
shall be rated for use with pressures up to 130 PSI (900 kPa) (gage). Provide
condenser water systems with automatic chemical treatment systems that
monitor conductivity, and pH, and provide for water metering and bleed-off.
Provide chemicals in accordance with EPA and equipment manufacturers
recommendations.
D304090 1.11 PIPING IDENTIFICATION
T
Provide piping identification labels or Stencil names or code letters for
piping systems in clearly visible letters and symbols. Provide
AF
arrow-shaped markings to indicate direction of flow.
D304090 1.12 PIPE SLEEVES
Provide pipe sleeves at each wall and floor penetration. The sleeve shall
be of a material suitable to protect the carrier pipe (two pipe sizes larger)
and sealed with an appropriate flexible material. Provide fire stopping
in fire rated walls in accordance with IBC.
R
D304090 1.13 SYSTEM FLUSHING
Thoroughly flush hydronic systems prior to system startup. Isolate coils

D
during initial flushing until water is clear.
D304090 1.14 HEAT TAPE
UL-Listed, self-regulating, heat tape on piping subject to freezing.
D3050 TERMINAL & PACKAGE UNITS
D305002 UNIT HEATERS
See D302004 for gas fired unit heaters.
D305002 1.1 STEAM
UL-Listed, factory assembled, unit heaters.
D305002 1.2 HOT WATER
UL-Listed, factory assembled, unit heaters.

Al Dhafra, UAE
D305002 1.3 CABINET UNIT HEATER
UL-Listed, factory assembled, heaters.
D305003 FAN COIL UNITS
UL-Listed, factory assembled and tested fan coils, AHRI 440 and AHRI certified.
D305004 FIN TUBE RADIATION
D305004 1.1 FIN TUBE RADIATORS AND CONVECTORS
Fin tube radiators and Convectors shall be provided with copper tubes and
aluminum fins. Provide normally open, spring return control valves.
D305005 1.1 UNIT HEATERS
Factory assembled, UL-1025, unit heaters.
T
D305005 1.2 BASEBOARD HEATERS
Factory assembled, UL-1042, heaters.

AF
D305005 1.3 WALL HEATERS
Factory assembled, UL-1025, cabinet heaters.
D305005 1.4 INFRARED HEATERS

R
Factory assembled, UL-Listed and labeled heaters.
D305006 PACKAGE UNITS

D
D305006 1.1 ROOFTOP AIR HANDLERS
Factory packaged units in accordance with AHRI 430 and suitable for outdoor
installation. Provide with manufacturer's roof curb.
D305006 1.2 DUCT HEATER
Factory assembled, UL-listed heaters. Provide control cabinet and heating

coil.
D3060 CONTROLS AND INSTRUMENTATION
D306001 HVAC CONTROLS
D306001 1.1 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROLS
Provide one of the following as directed in ESR Section D30.
a. Provide Direct Digital Controls (DDC) to comply with the requirements

Al Dhafra, UAE
specified in UFGS Section 23 09 23.13 20, BACNET Direct Digital Control

Systems for HVAC.
b. Provide a partial direct digital control (DDC) system to that will
communicate with the existing DDC system. If using BACnet protocol,
comply with the requirements specified in UFGS Section 23 09 23.13
20, BACnet Direct Digital Control Systems for HVAC. Notwithstanding
any other provisions of this contract, no other product will be
acceptable other than that indicated in ESR Section D30. Provide a
distributed control system. Integrate all new DDC points on the
existing server providing a seamless logical flow from the existing
facilities to the new integrated facility.
The Designer of Record shall use UFGS Section 23 09 23.13 20 if using BACnet
protocol, and submit the edited specification section as a part of the
project design submittal.
Design requirements shall be in accordance with all specification notes and

the BAS Owner shall be identified and designated early in the design
documentation.
T
The system shall have stand alone digital controllers, a communication
network, and a workstation computer with control software. Provide
stand-alone control routines that operate without connection to the network
AF
during a loss of communication. Provide trending, scheduling and alarm
tables (may be included with the sequence of operation). Provide reset
routines (based on outdoor air temperature or zone demand) for hot water
loop temperature setpoints and supply air static pressure control. Use
alarming and trending services during performance testing or commissioning.
Alarm every sequence routine when out-of-limits or control/response failure
occurs. Display all graphic floor plans, equipment graphics, DDC ladder
diagrams, and sequence of operations graphic pages.
R
All 120-volt wiring shall comply with NFPA 70. All 24-volt wiring shall
comply with the IMC and terminal device manufacturers recommendations.
D
Provide training on the installed system according to the maximum training

days in UFGS 23 09 23.13 20. All operator workstation functions requiring
BACnet services, i.e., navigating through the graphic displays, trending,
alarming and monitoring of the new controls system must be demonstrated from
the existing operator workstation using only the existing application
software and without the need to launch other applications or logon to other
vendor applications.
D306001 1.2 ELECTRONIC CONTROLS
If required, provide programmable thermostats with built in keypads for

scheduling of day and night temperatures with two setback periods per day.
Provide independent summer and winter programs. Thermostats shall have
temporary and manual override of schedule and battery backup.
D3070 SYSTEMS TESTING AND BALANCING
D3070 1.1 HVAC SYSTEM

Al Dhafra, UAE
Provide HVAC systems testing and balancing that complies with the
requirements specified in UFGS Specification Section 23 05 93, Testing,
Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC. The Designer of Record shall prepare
UFGS Specification Section 23 05 93, as a part of the project specification
and shall include the prepared specification section in the design submittal
for the project.
D3090 OTHER HVAC SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT
D309001 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION ITEMS
D309001 1.1 SEISMIC DESIGN
Provide in accordance with UFC 3-401-01, Mechanical Engineering.
D309002 REFRIGERATION SYSTEMS
D309090 OTHER SPECIAL MECHANICAL SYSTEMS
D309090 1.1 ENERGY RECOVERY WHEELS
T
Total energy (enthalpy) type energy recovery wheels (heat wheels). Media
shall be aluminum or a lightweight polymer coated with a corrosion-resistant
finish. Etched or oxidized surfaces are not acceptable. Heat transfer
AF
surfaces shall be coated with a non-migrating (permanently bonded) absorbent
specifically developed for the selective transfer of water vapor. Equal
sensible and latent recovery efficiencies shall be documented through a
certification program conducted per ASHRAE 84 and AHRI 1060. The energy
recovery wheel shall have an insulated housing of double wall construction,
rotor seals that are specifically designed to limit cross-contamination,
and a rotation detector. Should rotation stop, the rotation detector shall
R
alarm the HVAC control system. Filter sections shall be readily accessible
for maintenance.
D309090 1.2 HEAT PIPES

D
Factory fabricated, assembled and tested heat pipes with counter-flow

arrangement. Provide hermitically sealed, seamless aluminum tube cores
with extended surfaces. Heat exchanger frame shall be constructed of not
less than 16-gage galvanized steel and fitted with intermediate tube
supports, and flange connections. Provide tube end covers and a partition
of galvanized steel to separate exhaust and supply air streams without
cross-contamination. A refrigerant shall be used as the working fluid.
Type I refrigerants are not allowed.

Al Dhafra, UAE
SECTION D40
FIRE PROTECTION
05/14
D40 GENERAL
D40 1.1 DESIGN GUIDANCE
Provide the design and installation of fire protection systems in accordance

with the following references. This Performance Technical Specification
(PTS) adds clarification to the fundamental requirements contained in the
T
following Government Standards. The general requirements of this PTS
section are located in PTS Section Z10, General Performance Technical
Specification.
AF

R
UFC(s):UFC 3-600-01, Fire Protection
D
Engineering for Facilities)

Buildings
UFC 3-600-10N Fire Protection Engineering
D40 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
Materials and assemblies installed in the work shall be inspected and found
to be in compliance with industry standards and these specifications prior
to acceptance of the work. Items found not to be in compliance shall be
removed, or corrective measures taken, to assure compliance with the
referenced standard.
Qualifications, Training Plans, and Test Plans and Procedures indicated

herein, shall be submitted 45 calendar days prior to the expected date of

Al Dhafra, UAE
execution. Notify the Contracting Officer 14 calendar days prior to all

testing. Submit test results within 7 calendar days of completion of testing.
D40 1.2.1 Qualified Workers
D40 1.2.1.1 Fire Protection Designer of Record
Services and qualifications of the FPDOR shall be as specified

in UFC 3-600-01 and UFC 3-600-10N. The FPDOR shall review and
approve all fire protection engineering submittals.
D40 1.2.1.2 Fire Protection Engineering Technicians
Workers required herein to be certified by the National

Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies
(NICET) as an engineering technician in the Fire Protection
Engineering Technology program shall be thoroughly trained and
experienced, and completely familiar with the specified
requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of
the work in this section. All documentation required to be
T
submitted for record and/or approval shall include the NICET
engineering technician's signature, along with the
technician's current NICET certification number, certification
AF
subfield, and level.
Installation drawings, shop drawings or working plans,

calculations, other required pre-construction documentation
and as-built drawings shall be prepared by, or under the direct
supervision of a NICET engineering technician as specified in
Section 6 D40 of Part 3.
R
D40 1.2.1.3 Qualified System Installers
Fire Suppression System and Fire Alarm System installers shall

be regularly engaged in the installation of the type and
D
complexity of system specified in the Contract documents, and

shall have served in a similar capacity for at least three
systems that have performed in the manner intended for a period
of not less than 6 months.
Installers of Chlorinated Poly Vinyl Chloride (CPVC) sprinkler

systems shall be certified by the manufacturer and maintain a
copy of their certification on hand at all times.
D40 1.2.1.4 Fire Protection QC Specialist
The Fire Protection (FP) QC Specialist shall be a U.S.

Registered Fire Protection Engineer (FPE) and shall be an
integral part of the Prime Contractor's Quality Control
Organization. This FPE shall have no business relationships
(owner, partner, operating officer, distributor, salesman, or
technical representative) with any fire protection equipment
device manufacturers, suppliers or installers for any such
equipment provided as part of this project. The Fire

Al Dhafra, UAE
Protection Designer of Record (FPDOR) may serve as the FPQC

Specialist provided the following qualifications are met.
a. Qualifications/Experience: The FPQC Specialist shall

have obtained their professional registration by
successfully completing the Fire Protection Engineering
discipline examination. This FPE shall have a minimum
of 5 years full time and exclusive experience in every
aspect of facility design and construction as it relates
to fire protection, which includes, but is not limited
to, building code analysis, life safety code analysis,
design of automatic detection and suppression systems,
passive fire protection design, water supply analysis,
and a multi-discipline coordination reviews, and
construction surveillance.
b. Area of Responsibility: The FPQC Specialist is
responsible for assuring the proper construction and
installation of life safety and fire protection features
across all disciplines and trades. The FPQC Specialist
shall be responsible for assuring that life safety and
T
fire protection features are provided in accordance with
the design documents, approved construction submittals,
and manufacturer's requirements. Examples include, but
AF
are not limited to, water distribution systems including
fire pumps and fire hydrants, fire resistive assemblies
such as spray-applied fire proofing of structural
components and fire rated walls/partitions, fire alarm
and detection systems, fire suppression and standpipe
systems, and emergency and exit lighting fixtures.
c. Construction Surveillance: The FPQC Specialist shall
visit the construction site as necessary to ensure life
R
safety and fire protection systems are being constructed,
applied, and installed in accordance with the approved
design documents, approved construction submittals, and
manufacturer's requirements. Frequency and duration of
D
the field visits are dependent upon particular system

components, system complexity, and phase of
construction. At a minimum, field visits shall occur
just prior to installation of suspended ceiling system
to inspect the integrity of passive fire protection
features and fire suppression system piping, preliminary
inspections of fire alarm/detection and suppression
systems, and final acceptance testing of fire
alarm/detection and suppression systems. The FPQC
Specialist shall prepare a written report detailing
compliance of any outstanding submittal review comments,
summarizing the results of all tests, detailing all
discrepancies discovered, corrective action taken, all
forms as required by the respective NFPA codes, and
recommendations/certifications for acceptance. Forward
one copy of the report with attachments to the Naval
Facilities Engineering Command Fire Protection Engineer.
D40 1.2.2 Performance Verification Testing

Al Dhafra, UAE
All systems shall have operational tests to demonstrate compliance

with contract requirements and respective NFPA codes, International
Building Code and as noted below. Test procedures shall be in full
compliance with the respective NFPA codes, the equipment manufacturer
recommendations, and UFC 3-600-10N. Provide all personnel,
equipment, and materials for tests. Return trips to witness repeat
acceptance tests due to failure of previous tests will be at the
Contractors expense.
D40 1.2.2.1 Preliminary Inspections and Final Acceptance Testing
The FPQC Specialist shall personally witness all preliminary

inspections of fire alarm/detection and suppression systems.
Once preliminary inspections have been successfully completed,
the FPQC Specialist shall submit a signed certificate to the
QC Manager that systems are ready for final inspection and
testing. The Naval Facilities Engineering Command Fire
Protection Engineer will witness formal tests and approve all
systems before they are accepted. The QC Manager shall submit
T
the request for formal inspection at least 15 days prior to the
date the inspection is to take place. The QC manager shall
provide 10 days advance notice to the Contracting Officer and
AF
the activity Fire Inspection Office of scheduled final
inspections.
D40 1.2.2.2 Final Life Safety/Fire Protection Certification
The FPQC Specialist shall provide certification that all life

safety and fire protection systems have been installed in
accordance with the contract documents, approved submittals,
R
and manufacturer's requirements. This certification shall
summarize all life safety and fire protection features, and
shall bear the professional seal of the FPQC Specialist.
D
D40 1.2.2.3 System Manufacturers Representatives
The systems manufacturer technical representative shall be

present for the final inspection and test for the following
systems: fire alarm and detection, fire pump, foam generating
and clean agent extinguishing.
D40 1.2.2.4 Fire Suppression Water Supply and Equipment
The fire hydrants shall be inspected prior to backfilling the

trench surrounding the fire hydrants. A report, including
pictures, shall be provided to the Contracting Officer.
Fire pump tests shall be conducted in the presence of the pump,

controller, and engine manufacturer technical representatives.
The fire pump manufacturer shall also be present for the
preliminary test of the fire pump system.
D40 1.2.2.5 Kitchen Hood Fire Extinguishing Systems

Al Dhafra, UAE
Not Used.
D40 1.2.2.6 Spray-Applied Fire Proofing and Fire Stopping
See Section C1030 for requirements.
D40 1.2.3 Training
The contractor shall provide training for the active systems within
6 weeks of final acceptance of the systems. The training shall be
scheduled at least 2 weeks in advance.

Procedures, MED Design Instruction Manual, and UFC 3-600-10N, Fire
Protection Engineering.
T

AF
All fire protection engineering submittals including:
a. Shop Drawings. Provide shop drawings for all systems.

b. Product Data. Provide product data for all equipment.
R
c. Design Data. Provide design data for all system calculations.
d. Test Reports
e. Certificates
D
D4010 FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEMS
D401001 FIRE ALARM DISTRIBUTION
D401001 1.1 REMOTE ANNUNCIATORS
Remote annunciators shall have a minimum 80 character alphanumeric display

with alarm acknowledge, alarm silence, and reset functions.
D401001 1.2 TRANSMITTED SIGNALS
Provide the following signals to be sent to the fire alarm receiving station:
a. Sprinkler Water Flow

b. Smoke Detector
c. Manual Pull Station
d. Supervisory (i.e., valve tamper switch, fire pump loss of power, fire
pump phase reversal)
e. Duct Smoke Detector

Al Dhafra, UAE
f. Fire Pump Running
D4020 FIRE SUPPRESSION WATER SUPPLY AND EQUIPMENT
D402001 FIRE PROTECTION WATER PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
The design point of connection to the existing water supply shall require the
approval of the Contracting Officer. The FP DOR shall conduct additional flow
tests after contract award prior to any design submissions. Tests shall be
conducted under the supervision of the Contracting Officer.
D4040 SPRINKLERS
D404001 SPRINKLERS & RELEASING DEVICES
D404001 1.1 DESCRIPTION
Areas subject to freezing shall be provided with a dry pipe system. Loading
docks may be protected with dry-type sidewall sprinklers supplied by the
wet-pipe system.
T
D404001 1.2 REQUIREMENTS
Utilize upright sprinklers with ordinary temperature rating and color to

AF
match finish in normally occupied rooms without a finished ceiling (i.e.,
laboratories, and other spaces with exposed ceilings).
D4090 OTHER FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS
D409001 CARBON DIOXIDE SYSTEMS

R
Not Used
D409002 FOAM GENERATING EQUIPMENT

D
D409002 1.1 SYSTEM CRITERIA
Foam fire protection systems shall incorporate the necessary elements for
foam storage, pumping, piping, proportioning, delivery, and detection,
activation and alarm systems.
D409002 1.2 SYSTEM OPERATION
Once activated, foam system(s) shall operate until shut down manually.
Provide separate circuits from the releasing control panel to each zone of
initiating devices. Transmission of signals from more than one zone over
a common circuit is prohibited.
D409002 1.3 AFFF CONCENTRATE PUMPS
The foam concentrate pump shall be positive displacement, electric motor

driven, drip proof, 240/480 volts, 50 Hz AC. System operation shall be fully
automatic, with manual over-ride and manual shutdown.

Al Dhafra, UAE
D409002 1.4 FOAM CONCENTRATE STORAGE TANK
A gage or unbreakable sight glass shall permit visual determination of level

of tank contents, unless liquid level is clearly visible through shell of
tank.
D409002 1.5 LOW-LEVEL LOW-EXPANSION FOAM SYSTEM
D409002 1.5.1 Discharge Devices
Where used the low-level AFFF nozzle system shall utilize the Viking
Grate Nozzle TM, Model GN 200 (or equivalent that is acceptable to
the NAVFAC Chief Fire Protection Engineer for this use).
D409002 1.5.2 Test Header
Where used a foam system test header connection with integral gate
valves shall be located at each foam system riser. Sufficient 2-1/2
inch (65 mm) male National Standard hose threads, with cap and chain,
shall be installed to allow testing of the riser at the design flow
T
rate. A wall escutcheon plate with "FOAM TEST HEADER" in raised
letters cast in plate shall be installed.
AF
D409002 1.6 AUTOMATIC WATER CONTROL VALVE ASSEMBLY (DELUGE VALVE)
Where used, the water control valve shall be an electrically actuated type.
Valve shall be resettable without opening the valve. Solenoid valve shall
be of the normally closed, de-energized type, which opens when energized
upon receipt of an electrical signal from the releasing control panel to
which it is connected. Solenoid valves used with diaphragm-type valves
shall be rated for a maximum pressure differential of 175 psi (1207 kPa).
R
Water control valves used for low-level foam systems shall be capable of
recycling to the closed position at an adjustable speed. Valves located
in hazardous locations shall be approved for the hazard classification of
the area where located.
D
D409002 1.7 FOAM SYSTEM RELEASING CONTROL SYSTEM
D409002 1.7.1 Manual Releasing Stations
Where used the units shall be dual-action type located inside a clear
plastic tamper cover that must be lifted prior to actuating the
station. Any lettering on the cover must be "FOAM"; the words "fire"
or "fire alarm" shall not appear on the cover. The station shall not
require the breaking of glass to actuate. Unit shall have operating
instructions clearly marked on the station cover. Unit shall be
compatible with the control panel to which it is connected. Operation
of a station shall result in immediate release of the foam system for
that space.
D409002 1.7.2 Flame Detectors
Where used flame detectors shall operate on the infrared (IR)

principle. Detector shall employ three IR sensors to provide

Al Dhafra, UAE
multi-spectrum detection. Each detector shall have a manufacturer's

swivel mounting bracket. Locate a permanent engraved rigid plastic
or metal label at each detector with detector aiming information
(degrees horizontal and vertical) for the corresponding detector.
D409002 1.7.3 Abort Switch
Where used a foam release abort switch shall be installed adjacent

to each manual releasing station and at the releasing panel and be
properly labeled (Minimum 1 inch high lettering stating:
"CONTINUOUS OPERATION OF SWITCH WILL ABORT FOAM FLOW UNTIL SYSTEM IS
RESET". Switch shall be deadman type which when depressed ceases flow
of foam solution (both water and foam concentrate). Upon release of
the switch, the system shall return to its previous operational state.
Switch and wiring shall be supervised.
D409003 CLEAN AGENT SYSTEMS
D409003 1.1 SYSTEM INSTALLATION
T
The system shall be supplied and installed by a factory-authorized
distributor. The distributor shall be trained by the manufacturer to
design, install, test, and maintain the system and shall be able to provide
AF
proof of training upon request.
D409003 1.2 RELEASING CONTROL SYSTEM
Where provided manual release stations shall be dual-action type located

inside a clear plastic tamper cover that must be lifted prior to actuating
the station. The words "fire" or "fire alarm" shall not appear on the cover.
The station shall not require the breaking of glass to actuate. Unit shall
R
have operating instructions clearly marked on the station cover. Unit shall
be compatible with the control panel to which it is connected. Operation
of a station shall result in immediate release of the clean agent system
for that space.
D
D409004 HOOD & DUCT FIRE PROTECTION
Not Used
-- End Of Section --

Al Dhafra, UAE
SECTION D50
ELECTRICAL
05/14
D50 GENERAL
RFP Part 3, including the Engineering System Requirements (ESR) provides project
specific requirements. The RFP Part 4, Performance Technical Specifications
(PTS), provides generalized technical requirements that apply to multiple facility
types and include more requirements than are applicable to any one project.
Therefore, only the RFP Part 4 requirements that apply to the project and further
define the RFP Part 3 project specific requirements are required.
D50 1.1 NARRATIVE
This section covers installations inside the facility and out to the five
foot line. See PTS Section G40, Site Electrical, for continuation of systems
beyond the five foot line.
T
D50 1.2 ELECTRICAL DESIGN GUIDANCE
AF
When all product Quality Control information is included in the Unified

Facility Criteria (UFC) and there are requirement options identified in the
R
ESR, then the Uniformat Level 4 titles (and possible subtitles) are included
without additional verbiage. One example of this is D501090, OTHER SERVICE
AND DISTRIBUTION.
D
D50 1.2.1 Government Publications

UFC(s):UFC 3-501-01, Electrical
Engineering)

Buildings
UFC 4-211-01N Aircraft Maintenance Hangars
UFC 3-580-01 Telecommunications Building Cabling

Al Dhafra, UAE
Systems Planning and Design
COMMITTEE ON NATIONAL SECURITY SYSTEMS (CNSS) TEMPEST
CNSSAM TEMPEST/1-13 Red/Black Installation Guidance
NSTISSI-7003 (1996) Protective Distribution Systems (PDS)
USAF STANDARDS, CRITERIA, AND PUBLICATIONS
ADAB Specs 20150402 Al Dhafra Air Base Specifications
ETL 02-12 Communications and Information System

Criteria for Air Force Facilities
USAFCENT OSP/ISP 2013 USAF Outside and Inside Plant

Distribution Guidance
T
AFSSI 7703 Communications Security: Protected
Distribution Systems
AFSSI 7700
AF Communications and Information:
Emissions Security
USAF Instructions 33 Series for Communications and

Information Publications and Forms
TO 31W3-10-22 Telecommunications Engineering,

Outside Plant Telephone
R
NAVY STANDARDS, CRITERIA, AND PUBLICATIONS

D
SECNAVINST 5510.36 Department of the Navy Information

Security Program
IA PUB-5239-22 Section 4 - Physical Protection
UFGS 26 08 00 Apparatus Inspection and Testing
UFGS 26 20 00 Interior Distribution System
UFGS 26 23 00 Switchboards and Switchgear
UFGS 26 29 23 Variable Frequency Drive Systems

Under 600 Volts
UFGS 26 32 13.00 20 Single Operation Generator Sets

Al Dhafra, UAE
UFGS 26 32 26 Motor Generator Sets, 400 Hertz
UFGS 26 33 53.00 20 Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS)
UFGS 26 35 43 400 Hertz Solid State Frequency

Converters
UFGS 26 36 23.00 20 Automatic Transfer Switches
UFGS 26 41 00.00 20 Lightning Protection System
UFGS 26 51 00 Interior Lighting
UFGS 27 05 14.00 10 Cable Television Premises

Distribution System
UFGS 27 05 28.36 40 Cable Trays for Communications

Systems
UFGS 27 10 00 Building Telecommunications Cabling
T
Systems
UFGS 27 54 00.00 20 Community Antenna Television (CATV)

AF
UFGS 28 20 00.00 20 Electronic Security System (ESS),
Commercial
National Fire Protection Association, NFPA 70 National Electric

Code), latest Edition.
National Fire protection Association, NFPA 72 National Fire Alarm

R
Code), latest Edition.
British Standards, BS 7671 (Requirements for Electrical

Installations)
D
British Standards, BS 1363-2 (13A Plugs, Socket-outlets &

adapters-Specifications for 13A switched & un-switched
socket-outlets
The Electricity Wiring Regulations issued by The Regulation and

Supervision Bureau for the Water, Wastewater and Electricity Sector
in the Emirate of Abu Dhabi.
D50 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
Qualifications, certifications, and Test Plans indicated herein shall be

submitted 45 calendar days prior to the expected date of execution. Notify
the Contracting Officer 14 calendar days prior to all testing. Submit test
results within 7 calendar days of completion of testing.
The Designer of Record is responsible for approving the submittals listed

below.

Al Dhafra, UAE
D50 1.3.1 Qualified Testing Organization
Contractor shall engage the services of a qualified testing

organization to provide inspection, testing, calibration, and
adjustment of the electrical distribution system and equipment listed
in paragraph entitled "Acceptance Tests and Inspections" herein.
Organization shall be independent of the supplier, manufacturer, and
installer of the equipment. The organization shall be a first tier
subcontractor.
Submit name and qualifications of organization. Organization shall

have been regularly engaged in the testing of electrical materials,
devices, installations, and systems for a minimum of 5 years. The
organization shall have a calibration program, and test instruments
used shall be calibrated in accordance with NETA ATS.
Submit name and qualifications of the lead engineering technician

performing the required testing services. Include a list of three
comparable jobs performed by the technician with specific names and
telephone numbers for reference. Testing, inspection, calibration,
T
and adjustments shall be performed by an engineering technician,
certified by NETA or the National Institute for Certification in
Engineering Technologies (NICET) with a minimum of 5 years' experience
AF
inspecting, testing, and calibrating electrical distribution and
generation equipment, systems, and devices.
D50 1.3.2 NEC Qualified Worker
Provide in accordance with NFPA 70. Qualified Workers shall be allowed

to be assisted by helpers on a 1 to 1 ratio, provided such helpers
are registered in recognized apprenticeship programs. Submit a
R
certification confirming NEC Qualified Worker requirements.
D50 1.3.3 Qualified PV Installer

D
D50 1.3.4 Qualified Telecommunications Worker
All installers assigned to the installation of telecommunications

systems or any of its components shall be Building Industry Consulting
Services International (BICSI) Registered Cabling Installation
Technicians or have a minimum of 3 year experience in the installation
of the specified copper and fiber optic cable and components. Include
names and locations of two projects successfully completed using
optical fiber and copper communications cabling systems. Include
written certification from users that systems have performed
satisfactorily for not less than 18 months. Include specific
experience in installing and testing structured telecommunications
distribution systems using optical fiber and Category 5e cabling
systems.
D50 1.3.5 Material Standards

Al Dhafra, UAE
Ensure service support and provide manufacturer's nameplate in

accordance with PTS Section Z10, General Performance Technical
Specification.
D50 1.3.5.1 Warning Labels
Provide arc flash warning labels.
D50 1.3.5.2 Field-Required Nameplates
Provide laminated plastic nameplates for each switchboard,

switchgear, panelboard, equipment enclosure, motor controller,
relay, and switch. Each nameplate must identify the function
and, when applicable, the position. Provide melamine plastic
nameplates, 0.125 inch (3 mm) thick, white with black center
core. Surface shall be matte finish. Corners shall be square.
Accurately align lettering and engrave into the core. Minimum
size of nameplates shall be 1-inch by 2-1/2 inches (25 mm by
65 mm). Lettering shall be a minimum of 0.25 inch (6.35 mm)
T
high normal block style.
D50 1.3.6 Factory Testing

AF
The Government reserves the right to witness all factory testing. The
manufacturer shall have a calibration program that assures that all
applicable test instruments are maintained within rated accuracy.
D50 1.3.7 Electrical System Startup and Testing
Submit test plans for approval. The test plans shall be tailored to
R
the systems provided.
The test plan shall list make and model and provide functional
description of the test instruments and accessories and shall describe
D
the setup of the tests to be conducted. Test instruments shall be

capable of measuring and recording or displaying test data at a higher
resolution and greater accuracy than specified for the equipment's
performance.
D50 1.3.7.1 Factory Trained Engineer
Provide a factory trained engineer to supervise start-up and

testing as required in referenced specifications.
D50 1.3.7.2 Performance Verification Testing
The Contractor shall show by demonstration in service that all

circuits and devices are in operating condition. Tests shall
be such that each item of control equipment will function not
less than five times. The Contractor shall provide all necessary
test equipment, tools, fuel, load banks, labor, and materials
for testing. As a minimum, all systems shall be tested in
accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Additional

Al Dhafra, UAE
testing requirements for the various systems are described with

those systems, hereinafter. The Contractor shall assure that
all applicable test instruments are maintained within rated
accuracy. Dated calibration labels shall be visible on all test
equipment.
Submit a separate electrical field test plan in accordance with

manufacturer's recommendations and that conforms to NETA ATS
for each piece of Electrical Distribution Equipment and System
requiring Performance Verification Testing.
The following items identify specific test requirements.

Additional test requirements are contained in the applicable
UFGS.
a. Panelboards - Field test each GFI and AFI circuit breaker

with a UL 1436-certified outlet circuit tester to verify
correct operation.
b. Motor control centers - Test motor control centers and
motor starters in accordance with NETA ATS.
T
c. Surge Protective Devices (SPD) -
1) Inspect for physical damage and compare nameplate

AF
data with the drawings and specifications, if applicable.
Verify from the nameplate data that the SPD equipment is
appropriate for the system voltage.
2) Verify lead length between the SPD equipment and the

circuit connection is less than one foot.
3) Verify wiring between the SPD equipment and the

R
circuit connection does not include high-inductance
coils or sharp bends.
4) Confirm circuit breaker used for SPD circuit

D
connection is sized in accordance with SPD manufacturer's

requirements.
5) Ensure SPD equipment is grounded in accordance with

SPD manufacturer's requirements. Check the ground lead
on each device for individual attachment to the ground
bus or electrode.
6) Check tightness of connections in accordance with

NETA ATS.
7) For SPD equipment with visual indications of proper

operation, verify that it displays normal operating
characteristics.
d. Busway - Conduct standard tests for busway in accordance
with NETA ATS.
e. Receptacles - Test GFI receptacles with a UL
1436-certified outlet circuit tester to verify correct
operation.

Al Dhafra, UAE
f. Lighting - Aim photocell switches and locate light level

sensors in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations. Verify that equipment operates in
accordance with user's requirements and in accordance
with manufacturers recommendations. Fluorescent lamps
on electronic dimming ballast control shall be burned in
at full light output for 100 hours before dimming.
g. Telecommunication - Test telecommunications systems in
accordance with applicable EIA/TIA requirements.
h. Public address and intercommunications systems - Tests
shall include originating and accepting messages at each
station, at proper volume levels, without cross-talk or
noise from other links or non-designated units. Test
shall utilize the phonetically balanced monosyllabic
work intelligibility test in accordance with ANSI S3.2
(ASA 85). In order to be acceptable, a score of at least
75 percent must be obtained for each system test.
i. Community Antenna Television Systems - Confirm design and
installation is in compliance with NCTA-02, 47 CFR 76.605
and in accordance with FCC proof of performance
T
requirements. Test plan shall define tests required to
ensure that the system meets technical, operational, and
performance specifications. Test plan shall include plan
AF
for testing for signal leakage.
j. Electronic security systems (ESS) - Test ESS in
accordance with UFGS requirements.
k. Grounding systems - Test the grounding system in
accordance with NETA ATS.
l. Lightning protection - Upon completion of the
installation, Contractor shall furnish the UL Lightning
Protection Inspection Certificate certified to UL 96A for
R
the system.
m. Emergency lighting - Test emergency lighting that is
intended for means of egress in accordance with NFPA 101,
Section 5-9. Confirm the emergency lighting system
D
operates for a minimum of 90 minutes and emergency

illumination satisfies NFPA 101, Section 5-9, specified
levels.
D50 1.3.7.3 Acceptance Tests and Inspections
The Government reserves the right to witness all Acceptance

Tests and Inspections, review data, and request other such
additional inspections and repeat tests as necessary to ensure
that the system and provided services conform to the stated
requirements.
The Qualified Testing Organization shall provide the Acceptance

Tests and Inspections test plan and perform the acceptance tests
and inspections. Test methods, procedures, and test values
shall be performed and evaluated in accordance with NETA ATS,
the manufacturer's recommendations, and paragraph entitled
"Field Quality Control" of each applicable specification
section. Tests identified as optional in NETA ATS are not

Al Dhafra, UAE
required unless otherwise specified. Equipment shall be placed

in service only after completion of required tests and
evaluations of the test results have been completed. Contractor
shall supply to the testing organization complete sets of shop
drawings, settings of adjustable devices, and other information
necessary for an accurate test and inspection of the system
prior to the performance of any final testing. Perform
acceptance tests and inspections on Diesel-Electric
Generators, Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) Systems,
400-Hertz Motor Generator Sets, 400-Hertz Solid State Frequency
Converters, Automatic Transfer Switches, and Switchboards and
Switchgear.
Design Submittals shall be in accordance with PTS Section Z10, General

Performance Technical Specifications, UFGS Section 01 33 10.05 20, Design
Submittal Procedures, MED Design Instruction Manual, and UFC 3-501-01,
Electrical Engineering.
T
Submit all PV submittals to the Contracting Officer for approval.
AF
with the limitations stated in PTS Section Z10, General Performance
UFGS 26 08 00, Apparatus Inspection and Testing

R
UFGS 26 20 00, Interior Distribution System
UFGS 26 23 00, Switchboards and Switchgear

D
UFGS 26 29 23, Variable Frequency Drives System Under 600 Volts
UFGS 26 32 13.00 20, Single Operation Generator Sets
UFGS 26 32 26, Motor Generator Sets, 400 Hertz
UFGS 26 33 53.00 20, Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS)
UFGS 26 35 43, 400 Hertz Frequency Converters
UFGS 26 36 23.00 20, Automatic Transfer Switches
UFGS 26 41 00.00 20, Lightning Protection System
UFGS 26 51 00, Interior Lighting
UFGS 27 05 14.00 10, Cable Television Premises Distribution System

Al Dhafra, UAE
UFGS 27 05 28.36 40, Cable Trays for Communications Systems
UFGS 27 10 00, Building Telecommunications Cabling System
UFGS 28 20 00.00 20, Electronic Security System (ESS), Commercial
D50 1.4.1 Sustainable Design Submittal
Submit sustainable design submittals in accordance with UFGS 01 33

29.05 20, Sustainability Reporting for Design-Build.

Performance Technical Specifications. In addition to the PTS Section Z10
requirements, the Designer of Record (DOR) shall approve the following
construction submittals as a minimum:
Electrical Equipment, OMSI information for equipment, and Quality
T
Assurance Submittals listed above.
AF
Provide certification that all adjustable protective device settings have
been set in accordance with the coordination study for the as-built equipment
and configuration.
D50 1.5.1 Sustainable Construction Submittal

R
01 33 29.05 20, Sustainability Reporting for Design-Build.
D5010 ELECTRICAL SERVICE AND DISTRIBUTION

D
General Purpose Interior Secondary Power Distribution System shall be rated at

415/240V, 3P, 4W, 50Hz. In addition 60Hz and 400Hz Systems will also be required.
D501001 MAIN TRANSFORMERS
Pad mounted distribution transformers shall be in accordance with PTS Section G40,
Site Electrical Utilities.
D501002 SERVICE ENTRANCE EQUIPMENT
When a switchboard or switchgear is required, the Designer of Record shall utilize

UFGS Section 26 23 00 for the project specification, and shall submit the edited
specification section as a part of the design submittal for the project.
D501003 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS
D501004 PANELBOARDS

Al Dhafra, UAE
Panelboards shall comply with UL 67 and UL 50. UL 869A shall apply if used as service
entrance equipment. Panelboards for non-linear loads shall be UL listed, including
heat rise tested, in accordance with UL 67, except with the neutral assembly
installed and carrying 200 percent of the phase bus current during testing.
Provide molded case circuit breakers in accordance with UL 489. Ground fault
circuit interrupting circuit breakers shall comply with UL 943. Arc fault circuit
breakers shall comply with UL 489 and UL 1699.
D501005 ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Provide molded case circuit breakers in accordance with UL 489. UL 869A shall apply
if used as service entrance equipment. Provide with solid neutral when grounded
conductor is present.
D501006 MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS
Motor control centers shall comply with UL 845, NEMA ICS 2, and NEMA ICS 3. Motor
controllers shall comply with UL 508. Provide disconnecting means capable of being
locked out for machines and other equipment to prevent unexpected startup or
T
release of stored energy in accordance with 29 CFR 1910.147.
D501006 1.1 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES (VFD)

AF
When Variable Frequency Drives are required, the Designer of Record shall
utilize UFGS Section 26 29 23 for the project specification, and shall submit
the edited specification section as a part of the design submittal for the
project.
D501090 OTHER SERVICE AND DISTRIBUTION

R
D501090 1.1 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICE (SPD)
D501090 1.2 BUSWAY

D
Busway shall comply with NEMA BU 1 and UL 857.
D5020 LIGHTING AND BRANCH WIRING
D502001 BRANCH WIRING
Provide wiring and connections for special outlets where required.
All homerun circuits must contain no more than 3 phase conductors.
Switches shall comply with NEMA WD-1 and UL 20.
D502002 LIGHTING EQUIPMENT
Installation shall meet requirements of manufacturer's recommendations and the

additional requirements for "Severe Seismic Disturbance" contained in ASTM E 580.
Fixture support wires shall conform with ASTM A 641/A 641M, galvanized regular
coating, soft temper.

Al Dhafra, UAE
D502002 1.1 BALLASTS
Electronic ballasts shall include a 5-year warranty.
D5030 COMMUNICATIONS AND SECURITY
D503001 TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
Installation and testing of telecommunications systems shall be in accordance with

aforementioned UFCs, TIA/EIA 568-C and addendums, TIA/EIA 569-B and addendums,
ANSI/TIA-606-B, ANSI/TIA-607-B, and BICSIs Telecommunications Distribution
Methods Manual, 13th Edition. The Designer of Record shall utilize UFGS sections
listed in this section for the project specifications and shall submit the edited
specification section as a part of the design submittal for the project. Use NEMA
VE 2-2006 and NEMA VE 1-2009 for cable trays.
D503002 PAGING SYSTEMS
Paging System shall be designed in accordance with UFC-021-01 Design and O&M: Mass
T
Notification Systems.
D503003 INTERCOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS

AF
D503004 TELEVISION SYSTEMS
D503004 1.1 CLOSED CIRCUIT TELEVISION (CCTV) FOR VIDEO TRAINING
R
D503004 1.2 COMMUNITY ANTENNA SYSTEM (CATV)
Installation and testing of Community Antenna System (CATV) shall be in accordance

D
with aforementioned UFCs and TIA/EIA 568-C and addendums, TIA/EIA 569-B and
addendums, ANSI/TIA-606-B, ANSI/TIA-607-B, and BICSIs Telecommunications
Distribution Methods Manual, 13th Edition. The Designer of Record shall utilize
UFGS sections listed in this section for the project specifications and shall
submit the edited specification section as a part of the design submittal for the
project.
D503005 SECURITY SYSTEMS
D503005 1.1 ELECTRONIC SECTURITY SYSTEMS (ESS)
The Designer of Record shall utilize UFGS Section 28 20 00.00 20 for the
project specification and shall submit the edited specification section as
a part of the design submittal for the project. All ACS components shall
be on the FIPS 201-2 product compliance list provided by GSA. All ESS
telecommunications components shall be DISA approved (aplits.disa.mil), and
all ESS system components shall undergo the Risk Management Framework (RMF)
accreditation process (to be done by others). CCTV system shall be ONVIF
compliant.

Al Dhafra, UAE
D503005 1.2 PROTECTED DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS (PDS)
Protected Distribution Systems shall be in accordance with AFSSI 7703, IA

PUB-5239-22, CNSSAM TEMPEST/1-13, and NSTISSI-7003.
D503005 1.3 SENSITIVE COMPARTMENTED INFORMATION FACILITIES (SCIF)
Not required.
D503005 1.4 ADDITIONAL SHIELDING
Electrical systems installed within secure spaces or facilities shall

comply with ICD 705, ICS 705-1, ICS 705-2, IC Tech Spec for ICD/ICS 705,
Best Practices Guideline for Architectural Radio Frequency Shielding, and
MQ-4C Triton FRD REV. G (section 4.2.1.1 EMI/EMC Requirements).FOB MCS
shielding, to include MCS Server Room, Pilot Space, Vestibule, and FOB
Equipment Room shall comply with FRD MOB section 4.2.1.1 EMI/EMC
Requirements.
T
D503090 OTHER COMMUNICATIONS AND ALARM SYSTEMS
AF
D5090 OTHER ELECTRICAL SERVICES
D509001 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION ITEMS (ELECTRICAL)
D509002 EMERGENCY LIGHTING AND POWER
D509002 1.1 EMERGENCY LIGHTING

R
D509002 1.2 EMERGENCY GENERATORS
When an emergency generator is required, the Designer of Record shall utilize

D
UFGS Section 26 32 13.00 20 for the project specification, and shall submit
the edited specification section as a part of the design submittal for the
project.
D509002 1.3 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER AND BYPASS/ISOLATION SWITCHES
When an Automatic Transfer Switch is required, the Designer of Record shall

utilize UFGS Section 26 36 23.00 20 for the project specification, and shall
submit the edited specification section as a part of the design submittal
for the project.
D509002 1.4 UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY (UPS) SYSTEM
When a UPS system is required, the Designer of Record shall utilize UFGS
Section 26 33 53.00 20 and shall submit the edited specification section
as a part of the design submittal for the project.
D509003 GROUNDING SYSTEMS

Al Dhafra, UAE
D509004 LIGHTNING PROTECTION
When a lightning protection system is required the designer of record shall utilize
UFGS section 26 41 00.00 20 and shall submit the edited specification section as
a part of the design submittal for the project.
D509006 ENERGY MANAGEMENT CONTROL SYSTEM
D509007 PHOTOVOLTAIC ENERGY SYSTEM
D509090 OTHER SPECIAL SYSTEMS AND DEVICES
D509090 1.1 400 HERTZ SYSTEM and 60 Hertz System
T
The Designer of Record shall utilize UFGS Section 26 32 26 or UFGS Section
26 35 43 for the project specification, and shall submit the edited
AF
--End Of Section--
R
D

Triton Operational Facilities (RAMS) P-960
Al Dhafra, UAE
SECTION E10
EQUIPMENT
05/14
E10 GENERAL
E10 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Where required by the project program, the contractor shall obtain the
services of equipment specialists to specify any audiovisual, shop, fitness
equipment, or other specialty equipment. Equipment specialists shall not
T
have any affiliation with the product specified. All specialty equipment
will be installed by qualified installers regularly engaged in installing
the specialty equipment. Systems furnishings installers must be the systems
AF
furniture manufacturer's dealer of record.
E10 1.2 DESIGN GUIDANCE

R

D
E10 1.2.1 Industry Standards and Codes
Loading Dock Equipment Manufacturers' Association (LODEM)
E10 1.2.2 Government Standards

PART 4 - SECTION E10 - Page 1

Al Dhafra, UAE
UFC(s):UFC 3-101-01, ArchitectureUFC


Buildings
E10 1.3 PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION AND COMPLIANCE TESTING
Verification of satisfactory special equipment and furnishing systems

performance shall be via Performance Verification Testing, as detailed in
this section of the RFP.
E10 1.3.1 Field Tests for Dock Leveling Equipment
a. Roll-over Tests - Move roll-over load of 20,000 pounds (9,072

kg) over the dock leveler between the bed of a freight carrier
and the building loading dock surface for ten cycles. With the
ramp extension retracted and the ramp platform leveled with the
T
building loading dock surface, run a 20,000 pound (9,072 kg)
roll-over load over the ramp in various directions for 20
cycles. No permanent deformation or hydraulic fluid leakage
shall occur subsequent to examination after these tests.
AF
b. Drop Tests - Twice, drop test the dock leveler at the indicated
rated capacity as follows: With the load on the platform and
the load resting on a vehicle carrier bed not less than 10 inches
(254 mm) above loading dock surface, pull the carrier or pull
away from the lip, leaving the loading ramp unsupported. The
measured vertical drop of the dock leveler taken at the point
where the lip rests on the vehicle carrier shall not exceed 4
R
inches (102 mm) during each of the drop tests. Inspect the
loading ramp after each drop and ensure no damage or distortion
to the mechanical, electrical, or structural components.
There shall be no leakage from the hydraulic system.
D
c. Acceptance Tests - Perform an acceptance test in the presence

of the dock leveler manufacturer and the Contracting Officer
subsequent to the roll-over load and drop tests. Conduct
operation of the equipment through all of its motions and
specified checks as follows: (a) extend lip to rest on a variety
of freight carriers with beds up to 12 inches (305 mm) above
and below deck level; (b) test 102 mm (4 inches) drop limitation
with 7,000 pound (3,175 kg) load on ramp, evenly distributed;
(c)test level compensation with the ramp, loaded with a minimum
of 7,000 pounds (3,175 kg); and (d) test proper compensation
(float) for various compression of counter-springs, with ramp
loaded and unloaded.
E10 1.4 DESIGN SUBMITTALS
Design Submittals shall be in accordance with UFGS section 01 33 10.05 20,

Design Submittal Procedures, MED Design Instruction Manual, UFC 3-101-01,
Architecture, UFC 3-120-10, Interior Design.

Al Dhafra, UAE
E10 1.5 CONSTRUCTION SUBMITTALS

Field tests of equipment, vault door, loading dock equipment, kitchen

equipment and unit kitchens.
E1010 COMMERCIAL EQUIPMENT
E101005 SECURITY & VAULT EQUIPMENT
E101005 1.1 VAULT AND DOORS
The Vault ("Weapons Storage Area" (WSA) or "Armory", or other title according
to the project program) space shall be designed in accordance with criteria
in MIL-HDBK-1013/1A to provide at least 10 minutes of delay time against
low and medium threat severity levels of forced entry. The space is required
T
to be built to the construction standards described in MIL-HDBK-1013/1A for
Class A vaults. The reinforced concrete must have minimum 28-day
compressive strength of at least 3000 PSI (20,684 kPa) and the floor, walls,
AF
and ceiling/roof components of this space must all be cast in place and at
least 8 inches (200 mm) thick. The door into the vault must be a GSA-Approved
and labeled Class 5 Security Vault Door that conforms to Federal
Specification AA-D-00600. Provide door manufacturers modified standard
or custom Day Gate, designed for use with the vault door furnished, for access
control and weapons issue. Except for the door opening, penetrations and
openings through the structural security envelope of the floor, walls,
and ceiling/roof of the Vault that are 96 sq. inches (618 sq. cm) or greater
R
with the least dimension greater than 6 inches (150 mm) are not allowed.
PTS Section D50, Electrical, includes requirements for Intrusion Detection
System (IDS) within the space and for Security Lighting at the outside of
the Vault Door to the space.
D
E101005 1.1.1 Set-backs
Where the perimeter walls of the WSA spaces are part of the facility
exterior walls, the vault walls shall be set back from the exterior
part of the exterior wall to allow at least 4 inches (100 mm) for the
normal wall facing to cover the vault walls.
E101005 1.1.2 Egress
Where a WSA space exceeds 1000 square feet (90 sq m) in floor area,
or will have more than eight occupants, the space shall have a minimum
of 2 exits for safety purposes. When more than one entrance / exit
is required, each shall be equipped with a Security Vault Door, with
only one used for normal entry access.
E101005 1.2 SECURITY VAULT DOOR
Security Vault Door must be GSA-Approved and labeled Class 5 Security Vault

Al Dhafra, UAE
Door that conforms to Federal Specification AA-D-00600. Provide

GSA-Approved and labeled Class 5 Security Vault Door that conforms to Federal
Specification AA-D-00600. Door(s) for normal or special entry access shall
be Class 5, either Type IIR- right opening swing without optical device or
Type IIL- left opening swing without optical device as determined by design
arrangement, Style K- Key change combination lock, Design S- single lock.
Where a second or additional door is required for safety purposes, door(s)

for exit only shall be Class 5, either Type IR- right opening swing with
optical device or Type IL- left opening swing with optical device as
determined by design arrangement, Style K- Key change combination lock,
Design B- no exterior hardware.
E101005 1.3 DAY GATE
Provide vault door manufacturer's modified standard or custom day gate

designed for use with vault door furnished, for access control and weapons
issue. Day gate construction shall be minimum 10 gage (3.4 mm) steel
flattened and expanded metal welded to a 1 inch (25 mm) minimum steel channel
or angle welded frame; expanded metal pattern shall be 1 inch by 1-3/4 inch
T
(25 by 45 mm) diamond grid. Maximum clearance between sides, top and bottom
of the day gate and the vault door-frame and floor shall be 1 inch (25 mm)
when the day gate is closed. Provide gate hinged on same side as the vault
AF
door, swinging to 180 degrees into the vault from closed to open positions.
Provide day gate with locking device operable from both sides; the outside
by key and the inside by key, knob, lever, or deadbolt; the inside locking
device shall either be positioned so that it is not accessible from the
outside or it shall be operable by key only. Day gate shall include an issue
port opening, cover with locking mechanism, and shelf. The issue port shall
be a framed opening welded to the day gate frame with a hinged door cover.
The hinged door shall be minimum 18 gage (1.2 mm) steel and shall be lockable
R
from the inside only. The opening shall be 8 inches (200 mm) high and 12
inches (300 mm) wide; tolerances are plus or minus 0.125 inch (3.2 mm). When
the issue port is closed, the hinged door cover shall match the opening to
within 0.0625 inch (1.6 mm). The shelf shall be minimum 16 gage (1.5 mm)
D
stainless steel, 12 inches (300 mm) deep by 12 inches (300 mm) wide to match
the port opening, and shall be capable of withstanding a vertical force of
100 lbf (445 N) at any point without deformation. Provide the
manufacturers standard painted finish to match that of the vault door. The
day gate shall not interfere with the operation of vault door inner escape
device.
E1020 INSTITUTIONAL EQUIPMENT
Institutional equipment includes items that are normally found in hospitals,

laboratories, auditoriums, and libraries.
E102001 MISCELLANEOUS COMMON FIXED & MOVABLE EQUIPMENT
This section shall include fixed workbenches, hazardous and non-hazardous shop
materials cabinetry, shop tools, and other fixed and movable equipment.
E102009 AUDIO-VISUAL EQUIPMENT

Al Dhafra, UAE
E102009 1.1 CEILING MOUNT FOR PROJECTOR
Provide the ceiling mounted hardware for a digital projector, to be

coordinated with support blocking (see PTS Section C10, Interior
Construction) and electrical and data connections (see Section D50,
Electrical).
E1030 VEHICULAR EQUIPMENT
E103002 LOADING DOCK EQUIPMENT
This paragraph covers the requirements for dock bumpers, truck-trailer restraining
devices, and industrial, mechanical and electro-hydraulic dock levelers of a fixed
hinged type. All loading dock equipment shall be Navy certified.
Provide a Loading Dock Equipment System for the protection of service docks and
for the loading and unloading of service vehicles.
E103002 1.1 DOCK LEVELERS
T
Based on the performance requirements of the project program, provide ANSI
MH30.2 (see LOEDM) steel tread plate lip and platform, hinged and supported
from beneath by steel framework that contains lifting, positioning, and
AF
lowering assembly. The design shall permit washing with water and
detergents, and operation in an ambient temperature from 0 degrees F to plus
110 degrees F (-
-18 degrees C to plus 43 degrees C). Minimum roll over capacity
shall be not less than 20,000 pounds (9,072 kg).
E103002 1.1.1 Height Adjustment
Provide a ramp with a minimum incline adjustment of 24 inches (600

R
mm). Divide 12 inches (300 mm) above and 12 inches (300 mm) below the
platform height.
E103002 1.1.2 Loading Ramp Compensation

D
a. Freight Carrier Out of Level - Allow a minimum correction of

one inch for each 18 inches (450 mm) and maximum of 4-inch (100
mm) correction of ramp width over the width of the ramp.
b. Loading and Unloading of the Freight Carrier - When the lip is
extended, provide a 4-inch (100 mm) compensation for carrier
spring deflection to allow full contact between the lip and the
carrier bed.
E103002 1.1.3 Safety Devices
a. Electro-hydraulic System - Provide a device to automatically

prevent a drop of more than 4 inches (100 mm) of the lip should
the freight carrier move away from the dock leaving the lip
unsupported.
b. Mechanical System - Provide a three-position safety system to
limit platform fall to dock level and 4 and 8 inches (100 and
200 mm) below dock level.
c. Dock Bumpers - Provide laminated rubber, tire fabric or

Al Dhafra, UAE
equivalent dock bumpers along the length of the loading dock.
E103002 1.1.4 Operation
a. Mechanical Control - Mechanical chain activated, with

extension-spring operation and counter-balance non-manual,
raising and lowering system.
b. Electro-Hydraulic Control - Provide dock leveler with
pushbutton control, heavy-duty dust tight and oil tight rated
in accordance with NEMA ICS 2, Part ICS2-216 for alternating
current.
c. Construction and Materials - The entire live load carrying
surface of the ramp and rear attachment shall be not less than
1/4-inch(6 mm) thick, 55,000 PSI (379,200 kPa) minimum yield
strength, low alloy, non-skid steel tread plate.
d. Toe Guards - Provide sides or edges of the ramps which rise above
the surrounding loading dock with sheet carbon steel skirts or
toe guards of minimum 14 gage nominal thickness.
E103002 1.1.5 Electro-Hydraulic Lift System
T
Provide a complete and separate system for each dock leveler. Design
system to withstand not less than 150 percent of the design operating
AF
pressure. Provide hose, fittings, pipe and tubing with working
pressures based upon a minimum 4 to 1 safety factor of bursting
pressure.
E103002 1.1.6 Electrical Requirements
NFPA 70, NEMA ICS 2, NEMA ICS 6 and NEMA MG 1

R
a. Motor - Conform to NEMA MG 1 and continuous duty or 60-minute
time rated, industrial type, single speed rated for operating
conditions.
b. Control - NEMA ICS 2, size 0 controller for heavy industrial
D
service.
c. Transformer - Totally enclosed, self-cooled, dry type
transformer. Incorporate circuit breakers with ground fault
interrupting protection conforming to UL 943.
E103002 1.1.7 Structural Warranty
Present a manufacturer's warranty certifying the leveler against

operational malfunction or structural failure, or both, for a period
of 10 years from the date of acceptance by the Government. Warranty
may exclude failure through overloading evidenced by member breakage
or residual deformation; but it may not exclude breakage of welds or
fastenings, fatigue breakage of components, or wear of moving parts.
Provide warranty to cover the full costs of repairs, or replacements
in case of a nonrepairable failure.
E103002 1.1.8 Accessories
a. Dock Truck or Trailer Restraining Device - Provide

Al Dhafra, UAE
self-aligning device, with a positive restraining force of not

less than 18,000 pounds (8,165 kilograms). Device shall service
all truck or trailers with ICC bars located between 12 and 30
inches (300 and 750 mm) above ground level.
E103003 WAREHOUSE EQUIPMENT
This paragraph covers the requirements for storage racks, heavy duty shelving,
material handling conveyors, and other warehouse equipment. See the project
program.
E103004 AUTOMOTIVE SHOP EQUIPMENT
This paragraph covers the requirements for automotive vehicle lifts meeting the
requirements of ANSI/ALI ALCTV-1998 standards, and other automotive shop equipment
such as pneumatic liquids delivery systems. See the project program.
E1040 GOVERNMENT FURNISHED EQUIPMENT
Refer to the project program.
T
E1090 OTHER EQUIPMENT
AF
E109002 FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT
Provide Food Service Equipment and the kitchen design in accordance with UFC
4-722-01, Dining Facilities. This paragraph covers the items of commercial food
service equipment. Included are items used for liquid and solid food storage, food
preparation, display, serving, and clean up equipment. Provide 180 degree F (82
degree C) hot water or chemical treatment for sinks, dishwashers, pot washers,
and exhaust ventilator wash down systems.
R
E109002 1.1 COMMERCIAL FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT
E109002 1.1.1 Equipment Materials

D
Fabricate custom and commercial equipment in accordance with NSP 2.
a. Stainless Steel Sheets - ASTM A167, 18-8 Composition, Type 302

or 304 or 316, non-magnetic, with a No. 4 finish on the exposed
face.
b. Tubing - ASTM A 270
c. Framing and Cross Bracing - ASTM A 276, Type 302 or Type 304
or Type 316
d. Copper Tubing -
1) Tube - ASTM B 88, Type K, annealed, for buried or embedment

in concrete, and Type L, hard drawn, for above grade
installation.
2) Fittings - ANSI B16.18, above grade, ASME B16.22 or ASME

B16.26, above or below grade.
e. Welded Joints - Use tungsten inert gas process. Use filler metal
compatible with the material being welded. Make all visible

Al Dhafra, UAE
welds ductile and of same color as adjoining surfaces. Coat

welds in hidden areas that are not finished by grinding and
polishing and the accompanying discoloration in the factory
with a metallic-based paint to prevent progressive corrosion.
Grind exposed welded joints flush with the adjoining material
and finish and polish to match the adjoining surface. Grind
off excess metal and smooth to a No. 4 finish. Remove
imperfections such as pits, runs, sputter, cracks, low spots,
voids and buckle.
Penetrate entire thickness for the entire length of the joint;

make joints flat, continuous and homogeneous with the sheet
metal without reliance on straps under seams or spot welding.
When stainless steel is joined to dissimilar metals, use
stainless steel for fastening devices and welding material.
f. Solder - ASTM B 32, 95.5 tin-antimony solder or other lead-free
solder for contact with potable water or food. Provide ASTM
B 32, alloy grade 50B for temperatures up to 150 degrees
Fahrenheit (65 degrees Celsius).
T
E109002 1.1.2 Custom-Fabricated Counters, Dishwasher Counters, and Sinks
Fabricate of 14 gage (1.8 mm) stainless steel, with all shop seams
AF
and water tight welded corners ground smooth, and polished. Pitch
all flat surfaces to drain and eliminate any chance of standing water.
Counters and sinks shall be furnished complete with integral stainless
steel backsplashes, side splashes, and legs with adjustable feet.
a. Sinks - Provide integral sinks in accordance with the

requirements of NSF 2, and ASTM A112.19.3M. Provide minimum
of 0.75 inch (19 mm) radius on all corners.
R
E109002 1.1.3 Exhaust Ventilators

D
Exhaust ventilators shall conform to NFPA 96, UL 710, and SMACNA DCS.
Fabricate exhaust ventilators of minimum 18 gage stainless steel in
segments not longer than 12'-0". Provide centrifugal
grease-extracting design to remove 95% of matter from the air with
non-removable extracting baffles located in the plenum chamber.
Exhaust ventilators shall provide integral make-up air system in
accordance with NFPA 96. Provide automatic wash-down cycle and fan
control on adjacent wall.
a. Fire Damper - Provide mechanically driven damper and damper

control. Activate by heat-sensing thermostat set to react to
a temperature of 350 degrees F (177 degrees C) in exhaust duct
at exhaust ventilators.
b. Fire Protection System - Provide a pre-engineered wet system
in accord with NFPA 96.
E109002 1.1.4 Pre-Fabricated Walk-in Refrigerators and Freezers

Al Dhafra, UAE
Provide walk-in units manufactured for food service use conforming

to NSF 7, UL 207, and UL 471. Provide refrigeration unit complying
with ASHRAE 15. Outside compressors, if used, require winter controls,
housing, and crankcase heater. Provide monitoring system to alarm
abnormally low or high temperatures, and personnel safety alarm. If
the unit utilizes the floor of the facility as an interior surface
of the unit, it shall be insulated and separated from adjacent floors.
E109002 1.1.5 Food Waste Disposer - ASTM F917
E109002 1.1.6 Beverage Dispenser, Non-Carbonated, Refrigerated - ASTM

F918
E109002 1.1.7 Food Slicing Machine - ASTM F919
E109002 1.1.8 Food Mixing Machine - ASTM F952
E109002 1.1.9 Powdered Iced Tea Dispenser - ASTM F1023
E109002 1.1.10 Frying and Braising Pan, Tilting - ASTM F1047
T
E109002 1.1.11 Food Cutter - ASTM F1126
E109002 1.1.12 Food Waste Pulper - ASTM F1150

AF
E109002 1.1.13 Cooker, Steam - ASTM F1217
E109002 1.1.14 Ovens, Microwave - ASTM F1360
E109002 1.1.15 Vegetable Peeling Machine - ASTM F1371-04

R
E109002 1.1.16 Combination Oven - ASTM F1495
E109002 1.1.17 Food Processor - ASTM F1568

D
E109002 1.1.18 Kettle, Steam Jacketed (20-200 gal) Floor or Wall Mounted
- ASTM F1602
E109002 1.1.19 Kettle, Steam Jacketed (32 oz-20 gal), Table Mounted -
ASTM F1603
E109002 1.1.20 Freezer, Ice Cream, Soft Serve - ASTM F1604
E109002 1.1.21 Griddle, Single or Double Sided - ASTM F1919
E109002 1.1.22 Deep Fat Fryers - ASTM F1963
E109002 1.1.23 Dough Divider/Rounder - ASTM F1966
E109002 1.1.24 Dishwashing Machines
a. Hot Water Sanitizing Rack Type, ASTM F857

b. Hot Water Sanitizing Single Tank, ASTM F858
c. Hot Water Sanitizing, Multi-Tank, ASTM F859

Al Dhafra, UAE
d. Hot Water Sanitizing, Multi-Tank, Conveyor, ASTM F860

e. Chemical Sanitizing, Stationary Rack, ASTM F953
f. Chemical Sanitizing, Fresh Water Rinse, ASTM F1022
g. Hot Water Sanitizing, Oval Conveyor, Multi-tank, ASTM F1237
E109002 1.1.25 Pot and Pan Washing Machines
a. Heat Sanitizing, Oscillating Arm Type, ASTM F1202

b. Heat Sanitizing, Rotary Conveyor, ASTM 1203
c. Heat Sanitizing, Rack Type, Rotary Spray, ASTM F1114
E109002 1.2 RESIDENTIAL OR LIGHT COMMERCIAL ELECTRIC KITCHEN EQUIPMENT
E109002 1.2.1 Cooking Top
Conform to UL 197 and UL 858.
E109002 1.2.2 Freezer
UL 250, minimum 14 cubic feet (0.39 cubic meters), frost-free.
T
E109002 1.2.3 Refrigerator
UL 250, refrigerator with frost-proof freezer, minimum 14.6 cubic feet

AF
(0.41 cubic meters).
E109002 1.2.4 Freestanding Ice Maker
UL listed and NSF approved; self-contained, air-cooled model, minimum

ice production of 355 pounds (161 kg) per 24 hours, and a minimum bin
storage capacity of 180 pounds (82 kg) of ice cubes.
R
E109002 1.2.5 Griddle
UL 197 and NSF 2, built-in counter-top model. Minimum capacity shall

D
be 260 pancakes or 420 hamburgers 4 ounces (110 g) per hour.
E109002 1.2.6 Microwave Oven
UL 923, minimum 1 cubic foot (0.03 cubic meter) capacity.
E109002 1.2.7 Oven
UL 858, self-cleaning and built-in.
E109002 1.2.8 Trash Compactor
UL 1086, under-counter model with storage compartment and 20 gallon

(75 liter) trash disposal bag capacity.
E109002 1.2.9 Kitchen Exhaust Hood
NFPA 96 and NSF 2, factory fabricated of minimum 18 gage stainless

steel.

Al Dhafra, UAE
E109002 1.2.10 Range Hood
UL 858, vented or non-vented with two-speed fan.
E109002 1.2.11 Dishwasher
UL 921 or UL 749 with detergent dispenser. For heavy-duty dishwasher,

provide stainless steel commercial grade with approximately 300-dish
per hour and 540 glasses per hour ratings.
E109002 1.2.12 Residential Garbage Disposal
UL 430, stainless steel, continuous feed with minimum 1/2 or 3/4 hp

motor. Optional 1 hp motor for heavy usage.
E109005 UNIT KITCHENS
E109005 1.1 UNIT KITCHENS
Unit kitchens must be complete with countertops, sinks, faucets, appliances,
T
and accessories. Comply with DoD ABAAS in units for the disabled. Provide
high pressure laminate or natural wood finish.
AF
E109005 1.2 UNIT KITCHEN COMPONENTS
a. Cabinets - ANSI/FCMA A161.1 wood and plywood cabinetry with drainers

and cabinet doors.
1) Provide 3/4-inch (19 mm) solid wood for face framing, drawer
fronts, and shelves up to 36 inch (91.44 cm) wide. Cabinet body members
require spline, biscuit, dowel or dado joining.
R
2) Provide 1/2-inch (12.8 mm) solid wood for drawer boxes with
dovetail or dowelled joints.
D
3) Provide 3/8-inch (9 mm) plywood for cabinet box and toe board.
4) Provide cabinet doors of High Pressure Laminate covered medium

density fiberboard or stile and rail doors.
b. Countertop - Provide ASTM 2124.3 and ASTM 2124.6, solid polymer
countertop and 3-1/2 inch (89 mm) backsplash.
c. Sink and Faucet - Provide ANSI A112.18.1M, NSF International Standard
61 sink and faucet. Section 9 for sink and faucet. Provide large 22
gauge stainless steel sink with basket strainer in w with water
stopper. Faucet shall be a washerless cartridge system
d. Refrigerator-Freezer - 5 cubic foot minimum undercounter refrigerator
freezer. Provide interior light, defrost, adjustable shelving,
adjustable thermostat features, and zero degree freezer.
e. Microwave Oven/Ventilation Hood Combination. Provide 1.4 cubic foot
900 watt minimum, microwave/hood above cooktop. Ductless hood must
be convertible to ducted at the project site.
f. Cooktop - Provide drop-in 2 burner black ceramic cooktop with 1200
watt elements.
g. Dishwasher - Provide 24 inch wide Energy Star Large capacity

Al Dhafra, UAE
dishwasher.
h. Accessories
1) Back wall shield and end wall shields when against an end wall.
2) Countertop fluorescent lighting.
3) Drawer slides rated for 100 pound capacity.
4) Door hinges to be adjustable, self-closing, and configured to

allow screw application to cabinet door from two directions.
E109090 OTHER SPECIALIZED FIXED AND MOVABLE EQUIPMENT
Specialized fixed and moveable equipment not described by the other assembly
categories.
E109090 1.1 WEAPONS RACKS
Weapons Storage Racks may be purchased or may be steel fabrications. Comply
T
with OPNAVINST 5530.13c and standard operating procedure for the facility.
E109090 1.2 GEAR DRYING CAGES

AF
Drying cages (racks) for SCUBA gear may be purchased or may be fabrications.
Comply with standard operating procedures for the facility.
R
D

Al Dhafra, UAE
SECTION E20
FURNISHINGS
05/14
E20 GENERAL
E20 1.1 DESIGN GUIDANCE

T
AF
standard at the time of contract award:
E20 1.1.1 Industry Standards and Codes

R
E20 1.1.2 Government Standards

D

` reference in this PTS section to UFC
UFC(s):UFC 3-10i-01, Architecture UFC

Buildings
UFC 3- 120-01 Sign Standards

Al Dhafra, UAE
E20 1.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
The Contractor shall have an Interior Designer, certified by the National

Council for Interior Design Qualification (NCIDQ), or a state and/or
jurisdiction Certified, Registered, or Licensed Interior Designer prepare
both the FF&E and the SID Package, attend and participate, in entirety, all
kick-off meetings, design meetings, to include, but not limited to, design
charettes, concept design workshops, and review meetings to develop the
building design, floor plan, and the FF&E package. The Contractor shall
obtain services of equipment specialists to specify the audiovisual, shop,
or specialty equipment. The Interior Designer and any specialists shall not
be affiliated with any furniture dealership/vendor or manufacturer. The
Government Interior Designer reserves the right to approve/disapprove the
qualifications of the Contractor's Interior
Systems furnishings installers must be the systems furniture manufacturer's

approved dealer of record. \
T
E20 1.3 DESIGN SUBMITTALS

AF
Procedures, MED Design Instruction Manual, and UFC 03-120-10, Interior
Design.
E20 1.4 CONSTRUCTION SUBMITTALS

R
Art work and FF&E Package

D
E2010 FIXED FURNISHINGS
E201001 FIXED ARTWORK
E201002 WINDOW TREATMENTS
Provide interior window coverings, associated hardware and controls at each

exterior window and at any interior view window where privacy may be required.
Refer to the Project Program for size, pattern and style of window treatments.
At a minimum, functional window coverings such as blinds or solar shades are
required on all projects.
E201002 1.1 BLINDS
Venetian blinds shall be one-inch horizontal room-darkening commercial

grade aluminum at a minimum thickness of 0.2mm (.008") (after coating) with
a minimum of 45.72 slats per meter (15 slats per foot). Blinds shall be

Al Dhafra, UAE
provided at each exterior window and at any interior window where privacy
may be required. One full size sample shall be provided and installed for
review and approval.
E201002 1.2 SHADES
Provide energy efficient solar shading systems for exterior windows. The
system shall maintain visibility while reducing glare, solar heat gain
during the summer and heat loss during the winter. Openness configuration
shall be no more than 5% for most areas. The system fabrics and components
shall be dimensionally stable and shall be manufactured to withstand fading,
fire, mildew, and soiling.
E201002 1.3 DRAPERIES AND HARDWARE
Draperies shall be manufactured under GSA contract as part of FF&E. Drapery

can be accordion-fold, ripple-fold, or pinch-pleat with associated hardware
suitable for the project requirements. All draperies shall meet the NFPA
Code 701 California Fire Marshalls flame retardant requirements.
T
E201003 SEATING (FIXED)
E201003 1.1 AUDITORIUM, LECTURE AND CLASSROOM SEATING

AF
The system shall permit the standards to be installed on radial lines from
a common center for which concentric circles are determined with each row
of units utilizing common middle standards. Standards in each row shall
be placed laterally so the aisle-end standards will be in alignment as
indicated on seating layout drawing. The angle of inclination of backs
shall be adjusted for variations in sightlines. Mechanical attachment of
components shall be of sufficient flexibility so that when permanently
R
assembled they will compensate for the changing dimensions laterally between
standards caused by convergence toward the center. Seat and back
attachments shall absorb inaccuracies in lateral spacing of standards at
point of attachment caused by unevenness of floor. Varying lateral
D
dimensions of backs and seats shall be in accordance with approved seating

layout. Minimum width of seating unit shall be 20 inches and may be used
only to complete a specific row dimension.
E201003 1.2 FIXED TABLES FOR AUDITORIUM, LECTURE AND CLASSROOMS
Provide worksurfaces mounted to floor standards shall be tubular steel,

sheet steel, or cast iron. The standards shall be formed to fit the floor
incline so that the standards will be vertical. The feet shall be formed
to eliminate tripping hazards and shall have holes for bolt attachment to
the floor. Provide riser standards, cantilevered standards and aisle and
end standards as required. Provide communications, data and power routing
as required. Provide a high-pressure plastic laminate over medium density
particleboard for the worksurfaces with coordinating vinyl or resin edge
detail.
E2020 MOVABLE FURNISHINGS
Furnishings, Fixtures, and Equipment (FF&E) shall include furniture, shop

Al Dhafra, UAE
equipment, audiovisual equipment, and specialty equipment. Weapon racks, drying

cages, and lockers are not considered FF&E. FF&E shall be fully integrated with
the building systems and finishes. FF&E may also include specialty items for which
the customer activity shall be responsible for specifying.
Design and provide as required FF&E for all areas as developed during client
programming. Design an FF&E package and prepare supporting plans and procurement
data in accordance with the general interior design requirements in UFC 3-120-10.
E2020 1.1 FF&E PACKAGE
FF&E Package: Design and provide a fully usable and complete facility to
include a FF&E movable furnishings package. The FF&E will include, but not
limited to, systems and modular furniture, training and conference
furniture, seating, tables, artwork, decorative window covering, specialty
furniture and equipment, dormitory room furnishings, and accessories. The
government will provide separate funding for the FF&E package.
Construction funds will not be used. The FF&E Package must include
shipping, freight, handling, installation and the HAR percentage as applied
to the final FF&E total cost.
T
E2020 1.1.1 Authorization
AF
The government will provide separate funding for procurement of the
FF&E package. Upon receipt of required funding, the Contractor shall
be authorized by the Contracting Officer as a planned line item
modification to the contract/task order to procure all FF&E.The amount
of the modification will be the actual cost of these items, including
any freight and installation charges from the furniture supplier as
well as the contractor's FF&E Handling and Administration Rate (HAR).
The HAR includes all of the prime contractor's effort related to
R
storage, coordination, handling, administration of subcontractors,
and all other associated costs and profit for the procurement of FF&E.
The prime contractor will propose in the contract/task order
solicitation the FF&E HAR. The contractor's proposed HAR may not
D
exceed 5% of the total FF&E costs, as noted on the bid schedule. No

other charges, expenses, fees, markups, etc will be authorized.
The government Interior Designer will approve the final FF&E

submittal. The FF&E package will be presented to the Contracting
Officer and the Contractor shall provide the FF&E exactly as specified
and approved.
E2020 1.2 PURCHASE AND INSTALLATION
The Contractor shall coordinate the building completion date with the
installation dealer specified in the FF&E Package. The Contractor or
contractor's representative is responsible for the following: issuing
purchase orders, receiving acknowledgements, sending copies of purchase
orders to the installation dealer(s) specified in the FF&E package, and
providing necessary deposits to furniture manufacturers.
The FF&E installation dealer(s) is responsible for the following: Receiving

and installing all FF&E specified in the FF&E package, coordinating delivery

Al Dhafra, UAE
and installation with the Contractor, inspecting for damage, providing

delivery receipts to the Contractor, filing necessary freight claims,
hanging artwork, bulletin boards, etc., removing packaging material,
cleaning up the site upon completion, and adhering to Contractor's safety
requirements.
E2020 1.2.1Not Used
E2020 1.2.2 Deposits
The Contractor should anticipate providing a deposit of between 30%

to 50% of the furniture costs when placing their order.
The Contractor shall also anticipate possible manufacturer price

increases. Recommend ordering FF&E product once funds are received
to avoid incurring additional costs. Delayed production and delivery
dates can be noted at the time of order placement to coincide with
building completion dates. Any costs incurred due to manufacturer
price increases will be the burden of the contractor.
T
E2020 1.2.3 Not Used
E2020 1.2.4 Sales Tax

AF
Exemptions for certain State or Local taxes may be available to the
contractor and/or its subcontractors. The contractor shall take
maximum advantage of all exemptions, including obtaining a resale
permit, from State and Local taxation authorities whether available
to it directly or available to the contractor based on an exemption
afforded the government. The responsibility for paying applicable
taxes rests with the contractor. State and local taxes applicable to
R
the FF&E line will be included with the subcontractor's quote, if
applicable.
E2020 1.2.5 Bonds

D
FF&E line item is not considered construction and the prime contractor
shall not be required to secure any additional bond for the award of
the FF&E line item unless otherwise indicated in the RFP. If any
additional bond is required for the FF&E line item it is to be included
in the prime contctor's FF&E HAR.
E2020 1.2.6 Unique Item Identification (IUID) and Validation
Unique item identification and valuation is a system of marking and

valuing items delivered to DoD that enhances logistics, contracting,
and financial business transactions. The IUID policy is mandatory
for all DoD contracts that require the delivery of items. An item
is a single article or a single unit formed by a grouping of
subassemblies, components or constituent parts. The contractor
shall provide DoD Unique item identification, valuation and delivery
of data for all required FF&E items for which the government's unit
acquisition cost is $5,000 or more.

Al Dhafra, UAE
E2020 1.2.7 Buy American Act and Trade Agreement Act
All supplies under the FF&E line item are subject to the Buy American
Act and Trade Agreement Act (TAA). This is an open market solicitation,
yet all FF & E proposed must be available on GSA schedule for
replacement parts or future purchases to match.
E2020 1.2.8 Not Used
E2020 1.2.9 Installation
The FF&E package includes the installation of all furniture and

furnishings as specified in the FF&E package. The installation
dealer specified in the FF&E package will receive, store, if required,
transport to the project site, off load, inside deliver, unpack,
assemble, place/install, clean, if required, and dispose of all the
trash for all furniture and furnishings. The Contractor's Interior
Designer shall be responsible for specifying installation services
and warehousing, as required, for all collateral equipment. It is
the Contractor's responsibility to coordinate the building
T
completion, occupancy, and furniture installation dates with the
installation dealer specified in the FF&E package. Any costs
associated with storing or delaying furniture shipments is the
AF
responsibility of the construction contractor.
E2020 1.2.10 Installation Warranty
All movable furnishings shall be installed in accordance with the

manufacturers instructions and warranty requirements. All movable
furnishings shall be level and aligned and all doors, drawers and
accessories shall be level and aligned to open, close and otherwise
R
operate smoothly and securely. All systems furniture shall be
installed by the systems furniture manufacturers dealer of record
and not the General Contractor. The Contractor shall repair, to the
customers satisfaction, any/all damage to any facility finish that
D
is a result of the furniture installation and correct all punch list

items for the furniture/furnishings.
E2020 1.2.11 Ordering Documentation
Two copies of all ordering documentation shall be provided to the

Contracting Officer including Factory Order number (FO) and warranty
information.
E2020 1.2.12 Post Award Changes
After award of the FF&E line item modification, any request to change
the FF&E items must be submitted on the Contracting Officer. The FF&E
modification has been accepted, priced, and negotiated based on
specific line items as detailed in the final package. Those items
have been agreed to considering color, specific type and quality of
material, price, sustainability, life cycle, and dealership service.
The Government will expect and require the contractor to provide
exactly those items. Should changes become necessary, careful

Al Dhafra, UAE
consideration is required to ensure that equivalent quality, price

and other aspects of the item is maintained. Otherwise, price
adjustments must be negotiated. The Contracting Officer will obtain
approval from the Government Interior Designer/Collateral Equipment
Manager in consultation with the client for any changes to the FF&E.
Post award FF&E manufacturer's price increases are the responsibility

of the Contractor and shall not be transferred to the government.
Recommend ordering FF&E product once funds are received to avoid
incurring additional costs. Delayed production and delivery dates
can be noted at the time of order placement to coincide with building
completion dates.
E2020 1.3 Not Used
E202001 MOVABLE ART WORK
The Contractor shall provide artwork for wall installation as part of the FF&E
T
Submittal according to the project program. Installation of artwork to be
completed by installation dealer specified in the approved FF&E package. Type of
artwork to be determined by client requirements and budget as described in the
AF
Project Program for the project. Install framed artwork 63 inches (1600 mm) on
center above finished floor. Include security mounting hardware as required.
E202002 MODULAR PREFABRICATED FURNITURE
E202002 1.1 FURNITURE SYSTEMS
Provide products that meet the NAVFAC performance specifications for systems
R
furniture. The Government Interior Designer must approve any other systems
furniture manufacturer. The typical workstation shall maximize each
allocated space with worksurfaces and overhead closed storage with a surface
to accommodate a Government provided computer. An attached articulated
D
keyboard/mouse tray shall be selected or provided. Provide a monitor lift

if required by the project program.
Powered raceways that will accommodate data and voice wire management shall
be completely coordinated with all facility systems. The Contractor's
Interior Designer shall ensure the coordination of all electrical/data and
furniture locations. Use of power poles will not be permitted to power FF&E.
The Contractor shall provide and coordinate all telecommunication
receptacles and outlet requirements (i.e. RJ 11/45 receptacles and cover
plates) with the Contractor's Interior Designer and the systems furniture
installer. The Contractor shall hardwire all pre-wired furniture with the
building systems, and coordinate all IT and telephone connections.
E202002 1.2 MODULAR FREESTANDING FURNITURE AND WORKSTATIONS
Provide products that meet the NAVFAC performance specifications for modular
freestanding furniture including wood. Provide modular furniture with
electrical/data cable trays and grommet holes for private offices and
smaller work areas. An attached articulated keyboard/mouse tray (and

Al Dhafra, UAE
monitor lift if required by the project program) shall be selected. Wood

surfaces shall be provided as appropriate. Include accommodation for a
Government provided computer and printer.
E202003 FREESTANDING FURNITURE
E202003 1.1 SEATING
E202003 1.1.1 Task Seating
Provide task seating that is fully ergonomic and coordinated by finish

and scale to the workstation. Seating specifications to include:
adjustable arms, back, height, and seat pan; 5 star base, appropriate
castors for floor surface, lumbar support and availability in a
minimum of two (2) sizes. Task seating can be from the same
manufacturer as the systems or major furniture supplier or other
seating manufacturer as approved by the government Interior Designer,
provided it is determined to be a best value to the project.
E202003 1.1.2 Lounge, Reception and Guest Seating
T
Provide lounge, reception and guest seating with upholsteries
consistent with the Project Program. Seating shall be easily
AF
reupholstered or have removable covers.
E202003 1.1.3 Training Room Seating
Provide seating with passive ergonomic features in that the seat and
back offers some synchronized movement to allow the person seated to
change positions. The support can be legs, sled base or single
pedestal with 5 star base and casters as determined by user
R
requirements. Provide high density stack chairs or nesting chairs as
required. Provide attached, storable tablet arm as required.
E202003 1.2 STORAGE AND FILING

D
Provide freestanding storage units, file cabinets and file safes to

accommodate the specific and unique storage requirements of the user.
Coordinate closely with storage provided in PTS Section E10, Equipment, for
high density filing.
E202003 1.3 CHILD DEVELOPMENT CENTERS
Provide all child care and classroom furnishings such as cribs, rocking
chairs, feeding chairs, tables, seating, toy storage, book display storage,
activity centers, freestanding floor activity toys, and any other required
furnishings. Outdoor structural play equipment may be required. The cribs
shall be of stainless steel construction. The chairs and tables shall be
appropriately sized for each age group.
E202003 1.4 TRAINING/CONFERENCE ROOM FURNISHINGS
E202003 1.4.1 Tables

Al Dhafra, UAE
Provide single or multi-person worksurfaces or tables as determined

from user requirements. Where computers are used, provide tables with
wire management capability or pre-wired tables to accommodate
data/telecommunications requirements. Powered raceways that will
accommodate data and voice wire management shall be completely
coordinated with all facility systems. The Contractor's Interior
Designer shall ensure the coordination of all electrical/data and
furniture locations. The Contractor shall provide and coordinate all
telecommunication receptacles and outlet requirements, hardwire all
pre-wired furniture with the building systems and coordinate all IT
and telephone connections.
E202003 1.4.2 Movable Presentation Furnishings
Provide audio-visual carts, lecterns, multi-media presentation

cabinets to accommodate power/data requirements.
E202003 1.5 DINING ROOM FURNISHINGS
E202003 1.5.1 Cafeteria, Dining Hall Furnishings
T
Provide stackable seating and associated dollies for transport and
storage, tables with folding or fixed legs or flip tops, and associated
AF
mobile carts for transport and storage, and trash and recycling
containers.
E202003 1.5.2 Executive Dining Furnishings
Provide premium quality dining furnishings to include tables, chairs,

buffet and serving units, hutches and cabinets as require by the
Project Program.
R
E202004 RUGS & ACCESSORIES

D
E202004 1.1 RUGS
Provide Area or Accent rugs. Refer to the Project Program for requirements.
E202004 1.2 LAMPS
Provide decorative lamps. Refer to the Project Program for requirements.
E202004 1.3 INTERIOR LANDSCAPING
Provide artificial plants of a variety of sizes and 'species' to provide

interior landscaping, including planters or containers for artificial
plants to coordinate with the interior finishes and furnishings of the
project.
E202004 1.4 OTHER DECORATIVE ITEMS
Refer to the Project Program for requirements.

Al Dhafra, UAE
E202090 OTHER MOVABLE FURNISHINGS
E202090 1.1 MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS
E202090 1.1.1 Containers
Provide waste receptacles, recycling containers, and ash urns as

required.
E202090 1.1.2 Accessories
Provide clocks, wall mounted or freestanding literature and coat

racks, and mirrors as required.
E202090 1.1.3 Small Equipment
Provide small appliances such as coffee pots, microwaves,

refrigerators, washers, dryers, and icemakers, as required.
E202090 1.1.4 Special Equipment
T
Provide mailroom work and storage tables, mail sorter units, carts
and equipment tables as required.
AF
R
D

Al Dhafra, UAE
SECTION F10
SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
05/14
F10 GENERAL
F10 1.1 DESIGN GUIDANCE

T
AF
standard at the time of contract award.
F10 1.1.1 Government Standards

R

D

UFC(s):UFC 3-101-01, ArchitectureUFC
03-301-01, Structural Engineering)

Buildings
F10 1.2 PERFORMANCE VERTIFICATION AND ACCEPTANCE TESTING
Verification of satisfactory special construction system performance shall

be via Performance Verification Testing, as detailed in this section of the
PART 4 - SECTION F10 - Page 1

Al Dhafra, UAE
F10 1.3 DESIGN SUBMITTALS

Procedures, MED Design Instruction Manual, and UFC 3-101-01, Architecture,
and UFC 3-301-01, Structural Engineering.
F10 1.4 CONSTRUCTION SUBMITTALS

minimum:
All structural elements necessary for construction.
For a pre-engineered metal building, provide shop drawings showing

engineering data and complete building drawings, signed and sealed by a
registered professional engineer.
T
F1010 SPECIAL STRUCTURES
F101001 METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS

AF
F101001 1.1 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
The metal building manufacturer shall be accredited in accordance with all

Parts of the Accreditation Criteria for Inspection Programs for
Manufacturers of Metal Building Systems (AC472) by the International
Accreditation Service, Inc. The Metal Building System design shall be in
accordance with the Metal Building Manufacturers Association (MBMA) Low Rise
R
Manual.
All structural design shall comply with the provisions of PTS Section B10,
Superstructure. The steel structure shall be as designed by the structural
D
engineer. If used for thrust bracing, tie rods shall be concrete encased.
Design framed openings structurally.
F101001 1.1.1 Additional Roof Design Requirements
a. Roof Decking - In addition to any other load requirements, roof

decking shall be designed to support a 200-pound (91 kg)
concentrated load at mid-span on a 12-inch (300 mm) wide section
of deck.
b. When used as a diaphragm, roof decks shall be designed in
accordance with SDEI DDM.
F101001 1.1.2 Deflection
a. Structural Members
1) Maximum deflection of main framing members and for roof

members shall not exceed values required by the IBC.

Al Dhafra, UAE
2) Purlins and Roof Panels: The deflection due to live, snow,

or wind shall not exceed L/180. The design analysis shall
establish that the roof when deflected under dead plus live or
snow loads will not result in a negative gradient. Maximum
deflections shall be based on sheets continuous across two or
more supports with sheets unfastened and free to deflect.
Provide bracing of purlin compression flanges as required to
resist applied loading.
b. Wall Panels - Maximum deflection of wall panels due to wind loads
shall be as required by the IBC and UFC.
F101001 1.2 WALL AND ROOF MATERIALS
F101001 1.2.1 Aluminum/Zinc-Coated Steel Sheet
ASTM A792/ A792M, AZ 55.
F101001 1.2.2 Aluminum Sheet
Alloy 3004 Alclad conforming to ASTM B209.
T
F101001 1.3 FRAMING AND STRUCTURAL MEMBERS
AF
F101001 1.3.1 Steel
ASTM A992 / A992M, ASTM A529/ A529M, ASTM A572/ A572M, or ASTM A588/
A588M.
F101001 1.3.2 Aluminum
ASTM B221 or ASTM C308.

R
F101001 1.3.3 Structural Tube
ASTM A500 or ASTM B221.

D
F101001 1.4 MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS
F101001 1.4.1 Fasteners
Fasteners shall be compatible with the materials they are fastening

to, be gasketed when exposed to weather to prevent leaks, and shall
provide both shear and tensile strengths not less than 750 pounds
(3,336 N) per fastener. The main fastening system shall use concealed
fasteners, however, when exposed fasteners are needed, color
fasteners shall be color coated to match wall/roof panels.
F101001 1.4.2 Light Transmitting Roof Panels (Non-Insulated)
ASTM D3841, Type II, Grade 1
F101001 1.4.3 Insulation
Blanket-type fiberglass insulation with a factory applied facing on

Al Dhafra, UAE
one side and having a permeance rating of 0.05 or less in accordance

with ASTM E96.
a. Flame Spread Rating 75 or less, and a Smoke Developed Rating

of 150 or less when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
b. Insulation R-value in accordance with ASTM C236 as determined
by energy use analysis or identified in the RFP.
F101001 1.5 FINISH
Factory Color Finish - Provide factory applied baked coatings to the exterior
and interior of metal wall panels and metal accessories. Provide exterior
finish top coat of 70 percent inorganic pigments with 0.8 mil dry film
thickness (DFT). Provide exterior primer standard with panel manufacturer
but not less than 0.8 mil DFT over the color topcoat and edge coating for
projects within 300 feet (91 meters) of a water shoreline or industrial
environments. Field apply 70 percent PVDF clear coat to unfinished panel
edges or field cut panels. Interior finish exposed to sun or rain shall
be the same coating and DFT as the exterior coating. Interior finish
protected from sun or rain exposure shall receive 1.0 mil DFT coating of
T
siliconized polyester (SMP) resin coating with organic or blended pigments
and manufacturers standard primer.
AF
F1030 SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION SYSTEMS
F103001 VAULTS
This paragraph is for prefabricated vaults. See PTS Section E10, Equipment, for
vault doors and day gates.
R
D

Al Dhafra, UAE
SECTION G10
SITE PREPARATION
12/14
G10 GENERAL
G10 1.1 DESIGN GUIDANCE

T
AF
Website, are listed below for basic designation identification. Comply
G10 1.1.1 Industry Standards and Codes

R
AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE (ANSI)
Refer to UMRL for reference designation identification.

D
G10 1.1.2 Government Standards
CORPS OF ENGINEERS (COE)
COE EM 385-1-1 Safety and Health Requirements Manual

UFC(s):UFC 3-201-01, Civil
Engineering UFC 3-220-01,
PART 4 - SECTION G10 - Page 1

Al Dhafra, UAE
Geotechnical Engineering)

Buildings
UFC 3-800-10N Environmental Engineering for

Facility Construction
UFGS 31 00 00 Earthwork
G10 1.2 PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION AND ACCEPTABLE TESTING
Compliance with the requirements will be determined by a review of the design

and construction submittals and by field inspection. See Section 01 33
T
10.05 20, Design Submittal Procedures, and Section 01 33 00.05 20,
Construction Submittal Procedures, for additional requirements. Verify
satisfactory earthwork performance via testing detailed in the paragraph,
"Field Quality Control", in UFGS Specification Section 31 00 00, Earthwork.
AF
G10 1.3 DESIGN SUBMITTALS
Design Submittals must be in accordance with UFGS section 01 33 10.05 20,

Civil Engineering, and UFC 3-220-01, Geotechnical Engineering.
R
If the UFGS products or systems are applicable to the project, the DOR is
required to edit these referenced UFGS sections and submit them as a part
D
of the design submittal specification. Edit the specification sections in

UFGS 31 00 00, Earthwork
Provide sustainability submittals in accordance with UFGS 01 33 29.05 20

Sustainability Reporting for Design-Build.
G10 1.4 CONSTRUCTION SUBMITTALS

the Designer of Record (DOR) is required to approve the following
Submittals in UFGS 01 57 20.00 10, Environmental Protection.
Submittals in UFGS Specification Section 31 00 00 Earthwork.

Al Dhafra, UAE
Waste Management Plan in accordance with Section 01 74 19, Construction and

Demolition Waste Management.

G10 1.5 GEOTECHNICAL REPORT
G10 1.5.1 Subsurface Soils Information
Any provided subsurface soil information is included for the

Contractor's information only, and is not guaranteed to fully
represent all subsurface conditions. The data included in this RFP
are intended for proposal preparation and preliminary design only.
Perform, at the Contractor's expense, such subsurface exploration,
investigation, testing, and analysis as the Designer of Record deems
necessary for the design and construction of the site improvements.
G10 1.5.2 Contractor-provided Geotechnical Engineer
T
The Contractor-provided Geotechnical Engineer is required to be
experienced with soil conditions in the region where the project site
is located. The Geotechnical Engineer is required to evaluate the
AF
RFP data, obtain and evaluate all additional data as required to
support the design and construction, and prepare a Geotechnical
Report.
Coordinate all work, if required, by the Contractor-provided

Geotechnical Engineer at the project location with the Contracting
Officer so as not to interfere with normal base operations. A minimum
of two weeks prior to the Foundation Work Design submittal, provide
R
the Contractor's Geotechnical Report (a searchable Adobe Acrobat PDF
version on CD and two printed copies) for review and record keeping
purposes. The report will become the property of the Government.
Provide the geotechnical reports generated during construction, such
D
as pile driving results and analysis, to the Contracting Officer. In

addition, provide a searchable Adobe Acrobat PDF version and two
printed copies for record keeping purposes.
G10 1.5.3 Contractor-Provided Geotechnical Report
Submit a written Geotechnical report based upon Government-provided

subsurface investigation data and all additional field and laboratory
testing accomplished at the discretion of the Contractor's
Geotechnical Engineer. Include the following in the Geotechnical
Report:
a. The project site description, vicinity map and site map

indicating the location of borings and any other sampling locations.
Provide 24 hour groundwater observations for at least 20% of the
borings, minimum one boring. Provide notes explaining any
abbreviations or symbols used and describing any special site
preparation requirements.

Al Dhafra, UAE
b. Results of all applicable field and laboratory testing, whether

Government or Contractor-provided. Address existing subsurface
conditions, selection and design of the foundation and floor slab,
all underground construction including utility installation and all
other site specific requirements (such as soil stabilization and slope
stability).

Addressing:
1) Settlement analysis - Limit settlement as required in UFC 3-220-01

Geotechnical Engineering and EM 1110-1-1904 "Settlement Analysis".
2) Bearing Capacity analysis
3) Foundation selection (shallow, deep, special) and construction

considerations; dimensions, and installation procedures.
4) Site preparation (earthwork procedures and equipment, compaction

requirements, building slab preparation (as applicable), soil
T
sensitivity to weather and equipment, groundwater influence on
construction, mitigation of expansive soils or liquefaction
potential, and dewatering requirements).
AF
5) Sheeting and shoring considerations, as applicable.
6) Pavement design calculations with parameters defined, actual or

assumed, and recommended thicknesses and materials.
7) Stormwater management facility(ies) and permitting requirements,

as applicable.
R
8) Haul routes and stockpile locations for earthwork, as applicable.
9) Calculations to support conclusions and recommendations.

D
10) Present recommendations on a structure-by-structure basis.
A registered Geotechnical Engineer is required to sign the

Geotechnical Report.
Accompany the submitted report with a cover letter identifying any

report recommendations proposed to be adopted into the design which
are interpreted by the Contractor as a changed condition to the
Geotechnical or Pavement related requirements of the RFP.
G10 1.5.4 Geotechnical Site Data required in Design Drawings
The Contractor's final design drawings must include the

Government-provided subsurface data presented in the RFP, as well as
any additional borings and laboratory test result data performed by
the Contractor. The data provided is required to include:
a. Logs of Borings and related summary of laboratory test results

Al Dhafra, UAE
and groundwater observations. Provide 24 hour groundwater

observations for at least 20% of the borings, minimum one boring.
Provide notes explaining any abbreviations or symbols used and
describing any special site preparation requirements.
b. Indicate the locations of all borings on the drawings. Revise

the applicable design drawings to reference the Contractor's
Geotechnical Report as being a basis for design.
G1010 SITE CLEARING
G1010 1.1 GENERAL
Clear and grub project site as required for project construction.
G1010 1.2 BURNING
Where burning is permitted, adhere to the applicable Host Nation

regulations.
T
G101001 CLEARING
G101001 1.1 CLEARING

AF
Clear all trees, shrubs, brush and vegetation necessary for construction
of the project. Clearing includes the felling, trimming, and cutting of
trees into sections and the satisfactory disposal of the trees and other
vegetation designated for removal, including downed timber, snags, brush,
and rubbish occurring within the areas to be cleared.
G101001 1.2 PRESERVATION

R
Preserve and protect trees, shrubs and vegetation not directly impacted by
the construction in accordance with Section 01 57 19.00 20, Temporary
Environmental Controls, and PTS Section G205005, paragraph 1.1 Existing
D
Plant Material to Remain or be Transplanted.
G101002 TREE REMOVAL
Remove and dispose of trees to a depth of at least 18 inches (450 mm) below ground
surface. Fill depressions with satisfactory material and compact. Mound fill
2 inches (50 mm) above adjacent surface to allow for settling when not part of
a subbase.
G101003 STUMP REMOVAL
Remove stumps to a depth of at least 18 inches (450 mm) below ground surface and
grind stumps 18 to 30 inches (450 to 750 mm) below ground surface. Fill depressions
with satisfactory material and compact. Mound fill 2 inches (50 mm) above adjacent
surface to allow for settling when not part of a subbase.
G101004 GRUBBING
Within the clearing limits, remove and dispose of all logs, shrubs, brush, matted

Al Dhafra, UAE
roots, roots larger than 2 inches (50 mm) in diameter, and other debris to a depth
of at least 18 inches (450 mm) below ground surface. Fill depressions made by
grubbing with satisfactory material and compact to make the new surface conform
to the adjacent surface of the ground.
G101005 SELECTIVE THINNING
G101005 1.1 TREE THINNING
Trim trees to remain of dead branches 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) or more in
diameter. Neatly cut limbs and branches in accordance with ANSI A300.
G101006 DEBRIS DISPOSAL
Prevent spillage on pavements, streets, or adjacent areas. Dispose of all surplus

and unsuitable material off of Government property.
G1020 SITE DEMOLITION & RELOCATIONS
G1020 1.1 GENERAL
T
Demolition work includes the demolition, removal and legal disposal of
existing construction debris as required to accommodate the new
AF
construction. Take necessary precautions to prevent damages to existing
utilities, construction and materials not scheduled for demolition, repair
or replacement; repair damages to the construction and materials to the
satisfaction of the Contracting Officer and at no additional cost to the
Government.
G1020 1.2 AUTHORIZATION

R
Do not begin demolition until the Demolition Plan has been approved by and
authorization is received from the Contracting Officer.
G1020 1.3 TITLE TO MATERIALS

D
Whenever possible, salvage or recycle all features demolished in lieu of

being disposed of as waste in a landfill. Since existing features to be
demolished which are not salvageable or reused will become the property of
the Contractor, remove them from the project site. The Government will not
be responsible for the condition, loss of, or damage to, such property after
contract award. Materials and equipment cannot be viewed by prospective
purchasers or sold on the site.
G1020 1.4 REUSE OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
Remove and store materials and equipment to be reused or relocated to prevent

damage, and reinstall as the work progresses.
G1020 1.5 SALVAGED MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
Salvage materials and equipment that are to be removed by the Contractor

and that are to remain the property of the Government, and deliver to a
storage site on the station in accordance with instructions of the

Al Dhafra, UAE
G102001 BUILDING MASS DEMOLITION
Refer to Section F20 for additional information.
G102002 ABOVEGROUND SITE DEMOLITION
G102002 1.1 DUST AND DEBRIS CONTROL
Prevent the spread of dust and debris to occupied portions of a building

or on pavements and avoid the creation of a nuisance or hazard in the
surrounding area. Do not use water for dust control if it results in
hazardous or objectionable conditions such as, but not limited to, ice,
flooding, or pollution. Sweep pavements as often as necessary to control
the spread of debris that may result in foreign object damage potential to
aircraft.
G102002 1.2 PROTECTION
T
G102002 1.2.1 Traffic Control
Where pedestrian and driver safety is endangered in the area of removal

AF
work, provide traffic control per FHWA Manual on Uniform Traffic
Control Devices (MUTCD).
G102002 1.2.2 Foreign Object Damage (FOD)
Remove potential FOD debris and waste materials on or adjacent to

operational airfield pavements due to the Contractor's operations.
If necessary, install a temporary barricade at the Contractor's
R
expense. The barricade is required to include a fence covered with
a fabric designed to stop the spread of debris. Anchor the fence and
fabric to prevent displacement by winds or jet/prop blasts. Remove
barricade when no longer required.
D
G102002 1.2.3 Existing Work
Protect existing work that is to remain in place, be reused, or remain

the property of the Government. At no additional expense to the
Government, repair all items that are damaged during performance of
the work to their original condition, or replace with new. Do not
overload pavements to remain.
G102002 1.3 PAVING AND SLABS
Remove concrete and asphaltic concrete paving and slabs as required for
construction of project. Remove the existing aggregate base in areas to
receive new pavement to the depth of the proposed pavement section below
new finish grade. Remove the existing aggregate base in areas not to
receive new pavement to a depth of 8 inches (200 mm) below existing adjacent
grade and break remaining pavement (if any) to allow drainage. Provide neat
sawcuts at limits of pavement removal; protect sawcuts so that new pavement
will butt against the existing without feathering.

Al Dhafra, UAE
G102002 1.4 ABOVEGROUND STORAGE TANKS
Perform aboveground storage tank removal work as indicated in the RFP, in

accordance with the ESR and the approved aboveground storage tank removal
work plan as described in Section 01 57 19.00 20, Temporary Environmental
Controls.
G102003 UNDERGROUND SITE DEMOLITION
G102003 1.1 UTILITY TERMINATION
Terminate utilities in accordance with Host Nation rules and regulations;

the nationally recognized code; and the requirements of the utility provider
covering the specific utility; UFC 3-201-01, Civil Engineering; and approved
by the Contracting Officer.
G102003 1.2 PROTECTION OF EXISTING UTILITIES
Protect existing utilities to remain. Where removal of existing utilities

and pavement is required, provide approved barricades, temporary covering
T
of exposed areas, and temporary services or connections. Repair damage to
existing utilities to remain at no additional expense to the government.
G102003
AF
1.3 UNDERGROUND STORAGE TANKS
Perform underground storage tank removal work as indicated in the RFP, in

accordance with the ESR and the approved underground storage tank removal
work plan as described in Section 01 57 19.00 20, Temporary Environmental
Controls.
G102004 BUILDING RELOCATION

R
Refer to applicable portions of Section F20 for additional information.
G102005 UTILITY RELOCATION

D
Repair relocated items that are damaged or replace damaged items with new undamaged
items as approved by the Contracting Officer and at no additional expense to the
government.
G102006 FENCING RELOCATION
Remove and replace post foundations. Repair relocated items that are damaged or
replace damaged items with new undamaged items as approved by the Contracting
Officer and at no additional expense to the government. Refer to Section G204001
for requirements for new fence systems, as applicable.
G102007 SITE CLEANUP
Remove rubbish and debris from the station daily; do not allow accumulations inside
or outside the building(s) or on pavements. Store materials that cannot be removed
daily in areas specified by the Contracting Officer.
G1030 SITE EARTHWORK

Al Dhafra, UAE
G1030 1.1 GENERAL
This section includes the design and construction requirements for earthwork
and grading related to construction of the roadways, parking, paved areas
and other related sitework. Refer to Section A10 for earthwork related to
construction of structures, including building, footings, foundations,
retaining walls, slabs, tanks, and utility appurtenances.
The Designer of Record is required to utilize UFGS Specification Section

31 00 00, Earthwork, for the project specification, and to submit the edited
G103001 GRADING
G103001 1.1 ELEVATIONS
Establish finish floor elevations as required by UFC 3-201-01, Civil

Engineering.
T
G103001 1.2 SITE GRADING
Provide site grading in accordance with the requirements of the UFC 3-201-01,
Civil Engineering and Federal Aviation Administration Advisory Circular 150/5320-5
AF
Airport Drainage Design.
G103001 1.3 FINISHED SURFACES
Provide finish grading with drainage towards new and existing drainage
features and with no resulting low spots that hold water or that direct runoff
R
towards new or existing facilities or site amenities. Provide finish
grading in accordance with the requirements of the UFC 3-201-01, Civil
Engineering and Federal Aviation Administration Advisory Circular 150/5320-5 Airport
Drainage Design.
D
G103001 1.4 RODENT AND VEGETATION CONTROL
Prevent and eliminate standing water.
G103002 COMMON EXCAVATION
Since all unsuitable material and surplus excavation will become the property
of the Contractor, dispose of it as indicated in the Project Program.
G103003 ROCK EXCAVATION
If blasting is allowed, conduct it in accordance with EM 385-1-1 and Host Nation

safety regulations. Provide blasting mats and use non-electric blasting caps.
Notify the Contracting Officer 24 hours prior to blasting.
Do not make requests for additional compensation for degree of hardness or

difficulty encountered in removal of material. Since all unsuitable material and
surplus excavation will become the property of the Contractor, dispose of it as

Al Dhafra, UAE
indicated in the Project Program.
G103004 FILL & BORROW
G103004 1.1 SOURCES
Where sufficient topsoil and satisfactory materials are not available on

the project site, provide suitable borrow materials.
G103004 1.2 UNSATISFACTORY SOIL MATERIALS
Remove unsatisfactory soil materials from the site in accordance with the
Project Program and replace with satisfactory soil materials in accordance
with UFGS Specification Section 31 00 00, Earthwork.
G103004 1.3 TOPSOIL
Refer to Section G2050, "Landscaping". Remove unsatisfactory, existing

topsoil from the site in accordance with the Project Program.
T
G103005 COMPACTION
Provide compaction in accordance with UFGS Specification Section 31 00 00,

AF
Earthwork, and the recommendations of the Contractor's Geotechnical Engineer,
whichever is greater.
G103006 SOIL STABILIZATION
Provide soil stabilization designed to function as required by site conditions

in accordance with the Host Nation specifications and standards . Apply and install
geosynthetics in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions.
R
G103007 SLOPE STABILIZATION
Provide slope stabilization methods in accordance with the Host Nation

D
specifications and standards. Design and install manufactured products, gabions,

geogrids, rock anchors in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions.
G103008 SOIL TREATMENT
G103008 1.1 TERMITE CONTROL
Refer to Section A1010 1.2, "Termite Control".
G103009 SHORING
Provide sheeting, shoring, bracing, cribbing and underpinning in accordance with

the Army Corps of Engineer's Safety and Health Requirements Manual (COE EM
385-1-1), UFC 3-220-01, Geotechnical Engineering, UFC 3-301-01, Structural
Engineering, and all other applicable Host Nation codes and requirements
Provide protection of existing structures.
G103010 TEMPORARY DEWATERING

Al Dhafra, UAE
The design of the temporary dewatering system is required to account for soil
conditions, rainfall, fluctuations in the groundwater elevations and the potential
settlement impact on adjacent facilities due to dewatering. Provide dewatering
in accordance with UFGS Specification Section 31 00 00. While the excavation is
open, maintain the water level continuously, at least 1.0 foot (0.30 m) below the
working level.
French drains, sumps, ditches or trenches will not be permitted within 3 feet (0.9
m) of the foundation of any structure without written approval of the Government's
Civil/Geotechnical Reviewer.
G103011 TEMPORARY EROSION & SEDIMENT CONTROL
G103011 1.1 TEMPORARY EROSION & SEDIMENT CONTROL
Develop and implement temporary erosion and sediment control measures and
other Best Management Practices (BMPs) prior to or in conjunction with
commencement of earthwork in accordance with the Host Nation Erosion and
Sediment Control Laws and Regulations. Remove all non-permanent erosion
T
control measures after vegetation is fully established.
G103011 1.2 MAINTENANCE

AF
Maintain temporary erosion control measures throughout the project until
areas are fully stabilized.
G103090 OTHER SITE EARTHWORK
G103090 1.1 HISTORIC AND ARCHAEOLOGIC ARTIFACTS

R
Refer to Section 01 57 19.00 20, Temporary Facilities and Controls for
Design-Build, in Part 2 of this RFP.
G103090 1.2 PIPELINE CASING UNDER RAILROADS OR PAVEMENTS

D
Where required by code or local practice provide casing for piping under
railroads. Pipelines under all pavements shall be concrete encased. The
Contractor is responsible for obtaining permits from all government and
nongovernment owners/agencies in designing and providing the work.
G103090 1.3 TOPSOIL AND SEED
Provide topsoil and seed according to UFGS Specification Section 31 00 00,

Earthwork, except when landscaping is required.
G1040 HAZARDOUS WASTE REMEDIATION
G1040 1.1 EXCAVATION
Perform excavation of contaminated soil and groundwater as indicated in the

RFP, in accordance with the ESR and the approved contaminated soil and
groundwater removal work plan as described in Section 01 57 19.00 20,
Temporary Environmental Controls. Excavate areas of contamination to the

Al Dhafra, UAE
depth noted elsewhere in the RFP. Select methods and equipment to minimize
disturbance to areas beyond the limits of the excavation area. Remove and
dispose of material that becomes contaminated as a result of the Contractor's
operations at no additional cost to the Government. Where excavation
extends into groundwater levels, employ dewatering methods on a localized
basis to facilitate excavation operations. Collect water generated by
dewatering during excavation and test in accordance with the ESR and the
approved work plan.
Dispose of water that contains contaminants above the levels indicated in

the ESR in accordance with the ESR and the approved work plan.
Non-contaminated water may be disposed of on-site.
G1040 1.2 STOCKPILED SOILS
Stockpile soils determined to be contaminated in accordance with the

criteria in the ESR in accordance with the contaminated soil and groundwater
removal work plan as described in Section 01 57 19.00 20, Temporary
Environmental Controls, and dispose of them in accordance with the
T
requirements of the ESR.
Soils that are determined to contain contaminants below the criteria listed
AF
in the ESR may be used as clean fill.
G1040 1.3 CLEAN FILL
Backfill and compact soils that are determined as clean fill via testing
in accordance with the requirements listed in the ESR.
G1040 1.4 SPILLS

R
In the event of a spill or release of hazardous substances, pollutant,

contaminant or oil, notify the Contracting Officer immediately.
Containment actions must be taken immediately to minimize the effect of any
D
spill or leak. Perform clean up at the Contractor's expense in accordance

with the ESR and the approved spill work plan as described in Section 01
57 19.00 20, Temporary Environmental Controls.
G1040 1.5 DISPOSAL
Since all waste materials will become the property of the Contractor,
transport and dispose of it in accordance with the criteria listed in the
ESR and the approved disposal plan as described in Section 01 57 19.00 20,
Temporary Environmental Controls.

Al Dhafra, UAE
SECTION G20
SITE IMPROVEMENTS
05/14
G20 GENERAL

T
AF

R
AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE (ANSI)
AMERICAN SOD PRODUCERS ASSOCIATION (ASPA)

D
U.S CONSUMER PRODUCT SAFETY COMMISSION, PUBLICATION NO. 325
Refer to UMRL for reference designation identification.
U.S. GENERAL SERVICES ADMINISTRATION (GSA)
FS RR-F-191 Fencing and Wire and Post Metal (and

Gates, Chain-link Fence Fabric, and
Accessories)
FACILITIES CRITERIA (UFC)


Al Dhafra, UAE

Engineering; UFC 3-201-02, Landscape
Architecture; UFC 3-220-01,
Geotechnical Engineering

Buildings
UFC 3-250-01FA Pavement Design for Roads, Streets,

Walks, and Open Storage Areas
UFC 3-260-01 Airfield and heliport Planning and Design
UFC 3-260-02 Pavement Design for Airfields
UFC 3-270-01 Asphalt Maintenance and Repair
T
UFC 3-270-02 Asphalt Crack Repair
UFC 3-270-03
AF Concrete Crack and Partial Depth Spall
Repair
UFC 3-270-04 Concrete Crack Repair

R
UFC 4-022-02 Selection and Application of Vehicle
Barriers
D
FEDERAL AVIATION ADMINISTRATION (FAA)
FAA Advisory Circular AC 150/5320-5 Airport Drainage Design.
DEPARTMENT OF THE AIR FORCE
Engineering Technical Letter ETL 04-2: Standard Airfield Pavement Marking Schemes
G20 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
G20 1.2.1 Qualifications of Tree Location Contractor
Contractor is required to be a professional tree moving company

holding landscape contractor's license in the state where the work
is to be performed and have a minimum ten years of tree relocation
experience. Contractor must be a Certified Arborist certified by the
International Society of Arboriculture. Arborist shall oversee all
tree moving operations during construction.

Al Dhafra, UAE
G20 1.2.2 Qualifications of New Landscape Contractor
Construction company must hold a landscape contractor's license in

the state where the work is to be performed and have a minimum five
years of landscape construction experience.
G20 1.3 PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION AND ACCEPTANCE TESTING

Construction Submittal Procedures, for additional requirements.
Verify satisfactory performance via Performance Verification, as detailed

in this section of the RFP. Verify satisfactory performance also via
testing as detailed in the paragraph, Field Quality Control, in applicable
UFGS Specification Sections utilized.
G20 1.3.1 Subgrade Preparation Performance Verification
T
Perform subgrade preparation in accordance with PTS Section G10. If
required by the Designer of Record, perform proof rolling. Perform
proof rolling in the presence of the Contracting Officer. Rutting
AF
or pumping of material is required to be undercut as directed by the
Contracting Officer and replaced with satisfactory soil materials as
defined in Section G10, Site Preparation.
G20 1.3.2 Base Course Performance Verification
G20 1.3.2.1 Aggregate Base Course

R
a. Sampling: ASTM D75/D75M.
b. Gradation: ASTM C136.
c. Thickness: Confirm in-place compacted thickness.
Acceptable tolerances are plus or minus 0.5 inches (13
D
mm). One test for every 500 square yards (418 square
meters); minimum 2 tests.
d. Density: ASTM D1556 or ASTM D6938. One field test for
every 1000 square yards (836 square meters); minimum 2
tests. ASTM D1557, Method A, B or C; one laboratory test
for the project.
e. Visual: Surface must be smooth with no ruts.
G20 1.3.2.2 Other Types of Base Courses
For other types of base courses, provide field testing in

accordance with the SHS.
G20 1.3.2.3 Graded Crushed Base Course
Provide performance verification in accordance with

Specification Section 32 11 23, Graded-Crushed Aggregate Base
Course attached in Part 5.

Al Dhafra, UAE
G20 1.3.3 Bituminous Concrete Pavement Performance Verification
Provide performance verification in accordance with Specification

Section 32 122 15.13, Hot Mix Asphalt for Airfield attached in Part
5.
G20 1.3.4 Portland Cement Concrete Pavement Performance Verification
Provide performance verification in accordance with Specification

Section 32 13 11, Concrete pavement for Airfields and Other Heavy-Duty
Pavements in Part 5.
G20 1.3.5 Concrete Joint Performance Verification
T
Install a test section of 150 m at start of sealing operation for each
type sealant to be used. Obtain approval of test section by
Contracting Officer prior to installing additional joint seal.
AF
Reject joint sealer that fails to cure properly, or fails to bond to
joint walls, or reverts to uncured state or fails in cohesion, or shows
excessive air voids, blisters, or has surface defects, swells, or
other deficiencies, or is not recessed within indicated tolerances.
Remove rejected sealer and reclean and reseal joints.
G20 1.3.6 Topsoil Performance Verification

R
Prior to planting design, provide a commercial soil analysis. Amend
planting areas based on the soil test's interpretation, amendment
type, and quantity recommendations (including soil nutrients and
texture, with percentages shown). Use additional topsoil only in
D
areas where soil analysis shows that the existing soil is inadequate
for growth of plant materials.
G20 1.3.7 Final Inspection for Planting and Irrigation
Request the final inspection in writing at least 10 days prior to the

last day of the planting and irrigation Establishment Period. The
Landscape Contractor must attend the inspection with the Contracting
Officer and document the inspection. The Landscape
Architect-of-Record must also attend the inspection and provide the
Contracting Officer with a letter certifying that the planting and
irrigation is installed per the plans and irrigation coverage is
correct and appropriate for optimum plant survival. At the end of
the Establishment Period, remove all stakes and guy cables.
G20 1.3.8 Landscape and Irrigation Establishment Period and Guarantee
Guarantee all transplanted trees, newly planted vegetation and

irrigation systems for a period of one year after the Contracting

Al Dhafra, UAE
Officer's final acceptance. This acceptance, and the submittal of

irrigation as-builts and controller charts, begins the Establishment
Period. Replace all trees, shrubs, and ground covers that die or have
20 percent or more of their crowns that die during planting operations
or the guarantee period with healthy plants of the same species or
variety during the appropriate planting season. The Landscape
Architect-of-Record must, along with the Contracting Officer, attend,
approve and document the start of the Establishment Period and
document quarterly and final inspections. The Landscape Architect
of Record must document quarterly and final inspections by submitting
written reports with photographs to the Contracting Officer. During
this period, perform tasks including, but not limited to: watering,
mowing, overseeding, fertilizing, mulching, pruning, weeding,
eradicating pests (rodents, rabbits, insects, mammals and fungus),
restaking, adjusting guy wires, adjusting irrigation systems,
maintaining erosion control materials, removing dead or broken
branches by pruning in accordance with ANSI A300 Part 1, maintaining
edging of planter beds, checking for girdling of trees, removal of
trash and debris, and replenishing mulch to assure all plant material
is in a healthy and thriving condition or replace plant material at
T
Contractor's expense. Reseed broadcast seeded or hydro-seeded areas
that do not achieve the 95-percent coverage by the end of the
Establishment Period by the same method and maintain an additional
AF
120 days to ensure coverage requirements are met. Maintain turf in
a manner that promotes proper health, growth, rich natural green
color, and a neat, uniform, manicured appearance, free of bare areas,
ruts, holes, weeds, pests, dead vegetation, debris, and unwanted
vegetation that present an unsightly appearance. Mow weekly during
the growing season and remove excess clippings.

R
Design Submittals must be in accordance with UFC 1-200-01, General Building

Requirements, UFGS section 01 33 10.05 20, Design Submittal Procedures, MED
Design Instruction Manual, and UFC 3-201-01, Civil Engineering.
D
If the UFGS products or systems are applicable to the project, the DOR is
required to edit these referenced UFGS sections and submit them as a part
of the design submittal specification. Edit the specification sections in
32 11 33, Cement Stabilized [Base] [Subbase] Course at Airfields and Roads
32 11 36.13, Lean Concrete Base Course
32 16 15, Concrete Block Pavements

The following specification are provided in Part 5 and are to be used verbatim

Al Dhafra, UAE
and not edited by the Design of Record.
32 11 23 Graded Crushed Aggregate Base Course
32 12 10 Bituminous Tack and Prime Coats
32 12 15.13 Hot-Mix Asphalt (HMA) for Airfields
32 13 11 Concrete Pavements for Airfields and Other heavy-Duty Pavements
32 13 73 Compression Joint Seals for Concrete Pavements
Submit a transplanting plan for all projects which include transplanting

trees. Submit the plan showing existing and proposed locations of
transplanted trees. Include in the plan delineate methods and times for
root pruning, digging, balling, removing, storing, transporting, planting,
watering, and maintenance to ensure survivability. Include also in the plan
equipment, anti-desiccant, and pesticides to be used. Provide a listing
T
of the plant material to be transplanted by common name and botanical name
as listed under "Nomenclature" in ANSI Z60.1; classification; caliper; and
height.
AF
Sustainability Reporting for Design Build.
G20 1.5.1 Transplanting Plan
Submit a transplanting plan for all projects which include

transplanting trees. Submit the plan showing existing and proposed
R
locations of transplanted trees. Include in the plan delineate
methods and times for root pruning, digging, balling, removing,
storing, transporting, planting, watering, and maintenance to ensure
survivability. Include also in the plan equipment, anti-desiccant,
D
and pesticides to be used. Provide a listing of the plant material

to be transplanted by common name and botanical name as listed under
"Nomenclature" in ANSI Z60.1; classification; caliper; and height.
G20 1.5.2 As-Builts
Submit a complete set of irrigation as-builts to the Contracting

Officer, to include the recording of measurements onto a record set
of full-size project irrigation plans. Indicate measurements for
locating water meters, pressure supply lines at 100 foot (30 m)
intervals, backflow prevention devices, rain/freeze sensors, valves
(including quick couplers and hose bibbs), controllers (and control
wire, if routed separately from pressure supply line); all dimensioned
from two permanent points of reference, such as building corners,
sidewalks, and other permanent features.
G20 1.6 ANTITERRORISM (AT) STANDARDS
Incorporate the minimum AT standards indicated in UFC 4-010-01, DoD Minimum

Al Dhafra, UAE
Antiterrorism Standard for Buildings.
G20 1.7 PROJECT LIMITATIONS
Prior to the start of design, determine the exact limit-of-work line for
the project periphery, considering items such as, but not limited to, utility
work, landscape areas, and laydown areas. See PTS G2050 for limits of
landscape areas.
G2010 ROADWAYS
G2010 1.1 PAVEMENT DESIGN
Provide geometric and pavement design, including minimum pavement sections,

in accordance with UFC 3-201-01, Civil Engineering, and the Department of
Transportation and Host Nation. Provide pavement calculations in
accordance with UFC 1-300-09N, Design Procedures. Provide any required
additional pavement design to provide a complete and useable facility.
For pavements subject to aircraft traffic or aircraft ground support
T
equipment traffic consult Government Geotechnical Engineer for design
criteria and requirements. Host Nation standards are not acceptable for
airfield pavements.
AF
G2010 1.2 PAVEMENT AESTHETICS
Provide surfaces consistent in color and finish.
G2010 1.3 TRAFFIC CONTROL DEVICES
Provide and install new traffic control devices (i.e., signs and markings)
R
in accordance with the United States Department of Transportation Federal
Highway Administration's Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices and their
standard, "Rigid Sign Supports" or Host Nation requirements. Also provide
new traffic control devices along/in the existing streets adjacent to the
D
project site as necessary to provide complete traffic control to the new

facilities.
G2010 1.4 EXISTING UTILITY STRUCTURES
Adjust existing utility structures to meet the new finished pavement grades
as required.
G201001 ROAD BASES & SUBBASES
Prepare subgrade in accordance with Section G10, Site Preparation. Geotextiles

may be used for separation or reinforcement in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions. Provide base course under paved areas in accordance with the Host
Nation specifications.
Place base course in accordance with the Host Nation Specifications for that
particular base course and in layers of equal thickness with no compacted layer
more than 6 inches (150 mm) thick. Compact base course at optimum moisture content
to 100 percent ASTM D 1557 maximum dry density.

Al Dhafra, UAE
Where Host Nation Specifications are not available or applicable, the Designer
of Record must utilize the applicable UFGS Specification Sections referenced under
paragraph 1.1.2 entitled "Government Standards" for the project specification.
Submit these specifications in edited form as a part of the design submittal for
the project.
Provide concrete curbs and gutters in accordance with the Host Nation standards
or as specified in UFC 3-201-01, Civil Engineering, whichever is more stringent.
G201003 ROAD PAVED SURFACES
Where Host Nation Standards are not available or applicable, the Designer of Record
must utilize the applicable UFGS Specification Sections referenced under paragraph
1.1.2 entitled "Government Standards" for the project specification. Submit
these specifications in edited form as a part of the design submittal for the
project.
G201003 1.1 ROAD PAVEMENT MIX
T
G201003 1.1.1 Bituminous Concrete Pavement
AF
Provide bituminous concrete pavement in accordance with the
applicable standard mix of the Host Nation Standard based on the
pavement design and vehicle loading indicated in this RFP.
G201003 1.1.1.1 Bituminous Concrete Placement
Provide bituminous concrete placement, including minimum

temperature during placement, joints, and maximum lift
R
thickness in accordance with the Host Nation Standard. Compact
bituminous concrete in accordance with the Host Nation
Standard, modified to 96 percent of maximum laboratory density.
D
G201003 1.1.2 Portland Cement Concrete Pavement
If reinforced, the welded wire fabric shall conform to ASTM A 185.

Bar reinforcement shall conform to ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 400 (Grade
60).
Provide concrete in accordance with the applicable standard mix of

the Host Nation Standard for the design strength plus any allowable
deviations.
G201003 1.2 JOINTS FOR PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT
Provide joints in accordance with Host Nation Standard and the applicable
portions of UFC 3-250-01FA, Pavement Design for Roads, Streets, Walks, and
Open Storage Areas. Install joints in a manner and at such time to prevent
random or uncontrolled cracking. Joints must form a regular rectangular
pattern. Wherever curved pavement edges occur, make joints to intersect
tangents to curve at right angles.

Al Dhafra, UAE
G201003 1.2.1 Expansion Joints
Provide thickened edge expansion joints at the intersection of two

rigid pavements. Use preformed joint filler, ASTM D1751. Filler
must be compatible with joint sealer material. Securely hold preformed
joint filler in position during concreting operations.
G201003 1.2.2 Isolation Joints
Provide thickened edge isolation joints by placing a 1/2-inch (12 mm)

preformed joint filler (ASTM D 1751) around each structure that
extends into or through the pavement before concrete is placed at that
location.
G201003 1.2.3 Contraction Joints
Saw joint lines within specified tolerance, straight, and extend for
width of transverse joint, and for entire length of longitudinal
joint.
T
G201003 1.2.4 Construction Joints
If an emergency stop occurs remove the concrete back to location of

AF
transverse joint and install a construction joint.
G201003 1.2.5 Joint Sealants
ASTM D5893/D5893M; provide single component cold-applied silicone.

Silicone sealant must be self-leveling and non-acid curing.
G201003 1.2.6 Preformed Compression Seals

R
Use preformed compression seals in areas where silicone joint sealant

does not perform, such as areas subject to water inundation, blasts,
or constant/repeated fuel spillage.
D
ASTM D 2628. ASTM D 2835, for lubricant.
G201003 1.3 PRIME COAT
Use prime coat in accordance with the Host Nation Standard. Prime coat must
be emulsified asphalt materials.
G201003 1.4 TACK COAT
Tack coat is required for bituminous pavement overlays and on vertical cut
faces of pavement patches. Provide tack coat in accordance with the Host
Nation Standard.
G201003 1.5 PAVEMENT PATCHES
Provide pavement patches for existing pavements where required for

installation of utility trenches. Sawcut 12 inches beyond edge of trench.
Provide thicknesses of pavement materials equal to or greater than the

Al Dhafra, UAE
existing pavement section.
For spalls or repairs of existing concrete pavement, perform repairs in

conformance with UFC 3-270-03, Concrete Crack and Partial Depth Spall
Repair, and UFC 3-270-04, Concrete Repair. Spall repair materials must be
either Rapid Setting Cementitious Concrete (RSCC), epoxy concrete, or
polymer-modified Portland Cement (non-sag mortar) products specially
formulated for spall repairs, with a proven record (in service at least three
years) of satisfactory use under loading and environmental conditions
similar to those at the location of intended use. Provide a manufacturer's
data sheet and certificate supporting the satisfactory use to the
Contracting Officer with the design. A product manufacturer's
representative is required to be present during the initial two days of
product application to verify that manufacturer's instructions for use are
adhered to by the contractor. Give the Contracting Officer 7 days notice
prior to the initial application in order to be present.
G201004 ROAD MARKING & SIGNAGE
G201004 1.1 MARKING
T
Provide pavement markings in accordance with the Host Nation Standard.
Design materials for life expectancy of at least 3 years under an average
AF
daily traffic count per lane of approximately 9000 vehicles. Water based
paints must have durability rating of at least 4 when determined in the wheel
path area.
Provide a half-rate initial marking application on bituminous pavements.

Provide the remaining application at the end of the normal curing period.
G201004 1.2 SIGNAGE

R
Provide signage in accordance with the MUTCD.

D
G201005 1.1 GUARDRAILS
Provide guard (guide) rails in accordance with the Host Nation Standard.
Where the Host Nation Standards do not include materials for guardrails,
provide guardrails in accordance with the applicable portions of the AASHTO
Roadside Design Guide.
G201005 1.2 BOLLARDS
For bollards to prevent damage, provide minimum 4 feet height, 4 inch

diameter steel pipe filled with concrete, painted, and embedded in a portland
cement concrete foundation.
For bollards located at building entries or other high-visibility areas

provide decorative bollards matching the design of the facility or
consistent with the Base Exterior Architecture Plan (BEAP) and the
Installation Appearance Plan.

Al Dhafra, UAE
Bollards for security are specified in Section G204004, "Security

Structures".
G201006 RESURFACING
Adjust rims of existing utility structures to match proposed grades after

resurfacing.
G201006 1.1 SLURRY SEAL
ASTM D 3910 and in accordance with the Host Nation Standard.
G201006 1.2 BITUMINOUS CONCRETE OVERLAY
Remove old pavement by cold milling to depths required to provide new surface
and leave underlying materials intact. Clean the pavement of excessive
dirt, clay or other foreign matter with power brooms and hand brooms
immediately prior to the milling operation.
Repair or replace damaged utility structures, valve boxes, or pavement that
T
is torn, cracked, gouged, rutted, broken or undercut at no addition expense
to the government.
AF
Provide bituminous concrete overlay produced from hot or cold recycling of
the milled material or from virgin materials in accordance with the
applicable provisions of UFC 3-201-01, Civil Engineering, and the standard
mix of the SHS based on the pavement design and vehicle loading as indicated
in this RFP.
G201006 1.3 CRACK SEALING

R
Use fiber reinforced crack sealer for sealing cracks in asphalt pavement
after milling and prior to resurfacing. Provide crack sealing conforming
to the following requirements in UFC 3-270-01, Asphalt Maintenance and
Repair, and UFC 3-270-02, Asphalt Crack Repair.
D
G2020 PARKING LOTS
Refer to Section G2010.
G2020 1.1 PERMEABLE PAVEMENT
Provide permeable concrete pavers of solid interlocking paving units

complying with ASTM C936, resistant to freezing and thawing when tested
according to ASTM C67, and made from normal-weight aggregates. If required
for applicable sustainability goal, provide permeable concrete pavers with
a Solar Reflectance Index (SRI) greater than or equal to 29.
Provide pervious concrete in accordance with UFGS Specification Section 32

13 43, Pervious Concrete Paving.
Do not use asphalt-surfaced porous pavement.

Al Dhafra, UAE
Refer to Section G201004. Provide water-based paints only.
Mark neatly to denote traffic lanes and parking spaces; mark in accordance with
the requirements of UFC 3-201-01, Civil Engineering.
T
G202005 1.1 WHEELSTOPS

AF
Provide precast concrete wheelstops.
G202006 RESURFACING
G2030 PEDESTRIAN PAVING

R
Locate new sidewalks such that they maintain continuity of pedestrian traffic to
and from the existing sidewalks adjacent to the site(s).
D
Provide as required by local standards or geotechnical report; refer to Section

G201001.
G203003 1.1 SIDEWALKS
Provide sidewalks of Portland cement concrete pavement with 4 inches (100

mm) thick minimum or permeable pavement. Provide concrete and permeable
pavement in accordance with Section G201003 and G2020, respectively. For
PCC sidewalks, provide a broomed finish. Provide sidewalks of at least 5
feet (1.5 meters) wide, except that sidewalks connecting entry points of
housing units to the housing unit's parking are required to be at least 36
inches (900 mm) wide. In housing areas, offset sidewalks paralleling
streets to maintain a minimum grassed separation of 5 feet (1.5 meters) from
the back face of the curb to the closest edge of the sidewalk.

Al Dhafra, UAE
Unless indicated otherwise, provide a transverse slope of 1/48. Limit

variation in cross section to 0.25 inch in 5 feet (6 mm in 1.50 m).
Submit samples boards per ESR G2050 and PTS G2050 and finish schedule on
final plans.
G203003 1.1.1 Joints for PCC Pavement Sidewalks
Provide contraction joints spaced at intervals equivalent to the width

of the sidewalk. Provide 0.5 inch (13 mm) thick transverse expansion
joints at changes in direction where sidewalk abuts curb, steps, rigid
pavement, or other similar structures; space expansion joints every
50 feet (15 m) maximum. Provide isolation joints by placing a
1/2-inch (12 mm) preformed expansion joint filler around each
structure that extends into or through the sidewalk before concrete
is placed at that location.
G203003 1.2 CONCRETE PAVERS
Concrete pavers shall meet ASTM C936. Install in accordance with
T
manufacturers recommendations.
G203003 1.3 HANDICAPPED RAMPS

AF
Provide handicapped ramps of PCC pavement with an exposed aggregate finish,
truncated domes, or as required by the SHS at roadway intersections.

R
G2040 SITE DEVELOPMENT
G204001 FENCING & GATES

D
G204001 1.1 CHAIN LINK FENCE
Do not use aluminum fabric, posts or accessories.
Chain link fence fabric must be at least 9 gauge (3 mm) steel wire mesh
material (before any coating) with mesh openings not larger than 2 inches
(51 mm). Install fence in accordance with ASTM F567 and the manufacturer's
written installation instructions.
G204001 1.1.1 Tensions Wires and Top Rails
Provide rails in accordance with FS RR-F-191/3, Class 1, steel pipe,

Grade A.
G204001 1.1.2 Gates
Provide gates in accordance with FS RR-F-191/2 with posts and fabric

as specified for fence.

Al Dhafra, UAE
G204001 1.1.3 Posts and Braces
Provide posts and braces in accordance with FS RR-F-191/3, Class 1,

steel pipe, Grade A. Each gate, terminal and end post will be braced
with truss rods.
G204001 1.1.4 Fencing Accessories
Provide fencing accessories in accordance with FS RR-F-191/4. If PVC

coating is required, provide accessories with PVC color coating
similar to that specified for chain-link fabric or framework.
G204001 1.2 ORNAMENTAL FENCE
G204001 1.3 SECURITY FENCE
Provide security fencing systems in accordance with UFC 3-201-01, Civil

Engineering, and this RFP.
G204001 1.3.1 Chain Link Security Fence
T
Provide chain link fence in accordance with paragraph G204001 - 1.1,
excepted as noted otherwise. Ensure that the fabric has twisted and
AF
barbed selvage at the top and bottom. Do not provide top rails.
Locate all posts and structural supports on the inner side of the
fencing. Install outriggers facing outward except when the fence
must be mounted directly on the property line.
G204001 1.3.2 Signage
Provide signage at a minimum of 200 foot (61 m) intervals along the

R
entire perimeter.
G204001 1.3.3 Drainage Culverts and Utility Openings

D
Provide protective measures to prevent access through culverts, storm

drains, sewers, air intakes, exhaust tunnels and utility openings or
across drainage ditches or swales.
G204001 1.4 OPENINGS IN PERIMETER AND SECURITY FENCING
Do not cover, block or lace openings in perimeter fencing and security

fencing with material which would prevent a clear view of personnel, vehicles
or material in the outer or inner vicinity of the fence line.
G204001 1.5 FENCE GROUNDING
Ground fencing on either side of every gate and at other locations when the
fencing is near and parallel to high tension power lines. Grounding is also
required at intervals of 1000 feet (305 meters) to 1500 feet (457 meters)
when the fencing runs through isolated areas and at lesser distances
depending on the proximity of the fencing to public roads, highways and
buildings where the fencing is around or within any explosive storage,
production, operating or handling areas.

Al Dhafra, UAE
G204001 1.6 ENCLOSURES FOR UTILITY EQUIPMENT
Where fencing is used to provide an enclosure for utility equipment, ensure

a minimum clearance is provided no less than 3 feet (900 mm) around the
equipment to permit maintenance access and ventilation. Provide stone,
gravel or concrete paving within the enclosure.
G204002 RETAINING WALLS AND FREESTANDING WALLS
Provide retaining walls to permanently resist soil pressures as well as live loads.
Provide wall drainage to minimize lateral loading and protect wall materials
against degradation.
G204002 1 JET BLAST DEFLECTOR
Provide jet blast deflectors to protect buildings and paved areas. The deflectors
shall be designed for KC-10 aircraft on the Refueler Apron. The deflectors shall
be designed by the manufacture and installed in accordance with the manufactures
recommendations
T
G204003 EXTERIOR FURNISHINGS
AF
Refer to ESR G20 and other portions of the RFP for exterior furnishings required
on this project. Permanently attach all site furnishings to concrete pads.
Provide site furnishings in conformance with the Base Exterior Architecture Plan
(BEAP) and or Installation Appearance Plan for each Activity. If no product
guidance is given, coordinate material, finish and color with architecture
(fiberglass and aluminum are not acceptable) and provide to the greatest extent
possible, materials with industrial recycled content, preferably from regionally
local manufacturers.
R
G204003 1.1 PICNIC AND PASSIVE RECREATION AREAS
Include tables, with attached benches, on concrete bases sloped to drain

D
and permanent barbecue grill(s) for picnic areas. Additionally, provide

separate receptacles for trash, recycling and barbecue ashes. Permanently
attach all site furnishings to concrete paving extending a minimum of 12
inches (300 mm) past the furnishing, with the exception of picnic tables
and benches, which require concrete paving extending 2 feet (600mm) minimum
on all sides. The elevation of the finished concrete must be plus 1 inch
(25 mm) above adjacent grade.
G204003 1.2 TRASH RECEPTACLES
Provide trash receptacles with drain hole and stationary or self-closing

lids with anchor chains secured to the receptacle to protect the contents
from weather. Design receptacles to hold heavy-duty plastic or galvanized
steel liners of the same manufacturer. Consider potential weight of full
containers when deciding on 'top loading' or 'side loading' receptacles.
Include a concrete pad 12 inches (300 mm) larger on all sides than the size
of the trash receptacle base.
G204003 1.3 BENCH

Al Dhafra, UAE
Minimum 6 feet (1.8 meter) length to match trash and recycling receptacle
material & color, installed a minimum of 18 inches (450 mm) above finish
grade, permanently installed with anchor bolts or in-ground. For benches
located in non-paved areas, provide concrete pads extending a minimum 2 feet
(0.6 meters) beyond the edge of the seat portion of the bench (or both front
and back if accessible from either).
G204003 1.4 RECYCLING RECEPTACLES
Provide recycling receptacles, single-piece with separate slots for cans,

bottles, newspaper. Match height, material, and style of the trash
receptacle.
G204003 1.5 BARBEQUE
Minimum 12 inches (300 mm) x 18 inches (450 mm) with heavy-duty grill and
hinged stainless steel lid, factory primed and painted with rust-resistant
paint. Install so coal height is a minimum of 36 inches (0.91 meter) above
finish grade.
T
G204003 1.6 HOT ASH RECEPTACLE
AF
Minimum 28 square inches (181 square centimeters) x 42 inches (1.1 meter)
high pre-cast reinforced concrete with drain hole with steel ash grate and
cast in "Hot Coals Only" logos on each side with white letters on a red
background.
G204004 SECURITY STRUCTURES
Where identified for project elsewhere in this RFP, provide active and passive
R
vehicle barriers to effectively stop or detect penetration by explosive-laden
vehicles through the perimeter of a protected area in accordance with UFC 4-022-02,
Selection and Application of Vehicle Barriers.
D
G204005 SIGNAGE
Provide facility signage as required by local code, the Installation and Appearance
Guide, the Base Exterior Architectural Plan (BEAP) and this RFP.
Size messages and graphics on signs according to the functional viewing distance.
Typically, at least 1 inch (25 mm) of letter height per 25 feet (7.62 meters) of
viewing distance is required for readability.
Refer to Section G201004, "Marking & Signage" for traffic signage.
G204007 PLAYING FIELDS
G204007 1.1 PLAYGROUNDS
Design playgrounds and provide surfacing and equipment in accordance with

this RFP and U.S. Consumer Products Safety Commission Publication 325 and
ASTM F1487. Border tot-lots and play-lots with reinforced concrete curbing
to a depth appropriate to the type safety surfacing utilized. Provide shade

Al Dhafra, UAE
and wind protection where these elements may significantly limit the use
of the facilities. For tot-lots and play-lots provide separated areas with
appropriately sized equipment and materials to serve their developmental
levels. Separate areas by a buffer zone, which can be an area of shrubs,
hardscape or benches. Provide signage to give guidance to adults as to the
age appropriateness of the equipment.
G204007 1.1.1 Tot Lots
Design each "tot lot" to accommodate children from ages 2 through 5

to provide a variety of play activities and motor skill development
opportunities which may include, as a minimum:
For multi-activity structures provide a minimum of two platforms and

two slides, one wheel chair accessible, swing set for young children,
paired spring mounted 'riders' or other similar types of apparatus.
Locate at least two benches with backs on concrete bases for
convenience to, and observation of, the tot-lot.
G204007 1.1.2 Play Lots
T
Design each "play lot" to accommodate children from ages 5 to 12 which
provide a wider range of activities and opportunities for greater
AF
motor skills development and improvement. These may include, as a
minimum:
For a multi-activity structure, provide a minimum of three platforms

and two slides, one wheel chair accessible. A swing set, or other
similar types of apparatus. Locate at least two benches with backs
on concrete bases for convenience to, and observation of, the
play-lot.
R
G204007 1.1.3 Equipment
Tot lot and play lot equipment must be factory finished institutional
D
quality, in compliance with ASTM F1487, the United States Consumer

Products Safety Commission's Guidelines for Public Playgrounds, and
the UFC 3-201-01, Civil Engineering. Use only equipment that has been
approved by International Play Equipment Manufacturers Association
(IPEMA) and installed by a National Playground Contractors
Association (NPCA) contractor.
Site tot lot and play lot equipment to provide use and no encroachment
zones in accordance with ASTM F1487. A use zone is a clear,
unobstructed area under and around play equipment where a child would
be expected to land when jumping or falling from a piece of play
equipment. Requirements for use zones vary for the age group and for
different pieces of equipment. Show all use zones for play equipment
on the site plan to ensure there is no conflict between play activities
on the ground and swinging or jumping from the equipment. The
No-encroachment zone is an additional area beyond the use zone where
children using the equipment can be expected to move about and should
have no encroaching obstacles. This area will vary according to the
types of adjacent equipment, and their orientation to one another.

Al Dhafra, UAE
G204007 1.1.4 CCA-Treated Lumber
Do not use chromate copper arsenate (CCA) treated lumber in

recreational facilities for children.
G204007 1.1.5 Playground Safety Surface
Provide a playground safety surface, in accordance with ASTM F355 and

ASTM F1292, throughout all use zones and under all play equipment in
tot lots and play lots. Natural wood products and decomposed granite
are not allowed for surfacing. Loose fill surfacing must be a minimum
of 4 inches (100 mm) below the top of edging. Consider local climate,
soil conditions, location and size of area, type of activity, age of
users, and intensity of use when choosing surfacing material.
Provide soil separator fabric between playground loose-fill material
and subgrade soil. Design play areas with permeable surface and
adequate drainage. Drain to sump a minimum of 20 feet out from the
playground curbing or to storm drain.
G204007 1.2 PLAYING FIELDS
T
Provide playing surfaces in accordance with this RFP. Use synthetic turf
systems approved by the reviewing Government Landscape Architect or Civil
Engineer.
AF
G204090 OTHER SITE IMPROVEMENTS
Provide other site improvements in conformance to the BEAP or Installation

Appearance Plan and to the requirements of UFC 4-010-01.
G204090 1.1 DUMPSTER PADS AND ENCLOSURES

R
Provide 200 mm (8 inch) thick non-reinforced portland cement concrete

pavement dumpster pads sized larger than what is required to accommodate
the specific dumpsters to be used at the site. Make the concrete pad large
D
enough to accommodate the front wheels of the carrying truck.
The dumpster enclosure's materials and style shall complement the adjacent
buildings and facilities. Walls should be at least 1.83 meters (6 feet)
tall. Where possible, orient the openings of enclosures away from building
entrances and main streets.
G2050 LANDSCAPING
Landscape area is defined as all permeable areas within the project boundaries
not covered by buildings, roads, parking lots, sidewalks, and other non-permeable
areas. All site areas disturbed by construction must receive landscape
improvements.
G2050 1.1 DESIGN
The design of landscaped areas must be in accordance with Presidential

Executive Order 13148 of April 2000, with a goal to reduce fertilizers,
pesticides, and water use. The intent is to achieve a base-wide ratio of

Al Dhafra, UAE
20 percent maximum non-native plants and 80 percent minimum locally or

regionally native plants. Do not use plants deemed invasive by the project
state or region's Exotic Pest Plant Council, State Department of Agriculture
or local chapter of the American Society of Landscape Architects as a threat
to ecosystems or agriculture. Select only plant species which require
little or no supplemental irrigation after the initial establishment period.
Only nursery-grown plants are acceptable. Cover all non-paved site areas
disturbed by construction operations with plant material or inorganic mulch.
Stabilized soil, decomposed granite, and organic mulch are not acceptable
as ground covers. Provide landscape architectural work in accordance with
UFC 3-201-02, Landscape Architecture. For all projects with planting and
or irrigation areas, utilize the design services of a Landscape Architect
licensed in the state of the project. The Landscape Architect of Record
must visit the site at least once prior to design, twice during construction,
and quarterly during the Establishment Period, including the Establishment
Period start and completion. The Landscape Architect of Record must attend
the kickoff partnering meeting and CDWs. Courtyards and plazas are to be
designed by the Landscape Architect. For the CDW, provide a Site Analysis
Plan to demonstrate the design thought process. It is the Contractor's
responsibility to coordinate between disciplines including architecture,
T
civil engineering, electrical engineering, mechanical engineering, fire
protection, and landscape architecture. Coordinate location of utilities,
structures, and equipment. For projects in dry climates (arid and
AF
semi-arid), eliminate or minimize the use of turf, except when needed for
active or passive recreation.
The Landscape Architect-of-Record is required to submit 5 sample boards of

landscape materials. Sample boards to include but not limited to colors,
finishes, textures of hardscape paving, walls, signs, monument piers,
inorganic mulches, organic mulches, and other site improvements. Include
cut sheets of all proposed plant material.
R
G205001 FINE GRADING AND SOIL PREPARATION
See Section G10, Site Preparation. Provide 4 inches (102 mm) of topsoil with
D
appropriate soil amendments, as recommended by a current soil composition test,

for all areas to be planted with turf grass.
G205002 EROSION CONTROL MEASURES
See Section G10, Site Preparation.
G205003 TOP SOIL AND PLANTING BEDS
See paragraph titled, G205005 PLANTINGS.
G205004 SEEDING, SPRIGGING, AND SODDING
Hydroseed areas that are to be seeded and are larger than 1,000 square feet (92.90
square meters). Hydroseed mix composition must be appropriate for surrounding
land use and compatible and consistent with local application rates, seed
availability and established practice in the project area. If project dates are
unknown, specify required planting dates or alternative species for different
seasons. Apply seed at a time best suited for germination of the selected species.

Al Dhafra, UAE
Seeded areas are required to achieve a 95-percent coverage of the selected species
and be weed free at the end of the Establishment Period.
G205005 PLANTINGS
G205005 1.1 EXISTING PLANT MATERIAL TO REMAIN OR BE TRANSPLANTED
Preserve existing trees to the greatest extent possible. Identify

preserved trees on the plans with tree species, caliper and dripline. Tag
trees to be saved with plastic or vinyl tape tied to the tree caliper.
Protect existing trees by fencing planting areas to remain from compaction
and any other damage with a barrier of metal poles a maximum 8 feet (2.4
meter) on center with plastic netting to a minimum of 10 feet (3.0 meter)
radius from outside of the tree's trunk. Where tree drip lines are greater
than 10 feet (3.0 meter) from the tree's trunk, locate barrier fencing at
the drip line of the tree. Install signs on each Tree Protection Zone fence
indicating that the barrier must not be taken down or moved without the
participation of a Certified Arborist. Ensure that the details and
specifications clearly state that none of the following activities occur
within the tree protection barricade: driving, parking, storing materials,
T
dumping waste, concrete washout, adding fill soil, trenching, removing soil,
grubbing, or any other disturbance to the tree or the associated roots. Do
not allow debris from tree or stump removal operations to fall on or otherwise
AF
damage plants that are not scheduled for removal. Do not remove plastic
tape and barrier fencing until planting operations are ready to begin and
or instructed by the Contracting Officer. Replace existing trees to remain
or to be transplanted that are unhealthy, that die, or have 20 percent or
more of their crowns that die during the establishment period with healthy
plants of the same species or variety during the appropriate planting season.
During the landscape establishment period, replace trees, turf, shrubs, and
ground cover that are damaged or destroyed during construction operations
R
by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Government. At the direction
of the Contracting Officer, remove the existing tree and stump and replace
it with trees of the same genus and species equal to the total caliper of
the existing tree. Minimum caliper of replacement trees must be 4 inch (100
D
mm). Replace shrubs with 5 gallon (18.9 liter) size container, ground cover
with flat containers planted at 8 inches (200 mm) on center, and turf with
sod, all of the same genus and species.
G205005 1.2 UTILITIES
Do not place trees within 10 feet (3 meter) of any above or below-grade

utility line or structure. Within roadway sightlines, mature shrubs must
not be greater than 3 feet (1 m) in height and trees must be limbed up a
minimum of 6 feet (2 m) so their mature growth will not obstruct views from
vehicle intersections or points of vehicle ingress or egress. Coordinate
utilities between the Landscape Architect and appropriate disciplines.
G205005 1.3 RECYCLING
Green waste: Contact the Public Works Department for potential green waste
collection and hauling by the Government. Separate green waste not
collected by the Government from construction debris and deliver to the
base's or local landfill's green waste recycling area. Quantify and report

Al Dhafra, UAE
diverted waste to the Contracting Officer.
G205005 1.4 PLANTING
G205005 1.4.1 Plant Quantities
Provide trees at the minimum rate of one (1) tree per 1,000 square
feet (92.9 square meters) of Landscape Area. Parking areas must
have a minimum of one (1) tree per every 5 parking spaces around the
parking perimeter and one (1) tree per every 10 parking spaces within
the parking area. Provide a minimum of one (1) tree in each end aisle
planter. Total minimum quantities may be reduced only by the reviewing
Government Landscape Architect. Tree quantities reduced by the
Government Landscape Architect will be included on the ADD/DEDUCT List
by the Contracting Officer. For bioretention areas, minimum
quantities of trees, shrubs, and ground covers must be as required
by State regulations. Provide a minimum tree size of 24 inch (600
mm) box/2 inch (50 mm) caliper, or if within an anti-terrorism zone
provide a minimum size of 36 inch (910 mm) box/3 inch (76 mm) caliper.
For trees within concrete or other non-permeable paved areas, allow
T
a minimum non-paved planting area of 4 feet by 8 feet (1.2 m by 2.4
m) per tree.
AF
For dry climates (arid and semi-arid) only: Plant a minimum of forty
percent (40%) of the landscaped areas with shrubs and groundcover so
that at 50 percent (50%) plant maturity, they will form mass plantings.
Utilize a minimum ratio of 60 percent (60%) 5 gallon (18.9 liter)
shrubs or groundcover and 40 percent (40%) 1 gallon (3.79 liter) shrubs
or groundcover. The remaining sixty percent (60%) of the landscape
area may be inorganic mulch, planted or a combination thereof. For
inorganic mulch, provide 3 inch (76 mm) depth of 3/4-inch (19 mm) and
R
smaller rock, and for larger than 3/4-inch (19 mm) size, assure
complete ground surface coverage. Provide plant material
calculation summary matrix on planting plan.
D
G205005 1.4.2 Plant Quality
All plants must comply with ANSI Z60.1 and ANSI A300, Part 1, current
editions. All plants must be in a healthy, disease and pest free
condition. All seed, sod, and sprigs must be State Certified.
G205005 1.4.3 Plant Selection
The reviewing Government Landscape Architect has final approval

authority on all selected plant material. Species deemed unsuitable
for planting by the Government Landscape Architect will not be
allowed.
G205005 1.4.4 Plant Installation
Planting operations, including but not limited to planting soil mixes

and fertilization, must comply with local established practices and
agricultural extension service recommendations. Stake or guy new or
transplanted trees with three stakes [2 inch x 2 inch x 8 feet (50

Al Dhafra, UAE
mm x 50 mm x 2.4 m) hardwood], or three guy cables [five-strand, 3/16

inch (5 mm) diameter galvanized steel cable]. Install linear tree root
barriers at the edge of paving where trees are planted within 10 feet
(3 m) of sidewalks, curbs, walls, columns, and other hard surface
areas. Do not encircle tree root balls with root barriers.
G205005 1.4.5 Edging Materials and Mulching Materials
Provide 3/16 inch (5 mm) minimum thick by 5 inch (127 mm) minimum deep
aluminumedging or 6 inch (150 mm) by 6 inch (150 mm) minimum, concrete
edging dividing all turf and planting beds and dividing all planted
and non-planted inorganic mulch areas. Provide stake type and
spacing for aluminum edging per manufacturer's recommendations.
Plastic edging is not allowed. Mulch planted areas not mulched with
inorganic mulch with a 3-inch (75 mm) depth of organic shredded
hardwood mulch. For inorganic mulch where rock cobble size is greater
than half of the profile depth, provide inch (19 mm) comparable
color and shape rock mulch in bottom half of profile. For dry climates
only, organic mulch must be shredded redwood bark unless approved
otherwise by the reviewing Government Landscape Architect. All
T
mulches (organic and inorganic) must not be subject to sloughing off
on sloped sites. Submit samples of mulches to the reviewing
Government Landscape Architect for approval prior to installation.
AF
Decomposed granite must not be used. Provide a 3-inch (75 mm) depth
of organic shredded hardwood mulch between plants used to form a mass
(in dry climates, mulch in the remainder of planting beds with
inorganic mulch). Install mulching materials prior to the start of
the Establishment Period.
G205005 1.4.6 Fertilizer

R
Fertilize all transplanted trees, new trees, shrubs, ground covers,
turf, perennials and ornamental grasses as recommended by local
agricultural extension services.
D
G205005 1.4.7 Weed Fabric and Erosion Control Fabric
Provide a weed barrier fabric of sheet polypropylene or polyester

fabric specifically designed for weed control purposes beneath all
planted or mulched non-planted areas. Treat fabric for protection
against deterioration due to ultraviolet radiation. Fabric must be
a minimum 99 percent opaque to prevent photosynthesis and seed
germination from occurring, yet allowing air, water and nutrients to
pass through to the roots. Minimum weight must be 5 ounces per square
yard (0.11 kg per square meter) with a minimum thickness of 20 mils
(0.50 mm) with a 20 year minimum guarantee. Provide a biodegradable
product designed specifically for erosion control on all sloped areas
3 (horizontal):1 (vertical) and steeper in slope. Do not place weed
fabric over the root balls of trees.
G205005 1.4.8 Drainage
Provide for proper grading and drainage of turf and planting areas.
Provide sub-surface drainage where soil or other conditions do not

Al Dhafra, UAE
allow surface drainage. Do not drain roof gutters into planter areas.
G205007 IRRIGATION SYSTEMS
G205007 1.1 IRRIGATION
Where an irrigation system is required per other parts of this RFP, provide
a permanent, below-grade system. Provide 100 percent sprinkler head to head
coverage. Provide pop-up heads in turf and landscape zones when adjacent
to walks, roads, parking lots, or in sparsely planted landscape areas where
pedestrians may circulate. Provide pop-up heads project-wide on
high-traffic sites such as, but not limited to, dining, housing,
entertainment, daycare, education and recreation facilities. For dry
climates, provide deep root watering systems for trees. Verify adequate
water pressure for irrigation purposes and provide booster pumps and or
pressure regulation as required. Provide minimum 18 inch (450 mm) cover
over pressurized (mainline) PVC irrigation pipe and 12 inch (300 mm) cover
over non-pressurized (lateral line) PVC irrigation pipe. 1/2-inch (13mm)
pipe is not allowed. Provide pressurized (mainline) pipe in conformance
with ASTM D1785, PVC 1120, Schedule 40. Provide non-pressurized (lateral)
T
pipe in conformance with ASTM D2241, PVC 1120 SDR 21, Class 200. The
Landscape Contractor must test the entire system in the presence of the
Contracting Officer and Landscape Architect-of-Record to ensure proper
AF
performance. All irrigation components must be commercial or institutional
quality. Provide rain shut-off device and watertight splices. Provide
sprinkler heads, bodies and nozzles of the same manufacturer. All
irrigation heads on the same valve must have nozzles with matched
precipitation rates.
G205007 1.2 OPERATION AND CONTROL

R
Assure systems will automatically operate on an "irrigation window" between
2000-0530. Provide compatible and fully functional control if a central
control system exists on base. Otherwise, provide
evapotranspiration-measuring control with flow meter and master valve with
D
controller capable of indicating visible or auditory notification, such as

a blinking light or beeping sound, of system shut-off.
G205007 1.3 ZONING
Provide separate control valves for differing plant species coefficients,

landscape coefficients, and solar exposures, for areas with differing
irrigation head types or differing precipitation rates, and top and bottom
of slopes. Provide a separate irrigation backflow prevention device and
water meter. Turf, trees, and shrubs/groundcover are not allowed on the
same valve. Provide separate concrete valve box with cast iron lid and valve
ID for each valve and wire splice. Provide quick coupling valves at 100
feet (30 m) on center. Provide in-head check valves for sloped areas with
0.5 feet (150 mm) or more in elevation change.
G205007 1.4 TEMPORARY IRRIGATION
Provide ultra-violet resistant pipe and fittings for above-grade, temporary

irrigation. Only non-pressure pipe is allowed above grade. Install

Al Dhafra, UAE
irrigation systems intended to remain in place longer than one year below
grade.
G205007 1.5 NON-POTABLE IRRIGATION
Provide lavender-colored pipe, sprinkler head and quick coupler caps, valve
tags, signage, and associated filtration equipment.
G205007 1.5.1 Controller Charts
Provide one chart for each new controller or existing re-sequenced

controller. The chart must be an actual plan reduced to fit inside
maximum dimensions of the controller housing. Use black line print
for chart and a different color to indicate each station area of
coverage. After chart is completed and approved for final
acceptance, seal chart between two 20 mil (0.5 mm) pieces of clear
plastic. Affix the chart to the inside of the controller cabinet door
using approved mastic or fastening system. Provide one additional
copy of the chart in electronic format. Additionally, the Landscape
Architect of Record must provide the Base with a maintenance plan and
T
schedule as part of the turn-over items.
AF
R
D

Al Dhafra, UAE
SECTION G30
SITE CIVIL/MECHANICAL UTILITIES

05/14
G30 GENERAL

T
AF

R
AMERICAN SOCIETY OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERS (ASME)

D

Engineering UFC 3-230-01, Water
Storage, Distribution, and
Transmission UFC 3-240-01, Wastewater
Collection UFC 3-210-10, Low Impact
Development UFC 3-401-01, Mechanical
Engineering)

Buildings

Al Dhafra, UAE
UFC 3-600-01 Fire Protection Engineering

Materials and assemblies installed in the work must be inspected and found
to be in compliance with industry standards and these specifications prior
to acceptance of the work. Remove items found not to be in compliance, or
take corrective measures, to assure compliance with the referenced standard.
Perform field tests and provide labor, equipment and incidentals required
for testing.
G30 1.2.1 Materials
All materials must be new, and bear the label of the standardizing
T
agency whenever standards have been established and label service is
normally and regularly furnished by the agency. All equipment provided
must be listed and suitably labeled for the specified purpose,
environment, and application and installed in accordance with
AF
manufacturers recommendations.
G30 1.2.2 Additional Work
Provide such other labor and materials as are required for a complete
and usable system in accordance with the requirements of the criteria
listed, regardless of whether such materials and associated labor are
R
called for elsewhere in this RFP.
G30 1.2.3 Qualifications of Well Drillers for Water Supply Wells

D
If required by the state waterworks' regulations, the well driller

must be certified by the state and remain certified while constructing
the well.
G30 1.2.4 Qualifications of Coating Contractors for Water Storage Tanks
All contractors and subcontractors that perform surface preparation

or coating application must be certified by the Society for Protective
Coatings (formerly Steel Structures Painting Council) (SSPC) to the
requirements of SSPC QP 5 for the inspection firm prior to contract
award, and remain certified while accomplishing any surface
preparation or coating application. The Coating Inspector must also
be certified to Level II for exterior and Level III for interior
coatings prior to and during the project.
G30 1.2.5 Qualifications of Oil/Water Separator Manufacturers
Manufacturers must have five years of experience producing packaged

oil/water separator units of similar size.

Al Dhafra, UAE
G30 1.3 PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION AND ACCEPTANCE TESTING

Construction Submittal Procedures, for additional requirements.
Verify satisfactory utility system performance via Performance Verification

Testing, as detailed in this section of the RFP. Verify satisfactory
performance also via testing as detailed in the paragraph, "Field Quality
Control", in applicable UFGS Specification Sections utilized.
G30 1.3.1 Water Supply Well Performance Verification
Upon completion of the permanent well, conduct performance testing

for well capacity, drawdown and pump equipment. Conduct water
quality testing in accordance with AWWA A100 and its appendices and
state regulations.
G30 1.3.2 Water Distribution Systems Verification Testing
T
Provide testing on water mains and service lines in accordance with
the Host Nation waterworks regulations and the following:
AF
a. Ductile Iron and other materials: AWWA C600.
b. PVC: AWWA C605.
c. HDPE: ASTM F2164.
Do not begin testing on any section of a pipeline where concrete thrust

blocks have been provided until at least 5 days after placing of the
concrete.
R
G30 1.3.3 Water Booster Pump Station Verification Testing
Test the water booster pump station in accordance with Host Nation
D
regulations. Conduct testing on discharge and site piping in

accordance with tests for water distribution mains; see G30, paragraph
1.3.2. Test pumps, controls, and alarms, in operation, under design
conditions to ensure proper operation of all equipment.
G30 1.3.4 Sanitary Sewer Distribution System Verification Testing
Provide testing on sewer mains and laterals in accordance with Host

Nation regulations.
G30 1.3.4.1 Deflection Test
Deflection of pipe in the installed pipeline under external

loads must not exceed 4.5 percent of the average inside diameter
of pipe, in accordance with ASTM D 2412.
G30 1.3.4.2 VISUAL TEST
Verify the sewer connection to the sewer system by performing

Al Dhafra, UAE
a dye check from the project to the first manhole on the next
active sewer branch main downstream from the sewer branch main
used as the project point of connection. Testing shall continue
till the dye visually confirms the design connection is
appropriate. Dye shall be a nontoxic non-staining sewer
tracing dye. During the test the contractor shall monitor the
storm drainage system downstream from the project, either
manholes or outfalls for any sign of cross connection.
Verify the project connections to the sewer system by performing

a smoke test on the project sewer. Testing will verify that
project storm drainage inlets or drains have not been connected
to the sanitary sewer.
These tests shall be observed by the Contracting officer's

representative and the utility operator's inspector.
G30 1.3.4.3 Leakage Tests
Test lines for leakage by either infiltration tests or
T
exfiltration tests, or by low-pressure air tests. Prior to
testing for leakage, backfill trench up to at least lower half
of pipe. When necessary to prevent pipeline movement during
AF
testing, place additional backfill around pipe sufficient to
prevent movement, but leaving joints uncovered to permit
inspection. The leakage allowance is indicated in AWWA C 600
for ductile iron pipelines; AWWA C 605 for polyvinyl chloride
pipelines; and the Host Nation sewerage regulations, whichever
is more stringent. When leakage or pressure drop exceeds the
allowable amount make satisfactory correction and retest
pipeline section in the same manner. Correct visible leaks
R
regardless of leakage test results.
a. Exfiltration Tests:
D
ASTM C 969M (ASTM C 969) and perform calculations in accordance

with its Appendix.
b. Low-pressure Air Tests:
i. Pipelines: ASTM C 924M (ASTM C 924) and perform

calculations in accordance with its Appendix.
ii. PVC plastic pipelines: UBPPA UNI-B-6 and perform

calculations in accordance with its Appendix.
G30 1.3.4.4 TV Inspection for Sanitary Sewer
Post-installation TV inspection will be performed on all

segments of the installed system when the total footage of
sanitary sewer mains installed in the contract is in excess of
300 feet.
Complete the post-installation TV inspection to confirm that

Al Dhafra, UAE
the completed lines are free of defects. For video recordings

include an audio track recorded by the inspection technician
during the actual inspection work describing the parameters of
the line being inspected. The minimum information to be
included is the pipe material, pipe size, starting and stopping
manholes and descriptions of any features as they occur. Video
recording playback must be at the same speed that it was
recorded. Permanently label CDs / DVDs according to their
contents; CDs / DVDs will become the property of the Government.
Provide all TV inspections of sanitary sewer mains in accordance

with the Pipeline Assessment and Certification Program as
sponsored by the National Association of Sewer Service
Companies (NASSCO). Prior to initiating CCTV inspection,
provide copies of PACP Certification of the operators that will
be performing the work.
Complete pipe segments and manhole work, including pipe

penetrations, manhole benches, main line and manhole visual
inspection, pressure testing, deflection and leakage tests on
T
a section of line (manhole to manhole) prior to performing TV.
Complete post-installation TV inspection in the presence of the

AF
Contracting Officer or his designated representative.
The importance of accurate measurements is emphasized. The

meter device must be accurate to one tenth of a foot.
Utilize the full capabilities of the camera equipment to

document the completion and the conformance of the work to the
Contract Documents. Provide a full 360 view of the pipe,
R
joints and service connections. Move the camera through the
line in either direction at a moderate rate, stopping when
necessary to permit proper documentation of the sewer's
condition. The maximum speed must be no greater than 30 feet
D
per minute. Use manual wenches, power winches, TV cable and

powered rewinds or other devices that do not obstruct the camera
view or interfere with the proper documentation of the sewer
conditions to move the camera through the sewer line.
Once video recording has commenced, the recording must be

continuous, without interruption, until the termination
manhole is reached.
Provide a color video showing the completed work. Prepare and

submit Television Inspection Logs providing location of service
connections along with the location of any discrepancies.
Keep computer printed location records (Television Inspection

Logs) and clearly show the location and orientation in relation
to an adjacent manhole for each point observed during the TV
inspection. Record features of significance such as locations
and orientations of service connections, pipe deflections,
leaks, rolled or dislodged gaskets, sags or bellies in the line,

Al Dhafra, UAE
or wide joints.
Document noted defects and lateral connections as color digital

files and color hard copy prints. Photo logs must accompany
each photo submitted.
Prior to submission of the TV inspection video, Television

Inspection Logs, and digital photographs to the Contracting
Officer, review the submittal items to ensure that they meet
the quality criteria set forth in this specification. A copy
of such video along with the Television Inspection Logs and
Digital photographs must be supplied to the Contracting Officer
within five (5) business days of completion of the
video-inspection. In the event that the video, Television
Inspection Logs or digital photographs are deemed of poor
quality or substandard by the Contracting Officer, the videos,
and / or Television Logs, or digital photographs will be
returned and a re-inspection provided by the Contractor, at no
T
G30 1.3.5 Sanitary Sewer Manholes Verification Testing
Provide a visual inspection of all manholes for proper grade and water
AF
tightness. Provide testing on sanitary sewer manholes in accordance
with Host Nation regulations. At minimum, perform hydraulic testing
in accordance with ASTM C 969/C 969M.
G30 1.3.6 Wastewater Pump Station Verification Testing
Test the wastewater pump station in accordance with Host Nation

regulations. Conduct testing on discharge piping and force main in
R
accordance with tests for water distribution mains; see G30, paragraph
1.3.2. Test pumps, controls, and alarms, in operation, under design
conditions to ensure proper operation of all equipment.
D
G30 1.3.7 Storm Sewer System Verification Testing
G30 1.3.7.1 Deflection Test
Deflection of pipe in the installed pipeline under external

loads must not exceed 4.5 percent of the average inside diameter
of pipe, in accordance with ASTM D 2412.
G30 1.3.7.2 TV Inspection for Storm Sewer Under Pavements
Post-installation TV inspection will be performed on all

segments of the installed system when the total footage of storm
sewer lines installed in the contract is in excess of 300 feet.
Complete the post-installation TV inspection to confirm that

the completed lines are free of defects. For video recordings
include an audio track recorded by the inspection technician
during the actual inspection work describing the parameters of
the line being inspected. The minimum information to be

Al Dhafra, UAE
included is the pipe material, pipe size, starting and stopping

manholes and descriptions of any features as they occur. Video
recording playback must be at the same speed that it was
recorded. Permanently label CDs / DVDs according to their
contents; CDs / DVDs will become the property of the Government.
Provide all TV inspections of storm sewer lines in accordance

with the Pipeline Assessment and Certification Program as
sponsored by the National Association of Sewer Service
Companies (NASSCO). Prior to initiating CCTV inspection,
provide copies of PACP Certification of the operators that will
be performing the work.
Complete pipe segments and manhole work, including pipe

penetrations, manhole benches, main line and manhole visual
inspection, pressure testing, and deflection test on a section
of line (manhole to manhole) prior to performing TV.
Complete post-installation TV inspection in the presence of the

Contracting Officer or his designated representative.
T
The importance of accurate measurements is emphasized. The
meter device must be accurate to one tenth of a foot.
AF
Utilize the full capabilities of the camera equipment to
document the completion and the conformance of the work to the
Contract Documents. Provide a full 360 view of the pipe,
joints and service connections. Move the camera through the
line in either direction at a moderate rate, stopping when
necessary to permit proper documentation of the sewer's
condition. The maximum speed must be no greater than 30 feet
R
per minute. Use manual wenches, power winches, TV cable and
powered rewinds or other devices that do not obstruct the camera
view or interfere with the proper documentation of the sewer
conditions to move the camera through the sewer line.
D
Once video recording has commenced, the recording must be

continuous, without interruption, until the termination
manhole is reached.
Provide a color video showing the completed work. Prepare and

submit Television Inspection Logs providing location of service
connections along with the location of any discrepancies.
Keep computer printed location records (Television Inspection

Logs) and clearly show the location and orientation in relation
to an adjacent manhole for each point observed during the TV
inspection. Record features of significance such as locations
and orientations of service connections, pipe deflections,
leaks, rolled or dislodged gaskets, sags or bellies in the line,
or wide joints.
Document noted defects and lateral connections as color digital

files and color hard copy prints. Photo logs must accompany

Al Dhafra, UAE
each photo submitted.
Prior to submission of the TV inspection video, Television

Inspection Logs, and digital photographs to the Contracting
Officer, review the submittal items to insure that they meet
the quality criteria set forth in this specification. A copy
of such video along with the Television Inspection Logs and
Digital photographs must be supplied to the Contracting Officer
within five (5) business days of completion of the video
-inspection. In the event that the video, Television
Inspection Logs or digital photographs are deemed of poor
quality or substandard by the Contracting Officer, the videos,
and / or Television Logs, or digital photographs will be
returned and a re-inspection provided by the Contractor, at no
Design Submittals must be in accordance with UFGS section 01 33 10.05 20,

T
Civil Engineering, and UFC 3-401-01, Mechanical Engineering.

AF

R
All test reports.

D
G30 1.6 COORDINATION
To the extent that site work is indicated on the RFP drawings, verify that
the locations and inverts of all site utility lines are coordinated with
building utility lines. If necessary, make adjustments to the locations
and inverts indicated on the RFP drawings in accordance with applicable codes
and standards.
G30 1.7 ANTITERRORISM (AT) STANDARDS
Incorporate the minimum AT standards indicated in UFC 4-010-01, DoD Minimum

Antiterrorism Standards for Buildings.
G30 1.8 BACKFLOW PREVENTION
Submit backflow prevention training certificates and backflow preventer

devices certification in accordance with Section 01 50 00, Temporary

Al Dhafra, UAE
Construction Facilities and Controls.
G30 1.9 WATER STORAGE TANK
Submit a certificate signed by a registered professional engineer providing

a (1) description of the entire tank and foundation structural design loading
conditions; (2) description of structural design methods and codes used in
establishing allowable stresses and safety factors; (3) statement that the
structural design has been checked by experienced engineers specializing
in hydraulic structures to ensure that design calculations for member sizes,
dimensions and fabrication processes are as prescribed by ACI and AWWA
standards; and (4) certification that the completed work was inspected in
accordance with AWWA D100 or AWWA D103 as applicable.
G30 1.10 NACE CERTIFIED CATHODIC PROTECTION SPECIALIST QUALIFICATIONS
Submit qualifications of specialist prior to site welding. Submit

documentation of NACE certification. Certifications must not be more than
one year old.
T
G30 1.11 EXCAVATION, BACKFILLING AND COMPACTION OF UTILITIES
Refer to Section G10, Site Preparation.

AF
G30 1.12 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING OF MATERIALS
Inspect materials delivered to site for damage. Unload and store with
minimum handling. Store materials on site in enclosures or under protective
covering. Store plastic piping, jointing materials and rubber gaskets
under cover out of direct sunlight. Do not store materials directly on the
ground. Keep inside of pipes, fittings, valves, and hydrants free of dirt
R
and debris. Handle in a manner to ensure delivery to the trench in sound
undamaged condition. Take special care to avoid injury to coatings and
linings on pipe and fittings; make satisfactory repairs if coatings or
linings are damaged. Carry, do not drag pipe to the trench.
D
G3010 WATER SUPPLY
G3010 1.1 WATER SYSTEM DESIGN
Determine domestic and fire demands for the facility and shall verify the
design of all components of the domestic and fire protection supply systems.
The water system design and construction must be in accordance with UFC
3-230-01, Water Supply: Storage, Distribution, and Transmission; the Host
Nation waterworks' regulations, and the utility provider's requirements.
Design the water supply systems to provide required flows and maintain
residual pressures based upon peak demands.
If the new water system is an extension of an existing water system, obtain

all necessary static pressure, residual pressure and flow characteristics
of the existing distribution system by actual field tests. Conduct flow and
pressure tests and provide design calculations that show the existing lines
are capable of handling the additional flows. Connect the new water system
to the nearest existing fitting or water line capable of handling the

Al Dhafra, UAE
additional flows.
Design the connections to the water system including the necessary meter
assemblies and backflow-preventing devices in accordance with the
requirements of the Activity or utility provider and the Host Nation
waterworks regulations.
Wherever possible, locate valve boxes and all other utility access
structures out of paved areas.
G301001 WELL SYSTEMS
The potable water well system must be designed and constructed in accordance with
AWWA A100 and its appendices; the state waterworks' regulations, and the system
owner's preferences and requirements.
G301001 1.1 WATER METER
Provide a water meter on the well pump discharge piping aboveground in a

pump enclosure or in a meter vault underground. Provide type of water meter
T
and remote reading capability in accordance with system owner's preferences
and requirements: AWWA C700, displacement type; AWWA C701, turbine type;
or AWWA C702, compound type.
AF
G301001 1.2 TEST HOLE
Drill test hole(s) at the well site before construction of the permanent
well to determine the existing site-specific geologic/hydrologic conditions
and groundwater-quality parameters. A test hole may be incorporated into
the finished construction provided it meets the requirements for a finished
well. Seal test holes not used in finished construction as recommended in
R
accordance with AWWA C654 and the state waterworks' regulations. Upon
completion of test hole, provide recommendations for permanent wells and
submit data obtained at each well site. Include with the recommendations
the appropriate depth, details of construction, length and location of
D
screens, screen openings, gravel size, grout, and an estimation of the

quantity of water that can be obtained from each water-bearing stratum and
from each completed well. Submit electric log, a drillers log drawn to scale
with coarseness and fineness modulus of each strata, time penetration log
(time to drill through each formation), and sieve analysis to substantiate
recommendations.
G301001 1.3 WELL CONSTRUCTION
G301001 1.3.1 Well Development
Provide well development in accordance with AWWA A100 and the state
waterworks' regulations.
G301001 1.3.2 Disinfection
Disinfect well, equipment, and material in accordance with AWWA C654

and the state waterworks' regulations. Provide a sanitary seal for
the well to prevent contamination until the pump foundation and pump

Al Dhafra, UAE
are installed on the well.
G301001 1.4 ABANDONMENT OF EXISTING WELLS
Abandon and seal existing wells in accordance with AWWA A100 and the state
G301002 POTABLE WATER DISTRIBUTION
G301002 1.1 WATER SYSTEM DESIGN
Provide all materials, equipment, labor, testing, and miscellaneous related

items for water distribution mains and service lines to the facility and
connections to the existing water system in accordance with UFC 3-230-01,
Water Supply: Storage, Distribution, and Transmission; the utility
provider's requirements; and the Host Nation waterworks' regulations;
Determine available flow at the residual pressure at each point of connection

by conducting flow tests in accordance with AWWA M17 and NFPA 291.
T
Water main piping, service lines, fittings, valves, accessories and all
other materials must meet the American Water Works Association (AWWA)
AF
standards for a minimum system working pressure of 150 psi (1050 kPa).
Utility structures, manholes, vaults, and similar underground structures

within aircraft pavements, or within 153 meters of runway pavements,
or within 15 meters of any full strength aircraft pavements shall be
designed in accordance with FAA Advisory Circular AC 150/5320-6E,
Airport Pavement Design and Evaluation, Appendix 3, Design of
Strucuters for Heavy Aircraft maximum wheel load 34,019 kg at paved
R
surfaces and 22,680 kg at unpaved surfaces.
G301002 1.2 WATER DISTRIBUTION MAINS

D
For underground applications, water mains 12 inches (300 mm) in diameter

and less must be ductile iron, PVC, uPVC, or high density polyethylene
(HDPE). Water mains deeper than 10 feet (3.0 m) or larger than 12 inches
(300 mm) in diameter must be ductile iron. All water mains under pavement
shall be concrete encased.
For aboveground applications, water mains shall be flanged ductile iron

pipe.
G301002 1.2.1 Materials
a. Ductile Iron Pressure Pipe
1) Pipe: AWWA C151, Pressure Class 350.
2) Fittings: AWWA C110 or AWWA C153.
3) Interior Lining: AWWA C104.

Al Dhafra, UAE
4) Exterior Protection (if required): AWWA C105,

polyethylene encasement.
b. PVC Pressure Pipe
2) Fittings: Ductile Iron (AWWA C110 or AWWA C153).

c. HDPE Pressure Pipe: AWWA C906.
d. Flanged Ductile Iron Pipe
1) Pipe: AWWA C115 and its appendices.
3) Lining: AWWA C104.
G301002 1.2.2 Installation
a. Ductile Iron: AWWA C600.
T
b. PVC: AWWA C605.
Provide nondetectable warning tape and a continuous length of tracer

AF
wire for the full length of each run of nonmetallic piping below grade.
Terminate tracer wire above grade at valve boxes and at exterior of
building.
G301002 1.2.3 Connections to Existing Water Lines
Make connections to existing water lines after approval from the

system owner is obtained and with a minimum interruption of service
R
on the existing line. Make connections to existing lines under
pressure in accordance with the recommended procedures of the
manufacturer of the pipe being tapped.
D
G301002 1.3 WATER SERVICE LINES
Water service lines less than 4 inches (100 mm) in diameter must be copper
tubing, PVC, uPVC, or HDPE. Water service lines 4 inches (100 mm) and 6
inches (150 mm) in diameter must be ductile iron pipe and PVC pressure pipe;
see G301002, paragraph 1.2, "Water Distribution Mains" for additional
requirements for ductile iron and PVC piping.
a. Copper Tubing
1) Pipe: ASTM B 88/B 88M, Type K.
2) Fittings for Solder-Type Joint: ANSI B16.8 or ASME B16.22.
3) Fittings for Compression-Type Joint: ASME B16.26, flared

tube type.

Al Dhafra, UAE
1) Pipe: ASTM D1785, Schedule 40 or ASTM D 2241, with SDR

rating for 160 psi (1.1 MPa) pressure rating.
2) Fittings: ASTM D 2466.
3) Joints: Elastomeric gaskets for pressure rating; solvent

cement joints, ASTM D 2564.
G301002 1.3.2 Service Connections
Connect service lines 2-inch (50 mm) diameter or less to the main by
a corporation stop and install a gate valve on service line below the
frostline.
a. Ductile-iron water mains: AWWA C600.

b. PVC water mains: UBPPA UNI-B-8 and the recommendations of AWWA
M23, Chapter 9, "Service Connections."
T
Install pipe, fittings and accessories in accordance with
AF
a. Metallic Piping: applicable requirements of AWWA C600.
b. PVC: ASTM D 2774 and ASTM D 2855.
G301002 1.4 CORROSION PROTECTION
G301002 1.4.1 Insulating Joints

R
Provide insulating joints to prevent contact between dissimilar
metals at the joint between adjacent sections of piping in accordance
with the pipe manufacturer's recommendations. Ensure that there is
no metal-to-metal contact between dissimilar metals after the joint
D
has been assembled.
To prevent the possibility of bi-metallic corrosion, service lines

of dissimilar metal to the water mains and the attendant corporation
stops must be wrapped with polyethylene or suitable dielectric tape
for a minimum clear distance of 3 feet (900 mm) from the main.
G301002 1.5 VALVES
Install valves with the same diameter and have the same joint ends as the
mains to which they are installed. Each type of valve must be of one
manufacturer.
G301002 1.5.1 Gate Valves
G301002 1.5.1.1 Location
Install valves at all new points of connection. At a minimum,

locate valves to ensure that no more than two fire hydrants will

Al Dhafra, UAE
be out of service in the event of a single break in a water main.

Locate valves outside of pavement and heavy traffic areas
whenever possible.
G301002 1.5.1.2 Gate Valves 3-inch (75 mm) and Larger in Diameter
a. Valves (20-inch and smaller in diameter): AWWA C509 or

AWWA C515, nonrising stem and of one manufacturer.
b. Valves (greater than 20-inch in diameter): AWWA C500.
c. Valves for Indicator Post: AWWA C509 or AWWA C500, as
indicated above, with indicator post flange in accordance
with applicable requirements of UL 262.
d. Interior Coating: AWWA C550.
G301002 1.5.1.3 Gate Valves Smaller than 3-inch (75 mm) in Diameter
MSS SP-80, Class 150, solid wedge. Provide valves with flanged
or threaded end connections, with unions on both sides of the
valve and a handwheel operator.
T
G301002 1.5.1.4 Valve Box
Provide a concrete vault for all valves.

AF
G301002 1.5.2 Check Valves
Provide check valves sized 2-inches (50 mm) to 24-inches (600 mm) as
swing-check type (AWWA C508) and with a protective epoxy interior
coating conforming to AWWA C550. For underground applications,
provide check valve in a valve vault.
R
G301002 1.5.3 Air Release, Air/Vacuum, and Combination Air Valves
AWWA C512 and AWWA M51.

D
G301002 1.5.4 Corporation Stops
If service lines 2---inch

- diameter or less are tapping water mains,
provide corporation stops. The corporation stops must be ground key
type, bronze, ASTM B61 or ASTM B62.
G301002 1.5.5 Installation of Valves
Make and assemble joints to valves as specified for making and

assembling the same type of joints between pipe and fittings.
G301002 1.6 WATER METERS
Provide water meter and remote reading as required by the utility provider
and in accordance with AWWA standards.
G301002 1.7 BACKFLOW PREVENTION
Provide backflow prevention and cross connection control in accordance with

Al Dhafra, UAE
AWWA M-14 and governing local/state plumbing codes and waterworks'

regulations.
G301002 1.8 FIRE HYDRANTS
Coordinate fire hydrant type and location with the base fire department.
Fire hydrants must be of one manufacturer and in accordance with UFC
3-600-01, Fire Protection Engineering. Coordinate with the project's fire
protection designer of record. Provide protection for fire hydrants
located in areas subject to vehicle damage. Fire hydrants must have
National Standard threads on hose and pumper connections. Provide a 6 inch
(150 mm) inlet, two 2.5 inch (62 mm) hose connections and one pumper
connection sized to accommodate local fire department equipment
requirements. Stencil hydrant number and main size on the hydrant barrel
using black stencil paint.
a. Dry Barrel Fire Hydrants: AWWA C502 with frangible sections.

b. Wet Barrel Fire Hydrants: AWWA C503 or UL 246, "Wet Barrel" design,
with breakable features.
c. Installation: Install hydrants with the pumper connection facing the
T
adjacent paved surface. If there are two, paved adjacent surfaces,
contact the Contracting Officer for further direction.
AF
G301002 1.9 THRUST RESTRAINT
Provide thrust restraint for all piping, valves, fittings, and other
appurtenances of the water distribution system.
Provide thrust restraint using restrained joints in accordance with pipe

manufacturer's recommendations, AWWA C600 and if for fire service main, NFPA
24.
R
G301002 1.10 DISINFECTION
Disinfect new water piping and existing water piping affected by

D
Contractor's operations in accordance with the Host Nation waterworks'

regulations and AWWA C651.
G301003 POTABLE WATER STORAGE
G301003 1.1 POTABLE WATER STORAGE TANKS
Provide potable water storage facilities in accordance with UFC 3-230-01,

Water Supply: Storage, Distribution, and Transmission; and the state
An elevated, steel water storage tank must be in accordance with AWWA D100.
A ground, steel water storage tank must be in accordance with AWWA D100 for
welded tanks and AWWA D103 for bolted tanks.
G301003 1.2 TANK ACCESSORIES
Provide piping and valves in accordance with G301002. Install an altitude

valve in a valve vault with appropriate shut off valves and check valve.

Al Dhafra, UAE
G301003 1.3 TANK COATINGS
All primer, intermediate coat and topcoat materials must be manufactured

by one manufacturer. Secondary materials, which are produced or are
specifically recommended by the coating system manufacturer, may be used.
Contrasting colors between coats are required.
G301003 1.3.1 Interior Coating System
Provide a commercially available interior coating system that is

certified in accordance with AWWA D102, ICS-No. 2 or ICS-No. 5, and
with NSF 61 and is in accordance with the state waterworks'
regulations.
The color of the final coat must be approved in writing by the

Contracting Officer before application begins.
Apply coatings at the following specified thickness:
Coat Minimum DFT (mils) Maximum DFT (mils)
T
Primer 3 5
Intermediat 3
AF 5
e
Top 3 5
Total 9 15
Systems
R
G301003 1.3.2 Exterior Coating System

D
Provide a commercially available, zinc/epoxy/polyurethane exterior

coating system that is certified in accordance with AWWA D102, OCS-No.
6 and is in accordance with the state waterworks' regulations.
The color of the final coat must be approved in writing by the

Contracting Officer before application begins.
Apply coatings at the following specified thickness:
Coat Minimum DFT (mils) Maximum DFT (mils)
Primer 3 5
Intermediat 3 5
e
Top 2 3

Al Dhafra, UAE
Total 8 13
Systems
G301004 FIRE PROTECTION WATER DISTRIBUTION
G301004 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Refer to applicable portions of Section G301002 and Section D40, Fire

Protection Systems. Water main piping, service lines, fittings, valves,
accessories and all other materials must meet the American Water Works
Association (AWWA) standards for a minimum system working pressure of 200
psi (1380 kPa).
G301004 1.2 DETECTOR CHECKS
UL 312; detector check includes bypass meter, piping, gate valves, check
valve and connections to detector check valve. Set valve to allow minimal
water flow through bypass meter when major water flow is required.
T
G301004 1.3 FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTIONS
UL 405.
AF
G301004 1.4 INDICATOR POSTS
UL 789.
G301005 FIRE PROTECTION WATER STORAGE

R
Fire Protection Water Storage shall be in accordance with UFC 3-600-01 and NFPA
22.
G301006 NON-POTABLE WATER DISTRIBUTION

D
Refer to G301002; note that system disinfection is not required.
G301007 PUMPING STATIONS
If a pump station is allowed, provide a packaged booster pump station including

pumps, piping, valves, sensors, controls, and accessories to maintain the water
system pressure in accordance with UFC 3-230-01, Water Supply: Storage,
Distribution, and Transmission; and the state waterworks' regulations.
The packaged booster pump station must have an Underwriters Laboratories (UL)
label indicating compliance of the equipment under the packaged pumping systems
UL listing category. This label must be inclusive of the entire station with
enclosure so as to demonstrate compliance with the National Electrical Code
requirements for working clearances and wiring procedures.
All interior coatings of pumps, piping, valves and other accessories must be a
National Standard Foundation (NSF) Standard 61 certified material for potable
water.

Al Dhafra, UAE
G301008 PACKAGED WATER TREATMENT PLANTS
Provide packaged water treatment plants in accordance with UFC 3-230-03, Water
Treatment; for pipeline materials and the state waterworks' regulations for
treatment plant requirements.
G3020 SANITARY SEWER
The gravity sanitary sewage collection system must be designed and

constructed in accordance with UFC 3-240-01, Wastewater Collection; and the
Host Nation sewer collection and treatment regulations. Connect the new
sanitary sewage collection system to the nearest existing sanitary manholes
adjacent to the project site. Provide design calculations that show the
existing system is capable of handling the additional flows.
In areas where chemicals and other substances may be stored (including

mechanical and electrical rooms), eliminate floor drains or make provisions
to prevent spills from entering the sanitary sewer system. If there is
T
process flow from equipment, discharge can be hard piped, with air gap, to
the sanitary sewer.
AF
Wherever possible, locate manholes and all other utility access structures
out of paved areas.
G302001 SANITARY SEWER PIPING

R
items to provide sanitary sewage lines necessary for collection and services
from the buildings.
G302001 1.2 GRAVITY SEWER PIPING

D
Gravity sanitary sewer mains and laterals must be Ductile Iron, PVC, uPVC
or Polypropylene sewer pipe and fittings. Use Ductile Iron under roadways
or at depths greater than 10 feet (3.0 m). PVC and Polypropylene may only
be used under roadways or at depths greater than 10 feet (3.0 m) when written
approval is received by the Government's Civil Reviewer or indicated in
another part of the RFP. All gravity sewer lines under pavement shall be
concrete encased.
a. PVC Gravity Sewer Pipe
1) Piping and Fittings: ASTM D3034 or ASTM F679, SDR 35.
2) Joints: ASTM D3212 and ASTM F477.

b. Ductile Iron Gravity Sewer Pipe
1) Piping: ASTM A746. Provide required Thickness Class based

Al Dhafra, UAE
on design information and methods in ASTM A746.
3) Joints: AWWA C111.
4) Interior Coating: AWWA C104.

c. Dual Wall and Triple Wall Polypropylene Sewer Pipe 12" to 60"
1) Piping and Fittings: ASTM F2736 and ASTMF2764/F2764M.
G302001 1.2.2 Connections to Existing Lines
Obtain approval from the Contracting Officer before making a

connection to an existing line. Conduct work so that there is minimum
T
interruption of service on existing line and provide a new manhole
at the connection point.
AF
Install pipe, fittings and accessories in accordance with

a. PVC and Dual and Triple Wall Polypropylene: ASTM D2321. Do

not use ASTM D2321 Class IV or V materials for bedding, haunching
or initial backfill materials.
R
b. Ductile Iron: AWWA C600.

wire for the full length of each run of nonmetallic piping below grade.
D

building.
G302001 1.3 PIPING FOR CLEANOUTS
a. Cast-Iron Soil Pipe for Cleanouts
1) Pipe: ASTM A 74, service.
2) Joints: ASTM C 564 compression-type rubber gaskets.

Install cast iron pipe and fittings in accordance with the

Al Dhafra, UAE
recommendations of the pipe manufacturer.
G302002 SANITARY SEWER MANHOLES & CLEANOUTS

items for the sanitary manholes in accordance with the following:
a. Set manhole rim elevations flush with finished surface of paved areas
or 100 mm above finished grade in unpaved areas.
b. Resilient connectors for making joints between manhole and pipes
entering manhole must conform to ASTM C 923/C 923M.
c. Provide drop manholes when a gravity sewer pipe enters a manhole at
an elevation of 24 inches (610 mm) or more above the manhole invert.
Utility structures, manholes, vaults, and similar underground

structures within aircraft pavements, or within 153 meters of runway
pavements, or within 15 meters of any full strength aircraft pavements
shall be designed in accordance with FAA Advisory Circular AC
T
150/5320-6E, Airport Pavement Design and Evaluation, Appendix 3,
Design of Strucuters for Heavy Aircraft maximum wheel load 34,019 kg
at paved surfaces and 22,680 kg at unpaved surfaces.
AF
G302002 1.2 PRECAST CONCRETE MANHOLES
ASTM C 478/C 478M; base and first riser must be monolithic.
Precast manhole sections must have:
a. ASTM C 990/C 990M butyl gaskets;

R
b. ASTM C 443/C 443M rubber O-ring joints; or
c. AASHTO M 198, Type B preformed plastic gaskets.
G302002 1.3 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE MANHOLES

D
Reinforced concrete; designed according to ASTM C 890 for A-16 (AASHTO

HS20-44), heavy-traffic, structural loading. Provide concrete work in
accordance with ACI 301/301M and ACI 350-01; provide a minimum compressive
strength of 4000 psi (28 MPa).
G302002 1.4 MANHOLE FRAMES AND COVERS
FS A-A-60005; cast iron or ductile iron; designed to accommodate the traffic

loadings. Stamp or cast the word "Sewer" into covers so that it is plainly
visible.
G302002 1.5 MANHOLE STEPS
a. Zinc-coated steel: 29 CFR 1910.27.

b. Plastic or rubber coating pressure molded to steel: ASTM D 4101,
copolymer polypropylene; or ASTM C 443/C 443M, except shore A
durometer hardness must be 70 plus or minus 5.

Al Dhafra, UAE
Aluminum steps or rungs will not be permitted.
Steps are not required in manholes less than 4 feet (1.2 m) deep.
G302002 1.6 MANHOLE CONSTRUCTION
Where a new manhole is constructed on an existing line, remove existing pipe

as necessary to construct the manhole. Cut existing pipe so that pipe ends
are approximately flush with the interior face of manhole wall, but not
protruding into the manhole. For changes in direction of the sewer and
entering branches into the manhole, make a circular curve in the manhole
invert of as large a radius as manhole size will permit. For cast-in-place
concrete, no parging will be permitted on interior manhole walls.
G302002 1.7 CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING MANHOLES
Center pipe connections to existing manholes on the manhole. Holes for the
new pipe must be of sufficient diameter to allow packing cement mortar around
the entire periphery of the pipe but no larger than 1.5 times the diameter
of the pipe. Cut the manhole in a manner that will cause the least damage
T
to the walls.
G302002 1.8 CLEANOUTS

AF
Construct cleanouts of cast iron soil pipe and fittings; see G302001,
paragraph 1.3.
G302003 LIFT STATIONS AND PUMPING STATIONS

R
If a pump station is allowed, provide all materials, equipment, labor,
testing and miscellaneous related items for a packaged lift or pump station
system for the facility in compliance with the UFC 3-240-01, Wastewater
Collection; the Host Nation sewerage regulations; and the utility provider's
D
requirements. Lift Stations shall not be provided within any paved area.
G302003 1.2 SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS
Provide pumps cabable of handling raw wastewater and passing spheres of at

least 3 inches (75 mm) in diameter. The pump's suction and discharge
openings must be at least 4 inches (100 mm) in diameter.
Provide submersible type sewage pumps, with guide rail system. Include ASTM
A48/A48M, Class 25, nonclog, cast-iron impeller; and hermetically sealed
motor with moisture-sensing probe, mechanical seals, and waterproof power
cable. Construct the guide rail system of stainless steel. Provide a
stainless steel lifting chain for raising and lowering the pump in the basin.
G302003 1.3 GRINDER PUMPS
Provide grinder-type sewage pumps, with guide rail system. Include

stainless steel impeller and hermetically sealed motor with
moisture-sensing probe, mechanical seals, and waterproof power cable.

Al Dhafra, UAE
Construct the guide rail system of stainless steel. Provide a stainless

steel lifting chain for raising and lowering the pump in the basin.
G302003 1.4 SUCTION LIFT PUMPS
Provide pumps capable of handling raw wastewater and passing spheres of at

least 3 inches (75 mm) in diameter. The pump's suction and discharge
openings must be at least 4 inches (100 mm) in diameter.
Provide dry-chamber-mounting, vacuum-primed, nonclog sewage pumps located

in dry compartment above wet pit. Include ASTM A48/A48M, Class 25, nonclog,
cast iron impeller; mechanical or stuffing box seals; pedestal mounted
motor; and suction piping extending to bottom of wet pit.
Provide suction-lift pumps capable of automatic rapid self priming and

re-priming at the "lead pump on" elevation. Suction piping must not exceed
25 feet (7.6 meters) in total length. Priming lift at the "lead pump on"
elevation must include a safety factor of at least 4 feet (1.2 meters) from
the maximum allowable priming lift for the specific equipment at design
operating conditions. The combined total of dynamic suction-lift at the
T
"pump off" elevation and the required net positive suction head at design
operating conditions must not exceed 22 feet (6.7 meters).
G302003 1.5 PUMP MOTOR

AF
Provide pump motor sized to accommodate pump operation along the entire
impeller curve.
G302003 1.6 STATION PIPING WITHIN WET WELL AND VALVE VAULT
G302003 1.6.1 Piping Less than 4-Inch (100 mm) in Diameter

R
a. PVC Pressure Pipe
1) Pipe: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 80.

D
2) Fittings: Schedule 80 socket fittings, ASTM D 2467;

Schedule 80 threaded fittings, ASTM D 2464.
G302003 1.6.2 Piping 4 inch (100 mm) Diameter and Larger
a. Flanged Ductile Iron Pipe
1) Pipe: AWWA C115 and its appendices.
3) Lining: AWWA C104.
G302003 1.7 FORCE MAINS
G302003 1.7.1 Force Mains for Submersible and Suction Lift Pumps
Force mains must be at least 4 inches (100 mm) in diameter and must

Al Dhafra, UAE
be either ductile iron or PVC pressure pipe.
a. Ductile Iron Pressure Pipe
3) Interior Lining: AWWA C104.

1) Pipe: AWWA C900, Pressure Class 150. AWWA C905.
2) Fittings: Ductile Iron (AWWA C110 or AWWA C153).
G302003 1.7.2 Force Mains for Grinder Pumps
T
Force mains less than 4 inches (100 mm) in diameter must be PVC pressure
pipe:
a.
AF
PVC Pressure Pipe
1) Pipe: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40 or ASTM D 2241, with SDR

rating for 160 psi (1.1 MPa) pressure rating.
2) Fittings: ASTM D 2466.
3) Joints: Elastomeric gaskets for pressure rating; solvent

R
cement joints, ASTM D 2564.
G302003 1.8 PIPING ACCESSORIES

D
G302003 1.8.1 Insulating Joints
Provide between pipes of dissimilar metals a rubber gasket or other

approved type of insulating joint or dielectric coupling to
effectively prevent metal-to-metal contact between adjacent sections
of piping.
G302003 1.8.2 Accessories
Provide flanges, connecting pieces, transition glands, transition

sleeves, and other adapters as required.
G302003 1.8.3 Flexible Flanged Coupling
Provide flexible flanged coupling applicable for sewage as indicated.

Use flexible flanged coupling designed for a working pressure of 350
psi (2400 kPa).
G302003 1.9 VALVES

Al Dhafra, UAE
Provide suitable shutoff and check valves on the discharge line of each pump.
Locate the check valve between the shutoff valve and the pump. Locate valves
in accordance with Host Nation sewerage regulations. Check valves must be
suitable for the material being handled and placed on the horizontal portion
of the discharge piping except for ball check valves, which may be placed
in the vertical run. Provide valves capable of withstanding normal pressure
and water hammer. Use valves from one manufacturer.
G302003 1.9.1 Shut Off Valves
G302003 1.9.1.1 Shut Off Valves Less than 4 Inch (100 mm) in
Diameter
PVC ball valves.
G302003 1.9.1.2 Shut Off Valves 4 Inch (100 mm) and Larger in
Diameter
AWWA C509 or AWWA C515, nonrising stem, and flanged. Provide
T
valves with handwheels that open by counterclockwise rotation
of the valve stem. Provide epoxy coating in accordance with
AWWA C550.
AF
G302003 1.9.2 Check Valves
G302003 1.9.2.1 Check Valves Less than 4-Inch (100 mm) in Diameter
Neoprene ball check valve with integral hydraulic sealing

flange, designed for a hydraulic working pressure of 175 psi
(1200 kPa).
R
G302003 1.9.2.2 Check Valves 4-Inch (100 mm) and Larger in Diameter
AWWA C508, flanged. Provide a nonclog, swing check valve rated

D
for not less than 175 psig (1200 kPa) working pressure capable
of passing 3-inch (75 mm) diameter solids.
G302003 1.9.3 Air Relief Valves
Provide air relief valves at high points in the force main to prevent
air locking in accordance with AWWA M51. Provide vacuum relief
valves, where required, to relieve negative pressures on force mains.
G302003 1.10 IDENTIFICATION TAGS AND PLATES
Provide valves with tags or plates numbered and stamped for their usage.
Use plates and tags of brass or nonferrous material and mounted or attached
to the valve.
G302003 1.11 THRUST RESTRAINT
Provide thrust restraint for force mains, valves and other features of the
wastewater distribution system.

Al Dhafra, UAE
Provide thrust restraint using restrained joints in accordance with pipe

manufacturer's recommendations, AWWA C600 and if for fire service main, NFPA
24.
G302003 1.12 STATION CONTROL SYSTEM
G302003 1.12.1 Operating Controls
G302003 1.12.2 Alarm Controls
Provide alarms for all pumping and lift stations; at minimum provide
alarms for high level, power failure, pump failure, unauthorized entry
or any cause of station malfunction. Provide alarms as required by
the pump manufacturer to obtain warranty.
G302003 1.12.3 Telemetry
If required, provide a telemetry system in accordance with Host nation

sewer collection and treatment regulations and system owner's
requirements to relay alarms to a facility that is manned 24 hours
T
a day.
G302003 1.13 UNDERGROUND ENCLOSURES

AF
G302003 1.14 STATION ACCESSORIES
G302003 1.14.1 Ventilation
Provide covered wet wells with provisions for air displacement venting
to the outside. Provide galvanized ASTM A 53/A 53M pipe with insect
screening.
R
Provide adequate ventilation for all pump stations.
G302003 1.14.2 Metering

D
Provide devices for measuring wastewater flow at all pumping stations.

Provide indicating, totalizing and recording flow measurement at
pumping stations with a 1200 gpm (76 l/s) or greater design peak hourly
flow. For smaller stations, provide elapsed time meters in
conjunction with pumping rate tests.
G302003 1.14.3 Pipe and Valve Supports
Use schedule 40 galvanized steel piping conforming to ASTM A 53/A 53M

for pipe and valve supports. Provide either ANSI B16.3 or ANSI B16.11
galvanized threaded fittings.
G302003 1.14.4 Miscellaneous Metals
Use stainless steel bolts, nuts, washers, anchors, and supports for
installation of equipment.
G302004 PACKAGED SANITARY SEWER TREATMENT PLANTS

Al Dhafra, UAE
Provide packaged wastewater treatment facilities in accordance with UFC 3-240-02,

Domestic Wastewater Treatment; for pipeline materials and the Host Nation sewer
collection and treatment regulations for treatment plant requirements.
G302005 SEPTIC TANKS
Provide septic tanks in accordance with the Host Nation treatment regulations and
the International Private Sewage Disposal Code 2000.
G302006 DRAIN FIELDS
Provide drain fields in accordance with the Host Nation treatment regulations and
the International Private Sewage Disposal Code 2000.
G302090 OTHER SANITARY SEWER
G302090 1.1 OIL/WATER SEPARATOR
Refer to G303090.
T
G3030 STORM SEWER
Provide all materials, equipment, labor, testing, and miscellaneous related items
AF
to provide storm drainage collection system necessary to drain the site. The storm
sewer collection system must be designed and constructed in accordance with UFC
3-201-01, Civil Engineering; the utility provider's requirements; and the Host
Nation stormwater management laws and regulations. Design project site to prevent
stormwater runoff in excess of the capacity of the existing utility system.
G303001 STORM SEWER PIPING

R
G303001 1.1 PIPING
Storm sewer piping 12 inches (300 mm) and larger in diameter shall be
D
reinforced concrete or corrugated steel; PVC, corrugated aluminum,

polyethylene and polypropylene pipe may only be used when written approval
is received by the Contracting Offer or indicated in another part of the
RFP.
Subsurface drainage piping shall be perforated PVC or HDPE.
a. PVC Pipe
1) Piping and Fittings: ASTM D3034, SDR 35.

b. Ductile Iron Pipe
1) Piping: ASTM A746. Provide required Thickness Class based

on design information and methods in ASTM A746.

Al Dhafra, UAE
3) Joints: AWWA C111.
4) Interior Coating: AWWA C104.

c. Reinforced Concrete Pipe
1) Circular Pipe: ASTM C76/C76M. Provide required Class

based on design information and methods in ASTM C76/C76M.
Class III minimum.
2) Elliptical Pipe: ASTM C507/C507M. Provide required

Class based on design information and methods in ASTM C76/C76M.
3) Joints:
a) ASTM C990/C990M butyl gaskets;
T
b) ASTM C 443/C 443M rubber O-ring joints; or
c) AASHTO M 198, Type B preformed plastic gaskets.

AF
d. Corrugated Aluminum Pipe
1) Piping: ASTM B745/B745M.
2) Joints: Coupling bands conforming to ASTM B745/B745M.

R
3) Coating: Fully bituminous coated for all applications in
accordance with ASTM A849. For applications where piping is part
of a piped storm sewer system (not a culvert), provide pipe fully
bituminous coated, invert (half) paved with concrete lining in
D

e. Corrugated Steel Pipe
1) Piping: ASTM A760/A760M.
2) Joints: Coupling bands conforming to ASTM A760/A760M.
3) Coating: Fully bituminous coated for all applications in

accordance with ASTM A849. For applications where piping is part
of a piped storm sewer system (not a culvert), provide pipe fully
bituminous coated, invert (half) paved with concrete lining in
f. Polyetheylene (PE) Pipe
1) Piping 12" to 60" and Fittings: ASTM 2648/F2648M and AASHTO

M 294 Type S, corrugated.
2) Joints: ASTM F477 and ASTM D3212

g. Dual and Triple Wall Polypropylene (PP) Pipe

Al Dhafra, UAE
1) Piping 12" to 60" and Fittings: ASTM F2736, ASTM

F2764/F2764M, ASTM F2881 and AASHTO M 330 Type S or D
2) Joints: ASTM F477 and ASTM D3212

h. Perforated PVC Pipe: ASTM D 2729.
i. Perforated PE Pipe
1) Piping and Fittings: AASHTO M 294, Type SP, corrugated.
2) Joints: AASHTO M 294, Soiltight.
Install piping in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and

the following standards:
1. PVC, PE and Dual and Triple Wall PP: ASTM D 2321. Do not use
ASTM D 2321 Class IV or V materials for bedding, haunching or
initial backfill materials.
T
2. Ductile Iron: AWWA C600.
3. Reinforced Concrete: ACPA 01-102 and 01-103.
4. Corrugated Aluminum: ASTM B 788/B 788M.
5.
AF
Corrugated Steel: ASTM A 798/A 798M.
6. Perforated PVC and Perforated PE: ASTM D 2321. Do not use ASTM
D 2321 Class IV or V materials for bedding, haunching or initial
backfill materials.

wire for the full length of each fun of nonmetallic piping below grade.
R
building.
G303001 1.2 PIPING FOR CLEANOUTS

D
a. Cast-Iron Soil Pipe for Cleanouts
1) Pipe: ASTM A 74, service.
2) Joints: ASTM C 564 compression-type rubber gaskets.

Install cast iron pipe and fittings in accordance with the

recommendations of the pipe manufacturer.
G303002 STORM SEWER STRUCTURES

Al Dhafra, UAE

items for the drainage structures in accordance with the following:
a. Set structure rim elevations flush with finished surface of paved

areas or 1 inch (25 mm) above finished grade in unpaved areas.
b. Provide resilient connectors for making joints between manhole and
pipes entering manhole in conformance with ASTM C 923/C 923M.
c. Provide precast or cast-in-place concrete drainage structures, except
cast-in-place concrete is required for airfield drainage structures,
headwalls and gutters.
Utility structures, manholes, vaults, and similar underground structures

within aircraft pavements, or within 153 meters of runway pavements,
or within 15 meters of any full strength aircraft pavements shall be
designed in accordance with FAA Advisory Circular AC 150/5320-6E,
Airport Pavement Design and Evaluation, Appendix 3, Design of
Structures for Heavy Aircraft maximum wheel load 34,019 kg at paved
surfaces and 22,680 kg at unpaved surfaces.
T
G303002 1.2 PRECAST CONCRETE INLETS
Provide work and materials in accordance with applicable requirements of

AF
the Host Nation Specifications and standards where the project is located.
G303002 1.3 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE DRAINAGE STRUCTURES
Provide work and materials in accordance with drainage structures indicated

in the Host Nation Specifications and standards where the project is located.
For airfield drainage structures, provide work and materials in accordance

R
with FAA ACA 150/5370-10B.
G303002 1.4 DRAINAGE STRUCTURE FRAMES AND COVERS

D
FS A-A-60005; cast iron or ductile iron; designed to accommodate the traffic

loadings. Stamp or cast the word "Storm" into covers so that it is plainly
visible.
For airfield drainage structures, fabricate frames and covers of standard

commercial grade steel welded by qualified welders in accordance with AWS
D1.1/D1.1M. Provide covers of rolled steel floor plate having an approved
anti-slip surface. Steel frames and covers must be hot dipped galvanized
after fabrication. At the contractor's option, ductile iron covers and
frames may be used for airfield drainage structures if designed for a minimum
proof load of 100,000 pounds (45,000 kg) in lieu of the steel frames and
covers. Covers must be of the same material as the frames (i.e. ductile
iron frame with ductile iron cover, galvanized steel frame with galvanized
steel cover). Perform proof loading in accordance with FS A-A-60005 and
ASTM A 48/A 48M. Physically stamp proof loads into the cover. Provide the
Contracting Officer copies of previous proof load test results performed
on the same frames and covers as proposed for this contract. Modify the
top of the structure to accept the ductile iron structure in lieu of the
steel structure indicated. The finished structure must be level and

Al Dhafra, UAE
non-rocking, with the top flush with the surrounding pavement.
G303002 1.5 DRAINAGE STRUCTURE STEPS
a. Zinc-coated steel: 29 CFR 1910.27.

b. Plastic or rubber coating pressure molded to steel: ASTM D 4101,
copolymer polypropylene; or ASTM C 443/C 443M, except shore A
durometer hardness shall be 70 plus or minus 5.
Aluminum steps or rungs will not be permitted.
Steps are not required in structures less than 4 feet (1.2 m) deep.
G303002 1.6 DRAINAGE STRUCTURE CONSTRUCTION
Where a new structure is constructed on an existing line, remove existing

pipe as necessary to construct the structure. Cut existing pipe so that
pipe ends are approximately flush with the interior face of structure wall,
but not protruding into the structure.
T
G303002 1.7 CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING STRUCTURES
Center pipe connections to existing structures on the structure. Holes for

AF
the new pipe must be of sufficient diameter to allow packing cement mortar
around the entire periphery of the pipe but no larger than 1.5 times the
diameter of the pipe. Cut the structure in a manner that will cause the
least damage to the walls.
G303002 1.8 CLEANOUTS
Construct cleanouts of cast iron soil pipe and fittings; see G303001,
R
paragraph 1.2.
G303003 LIFT STATIONS

D
Storm water pump station shall be designed to discharge the maximum flow from the
design storm and operate efficiently considering a 2 year and 5 year storm. Pump
station shall be cast in place concrete or precast concrete. Minimum of two pumps
shall be provided. Storm water pump station shall be in accordance with applicable
portions of section G303003 LIFT STATIONS AND PUMP STATIONS. Pumps shall be rated
to operate at 415/240V, 3P, 4W, 50Hz. Electric service to the Pump Station shall
be designed for both pumps operating simultaneously (worst case scenario). All
pipe inside the pump station shall be ductile iron. Pumps shall be variable speed
centrifugal type. Backup emergency power shall be provided from the emergency
generator being provided in the Contract. Pumps, controls, and all electrical
components shall be provided from the same supplier. All electrical controls and/or
devices shall be provided with NEMA Type 4X enclosure.
G303004 CULVERTS
Culverts 12 inches (300 mm) and larger in diameter shall be reinforced concrete
or corrugated steel; PVC, corrugated aluminum, polyethylene and polypropylene pipe

Al Dhafra, UAE
may only be used when written approval is received by the Contracting Officer or
indicated in another part of the RFP. See G303001, paragraphs 1.1.1 and 1.1.2 for
material and installation requirements.
Flared end sections must be the same material as pipe material.
Provide erosion control in accordance with the Host Nation Erosion and
Sedimentation Control Standards or EPA guidance.
G303005 HEADWALLS
Provide cast-in-place concrete headwalls in accordance with the Host Nation

Standards.
G303006 EROSION & SEDIMENT CONTROL MEASURES
G303007 STORMWATER MANAGEMENT
T
G303007 1.1 STORMWATER COLLECTION AND STORAGE
Provide permanent detention/retention ponds and other drainage features to

AF
regulate stormwater runoff and to prevent damage to the site and off-site.
Integrate permanent stormwater management ponds, swales, and other
stormwater management features, into the total site design to provide an
aesthetically pleasing and harmonious landscape. Develop and construct the
ponds and other drainage features in accordance with UFC 3-201-01, Civil
Engineering; Host nation stormwater management Laws and Regulations; UFC
3-210-10, Low Impact Development; and applicable project sustainability
goals.
R
G303090 OTHER STORM SEWER
G303090 1.1 OIL/WATER SEPARATOR

D
Provide an oil/water separator to remove free oil from oil-in-water mixtures

originating from proposed facility operations. Provide grit protection
upstream of the oil/water separator.
Provide an oil/water separator utilizing coalescing media and conforming

to the applicable guidelines of the American Petroleum Institute (API).
Provide materials or a coating system which will protect the separator from
the oil-in-water mixture, atmosphere, and in-situ soil conditions.
Use a separator with a completely removable cover.
G3040 HEATING DISTRIBUTION
G304001 OVERHEAD HOT WATER SYSTEMS
G304001 1.1 PIPING & FITTINGS

Al Dhafra, UAE
Hot water piping shall be ASTM A 53, Type E (electric-resistance welded),

Grade A or B), or Type S (seamless, Grade A or B); black steel, Weight Class
XS (Extra Strong). ASTM A 106, Grade A or B, black steel, Schedule 80 may
be used.
G304001 1.2 INSULATION
Mineral fiber, calcium silicate, or cellular glass pipe insulation with

aluminum jacket which matches existing or surrounding insulation. Paint
jacket to suit Base Architectural Plan. The minimum insulation thickness
shall be in accordance with the following table:
Table 1 Insulation Thickness for Hot Water Systems
Nominal Pipe Mineral Calcium Cellular

Diameterinche Fiberinches (mm) Silicateinches Glassinches (mm)
s (mm) (mm)
1.00 (25) 1.5 (38) 1.5 (38) 1.5 (38)
T
1.5 (38) 1.5 (38) 1.5 (38) 1.5 (38)
2.0 (51) 1.5 (38) 1.5 (38) 1.5 (38)

AF
2.5 (64) 1.5 (38) 1.5 (38) 1.5 (38)
3.0 (76) 1.5 (38) 1.5 (38) 1.5 (38)
4.0 (100) 2.0 (51) 2.5 (64) 1.5 (38)

R
5.0 (125) 2.0 (51) 2.5 (64) 1.5 (38)
6.0 (150) 2.5 (64) 2.5 (64) 1.5 (38)
8.0 (200) 2.5 (64) 2.5 (64) 1.5 (38)

D
10.0 (250) 2.5 (64) 2.5 (64) 1.5 (38)
12.0 (300) 2.5 (64) 2.5 (64) 1.5 (38)
14.0 (350) 2.5 (64) 2.5 (64) 1.5 (38)
16.0 (400) 2.5 (64) 2.5 (64) 1.5 (38)
18.0 (450) 2.5 (64) 2.5 (64) 1.5 (38)
G304001 1.3 EXPANSION
Compensate for piping expansion by utilizing expansion loops and joints.

Provide guided slip or flexible ball type expansion joints.

Al Dhafra, UAE
G304001 1.4 SUPPORTS
MSS SP-58 and MSS SP-69, adjustable supports with insulation protection
saddles. Provide stainless steel axles for rollers. Provide support poles
with guy wires and hardware.
G304002 OVERHEAD STEAM SYSTEMS
G304002 1.1.1 Steam Piping
Steam piping shall be ASTM A 53, Type E (electric-resistance welded,

Grade A or B) or Type S (seamless, Grade A or B), black steel. Provide
Weight Class STD (Standard) for welding end connections. Provide
Weight Class XS (Extra Strong) for threaded end connections. ASTM
A 106, Grade A or B, black steel, Schedule 40 may be used for pipe
sizes through 9 inches (250 mm), and minimum pipe wall thickness of
0.35 inches (9.5 mm) for pipe sizes 12 inches (300 mm) and larger for
welding end connections. Provide Schedule 80 for threaded end
T
connections.
G304002 1.1.2 Condensate Piping

AF
Condensate piping shall be ASTM A 53, Type E (electric-resistance
welded), Grade A or B), or Type S (seamless, Grade A or B); black steel,
Weight Class XS (Extra Strong). ASTM A 106, Grade A or B, black steel,
Schedule 80 may be used.

R
Fibrous glass, calcium silicate, or cellular glass pipe insulation with
aluminum jacket which matches existing or surrounding insulation. Paint
jacket to suit Base Architectural Plan. The minimum insulation thickness
shall be in accordance with the following tables:
D
Table 1 Insulation Thickness for Steam Systems
Nominal Pipe Fibrous Calcium Cellular

Diameterinche Glassinches (mm) Silicateinches Glassinches (mm)
s (mm) (mm)
1.00 (25) 3.5 (90) 4.0 (100) *
1.5 (38) 3.5 (90) 4.0 (100) *
2.0 (51) 3.5 (90) 4.0 (100) *
2.5 (64) 3.5 (90) 4.0 (100) *
3.0 (76) 4.0 (100) 4.5 (115) *
4.0 (100) 4.0 (100) 4.5 (115) *

Al Dhafra, UAE
5.0 (125) 4.5 (115) 5.0 (125) *
6.0 (150) 4.5 (115) 5.0 (125) *
8.0 (200) 5.0 (125) 6.0 (150) *
10.0 (250) 5.0 (125) 6.0 (150) *
12.0 (300) 5.0 (125) 6.0 (150) *
14.0 (350) 5.0 (125) 6.0 (150) *
16.0 (400) 5.0 (125) 6.0 (150) *
18.0 (450) 5.0 (125) 6.0 (150) *
* Cellular glass pipe insulation having an insulating efficiency not less

than that of the specified thickness of calcium silicate may be provided.
T
Table 2 Insulation Thickness for Condensate Systems
Nominal Pipe
AF
Mineral Fiberinches (mm) Fibrous Glassinches (mm)
Diameterinches
(mm)
1.00 (25) 2.5 (64) *
1.5 (38) 2.5 (64) *

R
2.0 (51) 2.5 (64) *
2.5 (64) 2.5 (64) *

D
3.0 (76) 3.0 (76) *
4.0 (100) 3.0 (76) *
5.0 (125) 3.5 (90) *
6.0 (150) 3.5 (90) *
8.0 (200) 3.5 (90) *
10.0 (250) 3.5 (90) *
12.0 (300) 3.5 (90) *
14.0 (350) 3.5 (90) *
16.0 (400) 3.5 (90) *

Al Dhafra, UAE
18.0 (450) 3.5 (90) *
* Fibrous glass pipe insulation having an insulating efficiency not less

than that of the specified thickness of mineral fiber may be provided.

MSS SP-58 and MSS SP-69, adjustable supports with insulation protection
saddles. Provide stainless steel axles for rollers. Provide support poles
with guy wires and hardware.
G304003 UNDERGROUND HOT WATER SYSTEMS
T
Direct buried, factory pre-fabricated, pre-insulated, piping systems shall

AF
consist of a service pipe with polyurethane insulation and a high-density
polyethylene (HDPE) jacket. Provide factory fabricated fittings and
components. Field insulation of fittings will not be allowed.
The minimum insulation thickness shall be in accordance with the following

tables:
R
Table 1 Insulation Thickness for Drainable/Dryable Systems
Nominal Pipe Parocinches (mm) Epitherminches Kaylo-10 Thermo-12

D
Diameterinche (mm) Super

s (mm) Caltempinches (mm)
1.00 (25) 2.0 (51) 2.5 (64) 4.0 (100)
1.5 (38) 2.0 (51) 2.5 (64) 4.0 (100)
2.0 (51) 2.5 (64) 3.5 (90) 4.5 (115)
2.5 (64) 2.5 (64) 3.5 (90) 4.5 (115)
3.0 (76) 3.0 (76) 4.0 (100) 5.0 (125)
4.0 (100) 3.0 (76) 4.0 (100) 5.0 (125)
5.0 (125) 3.0 (76) 4.0 (100) 5.0 (125)
6.0 (150) 3.5 (90) 4.5 (115) 5.5 (140)

Al Dhafra, UAE
8.0 (200) 3.5 (90) 4.5 (115) 5.5 (140)
10.0 (250) 4.0 (100) 5.0 (125) 6.0 (150)
12.0 (300) 4.0 (100) 5.0 (125) 6.0 (150)
14.0 (350) 4.0 (100) 5.0 (125) 6.0 (150)
16.0 (400) 4.0 (100) 5.0 (125) 6.0 (150)
18.0 (450) 4.0 (100) 5.0 (125) 6.0 (150)
Table 2 Insulation Thickness for Water Spread Limiting Systems
Nominal Pipe Calcium Silicateinches Polyurethaneinches (mm)

Diameterinches (mm)
(mm)
T
1.00 (25) N/A N/A
1.5 (38)
AF
N/A N/A
2.0 (51) N/A N/A
2.5 (64) N/A N/A
3.0 (76) 1.00 (25) 1.23 (31)

R
4.0 (100) 1.00 (25) 1.23 (31)
5.0 (125) N/A N/A

D
6.0 (150) 1.5 (38) 1.34 (34)
8.0 (200) 2.0 (51) 1.21 (30)
10.0 (250) 2.5 (64) 1.31 (33)
12.0 (300) 2.0 (51) 1.29 (33)
14.0 (350) N/A N/A
16.0 (400) N/A N/A
18.0 (450) N/A N/A
G304003 1.3 UHDS DESIGN

Al Dhafra, UAE
Design and provide direct buried, factory-prefabricated, pre-insulated main

hot water piping, including piping in manholes. Asbestos cement or plastic
conduit is not acceptable. The UHDS representative shall be certified in
writing by the UHDS manufacturer to be technically qualified and experienced
in the installation of the system. Provide a Certificate of Satisfactory
Operation certifying that at least 3 systems installed by the UHDS
manufacturer within the previous 10 years have and are operating
satisfactorily for not less than 5 years. The certificate shall include
verification information.
G304003 1.4 VALVING
to each building. Valves shall be located in valve boxes. Valves shall
be ASME class 150.
Compensate for piping expansion by utilizing expansion loops.
T
G304004 UNDERGROUND STEAM DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS

AF
Direct buried, factory pre-fabricated, pre-insulated, steam and condensate
piping systems shall consist of a steel service pipe with polyurethane
insulation and a high-density polyethylene (HDPE) jacket. Provide factory
fabricated fittings and components. Field insulation of fittings will not
be allowed.

R
The minimum insulation thickness shall be in accordance with the following

tables:
D
Table 1 Insulation Thickness for Drainable/Dryable Systems

1.00 (25) 2.0 (51) 2.5 (64) 4.0 (100)
1.5 (38) 2.0 (51) 2.5 (64) 4.0 (100)
2.0 (51) 2.5 (64) 3.5 (90) 4.5 (115)
2.5 (64) 2.5 (64) 3.5 (90) 4.5 (115)
3.0 (76) 3.0 (76) 4.0 (100) 5.0 (125)
4.0 (100) 3.0 (76) 4.0 (100) 5.0 (125)

Al Dhafra, UAE
5.0 (125) 3.0 (76) 4.0 (100) 5.0 (125)
6.0 (150) 3.5 (90) 4.5 (115) 5.5 (140)
8.0 (200) 3.5 (90) 4.5 (115) 5.5 (140)
10.0 (250) 4.0 (100) 5.0 (125) 6.0 (150)
12.0 (300) 4.0 (100) 5.0 (125) 6.0 (150)
14.0 (350) 4.0 (100) 5.0 (125) 6.0 (150)
16.0 (400) 4.0 (100) 5.0 (125) 6.0 (150)
18.0 (450) 4.0 (100) 5.0 (125) 6.0 (150)
Table 2 Insulation Thickness for Water Spread Limiting Systems
T
Nominal Pipe Calcium Silicateinches Polyurethaneinches (mm)
Diameterinches (mm)
(mm)
AF
1.00 (25) N/A N/A
1.5 (38) N/A N/A
2.0 (51) N/A N/A

R
2.5 (64) N/A N/A
3.0 (76) 1.00 (25) 1.23 (31)

D
4.0 (100) 1.00 (25) 1.23 (31)
5.0 (125) N/A N/A
6.0 (150) 1.5 (38) 1.34 (34)
8.0 (200) 2.0 (51) 1.21 (30)
10.0 (250) 2.5 (64) 1.31 (33)
12.0 (300) 2.0 (51) 1.29 (33)
14.0 (350) N/A N/A
16.0 (400) N/A N/A
18.0 (450) N/A N/A

Al Dhafra, UAE
Table 3 Insulation Thickness for Condensate Return Systems

1.00 (25) 2.0 (51) 2.5 (64) 4.0 (100)
1.5 (38) 2.0 (51) 2.5 (64) 4.0 (100)
2.0 (51) 2.5 (64) 3.5 (90) 4.5 (115)
2.5 (64) 2.5 (64) 3.5 (90) 4.5 (115)
3.0 (76) 3.0 (76) 4.0 (100) 5.0 (125)
4.0 (100) 3.0 (76) 4.0 (100) 5.0 (125)
5.0 (125) 3.0 (76) 4.0 (100) 5.0 (125)
T
6.0 (150) 3.5 (90) 4.5 (115) 5.5 (140)
8.0 (200)
AF
3.5 (90) 4.5 (115) 5.5 (140)
10.0 (250) 4.0 (100) 5.0 (125) 6.0 (150)
12.0 (300) 4.0 (100) 5.0 (125) 6.0 (150)
14.0 (350) 4.0 (100) 5.0 (125) 6.0 (150)

R
16.0 (400) 4.0 (100) 5.0 (125) 6.0 (150)
18.0 (450) 4.0 (100) 5.0 (125) 6.0 (150)

D
G304004 1.3 UHDS DESIGN
Design and provide direct buried, factory-prefabricated, pre-insulated main

steam and condensate piping in separate conduits and including piping in
manholes. Asbestos cement or plastic conduit is not acceptable. The UHDS
representative shall be certified in writing by the UHDS manufacturer to
be technically qualified and experienced in the installation of the system.
Provide a Certificate of Satisfactory Operation certifying that at least
3 systems installed by the UHDS manufacturer within the previous 10 years
have and are operating satisfactorily for not less than 5 years. The
certificate shall include verification information.
G304004 1.4 VALVING
to each building. Valves shall be located in manholes. Valves shall be

Al Dhafra, UAE
ASME class 150.
Compensate for piping expansion by utilizing expansion loops. Locate

anchors outside manholes.
G304005 REINFORCED CONCRETE MANHOLES & VALVE BOXES
G304005 1.1 MANHOLE CONSTRUCTION
Manholes shall be shall be constructed of reinforced, 3000 psi (206.8 bar)

concrete and shall extend a minimum of 6 inches (300 mm) above grade. Depth
shall be as required to maintain proper pipe slopes. Construct manhole
floor and sides in one monolithic pour. Provide galvanized steel or
sectioned aluminum, open grate or solid cover as indicated in ESR Section
G30. Provide ventilation openings for solid cover. Provide ladder.
Ladder shall be steel with non-slip surfaces and anchored to the wall.
Manhole floor and walls shall be watertight. Provide sleeves or core drill
openings for pipes with modular mechanical seals. Provide sump pit for
T
pump.
G304005 1.2 VALVE BOX CONSTRUCTION

AF
Cast-iron or ductile-iron box of a suitable size. Provide cast-iron or
ductile-iron cover for the box with word(s) describing the utility cast on
the cover.
G304005 1.3 MANHOLE SUMP PUMPS
Vertical sump pump. Operating temperature design must be 195 degrees F (93
R
degrees C) minimum. Provide with 2-pole float control.
G304090 OTHER HEATING DISTRIBUTION

D
G304090 1.1 WARNING & IDENTIFICATION TAPE
Polyethylene plastic tape manufactured specifically for warning and

identifying buried utility lines.
Provide a cathodic protection system for the underground piping system.

System shall be designed by a National Association of Corrosion Engineers
(NACE) certified Cathodic Protection Engineer. The corrosion engineer
shall obtain soil data and existing system conditions. Corrosion engineer
shall supervise, inspect and test the installation and performance of the
cathodic protection system. Test stations shall be post mounted and placed
at the manhole or nearby building. Test stations shall be located at each
end of each cathodically protected section.
G3050 COOLING DISTRIBUTION
G305001 OVERHEAD COOLING SYSTEMS

Al Dhafra, UAE
G305001 1.1.1 Chilled and Condenser Water Piping
Chilled and condenser water piping shall be electric resistance welded

or seamless Schedule 40 black steel pipe conforming to ASTM A 53.
Piping 4 inch (100 mm) and smaller may be ASTM B 88 Type K or L copper.
G305001 1.1.2 Steel Pipe Fittings
For piping 2 inch (50 mm) and smaller, provide ANSI/ASME B16.3
malleable iron screwed fittings or ASME B16.11 socket welding (Class
3000) or threaded type (Class 2000). Provide ASME/ANSI B16.9
butt-welding fittings or ASME/ANSI B16.5 flanged type for piping 2-1/2
inch (63 mm) and larger. Grooved joint pipe coupling systems of
appropriate pressure rating are acceptable in lieu of welded or
screwed fittings.
G305001 1.1.3 Copper Fittings
T
Provide ANSI B16.18 cast bronze solder joint type or ASME/ANSI B16.22
wrought copper solder joint type.
AF
Mineral fiber, Urethane, cellular glass, Faced Phenolic Foam, or Flexible

Cellular pipe insulation with aluminum jacket in accordance with ESR Section
G30. The minimum insulation thickness shall be in accordance with the
following table:
R
Table 1 Insulation Thickness for Cold Water Systems
Nominal Pipe Mineral Urethaneinche Cellular Faced Flexible

Diameterinche Fiberinche s (mm) Glassinche Phenolic Cellularinche
D
s (mm) s (mm) s (mm) Foaminche s (mm)

s (mm)
1.00 (25) 1.00 (25) 0.75 (19) 1.5 (38) 1.00 (25) 0.75 (19)
1.5 (38) 1.00 (25) 0.75 (19) 1.5 (38) 1.00 (25) 0.75 (19)
2.0 (51) 1.00 (25) 0.75 (19) 1.5 (38) 1.00 (25) 0.75 (19)
2.5 (64) 1.00 (25) 0.75 (19) 1.5 (38) 1.00 (25) 0.75 (19)
3.0 (76) 1.00 (25) 0.75 (19) 1.5 (38) 1.00 (25) 0.75 (19)
4.0 (100) 1.5 (38) 0.75 (19) 1.5 (38) 1.00 (25) 0.75 (19)
5.0 (125) 1.5 (38) 0.75 (19) 1.5 (38) 1.00 (25) 0.75 (19)
6.0 (150) 1.5 (38) 1.00 (25) 1.5 (38) 1.5 (38) 1.00 (25)

Al Dhafra, UAE
8.0 (200) 1.5 (38) 1.00 (25) 1.5 (38) 1.5 (38) 1.00 (25)
10.0 (250) 1.5 (38) 1.00 (25) 1.5 (38) 1.5 (38) 1.00 (25)
12.0 (300) 1.5 (38) 1.00 (25) 1.5 (38) 1.5 (38) 1.00 (25)
14.0 (350) 1.5 (38) 1.00 (25) 1.5 (38) 1.5 (38) 1.00 (25)
16.0 (400) 1.5 (38) 1.00 (25) 1.5 (38) 1.5 (38) 1.00 (25)
18.0 (450) 1.5 (38) 1.00 (25) 1.5 (38) 1.5 (38) 1.00 (25)
Provide MSS SP-58 and MSS SP-69, adjustable supports with insulation
protection saddles. Provide stainless steel axles for rollers. Provide
support poles with guy wires and hardware.
T

AF
G305002 UNDERGROUND COOLING SYSTEMS
Direct buried, factory-prefabricated, pre-insulated, chilled water piping

systems. All fittings and accessories shall be designed and
R
factory-fabricated to prevent moisture from entering into the system.
Backfill and overall installation shall meet the requirements of the piping
system manufacturer.
D
G305002 1.2 VALVES
to each building. Valves shall be located in valve boxes.
G305090 OTHER COOLING DISTRIBUTION
Compensate for piping expansion by utilizing expansion loops. Locate

anchors outside manholes.
Polyethylene plastic tape manufactured specifically for warning and

identifying buried utility lines.

Al Dhafra, UAE
Provide a cathodic protection system for the underground chilled water and
condenser water piping system. System shall be designed by a National
Association of Corrosion Engineers (NACE) certified Cathodic Protection
Engineer. The corrosion engineer shall obtain soil data and existing system
conditions. Corrosion engineer shall supervise, inspect and test the
installation and performance of the cathodic protection system. Test
stations shall be post mounted and placed at the manhole or nearby building.
Test stations shall be located at each end of each cathodically protected
section.
G3060 FUEL DISTRIBUTION
G306001 LIQUID FUEL DISTRIBUTION PIPING
G306001 1.1 DIESEL
Fuel piping shall be ASTM A 53, Type E (electric-resistance welded, Grade

A or B) or Type S (seamless, Grade A or B), black steel or API SPEC 5L,
seamless, submerged-arc weld or gas metal-arc weld, Grade B, black steel.
Provide Weight Class STD (Standard) for welding end connections. Provide
T
Weight Class XS (Extra Strong) for threaded end connections.
G306003 LIQUID FUEL STORAGE TANKS

AF
G306003 1.1 STORAGE TANKS
For standby generator set: Aboveground, double wall in accordance with UL

142 (shall be UL-142 listed) with secondary containment and leak monitoring
with a capacity to meet the system requirements. Provide with
overfill/spill containment, overfill protection and vents. Tank shall also
comply and be located in accordance with NFPA 30.
R
G306003 1.2 FUEL PUMPS
Fuel pumps shall comply with NEMA MG 1, NFPA 70, and be designed for use
D
with hydrocarbon fuels and working pressure of 275 psig (1896 kilopascals)
at 100 degrees F (38 degrees C).
G306003 1.3 FUEL METERS
Continuous duty, positive displacement type, with electronic thermal

compensation capability, suitable for outdoor installation, and designed
for use with hydrocarbon fuels and working pressure of 275 psig (1896
kilopascals) at 100 degrees F (38 degrees C).
G306004 LIQUID FUEL DISPENSING TANKS
The same as storage tanks except, include tank mounted dispenser with filter,
vacuum breaker, safety breakaway, hose and nozzle.
G306006 GAS DISTRIBUTION PIPING (NATURAL & PROPANE)
G306006 1.1 STEEL PIPE

Al Dhafra, UAE
Gas piping shall be ASTM A 53, Type E (electric-resistance welded, Grade

A or B) or Type S (seamless, Grade A or B), black steel. Provide Weight Class
STD (Standard) for welding end connections. Provide Weight Class XS (Extra
Strong) for threaded end connections.
G306006 1.2 POLYETHYLENE (PE)
PE pipe and heat fusion fittings shall conform to ASTM D 2513, Grade PE2406
or PE3408.
G306007 GAS STORAGE TANKS
G306007 1.1 PROPANE STORAGE TANKS
ASME labeled tank in accordance with NFPA 58 with a capacity to meet the
system requirements.
G306009 OTHER GAS DISTRIBUTION
T
Detectable aluminum foil, plastic backed tape or detectable magnetic plastic
tape manufactured specifically for warning and identifying buried piping.
AF
R
D

Al Dhafra, UAE
SECTION G40
SITE ELECTRICAL UTILITIES

05/14
G40 GENERAL
G40 1.1 NARRATIVE
This section covers installations exterior to the facility outside the five
foot line. See PTS Section D50, Electrical, for continuation of systems
inside the five foot line, into and inside the building.
T
G40 1.2 ELECTRICAL DESIGN GUIDANCE
AF
When all product Quality Control information is included in the Unified

Facility Criteria (UFC) and there are requirement options identified in the
R
ESR, then the Uniformat Level 4 titles (and possible subtitles) are included
without repetition of requirements. One example of this is G401008,
GROUNDING SYSTEMS.
D

UFC(s):UFC 3-501-01, Electrical
Engineering)

Buildings
UFC 3-570-02N Electrical Engineering Cathodic

Protection

Al Dhafra, UAE
UFC 3-580-01 Telecommunications Building Cabling

Planning and Design
USAF STANDARDS, CRITERIA, AND PUBLICATIONS
ADAB Specs 20150402 Al Dhafra Air Base Specifications
ETL 02-12 Communications and Information System

Criteria for Air Force Facilities
USAFCENT OSP/ISP 2013 USAF Outside and Inside Plant

Distribution Guidance
TO 31W3-10-22 Telecommunications Engineering,

Outside Plant Telephone
T
UFGS 26 11 13.00 20 Primary Unit Substation

AF
UFGS 26 11 16 Secondary Unit Substations
UFGS 26 12 19.10 Three-Phase Pad-Mounted Transformers
UFGS 26 12 19.20 Single-Phase Pad-Mounted

Transformers
R
UFGS 26 13 00.00 20 SF6/High-Firepoint Fluids Insulated
Pad-Mounted Switchgear
UFGS 26 23 00 Switchboards and Switchgear

D
UFGS 26 27 14.00 20 Electricity Metering
UFGS 26 56 00 Exterior Lighting
UFGS 33 71 02.00 20 Underground Electrical Distribution
UFGS 33 82 00 Telecommunications Outside Plant
Qualifications, certifications, and Test Plans indicated herein shall be

submitted 45 calendar days prior to the expected date of execution. Notify
the Contracting Officer 14 calendar days prior to all testing. Submit test
results within 7 calendar days of completion of testing.
The Designer of Record is responsible for approving the submittals listed

below.

Al Dhafra, UAE
G40 1.3.1 Qualified Testing Organization
Contractor shall engage the services of a qualified testing

organization to provide inspection, testing, calibration, and
adjustment of the electrical distribution system and equipment listed
in paragraph entitled "Acceptance Tests and Inspections" herein.
Organization shall be independent of the supplier, manufacturer, and
installer of the equipment. The organization shall be a first tier
subcontractor.
a. Submit name and qualifications of organization. Organization

shall have been regularly engaged in the testing of electrical
materials, devices, installations, and systems for a minimum
of 5 years. The organization shall have a calibration program,
and test instruments used shall be calibrated in accordance with
NETA ATS.
b. Submit name and qualifications of the lead engineering
technician performing the required testing services. Include
a list of three comparable jobs performed by the technician with
specific names and telephone numbers for reference. Testing,
T
inspection, calibration, and adjustments shall be performed by
an engineering technician, certified by NETA or the National
Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies
AF
(NICET) with a minimum of 5 years' experience inspecting,
testing, and calibrating electrical distribution and
generation equipment, systems, and devices.
G40 1.3.2 NEC Qualified Worker
Provide in accordance with NFPA 70. Qualified Workers shall be allowed

to be assisted by helpers on a 1 to 1 ratio, provided such helpers
R
are registered in recognized apprenticeship programs. Submit a
certification confirming NEC Qualified Worker requirements.
G40 1.3.3 Qualified Medium Voltage Electrician

D
All workers on medium voltage electrical crews shall have 5 years

experience working medium voltage systems on similar projects
involving the same or higher voltage.
G40 1.3.4 Qualified Cable Splicer (Medium Voltage Cable)
The cable splicer/terminator must have a certification from the

National Cable Splicing Certification Board (NCSCB) in the field of
splicing and terminating shielded medium voltage (5 kV to 35 kV) power
cable using pre-manufactured kits (pre-molded, heat-shrink,
cold-shrink). Proof of certification for the individuals that will
be performing cable splicer and termination work shall be submitted
30 days before splices or terminations are to be made.
G40 1.3.5 Qualified PV Installer
Installation of photovoltaic systems shall be by experienced and

trained installers. At minimum the PV installation supervisor shall

Al Dhafra, UAE
hold a "PV Installer Certification" as issued by the North American

Board of Certified Energy Practitioners or hold a Certified Solar
Roofing Professional (CSRP) credential issued by RISE "Roof
Intergrated Solar Energy Inc".
G40 1.3.6 Qualified Cable Splicer (Telecommunications)
Certification shall include the training, and experience of the

individual on specific type and classification of telecommunications
cable to be provided under this contract.
G40 1.3.7 Qualified Cable Installer and Splicer (Fiber Optic Cable)
Certification shall include the training, and experience of the

individual on specific type and classification of Fiber Optic media
to be provided under this contract.
G40 1.3.8 Qualified Fiber Optic (FO) Cable Manufacturer
The FO media manufacturer shall have a minimum of 3 years experience
T
in the manufacturing, assembly, and factory testing of FO media that
complies with RUS REA Bull 1753F-601 (PE-90). Manufacturer shall
provide a list of customers with 3 years of maintenance logs
AF
documenting experience with government customers.
G40 1.3.9 Material Standards
Ensure service support and provide manufacturer's nameplate in

accordance with PTS Section Z10, General Performance Technical
Specification.
R
G40 1.3.9.1 Warning Labels
Each enclosure of electrical equipment, including substations,

pad-mounted transformers, pad-mounted switches, pad-mounted
D
sectionalizing termination cabinets, and switchgear, shall

have a warning label identifying the enclosure as 1) containing
energized electrical equipment and 2) an arc flash hazard.
G40 1.3.10 Factory Testing
The Government reserves the right to witness all factory testing. The
manufacturer shall have a calibration program that assures that all
applicable test instruments are maintained within rated accuracy.
G40 1.3.11 Electrical System Startup and Testing
Submit test plans for approval. The test plans shall be tailored to
the systems provided.
The test plan shall list make and model and provide functional
description of the test instruments and accessories and shall describe
the setup of the tests to be conducted. Test instruments shall be
capable of measuring and recording or displaying test data at a higher

Al Dhafra, UAE
resolution and greater accuracy than specified for the equipment's

performance.
G40 1.3.11.1 Factory Trained Engineer
Provide a factory trained engineer to supervise start-up and

testing as required in referenced specifications.
G40 1.3.11.2 Performance Verification Testing
The Contractor shall show by demonstration in service that all

circuits and devices are in operating condition. Tests shall
be such that each item of control equipment will function not
less than five times. The Contractor shall provide all necessary
test equipment, tools, fuel, load banks, labor, and materials
for testing. As a minimum, all systems shall be tested in
accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Additional
testing requirements for the various systems are described with
those systems, hereinafter. The Contractor shall assure that
all applicable test instruments are maintained within rated
T
accuracy. Dated calibration labels shall be visible on all test
equipment.
AF
Submit a separate electrical field test plan in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations and that conforms to NETA ATS
for each piece of Electrical Distribution Equipment and System
requiring Performance Verification Testing.
The following items identify specific test requirements.

Additional test requirements are contained in the applicable
UFGS.
R
a. Cable - Test cable in accordance with the manufacturer's

recommendations and NETA ATS. Adhere to precautions and
limits as specified in the applicable NEMA/ICEA Standard
D
for the specific cable.

b. Grounding - Test ground systems in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations and NETA ATS.
c. Site Lighting - Contractor's Quality Control (CQC)
representative shall perform a field survey of site
lighting systems in accordance with IESNA for acceptance.
Show that the lighting system operates in accordance with
the users requirements and is in accordance with
designed levels. Provide certification that the measured
lighting levels conform to the design requirements.
d. Telecommunications wiring - Test all cables in accordance
with industry standards.
G40 1.3.11.3 Acceptance Tests and Inspections
The Qualified Testing Organization shall provide the Acceptance

Tests and Inspections test plan and procedures and perform the
acceptance tests and inspections. Test methods, procedures, and
test values shall be performed and evaluated in accordance with

Al Dhafra, UAE
NETA ATS, the manufacturer's recommendations, and paragraph

entitled "Field Quality Control" of each applicable
specification section. Tests identified as optional in NETA ATS
are not required unless otherwise specified. Equipment shall
be placed in service only after completion of required tests
and evaluation of the test results have been completed.
Contractor shall supply to the testing organization complete
sets of shop drawings, settings of adjustable devices, and other
information necessary for an accurate test and inspection of
the system prior to the performance of any final testing.
Specific test requirements are contained in the UFGS for

equipment.
G40 1.3.12 RF Designer Qualifications
The DOR shall a minimum 10 years of experience designing, installing,

and managing military radio frequency and satellite communications
systems. The DOR shall coordinate closely with the client stakeholder
communications engineer, as well as any other necessary base
T
stakeholders to ascertain information and conduct necessary systems
and requirements analysis. The DOR shall develop all specifications
and identify necessary criteria and standards governing military
AF
RF/SATCOM towers. See all attachment for tower concept and
requirements.
G40 1.3.12.1 RF Technician/Installer Qualifications
The RF technician(s)/ installer(s) shall have a minimum 5 years of

experience installing, maintaining, and testing RF towers, cabling,
and supporting equipment. Include names and locations of two projects
R
successfully completed using optical fiber and copper communications
cabling systems. Include written certification from users that
systems have performed satisfactorily for not less than 18 months.
Include specific experience in installing and testing antennas
D
coaxial and fiber optic cable and support systems.
Design Submittals shall be in accordance with PTS Section Z10, General

Performance Technical Specifications, UFGS Section 01 33 10.05 20, Design
Submittal Procedures, MED Design Instruction Manual, and UFC 3-501-01,
Electrical Engineering.
with the limitations stated in PTS Section Z10, General Performance
UFGS 26 11 13.00 20, Primary Unit Substation

Al Dhafra, UAE
UFGS 26 11 16, Secondary Unit Substations
UFGS 26 12 19.10, Three-Phase Pad-Mounted Transformers
UFGS 26 12 19.20, Single-Phase Pad-Mounted Transformers
UFGS 26 13 00.00 20, SF6/High-Firepoint Fluids Insulated Pad-Mounted

Switch Gear
UFGS 26 23 00, Switchboards and Switchgear
UFGS 26 27 14.00 20, Electricity Metering
UFGS 33 71 02.00 20, Underground Electrical Distribution
UFGS 33 82 00, Telecommunications Outside Plant
G40 1.4.1 Sustainable Design Submittal
T
Submit sustainable design submittals in accordance with UFGS 01 33
29.05 20, Sustainability Reporting for Design-Build.
AF

Performance Technical Specifications. In addition to the PTS Section Z10
requirements, the Designer of Record (DOR) shall approve the following
OMSI Information for Electrical Equipment (if OMSI Manual for the
R
entire project is not already required); all "G" item submittals
listed in the submittals of the specifications sections identified
in the Design Submittals paragraph above; and all "G" item submittals
listed in Government Surveillance UFGS Section 01 33 00.05 20,
D
Construction Submittal Procedures.
Provide certification that all adjustable protective device settings have

been set in accordance with the coordination study for the as-built equipment
and configuration.
G40 1.5.1 Sustainable Construction Submittal

01 33 29.05 20, Sustainability Reporting for Design-Build.
G4010 ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION
Exterior Primary Power Distribution System is rated at 11KV, 3P, DELTA.
G401001 SUBSTATIONS
When secondary unit substations are required, the Designer of Record shall utilize

Al Dhafra, UAE
UFGS Section 26 11 16, Secondary Unit Substation, and UFGS Section 26 23 00,
Switchboards and Switchgear, for the project specification, and shall submit the
edited specification section as a part of the design submittal for the project.
G401002 TRANSFORMERS
When transformers are required, the Designer of Record shall utilize UFGS Section
26 12 19.10, Three-Phase Pad Mounted Transformers, UFGS Section 26 12 19.20,
Single-Phase Pad Mounted Transformers, or UFGS Section 33 71 01.00 20, Overhead
Transmission and Distribution, for the project specification, and shall submit
the edited specification section as a part of the design submittal for the project.
G401003 SWITCHES, CONTROLS AND DEVICES
When switches or control devices are required, the Designer of Record shall utilize
UFGS Section 26 13 00.00 20, SF6/High-Firepoint Fluids Insulated Pad Mounted
Switchgear, for the project specification, and shall submit the edited
G401004 OVERHEAD ELECTRIC CONDUCTORS
T
Not applicable.
G401005 TOWERS, POLES, CROSSARMS AND INSULATORS

Not applicable.
AF
Route underground cables to minimize splices. Cable pulling tensions shall not
exceed the maximum pulling tension recommended by the cable manufacturer. Medium
voltage cable termination shall be suitable for the location installed and meet
IEEE Std. 48 Class 1 requirements.
R
G401007 DUCTBANKS, MANHOLES, HANDHOLES AND RACEWAYS
Concrete manholes and handholes shall be standard type pre-cast concrete.

D
Composite/Fiberglass handholes shall be polymer concrete reinforced with a heavy

weave fiberglass reinforcing as indicated. Load ratings of manholes and handholes
shall be suitable for the location installed. Manholes shall be 2.5M x 2.5M x 2.5M
minimum, inside dimensions.
G401009 METERING
When metering is required the Designer of Record shall utilize UFGS section 26
27 14.00 20 for the project specification and shall submit the edited specification
section as part of the design submittal for the project.
G401010 CATHODIC PROTECTION SYSTEMS
Cathodic protection systems shall be in accordance with UFC 3-570-02N.
G401011 EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS FOR COASTAL AND HIGH HUMIDITY AREAS

Al Dhafra, UAE
G4020 SITE LIGHTING
G402001 EXTERIOR LIGHTING FIXTURES AND CONTROLS
Utilize SSL lighting sources for exterior lighting, except where lighting is
required to match an existing source.
Comply with ANSI/ASHRAE/IES 90.1 for all exterior lighting applications and
controls. Comply with UFC 3-530-01 for reduction of light pollution.
Provide SPD at panelboards that include circuits feeding exterior lighting

systems.
Coordinate the design and luminaire selection with the COR.
When exterior lighting is required the Designer of Record shall utilize UFGS
section 26 56 00 for the project specification and shall submit the edited
specification section as part of the design submittal for the project.
G402002 SPECIAL SECURITY LIGHTING SYSTEM
T
Not applicable.
G402003 OTHER AREA LIGHTING

AF
Refer to Part 3, G-40 for KC-10 Ramp (TANGO Ramp) Flood Lighting requirements.
G402004 LIGHTING POLES
Poles shall meet International Building Code for street lighting poles, and AASHTO
loadings for highway and sports lighting poles taking into account the effective
projected areas of the luminaries provided. Poles shall be direct set or
R
anchor-base type designed for use with underground supply conductors.

D
Provide in accordance with Paragraph G401006. Medium Voltage (11KV) conductor

shall be no less than the size and rating of the existing 11KV MV loop feeder
conductor.
Handholes and underground conduits for site lighting shall be in accordance with
Paragraph G401007.
G4030 SITE COMMUNICATION AND SECURITY
When site communications (OSP) are required, the Designer of Record shall utilize
UFGS Section 33 82 00, Telecommunications Outside Plant (OSP), and UFGS 33 71 02.00
20, Underground Electrical Distribution for the project specifications and shall
submit the edited specification section as a part of the design submittal for the
project. Submit all test results to MED for review. All materials and components
shall be UL listed (or third party verifiable equivalent safety rating, evidence

Al Dhafra, UAE
provided by the Contractor.
G403001 TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
Provide OSP telecommunications distribution in accordance with all RUS standards,

TIA-758-B, ANSI/TIA-606-B, ANSI/TIA-607-B, and the methods and best practices of
ANSI/NECA/BICSI-607-2011 and Outside Plant Design Reference Manual, 5th Edition.
G403002 CABLE TV SYSTEMS (CATV)
Provide OSP CATV distribution in accordance with all RUS standards, TIA-758-B,
ANSI/TIA-606-B, ANSI/TIA-607-B, and the methods and best practices of
ANSI/NECA/BICSI-607-2011 and Outside Plant Design Reference Manual, 5th Edition.
Cables shall comprise of RG-11 (Series 11) and/or 0.625 coax (attenuation and
signal characteristics dictating).
G403003 CABLES AND WIRING
Provide underground copper cable pair in accordance with REA 1753F-208. PE-89 cable
shall be PIC-filled, armored cable, and be tested in compliance with RUS 1753F-201
T
and TIA-758-B. PE-90a (RUS 1753-601a) fiber optic media shall meet all performance
requirements of RUS 1753F-201 and EIA/TIA-568-C and the physical requirements of
ICEA S 87-640 and EIA/TIA-598-A. All OSP cable shall be UL listed.
AF
See Attachment RF Cable and Antenna Layout for antenna cabling. The design of
pathways and spaces shall be unique and accommodate RF cabling size, weight,
bending radii, length constraints, terminations, etc.
Provide in accordance with paragraph G401007. The concrete pour and final
R
structure shall abide to AASHTO H20 and ASTM C150 standards, and drawing
attachments in Part 6. The conduit, the conduit fittings (elbows, connectors,
couplings etc.) and solvent cement shall be from the same manufacturer. ABS
plastic duct terminators (not required to be the same brand as conduit) shall be
D
bell-shaped and cast into the manhole walls for use in terminating the conduit.
The conduit shall be solvent welded to the terminators. The ducts will be positioned
and encased in concrete using the appropriate spacers to create a minimum of 50mm
of separation between all intra-duct bank formations. Combined utility trenches
shall conform to NESC separation requirements. The conduit shall be UL listed (or
verifiable equal safety rating, evidence provided by the Contractor), schedule
40 PVC (poly vinyl chloride) with an inside diameter of 102.26mm, outside diameter
of 114.3mm, and a minimum wall thickness of 6.02mm.
G403005 TOWERS, POLES AND STANDS
The tower, as specified in Part 3, G40, shall comply with ASCE/SEI 10-15 Design
of Latticed Steel Transmission Structures, and TIA-222-G Structural Standard for
Antenna Supporting Structures and Antennas and all associated addendums. Lightning
protection for the tower, antennas, and antenna cabling shall comply with
FAA-STRD-019E and NFPA 780. Design and provide tower in strict compliance with
OSHA and OPNAVINST 5100.23 for safety and occupational health.
See antenna tower attachments accompanying this RFP.

Al Dhafra, UAE
See Attachment Lightning Protection Specifications (customer furnished

information) for additional information pertaining to the in-line RF lightning
protection.
See Attachment Antenna J-box concept for antenna j-box layout.
See Attachment CDL Configuration for CDL build requirements and additional
information pertaining to the CDL wiring, RETA box, and mounting requirements.
G403006 TV CAMERAS AND MONITORS
Provide in accordance with Part 3 and Part 4, Section D50.
G403007 ELECTRONIC SECURITY SYSTEM (ESS)
Provide in accordance with Part 3 and Part 4, Section D50.
G403008 OTHER COMMUNICATION AND ALARM
T
Provide OSP bonding and grounding in accordance with all RUS standards, TIA-758-B,
AF
ANSI/TIA-606-B, ANSI/TIA-607-B, and the methods and best practices of
ANSI/NECA/BICSI-607-2011, Outside Plant Design Reference Manual, 5th Edition, and
drawing attachments in Part 6. All materials and components shall be UL listed
(or third party verifiable equivalent safety rating, evidence provided by the
Contractor). The underground distribution system shall have a complete bonding
and grounding system for all metallic cable components, splices, cable breaks,
maintenance holes and all manhole/handhole infrastructures. All manholes and
R
handholes shall be outfitted with a solid copper ground rod, 20mm x 3 meter shall
be installed in each and properly connected to the grounding/bonding hardware in
the manhole/handhole. A sump cover shall be provided for the sump.
D
G4090 OTHER ELECTRICAL UTILITIES
Not applicable.

Al Dhafra, UAE
SECTION Z10
GENERAL PERFORMANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

05/14
Z10 GENERAL
Z10 1.1 NARRATIVE
All Performance Technical Specification (PTS) sections must be used in

conjunction with all parts of the Design Build (D/B) Request for Proposal
(RFP) to determine the full requirements of this solicitation. This PTS
T
section provides general requirements for the other PTS sections of this
RFP and is used in conjunction with the other PTS sections.
AF
Refer to UFGS section 01 33 10.05 20, Design Submittal Procedures for the
Order of Precedence of the RFP Parts. Requirements listed in the Project
Program take precedence over the PTS sections requirements; therefore,
requirements identified in the Project Program eliminate options related
to that requirement in the PTS sections.
Z10 1.2 DESIGN GUIDANCE

R
Provide work in compliance with the following design standards and codes,
as a minimum. Government standards listed in this RFP take precedence over
industry standards.
D
The PTS Sections reference published standards, the titles of which can be
found in the Unified Master Reference List (UMRL)on the Whole Building Design
Guide at the Unified Facilities Guide Specification (UFGS) Website . The
publications referenced form a part of this specification to the extent
referenced. The publications are referred to in the section text by the
basic designation only. Industry standards, codes, and Government standards
referenced in the section text, and not found in the UMRL, are listed at
the beginning of the PTS sections.
The advisory provisions of all referenced codes, standards, and

specifications must be mandatory; substitute words such as "must", or
"required" for words such as "should", "may", or "recommended," wherever
they appear. The results of these wording substitutions incorporate these
code and standard statements as requirements. Reference to the "authority
having jurisdiction" for variance from criteria shall be interpreted to mean
the "Chief Engineer, NAVFAC" and for contractual obligations on this project
shall be interpreted to mean the "Contracting Officer". Comply with the
required and advisory portions of the current edition of the standard at
PART 4 - SECTION Z10 - Page 1

Al Dhafra, UAE
the time of contract award.
The following list of codes and standards is not comprehensive and is

augmented by other codes and standards referenced and cross-referenced in
the RFP.
Z10 1.2.1 INDUSTRY CODES
INTERNATIONAL BUILDING CODE (IBC) as modified by UFC 1-200-01. UFC

1-200-01 applies the IBC to the project and references other
commercial standards and UFC criteria that become part of the
contract.
Z10 1.2.2 INDUSTRY REQUIREMENTS
WHOLE BUILDING DESIGN GUIDE (WBDG)
WHOLE BUILDING DESIGN GUIDE, Ensure Occupant Safety and Health

(Systems Safety Engineering) at
http://www.wbdg.org/design/ensure_health.php
T
Z10 1.2.3 GOVERNMENT STANDARDS
AF
Z10 1.2.3.1 UNIFIED FACILITIES CRITERIA (UFC)
UFC 1-200-01 General Building Requirements(UFC

1-200-01 is a hub document that
provides general building
requirements and references other
critical UFCs. A reference to UFC
R
Tri-Service Core UFCs. A complete
list of these Tri-Service Core UFCs is
located in UFGS section 01 33 10.05 20)
D

Buildings
MED Design Instruction Manual
Z10 1.2.3.2 FEDERAL STANDARDS
Architectural Barriers Act Accessibility Standard with

DEPSECDEF Memorandum 31 Oct 2008, "Access for People with
Disabilities"
Occupational Safety and Health Association (OSHA)
Z10 1.3 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS IDENTIFICATION
Z10 1.3.1 MATERIALS STANDARD
Refer to the Project Program for identification of Government

Al Dhafra, UAE
Furnished Equipment.
The equipment items shall be supported by service organizations that

are convenient to the equipment installation in order to render
satisfactory service to the equipment on a regular and emergency basis
during the warranty period of the contract.
Materials, equipment, fixtures, and other appurtenances shall comply

with applicable Underwriters Laboratories, (UL) Inc., American
National Standards Institute, Inc., and National Electrical
Manufacturer's Association standards or applicable standards of a
similar independent testing organization. All materials shall be new,
and shall bear the label of Underwriters Laboratories whenever
standards have been established and label service is normally and
regularly furnished by the agency. All equipment provided shall be
listed and labeled suitable for the specified purpose, environment,
and application and installed in accordance with manufacturers
recommendations. Insulation shall be asbestos free.
Z10 1.3.2 EQUIPMENT NAMEPLATE IDENTIFICATION
T
Each item of equipment shall have a nameplate bearing the
manufacturer's name, address, model number, and serial number
AF
securely affixed in a conspicuous place. The nameplate of the
distributing agent will not be acceptable.
Z10 1.3.3 FIELD-APPLIED NAMEPLATES
Provide laminated plastic nameplates for each piece of equipment. Each

nameplate must identify the function and, when applicable, the number
designation of that piece of equipment as used in the design documents.
R
Provide melamine plastic nameplates, 0.125 inch (3 mm) thick, white
with black center core.
Z10 1.4 COMMISSIONING

D
Commission the building systems identified in the Project Program paragraph

2.2.3. Refer to UFGS section 01 45 00.00 10, Quality Control for
commissioning requirements. Test reports must be certified by the
Commissioning Authority (CA), that work is in compliance with requirements
of the RFP.
Z10 1.5 PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION AND ACCEPTANCE TESTS

via Performance Verification Testing, Acceptance Tests, and submittal of
test reports certified by the Designer of Record (DOR), that work is in
compliance with requirements of the RFP. The Government reserves the right
to witness all Performance Verification and Acceptance Tests, review data,
and request other such additional inspections and repeat tests as necessary
to ensure that the work and provided services conform to the stated
requirements. Contractor shall pay the cost of all testing.
Refer to each PTS section to identify Performance Verification and

Al Dhafra, UAE
Acceptance Testing required by the work specified in that PTS section.
Z10 1.6 SUBMITTALS
Contractor's design submittals that combines design and construction

submittals, must jointly comply with UFGS sections 01 33 00.05 20,
Construction Submittal Procedures and 01 33 10.05 20, Design Submittal
Procedures. Contractor's construction submittals that submitted separate
from the design submittals must comply with UFGS 01 33 00.05 20, Construction
Refer to "Construction Quality Control" in UFGS 01 33 00.05 20,

Construction Submittal Procedures and 01 45 00.05 20, Design and
Construction Quality Control to define reviewing and approving Authority
of design and construction submittals.
Utilize the same materials and equipment that are approved and provided for
an initial facility design, on all follow-on facilities that use the same
design with-in this contract. Once the initial facility design is approved
by the Government, the Contractor must obtain Government approval to change
T
materials and equipment when designing and constructing follow-on
facilities utilizing the same design.
AF
Z10 1.6.1 DESIGN SUBMITTALS
Design submittals shall be in accordance with Unified Facility Guide

Specification (UFGS) section 01 33 10.05 20, Design Submittal
Procedures, UFC 1-300-09N, Design Procedures, and other
discipline-specific guidelines listed in the applicable PTS sections.
UFGS Section 01 33 10.05 20, Design Submittal Procedures and some PTS
R
sections requires the use of UFGS sections in the development on the
contractor originated specification. The Designer of Record (DOR)
shall edit the UFGS sections for the project and submit the edited
specification as a part of the design submittal. The DOR shall edit
D
the UFGS as follows:
(1) Prepare UFGS Specifications as part of the project specification,
(2) Delete only portions of the UFGS specification that are not
applicable to the project,
(3) Edit only the bracketed choices that are within the UFGS
specification text,
(4) Edit blank bracketed options to include requirements that exercise

prudence and adherence to acceptable industry standards,
(5) Comply with the directions, directives, and requirements of all

UFGS Criteria Notes. The UFGS Criteria Notes are typically bordered
on the top and bottom by a line of asterisks to highlight their
location.
(6) If proprietary information is provided or required to streamline

Al Dhafra, UAE
the construction submittal process, include proprietary information

in the edited UFGS sections and added to the end of each UFGS section.
Confirm that the proprietary products, materials, and systems listed
in the specifications are in compliance with the requirements of the
RFP.
Z10 1.6.2 CONSTRUCTION SUBMITTALS
Submit for approval to the Designer of Record (DOR), construction

submittals, product data, manufacturer's information, shop drawings,
and test reports on all materials and systems installed in the project,
unless the DOR designates submittal for QC approval. Refer to each
PTS section for further construction submittal requirements relating
to the work identified in that particular PTS section. Some PTS
sections reference UFGS sections that will require more construction
submittals for DOR approval than is stated above. Refer to Section
01 33 00.05 20 for the list of construction submittals reserved for
Government Approval and Government Surveillance.
--End of Section--
T
AF
R
D

Al Dhafra, UAE
PART FIVE - PRESCRIPTIVE SPECIFICATIONS

UFGS 31 00 00 EARTHWORK
UFGS 31 31 16.13 CHEMICAL TERMITE CONTROL
UFGS 32 11 23 GRADED-CRUSHED AGGREGATE BASE COURSE
UFGS 32 12 10 BITUMINOUS TACK AND PRIME COATS
UFGS 32 12 15 HOT-MIX ASPHALT (HMA) FOR AIRFIELDS
UFGS 32 13 11 CONCRETE PAVEMENT FOR AIRFIELDS AND OTHER

HEAVY-DUTY PAVEMENTS
UFGS 32 13 73 COMPRESSION JOINT SEALS FOR CONCRETE PAVEMENTS
T
AF
R
D
PART FIVE - PRESCRIPTIVE SPECIFICATIONS - Page 1

DIVISION 31 - EARTHWORK
SECTION 31 00 00
EARTHWORK
08/08
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
1.2 DEFINITIONS
1.2.1 Satisfactory Materials/ Select Granular Material
1.2.2 Unsatisfactory Materials
1.2.3 Cohesionless and Cohesive Materials
1.2.4 Degree of Compaction
T
1.2.5 Hard/Unyielding Materials
1.2.6 Rock
1.2.7 Unstable Material
1.2.8 Initial Backfill Material (Utilities)
1.2.9
AF
Expansive Soils
1.2.10 Nonfrost Susceptible (NFS) Material
1.2.11 Gypsiferous Soils
1.3 SITE AND SUBSURFACE INFORMATION
1.3.1 Classification of Excavation
1.3.2 Blasting
1.4 SUBMITTALS
R
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 BURIED WARNING AND IDENTIFICATION TAPE

2.1.1 Detectable Warning Tape
D
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL EXCAVATION

3.1.1 Trench Excavation Requirements
3.1.1.1 Bottom Preparation
3.1.1.2 Removal of Unyielding Material
3.1.1.3 Removal of Unstable Material
3.1.1.4 Excavation for Appurtenances
3.1.1.5 Jacking, Boring, and Tunneling
3.1.2 Underground Utilities
3.1.3 Structural Excavation
3.2 SELECTION OF BORROW MATERIAL
3.3 OPENING AND DRAINAGE OF EXCAVATION AND BORROW PITS
3.4 SHORING
3.4.1 General Requirements
3.4.2 Geotechnical Engineer
3.5 GRADING AREAS
3.6 FINAL GRADE OF SURFACES TO SUPPORT CONCRETE
3.7 GROUND SURFACE PREPARATION
3.7.2 Frozen Material
3.8 UTILIZATION OF EXCAVATED MATERIALS

3.9 BURIED TAPE AND DETECTION WIRE
3.9.1 Buried Warning and Identification Tape
3.9.2 Buried Detection Wire
3.10 BACKFILLING AND COMPACTION
3.10.1 Trench Backfill
3.10.1.1 Replacement of Unyielding Material
3.10.1.2 Replacement of Unstable Material
3.10.1.3 Bedding and Initial Backfill
3.10.1.4 Final Backfill
3.10.2 Backfill for Appurtenances
3.11 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS
3.11.1 Water Lines
3.11.2 Electrical Distribution System
3.12 SUBGRADE PREPARATION
3.12.1 Construction
3.12.2 Required Compaction and Moisture Content
3.12.2.1 Subgrade for Airfield and Vehicular Pavements
3.13 FINISHING
3.13.1 Subgrade and Embankments
3.13.2 Grading Around Structures
T
3.14 TESTING
3.14.1 In-Place Densities
3.14.2 Check Tests on In-Place Densities
3.14.3 Moisture Contents
3.14.4
AF
Optimum Moisture and Laboratory Maximum Density
3.15 SUBGRADE AND EMBANKMENT PROTECTION
3.16 CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROL PERSONNEL

R
D
SECTION 31 00 00
EARTHWORK
08/08
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

basic designation only. The most current versions of the publications
shall be used.
AMERICAN WATER WORKS ASSOCIATION (AWWA)
AWWA C600 Installation of Ductile-Iron Water Mains

and Their Appurtenances
T
ASTM C 117 Standard Test Method for Materials Finer

AF than 75-um (No. 200) Sieve in Mineral
Aggregates by Washing
ASTM C 136 Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of

Fine and Coarse Aggregates
ASTM D 422 Particle-Size Analysis of Soils

R
ASTM D 1140 Amount of Material in Soils Finer than the
No. 200 (75-micrometer) Sieve
ASTM D 1556 Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place

by the Sand-Cone Method
D
ASTM D 1557 Standard Test Methods for Laboratory

Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using
Modified Effort (56,000 ft-lbf/ft3) (2700
kN-m/m3)
ASTM D 2216 Laboratory Determination of Water

(Moisture) Content of Soil and Rock by Mass
ASTM D 2487 Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified

Soil Classification System)
ASTM D 4318 Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and

Plasticity Index of Soils
ASTM D 6938 Standard Test Method for In-Place Density

and Water Content of Soil and
Soil-Aggregate by Nuclear Methods (Shallow
Depth)
BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTE (BSI)
BS 812-118 Testing Aggregates Part 118: Method

for Detemination of Sulphate Content
1.2 DEFINITIONS
1.2.1 Satisfactory Materials/ Select Granular Material
Materials classified according to ASTM D 2487 using ASTM D 422, ASTM D 1140,
ASTM C 136, ASTM C 117 and ASTM D 4318 as GW, GP, GM, SP, and SW are
satisfactory. Materials classified as GC, SC, ML, and CL are satisfactory
when natural (not man-made) and in-situ, but are otherwise unsatisfactory
for fill and backfill. The plasticity index shall not exceed 12 and the
liquid limit shall not exceed 35. Particles shall not be larger than 75 mm
in any dimension, with 70 percent to 100 percent passing the 19 mm sieve.
Not more than 25 percent by weight shall pass the 0.075 mm (No. 200) sieve.
Sieves shall conform to ASTM E 11.
1.2.2 Unsatisfactory Materials
T
Materials which do not comply with the requirements for satisfactory
materials are unsatisfactory. Unsatisfactory materials also include
man-made fills, trash, refuse, backfills from previous construction, rock
fragments classified in accordance with ASTM D 2487 as cobbles or boulders,
AF
lenses or pockets of gypsum, gypsiferous solid, expansive soils, and
material classified as satisfactory which contains roots and other organic
matter or frozen material. Material classified as SC and GC are
unsatisfactory when more than 25 percent of the material passes the 0.075
mm sieve. Materials included in the paragraph Satisfactory Materials which
are in a saturated, dry, uncompacted, disturbed, or otherwise unacceptable
condition at the time of construction, are unstatisfactory. The
Contracting Officer shall be notified of any contaminated materials.
R
1.2.3 Cohesionless and Cohesive Materials
Cohesionless materials include materials classified according to ASTM D 2487

as GW, GP, SW, and SP. Cohesive materials include materials classified as
D
GC, SC, ML, CL, MH, and CH. Materials classified as GM and SM will be
identified as cohesionless only when the fines are non-plastic. Perform
material classifying tests in accordance with ASTM D 4318, ASTM C 136,
ASTM D 422, and ASTM D 1140.
Degree of compaction required is expressed as a percentage of the maximum

density obtained by the test procedure presented in ASTM D 1557 Method C
abbreviated as a percent of laboratory maximum density.
1.2.5 Hard/Unyielding Materials
Hard/Unyielding materials include weathered rock or dense consolidated

deposits. Conglomerate materials with stones greater than 75 mm in any
dimension and are not included in the definition of "Rock" are also
considered Hard/Unyielding materials. These materials usually require the
use of heavy excavation equipment, ripper teeth, or jack hammers for
removal.
1.2.6 Rock
Rock includes solid homogeneous interlocking crystalline material with

firmly cemented, laminated, or foliated masses. Conglomerate deposits,
large boulders, buried masonry, or concrete (other than pavement) exceeding
0.375 cubic meters in volume are also defined as "Rock". Materials
classified as "Rock" cannot be removed without drilling and the use of
expansion jacks or feather wedges, or the use of backhoe-mounted pneumatic
hole punchers or rock breakers. Removal of hard material will not be
considered rock excavation because intermittent drilling is performed
merely to increase production.
1.2.7 Unstable Material
Unstable material are too wet to properly support the utility pipe,
conduit, or appurtenant structure.
1.2.8 Initial Backfill Material (Utilities)
Initial backfill consists of select granular material or satisfactory

materials free from rocks 12 mm or larger in any dimension or free from
T
rocks of such size as recommended by the pipe manufacturer, whichever is
smaller.
1.2.9 Expansive Soils

AF
Expansive soils are defined as soils that have a plasticity index equal to
or greater than 25 when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4318.
1.2.10 Nonfrost Susceptible (NFS) Material
Nonfrost susceptible material are a uniformly graded washed granular soils

with a maximum particle size of 75 mm and less than 5 percent passing the
R
0.075 mm size sieve, and with not more than 3 percent by weight finer than
0.02 mm grain size.
1.2.11 Gypsiferous Soils

D
Gypsiferous soils are those found to contain 10 percent or more gypsum as

determined by visual inspection. If there is disagreement with the
classification by visual inspection, the following test shall apply. A 1000
gram sample shall be heated to 110 degrees centigrade for 24 hours. At this
point the sample will be broken apart. The gypsum can be identified by its
white color. The gypsum content can be determined by weight from a chemical
analysis performed in accordance with BS 812-118, if necessary, to
establish exact quantities. All testing will be done at the expense of the
Contractor.
1.3 SITE AND SUBSURFACE INFORMATION
Subsurface soil boring logs are presented in PART 6 ATTACHMENTS . The

subsoil investigation report and samples of materials taken from subsurface
investigations may be examined at MED. These data represent the best
subsurface information available; however, variations may exist in the
subsurface between boring locations. These documents are for information
only.
1.3.1 Classification of Excavation
No consideration will be given to the nature of the materials, and all

excavation will be designated as unclassified excavation.
1.3.2 Blasting
Blasting will not be permitted.
1.4 SUBMITTALS

Shoring; G M/R
T
Submit 15 days prior to starting work.
SD-03 Product Data

AF
Utilization of Excavated Materials
Opening of any Excavation or Borrow Pit
Procedure and location for disposal of unused satisfactory

material. Proposed source of borrow material. Notification of
encountering rock in the project. Advance notice on the opening
of excavation or borrow areas. Advance notice on shoulder
R
construction for rigid pavements.
SD-06 Test Reports
Testing; G M
D
Borrow Site Testing; G M
Within 24 hours of conclusion of physical tests, 2 copies of

test results, including calibration curves and results of
calibration tests. Results of testing at the borrow site.
SD-07 Certificates
Testing
Qualifications of the Corps validated commercial testing

laboratory or the Contractor's validated testing facilities.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 BURIED WARNING AND IDENTIFICATION TAPE
Provide metallic core or metallic-faced, acid- and alkali-resistant,

polyethylene plastic warning tape manufactured specifically for warning and
identification of buried utility lines. Provide tape on rolls, 75 mm
minimum width, color coded as specified below for the intended utility with
warning and identification imprinted in bold black letters continuously

over the entire tape length. Warning and identification to read, "CAUTION,
BURIED (intended service) LINE BELOW" or similar wording. Provide
permanent color and printing, unaffected by moisture or soil.
Warning Tape Color Codes
Red: Electric
Orange: Telephone and Other Communications
Blue: Water Systems
Green: Sewer Systems
2.1.1 Detectable Warning Tape
Provide acid and alkali-resistant polyethylene plastic tape conforming to

the width, color, and printing requirements specified above, with a minimum
thickness of 0.10 mm and a minimum strength of 10.3 MPa lengthwise, and 8.6
MPa crosswise, with a maximum 350 percent elongation. Manufacture tape with
integral wires, foil backing, or other means of enabling detection by a
metal detector when tape is buried up to 920 mm deep. Encase metallic
element of the tape in a protective jacket or provide with other means of
T
corrosion protection.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
AF
GENERAL EXCAVATION
Perform excavation of every type of material encountered within the limits

of the project to the lines, grades, and elevations indicated and as
specified. Perform the grading in accordance with the typical sections
shown and the tolerances specified in paragraph FINISHING. Transport
satisfactory excavated materials and place in fill or embankment within the
limits of the work. Excavate unsatisfactory materials encountered within
R
the limits of the work below grade and replace with satisfactory materials
as directed. Include such excavated material and the satisfactory material
ordered as replacement in excavation. Disposal of surplus satisfactory and
unsatisfactory shall be outside the limits of construction and is the
Contractor's responsibility. The Contractor shall coordinate with the
D
local Government or authorities concerning the location and time of

disposal. During construction, perform excavation and fill in a manner and
sequence that will provide proper drainage at all times. Obtaining borrow
and/or fill material is the responsiblity of the Contractor.
3.1.1 Trench Excavation Requirements
Excavate trenches to the depths and widths recommended by the pipe

manufacturer. Where no manufacturer's installation manual is available,
trench walls may either be sloped to below the top of the pipe, or made
vertical. Shore vertical trench walls more than 1.5 meters high. Trench walls
which are sloped should be cut back to at least the angle of repose of the
soil. Give special attention to slopes which may be adversely affected by
weather or moisture content. For pipes having an inside diameter less than
600 mm, do not exceed a trench width of 600 mm plus the outside diameter of
the pipe. For pipes having inside diameters larger than 600 mm, do not exceed
900 mm plus outside diameter of the pipe. Where recommended trench widths are
exceeded the Contractor shall provide redesigns, stronger pipe, or special
installation procedures. The Contractor is responsible for the cost of
redesign, stronger pipe, or special installation procedures without any
3.1.1.1 Bottom Preparation
Grade the bottoms of trenches accurately to provide uniform bearing and

support for the bottom quadrant of each section of the pipe. Excavate bell
holes to the necessary size at each joint or coupling to eliminate point
bearing. Remove stones of 75 mm or greater in any dimension, or as
recommended by the pipe manufacturer, whichever is smaller, to avoid point
bearing.
3.1.1.2 Removal of Unyielding Material
Where unyielding material is encountered in the bottom of the trench,

remove such material 150 mm below the required grade and replaced with
suitable materials as provided in paragraph BACKFILLING AND COMPACTION.
3.1.1.3 Removal of Unstable Material
Where unstable material is encountered in the bottom of the trench, remove

such material to the depth directed and replace it to the proper grade with
select granular material as provided in paragraph BACKFILLING AND
T
COMPACTION. When removal of unstable material is required due to the
Contractor's fault or neglect in performing the work, the Contractor is
responsible for excavating the resulting material and replacing it without
AF
3.1.1.4 Excavation for Appurtenances
Provide excavation for manholes, catch-basins, inlets, or similar

structures of sufficient size to permit the placement and removal of forms
for the full length and width of structure footings and foundations as
shown. Clean rock of loose debris and cut to a firm surface either level,
stepped, or serrated, as shown or as directed. Remove loose disintegrated
R
rock and thin strata. Specify removal of unstable material. When concrete
or masonry is to be placed in an excavated area, take special care not to
disturb the bottom of the excavation. Do not excavate to the final grade
level until just before the concrete or masonry is to be placed.
D
3.1.1.5 Jacking, Boring, and Tunneling
Unless otherwise indicated, provide excavation by open cut except that

sections of a trench may be jacked, bored, or tunneled if, in the opinion
of the Contracting Officer, the pipe, cable, or duct can be safely and
properly installed and backfill can be properly compacted in such sections.
3.1.2 Underground Utilities
The Contractor is responsible for movement of construction machinery and

equipment over pipes and utilities during construction. Excavation made
with power-driven equipment is not permitted within 600 mm of known
Government-owned utility or subsurface construction. For work immediately
adjacent to or for excavations exposing a utility or other buried
obstruction, excavate by hand. Start hand excavation on each side of the
indicated obstruction and continue until the obstruction is uncovered or
until clearance for the new grade is assured. Support uncovered lines or
other existing work affected by the contract excavation until approval for
backfill is granted by the Contracting Officer. Report damage to utility
lines or subsurface construction immediately to the Contracting Officer.
3.1.3 Structural Excavation
Ensure that footing subgrades have been inspected and approved by the
Contracting Officer prior to concrete placement.
3.2 SELECTION OF BORROW MATERIAL
Select borrow material to meet the requirements and conditions of the

particular fill or embankment for which it is to be used is the
Contractor's responsibility. The Contractor is responsible for obtaining
the right to procure material, pay royalties and other charges involved,
and bear the expense of developing the sources, including rights-of-way for
hauling from the owners.
3.3 OPENING AND DRAINAGE OF EXCAVATION AND BORROW PITS
Except as otherwise permitted, excavate borrow pits and other excavation

areas providing adequate drainage. Transport overburden and other spoil
material to designated spoil areas or otherwise dispose of as directed.
Provide neatly trimmed and drained borrow pits after the excavation is
completed. Ensure that excavation of any area, operation of borrow pits,
T
or dumping of spoil material results in minimum detrimental effects on
natural environmental conditions.
3.4 SHORING
AF
Submit a Shoring and Sheeting plan for approval 15 days prior to starting
work. Submit drawings and calculations, certified by a registered
professional engineer, describing the methods for shoring and sheeting of
excavations. Finish shoring, including sheet piling, and install as
necessary to protect workmen, banks, adjacent paving, structures, and
R
utilities. Remove shoring, bracing, and sheeting as excavations are
backfilled, in a manner to prevent caving.
3.4.2 Geotechnical Engineer

D
Hire a Professional Geotechnical Engineer to provide inspection of

excavations and soil/groundwater conditions throughout construction. The
Geotechnical Engineer is responsible for performing pre-construction and
periodic site visits throughout construction to assess site conditions.
The Geotechnical Engineer is responsible for updating the excavation,
sheeting and dewatering plans as construction progresses to reflect
changing conditions and submit an updated plan if necessary. Submit a
monthly written report, informing the Contractor and Contracting Officer of
the status of the plan and an accounting of the Contractor's adherence to
the plan addressing any present or potential problems. The Contracting
Officer is responsible for arranging meetings with the Geotechnical
Engineer at any time throughout the contract duration.
3.5 GRADING AREAS
Where indicated, divide work into grading areas within which satisfactory
excavated material will be placed in embankments, fills, and required
backfills. Do not haul satisfactory material excavated in one grading area
to another grading area except when so directed in writing. Place and
grade stockpiles of satisfactory and unsatisfactory as specified. Keep
stockpiles in a neat and well drained condition, giving due consideration
to drainage at all times. Clear, grub, and seal by rubber-tired equipment,

the ground surface at stockpile locations; separately stockpile excavated
satisfactory and unsatisfactory materials. Protect stockpiles of
satisfactory materials from contamination which may destroy the quality and
fitness of the stockpiled material. If the Contractor fails to protect the
stockpiles, and any material becomes unsatisfactory, remove and replace
such material with satisfactory material from approved sources.
3.6 FINAL GRADE OF SURFACES TO SUPPORT CONCRETE
Do not excavate to final grade until just before concrete is to be placed.
3.7 GROUND SURFACE PREPARATION
Remove and replace unsatisfactory material with satisfactory materials, as

directed by the Contracting Officer, in surfaces to receive fill or in
excavated areas. Scarify the surface to a depth of 150 mm before the fill
is started. Plow, step, bench, or break up sloped surfaces steeper than 1
vertical to 4 horizontal so that the fill material will bond with the
T
existing material. When subgrades are less than the specified density,
break up the ground surface to a minimum depth of 150 mm, pulverizing, and
compacting to the specified density. When the subgrade is part fill and
part excavation or natural ground, scarify the excavated or natural ground
AF
portion to a depth of 300 mm and compact it as specified for the adjacent
fill.
3.7.2 Frozen Material
Do not place material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain

frost. Finish compaction by sheepsfoot rollers, pneumatic-tired rollers,
steel-wheeled rollers, or other approved equipment well suited to the soil
R
being compacted.
3.8 UTILIZATION OF EXCAVATED MATERIALS
The Contractor is responsible for the disposal of unsatisfactory material.

D
Use satisfactory material removed from excavations, insofar as practicable,

in the construction of fills, embankments, subgrades, shoulders, bedding
(as backfill), and for similar purposes. Do not waste any satisfactory
excavated material without specific written authorization. Dispose of
satisfactory material is the Contractor's responsibility.
3.9 BURIED TAPE AND DETECTION WIRE
3.9.1 Buried Warning and Identification Tape
Provide buried utility lines with utility identification tape. Bury tape
300 mm below finished grade; under pavements and slabs, bury tape 150 mm
below top of subgrade.
3.9.2 Buried Detection Wire
Bury detection wire directly above non-metallic piping at a distance not to

exceed 300 mm above the top of pipe. Extend the wire continuously and
unbroken, from manhole to manhole. Terminate the ends of the wire inside
the manholes at each end of the pipe, with a minimum of 0.9 m of wire,
coiled, remaining accessible in each manhole. Furnish insulated wire over
it's entire length. Install wires at manholes between the top of the
corbel and the frame, and extend up through the chimney seal between the
frame and the chimney seal. For force mains, terminate the wire in the
valve pit at the pump station end of the pipe.
3.10 BACKFILLING AND COMPACTION
Place backfill adjacent to any and all types of structures, and compact to
at least 95 percent laboratory maximum density, to prevent wedging action
or eccentric loading upon or against the structure. Prepare ground surface
on which backfill is to be placed as specified in paragraph GROUND SURFACE
PREPARATION. Provide compaction requirements for backfill materials in
conformance with the applicable portions of paragraphs GROUND SURFACE
PREPARATION. Finish compaction by sheepsfoot rollers, pneumatic-tired
rollers, steel-wheeled rollers, vibratory compactors, or other approved
equipment.
3.10.1 Trench Backfill
Backfill the trench to 600 mm above the top of pipe prior to performing the
required pressure tests. Leave the joints and couplings uncovered during
T
the pressure test. Do not backfill the trench until all specified tests are
performed. Backfill trenches to the grade shown.
3.10.1.1 Replacement of Unyielding Material

AF
Replace unyielding material removed from the bottom of the trench with
select granular material or initial backfill material.
3.10.1.2 Replacement of Unstable Material
Replace unstable material removed from the bottom of the trench or

excavation with select granular material placed in layers not exceeding 150
R
mm loose thickness.
3.10.1.3 Bedding and Initial Backfill
Place initial backfill material and compact it with approved tampers to a

D
height of at least 300 mm above the utility pipe or conduit. Bring up the
backfill evenly on both sides of the pipe for the full length of the pipe.
Take care to ensure thorough compaction of the fill under the haunches of
the pipe. Except as specified otherwise in the individual piping section, p
place bedding for buried piping in accordance with AWWA C600, Type 4,
except as specified herein. Compact backfill to top of pipe to 95 percent
of ASTM D 1557 maximum density.
3.10.1.4 Final Backfill
Fill the remainder of the trench, except for special materials for
roadways, railroads and airfields, with satisfactory material. Place
backfill material and compact as follows:
a. Roadways and Airfields: Deposite backfill in layers of a maximum of

150 mm loose thickness, and compact to 95 percent maximum density. Do
not permit water flooding or jetting method of compaction.
b. Sidewalks, Turfed or Seeded Areas and Miscellaneous Areas: Deposit

backfill in layers of a maximum of 150 mm loose thickness, and compact
it to 90 percent maximum density. Do not permit compaction by water
flooding or jetting. Apply this requirement to all other areas not

specifically designated above.
3.10.2 Backfill for Appurtenances
After the manhole, catchbasin, inlet, or similar structure has been

constructed and the concrete has been allowed to cure for 14 days, place
backfill in such a manner that the structure is not be damaged by the shock
of falling earth. Deposit the backfill material, compact it as specified
for final backfill, and bring up the backfill evenly on all sides of the
structure to prevent eccentric loading and excessive stress.
3.11 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS
Special requirements for both excavation and backfill relating to the

specific utilities are as follows:
3.11.1 Water Lines
Excavate trenches to a depth that provides a minimum cover of 900 mm from

the existing ground surface, or from the indicated finished grade,
T
whichever is lower, to the top of the pipe.
3.11.2 Electrical Distribution System

AF
Provide a minimum cover of 600 mm from the finished grade to direct burial
cable and conduit or duct line, unless otherwise indicated.
3.12 SUBGRADE PREPARATION
3.12.1 Construction
Shape subgrade to line, grade, and cross section, and compact as

R
specified. Include plowing, disking, and any moistening or aerating
required to obtain specified compaction for this operation. Remove soft or
otherwise unsatisfactory material and replace with satisfactory excavated
material or other approved material as directed. Excavate rock encountered
in the cut section to a depth of 150 mm below finished grade for the
D
subgrade. Bring up low areas resulting from removal of unsatisfactory

material or excavation of rock to required grade with satisfactory
materials, and shape the entire subgrade to line, grade, and cross section
and compact as specified. Do not vary the elevation of the finish subgrade
more than 15 mm from the established grade and cross section.
3.12.2 Required Compaction and Moisture Content
The required degree of compaction is 95 percent of maximum density as

determined by ASTM D 1557 unless otherwise stated within this specification
or on the drawings. The required moisture content at time and location of
compaction shall be uniform throughout the material and within plus 2 and
minus 1 percent of optimum moisture as determined by ASTM D 1557. Water
shall be added to the stockpile or the borrow area and adjusted, if
necessary in each layer. Brine water, brackish ground water, sea water,
sewer effluent, or otherwise unsatisfactory water is not permitted.
3.12.2.1 Subgrade for Airfield and Vehicular Pavements
Compact subgrade for pavements to at least 95 percentage laboratory maximum

density for the depth below the surface of the pavement shown. When more
than one soil classification is present in the subgrade, thoroughly blend,

reshape, and compact the top 150 mm of subgrade.
3.13 FINISHING
Finish the surface of excavations, embankments, and subgrades to a smooth

and compact surface in accordance with the lines, grades, and cross
sections or elevations shown. Provide the degree of finish for graded
areas within 30 mm of the grades and elevations indicated except that the
degree of finish for subgrades specified in paragraph SUBGRADE
PREPARATION. Finish gutters and ditches in a manner that will result in
effective drainage. Finish the surface of areas to be turfed from
settlement or washing to a smoothness suitable for the application of
turfing materials. Repair graded, topsoiled, or backfilled areas prior to
acceptance of the work, and re-established grades to the required
elevations and slopes.
3.13.1 Subgrade and Embankments
During construction, keep embankments and excavations shaped and drained.

Maintain ditches and drains along subgrade to drain effectively at all
T
times. Do no disturb the finished subgrade by traffic or other operation.
Protect and maintain the finsihed subgrade in a satisfactory condition
until ballast, subbase, base, or pavement is placed. Do not permit the
storage or stockpiling of materials on the finished subgrade. Do not lay
AF
subbase, base course, ballast, or pavement until the subgrade has been
checked and approved, and in no case place subbase, base, surfacing,
pavement, or ballast on a muddy, spongy, or frozen subgrade.
3.13.2 Grading Around Structures
Construct areas within 1.5 m outside of each building and structure line
true-to-grade, shape to drain, and maintain free of trash and debris until
R
final inspection has been completed and the work has been accepted.
3.14 TESTING
Testing shall be the responsiblity of the Contractor and shall be performed

D
by a Corps approved commercial testing laboratory or the Contractor's

validated testing facility. If the Contractor elects to establish testing
facilities, do not permit work requiring testing until the Contractor's
facilities have been inspected, Corps validated and approved by the
Contracting Officer. Field in-place density shall be determined in
accordance with ASTM D 1556 or ASTM D 6938. When ASTM D 6938 is used,
check the calibration curves and adjust using only the sand cone method as
described in ASTM D 1556. The calibration checks of both the density and
moisture gauges shall be made at the beginning of a job on each different
type of material encountered and at intervals as directed by the
Contracting Officer. When test results indicate, as determined by the
Contracting Officer, that compaction is not as specified, the material
shall be removed, replaced and recompacted to meet specification
requirements at no additional expense to the Government. Tests on
recompacted areas shall be performed to determine conformance with
specification requirements. The following number of tests, if performed at
the appropriate time, will be the minimum acceptable for each type
operation.
3.14.1 In-Place Densities
a. One test per 185 square meters, or fraction thereof, of each lift
of fill or backfill areas compacted by other than hand-operated
machines.
b. One test per 100 square meters, or fraction thereof, of each lift
of fill or backfill areas compacted by hand-operated machines.
c. One test per 350 linear meters, or fraction thereof, of each lift
of embankment or backfill for roads and airfields.
d. One test per 200 linear meters, or fraction thereof, of each lift
of embankment or backfill for railroads.
3.14.2 Check Tests on In-Place Densities
If ASTM D 6938 is used, check in-place densities by ASTM D 1556 as follows:
a. One check test for every seven ASTM D 6938 test of each lift of
fill or backfill compacted.
T
3.14.3 Moisture Contents
In the stockpile, excavation, or borrow areas, perform a minimum of two

AF
tests per day per type of material or source of material being placed
during stable weather conditions in accordance with ASTM D 2216. During
unstable weather, perform tests as dictated by local conditions and
3.14.4 Optimum Moisture and Laboratory Maximum Density
Perform tests for each type material or source of material including borrow
R
material to determine the optimum moisture and laboratory maximum density
values in accordance with ASTM D 1557. One representative test per 1150
cubic meters of fill and backfill, or when any change in material occurs
which may affect the optimum moisture content or laboratory maximum density.
D
3.15 SUBGRADE AND EMBANKMENT PROTECTION
During construction, embankments and excavations shall be kept shaped and

drained. Ditches and drains along subgrade shall be maintained to drain
effectively at all times. The finished subgrade shall not be disturbed by
traffic or other operation and shall be protected and maintained by the
Contractor in a satisfactory condition until, subbase, base, or pavement is
placed. The storage or stockpiling of materials on the finished subgrade
will not be permitted. No subbase, base course, or pavement shall be laid
until the subgrade has been checked and approved, and in no case shall
subbase, base, surfacing, or pavement be placed on a muddy or spongy
subgrade.
3.16 CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROL PERSONNEL
A minimum of one person from the Contractor Quality Control staff shall be
dedicated full-time to the execution requirements of this specification.
This person shall have over five (5) years of experience in earthwork
construction activities similar to that of this project.
DIVISION 31 - EARTHWORK
SECTION 31 31 16.13
CHEMICAL TERMITE CONTROL
11/14
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
1.2 SUBMITTALS
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.3.2 Safety Requirements
T
1.4.1 Delivery
1.4.2 Inspection
1.4.3 Storage
1.4.4 Handling
1.5 SITE CONDITIONS
AF
1.5.1 Soil Moisture
1.5.2 Runoff and Wind Drift
1.5.2.1 Vapor Barriers and Waterproof Membranes
1.5.2.2 Utilities and Vents
1.5.3 Placement of Concrete
1.6 WARRANTY
R
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 TERMITICIDES
PART 3 EXECUTION
D
3.1 VERIFICATION OF MEASUREMENT

3.2 TECHNICAL REPRESENTATIVE
3.3 SITE PREPARATION
3.3.1 Ground Preparation
3.3.2 Verification
3.3.3 Foundation Exterior
3.3.4 Utilities and Vents
3.3.5 Crawl and Plenum Air Spaces
3.3.6 Application Plan
3.4 TERMITICIDE TREATMENT
3.4.1 Equipment Calibration and Tank Measurement
3.4.2 Mixing and Application
3.4.3 Treatment Method
3.4.3.1 Surface Application
3.4.3.2 Rodding and Trenching
3.4.4 Sampling
3.5 CLEAN UP, DISPOSAL, AND PROTECTION
3.5.1 Clean Up
3.5.2 Disposal of Termiticide
3.5.3 Protection of Treated Area
SECTION 31 31 16.13 Page 1

3.6 CONDITIONS FOR SATISFACTORY TREATMENT

3.6.1 Equipment Calibrations and Measurements
3.6.2 Testing
3.6.3 Disturbance of Treated Soils
3.6.4 Termites Found Within the Warranty Period
3.7 RE-TREATMENT
T
AF
R
D

SECTION 31 31 16.13
CHEMICAL TERMITE CONTROL

11/14
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

DODI 4150.07 DOD Pest Management Program
1.2 SUBMITTALS
T
AF
SD-03 Product Data

R
Termiticide Application Plan; G R
Termiticides
Foundation Exterior
Utilities and Vents
Crawl and Plenum Air Spaces
D
Verification of Measurement
Application Equipment
Warranty
SD-04 Samples
Termiticides
SD-06 Test Reports
Equipment Calibration and Tank Measurement

Soil Moisture
Quality Assurance
SD-07 Certificates
Qualifications
Comply with DODI 4150.07 for requirements on Contractor's licensing,

certification, and record keeping. Maintain daily records using the Pest
Management Maintenance Record, DD Form 1532-1, or a computer generated
equivalent, and submit copies of records when requested by the Contracting
Officer. These forms may be obtained from the main web site:
http://www.dtic.mil/whs/directives/forms/index.htm
Upon completion of this work, submit the Pest Management Report DD Form
1532, or an equivalent computer product, to the Integrated Pest Management
Coordinator. This form identifies the target pest, type of operation,
brand name and manufacturer of pesticide, formulation, concentration or
rate of application used.
For the application of pesticides, use the services of a applicator whose

principal business is pest control. The applicator shall be licensed and
certified in the state where the work is to be performed. Termiticide
applicators shall also be certified in the U.S. Environmental Protection
Agency (EPA) pesticide applicator category which includes structural pest
T
control. Submit a copy of the pest control business license and pesticide
applicator certificate(s).
1.3.2 Safety Requirements

AF
Formulate, treat, and dispose of termiticides and their containers in
accordance with label directions. Draw water for formulating only from
sites designated by the Contracting Officer, and fit the filling hose with
a backflow preventer meeting local plumbing codes or standards. The
filling operation shall be under the direct and continuous observation of a
contractor's representative to prevent overflow. Secure pesticides and
related materials under lock and key when unattended. Ensure that proper
R
protective clothing and equipment are worn and used during all phases of
termiticide application. Dispose of used pesticide containers off
Government property.

D
1.4.1 Delivery
Deliver termiticide material to the site in the original unopened

containers bearing legible labels indicating the EPA registration number
and manufacturer's registered uses. All other materials, to be used on
site for the purpose of termite control, shall be delivered in new or
otherwise good condition as supplied by the manufacturer or formulator.
1.4.2 Inspection
Inspect termiticides upon arrival at the job site for conformity to type
and quality in accordance with paragraph TERMITICIDES. Each label shall
bear evidence of registration under the Federal Insecticide, Fungicide, and
Rodenticide Act (FIFRA), as amended or under appropriate regulations of the
host county. Other materials shall be inspected for conformance with
specified requirements. Remove unacceptable materials from the job site.
1.4.3 Storage
Contractors shall not store pesticides on the installation unless it is

written into the contract.
1.4.4 Handling
Termiticides shall be handled and mixed in accordance with the

manufacturer's label and SDS, preventing contamination by dirt, water, and
organic material. Protect termiticides from weather elements as
recommended by the manufacturer's label and SDS. Spill kits must be
maintained on pest control vehicles and must be available at the mixing
site. Termiticide mixing must be conducted in an area with adequate spill
containment..
1.5 SITE CONDITIONS
The following conditions will determine the time of application.
1.5.1 Soil Moisture
Soils to be treated shall be tested immediately before application. Test

soil moisture content to a minimum depth of 75 mm. The soil moisture shall
be as recommended by the termiticide manufacturer. The termiticide will
T
not be applied when soil moisture exceeds manufacturer's recommendations
because termiticides do not adhere to the soil particles in saturated soils.
1.5.2 Runoff and Wind Drift

AF
Do not apply termiticide during or immediately following heavy rains.
Applications shall not be performed when conditions may cause runoff or
create an environmental hazard. Applications shall not be performed when
average wind speed exceeds 16 km per hour. The termiticide shall not be
allowed to enter water systems, aquifers, or endanger humans or animals.
1.5.2.1 Vapor Barriers and Waterproof Membranes

R
Termiticide shall be applied prior to placement of a vapor barrier or
waterproof membrane.
1.5.2.2 Utilities and Vents

D
Prior to application, HVAC ducts and vents located in treatment area shall
be turned off and blocked to protect people and animals from termiticide.
Submit written verification that utilities and vents have been located and
treated as specified.
1.5.3 Placement of Concrete
Place concrete covering treated soils as soon as the termiticide has

reached maximum penetration into the soil. Time for maximum penetration
shall be as recommended by the manufacturer.
1.6 WARRANTY
The Contractor shall provide a 3 -year written warranty against

infestations or reinfestations by subterranean termites of the buildings or
building additions constructed under this contract. Warranty shall include
annual inspections of the buildings or building additions. If live
subterranean termite infestation or subterranean termite damage is
discovered during the warranty period, and the soil and building conditions
have not been altered in the interim:

a. Retreat the soil and perform other treatment as may be necessary for
elimination of subterranean termite infestation;
b. Repair damage caused by termite infestation; and
c. Reinspect the building approximately 180 days after the retreatment.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 TERMITICIDES
Submit manufacturer's label and Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for
termiticides proposed for use. Provide termiticides currently registered
by the EPA or approved for such use by the appropriate agency of the host
county. Non-repellant termiticides shall be selected for maximum
effectiveness and duration after application. The selected termiticide
shall be suitable for the soil and climatic conditions at the project site
and applied at the highest labeled rate. Submit samples of the pesticides
used in this work. The Contracting Officer may draw, at any time and
without prior notice, from stocks at the job site; should analysis,
T
performed by the Government, indicate such samples to contain less than the
amount of active ingredient specified on the label, work performed with
such products shall be repeated, with pesticides conforming to this
specification, at no additional cost to the Government.
AF
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 VERIFICATION OF MEASUREMENT
Once termiticide application has been completed, measure tank contents to

determine the remaining volume. The total volume measurement of used
contents for the application shall equal the established application rate
R
for the project site conditions. Provide written verification that the
volume of termiticide used meets the application rate.
3.2 TECHNICAL REPRESENTATIVE

D
A DOD certified pesticide applicator or Pest Management Quality Assurance

Evaluator (QAE)/Performance Assessment Representative (PAR) shall be the
technical representative, shall be present at all meetings concerning
treatment measures for subterranean termites, and shall be present during
treatment application. The command Integrated Pest Management Coordinator
shall be contacted prior to starting work.
3.3 SITE PREPARATION
Work related to final grades, landscape plantings, foundations, or any

other alterations to finished construction which might alter the condition
of treated soils, must be coordinated with this specification.
3.3.1 Ground Preparation
Eliminate food sources by removing debris from clearing and grubbing and
post construction wood scraps such as ground stakes, form boards, and scrap
lumber from the site, before termiticide application begins.

3.3.2 Verification
Before work starts, verify that final grades are as indicated and smooth
grading has been completed in accordance with Section 31 00 00 EARTHWORK.
Soil particles shall be finely graded with particles no larger than 25 mm
and compacted to eliminate soil movement to the greatest degree.
3.3.3 Foundation Exterior
Provide written verification that final grading and landscape planting

operations will not disturb treatment of the soil on the exterior sides of
foundation walls, grade beams, and similar structures.
3.3.4 Utilities and Vents
Provide written verification that the location and identity of HVAC ducts
and vents, water and sewer lines, and plumbing have been accomplished prior
to the termiticide application.
3.3.5 Crawl and Plenum Air Spaces
T
Provide written verification that the location and identity of crawl and
plenum air spaces have been accomplished prior to the termiticide
application.
3.3.6
AF
Application Plan
Submit a Termiticide Application Plan with proposed sequence of treatment

work with dates and times for approval before starting the specified
treatment. Include the termiticide trade name, EPA registration number,
chemical composition, formulation, concentration of original and diluted
material, application rate of active ingredients, method of application,
area/volume treated, and amount applied. Also include a copy of the pest
R
control business license and pesticide applicator certificate(s).
3.4 TERMITICIDE TREATMENT
3.4.1 Equipment Calibration and Tank Measurement

D
Submit a listing of equipment to be used. Immediately prior to

commencement of termiticide application, calibration tests shall be
conducted on the application equipment to be used and the application tank
shall be measured to determine the volume and contents. These tests shall
confirm that the application equipment is operating within the
manufacturer's specifications and will meet the specified requirements.
Submit written certification of the equipment calibration test results
within 1 week of testing.
3.4.2 Mixing and Application
Formulating, mixing, and application shall be performed in the presence of

a DOD certified pesticide applicator, Pest Management QAE/PAR, or
Integrated Pest Management Coordinator. A closed system is recommended as
it prevents the termiticide from coming into contact with the applicator or
other persons. Water for formulating shall only come from designated
locations. Filling hoses shall be fitted with a backflow preventer meeting
local plumbing codes or standards. Overflow shall be prevented during the
filling operation. Spill kits must be maintained on pest control vehicles
and must be available at the mixing site. Termiticide mixing must be

conducted in an area that has been designated by the government

representative and that has adequate spill containment. Prior to each day
of use, the equipment used for applying termiticides shall be inspected for
leaks, clogging, wear, or damage. Any repairs are to be performed
immediately.
3.4.3 Treatment Method
For areas to be treated, establish complete and unbroken vertical and/or

horizontal soil poison barriers between the soil and all portions of the
intended structure which may allow termite access to wood and wood related
products. Applications to crawl spaces shall be made in accordance with
(IAW) label directions. Applications shall not be made to crawl space
areas that are used as plenum air spaces.
3.4.3.1 Surface Application
Use surface application for establishing horizontal barriers. Surface

applicants shall be applied as a coarse spray and provide uniform
distribution over the soil surface. Termiticide shall penetrate a minimum
of 25 mm into the soil, or as recommended by the manufacturer.
T
3.4.3.2 Rodding and Trenching
Use rodding and trenching for establishing vertical soil barriers.

AF
Trenching shall be to the depth of the foundation footing. Width of trench
shall be as recommended by the manufacturer, or as indicated. Rodding or
other approved method may be implemented for saturating the base of the
trench with termiticide. Immediately after termiticide has reached maximum
penetration as recommended by the manufacturer, backfilling of the trench
shall commence. Backfilling shall be in 150 mm rises or layers. Each rise
shall be treated with termiticide.
R
3.4.4 Sampling
The Contracting Officer may draw from stocks at the job site, at any time
and without prior notice, take samples of the termiticides used to
determine if the amount of active ingredient specified on the label is
D
being applied.
3.5 CLEAN UP, DISPOSAL, AND PROTECTION
Once application has been completed, proceed with clean up and protection
of the site without delay.
3.5.1 Clean Up
The site shall be cleaned of all material associated with the treatment
measures, according to label instructions, and as indicated. Excess and
waste material shall be removed and disposed off site.
3.5.2 Disposal of Termiticide
Dispose of residual termiticides and containers off Government property,

and in accordance with label instructions and EPA criteria.
3.5.3 Protection of Treated Area
Immediately after the application, the area shall be protected from other

use by erecting barricades and providing signage as required or directed.

Signage shall be placed inside the entrances to crawl spaces and shall
identify the space as treated with termiticide and not safe for children
and animals. Treated areas should be covered with plastic if slab is not
to be poured immediately following termiticide application.
3.6 CONDITIONS FOR SATISFACTORY TREATMENT
3.6.1 Equipment Calibrations and Measurements
Where results from the equipment calibration and tank measurements tests
are unsatisfactory, re-treatment will be required.
3.6.2 Testing
Should an analysis, performed by a third party, indicate that the samples

of the applied termiticide contain less than the amount of active
ingredient specified on the label, and/or if soils are treated to a depth
less than specified or approved, re-treatment will be required.
3.6.3 Disturbance of Treated Soils
T
Soil and fill material disturbed after treatment shall be re-treated before
placement of slabs or other covering structures.
3.6.4
AF
Termites Found Within the Warranty Period
If live subterranean termite infestation or termite damage is discovered

during the warranty period, re-treat the site.
3.7 RE-TREATMENT
Where re-treatment is required, comply with the requirements specified in

R
paragraph WARRANTY.
D

DIVISION 32 - EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS
SECTION 32 11 23
GRADED-CRUSHED AGGREGATE BASE COURSE
08/08
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
1.2 DEFINITIONS
1.2.1 Graded-Crushed Aggregate Base Course
1.4 SUBMITTALS
T
1.5.1 Sampling
1.5.2 Tests
1.5.2.1 Sieve Analysis
1.5.2.2
AF
Liquid Limit and Plasticity Index
1.5.2.3 Moisture-Density Determinations
1.5.2.4 Field Density Tests
1.5.2.5 Wear Test
1.5.2.6 Soundness
1.5.3 Testing Frequency
1.5.3.1 Initial Tests
1.5.3.2 In Place Tests
R
1.5.4 Approval of Material
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 AGGREGATES
D
2.1.1 Coarse Aggregate

2.1.2 Fine Aggregate
2.1.2.1 Graded-Crushed Aggregate Base Course
2.1.3 Gradation Requirements
2.2 LIQUID LIMIT AND PLASTICITY INDEX
PART 3 EXECUTION

3.2 OPERATION OF AGGREGATE SOURCES
3.3 STOCKPILING MATERIAL
3.4 PREPARATION OF UNDERLYING COURSE
3.5 INSTALLATION
3.5.1 Mixing the Materials
3.5.2 Placing
3.5.3 Grade Control
3.5.4 Edges of Base Course
3.5.5 Compaction
3.5.6 Thickness
3.5.7 Finishing
3.5.8 Smoothness
3.6 TRAFFIC
3.7 MAINTENANCE
3.8 DISPOSAL OF UNSATISFACTORY MATERIALS
T
AF
R
D
SECTION 32 11 23
GRADED-CRUSHED AGGREGATE BASE COURSE

08/08
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by basic
designation only. The most current versions of the publications shall be
used.
ASTM C 88 Standard Test Method for Soundness of

Aggregates by Use of Sodium Sulfate or
T
Magnesium Sulfate

than 75-um (No. 200) Sieve in Mineral
AF Aggregates by Washing
ASTM C 127 Standard Test Method for Density, Relative

Density (Specific Gravity), and Absorption
of Coarse Aggregate

R
of Fine Aggregate
ASTM C 131 Standard Test Method for Resistance to

Degradation of Small-Size Coarse Aggregate
by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles
D
Machine

ASTM D 75 Standard Practice for Sampling Aggregates
ASTM D 1556 Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place

by the Sand-Cone Method
ASTM D 1557 Standard Test Methods for Laboratory

Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using
Modified Effort (56,000 ft-lbf/ft3) (2700
kN-m/m3)
ASTM D 2487 Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified

Soil Classification System)
ASTM D 4318 Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and

Plasticity Index of Soils
ASTM D 6938 Standard Test Method for In-Place Density

and Water Content of Soil and
Soil-Aggregate by Nuclear Methods (Shallow
Depth)
ASTM E 11 Wire Cloth and Sieves for Testing Purposes
1.2 DEFINITIONS
For the purposes of this specification, the following definitions apply.
1.2.1 Graded-Crushed Aggregate Base Course
Graded-crushed aggregate (GCA) base course is well graded, crushed, durable

aggregate uniformly moistened and mechanically stabilized by compaction.
GCA is similar to ABC, but it has more stringent requirements and it
produces a base course with higher strength and stability.
Degree of compaction required is expressed as a percentage of the maximum
T
density obtained by the test procedure presented in ASTM D 1557 Method C
abbreviated as a percent of laboratory maximum density.

AF
All plant, equipment, and tools used in the performance of the work will be
subject to approval before the work is started and shall be maintained in
satisfactory working condition at all times. Provide adequate equipment
having the capability of producing the required compaction, meeting grade
controls, thickness control, and smoothness requirements as set forth
herein.
R
1.4 SUBMITTALS

D
SD-03 Product Data
Plant, Equipment, and Tools
List of proposed equipment to be used in performance of

construction work, including descriptive data.
Waybills and Delivery Tickets
Copies of waybills and delivery tickets during the progress of

the work.
SD-06 Test Reports
Sampling and Testing; G M

Field Density Tests; G M
Certified copies of test results for approval not less than 30

days before material is required for the work.
Calibration curves and related test results prior to using the

device or equipment being calibrated.
Copies of field test results within 24 hours after the tests are
performed.
Sampling and testing are the responsibility of the Contractor and performed
by a testing laboratory approved in accordance with Section 01 45 00.00 10
QUALITY CONTROL. Work requiring testing will not be permitted until the
testing laboratory has been inspected and approved. Test the materials to
establish compliance with the specified requirements; perform testing at
the specified frequency. The Contracting Officer may specify the time and
location of the tests. Furnish copies of test results to the Contracting
Officer within 24 hours of completion of the tests.
1.5.1 Sampling
T
Take samples for laboratory testing in conformance with ASTM D 75. When
deemed necessary, the sampling will be observed by the Contracting Officer.
1.5.2 Tests
AF
Perform the following tests in conformance with the applicable standards
listed.
1.5.2.1 Sieve Analysis
Make sieve analysis in conformance with ASTM C 117 and ASTM C 136. Sieves
R
shall conform to ASTM E 11.
1.5.2.2 Liquid Limit and Plasticity Index
Determine liquid limit and plasticity index in accordance with ASTM D 4318.
D
1.5.2.3 Moisture-Density Determinations
Determine the laboratory maximum dry density and optimum moisture content
in accordance with ASTM D 1557 procedure C.
1.5.2.4 Field Density Tests
Measure field density in accordance with ASTM D 1556 or ASTM D 6938. For
the method presented in ASTM D 1556 use the base plate as shown in the
drawing. For the method presented in ASTM D 6938 check the calibration
curves and adjust them, if necessary, using only the sand cone method as
described in paragraph Calibration, of the ASTM publication. Tests
performed in accordance with ASTM D 6938 result in a wet unit weight of
soil, and ASTM D 6938 shall be used to determine the moisture content of
the soil. The calibration curves furnished with the moisture gauges shall
also be checked along with density calibration checks as described in
ASTM D 6938. The calibration checks of both the density and moisture
gauges shall be made by the prepared containers of material method, as
described in paragraph Calibration of ASTM D 6938, on each different type
of material being tested at the beginning of a job and at intervals as
directed.
1.5.2.5 Wear Test
Perform wear tests on GCA course material in conformance with ASTM C 131.
1.5.2.6 Soundness
Perform soundness tests on GCA in accordance with ASTM C 88.
1.5.3 Testing Frequency
1.5.3.1 Initial Tests
Perform one of each of the following tests, on the proposed material prior
to commencing construction, to demonstrate that the proposed material meets
all specified requirements when furnished. If materials from more than one
source are going to be utilized, this testing shall be completed for each
source.
a. Sieve Analysis.
T
b. Liquid limit and plasticity index.
c. Moisture-density relationship.
AF
d. Wear.
e. Soundness.
1.5.3.2 In Place Tests
Perform each of the following tests on samples taken from the placed and
R
compacted GCA. Samples shall be taken and tested at the rates indicated.
Perform sampling and testing of recycled concrete aggregate at twice the
specified frequency until the material uniformity is established.
a. Perform density tests on every lift of material placed and at a

D
frequency of one set of tests for every 250 square meters, or portion
thereof, of completed area.
b. Perform sieve analysis on every lift of material placed and at a

frequency of one sieve analysis for every 500 square meters, or portion
thereof, of material placed.
c. Perform liquid limit and plasticity index tests at the same

frequency as the sieve analysis.
d. Measure the total thickness of the base course at intervals, in

such a manner as to ensure one measurement for each 500 square meters
of base course. Measurements shall be made in 75 mm diameter test
holes penetrating the base course.
1.5.4 Approval of Material
The source of the material shall be selected 30 days prior to the time the
material will be required in the work. Tentative approval of material will
be based on initial test results. Final approval of the materials will be
based on sieve analysis, liquid limit, and plasticity index tests performed
on samples taken from the completed and fully compacted course(s).
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 AGGREGATES
Provide GCA consisting of clean, sound, durable particles of crushed stone,

crushed gravel, angular sand, or other approved material. GCA shall be
free of silt and clay as defined by ASTM D 2487, organic matter, and other
objectionable materials or coatings. The portion retained on the 4.75 mm
sieve is known as coarse aggregate; that portion passing the 4.75 mm sieve
is known as fine aggregate.
Provide coarse aggregates with angular particles of uniform density. When

the coarse aggregate is supplied from more than one source, aggregate from
each source shall meet the specified requirements and shall be stockpiled
separately.
a. Crushed Gravel: Crushed gravel shall be manufactured by crushing
T
gravels, and shall meet all the requirements specified below.
b. Crushed Stone: Provide crushed stone consisting of freshly mined

quarry rock, meeting all the requirements specified below.
AF
Fine aggregates shall be angular particles of uniform density. When the

fine aggregate is supplied from more than one source, aggregate from each
source shall meet the specified requirements.
2.1.2.1 Graded-Crushed Aggregate Base Course

R
Provide GCA fine aggregate consisting of angular particles produced by
crushing stone, or gravel that meets the requirements for wear and
soundness specified for GCA coarse aggregate. Fine aggregate shall be
produced by crushing only particles larger than 4.75 mm sieve in size. The
D
fine aggregate shall contain at least 90 percent by weight of particles

having two or more freshly fractured faces in the portion passing the 4.75
mm sieve and retained on the 2 mm sieve, and in the portion passing the 2 mm
sieve and retained on the 0.425 mm sieve.
2.1.3 Gradation Requirements
Apply the specified gradation requirements to the completed base course.

The aggregates shall be continuously well graded within the limits
specified in TABLE 1. Sieves shall conform to ASTM E 11.
TABLE 1. GRADATION OF AGGREGATES
Percentage by Weight Passing Square-Mesh Sieve
Sieve
Designation No. 3*
----------------------------------------------------------------
50.0 mm 100
37.5 mm 95-100
TABLE 1. GRADATION OF AGGREGATES
Percentage by Weight Passing Square-Mesh Sieve
Sieve
Designation No. 3*
----------------------------------------------------------------
25.0 mm 70-90
12.5 mm 30-65
4.75 mm 20-50
2.00 mm 15-40
0.425 mm 5-25
0.075 mm 0-5
NOTE 2: The values are based on aggregates of uniform specific gravity.

If materials from different sources are used for the coarse and fine
aggregates, they shall be tested in accordance with ASTM C 127 and
ASTM C 128 to determine their specific gravities. If the specific
gravities vary by more than 10 percent, the percentages passing the various
sieves shall be corrected as directed by the Contracting Officer.
T
2.2 LIQUID LIMIT AND PLASTICITY INDEX
Apply liquid limit and plasticity index requirements to the completed

AF
course and to any component that is blended to meet the required
gradation. The portion of any component or of the completed course passing
the 0.425 mm sieve shall be either nonplastic or have a liquid limit not
greater than 25 and a plasticity index not greater than 5.
PART 3 EXECUTION

R
When the GCA is constructed in more than one layer, clean the previously
constructed layer of loose and foreign matter by sweeping with power
sweepers or power brooms, except that hand brooms may be used in areas
where power cleaning is not practicable. Provide adequate drainage during
D
the entire period of construction to prevent water from collecting or

standing on the working area. Provide line and grade stakes as necessary
for control. Grade stakes shall be in lines parallel to the centerline of
the area under construction and suitably spaced for string lining.
3.2 OPERATION OF AGGREGATE SOURCES
Clearing, stripping, and excavating are the responsibility of the

Contractor. Operate the aggregate sources to produce the quantity and
quality of materials meeting the specified requirements in the specified
time limit. Aggregate sources on private lands shall be conditioned in
agreement with local laws or authorities.
3.3 STOCKPILING MATERIAL
Clear and level storage sites prior to stockpiling of material. Stockpile

all materials, including approved material available from excavation and
grading, in the manner and at the locations designated. Aggregates shall
be stockpiled on the cleared and leveled areas designated by the
Contracting Officer to prevent segregation. Materials obtained from
different sources shall be stockpiled separately.
3.4 PREPARATION OF UNDERLYING COURSE
Prior to constructing the base course(s), the underlying course or subgrade

shall be cleaned of all foreign substances. At the time of construction of
the base course(s), the underlying course shall contain no frozen
material. The surface of the underlying course or subgrade shall meet
specified compaction and surface tolerances. The underlying course shall
conform to Section 31 00 00 EARTHWORK. Ruts or soft yielding spots in the
underlying courses, areas having inadequate compaction, and deviations of
the surface from the requirements set forth herein shall be corrected by
loosening and removing soft or unsatisfactory material and by adding
approved material, reshaping to line and grade, and recompacting to
specified density requirements. For cohesionless underlying courses
containing sands or gravels, as defined in ASTM D 2487, the surface shall
be stabilized prior to placement of the base course(s). Stabilization
shall be accomplished by mixing GCA into the underlying course and
compacting by approved methods. The stabilized material shall be
considered as part of the underlying course and shall meet all requirements
of the underlying course. The finished underlying course shall not be
disturbed by traffic or other operations and shall be maintained in a
T
satisfactory condition until the base course is placed.
3.5 INSTALLATION
3.5.1
AF
Mixing the Materials
Mix the coarse and fine aggregates in a stationary plant, or in a traveling

plant or bucket loader on an approved paved working area. Make adjustments
in mixing procedures or in equipment, as directed, to obtain true grades,
to minimize segregation or degradation, to obtain the required water
content, and to insure a satisfactory base course meeting all requirements
of this specification.
R
3.5.2 Placing
Place the mixed material on the prepared subgrade or subbase in layers of

uniform thickness with an approved spreader. When a compacted layer 150 mm
D
or less in thickness is required, place the material in a single layer.

When a compacted layer in excess of 150 mm is required, place the material
in layers of equal thickness. No layer shall be thicker than 150 mm or
thinner than 75mm when compacted. The layers shall be so placed that when
compacted they will be true to the grades or levels required with the least
possible surface disturbance. Where the base course is placed in more than
one layer, the previously constructed layers shall be cleaned of loose and
foreign matter by sweeping with power sweepers, power brooms, or hand
brooms, as directed. Such adjustments in placing procedures or equipment
shall be made as may be directed to obtain true grades, to minimize
segregation and degradation, to adjust the water content, and to insure an
acceptable base course.
3.5.3 Grade Control
The finished and completed base course shall conform to the lines, grades,
and cross sections shown. Underlying material(s) shall be excavated and
prepared at sufficient depth for the required base course thickness so that
the finished base course and the subsequent surface course will meet the
designated grades.
3.5.4 Edges of Base Course
The base course(s) shall be placed so that the completed section will be a
minimum of 600 mm wider, on all sides, than the next layer that will be
placed above it. Additionally, place approved fill material along the
outer edges of the base course in sufficient quantities to compact to the
thickness of the course being constructed, or to the thickness of each
layer in a multiple layer course, allowing in each operation at least a 600
mm width of this material to be rolled and compacted simultaneously with
rolling and compacting of each layer of base course. If this base course
material is to be placed adjacent to another pavement section, then the
layers for both of these sections shall be placed and compacted along this
edge at the same time.
3.5.5 Compaction
Compact each layer of the base course, as specified, with approved

compaction equipment. Maintain water content during the compaction
procedure to within plus or minus 2 percent of the optimum water content
determined from laboratory tests as specified in paragraph SAMPLING AND
TESTING. Begin rolling at the outside edge of the surface and proceed to
T
the center, overlapping on successive trips at least one-half the width of
the roller. Alternate trips of the roller shall be slightly different
lengths. Speed of the roller shall be such that displacement of the
aggregate does not occur. In all places not accessible to the rollers, the
AF
mixture shall be compacted with hand-operated power tampers. Continue
compaction until each layer has a degree of compaction that is at least 100
percent of laboratory maximum density through the full depth of the layer.
Make such adjustments in compacting or finishing procedures as may be
directed to obtain true grades, to minimize segregation and degradation, to
reduce or increase water content, and to ensure a satisfactory base
course. Any materials that are found to be unsatisfactory shall be removed
and replaced with satisfactory material or reworked, as directed, to meet
R
the requirements of this specification.
3.5.6 Thickness
Construct the compacted thickness of the base course as indicated. No

D
individual layer shall be thicker than 150 mm nor be thinner than 75 mm in

compacted thickness. The total compacted thickness of the base course(s)
shall be within 13 mm of the thickness indicated. Where the measured
thickness is more than 13 mm deficient, correct such areas by scarifying,
adding new material of proper gradation, reblading, and recompacting as
directed. Where the measured thickness is more than 13 mm thicker than
indicated, the course shall be considered as conforming to the specified
thickness requirements. Average job thickness shall be the average of all
thickness measurements taken for the job, but shall be within 6 mm of the
thickness indicated. The total thickness of the base course shall be
measured at intervals in such a manner as to ensure one measurement for
each 500 square meters of base course. Measurements shall be made in 75 mm
diameter test holes penetrating the base course.
3.5.7 Finishing
The surface of the top layer of base course shall be finished after final
compaction by cutting any overbuild to grade and rolling with a
steel-wheeled roller. Thin layers of material shall not be added to the
top layer of base course to meet grade. If the elevation of the top layer
of base course is 13 mm or more below grade, then the top layer should be
scarified to a depth of at least 75 mm and new material shall be blended in

and compacted to bring to grade. Adjustments to rolling and finishing
procedures shall be made as directed to minimize segregation and
degradation, obtain grades, maintain moisture content, and insure an
acceptable base course. Should the surface become rough, corrugated,
uneven in texture, or traffic marked prior to completion, the
unsatisfactory portion shall be scarified, reworked and recompacted or it
shall be replaced as directed.
3.5.8 Smoothness
The surface of the top layer shall show no deviations in excess of 10 mm

when tested with a 3.66 meter straightedge. Take measurements in
successive positions parallel to the centerline of the area to be paved.
Measurements shall also be taken perpendicular to the centerline at 15 meter
intervals. Deviations exceeding this amount shall be corrected by
removing material and replacing with new material, or by reworking existing
material and compacting it to meet these specifications.
3.6 TRAFFIC
T
Completed portions of the base course may be opened to limited traffic,
provided there is no marring or distorting of the surface by the traffic.
Heavy equipment shall not be permitted except when necessary to
construction, and then the area shall be protected against marring or
AF
damage to the completed work.
3.7 MAINTENANCE
Maintain the base course in a satisfactory condition until the full

pavement section is completed and accepted. Maintenance shall include
immediate repairs to any defects and shall be repeated as often as
necessary to keep the area intact. Any base course that is not paved over
R
prior to the onset of winter, shall be retested to verify that it still
complies with the requirements of this specification. Any area of base
course that is damaged shall be reworked or replaced as necessary to comply
with this specification.
D
3.8 DISPOSAL OF UNSATISFACTORY MATERIALS
Any unsuitable materials that must be removed shall be disposed of as

directed. No additional payments will be made for materials that must be
replaced.
SECTION 32 12 10
BITUMINOUS TACK AND PRIME COATS
10/06
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
1.2 SUBMITTALS
1.3 PLANT, EQUIPMENT, MACHINES AND TOOLS
1.3.2 Bituminous Distributor
1.3.3 Heating Equipment for Storage Tanks
T
1.3.4 Power Brooms and Power Blowers
1.4 WEATHER LIMITATIONS
1.5 DELIVERY AND STORAGE
PART 2 PRODUCTS
AF
2.1 PRIME COAT
2.1.1 Emulsified Asphalt
2.2 TACK COAT
PART 3 EXECUTION
R
3.1 PREPARATION OF SURFACE
3.2 APPLICATION RATE
3.2.1 Tack Coat
3.2.2 Prime Coat
D
3.3 APPLICATION TEMPERATURE

3.3.1 Viscosity Relationship
3.3.2 Temperature Ranges
3.4 APPLICATION
3.4.1 General
3.4.2 Prime Coat
3.4.3 Tack Coat
3.5 CURING PERIOD
3.7 SAMPLING AND TESTING
3.7.1 Sampling
3.7.2 Calibration Test
3.7.3 Trial Applications
3.7.3.1 Tack Coat Trial Application Rate
3.7.3.2 Prime Coat Trial Application Rate
3.7.4 Sampling and Testing During Construction
3.8 TRAFFIC CONTROLS
SECTION 32 12 10
BITUMINOUS TACK AND PRIME COATS

10/06
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

ASTM D 140 Sampling Bituminous Materials
ASTM D 2397 Cationic Emulsified Asphalt
T
ASTM D 2995 Determining Application Rate of Bituminous
Distributors
ASTM D 977
AF Emulsified Asphalt
1.2 SUBMITTALS

R
SD-03 Product Data

D
Equipment, Machines and Tools
SD-06 Test Reports
Copies of all test results for emulsified asphalt, and

bituminous materials, within 24 hours of completion of tests.
Certified copies of the manufacturer's test reports indicating
temperature viscosity relationship for cutback asphalt, compliance
with applicable specified requirements, not less than 30 days
before the material is required in the work.
1.3 PLANT, EQUIPMENT, MACHINES AND TOOLS
Plant, equipment, machines and tools used in the work are subject to
approval and must be maintained in a satisfactory working condition at all
times. Calibrated equipment such as asphalt distributors, scales, batching
equipment, spreaders and similar equipment, shall have been recalibrated by
a calibration laboratory within 12 months prior to commencing work and

every six (6) months thereafter, by such laboratory from the date of
recalibration, during the term of the contract.
1.3.2 Bituminous Distributor
The distributor shall have pneumatic tires of such size and number that the
load produced on the base surface does not exceed 295 kg/25 mm of tire
width and to prevent rutting, shoving or otherwise damaging the base
surface or other layers in the pavement structure. Design and equip the
distributor to spray the bituminous material in a uniform coverage at the
specified temperature, at readily determined and controlled rates from 0.23
to 9.05 L/square meter, with a pressure range of 172.4 to 517.1 kPa and
with an allowable variation from the specified rate of not more than plus
or minus 5 percent, and at variable widths. Distributor equipment shall
include a separate power unit for the bitumen pump, full-circulation spray
bars, tachometer, pressure gauges, volume-measuring devices, adequate
heaters for heating of materials to the proper application temperature, a
thermometer for reading the temperature of tank contents, and a hand hose
attachment suitable for applying bituminous material manually to areas
inaccessible to the distributor. Equip the distributor to circulate and
T
agitate the bituminous material during the heating process.
1.3.3 Heating Equipment for Storage Tanks

AF
The equipment for heating the bituminous material shall be steam, electric,
or hot oil heaters. Steam heaters shall consist of steam coils and
equipment for producing steam, so designed that the steam cannot get into
the material. Fix an armored thermometer to the tank with a temperature
range from 4.4 to 204.4 degrees C so that the temperature of the bituminous
material may be determined at all times.
1.3.4 Power Brooms and Power Blowers

R
Use power brooms and power blowers suitable for cleaning the surfaces to
which the bituminous coat is to be applied.

D
Apply bituminous coat only when the surface to receive the bituminous coat
is dry. Apply bituminous coat only when the atmospheric temperature in the
shade is 10 degrees C or above and when the temperature has not been below
2 degrees C for the 12 hours prior to application, unless otherwise
directed.
Inspect the materials delivered to the site for contamination and damage.
Unload and store the materials with a minimum of handling.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 PRIME COAT
Prime coat shall be emulsified asphalt and shall conform to ASTM D 977,
Type SS-1h or ASTM D 2397, Type CSS-1h.
2.2 TACK COAT
Tack coat shall be emulsified asphalt and shall conform to ASTM D 977, Type
SS-1h or ASTM D 2397, Type CSS-1h.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION OF SURFACE
Immediately before applying the bituminous coat, remove all loose material,
dirt, clay, or other objectionable material from the surface to be treated
by means of a power broom or blower supplemented with hand brooms. The
surface shall be dry and clean at the time of treatment.
3.2 APPLICATION RATE
The exact quantities within the range specified, which may be varied to
suit field conditions, will be determined by the Contracting Officer.
T
3.2.1 Tack Coat
Apply bituminous material for the tack coat in quantities of not less than
0.20 L nor more than 0.70 L/square meter of pavement surface.
AF
3.2.2 Prime Coat
Apply bituminous material for the prime coat in quantities of not less than
0.70 L nor more than 1.80 L/square meter of pavement surface.
3.3 APPLICATION TEMPERATURE

R
3.3.1 Viscosity Relationship
Asphalt application temperature shall provide an application viscosity

between 10 and 60 seconds, Saybolt Furol, or between 20 and 120 square
mm/sec, kinematic. Furnish the temperature viscosity relation to the
D
3.3.2 Temperature Ranges
The viscosity requirements determine the application temperature to be

used. The following is a normal range of application temperatures:
Emulsions
-------------
SS-1h 20-70 degrees C

CSS-1h 20-70 degrees C
*These temperature ranges exceed the flash point of the material and care
should be taken in their heating.
3.4 APPLICATION
3.4.1 General
Following preparation and subsequent inspection of the surface, apply the
bituminous prime or tack coat with the Bituminous Distributor at the

specified rate with uniform distribution over the surface to be treated.
Properly treat all areas and spots missed by the distributor with the hand
spray. Until the succeeding layer of pavement is placed, maintain the
surface by protecting the surface against damage and by repairing deficient
areas at no additional cost to the Government. If required, spread clean
dry sand to effectively blot up any excess bituminous material. No
smoking, fires, or flames other than those from the heaters that are a part
of the equipment are permitted within 8 meters of heating, distributing,
and transferring operations of bituminous material other than bituminous
emulsions. Prevent all traffic, except for paving equipment used in
constructing the surfacing, from using the underlying material, whether
primed or not, until the surfacing is completed. The bituminous coat shall
conform to all requirements as described herein.
3.4.2 Prime Coat
Apply a prime coat to the completed base course material. Hot-mix asphalt
shall be placed on the prime coat with five (5) days. The type of liquid
asphalt and application rate will be as specified herein. Protect the
underlying from any damage (water, traffic, etc.) until the surfacing is
T
placed. Repair (recompact or replace) damage to the underlying material
caused by lack of, or inadequate, protection by approved methods at no
additional cost to the Government. Apply the bituminous material uniformly
over the surface to be treated at a pressure range of 172.4 to 517.1 kPa
AF
and at the rate of not less than 0.70 L not more than 1.80 L/square m. To
obtain uniform application of the prime coat on the surface treated at the
junction of previous and subsequent applications, spread building paper on
the surface for a sufficient distance back from the ends of each
application to start and stop the prime coat on the paper and to ensure
that all sprayers will operate at full force on the surface to be treated.
Immediately after application remove and destroy the building paper.
R
3.4.3 Tack Coat
Apply tack coat at the locations shown on the drawings. Apply the tack
coat when the surface to be treated is dry. Immediately following the
preparation of the surface for treatment, apply the bituminous material by
D
means of the bituminous distributor, within the limits of temperature

specified herein and at a rate of not less than 0.20 L nor more than 0.70 L
of diluted emulsion per square meter. Apply the bituminous material so
that uniform distribution is obtained over the entire surface to be
treated. Treat lightly coated areas and spots missed by the distributor
with the bituminous material. Following the application of bituminous
material, allow the surface to cure without being disturbed for period of
time necessary to permit setting of the tack coat. Apply the bituminous
tack coat only as far in advance of the placing of the overlying layer as
required for that day's operation. Maintain and protect the treated
surface from damage until the succeeding course of pavement is placed.
3.5 CURING PERIOD
Following application of the bituminous material and prior to application

of the succeeding layer of pavement, the bituminous coat shall be allowed
to cure and to obtain evaporation of any volatiles or moisture. Maintain
the coated surface until the succeeding layer of pavement is placed, by
protecting the surface against damage and by repairing and recoating
deficient areas. Allow the prime coat to cure without being disturbed for
a period of at least 48 hours or longer, as may be necessary to attain
penetration into the treated course. Furnish and spread enough sand to
effectively blot up and cure excess bituminous material.
Samples of the bituminous material shall be tested for compliance with the
applicable specified requirements. A sample shall be obtained and tested
by the Contractor for every 378 liters of bituminous material used.
3.7 SAMPLING AND TESTING
Sampling and testing shall be performed by an approved commercial testing

laboratory or by facilities furnished by the Contractor. No work requiring
testing will be permitted until the facilities have been inspected and
approved.
3.7.1 Sampling
The samples of bituminous material, unless otherwise specified, shall be in

accordance with ASTM D 140. Sources from which bituminous materials are to
be obtained shall be selected and notification furnished the Contracting
T
Officer within 15 days after the award of the contract.
3.7.2 Calibration Test

AF
Furnish all equipment, materials, and labor necessary to calibrate the
bituminous distributor. Calibration shall be made with the approved job
material and prior to applying the bituminous coat material to the prepared
surface. Calibrate the bituminous distributor in accordance with
ASTM D 2995.
3.7.3 Trial Applications

R
Before providing the complete bituminous coat, apply three lengths of at
least 30 meters for the full width of the distributor bar to evaluate the
amount of bituminous material that can be satisfactorily applied.
3.7.3.1 Tack Coat Trial Application Rate

D
Unless otherwise authorized, apply the trial application rate of bituminous

tack coat materials in the amount of 0.20 L/square meter. Other trial
applications shall be made using various amounts of material as may be
deemed necessary.
3.7.3.2 Prime Coat Trial Application Rate
Unless otherwise authorized, apply the trial application rate of bituminous

materials in the amount of 1.10 L/square meter. Other trial applications
shall be made using various amounts of material as may be deemed necessary.
3.7.4 Sampling and Testing During Construction
Perform quality control sampling and testing as required in paragraph FIELD

QUALITY CONTROL.
3.8 TRAFFIC CONTROLS
Keep traffic off surfaces freshly treated with bituminous material.

Provide sufficient warning signs and barricades so that traffic will not
travel over freshly treated surfaces.
T
AF
R
D
SECTION 32 12 15
HOT-MIX ASPHALT (HMA) FOR AIRFIELDS
05/10
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
1.2.1 Asphalt Mixing Plant
1.2.2 Hauling Equipment
1.2.3 Material Transfer Vehicle (MTV)
1.2.4 Asphalt Pavers
T
1.2.4.1 Receiving Hopper
1.2.4.2 Automatic Grade Controls
1.2.5 Rollers
1.3 SUBMITTALS
1.4
AF
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.4.1 Sublot Sampling
1.4.2 Additional Sampling and Testing
1.4.3 In-place Density
1.4.4 Surface Smoothness
1.4.4.1 Smoothness Requirements
1.4.4.2 Testing Method
1.5 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
R
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 AGGREGATES
D

2.1.3 Mineral Filler
2.1.4 Aggregate Gradation
2.2 ASPHALT CEMENT BINDER
2.3 MIX DESIGN
2.3.1 JMF Requirements
2.3.2 Adjustments to JMF
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROL

3.1.1 General Quality Control Requirements
3.1.2 Testing Laboratory
3.1.3 Quality Control Testing
3.1.3.1 Asphalt Content
3.1.3.2 Aggregate Properties
3.1.3.3 Temperatures
3.1.3.4 Aggregate Moisture
3.1.3.5 Moisture Content of Mixture
3.1.3.6 Laboratory Air Voids, VMA, Marshall Stability and Flow
3.1.3.7 In-Place Density
3.1.3.8 Grade and Smoothness

3.1.3.9 Additional Testing
3.1.3.10 QC Monitoring
3.1.4 Sampling
3.1.5 Control Charts
3.2 PREPARATION OF ASPHALT BINDER MATERIAL
3.3 PREPARATION OF MINERAL AGGREGATE
3.4 PREPARATION OF HOT-MIX ASPHALT MIXTURE
3.5 PREPARATION OF THE UNDERLYING SURFACE
3.6 TEST SECTION
3.6.1 Sampling and Testing for Test Section
3.6.2 Additional Test Sections
3.7 TESTING LABORATORY
3.8 TRANSPORTING AND PLACING
3.8.1 Transporting
3.8.2 Placing
3.9 COMPACTION OF MIXTURE
3.9.1 General
3.9.2 Segregation
3.10 JOINTS
3.10.1 Transverse Joints
T
3.10.2 Longitudinal Joints
3.10.3 HMA-Portland Cement Concrete Joints

AF
R
D
SECTION 32 12 15
HOT-MIX ASPHALT (HMA) FOR AIRFIELDS

05/10
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

basic designation only. The most current versions of the publications
shall be used.
AMERICAN ASSOCIATION OF STATE HIGHWAY AND TRANSPORTATION OFFICIALS

(AASHTO)
AASHTO M 156 Standard Specification for Requirements
T
for Mixing Plants for Hot-Mixed, Hot-Laid
Bituminous Paving Mixtures
AASHTO T 308 Standard Method of Test for Determining

AF the Asphalt Binder Content of Hot Mix
Asphalt (HMA) by the Ignition Method
AASHTO T 329 Standard Test Method for Moisture Content

of Hot Mix Asphalt (HMA) By Oven Method.
ASPHALT INSTITUTE (AI)

R
AI MS-02 Mix Design Methods

D
than 75-um (No. 200) Sieve in Mineral

Aggregates by Washing
ASTM C 1252 Standard Test Methods for Uncompacted Void

Content of Fine Aggregate (as Influenced
by Particle Shape, Surface Texture, and
Grading)

of Coarse Aggregate

of Fine Aggregate
ASTM C 131 Standard Test Method for Resistance to

Degradation of Small-Size Coarse Aggregate
by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles
Machine

ASTM C 142 Standard Test Method for Clay Lumps and

Friable Particles in Aggregates
ASTM C 566 Standard Test Method for Total Evaporable

Moisture Content of Aggregate by Drying
ASTM C 88 Standard Test Method for Soundness of

Aggregates by Use of Sodium Sulfate or
Magnesium Sulfate
ASTM D 140/D 140M Sampling Bituminous Materials
ASTM D 1461 Moisture or Volatile Distillates in

ASTM D 2172 Quantitative Extraction of Bitumen from

T
ASTM D 2419 Sand Equivalent Value of Soils and Fine
Aggregate
ASTM D 242/D 242M Mineral Filler for Bituminous Paving

AF Mixtures
ASTM D 2489/D 2489M Estimating Degree of Particle Coating of

Bituminous-Aggregate Mixtures
ASTM D 2726 Bulk Specific Gravity and Density of

Non-Absorptive Compacted Bituminous
Mixtures
R
ASTM D 3665 Random Sampling of Construction Materials
ASTM D 3666 Minimum Requirements for Agencies Testing

and Inspecting Road and Paving Materials
D
ASTM D 4125 Asphalt Content of Bituminous Mixtures by

the Nuclear Method
ASTM D 4791 Flat Particles, Elongated Particles, or

Flat and Elongated Particles in Coarse
Aggregate
ASTM D 4867/D 4867M Effect of Moisture on Asphalt Concrete

Paving Mixtures
ASTM D 5444 Mechanical Size Analysis of Extracted

Aggregate
ASTM D 6307 Asphalt Content of Hot Mix Asphalt by

Ignition Method
ASTM D 6926 Standard Practice for Preparation of

Bituminous Specimens Using Marshall
Apparatus
ASTM D 6927 Standard Test Method for Marshall

Stability and Flow of Bituminous Mixtures
ASTM D 946 Penetration-Graded Asphalt Cement for Use

in Pavement Construction
ASTM D 979 Sampling Bituminous Paving Mixtures
STATE OF CALIFORNIA DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION (CDT)
CDT Test 526 Operation of California Profilograph and

Evaluation of Profiles
COE CRD-C 171 Standard Test Method for Determining

Percentage of Crushed Particles in
Aggregate
T
Perform the work consisting of pavement courses composed of mineral
aggregate and asphalt material heated and mixed in a central mixing plant
and placed on a prepared course. HMA designed and constructed in
accordance with this section shall conform to the lines, grades,
AF
thicknesses, and typical cross sections shown on the drawings. Construct
each course to the depth, section, or elevation required by the drawings
and rolled, finished, and approved before the placement of the next
course. Submit proposed Placement Plan, indicating lane widths,
longitudinal joints, and transverse joints for each course or lift.
1.2.1 Asphalt Mixing Plant

R
Plants used for the preparation of hot-mix asphalt shall conform to the
requirements of AASHTO M 156 with the following changes:
a. Truck Scales. Weigh the asphalt mixture on approved scales

furnished by the Contractor, or on certified public scales at the
D
Contractor's expense. Scales shall be inspected and sealed at least

annually by an approved calibration laboratory.
b. Testing Facilities. Provide laboratory facilities at the plant for

the use of the Government's acceptance testing and the Contractor's
quality control testing.
c. Inspection of Plant. The Contracting Officer shall have access at

all times, to all areas of the plant for checking adequacy of
equipment; inspecting operation of the plant; verifying weights,
proportions, and material properties; checking the temperatures
maintained in the preparation of the mixtures and for taking samples.
Provide assistance as requested, for the Government to procure any
desired samples.
d. Storage Bins. The asphalt mixture may be stored in non-insulated

storage bins for a period of time not exceeding 3 hours. The asphalt
mixture may be stored in insulated storage bins for a period of time
not exceeding 8 hours. The mix drawn from bins shall meet the same
requirements as mix loaded directly into trucks.
1.2.2 Hauling Equipment
Trucks used for hauling hot-mix asphalt shall have tight, clean, and smooth
metal beds. To prevent the mixture from adhering to them, the truck beds
shall be lightly coated with a minimum amount of paraffin oil, lime
solution, or other approved material. Petroleum based products shall not
be used as a release agent. Each truck shall have a suitable cover to
protect the mixture from adverse weather. When necessary to ensure that
the mixture will be delivered to the site at the specified temperature,
truck beds shall be insulated or heated and covers (tarps) shall be
securely fastened.
1.2.3 Material Transfer Vehicle (MTV)
Material transfer Vehicles shall be required due to the improvement in

smoothness and decrease in both physical and thermal segregation. To
transfer the material from the hauling equipment to the paver, use a
self-propelled, material transfer vehicle that can deliver material to the
paver without making contact with the paver. The MTV shall be able to move
back and forth between the hauling equipment and the paver providing
material transfer to the paver, while allowing the paver to operate at a
T
constant speed. The Material Transfer Vehicle will have remixing and
storage capability to prevent physical and thermal segregation.
1.2.4 Asphalt Pavers

AF
Mechanical spreading and finishing equipment shall consist of a
self-powered paver, capable of spreading and finishing the mixture to the
specified line, grade, and cross section. The screed of the paver shall
be capable of laying a uniform mixture to meet the specified thickness,
smoothness, and grade without physical or temperature segregation, the full
width of the material being placed. The screed will be equipped with a
compaction device and it will be used during all placement.
R
1.2.4.1 Receiving Hopper
The paver shall have a receiving hopper of sufficient capacity to permit a

uniform spreading operation. The hopper shall be equipped with a
D
distribution system to place the mixture uniformly in front of the screed

without segregation. The screed shall effectively produce a finished
surface of the required evenness and texture without tearing, shoving, or
gouging the mixture.
1.2.4.2 Automatic Grade Controls
If an automatic grade control device is used, the paver shall be equipped

with a control system capable of automatically maintaining the specified
screed elevation. The control system shall be automatically actuated from
either a reference line and/or through a system of mechanical sensors or
sensor-directed mechanisms or devices which will maintain the paver screed
at a predetermined transverse slope and at the proper elevation to obtain
the required surface. The transverse slope controller shall be capable of
maintaining the screed at the desired slope within plus or minus 0.1
percent. A transverse slope controller shall not be used to control
grade. The controls shall be capable of working in conjunction with any of
the following attachments:
a. Ski-type device of not less than 9.14 m in length.
b. Taut stringline set to grade.
c. Short ski or shoe for joint matching.
d. Laser control.
1.2.5 Rollers
Rollers shall be in good condition and shall be operated at slow speeds to

avoid displacement of the asphalt mixture. The number, type, and weight of
rollers shall be sufficient to compact the mixture to the required density
while it is still in a workable condition. Equipment which causes
excessive crushing of the aggregate shall not be used.
1.3 SUBMITTALS

T
SD-02 Shop Drawings

AF
Placement Plan G M
SD-03 Product Data
Mix Design
Contractor Quality Control

R
SD-04 Samples
Asphalt Cement Binder; G R
19 Liter sample for mix design

D
Aggregates; G R
Sufficient materials to produce 90 kg of blended mixture fo mix

design verification.
SD-06 Test Reports
Aggregates G M
QC Monitoring; G M
Aggregate and QC test results
SD-07 Certificates
Asphalt Cement Binder
Copies of certification test data
Testing Laboratory
Certification of compliance
The Government quality assurance (QA) program for this project is separate
and distinct from the Contractor's quality control (QC) program specified
in Part 3. Testing for acceptability of work will be performed by the
Government or by an independent laboratory hired by the Contracting
Officer , except for grade and smoothness testing which shall be performed
by the Contractor. Acceptance of the plant produced mix and in-place
requirements will be on a lot to lot basis. A standard lot for all
requirements will be equal to 2000 metric tons. Where appropriate,
adjustment in payment for individual lots of hot-mix asphalt will be made
based on in-place density, laboratory air voids, grade and smoothness in
accordance with the following paragraphs. Grade and surface smoothness
determinations will be made on the lot as a whole. Exceptions or
adjustments to this will be made in situations where the mix within one lot
is placed as part of both the intermediate and surface courses, thus grade
and smoothness measurements for the entire lot cannot be made. In order to
evaluate laboratory air voids and in-place (field) density, each lot will
be divided into four equal sublots.
T
1.4.1 Sublot Sampling
One random mixture sample for determining laboratory air voids, theoretical
AF
maximum density, and for any additional testing the Contracting Officer
desires, will be taken from a loaded truck delivering mixture to each
sublot, or other appropriate location for each sublot. All samples will be
selected randomly, using commonly recognized methods of assuring randomness
conforming to ASTM D 3665 and employing tables of random numbers or
computer programs. Laboratory air voids will be determined from three
laboratory compacted specimens of each sublot sample in accordance with
ASTM D 6926. The specimens will be compacted within 2 hours of the time
R
the mixture was loaded into trucks at the asphalt plant. Samples will not
be reheated prior to compaction and insulated containers will be used as
necessary to maintain the temperature.

D
The Contracting Officer reserves the right to direct additional samples and
tests for any area which appears to deviate from the specification
requirements. The cost of any additional testing will be paid for by the
Government. Testing in these areas will be treated as a separate lot.
Payment will be made for the quantity of HMA represented by these tests in
accordance with the provisions of this section.
1.4.3 In-place Density
For determining in-place density, one random core (100 mm or 150 mm in

diameter) will be taken by the Government from the mat (interior of the
lane) of each sublot, and one random core will be taken from the joint
(immediately over joint) of each sublot, in accordance with ASTM D 979.
Each random core will be full thickness of the layer being placed. When
the random core is less than 25 mm thick, it will not be included in the
analysis. In this case, another random core will be taken. After air
drying to meet the requirements for laboratory-prepared, thoroughly dry
specimens, cores obtained from the mat and from the joints will be used for
in-place density determination in accordance with ASTM D 2726.
Use one of the following methods to test and evaluate surface smoothness of
the finished surface of the pavement final grade. All testing shall be
performed in the presence of the Contracting Officer . Detailed notes of
the results of the testing shall be kept and a copy furnished to the
Government immediately after each day's testing. The profilograph method
shall be used for all longitudinal and transverse testing, except where the
runs would be less than 60 m in length and the ends where the straightedge
shall be used. Where drawings show required deviations from a plane
surface (crowns, drainage inlets, etc.), the surface shall be finished to
meet the approval of the Contracting Officer .
a. Profilograph Testing: The finished surfaces of the pavements shall

have no abrupt change of 3 mm or more, and all pavement shall have a
Profile Index not greater than specified in Table 4 when tested with an
approved California-type profilograph. If the extent of the pavement
in either direction is less than 60 m, that direction shall be tested
by the straightedge method and shall meet requirements specified above.
T
Table 4. Profilograph Surface Smoothness--Pavements
Pavement Category Direction of Testing Maximum Specified

AF Profile Index (mm/km)
----------------- -------------------- ---------------------
Runways Longitudinal 110

Transverse (Use Straightedge)
Taxiways Longitudinal 140

Transverse (Use Straightedge)
R
Calibration Hardstands & (Use Straightedge)
Compass Swinging Bases
All Other Airfield & Longitudinal 140

D
Helicopter Paved Areas Transverse 140
After the final rolling, but not later than 24 hours after placement, the
surface of the pavement in each entire lot shall be tested in such a manner
as to reveal all surface irregularities exceeding the tolerances specified
above. Separate testing of individual sublots is not required. If any
pavement areas are diamond ground, these areas shall be retested
immediately after grinding. The area corrected by grinding shall not
exceed 10 percent of the total area of the lot. The entire area of the
pavement shall be tested in both a longitudinal and a transverse direction
on parallel lines. The transverse lines shall be 4.5 m or less apart, as
directed. The longitudinal lines shall be at the centerline of each paving
lane for lines less than 6.1 m and at the third points for lanes 6.1 m or
greater. Other areas having obvious deviations shall also be tested.
Longitudinal testing lines shall be continuous across all joints.
a. Straightedge Testing. The straightedge shall be held in contact

with the surface and moved ahead one-half the length of the
straightedge for each successive measurement. The amount of surface

irregularity shall be determined by placing the freestanding
(unleveled) straightedge on the pavement surface and allowing it to
rest upon the two highest spots covered by its length, and measuring
the maximum gap between the straightedge and the pavement surface in
the area between these two high points.
b. Profilograph Testing. Profilograph testing shall be performed

using approved equipment and procedures described in CDT Test 526. The
equipment shall utilize electronic recording and automatic computerized
reduction of data to indicate "must-grind" bumps and the Profile Index
for the pavement. The "blanking band" shall be 5 mm wide and the "bump
template" shall span 25 mm with an offset of 10 mm. The profilograph
shall be operated by an approved, factory-trained operator on the
alignments specified above. A copy of the reduced tapes shall be
furnished the Government at the end of each day's testing.
c. Bumps ("Must Grind" Areas). Any bumps ("must grind" areas) shown
on the profilograph trace which exceed 10 mm in height shall be reduced
by diamond grinding until they do not exceed 7.5 mm when retested.
Such grinding shall be tapered in all directions to provide smooth
T
transitions to areas not requiring grinding. The following will not be
permitted: (1) skin patching for correcting low areas, (2) planing or
milling for correcting high areas. At the Contractor's option,
pavement areas, including ground areas, may be rechecked with the
AF
profilograph in order to record a lower Profile Index.
1.5 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
The hot-mix asphalt shall not be placed upon a wet surface or when the
surface temperature of the underlying course is less than specified in
Table 5. The temperature requirements may be waived by the Contracting
Officer , if requested; however, all other requirements, including
R
compaction, shall be met.
Table 5. Surface Temperature Limitations of Underlying Course
Mat Thickness, mm Degrees C

D
75 or greater 4
Less than 75 7
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 AGGREGATES
Aggregates shall consist of crushed stone, crushed gravel, crushed slag,

screenings, natural sand and mineral filler, as required. The portion of
material retained on the 4.75 mm sieve is coarse aggregate. The portion of
material passing the 4.75 mm sieve and retained on the 0.075 mm sieve is
fine aggregate. The portion passing the 0.075 mm sieve is defined as
mineral filler. Submit sufficient materials to produce 90 kg of blended
mixture for mix design verification. All aggregate test results and
samples shall be submitted to the Contracting Officer at least 14 days
prior to start of construction. Aggregate testing shall have been
performed within 90 days of performing the mix design.
Coarse aggregate shall consist of sound, tough, durable particles, free

from films of material that would prevent thorough coating and bonding with
the asphalt material and free from organic matter and other deleterious
substances. The coarse aggregate particles shall meet the following
requirements:
a. The percentage of loss shall not be greater than 40 percent after

500 revolutions when tested in accordance with ASTM C 131.
b. The sodium sulfate soundness loss shall not exceed 12 percent, or

the magnesium sulfate soundness loss shall not exceed 18 percent after
five cycles when tested in accordance with ASTM C 88.
c. At least 75 percent by weight of coarse aggregate shall have at

least two or more fractured faces when tested in accordance with
COE CRD-C 171. Fractured faces shall be produced by crushing.
d. The particle shape shall be essentially cubical and the aggregate
T
shall not contain more than 20 percent, by weight, of flat and
elongated particles (3:1 ratio of maximum to minimum) when tested in
accordance with ASTM D 4791.
AF
e. Clay lumps and friable particles shall not exceed 0.3 percent, by
weight, when tested in accordance with ASTM C 142.
Fine aggregate shall consist of clean, sound, tough, durable particles.

The aggregate particles shall be free from coatings of clay, silt, or any
objectionable material and shall contain no clay balls. The fine aggregate
R
particles shall meet the following requirements:
a. The quantity of natural sand (noncrushed material) added to the

aggregate blend shall not exceed 15 percent by weight of total
aggregate.
D
b. The individual fine aggregate sources shall have a sand equivalent

value greater than 45 when tested in accordance with ASTM D 2419.
c. The fine aggregate portion of the blended aggregate shall have an

uncompacted void content greater than 45.0 percent when tested in
accordance with ASTM C 1252 Method A.
d. Clay lumps and friable particles shall not exceed 0.3 percent, by
weight, when tested in accordance with ASTM C 142.
2.1.3 Mineral Filler
Mineral filler shall be nonplastic material meeting the requirements of

ASTM D 242/D 242M.
2.1.4 Aggregate Gradation
The combined aggregate gradation shall conform to gradations specified in

Table 6, when tested in accordance with ASTM C 136 and ASTM C 117, and
shall not vary from the low limit on one sieve to the high limit on the
adjacent sieve or vice versa, but grade uniformly from coarse to fine. The
JMF shall be within the specification limits; however, the grdation can
exceed the limits when the allowable devaliation form the JMF shown in
Tables 9 and 10 are applied.
Table 6. Aggregate Gradations
Gradation 1 Gradation 2 Gradation 3
Percent Passing Percent Passing Percent Passing

Sieve Size, mm by Mass by Mass by Mass
25.0 100 --- ---

19.0 76-96 100 ---
12.5 68-88 76-96 100
9.5 60-82 69-89 76-96
4.75 45-67 53-73 58-78
2.36 32-54 38-60 40-60
1.18 22-44 26-48 28-48
0.60 15-35 18-38 18-38
0.30 9-25 11-27 11-27
T
0.15 6-18 6-18 6-18
0.075 3-6 3-6 3-6
2.2
AF
ASPHALT CEMENT BINDER
Asphalt cement binder shall conform to or ASTM D 946 Penetration Grade

60-70 may be used. Test data indicating grade certification shall be
provided by the supplier at the time of delivery of each load to the mix
plant. Copies of these certifications shall be submitted to the
Contracting Officer. The supplier is defined as the last source of any
modification to the binder. The Contracting Officer may sample and test
R
the binder at the mix plant at any time before or during mix production.
Samples for this verification testing shall be obtained in accordance with
ASTM D 140/D 140M and in the presence of the Contracting Officer . These
samples shall be furnished to the Contracting Officer for the verification
testing, which shall be at no cost to the Contractor. Submit 20 L sample
D
of the asphalt cement specified for mix design verification and approval
not less than 14 days before start of the test section.
2.3 MIX DESIGN
Develop the mix design. The Job Mix formula (JMF)shall have been developed
and aggregates tested no earlier than 6 monnths before contract award. The
asphalt mix shall be composed of a mixture of well-graded aggregate,
mineral filler if required, and asphalt material. The aggregate fractions
shall be sized, handled in separate size groups, and combined in such
proportions that the resulting mixture meets the grading requirements of
Table 6. No hot-mix asphalt for payment shall be produced until a JMF has
been approved. The hot-mix asphalt shall be designed using hand-held
hammer procedures contained in AI MS-02 and the criteria shown in Table 7.
Laboratory compaction temperatures for Polymer Modified Asphalts shall be
as recommended by the asphalt cement manufacturer. If the Tensile Strength
Ratio (TSR) of the composite mixture, as determined by ASTM D 4867/D 4867M
is less than 75, the aggregates shall be rejected or the asphalt mixture
treated with an anti-stripping agent. The amount of anti-stripping agent
added shall be sufficient to produce a TSR of not less than 75. If an
antistrip agent is required, it shall be provided at no additional cost to
the Government. Sufficient materials to produce 90 kg of blended mixture

shall be provided to the Contracting Officer for verification of mix
design at least 14 days prior to construction of test section.
2.3.1 JMF Requirements
Submit the proposed JMF in writing, for approval, at least 14 days prior to
the start of the test section, including as a minimum:
a. Percent passing each sieve size.
b. Percent of asphalt cement.
c. Percent of each aggregate and mineral filler to be used.
d. Asphalt viscosity grade, penetration grade, or performance

grade.
e. Number of blows of hammer per side of molded specimen.
f. Laboratory mixing temperature.
T
g. Lab compaction temperature.
h. Temperature-viscosity relationship of the asphalt cement.

AF
i. Plot of the combined gradation on the 0.45 power gradation
chart, stating the nominal maximum size.
j. Graphical plots and summary tabulation of stability, flow, air

voids, voids in the mineral aggregate, and unit weight versus
asphalt content as shown in AI MS-02. Summary tabulation shall
include individual specimen data for each specimen tested.
R
k. Specific gravity and absorption of each aggregate.
l. Percent natural sand.

D
m. Percent particles with two or more fractured faces (in coarse

aggregate).
n. Fine aggregate angularity.
o. Percent flat or elongated particles (in coarse aggregate).
p. Tensile Strength Ratio and wet/dry specimen test results.
q. Antistrip agent (if required).
r. List of all modifiers.
s. Percentage and properties (asphalt content, binder properties,

and aggregate properties) of RAP in accordance with paragraph
RECYCLED HOT-MIX ASPHALT, if RAP is used.
Table 7. Marshall Design Criteria
Test Property 75 Blow Mix 50 Blow Mix
Stability, newtons
minimum 9560(1) 6000(1)
Flow, 0.25 mm 8-16(2) 8-18(2)
Air voids, percent 4(4) 4(4)
Percent Voids in
mineral aggregate
(minimum) See Table 8 See Table 8
Dust Proportion(3) 0.8-1.2 0.8-1.2
T
TSR, minimum percent 75 75
(1) This is a minimum requirement. The average during construction

shall be significantly higher than this number to ensure compliance
AF
with the specifications.
(2) The flow requirement is not applicable for Polymer Modified

Asphalts
(3) Dust Proportion is calculated as the aggregate content, expressed

as a percent of mass, passing the 0.075 mm sieve, divided by the
effective asphalt content, in percent of total mass of the mixture.
R
(4) Select the JMF asphalt content corresponding to an air void
content of 4 percent. Verify the other properties of Table 7 meet the
specification requirements at this asphalt content.
D
Table 7. Superpave Gyratory Compaction Criteria
Test Property Value
Air voids, percent 4(1)
Percent Voids in
mineral aggregate
(minimum) See Table 8
Dust Proportion(2) 0.8-1.2
TSR, minimum percent 75
(1) Select the JMF asphalt content corresponding to an air void content
of 4 percent. Verify the other properties of Table 7 meet the
specification requirements at this asphalt content.
(2) Dust Proportion is calculated as the aggregate content, expressed

as a percent of mass, passing the 0.075 mm sieve, divided by the
effective asphalt content, in percent of total mass of the mixture.
Table 8. Minimum Percent Voids in Mineral Aggregate (VMA)(4)
Aggregate (See Table 6) Minimum VMA, percent

Gradation 1 13.0
Gradation 2 14.0
Gradation 3 15.0
(1) Calculate VMA in accordance with AI MS-02, based on ASTM D 2726

bulk specific gravity for the aggregate.
2.3.2 Adjustments to JMF
The JMF for each mixture shall be in effect until a new formula is approved
in writing by the Contracting Officer . Should a change in sources of any
materials be made, a new mix design shall be performed and a new JMF
approved before the new material is used. The Contractor will be allowed
T
to make minor adjustments within the specifcation limits to the JMF to
optimize mix volumetric properties. Adjustments to the original JMF shall
be limited to plus or minus 4 percent on the 4.75 mm and coarser sieves;
plus or minus 3 percent on the 2.36 mm to 0.30 mm sieves; and plus or minus
AF
1 percent on the 0.15 mm sieve. Adjustments to the JMF shall be limited to
plus or minus 1.0 percent on the 0.075 mm sieve. Asphalt content
adjustments shall be limited to plus or minus 0.40 from the original JMF.
If adjustments are needed that exceed these limits, a new mix design shall
be developed.
PART 3 EXECUTION
R
3.1 CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROL
3.1.1 General Quality Control Requirements

D
Submit the approved Quality Control Plan. Hot-mix asphalt for payment
shall not be produced until the quality control plan has been approved.
The plan shall address all elements which affect the quality of the
pavement including, but not limited to:
a. Mix Design and unique JMF identification code
b. Aggregate Grading
c. Quality of Materials
d. Stockpile Management and procedures to prevent contamination
e. Proportioning
f. Mixing and Transportation
g. Correlation of mechanical hammer to hand hammer. Determine

the number of blows of the mechanical hammer required to provide
the same density of the JMF as provided by the hand hammer. Use
the average of three specimens per trial blow application.
h. Mixture Volumetrics
i. Moisture Content of Mixtures
j. Placing and Finishing
k. Joints
l. Compaction, including HMA-PCC joints
m. Surface Smoothness
n. Truck bed release agent
3.1.2 Testing Laboratory
Provide a fully equipped asphalt laboratory located at the plant or job

site. It shall be equipped with heating and air conditioning units to
maintain a temperature of 24 plus or minus 2.3 degrees C. Laboratory
facilities shall be kept clean and all equipment shall be maintained in
proper working condition. The Contracting Officer shall be permitted
T
unrestricted access to inspect the Contractor's laboratory facility, to
witness quality control activities, and to perform any check testing
desired. The Contracting Officer will advise the Contractor in writing of
any noted deficiencies concerning the laboratory facility, equipment,
AF
supplies, or testing personnel and procedures. When the deficiencies are
serious enough to adversely affect test results, the incorporation of the
materials into the work shall be suspended immediately and will not be
permitted to resume until the deficiencies are corrected.
3.1.3 Quality Control Testing
Perform all quality control tests applicable to these specifications and as

R
set forth in the Quality Control Program. The testing program shall
include, but shall not be limited to, tests for the control of asphalt
content, aggregate gradation, temperatures, aggregate moisture, moisture in
the asphalt mixture, laboratory air voids, stability, flow, in-place
density, grade and smoothness. A Quality Control Testing Plan shall be
D
developed as part of the Quality Control Program.
3.1.3.1 Asphalt Content
A minimum of two tests to determine asphalt content will be performed per

lot (a lot is defined in paragraph QUALITY ASSURANCE) by one of the
following methods: extraction method in accordance with ASTM D 2172,
Method A or B, the ignition method in accordance with the AASHTO T 308,
ASTM D 6307, or the nuclear method in accordance with ASTM D 4125, provided
each method is calibrated for the specific mix being used. For the
extraction method, the weight of ash, as described in ASTM D 2172, shall be
determined as part of the first extraction test performed at the beginning
of plant production; and as part of every tenth extraction test performed
thereafter, for the duration of plant production. The last weight of ash
value obtained shall be used in the calculation of the asphalt content for
the mixture.
3.1.3.2 Aggregate Properties
Aggregate gradations shall be determined a minimum of twice per lot from

mechanical analysis of recovered aggregate in accordance with ASTM D 5444
or ASTM D 6307. For batch plants, aggregates shall be tested in accordance

with ASTM C 136 using actual batch weights to determine the combined
aggregate gradation of the mixture. The specifc gravity of each aggregate
size grouping shall be determined for each 18,000 metric tons in accordance
with ASTM C 127 or ASTM C 128. Fractured faces for gravel sources shall be
determined for each 18,000 metric tons in accordance with COE CRD-C 171.
The uncompacted void content of manufactured sand shall be determined for
each 18,000 metric tons in accordance with ASTM C 1252 Method A.
3.1.3.3 Temperatures
Temperatures shall be checked at least four times per lot, at necessary

locations, to determine the temperature at the dryer, the asphalt cement in
the storage tank, the asphalt mixture at the plant, and the asphalt mixture
at the job site.
3.1.3.4 Aggregate Moisture
The moisture content of aggregate used for production shall be determined a

minimum of once per lot in accordance with ASTM C 566.
T
3.1.3.5 Moisture Content of Mixture
The moisture content of the mixture shall be determined at least once per
lot in accordance with AASHTO T 329.
AF
3.1.3.6 Laboratory Air Voids, VMA, Marshall Stability and Flow
Mixture samples shall be taken at least four times per lot and compacted
into specimens, using 75 blows per side with the Marshall hand-held hammer
as described in ASTM D 6926. After compaction, the laboratory air voids
and VMA of each specimen shall be determined, as well as the Marshall
stability and flow, as described in ASTM D 6927. The VMA shall be within
R
the limits of Table 8.
3.1.3.7 In-Place Density
Conduct any necessary testing to ensure the specified density is achieved.

D
A nuclear gauge or other non-destructive testing device may be used to

monitor pavement density.
3.1.3.8 Grade and Smoothness
Conduct the necessary checks to ensure the grade and smoothness

requirements are met in accordance with paragraph QUALITY ASSURANCE.
3.1.3.9 Additional Testing
Any additional testing, which the Contractor deems necessary to control the
process, may be performed at the Contractor's option.
3.1.3.10 QC Monitoring
Submit all QC test results to the Contracting Officer on a daily basis as

the tests are performed. The Contracting Officer reserves the right to
monitor any of the Contractor's quality control testing and to perform
duplicate testing as a check to the Contractor's quality control testing.
3.1.4 Sampling
When directed by the Contracting Officer , sample and test any material
which appears inconsistent with similar material being produced, unless
such material is voluntarily removed and replaced or deficiencies corrected
by the Contractor. All sampling shall be in accordance with standard
procedures specified.
3.1.5 Control Charts
For process control, establish and maintain linear control charts on both
individual samples and the running average of last four samples for the
parameters listed in Table 9, as a minimum. These control charts shall be
posted as directed by the Contracting Officer and shall be kept current at
all times. The control charts shall identify the project number, the test
parameter being plotted, the individual sample numbers, the Action and
Suspension Limits listed in Table 9 applicable to the test parameter being
plotted, and the Contractor's test results. Target values (JMF) shall also
be shown on the control charts as indicators of central tendency for the
cumulative percent passing, asphalt content, and laboratory air voids
parameters. When the test results exceed either applicable Action Limit,
T
take immediate steps to bring the process back in control. When the test
results exceed either applicable Suspension Limit, halt production until
the problem is solved. When the Suspension Limit is exceeded for
individual values or running average values, the Contracting Officer
AF
Engineer has the option to require the Contractor to remove and replace the
material represented by the samples or to leave in place and base
acceptance on mixture volumetric properties and in place density. Use the
control charts as part of the process control system for identifying trends
so that potential problems can be corrected before they occur. Decisions
concerning mix modifications shall be made based on analysis of the results
provided in the control charts. The Quality Control Plan shall indicate
the appropriate action which shall be taken to bring the process into
R
control when certain parameters exceed their Action Limits.
Table 9. Action and Suspension Limits for the Parameters to be Plotted on

Individual and Running Average Control Charts
D
Individual Samples Running Average of

Last Four Samples
Action Suspension Action Suspension

Parameter to be Plotted Limit Limit Limit Limit
----------------------------------------------------------------------
4.75 mm sieve, Cumulative % 6 8 4 5

Passing, deviation from JMF
target; plus or minus values
0.6 mm sieve, Cumulative % 4 6 3 4

0.075 mm sieve, Cumulative % 1.4 2.0 1.1 1.5

Stability, newtons (minimum)

75 blow JMF 7830 7290 9560 9030
Table 9. Action and Suspension Limits for the Parameters to be Plotted on

Individual and Running Average Control Charts
Individual Samples Running Average of

Last Four Samples
Action Suspension Action Suspension

Parameter to be Plotted Limit Limit Limit Limit
----------------------------------------------------------------------
50 blow JMF 4230 3690 6000 5470
Flow, 0.25 mm
75 blow JMF 8 min. 7 min. 9 min. 8 min.
16 max. 17 max. 15 max. 16 max.
50 blow JMF 8 min. 7 min. 9 min. 8 min.
18 max. 19 max. 17 max. 18 max
Asphalt content, % deviation 0.4 0.5 0.2 0.3

from JMF target; plus or
minus value
T
Laboratory Air Voids, % No specific action and suspension
deviation from JMF target limits set since this parameter is
value used to determine percent payment
AF
In-place Mat Density, % of No specific action and suspension
TMD limits set since this parameter is
used to determine percent payment
In-place Joint Density, % of No specific action and suspension

TMD limits set since this parameter is
used to determine percent payment
R
3.2 PREPARATION OF ASPHALT BINDER MATERIAL
The asphalt cement material shall be heated avoiding local overheating and
D
providing a continuous supply of the asphalt material to the mixer at a

uniform temperature. The temperature of unmodified asphalts shall be no
more than 160 degrees C when added to the aggregates.
3.3 PREPARATION OF MINERAL AGGREGATE
The aggregate for the mixture shall be heated and dried prior to mixing.
No damage shall occur to the aggregates due to the maximum temperature and
rate of heating used. The temperature of the aggregate and mineral filler
shall not exceed 175 degrees C when the asphalt cement is added. The
temperature shall not be lower than is required to obtain complete coating
and uniform distribution on the aggregate particles and to provide a
mixture of satisfactory workability.
3.4 PREPARATION OF HOT-MIX ASPHALT MIXTURE
The aggregates and the asphalt cement shall be weighed or metered and
introduced into the mixer in the amount specified by the JMF. The combined
materials shall be mixed until the aggregate obtains a thorough and uniform
coating of asphalt binder (testing in accordance with ASTM D 2489/D 2489M
may be required by the Contracting Officer) and is thoroughly distributed
throughout the mixture. The moisture content of all hot-mix asphalt upon
discharge from the plant shall not exceed 0.5 percent by total weight of
mixture as measured by ASTM D 1461.
3.5 PREPARATION OF THE UNDERLYING SURFACE
Immediately before placing the hot mix asphalt, the underlying course shall
be cleaned of dust and debris. A prime coatand/ortack coat shall be
applied in accordance with the contract specifications.
3.6 TEST SECTION
Prior to full production, place a test section for each JMF used.
Construct a test section consisting of a maximum of 250 tons and two paver
passes wide placed in two lanes, with a longitudinal cold joint. The test
section shall be of the same depth as the course which it represents. The
underlying grade or pavement structure upon which the test section is to be
constructed shall be the same as the remainder of the course represented by
the test section. The equipment used in construction of the test section
shall be the same equipment to be used on the remainder of the course
represented by the test section. The test section shall be placed as part
T
of the project pavement as approved by the Contracting Officer.
3.6.1 Sampling and Testing for Test Section

AF
One random sample shall be taken at the plant, triplicate specimens
compacted, and tested for stability, flow, laboratory air voids, and
Tensile Strength Ratio (TSR). A portion of the same sample shall be tested
for theoretical maximum density (TMD), aggregate gradation and asphalt
content. Four randomly selected cores shall be taken from the finished
pavement mat, and four from the longitudinal joint, and tested for
density. Random sampling shall be in accordance with procedures contained
in ASTM D 3665. The test results shall be within the tolerances or exceed
R
the minimum values shown in Table 10 for work to continue. If all test
results meet the specified requirements, the test section shall remain as
part of the project pavement. If test results exceed the tolerances shown,
the test section shall be removed and replaced at no cost to the Government
and another test section shall be constructed.
D
Table 10. Test Section Requirements for Material and Mixture Properties
Property Specification Limit
Aggregate Gradation-Percent Passing (Individual Test Result)
4.75 mm and larger JMF plus or minus 8
2.36, 1.18, 0.60, and 0.30 mm JMF plus or minus 6
0.15 and 0.075 mm JMF plus or minus 2.0
Asphalt Content, Percent JMF plus or minus 0.5

(Individual Test Result)
Laboratory Air Voids, Percent

(Average of 3 specimens) JMF plus or minus 1.0
VMA, Percent (Average of 3 specimens) See Table 8
Table 10. Test Section Requirements for Material and Mixture Properties
Property Specification Limit

Stability, newtons (Average of 3 specimens) 9560 minimum
Flow, 0.25 mm (Average of 3 specimens) 8 - 18
Tensile Strength Ratio (TSR) 75% minimum
Mat Density, Percent of TMD

(Average of 4 Random Cores) 92.0 - 96.0
Joint Density, Percent of TMD

(Average of 4 Random Cores) 90.5 minimum
3.6.2 Additional Test Sections
If the initial test section should prove to be unacceptable, the necessary

adjustments to the JMF, plant operation, placing procedures, and/or rolling
T
procedures shall be made. A second test section shall then be placed.
Additional test sections, as required, shall be constructed and evaluated
for conformance to the specifications. Full production shall not begin
until an acceptable section has been constructed and accepted.
AF
3.7 TESTING LABORATORY
The laboratories used to develop the JMF, perform Contractor Quality

Control testing, and for Government acceptance testing shall meet the
requirements of ASTM D 3666. All required test methods shall be performed
by an accredited laboratory. The Government will inspect the laboratory
equipment and test procedures prior to the start of hot-mix operations for
R
conformance with ASTM D 3666. The laboratory shall maintain this
validation for the duration of the project. Submit a certification of
compliance signed by the manager of the laboratory stating that it meets
these requirements to the Contracting Officer prior to the start of
construction. The certification shall contain as a minimum:
D
a. Qualifications of personnel; laboratory manager, supervising

technician, and testing technicians.
b. A listing of equipment to be used in developing the job mix.
c. A copy of the laboratory's quality control system.
d. Evidence of participation in the AASHTO Materials Reference

Laboratory (AMRL) program.
3.8 TRANSPORTING AND PLACING
3.8.1 Transporting
The hot-mix asphalt shall be transported from the mixing plant to the site
in clean, tight vehicles. Deliveries shall be scheduled so that placing
and compacting of mixture is uniform with minimum stopping and starting of
the paver. Adequate artificial lighting shall be provided for night
placements. Hauling over freshly placed material will not be permitted
until the material has been compacted as specified, and allowed to cool to
60 degrees C.
3.8.2 Placing
The mix shall be placed in lifts of adequate thickness and compacted at a

temperature suitable for obtaining density, surface smoothness, and other
specified requirements. Upon arrival, the mixture shall be placed to the
full width by an asphalt paver; it shall be struck off in a uniform layer
of such depth that, when the work is completed, it shall have the required
thickness and conform to the grade and contour indicated. Waste mixture
shall not be broadcast onto the mat or recycled into the paver hopper.
Collect waste mixture and dispose off site. The speed of the paver shall
be regulated to eliminate pulling and tearing of the asphalt mat.
Placement of the mixture shall begin along the centerline of a crowned
section or on the high side of areas with a one-way slope. The mixture
shall be placed in consecutive adjacent strips having a minimum width of 3 m.
The longitudinal joint in one course shall offset the longitudinal joint in
the course immediately below by at least 300 mm; however, the joint in the
surface course shall be at the centerline of the pavement. Transverse
joints in one course shall be offset by at least 3 m from transverse joints
in the previous course. Transverse joints in adjacent lanes shall be
T
offset a minimum of 3 m. On isolated areas where irregularities or
unavoidable obstacles make the use of mechanical spreading and finishing
equipment impractical, the mixture may be spread and luted by hand tools.
3.9
AF
COMPACTION OF MIXTURE
3.9.1 General
a. After placing, the mixture shall be thoroughly and uniformly

compacted by rolling. The surface shall be compacted as soon as
possible without causing displacement, cracking or shoving. The
sequence of rolling operations and the type of rollers used shall be at
R
the discretion of the Contractor, with the exception that the
Contractor shall not apply more than three passes with a vibratory
roller in the vibrating mode. The speed of the roller shall, at all
times, be sufficiently slow to avoid displacement of the hot mixture
and be effective in compaction. Any displacement occurring as a result
D
of reversing the direction of the roller, or from any other cause,

shall be corrected at once.
b. Sufficient rollers shall be furnished to handle the output of the

plant. Rolling shall continue until the surface is of uniform texture,
true to grade and cross section, and the required field density is
obtained. To prevent adhesion of the mixture to the roller, the wheels
shall be kept properly moistened but excessive water will not be
permitted. In areas not accessible to the roller, the mixture shall be
thoroughly compacted with hand tampers. Any mixture that becomes loose
and broken, mixed with dirt, contains check-cracking, or is in any way
defective shall be removed full depth, replaced with fresh hot mixture
and immediately compacted to conform to the surrounding area. This
work shall be done at the Contractor's expense. Skin patching will not
be allowed.
3.9.2 Segregation
The Contracting Officer can sample and test any material that looks
deficient. When the in-place material appears to be segregated, the
Contracting Officer has the option to sample the material and have it
tested and compared to the aggregate gradation, asphalt content, and

in-place density requirements in Table 10. If the material fails to meet
these specification requirements, the extent of the segregated material
will be removed and replaced the full depth of the layer of asphalt mixture
at no additional cost to the Government. When segregation occurs in the
mat, take appropriate action to correct the process so that additional
segregation does not occur.
3.10 JOINTS
The formation of joints shall be made ensuring a continuous bond between

the courses and to obtain the required density. All joints shall have the
same texture as other sections of the course and meet the requirements for
smoothness and grade.
3.10.1 Transverse Joints
The roller shall not pass over the unprotected end of the freshly laid
mixture, except when necessary to form a transverse joint. When necessary
to form a transverse joint, it shall be made by means of placing a bulkhead
or by tapering the course. The tapered edge shall be cut back to its full
T
depth and width on a straight line to expose a vertical face prior to
placing the adjacent lane. The cutback material shall be removed from the
project. In both methods, all contact surfaces shall be given a light tack
coat of asphalt material before placing any fresh mixture against the joint.
AF
3.10.2 Longitudinal Joints
Longitudinal joints which are irregular, damaged, uncompacted, cold (less

than 80 degrees C at the time of placing the adjacent lane), or otherwise
defective, shall be cut back a maximum of 75 mm from the top edge of the
lift with a cutting wheel to expose a clean, sound, near vertical surface
for the full depth of the course. All cutback material shall be removed
R
from the project. Cutting equipment that uses water as a cooling or
cutting agent shall not be permitted. All contact surfaces shall be given
a light tack coat of asphalt material prior to placing any fresh mixture
against the joint.
D
3.10.3 HMA-Portland Cement Concrete Joints
Avoid spalling portland cement concrete (PCC) pavement when compacting HMA
at a HMA-PCC joint. Pneumatic-tire rollers should be used and the HMA
shall be rolled parallel to the joint. All procedures, including repair of
damaged PCC, shall be in accordance with the approved Quality Control Plan.
SECTION 32 13 11
CONCRETE PAVEMENT FOR AIRFIELDS AND OTHER HEAVY-DUTY PAVEMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
1.3 SUBMITTALS
1.4 ACCEPTABILITY OF WORK
1.4.1 Pavement Lots
1.4.2 Acceptance of Lots
1.4.3 Evaluation
T
1.4.5.3 Acceptance for Smoothness
1.4.6
AF
Edge Slump and Joint Face Deformation
1.4.6.1 Edge Slump
1.4.6.2 Joint Face Deformation
1.4.6.3 Determination of Edge Slump and Joint Face Deformation
1.4.6.4 Excessive Edge Slump
1.4.7 Plan Grade
1.4.7.1 Grade Conformance Tests
1.4.7.2 Acceptance for Plan Grade
R
1.4.8 Flexural Strength
1.4.8.1 Sampling and Testing
1.4.8.2 Computations
1.4.9 Thickness
1.4.9.1 Drilling, Measuring, and Computations
D
1.4.9.2 Evaluation for Thickness

1.4.10 Areas Defective in Plan Grade or Smoothness
1.6 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING OF MATERIALS
1.6.1 Aggregates
1.6.2 Chemical Admixtures, Curing Compounds and Epoxies
1.6.3 Cementitious Materials
1.7 TESTING DURING CONSTRUCTION
1.8 QUALIFICATIONS
1.8.1 Contractor Quality Control Staff
1.8.2 Other Staff
1.8.3 Laboratory Accreditation
1.9 TEST SECTION
1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING OF MATERIALS
1.10.1 Bulk Cementitious Materials
1.10.2 Aggregate Materials
1.10.3 Other Materials
1.11 EQUIPMENT
1.11.1 Batching and Mixing Plant
1.11.1.1 Location of Batching and Mixing Plant
1.11.1.2 Type and Capacity of Batching and Mixing Plant
1.11.1.3 Batching Tolerances

1.11.1.4 Moisture Control
1.11.2 Concrete Mixers
1.11.2.1 Stationary, Central Plant, Mixers
1.11.2.2 Truck Mixers
1.11.2.3 Mixing Time and Uniformity
1.11.3 Transporting Equipment
1.11.4 Transfer and Spreading Equipment
1.11.5 Paver-Finisher
1.11.5.1 Paver-Finisher with Fixed Forms
1.11.5.2 Slipform Paver-Finisher
1.11.5.3 Longitudinal Mechanical Float
1.11.5.4 Nonrotating Pipe Float
1.11.5.5 Other Types of Finishing Equipment
1.11.6 Curing Equipment
1.11.7 Texturing Equipment
1.11.7.1 Burlap Drag
1.11.8 Sawing Equipment
1.11.9 Straightedge
PART 2 PRODUCTS
T
2.1 CEMENTITIOUS MATERIALS
2.1.1 Portland Cement
2.1.2 Silica Fume
2.2 AGGREGATES
AF
2.2.1 Aggregate Sources
2.2.1.1 Alkali-Silica Reactivity
2.2.1.2 Combined Aggregate Gradation
2.2.2.1 Material Composition
2.2.2.2 Particle Shape Characteristics
2.2.2.3 Size and Grading
R
2.2.2.4 Deleterious Materials - Airfield Pavements
2.2.2.5 Testing Sequence Deleterious Materials -- Airfields Only
2.2.3.1 Composition
2.2.3.2 Grading
D
2.2.3.3 Deleterious Material

2.3 CHEMICAL ADMIXTURES
2.3.2 Retarding or High Range Water Reducing Admixture (HRWR)
2.4 MEMBRANE FORMING CURING COMPOUND
2.5 WATER
2.6 JOINT MATERIALS
2.6.1 Expansion Joint Material
2.6.2 Slip Joint Material
2.7 REINFORCING
2.7.1 Reinforcing Bars and Bar Mats
2.7.2 Welded Wire Reinforcement
2.8 DOWELS AND TIE BARS
2.8.1 Dowels
2.8.2 Dowel Bar Assemblies
2.9 EPOXY RESIN
2.10 SPECIFIED CONCRETE STRENGTH AND OTHER PROPERTIES
2.10.1 Specified Flexural Strength
2.10.2 Concrete Temperature
2.10.3 Concrete Strength for Final Acceptance
2.11 MIXTURE PROPORTIONS
2.11.1 Composition
2.11.2 Proportioning Studies
2.11.2.1 Water-Cement Ratio
2.11.2.2 Trial Mixture Studies
2.11.2.3 Mixture Proportioning for Flexural Strength
2.11.3 Average CQC Flexural Strength Required for Mixtures
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION FOR PAVING

3.1.1 Weather Prevention
3.1.2 Proposed Techniques
3.2 CONDITIONING OF UNDERLYING MATERIAL
3.2.1 General Procedures
3.2.2 Traffic on Underlying Material
3.3.1 Placement and Protection During Inclement Weather
3.3.2 Paving in Hot Weather
3.3.3 Prevention of Plastic Shrinkage Cracking
3.3.4 Paving in Cold Weather
3.4 CONCRETE PRODUCTION
T
3.4.1 Batching and Mixing Concrete
3.4.2 Transporting and Transfer - Spreading Operations
3.5 PAVING
3.5.2
AF
Consolidation
3.5.3 Operation
3.5.4 Required Results
3.5.5 Fixed Form Paving
3.5.5.1 Forms for Fixed-Form Paving
3.5.5.2 Form Removal
3.5.6 Slipform Paving
3.5.6.1 General
R
3.5.6.2 Guideline for Slipform Paving
3.5.7 Placing Reinforcing Steel
3.5.8 Placing Dowels
3.5.8.1 Contraction Joints
3.5.8.2 Construction Joints-Fixed Form Paving
D
3.5.8.3 Dowels Installed in Hardened Concrete

3.5.8.4 Lubricating Dowel Bars
3.6 FINISHING
3.6.1 Machine Finishing With Fixed Forms
3.6.2 Machine Finishing with Slipform Pavers
3.6.3 Surface Correction and Testing
3.6.4 Hand Finishing
3.6.4.1 Equipment
3.6.4.2 Finishing and Floating
3.6.5 Texturing
3.6.5.1 Burlap Drag Surface
3.6.6 Edging
3.6.7 Outlets in Pavement
3.7 CURING
3.7.1 Protection of Concrete
3.7.2 Membrane Curing
3.7.3 Moist Curing
3.8 JOINTS
3.8.1 General Requirements for Joints
3.8.2 Longitudinal Construction Joints
3.8.3 Transverse Construction Joints
3.8.4 Expansion Joints

3.8.5 Slip Joints
3.8.6 Contraction Joints
3.8.7 Thickened Edge Joints
3.9 REPAIR, REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT OF NEWLY CONSTRUCTED SLABS
3.9.1 General Criteria
3.9.2 Slabs with Cracks
3.9.3 Removal and Replacement of Full Slabs
3.9.4 Repairing Spalls Along Joints
3.10 EXISTING CONCRETE PAVEMENT REMOVAL AND REPAIR
3.10.1 Removal of Existing Pavement Slab
3.10.2 Edge Repair
3.10.2.1 Spall Repair
3.10.2.2 Underbreak and Underlying Material
3.11 PAVEMENT PROTECTION
3.12 TESTING AND INSPECTION FOR CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROL
3.12.1 Testing and Inspection by Contractor
3.12.2 Testing and Inspection Requirements
3.12.3 Concrete Strength Testing for Contractor CQC
3.12.4 Reports
T
AF
R
D
SECTION 32 13 11
CONCRETE PAVEMENT FOR AIRFIELDS AND OTHER HEAVY-DUTY PAVEMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

basic designation only. The most current versions of the publications shall
be used.
ACI INTERNATIONAL (ACI)
ACI 211.1 Standard Practice for Selecting

Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight, and
T
Mass Concrete
ACI 305R Hot Weather Concreting
ACI 306R
AF Cold Weather Concreting
AMERICAN ASSOCIATION OF STATE HIGHWAY AND TRANSPORTATION OFFICIALS

(AASHTO)
AASHTO M 182 Burlap Cloth Made from Jute or Kenaf

R
ASTM A 184/A 184M Fabricated Deformed Steel Bar Mats for
Concrete Reinforcement
ASTM A 185/A 185M Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain,

D
for Concrete
ASTM A 497/A 497M Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement, Deformed,

for Concrete
ASTM A 615/A 615M Standard Specification for Deformed and

Plain Carbon Steel Bars for Concrete
Reinforcement
ASTM A 775/A 775M Epoxy-Coated Reinforcing Steel Bars
ASTM A 996/A 996M Rail-Steel and Axle-Steel Deformed Bars or

Concrete Reinforcement
ASTM C 1064/C 1064M Temperature of Freshly Mixed Portland

Cement Concrete
ASTM C 1077 Laboratories Testing Concrete and Concrete

Aggregates for Use in Construction and
Criteria for Laboratory Evaluation
ASTM C 117 Materials Finer Than 75 micrometer (No.

200) Sieve in Mineral Aggregates by Washing
ASTM C 123 Lightweight Particles in Aggregate
ASTM C 1240 Silica Fume Used in Cementitious Mixtures
ASTM C 1260 Potential Alkali Reactivity of Aggregates

(Mortar-Bar Method)
ASTM C 131 Resistance to Degradation of Small-Size

Coarse Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in
the Los Angeles Machine
ASTM C 136 Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse

Aggregates
ASTM C 142 Clay Lumps and Friable Particles in

Aggregates
ASTM C 143/C 143M Slump of Hydraulic Cement Concrete
T
ASTM C 150 Portland Cement
ASTM C 1567 Potential Alkali-Silica Reactivity of

AF Combinations of Cementitious Materials and
Aggregate (Accelerated Mortar-Bar Method)
ASTM C 1602/C 1602M Mixing Water Used in Production of

Hydraulic Cement Concrete
ASTM C 172 Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete

R
ASTM C 174/C 174M Measuring Thickness of Concrete Elements
Using Drilled Concrete Cores
ASTM C 192/C 192M Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens

in the Laboratory
D
ASTM C 231 Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by

the Pressure Method
ASTM C 260 Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete
ASTM C 294 Standard Descriptive Nomenclature for

Constituents of Concrete Aggregates
ASTM C 295 Petrographic Examination of Aggregates for

Concrete
ASTM C 31/C 31M (Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens

in the Field
ASTM C 33 Concrete Aggregates
ASTM C 494/C 494M Chemical Admixtures for Concrete
ASTM C 78 Flexural Strength of Concrete (Using

Simple Beam With Third-Point Loading)
ASTM C 881/C 881M Epoxy-Resin-Base Bonding Systems for

Concrete
ASTM C 94/C 94M Ready-Mixed Concrete
ASTM D 1751 Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for

Concrete Paving and Structural
Construction (Nonextruding and Resilient
Bituminous Types)
ASTM D 1752 Preformed Sponge Rubber and Cork Expansion

Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and
Structural Construction
ASTM D 2995 Determining Application Rate of Bituminous

Distributors
ASTM D 3665 Random Sampling of Construction Materials
ASTM D 4791 Flat Particles, Elongated Particles, or
T
Flat and Elongated Particles in Coarse
Aggregate
ASTM D 75 Sampling Aggregates

AF
NATIONAL READY MIXED CONCRETE ASSOCIATION (NRMCA)
NRMCA QC 3 Quality Control Manual: Section 3, Plant

Certifications Checklist: Certification of
Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities
STATE OF CALIFORNIA DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION (CDT)

R
CDT Test 526 Operation of California Profilograph and
Evaluation of Profiles

D
COE CRD-C 130 Standard Recommended Practice for

Estimating Scratch Hardness of Coarse
Aggregate Particles
COE CRD-C 143 Specifications for Meters for Automatic

Indication of Moisture in Fine Aggregates
COE CRD-C 300 Specifications for Membrane-Forming

Compounds for Curing Concrete
COE CRD-C 521 Standard Test Method for Frequency and

Amplitude of Vibrators for Concrete
COE CRD-C 55 Test Method for Within-Batch Uniformity of

Freshly Mixed Concrete
This section is intended to stand alone for construction of concrete

pavement. However, where the construction covered herein interfaces with
other sections, the construction at each interface shall conform to the

requirements of both this section and the other section, including
tolerances for both.
1.3 SUBMITTALS

SD-03 Product Data
Equipment
a. Details and data on the batching and mixing plant prior to

plant assembly including manufacturer's literature showing that
the equipment meets all requirements specified herein.
T
b. A certified copy of the NRMCA QC Manual Section 3 Concrete
Plant Certification Checklist and Calibration documentation on all
measuring and weighing devices, submitted prior to uniformity
testing.
AF
c. A description of the equipment proposed for transporting
concrete mixture from the central mixing plant to the paving
equipment.
d. A description of the equipment proposed for the machine and

hand placing, consolidating and curing of the concrete mixture.
Manufacturer's literature on the paver and finisher, together with
R
the manufacturer's written instructions on adjustments and
operating procedures necessary to assure a tight, smooth surface
on the concrete pavement. The literature shall show that the
equipment meets all details of these specifications.
D
Proposed Techniques
Placing and protection methods; paving sequence; jointing

pattern; data on curing equipment and profilographs; demolition of
existing pavements; as specified.
SD-05 Design Data
Proportioning Studies; G M
The results of the mixture proportioning studies shall be signed

and stamped by the registered professional engineer having
technical responsibility for the mix design study and submitted at
least 30 days prior to commencing concrete placing operations.
The results shall include a statement giving the maximum nominal
coarse aggregate size and the weights and volumes of each
ingredient proportioned on a one cubic meter basis. Aggregate
quantities shall be based on the mass in a saturated surface dry
condition. The recommended mixture proportions shall be
accompanied by test results demonstrating that the proportions
selected will produce concrete of the qualities indicated. The
submittal shall include:
a. Coarse and fine aggregate gradations and plots.

b. Combined aggregate gradation and coarseness/workability
plots.
c. Coarse aggregate quality test results, including
deleterious materials.
d. Fine aggregate quality test results.
e. Mill certificates for cement and silica fume.
f. Certified test results for air entraining, water reducing,
retarding, non-chloride accelerating admixtures.
g. Specifed flexural strength, slump, and air content.
h. Documentation of required average CQC flexural strength, Ra.
i. Recommended proportions/volumes for proposed mixture and
each of three trial water-cementitious materials ratios.
j. Individual beam breaks.
k. Flexural strength summaries and plots.
l. Correlation ratios for acceptance testing and CQC testing.
SD-06 Test Reports
T
Certified copies of laboratory test reports and sources for

cement and silica fume, aggregates, admixtures, curing compound,
AF
epoxy, and proprietary patching materials proposed for use on this
project. All aggregate tests shall have been performed no
earlier than 6 months prior to contract award.
SD-07 Certificates
Contractor Quality Control Staff

R
American Concrete Institute certification for Contractor Quality
Control staff. Qualifications and resumes for petrographer,
surveyor, concrete batch plant operator, and profilograph operator.
Laboratory Accreditation
D
Accreditation of the commercial laboratory by an independent

evaluation authority, indicating conformance to ASTM C 1077,
including all applicable test procedures.
1.4.1 Pavement Lots
A lot will be that quantity of construction that will be evaluated for

acceptance with specification requirements. A lot will be equal to one
shift of production not to exceed 750 cubic meters. In order to evaluate
thickness, each lot will be divided into four equal sublots. Grade
determinations will be made on the lot as a whole. Surface smoothness
determinations will be made on every 0.1 km segment in each lot. Location
of all samples shall be selected on a random basis in accordance with
ASTM D 3665. When operational conditions cause a lot to be terminated
before the specified four sublots have been completed, the following
procedure shall be used to adjust the lot size and number of tests for the
lot. Where three sublots have been completed, they shall constitute a
lot. Where one or two sublots have been completed, they shall be
incorporated into the next lot (except for the last lot), and the total
number of sublots shall be used and acceptance criteria adjusted
accordingly.
1.4.2 Acceptance of Lots
When a lot of material fails to meet the specification requirements, that

lot shall be removed and replaced. Results of strength tests shall be used
to control concreting operations. Any pavement not meeting the required
'specified strength' shall be removed and replaced at no additional cost to
the Government.
1.4.3 Evaluation
The Contractor shall provide all sampling and testing required at the
Contractor's expense. Individuals performing sampling, testing and
inspection duties shall meet the requirements of paragraph: QUALIFICATIONS.
The Contracting Officer reserves the right to direct additional samples and
T
tests for any area which appears to deviate from the specification
requirements. Testing in these areas will be in addition to the sublot or
lot testing, and the requirements for these areas will be the same as those
for a sublot or lot. The Contractor shall provide facilities for and,
AF
where directed, personnel to assist in obtaining samples for any Government
testing.
The profilograph method shall be used for all longitudinal testing, except
for paving lanes less than 60 m in length. The straightedge method shall
be used for transverse testing, for longitudinal testing where the length
R
of each pavement lane is less than 60 m, and at the ends of the paving
limits for the project. Where drawings show required deviations from a
plane surface (crowns, drainage inlets, etc.), the surface shall be
finished to meet the approval of the Contracting Officer. Detailed notes
shall be kept of the results of the testing and a copy furnished to the
D
Government after each day's testing.
a. Straightedge Testing: The finished surfaces of the pavements shall

have no abrupt change of 6 mm or more, and all pavements shall be
within the limits specified herinafter when checked with an approved 4 m
straightedge. Runways and taxiways shall have a variation from the
specified straight edge not greater than 3 mm in the longitudinal
direction and not greater than 6 mm in the transverse direction. All
other airfield areas shall have a variation from a straight edge not
greater than 6 mm in either the longitudinal or transverse direction.
b. Profilograph Testing: The finished surfaces of the pavements shall

have no abrupt change of 6 mm or more, and each 0.1 km segment of each
pavement lot shall have a Profile Index not greater than specified
herinafter when tested with an approved California-type profilograph.
Runways and taxiways shall have a Profile index not greater than 110 mm
per km in the longitudinal direction. Runway and taxiway transverse
smoothness shall be measured with the straight edge method and the
straight edge requirements shall apply. All other airfield areas shall
have a Profile Index not greater than 140 mm per km in the longitudinal
direction.
After the concrete has hardened sufficiently to permit walking thereon, but
not later than 48 hours after placement, the entire surface of the pavement
in each lot shall be tested by the Contractor in such a manner as to reveal
all surface irregularities exceeding the tolerances specified above. If
any pavement areas are ground, these areas shall be retested immediately
after diamond grinding. The entire area of the pavement shall be tested in
both a longitudinal and a transverse direction on parallel lines. The
transverse lines shall be 4.5 m or less apart, as directed. The
longitudinal lines shall be at the centerline of each paving lane shown on
the drawings, regardless of whether the Contractor is allowed to pave two
lanes at a time, and at the 1/8th point in from each side of the lane.
Other areas having obvious deviations shall also be tested. Longitudinal
testing lines shall be continuous across all joints. Transverse testing
lines for pilot lanes shall be carried to construction joint lines and for
fill-in lanes shall be carried 600 mm across construction joints, and the
readings in this area applied to the fill-in lane. Straightedge testing of
T
the longitudinal edges of slipformed pilot lanes shall also be performed
before paving fill-in lanes as specified in paragraph "Edge Slump and Joint
Face Deformation".
AF
a. Straightedge Testing: The straightedge shall be held in contact
with the surface and moved ahead one-half the length of the
straightedge for each successive measurement. The amount of surface
irregularity shall be determined by placing the freestanding
(unleveled) straightedge on the pavement surface and measuring the
maximum gap between the straightedge and the pavement surface.
Measurements shall be determined along the entire length of the
straight edge.
R
b. Profilograph Testing: Profilograph testing shall be performed
using approved equipment and procedures described in CDT Test 526. The
equipment shall utilize electronic recording and automatic computerized
reduction of data to indicate "must-grind" bumps and the Profile Index
D
for each 0.1 km segment of the pavement lot. Grade breaks on aprons
shall be accomodated by breaking the profile segment into short
sections and repositioning the blanking band on each section. The
"blanking band" shall be 5 mm wide and the "bump template" shall span
25 mm with an offset of 10 mm. The profilograph testing of the last
9.1 m of a paving lane in the longitudinal direction from each day's
paving operation shall be counted on the following day's continuation
lane. The profile index shall be computed for each pass of the
profilograph (3 per lane) in each 0.1 km segment. The profile index
for each segment shall be the average of the profile indices for each
pass in each segment. Profilographs of unequal lengths shall be scaled
and proportioned to an equivalent 0.1 km as outlined in the CDT Test 526.
A copy of the reduced tapes shall be furnished the Government at the
end of each day's testing.
1.4.5.3 Acceptance for Smoothness
a. Straightedge Testing: Location and deviation from straightedge for

all measurements shall be recorded. When 10.0 percent or more of all
measurements made within a lot exceed the tolerance specified in
paragraph "Smoothness Requirements" above, after any reduction of high
spots or removal and replacement, the lot shall be removed and replaced
at no additional cost to the Government.
b. Profilograph Testing: Location and data from all profilograph

measurements shall be recorded. When the Profile Index of a 0.1 km
segment of a lot exceeds the tolerance specified in paragraph
"Smoothness Requirements" above by 16 mm per km or more, the lot shall
be removed and replaced at no additional cost to the Government.
c. Bumps ("Must Grind" Areas): Any bumps ("must grind" areas) shown
on the profilograph trace which exceed 10 mm in height shall be reduced
by diamond grinding in accordance with subparagraph "Areas Defective In
Plan Grade Or Smoothness" until they do not exceed 7.5 mm when
retested. Such grinding shall be tapered in all directions to provide
smooth transitions to areas not requiring grinding.
1.4.6 Edge Slump and Joint Face Deformation
1.4.6.1 Edge Slump
When slip-form paving is used, not more than 15.0 percent of the total free
T
edge of each pavement panel shall have an edge slump exceeding 6 mm and
none of the free edge of the pavement lot shall have an edge slump
exceeding 9 mm as determined in accordance with the measurements specified
in paragraph: "Determination of Edge Slump". (A pavement panel is defined
AF
as a lane width by the length between two adjacent transverse contraction
joints. The total free edge of the pavement will be considered to be the
cumulative total linear measurement of pavement panel edge originally
constructed as non-adjacent to any existing pavement; i.e., 30 m of pilot
lane originally constructed as a separate lane, will have 60 m of free
edge; 30 m of fill-in lane will have no free edge, etc.,). The area
affected by the downward movement of the concrete along the pavement edge
shall not exceed 450 mm back from the edge.
R
1.4.6.2 Joint Face Deformation
In addition to the edge slump limits specified above, the vertical joint
face shall have a surface within the maximum limits shown below:
D
Offset from Offset from Offset From Abrupt Offset of

Straightedge Straightedge Straightedge Offset Joint Face
Applied Applied Applied in Any From True
Longitudinally Longitudinally Top to Bottom Direction Vertical
To Pavement Surface To Vertical Against the
Face Joint Face
_________________________________________________________________________________
Airfield Pavement
3 mm 6 mm 9 mm 3 mm 8 mm/100 mm
1.4.6.3 Determination of Edge Slump and Joint Face Deformation
Immediately after the concrete has hardened sufficiently to permit walking

thereon, the pavement surface of each lot shall be tested by the
Contractor. Testing shall be performed with a minimum 4 m straightedge to
reveal irregularities exceeding the edge slump tolerance specified above.
The vertical edge slump shall be determined at each free edge of each
slipformed paving lane constructed. The straightedge shall be placed

transverse to the direction of paving and the end of the straightedge
located at the edge of the paving lane. Measurements shall be made at 1.5
to 4.5 m spacings, as directed, commencing at the header where paving was
started. Initially measurements shall be made at 1.5 m intervals in each
lane. When no deficiencies are present, the Contracting Officer may
approve an increase in the interval. When any deficiencies exist, the
interval will be returned to 1.5 m. In no case shall the interval exceed
4.5 m. In addition to the transverse edge slump determination above, the
Contractor, at the same time, shall check the longitudinal surface
smoothness of the joint on a continuous line 25 mm back from the joint line
using the 4 m straightedge advanced one-half its length for each reading.
Other tests of the exposed joint face shall be made to ensure that a
uniform, true vertical joint face is attained. The measurements shall be
made by the Contractor, shall be properly referenced in accordance with
paving lane identification and stationing, and a report given to the
Contracting Officer within 24 hours after measurement is made. The report
shall also identify areas requiring replacement in accordance with
paragraph: "Excessive Edge Slump".
1.4.6.4 Excessive Edge Slump
T
When edge slump exceeding the limits specified above is encountered on
either side of the paving lane, additional straightedge measurements shall
be made, if required, to define the linear limits of the excessive slump.
AF
The concrete slabs having excessive edge slump or joint deformation shall
be removed and replaced to the next transverse joint in conformance with
paragraph: REPAIR, REMOVAL, REPLACEMENT OF NEWLY CONSTRUCTED SLABS. Use of
slip-form paving equipment and procedures that fail to consistently provide
edges within the specified tolerances on edge slump and joint face
deformation shall be discontinued and the pavements shall be constructed by
means of standard paving procedures using fixed forms.
R
1.4.7 Plan Grade
1.4.7.1 Grade Conformance Tests
Within 5 days after paving of each lot, the finished surface of the
D
pavement area shall be tested by the Contractor, by running lines of levels

at intervals corresponding with every longitudinal and transverse joint to
determine the elevation at each joint intersection. The results of this
survey shall be recorded and a copy given to the Government at the
completion of the survey of each lot. The finished surfaces of airfield
runway, taxiway, and apron pavements shall vary not more than 13 mm above
or below the plan grade line or elevation indicated. The surfaces of other
pavements shall vary not more than 19 mm. The above deviations from the
approved grade line and elevation will not be permitted in areas where
closer conformance with the planned grade and elevation is required for the
proper functioning of appurtenant structures. The finished surfaces of new
abutting pavements shall coincide at their juncture.
1.4.7.2 Acceptance for Plan Grade
When 10.0 percent or more of all measurements made within a lot are outside
the specified tolerance, the deficient area shall be removed and replaced
at no additional cost to the Government.
1.4.8 Flexural Strength
Each lot of pavement will be evaluated for acceptance in accordance with

the following procedures.
1.4.8.1 Sampling and Testing
For acceptance, one composite sample of concrete from each sublot shall be
obtained in accordance with ASTM C 172 from one batch or truckload. Test
beams 152 x 152 mm shall be fabricated and cured in accordance with
ASTM C 31/C 31M; and tested in accordance with ASTM C 78. Two test beams
per sublot (8 per lot) shall be tested at 28 days.
1.4.8.2 Computations
Average the eight 28-day strength tests for the lot. The average strength
shall be used in accordance with paragraph "Concrete Strength for Final
Acceptance".
1.4.9 Thickness
T
Each lot of pavement will be evaluated for acceptance in accordance with
the following procedure. The Contractor shall be responsible for drilling
the cores, measuring the cores, and for filling the core holes with a
non-shrink concrete, as approved.
AF
1.4.9.1 Drilling, Measuring, and Computations
Two cores, between 100 and 150 mm in diameter, shall be drilled from the
pavement, per sublot (8 per lot). Eight measurements of thickness shall be
made around the circumference of each core and one in the center, in
accordance with ASTM C 174/C 174M, using calibrated calipers for specimens
longer than 250 mm. The pavement thickness from the 8 cores for the lot
R
shall be averaged and shall be evaluated as described below.
1.4.9.2 Evaluation for Thickness

D
Evaluation for Thickness
Deficiency in Thickness
Determined by Cores Pavements Over Pavements Less than
millimeters 200 mm Thick 200 mm Thick
0.00 to 6.0 Accept Accept

6.5 or greater Reject
Reject
Where rejection is indicated, the entire lot shall be removed and replaced
at no additional cost to the Government. Where either of the two cores
from a sublot show a thickness deficiency of 6.0 mm or greater, two more
cores shall be drilled in the sublot and the average thickness of the four
cores computed. If this average shows a thickness deficiency of 6.5 mm or
more the entire sublot shall be removed.
1.4.10 Areas Defective in Plan Grade or Smoothness
In areas not meeting the specified limits for surface smoothness and plan
grade, high areas shall be reduced to attain the required smoothness and
grade, except as depth is limited below. High areas shall be reduced by

grinding the hardened concrete with an approved diamond grinding machine
after the concrete is 14 days or more old. The area corrected by grinding
the surface of the hardened concrete shall not exceed 1 percent of the
total area of any sublot. The depth of diamond grinding shall not exceed 6
mm. All pavement areas requiring plan grade or surface smoothness
corrections in excess of the limits specified above, shall be removed and
replaced in conformance with paragraph REPAIR, REMOVAL, REPLACEMENT OF
NEWLY CONSTRUCTED SLABS. All areas in which diamond grinding has been
performed will be subject to the thickness tolerances specified in
paragraph: Thickness. Any diamond grinding performed on individual slabs
with excessive deficiencies shall be performed at the Contractor's own
decision without entitlement to additional compensation if eventual removal
of the slab is required.
The materials and the pavement itself will be accepted on the basis of
tests made by the Contractor. The Government may, at its discretion, make
check tests to validate the results of the Contractor's testing. If the
results of the Contractor tests vary by less than 2.0 percent of the
T
Government's test results, the results of the Contractor's tests will be
used. If the results of the Government and Contractor tests vary by 2.0
percent, but less than 4.0 percent, the average of the two will be
considered the value to be used. If these vary by 4.0 percent or more,
AF
each sampling and testing procedure shall be carefully evaluated and both
the Government and the Contractor shall take another series of tests on
duplicate samples of material. If these vary by 4.0 percent or more, the
results of the tests made by the Government shall be used and the
Government will continue check testing of this item on a continuous basis
until the two sets of tests agree within less than 4.0 percent on a regular
basis. Testing performed by the Government will in no way at any time
relieve the Contractor from the specified testing requirements.
R
1.6 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING OF MATERIALS
All sampling and testing shall be performed by, and at the expense of, the
Contractor. The Contractor shall use an approved commercial laboratory or,
D
for cementitious materials and chemical admixtures, a laboratory maintained

by the manufacturer of the material. No material shall be used until
notice of acceptance has been given. The Contractor will not be entitled
to any additional payment or extension of time due to failure of any
material to meet project requirements, or for any additional sampling or
testing required. Additional tests may be performed by the Government at
the discretion of the Contracting Officer; such Government testing will not
relieve the Contractor of any testing responsibilities.
1.6.1 Aggregates
Aggregates shall be sampled by the Contractor in the presence of a

Government representative. Samples shall be obtained in accordance with
ASTM D 75 and shall be representative of the materials to be used for the
project. Test results shall be submitted 7 days before commencing mixture
proportioning studies.
1.6.2 Chemical Admixtures, Curing Compounds and Epoxies
At least 30 days before the material is used, the Contractor shall submit
certified copies of test results for the specific lots or batches to be
used on the project. Test results shall be not more than 6 months old
prior to use in the work. Chemical admixtures that have been in storage at
the project site for longer than 6 months or that have been subjected to
freezing will be retested at the expense of the Contractor and shall be
rejected if test results are not satisfactory.
1.6.3 Cementitious Materials
Cement and silica fume will be accepted on the basis of manufacturer's

certification of compliance, accompanied by mill test reports showing that
the material in each shipment meets the requirements of the specification
under which it is furnished. Mill test reports shall be no more than 1
month old, prior to use in the work. No cementitious material shall be
used until notice of acceptance has been given by the Contracting Officer.
Cementitious material may be subjected to check testing by the Government
from samples obtained at the mill, at transfer points, or at the project
site. If tests prove that a cementitious material that has been delivered
is unsatisfactory, it shall be promptly removed from the site of the work.
Cementitious material that has not been used within 6 months after testing
shall be retested at the Contractor's expense and shall be rejected if test
results are not satisfactory.
T
1.7 TESTING DURING CONSTRUCTION
During construction, the Contractor shall be responsible for sampling and

AF
testing aggregates, cementitious materials, and concrete as specified
herein. The Government will sample and test concrete and ingredient
materials as considered appropriate. The Contractor shall provide
facilities and labor as may be necessary for procurement of representative
test samples. Testing by the Government will in no way relieve the
Contractor of the specified testing requirements.
1.8 QUALIFICATIONS
R
1.8.1 Contractor Quality Control Staff
All Contractor Quality Control personnel assigned to concrete construction

shall be American Concrete Institute (ACI) certified in the following grade
D
(or shall have written evidence acceptable to the Contracting Officer's

representative of having completed similar qualification programs):
a. CQC personnel responsible for inspection of concrete paving

operations: ACI Concrete Transportation Inspector.
b. Lead Foreman or Journeyman of the Concrete Placing, Finishing, and

Curing Crews: ACI Concrete Flatwork Technician/Finisher.
c. Field Testing Technicians: ACI Concrete Field Testing Technician,

Grade I.
d. Laboratory Testing Technicians: ACI Concrete Strength Testing

Technician and Laboratory Testing Technician, Grade I or II.
1.8.2 Other Staff
Submit for approval, the qualifications and resumes for the following staff:
a. Petrographer: Bachelor of Science degree in geology or petrography,

trained in petrographic examination of concrete aggregate according to
ASTM C 294 and ASTM C 295 and trained in identification of the specific
deleterious materials and tests identified in this specification.
Resume shall detail the education, training and experience related to
the project-specific test methods and deleterious materials and shall
be submitted at least 20 days before petrographic and deleterious
materials examination is to commence.
b. Licensed Surveyor: All survey work shall be performed under the

supervision of a Licensed Surveyor.
c. Concrete Batch Plant Operator: National Ready Mix Concrete

Association (NRMCA) Level 2.
d. Profilograph Operator: Certification by equipment manufacturer or a

state Department of Transportation.
1.8.3 Laboratory Accreditation
Laboratory and testing facilities shall be provided by and at the expense

of the Contractor. The laboratories performing the tests shall be
accredited in accordance with ASTM C 1077, including ASTM C 78 and
T
ASTM C 1260. The accreditation shall be current and shall include the
required and optional test methods, as specified throughout this section.
Onsite temperature-controlled concrete curing facilities shall be provided.
AF
a. Aggregate Testing and Mix Proportioning: Aggregate testing and
mixture proportioning studies shall be performed by a commercial
laboratory.
b. Acceptance Testing: The Contractor shall furnish all materials,

labor, and facilities required for molding, curing, testing, and
protecting test specimens at the site and in the laboratory. Steel
molds shall be used for molding the beam specimens. The Contractor
R
shall furnish and maintain boxes or other facilities suitable for
storing and curing the specimens at the site while in the mold within
the temperature range stipulated by ASTM C 31/C 31M. Flexural loading
equipment shall be in accordance with ASTM C 78.
D
c. Contractor Quality Control: All sampling and testing shall be

performed by an approved, onsite, independent, commercial laboratory,
or for cementitious materials and admixtures, the manufacturer's
laboratory.
d. Laboratory Inspection: The Government will inspect the laboratory

equipment and test procedures prior to the start of concreting
operations for conformance to ASTM C 1077. The laboratory shall
maintain this certification for the duration of the project.
1.9 TEST SECTION
At least 10 days but not more than 60 days prior to construction of the
concrete pavement, a test section shall be constructed near the job site,
but not as part of the production pavement area. The Contractor shall use
the test section to develop and demonstrate to the satisfaction of the
Contracting Officer the proposed techniques of mixing, hauling, placing,
consolidating, finishing, curing, initial saw cutting, start-up procedures,
testing methods, plant operations, and the preparation of the construction
joints. The test section shall consist of one paving lane at least 130 m
long and shall be constructed to the same thickness as the thickest portion
of pavement shown on the Drawings. The lane width shall be the same as
that required for use in the project. The test section shall contain at
least one transverse construction joint. If doweled longitudinal
construction joints are required in any of the production pavements, they
shall be installed full length along one side of the test strip throughout
the test section. Two separate days shall be used for construction of the
test section. Variations in mixture proportions other than water shall be
made if directed. The Contractor shall vary the water content, as
necessary, to arrive at the appropriate content. The mixing plant shall be
operated and calibrated prior to start of placing the test section. The
Contractor shall use the same equipment, materials, and construction
techniques on the test section as will be used in all subsequent work.
Base course preparation, concrete production, placing, consolidating,
curing, construction of joints, and all testing shall be in accordance with
applicable provisions of this specification. Three days after completion
of the test section, the Contractor shall provide eight cores at least 150
mm diameter by full depth cut from points selected in the test section by
the Government. The cores will be evaluated for homogeneity, consolidation
and segregation. The Contractor shall construct the test section meeting
all specification requirements and being acceptable to the Contracting
Officer in all aspects, including surface texture. Failure to construct an
T
acceptable test section will necessitate construction of additional test
sections at no additional cost to the Government. If the Contractor
proposes to use slipform paving and is unable to construct an acceptable
test section, the slipform paving equipment shall be removed from the job
AF
and the construction completed using stationary side forms and equipment
compatible with them. Production paving shall not commence until the
results on aggregates and concrete, including evaluation of the cores, and
all pavement measurements for edge slump, joint face deformation, actual
plan grade, surface smoothness and thickness have been submitted and
1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING OF MATERIALS

R
1.10.1 Bulk Cementitious Materials
All cementitious material shall be furnished in bulk. The temperature of

the cementitious material, as delivered to storage at the site, shall not
D
exceed 65 degrees C. Sufficient cementitious materials shall be in storage

to sustain continuous operation of the concrete mixing plant while the
pavement is being placed. Separate facilities shall be provided which will
prevent any intermixing during unloading, transporting, storing, and
handling of each type of cementitious material.
1.10.2 Aggregate Materials
Aggregate shall be stored at the site of the batching and mixing plant
avoiding breakage, segregation, intermixing or contamination by foreign
materials. Each size of aggregate from each source shall be stored
separately in free-draining stockpiles. Aggregate stored on ground shall
have a minimum 0.6 m thick sacrificial layer left undisturbed. Fine
aggregate and the smallest size coarse aggregate shall remain in
free-draining storage for at least 24 hours immediately prior to use.
Sufficient aggregate shall be maintained at the site at all times to permit
continuous uninterrupted operation of the mixing plant at the time concrete
pavement is being placed. Tracked equipment shall not be allowed on coarse
aggregate stockpiles.
1.10.3 Other Materials
Reinforcing bars and accessories shall be stored above the ground on

supports. All materials shall be stored avoiding contamination and
deterioration.
1.11 EQUIPMENT
All plant, equipment, tools, and machines used in the work shall be
maintained in satisfactory working conditions at all times.
1.11.1 Batching and Mixing Plant
1.11.1.1 Location of Batching and Mixing Plant
The location for the batching and mixing plant shall be the Contractor's
responsibility and its location shall be subject to the Contracting
Officer's approval. There shall be operable telephonic or radio
communication between the plant and the placing site at all times
concreting is taking place. The method of communication shall be subject
to the Contracting Officer's approval. The Contractor shall submit to the
T
Contracting Officer the frequency, output power and antenna gain for all
radio communication equipment used at the project site.
1.11.1.2 Type and Capacity of Batching and Mixing Plant

AF
The batching and mixing plant shall be a stationary-type central mix
plant. The plant shall be designed and operated to produce concrete within
the specified tolerances, and shall have a capacity of at least 200 cubic
meters per hour. The batching and mixing plant shall conform to the
requirements of NRMCA QC 3 including provisions addressing:
a. Material Storage and Handling

R
b. Batching Equipment
c. Central Mixer
d. Ticketing System
e. Delivery System
D
1.11.1.3 Batching Tolerances
The following tolerances shall apply.
Percentage of Required
Materials Mass
____________ _________
Cementitious Materials plus or minus 1
Aggregate plus or minus 2
Water plus or minus 1
Admixture plus or minus 3
For volumetric batching equipment for water and admixtures, the above
numeric tolerances shall apply to the required volume of material being
batched. Concentrated admixtures shall be uniformly diluted, if necessary,
to provide sufficient volume per batch to ensure that the batchers will
consistently operate within the above tolerance.
1.11.1.4 Moisture Control
The plant shall be capable of ready adjustment to compensate for the
varying moisture contents of the aggregates and to change the quantities of

the materials being batched. An electric moisture meter complying with the
provisions of COE CRD-C 143 shall be provided for measuring of moisture in
the fine aggregate. The sensing element shall be arranged so that
measurement is made near the batcher charging gate of the fine aggregate
bin or in the fine aggregate batcher.
1.11.2 Concrete Mixers
Mixers shall be stationary or truck mixers. Truck mixers shall not be used
for mixing or transporting slipformed paving concrete. Mixers shall be
capable of combining the materials into a uniform mixture and of
discharging this mixture without segregation. The mixers shall not be
charged in excess of the capacity recommended by the manufacturer. The
mixers shall be operated at the drum or mixing blade speed designated by
the manufacturer. The mixers shall be maintained in satisfactory operating
condition, and the mixer drums shall be kept free of hardened concrete.
Mixer blades or paddles shall be replaced when worn down more than 10
percent of their depth when compared with the manufacturer's dimension for
new blades or paddles.
T
1.11.2.1 Stationary, Central Plant, Mixers
Stationary mixers shall be drum or pan mixers. Mixers shall be provided

with an acceptable device to lock the discharge mechanism until the
AF
required mixing time has elapsed.
1.11.2.2 Truck Mixers
The only truck mixers used for mixing or transporting paving concrete shall
be those designed with extra large blading and rear opening specifically
for low-slump paving concrete. Truck mixers, the mixing of concrete
therein, and concrete uniformity and testing thereof shall conform to the
R
requirements of ASTM C 94/C 94M. The number of revolutions between 70 to
100 for truck-mixed concrete and the number of revolutions for shrink-mixed
concrete shall be determined by uniformity tests as specified in
ASTM C 94/C 94M and in requirements for mixer performance stated in
paragraph TESTING AND INSPECTION FOR CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROL. If
D
requirements for the uniformity of concrete are not met with 100
revolutions of mixing after all ingredients including water are in the
truck mixer drum, the mixer shall not be used until the condition is
corrected. Water shall not be added after the initial introduction of
mixing water except, when on arrival at the job site, the slump is less
than specified and the water-cement ratio is less than that given as a
maximum in the approved mixture. Additional water may be added to bring
the slump within the specified range provided the approved water-cement
ratio is not exceeded. Water shall be injected into the head of the mixer
(end opposite the discharge opening) drum under pressure, and the drum or
blades shall be turned a minimum of 30 additional revolutions at mixing
speed. Water shall not be added to the batch at any later time.
1.11.2.3 Mixing Time and Uniformity
a. Stationary Mixers: For stationary mixers, before uniformity data

are available, the mixing time for each batch after all solid materials
are in the mixer, provided that all of the mixing water is introduced
before one-fourth of the mixing time has elapsed, shall be 1 minute for
mixers having a capacity of 0.75 cubic meter. For mixers of greater
capacity, this minimum time shall be increased 20 seconds for each
additional cubic meter or fraction thereof. After results of

uniformity tests are available, the mixing time may be reduced to the
minimum time required to meet uniformity requirements; but if
uniformity requirements are not being met, the mixing time shall be
increased as directed. The mixing time for full batch production shall
be a minimum of 75 seconds. Mixer performance tests at new mixing
times shall be performed immediately after any change in mixing time.
When regular testing is performed, the concrete shall meet the limits
of any five of the six uniformity requirements listed in Table 1
below. When abbreviated testing is performed, the concrete shall meet
only those requirements listed for abbreviated testing. The concrete
proportions used for uniformity tests shall be as used on the project.
Regular testing shall consist of performing all six tests on three
batches of concrete. The range for regular testing shall be the
average of the ranges of the three batches. Abbreviated testing shall
consist of performing the three required tests on a single batch of
concrete. The range for abbreviated testing shall be the range for one
batch. If more than one mixer is used and all are identical in terms
of make, type, capacity, condition, speed of rotation, etc., the
results of tests on one of the mixers shall apply to the others,
subject to the approval of the Contracting Officer. All mixer
T
performance (uniformity) testing shall be performed in accordance with
COE CRD-C 55 and with paragraph titled TESTING AND INSPECTION FOR
CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROL.
AF TABLE 1
UNIFORMITY REQUIREMENTS--STATIONARY MIXERS
Regular Tests Abbreviated Tests

Allowable Allowable
Maximum Range for Maximum Range
Parameter Average of 3 Batches for 1 Batch
___________ ______________________ ____________________
R
Unit weight of air-free mortar 32 kg/cubic m 32 kg/cubic m
Air content 1.0 percent --

D
Slump 25 mm 25 mm
Coarse aggregate 6.0 percent 6.0 percent
Compressive strength at 7 days, 10.0 percent 10.0 percent
Water content 1.5 percent --
b. Truck Mixers: Mixer performance (uniformity) tests for truck

mixers shall be made in accordance with ASTM C 94/C 94M.
1.11.3 Transporting Equipment
Slipform concrete shall be transported to the paving site in nonagitating

equipment conforming to ASTM C 94/C 94M or in approved agitators. Fixed
form concrete shall be transported in approved truck mixers designed with
extra large blading and rear opening specifically for low slump concrete.
All transporting equipment shall be designed and operated to deliver and
discharge the required concrete mixture completely without segregation.
1.11.4 Transfer and Spreading Equipment
Equipment for transferring concrete from the transporting equipment to the

paving lane in front of the paver shall be specially manufactured,
self-propelled transfer equipment which will accept the concrete outside
the paving lane and will transfer and spread it evenly across the paving
lane in front of the paver and strike off the surface evenly to a depth
which permits the paver to operate efficiently.
1.11.5 Paver-Finisher
The paver-finisher shall be a heavy-duty, self-propelled machine designed

specifically for paving and finishing high quality pavement. The
paver-finisher shall weigh at least 3280 kg/m of lane width, and shall be
powered by an engine having at least 15,000 W/m of lane width. The
paver-finisher shall spread, consolidate, and shape the plastic concrete to
the desired cross section in one pass. The mechanisms for forming the
pavement shall be easily adjustable in width and thickness and for required
crown. In addition to other spreaders required by paragraph Transfer and
Spreading Equipment, the paver-finisher shall be equipped with a full width
T
knock-down auger or paddle mechanism, capable of operating in both
directions, which will evenly spread the fresh concrete in front of the
screed or extrusion plate. Immersion vibrators shall be gang mounted at
the front of the paver on a frame equipped with suitable controls so that
AF
all vibrators can be operated at any desired depth within the slab or
completely withdrawn from the concrete, as required. The vibrators shall
be automatically controlled so that they will be immediately stopped as
forward motion of the paver ceases. The spacing of the immersion vibrators
across the paving lane shall be as necessary to properly consolidate the
concrete, but the clear distance between vibrators shall not exceed
750 mm. The outside vibrators shall not be more than 300 mm from the lane
edge. Spud vibrators shall operate at a frequency of not less than 135 Hz
R
and an amplitude of not less than 0.75 mm and tube vibrators at a frequency
of not less than 80 Hz and an amplitude of not less than 0.75 mm, as
determined by COE CRD-C 521. The paver-finisher shall be equipped with a
transversely oscillating screed or an extrusion plate to shape, compact,
and smooth the surface and shall so finish the surface that no significant
D
amount of hand finishing, except use of cutting straightedges, is

required. The screed or extrusion plate shall be constructed to provide
adjustment for crown in the pavement. The entire machine shall provide
adjustment for variation in lane width or thickness and to prevent more than
200 mm of the screed or extrusion plate extending over previously placed
concrete on either end when paving fill-in lanes. Machines that cause
displacement of properly installed forms or cause ruts or indentations in
the prepared underlying materials and machines that cause frequent delays
due to mechanical failures shall be replaced as directed.
1.11.5.1 Paver-Finisher with Fixed Forms
The paver-finisher shall be equipped with wheels designed to ride the

forms, keep it aligned with the forms, and spread the load so as to prevent
deformation of the forms.
1.11.5.2 Slipform Paver-Finisher
The slipform paver-finisher shall be automatically controlled and crawler

mounted with padded tracks so as to be completely stable under all
operating conditions. The paver-finisher shall finish the surface and
edges so that no edge slump beyond allowable tolerance occurs. Suitable

moving side forms shall be provided that are adjustable and will produce
smooth, even edges, perpendicular to the top surface and meeting
specification requirements for alignment and freedom from edge slump.
1.11.5.3 Longitudinal Mechanical Float
A longitudinal mechanical float shall be specially designed and

manufactured to smooth and finish the pavement surface without working
excess paste to the surface. It shall be rigidly attached to the rear of
the paver-finisher or to a separate self-propelled frame spanning the
paving lane. The float plate shall be at least 1.5 m long by 200 mm wide
and shall automatically be oscillated in the longitudinal direction while
slowly moving from edge to edge of the paving lane, with the float plate in
contact with the surface at all times.
1.11.5.4 Nonrotating Pipe Float
A pipe float if used, shall be a nonrotating pipe 150 to 250 mm in diameter

and sufficiently long to span the full paving width when oriented at an
angle of approximately 60 degrees with the centerline. The pipe float
T
shall be mounted on a self-propelled frame that spans the paving lane. No
means of applying water to the surface shall be incorporated in the pipe
float.
1.11.5.5
AF
Other Types of Finishing Equipment
Clary screeds, other rotating tube floats, or bridge deck finishers shall
not be allowed on mainline paving, but may be allowed on irregular or
odd-shaped slabs, and near buildings or trench drains, subject to the
Contracting Officer's approval. Bridge deck finishers shall have a minimum
operating weight of 3400 kg and shall have a transversely operating
carriage containing a knock-down auger and a minimum of two immersion
R
vibrators. Vibrating screeds or pans shall be used only for isolated slabs
where hand finishing is permitted as specified, and only where specifically
approved. Concrete finishing equipment of types other than specified above
may be demonstrated on a test section outside the production pavement if
approved in writing.
D
1.11.6 Curing Equipment
Equipment for applying membrane-forming curing compound shall be mounted on

a self-propelled frame that spans the paving lane. The reservoir for
curing compound shall be constantly mechanically (not air) agitated during
operation and shall contain means for completely draining the reservoir.
The spraying system shall consist of a mechanically powered pump which will
maintain constant pressure during operation, an operable pressure gauge,
and either a series of spray nozzles evenly spaced across the lane to give
uniformly overlapping coverage or a single spray nozzle which is mounted on
a carriage which automatically traverses the lane width at a speed
correlated with the forward movement of the overall frame. All spray
nozzles shall be protected with wind screens. Calibrate the spraying
system in accordance with ASTM D 2995, Method A, for the rate of
application required in paragraph: Membrane Curing. Any hand-operated
sprayers allowed by paragraph: Membrane Curing shall be compressed air
supplied by a mechanical air compressor. If the curing equipment fails to
apply an even coating of compound at the specified rate, it shall
immediately be replaced.
1.11.7 Texturing Equipment
Texturing equipment shall be as specified below. Before use, the texturing

equipment shall be demonstrated on a test section, and the equipment shall
be modified as necessary to produce the texture directed.
1.11.7.1 Burlap Drag
A burlap drag shall be securely attached to a separate wheel mounted frame

spanning the paving lane or to one of the other similar pieces of
equipment. Length of the material shall provide 600 to 900 mm dragging
flat on the pavement surface. Width shall be at least equal to the width
of the slab. The material shall be clean, reasonably new burlap,
completely saturated with water before attachment to the frame, always
resaturated before start of use, and kept clean and saturated during use.
Burlap shall conform to AASHTO M 182, Class 3 or 4.
1.11.8 Sawing Equipment
Equipment for sawing joints and for other similar sawing of concrete shall
be standard diamond-type concrete saws mounted on a wheeled chassis which
T
can be easily guided to follow the required alignment. Blades shall be
diamond tipped. If demonstrated to operate properly, abrasive blades may
be used. Provide spares as required to maintain the required sawing rate.
Wheel saws used in the removal of concrete shall be saws with large
AF
diameter tungsten carbide tipped blades mounted on a heavy-duty chassis
which will produce a saw kerf at least 40 mm wide. All saws shall be
capable of sawing to the full depth required. Early-entry saws may be
used, subject to demonstration and approval of the Contracting Officer. No
change to the initial sawcut depth shall be permitted.
1.11.9 Straightedge
R
The Contractor shall furnish and maintain at the job site, in good
condition, one 4 m straightedge for each paving train for testing the
hardened portland cement concrete surfaces. These straightedges shall be
constructed of aluminum or magnesium alloy and shall have blades of box or
box-girder cross section with flat bottom, adequately reinforced to insure
D
rigidity and accuracy. Straightedges shall have handles for operation on

the pavement.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 CEMENTITIOUS MATERIALS
Cementitious materials shall be portland cement in combination with silica

fume and shall conform to appropriate specifications listed below.
2.1.1 Portland Cement
Portland cement shall conform to ASTM C 150 Type I or ASTM C 150, Type V,
low alkali, including false set requirements. Low alkali cement is
required if the proposed aggregates are found to have greater than 0.04
percent expansion when tested in accordance with paragraph: Alkali-Silica
Reactivity.
2.1.2 Silica Fume
Silica fume shall conform to ASTM C 1240, including the optional limits on
reactivity with cement alkalis. Silica fume may be furnished as a dry,

densified material or as a slurry. The Contractor shall provide at his
expense the services of a manufacturer's technical representative,
experienced in mixing, proportioning, placement procedures, and curing of
concrete containing silica fume. This representative shall be present on
the project prior to and during at least the first 4 days of concrete using
silica fume.
2.2 AGGREGATES
2.2.1 Aggregate Sources
2.2.1.1 Alkali-Silica Reactivity
Fine and coarse aggregates to be used in all concrete shall be evaluated

and tested by the Contractor for alkali-aggregate reactivity. Both coarse
aggregate size groups shall be tested if from different sources.
The fine and coarse aggregates shall be evaluated separately, using

ASTM C 1260. Test results of the individual aggregates shall have a
measured expansion equal to or less than 0.08 percent at 30 days after
T
casting. Should the test data indicate an expansion of greater than 0.08
percent, the aggregate(s) shall be rejected or additional testing, using
ASTM C 1567 shall be performed using the following method:
AF
Utilize the Contractor's proposed low alkali portland cement and silica
fume in combination with the proposed aggregate percentage for the test
proportioning. Silica fume shall be used in the range of 7.0 percent
to 9.0 percent of the total cementitious material by mass. The
quantity shall be determined that will meet all the requirements of
these specifications and that which will lower the expansion equal to
or less than 0.08 percent at 30 days after casting.
R
2.2.1.2 Combined Aggregate Gradation
In addition to the grading requirements specified for coarse aggregate and

for fine aggregate, the combined aggregate grading shall meet the following
requirements:
D
a. The materials selected and the proportions used shall be such that
when the Coarseness Factor (CF) and the Workability Factor (WF) are
plotted on a diagram as described in d. below, the point thus
determined shall fall within the parallelogram described therein.
b. The Coarseness Factor (CF) shall be determined from the following

equation:
CF = (cumulative percent retained on the 9.5 mm

sieve)(100)/(cumulative percent retained on the 2.36 mm sieve)
c. The Workability Factor WF is defined as the cumulative percent

passing the 2.36 mm sieve. However, WF shall be adjusted, upwards
only, by 2.5 percentage points for each 42 kg of cementitious material
per cubic meter greater than 335 kg per cubic meter.
d. A diagram shall be plotted using a rectangular scale with WF on the

Y-axis with units from 20 (bottom) to 45 (top), and with CF on the
X-axis with units from 80 (left side) to 30 (right side). On this
diagram a parallelogram shall be plotted with corners at the following
coordinates (CF-75, WF-28), (CF-75, WF-40), (CF-45, WF-32.5), and

(CF-45, WF-44.5. If the point determined by the intersection of the
computed CF and WF does not fall within the above parallelogram, the
grading of each size of aggregate used and the proportions selected
shall be changed as necessary.)
e. A blending aggregate shall be used to meet the required combined

grading. This blending aggregate shall be batched separately. The
combined grading of all aggregates used, in the proportions selected,
shall be computed on the basis of cumulative percent retained on each
sieve specified for fine and coarse aggregate.
2.2.2.1 Material Composition
Coarse aggregate shall consist of crushed or uncrushed gravel, crushed

stone, or a combination thereof. If dust, coatings or other deleterious
fine materials are present in amounts in excess of limits specified in
ASTM C 33, they shall be removed from the coarse aggregates by washing or
air blasting. Coarse aggregate shall not show more than 40 percent loss
T
when subjected to the Los Angeles abrasion test in accordance with
ASTM C 131.
2.2.2.2 Particle Shape Characteristics

AF
Particles of the coarse aggregate shall be generally spherical or cubical
in shape. The quantity of flat and elongated particles in any size group
coarser than the 9.5 mm sieve shall not exceed 20 percent by weight as
determined by the Flat Particle Test and the Elongated Particle Test of
ASTM D 4791. A flat particle is defined as one having a ratio of width to
thickness greater than 3; an elongated particle is one having a ratio of
length to width greater than 3.
R
2.2.2.3 Size and Grading
The nominal maximum size of the coarse aggregate shall be 37.5 mm. The
coarse aggregates shall be graded and furnished in two size groups meeting
D
the individual grading requirements of ASTM C 33, Size No. 4 (37.5 to 19.0
mm) and Size No. 67 (19.0 to 4.75 mm).
2.2.2.4 Deleterious Materials - Airfield Pavements
The amount of deleterious material in each size group of coarse aggregate

shall not exceed the limits shown in Table 5 below, determined in
accordance with the test methods shown.
TABLE 5
LIMITS OF DELETERIOUS MATERIALS IN COARSE AGGREGATE
FOR AIRFIELD PAVEMENTS
Percentage by Mass
Moderate
(h)
Materials Weather
____________ _______________________________________
Clay lumps and friable 0.2
TABLE 5
LIMITS OF DELETERIOUS MATERIALS IN COARSE AGGREGATE
FOR AIRFIELD PAVEMENTS
Percentage by Mass
Moderate
Materials (h) Weather
____________ _______________________________________
particles (ASTM C 142)
Shale (a) (ASTM C 295) 0.2
Material finer than 0.075 mm 0.5

(No. 200 sieve) (b) (ASTM C 117)
Lightweight particles (c) 0.2

(ASTM C 123)
T
Clay ironstone (d) 0.5
(ASTM C 295)
Chert and cherty stone (less than 0.5

AF
2.40 Mg/cubic meter density SSD
(2.40 Sp. Gr.)) (e)
( ASTM C 123) and ASTM C 295)
Claystone, mudstone, and 0.1

siltstone (f) (ASTM C 295)
Shaly and argillaceous 0.2

R
limestone (g) (ASTM C 295)
Other soft particles 1.0

(COE CRD-C 130)
D
Total of all deleterious 2.0

substances exclusive of material
finer than 0.075 mm (No. 200 sieve)
a. Shale is defined as a fine-grained, thinly laminated or fissile

sedimentary rock. It is commonly composed of clay or silt or both. It
has been indurated by compaction or by cementation, but not so much as
to have become slate.
b. Limit for material finer than 0.075 mm (No. 200 sieve) will be
increased to 1.5 percent for crushed aggregates if the fine material
consists of crusher dust that is essentially free from clay or shale.
c. The separation medium shall have a density of 2.0 Mg/cubic meter

(Sp. Gr. of 2.0). This limit does not apply to coarse aggregate
manufactured from blast-furnace slag unless contamination is evident.
d. Clay ironstone is defined as an impure variety of iron carbonate,

iron oxide, hydrous iron oxide, or combinations thereof, commonly mixed
with clay, silt, or sand. It commonly occurs as dull, earthy
particles, homogeneous concretionary masses, or hard-shell particles
with soft interiors. Other names commonly used for clay ironstone are
"chocolate bars" and limonite concretions.
e. Chert is defined as a rock composed of quartz, chalcedony or opal,

or any mixture of these forms of silica. It is variable in color. The
texture is so fine that the individual mineral grains are too small to
be distinguished by the unaided eye. Its hardness is such that it
scratches glass but is not scratched by a knife blade. It may contain
impurities such as clay, carbonates, iron oxides, and other minerals.
Cherty stone is defined as any type of rock (generally limestone) that
contains chert as lenses and nodules, or irregular masses partially or
completely replacing the original stone.
f. Claystone, mudstone, or siltstone, is defined as a massive

fine-grained sedimentary rock that consists predominantly of indurated
clay or silt without laminations or fissility. It may be indurated
either by compaction or by cementation.
g. Shaly limestone is defined as limestone in which shale occurs as

one or more thin beds or laminae. These laminae may be regular or very
irregular and may be spaced from a few inches down to minute fractions
T
of an inch. Argillaceous limestone is defined as a limestone in which
clay minerals occur disseminated in the stone in the amount of 10 to 50
percent by weight of the rock; when these make up from 50 to 90
percent, the rock is known as calcareous (or dolomitic) shale (or
AF
claystone, mudstone, or siltstone).
h. Testing shall be performed in accordance with the referenced test

methods, except that the minimum sample size shall be as specified in
Paragraph: Testing Deleterious Materials-Airfields Only.
2.2.2.5 Testing Sequence Deleterious Materials -- Airfields Only

R
The Contractor will not be entitled to any extension of time or additional
payment due to any delays caused by the testing, evaluation, or personnel
requirements. The size of the coarse aggregate sample shall be at least 90
kg for the 19 mm and larger maximum size and 12 kg for the 4.75 to 19 mm
coarse aggregate and 5 kg for the fine aggregate. The Contractor shall
D
provide facilities for the ready procurement of representative test

samples. The testing procedure on each sample of coarse aggregate for
compliance with limits on deleterious materials shall be as follows:
Step 1: Wash each full sample of coarse aggregate for material finer
than the 0.075 mm sieve. Discard material finer than the 0.075 mm
sieve.
Step 2: Test remaining full sample for clay lumps and friable
particles and remove.
Step 3: Test remaining full sample for lightweight particles

(Sp.Gr.2.0) and remove.
Step 4. Test remaining full sample for chert and/or cherty stone with
SSD density of less than 2.40 Mg/cubic meter (Sp. Gr. 2.40). Remove
lightweight chert and/or cherty stone. Restore other materials less
than 2.40 to the sample.
Step 5: Test remaining sample for clay-ironstone, shale, claystone,

mudstone, siltstone, shaly and/or argillaceous limestone, and remove.
Step 6: Test approximately one-fifth of remaining full sample for

other soft particles.
2.2.3.1 Composition
Fine aggregate shall consist of natural sand, manufactured sand, or a

combination of the two, and shall be composed of clean, hard, durable
particles meeting the requirements of ASTM C 33. Aggregate used for paving
compass calibration hardstands shall be free of materials having
undesirable magnetic properties, including magnetite in granite, high-iron
minerals in traprcok, and pyrite in limestone. Each type of fine aggregate
shall be stockpiled and batched separately. Particles of the fine
aggregate shall be generally spherical or cubical in shape.
2.2.3.2 Grading
Grading of the fine aggregate, as delivered to the mixer, shall conform to

the requirements of ASTM C 33 and shall have a fineness modulus of not less
T
than 2.50 nor more than 3.00.
2.2.3.3 Deleterious Material

AF
The amount of deleterious material in the fine aggregate shall not exceed
the following limits by mass:
Material Percentage by Mass

__________ ___________________
Clay lumps and friable particles ASTM C 142 1.0

R
Material finer than 0.075 mm (No. 200 sieve) ASTM C 117 3.0
Lightweight particles ASTM C 123 using a medium 0.5

with a density of 2.0 Mg/cubic meter (Sp. Gr. of 2.0))
D
Total of all above 3.0
2.3 CHEMICAL ADMIXTURES
Chemical admixtures may only be used when the specific admixture type and
manufacturer is the same material used in the mixture proportioning
studies. Air-entraining admixture shall be used and shall conform to
ASTM C 260. An accelerator conforming to ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type C, may be
used only when approved by the Contracting Officer and shall not be used to
reduce the amount of cementitious material used. Calcium chloride and
admixtures containing calcium chloride shall not be used. Retarding or
water-reducing admixture shall meet the requirements of ASTM C 494/C 494M,
Type F or G, except that the 6-month and 1-year compressive strength tests
are waived.
2.3.2 Retarding or High Range Water Reducing Admixture (HRWR)
Retarding and high-range water-reducng admixture shall meet the

requirements of ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F or G. The retarding and HRWR
shall be free from chlorides, alkalies, and shall be of the synthesized,

sulfonated complex polymer type, which shall be added to the concrete as a
single component at the batch plant. The admixture shall be added to the
concrete mixture only when its use is approved or directed, and only when
it has been used in mixture proportioning studies to arrive at approved
mixture proportions. The Contractor shall submit certified copies of the
independent laboratory test results required for compliance with ASTM C 494.
2.4 MEMBRANE FORMING CURING COMPOUND
Membrane forming curing compound shall be a white pigmented compound

conforming to COE CRD-C 300.
2.5 WATER
Water for mixing and curing shall be fresh, clean, potable, and free of
injurious amounts of oil, acid, salt, or alkali, except that non-potable
water, or water from concrete production operations, may be used if it
meets the requirements of ASTM C 1602/C 1602M.
2.6 JOINT MATERIALS
T
2.6.1 Expansion Joint Material
Expansion joint filler shall be a preformed material conforming to

AF
ASTM D 1751 or ASTM D 1752 Type II or III. Expansion joint filler shall be
19 mm thick, unless otherwise indicated, and shall be furnished in a single
full depth piece.
2.6.2 Slip Joint Material
Slip joint material shall be 6 mm thick expansion joint filler, unless

otherwise indicated, conforming to para: Expansion Joint Material.
R
2.7 REINFORCING
All reinforcement shall be free from loose, flaky rust, loose scale, oil,
grease, mud, or other coatings that might reduce the bond with concrete.
D
Removal of thin powdery rust and tight rust is not required. However,
reinforcing steel which is rusted to the extent that it does not conform to
the required dimensions or mechanical properties shall not be used.
2.7.1 Reinforcing Bars and Bar Mats
Reinforcing bars shall conform to ASTM A 615/A 615M, billet-steel

ASTM A 996/A 996M, rail and axle steel, Grade 60. Bar mats shall conform
to ASTM A 184/A 184M. The bar members may be billet rail or axle steel.
2.7.2 Welded Wire Reinforcement
Welded Wire Reinforcement shall be deformed or smooth, conforming to

ASTM A 497/A 497M or ASTM A 185/A 185M, and shall be furnished in flat
sheets.
2.8 DOWELS AND TIE BARS
2.8.1 Dowels
Dowels shall be single piece bars fabricated or cut to length at the shop
or mill before delivery to the site. Dowels shall be free of loose, flaky
rust and loose scale and shall be clean and straight. Dowels may be
sheared to length provided that the deformation from true shape caused by
shearing does not exceed 1 mm on the diameter of the dowel and does not
extend more than 1 mm from the end of the dowel. Dowels shall be plain
(non-deformed) steel bars conforming to ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 40 or 60;
ASTM A 996/A 996M, Grade 50 or 60. Dowel bars shall be epoxy coated in
conformance with ASTM A 775/A 775M. Grout retention rings shall be fully
circular metal or plastic devices capable of supporting the dowel until the
epoxy hardens.
2.8.2 Dowel Bar Assemblies
Dowel bar assemblies shall consist of a framework of metal bars or wires

arranged to provide rigid support for the dowels throughout the paving
operation, with a minimum of four continuous bars or wires extending along
the joint line. The dowels shall be welded to the assembly or held firmly
by mechanical locking arrangements that will prevent them from rising,
sliding out, or becoming distorted during paving operations.
2.9 EPOXY RESIN
T
All epoxy-resin materials shall be two-component materials conforming to
the requirements of ASTM C 881/C 881M, Class as appropriate for each
application temperature to be encountered, except that in addition, the
AF
materials shall meet the following requirements:
a. Material for use for embedding dowels and anchor bolts shall be
Type IV, Grade 3.
b. Material for use as patching materials for complete filling of

spalls and other voids and for use in preparing epoxy resin mortar
shall be Type III, Grade as approved.
R
c. Material for use for injecting cracks shall be Type IV, Grade 1.
d. Material for bonding freshly mixed portland cement concrete or

mortar or freshly mixed epoxy resin concrete or mortar to hardened
D
concrete shall be Type V, Grade as approved.
2.10 SPECIFIED CONCRETE STRENGTH AND OTHER PROPERTIES
2.10.1 Specified Flexural Strength
Specified flexural strength, R, for concrete is 3.8 MPa at 28 days, as

determined by tests made in accordance with ASTM C 78 of beams fabricated
and cured in accordance with ASTM C 192/C 192M. Maximum allowable
water-cementitious material ratio is 0.45. The water-cementitious material
ratio will be the equivalent water-cement ratio as determined by conversion
from the weight ratio of water to cement plus silica fume by the mass
equivalency method described in ACI 211.1. The concrete shall be
air-entrained with a total air content of 4 plus or minus 1.5 percentage
points, at the point of placement. Air content shall be determined in
accordance with ASTM C 231. The maximum allowable slump of the concrete at
the point of placement shall be 75 mm for pavement constructed with fixed
forms. For slipformed pavement, the maximum allowable slump shall be 30
mm. The selected slump shall be applicable to both pilot and fill-in lanes.
2.10.2 Concrete Temperature
The temperature of the concrete as delivered shall conform to the

requirements of paragraphs, Paving in Hot Weather and Paving in Cold
Weather. Temperature of concrete shall be determined in accordance with
ASTM C 1064/C 1064M.
2.10.3 Concrete Strength for Final Acceptance
The strength of the concrete will be considered acceptable when the 28-day
flexural strengths for each lot are above the'Specified Flexural Strength'
and no individual set (2 specimens per sublot) in the lot are 170 kPa or
more below the equivalent 'Specified Flexural Strength'. If any lot or
sublot, respectively, fails to meet the above criteria, the lot or sublot
shall be removed and replaced at no additional cost to the Government.
This is in addition to and does not replace the average strength required
for day-to-day CQC operations as specified in paragraph: Average CQC
Flexural Strength Required for Mixtures.
2.11 MIXTURE PROPORTIONS
T
2.11.1 Composition
Concrete shall be composed of cementitious material, water, fine and coarse

aggregates, and admixtures. The cementitious materials shall be portland
AF
cement in combination with silica fume. Silica fume shall consist of not
less than 7.0 percent of the cementitious material by mass and not more
than 9.0 percent. The total cementitious materials content shall be at
least 390 kg/cubic meter. Admixtures shall consist of air entraining
admixture and may also include, as approved, a retarder, conventional
water-reducing admixture, and high-range water reducing admixture (HRWR).
If a HRWR is used, it shall be used only at the dosage determined during
mixture proportioning studies.
R
2.11.2 Proportioning Studies
Trial design batches, mixture proportioning studies, and testing

requirements shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. Trial mixtures
D
having proportions, slumps, and air content suitable for the work shall be
based on methodology described in ACI 211.1, modified as necessary to
accommodate flexural strength.
2.11.2.1 Water-Cement Ratio
At least three different water-cement ratios, which will produce a range of

strength encompassing that required on the project, shall be used. The
maximum allowable water-cement ratio required in paragraph: Specified
Flexural Strength will be the equivalent water-cement ratio. Laboratory
trial mixtures shall be proportioned for maximum permitted slump and air
content.
2.11.2.2 Trial Mixture Studies
Separate sets of trial mixture studies shall be made for each combination
of cementitious materials and each combination of admixtures proposed for
use. No combination of either shall be used until proven by such studies,
except that, if approved in writing and otherwise permitted by these
specifications, an accelerator or a retarder may be used without separate
trial mixture study. Separate trial mixture studies shall also be made for
concrete for each placing method proposed. The temperature of concrete in

each trial batch shall be reported. Each mixture shall be designed to
promote easy and suitable concrete placement, consolidation and finishing,
and to prevent segregation and excessive bleeding.
2.11.2.3 Mixture Proportioning for Flexural Strength
The following step by step procedure shall be followed:
a. Fabricate all beams for each mixture from the same batch or blend
of batches. Fabricate and cure all beams in accordance with
ASTM C 192/C 192M, using 152 x 152 mm steel beam forms.
b. Cure test beams from each mixture for 3, 7, and 28-day flexural
tests; 6 beams to be tested per age.
c. Test beams in accordance with ASTM C 78.
d. Using the average strength for each w/c at each age, plot all
results from each of the three mixtures on separate graphs for w/c
versus:
T
3-day flexural strength
e.
AF
From these graphs select a w/c that will produce a mixture giving
a 28-day flexural strength equal to 1.15 times the Specified
Flexural Strength.
f. Using the above selected w/c, select from the graphs the expected
7-day flexural strength.
g. From the above expected strengths for the selected mixture,

R
determine the Ratio of the 7-day flexural strength of the selected
mixture to the 28-day flexural strength of the mixture (for CQC
control).
h. If there is a change in materials, additional mixture design

D
studies shall be made using the new materials and new Correlation
Ratios shall be determined.
i. No concrete pavement shall be placed until the Contracting Officer

has approved the Contractor's mixture proportions. The approved
water-cementitious materials ratio shall not exceed the maximum
value specified in paragraph: Specified Flexural Strength and
shall not be increased without the Contracting Officer's written
approval.
2.11.3 Average CQC Flexural Strength Required for Mixtures
In order to ensure meeting the strength requirements specified in

paragraph: SPECIFIED CONCRETE STRENGTH AND OTHER PROPERTIES, during
production, the mixture proportions selected during mixture proportioning
studies and used during construction shall produce a required average CQC
flexural strength exceeding the specified strength, R, by 15 percent. This
required average CQC flexural strength, Ra, will be used only for CQC
operations as specified in paragraph: TESTING AND INSPECTION FOR CONTRACTOR
QUALITY CONTROL and as specified in the previous paragraph. During
production, the required Ra shall be adjusted , as appropriate and as
approved, based on the standard deviation of average 28-day strengths being

attained during paving.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION FOR PAVING
Before commencing paving, the following shall be performed. If used, forms

shall be in place, cleaned, coated, and adequately supported. Any
reinforcing steel needed shall be at the paving site. All transporting and
transfer equipment shall be ready for use, clean, and free of hardened
concrete and foreign material. Equipment for spreading, consolidating,
screeding, finishing, and texturing concrete shall be at the paving site,
clean and in proper working order. All equipment and material for curing
and for protecting concrete from weather or mechanical damage shall be at
the paving site, in proper working condition, and in sufficient amount for
the entire placement.
3.1.1 Weather Prevention
T
When windy conditions during paving appear probable, equipment and material
shall be at the paving site to provide windbreaks, shading, fogging, or
other action to prevent plastic shrinkage cracking or other damaging drying
of the concrete.
AF
3.1.2 Proposed Techniques
The Contractor shall submit for approval the following items:
a. A description of the placing and protection methods proposed

when concrete is to be placed in or exposed to hot, cold, or rainy
weather conditions.
R
b. A detailed paving sequence plan and proposed paving pattern
showing all planned construction joints; transverse and
longitudinal dowel bar spacing; and identifying pilot lanes and
hand placement areas. No deviation from the jointing pattern
D
shown on the drawings shall be made without written approval of

the Corps of Engineers Transatlantic Programs Center.
c. Plan and equipment proposed to control alignment of sawn

joints within the specified tolerances.
d. Data on the curing equipment, media and methods to be used.
e. Data on profilograph and methods to measure pavement

smoothness.
f. Pavement demolition work plan, presenting the proposed

methods and equipment to remove existing pavement and protect
pavement to remain in place.
3.2 CONDITIONING OF UNDERLYING MATERIAL
3.2.1 General Procedures
Underlying material, upon which concrete is to be placed shall be clean,

damp, and free from debris, waste concrete or cement, frost, ice, and
standing or running water. Prior to setting forms or placement of

concrete, the underlying material shall be well drained and shall have been
satisfactorily graded and uniformly compacted in accordance with the
applicable Section of these specifications. The surface of the underlying
material shall be tested as to crown, elevation, and density in advance of
setting forms or of concrete placement using slip-form techniques. High
areas shall be trimmed to proper elevation. Low areas shall be filled and
compacted to a condition similar to that of surrounding grade, or filled
with concrete monolithically with the pavement. Low areas filled with
concrete shall not be cored for thickness to avoid biasing the average
thickness used for evaluation. Any underlying material disturbed by
construction operations shall be reworked and recompacted to specified
density immediately in front of the paver. If a slipform paver is used,
the same underlying material under the paving lane shall be continued
beyond the edge of the lane a sufficient distance and shall be thoroughly
compacted and true to grade to provide a suitable trackline for the
slipform paver and firm support for the edge of the paving lane.
3.2.2 Traffic on Underlying Material
Equipment shall be allowed to operate on the underlying material only if
T
approved by the Contracting Officer and only if no damage is done to the
underlying material and its degree of compaction. Any disturbance to the
underlying material that does occur shall be corrected, as approved, before
the paver-finisher or the deposited concrete reaches the location of the
AF
disturbance and the equipment shall be replaced or procedures changed to
prevent any future damage.
3.3.1 Placement and Protection During Inclement Weather
The Contractor shall not commence placing operations when heavy rain or
R
other damaging weather conditions appear imminent. At all times when
placing concrete, the Contractor shall maintain on-site sufficient
waterproof cover and means to rapidly place it over all unhardened concrete
or concrete that might be damaged by rain. Placement of concrete shall be
suspended whenever rain, high winds, or other damaging weather commences to
D
damage the surface or texture of the placed unhardened concrete, washes

cement out of the concrete, or changes the water content of the surface
concrete. All unhardened concrete shall be immediately covered and
protected from the rain or other damaging weather. Any slab damaged by
rain or other weather shall be completely removed full depth, by full slab
width, to the nearest original joint, and replaced at the Contractor's
expense as specified in paragraph: REPAIR, REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT OF NEWLY
CONSTRUCTED SLABS,
3.3.2 Paving in Hot Weather
When the ambient temperature during paving is expected to exceed 32 degrees

C, the concrete shall be properly placed and finished in accordance with
procedures previously submitted, approved, and as specified herein. The
concrete temperature at time of delivery to the forms shall not exceed the
temperature shown in the table below when measured in accordance with
ASTM C 1064/C 1064M. Cooling of the mixing water or aggregates or placing
in the cooler part of the day may be required to obtain an adequate placing
temperature. Steel forms and reinforcing shall be cooled as needed to
maintain steel temperatures below 49 degrees C. Transporting and placing
equipment shall be cooled or protected if necessary to maintain proper
concrete placing temperature. The finished surfaces of the newly laid

pavement shall be kept damp by applying a fog spray (mist) with approved
spraying equipment until the pavement is covered by the curing medium.
Maximum Allowable Concrete Placing Temperature
Relative Humidity, Percent, Maximum Allowable Concrete

During Time of Concrete Placement Temperature in Degrees C
___________________________________ _________________________
Greater than 60 33
40-60 30
Less than 40 27
3.3.3 Prevention of Plastic Shrinkage Cracking
During weather with low humidity, and particularly with high temperature
and appreciable wind, the Contractor shall develop and institute measures
to prevent plastic shrinkage cracks from developing. If plastic shrinkage
cracking occurs, further placement of concrete shall be halted until
protective measures are in place to prevent further cracking. Periods of
T
high potential for plastic shrinkage cracking can be anticipated by use of
Fig. 2.1.5 of ACI 305R. In addition to the protective measures specified
in the previous paragraph, the concrete placement shall be further
protected by erecting shades and windbreaks and by applying fog sprays of
AF
water, the addition of monomolecular films, or wet covering. When such
water treatment is stopped, curing procedures shall be immediately
commenced. Plastic shrinkage cracks that occur shall be repaired in
accordance with paragraph: REPAIR, REMOVAL, REPLACEMENT OF NEWLY
CONSTRUCTED SLABS. Plastic shrinkage cracks shall never be troweled over
or filled with slurry.
3.3.4 Paving in Cold Weather

R
Cold weather paving shall conform to ACI 306R. Special protection
measures, as specified herein, shall be used if freezing temperatures are
anticipated before the expiration of the specified curing period.
Placement of concrete shall not begin unless the ambient temperature is at
D
least 2 degrees C and rising. Thereafter, placement of concrete shall be

halted whenever the ambient temperature drops below 5 degrees C. When the
ambient temperature is less than 10 degrees C, the temperature of the
concrete when placed shall be not less than 10 degrees C nor more than 25
degrees C. Heating of the mixing water or aggregates will be required to
regulate the concrete placing temperature. Materials entering the mixer
shall be free from ice, snow, or frozen lumps. Salt, chemicals or other
materials shall not be incorporated in the concrete to prevent freezing.
If allowed under paragraph: MIXTURE PROPORTIONS, an accelerating admixture
may be used when the ambient temperature is below 10 degrees C. Covering
and other means shall be provided for maintaining the concrete at a
temperature of at least 10 degrees C for not less than 72 hours after
placing, and at a temperature above freezing for the remainder of the
curing period. Pavement slabs damaged by freezing shall be removed full
depth, by full slab width, to the nearest original joint, and replaced at
the Contractor's expense as specified in paragraph: REPAIR, REMOVAL,
REPLACEMENT OF NEWLY CONSTRUCTED SLABS.
3.4 CONCRETE PRODUCTION
Batching, mixing, and transporting equipment shall have a capacity
sufficient to maintain a continuous, uniform forward movement of the paver

of not less than 0.8 m per minute. Concrete transported in non-agitating
equipment shall be deposited in front of the paver within 45 minutes from
the time cement has been charged into the mixing drum, except that if the
ambient temperature is above 32 degrees C, the time shall be reduced to 30
minutes. Concrete transported in truck mixers shall be deposited in front
of the paver within 90 minutes from the time cement has been charged into
the mixer drum of the plant or truck mixer. If the ambient temperature is
above 32 degrees C, the time shall be reduced to 60 minutes. Every load of
concrete delivered to the paving site shall be accompanied by a batch
ticket from the operator of the batching plant. Tickets shall be on
approved forms and shall show at least the mass, or volume, of all
ingredients in each batch delivered, the water meter and revolution meter
reading on truck mixers and the time of day. Tickets shall be delivered to
the placing foreman who shall keep them on file and deliver them to the
Government weekly, or as directed by the Contracting Officer.
3.4.1 Batching and Mixing Concrete
Scale pivots and bearings shall be kept clean and free of rust. Any
equipment which fails to perform as specified shall immediately be removed
T
from use until properly repaired and adjusted, or replaced.
3.4.2 Transporting and Transfer - Spreading Operations

AF
Non-agitating equipment shall be used only on smooth roads and for haul
time less than 15 minutes. Concrete shall be deposited as close as
possible to its final position in the paving lane. All equipment shall be
operated to discharge and transfer concrete without segregation. In no
case shall dumping of concrete in discrete piles be permitted. No transfer
or spreading operation which requires the use of front-end loaders, dozers,
or similar equipment to distribute the concrete will be permitted.
R
3.5 PAVING
Pavement shall be constructed with paving and finishing equipment utilizing

D
rigid fixed forms or by use of slipform paving equipment. Paving and

finishing equipment and procedures shall be capable of constructing paving
lanes of the required width at a rate of at least 30 m of paving lane per
hour on a routine basis. Paving equipment and its operation shall be
controlled, and coordinated with all other operations, such that the
paver-finisher has a continuous forward movement, at a reasonably uniform
speed, from beginning to end of each paving lane, except for inadvertent
equipment breakdown. Failure to achieve this shall require the Contractor
to halt operations, regroup, and modify operations to achieve this
requirement. Workmen with foreign material on their footwear or
construction equipment that might deposit foreign material shall not be
permitted to walk or operate in the plastic concrete. Where an open-graded
granular base is required under the concrete, the Contractor shall select
paving equipment and procedures which will operate properly on the base
course without causing displacement or other damage.
3.5.2 Consolidation
Concrete shall be consolidated with the specified type of lane-spanning,

gang-mounted, mechanical, immersion type vibrating equipment mounted in
front of the paver, supplemented, in rare instances as specified, by
hand-operated vibrators. The vibrators shall be inserted into the concrete

to a depth that will provide the best full-depth consolidation but not
closer to the underlying material than 50 mm. Excessive vibration shall
not be permitted. If the vibrators cause visible tracking in the paving
lane, the paving operation shall be stopped and equipment and operations
modified to prevent it. Concrete in small, odd-shaped slabs or in isolated
locations inaccessible to the gang-mounted vibration equipment shall be
vibrated with an approved hand-operated immersion vibrator operated from a
bridge spanning the area. Vibrators shall not be used to transport or
spread the concrete. Hand-operated vibrators shall not be operated in the
concrete at one location for more than 20 seconds. Insertion locations for
hand-operated vibrators shall be between 150 to 400 mm on centers. For
each paving train, at least one additional vibrator spud, or sufficient
parts for rapid replacement and repair of vibrators shall be maintained at
the paving site at all times. Any evidence of inadequate consolidation
(honeycomb along the edges, large air pockets, or any other evidence) shall
require the immediate stopping of the paving operation and approved
adjustment of the equipment or procedures.
3.5.3 Operation
T
When the paver approaches a header at the end of a paving lane, a
sufficient amount of concrete shall be maintained ahead of the paver to
provide a roll of concrete which will spill over the header. The amount of
extra concrete shall be sufficient to prevent any slurry that is formed and
AF
carried along ahead of the paver from being deposited adjacent to the
header. The spud vibrators in front of the paver shall be brought as close
to the header as possible before they are lifted. Additional consolidation
shall be provided adjacent to the headers by hand-manipulated vibrators.
When the paver is operated between or adjacent to previously constructed
pavement (fill-in lanes), provisions shall be made to prevent damage to the
previously constructed pavement. Screeds or extrusion plates shall be
electronically controlled from the previously placed pavement so as to
R
prevent them from applying pressure to the existing pavement and to prevent
abrasion of the pavement surface. The overlapping area of existing
pavement surface shall at all times be kept completely free of any loose or
bonded foreign material as the paver-finisher operates across it. When the
paver travels on existing pavement, approved provisions shall be made to
D
prevent damage to the existing pavement. Pavers using transversely

oscillating screeds shall not be used to form fill-in lanes that have
widths less than a full width for which the paver was designed or adjusted.
3.5.4 Required Results
The paver-finisher, and its gang-mounted vibrators, together with its

operating procedures shall be adjusted and operated and coordinated with
the concrete mixture being used to produce a thoroughly consolidated slab
throughout, true to line and grade within specified tolerances. The
paver-finishing operation shall produce a surface finish free of
irregularities, tears, voids of any kind, and any other discontinuities.
The paver-finisher shall make only one pass across the pavement; multiple
passes will not be permitted. The equipment and its operation shall
produce a finished surface requiring no hand finishing other than the use
of cutting straightedges, except in very infrequent instances. If any
equipment or operation fails to produce the above results, the paving shall
be stopped, the equipment shall be replaced or properly adjusted, the
operation shall be appropriately modified, or the mixture proportions
modified, in order to produce the required results before recommencing
paving. No water, other than fog sprays (mist) as specified in paragraph:
Prevention of Plastic Shrinkage Cracking, shall be applied to the concrete

or the concrete surface during paving and finishing.
3.5.5 Fixed Form Paving
Paving equipment for fixed-form paving and the operation thereof shall
conform to the requirements of paragraph EQUIPMENT, all requirements
specified above under paragraph PAVING and as specified herein.
3.5.5.1 Forms for Fixed-Form Paving
a. Straight forms shall be made of steel and shall be furnished

in sections not less than 3 m in length. Flexible or curved forms
of proper radius shall be used for curves of 31 m radius or less.
Wood forms for curves and fillets shall be made of well-seasoned,
surfaced plank or plywood, straight, and free from warp or bend.
Wood forms shall be adequate in strength and rigidly braced.
Forms shall have a depth equal to the pavement thickness at the
edge. Where the project requires several different slab
thicknesses, forms may be built up by bolting or welding a tubular
metal section or by bolting wood planks to the bottom of the form
T
to completely cover the underside of the base of the form and
provide an increase in depth of not more than 25 percent. The
base width of the one-piece or built-up form shall be not less
than eight-tenths of the vertical height of the form, except than
AF
forms 200 mm or less in vertical height shall have a base width
not less than the vertical height of the form. Maximum vertical
deviation of top of any side form, including joints, shall not
vary from a true plane more than 3 mm in 3 m, and the upstanding
leg shall not vary more than 6 mm.
b. Form sections shall be tightly locked and shall be free from play
or movement in any direction. Forms shall be provided with
R
adequate devices for secure settings so that when in place they
will withstand, without visible spring or settlement, the impact
and vibration of the consolidating and finishing equipment.
c. Set forms for full bearing on foundation for entire length and
D
width and in alignment with edge of finished pavement. Support

forms during entire operation of placing, compaction, and
finishing so that forms will not deviate vertically more than 3 mm
from required grade and elevations indicated. Conformity to the
alignment and grade elevations shown on the drawings shall be
checked and necessary corrections shall be made immediately prior
to placing the concrete. The forms shall be cleaned and oiled
each time before concrete is placed. No concrete shall be placed
until setting of forms has been checked and approved by the CQC
team.
3.5.5.2 Form Removal
Forms shall remain in place at least 12 hours after the concrete has been
placed. When conditions are such that the early strength gain of the
concrete is delayed, the forms shall be left in place for a longer time, as
directed. Forms shall be removed by procedures that do not injure the
concrete. Bars or heavy metal tools shall not be used directly against the
concrete in removing the forms. Any concrete found to be defective after
form removal shall be repaired promptly, using procedures specified
hereinafter or as directed.
3.5.6 Slipform Paving
3.5.6.1 General
Paving equipment for slipform paving and the operation thereof shall
conform to the requirement of paragraph EQUIPMENT, all requirements
specified above in subparagraphs, General, Consolidation, Operation, and
Required Results, and as specified herein. The slipform paver shall shape
the concrete to the specified and indicated cross section, meeting all
tolerances, in one pass. The slipform paver shall finish the surface and
edges so that only a very minimum isolated amount of hand finishing is
required. If the paving operation does not meet the above requirements and
the specified tolerances, the operation shall be immediately stopped, and
the Contractor shall regroup and replace or modify any equipment as
necessary, modify paving procedures or modify the concrete mix, in order to
resolve the problem. The slipform paver shall be automatically
electronically controlled from a taut wire guideline for horizontal
alignment and on both sides from a taut wire guideline for vertical
alignment, except that electronic control from a ski operating on a
previously constructed adjoining lane shall be used where applicable for
T
either or both sides. Automatic, electronic controls for vertical
alignment shall always be used on both sides of the lane. Control from a
slope-adjustment control or control operating from the underlying material
shall never be used. Side forms on slipform pavers shall be properly
AF
adjusted so that the finished edge of the paving lane meets all specified
tolerances. Dowels in longitudinal construction joints shall be installed
as specified below. The installation of these dowels by dowel inserters
attached to the paver or by any other means of inserting the dowels into
the plastic concrete shall not be permitted.
3.5.6.2 Guideline for Slipform Paving

R
Guidelines shall be accurately and securely installed well in advance of
concrete placement. Supports shall be provided at necessary intervals to
eliminate all sag in the guideline when properly tightened. The guideline
shall be high strength wire set with sufficient tension to remove all sag
between supports. Supports shall be securely staked to the underlying
D
material or other provisions made to ensure that the supports will not be
displaced when the guideline is tightened or when the guideline or supports
are accidentally touched by workmen or equipment during construction. The
appliances for attaching the guideline to the supports shall be capable of
easy adjustment in both the horizontal and vertical directions. When it is
necessary to leave gaps in the guideline to permit equipment to use or
cross underlying material, provisions shall be made for quickly and
accurately replacing the guideline without any delay to the forward
progress of the paver. Supports on either side of the gap shall be secured
in such a manner as to avoid disturbing the remainder of the guideline when
the portion across the gap is positioned and tightened. The guideline
across the gap and adjacent to the gap for a distance of 60 m shall be
checked for horizontal and vertical alignment after the guideline across
the gap is tightened. Vertical and horizontal positioning of the guideline
shall be such that the finished pavement shall conform to the alignment and
grade elevations shown on the drawings within the specified tolerances for
grade and smoothness. The specified tolerances are intended to cover only
the normal deviations in the finished pavement that may occur under good
supervision and do not apply to setting of the guideline. The guideline
shall be set true to line and grade.
3.5.7 Placing Reinforcing Steel
The type and amount of steel reinforcement shall be as shown on the

drawings. For pavement thickness of 300 mm or more, the reinforcement
steel shall be installed by the strike-off method wherein a layer of
concrete is deposited on the underlying material, consolidated, and struck
to the indicated elevation of the steel reinforcement. The reinforcement
shall be laid upon the prestruck surface, and the remaining concrete shall
then be placed and finished in the required manner. When placement of the
second lift causes the steel to be displaced horizontally from its original
position, provisions shall be made for increasing the thickness of the
first lift and depressing the reinforcement into the unhardened concrete to
the required elevation. The increase in thickness shall be only as
necessary to permit correct horizontal alignment to be maintained. Any
portions of the bottom layer of concrete that have been placed more than 30
minutes without being covered with the top layer shall be removed and
replaced with newly mixed concrete without additional cost to the
Government. For pavements less than 300 mm thick, the reinforcement shall
be positioned on suitable chairs securely fastened to the subgrade prior to
concrete placement. Concrete shall be vibrated after the steel has been
placed. Regardless of placement procedure, the reinforcing steel shall be
T
free from coatings which could impair bond between the steel and concrete,
and laps in the reinforcement shall be as indicated. In lieu of the above,
automatic reinforcement depressing attachments may be used to position the
reinforcement provided the entire operation is approved by the Contracting
AF
Officer. Regardless of the equipment or procedures used for installing
reinforcement, the Contractor shall ensure that the entire depth of
concrete is adequately consolidated.
3.5.8 Placing Dowels
The method used in installing and holding dowels in position shall ensure
that the error in alignment of any dowel from its required horizontal and
R
vertical alignment after the pavement has been completed will not be
greater than 3 mm per 300 mm. Except as otherwise specified below,
horizontal spacing of dowels shall be within a tolerance of plus or minus
15 mm. The vertical alignment of the dowels shall be measured parallel to
the designated top surface of the pavement, except for those across the
D
crown or other grade change joints. Dowels across crowns and other joints
at grade changes shall be measured to a level surface. Horizontal
alignment shall be checked perpendicular to the joint edge. The horizontal
alignment shall be checked with a framing square. Dowels shall not be
placed closer than 0.6 times the dowel bar length to the planned joint
line. If the last regularly spaced dowel is closer than that dimension, it
shall be moved away from the joint to a location 0.6 times the dowel bar
length, but not closer than 150 mm to its nearest neighbor. Dowel
interference at a transverse joint-longitudinal joint intersection shall be
resolved by deleting the closest transverse dowel. Dowels shall be
installed as specified in the following subparagraphs.
3.5.8.1 Contraction Joints
Dowels in longitudinal and transverse contraction joints within the paving

lane shall be held securely in place, as indicated, by means of rigid metal
frames or basket assemblies of an approved type. The basket assemblies
shall be held securely in the proper location by means of suitable pins or
anchors. Do not cut or crimp the dowel basket tie wires unless the tie
wires are 6 mm or larger in diameter. At the Contractor's option, in lieu
of the above, dowels in contraction joints shall be installed near the
front of the paver by insertion into the plastic concrete using approved
equipment and procedures. Approval will be based on the results of a
preconstruction demonstration which the Contractor shall conduct, showing
that the dowels are installed within specified tolerances.
3.5.8.2 Construction Joints-Fixed Form Paving
Installation of dowels shall be by the bonded-in-place method.

Installation by removing and replacing in preformed holes will not be
permitted. Dowels shall be prepared and placed across joints where
indicated, correctly aligned, and securely held in the proper horizontal
and vertical position during placing and finishing operations, by means of
devices fastened to the forms. The spacing of dowels in construction
joints shall be as indicated, except that, where the planned spacing cannot
be maintained because of form length or interference with form braces,
closer spacing with additional dowels shall be used.
3.5.8.3 Dowels Installed in Hardened Concrete
Dowels installed in hardened concrete shall be installed by bonding the

dowels into holes drilled into the hardened concrete. The concrete shall
T
have cured for 7 days or reached a minimum flexural strength of 3.1 MPa
before drilling commences. Holes 3 mm greater in diameter than the dowels
shall be drilled into the hardened concrete using rotary-core drills.
Rotary-percussion drills may be used, provided that excessive spalling does
AF
not occur to the concrete joint face. Continuing damage shall require
modification of the equipment and operation. Upon completion of the
drilling operation, the dowel hole shall be blown out with oil-free,
compressed air. Dowels shall be bonded in the drilled holes using epoxy
resin. Epoxy resin shall be injected at the back of the hole before
installing the dowel and extruded to the collar during insertion of the
dowel so as to completely fill the void around the dowel. Application by
buttering the dowel will not be permitted. The dowels shall be held in
R
alignment at the collar of the hole, after insertion and before the grout
hardens, by means of a suitable metal or plastic grout retention ring
fitted around the dowel. Dowels required to be installed in any joints
between new and existing concrete shall be grouted in holes drilled in the
existing concrete, all as specified above.
D
3.5.8.4 Lubricating Dowel Bars
The portion of each dowel intended to move within the concrete or expansion
cap shall be wiped clean and coated with a thin, even film of lubricating
oil or light grease before the concrete is placed.
3.6 FINISHING
Finishing operations shall be a continuing part of placing operations

starting immediately behind the strike-off of the paver. Initial finishing
shall be provided by the transverse screed or extrusion plate. The
sequence of operations shall be transverse finishing, longitudinal machine
floating if used, straightedge finishing, texturing, and then edging of
joints. Finishing shall be by the machine method. The hand method shall
be used only on isolated areas of odd slab widths or shapes and in the
event of a breakdown of the mechanical finishing equipment. Supplemental
hand finishing for machine finished pavement shall be kept to an absolute
minimum. Any machine finishing operation which requires appreciable hand
finishing, other than a moderate amount of straightedge finishing, shall be
immediately stopped and proper adjustments made or the equipment replaced.
Every effort shall be made to prevent bringing excess paste to the surface
and any operations which produce more than 3 mm of mortar-rich surface
(deficient in plus No. 4 sieve size aggregate) over the top layer of coarse
aggregate shall be halted immediately and the equipment, mixture, or
procedures modified as necessary. Compensation shall be made for surging
behind the screeds or extrusion plate and settlement during hardening and
care shall be taken to ensure that paving and finishing machines are
properly adjusted so that the finished surface of the concrete (not just
the cutting edges of the screeds) will be at the required line and grade.
Finishing equipment and tools shall be maintained clean and in an approved
condition. At no time shall water be added to the surface of the slab with
the finishing equipment or tools, or in any other way, except for fog
(mist) sprays specified to prevent plastic shrinkage cracking.
3.6.1 Machine Finishing With Fixed Forms
The machine shall be designed to ride the forms and shall be operated to
screed and consolidate the concrete. Machines that cause displacement of
the forms shall be replaced. The machine shall make only one pass over
each area of pavement. If the equipment and procedures do not produce a
surface of uniform texture, true to grade, in one pass, the operation shall
T
be immediately stopped and the equipment, mixture, and procedures adjusted
as necessary.
3.6.2 Machine Finishing with Slipform Pavers

AF
The slipform paver shall be operated so that only a very minimum of
additional finishing work is required to produce pavement surfaces and
edges meeting the specified tolerances. Any equipment or procedure that
fails to meet these specified requirements shall immediately be replaced or
modified as necessary. A self-propelled nonrotating pipe float may be
used while the concrete is still plastic, to remove minor irregularities
and score marks. Only one pass of the pipe float shall be allowed. If
R
there is concrete slurry or fluid paste on the surface that runs over the
edge of the pavement, the paving operation shall be immediately stopped and
the equipment, mixture, or operation modified to prevent formation of such
slurry. Any slurry which does run down the vertical edges shall be
immediately removed by hand, using stiff brushes or scrapers. No slurry,
D
concrete or concrete mortar shall be used to build up along the edges of

the pavement to compensate for excessive edge slump, either while the
concrete is plastic or after it hardens.
3.6.3 Surface Correction and Testing
After all other finishing is completed but while the concrete is still
plastic, minor irregularities and score marks in the pavement surface shall
be eliminated by means of cutting straightedges. Such straightedges shall
be 4 m in length and shall be operated from the sides of the pavement and
from bridges. A straightedge operated from the side of the pavement shall
be equipped with a handle 1 m longer than one-half the width of the
pavement. The surface shall then be tested for trueness with a
straightedge held in successive positions parallel and at right angles to
the center line of the pavement, and the whole area covered as necessary to
detect variations. The straightedge shall be advanced along the pavement
in successive stages of not more than one-half the length of the
straightedge. Depressions shall be immediately filled with freshly mixed
concrete, struck off, consolidated, and refinished. Projections above the
required elevation shall also be struck off and refinished. The
straightedge testing and finishing shall continue until the entire surface
of the concrete is free from observable departure from the straightedge and
conforms to the surface requirements specified in paragraph: ACCEPTABILITY
OF WORK. This straightedging shall not be used as a replacement for the
straightedge testing of paragraph: Surface Smoothness. Long-handled, flat
bull floats shall be used very sparingly and only as necessary to correct
minor, scattered surface defects. If frequent use of bull floats is
necessary, the paving operation shall be stopped and the equipment, mixture
or procedures adjusted to eliminate the surface defects. Finishing with
hand floats and trowels shall be held to the absolute minimum necessary.
Extreme care shall be taken to prevent overfinishing joints and edges. The
surface finish of the pavement shall be produced essentially by the
finishing machine and not by subsequent hand finishing operations. All
hand finishing operations shall be subject to approval and shall be
modified when directed.
3.6.4 Hand Finishing
Hand finishing operations shall be used only as specified below.
3.6.4.1 Equipment
T
In addition to approved mechanical internal vibrators for consolidating the
concrete, a strike-off and tamping template and a longitudinal float shall
be provided for hand finishing. The template shall be at least 300 mm
longer than the width of pavement being finished, of an approved design,
AF
and sufficiently rigid to retain its shape, and shall be constructed of
metal or other suitable material shod with metal. The longitudinal float
shall be at least 3 m long, of approved design, and rigid and substantially
braced, and shall maintain a plane surface on the bottom. Grate tampers
(jitterbugs) shall not be used.
3.6.4.2 Finishing and Floating

R
As soon as placed and vibrated, the concrete shall be struck off and
screeded to the crown and cross section and to such elevation above grade
that when consolidated and finished, the surface of the pavement will be at
the required elevation. In addition to previously specified complete
coverage with handheld immersion vibrators, the entire surface shall be
D
tamped with the strike-off and tamping template, and the tamping operation
continued until the required compaction and reduction of internal and
surface voids are accomplished. Immediately following the final tamping of
the surface, the pavement shall be floated longitudinally from bridges
resting on the side forms and spanning but not touching the concrete. If
necessary, additional concrete shall be placed, consolidated and screeded,
and the float operated until a satisfactory surface has been produced. The
floating operation shall be advanced not more than half the length of the
float and then continued over the new and previously floated surfaces.
3.6.5 Texturing
Before the surface sheen has disappeared and before the concrete hardens or
curing compound is applied, the surface of the pavement shall be given a
texture as described herein. After curing is complete, all textured
surfaces shall be thoroughly power broomed to remove all debris.
3.6.5.1 Burlap Drag Surface
Surface texture shall be applied by dragging the surface of the pavement,

in the direction of the concrete placement, with an approved burlap drag.
The drag shall be operated with the fabric moist, and the fabric shall be
cleaned or changed as required to keep clean. The dragging shall be done
so as to produce a uniform finished surface having a fine sandy texture
without disfiguring marks.
3.6.6 Edging
After texturing has been completed, the edge of the slabs along the forms,
along the edges of slipformed lanes, and at the joints shall be carefully
finished with an edging tool to form a smooth rounded surface of 3 mm
radius. Tool marks shall be eliminated, and the edges shall be smooth and
true to line. No water shall be added to the surface during edging.
Extreme care shall be taken to prevent overworking the concrete.
3.6.7 Outlets in Pavement
Recesses for the tie-down anchors, lighting fixtures, and other outlets in
the pavement shall be constructed to conform to the details and dimensions
shown. The concrete in these areas shall be carefully finished to provide
a surface of the same texture as the surrounding area that will be within
the requirements for plan grade and surface smoothness.
T
3.7 CURING
3.7.1 Protection of Concrete

AF
Concrete shall be continuously protected against loss of moisture and rapid
temperature changes for at least 7 days from the completion of finishing
operations. All equipment needed for adequate curing and protection of the
concrete shall be on hand and ready for use before actual concrete
placement begins. If any selected method of curing does not afford the
proper curing and protection against concrete cracking, the damaged
pavement shall be removed and replaced, and another method of curing shall
R
be employed as directed. Curing shall be accomplished by one of the
following methods except that only moist curing shall be used for the first
24 hours.
3.7.2 Membrane Curing

D
A uniform coating of white-pigmented, membrane-forming, curing compound

shall be applied to the entire exposed surface of the concrete as soon as
the free water has disappeared from the surface. Along the formed edge
faces, it shall be applied immediately after the forms are removed.
Concrete shall not be allowed to dry before the application of the
membrane. If any drying has occurred, the surface of the concrete shall be
moistened with a fine spray of water, and the curing compound applied as
soon as the free water disappears. The curing compound shall be applied to
the finished surfaces by means of an approved automatic spraying machine.
The curing compound shall be applied with an overlapping coverage that will
give a two-coat application at a coverage of 10 square meters per L, plus
or minus 5.0 percent for each coat. A one-coat application may be applied
provided a uniform application and coverage of 5 square meters per L, plus
or minus 5.0 percent is obtained. The application of curing compound by
hand-operated, mechanical powered pressure sprayers will be permitted only
on odd widths or shapes of slabs and on concrete surfaces exposed by the
removal of forms. When the application is made by hand-operated sprayers,
a second coat shall be applied in a direction approximately at right angles
to the direction of the first coat. If pinholes, abrasions, or other
discontinuities exist, an additional coat shall be applied to the affected
areas within 30 minutes. Concrete surfaces that are subjected to heavy

rainfall within 3 hours after the curing compound has been applied shall be
resprayed by the method and at the coverage specified above. Areas where
the curing compound is damaged by subsequent construction operations within
the curing period shall be immediately resprayed. Concrete surfaces to
which membrane-curing compounds have been applied shall be adequately
protected during the entire curing period from pedestrian and vehicular
traffic, except as required for joint-sawing operations and surface tests,
and from any other possible damage to the continuity of the membrane.
3.7.3 Moist Curing
Concrete to be moist-cured shall be maintained continuously wet for the

entire curing period, or until curing compound is applied, commencing
immediately after finishing. If forms are removed before the end of the
curing period, curing shall be carried out as on unformed surfaces, using
suitable materials. Surfaces shall be cured by ponding, by continuous
sprinkling, by continuously saturated burlap or cotton mats, or by
continuously saturated plastic coated burlap. Burlap and mats shall be
clean and free from any contamination and shall be completely saturated
before being placed on the concrete. Lap sheets to provide full coverage.
T
The Contractor shall have an approved work system to ensure that moist
curing is continuous 24 hours per day and that the entire surface is wet.
3.8 JOINTS
AF
3.8.1 General Requirements for Joints
Joints shall conform to the locations and details indicated and shall be
perpendicular to the finished grade of the pavement. All joints shall be
straight and continuous from edge to edge or end to end of the pavement
with no abrupt offset and no gradual deviation greater than 13 mm. Where
any joint fails to meet these tolerances, the slabs adjacent to the joint
R
shall be removed and replaced at no additional cost to the Government. No
change from the jointing pattern shown on the drawings shall be made
without written approval of the Contracting Officer. Joints shall be
sealed immediately following curing of the concrete or as soon thereafter
as weather conditions permit. Joints shall be sealed as specified in
D
32 13 73 COMPRESSION JOINT SEALS FOR CONCRETE PAVEMENTS.
3.8.2 Longitudinal Construction Joints
Dowels shall be installed in the longitudinal construction joints, or the

edges shall be thickened as indicated. Dowels shall be installed in
conformance with paragraph, Placing Dowels. After the end of the curing
period, longitudinal construction joints shall be sawed to provide a groove
at the top for sealant conforming to the details and dimensions indicated.
3.8.3 Transverse Construction Joints
Transverse construction joints shall be installed at the end of each day's

placing operations and at any other points within a paving lane when
concrete placement is interrupted for 30 minutes or longer. The transverse
construction joint shall be installed at a planned transverse joint.
Transverse construction joints shall be constructed by utilizing headers or
by paving through the joint, then full-depth sawcutting the excess
concrete. Pavement shall be constructed with the paver as close to the
header as possible, and the paver shall be run out completely past the
header. Transverse construction joints installed at a planned transverse
joint shall be constructed as shown or, if not shown otherwise, shall be

dowelled in accordance with paragraph: Dowels Installed in Hardened
Concrete, or paragraph: Construction Joints - Fixed Form Paving.
3.8.4 Expansion Joints
Expansion joints shall be formed where indicated, and about any structures
and features that project through or into the pavement, using joint filler
of the type, thickness, and width indicated, and shall be installed to form
a complete, uniform separation between the structure and the pavement. The
filler shall be attached to the original concrete placement with adhesive
or other fasteners and shall extend the full slab depth. Adjacent sections
of filler shall be fitted tightly together, and the filler shall extend
across the full width of the paving lane or other complete distance in
order to prevent entrance of concrete into the expansion space. Edges of
the concrete at the joint face shall be finished with an edger with a
radius of 3 mm. The joint filler strips shall be installed 19 mm below the
pavement surface with a slightly tapered, dressed-and-oiled wood strip or
other approved material temporarily secured to the top of the filler to
form a recess to be filled with joint sealant.
T
3.8.5 Slip Joints
Slip joints shall be installed where indicated using the specified

materials. Preformed joint filler material shall be attached to the face
AF
of the original concrete placement with adhesive or other fasteners. A19 mm
deep reservoir for joint sealant shall be constructed at the top of the
joint. Edges of the joint face shall be finished with an edger with a
radius of 3 mm.
3.8.6 Contraction Joints
Transverse and longitudinal contraction joints shall be constructed by

R
sawing an initial groove in the concrete with a 3 mm blade to the indicated
depth. During sawing of joints, and again 24 hours later, the CQC team
shall inspect all exposed lane edges for development of cracks below the
saw cut, and shall immediately report results to the Contracting Officer.
If the Contracting Officer determines that there are more uncracked joints
D
than desired, the Contractor will be directed to saw succeeding joints 25

percent deeper than originally indicated at no additional cost to the
Government. The time of initial sawing shall vary depending on existing
and anticipated weather conditions and shall be such as to prevent
uncontrolled cracking of the pavement. Sawing of the joints shall commence
as soon as the concrete has hardened sufficiently to permit cutting the
concrete without chipping, spalling, or tearing. The sawed faces of joints
will be inspected for undercutting or washing of the concrete due to the
early sawing, and sawing shall be delayed if undercutting is sufficiently
deep to cause structural weakness or excessive roughness in the joint. The
sawing operation shall be carried on as required during both day and night
regardless of weather conditions. The joints shall be sawed at the
required spacing consecutively in the sequence of the concrete placement.
Adequate lighting shall be provided for night work. Illumination using
vehicle headlights will not be permitted. A chalk line or other suitable
guide shall be used to mark the alinement of the joint. Before sawing a
joint, the concrete shall be examined closely for cracks, and the joint
shall not be sawed if a crack has occurred near the planned joint
location. Sawing shall be discontinued when a crack develops ahead of the
saw cut. Immediately after the joint is sawed, the saw cut and adjacent
concrete surface shall be thoroughly flushed with water and vacuumed until
all waste from sawing is removed from the joint and adjacent concrete
surface. The surface shall be resprayed with curing compound as soon as
free water disappears. Necessary precautions shall be taken to insure that
the concrete is properly protected from damage and cured at sawed joints.
The top of the joint opening and the joint groove at exposed edges shall be
tightly sealed with cord backer rod before the concrete in the region of
the joint is resprayed with curing compound, and shall be maintained until
removed immediately before sawing the joint sealant reservoir. After
expiration of the curing period, the upper portion of the groove shall be
widened by sawing with ganged diamond saw blades to the width and depth
indicated for the joint sealer. The reservoir shall be centered over the
initial sawcut.
3.8.7 Thickened Edge Joints
Thickened edge joints shall be constructed as indicated on the drawings.

Underlying material in the transition area shall be graded as shown and
shall meet the requirements for smoothness and compaction specified for all
other areas of the underlying material.
3.9 REPAIR, REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT OF NEWLY CONSTRUCTED SLABS
T
3.9.1 General Criteria
New pavement slabs that are broken, have spalled edges, or contain cracks
AF
shall be removed and replaced or repaired, as specified hereinafter at no
cost to the Government. Removal of partial slabs is not permitted. Not
more than 15.0 percent of each slab's longitudinal joint edge shall be
spalled. Slabs with spalls exceeding this quantity, regardless of spall
size, shall be sawn full depth to remove the spalled face, or removed, as
directed. The Contracting Officer will determine whether cracks extend
full depth of the pavement and may require cores to be drilled on the crack
to determine depth of cracking. Such cores shall be at least 150 mm
R
diameter, and shall be drilled and backfilled with a well consolidated
concrete mixture bonded to the walls of the hole with Type V, Grade 3 epoxy
resin. Drilling of cores and refilling holes shall be performed by the
Contractor at no expense to the Government.
D
3.9.2 Slabs with Cracks
Cracks that do not exceed 25 percent of the design thickness in depth shall
be cleaned and then pressure injected full depth with epoxy resin, Type IV,
Grade 1. Slabs containing cracks deeper than 25 percent of the design
thickness shall be removed.
3.9.3 Removal and Replacement of Full Slabs
Where it is necessary to remove full slabs, removal shall be in accordance

with paragraph: Removal of Existing Pavement Slab. Removal and replacement
shall be full depth, by full width of the slab, and the limit of removal
shall be normal to the paving lane and extend to each original joint.
Dowels of the size and spacing as specified for other joints in similar
pavement shall be installed by epoxy grouting them into holes drilled into
the existing concrete using procedures as specified in paragraph: Placing
Dowels. Original damaged dowels shall be cut off flush with the joint
face. Protruding portions of dowels shall be painted and lightly oiled.
All four edges of the new slab shall thus contain dowels. Placement of
concrete shall be as specified for original construction. Prior to
placement of new concrete, the underlying material shall be recompacted and
shaped as specified in the appropriate section of these specifications, and

the surfaces of all four joint faces shall be cleaned of all loose material
and contaminants and coated with a double application of membrane forming
curing compound as bond breaker. Care shall be taken to prevent any curing
compound from contacting dowels. The resulting joints around the new slab
shall be prepared and sealed as specified for original construction.
3.9.4 Repairing Spalls Along Joints
Where directed, spalls along joints of new slabs, along edges of adjacent
existing concrete, and along parallel cracks shall be repaired by first
making a vertical saw cut at least 25 mm outside the spalled area and to a
depth of at least 50 mm. Saw cuts shall be straight lines forming
rectangular areas. The concrete between the saw cut and the joint, or
crack, shall be chipped out to remove all unsound concrete and into at least
13 mm of visually sound concrete. Spalls along joints to be sealed with
compression seals shall be sawn, chipped out, and repaired to a depth to
restore the full joint-face support. The cavity thus formed shall be
thoroughly cleaned with high pressure water jets supplemented with oil-free
compressed air to remove all loose material. Immediately before filling
the cavity, a prime coat shall be applied to the dry cleaned surface of all
T
sides and bottom of the cavity, except any joint face. The prime coat
shall be applied in a thin coating and scrubbed into the surface with a
stiff-bristle brush. Prime coat for portland cement repairs shall be a
neat cement grout and for epoxy resin repairs shall be epoxy resin, Type
AF
III, Grade 1. The prepared cavity shall be filled with: Portland cement
concrete or latex modified mortar for larger cavities, those more than
0.009 cubic meter in size after removal operations; Portland cement mortar
for cavities between 0.00085 cubic meter and 0.009 cubic meter; and epoxy
resin mortar or epoxy resin or latex modified mortar for those cavities
less than 0.00085 cubic meter in size. Portland cement concretes and
mortars shall be very low slump mixtures, 13 mm slump or less,
proportioned, mixed, placed, consolidated by tamping, and cured, all as
R
directed. Epoxy resin mortars shall be made with Type III, Grade 1, epoxy
resin, using proportions and mixing and placing procedures as recommended
by the manufacturer and approved by the Contracting Officer. Proprietary
patching materials may be used, subject to approval by the Contracting
Officer. The epoxy resin materials shall be placed in the cavity in layers
D
not over 50 mm thick. The time interval between placement of additional

layers shall be such that the temperature of the epoxy resin material does
not exceed 60 degrees C at any time during hardening. Mechanical vibrators
and hand tampers shall be used to consolidate the concrete or mortar. Any
repair material on the surrounding surfaces of the existing concrete shall
be removed before it hardens. Where the spalled area abuts a joint, an
insert or other bond-breaking medium shall be used to prevent bond at the
joint face. A reservoir for the joint sealant shall be sawed to the
dimensions required for other joints. The reservoir shall be thoroughly
cleaned and then sealed with the sealer specified for the joints. In lieu
of sawing, spalls not adjacent to joints and popouts, both less than 150 mm
in maximum dimension, may be prepared by drilling a core 50 mm in diameter
greater than the size of the defect, centered over the defect, and 50 mm
deep or13 mm into sound concrete, whichever is greater. The core hole
shall be repaired as specified above for other spalls.
3.10 EXISTING CONCRETE PAVEMENT REMOVAL AND REPAIR
Existing concrete pavement shall be removed at locations indicated on the

drawings. Prior to commencing pavement removal operations, the Contractor
shall inventory the pavement distresses (cracks, spalls, and corner breaks)
along the pavement edge to remain. After pavement removal, the remaining
edge shall again be surveyed to quantify any damage caused by Contractor's
removal operations. Both surveys shall be performed by the Contractor, in
the presence of the Contracting Officer. Repairs shall be made as
indicated and as specified herein. All operations shall be carefully
controlled to prevent damage to the concrete pavement and to the underlying
material to remain in place. All saw cuts shall be made perpendicular to
the slab surface, forming rectangular areas.
3.10.1 Removal of Existing Pavement Slab
When existing concrete pavement is to be removed and adjacent concrete is

to be left in place, the joint between the removal area and adjoining
pavement to stay in place shall first be cut full depth with a standard
diamond-type concrete saw. Next, a full depth saw cut shall be made
parallel to the joint at least 600 mm from the joint and at least 150 mm
from the end of any dowels. This saw cut shall be made with a wheel saw
as specified in paragraph: Sawing Equipment. All pavement to be removed
beyond this last saw cut shall be removed in accordance with the approved
demolition work plan. All pavement between this last saw cut and the joint
line shall be removed by carefully pulling pieces and blocks away from the
T
joint face with suitable equipment and then picking them up for removal.
3.10.2 Edge Repair

AF
The edge of existing concrete pavement against which new pavement abuts
shall be protected from damage at all times. Slabs which are damaged
during construction shall be removed and replaced as directed by the
Contracting Officer at no cost to the Government. Repair of previously
existing damage areas will be considered a subsidiary part of concrete
pavement construction. All exposed keyways shall be sawn off full depth.
3.10.2.1 Spall Repair

R
Not more than 15.0 percent of each slab's edge shall be spalled as a result
of the Contractor's actions. Slabs with spalls exceeding this quantity,
regardless of spall size, shall be sawn full depth to remove the spalled
face. Spalls along joints and along cracks shall be repaired where
D
indicated and where directed. Repair materials and procedures shall be as

previously specified in paragraph: Repairing Spalls Along Joints.
3.10.2.2 Underbreak and Underlying Material
All underbreak shall be repaired by removal and replacement of the damaged

slabs in accordance with paragraph: Removal and Replacement of Full
Slabs. The underlying material adjacent to the edge of and under the
existing pavement which is to remain in place shall be protected from
damage or disturbance during removal operations and until placement of new
concrete, and shall be shaped as shown on the drawings or as directed.
Sufficient underlying material shall be kept in place outside the joint
line to completely prevent disturbance of material under the pavement which
is to remain in place. Any material under the portion of the concrete
pavement to remain in place which is disturbed or loses its compaction
shall be carefully removed and replaced with concrete.
3.11 PAVEMENT PROTECTION
The Contractor shall protect the pavement against all damage prior to final
acceptance of the work by the Government. Aggregates, rubble, or other
similar construction materials shall not be placed on airfield pavements.

Traffic shall be excluded from the new pavement by erecting and maintaining
barricades and signs until the concrete is at least 14 days old, or for a
longer period if so directed. As a construction expedient in paving
intermediate lanes between newly paved pilot lanes, operation of the
hauling equipment will be permitted on the new pavement after the pavement
has been cured for 7 days and the joints have been sealed or otherwise
protected. Also, the subgrade planer, concrete paving and finishing
machines, and similar equipment may be permitted to ride upon the edges of
previously constructed slabs when the concrete has attained a minimum field
cured flexural strength of 3.6 MPa and approved means are furnished to
prevent damage to the slab edge. All new and existing pavement carrying
construction traffic or equipment shall be continuously kept completely
clean, and spillage of concrete or other materials shall be cleaned up
immediately upon occurrence. Special care shall be used where Contractor's
traffic uses or crosses active airfield pavement. Other existing pavements
used by the Contractor shall be power broomed at least daily when traffic
operates. For fill-in lanes, equipment shall be used that will not damage
or spall the edges or joints of the previously constructed pavement.
3.12 TESTING AND INSPECTION FOR CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROL
T
3.12.1 Testing and Inspection by Contractor
During construction, the Contractor shall be responsible for sampling and

AF
testing aggregates, cementitious materials (cement and silica fume), and
concrete to determine compliance with the specifications. The Contractor
shall provide facilities and labor as may be necessary for procurement of
representative test samples. The Contractor shall furnish sampling
platforms and belt templates to obtain representative samples of aggregates
from charging belts at the concrete plant. Samples of concrete shall be
obtained at the point of delivery to the paver. Testing by the Government
will in no way relieve the Contractor of the specified testing
R
requirements. The Contractor shall perform the inspection and tests
described below, and based upon the results of these inspections and tests,
shall take the action required and submit reports as required. This
testing shall be performed by the Contractor regardless of any other
testing performed by the Government, or for any other reason.
D
3.12.2 Testing and Inspection Requirements
Contractor CQC sampling, testing, inspection and reporting shall be in

accordance with the following Table.
TABLE 6
CONTRACTOR TESTING AND INSPECTION REQUIREMENTS
Frequency Test Method Control Limit/Corrective Action
Fine Aggregate Gradation and Fineness Modulus

2 per lot ASTM C 136 9 of 10 tests vary <0.15 from average
sample at belt Outside limits on any sieve-retest
2nd failure-stop, repair, retest
Coarse Aggregate Gradation

2 per lot ASTM C 136 Outside limits on any sieve-retest
sample at belt 2nd failure-report to COR, correct
2 consecutive avgs of 5 tests out-

report to COR, stop ops, repair, retest
Aggregate Deleterious Materials

Every 30 see paragraph: Stop production, retest, replace aggregate
days AGGREGATES Increase testing interval to 90 days
if previous 2 tests pass
Plant - Scales, Weighing Accuracy

Monthly NRMCA QC 3 Stop plant ops, repair, recalibrate
Plant - Batching and Recording Accuracy

Weekly Record/Report Record required/recorded/actual batch mass
Stop plant ops, repair, recalibrate
Plant - Batch Plant Control

Every lot Record/Report Record type/amt of each material per lot
Plant - Mixer Uniformity - Stationary Mixers

Every 4 COE CRD-C 55 After initial approval, use abbreviated
months method. Increase mixing time, change
T
during batching sequence, reduce batch size to
paving bring into compliance. Retest
Plant - Mixer Uniformity - Truck Mixers

Every 4
AF
ASTM C 94/C 94M Random selection of truck. Increase mixing
months time, change batching sequence, reduce
during batch size to bring into compliance. Retest.
paving
Concrete Mixture - Air Content

When test ASTM C 231 Individual test control chart:
specimens sample at Warning +/-1.0 - adjust AEA, retest
R
prepared paving site Action +/-1.5 - halt ops, repair, retest
+ 2 random Range between 2 consecutive tests:
Warning +2.0 - recalibrate AEA dispenser
Action +3.0 - halt ops, repair, retest
D
Concrete Mixture - Slump

When test ASTM C 143/C 143M Individual test control chart:
specimens sample at Upper Warning - 13 mm below max-
prepared paving site adjust batch masses within max W/C ratio
+ 4 random Upper Action - maximum allowable slump
stop operations, adjust, retest
Range between each consecutive test:
38 mm
stop operations, repair, retest
Concrete Mixture - Temperature

When test ASTM C 1064/C 1064M See paragraph: WEATHER LIMITATIONS
specimens sample at
prepared paving site
Concrete Mixture - Strength

8 per lot ASTM C 31/C 31M See Paragraph: Concrete Strength Testing
sample at for CQC
paving site
Paving - Inspection Before Paving

Prior to Report Inspect underlying materials, construction
each paving joint faces, forms, reinforcing, dowels,
operation and embedded items
Paving - Inspection During Paving

During each Monitor and control paving operation,
paving including placement, consolidation,
operation finishing, texturing, curing, and
joint sawing.
Paving - Vibrators
Weekly, COE CRD-C 521 Test frequency (in concrete), and amplitude
during (in air), measure at tip/head and average.
paving Repair or replace defective vibrators.
Moist Curing
2 per lot, Visual Repair defects, extend curing by 1 day
min 4 per
day
T
Membrane Compound Curing
Daily Visual Calculate coverage based on quantity/area
Respray areas where coverage defective
Recalibrate equipment
AF
Cold Weather Protection
Once per Visual Repair defects, report conditions to COR
3.12.3 Concrete Strength Testing for Contractor CQC

R
a. Take samples for strength tests at the paving site. Fabricate and
cure test beams in accordance with ASTM C 31/C 31M; test them in
accordance with ASTM C 78.
b. Fabricate and cure 2 test beams per sublot from the same batch or
D
truckload and at the same time acceptance beams are fabricated and
test them for flexural strength at 7-day age.
c. Average all 8 flexural tests per lot. Convert this average 7-day
flexural strength per lot to equivalent 28-day flexural strength
using the Correlation Ratio determined during mixture
proportioning studies.
d. Compare the equivalent 28-day flexural strength from the

conversion to the Average Flexural Strength Required for Mixtures
from paragraph of same title.
e. If the equivalent average 28-day strength for the lot is below the
Average Flexural Strength Required for Mixtures by 490 kPa
flexural strength or more, at any time, adjust the mixture to
increase the strength, as approved.
f. The Contractor's CQC testing agency shall maintain up-to-date

control charts for strength, showing the 7-day CQC flexural
strength and the 28-day flexural strength (from acceptance tests)
of each of these for each lot.
3.12.4 Reports
All results of tests or inspections conducted shall be reported informally

as they are completed and in writing daily. A weekly report shall be
prepared for the updating of control charts covering the entire period from
the start of the construction season through the current week. During
periods of cold-weather protection, reports of pertinent temperatures shall
be made daily. These requirements do not relieve the Contractor of the
obligation to report certain failures immediately as required in preceding
paragraphs. Such reports of failures and the action taken shall be
confirmed in writing in the routine reports. The Contracting Officer has
the right to examine all Contractor quality control records.
T
AF
R
D
SECTION 32 13 73
COMPRESSION JOINT SEALS FOR CONCRETE PAVEMENTS
04/06
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
1.2 SAFETY
1.3 SUBMITTALS
1.4 TEST REQUIREMENTS
1.5 EQUIPMENT
1.5.1 Joint Cleaning Equipment
T
1.5.1.1 Concrete Saw
1.5.1.2 Sandblasting Equipment
1.5.1.3 Waterblasting Equipment
1.5.2 Sealing Equipment
1.6
AF
TRIAL JOINT SEAL AND LUBRICANT/ADHESIVE INSTALLATION
1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 COMPRESSION SEALS

2.2 LUBRICANT/ADHESIVE
R
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION OF JOINTS

3.1.1 Sawing
D
3.1.2 Sandblast Cleaning

3.1.3 Waterblast Cleaning
3.1.4 Rate of Progress
3.2 INSTALLATION OF THE COMPRESSION SEAL
3.2.1 Time of Installation
3.2.2 Sequence of Installation
3.3 SEALING OF JOINTS
3.4 CLEAN-UP
3.5 QUALITY CONTROL PROVISIONS
3.5.1 Application Equipment
3.5.2 Procedures
3.5.2.1 Quality Control Inspection
3.5.2.2 Conformance to Stretching and compression Limitations
3.5.2.3 Pavement Temperature
3.5.3 Final Inspection
SECTION 32 13 73
COMPRESSION JOINT SEALS FOR CONCRETE PAVEMENTS

04/06
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

basic designation only. The most current versions of the publications shall
be used.
ASTM D 2628 Preformed Polychloroprene Elastomeric

Joint Seals for Concrete Pavements
T
ASTM D 2835 Lubricant for Installation of Preformed
Compression Seals in Concrete Pavements
AF
COE CRD-C 548 Standard Specification for Jet-Fuel and

Heat Resistant Preformed Polychloroprene
Elastomeric Joint Seals for Rigid Pavements
1.2 SAFETY
R
Compression joint seals shall not be placed within 7.5 meters of liquid
oxygen (LOX) equipment, LOX storage, or LOX piping.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
D

SD-03 Product Data
Equipment
List of proposed equipment to be used in the performance of

construction work, including descriptive data, 60 days prior to
use on the project.
Manufacturer's Instructions
Where installation procedures are required in accordance with

the manufacturer's recommendations, printed copies of
manufacturers' instructions, 60 days prior to use on the project.
SD-04 Samples
Compression Seals; G R
Regardless of testing responsibility, 2.7 meter long samples of

the materials, 60 days prior to use on the project. Printed
directions from the manufacturer on recommended installation
criteria shall be furnished with the samples plus the
manufacturer's certification that the selected seal is recommended
for the installation on this project.
SD-06 Test Reports
Test Requirements; G M
Certified copies of test results, 60 days prior to use of

material on the project.
1.4 TEST REQUIREMENTS
Each lot of compression joint seal and lubricant/adhesive shall be sampled,
T
identified, and tested for conformance with the applicable material
specification. A lot of compression seal shall consist of 1 day's
production or 6,000 meters for each cross section, whichever is less. A
lot of lubricant/adhesive shall consist of 1 day's production. Testing of
AF
the compression joint seal and lubricant/adhesive material shall be the
responsibility of the Contractor and shall be performed in an approved
independent laboratory, and certified copies of the test reports shall be
submitted for approval 60 days prior to the use of the materials at the
jobsite. Samples of each lot of material shall also be submitted and will
be retained by the Government for possible future testing should the
materials appear defective during or after application. The Contractor
shall furnish additional samples of materials, in sufficient quantity to be
R
tested, upon request. Final acceptance will be based on conformance to the
specified test requirements and the performance of the in-place materials.
1.5 EQUIPMENT
D
Machines, tools, and equipment used in the performance of the work required
by this section shall be approved before the work is started and shall be
maintained in satisfactory condition at all times.
1.5.1 Joint Cleaning Equipment
1.5.1.1 Concrete Saw
A self-propelled power saw with water-cooled diamond saw blades shall be

provided for cutting joints to the depths and widths specified and for
removing filler, existing old joint seal, or other material embedded in the
joints or adhered to the joint faces.
1.5.1.2 Sandblasting Equipment
Sandblasting equipment shall include an air compressor, hose, and a

long-wearing venturi-type nozzle of proper size, shape, and opening. The
maximum nozzle opening should not exceed 6 mm. The air compressor shall be
portable and shall be capable of furnishing not less than 4200 liters per
minute and maintaining a line pressure of not less than 620 kPa at the
nozzle while in use. The compressor shall be equipped with traps that will
maintain the compressed air free of oil and water. The nozzle shall have
an adjustable guide that will hold the nozzle aligned with the joint about
25 mm above the pavement surface and will direct the blast to clean the
joint walls. The height, angle of inclination, and the size of the nozzle
shall be adjusted as necessary to ensure satisfactory results.
1.5.1.3 Waterblasting Equipment
Waterblasting equipment shall include a trailer-mounted water tank, pumps,

high-pressure hose, a wand with safety release cutoff controls, nozzle, and
auxiliary water resupply equipment. The water tank and auxiliary water
resupply equipment shall be of sufficient capacity to permit continuous
operations. The pumps, hoses, wand, and nozzle shall be of sufficient
capacity to permit the cleaning of both walls of the joint and the pavement
surface for a width of at least 13 mm on either side of the joint. A
pressure gauge mounted at the pump shall show at all times the pressure in
kPa at which the equipment is operating.
1.5.2 Sealing Equipment
Equipment used to install the compression seal shall place the compression
T
seal to the prescribed depths within the specified tolerances without
cutting, nicking, twisting, or otherwise damaging the seal. The equipment
shall be capable of placing the seal with not more than two percent
longitudinal stretch or compression of the seal during installation. The
AF
machine shall be an automatic self-propelled joint seal application
equipment and engine powered. The machine shall include a reservoir for
the lubricant/adhesive, a device for conveying the lubricant/adhesive in
the proper quantities to the sides of the compression seal or the sidewalls
of the joints, a reel capable of holding one full spool of compression
seal, and a power-driven apparatus for feeding the joint seal through a
compression device and inserting the seal into the joint. The equipment
shall also include a guide to maintain the proper course along the joint
R
being sealed. The machine shall at all times be operated by an experienced
operator.
1.6 TRIAL JOINT SEAL AND LUBRICANT/ADHESIVE INSTALLATION

D
Prior to the cleaning and sealing of the joints for the entire project, a
test section at least 69 meters long shall be prepared at a designated
location in the project pavement, using the specified materials and the
approved equipment to demonstrate the proposed joint preparation and
sealing of all types of joints in the project. Following the completion of
the trial length and before any other joint is sealed, the trial joints
will be inspected by the Government to determine that the materials and
installation meet the requirements specified. If materials or installation
do not meet requirements, the materials shall be removed, and the joints
shall be recleaned and resealed at no cost to the Government. No other
joints shall be sealed until the test installation has been approved. If
the trial section is approved, it may be incorporated into the permanent
work. Other joints shall be sealed in the manner approved for sealing the
trial joint.
Materials delivered to the jobsite shall be inspected for defects,

unloaded, and stored with a minimum of handling to avoid damage. Storage
facilities shall protect materials from weather and shall maintain
materials at temperatures recommended by the manufacturer.
1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
The ambient temperature and the pavement temperature within the joint wall
shall be at least 2 degrees C and rising at the time of installation of the
materials. Sealant installation will not be allowed if moisture or foreign
material is observed in the joint.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 COMPRESSION SEALS
Compression joint seal materials shall be a vulcanized elastomeric compound

using polychloroprene as the only base polymer. The material and
manufactured seal shall conform to ASTM D 2628 and COE CRD-C 548 where jet
fuel and/or heat blast resistance is required. The joint seal shall be a
labyrinth type seal. The uncompressed depth of the face of the compression
seal (that is to be bonded to the joint wall) shall be greater than the
uncompressed width of the seal, except that for seals 25 mm or greater in
width, the depth need be only 25 mm or greater. The actual width of the
uncompressed seal for construction and contraction joints shall be 25 mm
T
and for expansion joints shall be 32 mm. The tolerance on the seal shall be
plus 3 mm or minus 1.5 mm.
2.2 LUBRICANT/ADHESIVE
AF
Lubricant/adhesive used for the compression elastomeric joint seal shall be
a one-component compound conforming to ASTM D 2835.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION OF JOINTS

R
Immediately before installation of the compression joint seal, the joints
shall be thoroughly cleaned to remove laitance, filler, existing sealer,
foreign material and protrusions of hardened concrete from the sides and
upper edges of the joint space to be sealed. Cleaning shall be by
sandblasting or waterblasting and shall extend along pavement surfaces at
D
least 13 mm on either side of the joint. After final cleaning and

immediately prior to sealing, the joints shall be blown out with compressed
air and left completely free of debris and water. The Contractor shall
demonstrate that the selected cleaning operation meets the cleanliness
requirements. Any irregularity in the joint face which would prevent
uniform contact between the joint seal and the joint face shall be
corrected prior to the installation of the joint seal.
3.1.1 Sawing
Joints shall be cleaned and opened to the specified width and depth by
sawing. Immediately following the sawing operation, the joint faces and
opening shall be thoroughly cleaned using a water jet to remove saw
cuttings or debris remaining on the faces or in the joint opening.
Compression seal shall be installed within 3 calendar days of the time the
joint cavity is sawed. Depth of the joint cavity shall be per
manufacturer's instructions. The saw cut for the joint seal cavity shall
be centered over the joint line. The nominal width of the sawed joint seal
cavity shall be as follows; the actual width shall be within a tolerance of
plus or minus 1.5 mm:
a. If a nominal 25 mm wide compression seal is furnished, the nominal

width of the saw cut shall be 14 mm when the pavement temperature
at the time of sawing is between 12 and 82 degrees C. If the
pavement temperature at the time of sawing is above this range,
the nominal width of the saw cut shall be decreased 1.5 mm. If
the pavement temperature at the time of sawing is below this
range, the nominal width of the saw cut shall be increased 1.5 mm.
b. The pavement temperature shall be measured in the presence of the

Contracting Officer. Measurement shall be made each day before
commencing sawing and at any other time during the day when the
temperature appears to be varying from the allowable sawing range.
3.1.2 Sandblast Cleaning
A multiple pass sandblasting technique shall be used until the surfaces are
free of dust, dirt, curing compound, or any residue that might prevent
ready insertion or uniform contact of the seal and bonding of the
lubricant/adhesive to the concrete.
3.1.3 Waterblast Cleaning
T
A multiple pass waterblast technique shall be used until the surfaces are
free of dust, dirt, curing compound, or any residue that might prevent
ready insertion or uniform contact of the seal and bonding of the
AF
lubricant/adhesive to the concrete.
3.1.4 Rate of Progress
Sandblasting or waterblasting of joint faces shall be limited to the length

of joint that can be sealed during the same workday.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF THE COMPRESSION SEAL

R
3.2.1 Time of Installation
Joints shall be sealed immediately within 3 calendar days of sawing the

joint seal cavity and following concrete cure and the final cleaning of the
D
joint walls. Open joints ready for sealing that cannot be sealed under the
specified conditions shall be provided with an approved temporary seal to
prevent infiltration of foreign material. When rain interrupts the sealing
operations, the joints shall be washed, air pressure cleaned, and allowed
to dry prior to installing the lubricant/adhesive and compression seal.
3.2.2 Sequence of Installation
Longitudinal joints shall be sealed first, followed by transverse joints.

Seals in longitudinal joints shall be installed so that all transverse
joint seals will be intact from edge to edge of the pavement.
Intersections shall be made monolithic by use of joint seal adhesive and
care in fitting the intersection parts together. Extender pieces of seal
shall not be used at intersections. Any seal falling short at the
intersection shall be removed and replaced with new seal at no additional
cost to the Government. Seals that are required to change direction by
more than 20 degrees, may require a poured sealant at the intersection.
Poured sealant shall be per compression seal manufacturer's instructions.
3.3 SEALING OF JOINTS
The sides of the joint seal or the sides of the joint shall be covered with
a coating of lubricant/adhesive and the seal installed as specified. Butt
joints and seal intersections shall be coated with liberal applications of
lubricant/adhesive. Lubricant/adhesive spilled on the pavement shall be
removed immediately to prevent setting on the pavement. The in-place joint
seal shall be in an upright position and free from twisting, distortion,
and cuts. Adjustments shall be made to the installation equipment and
procedure, if the stretch exceeds 1 percent. Any seal exceeding 2 percent
stretch shall be removed and replaced. The joint seal shall be placed at a
uniform depth within the tolerances specified. In-place joint seal which
fails to meet the specified requirements shall be removed and replaced with
new joint seal at no cost to the Government. The compression joint seal
shall be placed to a depth of 6 mm, plus or minus 3 mm, below the pavement
surface except when the joint is beveled or has a radius at the surface, or
unless otherwise directed. For beveled joints or joints with a radius at
the surface, the compression joint seal shall be installed at a depth of 3
mm, plus or minus 3 mm, below the bottom of the edge of the bevel or
radius. No part of the seal shall be allowed to project above the surface
of the pavement or above the edge of the bevel or radius. The seal shall
T
be installed in the longest practicable lengths in longitudinal joints and
shall be cut at the joint intersections to provide continuous installation
of the seal in the transverse joints. The lubricant/adhesive in the
longitudinal joints shall be allowed to set for 1 hour prior to cutting at
AF
the joint intersections to reduce the possibility of shrinkage. For all
transverse joints, the minimum length of the compression joint seal shall
be the pavement width from edge to edge.
3.4 CLEAN-UP
Upon completion of the project, all unused materials shall be removed from
the site, any lubricant/adhesive on the pavement surface shall be removed,
R
and the pavement shall be left in clean condition.
3.5 QUALITY CONTROL PROVISIONS
3.5.1 Application Equipment

D
The application equipment shall be inspected to assure uniform application

of lubricant/adhesive to the sides of the compression joint seal or the
walls of the joint. If any equipment causes cutting, twisting, nicking,
excessive stretching or compressing of the seal, or improper application of
the lubricant/adhesive, the operation shall be suspended until causes of
the deficiencies are determined and corrected.
3.5.2 Procedures
3.5.2.1 Quality Control Inspection
Quality control provisions shall be provided during the joint cleaning

process to prevent or correct improper equipment and cleaning techniques
that damage the concrete in any manner. Cleaned joints shall be approved
by the Government prior to installation of the lubricant/adhesive and
compression joint seal.
3.5.2.2 Conformance to Stretching and compression Limitations
Conformance to stretching and compression limitations shall be determined.
The top surface of the compression seal shall be marked at 305 mm intervals
in a manner clear and durable to enable length determinations of the seal.
After installation, the distance between the marks shall be measured on the
seal. If the stretching or compression exceeds 2 percent, the seal shall
be removed and replaced with new joint at no additional cost to the
Government. The seal shall be removed up to the last correct measurement.
The seal shall be inspected a minimum of once per 50 meters of seal for
compliance to the shrinkage or compression requirements. Measurements
shall also be made at the same interval to determine conformance with depth
and width of installation requirements. Compression seal that is not in
conformance with specification requirements shall be removed and replaced
with new joint seal at no additional cost to the Government.
3.5.2.3 Pavement Temperature
The pavement temperature shall be determined by placing a thermometer in

the initial saw cut for the joint and the reading shall be recorded. The
thermometer shall remain in the joint for an adequate time to provide a
control reading.
3.5.3 Final Inspection
T
The joint sealing system (compression seal and lubricant/adhesive) shall be
inspected for proper rate of cure and bonding to the concrete, cuts,
twists, nicks and other deficiencies. Seals exhibiting any defects, at any
AF
time prior to final acceptance of the project, shall be removed from the
joint, wasted, and replaced in a satisfactory manner.
R
D
Al Dhafra, UAE
PART SIX ATTACHMENTS

ADAB SPEC COMM
REFUELER RAMP AS-BUILTS
GEOTECH
MQ-4C TRITON FRD
NAVFAC SYSTEM FURITURE SPECIFICATION
PENN MEMO
RF CABLINE AND ANTENNA
SITE DRAWINGS
SITE PHOTOS
TOWER DRAWINGS
TRITON BASING 101
UFC 4 211 01N
ECB 2015-7
NAVY FALL PROTECTION GUIDE
T
AF
R
D
PART SIX - ATTACHMENTS - Page 1

Al Dhafra, UAE
ADAB SPEC COMM
T
AF
R
D
Part 6 - Attachments
15.0 ADAB Spec Communications
15.1 Acronyms
BET building entrance terminal

CAT category
CATV community access (cable) television
CER communications equipment room
CHH communications handhole
CMH communications manhole (maintenance hole)
CPI Chatsworth Products Incorporated
EIA Electronic Industries Alliance
ETL Engineering Technical Letter
FOC fiber optic cable
GFGI - Government Furnished Government Installed
ITN information transfer node
LAN local area network
PVC polyvinyl chloride
TC telecommunication closet
TGB telecommunication grounding busbar
T
TIA Telecommunications Industry Association
TMGB telecommunication main ground busbar
UPS uninterruptible power supply
UTP unshielded twisted pair
AF
15.2 Construction Contractor Responsibilities (not limited to)
15.2.1 Provide and install the premise wiring to include wall jacks, boxes, Green CAT 6 cable,
RG-6 cable (for CATV) and orange multi-mode optical fiber cable. Terminate CAT 6 with Green
Modules.
15.2.2 Provide and install conduits and wall-mounted cable tray or wire basket to provide
R
continuous pathway with gaps to connect cabinets and wall-mounted or flush mounted wall outlet
boxes.
15.2.3 Provide and install the communications cabinet(s)/rack, TMGB and/or TGB, CAT 6 patch
D
panels, plywood backboard.
15.2.4 Provide and install CATV splitter network and Optical receiver.
15.2.5 Terminate CAT 6 cable at the wall outlets and patch panel(s). Terminate RG-6 coaxial
cable at wall jacks and splitter network.
15.2.6 Provide and install premise wiring multi-mode fiber optic cables (FOC) and terminations.
15.2.7 Provide 24 strand single-mode OSP fiber cable from the TR to the first CMH, leaving 15
meters of slack in the CMH. Terminate with LC connectors, using fusion method at the top of the
42U cabinet. Terminate the first 4 Strands of fiber with LC APC connectors. Label housing and
cable with (EBN # to CMH #).
15.2.8 TRs in facilities with more than one (1) floor or level should be located directly
above each other. Install (4) 100mm (4 in) trade size rigid steel conduit to connect the TCs
on multiple levels. Steel conduit shall be finished flush to the ceiling and floor as appropriate
and each end shall have a PVC bushing to protect cable.
15.2.9 Ground the communication cabinet(s)/rack to the TMGB/TGB as appropriate. Bond the
TMGB to electrical service grounding electrode. Bond the TGB(s) back to the TMGB. Use MIL-
STD-188-124B
15.2.10 Test terminations at both the wall outlets and patch panel(s) to ensure a quality
connection/termination. Provide test report per submittal register.
15.3 Governments Responsibilities
15.3.1 Provide and install Ethernet switches and UPS equipment in communications
rack/cabinet(s).
15.3.2 Provide and install FOC patch cables.
15.4 Telecommunications Room (TR)
15.4.1 General. TRs shall be sized in accordance with TIA-569-B. A TR shall be included
directly above first floor TRs for multi-story buildings in accordance with TIA-569-B. TRs shall be
located as shown on project drawings. The building communications service entrance shall consist
of a minimum of two (2) each 100mm (4 in) schedule 40 or better PVC conduits. The service
conduit shall terminate 100mm (4 in) above the finished floor elevation flush with the plywood
T
communications backboard in the TR providing an entry point for outside plant cable(s) into the
building. Two story facilities will shall
15.4.1.1
AF
Install plywood backboard, 20mm (3/4 in) thick, painted (white) on the wall(s) in
the TR per the drawings for the mounting of telecommunications equipment. Width and length
of the plywood backboard will specified by the contract drawings.
15.4.1.2 Install a dedicated electrical panel with the following requirements: 120/208V
3phase 30 slot panel with 100A capacity or country equivalent. 30A spare shall be reserved in
each panel. TR panel will feed all loads, no branch circuits to be used. Provide additional power
outlets for maintenance and housekeeping every 1.8m (6ft) along perimeter wall. Provide a
R
minimum of two dedicated un-switched 20-amp, 120-VAC, 60Hz ( or host country standard
voltage and frequency) duplex receptacle power outlets, extending from ceiling to cabinet, each
on a separate branch circuit for communication equipment.
D
15.4.1.3 In the ground floor (main) TR mount a TMGB on the plywood backboard. The
TMGB shall be 100mm (4 in) wide, 600mm (2ft) long and 6mm (1/4 in) thick and shall be
insulated from its supports by a minimum of 50mm (2 in). The TMGB shall be a predrilled
busbar provided with holes for use with standard sized lugs. TMGB shall be CPI part number
40153-020 or approved equal. Connect TMGB to main facility power panel (MDB) grounding
busbar via 50mm2 (1/0 AWG) insulated (yellow/green) copper conductor or to the point where
the electrical grounding electrode conductor bonds to the grounding electrode. Exterior
grounding/bonding connections shall utilize exothermic welding, listed compression type
connectors or other irreversible compression type connections. Two-hole lugs are preferred
for interior connections to the TMGB.
15.4.1.4 In other facility TRs (if any) mount a TGB on the plywood backboard. The TGB
shall be 100mm (4 in) wide, 300mm (12 in) long and 6mm (1/4 in) thick and shall be insulated
from its supports by a minimum of 50mm (2 in). The TGB shall be a predrilled busbar provided
with holes for use with standard sized lugs. TGB shall be CPI part number 40153-012 or
approved equal. Connect TGB to the TMGB via 50mm2 (1/0 AWG) insulated (yellow/green)
copper conductor. Bond communications equipment in the TC to the TGB via 16mm2 (6 AWG)
insulated copper conductor. Two-hole lugs are preferred are preferred for interior connections
to the TMGB.
.
15.4.2 Communications Cabinets
15.4.2.1 Cabinets shall be EIA-310-D or IEC 60297 industry standard compliant 19 in. 42U
with (800mmW) X (800mmD) glass fronted door w/Lock, Metal floor standing rack. Cabinet
shall be Conteg part number RI7-42-80/80/H or approved equal.
15.4.2.2 Install adequate 24/48-port, CAT 6 110 punchdown block patch panels to
accommodate the total voice and data drops Voice and data patch panel terminations shall not
be intermingled, group telephone terminations separate from data terminations at the patch
panels. Ideally, separate patch panels should be utilized for voice and data terminations.
15.4.2.3 Ground the cabinet to the installed TMGB or TGB with 16mm2 (6 AWG) insulated
(yellow/green) copper conductor. Scrape (remove) the paint from the location of the cabinet
ground lug in order to achieve the highest quality electrical connection.
15.4.3 Universal Rack
T
15.4.3.1 Universal racks shall be 45U, 2130mm (7 ft) tall, standard 19 in. (483mm) rack
width, free-standing and floor-mounted. Rack shall be CPI part number 48353-X03 or
approved equal.
15.4.3.2
AF
Install adequate 24/48-port, CAT 6 110 punchdown block patch panels to
accommodate the total voice and data drops.Voice and data patch panel terminations shall not
be intermingled, group telephone terminations separate from data terminations at the patch
panels. Ideally, separate patch panels should be utilized for voice and data terminations.
15.4.3.3 Ground the rack to the installed TMGB or TGB with 16mm2 (6 AWG) insulated
(yellow/green) copper conductor. Scrape (remove) the paint from the location of the cabinet
R
ground lug in order to achieve the highest quality electrical connection.
15.4.4 Cable Pathway
15.4.4.1 General. The building telecommunications pathway system shall include

D
horizontal and backbone pathways, service entrance facilities, work area pathways,
telecommunications outlet assemblies, and conduit. Provide telecommunications pathways in
accordance with TIA-569.
15.4.4.2 LAN-1 Pathway. Premise wiring shall be concealed and wall boxes shall be flush
mounted.
15.4.4.2.1 Cabling pathways will be constructed of Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit PVC Type
EPC-40 in accordance with NEMA TR 2 or UL 651 or Electrical zinc-coated steel metallic
tubing (EMT) in accordance with UL 797. Fittings will be Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit PVC in
accordance with NEMA TR 3 and UL 514B or cadmium- or zinc-coated ferrous fittings for
EMT conduit in accordance with UL 514B. Cable trays forming a wireway system will have
a nominal 75mm depth or as indicated on drawings, and constructed of aluminum or zinc-
coated steel and include splice, end plates, dropouts and miscellaneous hardware. Edges,
fittings and hardware will be finished free from burrs and sharp edges. Ensure the fittings
and load-carrying ability of straight tray sections are supported and manufacturers
minimum standard radius in compliance with NEMA VE 1.
15.4.4.2.2 Telecommunications outlet boxes shall be flush mounted, aluminum or

stainless steel housing with conduit openings of no smaller than 25mm (1 in) with a bushed
side opening. The standard outlet box type shall be 100mm square by 54mm deep and
large enough to allow manufacturers recommended conductor bend radii and have a mud
ring attached to reduce the outlet opening to a single gang Provide each outlet box with a
plastic cover (faceplate) to support up to 4 telecommunications modular jacks.
15.5 Premise Wiring
15.5.1 Definition. Premise wiring includes the cabling, connectors and accessories that are
used to connect multi-mode optical fiber, data, phone and CATV equipment within a building.
Demarcation point between premise wiring and outside plant cabling is the communications service
entrance TR.
15.5.2 Data and Telephone Cable. Wiring for telephones and LAN networks will consist of 4-
pair CAT 6 complaint cables with a maximum allowable distance of 90 m (295 ft). Cable
terminations shall be wired to TIA/EIA-568-B termination configuration T568B. Raceway (conduit,
Panduit, etc.) used for communications cabling shall not exceed 40% cable fill based on total cross-
sectional area. Leave a 1 m (3.3 ft) service loop prior to terminating the cable at the patch panel.
Communications cabling shall maintain a minimum separation of 300mm (12 in) from electrical
wiring along its entire path.
T
15.5.3 Data and Telephone Drops. The standard communications wall drop shall be 2 each
CAT 6 cable drops (1 voice and 1 data) installed in a single gang outlet box with RJ-45 jacks, per
drawings. All associated end equipment shall be CAT 6 compliant. Maintain a minimum separation
AF
of 300mm (12 in) from power receptacles. Wall drops shall be installed 450mm (1.5 ft) to the center
above finished floor.
15.5.4 Fiber Optic Cable. The standard communication wall drop shall be a dual outlet
consisting of two pair (four strands) of 50 micron multi-mode fiber. Fiber will be terminated on a
patch panel in the TR using fusion splicing method. Fiber will be terminated at the wall jack using
fusion splicing method.
R
15.5.5 CATV Cable. CATV coaxial cable shall be 75 ohm, RG-6 type cables with foam dielectric
and at least a 77% braid and 2 separate layers of foil for shield coverage. RG-6 cables shall be
rated for frequencies up to 1 GHz. Recommended coaxial cable shall be CommScope
F677TSVV or approved equal.
D
15.5.6 CATV Drops. Cable shall not be run through structural members or in contact with pipes,
ducts, or other potentially damaging items. Placement of cable parallel to power conductors shall
be avoided, if possible; a minimum separation of 300mm (12 in) shall be maintained when such
placement cannot be avoided. Cables shall be terminated unless shown otherwise. Minimum
bending radius shall not be exceeded during installation or once installed. Cable ties shall not be
excessively tightened such that the transmission characteristics of the cable are altered. The drops
are terminated with RG-6 snap-and-seal style F connectors at both ends. Recommended
connector shall be Thomas & Betts SNS1P6U or approved equal. One end shall be installed
in an F-81 barrel face plate and the other end shall be connected to the contractor installed splitter
network located in the TC. The F-81 barrel connectors shall be a minimum of 25mm (1 in) in length.
All splitters shall be rated to pass frequencies between 5 MHz and 1 GHz. Recommended 2-Way
splitter shall be Regal DS2DGH10 or approved equal. Recommended 8-way vertical splitter
shall be Regal DS8DGV10 or approved equal. Recommended 8-way horizontal splitter shall
be Regal DS8DGH10 or approved equal. All cable bends shall not exceed factory
recommendations. If connecting an 8-way splitter to a 2-way splitter there shall be a minimum of
610mm (2 ft) of coaxial cable between them. CATV drops shall be installed 450mm (1.5 ft) to the
center above finished floor.
15.5.7 Outlets and Patch Panel Labeling. As a minimum, outlet and patch panel labeling shall
show the TR number serving the outlet and the outlet circuit number. The outlet number should
reflect its relative physical location in the building. Circuit numbers should not incorporate
telephone extension numbers since telephone numbers can be reassigned to different outlets in
telephone switching equipment and are therefore subject to frequent change. Where several patch
panels are located in a single TR, the numbering and labeling scheme shall also show the number
of the patch panel serving the outlet. Numbering sequence shall begin at the left side of the room
main entrance and clockwise around the room. Each individual jack shall be labeled to show its
function; top positions shall be designated for telephone and labeled V-#, and bottom positions
shall be designated for data and labeled D-# Where the # designates the respective sequenced
outlet number. All patch panels terminating copper cable shall be stenciled with the panel number,
the cable count, and whether terminations are wired to TIA/EIA-568-B termination configuration
T568B (by default) or T568A (by exception only) wiring standard. Lettering on labels shall be 6mm
(0.25 in) high and machine-made; handwritten labels shall not be used for permanent installation.
15.5.8 Distribution System Labeling. All transitions and changes in distribution system size
and type must be labeled on the as-built drawings. Each cabinet must be labeled at the top with a
unique designation. All cables, patch panels, and cable terminations must be labeled.
15.6 Outside Plant
T
15.6.1 Definition. Telecommunication infrastructure designed for installation exterior to
buildings. For Al Dhafra AB this will primarily be the communications ductbank system to include
conduit, CHHs, CMHs and communication cabling.
AF
15.6.2 Lengths between pulling points. The maximum distance between Manholes shall be
152 m (500 ft) and the maximum distance to or between handholes shall be 76 m (250 ft). [AFCENT
A6X Guidance]
15.6.3 Bends. Where bends are required, manufactured bends should be used whenever
possible. Manufactured bends shall have a minimum inner radius of 1 meter (40 in) based on a 10x
100mm inner diameter conduit. Bends made manually shall not reduce the internal diameter of the
R
conduit. [TIA/EIA-758 5.1.1.2.4]
15.6.4 Number of bends. For the purposes of this sub-clause, the following definitions apply.
90-Degree Bend: any radius bend in a piece of pipe that changes direction of the pipe 90-
D
degrees.
Kick: a bend in a piece of pipe, usually less than 45-degrees, made to change the direction
of the pipe.
Offset: two bends usually having the same degree of bend, made to avoid an obstruction
blocking the run of the pipe.
90-Degree Sweep: a bend that exceeds the manufacturers standard size 90-degree bend.
Back-to-back 90-degree Bend: any two (2) 90-degree bends placed closer together than
3 m (10 ft) in a conduit run.
There shall not be more than the equivalent of one (1) 90-degree bend (180-degrees total) between
pull points, including offsets and kicks. Back-to-back 90-degree bends shall be avoided. [AFCENT
A6X Guidance]
15.6.5 Drain slope. Underground conduit shall be installed such that a slope exists at all points
of the run to allow drainage and prevent the accumulation of water. A drain slope of no less than
10mm per meter (0.125 inch per foot) is desirable when extending conduit away from building
structures. Where conduit extends between maintenance holes [CMH], a slope of 10mm per meter
(0.125 inch per foot) should extend from the middle of the span to each maintenance hole.
[TIA/EIA-758 5.1.1.2.6]
15.6.6 Duct plugs. Ducts shall be sealed to resist liquid and gas infiltration at all maintenance
holes and building entrance points. [TIA/EIA-758 5.1.1.2.8]
15.6.7 PVC conduit. Conduit shall be manufactured to not less than the NEMA TC-2
specification with a schedule 40 wall thickness, type EPC-40-PVC Heavy Wall. ASTM D1785
standard specification for Schedule 40 and Schedule 80 PVC is the preferred conduit of choice,
based on diameter, wall thickness and material physical strength. ASTM D1975 specification
schedule 40 conduit is specifically NOT authorized as this specification covers PVC conduit for use
with the distribution of pressurized liquids only. NEMA TC-6, SAS and DIN specifications are not
approved. Schedule 80 will be used for road crossings and heavy traffic areas and will be concrete
encased.
15.6.8 PVC fittings. Fittings for PVC conduit shall be manufactured to at least the NEMA TC-
3 specification. Fittings covered by this specification include sweeps, couplings, female adaptors,
male terminals, junction box adapters, reducers, caps and end-bells.
15.6.9 Ductbank
15.6.9.1 General. All communications ductbank shall be concrete encased. Ductbank shall
include 100mm (4 in) trade size PVC conduit. A 150mm (6 in) deep layer of rock-free sand
shall be placed on top of the ductbank concrete. A continuous run of plastic, non-biodegradable
T
magnetic marker strip with the word Communications continuously printed shall be placed
directly centered (horizontally) above the duckbank a minimum of 300mm (12 in) below finished
grade. Backfill with native soil in layers compacted to 95% modified density.
AF
15.6.9.2 Concrete. Concrete shall meet or exceed 28 MPa (4,000 psi) compressive
strength. Concrete shall extend a minimum of 75mm (3 in) beyond the edge of the conduit
limits on all sides.
15.6.9.3 Conduit spacers. Adjacent conduits shall be separated by 75mm (3 in). Spacers,
intermediate and base spacers or combination spacers as appropriate, shall be installed at
intervals of 2 m (6.6 ft) to properly support the ductbank and maintain conduit spacing during
R
concrete encasement. Spacers shall be the following products or approved equal; base spacer
Carlon part number S288NLN; intermediate spacer Carlon part number S289NLN;
combination spacers, 2x2 Carlon part number SP4W30-2, 2x3 Carlon part number
SP4W30-3.
D
15.6.9.4 Burial depth. The top of the ductbank concrete shall be a minimum of 914mm
(36in) below finished grade.
15.6.9.5 Ductbank fittings and Connections. All fittings including couplings, sweeps and
interconnection between conduits shall be primed with PVC primer and glued with PVC solvent
cement.
15.6.9.6 Ductbank Mandrel Test. Each conduit duct shall be tested for clearance by pulling
a mandrel through the duct. This test shall be inspected by the Contracting Officer and the
Communication engineer or his representative. For a 100mm (4 in) diameter conduit the
mandrel shall be not less than 90mm (3.5 in) diameter. If the conduit fails the mandrel test or
the mandrel causes obvious damage to the conduit, the contractor will be required to remove
and replace the deficient portion of the conduit to the nearest joint or structure.
15.6.9.7 Ground wire and pull tape. Terminate ground wire to ductbank structure (CMH or
CHH) grounding busbar as appropriate with exothermic welding. Install. 12.5mm ( in)
diameter 900 lb (409 kg) pull-strength polyester pull rope in each ductbank conduit.
Recommended pull rope shall be NEPTCO part number WP900P or approved equal.
15.6.10 Maintenance Holes (CMH)
15.6.10.1 General. CMHs are reinforced concrete units with a removable cover that permits
internal access via ladder. CMHs shall be installed on a gravel base of sufficient depth to allow
for drainage and stability. All CMHs shall have a lid (cover) that supports heavy vehicular traffic
(BS EN 124 Class D400). All CMH structures shall be designed to satisfy and meet the
AASHTO H20 loading requirements. Concrete shall meet or exceed 31 MPa (4,500 psi)
compressive strength. CMHs shall have a 300mm (12 in) by 300mm (12 in.) sump hole by
100mm (4 in) deep sump hole located directly below the CMH cover location.
15.6.10.2 Dimensions. Standard CMH internal dimensions shall be 2.5m (8.2 ft) by 2.5m
(8.2 ft) by 2m (6.5 ft) deep with a minimum of 200mm (8 in) thick walls, floor and top. Finished
access opening shall not be less than 1000mm (39 in) in diameter. Note: Lid (cover) will have
to be larger to properly seat in the frame.
15.6.10.3 Concrete reinforcing. Standard reinforcing shall be #16 (16mm diameter) steel
rebar. Each face (walls, floor, tops) shall have two (2) each mats of rebar spaced 150mm (6
in) on center, each way. Lap and splice bars at their ends, terminations, etc. to provide a fully
continuous cage. Rebar shall have a minimum concrete cover of 50mm (2 in).
15.6.10.4 Cable racks. Install cable racks with the top of the rack even with the top of the
T
conduit window. Provide four (4) each racks on each wall of the CMH. Ground cable racks to
installed ground busbar via 25mm2 (4 AWG) insulated (yellow/green) copper conductor.
Provide four (4) each 350mm (14 in) hooks per rack. Cable racks and hooks shall be Hubbell
AF
(or approved equal) part numbers; 37 hole rack, C2030313; 14 (350mm) PVC coated
rack hook, C2030499.
15.6.10.5 Cover (lid). Cover shall support heavy vehicular traffic meeting BS EN 124 Class
D400. The cover shall have diamond pattern on its top surface with 40mm (1.5 in) by 10mm
(0.4 in) non-penetrating pickholes spaced at 180 degrees. Covers shall be bolted to the frame
with two pentagon head special monel security bolts (tamperproof bolts). Frames and covers
shall be made of cast iron and a machine-finished seat shall be provided to ensure a matching
R
joint between frame and cover. Covers shall have an identifying mark that prominently
indicates their function and shall read COMMUNICATIONS in lettering a minimum of 25mm
tall. Also provide the structure number as indicated on the drawings, i.e., CMH XXX in
lettering a minimum of 75mm tall.
D
15.6.10.6 Waterproofing. All exterior surfaces shall be coated with a double layer (2-ply)
waterproofing sealant and bituminous material. Provide a waterstop at cold joint between
structure walls and floor slab in order to provide a water-tight joint between the concrete
sections. The waterstop shall be centered on the joint with 75mm (3 in) extending into the wall
and 75mm (3 in) extending into the floor slab. The waterstop shall be Thermo Plastic
Elastomeric Rubber (TPER), 150mm (6 in) wide. Waterproofing shall be Westec Envirostop
TPER ribbed centerbulb (619) or approved equal.
15.6.10.7 Conduit Stub-outs. Conduit stub-outs will be built into the CMH/CHH with no less
than 101.6mm (4in) between the conduit and the wall. Separation between conduits will be no
less than 50mm (2in).
15.6.10.8 Collar. A collar is used to raise the finished elevation of the structure opening to
the finished grade. The collar shall have the same concrete and reinforcing specifications as
the main structure. The wall thickness of the collar shall be 200mm (8 in). The internal
dimensions of the collar shall not be smaller than the minimum finished access opening size in
15.6.10.2. A collar is required for structures located in roads and sidewalks or required due to
the depth of the structure.
15.6.10.9 Grounding. Install a copper grounding busbar and ground rod.
15.6.10.9.1 Busbar. See TGB specification in 15.4.1.4.
15.6.10.9.2 Ground rod. Ground rod shall be 20mm (0.79 in) diameter by 2.4 m (10 ft)
long solid copper installed in a precast concrete inspection pit with cover. Ground rod will
be placed 457mm (18 in) below ground level. Busbar will be placed in CMH at the top
above the top of the ground rod. Connect ground rod to ground busbar via 50mm2 (1/0
AWG) insulated copper conductor routed through CMH top, grout or seal ground wire
penetration watertight. Precast concrete ground rod inspection pit shall be: Furse part
number PT005. Ground rod assembly shall be the following Furse part numbers and
quantities (or approved equal): two (2) each RC015 (solid copper rod, 20mm dia. 1.2
m length), one (1) each ST015 (20mm driving stud), one (1) each CG013 (coupling
dowel) and one (1) each SP015 (20mm spike).
15.6.10.9.3 Ground Connections. Make connection with a Cadweld at the ground rod and
a listed compression type connector or other irreversible compression type connection at
the busbar. Two-hole lugs are preferred. Ground cable racks to ground busbar as
described in 15.6.10.4. Precast concrete ground rod inspection pit shall be Furse part
number PT005. Ground clamp shall be Erico GR1182C for ground rod to 1/0 AWG
T
Stranded or approved equal.
AF
15.6.10.10 Pulling-in iron. Install one (1) each pulling-in iron 150mm (6 in) below the bottom
of each conduit window. Pulling-in iron shall be minimum 22mm diameter corrosion-resistant
steel lapped around concrete reinforcing.
15.6.11 Hand Holes (CHH)
15.6.11.1 General. CHHs are reinforced concrete units with a removable cover. CHHs shall
be installed on a gravel base of sufficient depth to allow for drainage and stability. All CHHs
R
shall have a lid (cover) that supports heavy vehicular traffic (BS EN 124 Class D400). All CMH
structures shall be designed to satisfy and meet the AASHTO H20 loading requirements
Concrete shall meet or exceed 31 MPa (4,500 psi) compressive strength.
D
15.6.11.2 Dimensions. Standard CHH internal dimensions shall be 1.2m (4 ft) by 1.2m (4 ft)
by 1.2m (4 ft) deep with a minimum of 150mm (6 in) thick walls, floor and top. Finished access
opening shall not be less than 900mm (36 in) in diameter. Note: Lid (cover) will have to be
larger to properly seat in the frame.
15.6.11.3 Concrete reinforcing. Standard reinforcing shall be #16 (16mm diameter) steel
rebar. Each face (walls, floor, and tops) shall have one (1) each mat of rebar spaced 150mm
(6 in) on center, each way. Lap and splice bars at their ends, terminations, etc. to provide a
fully continuous cage. Rebar mat shall be centered in structure walls, floor and top.
15.6.11.4 Cable racks. Install cable racks with the top of the rack even with the top of the
conduit window. Provide two (2) each racks on each wall of the CHH. Ground cable racks to
installed ground busbar via 25mm2 (4 AWG) insulated (yellow/green) copper conductor.
Provide three (3) each 250mm (10 in) hooks per rack. Cable racks and hooks shall be Hubbell
part numbers (or approved equal): 14 hole rack, C2031125; 10 (250mm) PVC coated
rack hook, C2031127
15.6.11.5 Cover. See 15.6.10.5. Also provide the structure number as indicated on the
drawings, i.e., CHH XXX-XX in lettering a minimum of 75mm tall.
15.6.11.6 Waterproofing. See 15.6.10.6.
15.6.11.7 Conduit Stub-outs. See 15.6.10.7, replace CMH with CHH.
15.6.11.8 Collar. A collar is used to raise the finished elevation of the structure opening to
the finished grade. The collar shall have the same concrete and reinforcing specifications as
the main structure. The wall thickness of the collar shall be 150mm (6 in). The internal
dimensions of the collar shall not be smaller than the minimum finished access opening size in
15.6.10.2. A collar is required for structures located in roads and sidewalks or where the depth
of the structure requires it.
15.6.11.9 Grounding. Install a copper grounding busbar and ground rod.
15.6.11.9.1 Busbar. See 15.6.10.9.1.
15.6.11.9.2 Ground rod. See 15.6.10.9.2, replace CMH with CHH.
15.6.11.9.3 Ground connections. See 15.6.10.9.3.
15.6.11.10 Pulling Iron. See 15.6.10.10
T
15.7 Testing
15.7.1 Communications CAT 6 (Class E) Testing. All metallic cabling shall be tested end-to-
AF
end and certified to meet TIA/EIA-568-C.2 performance standards (international equivalent
ISO/IEC 11801). All equipment shall be tested to meet contract specifications. All certified test
results and certification of test device calibration shall be provided in a report (including both raw
LinkWare data and a pdf file for each individual cable drop tested and a pdf file of the summary test
results) upon completion of construction to the CO (see AF-66). Level III or Level IV field test
equipment such as the Fluke Analyzer DTX-1800 or similar, and shall be used to test CAT 6
rated cables and components in the CAT 6 Permanent Link mode. Specifically, performance tests
results shall be included for the following characteristics:
R
(A) Insertion Loss (Attenuation)
(B) Near-End Cross Talk (NEXT) loss
(C) Far-End Cross Talk (FEXT) loss
(D) Attenuation-to-Crosstalk Ratio-Far-End (ACR-FE)
D
(E) Return Loss

(F) Propagation Delay/Delay Skew
(G) Power Sum Near-End Crosstalk (PSNEXT) loss
(H) Power Sum Attenuation-to-Crosstalk Ratio-Far-End (PSACR-F)
(I) Wire Map /continuity & pairing test
(J) Length (Permanent link distance)
15.7.2 Fiber Optic Testing. Single-mode OSP cable will be tested with an OTDR from the TR.
Readings will be saved and provided on a disc. Test will be accomplished at 1310 and 1550 nm Allowed
splice loss for Single-Mode fiber is .3db and allowed factory connector loss is .3db and .5 db per 1000ft.
(Reference TIA-526-7) Multi-Mode ISP fiber will be tested with a Power meter and light source. Test will
be bidirectional. Test will be accomplished at 850 and 1300 nm. Allowed splice loss for Multi-Mode
fiber is .3db and allowed factory connector loss is .5db. 0.35 dB is allowed per 100 meter. Results will be
saved and provided on a disc. (Reference TIA-526-14-B)
15.7.3 Coaxial Cable Testing. Coaxial cables shall be tested end-to-end and according to ANSI/SCTE
Test Standards. All equipment shall be tested to meet contract specifications. All test results and
certifications shall be provided in a report upon completion of construction to the CO. Specifically
performance test results for each cable drop or splitter shall be included for the following characteristics.
(A) Coaxial Cable Attenuation (measured in dB) at the following frequencies: 187 MHz, 500
MHz, and 750 MHz.
(B) 2-way Splitter Loss (measured in dB) at 40 MHz to 500MHz and at 750 MHz.
(C) 8-way Splitter Loss (measured in dB) at the following frequencies: 40 MHz, 500 MHz and
750 MHz.
(D) Length in feet of each coaxial cable from splitter to wall outlet
T
AF
R
D
Al Dhafra, UAE
REFUER RAMP AS-BUILTS
T
AF
R
D
Part 6 - Attachments
A B C D E F G H
1 5
MATCHLINE
8 0
4
- FOR
8
CONTINUATION
1 2
4
9
7
SEE
7
0
SHEET
4
4
1
6 C-30
3 5 8 1 5
2 0 1 4 9 1 3 6 8 0 9 6 3 1 8 5 3 .6
7
.5 .5 .4 .4 .4 .4
0 2 5 7 9 5 4 7 4 1 6 5 3 0 7 4 2
.7 .7 .7 .6 .6 .6 .5 9 9
0 3 5 7 9 6 3 7 2 9 7 .0 .0 8
.9 .9 .9 .8 .8 .8 .7 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 1 1
0 4 1
.2
0
.1 .1 .1 .0 .0 .9 9 9 9 9 1 9 1 1 1 1 1 1
.4
7 .3 .2 .2 .2 0 0 0 0 9 9 9 9 9 1 1 1 1 1 1
.3 .3 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 2
0
2
0 2 2 2 1
9 1 1 1 1 1 1
0 0 0 2 2 2 2 2 2
2 2 2
6 9 0 5 3 8 2 7 3
1 5 0 5
5
2
9 0
3
7
7
4 2 9 3 6 9 3 7 0 8 9 3 0 8 5 0 8 .5 .5 .5 .4
2 7 0 4 7 1 5 2 6 6 4 1 .8
6 3 1
.7
5
.7 .7 .6 .6 .6 .6 .5 9
1 5 8 2 5 9 3 0 8 5 2 0 7 .0 .0 9 .9 .9 .8 .8 .8 .7 9 9 9 9 9 9 1 9
1
8 9 6 3 1 8 5 .2 .2 .1 .1 .1 .1 .0 0 .9 9 .9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
.3 .3 .3 .3 .2 .2 0 0 0 0 0 2 0 1 9 9 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
.4
2
0 2
0 2
0 2
0
2
0
2
0
2
0 2 2
0
2
0 2 2 2 2 2
20 19 1 1
3
3 2 8 9 5 0 3
6 2
8
7 .5
6
3
8 17
3 8 7 3 7 2 2 6 1 5 1 7 5 3 0 8 6 1 9
4 8 3 8 3 8 5 3 0 8 7 3 0 8 5 3 0 8
.7
3
.7 .6 .6 .6 .6 .5 1 .5
5 5 9 4 9 4 8 3 0 5 0 .0 .0 .9 5 .9 .9 .8 .8 .8 .8 .7 .7 9 9 9 9 9
3 0 8 5 0 8 5 .2
8
.1 .1 .1 0 .0 .0 .9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 1 1 1 1
1 3 .2 .1 0 9 9 9 9 9 1 1 1
10%
.4 .4 .3 .3 .3 .3 .2 .2 0 0 0 0 2
0 0 2 2 2
0
2
0 1 9 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 2 2 2 2 1
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
2 9 5 2 8
N
18
2 5
APR
5 1 7 9 5 1 8 4 1 8 5 6 8 1 9 6 4 2 9
0 1 3 2 3 7 5 3 0 8 3 .6 .5
8 4 7 3 5 4 8 0 4
.0
9 7 4 2 0
.8 .8 .8 .8 .7 .7 .6 .6 .6
3 8 5 .3 7 2 9 8 1 3 1
9 6 1 9 7
.0 .9 .9 .9 .9 .9 .7 9 .7 9 9 9 9 9 9
5 2 0 5 3 0
.2
6 8
.1 .1 .1 .0 .0 0 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 1 9 1 1 1 1 1 1
.4 0 .3 .3 .2 .2 .2 .1 0 0 0 0 2 9 9 9 1 1 1 1 1 1
.4 .4 0 2 .3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2
0 2 2
0 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1
0 0 2 0 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
2 2 2
19
06/06/05
05/23/05
04/08/05
13/11/05
6 2 9
4 2 0 8 6 4 2 0 8 2 4 8 5
2 9 6 0 8 5 2 9 5 3 1 7 4 0 .6
4 2 0 8 9 .7 .6
19
8 2 7 3 6 3 9 .8 .7
2 .7 .7
DATE
0 5 0 7 5 0 1 6 .8 .8 .8 .7 9
7 4 1 9 6 3 1 8 6 4 2 9
.1 .1 .1 .1
8 .0 .0 .0 .9 .9 6 .9 .9 9 9 9 9 1 9
0 0 7 5 3
.3 .2 .2 .2 .1 .0 0 0 9 .94 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 1 1
7 4 2 .4 .3 .3 .3 0 .2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 2 0 1 9 19 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
.4 .4 .4 0 0 0 0 2
0 2 0 2 2
0 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1
0 0 0 2 2 2 2 2
2 2 2
9 6 0
19
5 3 8 7 6 6 4 4 3 2 1 2
6 4 3 1 0 8 7 3 1 1 1 0 2 0 8 4 2 0 8 6 4
2 0 9 8 2 0 5 9 7 5 .9 .9 .8 .8 .8 .8 .8 .7 .7 .7 .7
6 4 2 1 9 8 6 5 3 7 5 2 0
7
.1
6 4
.1 .1
7
.0 .0 .0 .9 .9 .9 9 9 9 9 9 9
7 6 4 2 0 7 5 3 1 9 .2 .2 .2 .1 .1 .0 0 0 0 9 9 1 9 9 1 9 9 9 1 1
5 .4
8
0
.4
2
0
.4
2
0
.4
0
.4
2
0
.3
0
.3
2
0
.3
2
0
.3
2
0
.2
2
0
2
0
2
0
2
0
.2 2
0
2
0
2
0 2
0
2
0
2
0 2 2 2 1
9 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
N
0 2 2 2
BASI
BASI
2
0 9 9 9 8 8 7 1
7 7 8 8 8 1
9 9 7
9 6
0
4
0
2
0 0
1
8
1 CEMENT-STABILIZED
2 2 2 1 1 1 0 5 3 9 5 3
.0 9 7 5 3 9 .8 .8 .8 .8 .8 .7
4 3 3 3 3 2 4 2 0 8 1 4 2 0 8
.1
1 .0 .0 .0 .9 .9 .9 .9 .9 .8 9 9 9 9
5 8
4 4 2 0 8 6 .3 .2
6
.2 .2 .2 .1 .1 .1 0 0 0 0 9 9 9 9 9 1 1 9 1 1
0 6
.4 .4 .3 .3 .3 .3 .2 0 0 0 0 2 077
20. 2 2 2 9 1 1 1 9 1 1 AGGREGATE SLPOE
.5 .4 .4 0 0 .4 0 0 0 0 0 2
0 0 2
0
2
0
2
0 2 2 2 2 1 1 1
0 0 0 2 2 2 2
ON
ON
0 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
ON"
2
PROTECTION (10:1)
RETENTI
RETENTI
7
7 8 9 0 2 2 6
4
4
5
2
7 0
8 9 1 3 4 1
6 9 7
8
6
0
4
1 3m @ 5%
CONSTRUCTI
5 6 7 7 4 0 0 8 7 3 .8 .8
4 8 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 3 1 9 .1 5 2 .1
8 .0 .0 .0 .0 .9
5
.9 .9 .8 .8
8 4 6 6 5 3 1 9 7 .2 .1 .1 .1 .0 0 .9 .9 9 9 9 9 9
2 3
.4 6 4 2 0 8 6
.3 .3 .3 .2 .2 .2 .1 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 9 9 9 9 1 1 1 1
2 0
.4 .4 .4 .4 .3 .3 0 0 .2 0 0 0 0 0 2 0 2 0 2 2
0 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1
.5 .5 2
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2
0
2 2 0 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
0 0 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 20 40mm DROP
ON
2 2
PTI
7 4 6 2 5 7 0 2
0 2 3 6 0 3 5 8 1 2 0 9 7 5 3 2 0
2
1 3 5 7 0 1 4 5 7 0 8 6 4
.1
1 9 7 5 4 .0 .0 .9
8
.9 .9 .9 .9 .9 2% 10%
DESCRI
2 1 .2 .1 .0 .0 .0
12 M OVED
12 M OVED
0 1 4 5 8 0 3 4 7 8 6 4 2 0 9 7 5 3
.2 .1 .1 .1 0 .0 0 0 9 9 9 9 9
4 2 0 8 6 5
.4
1 9 7
.3 .3 .3 .3 .2 .2 .2 .2 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 2 2 9 1 1 1 1 1
.5 .5 .4 .4 .4 .3 .3 0 0 0 0 0 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1
.5 .4 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 2 0 2 2 2
00%
0 0 0 0 0 0 2 0 2 2 2 2 2
2 2 2 2 2 2 2
2 2
86%
2 3
1.
6 3 4 8 2 6 0 3 8 1 5 9
0 0 7 4 9 6
FOR
3 0 7 2 0 9 2 7
50%
1 3 7 0 7 4 6 .0 .9
3 7 0 4 7 9 7 5 4 2 .2 9
.1
5 .1 .1 .0 .0 .0 .0 .0 .9 .9
0.
4 0 3 7 4 7 0 2 .1 .1 0
0 4 0 .2 .1 0 9
380
0 6 2 0 7 5 .2 .2 .2 .2 0 0 0 0 0 0 9 9
7 2 0 9 7 5 4 9
.3 .3 .3 .3 .3 0 2 0 0 0 0 2 2 2 0 2 2 2 1 1
5
4 .5 .5 .4 .4 .4 .4 .4 .4 .3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1
.5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 2 2 2 2
38%
.5 0 0 0 0 2 2 2
0.
0 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
0 2
225.
2
NAL "CLEARED
CHANGE ORDER
CHANGE ORDER
62%
8 3 9 3 9 3
0.
9 8 3 9 3 8 8 6 5 3 2
1 5 4 8 3 5 4 2 4 9 .0
4 8 2 7 2 6 8 6 4 3 1 0 8 7
.1 .1 .1 1 .0 .0 .0 .0 .0
8 3 2 6 1 5 0 0 9 3 4 2 1 9
.2 .2 .2 .2 .2 .1 .1 .1 0 0 0 0 0
4 9 3 7 5 3 8 7 5 .3 .2 .2 0 0 0 0 2
0.
7 2 1 9 8 6 2 .4 .3 .3 0 0 0 0 0 2 2 2 2 2 2
5 4
.5 .5 .4 .4 .4 .4 .4 .3 .3 .3 0 0 0 0 2 0 2 2 2 2 0
.5 .5 .5 0 0 .4 0 0 0 0 2
0 0 0 0 2
0 2 2
0 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
0 0 0 0 0 2 2 2 2 2 2 19
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
LT
2 8 4
AS BUI
4 1 7 3 9 6 1 9 8
3 0 6 2 9 9 5 2 .1
4 5 1 7 2 8
6 5 3 2 0 8 6 .1
3
.1 .0 .0
3 5 1 6 3 8 6 0 3 2 0 9 7
.2 .2 .2 .2 .1 .1 .1 .1 0 0 0
3 9 5 0 6 2 8 6 4
9 3 2 0 9 7
.3
5 .3 .3 .3 .2 .2 .2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 2 2
2 7 6 4 3 2 0 9 7
.4 .4 .4 .4 .3 .3 .3 0 0 0 0 0
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
9 7
.5 .5 .5 .5 .5 .4 .4 0 .4 0 0 0 2
0 0 2
0
2
0 2 2 2 2 2 2
.5 .5 0 0 0 0 2 0 2 2
SEE SH EET C- 29
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 2 2 2 2 2
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
FI
REFUELER RAMP 1
3 2 8 5 3 0 8 5
T
6 1 9 5 8 7 5
5 9 3 7 5 3 .2 0 9 4
SYMBOL
1 8 4 2 8 2 9 4 .1 .1 .1
8 5 9 6 3 0 7 4 0 8 7 6 4 3 2 0
.2
8 .2 .2 .2 .2 0 .2 .1 0 .1
9 6 3 0 5
7 4 1 1 0 9
2 7 6 5 4 2 1
.4 .3 .3 .3 .3 .3 .3 .3 0 .2 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 2
0
2 2
0 0
8 4 3 .4 .4 .4 0 0 2 2 2 2
A
9 7 .5 .4 .4 .4 0 0 0 2 2
2
.5 0 2
0
.5 0 2
1
0 .5 .5 .4 0 0 2
.6 .5 .5 0 .5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2
0
2
0 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
0 0 0 0 2 0 0 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
2 2 2 2 2 2
4 4 0 8 7
1
701
4 1 9 7 6 7 2 4 2 6
8 3 3 0 .2 6 5 1 0
2 9 8 6 4 2 0 7 6 5 4 2 0 9 8
.2 .2 .2 .2 .2 .2
3 3 2 0 9 6 5 3 6 2 1 0 9 6 .3 .3 .3 .3 .2 .2 0 0
7 4 0 1 9 7 6 4 3 2 0 9 8 7 .4
4 3
.4 .4 .4 .3 .3 .3 0 .3 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 0 2 0 0
2 1 9 7 6 5
.5 .5 .5 .5 .4 .4 .4 .4 .4 0 0 0 0 0 2 0 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
.6 .5 .5 .5 .5 0 0 0 0 0 2 2 2 2 2
.6 .6 0 0 0 0 0 0 2
0
2
0
2
0 0 2
0 0 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
0 0 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
2 2
8 7 7 7 7 6
7
20
1 0 9 9 9 9 4 8 8 7 0 9 8 6
8 7 7 6 6 5 5 4 5
3 3 2 2 1 9
9 8 7 6 5
.3 3 2 1 .3 .2 .2 .2 .2
3 2 1 9 9 4 8 2 1 8 7 6 4 3 .4 .4 .3 .3 .3 .3 .3 0 .3 .3 .3 0 0 0 0 0
3 2 9 0 6 5 3 .5 0 9 .4 .4 .4 .4 .4 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 2 2
4 2 1 0 .5 .5 .5 .4 .4 0 0 0 2 2 2
UE0000 -CG28PN
3 8 0 0 2 2
4 .6 .6 .6 .6 .5 .5 .5 .5 0 .5 2
0 0 0 0 0 2
0
2
0 2 2
0
2
0 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
.6 0 0 0 0 2
0 0 2
0
2
0 2 2
0 2 2 2 2
0 2 2 2 2 2
2
04-08-05
0 2 2 4 5 6 7
8 9 3
BY:
2 3 5 6 6 9 9 8 7 5 4 3 2
2 2 3 5 5 2 1 9 .3 6 .3 .3 .3
ON
0 1 3 .3 .3
4 5 5 7 8 5
8 9 9 3 2 1 0 9
8
3 7 6 .4 4
.4 .4 .4 0 .3 .3 0 .3 0 0 0
1 2 3 3 4 1 0 9 6 7 6 4 3
.5 .5 .5 .5 .4 .4 .4 0 .4 0 0 .4 0 0 2 0 0 0 2 2 2
6 4 3 2 .6 8
.5 .5 .5 .5 .5 0 0 .4 0 0 0 0 2 2 0 2 2 2 2 2
5 .6 .5 0 0 2 2
AF
.6 .6 .6 .5 0 0 0 2 2 0 2 2 2
.6
N UATI
.6 0 0 0 0 0 2 0 2 2 2 2 2
0 0 0 0 0 2 2 2 0 2 2 2 2
2 2 2 2 2 2
TTED
LE NO.:
5 7 9 2 3 6 8
2 4 6 9 0 3 3 2 1 1 0 9 8
1 5 6 9 0 6 5 4 .4 .3 .3
9 1 2 5 6 8 0 3 4 1 0 9 9 8 7
.4
5
.4 .4 .4 .4 .4 .4
1 7 5 4 2 .4 .4 .4 0 0 0
SUBMI
4 5 7 8 6 4 .5 .4 0 0 0 0
BY: DATE:
9 2 4 8 0 8 .5 .5 .5 .4 0 0 2 2 2
7 0 6 5 4
6 3 3 2 1 0 9
.5 .5 .5 .5 .5 .5 .5 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 2 2 2 2 2
7
.6 .6 .6 .6 .6 .6 .6 .5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 0 2 2 2 2 2
.6 .6 .6 0 0 2 2 2
CONTI
0 0 0 0 0 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
0 0 0 2 0 0 0 2 2 2 2
2 2 2 2 2 2
FI
5 5 9
9 2 2 5 9 1 7 9 1 5 4
5 9 5 9 8 8 .4 6 6
6 5 8 1 4 7 4 3 3 2 2 1 0 9
.4 .4 .4
2 8 1 5 7 1 3 7 9 3 0 9
9
2 8 7 7 6 5 .5 4
.5 .5 .5 .5
0 .5 .4 .4 0 .4 .4 0 0
6 9 8 5 6 5 4 4 3 2 1 1 .6
9 .5 .5 .5 .5 .5 0 .5 .5 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 2 2
9 8 .6
6
.6 .6 .6 .6 .5 .5 0 0 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 2 2 2 2
.6
7 .6 .6 .6 .6 .6 0 0 0 0 0 2 2 0 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
0 .6 0 .6 0 0 2
0 0 0 0 2
0 2 0 2 2 2 2 2 2
2 2
0 72.048
2
2
0 2 2 2 35.628
2 2 2
35.628 70.128 40.545
JOSE
BY:
GNED
BY:
RAJ
1
FOR
BAR
4 3 2 6 3 6 0 5 9
8 7 1 5 9 8 4 3 2 2 1 0
4 7 2 6 0 5 2 8 8 7 9 6 5 5 4 .5 .5 .5 .5 .5 .5
8 2 6 0 5 9 2 1 1 0 9 9 .5 6 .5 .5 .5 .5 .5 0
4 2 1 5 9 3 6 5 5 4 3 3 2
.6 .6 .5 .5 .5 .5 .5 0 0 0 2 0 0 0 0
1 7 6 9 8 7 7 6
.6 .6 .6 .6 .6 .6 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 2 2 2 2 2
0 0 9 .6 .6 .6 .6 .6 .6 .6 0 0 0 2 0 2 2 2 2
DESI
.7 .6 0 0 0 0 2 2 2
.7 .7 .6 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
DW N
0 0 2 2
CHK
2 0 0 0 2 2 2 0 2 2 2 2
2 2 2 2
20.614 4 20.586
NE -
1 7 8
20.689 20.664 5 1 6 2 7 3 9 0
4
0
0
9
6 9 8 8
3 7 .5
7 0
7 3 20.714
8 4 9 5 6 8
1 7 7
2
6
8
6
3 5
9
5
4
4
9
4
5
4
0
.6
3
.6
3 2
.6
2
.6
1
.6
1
.6
0
.6 .6 .5 0
.5 0
.5 .5 0
.5 0 .5
7
1 6 2 1 .7
1 0 0
0.07% 0.69
9 9
0 8
.6 .6
7
.6
0.07%20.6 .6
.6 .6 .6 .6 .6 0.07%
0 0 .6 0 0 0 0 0 0 20.07%2 0 2 2 0
oup Com pany

3 2 2 .7 0 .7 .7 .6 .6 .6 0 0 0 0 2
0 0 0 0 0 2 2 2
0 2
0 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
.7 .7 .7 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
2
0
2
0 0.07%
2
0 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
M ATCHLI
8 7 4 1 7 4
6 2 9 5 2 9 5 1 7 4 7 7 7 6 6 1
1 4 1 7 3 0 1 1 0 0 0 .6 9 9 8 8 1
.6 .6 .6 .6 .6 6
8
3
3 6 2 9 5 2 8 5 4 3
8 3 3 2 2 2 .7 .7 .7 .7 .7 0 .6 .6 .6 .6 8 0 0 0 .6
7 0 9 6 6 5 5 5 4 4 .7 .7 .7 .7 .7 .7 0 0 2 0 0 .6 0 0 2 2 2 0
8 .7 8 6 7 6 .7 .7 .7 .7 .7 0 0 0 2 0 2 0 0 0 2 0 2 0 2 2
0 .7
7 .7 .7 .7 .7 .7 0 0 0 0 0
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
.7 2
3 0 0
ey Gr
2 .7 0 0 0 0 0 2 2 2 2
0 0 0 2 0 2 2 2 2 2 2
c Program s
2 2 2 2
anl
8 6 1 9 6 3 1 9 6 3 1
7 7 7 4 7 6 6 6 6 5 5 5 5
9 8 1 5 2 4 1 .7 .7 .7 .7
2 0 6 8 9 8 .7 .7 7 .7 .7 .7 .7 .7
A St
7 1 5 3 0 4 0 9 9 8 8
0 8 4 2 9 2 4 2 7 1 1 1 .8 0 0 9
.7
8 .7 .7 .7 0 .7 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3 4 .8 .8 1 .8 .7 .7 .7 0 0 0 2 2 2
de
3 3 3 2 2 .8 .8 .8 .8 0 2 0 2 2
4 .8 .8 .8 .8 .8 .8 0 0 .8 .8 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 2 2 2 2 2
.8 0 0 2
dwi
.8 0 0 2 2 0 0 0 2 0 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
0 0 0 0 2 0 2 2 2 2 2
2
0 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 20
US Arm y Corps
sINC
on -W or
1 9 8 7 5 4
3 2 20
50%
9 8 6 4 3 5 4 4 4 4
9 8 2 0 6 5 3 1 5 5 5 5 5 4
.8 .8 .8 .8 .8
9 6 4 3 2 1 7 7 7 6 4 7 7 6
8 6 6 6 6
.8 .8 .8 .8 .8 .8 .8 0 0
ant
3 2 0 8 8 8 7 7 .8 .8 .8 .8 0 0 0 0 2 0
9 7 6 9 9 9 8 7 8
.8
8
.8 .8 .8 7
.8 .8 .8 .8 0 0 0 0 0 2 2 2 2
40%
9 8 .8 .8 .8 0 2 2
neers
.8 .8 .8 0 0 0 2
12%
9 9 .8 .8 0 0 0 2 2 2 2
.8 .8 .8 0 0 0 0 2 0 2 2 2
1.
.8 .8 0 2 0 0 2 2
i
0 0 0 0 2 0 2 2 2
uct
84
0 0 0 0 2 0 2 2 2 2 2 2
2 2 2 2 2
R
2 2
anti
r
1.
39.
t
1.
aland Const
22%
3 2
ey Consul
9 7 7 6 5 4 3 3 3
1 1 0 3 7 3 3
8 8 8 6 5 4 2 4 4
9 3 .9
3 3 3 3
.9 .9 .9
0 9 9 8 8 4 9 4 8 4 7 4 4 4 4
.9
4 3
.9 .9 .9 .9 .9 .9 0 0
2 1 0 0 0 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
.9 .9 .9 .9 .9 .9 .9 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 2
5 4 3 5 5 5 5
.9 .9 .9 .9 .9 .9 .9 0 0 0 0 2 0 2 2
of Engi
5
1.
5 5 5 .9
5 .9 .9 .9 .9 .9 .9 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 2 2
0 2 2 2 2 2
.9 .9 0 2 2
Transatl
2
01%
.9 .9 0 0 0 0 2 2
0 0 .9 0 0 0 2
0 0
2
0 2
0
2
0 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
2 0 2 2 2 2
2 2
Center
onm ent
1.
1 1 2 2 2 3 3
0 1 1 1 0 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
1 1 1 0 2 2 2 2 2 2 .0
4 5 6
7
9 9 0 1 1 2 2 2 2
.0
2 .0 .0 .0 .0 .0 .0 .0 .0
1 1 1 1 1 2 3 4 1 5 1 1 1 2 2 2 2
.0 .0 .0 .0 .0 .0 1 1 211 1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 .0 1
.0 .0 .0 .0 .0 .0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2
1 1
.0 .0 .0 .0 .0 .0 .0 .0 .0 1 .0 1 1 1 21 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
.0 .0 .0 .0 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 2
1 2 1 1 2 2 2 2 2
r
1 2
1 1 1 1 1 21 2 2 2
ng,Envi
1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
2 2 2
7 9 0 1 2
5 8 0 0
anl
1 2 3 4 6 9 9 0 4
8 0 2 3 5 8
6 7 7 8 8
9 0 9 9 9 9 9 9 .0 9
.0 .1 .1 .1 0
0 1 2 3 5 0 3 5 6 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 9
.0 .0 .0 .0 .0 1 .0 1 1 .1
9 0 6 6 6 8 7 1 7 7 7 7
.0 .0 .0 .0 .0 .0 .0 .0 .0 .0 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 2
6 6 .0
i
6 7 .0 1 1 2 2 1
5 6 .0 .0 .0 .0 .0 1 1 1 1 1 2 2
neer
.0 .0 .0 .0 .0 .0 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
21.184
.0 .0 1 1 1 2
1 1 1 1 1 2
1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
21.172
1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
2 21.150
St
2 2 2
21.135
Engi
21.116 2 8 0 3 5 7
6 8 0
8
2 4
2 3 4 6 8 0 6 4 6 6 7 7 7 7 8 8
3 2 5 7 9 7 5 5 5 5 6 .1 6 6 .1 .1 .1 .1 .1 .1 .1 .1
7 9 0 2 4 1
9 2 6 2
9 3 3 3
.1
3
.1
4
4
4
.1
4 5
2
.1 .1 .1 .1 .1 1 .1 .1 1
.1 1 1 1 1 1 0.03%1
2
1 1
.1
0
.1
0
.1
1
.1
1
.1
1
1
.1 1
.1
0.05% .1
2
1
.1
2
1
.1
1
.1
1
.1
2
1 0.04%
2
1
1
.1
2
1 1
.1
2
1 2
1
2
1 0.03% 2
1
2
1 2
2
1
2
1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
2 2
2
1 0.02% 2
1 2
1 2
1 2
1 2 2
1 2 2 2 2
D
RATES
2
NAGE PLAN
700
TED ARAB EMI

102 103
FUEL HYDRANT SYSTEM

101
REFUELER RAMP AND
GN
TE DESI
DRAI
SHEET A
TAXIWAY A
R BASE, UNI
AND
SI
AL DHAFRA AI
NG
GRADI
NOTES:
1. SPOT ELEVATIONS AND CONTOURS SHOWN
1 ARE TOP OF FINISHED SURFACE.
SHEET
REFERENCE
NUMBER:
C-28
10 0 10 20 30
20 40 UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED, LINEAR DIMENSIONS
20
SHOWN ARE IN METERS.
1:500
A B C D E F G H
MATCHLINE - FOR CONTINUATION SEE SHEET C-31

1 6 8 0
3 6 7 9 4 2 4 5 2 0
6 8 0 2 1 8 .4
0 6 3 1 8 5 2 9 6 .5 .5 .4 .4 .4
.7 .6 .6 .6 .5 .5 0 0 0
.80 0
.7
0
.7 0 0 0 0 0 0 2
0
2
0
2
0 2 2 2
5 2
3 20 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
6 2
0
.8
8 1 4 8
7 0 3 6 9 2 5 7 1
8 1 4 3 7 2 9 .4 4
1 4 8 6 0 5 .5 .4 .4 .4
6 1
.6 .6 .6 .6 .5 .5 0
.80 .7 .7 .7 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 2
0
2
0
N 2
0
.8
3
5
20 2
0 2
0
2
0 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
7 6 0 5
9 3 3 2 8 6 3
8 6 1 5 8 1 .4
9 4
3 1 9
2 6 4 1 .5
6 .5 .5 .4 .4
1 6 .7 .6 .6 .6 .6 .5 0 0 0 0
5 80 .7 .7 0 0 0 0 2
0 0 2 2
0 2 2 2
3 . 0 0 0 2 2
.8 20 2 2 2 2 2 2
0
APR
2
9 4 0 5 1 3
1 2 8 3 9 7 5 2 0 5
2 0 6 7 7 4 2 .5 .5 .4
7 4 2 9 .5 .5 .5
.80 .7 .7 .7 .6 .6 .6 .6 0 2
0 0 0 2
0 476 20
20.
0 0 0 0 2
5 20 2
0 2
0 2 2
0 2 2 2
2 2
3
06/10/05
06/06/05
05/23/05
04/08/05
.8
0
2
DATE
2 9 6 2 6 3 0
1 8 5 8 6 3 0 8 6 1 9 7
7 4 2 7 5 .5 .5 .4 .4
2 .7
2 0 .6 .6 .6 .6 .5
80 .7 .7 .7 0 0 0 0
539 0 0 0
5 . 0 2
0 0 0 2
0
2
0 2 2 2 2 20. 2 2 2
3 20 2 2 2
.8
0
2
7 1 9 7 REFUELER
4 RAMP 3
1 9 7
5 80
3 7
2
.7
5
1
.7
2
9
.7
0
.6
8
4
.6
6
3
.6
4
.6
1
.5
9 7
.5 553 0
.5 .5
0
.4
8
N
0 0 0 0
. .7 0 0 0 20. 2
BASI
BASI
0 0 0 0 2 2 2 2
3
5 20 2
0 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
.8
0
2
3 8 7 6 5 5 5
5 2 2 1 0 9 9 8 6 4 2 0
4 4 1 9 7 4 2 0 .5 .5 .5
80
7 .7 3 .7 .6 .6 .6 .5 .5
ON
ON
. .7 .7 .6 .6 0 0 0 0 0
ON"
0 0 0 0 0 0 2 2 2
3
5 20 2
0 2
2
0 2 2 2
0 2 2 2 2 2
RETENTI
RETENTI
.8
0
2
0.5%
CONSTRUCTI
8 9 0 0 1 2
5 6 7 7 8 5 9 9 9 8 6 4 2
5 7 3 1 .5 .5 .5
4 7 5 3 1 9 .6 .6 .6 .5 .5
80 .7 .7 .7 .7 .6 .6 0 0 0 0 0 0
ON
. 0 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 2 2 2 2 2
0
3
5 20 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
PTI
.8
0
2
DESCRI
12 M OVED
12 M OVED
0 2 4 7 0
0%
8 0 2 3 5 7 9 3 1 9 5 5 4
6 8 6 4 7 .5
7 5 4 2 0 .6 .6 .5 .5 .5
5
.7 .7 .7 .7 .7 .6 .6 .6 0 0 0 0
.80 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2
0 2 2 2
0 2 2
5 2 2 2
3 20 2 2 2 2 2
.8
01%
0
FOR
2
13%
4 0 3
7 9 3 5 9 1 2 7 9 7
7
0.
7 0 3 0 9 7 5 4 0 .5 5
7 6 2 .6 .6 .6 .5
380
5 .7 .7
4 .7 .7 .6 .6 .6 0 0 0 0 .5
80 .7 0 2
0.
. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 2 2 2 0
5 0 2 2 2 2 2 2
20 2
NAL "CLEARED
3 2 2
CHANGE ORDER
CHANGE ORDER
.8
225.
0
2
3 6 1 5 4
1 0 4 8 5 3 2 0 0 7
8 3 7 3 5 0 8 6
.6 .6 .6 .6 9 .5
6 7 6 4 .7 1 .7 .6 .6 0 0 0 .5 0
80 .7 .7 .7 0 .7 0 0 0 2 2 2
0 2 0 2
LT
5 . 0 0 0 2 0 2 2 2 2
3 20 2 2 2 2
EXISTING EAST FLIGHTLINE APRON
AS BUI
.8
0
2
8 8 4 9 5 0 6 2
9 5 1 6 1 0 3 7 6 4 3 2 0 9
5 3 2 9 .6 .6 .6 .5
6 7 6
.7 .7 .7 .6 .6 .6 .6
.80 .7 .7 .7 0 0 2
0 0 0 0 0 0 0
FI
0 0 0 0 0 2 2 2 2 2
3
5 20 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
SEE SH EET C- 28
.8
T
0
SYMBOL
2
8 5 1 8 5 2 9
1 8 4 1 8 5 1 8 7 6 4 3 2 0
4 2 .6
A
5 1 0 .6
2
6 .6 .6
0
.6 .6
1
7 8 .7 .6
.7 .7 .7 .7 .7 .7 0
80 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2
4 .8
3
5 20
.
2
0 2
0
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
0
2
601
8 6 4 2 0 8 7
0 6 4 2 0 9 7 6 5 3 2
2 8 4 3 2 8 .6 .6 .6
8 8 7 5
.7 .7 .7
1 .6 .6 .6 .6
.80 .7 .7 .7 0 0 0 .7 0 0 2
0 0 2
0
2
0
2
0
0 2 2
3
5 20 2
0 2
0
2
0 2 2 2 2 2
.8
0
2
0 8 7 6 5 4 4
6
UE0000 -CG29PN
2 1 0 3 9 0 9 7 6 5 4
3 3 5 4 1 8 .6
8 8 7 6
.7 .7 .7 .7 .6 .6 .6 .6 .6
80 .7 .7 .7 0 .7 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2
0 0
. 0 0 0 2 0 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
20 2
04-08-05
5 2 2 2
.83
BY:
20
6 7 8 8 9 0
6 3 7 8 0 9 7 7
AF
4 5 5 5 4 2 1 .7 .6
.6
ON
9 8 7 6 .7 .7 .7 .7 .7 0 68
9
0 .6
80 .7 .7 0 0 . 0
. .7 0 0 0 0 2 2 20 2 2
TTED
5 0 0 0 2 2 2 2
3 20 2 2
LE NO.:
2
NUATI
2
.8
0
2
SUBMI
BY: DATE:
8 1 7
7 9 1 2 5 6 8 0 1 4 8
6 2 9 .6
5 .7 6 5 4 3 2
.7 .7 .6
9 8 0 .7 .7 .7 .7 .7 .7 0 70
3 0
.80 .7 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 . 0 2
5 0 2 2 20 2
20 2 2 2
FI
3 2 2 2
CON TI
.8
0
2
5 8 1 3 7 9 3
7 0 6 9 2 3 3 2 1 0 0
3 6 5 4 .7 .7
0 8 8 7 5 .7 .7 .7 .7 .7 .7
.81 .7 .7 .7 .7 .7 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 2 2 2 2 2 2
3
5 20 2 2 2
0 2 2
0 2 2
JOSE
BY:
GNED
BY:
.8
RAJ
BAR
0
2
FOR
5 2 6 0 4 9
6 1 6 0 3 8 3 1
DESI
0 3 4 3 2
81
8 7 7 .7 6 5 4
.7 .7 .7 .7
DW N
8 8 .7 .7 .7
.7 .7
CHK
.
.7 .7 .7 0 0 0 0 0 0
5 20 0 0 2
0
2
0 2
2
0
2
0
2
0 2 2 2 2 2
3 2 2
.8 20.764
0
2
20.789
NE -
AIRFIELD LIGHTS 20.806 20.8351 9 5 0 6 1 7 6
2
5
8 5
3
4
8
4
4
3
9 3
5
oup Com pany

8 8 7 7 6 .7 .7 .7 .7
1 8
.7 .7 .7 .7 .7 .7
5 .8 .7 .7 .7 0 0 0 2
0 0 0 0 0
0
6 0
.8
3
2
0 2
0
2
0 2
0 2
0.07%2
0
2
0 2 2 2 0.07%
2 2 2
(TYP) 0
.8 .8
2
2
0 -0.38%
2 0
M ATCHLI
2
5 9 5
1 5 2 8
81 81
2
80 80 1 7 3 0
3 0
83 82
8
82 82 81 . . .
20
. 80 79 79 79
ey Gr
. . . .
85 . . . .
20 20 20 20
.
c Program s
2 5
5 9 .
20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20
4
.8
6 20
.8 0 .8
0 0
anl
2 2 2
UTILITY SIGN
A St
5 4
de
9 86 1 9 6 3 1 8 5
VALVE 3 2 86
8 86 . 86 85 85 85 85 84 84
MARKER 1 87 86 .
dwi
0 4 9 87 . 20 . . . . . . .
8 9 0 88 . . 20
. 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20
.8 .9 . 20 20 20
US Arm y Corps
.8 20
l
0 0
sINC
0
on -W or
2
71%
2 2
ant
neers
0.
4 2 2 1 0 8 6 4 2 0
8 5
91
5 4 91 91 91 91 91 90 90 90 90 90
7 8 8
91 91 . . . .
i
. . . . .
92 .
uct
1 3 . . 20 20 20 20 20
R
.9
2
.9 . .
20 20 20 20 20 20 20
.9 20
anti
0 0 0 20
r
84%
2 2
t
aland Const
2
841
ey Consul
of Engi
0.
6 6
39.
0 1 9 8 7
Transatl
3 8 8 9
96 96
1
96
0
95 95 95 95 95
5 4 7 7
95 95 95 . 96 . . . . .
5 6 7
96 95 . . .
20 20
. .
20
.
20 20 20 20 20
.9 .9 .9 . .
20 20 20 20
FUEL BLADDER 20
Center
FUEL BLADDER 0 0 2
0 20
2 2
onm ent
1 1 1 0 1
4 1 9 3 5
00
7 9 1 01 01 01 01
0 01
9 0 0 6 9 1
00 00 00 01
.
1. . . 01 .
00 99 00 . 21
r
.0 . 21
.9 .0 . 21 21
ng,Envi
. .
. . .
21 21 21 21
.
212 21
2
0
2
1 2
1
21 20 21 21
anl
8 1 5 6 7 7 7 8
2 5 4 5 5 5 5 5 5
i
7 2 7 7 5 8 5 5
.0
neer
2 3 4 4 .0 .0 5 .0 .0 .0
3 3 3 3
.0 .0 .0 .0 .0
.0 .0 .0 .0 .0 .0 1 2
1 2
1
2
1
1 1 1 2
1
2
1
2
1
1 1 1 2
St
1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2
2 2 2
Engi
2 2
21.060 21.072 21.099
0 3 4 5 6
2 0
0 6 0.05 2 07
6 1 5 0.07%
08
9 4 09
9
.1
0
.1
0
.1
0 0.02
.1 .1
0
.1
0
06 3 06 06
9 07 . 08 08 1. 09 . 1 1 1 1 1
. 06 .
21
. 21 . . 2 . 21 2 1 2 2 2
21 . 21 21
. 21 21 21 2 2
21
D
RATES
2
NAGE PLAN
24.662 36.420 72.048
TED ARAB EMI

FUEL HYDRANT SYSTEM
100
REFUELER RAMP AND

99
GN
600
TE DESI
DRAI
SHEET B
TAXIWAY "A"
R BASE, UNI
AND
SI
AL DHAFRA AI
NG
GRADI
NOTES:
1. SPOT ELEVATIONS AND CONTOURS SHOWN
ARE TOP OF FINISHED SURFACE.
SHEET
REFERENCE
NUMBER:
C-29
10 0 10 20 30 40 UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED, LINEAR DIMENSIONS
1:500
70.128
72.048
A B C D E F G H

1 6 1 6 1 6 1 5 0 5 0 3
9 8 4 4 1 9 6 4 1 4 9
9 6 5 9 3 6 0 5 1 6 .0
1 9
.9
6
.9 .9 .8 .8 .8 .8 .79 76 73 71
6 0 4 1 6 0 4 7 3 2 0 7 2
19
7 4
.1 .0 .9 . . .
1 8 6 3 0
8 8 5 3 0 .3 5 .3
0
.2 .2
4
.2 . .1 .1 8 .0 8 8 7 7 1
7 7 7 1
7
1
7 7 17 17 17 17
1 .5 .5 .5 .4 .4 .4 .4 .3 .3 8 18 8 8 093
18. 8 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
.6 8 8 8 .5 8 8 8 8 1
8
8 1
8 8 1
8 8 1 1 1 1 1
8 1 1 8 1 1 1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1
6
7 0 4 8 2 5 9 3 6 0 4 7 0 3
8 0 0 7 5
5 4 2 5 1 4 8 6 3 8 5 2 82 79 77 74
8
.6
8
3
.6
5
6
8
.6
2
9
8
.6
0
2
8
.5
7
4
1
8
.5
4
7
1
8
.5
2
0
1
8
.4
9
3
1
8
.4
6
6
1
8
.4
3
9
1
8
.4
1
2
1
8
.3
8
1
8
.3
5
7
1
8
.3
3
1
1
8
.3
0
1
8
.2
7
6
18
.24
9
1
8
.2
2
1
8
.1
9
1
8
.1
6
1
8
.1
4
1
8
.1
1
1
8
.0
1
8
.0
1
8
.0
1
8
.0
1
7
.9
1
7
.9
1
7
.9
1
7
.9
1
7
.8
1
7
.8
17
.
17
.
17
.
17
.
N
18
1 8 1 1 1
1
0
704
0 8 3 5 8
17
3 8 1 2 5 7 5 2 5 6 4 1 8 85 0 2 4
2 8 3 5 7 8 0 7 5 7 8 6 3 0 7 .0
2 9
.9 .9 .9 .8 . 83 80 77
9 1 1 5 6 2 0 2 4 1 8 5 3 1 .2 4 1
.1 .1 .1 .1 .0 .0 .9 7 17 .
17
. .
5
4
2
6 8 6 4 .6 8 5 .5
0 7 .4 .4 .3 .3 .3 30 .2 .2 8 8 8 8 7 1
7 1 7 1
7 17 17
9 .6 .6 .5 .5 .4 8 8 8 . 8 8 8 8 8 1 1 8 1 1 1 1
.7 .7 .6 8 8
8 .5 8 1
8 8 8 1
8 1 1 1 8 18 1 1 1 1 1 1
8 8 8 1 1 8 1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1 1
APR
3 6 8 9 0 2
9 0 4 2 4 4
4 5 6 6 7 8 4 2 2 6 5 0 7
.9 .9 2 86 83 80
1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 2 6 3 0 7
.1 .1
9 .0 3 .0 .9 89 . . .
6 9 9 0 1 8 35
9 .1 .0 7 7 . 17
16
7 7 7 8 6 3 0 7 4
.3 .2 .2 .2 .0 8 8 7 17 17
5 9 6 3 0 7
.6
4 1
.5
9
.5 .5 .5 .4 .4 .4 .3 . .2 8 8 8 8 8 1 8 1 1 1 1 17
2 .7 .7 .7 .7 .6 .6 8 8 8 8 8 8 18 8 8 1
8 1 1
8 1 1 1 1 1
.8 8 8 1 1
16
8 8 8 8 8 8 8 1 1 1 1 1 1
8 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
1
06/06/05
05/23/05
04/08/05
3/11/05
3 5 5 5 5
3
DATE
4 3 6 4 4 4 1 8 5 6 5 6 5
1 1 0 9 8 7 6 5 5 8
4 5 2 9 .1 3 0 7
.0
4
.0 .9 .9 92 89 86 83
7 4 3 3 2 2 9 6 9 6 3 6 7 4 1 .2 .2 .1 8 .1 .1 .0 . . . .
9 6 6 5 7 4 1 8 5 .6
2
.5 .5
2
.4
9
.4 .4 40 .3 .3 .3 .2 8 8 8 1 8 8 8 8 8 7 7 17 17 17 17
.8
6 3 0 .7 .7 .7 .6 .6 8 8 .5 8 8 . 8 8 8 8 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
8 8
.8
8
.8 .8 1
8 8 8 8 8 1
8
1 1 1
8 1
8 1 1 18 1 1 1 1
1 8 1 1 1 1
1 1 1
8 6 5 4 3 1 1 0 8 7 5
2 7 7 7 2 9
9 0 6 5 3 1 7 9
6 4 3 0
0 6 3 0 .1 4
.1
1 8 5 2 .9 96 92 .89 86
7 3 2 8 8 9 2 6 .2 .2 .1 .0 .0 . . .
5 0
0
6
8
.9
3
7
.9
0
4
.8
7
3
.8
4
0
.8
0
.7
7
.7
4
5
.7
1
.6
8
.6
5
.6
1
8
.5
8
.5
5
.5
2
8
.4
9
18
.45
8
.4 8
.3
8
.3
1
8
.3
8
.3
1
8
1
8
.2
1
8 1
8
1
8 1
8
1
8
1
8
.0
1
8 1
7 17 17 17 17
N
.0 .9 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 1 1 8 1 1 1 1
BASI
BASI
9 8 8 8 1 1 8 1 1 1 1 1 1
8 1 1 1 1
1 1 1 18 6
8 6 .89
18
0
6 4 0 8 6 4 2 9 5 2 4 1 9 17
8 3 0 3 1 8 5 8 4 1
3 9 4
7
1 8
2 5 1 8 5 2 .0 .0 .0 .99 96 .92
9 3 7 4 1 0 5 1 7 1 7 4 1 7 .4 .4
7 .3 .3 .2 .2 .2 .1 .1 .1 8 8 8 17
.
17
3 7 7 4
0 0 7 4 .8
7
.7
4
.7
7
.6
4
.6 .5 .5 .51 .4 8 .3 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 1 1 1 17
.0
0 .9 .9 .7 .6 8 1 1
ON
ON
.8 .8 8 8 1 8 1 1 1
.0 .9 8 8 8 8 8 8 18 1 1 1 1
ON"
9 8 8 8 8 8 1 8 1 1 8 1 1 1 1 1 1
1 9 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
1
RETENTI
RETENTI
4
CONSTRUCTI
9 0 6 3 0 7 9 1 8 4 1
6 7 6 3 2 6
19 5 1 2 8 0 9 2 2 4 5 2 9 6 2 9 6 .1 .0 6
.02 99 96 92
6 1 7 3 9 7 3 9 3 6
.4
9 .3 .3 .2 .2 .1 .1 8 .0 . . .
1 7 2 8 4 9 0 7 3 0 6 3 0 6 .6 .5
4
.5 .4 .4 .3 .2 8 8 8 1 8 18 17 17 17
1 7 4 0 7 3
.9 .8 .8 .8 .7 .7 .7 .6 .56 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 1 1
8 1 1
8 1 1
.1 .0 .0 .9 .9 8 8 8 8 1 1 1 1 1
.0 8 8 8 8 18 1 1 1
ON
9 8 8 8 8 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
9 9 9 1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1 1
PTI
3 4 0 6 7 2 7
DESCRI
7 2
12 M OVED
12 M OVED
5 6 9 6 9 02 99
8 3 7 2 1 4
6
1
1
7 0 4 0 3 0
2 6 3 9 .1
3
.0 06 . . 95
5 4 3 5 5 6 8 4 0 7
.3 .2 .2 .1 .1 .
18 17
.
7 2 7 1 6 0 0 7
0 4 9
9
6 2
9 9 .7
2 8
.6 61 .5 .5 .5 .4 .4 .4 .3 .3 8 8 8 8 18 17
1 8 4 1 7 4 .0 3
.8 .7 .7 .6 . 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 1 8 1 1 1
.1 .1 .1 .0 .0 9 .9 .9 .8 .8 8 8 8 8
18 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
.2 9 9 9 9 9 1 8 8 8 8 8 1
8 1 1 1 1
9 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
1 1
FOR
4 8 3 7 2 6 1 0 4 7
2 6 0 3 7 1
4 9 4 0 7 3 0 6 3 6 06 02 98
0 7 5 8 2 5 9 2 6 9 3 6 2 8 7
.3 .3 .2 .2 .2 .1 .1 09 18
. . .
4 1 7 0 .6
9 .4 .3 . 18 17
18
4 7 7 9 2 8 5 1 4 66 .5 .5 .4 450 8 8
18
17
.5
632
3 7 0 3 6 .7 .7 18. 8 8 8 8 8
5 8 4 0 .0 .0 .9 .9 .9 .8 .8 .8 .7 . 8 8 8 8 8 8 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
.2 .2
1
.1 .1 .1 9 9 8 8 8 8 8 8 1
8 8 1
8 18 1 1
8 1 1 1 1 1
9 9 9 9 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
9 1
NAL "CLEARED
1 1 1
CHANGE ORDER
CHANGE ORDER
1
147.
9 2 9 3 6
8 3 5 9 2 5 1 6 0 6 9 2 6 8
6 0 2 4 7 3 .2 12 09 05 01
SEE SH EET C- 31
8 2 7 9 1 4 0 3 9 5 8 .3 .1
6 1 3 5 0 5 5 8 4
.6
7
.5 .4 .4 .4 .3 .2 .2 8 . . . .
2 5 7 9 1 3 3 9
8 6 2 8
.9
4 1 7 3
.7
9
.7 .72 .6 .6 .5 8 .3 8 8 8 8 1 8 18 18 18 18
6 2 8 4 7 .0 .0 .9 .9 .8 .8 8 8 8 8 8 1 1 1 1
.3 .3 .2 .2 .2
1 .1 .1 .0 9 9 8 8 8 8 8 8 1
8 18 1
8 1
8 1 1
8 1 1 1 1 1 1
9 9 9 1 1 1
LT
9 9 9 9 9 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1 1 1
AS BUI
4 7 9 1 8 8
4 7 9 5 6 5
7
8
0 1 0
3 6
5
2
7 9
0
5
2
.3
1 7
.2
3
.2
0
16
3
12
5
.08 .04 3m @5%
2 9 1 2 3 4 3 9 4 .4 .3 .3 .2 . . 18
6 7 8 9 0 0
1 2 .1 8
5
4
6 0 6
.9
2 9 5 1
77 .7 .6 .6 .5 .5 .5 8 .4 8 8 8 8 1
8
18 18 18
5 9 1 7 4 6 .0 .0 .9 .8 .8 .8 . 8 8 618 8 8 8 1 8 8 1 1 1
3 .3
5
.3 .2 .2 .2 .1 9 .0 9 8 8 8 8 18 8 1 1 18. 1 1 1 1 1 1
.4 .3 1 9 8 1 1
9 9 1 40mm DROP
FI
9 9 9 9 9 1 9 1 1 1 1 1 1
9 1 1 1 1 1 1
1
T
2%
SYMBOL
6 6 6 7 8
9 3
1 2
5
3 4 7
5 3
6
7 15
8 9 .07
9 10%
7 7 7 8 6 6 6 4 0 9 1
.2 .2 19 . 11
6 7 6 7 7 7 7 7 6 4 0 6 6 .7 4 0 6 2 8
.5 .5 6 .4 .3 .3 .3 8 . 18 . 18
7 7 7 7 7 6 2 8 4 6 2 8 .9 .9 82 .7 .7 .6 .6 .5 8 .4 8 8 8 8 8 1 18 18
.8
A
0 0
2
8 .0 .0 8 8 1
0
2 4 .2 .2 .1 .9 8
1
0 6 .1 . 8 8 1 8 1 1 1 1
.5 .4 .4 .3 .3 .3 9 9 9 9 .1 9 9 8 1
8
1
8 8 18
1 1
8
1
8 1 1 1 1 1
1
4 1
9
1
9 1
9 1
9
1
9 1
9 1 1 1 1 1
9 1 1 1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 9
5 1 1 1 9 5 1 7 1 1 1
3 1 0
8 6 5 4
7
3 3 9 5 1 7 3
.3 .3 .3 .2 23 19 15 .10
3 0 9 7 6 5 4 0 6 9 3 9 1 .6 .5 .5 .4 .4 . . .
9 7 6 5 7 3
2
9
1 5 0 6 2 8 4
.0 .9
2 87 .8 .7 .7 .7 .6 8 8 .5 8 8 8 8
1
8 8 18 18 18 18
0 9 5 1 .3 .2 .2 .1 .1 .0 .0 .9 . 8 8 8 8 8 8 1 8 1 1 1 1 1
8 3 .4 .4 .4 .3 .2 9 9 9 9 9 1
8 8 18 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
.5 .5 9 9 9 1
9 9 9 1 1 1
9 1 1
9 1 1 1
9 9 1 1 1 1 1
ON
1 1
19 0 9 6 0
4 8 4 3
3 2 1 5 14
NUATI
4 7 4 8 0
4 9 6 7 9 4
6 0 1 0 7 3
6 9 5 1 7
.4
3
.3
4
.3 26 .22 .18 .
5 .9 2 .3 . 18
UE0000 -CG30PN
7 1 8 6 1 1 6 .5 .5 .4
2 0 5 2 0 9 5 3 7 2 8 4 0 .0
1
93
8 .8 .8 .7 .7 .6 .6 .5 8 8 8 8 18 18 18
1 7 2 8 4 5 1
.2 .1 .0 8 . .8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 1 1 1
5
.6
6
.5 .4 .4 .3 .3 .3 .2 .1 9 .1 9 9 1
18 8 1 1 8 8 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
.6 9 .5 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 1
9 9 1 9 1 1 1 1 1
9 9 1 1 1 1 1 1
04-08-05
1 1 1 1 1 1
BY:
4
17
8 3 8 6 8 2 9 4 0
2 1
CO N TI
6 5 2
6 2 8 5 1 2
8 0 7 5
3
0
9 6 2 8
0 3 9 5 1 6 .4 .3 .3
4
29 25
7
.21 .17
1 0 6 3 2 9 5 0 1 .0
4 4 9 .8 .7 .7 .6 .6 .5 .5 .5 .4 8 . . 18 18
7 5 18
AF
3 9 8 7 98 .9 .8 8 8
5 8
3
8 9 5 0 6 1 .3
3
.2
4
.2 .1 .1 .0 9 . .8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 1 1 1 18
.6 .3 .2 8 1
50%
2 .5 .5 .4 8 1 1 1
.7 9 .6 .5 .4 9 9 9 9 9 9 1
9 9 1 18 1 1
8 1 1 1 1 1 1
TTED
1 9 9 9 9 9 9 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
9 1 1 1 1 1
LE NO.:
1 1
0.
7 3 0 7 3 1
1 7 4 0 0 6
CEMENT-STABILIZED
SUBMI
6 3 2 20
1 2 7 4 6 7 33 29 24
BY: DATE:
1 2 7 7 1 8 3 9 5 0
2 2 .4
16
5 0 8 6 9 0 5 6 .6 .5 .5 .4 .3 . . . .
8 3 8 3 9 4 9 0 6 5 7 .1 .0 03
4
.9 .8 .7 .7 .6 .5 18 18 18 18
7 3 8 2 1 7 2 8 3 9 4
.3
1 .1 . .9 .9 .8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8
5 0 6 .4 .3 .2 .2 9 9 8 8 8 8 8 8 1 1 1 1 1 1
9 .5 .5 .4 .3 19 8 1
16
.7 .7 .7 .6 .6 9 9 9 9 9 1 1 1 8 1 1 1 1 1 1
AGGREGATE SLPOE
FOR
9 9 9 9 9 9 1 1 9 1 1
9 9 1 1 1
FI
9 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
1 1
18
PROTECTION (10:1)
86%
0 1 6 2 1
8 9 5 5 1 2 8
5 3 7 1 5 9 3 6 4 7 3 9 4 0 5
.4
7
32 27 23
0 4 9 2 7 1 4 9 5 0 5 1 2
.6 .6 .5 .5 .4 36 . . .
0 8 1 6 4 7 2 6 1 1 7 2 8 3 9
.0 .9 .9 .9 .8 .7 .7 .5 8 .
18 18 18
7 2
4
7 3 8 3
9 9 4 0 5 .4 .3
6 .3 .2 .2 .1 .1 .08 9 8 .8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 1
8
1
8 1 18
.5 8 1
0.
.8 .8 .7 .7 .6 .6 9 .5 .5 .4 9 9 9 9 9 9 1
9
19 1 1
8 1 1 1
8 1 1 1 1 1 1
1
NE -
9 9 9 9 9 9 1 9 9 9 1 1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
JOSE
BY:
GNED
BY:
63%
RAJ
BAR
1 0 4 8 3 7 1 5 2
4 2 6 8 3 7 2 5 3 9 4 40 35
0 26
1 7 0 5 9 9 7 0 5 0 5 1 6
.7
7 3 8
.5 .4 .4 . . 31 .
0.
0 9 2 5 8 7 4 7 3 3 8 1
.0
4 0 .9 .8 .7 .6 .6 .5 18
. 18
DESI
2 5 8
0 3 6 5 1 6 1 .4
2
.3
3 8
.2 .1 14 .0 .0 .9 .8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 18 18
M ATCHLI
4
703
0 .3 8 1 1
DW N
4 9 5 .5 .4 .2 . 9 8 8 8 1 1
.6 .5
CHK
.8 .8 .6 9 9 1 1 1 1 1
.9 .8 9 9 .7 9
.7 9 9 9 9 1
9 9 1
9
1
9 9 1
9
1
9 19 1 1 1 1 1 1
9 9 9 1 1 1 1 1
98%
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
2
29
09%
0 3 6 9 2 6 9 2 5 8 1 .
2 34
0.
4 7
9 0 2 6 7 4
9 0 5 0 5
7 1 6 1 6 2
.5
2 8
.43 38 . 18
8 0 1 3 6 7 4 4 4 9 0
.9 .8 .7 .7 .6 .6 .5 .4 . 18
5 7 8 9 1 2 5 6 2 8 3 8 3 8 3 9
.2 19 .1 .0 .0 .0 .9 .8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 18 18
1 6 2 7 2 7 .6 .5 .5 .4 .4 .3 .3 .2 . 9 8 8 8 1 1 1
oup Com pany

1 6 9 9 1 1 1 1 1
19
1.
.0 .9 .9 .8 .8 .7 .7 .6 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 1
9
1
9 1 1 1 1 1 1
0 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
19.860 18.332
19.262 9 1 3 5 7 0
9 18.673 3
1 5 7 9 2
1
7
3
2
3
8 9 9 0 1 2 2 19.561 94
3 4 5 4
5 9
6 6 9
7 4
7
9
8 4
8
.9
9
.9
0
.8
5
.8
0
.7
5 .7
.6
6
.6
1
.5
6
.5
1
.4
6
.4 .3 .3
7 8 8 8 0 4 0.84%
9 4 9 4 4 9 .2
4 .1 .0 .0 8 8 8 8
0.84%
8 8 8 8
.1
3 .0
8
0.84%.0
3
.9
8 .9
3
9
.8 .8
3
.7
9
.7 .6 .6 .5 .5 9
.4 .4 0.84%19.3
.3 9 9
.2 9 1
9 9 1
9 1
8
0.84%18.94
9
1
8
1
8 1 1
8 1
1
8 1
8 1 1 1 1 1 1
c Program s
9 9 9 9 9 9 1 1
ey Gr
0 0 9 1 9 9 9 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 2 9 1 1 1 1
1
7 3 4
anl
0 0 1 7 0 3 6 9 2
1 4 2 7 2 7 8
9 3 4 0 1 3 8 5 .8 6 .7 6
.6 .5 .4
3 .3
5 0 2 4 6 7 1 8 6 7 9 4 4 0 8 .7 8 .6 .5 .4
A St
2 6 8 7 2 8 3 3 8 4 .9 .8 8 8
4 7 8 9 1 6 1 6 .6
2 7 2 7
.4 .3 .2 .2 .1 .0 .0 99
4 .9 1 8 1 8 8 8 8 8 1
1 .8 1 .5 .3 .1 8 1 1 1 1
de
0 5 0 5 .7 .6 .5 .4 9 . 8 1 1 1
.1 .9 .9 .8 .7 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 1 9 18 8 1 1
.0 .0 9 9 9 9 9 1 1 1
dwi
0 9 9 1 9 9 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
0 0 9 1 1
US Arm y Corps
2 2 2 1 1 1
l
NC
on -W or
6 9 8 2 4
I
7 4 3 7 1 6 0 5 2 3 3 9 4
8 7 8
1 8 0 9 5 1 .5 .4 .4
s
5 0 4 6 0 2 5 8 4 0 .7 2 .6 .6 .5
18
8
1
5 8 .0 4 .9 .8 .8
neers
7 2 2
17
8 4 9 4 9 5 5 1 6 1 7 .9 .9 .7 8 8 8
ant
7 0 6 2 1 .1 .0 8 8 8 8
2
.0
2 8 3 8 3 9 .7 9 5 0
.5 .5 .4 .4 .3 .3 .2 .2 9 8 8 8 8 8 1 8 1 1 1 1 1 1
2
0 .0 .9 .9 .8 .8 .7 9 .6 .6 .6 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 1
9 134
19. 1 9 1 1 1 1 1 1
.1 1
R
9 9 1 1 1 1 1
i
0 9 1 9 9 1 1 1
2 9 9 9 19
uct
0 2 1 1 1
anti
1 1 1 1 1
2 RETENTION BASIN
r
t
aland Const
5 0 5
ey Consul
7 1 6 2 7 3 8 4 9 8 4 6 1 0
1 7 5
1 4 8 7 0 5 8 3 7 3 8
5 4 9 5
.9
0
.8
6
.8
1
.7
2 .6 .6
.5
9
.5 .5 BOTTOM EL 16.00
of Engi
9 4 8 1 6 9 4 8 2 7 8 5 0 4 9 5
2 0 6 1 6 2 .1 .1 .0 .0 .9 .9 .7 8 8 8 8
.3 .2 8
Transatl
0 0 6 1 7 3 9 .5 .4 .3 .2 8 8 8 8 8 1 8 1
3 9 4
.0
5 2 .6 .6 .5 .4 .4
9 9 9 9 8 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
.1 .0 .0 0 .9 .9 .8 .8 .7 .7 9 9 9 9 1
9 9 1
9
1
9
1
9 1 1 1 1 1
0 0 0 9 9 9 9 9 9 1 9 9 1 1 1 1
2 1 1 1
Center
2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1
onm ent
7 4 1 7 4 1 8 4 1 6
5 0 5 0 8 4 0 7 1 7 2 8 4 9 5 1 6
3 7 4 9 7 .0 4 5 .8 .7 .6
3 5 6 2 7 3 8
3 8 5 0 6 2
.1
3 0
.9 .9 .8 .7 .6 .6 .5
7 2 7 2 8 3 9 4 0 5 0 6 2 7 .5
4 9
.3 .3 .2 .2 .1 9 .0 .0 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8
5 1 2 7 8 4 0 .7 1 .6 .6 .5 .4 .4 .3 9 9 9 9 1 9 9 8 1 1 1
8 1 1 1 1 1
.1
6
.0 .9 .8 .8 .8 9 .7 9 9 9 9 9 9 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
.1 .0 .9 9 9 9 1 9 1
9 9 9 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
r
0 0 9 9 1 1
ng,Envi
2 0 0 2 1 1 1 1 1
2 2 1
anl
1 9 5 3 1 9 7 5 2 7 7
6 9 2 0 6 9 7 6 2 8 3 9 5 1 2
1 7 0 3 0 3 6 2 7 4
.0
4 0
.9 .8 .8 .7 .7 .7 .6 .6
3 0 7 4 0 9 4 1 7 8 3 9 4 0 6
.2 .1
3 .0 .0 .9 8
i
4 7 3 0 4 5 6 2 .4 .3 .2 .1 9 8 8 8 8 8
6 7 .6 .3 8 8 8 1
neer
7 .1 0 2 8 4 .6 .5 .4 .3 9 9 9 1 1 1 1
8 4
.0
5 1 .8 .8 .7 .7 .6 9 .5 9 9 9 9 1 9 9 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
.1 2
0 .0 .0 0 .9 .9 9 9 9 9 1
9 9 1 9 1
9
1
9 1 1
9 1 1 1 1 1
0
St
0 0 2 9 9 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 2 2 1
Engi
1
9 8 5 4 3 2 1 0 7
0 4 0 3 7 6 5 3 9 5 1 7 3 8
3 9 2 8 5 1 8 9 1 7 .8 .8 .7
1 4 1 5 7 4 3 9 4 0 6 2 .1 .1 .0
5
.0 .9 .9 .8 .7 .6
9 7 4 3 0 8 6 4 2 9 8 6 0
.5 1 7 .3 .3 .3 .2 .2 9 .0 8 8 8 8 8 8 8
0 6 2 8 3 9 5 1 6 2 8 .6 .6 .5 .4 .4 9 9 9 1 9 9 9 8 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
.1 5 0
.0 .0 .9 .9 .8 .8 .8 .7 .7 .6 9 9 9 9 9 1 9 9 1 9 1 1 1 1 1
0 .1 .1 0 0 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 1 1 1 1
9 1 1 1 1 1
2
9
2
0 2
0 2 2 1 1
3
1 1
1
1 1 1
8
1
8 6 6
D 4 5
4 2 2 3
0
9
0
4
8 0
8
6
6
2
7
.1
8
7
.1
4
7
.1
0
7
.0
6
8
.0
2
8
.9
8
8
.9
4
8
.9
0
9
.8
6
9
.8
2
9
.7
8
9
.7
4
8
19
8 5 0 9 7 9 1 7 .3 .2 8 8
0 6 7 5 4 3 6 1 8 4 9 5 1 3 .5 .5 .4 .3 .3 .2 9 9 9 9 1 8 8 8 1 8 8
.2
2 8 .0
0 .9 2 .8 .8 .7 .7 .7 .6 .6 .5 .4 9 9 9 9 9 1 1 1 9 1 1 1 1 1 1
0 .1 .1 .0 0 .0 9 .9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 1
9 9 9 1 1 1
9 1 1 1 1
0 0 0 1 9 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
86%
2 2 2 0 2 2 1 1 1
2 1
RATES
17
7 9 9
0 2 3 5 6 8 4 0
0.
4 6 7 9 6 2 .8
1 1 2 2 3 5 8 4 0 .8 .8
2 6 7 9 9 9
0 1
0 7
0
3
0 1 5
0
1
1 7 3 9
1 5 1
.2
7
.2
3
.1
9
.1 .1
1 .0 .0 .0 .9 .9 8 8 8
NAGE PLAN
7 8 7 8 9 .4 .4 .3 .3 9 8 8 1 1
18
6 7 6 7 8 2 .6 .5 .3 9 9
2 4 0 2 8 4 0 6 .7 5 .7 .6 .5 .5 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 1 1 1 1 1 1
8 .1 .0 .9 .8 .8 .7 9 1 1 1 1
00%
.1 .0 .9 9 9 9 9 9 9 1
.2 .1 0 0 0 0 9 9 .9 9 9 1 9 1 1 1 1
9 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
0 0 2 2 2 2 1 1 9 1 1 1
2 2 1
TED ARAB EMI

FUEL HYDRANT SYSTEM
1.
3 5 1 3 6 8 0
2 5 7 0 9 8 4 0 7
8
16
1 6 7 0 8 0 7 3 5 2 .9 .8
3 8 3 4 .0 .9
REFUELER RAMP AND

5 6 8 0 5 2 4 .1 .0 .0 .9
5 7 9 0 2 3 7 8 0 2 4 0 6 2 8 5 1 7 3 9
.3 .3 .2 .2 .2 .1 9 8 8 8 8
4 0 7 2 5 1 7 5 5 2 8 .7 .7 .6 .6 .5 .5 .5 .4 .4 .3 9 9 9 9 1 9 9 1 1 1
16
6 8 3 9 .8 9 9 9 1 1 1 1
4 .2 .1 .0 .0 .0 .9 .9 .8 .8 .7 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 1 1 1 1 1 1
.2 0 .1 0 0 0 0 9 9 9 9 9 1 1 1 1
9 1 1 1 1 1 1
0 2 0 2 2 2 1 9 1 1 1
2 2 2 1 1
72.048 35.628 35.628 70.128 40.545
1 5 9 3 6 0 4 8 0
2 6 0 4 8 4 1 7 4 0 6 3
20
7 2 0 5 2 8
1 9 5 7 4 0 6 3 9
.2 .1 .1 .0 .0 .0 .9 .9 3m @ 5%
GN
4 6 9 4 2 5 1 7 .3 .2 .2 .1
1 6 9 2 7 7 9 2 5 8 1 4 0 6 .6 8 .4 .4 .3 9 9 9 9 9 9 8 8
6 4 8 4 1
.0
3 9 6 2 8 5 1 7 3 .7 .6 .5 .5 .5 .4 9 9 9 9 9 9 1 9 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
.2
2 .1 .1 .0 .9 .9 .8 .8 .8 .7 .7 9 9 9 9 9 1 1 1 1 1
.2 .1 0 0 0 9 9 .9 9 9 9 9 9 1 1
9 1 1
9 1 1 1 1 1
0 0 0 2 9
TE DESI
0 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 2 2 1 40mm DROP
DRAI
2
SHEET C
3
19 1
380
7 2 7 9
R BASE, UNI
3 7 8 2 7 0 7 2 6 2 .9
0 4 1 3 0 7 3 .2 6 3 9
9 1 9 2 6 7 4 .2 .1 .0 .0 .0 8
8 4
3
0
6 7
0
3
4 9
7
6
2 2
5
8
9
5
4 1
7
8
1
4
6
.8
0 7
3
3
7
.7
0 6
5
.6
2
.5
9
.5
5
.5
2
.4
8
448
9
.4 .3 .3 9
.3
9
.2 9 1
9
9
.1 9 9 1
9 1
9 1 2%
7 .0 .8 .7 .7 .6 9 9 1 1
225.
.2 .2 .2 .1 .1 .0 .0 .9 .9 .9 .8 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 1
9
1
9 19. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 9 9 9 9 9 1 9 1 1 1 1
0 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 2 2
0 6 8 5 1 7 2
3 9 5 1 8 4 9 5 2 8 5 2 8 5
AND
8 8 8 5 2 .2 2 .0 .0
6 7 7 2 8 2 8 3
6 3 8 6 2 5 2 9
.3 .3 .2 .2 .1 .1 .1
6 1 6 1 6 1 8 1 1 2 7 2 4 0 7 3 0 3 9 .5 .5 .4 .4 .3 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
9 6 2 9 5 2 5 .0 8 4 1 .8 .8 .8 .7 .7 .7 .6 .6 .5 9 493
19. 9 9 9 9 1 9 1 1 1 1
.0 .9 9 1 1 1 1 1
SI
.2 .2 .2 .1 .1 .1 0 .0 0 .9 .9 9 1
9 9 9 9 1
9
1
9
1
9 9 9 1 1
9 1 1 1
0 0 0 0 0 0 2 0 2 9 9 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1
0 7 2 6 2
AL DHAFRA AI
0 3 0 8 2 1 7 4 9 4 1
2 8 6 5 4 4 1 7
0 3 2 8 5 1 7 3 4 7 3 0 7 4 0 7 .3 .2 .2 .2 .1 .1 .1
6 9 7 4 6 4 0 5 4 0 7 4 0 7 .6 .5 .4 .4 .4 .3 .3 9 9 9 NOTES:
0 4 1 1 7 7 .5 .5 9 9 9
NG
3 2 7 7 4 1 .8 .7 .7 .6 9 1 9 1
1 8 4 1 4 1 .0 .9 .9 .9 .8 .8 .7 9 606
19. 9 9 9 9 9 9 1 1 1 1 1
.2 .2 .2 .1 .1 .1 .0 .0 9 9 9 9 9 9 1 1 9 1 1 1 1 1
.3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2
0
1
9 1
9 9 1
9 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
0 0 2 2 2 1
2 2 2 2 2 2 1. SPOT ELEVATIONS AND CONTOURS SHOWN
GRADI
9
19
3 0 6 3
9 6 4 1 8 7 8
4
5
2
2
0
8
9
5
8 2
6
9
5 6 3
2
.3
0 .2
6
3
7
.2
0 7 ARE TOP OF FINISHED SURFACE.
3 1 6 2 9 7 4 2 4 1 8 4 1 .5 .5 .4 .4 .4 .3 .3 .3 9 .2 .1
8 3 1 8 6 7 9 0 4 4 0 7 4 1 7
.7 .7 .6 .6 .5 9 9 1 9 9 9
1 9 6 3 0 6 3 0 3 7
.9 .8 .8 .8 .7 .6 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 1 9 1 1 1
3 6 .2 .1 .1 .1 .0 .0 .0 .9 .9 9 9 9 9 9 1 1 1 1 1 1
0
.3 0
.2
0
.2 0
.2
2
0 0
2
0 2
0
2
0
2
0 2
0
1
9 1
9
1
9 1
9 1
9 1
9 1
9 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
2. RETENTION BASIN SECTIONS ARE SHOWN IN REFER
2 2 2 2 2
702
7 6 6 6 5 5 4 SC-2
7 2 6 3
18
9 8 8 8 7 4 8 5 9
17
3 1 9 1 .2 .2
1 7 6 4 4 1 9 9 7 6 4 2 1 6 2 9 6 3 0 7 .4 .4 .3 .3 .3 .2
8 4 3 1 9 8 6 3 0 2 1 7 4 1 8 5
.7
9
.6 .6 .5 .5 .5 .4 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
4 7 6 5 9 6 2 9 .0 .0
7 4 .8 .8 .8 .7 .7 .6 .5 9 9 9 9 1 1 1 1 1
1 8
.2
2 .1 .1 .1 .0 .0 .9 .9 .9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 1 1 1 1 1 1
.3 .3 .2 .2 0 0 0 0 2
0 0 0 9 9 9 1 1 1
9 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
0 0 0 0 0 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1
2 2 2 2 2
1 6 5 5 5 5 4 4 5 1
6
8
7
5
8 2
8
9
9
7
1
4
1
1
2 8
3
5
4
.3
2
5
.2
9
5
5 5 5 0 5 5 5 5 5 2 9 6 3 5 7 4
.6 .5 .5 .4 .4 .4 .3 .3
6 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 9 5 3 7 4 1 8 .8 .7 .7
0 .6 .6 .5 .4 9 9 9 9
5
3 0 4 1 8 .1 2 6
.0 .0 .9 .9 .8 9 .8 .7 .7 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 1 1 1 1
6 7
.2 .2 .1 .1 .0 .0 0 .9 9 9 9 9 9 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
.3 .3 .3 .2 0 0 2
0
0 0 0 2
0 2 9 1
9 1
9
1
9 1 1 1 1 1 1
1
0 0 0 0 0 2 2 2 2 1
2 2 2 2 2 2
4 5
SHEET
3 8 2 4 6 8 0 2 8 5
5 0 2 6 0 2 4 1
3 6 7 9 6 0 8 5 9 6 .3 .3
3 4 5 6 6
8
3
8
1
0
8
1
5
2 2
4
9
5 6
6
3
8 0
8
8
0
5
1
2
2
.8
9
.8
6
4
.8
3
.8
0
.7
7
.7
4
.7
2
.6
9
9
.6 .6
3
.6 .5 .5 9
.5
9
.4
9
.4 9
.4 9
.4
1
9 1
9 REFERENCE
8 5 2 9
.2 .1 .1 .1 .0 .0 .0 .0 .9 .9 .9 9 9 9 9 9 1 9 9 9 9 1 1 1 1 1
.3 .3 .3 .2 .2 .2 0 0 0 0 0 0 9 9 9 1 9 1 9 1 1
9 1 1 1 1 1 1
0 0 1 1
2
0
2
0 2
0
2
0 2
0
2
0
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 NUMBER:
4 1 4 7 0 4 6
3 5 1 5 8 1 0 8 5 2 9 7 4 1
1 4 9 1 6 0 8 1 8 5 7 .4 .4
2 4 0 6 3 3 7 8 2 9 6 3 .7
3 .6 .5 .5 .5 .4 .4
7 0 2 5 7 9 5 2 7 7 4 1 8 5
.9
0 4 .7 .7 .7 .6 .6 .6 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
0 3 5 9 6 3 0 7
.1
9 .0 .0 .9 .9 .8 .8 .8 9 9 9 9 1 1
2
0
.4
0
2
0
.3
7
2
0
.3
4
2
0
.3
1
2
0
.2
2
0
.2
2
0
.2
2
0
.2
2
0
.1
2
0
2
0
.1
2
0
.0
2
0
.0
2
0
2
0
1
9
.9
1
9 1
9
1
9 1
9
1
9 1
9 1
9
1
9
1
9 1

1 1 1
9 1 1 1 1 1 1
C-30
1:500
72.048
A B C D E F G H
8 1 5 0 5
3 7 1 6
MATCHLINE - FOR CONTINUATION SEE SHEET C-33 9
0
.9
4
2
.8
9
4
.8
6
9
.8
4
3
8
.8
1
8
.7
9
.7
6
8
8
.7
4
2
8
.7
1
8
.6
9
8
.6
6
6
8
.6
4
8
.6
1
8
.5
9
1
8
.5
.9 8 8 8 8 1 1 8 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
8 1 1 1 1 1
TRANSFORMER 1
3 7 3 7 0 4 7
0 9 3 6 2 9 0 4 1 9 6 3
7 2 6 2 0 7 0 7 .7 .6 .6
7 3 8 5 .9 5 .8 .7 .7 .7 .6
.0 .0 .9 .9 .9 8 .8 .8 8 8 8 1
8 8 8
1
8
6 1
9 1
9
1
8
1
8 1
8 1 1
8
1
8 1 1 1
8 1 1 1
FIRE
WAREHOUSE OFFICE 3
STAION 3 8 0 3 5 8
7 0 3
2
0
4
7
6
4
8 2
1
.7
9 6
5
3
7
1
0
6 1 7 4 1 6
.8 .8 .7 .7 .7
3710 BLDG BLDG 9
.1
9
.1
9
.0
9
.0
9
.0 8
.9
8
.9 8
.9
8
.9
8 8
.8
1
8 1
8
1
8
1
8
1
8
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
1
2711
NG
N
604
2
LDI
6 7 9 0 1
0 6 3
0 0
0 2 19 3 1
4
8
5 5 2 9
8
.8
6
.8
4
.8
1
.7
8
5 0 8
.1
7 4 .0 .9 .9 .9 .8 8
.2 5 .1 .0 .0 8 8 8 8 8 8
.2 .1 9 9 9 8 1 1 1 1
BUI
9 9 1 9 9 1 1 1 1 1
1 9 1 1 1
APR
1 1
5 5 5 5 5
18
7 6 6 6 6 6 5 7 4 1 8 5
6 4 4
7 1 6 5 2 9 6 3 0
.9 .9 .9 .8 .8
3 9 .2
8 .1 .1 .0 .0 .0 .0 8 8 8
06/10/05
06/06/05
05/23/05
04/08/05
.3 .2 .1 8 8
18
.2 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 1 1 1 1 1
9 9 9 1 9 1 1 1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1
DATE
1 0 8
2 4 1 9 8 7 5 4 2 2 9 5 7
3 5 2 0 7 1 8 5 .9 .9 2
2 8 3 0 7 4
.1
4
.1 .0 .0 .0 .9
.3 .3 .2 .2 .2 .1 9 8 8
.4 9 .3 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 1 1 1 8
9 1 9 1 9 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
1 1 1
5 4 2 0
N
1 7 2 0 7 3 0
BLDG
5
BASI
BASI
3 8 3 9 6
19
0 0 5 6 2 6 3 .0
1 0 2 9 5 2 9 9
.1 .0 .0 .0
7 .4 .3 .3 .2 .2 .2 .1 .1 9 9 9
.5 .4 9 .3 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 1
9 1 1 1
9 9 1 9 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1
ON
ON
6 7 3 9 6 2
ON"
8 3 0 7 3 8 5 1 7 3 0 7
1 0 4 0
5 1 7 4 1
.3
4 7
.2 .2 .1 .1 .1 .0
.3
RETENTI
RETENTI
.5 .5
7
.4 .4 9 .3 .2 9 9 9 9
9 9 .4 9 9 1 9 1
9 9 1
9
1
9 1 1 1 1
1 1 9 1 1 1 1
CONSTRUCTI
1
4 4 9 4 9 5
9 4 4 9 5 9 5 9 8 4 1 7 4
9
ON
3 6 9 6 2 9 5 2 8 .3 1
.2 .2 .2 .1 .1
8 4 .5 .5 .5 .4 .4 .4 .3 9 .3 9 9 9 9 9
.6 .6
PTI
9 9 9 9 9 9 1 9 1 1 1 1 1
9 9 1 1 9 1 1 1 1 1
1 1 1
12 M OVED
12 M OVED
DESCRI
4 5 7
9 7 0 3 8 2 2 9 1
9 4 7 1 5 7 3 0 7 .4 9 6 8
6 3 8 5 1
.5
4
.5 .4 9 .3 .3 .3 .2 3 .2
.7 .7 .6 .6 .6 .5 1 9 9 5 9
BLDG 9 9 1
9 9 9 1
9
1
9 1
9 1
9
1 1
9 1 1
9
.2 1
FOR
BLDG 1 1 1 1
1
9
3 4 9 4 7 0
6 5 8 1 6 6 9 1 1 6 3 6 2 9
2 7 3 2 8 5 7 .4 .3
.6
NAL "CLEARED
5 0 .5 1 .3 .2
CHANGE ORDER
CHANGE ORDER
2 .7 .6 .5 .5 .4 40
.8 .8 .7 .7 9 9 9 9 1
9 . 9 9 9
EOC 1
9
1
9 1
9
1
9
1
9 1 1
9 1 1
9 1 1 19 1 1 1
12.143 72.048
SEE SHEET C- 30
5 9 0 2
6 8 2 3 5 6 3 0 6
LT
0 4 5 4 9 1 9 1 .4
2 1 2 8 0 7 3
.5 .5 8 .4 .3
4
.9
6
.8 .7 .7 .7 .6 .6 9 .5 47 9 9 9
EMXG .8
AS BUI
.9 9 9 9 9 1
9 9 9 9 1
9 1
1
9
19
. 1 1 1
9 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
1
3 4 4 4 5
3 3 3 3 7
FI
2 2 2 2 2 5 3 9 5 1 3
9 8 5 7 3 1 7
.5 .5 .5 .4 .4
2 9 1
.8
9 .7 .7 .6 .6 9
.0 .9 .9 .8 .7 9 9 9 9 9 9 1 9
0 .9 9 9 9 9 9 1 1
9 1 1 1 1 1 1
9 1 1 1
T
2 1 1 1
SYMBOL
A
0
2700
1
2701 6 6 0 9 8 1
7
6 5 4 5
3
1
2 7
1 3
0
8
9
4
8 0
7
8 5 3 .6 .5 .5 .5
9 .7 .6
4 3m @ 5% 0
.1
1
0
.0
0
.0
4
9
.9
9
1
9
.9
1
9
.9
9
.8
7
9
.8
9
.7
1
9
1
9
.7
1
9 1
9
1
9
1
9 1
9
2 1 1
AGE 40mm DROP
2 2 1 1
BLDG 4 8
20 4 1 9 5 8 6 4 2
1 0
2 7 2 6 4 0 7 7 2 0 4 0 6 8
0
.1
8
.0 .0
5 1 .8 3 9 .7 .7 .6 .6 .5
.2 0 .1 .0 0 0 .9 .9 9 .8 .7 9 9 9 9 9
0 2 0 0 2 2 9 9 1 9 9 1 1 1 1 1
2 2 2 1 1 1 1
ON
N UATI
AGE
UE0000 -CG31PN
5
2% 9 2 6 7
3
2
9
8
6 4
2
9
9 6 1
2
6
9 2
5
8
2 3
9
.6
9 5
2
8 6 1
.1 .1 .0
5 .8 .7 .7 .6
.2 .2 .2 .0 .9 .9 .9 .8 9
04-08-05
9 9 9
STORAGE 2
0 2
0
2
0 2
0
2
0
2
0 2
0
1
9
1
9 1
9
1
9 1 1
9 1 1 1
BY:
6702 4701 YARD
CONTI
AF
5 4 9 0 6 2 6 2 7 3 8 3 9 5
0 5 6 2
BUNKER LAT NE
RI / 7 5 0 5 1 7 2 8 3 9 4 0 5 1
.7 .7
TTED
.3 .3 .2 .1 .1 .0 .0 .9 .9 .9 .8 .8
6703 .3 .2 0 9 9 9
LE NO.:
0 0 0 9 9 9 9
10% 2
0
2
0 2 2 2
0 2
0
2
0 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
LAUNDRY
BUNKER
SUBMI
BY: DATE:
42%
2 6 5 9 4 7 1 6 0 4 8 2 7
6 8 2 4 1 5 0 6 1 7 2 8 3 8 4 9
.4 3 9 .3
0 .2 .2 .1 .1 .0 .0 .9 .9 .8 .8 .7
.3 .3
FI
.4 0 0 9 9
FOR
0 0 0 2 0 0 0 0 9 9 1 9
2 0 0 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1
1.
2 2 2
6 8 1 7 0 3 6 0
6 3 7 9 2 9 5 4 5 1 1 7
2 1 3 8 3 9 4 0 .0 6 .8
5 .5 .3 .3 .2 .1 .1 .1 .0 .9 .9
5 8 .4 .2 0 0 0 0 9 9
.4 0
NE -
0 0 9
JOSE
0 0 2 1
BY:
.5 0 0 2
GNED
2 2 1
BY:
2 2 2 1
RAJ
2 2 2
BAR
0 0 2
2 2
19
DESI
4 9 3 4 6 8 0 2
DW N
1
CHK
4 9 0 2 2 5 8 7 3 8 3 8 3 9 4
M ATCHLI
1 6 2 7 .4 7 2 .2 .2 .1 .1 .0 .0 .9 .9
8 .6 .5 .5 .4 .3 .3 0 0 0
603
4 0 0 0 2 0 2 9 9
0 0 0 0 2 0 0 2 2 2 2 1 1
.6 2 2 2 2 2 2
0
33%
2
20
44%
7 8 8 0 0 1 2 2 3 5
9
1.
2 7 0 5 0 0 6 1 6 1 6 1 1
5 1 .3 .1 .1
0 5 .6 .5 .5 .4 .3 .2 .2 06
3 .0
20
.7 .6 .4 0
oup Com pany

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 . 0
2 0 0 2 2
0 2 2
0 0 2 2 2 2 2 2 20 2
1.
4 2 2 2
.7
0
2
3 20.772
5 4 4 3 2 2 20.466
1 9
0 4
0
8
9 8
8
3
7 8
7
c Program s
9 9 4 9 4 .0
0 4 4 .5 .4 .3 .3 .2 23
8 .1 .1
9 .7 .6 .6 .5 .4 0.84%
0 0 . 0 0 0
.7 0 0 0 0 0 20 2
0.52% 0 0.84% 0 2
ey Gr
5 0 2 2 0 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
3 2 2
.8
0
2
anl
0 1 3 3 4
8 8 9 5 0 5 1 0 5 0
6 6 0 0 .2 .1
A St
1 4 9 8 9 4 9 .4 .3 .1
79 .7 .6
4
.5 .5 .4 .4 0 .3 25
2 0 0
de
0 0
US Arm y Corps
. .6 0 2 0 2 0 . 2 2 2
5 20 0 0 0 0 2 2 20
dwi
2 2 0 2 2 2
3 2
.8
0
l
sINC
on -W or
2
neers
8 4 8 9 2
9 3 0 2 1 5 6
20.835 9 1 0 4 0
7 5 1 6 .3 6 1
.1
2
ant
R
1 7 5 5 .4 .2 .1
79 4 .6 .6 .6 .5 .5 .4 .3 0 .2 0
anti
5 . .7 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 2 0
20 2 0 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
i
3 0 2 2 2
uct
.8 2
0
2
r
t
aland Const
of Engi
ey Consul
3
Transatl
7 3 6 9 3 5 9
1 5 8 1 4 6 0 2 7 3
9 0 5 0 6 1 .4 2 7
.2 .2 8
.1
2 4 .7 .6 .5 0 .4 .3 .3 0 .1
.6 .5 0
Center
.79 .7 0 0 2
0
2
0 0 2
2
0
2
0 2
0
2
0 2
2
0 2
5
3 20 2
0 2 2 2
.8
0
2
onm ent
6 3 8 2 7
9 3 7 2 7 0 5 9 9 4 0 5
4 1 2 3 8 3 .2 .2 .1
01%
2 0 5 6 .4 .2
5 0
.6 .6 .5 .5 .4 .3 .3 0 0
5 .79 .7 .7 0 0 0 0 2
0 0 0 0 0 2 2
0
2
2 2
3 20 0 2 2
r
0 2 2 2 2
ng,Envi
.8 2 2
0.
0
2
anl
13%
1 6 2 4
2 8 3 9 4 0 6 6 8 7
1 6 7 2 8 9 5 0 1 .1
i
3 6 1 4 .2
0 .3 .3 .2
neer
79
5
.7 .6 .6 .5 .5 .4 .4 .3 0
. .7 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2
5 20 0 2 2 2 2
0.
0 2 2 2 2 2 2
St
3 2 2 2
Engi
.8
HANGAR 2
0
HANGAR 7 7 4 9
1
2 3 0 0 3 0 7 3
5 9 6 3 9 7 9 5 6 2 .2 .2 .1
3 .7 0 6 2 7 3 .4 .4 .3 .3 0
.4
7701
D 7704
2
0
.8
3
5
5
20
20
.
.79
79
4
2
0
0
.7
5
3
2
2
0
0
.7
.7
1
1
2
2
0
0
.6
.6
7
0
2
2
0
0
.6
.6
2
8
2
0
2
.5
0
.5
8
5
2
2
0
0
.5
.5
4
4
2
0
2
0
.5
0
2
2
2
0
0
.4
6
0
2
2
0
0
.4
1
8
2
2
0
0
.3
7
6
2
2
0
0
.3
3
4
2
2
0
0
.2
9
2
2
0
2
0
.2
5
0
2
2
0
.2
0
9
RATES
3 2
.8
0
2 2
NAGE PLAN
0 8 7 7 6 6
4 3 2 1 0 7 9 8 4 0 6 2
5 3 5 1 .3 .2
5 1 7 3 9
.4
2 .3 .3 .2
79
5 .7 .6 .6 .5 .5 .5 .4 0 0 0 0 0
. .7 0 0 0 2 2
TED ARAB EMI

5 0 0 0 0 2 0 2 2 2
20 0 2 2 2 2 2 2
FUEL HYDRANT SYSTEM

3 2 2
.8
0
2
REFUELER RAMP AND

7 0 0 1 2 2 4
7 8 8 9 9 8 4 1 6 2 8 4
6 6 9 5 1 .4 0 .2 .2
5 1 .6 3 .5 .5 .4 .4 .3 .3
5
.7 .7 0 .6 .5 0 0 0 0 0
.79 0 0 2 0 2
0
2
0 0 2 2 0 2
0
2 2 2
5 2 2
3 20 2 2 2
.8
0
2
GN
5 7 9 1
9 1 4 6 8 9 2 3 7 3 9 6
2 6 5 1 .2
6 7 1 8 4 0
.5
2 8
.4 .4 .3 .3 .2
TE DESI
79
5 .7 .6 .6 .6 .5 .4 0 0 0 0
DRAI
. .7 0 0 0 2
SHEET D
5 0 0 0 0 0 2 2 2
3 20 2
0 2 2 2
0 2 2 2 2 2 2
.8
0
R BASE, UNI
2
6 9 3 5 2 5 8
7 0 4 3 9 6 2 5 1 7
8 1 4 4 1 .2
6 5 2 8 .6
7 .5 .4 .4 .4 .3 .3
79 .7 .7 .6 .6 .5 0 0 0 0 388 0 0 0
5 . 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 2 2 2 20. 2 2 2
3 20 2 2 2 2 2 2
.8
0
2
AND
4 8 7 1 6
5 9 6 3 9
SI
20
9 8 6 1 7 3
5 4 8 2 1 8 4 0
.4 .4 .3 .3 .2
7
.7
2
.6
5
.5 .5 .5 0 0 0
79 .7 .6 .6 0 0 0 0 402 2 2 2
5 . 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 2 2 2 20.
3 20 2 2 2 2 2 2
.8
AL DHAFRA AI
0
2
NG
2 7 3
6 2 7 2 9 4 9 5 0 6 8 4 1
0 2 5 2 1 8 5 1 .3
7 6 9
.6 .6
8 5
.5 .4 .4 .4 .3 .3
79 .7 .7 .6 0 .5 .5 0 0 0 0 2
0 0
GRADI
5 . 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 2 2 2
0 2 2 2 2
3 20 2 2 2 2 2
.8
0
2
6 9 6 1
2 5 9 6 2 9 9 3 2 9 3 3
6 8 9 2 2 9 6 2 .4 6 .3 6
8 .7 2 6 .6 .5 .5 .4 .4 .3 .3
79 0 .7 .6 .6 0 .5 0 2
0
0 0 2
0 0 0
. 0 0 0 0 0 2 2 2 2 2
5 20 2 2 2 2 2 2
3 2
.8
602
0
2
1 9 8
7 5 3 1 9 7 5 3 1 7 4
3 9 0 7 4 .3 .3
6 1 9 6 3 0 7 3
.5 .4 .4 .4
9 .7
3
.6 .6 .6 .6 .5 .5 0 0 0
5 79 0 .7 0 0 0 0 0 0 2
0
2
0
2
0 2 2 2
. 2 0 2 2 2 2 2 2
3 20 2
1 2
0
.8
9 7 5
0 9 1 6 6
NOTES: 9 4 3
3
0
3
7
2
4
1 1
1
.5
8 4 .5 8
7
.4
5 2
.3
9
.3
6
79
6
.6 .6 .6 .5 0 .4 .4
. .7 .7 .7 0 0 0 2 0 2
0 0 0 2
0
0 0 2
5 20 0 0 0 2 2 2 2 2
SHEET
1. SPOT ELEVATIONS AND CONTOURS SHOWN ARE TOP OF .8
3 2 2 2 2 2
0
2
FINISHED SURFACE. 1 2 3
REFERENCE
7 8 8 9 0 0 0 4 8
6 7 8 0 7 1
5 6 7 4 1
.5 5 3 .4 .4 .3
.80
0
.7
6
.7
3
.7
0
.6 0
.6 0
.6 0 0
.5 0
.5 0
.5
0
.4
2
0 0 2
0 NUMBER:
2. RETENTION BASIN SECTIONS ARE SHOWN IN REFER 3
5 20 2
0 2
0
2
0 2
0 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
.8
0
SC-2 2
8
6
MATCHLINE - FOR CONTINUATION SEE SHEET C-29 0

.7
1
0
0
.6
8
2
2
0
.6
5
3
2 2 0
2
.6
2
6
0
.5
9
7
0
.5
6
9
2
0
.5
4
1
2
0
.5
1
2
2
0
.4
8
4
2
0
.4
5
2
0
.4
2
C-31
10 0 10 20 30 2
40 2 UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED, LINEAR DIMENSIONS
1:500
A B C D E F G H
6
N
16
APR
06/10/05
06/06/05
05/23/05
04/08/05
DATE
15
14
SS
5
N
BASI
BASI
ON
ON
ON"
RETENTI
RETENTI
CONSTRUCTI
BUILDING
ON
PTI
12 M OVED
12 M OVED
DESCRI
FOR
NAL "CLEARED
CHANGE ORDER
CHANGE ORDER
LT
AS BUI
FI
T
SYMBOL
A
0
1
SS
4
W
SEE SHEET C- 33
UE0000 -CG32PN
04-08-05
BY:
AF
TTED
LE NO.:
SUBMI
BY: DATE:
NOTES:
FI
1. SPOT ELEVATIONS AND CONTOURS SHOWN ARE TOP OF
FINISHED SURFACE.
ON
NUATI
JOSE
BY:
GNED
BY:
RAJ
BAR
SC-2
DESI
DW N
CHK
FOR CONTI
oup Com pany

3 AIRFIELD LIGHTS
c Program s
ey Gr
(TYP)
NE -
anl
A St
de
US Arm y Corps
dwi
M ATCHLI
l
sINC
on -W or
neers
ant
R
anti
r i
uct
t
aland Const
ey Consul
of Engi
Transatl
Center
onm ent
705
r
ng,Envi
SHIFT BASIN AROUND
anl
i
RETENTION BASIN
neer
TRANSFORMER LOCATION
St
Engi
BOTTOM EL 16.00
D 17
17
10%
RATES
17
2
NAGE PLAN
16
16
TED ARAB EMI

FUEL HYDRANT SYSTEM
REFUELER RAMP AND
16
16
16
GN
10%
16 CEMENT-STABILIZED
TE DESI
AGGREGATE SLOPE
DRAI
SHEET E
R BASE, UNI
PROTECTION (10:1)
17
10%
17 3m @ 5%
17
AND
40mm DROP
SI
AL DHAFRA AI
70.128 40.545
72.048 35.628 35.628
NG
GRADI
2%
18
17.740 17.594
17.992
9 8 8 7 6 6 4
3 2 1 1 9
18.249
9 6
18.121
1 9 8 5 1
3 2 1 9 2
8
0.36% 0
6 8
5 4 3 2
.8
0 8
1
.7
6 4
0
.7
1 0.36%
.6
9
.6
7
.6
5
.6
3
.6 .5
6 4 6 4 .8 .7 .7
18
4 3 4 5 4 2 2 9 9 7 .8 7 7
1 0 8 0 6 7 5 3 .0 .9 .9 .9 .9 .8 .8 7 7 7 7 7 7
.3
3
0.36% .3
1
.2
9
.2
7
8
.2
.2
2
80.36%8.18
.2
8
.1 .1
4
8
.1
1
8
.0 0.36%
8
.0
8
.0 8
.0
1
8 7
.9
1
7
1
7 1
7
1
7 1
7
1
7
1
7 1
7
1
7
1
7 1 1
7 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
8 8 8 8 1 8 1 8 1 1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
1 7 6 3
5 0 6 4 3 2 9 7 5 3 2 0 8 4 2
2 3 8 4 .6
8 5 0 7 5 4 0 9
7 7 5 3 0 8 6
.8 .8
9
.7 75 73 71 69 .66 .6
8 8 5 3 0 2 2 .9 .8 .8 .7 . . . . 7
1 .4
0
3
.3
8
1
.3
5
.3
3
6
.3
1
3
.2
9
0
.2
6
.2
4
8
.2
2
.2
0
8
.1
7
8
.1
5
8
.1
3
8
.1
1
8
.0
8
8
.0
6
1
8
.0
8
.0
1
7
.9
1
7
1
7
.9
1
7
.9
1
7
.9
1
7
1
7 1
7 1
7
1
7 1
7 17 17 17 17 17 1
7 1
8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 1 8 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
98%
5 9 6 3 6
0 3
7 4 9
1
6
8 4
6
2
3 9
9
7
6 3m @ 5%
5
2
2 1 7 4 0 7 3 9 6 9 7 2 0 8
.8 .8 1
.7 .7 .7 .6 .6 .6 SHEET
3 6 9 5 1 9 6 4 2 9 2 .9 .9 .8 .8 .7
0.
8 1 8 6 4 7 7
1 8 4 1 7 5 0 0 5 3 .1 .1 .0 .0 .0 02 .9 .9 95 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 1 7
86%
2 7 3 .2 .2 .2 .1 .1 . 7 7 1 7 1 1 1
50%
7 0 .2 . 1
63%
4 .3 .3 7 1 1 1
.4 .4 .4 .4 .3 8 .3 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 1
8
1
8 1
8
1
8
18 18 17 1 17 1 1 1 1 40mm DROP
8 8 8 8 8 1 8 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 REFERENCE
09%
1 1 1 1 1 1
10%
0.
0.
0.
0 5 1 4 0
0
7
6
5
2
8 0 6 1 70
7 8
2
2% 10% NUMBER:
78
1.
9 5 2 8 2 4 .6
7 2 8 3 9 4 9 4 1 9 7 4 2 6 7 4 .9 .9 .8 .8 82 80 . 75 73 .
0 6 1 6 1 6 2 4 3 8 4 1 9 6 4
.1 .0 .0 .0 99 .9 .9 7 . . 17
. . 17 7
4 1 9 6 4 1 9
.3
6
.3 .3
1 9 6
.2 .2 .1 .1 .1 .0 8 8 8 . 7 1 7 7 17 17 17 17 1
.5 .5 .4 .4 .4 .4 8
.3
8 8 8 .2
8
.2 8 8 8 8 8 1
8
1
8 1 1 1 17 1
7
1
7 1 1 1
8 8 8 8 8 8 1 8 1 1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
1
C-32
MATCHLINE - FOR CONTINUATION SEE SHEET C-30 10 0 10 20 30 40 UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED, LINEAR DIMENSIONS
1:500
A B C D E F G H
N
6
17
APR
06/06/05
05/23/05
04/08/05
E
11/11/05
DATE
NOTES:
5 1. SPOT ELEVATIONS AND CONTOURS SHOWN ARE TOP OF
N
BASI
BASI
FINISHED SURFACE.
ON
ON
ON"
RETENTI
RETENTI
SC-2
CONSTRUCTI
ON
PTI
16
12 M OVED
12 M OVED
DESCRI
FOR
NAL "CLEARED
CHANGE ORDER
CHANGE ORDER
LT
93
AS BUI
FI
BLDG
SYMBOL
A
0
1
4
SEE SHEET C- 32
SS
60
7
1
W
UE0000 -CG33PN
04-08-05
BY:
W
AF
TTED
LE NO.:
SUBMI
BY: DATE:
ON
FI
NUATI
JOSE
BY:
GNED
FOR CONTI
BY:
RAJ
BAR
BLDG
SS
DESI
DW N
CHK
oup Com pany
17
17
NE -
c Program s
3
ey Gr
17
anl
M ATCHLI
A St
de
US Arm y Corps
ldwi
E
sINC
on -W or
17
neers
18
ant
anti
R
i
uct
B
LD
r
t
aland Const
ey Consul
G
of Engi
Transatl
Center
E
onm ent
NG
RETENTION BASIN
LDI
SS
r
ng,Envi
BOTTOM EL 16.00
BUI
anl
i
CEMENT-STABILIZED
neer
St
Engi
AGGREGATE SLOPE
W BLDG PROTECTION (10:1)
D
10%
5
60
18
16
RATES
2
NAGE PLAN
18
TED ARAB EMI

FUEL HYDRANT SYSTEM
17
REFUELER RAMP AND

16
10%
GN
TE DESI
DRAI
SHEET F
17
R BASE, UNI
BLDG
SS
10%
3m @ 5%
SS
AND
40mm DROP
SI
18
17
AL DHAFRA AI
W
NG
12.143 36.420 72.048
18
GARDI
E
E
E
18.740 18.508
8
0 9
18.639 17
9 5 3 5
2
3
0
.5
0 8
6
6
4 4
2
0.36% 421 9
9
7
7
5
6
3 .4 .3 .3 .3
.7
4
.6
8
8
.6 8
.6 0.36%
.5
9
.5
7
8
.5
8
.5
1
8 8
.4
8
.4
1
8
1
8
.
1
8
1
8
1
8
8 8 1 8 8 1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1 1
0.83%
48
2 9 1 6
1 0 7 4 3 0 5 2 9 7 4 7 2
BLDG
3 3 0 5 6 1 9
.4
9 7 .6 .6 8 3 .4 .4
BLDG .8
2 7 .7
2 .7 .6 .6 8 8 .5 .5 .5 .5 .4 8 8
18
.7 8 8 8 1 1 8 8 8 8 8 1 1
C
8 8 8 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
1 1 1
44%
33%
9 8 1
2 8 3 9 5 9
1
7 4
3 1
9 9
5 SHEET
0 8 1
1.
6 4 6 3 6 .4
0 6 0 8 6 3 .7 .6 6
.6 .6 .5 .5 .5
1.
.8 .8 .7 .6 .5 8
8
.9
1
8
1
8 8
.7
1
8 8
.7 1
8
1
8
1
8 1
8
1
8 1
8
1
8 1
8 1
8 1 REFERENCE
18
1 1 1
NUMBER:
8 1 5 0 5
4 9 1 3 8 2 7 9 6 1 1 9 6
2 6 3 9 4 1 6 4 .5
0 4 9 4 .8 .7
6
.7 .7 .6 .6 .6 .6 .5
9 .9 .8 .8 .8 8 8 .7 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 1
8
.9 8 8 8 8 1 1 8 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
8 1 1 1 1 1

TRANSFORMER 1
C-33
1:500
A B C D E F G H
FOC
W
TCHHOUSE
NG
STI
SWI
EXI
CA
BLE
TRE
NC
H
3B
APR
TENNESSEE STREET
CABLE TRENCH
04/08/05
DATE
CA
ET
RE
LI
E
ST
FO
N
SI FOC
RN
ON
E
5 SC
FUEL
WI
IA
E
W
STR
SS
EET
ON'
CABLE TRENCH
FOR CONSTRUCTI
W
ON
PTI
E
DESCRI
ng
BLDG
l
U/C Buidi
SS
CLEARED
BUILDING
NAL '
93
BLDG BUILDING
BLDG
SS
CABLE TRENCH
C-14
FI
CABLE TRENCH SS
C-13
W
E W
E E
E
E
SS
SYMBOL
SS
W
MECHANIC ROAD
MECHANIC ROAD
C-20
0
FUTURE RAMP EXPANSION
C-19
T
W
TAXILANE
4 TEL
W
W
W
BLDG
SS
BLDG
AIRFIELD LIGHTS
(TYP) KANSAS ST (14 AIRCRAFT)
TANK
C-27 E
AIRFIELD LIGHTS
(TYP)
C-26
E
C-33
B
LD
C-32
G
74
E
LABORATORY
NG
LDI
SS
01PN
BUI
04-08-05
W
C-40 W BLDG
C-39
BY:
UE0000 -CI
SUBSTATION BUILDING
BLDG PARKING AREA

BLDG
TTED
XE-9
AF
XE-8
LE NO.:
FUE
BLDG
SUBMI
L
BY: DATE:
SS
SS
XE-24
OLD CABIN
XE-11 XE-10
W
XE-23
MOSQUE
W
FI
E
E
E
90
SHEET H SHEET G SHEET F
BLDG
SHEET E
BLDG
BY:
GNED
BY:
RAJ
DET
LJS
TRANSFORMER
FIRE
WAREHOUSE OFFICE
STAION
DESI
3710 BLDG BLDG
DW N
2711
CHK
NG
LDI
E
BUI
W
C
C
100 W
AIRFIELD LIGHTING VAULT
FUE
100 W
L
AIRFIELD LIGHTS
BLDG
KA
(TYP)
NS
E
oup Com pany

W W W
E
W
C
AS
BLDG
BLDG
AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL TOWER
E
3
ST
164A 164B
c Program s
(UNDER CONSTRUCTION)
RE
W
ey Gr
REFUELER RAMP
ET
C
C-12
AIR TRAFFIC
C-11
anl
CONTROL
TOWER (12 AIRCRAFT)
A St
(UNDER CONSTRUCTION)
US Arm y Corps
(FF=20.52)
de
dwi
C-18 C-17
l
sINC
on -W or
R
neers
W
W
W
ant
anti
C
W
i
C-25 C-24
uct
W
W W
W
W
W
r
t
aland Const
of Engi
ey Consul
Transatl
Center
C-31 C-30
W
W
W
W
onm ent
HANGAR AIRFIELD LIGHTS
BLDG
HANGAR
C-38 (TYP)
C-37
W
BLDG
7701 7702 7701 7704
r
ng,Envi
anl
FLORIDA STREET
XE-7 XE-6
FUEL
i
neer
FUEL BLADDERS
St
XE-12
D
Engi
XE-22 XE-21
FUEL
FUEL BLADDERS
SHEET J SHEET D SHEET C
RATES
2
EMI
FUEL HYDRANT SYSTEM
AIRFIELD LIGHTS
REFUELER RAMP AND

(TYP)
ARAB
FUEL BLADDERS
FUEL BLADDERS
PLAN
EAST FLIGHTLINE APRON
FUEL
TED
BASE, UNI
FUEL
TE KEY
C-10 C-9
AIRFIELD LIGHTS
(TYP)
C-16 UTILITY
MARKER VALVE
SIGN
FLANGE
C-15
SI
R
AL DHAFRA AI
TAXIWAY
H
FUEL BLADDER
FUEL BLADDER
C-23 FUEL BLADDER FUEL BLADDER
Z-1 C-22
M
E
H
M
E
C-29 C-28
TAXIWAY A
C-36 C-35
1 XE-20 XE-19
SHEET B SHEET A SHEET
REFERENCE
NUMBER:
C 50 0 50 100 150
WA
XI
Y
C-1
TA
1:4000
A B C D E F G H
GENERAL NOTES:
FOC
PHASE 1 AND PHASE 2 - TAXIWAY "A" TO REMAIN OPERATIONAL 1. WORK WITHIN CONSTRUCTION SETBACKS (61m FROM CENTERLINE TAXIWAY
W
6 SHALL BE CLOSELY COORDINATED WITH AIRFIELD MANAGEMENT.
FOC
E
W
FUEL
PHASE 1 2. KANSAS ST. TAXIWAY AND FLORIDA ST. TAXIWAY HAVE BEEN TEMPORARILY
W
SS
SS
WORK WILL BE LIMITED TO ITEMS EAST OF KANSAS ST OUTSIDE
CLOSED BY OTHERS.
W
SS
THE AIR FORCE FUEL BLADDER FARM FENCING AND BARRIERS AND
ST ITEMS MORE THAN 61m FROM CENTERLINE TAXIWAY "A".
APR
3. BARRICADES, CLOSED TAXIWAY MARKERS AND CONSTRUCTION FENCES SHALL
N
SI
W
ON BE CONTINUOUSLY MAINTAINED IN A CLEAN CONDITION AND IN THE PROPER
N
SC
WI PHASE 2
04/08/05
E
UPRIGHT POSITION. BARRICADES SHALL BE WEIGHTED TO WITHSTAND
DATE
WORK WILL BE TO CONSTRUCT ITEMS WEST OF KANSAS ST JET BLAST.
AFTER THE AIR FORCE REMOVES ITS FUEL BLADDERS AND
TEMPORARY CLOSED TAXIWAY MARKER AND
ASSOCIATED FENCING AND BARRIERS. ONLY ITEMS MORE THAN 61m 4. EACH BARRICADE USED SHALL HAVE A LIGHT FIRMLY ATTACHED. LIGHTS
5 TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION FENCE TO
E
FROM CENTERLINE TAXIWAY "A" WILL BE INCLUDED IN BASIC PHASE 2. SHALL BE AMBER-YELLOW OR RED. LIGHTS SHALL BE FLASHING OR
REMAIN UNTIL COMPLETION OF RAMP
SS
CONTINUOUS BURN. ALL LIGHTS USED SHALL BE OF SAME TYPE (FLASH
BUILDING
RATE) AND COLOR. FLASHING LIGHTS SHALL HAVE A MINIMUM EFFECTIVE

PHASE 1A AND PHASE 2A (CLOSE TAXIWAYS AS SHOWN)
ON'
TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION FENCE TO INTENSITY OF 5 CANDELAS AND A FLASH RATE BETWEEN 55 AND 160
WORK WITHIN 61m OF CENTERLINE TAXIWAY "A" SHALL BE EXPEDITED
FOR CONSTRUCTI
93
REMAIN UNTIL COMPLETION OF RAMP FLASHES PER MINUTE. CONTINUOUS BURN LIGHTS SHALL HAVE A MINIMUM
BLDG
SS TO MINIMIZE THE DURATION OF TEMPORARY TAXIWAY CLOSURES.
ON
SS
W EFFECTIVE INTENSITY OF 10 CANDELAS.
PTI
W
DESCRI
MECHANIC RD
W
PHASE 2B 5. CONTRACTOR SHALL MONITOR PROJECT AREA AND ADJACENT PAVED AREAS
WORK WITHIN 17.540m OF EAST SIDE OF EAST FLIGHT LINE APRON SHALL (APRON, TAXIWAY, ROADWAY) FOR THE PRESENCE OF FOREIGN OBJECTS AND
BLDG
SS
AIRFIELD LIGHTS
(TYP)
BE EXPEDITED. WHEN COMPLETED, THE BARRICADES SHALL BE SHALL PROMPTLY REMOVE ALL SUCH OBJECTS BY SWEEPING OR VACUUMING.
AIRFIELD LIGHTS
(TYP)
MOVED ONTO NEW RAMP PAVEMENT.
CLEARED
E
E
B
LD
G
E
NOTE:
NG
LDI
SS
BUI
NAL '
W
W BLDG
PHASE 1A AND PHASE 2A MAY BE CONCURRENT.

SUBSTATION BUILDING
BLDG
PHASE 2B MAY BE PRIOR TO PHASE 2A.
FI
T
900m m
SYMBOL
FUE
CA
900m m
BLDG
L
BLE
SS
SS
TRE
0
NC
H
4 W
E
E
TO
TO
BLDG
BLDG
C
600m m
600m m
TRANSFORMER
CAL
FIRE
WAREHOUSE OFFICE
STAION
08PN
3710 BLDG BLDG
2711
NG
LDI
04-08-05
E
BUI
FOR
W
BY:
AF
m
C
C
UE0000 -CI
300m m
FUE
m
W
NI
00
L
AIRFIELD LIGHTS
BLDG
12
(TYP)
AS
N)
C
TTED
KA
LE NO.:
(M
E
W W W
NS
T
C
SUBMI
BY: DATE:
BLDG
AS
BLDG
E
FI
ST
W
C
17.540 150mm TO 300mm WIDE STRIPES 150mm TO 200mm WIDE STRIPES
BY:
GNED
BY:
RAJ
DET
LJS
(REFLECTIVE ORANGE AND WHITE) (REFLECTIVE ORANGE AND WHITE)
DESI
DW N
CHK
W
W
W
PHASE 2B LOW PROFILE

C
W
HIGH PROFILE
W W
W
LOW PROFILE IS PREFERRED BARRICADE.
oup Com pany

PHASE 1A AND 2A
TEMPORARY CLOSED
NOTE:
W
W
3 TAXIWAY MARKER (TYP)

HANGAR
BARRICADES SHALL NORMALLY BE POSITIONED ON PAVEMENT 1.5m FROM EDGE OF PAVEMENT
c Program s
ey Gr
HANGAR AIRFIELD LIGHTS
(TYP)
7701 7704
PERMANENTLY CLOSED DROP-OFF. DURING PAVING ACTIVITIES, BARRICADES MAY BE TEMPORARILY OFFSET 3.0-5.0m
anl
PHASE 2B
A St
TAXIWAY MARKER FROM PAVEMENT DROP-OFF TO ACCOMMODATE PAVING EQUIPMENT AND ASSOCIATED ACTIVITIES.
de
FLORIDA ST
dwi
R
TEMPORARY CLOSED
US Arm y Corps
FUEL
FOLLOWING PAVING, MOVE BARRICADES TO NORMAL POSITIONS.
l
NC
FUEL BLADDERS
on -W or
I
TAXIWAY MARKER
0
PHASE 1A AND 2A
s
00
neers
FUEL
ant
.
BARRICADES
i
TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION
45
uct
anti
FUEL BLADDERS
PHASE 2B BARRICADES
r
t
aland Const
ey Consul
(15m C-C MAX SPACING) FENCE (TYP)
of Engi
Transatl
PHASE 2 PHASE 1
Center
onm ent
EAST FLIGHT LINE APRON 6.900
r
ng,Envi
.00
anl
20
AIRFIELD LIGHTS
i
(TYP)
D
neer
St
Engi
NOTE:
FUEL BLADDERS
FUEL BLADDERS
TEMPORARY CROSSES ARE TO BE

(TYP)
00
FUEL
CONSTRUCTED OF 16mm EXTERIOR

45.
900
WORK UNDER OPTION 1 PLYWOOD PAINTED YELLOW. THE
FUEL
PHASE 1 AND 2 BARRICADES
6.
1
SUSPENDED .2 CROSSES ARE TO BE SECURELY
0
(15m C-C MAX SPACING) 0
50
ANCHORED TO THE PAVEMENT
RATES
X
22.
PHASE 2A
2 9 WITH NAILS OR SAND BAGS.
PLAN
AIRFIELD LIGHTS .8
(TYP)
0
0
EMI
UTILITY SIGN
FUEL HYDRANT SYSTEM

MARKER VALVE FLANGE
676
REFUELER RAMP AND

FUEL BLADDER FUEL BLADDER FUEL BLADDER
PHASE 2A PHASE 1A
ARAB
61.
NG
STAGI
TEMPORARY CLOSED TAXIWAY MARKER
TED
BASE, UNI
TAXIWAY "A" PHASE 1A AND 2A
ON
PHASE 1A AND 2A
CONSTRUCTI
PHASE 1A AND 2A BARRICADES
LEGEND
R
(15m C-C MAX SPACING)
AL DHAFRA AI
BARRICADE
TEMPORARY CLOSED TAXIWAY MARKER
CONSTRUCTION STAGING PLAN

SCALE: 1:2000 TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION FENCE
1 (SEE SHEET SC-10)
SHEET
REFERENCE
NUMBER:
50 0 50 100 150 C-8

UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED, LINEAR DIMENSIONS
1:2000 SHOWN ARE IN METERS.
A B C D E F G H
APR
PHASE 2 PHASE 1
04/08/05
DATE
5
NE
REFUELER RAMP BASELI
ON'
FOR CONSTRUCTI
ON
PTI
DESCRI
CLEARED
NAL '
SEE SHEET C- 10
FI
T
SYMBOL
0
4
PHASE 1
09DM
04-08-05
BY:
AF
ON
UE0000 -CI
NUATI
PHASE 2
TTED
LE NO.:
SUBMI
BY: DATE:
FOR CONTI
FI
BY:
GNED
BY:
RAJ
DET
LJS
DESI
DW N
CHK
NE -
oup Com pany

M ATCHLI
c Program s
ey Gr
anl
A St
de
dwi
R
US Arm y Corps
l
NC
on -W or
I s
neers
ant
i
uct
anti
PHASE 1B
PHASE 2A
r
t
aland Const
ey Consul
of Engi
Transatl
Center
676
onm ent
61.
r
ng,Envi
anl
i
D
neer
St
Engi
RATES
ON
2
TI
TE DEMOLI
EMI
FULL DEPTH SAW CUT
FUEL HYDRANT SYSTEM

OF ASPHALT
REFUELER RAMP AND
ARAB
- SHEET A
CENTERLINE TAXIWAY A
GN
TED
TE DESI
BASE, UNI
SI
PAVEMENT AND
SI
PLAN
R
AL DHAFRA AI
NOTES:
1. REFER TO SUBMITTAL NO. 01015-1.1 FOR DEMOLITION PLAN APPROVED
1 OCTOBER 4, 2004.
2. TAXIWAY EDGE LIGHTS ARE INCLUDED AS PART OF DEMOLITION AND REMOVAL.
3. THE LOCATIONS OF EXISTING UTILITIES SHOWN ON THIS DRAWING ARE SHEET
APPROXIMATE AND ARE FOR GENERAL INFORMATION ONLY. CONTRACTOR IS REFERENCE
RESPONSIBLE FOR OBTAINING EXACT LOCATIONS OF EXISTING UTILITIES BEFORE NUMBER:
STARTING CONSTRUCTION. SOME EXISTING UTILITIES MAY NOT BE SHOWN.
10 0 10 20 30 40
C-9
1:500
A B C D E F G H
6
N
APR
04/08/05
14/11/05
DATE
PHASE 2
PHASE 2B
ON'
CLEARED FOR CONSTRUCTI
ON
PTI
DESCRI
FUEL BLADDERS
LT
AS BUI
NAL '
FI
SYMBOL
0
1
T
4
SEE SHEET C- 9
10DM
04-08-05
BY:
UE0000 -CI
PHASE 2
TTED
AF
LE NO.:
SUBMI
BY: DATE:
CONTRACTOR TO CUT EXISTING
FUEL LINE RUNNING UNDER
ON
FI
NUATI
TAXIWAY Z-1
BY:
GNED
BY:
RAJ
DET
LJS
FOR CONTI
BURIED PCC N 2683047.595
DESI
DW N
CHK
TRANSITION SLAB E 252128.660
AIRFIELD LIGHTS
oup Com pany

(TYP)
000
3
NE -
c Program s
ey Gr
3.
UTILITY
anl
SIGN
A St
M ATCHLI
MARKER VALVE
de
dwi
17.820
US Arm y Corps
l
sINC
on -W or
PHASE 2A
neers
R
ant
TAXIWAY Z-1
i
uct
anti
AIR FORCE TO CUT EXISTING
r
t
aland Const
ey Consul
FUEL LINE AND CONNECT TO
of Engi
Transatl
FUEL BLADDER FUEL BLADDER NEW TEMPORARY FUEL LINE
Center
676
onm ent
FROM NEW FUEL BLADDER FARM
61.
r
ng,Envi
anl
i
neer
St
Engi
D
RATES
ON
2
TI
TAXIWAY Z-1 TO BE
TE DEMOLI
CLOSED BY AIR FORCE
EMI
FUEL HYDRANT SYSTEM
REFUELER RAMP AND
ARAB
- SHEET B
GN
TED
TE DESI
FULL DEPTH SAW CUT
BASE, UNI
SI
N 2683015.665
OF ASPHALT
E 252103.731
PAVEMENT AND
SI
PLAN
R
AL DHAFRA AI
NOTES:
OCTOBER 4, 2004.
3. THE LOCATIONS OF EXISTING UTILITIES SHOWN ON THIS DRAWING ARE
APPROXIMATE AND ARE FOR GENERAL INFORMATION ONLY. CONTRACTOR IS
RESPONSIBLE FOR OBTAINING EXACT LOCATIONS OF EXISTING UTILITIES BEFORE
1
SHEET
REFERENCE
NUMBER:
C-10
1:500
A B C D E F G H
6
N
APR
04/08/05
DATE
5
ON'
FOR CONSTRUCTI
ON
PTI
DESCRI
CLEARED
SEE SHEET C- 12
NAL '
FI
T
SYMBOL
0
4
ON
NUATI
11DM
04-08-05
BY:
AF
UE0000 -CI
FOR CONTI
TTED
LE NO.:
SUBMI
BY: DATE:
FI
NE -
BY:
GNED
BY:
RAJ
DRF
LJS
DESI
PHASE 1
M ATCHLI
DW N
PHASE 2
CHK
oup Com pany
NE
3
c Program s
ey Gr
anl
A St
de
dwi
R
US Arm y Corps
l
NC
on -W or
I s
neers
ant
i
uct
anti
r
t
aland Const
ey Consul
of Engi
Transatl
Center
r
ng,Envionm ent
REMOVE ASPHALT TAXIWAY
REMOVE ASPHALT SHOULDER
anl
i
D
neer
St
Engi
RATES
ON
2
TI
TE DEMOLI
EMI
FUEL HYDRANT SYSTEM
REFUELER RAMP AND
ARAB
- SHEET C
GN
TED
TE DESI
BASE, UNI
SI
PAVEMENT AND
SI
PLAN
R
AL DHAFRA AI
NOTES:
OCTOBER 4, 2004.
1 RESPONSIBLE FOR OBTAINING EXACT LOCATIONS OF EXISTING UTILITIES BEFORE
SHEET
REFERENCE
NUMBER:
MATCHLINE - FOR CONTINUATION SEE SHEET C-9 10 0 10 20 30 40

C-11
1:500
A B C D E F G H

TRANSFORMER
N
6
FIRE
WAREHOUSE OFFICE
STAION
3710 BLDG BLDG
2711
NG
LDI
E
BUI
APR
W
04/08/05
12/11/05
DATE
C
C
FU
W
EL
5
BLDG
C
ON'
E
FOR CONSTRUCTI
W W W
ON
E
PTI
C
DESCRI
BLDG
BLDG
E
CLEARED
SEE SHEET C- 11
LT
AS BUI
NAL '
W
FI
T
SYMBOL
0
1
4
ON
NUATI
12DM
04-08-05
BY:
AF
UE0000 -CI
FOR CONTI
TTED
LE NO.:
SUBMI
BY: DATE:
FI
EXISITNG LIGHT POLE
NE -
BY:
GNED
BY:
RAJ
DRF
LJS
W
RELOCATED.
W
DESI
DW N
CHK
M ATCHLI
C
oup Com pany

W
W W
3
c Program s
ey Gr
W
anl
A St
de
dwi
R
US Arm y Corps
l
sINC
on -W or
neers
ant
i
uct
anti
FULL DEPTH SAW CUT
r
t
aland Const
ey Consul
OF ASPHALT
of Engi
Transatl
Center
r
ng,Envionm ent
W
W
anl
i
D
neer
St
Engi
HANGAR
HANGAR
7701 7704
RATES
ON
2
TI
TE DEMOLI
EMI
FUEL HYDRANT SYSTEM
REFUELER RAMP AND
ARAB
- SHEET D
EXISTING STRUCTURE TO
GN
BE MOVED BY OWNER
FUEL
TED
LEGEND:
TE DESI
BASE, UNI
SI
FUEL BLADDERS
AREA REQUIRING
DEMOLITION AND REMOVAL
PAVEMENT AND
SI
PLAN
FUEL
R
AL DHAFRA AI
NOTES:
OCTOBER 4, 2004.
FUEL BLADDERS
1 RESPONSIBLE FOR OBTAINING EXACT LOCATIONS OF EXISTING UTILITIES BEFORE
SHEET
REFERENCE
NUMBER:

C-12
1:500
A B C D E F G H
6
N
APR
04/08/05
DATE
SS
5
ON'
FOR CONSTRUCTI
BUILDING
ON
PTI
DESCRI
CLEARED
NAL '
FULL DEPTH SAW CUT
FI
T
OF ASPHALT
SYMBOL
0
SS
4
W
SEE SHEET C- 14
13DM
04-08-05
BY:
AF
UE0000 -CI
TTED
LE NO.:
SUBMI
BY: DATE:
FI
ON
NUATI
BY:
GNED
BY:
GMR
RAJ
DRF
DESI
DW N
CHK
FOR CONTI
oup Com pany

3 AIRFIELD LIGHTS
c Program s
ey Gr
(TYP)
anl
NE -
A St
de
E
dwi
R
US Arm y Corps
l
NC
on -W or
M ATCHLI
I s
neers
ant
i
uct
anti
r
t
aland Const
ey Consul
of Engi
Transatl
Center
PHASE 2 PHASE 1
r
ng,Envionm ent
anl
i
D
neer
St
Engi
W
RATES
ON
2
TI
TE DEMOLI
EMI
FUEL HYDRANT SYSTEM
REFUELER RAMP AND
NE
ARAB
- SHEET E
GN
TED
TE DESI
BASE, UNI
SI
PAVEMENT AND
SI
PLAN
R
AL DHAFRA AI
NOTES:
OCTOBER 4, 2004.
1
SHEET
RESPONSIBLE FOR OBTAINING EXACT LOCATIONS OF EXISTING UTILITIES BEFORE
REFERENCE
NUMBER:
10 0 10 20 30 40
C-13
MATCHLINE - FOR CONTINUATION SEE SHEET C-11 UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED, LINEAR DIMENSIONS
1:500
A B C D E F G H
N
6
APR
04/08/05
E
DATE
5
ON'
FOR CONSTRUCTI
ON
PTI
DESCRI
CLEARED
93
NAL '
N 2683458.896
E 252393.771
SEE SHEET C- 13
FI
BLDG
SYMBOL
0
4
SS
14DM
04-08-05
BY:
AF
ON
FULL DEPTH SAW CUT
UE0000 -CI
W
NUATI
OF ASPHALT
TTED
LE NO.:
SUBMI
BY: DATE:
FOR CONTI
FI
REMOVE EXISTING LIGHT
POLES ALONG ROAD
BY:
GNED
BY:
RAJ
DRF
LJS
BLDG
SS
AIRFIELD LIGHTS
DESI
DW N
CHK
(TYP)
NE -
oup Com pany

REMOVE ASPHALT SHOULDER
M ATCHLI
3
c Program s
ey Gr
anl
A St
de
dwi
R
US Arm y Corps
l
E
sINC
on -W or
neers
ant
i
uct
anti
B
LD
r
t
aland Const
REMOVE ASPHALT TAXIWAY
ey Consul
G
of Engi
Transatl
Center
E
onm ent
REMOVE WATER LINE
NG
LDI
SS
r
ng,Envi
BUI
anl
i
D
neer
St
Engi
W BLDG
RATES
ON
2
TI
TE DEMOLI
EMI
FUEL HYDRANT SYSTEM
REFUELER RAMP AND
ARAB
- SHEET F
GN
TED
TE DESI
FU
EL
BASE, UNI
BLDG
SI
SS
SS
PAVEMENT AND
SI
PLAN
R
AL DHAFRA AI
W
E NOTES:
E

E
OCTOBER 4, 2004.
2. TAXIWAY EDGE LIGHTS ARE INCLUDED AS PART OF DEMOLITION AND
REMOVAL.
1
BLDG
BLDG APPROXIMATE AND ARE FOR GENERAL INFORMATION ONLY. CONTRACTOR

C
IS RESPONSIBLE FOR OBTAINING EXACT LOCATIONS OF EXISTING

SHEET
UTILITIES BEFORE STARTING CONSTRUCTION. SOME EXISTING UTILITIES REFERENCE
MAY NOT BE SHOWN. NUMBER:
4. REMOVALS SHOWN ARE IN PHASE 2
TRANSFORMER
C-14
1:500
A B C D E F G H
APR
XXXXX
04/08/05
10/11/05
DATE
/////
5
/////
ON"
CONSTRUCTI
NE
ON
PTI
DESCRI
FOR
NAL"CLEARED
REFUELER RAMP
LT
AS BUI
SEE SH EET C- 16
FI
T
SYMBOL
A
0
4
853
701
412.
15PN
04-08-05
BY:
ON
UE0000 -CI
AF
N UATI
15.000
149.270
TTED
LE NO.:
137.770 137.770
XXXXX
SUBMI
BY: DATE:
ASPHALT
CONTI
SHOULDER
FI
/////
/////
JOSE
BY:
GNED
BY:
RAJ
FOR
BAR
DESI
DW N
CHK
NE -
oup Com pany

M ATCHLI
c Program s
ey Gr
anl
A St
de
dwi
US Arm y Corps
l
sINC
on -W or
neers
ant
R
i
uct
anti
r
t
aland Const
ey Consul
of Engi
Transatl
Center
E 252360.4821
onm ent
ASPHALT TAXIWAY
BEGIN RAMP STA 700+21.835 N 2682827.6837
/////
(SAME PAVEMENT STRUCTURE
r
ng,Envi
STA 102+87.040
035
anl
AS TAXIWAY-KANSAS ST)
/
21.835 LT
i
3.
neer
/
St
Engi
/
/
XXXXX
XXXXX
/////
D 835
ASPHALT PAVEMENT
/////
STA 102+98.267
18.800 LT
RATES
21.
2
90
.0
TED ARAB EMI

0
103
FUEL HYDRANT SYSTEM

102
PLAN
REFUELER RAMP AND
101
700
GN
INTERSECTION
LAYOUT
TE DESI
SHEET A
CL REFUELER RAMP BASELINE STA 700+00
R BASE, UNI
CL TAXIWAY "A" STA 101+37.770
N 2682902.3341
E 252229.3882
SI
ELD
AL DHAFRA AI
RFI
AI
1
NOTE:
FOR ALIGNMENT CONTROL, SEE SHEET C-18
SHEET
REFERENCE
NUMBER:
C-15
1:500
853
412.
A B C D E F G H
6 N
XXXXX
APR
10/11/05
04/08/05
LANE - KANSAS ST.
DATE
853
412.
5
ON"
TAXI
CONSTRUCTI
ON
PTI
REFUELER RAMP
DESCRI
FOR
T
NAL "CLEARED
LT
AS BUI
FI
SYMBOL
A
0
4
AF
SEE SHEET C- 15
601
UE0000 -C116PN
04-08-05
BY: TTED
LE NO.:
137.770
SUBMI
BY: DATE:
ON
FI
XXXXX
NUATI
JOSE
BY:
GNED
BY:
RAJ
BAR
FOR CONTI
STA 600+61.678
DESI
DW N
CHK
15.785 LT
E=252146.3108
AIRFIELD LIGHTS STA 600+61.513 N=2683045.4476
oup Com pany

(TYP) 28.019 LT
R
3
NE -
c Program s
ey Gr
UTILITY E=252136.5663
SIGN
anl
M ATCHLI
MARKER VALVE N=2683052.8463
A St
de
US Arm y Corps
dwi
EX.ABANDONED
l
sINC
on -W or
neers
FUEL LINE(GROUTED)
ant
XXXXX
251885.184
anti
E 252151.222
i
uct
2683236.290
r
t
aland Const
TAXIWAY N 2683024.536
ey Consul
of Engi
Transatl
FUEL BLADDER FUEL BLADDER Z-1
Center
28.019
D
r
ng,Envionm ent
035
anl
/////
E=252112.1483
i
neer
3.
St
N=2683021.5716
Engi
XXXXX
XXXXX
/////
STA 99+71.981
835
21.835 LT ASPHALT PAVEMENT
RATES
2
21.
9
0
TED ARAB EMI

.0
FUEL HYDRANT SYSTEM

0
PLAN

REFUELER RAMP AND

99 100
600
98
GN
LAYOUT
TE DESI
SHEET B
CENTERLINE TAXIWAY A INTERSECTION
R BASE, UNI
CL TAXILANE - KANSAS ST. STA 600+00.000
CL TAXIWAY "A" STA 100+00.000
N 2682987.1176
SI
ELD
E 252120.7957
AL DHAFRA AI
RFI
AI
1
NOTE:
SHEET
REFERENCE
NUMBER:
C-16
1:500
6
2
3
4
5
1
NE -
M ATCH LI FOR CONTI ON
N UATI SEE SH EET C- 18
A
137.700
B
703 704
702

NE
C
REFUELER RAMP
412.
853
149.270
D
D
R
E

XXXXX
XXXXX
XXXXX /////
/////
/////
15.000
/////
/////
/////
AF
F
10
ASPHALT
SHOULDER
1:500
NOTE:
0
10
20
30
FOR ALIGNMENT CONTROL, SEE SHEET C-18.
T
G
40
H
DESI
GNED BY: DATE:
REFUELER RAMP AND
FUEL HYDRANT SYSTEM RAJ 04-08-05
AL DHAFRA AI
R BASE, UNI
TED ARAB EMI
RATES St
anl t
ey Consulant
sINC A St
anl
ey Gr
oup Com pany
DW N BY: SUBMI
TTED BY:
Engi
neer
ing,Envi
ronm ent
aland Const
ruct
ion -W or
ldwi
de
SI
TE DESI
GN JOSE
US Arm y Corps
SHEET
of Engi
neers
C-17
CHK BY: FI
LE NO.: E AS BUI
LT 10/11/05
NUMBER:
AI
RFI
ELD LAYOUT PLAN
REFERENCE
Transatl
anti
c Program s BAR D 100% SUBM I
TTAL 03/11/05
SHEET C UE0000 -CI
17PN
Center SYMBOL DESCRI
PTI
ON DATE APR
6
2
3
4
5
1
A
W
W
7701
E
E
B
W
W
W
3710
W
WAREHOUSE
W
C
7704
W
C
BLDG
2711
OFFICE
C
C
W
C
W
D
BLDG
D
BLDG
FIRE
STAION
HANGAR
NG
LDI
BUI
R
E

E
BLDG
BLDG
E
TRANSFORMER
AF
ASPHALT
SHOULDER
HANGAR
E 252367.0985
F
E 252374.1685
N 2683302.5876
10
N 2683319.2426
PC 604+00.233
PT 604+18.534
1:500
///// /////
15.500 LT
T
E 252285.2335
N 2683222.9182
STA 602+87.056
15.000
/////
/////
XXXXX
XXXXX
10
XXXXX
15.500
604
20
602 603
TAXI
LANE - KANSAS ST
30
G
40
REFUELER RAMP
N
412.
853
137.770

H
NE -
M ATCHLI FOR CONTI ON
N UATI SEE SHEET C- 17
DESI
GNED BY: DATE:
REFUELER RAMP AND
AL DHAFRA AI
R BASE, UNI
TED ARAB EMI
RATES St
anl t
ey Consul sINC
ant A St
anl
ey Gr
oup Com pany
DW N BY: SUBMI
TTED BY:
Engi
neer
ing,Envi
ronm ent
aland Const
ruct
ion -W or
ldwi
de
SI
TE DESI
GN JOSE
US Arm y Corps
SHEET
of Engi
neers
C-18
CHK BY: FI
LE NO.: E AS BUI
LT 12/11/05
NUMBER:
AI
RFI
ELD LAYOUT PLAN
REFERENCE
Transatl
anti
c Program s D FI
NAL"CLEARED FOR CONSTRUCTI
ON" 04/08/05
SHEET D BAR UE0000 -CI
18PN
PTI
ON DATE APR
6
2
3
4
5
1
M ATCHLI
NE - NUATI
FOR CONTI ON SEE SHEET C- 20
A
/////
153.270
XXXXX
/////
B
705

NE
END RAMP
//// /
INTERSECTION
END SHOULDER
E 252496.8959
E 252574.2504
STA 704+49.688
STA 704+34.688
N 2683244.9611
N 2683344.0411
/////
412.
853 15.
000
C
CL REFUELER RAMP BASELINE STA 705+60.388
ASPHALT SHOULDER
149.270
REFUELER RAMP
D
D
R
XXXXX
////
E
/
/////

/////
15.00
/////
AF
(TYP)
F
10
NOTE:
1:500
AIRFIELD LIGHTS
0
10
20
30
FOR ALIGNMENT CONTROL, SEE SHEET C-18.
ST
CA
LI
FO
RN
IA
T
G
40
SS
H
DESI
GNED BY: DATE:
REFUELER RAMP AND
AL DHAFRA AI
R BASE, UNI
TED ARAB EMI
RATES St
anl t
ey Consulant
s I
NC A St
anl
ey Gr
oup Com pany
Engi
neer
ing,Envi
ronm ent
aland Const
ruct
ion -W or
ldwi
de
DW N BY: SUBMI
TTED BY:
SI
TE DESI
GN JOSE
US Arm y Corps
SHEET
of Engi
neers CHK BY:
C-19
FI
LE NO.: E AS BUI
LT 02/10/05
NUMBER:
AI
RFI
ELD LAYOUT PLAN
REFERENCE
Transatl
anti
c Program s BAR D FI
ON" 04/08/05
SHEET E UE0000 -CI
19PN
PTI
ON DATE APR
6
2
3
4
5
1
A
W
C
B
BLDG
W
NG
LDI
BUI
W
BLDG
C
BLDG
BLDG
LD
PC
G
E
N
SS
26
24
8
E
6+
25 355
3
E
07 . 54
55
E
.
60 .185827
14
9
D
SS
SS
D SS
E
E
BLDG

KA
60 NS
AS
ST
SS
E
R
BLDG
5.
50
AS
0
7.
E
PH
50
0
AL
NOTE:
E
AS
WI
T
SC
PH
SH
AL
ON
/
OU
SI
//
TRANSFORMER
N
TA
LD
//
XI
ER
ST
WA
5.
Y
50
0
7.
50
0
E 252393.771
N 2683458.896
MATCH EXISTING
5
60
AS
PH
AF
END TAXIWAY CONSTRUCTION
AL

T
SH
OU
PT 604+18.534
LD
F
ER
10
TAXIWAY - KANSAS ST STA 605+60.000
1:500
/////
0
10
T
93
20
853
412.
30
G
40
000
15.
/////
REFUELER RAMP

H
XXXXX
ASPHALT SHOULDER
N
153.270
/////
M ATCHLI
NE - FOR CONTI ON
NU ATI SEE SHEET C- 19
DESI
GNED BY: DATE:
REFUELER RAMP AND
AL DHAFRA AI
R BASE, UNI
TED ARAB EMI
RATES St
anl t
ey Consulant
sINC A St
anl
ey Gr
oup Com pany
DW N BY: SUBMI
TTED BY:
Engi
neer
ing,Envi
ronm ent
aland Const
ruct
ion -W or
ldwi
de
SI
TE DESI
GN JOSE
US Arm y Corps
SHEET
of Engi
neers CHK BY: FI
LE NO.: E AS BUI
LT 02/10/05
C-20
NUMBER:
AI
RFI
ELD LAYOUT PLAN
REFERENCE
Transatl
anti
c Program s BAR D FI
ON" 04/08/05
SHEET F UE0000 -CI
20PN
PTI
ON DATE APR
6
2
3
4
5
1
A
TRANSFORMER
HANGAR
B
0
00
5.
R3
076
252240.
252142.335 2683139.895
449
252262. 406
252370.
2683014.705
2683157.551 2683292.438
29.038
STRI
R35
.
R60.
333
252363.
770 252284.823
000
E=252393.
252235.
000
465
PE WI
159 252194. 2683275.764

N=2683458.
252153. 207
378 2683175.
R60
2683134.
771
2683081.473
.
2683028.569
896
D
DE SOLI
150mm WI
EX.TAXIWAY LINE
000
NE
YELLOW LI 252264.
R
35 087
R 2683158
R3 3
5
.0 .329
053
252329. 358
252370.
R3
00
5. .0
0 747
252287.
00
DOUBLE 150mm SOLI
2683284.762
5.
0
0 2683178.952 2683231.857 D
DE SOLI
150m m WI
00
0
NE
YELLOW LI
TH 150mm SPACE
48.210
48.210
0 (T
D YELLOW
00 YP
5.
R3
R )
R3
5. 35
00 .0
591
252243. 897
252284. 0 0
40.540
285
40.540
252202. 2683087.522 2683140.427

2683034.617
179
252378. 485
252419.
C-17 C-17 873
252336. 2683237.905 2683290.810
C-17
KC-135 KC-135 2683185.000
KC-135 KC-135
KC-10 KC-135 KC-135
KC-10 KC-10
C
TANKER 5
TANKER 1
TANKER 3
137.770
TANKER 9
TANKER 11
TANKER 7
TAXIWAY A
124.232
PARKING POSITION
PARKING POSITION
PARKING POSITION
PARKING POSITION
PARKING POSITION
PARKING POSITION
926
252420. 231
252462.
314
252338. 620
252379.
008
252297. 2683204.531 2683257.436
703
252255. 2683098.721 2683151.626
2683045.816
2682992.911
R
R3
R3
35
R3
5.
5.
.0
R3
R3 00
R3
00
5.
00
5. 0
5.
0
5.
00
00
00
00 0
0
0
280
252468.
974
252426.
362
252344. 668
252385. 309
2683208.
751
252261. 057
252303. 404
2683155.
594
2683049. 499
2683102.
785
2682943. 690
2682996.
SHOULDER
D
DE SOLI
150mm WI
252250.927
NE
YELLOW LI
2682929.922
R3
5.
R
00
3
0
R
5
35
.0
0
35
0
.0
0 0 00
.0
R3
00 5.
00
00
5.
00 5. R3
0 R3
D
101
252476. 406
252517.
795
252434.
2683161.453 2683214.358
183
252352. 489 2683108.548
877
252310. 252393.
2683002.738 643
2682949.833 2683055.
D
TANKER 6
TANKER 4
TANKER 8
TANKER 12
TANKER 10
TANKER 2
120 500
11.
PARKING POSITION
120
67. 67.
120
67. 120
67. 120
67.
835
21. 753
65.
PARKING POSITION
PARKING POSITION
PARKING POSITION
PARKING POSITION
137.770
PARKING POSITION
137.770
KC-10
KC-10 KC-10
KC-10
KC-10 KC-10 KC-135
KC-135 KC-135
KC-135 C-17
KC-135 KC-135 C-17
C-17 C-17
295
252364.
2682908.127
C-17
R3
R 600
252405.
2682961.032
C-17
906
252446.
2683013.937
212
252488.
2683066.842
518
252529.
2683119.747
824
252570.
2683172.652
5. R3
00 5.
00
0 0
44.610
E
44.610
44.610
R3
44.610
R3
44.610
5.
00
5.
0
00
R3
0
R
3 5.
35
5 00
0
.0
.0
0
00
0 872
566
252535. 252576.
150mm WI D
DE SOLI 260
252494.
649 955
252452. 526
2683123.
343
252370. 252411. 2683070.620
NE
YELLOW LI 811 716
2683017.
906
2682911. 2682964.
001
2682859.
11.500
252359.520
2682845.138
11.500
D YELLOW
150mm SOLI SHOULDER
R3
5.
00
0
AF
EX.TAXIWAY LINE
10
F
1:1000
0
10
20
T
PERMANENT
30
CLOSED "X"
E=252585.
317
N=2682922.
513
PLACE TAXIWAY
40
50
60
70
80
G
NOTE:
90
CA
BLE
TRE
NC
H
FOR PAVEMENT MARKING DETAILS, SEE SHEET SC-9.
H
DESI
GNED BY: DATE:
REFUELER RAMP AND
AL DHAFRA AI
R BASE, UNI
TED ARAB EMI
RATES St
anl
ey Consul
tant
sINC A St
anl
ey Gr
oup Com pany
DW N BY: SUBMI
TTED BY:
Engi
neer
ing,Envi
ronm ent
aland Const
ruct
ion -W or
ldwi
de
SI
TE DESI
GN JOSE
US Arm y Corps
SHEET
of Engi
neers CHK BY: FI
LE NO.: A AS BUI
LT 12/11/05
NUMBER:
PAVEMENT MARKI
NG PLAN
C-21
REFERENCE
Transatl
anti
c Program s BAR 0 CHANGE ORDERE NO 21 09/23/05
UE0000 -CI
21PN
PTI
ON DATE APR
A B C D E F G H
F
28
6
27
26
N
APR
25
05/02/05
04/08/05
13/11/05
24
DATE
W
23
5 R R
HYDRANT VALVE PIT "4"

22
ON"
15 ADDENDUM
CONSTRUCTI
21
ON
PTI
20
DESCRI
FOR
19
NO
NAL "CLEARED
CHANGE ORDER
18
SEE SHEET C- 23
LT
AS BUI
F
17
FI
F
SYMBOL
16
0
1
4
15
ON
14
N UATI
22PN
04-08-05
13
BY:
UE0000 -CI
FOR CONTI
AF
TTED
LE NO.:
12
SUBMI
BY: DATE:
R
FI
HYDRANT VALVE PIT "2"
R 11
F F
NE -
BY:
JOSE
GNED
BY:
DET
BAR
10
DESI
DW N
CHK
W W
M ATCHLI
W
9
ISOLATION
oup Com pany

VALVE PIT
8
3
c Program s
ey Gr
7
anl
A St
US Arm y Corps
de
dwi
6
l
sINC
on -W or

PHASE 1 CDC Specifications &amp; Drawings

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

PHASE 1 CDC Specifications &amp; Drawings

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

Request for Proposal

Triton Operational Facilities

1.0 Table of Contents (RFP Parts 2-6)

2. PART 3 PROJECT PROGRAM

CHAPTER 1 & 2. PROJECT DESCRIPTION AND PROJECT OBJECTIVES

3. PART 4 PERFORMANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

G20 SITE IMPROVEMENTS

4. PART 5 PRESCRIPTIVE SPECIFICATIONS

ADAB SPEC COMM

PART TWO - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

PART TWO - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS - Page 1

Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;

SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals

1.2 SPECIAL SCHEDULING REQUIREMENTS

b. Permission to interrupt any roads and/or utility service must be

1.3.1 Activity Regulations

Ensure that Contractor personnel employed on the Activity become familiar

1.3.1.1 Subcontractors and Personnel Contacts

Provide a list of contact personnel of the Contractor and subcontractors

1.3.1.2 No Smoking Policy

Smoking is prohibited within and outside of all buildings on installation,

1.3.2 Working Hours

1.3.3 Work Outside Regular Hours

If the Contractor desires to carry on work outside regular duty hours, or

1.3.4 Occupied Areas and Existing Facilities

The Contractor may be working around occupied areas and existing

1.3.5 Utility Cutovers and Interruptions

d. Operation of Station Utilities: The Contractor must not operate nor

disturb the setting of control devices in the station utilities system,

1.4 BASE SECURITY REQUIREMENTS

a. Contractor must be registered to work in the UAE and must register

b. Other Data: Contractor shall provide additional data, as required

c. Compliance with Revised Requirements: The Government and/or Host

d. Contractor shall employ an acceptable system for accountability

1.4.3 Construction Security Area

the entire duration of this contract. However, as various parts of the

1.4.3.1 Access to the Construction Security Area

Contractor access to the Construction Security Area for all personnel,

1.4.3.2 Identification of Employees in the Construction Security Area

1.4.3.3 Identification of Vehicles and Equipment in the Construction

1.4.4 Base Security Area

Limited access to the Base Security Area will be controlled by Base

1.4.4.1 Access to the Base Security Area

1.4.4.2 Identification of Employees in the Base Security Area

1.4.4.3 Identification of Vehicles and Equipment in the Base Security Area

registration number, company name of owner, operator's name and CPR or

1.4.5 Access Passes for Contractor Supervisory Personnel

All Contractor supervisory personnel(above foreman level) requiring regular

supervisory person requiring access, the Contractor shall submit a Security

1.4.6 Escorted Access Passes

The Contractor and Contractor's personnel, including individual vendor or

1.4.7 Contractor Security Manager

the contractor's office located at the Construction Security Area Access

1.4.8 Access to Operational Areas

Contractor personnel are expressly prohibited from entering operational

1.4.8.1 Restricted Items

No cell phones with cameras will be allowed on Base.

1.5 RADIO TRANSMITTER RESTRICTIONS

To preclude accidental actuation of sensitive electronic equipment, the

Contractor shall not use radio transmitting equipment without prior

1.6 ON-BASE PHOTOGRAPHY PROHIBITION

1.7 COMPLIANCE WITH HOST COUNTRY RULES AND CUSTOMS

1.8 CONTRACTOR TRANSPORTATION AND CUSTOMS CLEARANCE

Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;

PHASE 1 CDC Specifications & Drawings

PHASE 1 CDC Specifications & Drawings